MM Tpe-331-5

RELEASED FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE BY: HORIZONTAL DE AVIACION LTDA
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
AlliedSignal Engines
Phoenix, Arizona
TO: HOLDERSOF TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL REPORT NO. 72-01-27
REVISED AUGUST 12, 1991
THIS REVISED PUBLICATION IS ISSUED FOR USE IN SUPPORTOF THE FOLLOWING AIRCRAFT.
ENGINE PART NO. ENGINE MODEL NO. AIRCRAFT APPLICATION
895720-1/-2/-3 TPE331-5-251K Jetprop Commander 690/

690A/690B
895720-4 TPE331-5-255K Jetprop Commander 690/
690A/690B
896950-1-1/-2/-3 TPE331-5-251C CASA 212-100
3101840-1 TPE331-5-252M Mitsubishi MU-2N/-2P
3102520-I TPE331-5-252K Jetprop Commander
690A/690B
3102520-2/-3 TPE331-5-254K Jetprop Commander
690C/690D
3103860-1 TPE331-5-252C CASA 212-100
REVISION NO. 3 DATEDAUGUST4, 1994
This a PARTIAL revision. Pages revised are listed below, together with the
Highlights of the revision. Please remove and discard the affected pages and
insert pages of this revision in their place. Enter on the Record of Revisions
the date pages are inserted. Also remove and discard the yellow Temporary
Revision pages for TR's 72-39 through 72-55 and 76-1, which were incorporated in
this revision.
WHEN INSERTING REVISED PAGES, PLEASE USE THE LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES IN THIS
REVISION TO ENSURETHATONLY CURRENTPAGESARE RETAINED AND ALL NON-CURRENT
PAGES ARE REMOVEDFROMTHE PUBLICATION.
Inquiries regarding this publication should be directed to:

Attn: Dept 64-03/2101-201
P.O. Box 29003, Phoenix, AZ 85038-9003
Telephone: (602) 365-2493, FAX: (602) 365-2210
- I I I I
I T,;S DOCU
ENTIS CO...... 1
PLETE
I I I I I I I II I
REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

UP136688
Page 1 of 11
Copyright 1987 AlliedSignal Inc. Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HIGHLIGHTS
Temporary Revisions 72-39 through 72-55, 76-1 have been incorporated into this
manual. The subject of each Temporary Revision is l i s t e d below.
72-39 To c l a r i f y the extent of disassembly and inspection requirements for

a gearbox inspection.
72-40 To change the l i m i t s for f i r s t stage turbine stator leading edge

cracks.
72-41 To reference the A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual and Flight Manual for

through operational checks required a f t e r adjusting f l i g h t idle fuel flow.
72-43
72-44 To add engine over temperature inspection requirements.
72-45 To change the allowable limits for nicks and dents on leaaing edge
of f i r s t stage impeller during inspection with engine assembled.
72-46 To change the allowable repair limits for nicks and dents on leading
and edge of f i r s t stage impeller with engine assembled.
72-47
72-48 To change the allowable l i m i t s for nicks and dents on leaaing edge
of f i r s t stage impeller during inspection with impeller removed from
engine.
72-49 To change the allowable repair limits for nicks and dents on leading
and edge of f i r s t stage impeller with impeller removed from engine.
72-50
72-51 To add a CAUTION regarding excessive use of aviation gasoline.
72-52 To add aviation gasoline operating limitations to Table 503.
72-53 To add additional unscheauled maintenance inspection requirements.
72-54 To add inspection criteria for oil pressure pump pitting.
72-55 To add inspection and repair procedure for pitting on interior of

oil pressure pump.
76-1 To add instructions that screw securing speed setting lever rod
shall not be re-installed after removal.
UP136688

Page 2 of 11
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
--AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
General information that affects numerous areas throughout the manual is listed
below.
Changed company's name from Garrett to AlliedSignal and updated the address and
telephone number.
Updated materials and compounds tables throughout manual.
Updated special tools, fixtures and equipment tables and t e x t .
Chapter/Section/Pages Description of Change
72-01-27
Ti tl e Page Updated to reflect current revision.
Record of Revisions Updated to r e f l e c t current revision.
Service Bulletin List Updated and revised service bulletin

list.
Introduction
Page 1/2 Changed mailing address and company name.
Page 4 Updated the manual chapter designations.
Page 8 Updated abbreviations.
Pages 9 and 11 Referenced manufacturer for fuel control

and propeller governor overhaul
publications.
Standard Practices
Page 48C Corrected wall thickness diameter in
Table 6 of magnetic particle inspection.
Pages 51 through 55 Deleted table reference from figure

illustrations.
Page 58 Added wear l i m i t s for teflon coated metal

tubes.
Page 65 Added part number to identify size of

stone g r i t .
Record of Temporary Revisions

Pages 1 through 4 Updated to r e f l e c t current temporary
revisions.
Trouble Shooting
Page 198.34A Added a check of fuel manifold purge
system during trouble shooting engine for
white smoke from t a i l p i p e .
REPORT NO. 72-OI-27-HIGHLIGHTS

UP136688
Page 3 of i i
Aug 4/94
GFG7n-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter/Secti on/Pages Description of Change

Servicing
Page 301 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-51.
Pages 302A, 304 and 307 Changed CAUTION and procedure to
emphasize the ignition system be de-
energized prior to motoring engine.
Page 303 Changed paragraph 3.B. t i t l e to reflect

preservation procedure is for engines
inactive for more than 60 days.
Specified that approved engine fuel and

oil be used during engine depreservation.
Pages 303, 304A and 305 Added NOTEto reflect engine be operated
with propeller off start locks.
Added CAUTIONand procedure to reflect a

minimum of 95 percent rpm must be
attained to charge the fuel purge system.
Page 304 Deleted step 3.B.(10) which stated 60 to

180 days procedure may be renewed three
times.
Adjustment/Test
Contents
Pages 2 and 3 Updated to reflect changes within this
Chapte r/Secti on.
Pages 505 through 507 Changed the engine oil temperature limits
and actions required for oil
overtemperatu re.
Pages 508 and 509 Changed the inspection required for
exceeding turbine temperature limit from
a Hot Section Inspection to a Turbine
Over Temperature Inspection.
Page 515 Changed operating l i m i t for overspeed
fuel governor.
Page 518 Added NOTEto reflect NTS lockout and

propeller governor reset check is
required after removal and installation
of propel I er pitch control.

UP136688
Page 4 of 11
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Adjustment/Test (Cont)
Page 539 Changed the minimum allowable baseline
curve for fuel manifold PSID versus total
fuel flow.
Pages 550 through 550D Added engine vibration check procedures.
Pages 551, 555 and 557 Corrected packing part number for torque
test k i t .
Pages 554 and 555 Changed CAUTION to reflect torquemeter

output signal may be affected i f bolt
torque procedure is not allowed.
Page 576 Added adjustment rate values for one turn

of maximum power adjustment.
Pages 584, 588, 589, 593 and 598.1 Added torque value of fuel control f l i g h t
idle access plug and spring assembly.
Pages 598.6, 598.11, 598.29, Changed the engine performance data

598.45, 598.48 and 598.67 reduction program number to TPEV3 for
on-the-wing and propeller test stand
recompensation.
This program reduces, calculates, plots,

and prints out the test results that give
the engine shaft horsepower, minimum and
maximum compensations, and plots of
computer generated curves based on the
output of test data.
Pages 598.27 and 598.28 Updated on-the-wing performance data

sheets, deleting PSI units of measure for
compressor discharge (Pt3).
Changed the performance data sheet to
include an explanation for obtaining
correct pressure altitude.
Pages 598.61 and 598.64 Changed engine test requirement to

include procedure for determining maximum
operating temperature (Tt5) during
propeller stand recompensation.

UP136688
Page 5 of 11
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A C E
MAINTENANCEMANUAL

Adjustment/Test (Cont)
Pages 598.62 and 598.63 Updated performance data sheets,
Page 598.78 Added requirement to retorque nose cone,
diaphragm and compressor split line after
operational test,
Inspection/Check
Contents Updated to reflect changes within this
Chapter/Secti on.
Pages 601 and 602 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-53.
Changed the unscheduled maintenance
inspection requirements for turbine
rotors.
Del eted requirement to fl uorescent
penetrant inspect impellers during
unscheduled maintenance.
Page 602A Added reference to Continuous
Airworthiness Service Bulletin 72-0823
regarding time between overhauls.
Pages 603 through 608 Changed inspection intervals for
specified items.
Page 608 Added fuel control/fuel pumpmating
splines inspection interval.
Pages 614 through 616 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-39.
Page 633 Changed the nomenclature from bushings to
bearings.
Pages 639 through 643 Added fuel control/fuel pumpmating
splines inspection interval.
Page 644 Added information center address and
phone number for accident or incident
inspection requirements.
Pages 645 through 663 Changed propeller strike inspection
procedures,
Page 663 Deleted the static propeller strike
inspection requirements.
REPORT NO, 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

UP136688
Page 6 of 11
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter/Section/Pa~es Description of Change

Inspection/Check (Cont)
Page 664 Deleted requirement to functional check
fuel control lightning strike inspection
procedure.
Page 668 Added requirement to flush airframe oil

system tubing to oil system contamination
inspection.
Pages 670 through 681 Changed bird strike inspection
requirements.
Pages 682 and 683 Changed the overspeed inspection
procedure.
Pages 686 through 688 Added inspection procedures for engine
turbine over temperature.
Pages 689 through 696 Added oil over temperature inspection
requ i rements.
Addendum
Pages 2 through 8 Updated inspection index table.
Cleaning/Painting
Contents Updated to reflect changes within this
chapter/section.
Pages 705, 706, 706A and Updated cleaning procedures.
709 through 712
Page 713 Added CAUTION to reflect rust stripper
solution can cause extreme damage to
metal spray repaired parts.
72-00-05
Page 202 (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-1/-2)
Referenced 72-10-20, Approved Repairs for
removal/installation of drain plugs.
72-10-03
Page 207 Reference Approved Repairs for
replacement of propeller governor shaft
packing.
Page 208 Added equipment and materials required to

perform approved repairs.

UP136688
Page 7 of 11
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C_hapter/Secti on/Pages Description of Change
72-10-03 (Cont)
Page 212 Added NOTE regarding magnetic pickup
peak-to-peak voltage,
Page 214 Added procedures for replacing propeller

shaft packing.
72-10-09
Page 223 Deleted requirement to wash nose cone
gasket with soap and water.
72-10-13
Page 224A Deleted requirement to wash diaphragm
gasket with soap and water.
Page 237 Added NOTE and revised inspection
procedure to reflect brownish
discoloration or streaking is not cause
to reject Sun and Bull Gear Assembly,
Part No. 3107037-2/-4/-5/-6.
72-10-15
Pages 203, 205, 206, 207, Incorporated Service Bulletin 72-0555.
210 and 219
72-10-16
Pages 206B through 209 Clarified the procedure for checking gap
between torque sensor and accessory drive
housing.
72-10-17
Pages 201 through 212 Incorporatea Service Bulletin 72-0555.
72-10-18
Pages 208, 208A and 208B Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-55.
72-10-19
Page 207 Clarified sequence for installing
compressor a i r - o i l seal rotor.
72-10-20
Pages 206 through 209 (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-I/-2)
Referenced Approved Repairs for removal
of drain plugs.
Page 246B (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-1/-2)

Referenced 72-00-05, Inspection/Check to
inspect and check drain plug.

UP136688
Page 8 of 11
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72-10-20 (Cont)
Pages 255 and 256 (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-i/-2)
Added drain plug removal/installation
procedures.
72-30-01
Pages 201 through 203 Incorporated Temporary Revisions 72-45
through 72-47.
72-30-03
Page 207 Changed NOTEto reflect that proper
compressor running clearance must be
established i f specified components were
replaced or reworked.
Page 208 Changed the type of thread lubricant used

on studs of transition liner to antiseize
Nickel Special.
Page 213 Changed the compressor housing inspection

criteria.
Page 214 Changed the allowable limits for nicks

and dents on leading edge of second stage
impel ler.
Pages 221 through 226 Added second stage impeller leading edge
repair procedures.
72-30-04
Page 265 Changed the type of thread lubricant used
on studs of transition liner to antiseize
Nickel Special.
Page 298.28 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-48.
Added f i r s t stage impeller wear step

limits.
Pages 298.38A and 298.39 Changed allowable limits for cracks in

compressor diffuser.
Pages 298.48 and 298.50A Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-49.
Page 298.48A Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-50.
72-40-01
Pages 204 and 205 Added copper washer and jam nut which
secures ITT sensor in turbine plenum.
REPORT NO. 72-OI-27-HIGHLIGHTS

UP136688
Page 9 of 11
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72-50-02
Page 201 Added step to lockwire screws securing
t a i l cone.
72-50-03
Page 204 Added oil inlet tube inspection criteria.
72-50-04
Page 210 Added requirement to check rotor set
retainer pin for looseness.
Pages 212 and 213 Added repair procedure for loose rotor
set retainer pin.
72-50-06
Pages 267 and 270 Changed inspection requirements for
turbine bearing retainer.
72-50-07
Pages 202A through 204A Incorporated Service Bulletins 72-0745
and A72-0861.
Page 210 Deleted NOTEwhich stated third stage

turbine wheel must be fluorescent
penetrant inspected at every removal.
Page 213 Deleted NOTEwhich stated second stage

stage turbine wheel must be fluorescent
Page 216 (Post SB 72-0745 or 72-0861) Added vane

movement inspection.
Page 225 (Post SB 72-0745 or 72-0861) Added third

stage stator seal assembly replacement
procedures.
72-50-08
Pages 204, 208, 213 and 217 Incorporated Service Bulletin 72-0821.
Page 218 Changed turbine stator locking nut

dimensional inspection c r i t e r i a .
Page 221 Deleted NOTE which stated f i r s t stage

turbine wheel must be fluorescent

UP136688
Page 10 of 11
Aug 4/94
~I=~7N.PA
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72-50-08 (Cont)
Page 237 (Post SB 72-0747) Added CAUTIONto
ensure transition liner with thermal
barrier coating is not soaked in cleaning
solutions which could damage the bonding
between coating and base metal.
Pages 239 and 240 (Post SB 72-0821) Added second stage

stator seal assembly replacement
procedures,
73-10-09
Page 226 Referenced 70-00-00, Standard Practices
for repair of fuel nozzle conical sealing
surface.
73-10-13
Page 210A Added test procedures for fuel manifold
purge system check valves.
74-20-01
Pages 208 and 208A Changed ignition lead inspection
procedures.
Page 211 Changed ignition lead repair procedure.
76-10-01
77-10-02
Page 220A Added test procedures for check valves.
77-20-03
Pages 201, 202, 203, 205, Added removal and installation proce-
206 and 206A dures for copper washer and jam nut
which secures ITT sensor in turbine
plenum.
79-20-02
Pages 202, 203, 204, 206 Clarified oil f i l t e r installation
and 208 through 210 procedures.
79-30-01
Pages 201 through 204 Incorporated Service Bulletin 79-0029 for
the magnetic drain plug.
Page 203 Added CAUTION to reflect overtorque of

magnetic drain plug could cause loss of
engine oil.

UP136688
Page 11 of 11
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
Phoenix, Arizona
VOLUME I
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE
PART NO. MODEL NO.
895720-1 TPE331-5-251K
895720-2 TPE331-5-251K
895720-3 TPE331-5-251K
895720-4 TPE331-5-255K
896950-1-1 TPE331-5-251C
896950-2 TPE331-5-251C
896950-3 TPE331-5-251C
3101840-1 TPE331-5-252M
3102520-1 TPE331-5-252K
3102520-2 TPE331-5-254K
3102520-3 TPE331-5-2 54K
3103860-1 TPE33I-5-252C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPORT NO. 72-01-27

(FAA APPROVED)
UP136688
Dec 14/87
Copyright 1987 AlliedSignal Inc. Revised Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SAFETY ADVISORY
WARNING: BEFORE USING ANY OF THE MATERIALS CALLED OUT IN THIS PUBLI-
CATION, BE AWARE OF ALL HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL PRE-
CAUTIONS RECOMMENDEDBY THE MANUFACTUREROR SUPPLIER.
FAILURE TO COMPLYWITH THE MANUFACTURERS' OR SUPPLIERS'
RECOMMENDATIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DISEASE.
This publication describes physical and chemical processes which may require the
use of chemicals, solvents, paints, and other commercially available materials.
The user of t h i s publication should obtain the Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA
Form 20 or equivalent) from the manufacturers or suppliers of the materials to
be used. The user must become completely f a m i l i a r with the manufacturer/
supplier information and adhere to the procedures, recommendations, warnings and
cautions set f o r t h f o r the safe use, handling, storage, and disposal of the
material s.
WARRANTY/LIABILITY ADVISORY
WARNING: ALLIEDSlGNAL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY

ALLIEDSlGNAL EQUIPMENTWHICH IS NOT MAINTAINED AND/OR
REPAIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALLIEDSlGNAL'S PUBLISHED
INSTRUCTIONS AND/OR ALLIEDSIGNAL'S FAA/SFAR 36 REPAIR
AUTHORIZATION. NEITHER DOES ALLIEDSlGNAL ASSUME
RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
FABRICATED BY OR PURCHASED FROM COMPANIES OTHER THAN
ALL I EDSI GNAL.
IMPROPERLY REPAIRED COMPONENTSMAY BE INFERIOR AND MAY

AFFECT AIRWORTHINESS OR REDUCE THE USEFUL LIFE OF THE
COMPONENTS. IMPROPERLYFABRICATED SPECIAL TOOLING OR
TEST EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN DAMAGETO PRODUCT COMPO-
NENTS OR PROVIDE ERRONEOUS RESULTS. WHENUSED, EQUIP-
MENT OR PARTS THAT HAVE BEEN REPAIRED OR FABRICATED BY
OTHER THAN ALLIEDSIGNAL-AUTHORIZED FACILITIES MAY
INCREASE RISKS OF DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY, COMPONENT
FAILURES, AND SECONDARY DAMAGE AND MAY VOID ANY WARRAN-
TIES UNDERWRITTEN BY ALLIEDSlGNAL.
UP136688
R 72-01-27-SAFETY/WARRANTY/LIABI LITY ADVISORY

Aug 4/94
~r.Tfl.~A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
72-01-27
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE
Ti tl e Page Aug 4 / 9 4 INTRODUCTION- Tab
Safety/ Table of
Warranty/ Contents Aug 16/89
Liability
Advisory Aug 4/94 Introduction 1 Aug 4/94
2 Blank
Li st of 3 Aug 4/94
Effective 4 Aug 4/94
Pages Aug 4/94 5 Aug 16/89
6 Aug 12/91
Record of 7 Aug 4/94
Revisions Aug 4/94 8 Aug 4/94
9 Aug 4/94
Temporary 11 Aug 4/94
Revisions Dec 14/87 12 Aug 16/89
Service i Aug 4/94
Bul I eti n 2 Aug 12/91
List 3 Dec 14/87
4 Aug 4/94
5 Aug 16/89
6 Aug 16/89
7 Aug 16/89
8 Aug 4/94
9 Aug 4/94
I0 Aug 4/94
11 Aug 12/91
12 Aug 12/91
13 Aug 4/94
14 Aug 4/94
15 Aug 4/94
16 Aug 4/94
17 Aug 4/94
18 Aug 4/94
19 Aug 4/94
20 Aug 4/94
21 Aug 4/94
22 Aug 4/94
23 Aug 4/94
24 Aug 4/94
25 Aug 4/94
26 Bl ank
List of
Chapters Dec 14/87
UP136688
72-01-27-EFF
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF REVISIONS
REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE

NO. DATE INSERTED BY NO. DATE INSERTED BY
1 Au.g 16/89
2 Aug 12/91
R 3 `Au~ 4,/94
UP136688
72-OI-27-REV-REC
Aug 4/94
¢"~=F("~=7 N - P A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
RECORD OF TEMPORARYREVISIONS
INCORPO-
CHAP/SEC/ RATED INTO
REV SUBJ DATE DATE DATE MANUAL BY
NO. PAGE NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOVED BY REV NO.
UP136688
72-01-27-T-R-REC
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
NOTE: A date l i s t e d in the " I n c o r p . " column is the l a t e s t date t h i s

r e p o r t was revised to i n c l u d e changes to t e x t / i l l u s t r a t i o n s
caused by the Service B u l l e t i n or i t s r e v i s i o n . When the words
"No E f f e c t " are l i s t e d , the Service B u l l e t i n caused no changes
within this report.
Service
B u l l e t i n No. Incorp. Ti t l e
613, Rev 2 Apr 1/74 ENGINE - POWERSECTION - Replace R e s t r i c t o r As-

sembly
644 Apr 1/74 ENGINE FLOW DIVIDER AND DRAIN VALVE - Drain
-
Port Leakage
72-0009, Rev 1 No E f f e c t ENGINE- AIR-OIL TURBINE SEAL - Replace Seal
72-0017 No E f f e c t ENGINE POWERSECTION - Rework or Replace

-
Torque Sensor
R 72-0019, Rev 17 Dec 14/87 ENGINE - SERVICE LIFE - Service Life Limits of
Critical Life Limited Components
72-0027, Rev 9 Mar 28/80 ENGINE - FUEL CONTROLASSEMBLY - Inspection and

Lubrication of Drive Coupling and Internal
Splines of Fuel Pump Assembly and Oil Pump As-
sembly
72-0029, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE - GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLIES - Internal Plug

Retention
72-0032 No Effect ENGINE - TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM - Remove and

Repl ace Control I er
72-0038, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - PROPELLER GOVERNORASSEMBLY - Remove

and Replace
72-0042, Rev 2 Oct 20/76 ENGINE ENGINE INDICATING - Installation of

-
One Piece ITT Sensor Assembly and New Second

Stage Stator
72-0044 Apr 1/74 ENGINE Operational Check of NTS Lockout and

-
Propeller Governor Reset System
72-0046, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Rework of Intermediate Gearbox Housing Assembly
Set (Diaphragm) to Incorporate Clinch Bolts
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 1
Aug 4/94
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany
~ /lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST (CONT)
Service
Bulletin No. Incor.p. Ti t l e
72-0049, Rev 1 Apr 1/74 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARSECTION - Positive

-
Retention of the Planetary Drive Helical Gear-

shaft Front Bearing
72-0052, Rev 3 Oct 20/76 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Installation of

-
Three Piece First Stage Stator and Liner Assem-

bly
72-0061, Rev 5 Aug 29/86 ENGINE REDUCTIONGEARSECTION - Installation

-
of Modified Fuel Control Drive (Direct Drive

Configuration)
72-0064, Rev 2 Dec 14/87 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARSECTION - Installation

-
of High Speed Pinion Journal Bearings
72-0072, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE Preformed Packings (O-Rings) Conver-

-
sion Table
R 72-0077, Rev 6 Mar 28/80 ENGINE REDUCTIONGEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replacement of the Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly

and the Inlet Tube and Screen Assemblies
72-0087, Rev 2 Oct 20/76 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Replacement of Hy-

-
draulic Turbine Bearing Support Mount Retainer

and Inspection of Propeller Pitch Control As-
sembly on Selected Engines
72-0089, Rev 3 Oct 20/76 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Modification to

Provide Dampening Capability for Turbine Bear-
ing Mount
72-0091, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTIONGEARAND SHAFTSECTION -

-
Replace Packing Within Propeller Pitch Control

Sl eeve
72-0092, Rev 7 Aug 14/81 ENGINE REDUCTIONGEARAND SHAFTSECTION - In-

-
spection and/or Replacement of Oil Transfer

Tube Part No. 3101187-1 and Replacement of Lu-
bricating Adapter and Associated Parts
72-0095, Rev 5 Aug 14/81 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFTSECTION - In-

-
spection and/or Rework of Fuel Control Drive

UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 2
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Service
72-0102, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION

-
- Replace Torsion Shaft Sleeve Bushing

with a Sleeve Bushing of Improved
Material
R 72-0104, Rev 9 Dec 14/87 ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION
-
AND FUEL CONTROLLING- Rework and/or

Replace Fuel Pump Splined Drive Coupling,
Oil Pump Drive Shaft and Oil Pressure
Pump Assembly
72-0107, Rev 4 May 31/82 ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION
-
- Replace Oil Transfer Adapter Assembly

and Oil Transfer Tube
72-0111, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR SECTION - Replace

-
Torque Sensor Assembly with Torque Sensor

Assembly Incorporating Welded Pins or
Rework Existing Torque Sensor Assembly to
Incorporate Welded Pins
72-0113, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - HOUSING ASSEMBLY - Incorporation

of New Matched Intermediate Gearbox Set
Housing Assembly (Common Diaphragm)
72-0114 June 19/78 ENGINE PROPELLER SHAFT - Replace Mount

-
Bolts and Add Key Washer on Propeller

Shaft Rear Bearing
72-0115, Rev 4 No Effect ENGINE - PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL ASSEMBLY

- I n s t a l l Propeller Pitch Control Sleeve
Assembly Part No. 869647-5
72-0119, Rev 6 Aug 8/85 ENGINE Replace Long Torsion Shaft Part
-
No. 868605-5 with Short Torsion Shaft I n -

corporating Bronze Bushing
72-0122, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX HOUSING -

Replacement or Rework Bearing Plate
Retainer Part No. 868190-1
72-0126, Rev 4 No Effect ENGINE COMBUSTION CHAMBERASSEMBLY -
-
Replace Combustion Chamber Assembly with

Redesigned Combustion Chamber Assembly to
Reduce Carbon Formation or Return to
Manufacturer f o r Rework
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 3
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
B u l l e t i n No. Incorp. Title
72-0127, Rev 3 Aug 8/85 ENGINE - COMPRESSORSEAL - Replace Compressor

Seal and Seal Rotor with Components Manufac-
tured of Improved Material
72-0130 No Effect ENGINE POWERSECTION - Convert Engine to

-
Module Concept (Deletes Power Section)
72-0163, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY

- Incorporate ~lodule With Wide Gears for Com-
monal i ty
72-0170, Rev 2 Aug 14/81 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-
corporation of Helical Drive Gearshaft Bearing
Outer Race Anti-Rotation Devices
R 72-0173, Rev 4 Dec 14/87 .ENGINE COMBUSTION - Replace Certain Turbine

-
Section Components with Components Coated for

Marini zati on
72-0174, Rev 7 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-
s t a l l Larger Compressor Bearing and Rework Spur
Gear Retainer
72-0175, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Change-Out of Intermediate Housing and Gear As-

sembly (Diaphragm Assembly) Containing Latest
Product Improvements
72-0181, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE PROPELLER GOVERNOR - D i s t r i b u t i o n of

-
Woodward Service B u l l e t i n No. 33565 - New

Propeller Governor Pump I d l e r Gear Stud
72-0185 No Effect ENGINE TORQUE SENSOR ASSEMBLY - Replace Key

-
With Pin to Prevent Gear Movement
72-0193, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE TORQUE SENSORASSEMBLY - Replace

-
Spring Tension Washer With Coil Spring to

Create More Positive Axial Load on Torque Sen-
sor Gearshaft Bearing
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 4
Aug 4/94
Allied-SignalAerospaceCompany
/lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal
Service
72-0196 No Effect ENGINE - OIL FLOWMETAL TUBE ASSEMBLY - Replace

Propeller Shaft Seal Plug Packing
72-0197, Rev 5 No Effect ENGINE FUEL CONTROL DRIVE GEAR TRAIN -
-
Replace or Rework Tachometer Spur Drive Gear-

shaft
72-0199 Mar 28/80 ENGINE POWERGROUPASSEMBLY - Install Power

-
Group Assembly Incorporating Die-Cast First

Stage Compressor Diffuser Assembly (Crossover
Duct)
72-0201, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE INTERMEDIATE HOUSING OIL SUPPLY TUBE

-
ASSEMBLY Replace Clamp on Metal Oil Transfer

-
Tube
R 72-0208, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE MANUAL - Reference Maintenance

-
Material to Maintain Engine Model TPE331-5-252K

R (CANCELLED)
72-0216 No Effect ENGINE CONVERSION - Convert Engine Model

-
TPE331-5-251K to Engine Model TPE331-5-252K
72-0217, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE TORQUE SENSOR ASSEMBLY - Rework Torque

-
Sensor Assembly to Improve Adjustment Retention
72-0220 No Effect ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - I n s t a l l Improved

-
Compressor Diffuser With Stronger Outside Di-

ameter Joint
72-0223, Rev 2 Aug 29/86 ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - Incorporate Im-

-
proved Compressor Housing
72-0224, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-
s t a l l a t i o n of a New Aluminum Output Propeller
Shaft Seal Retainer
R 72-0226, Rev 7 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY - In-

-
corporate Housing With Steel Sleeve f o r Preven-

tion of Fretting
R 72-0227, Rev 9 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION-

-
Rework of Intermediate Gearbox Housing Assembly

Set (Di aphragm)
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 5
Aug 16/89
ignal
~
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l s l i e d
Service
Bulletin No. Incorp. Title
72-0231, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFTSECTION -

-
Rework Journal Bearing Configuration to Roller

Bearing Configuration
72-0232, Rev 6 Aug 29/86 ENGINE TORQUESENSORAND GEARASSEMBLY -

-
Replace or Rework Torque Sensor and Gear Assem-

bly Part No. 3101726-1 to Part No. 3101726-2
72-0240 No Effect ENGINE MANUAL - Reference Maintenance and

-
Overhaul Manual to Maintain Engine Model

TPE331-5-254K
72-0241, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE TORQUESENSORASSEMBLY - Install Im-

-
proved Piston, Sleeve, Shaft and Cam Set
72-0248, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - POWERGROUPASSEMBLY - Replace Dif-

fuser
72-0251 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGASSEMBLY -

-
Rework/Replace Accessory Drive Housing Assembly

for Incorporating New CrossOver Duct (Rework to
3101836-Various)
R 72-0252, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY -
-
Rework Accessory Drive Housing Assembly to In-

corporate Fuel Control Drive (Direct Drive)
Features and Gearcase Drain Holes, and
Propeller Flange Steel Sleeve (Part No. 869444
- Various)
72-0253, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGASSEMBLY -

-

corporate Fuel Control Drive (Direct Drive)
Features, Propeller Shaft Flange Steel Sleeve
and Replacement of Torque Compensator Seat
(Rework to 896855-Various)
R 72-0255, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGASSEMBLY -

-

corporate Propeller Shaft Flange Steel Sleeve
(Rework 3101836-Various)
72-0257, Rev 1 Aug 14/81 ENGINE - POSITIVE TORQUESENSORREGULATOR -

Remove Pressure Regulator Valve
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 6
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
Bulletin No. Incorp. Ti t l e

-
Replace or Rework Torsion Shaft Assembly to In-

corporate Lubrication Holes (Rework 3102028-1
to 3102028-2 or 3101758-Various)
R 72-0261, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE - TURBOPROP ENGINE - Progression of Ac-

cessory Drive Housing and Intermediate Gearbox
Housing Assembly Set Part Numbers

-
TPE331-5-251K to TPE331-5-251C or
TPE331-5-251C to TPE331-5-251K
72-0270, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE FIRST STAGE IMPELLER ASSY - Rework

-
First Stage Impeller Leading Edge (Part No.

896223-2 to 896223-3)
R 72-0271, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE CONVERSION - Convert Engine Model

-
TPE331-5-252K or TPE331-5-254K to Adapt OEM

Provided Hartzell or Dowty Propeller
72-0272 No Effect ENGINE TORQUE SENSORASSEMBLY - Remove

-
nameplate from Torque Sensor Assembly
72-0281, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE TORSION SHAFT - Replace or Rework Tor-

-
sion Shaft to Facilitate Inspection of Shaft

Installation (Rework Part No. 894124-1 to -2)

-
TPE331-5-251K to TPE331-5-252M or TPE331-5-252M

to TPE331-5-251K
72-0290 No Effect ENGINE TORQUE SENSORASSEMBLY - Install Ad-

-
justment Plug with Serrated Locking Feature
72-0297 No Effect ENGINE COMBUSTION TRANSITION LINER ASSEMBLY -

-
Remove and Replace/Rework Liner Assembly Part

No. 893970-1 to 893970-3
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 7
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
72-0298 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY -

-
Rework Accessory Drive Housing Assembly to Pre-

vent Oil Leaks at Propeller Shaft Flange
R 72-0300, Rev 5 July 29/83 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Curvic

Coupling Gasket (Forward Side of Third Stage
Turbine Wheel)
72-0301, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY - In-

-
spect and Enlarge Oil Port Cavity Drain Holes
72-0305, Rev 2 July 29/83 ENGINE POWER GROUPASSEMBLY- Replace F i r s t

-
Stage Compressor D i f f u s e r Assembly, Part No.

3101830-1/-2 with D i f f u s e r Assembly, Part No.
3102847-1
72-0317 No Effect ENGINE INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY

-
- Incorporate Housing Assembly Set to Eliminate

Potential Oil Leak
72-0323, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE - ANTI-ICE SHIELD ASSEMBLY -

Repl ace/Rework Anti- I c e Shi el d Assembly
R 72-0325, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

R Replace Gear, Part No. 896805-1 with Gear As-
R sembly, Part No. 3102985-1
72-0326, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Third Stage

Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No.
868630-1/-2/-3/-4
72-0327 No Effect ENGINE - THIRD STAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSEMBLY -

Rework Third Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part
No. 868630-1/-2/-3/-4 to Part No. 868630-7
72-0330 No Effect ENGINE - TORQUE SENSOR GEARASSEMBLY - Replace

Spring, Part No. 3102241-1 with Part No.
3102241-2
72-0331 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace/Rework Oil Pressure Pump Assembly, Part
No. 867165-14 to Part No. 867165-19
72-0341 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace/Rework Propeller Governor Assembly
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 8
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
Bulletin No. Inc.orp. Title
72-0342 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace/Rework Torque Sensor to Reduce Torque
Signal Fluctuations
72-0345 No Effect ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace First

-
Stage Impeller Shroud with Unpainted Finish

Shroud
72-0346, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace Oil Seal

-
Assembly, Part No. 3101160-2 with 3101160-5
72-0350, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Replace Certain

-
Identified Third Stage Turbine Wheel Assem-

blies, Part No. 868630-1/-2/-3/-4/-7
R 72-0351, Rev 3 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Inspect Third Stage

Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No.
868630-1/-2/-3/-4/-7
72-0353 July 29/83 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Pin in Bearing Retaining Nut on Torque
Sensor Gear

Replace Bearing Sets in Torque Sensor Gear As-
sembly Drive Train Arm
72-0364, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Third Stage

Turbine Wheel, Part No. 868630-1/-2/-3/-4/-7 or
895539-1/-2/-3/-4 with Turbine Wheel, Part No.
868630-8
72-0367 No Effect ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - I n s t a l l First

-
Stage Compressor Diffuser Assembly, Part No.

3102847-1
72-0374, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE CONVERSION - Convert Engine Part No.

-
895720-1/-2/-3 (TPE331-5-251K) to 895720-4

(TPE331-5-255K) to Adapt Dowty Propeller
72-0375, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Inspect Third Stage

Wheel Assembly, Part No. 895539-1/-2/-3/-4
72-0380, Rev 3 Aug 8/85 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Third Stage
Seal Assembly
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 9
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-~_A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
Bulletin No. !ncorp. Title
72-0383, Rev 3 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -
Replace Bearing and Shaft Set, Part No.
3101170-10/-15
A72-0384, Rev 4 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Reidentify or

Replace Third Stage Stator and Establish Rework
Interval
72-0387, Rev 2 May 15/84 ENGINE - COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace Com-

bustion Transition Liner Seal Assembly, Part
No. 868260-I/-2 with Part No. 868260-3
72-0388, Rev 5 Aug 8/85 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Second Stage
Turbine Seal Assembly
72-0391, Rev 3 No E f f e c t ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Bearing Retainer, Part No. S9011F67-090
with Part No. 3103393-1
72-0404, Rev 5 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 ENGINE- Time Between Overhaul (TBO) Intervals
72-0411, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION - In-

-
creased Torque Value on Torque Sensor Assembly

Spur Gearshaft Retaining Nut
72-0412 July 19/83 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Torque Sensor Assembly Spur Gearshaft
Retaining Key
72-0414, Rev 1 No E f f e c t ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-

corporate Tapered Web Helical Gearshaft
R 72-0416, Rev 6 Apr 29/87 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Starter Gearshaft and Seal
72-0430, Rev 2 Aug 29/86 ENGINE- COMPRESSORSECTION - Install Bolt Lock

Plates on Compressor First Stage Diffuser As-
sembly, Part No. 3101830-3 and Part No.
3102847-1
72-0432, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Compressor Seal Rotor, Part No.
3101447-3 with Part No. 3101447-5
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 10
Aug 4/94
~:~;lied
Service
Bulletin No. !gcorp. Ti t l e
72-0441 Aug 8/85 ENGINE TURBINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SEC-

-
TION - Replace Accessory Drive Housing Assembly
72-0444, Rev 4 Dec 14/87 ENGINE - COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace First

Stage Diffuser Seals, Spacers, and Retainer
Rings
72-0446 Aug 8/85 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Install Exhaust Pipe

-
with External Pipe with External EGT Capabili-

ties and PS5 Tap
72-0447, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Rework or Replace

-
Transition Liner, Part No. 3101408-2 with Part

No. 3101408-4 or Part No. 896496-1 with Part
No. 896496-3
72-0462, Rev 1 Apr 25/86 ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - Rework/Replace
-
Compressor Housing Assembly, Part No. 3102022-2

to 3102022-4
72-0463 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTIONGEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace or Rework Input Side Accessory Drive

Housing Assembly and Oil Transfer Manifold
72-0468 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION - In-

-
spect and/or Repair Oil Pressure Pump Assembly,

Part No. 867165-19

Replacement of Planetary Gear, Gear Support and
Retaining Plates
R 72-0478, Rev 3 Dec 14/87 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Inspect/Repair Paint Loss/Magnesium Corrosion

on Output Gearbox Housing, Forward Diaphragm
Housing, and Accessory Drive Housing
(CANCELLED)
72-0486, Rev 1 Aug 29/86 ENGINE FUEL CONTROL DRIVE GEARTRAIN -

-
Replace or Rework Tachometer Drive Spur Gear-

shaft
UP136688
72-OI-27-S-B-LIST
Page 11
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
Service
72-0498 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Perform One-Time Inspection of Propeller Shaft
72-0501, Rev 2 Dec 14/87 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace/Rework Main Drive Torsion Shaft Assem-

bly

-
Replace/Rework Main Drive Torsion Shaft Assem-

bly
72-0505, Rev 1 Aug 16/89 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace Oil Pressure Pump Assembly
72-0511 No Effect ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Replace Oil Scavenge

-
Pump Assembly
72-0512, Rev 1 Dec 14/87 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFTSECTION -

-
Replace Bearing Retainer
72-0514 Aug 16/89 ENGINE CONVERSION - Convert Engine, Part No.

-
3102520-2 (TPE331-5-254K) to Part No. 3102520-3

TPE331-5-254K) or Engine, Part No. 3102520-3
I
TPE331-5-254K) to Part No. 3102520-2
(TPE331-5-254K)
R 72-0517 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
R Replace Planetary Bearing Shouldered Pin
72-0518 No Effect ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Seal

(Supersedes SPB TPE0340)
72-0527 Aug 16/89 ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace Com-

-
bustion Transition Liner Assembly
72-0530, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE Accomplish Special Beryllium Spec-

-
trometric Oil Analysis Program (SOAP) Inspec-

tion (CANCELLED)
72-0532 Aug 29/86 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace Propeller Governor Gasket
72-0533, Rev 2 Dec 14/87 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Replace or Rework

-
Scavenge Pump Assembly

UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 12
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
Bulletin No. Incor~. Ti tl e
72-0534 Aug 29/86 ENGINE REDUCTIONGEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-

-
spect Torsion Shaft Oil Scavenge Pump Drive

Coupling
72-0538 Dec 14/87 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Oil Transfer Tube
R 72-0540, Rev 1 Dec 14/87 ENGINE - COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace Diffuser

Assembly
72-0545, Rev 1 Aug 16/89 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Oil Transfer Tube (CANCELLED)

-
Replace Retainer Assembly on Propeller Pitch

Control Assembly
R 72-0555, Rev 4 Aug 4/94 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

R Replace Hydraulic Torque Sensor Gear Assembly,
R Part No. 3101726-1/-2 with Part No. 3101726-3
72-0558 Aug 16/89 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

A72-0559, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Inspect and/or

-
Replace Third Stage Stator Assembly
72-0563 Aug 16/89 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Inspect Oil I n l e t

-
Tube, Part No. 896982-1
72-0565, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE CONVERSION - Convert Engine Model

-
TPE331-5-251C to Engine Model TPE331-5-252C
72-0578, Rev 1 Aug 16/89 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Replace Third Stage
-
Turbine Stator Assembly
72-0592 Aug 16/89 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Nut (Turbine

Main Shaft Nut)
72-0594 Aug 16/89 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

72-0595 Aug 16/89 ENGINE TURBINE SECTION - Replace Segmented

-
Shroud ( F i r s t Stage)

-
Authorization to I n s t a l l Spur and Helical Gear

Assembly, Part No. 3107037-X
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 13
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
R 72-0612 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Oil Scavenge

R Pump Assembly

Replace Seal (Starter Gearshaft)
72-0618, Rev 2 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - COMPRESSORSECTION - Authorization to

I n s t a l l F i r s t Stage Compressor Impeller, Part
No. 896223-7
72-0625 Aug 12/91 ENGINE COMPRESSORSECTION - Replace Identi-

-
fied Compressor Bearings
72-0529, Rev 1 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -
Replace Air-Oil Seal Rotor,. Part No. 3101447-5

-
Replace Stationary Oil Seal Assembly, Part No.

3101160-5 with Part No. 3101160-7
72-0634, Rev 1 Aug 12/91 ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -
-
Replace Annular Ball Bearing (Compressor), Part

No. 3101405-1 with Part No. 3103708-1
72-0644 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Gasket, Part

No. 865095-1 with Part No. 865095-4
72-0645 Aug 12/91 ENGINE REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

-

Replace Accessory Drive Housing, Part No.
3102345-5 with Part No. 3103732-2

Replace Coupling, Part No. 865888-3 with
Coupling, Part No. 865888-6
72-0674, Rev 1 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - COMPRESSORSECTION - Authorization to

I n s t a l l Second Stage Compressor Impeller, Part
No. 893482-5
72-0675 Aug 12/91 ENGINE- TURBINE ASSEMBLY- Install Third Stage

Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No. 868630-9
A72-0685, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-
spect Propeller Governor Assembly
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 14
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
B u l l e t i n No. Incor E. Ti tl e
R 72-0695, Rev 1 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -
Replace Oil Scavenge Tube, Part No. 3101336-1
w i t h Part No. 3103467-1
A72-0699, Rev 2 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Third Stage
Turbine Stator Assembly
72-0703 No Effect ENGINE - I n c o r p o r a t i o n of New Engine Log Book
72-0704, Rev i No Effect ENGINE - COMPRESSORSECTION - Inspect and/or

Replace Second Stage Impeller, Part No.
893482-2/-3

Modification Kit, Part No. 3107051-1/-2

Replace/Rework Coupling, Part No. 865888-3 with
Part No. 3107065-1
R 72-0709, Rev 2 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - I n s t a l l Non-Asbestos Gaskets
72-0711 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - COMPRESSOR SECTION - Replace Second

Stage Diffuser Vane Assembly, Part No. 893384-3
72-0715 Aug 12/91 ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace P r o p e l l e r Governor Assembly, Part No.

895490-7 with Part No. 895490-9
72-0723 Aug 12/91 ENGINE REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

-
Replace Sleeve, Part No. 893283-i with Part No.

893283-2
R 72-0728, Rev 2 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -
Replace Propeller Governor Assembly

Replace Splined Adapter, Part No. 3103193-2
R 72-0745, Rev 2 Aug 4/94 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Third Stage
R Turbine Stator Assembly, Part No.
R 868379-1/-3/-5 with Part No. 867559-2
R 72-0747 Aug 4/94 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Transition

R Liner, Part No. 3101408-4 with Part No.
R 3101408-5
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 15
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
Bulletin No. Incorp. Ti tl e
72-0748, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

Replace R o l l e r Bearing and Shaft Set (High
Speed Pinion) Part No. 3101084-8/-12/-13 with
Part No. 3101084-15
R 72-0760 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

R Replace Compressor Bearing C a r r i e r , Part No.
R 868877-8 with 868877-10
R 72-0763, Rev 1 No E f f e c t ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - In-

R s t a l l Insert and Packing in Threaded Oil Port
R 72-0775 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION - In-

R stall Intermediate Gearbox Housing Assembly,
R Part No. 3103727-4
R 72-0789 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

R Distribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No.
R 33589 Which Provides a New Speeder Spring and
R Reset Piston

R Replace Propeller Governor Assembly, Part No.
R 897410-10/-11/-13 with Part No.
R 897410-15/-16/-17
R 72-0796 No E f f e c t ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

R Replace Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly (Gearcase),
R Part No. 3101321-1 with Part No. 3101321-4
R 72-0797 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Inspect Turbine Sca-

R venge Pump Assembly, Part No. 865046-AII
R 72-0819 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION -

R Replace Oil Jet Assemblies, Part No.
R 896173-4/-5/-6 with Part No. 3104575-1/-2/-3
R 72-0821, Rev 1 Aug 4/94 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Second Stage
R 894528-i/-3/-6 with Part No. 894528-10
R 72-0823, Rev 2 Aug 4/94 ENGINE - Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance

R Operation
72-0827, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR~D SHAFT SECTION -

Replace Cou.~ing (Propshaft), Part No.
865888-3/-6:or 3107065-1 with Part No. 865888-8
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 16
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
B u l l e t i n No. Incor~. Title
R 72-0850 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Bearing

R Retainer, Part No. 3101091-2 with Part No.
R 3103969-i
R A72-0857 No Effect ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - I n -

R spect and/or Replace Gasket ( P r o p e l l e r Pitch
R C o n t r o l ) , Part No. 865664-4 w i t h Part No.
R 865664-5
R A72-0861 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION_- Replace Third Stage

R 868379-1/-3/-5 w i t h Part No. 867559-2
R 72-0863, Rev 2 Aug 4/94 ENGINE - TURBINE SECTIUN - Replace Oil I n l e t

R Tube Gasket, Part No. 865095-5 with 865095-6

R Replace P r o p e l l e r Governor (Drive) Spur Gear,
R Part No. 867883-1 with 867883-2

R Replace Coupling ( P r o p s h a f t ) , Part No.
R 865888-3/-6/-8 or 3107065-1 with Part No.
R 3107092-1 or 865888-10
R 72-0887 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION- Replace Gasket

R (Turbine Scavenge Pump), Part No. 865091-4 with
R Part No. 865091-5
R 72-08~8 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Replace Gasket

R (Turbine Bearing Support), Part No. 865792-3
R witll Part No. 865792-4
R 72-0896 No E f f e c t ENGINE - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION -

R Replace Output Gearbox Housing and R e i d e n t i f y
R Nose Cone Assembly
R A72-0906 No Effect ENGINE - TURBINE SECTION - Accomplish Inspec-

R t i o n of I d e n t i f i e d Third Stage Turbine S t a t o r
R Assembly, Part No. 868379-3
73-0005 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - TORQUE LIFilTING -

Replace Torque L i m i t e r Assembly
73-0006 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - BODY AND RELIEF VALVE
- Stake Retainer
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 17
Aug 4/94
~l:::~7t~-~A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Servi ce
73-0007 No E f f e c t ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY

- Rework Fuel Control
73-0009, Rev 2 Oct 20/76 ENGINE - FUEL SYSTEM - I n s t a l l a t i o n of Heated

Pneumatic Lines and Ground Jumper Assemblies
73-0010, Rev 1 No E f f e c t ENGINE - FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY - A d d i t i o n of

Screened F i t t i n g s
73-0013 No E f f e c t ENGINE - FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES -

Remove and Replace
73-0017, Rev 3 No E f f e c t ENGINE - ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - Remove and

Replace Flow Divider and Drain Valve
73-0022, Rev 3 June 19/78 ENGINE - ENGIHE FUEL AND CONTROL - Relocation
of P3 F i l t e r and I n s t a l l a t i o n of Test F i t t i n g
73-0023, Rev I No E f f e c t ENGINE ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - Rework to

-
Provide Heated O r i f i c e f o r Fuel Control
73-0026, Rev 3 No E f f e c t ENGINE - ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - I n s t a l l Tee

F i t t i n g to F a c i l i t a t e Testing of Fuel Nozzle
and Manifold Assemblies
73-0028, Rev 2 Oct 20/76 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - To

Replace Fuel Control Support Assembly and
Provide Check to Ensure the S e c u r i t y of the En-
gine Mounted Fuel Control Assembly
73-0029, Rev 1 No E f f e c t ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL CONTROLLING - To

-
Provide A d d i t i o n a l S e c u r i t y of Attachment
Between the Fuel Control Assembly and the Rear
Support Bracket Assembly
73-0030, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - CONTROLLING- D i s t r i b u t i o n of Bendix

Service B u l l e t i n GT No. 71 Which Provides
M o d i f i c a t i o n t o Incorporate a New or Reworked
S t a r t Flow Adjustment Valve
73-0032 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL - Distribution of Vickers Service

Bulletin 406138-28-1 Which Provides for Rework
of Fuel Pump Relief Valve
73-0035, Rev 3 Oct 20/76 ENGINE - FUEL - I n s t a l l a t i o n of Pneumatic Con-

nection f o r Fuel Line Purge System
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 18
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
73-0036, Rev 2 Oct 20/76 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROLLING - CONTROLLING - To

Change Shim Installation on Fuel Control Assem-
bly Mounting and Increase Torque on Mount Bolts
73-0038 Oct 20/76 ENGINE - FUEL - Installation of Pneumatic Con-

nection for Fuel Line Purge System
73-0039 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL - Fuel Pump Replacement
73-0040 No Effect ENGINE CONTROLLING - Distribution of Bendix

-
Service Information Letter No. 15 Which

Provides Modification to Incorporate a New
Check Valve Housing on Fuel Control
73-0049, Rev 1 Aug 14/81 ENGINE - FUEL CONTROLLING- Distribution of

Bendix Service Information Letter No. 14. Tem-
perature Compensator, Bendix Model TS-R1,
Modification to Incorporate Additional Bimetal-
I ic Discs
73-0051, Rev 3 Nov 29/82 ENGINE FUEL - Replace Fuel Pump Assembly With
-
Pump Incorporating Mounting Flange Integral

With Pump Body
73-0053, Rev 1 June 19/78 ENGINE - FUEL CONTROLLING - Distribution of

Bendix Service Information Letter No. 17R2, In-
spection of Fuel Control Maximum Condition
Lever OJadrant Angle
73-0054, Rev 2 Mar 28/80 ENGINE - FUEL - Replace Fuel Control Assembly
Insulator (Spacer) Part No. 693939 With Alumi-
num Spacer Part No. 897353-1
73-0059 Mar 28/80 ENGINE FUEL - Replace Fuel Pump Assembly With
-
Pump Incorporating Mounting Flange that is In-

tegral with Pump Body
73-0064, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE FUEL CONTROLLING- Distribution of

-
Bendix Service Bulletin GT-92 Revision 1, Fuel

Control, Gas Producer, Bendix Model DP-K2, In-
corporation of New Fuel Inlet F i l t e r Assembly
73-0065 No Effect ENGINE FUEL PUMPASSEMBLY - Replace or Rework

-
Centrifugal Fuel Pump Shouldered Shaft Part No.

895215-1
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
R Page 19
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
73-0068 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL PUMP - Replace Shaft and Impeller

Assembly Part No. 869904-11 With Part No.
869904-12 and Delete Shaft Oil Seal Part No.
897365-1
73-0076, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR - Incorporate

Improved Fuel Pressure Regulator Valve Part No.
394312-X
73-0085 Mar 28/80 ENGINE - FUEL CONTROLLING- Distribution of

Bendix Service Bulletin GT-99R1 Fuel Control,
Gas Producer, Bendix Model DP-K2, Modification
to Remove I n l e t Screen from Start Fuel Flow
Adapter Assembly
73-0088, Rev 3 July 29/83 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Replace
Primary Manifold and Hose to Standardize Mani-
folds and Reduce Maintenance
73-0098, Rev 4 Aug 8/85 ENGINE - FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES -
Replace Flexible Hose
73-0099 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL SYSTEM - Replace Leaf Spring in

Fuel Solenoid Valve Assembly
73-0103, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL PUMP - Inspect and/or Replace

Fuel PumpAssembly
73-0104, Rev 2 Nov 29/82 FUEL - FUEL PUMP- Replace Packing
73-0110 May 31/82 ENGINE - FUEL PUMP- Replace F i l t e r Element for

Improved F i l t r a t i o n
73-0113, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING-

Replace/Rework Fuel Pump
73-0115 July 29/83 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL- CONTROLLING- Replace

Secondary Manifold and Hose to Standardize
14anifolds and Reduce Maintenance
73-0120, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Install

Fuel Control with Increased Maximum Flow Stop
73-0121, Rev 5 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Replace

Fuel Pump Drive Shaft, Part No. 869196-1 with
Drive Shaft, Part No. 897601-1 on Identified
Fuel Pumps
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
R Page 20
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
73-0131 Sep 26/84 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Replace

Bolts on Fuel Control Support Bracket to
Provide Lockwiring of Bolts
73-0146, Rev 3 Aug 12/91 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Replace
Fuel F i l t e r to Prevent Contamination of Engine
Fuel System
73-0156, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Replace

Packing in Fuel Pump
73-0157, Rev 1 Dec 14/87 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Dis-
t r i b u t i o n of Woodward Service Bulletin No.
40096 Which Provides a New Pt2 Amplifier Plug
73-0176, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Dis-

WG64039 Which Provides Inspection Procedures
73-0177 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - DISTRIBUTION - Dis-

t r i b u t i o n of GFSD Service Bulletin
394230-73-0177 Which Provides for Replacement
of Ball Valve within Fuel Solenoid Valve
73-0182 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Dis-

WG64040 Which Provides A New Bypass Valve Bear-
ing
R 73-0186 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - DISTRIBUTION -

R Replace Fuel Nozzle Gaskets
73-0i87 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - FUEL AND CONTROL - DISTRIBUTION -

Replace Solenoid Valve, Part No. 692545-9 with
Part No. 692545-14

R Replace Actuating Arm (Fuel Shutoff Valve),
R Part No. 858906-1 with Part No. 897757-1
R 73-0207 No Effect ENGINE - FUEL AND CONTROL - Distribution of

R Woodwara Service Bulletin No. WG64043 Which
R Provides a New Diaphragm
R 73-0208 No Effect ENGINE - ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - Replace Fuel

R Shutoff Valve, Part No. 394230-4-1 with Part
R No. 394230-9-1
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 21
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
lliedSignal MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AEROSPACE GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Service
Bulletin No. Incor~.. Title

R Replace/Rework Actuating Arm (Fuel S h u t o f f
R Valve), Part No. 897757-1 with Part No.
R 897757-2
R 73-0217 No Effect ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - CONTROLLING - Dis-

R tribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No.
R WG64044 Which Provides an Improved Ps3 Sensor
R and Bypass Valve Assembly
74-0001, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - IGNITOR PLUG - Replace I g n i t o r Plug
74-0003, Rev 5 Aug 29/86 ENGINE- IGNITION - Replace I g n i t i o n Unit
74-0005, Rev 1 Aug 8/85 IGNITION - DISTRIBUTION - I n s t a l l P r o t e c t i v e

Wrap on I g n i t i o n Leads (CANCELLED)
74-0007 No Effect IGNITION - DISTRIBUTION - D i s t r i b u t i o n of Cham-

pion Service B u l l e t i n No. 85-11 Which Provides
f o r Inspection of I g n i t e r Plug
75-0002, Rev 3 No E f f e c t ENGINE - ANTI-ICING - Rework or Replace A n t i -

Icing Solenoid Valve
75-0003, Rev 2 May 31/82 ENGINE - ANTI-ICE VALVE - Seal A n t i - l c e Valve

to Prevent Possible Oil Seepage i n t o Valve
Mechanism
75-0004, Rev 3 Aug 29/86 ENGINE - AIR SYSTEM COMPONENTS - Rework A n t i -

Ice Shield Assembly
75-0005 Aug 8/85 AIR - ENGINE ANTI-ICING - Rework or Replace

A n t i - l c i n g Shield Assembly, Part No. 896298-2
with -6, Part No. 896298-3 with -7, and Part
No. 896298-4 w i t h -8
75-0006, Rev 1 No E f f e c t A I R - ENGINE ANTI-lClNG - Rework A n t i - l c i n g

Shield Assembly to Add Drain Holes
76-0002 No Effect ENGINE - CONTROL LINKAGE ASSEMBLY - One Time

Inspection and Retorque of Screw and/or Nut or
Bolt Securing Levers to Concentric Shaft
7 6-0005 No E f f e c t ENGINE - CONTROLS LINKAGE - Replace Propel l e r

Governor Adjustment Screw
UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 22
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
76-0006 No Effect ENGINE CONTROLS LINKAGE - Replace Stop

-
Screws, Part No. NAS1096-3-16 With Stop Screws,

Part No. 897548-1
76-0012 No Effect ENGINE CONTROLS POWERCONTROL - Replace Lower

-
Outer Shaft Lever and Bolt
76-0019 Aug 16/89 ENGINE CONTROLS POWERCONTROL - Replace

-
Torque and Temperature Limiter Controller
76-0034, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE CONTROLS - POWERCONTROL - Replace Qua-

drant Plate and Rigging Plate
77-0002, Rev 1 Oct 29/76 ENGINE INDICATING - Replace Control Assembly

-
Part No. 305520-1 Through -43 With Adjustable

Compensating Resistor Part No. 897069-i
77-0003, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE INDICATING - Replace Compensating Re-

-
sistor, Part No. 897069-1 with Improved Compen-

sating Resistor, Part No. 897069-2
77-0005, Rev 1 Aug 14/81 ENGINE ENGINE INDICATING - Removal of Howell

-
Indicating System and Installation of ITT Indi-

cating System (CANCELLED)
77-0008, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - INTERSTAGE TURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT)

SENSOR ASSEMBLY Replace ITT Sensor Assembly,
-
Part No. 896911-3 with Part No. 896911-5
77-0009, Rev 4 No Effect ENGINE - INTERSTAGE TURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT)

SENSOR ASSEMBLY Replace ITT Sensor Assembly
-
77-0010, Rev 3 July 29/83 ENGINE - INDICATING - Remove Clamp to Relieve

Torsional Load on ITT Sensor Lead
77-0011 May 31/82 ENGINE- INDICATING- Install Adjustor Retainer

Over Torque Compensator Adjustment Screw
77-0017 No Effect ENGINE INDICATING - POWER - Replace Tube Assem-

bly, Part No. 896788-1 with 3102877-1
7 7-0018 No Effect ENGINE INDICATING TEMPERATURE - Replace In-

-
terstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) Sensor As-

sembly Clamps, Part No. 211-533-9002 with
Clamps, Part No. 211-536-9103 and Add Glass
Cloth Tape, Part No. 722-505-9001
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 23
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service
77-0023, Rev 1 Aug 29/86 ENGINE INDICATING - TEMPER/~TURE - Add Compen-

sating Resistor Mounting Bracket, Part No.
3102228-1, Clamp, Part No. 3102229-1 and
Replace or Rework Bracket, Part No. 894163-1
77-0026 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - INDICATING - TEMPERATURE - Incorporate

Improved Thermocouple Harness Flanges and Half
Sleeves
77-0027, Rev 3 Aug 12/91 ENGINE - INDICATING - POWER- Install Fluid

Flow Restrictor, Part No. 634-503-9001 on Beta
Swi tch
77-0040 Aug 16/89 ENGINE - INDICATING - TEMPERATURE - Replace

Compensating Resistor Mounting Bracket
R 77-0064, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - INDICATING - Replace Compensating Re-

R sistor (Positive Compensation), Part No.
R 897069-2 with Part No. 897069-3
79-0004, Rev 1 May 31/82 ENGINE - OIL FILTER ADAPTER - Replace Oil
F i l t e r Adapter to Eliminate Interference
79-0005, Rev 2 Oct 20/76 ENGINE - OIL SYSTEM - Replace Turbine Bearing
Oil I n l e t Tube and Add Support Bracket
79-0006, Rev 1 No Effect ENGINE - OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY - Replace-

ment of Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Body
79-0008, Rev 2 No Effect ENGINE - OIL FILTER BY-PASS - Replace ByPass

Valve
79-0009 No Effect ENGINE - OIL TANK - Replace Oil F i l l e r Cap ana

Dipstick Assembly to Provide Correct "Add" and
"Full" Marki rigs
79-0010, Rev 2 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 ENGINE- OIL FILTER - Replace Oil F i l t e r Cap
79-0011 No Effect OIL - STORAGE - Replace Hose to Reduce Kinking

During I n s t a l l a t i o n
79-0012, Rev 1 Dec 14/87 OIL - DISTRIBUTION - Replace Oil F i l t e r Adapter

and Swivel with Improved One Piece Oil F i l t e r
Adapter
R 79-0014, Rev 4 Dec 14/87 OIL - DISTRIBUTION - Replace Oil F i l t e r Element

UP136688
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
Page 24
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Service
79-0015, Rev 3 Dec 14/87 OIL - D I S T R I B U T I O N - Replace Oil F i l t e r Element
(CANCELLED)
R 79-0029, Rev 2 Aug 4/94 OIL - INDICATING - Replace Magnetic Plug Assem-
R bly (Chip Detector), Part No. 893742-1 with
R Valve, Part No. 3103972-1 and Detector, Part
R No. 3103971-1
72-01-27-S-B-LIST
UP136688
Page 25/26
Aug 4/94
~F~7N-PA
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
LIST OF CHAPTERS
Chapter Date
70 Standard Practices - Engine Dec 14/87
71 Power Plant Dec 14/87
72 Engine Dec 14/87
73 Engine Fuel and Control Dec 14/87
74 Ignition Dec 14/87
75 Ai r Dec 14/87
76 Engine Controls Dec 14/87
77 Engine Indicating Dec 14/87
79 Oil Dec 14/87

UP136688
72-01-27-CHAPTERS
Dec 14/87
/_~lslied
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUBJECT SUBJECT PAGE
INTRODUCTION 72-01-27 1
General 3
How to Use This Maintenance Manual 3
General 3
Engine Identification System 5
Effectivity Code System 6
Vendor Codes and Part Numbers 7
NPC (Nonmetallic Packaged Commodities) Numbers 7
Applicable Publications 7
Abbreviations 8
Use of Warnings, Cautions and Notes 8
UP136688
R 72-01-27-CONTENTS
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
INTRODUCTION
I. General
A. This publication provides maintenance instructions for support of en-

gines manufactured by AlliedSignal Inc., AlliedSignal Engines, 111 South
34th Street, P.O. Box 52181, Phoenix, AZ 85072-2181. Specific engines
covered in this publication are listed on the t i t l e page.
B. This publication is prepared generally in accordance with Air Transport

Association Specification No. 100. Definitions of words and terms used
in this publication are as stipulated therein.
C. The Introduction section consists of the following subsections.
(1) How to Use Instructions

(2) Effectivity Code List (Table i )
(3) Applicable Publications L i s t (Table 2)
72-01-27-I NTRO
UP136688
Page I/2
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. How to Use This Maintenance Manual
A. General
In accordance with Air Transport Association Specification No. 100, the

manual is divided into chapters, sections, and subjects by a numbering
system which consists of a three-element number separated by dashes:
First and second digits - System/Chapter (Assigned by specification)
Third and fourth digits - Sub-System/Section (Assigned by specification)
Fifth and sixth digits - Unit/Subject (Assigned by manufacturer)
The following example illustrates and describes use of each element of

the number:
Typical Chapter - Section - Subject Number - 73-10-06
-73- This number designates a major system. Chapter 73 is "Engine Fuel

and Control ".
-10- This number designates a section or sub-system breakdown of

material in Chapter 73. In this example: "Distribution".
-06- This number designates a specific component or unit of a section.

In this case, -06 represents "Fuel Shutoff Valve".
The complexity and volume of material contained in the maintenance man-

ual dictates the need for separating the subjects within manual chapters
down into reasonable small topics for ready reference and ease of
revision.
To accomplish this, page number blocks are used to separate subjects

into topics. I t is necessary to use standard page block system so that
topics may be separated for special distribution. Page number blocks
used are as follows:
Description and Operation 1 through 100

Trouble Shooting 101 through 200
Maintenance Practices 201 through 300
Servicing 301 through 400
72-01-27-1NTRO
UP136688
Page 3
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Removal/Installation 401 through 500

Adjustment/Test 501 through 600
Inspection/Check 601 through 700
Cleaning/Painting 701 through 800
Approved Repairs 801 through 900
In the case of relatively simple components, coverage for description

and operation and other topics may not be required. In such cases the
unused page number blocks are omitted.
When topics are brief they are combined into one topic entitled, for ex-
ample, Fuel System Installation - Maintenance Practices. Topics covered
in this manner are page numbered within the 201 through 300 page number
blocks. Maintenance Practices consists of a combination of the follow-
ing topics: Servicing, Removal/Installation, Adjustment/Test,
Inspection/Check, Cleaning/Painting, and Approved Repairs.
Maintenance procedures for components and systems are located in various

chapters and sections within the manual as outlined in the following
list.
(See Air Transportation Association Specification ~o. 100 for a complete

listing of all Chapter/Section numbers.)
Chapter 70 - Standard Practices - Engine
Chapter 71 - Power Plant
71-30-XX Fi reshi el ds
Chapter 72 - Engine
R 72-00-00 General
R 72-O0-XX Engine Components
72-10-XX Reduction Gear and Shaft Section
72-30-XX Compressor Section
72-40-XX Combustion Section
72-50-XX Turbine Section
Chapter 73 - Engine Fuel and Control
73-O0-XX General
73-10-XX Distribution
73-20-XX Controlling
Chapter 74 - Ignition
74-O0-XX General
74-10-XX Electrical Power Supply
R 74-20-XX Distribution
74-30-XX Switching
UP136688
72-01-27-1NTRO
Page 4
Aug 4/94
ignal
~. / l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 75 - Air
75-O0-XX General
75-10-XX Engine Anti-Icing
Chapter 76 - Engine Controls
76-O0-XX General
76-10-XX Power Control
Chapter 77 - Engine Indicating
77-O0-XX General
77-I0-XX Power
77-20-XX Temperature
Chapter 78 - Exhaust (Not Used)
Chapter 79 - Oil
79-O0-XX General
79-10-XX Storage
79-20-XX Distribution
79-30-XX Indicating
Index tab sheets are used to subdivide this publication for ease in
locating specific information. Yellowtab sheets are used to index the
introduction and each separate chapter. White tab sheets are used to
subdivide Chapter 72. A table of contents follows each yellow and white
tab to l i s t significant material and material location within the tabbed
section.
2. B. Engine Identification System
Each engine is provided with a nameplate for identification of the

engine. Information supplied on the engine nameplate includes model
number, part number, and serial number. The model number defines sig-
nificant features and specification ratings. The part number defines a
group of specific configurations. All engines with the same part number
are interchangeable. The part number is supplemented by a series num-
ber, and i f applicable, change numbers to define a specific config-
uration. A series number is assigned at engine manufacture or overhaul
to identify product improvement changes incorporated beyond the i n i t i -
ally manufactured configuration. Individual changes incorporated which
are not within the series grouping are identified separately by change
numbers. Changes represented by series and change numbers are product
improvements and do not affect interchangeability of the engine. Refer
to the engine log book for changes incorporated since engine production
which are not separately identified on the nameplate.
UP136688
72-01-27-1NTRO
R Page 5
Aug 16/89
~ l s l i e d

Each assembly of the engine which is a complete unit has a separate
nameplate carrying part number, serial number, and product improvement
change information. Any assembly is interchangeable with assemblies
having the same part number.
2. C. Effectivity Code System
Some of the instructions and information contained in this publication

are applicable only to specific engine model numbers, engine series/
serial numbers, or pre or post service bulletin configurations of
engines. When this occurs, the applicability of the material is noted
at the beginning of the paragraph, procedural step, table t i t l e , or
figure t i t l e . Whenthe applicability of the material applies to certian
engine part numbers only, applicability is specified by effectivity
codes representing engine part numbers. (Refer to table 1.)
HOW TO USE EFFECTIVITY CODES:
Effectivity codes listed which are separated by a comma (AA, AC) mean
any intervening codes do not apply. For example, a paragraph beginning
with (Codes AA, AC) is applicable for Codes AA and AC and is not appli-
cable to Codes AB.
Effectivity codes listed which are separated by a dash (AA-AC) mean all
intervening codes do apply. For example, a paragraph beginning with
(Codes AA-AC) is applicable for Codes AA, AB, and AC.
When no codes are noted the information is applicable to all engine
model s.
Table 1. Effectivity Code List
Engine Model No. Engine Part No. Effectivity Code
TPE331-5-251C 896950-1-1 CA
TPE331-5-251C 896950-2 CB
TPE331-5-251C 896950-3 CC
TPE331-5-251K 895720-1 AA
TPE331-5-251K 895720-2 AB
TPE331-5-251K 895720-3 AC
TPE331-5-252K 3102520-1 EA
TPE331-5-252M 3101840-1 DA
TPE331-5-254K 3102520-2 FA
TPE331-5-254K 3102520-3 FB
TPE331-5-255K 895720-4 BA
TPE331-5-252C 3103860-I GA
UP136688
72-01-27-1NTRO
Page 6
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
When material is applicable only to specific engine series numbers, or

engine serial numbers, or only to configurations which are pre or post
service bulletin compliance, applicability is specified by direct ref-
erence to engine series numbers, or engine serial number, or service
bulletin number.
2. D. Vendor Codes and Part Numbers
The inclusion of vendor codes and part numbers in this publication shall
not be construed as an authorization of the vendor, pursuant to FAA reg-
ulations, to ship directly to the user. Neither shall i t be construed
R as a certification by the AlliedSignal Engines that parts shipped by
vendors directly to users w i l l conform to the type design or that such
parts are airworthy or safe for installation.
E. NPC (Nonmetallic Packaged Commodities) Numbers
R AlliedSignal part numbers prefixed with the letters NPC are assigned to
R various materials and compounds which may be procured from AlliedSignal
R Engines, Distribution Center, P.O. Box 29003, Phoenix, AZ 85038. In ad-
R dition to AlliedSignal's NPC number assigned to a product, the
manufacturer's name and address is provided as another source of
procurement.
3. Applicable Publications
Other publications applicable to equipment specified in this publication are

listed in Table 2 by report number, along with nomenclature and part number
of the equipment covered. Separate publications for components of the en-
gine, when available, are referenced in the text where applicable and listed
in Table 2.
72-01-27-1NTRO
UP136688
Page 7
Aug 4/94
~I:::~7N-PA
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Abbreviations
Abbreviations used w i t h i n t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n are as follows.
Abbreviation Term Abbreviation Term
ACFT Aircraft mV Mil I ivol t

ASSY Assembly NC Normal l y Closed
C Cel sius NO. Number
cc cubic centimeters OAT Outside Ambient
CCW Counterclockwise Temperature
CMM Component Mainte- OD Outside
nance Manual Diameter
R CPS Cycles Per Second OHM Overhaul Manual
R CTKS Centi stoke s OVHL Overhaul
CW C1ockwise PN Part Number
DIA Diameter OVHL Overhaul
DIM. Dimension PPH Pounds Per Hour
F Fahrenheit PRESS. Pressure
R GPM Gallons Per Minute PRI Primary
HP Horsepower PROP Propeller
HR Hour PSl Pounds Per Square Inch
HSG Housing PSIG Pounds Per Square Inch
IAS Indicated Air Speed Gage
IAW In Accordance With RPM Revolutions Per Minute
ID Inside Diameter SB Service B u l l e t i n
IN. Inch SEC Secondary
R IPL I l l u s t r a t e d Parts SG S p e c i f i c Gravity
List SHP Shaft Horsepower
KTS Knots SPB Spare Parts B u l l e t i n
LBS Pounds SW Switch
MAINT Maintenance TEMP Temperature
MAX. Maximum
MIN Minimum
5. Use of Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Warnings, Cautions and Notes are found throughout this manual preceding to
applicable procedures. The following definitions apply to Warnings, Cau-
tions and Notes:
WARNING: PROCEDURESTHAT MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE
IF NOT CAREFULLY FOLLOWED.
CAUTION: PROCEDURESTHAT MAY RESULT IN DAMAGETO EQUIPMENT IF NOT

CAREFULLY FOLLOWED.
NOTE: Procedures that are considered essential to emphasize.

UP136688
72-01-27-1NTRO
Page 8
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2. Applicable Publications List
Nomenclature Part No. Publication Type
Turboprop Aircraft Engine 895720-X 72-01-25 IPC

896950-X 72-01-28 OHM
3101840-X 72-01-26 SM
3102520-X
3103860-X
Anti-lce Valve Assy (Fuel) 895203-X 73-10-20 OHM

894436-X 73-10-21 OHM
Feathering Valve Assy 869245-X 72-13-04 OHM
Fuel Control Unit 893528-X 15-613A CMM

Bendix Part No.
2524660-X
893528-X 15-613 CMM

Bendix Part No.
2524538-X
R 893561-X "40068B OHM

Woodward Part
No. 8070-X
895410-X 15-613 CMM

Bendix Part No.
2524658-X
Fuel Enrichment Valve Assembly 895208-X 73-21-12 OHM
Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve 394324-X 73-10-14 OHM

394390-X 73-10-15 OHM
Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly 893468-X 73-10-16 OHM

- Primary 3102473-X 73-10-16 OHM
Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly 893469-X 73-10-16 OHM

- Secondary 3102474-X 73-10-16 OHM
Fuel Pressure Regulator 394312-X 73-10-03 OHM
R *For applicable publications, refer to; Woodward Governor Co., 5001N Second St,
R Rockford, IL 61101
72-01-27-1NTRO
UP136688
Page 9
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
/lied
Table 2. Applicable Publications List (Cont)
Fuel Pressurizing Valve 869381-X 73-21-15 OHM
Fuel Pump Assembly 869151-X 73-21-07 OHM

895413-X 73-21-09 OHM
897400-X 73-21-19 OHM
897380-X 73-21-20 OHM
893540-X 28-20-05 CMM
Sperry Vi ckers
Part No. 406138
893540-X 28-20-05 CMM
Sperry Vickers
Part No. 414199
897385-X 28-20-05 CMM

Sperry Vickers
Part No. 429969
Fuel Shutoff Valve 394230-X 73-10-06 OHM
Oil to Fuel Cooler Assembly 156120-X 2-220 OHM
Oil Pressure Pump Assembly 867165-X 72-10-03 OHM

R 3103217-2 72-10-01 OHM
Oil Pressure Regulator Assembly 869601-X 79-20-05 OHM

3101802-X 79-20-08 OHM
Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly 868948-X 72-12-03 OHM

(Gearcase) 3101321-X 72-12-04 OHM
Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly 865046-X 72-50-04 OHM
(Turbine)
UP136688
72-01-27-1NTRO
Page 10
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2. Applicable Publications L i s t (Cont)
R Propeller Governor 893615-X *33091 CMM

Woodward Part
No. 210536
893615-X *3309 IA CMM

Woodward Part
No. 210738
895490-X 72-13-20 OHM
894418-X *33091 CMM

Woodward Part
No. 210540J/
210735/210742
897410-X 33170 CMM

Woodward Part
No. 210746
897410-X 33170 CMM
Propel I er Pitch Control 869130-X 72-13-11 OHM

895481-X 72-13-12 OHM
Resistor Assembly 305520-X 77-20-01 OHM

(Compensating Resistor)
Solenoid Shutoff Valve Assembly 319980-X 75-10-01 OHM

(Anti-lce)
Solenoid Shutoff Valve Assembly 692545-X 49 -30-67 OHM

(BETA and NTS Pressure Switch)
Solenoid Shutoff Valve Assembly 692545-X 49 -30-67 OHM

(Fuel Pressure Regulating)
R *For applicable publication, refer to; Woodward Governor Co., 5001 N Second St,
R Rockford, IL 61101
72-01-27-1NTRO
UP136688
Page 11
Aug 4/94
C~FC~70-2A
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 3. Applicable Publications List (Cont)
Solenoid Shutoff Valve Assembly 3101396-X 24-09-45 OHM

(Fuel Manifold Purge System)
Solenoid Valve (Oil Vent Valve) 319974-X 79-20-06 OHM
Speed Switch 305394-X 74-30-01 OHM

305538-X 74-3O-02 OHM
Torque Limiter Assy 895380-X 73-22-01 OHM

Torque and Temperature Controller 949594-X 3-2188 CMM
Torque Sensor Assembly 895609-X 72-12-11 OHM

896826-X 72-12-12 OHM
Torque Sensor Assembly (Module) 3101726-X 72-00-17 OHM
Torque Sensor Compensator Assembly 867916-X 77-10-01 OHM
UP136688
72-01-27-1NTRO
R Page 12
Aug 16/89
Allied.SignalAerospace Company
lied
CHAPTER 70 - STANDARDPRACTICES
-TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
GENERAL 70-00-00
STANDARD PRACTICES I
General 1
Standard Disassembly Procedures 3
Standard Reassembly Procedures 5
Replaceable Components 11
Bearing Inspection 13
Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection 44
Magnetic Particle Inspection 45
Inspection of Tubes, Hoses, and Fittings 56
Cleaning Instructions for Fire Extinguisher Agents 62
Curvic Coupling Handling and Inspection 63
R Fuel Nozzle Conical Sealing Surface Repair 65
R (Size 4 Fitting)
Other Standard Practices 65
UP136688
70-CONTENTS
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (KEPORT NO. 72-01-27)

72-01-27
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
STANDARD 32 Dec 14/87

PRACTI CES Tab 33 Dec 14/87
34 Dec 14/87
Table of 35 Dec 14/87
Contents Aug 12/91 36 Aug 12/91
37 Dec 14/87
List of 38 Dec 14/87
Effective 39 Dec 14/87
Pages Aug 4/94 40 Dec 14/87
41 Dec 14/87
Record of 42 Dec 14/87
Ternpora ry 43 Dec 14/87
Revi si ons Dec 14/87 44 Aug 12/91
44A Aug 12/91
70-00-00 1 Aug 4/94 44B Aug 12/91
2 Aug 12/91 44C Aug 12/91
3 Aug 16/89 44D Aug 12/91
4 Dec 14/87 45 Aug 12/91
5 Aug 16/89 46 Aug 16/89
6 Aug 16/89 47 Aug 16/89
7 Dec 14/87 48 Aug 16/89
8 Aug 16/89 48A Aug 16/89
9 Aug 16/89 48B Aug 16/89
I0 Aug 16/89 48C Aug 4/94
IOA Aug 16/89 48D Aug 16/89
lOB Blank 48E Aug 16/89
11 Aug 12/91 48F Blank
12 Aug 12/91 49 Aug 16/89
13 Aug 12/91 50 Aug 16/89
14 Aug 4/94 51 Aug 4/94
15 Aug 4/94 52 Aug 4/94
16 Blank 53 Aug 4/94
17 Aug 12/91 54 Aug 4/94
19 Aug 12/91 56 Dec 14/87
20 Blank 57 Dec 14/87
21 Aug 12/91 58 Aug 4/94
22 Blank 58A Aug 4/94
23 Aug 12/91 58B Blank
24 Blank 59 Aug 16/89
25 Dec 14/87 60 Dec 14/87
26 Dec 14/87 61 Dec 14/87
27 Dec 14/87 62 Aug 12/91
28 Dec 14/87 63 Dec 14/87
29 Aug 4/94 64 Dec 14/87
3O Dec 14/87 65 Aug 4/94
31 Dec 14/87 66 Blank
UP136688
70-EFF
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
INCORPO-
CHAPISECl RATED INTO
NO. PAGE NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY R~4OVED BY REV NO.
UP136688
70-T-R-REC
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL - STANDARD PRACTICES
1. General
NOTE: The application of general maintenance practices introduced

in this manual are on the same guide lines as FAA Manual
AC65-9, Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
For those maintenance practices not covered in this Main-
tenance Manual, use FAA Manual AC65-9, Airframe and Power-
plant Mechanics General Handbook.
The standard practices and general maintenance instructions presented in

this chapter are recommended by the engine manufacturer. Frequent reference
shall be made to this chapter by personnel engaged in maintenance procedures
outlined in this publication. Table 1 provides a l i s t of tools and consuma-
ble material required to perform STANDARD PRACTICES.
Table 1. Tools and Consumable Materials
Tool, Material or Compound Hanufacturer
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed items.
Acetone ( Federal Commercial ly avail able

Specification 0-A-51C)
Any approved engine oil Commercial ly avail able
Heli-coil extracting tools Mite Corp, 466 Blake St, New Haven, CT
06515
High temperature compound Fel-Pro Inc, Div of Felt Products Mfg Co,
(Fel -Pro C5-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL
60076-4046
Insert instal ling tool Heli-Coil Products Div, Heli-Coil Corp,

1564 Shelter Rock Lane, Danbury, CT 06810
Isopropyl alcohol Commercial ly avail abl e
Isobutyl alcohol Commercial ly available
Lubricant (0S-124 or Monsanto Co, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,

Santovac 5) St Louis, MO 63166
70-00-00
UP136688
R Page 1
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
/lied
Table 1. Tools and Consumable Materials (Cont)
Tool, Material or Compound Manufacturer
Keensert installation tool Tridair Ind, Fastener Div, 3000 W Lomita

Blvd, Torrance, CA 90505
Marking material s
Silver pencil (Preferred) Boise Cascade Office Products Div,
(Berol Verithin No. 753) 302 South 23rd Ave, Phoenix, AZ 85009
Violet master marker Pannier Corp, 207 Sandusky St, Pittsburgh,
(Grade 127-1/2) PA 15212
Portable fl uorescent Magnaflux Corp, 7300 W Lawrence Ave,
penetrant k i t (ZA-59) Chicago, IL 60656
Primer (Green epoxy-amine) Koppers Co, Inc, Paint Div, P.O. Box
(Base P415A-66-34151 and 911207, Commerce, CA 90091 (or author-
Activator C-1178) ized Distributor Griggs Paint of Domcom
Smaller quantities Enterprises, 3602 S 16th Pl, Phoenix,
(5 grams to 4 oz) are AZ 85040)
available from Wilco,
4636 E Elwood, Suite 11,
Phoenix, AZ 85040
Solvent (Federal Specification Commercial ly avail able
P-D-680, Type 1)
1,1,1-Tri chl oroethane Commercial ly available
(MIL-T-81533)
UP136688
70-00-00
R Page 2
Aug 12/91
lied
2. Standard Disassembly Procedures
R CAUTION: ENSURE TEE OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELYWHENREMOVING

R CAPS AND TUBE ASSEMBLIES. IF TEE OR FITTINGS ARE NOT
R SECURED, UNDUESTRESS, BENDING, AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN
R ATTACHING PARTSMAY RESULT.
A. Observe the following general procedures throughout disassembly or

removal operations.
(1) Place each part removed from the engine on a clean workbench in the
order of disassembly, in preparation for cleaning and inspection.
Keep hardware and small parts together in trays to prevent parts
from being mislaid.
(2) Provide proper covering or support to protect shafts, gears, studs,

curvics, or any projecting part from being bent, scratched, or
otherwise damaged.
(3) Do not use steel or lead hammers directly on the assemblies or

their parts. Use cellulose-tipped hammers, fiber, or rawhide
mallets. Do not clamp parts directly in the steel jaws of a bench
vise. Use a vise having micarta jaws or equivalent.
(4) Spray steel parts with engine oil after disassembly. Cover all
parts with plastic sheeting or suitable plastic closures unless
cleaning and inspection are to be accomplished immediately.
(5) Do not disassemble tube assemblies, hose assemblies, riveted assem-

blies, staked or press-fit parts (except seals and bearings),
remove nameplates, modification plates, lubrication plates, decals,
studs or their lockrings and thread inserts, unless specifically
required in the text or necessary for replacement of a part. I f
disassembly or removal is necessary, proceed in a manner consistent
with good shop practice.
(6) Always seal ports, bores and passages. Cover large openings with
plastic sheeting. Cap open tube ends. I f the engine is to be l e f t
for even a short period in a p a r t i a l l y disassembled state, cover or
cap all openings.
(7) During various stages of disassembly, examine all parts and assem-
blies for signs of scoring, burning or other defects. Note physi-
cal conditions which w i l l not be apparent after cleaning. Tag in-
volved parts before they are cleaned and laid out for detailed
inspection.
(8) Note and record number and thickness of all shims or shim washers
removed from the various components of the engine for reference at
reassembly.
(9) Record manner of lockwiring for duplication at reassembly.

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 3
Aug 16/89
I ~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: NO SCRIBEMARKSARE ALLOWEDON ROTATING PARTS.
. A. (iO) Use silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753) for indexing housings
and shafts where required during disassembly.
(ii) Whenever components with knife edge (labyrinth) seals are removed
from engine, use care to prevent any handling damage such as dents,
nicks, or bends on knife edges.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 4
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal /•lslied
2. B. Retain Assembly Part Number when Replacing Multiple Piece Parts
When a part to be replaced is marked with an assembly part number in ad-

dition to the individual piece part number, ensure that the replacement
part is identified with the assembly part number.
3. Standard Reassembly Procedures
R CAUTION: ENSURE TEE OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY WHEN INSTALLING

R CAPS AND TUBE ASSEMBLIES. IF TEE OR FITTINGS ARE NOT
R SECURED, UNDUE STRESS, BENDING, AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN
R ATTACHING PARTS MAY RESULT.
A. Perform reassembly procedures with careful attention to details outlined

in this publication. Highest standard of precision engine shop proce-
dures shall be observed throughout reassembly. Observe the following
general procedures at reassembly.
(i) Exercise extreme care to prevent d i r t , dust or foreign particles
from entering the engine. I f any foreign particle is dropped into
the engine during maintenance, stop work until foreign particle is
located and removed, even i f this may cause considerable
disassembly.
(2) For added protection to the engine, cover large openings with
plastic sheeting. Cap open tube ends. If the engine is to be l e f t
for even a short period in a p a r t i a l l y disassembled state, cover or
cap all openings.
(3) I f any parts were coated with corrosion-preventive compound, remove

all traces of compound and any accumulated foreign matter. Be sure
a l l parts are thoroughly clean before assembly. Wipe a l l parts and
surfaces with a clean, l i n t - f r e e cloth.
R WARNING: CLEANING AGENTS ARE TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE
R IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES
R OR CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGETO PHYS-
R ICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID
R FIRE HAZARD.
R CAUTION: NO SCRIBE MARKS ARE ALLOWED ON ROTATING PARTS.

R DO NOT USE 1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE AS A CLEANING
R AGENT ON TITANIUM COMPONENTS.
(4) Remove silver pencil and violet master marker index markings from
rotating group, and stationary components aft of compressor housing
R using 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) or acetone (Federal Spe-
R c i f i c a t i o n 0-A-51C).
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 5
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. A. (5) When special measurements for shimming of f i t t i n g are made on parts

or on assembled parts prior to their installation in the next
higher assembly, tag these parts as measured components of the
higher assembly and keep with that assembly. I f replacement of a
measured component is required, repeat all measurements which in-
clude that part, using the new part.
(6) Lightly coat new packings and gaskets used in the engine fuel sys-
tem with clean engine fuel or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)
prior to installation, and l i g h t l y coat new packings and gaskets
used in the engine oil system with clean engine oil or iubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation.
(7) Coat threaded male plumbing f i t t i n g s , located forward of aft flange

of compressor housing, l i g h t l y with clean engine o i l before
assembly. Unless otherwise specified, coat threaded male plumbing
f i t t i n g s , located aft of compressor housing, l i g h t l y with high tem-
perature compound (Fel-Pro CS-A) before assembly.
(8) Unless otherwise specified, l i g h t l y coat o i l wetted parts (gears,

shafts, bearings, etc) with clean engine oil prior to assembly.
(9) Whenever non-standard torque values are required for individual

parts, the parts are identified and the torque requirements are
listed in the applicable chapter/section/subject covering the part.
These specified torque values do not include f r i c t i o n a l torques
developed by self-locking devices or "run-down" resistance. The
frictional resistance or "run-down" torque must be added to the
specified torque. Torque tolerances are not provided for nuts and
bolts since this tolerance is assumed to be the nominal tolerance
of a properly calibrated torque wrench. Where two torque values
are included, the lower value shall be used when torque is applied
to the nut and the bolt is held stationary. When torque is applied
to the bolt and the nut is held stationary, the higher value shall
be used. Whentorque values are not specified, conform to standard
shop practice of sources such as FAA Manual AC65-9, Airframe and
Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 6
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. A. (10) Follow general guidelines listed in Tables A and B for tightening

small fasteners.
NOTE: Fasteners instal led through essentially inelastic

boundaries w i l l f i r s t be tightened to remove vis-
ible clearance between parts. During this i n i -
tial tightening of the fastener, the "run-down"
resistance shall be noted on the last rotation
just before establishment of a tensile preload in
the fastener. The fastener shall then be given a
steady additional tightening movement by the
wrench to produce a final torque, that is approx-
imately equal to the "run-down" torque plus the
values shown in Table A for the respective thread
size. This procedure w i l l produce -+35 percent
accuracy which is adequate for all items not
listed under torque values below. As a further
assistance, Table B gives general guidelines for
obtaining the final torque.
Table A:
Torque I i n.-I b)
Thread Size Aluminum Fastener Cres Fastener
6 5 10
8 10 20
10 15 35
1/4 45 75
5/16 80 160
3/8 140 275
Table B:
Thread Size Approximate Rotation After Run-down
6-32 45 deg
8-32 60 deg
10-24 40 deg
1/4-20 40 deg
5/16-18 40 deg
3/8-24 60 deg
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 7
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL •lsliedignal
3. A. (10) (a) Fasteners installed through elastic boundaries (sealed by

means of a diaphragm or similar elastomeric gasket) shall be
tightened uniformly to effect a pressure-tight seal.
(11) Unless otherwise specified flared tubing and hose f i t t i n g , not

used with conical seals, shall be tightened to torque values spe-
cified in Table 2.
Table 2. Standard Torque Values for Flared Tubing and Hose Fittings
Not Used with Conical Seals
Tube Torque
Dash No. Aluminum Parts All Steel Parts Units
2 12-15 35-40 in.-Ib

3 20-35 70-80 in.-Ib
4 40-60 100-120 in.-Ib
5 65-85 140-160 in.-Ib
6 100-120 190-220 in.-Ib
7 140-160 240-280 in.-Ib
8 180-220 300-350 in.-Ib
10 270-330 440-500 in.-Ib
12 360-440 600-660 in.-Ib
16 500-620 840-960 in.-Ib
20 660-780 1080-1320 in.-Ib
24 800-960 1500-1800 in.-Ib
28 960-1140 2160-2520 in.-Ib
32 1080-1320 2400-2880 in.-Ib
(12) Minimum running torque values have been established for several
sizes of bolts and self-locking female threads. Bolts and inserts
with running torques less than the below minimum shall be
replaced.
Bolt/Insert Size Minimum Runninq Torque
8-32 4 in.-Ib
10-32 6 in.-Ib
1/4-20 6 in.-Ib
1/4-28 6 i n.-I b
UP136688
70-00-00
R Page 8
Aug 16/89
lied
3. A. (13) Any extension used with a torque wrench to provide access, or any
special tool providing an o f f s e t causes a difference between i n d i -
cated and actual torque. The actual torque applied in t h i s condi-
tion may be calculated as follows.
R=TxL
L+E
Where: R= Indicated torque on torque wrench

T = Actual torque
L = Effect length of torque wrench lever arm (see figure 1)
E= Effective length of offset (see figure 1)
L+E
" " E l" L TORQUEWRENCH

EXTENSION ~ /
II
EXAMPLE!
L+E
IL
TORQUEWRENCH
\
/
EXTENSIONJ ~1~ li
EXAMPLE2 1-48A-300
UP136688
Determine Effect Length of Wrench and Extension

Figure 1 70-00-00
Page 9
Aug 16/89
Allied-SignalAerospace Company
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. B. Installation of Conical Seals
CAUTION: PROPER INSTALLATION OF CONICAL SEALS DESCRIBED

IN THE FOLLOWING STEP IS ESSENTIAL TO AVOID
FLOW RESTRICTIONS OR SUBSEQUENT LEAKAGE. CONI-
CAL SEALS ARE TO BE USED ONLYONCEAND SHALL BE
REPLACED AT EACHDISASSEMBLY OF PLUMBING. EN-
SURE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED CONICAL SEAL IS
REMOVED FROMPLUMBING FITTING BEFOREINSTALLING
NEW CONICAL SEAL.
ANYTIME A CONNECTION (WITH A CONICAL SEAL IN-

STALLED) BETWEEN FUEL MANIFOLDASSEMBLYAND
NOZZLE ASSEMBLY IS LOOSENED, CONICAL SEAL MUST
BE REPLACED.
R INSTALLATION OF CONICAL SEAL BETWEEN FUEL MANI-

R FOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLYREQUIRES A MANIFOLD
R AND NOZZLEASSEMBLY FLOW CHECKIN ACCORDANCE
R WITH 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST, OR 73-10-09,
R ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
NOTE: Conical seals may be used at any flared tubing

f i t t i n g of appropriate size in fuel and oil sys-
tems as a repair to correct leakage at the option
of the user.
R Standard torque values for flared tubing f i t t i n g s

R u t i l i z i n g conical seals are listed in Table 3.
(1) Unless otherwise specified, flared tubing f i t t i n g s when used with

conical seals shall be tightened to torque values in Table 3. When
conical seals are used, install conical seals and tighten f i t t i n g s
as follows.
(a) Select proper conical seal part number for tube assembly being
installed (refer to table 3).
(b) Lubricate conical seal and threads of plumbing f i t t i n g s with

clean engine oil (72-00-00, Servicing).
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 10
Aug 16/89
lied
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL CONICAL SEALS INTO TUBE

NUTS. SEALSHALL BE INSTALLED ON MALE
FITTING ONLY.
Table 3. Standard Torque Values for Flared Tubing Fittings

Used with Conical Seals
Tube Conical Seal Torque (in.-Ib)

Dash No. Part No. All Steel Parts
3 651-525-9003 110 to 125

4 651-525-9004 165 to 190
5 651-525-9005 225 to 250
6 651-525-9006 335 to 375
8 651-525-9008 575 to 625
UP136688
70-00-00
R Page IOA/IOB
Aug 16/89
lied
3. B. (1) (c) Install conical seal onto male flare portion of plumbing
f i t t i n g . Flats on conical seal are designed to provide proper
positioning of seal onto plumbing f i t t i n g to prevent cocking
of seal that could cause flow restrictions.
(d) Thread tube nut onto plumbing f i t t i n g several turns with

fingers until j o i n t is snug. I f tube nut cannot be tightened
snugly with fingers, disassemble and correct problem to pre-
vent assembly damage to conical seal.
CAUTION: USE CARE NOT TO TIGHTEN TUBE NUTS MORETHAN SPE-

CIFIED TO AVOID DAMAGINGSEAL. DO NOT LOOSEN
TUBE NUT AFTER INITIAL TORQUEAPPLICATION
WITHOUT REPLACING CONICAL SEAL. (CONICALSEAL
IS SUBJECT TO COLD CREEP; THEREFORE, A DOUBLE
TIGHTENING PROCEDURE IS REQUIRED.)
(e) Tighten tube nuts as follows.
1 Tighten tube nuts to torque value specified in Table 3.

Torque values are higher than torque values of tube nuts
without conical seals installed.
--2 Allow five minutes elapsed time for cold creep to occur.
3 Recheck torque on tube nut and, i f required, further

tighten to torque value specified in Table 3.
C. Do not use petroleum based solvents or lubricants to clean or lubricate

electrical connectors. Oily film and d i r t residue l e f t by evaporated
solvents and lubricants can cause carbon tracks, arcing, and shorting.
4. Replaceable Components
A. Replace the following components in addition to the replaceable compo-

nents outlined in other chapters.
(1) Replace all plumbing, tubing, f i t t i n g s , brackets, grommets, and

common hardware i f required.
R (2) Replace packings removed during maintenance with new packings.
R Manufacturer recommends replacing gaskets removed during mainte-
R nance with new gaskets.
B. Replace Damaged Keensert Studs and Inserts
(1) Cut off stud just above mounting surface to expose pilot hole for
removal d r i l l .
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW DRILL TO TOUCH HOUSINGOR DAMAGE

MAY RESULT.
(2) D r i l l out stud or insert until only a thin shall remains.

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 11
Aug 12/91
/lied
4. B. (3) Bend locking keys inward and break them off. Remove stud and in-
sert with an "easy-out" tool.
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-

VENTILATED AREA. AVOIDBREATHING FUMESOR CON-
TACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENTDAMAGETO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEPAWAYFROMFLAMETO AVOID FIRE
HAZARD.
(4) Clean components using 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) to

remove all traces of grease or o i l . Cleaner shall be allowed to
evaporate.
(5) Apply a thin even coat of primer to the threaded hole. Application
of primer shall be uniform and neat in appearance without bare
spots or runs.
(a) Blind holes shall be coated to cover adjacent walls with
primer. The bottom of hole need not be covered. Allow primer
to dry 2 or 3 minutes before installing stud or insert.
(b) Through holes in components shall be coated to cover all in-
ternal surfaces through to adjacent painted surfaces.
(6) While primer is s t i l l soft, install stud or insert as follows.
(a) Install stud into threaded hole until step is 0.010 to 0.030
inch below machined surface. Ensure locking keyways are
aligned 90 ±45 degrees from previously installed locking key
position.
(b) Install insert 3/4 to 1 1/2 turns below surface of

countersink.
(c) Drive in locking keys using hammer and keensert installation

tool.
(d) Surfaces adjacent to the locking device of the stud or insert

shall be touched up by wiping on a thin even coat of primer to
seal scratches and insulate dissimilar metal surface.
(e) Apply a thin even coat of primer to area around stud or insert
to seal all surfaces.
(7) Allow primer to cure 4 to 6 hours at room temperature or for 1 hour
at 82 to 135C (180 to 275F) prior to assembly usage.
C. Replace Damaged Heli-Coil Inserts
Damaged heli-coil inserts may be removed with heli-coil extracting

tools. For removal and replacement instructions and tools required,
reference should be made to the manufacturer.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 12
Aug 12/91
lied
5. Bearing Inspection
R NOTE: Functional surfaces of bearings shall be visually checked

R under suitable lighting at ten power magnification. Visual
R check may be supplemented by hand tracing with a precision
R stylus to determine the acceptability of observed surface
R defects. Refer to Table 4.
A. Handling Procedures
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARINGCOMPONENTSMUSTBE MINIMIZED.

WHENHANDLING BEARINGSPERSONNELSHALL WEAREITHER
SYNTHETIC RUBBERGLOVESOR NYLONMESHGLOVES, WITH
POLYETHYLENE PALMSAND FINGERS. IN CASENONEOF THE
ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE, CLEANCOTTONGLOVESSHALL BE
WORN.
(1) Submergebearings in container of approved engine oil until inspec-
tion to minimize contamination.
(2) Prior to inspection, clean bearing components in accordance with
72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting.
(3) After inspection of bearings coat with approved engine oil and
store in a sealed bag until installation.
R B. Inspect Bearing Inspection
R (1) Prior to Inspection, clean bearing components per 72-00-00,

R Cleaning/Painting.
R (2) Place bearings in a covered container or plastic bag while awaiting

R inspection to minimize contamination.
(3) Functional surfaces of bearings include:
(a) Total raceway width of straight-through (non-flanged) races of

roller bearings.
(b) Load paths on flanged raceways of roller bearings.
(c) Roller OD load path.
(d) Roller corner radius to end face intersection. (See Figure

2.)
(e) Roller bearing raceway guide flange inner surface.
(f) Cage pilot land surface.

(g) Balls and ball bearing outer raceway.
(h) Ball bearing loaded raceway half for split inner rings.
70-00-00
UP136688
Page 13
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Table 4 specifies stylus t i p radius. I f using
stylus with ball t i p , ball diameter must be equal
to twice the radius specified in table. Stylus
t i p surface finish shall be 4AA or better.
. B. (4) When a stylus is used i t shall have a t i p radius as specified in
Table 4. The stylus shall be held perpendicular to the surface be-
ing examined and the only pressure exerted should be the weight of
the stylus. Surface blemishes of acceptable bearings must not ex-
ceed the requirements of Table 4.
(5) Bearings that exhibit surface conditions that exceed the limits of
Table 4, or other damage that renders them inoperable are to be
rejected for reuse. Bearings that have surface conditions no worse
than those shown in illustrations are identified as acceptable and
may be reused.
(6) Components (races, rollers, cage, etc) of each bearing should be

separated from components of other bearings. Each reassembled
bearing must contain only original components and be oriented at
reassembly the same as at disassembly.
(7) Definitions and limits.

(a) Arced. Round pit shaped cavity in a surface from which metal
has been removed by an electrical arc, causing a temper change
(softer) in the metal around the p i t shaped cavity. Arced
condition is cause for rejection.
(b) Brinelling (True). True brinelling is plastic flow of metal

characterized by smooth, shiny bottomed indentations in race-
ways and rolling elements usually equally spaced corresponding
to rolling element spacing as shown in Figure 3. (Refer to
Table 4 for limits.)
(c) Brinelling (False). False brinelling is characterized by sur-

face marks or blemishes on balls, rollers or raceways that
normally have a polished or satin finish appearance. This is
usually caused by continuous non-rotational vibrations and is
shown in Figure 4. (Refer to Table 4 for l i m i t s . )
(d) Cracks. Cracks are separations, fissures or ruptures charac-

terized by sharp edges and/or sharp changes in direction.
Cracks are cause for rejection on functional or non-functional
surfaces.
(e) Corrosion. Corrosion on surface areas is characterized by a

broken, pitted or discolored appearance. Corroded surface
areas w i l l exhibit an orange peel appearance. Figure 5 shows
R corrosion. (Refer to Table 4 for l i m i t s . )
70-00-00
Page 14
UP136688
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. B. (7) (f) Burnishing. Burnishing is a mechanical smoothing of a sur-

face, sometimes resulting in discoloration around the contact
area. This is not accompanied by wear. Acceptable components
show wear of less than 0.000050 inch. (See r o l l e r end wear
and cage defects sections.)
(g) Dents. Dents are slight depressions or hollows on the surface
made by mechanical injury to the material such as blows or
pressure caused by hard objects contacting the finished
surface. They are usually bright bottomed and irregular in
shape. (Refer to Table 4 for l i m i t s . )
(h) Fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is rapid oxidation of

surfaces of closely f i t t e d parts. I t is characterized by
rusty appearing surfaces ranging from black (well bonded) to a
f a i r l y bright reddish-brown (often loosely bondea or even free
particles). Fretting corrosion is acceptable on non-
functional surfaces. (See Figure 6.)
(i) Heat discoloration. Heat discoloration of bearing surfaces

ranges from light straw to blue or purple. Purple or blue
discoloration which s t i l l exists after the bearing is cleaned
w i l l be cause for rejection.
(J) Stains. Stains are surface aiscolorations which range from

black to dark reddish-brown in color. Surface areas which are
stained will exhibit an intact, non-pitted, unbroken
appearance. Stains are acceptable on all surfaces.
(k) Varnishing. Varnishing is the breakdown of a lubricant

because of temperature which results in a harmless surface
discoloration which can be recognized by i t s light brown to
black appearance. Varnishing is acceptable on all surfaces.
(1) Galling. Galling is a more severe condition of fretting cor-

rosion where there is a significant transfer of material
between surfaces due to welding and break-away of particles.
I t is caused by excessive sliding between two poorly lubri-
cated surfaces which are forced into contact with each other
R by high pressure. (Refer to Table 4 for l i m i t s . )
(m) Rust. See Corrosion.
(n) Pits. Pits are small, irregular shaped cavities in a surface

from which material has been removed by corrosive action such
R as chemical or electrolytic attack. (Refer to Table 4 for
limits.)
(o) Nicks. See Dents.

(p) Surface slag inclusions. Surface slag inclusions are foreign
materials embedded in the metal. These occasionally appear as
dark spots or lines following bearing operation. (Refer to
Table 4 for limits.)
70-00-00
UP136688
Page 15/16
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ /lied
Table 4. Inspection Criteria for Acceptance of Bearing

Component (Rings and Rolling Elements) Defects*
Stylus Tip Radius to be Used on Functional Surfaces

Rolling Element Dia Rolling Element
Description of Rolling Element Dia o v e r 0.500 in. but Dia over 1.00
Defect up to 0.500 in. less than 1.00 in. in.
True brinelling 0.040in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.
False brinelling 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.
Corrosion and 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.

Rust
Pits 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.
Pits in a 0.250 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.

in. dia circle
Nicks and dents 0.040in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.
Scoring 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.
Scratches and 0.040 in. axial 0.080 in. axial 0.120 in. axial
scuffs-Rollers 0.080 in. 0.120 in. 0.160 in.
ci rcumferenti al ci rcumferenti al ci rcumferenti al
*NOTE: All defects are acceptable unless f e l t with the designated

stylus or are greater in dimension than the maximum size
allowable.
N.A. - Not applicable

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 17/18
Aug 12/91
/lied
Table 4. Inspection C r i t e r i a for Acceptance of Bearing

Component (Rings and Rolling Elements) Defects* (Cont)
Maximum Defect Size Allowable

Rolling
Rol I i ng Element Dia Rolling
Element Dia over 0.500 Element Dia
Description of Non-Functional up to 0.500 i n . but less over 1.00
Defect Surfaces in, than 1.00 i n . in.
True b r i n e l l i n g See Dents 0.015 i n . 0.025 in. 0.035 i n .
False b r i n e l l i n g NoA. N,A. N.A. N.A.
R Corrosion and None acceptable N.A, N.A. N.A.

Rust
Pits 0.060 in. maxi- 0.010 i n . 0.014 in. 0.018 i n .

mum dimension
Pits in a 0.250 Max. number of 5. Max. o f 3 at Max. of 3 at Max. of 3 at

i n . dia c i r c l e 0.030 i n . in 0.010 i n . 0.014 i n. 0.018 i n .
greatest dimension
Nicks and dents 0.125 in. in 0.025 i n . 0.030 in. 0.035 in.
greatest dimension
Scoring Acceptable Max. depth Max. depth Max. depth

of 0.002 i n . of 0.002 i n . of 0.002 i n .
Scratches and See Roller Max. depth Max. depth Max. depth
scuffs-kol I ers end wear of 0.002 in. of 0.002 i n . o f 0.002 i n .

allowable.

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 19/20
Aug 12/91
Signal
~!,ied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Stylus Tip Radius to be Used on Functional Surfaces

Rolling Element Dia Rolling Element
Description of Rolling Element Dia o v e r 0.500 in. but Dia over 1.00
Defect up to 0.500 in. less than 1.00 in. in.
Scratches and 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.

scuffs-Balls Single scratches may not extend more than one half way
R and Outer around the circumference or multiple scratches may not
R Races cross or extend more than one quarter the way around
circumference.
Scratches and 0.040 in. 0.080 in. 0.120 in.

R scuffs-Ri ngs
Surface slag None acceptable None acceptable None acceptable

inclusions
Galling N.A. N.A. N.A.

all owable.

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 21/22
Aug 12/91
/lied

Maximum Defect Size Allowable

Rolling
Rolling Element Dia Rolling
Element Dia over 0.500 ElementDia
Description of Non-Functional up to 0.500 in. but less o v e r 1.00
Defect Surfaces in. than 1.00 in. in.
Scratches N.A. Max. depth Max. depth Max. depth

scuffs-Balls of 0.002 in. of 0.002 in. of 0.002 in.
and Outer
Races
Scratches and Acceptable - 0.500 in. max. - circumferential length on

~R scuffs-Rings raised metal raceway or one half width of raceway or
must be stoned 0.002 in. maximum depth
flush with
surface.
Surface slag 0.125 in. greatest None None None

i ncl usi ons dimension and acceptable acceptable acceptable
does not extend
onto a functional
surface.
Galling Rejectable i f N.A. N.A. N.A.

f e l t with a
0.160 in.
stylus.

all owable.

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 23/24
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
ROLLER O.DI SURFACE
ROLLER CORNER
/
RADIUS TO END f
FACE INTERSECTION
(BOTH ENDS)
F-19A-5111
Bearing Roller Functional Surfac e

UP136688
Figure 2 70-00-00
Page 25
Dec 14/87
~I MAN
I TENANCM
EANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
,., ~ ~',~A~,~',~,~g ~ ' ~ ~t~-" _
3,,
F+19A-224
UP136688
True Brinel ling

Figure 3 70-00-00
Page 26
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
F+I 9A-225
False Brinelling 70-00-00

UP136688
Figure 4
Page 27
Dec 14/87
MAI T ANCE AN AL
TPE331--5 (REPORTN0g 72~01m27)
II
BALL CORROSION
F+19A-223
Bearing Corrosion
UP136688
Figure 5 70-00-00
Page 28
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
IIAI NTEI4ANCE MANUAL
5. B. (7) (q) Scratches and scuffs. Scratches and scuffs are narrow, shal-
low l i n e a r abrasions caused by movement of sharp objects or
p a r t i c l e s across a surface. These penetrate the o r i g i n a l sur-
R face of bearing components. (Refer to Table 4 f o r l i m i t s . )
(r) Scoring. Scoring is deep, m u l t i p l e scratches caused by s l i d -

ing at the r o l l i n g contact surface in the presence of foreign
particles usually found on b a l l , r o l l e r and raceway surfaces.
R (Refer to Table 4 for l i m i t s . )
(s) Skidding. Skidding is excessive slipping between b a l l s or

r o l l e r s and raceways. Skidding is evidenced on r o l l e r bear-
ings by a burnished or frosted ring around the r o l l e r s and/or
raceways, on ball bearings by a speckled wear pattern or by a
burnished or frosted ring on balls and by burnished or i r r e g u -
l a r frosted or smeared areas on the inner race. Skidding is
cause for r e j e c t i o n . (See Figures 7 and 8.)
(t) Spalling. Spalling is exhibited by i r r e g u l a r shaped c a v i t i e s

of flaked-out metal from a raceway or r o l l i n g element surface
with jagged bottoms caused by r o l l i n g contact f a t i g u e . Spall-
ing is cause f o r r e j e c t i o n . (See Figure 9.)
(u) Fractures. See cracks.
(v) Raised metal. Raised metal not s p e c i f i c a l l y covered by

description or i l l u s t r a t i o n is not acceptable.
(w) Burrs. See raised metal.
(x) Roller end wear. Roller end wear may appear as c i r c u l a r

scratches, burnishing, s c u f f i n g , f r o s t i n g , or p i t t i n g . Tile
r o l l e r end inspection c r i t e r i a is based on the DN value of the
bearing where D is the bore (inner diameter of inner race) in
m i l l i m e t e r s and N is the speed of the rotating r i n g . For
example: a 40 m i l l i m e t e r bore bearing with rotating inner
ring speed of 20,000 rpm equals 800,000 DN. I f the DN value
is greater than 700,000, the following guide lines shall be
fol I owed.
I Roller ends which e x h i b i t wear of 0.0001 inch or more mea-

sured from the unworn surface are cause f o r r e j e c t i o n . Ex-
ceptions to t h i s c r i t e r i a are:
a Wear on the center portion of the r o l l e r end caused by
debris between cage and r o l l e r as shown in Figure 10 is
acceptable.
b Roller end patterns which are eccentric i r r e s p e c t i v e of

wear depth are cause f o r r e j e c t i o n . (See Figure 11.)
70-00-00
UP136688
Page 29
Aug 4194
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FRETTI N G
CORROSION
F+I2A-104
UP136688
Fretting Corrosion
Figure 6 70-00-00
Page 30
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
F+47A- 103
Bearing Skidding Damage

UP136688
Figure 7 70-00-00
Page 31
Dec 14/87
~ [ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SKIDDING DAMAGE
SKIDDING DAMAGE
F+47A- 104
UP136688
Roller Skidding
Figure 8 70-00-00
Page 32
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
X=IS2.
Spalling
UP136688
Figure 9 70-00-00
Page 33
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
F+19A-247
UP136688
Roller End Pattern

Figure 10 70-00-00
Page 34
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
ECCENTRIC
/
PITTING
F+19A-227
Eccentric Roller End Pattern - Reject

UP136688
Figure 11 70-00-00
Page 35
Dec 14/87
/lied
5. B. (7) (x) 1 c Excessive p i t t i n g conditions as shown in Figure 12 are

cause for rejection.
d Excessive scuffing patterns as shown in Figure 13 are

cause for r e j e c t i o n .
e Other r o l l e r end patterns are shown in Figures 14 and 15

and are subject to the above c r i t e r i a .
2 For bearings with a DN value of less than 700,000, all

c r i t e r i a are the same as for bearings with DN above 700,000
except that the wear l i m i t is 0.0002 inch.
3 Cage defects which are cause for rejection include the

fol l owing.
a Flaking, peeling and blistering of silverplate (Figure
16).
b Grossly uneven wear of silverplate on p i l o t surface

(Figure 16).
C Cage pocket wear that has worn through silverplate.

Figure 17 shows a marginal case that should be consid-
ered as cause for rejection when specified in inspection
instructions of applicable chapter/section/subject for a
particular bearing.
d Cracked cages as shown in Figure 18 are not acceptable.
e Bent or broken cages are not acceptable.
f Purple to black discoloration is acceptable on bearing

cages unless silverplated surfaces shown evidence of
heavy chemical attack, i . e . , pitting, surface roughness
or exposed base metal.
R (8) Dimensionally check bearings as follows.
R (a) Dimensions shall be measured in accordance with AFBMA(Anti-

R Friction Bearing Mfg. Association, Suite 700, 1101 Connecticut
R Avenue N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036,) Standards, Section 4,
R "Ball and Roller Bearing Standard Gaging Practices".
(b) Dimensions shall meet the requirements in applicable manual

for the engine and bearing in question except when specific
deviations are allowed in this publication.
R (c) Dimensional inspections are included for c r i t i c a l wear areas.

R However, i f visual inspection shows no indication of wear or
R damage, dimensional requirements shall be l e f t to the judge-
R ment of the inspection personnel.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 36
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
EXCESSIVE PITTING WEAR
F+I9A-234
Excessive P i t t i n g Pattern - Reject

UP136688
Figure 12 70-00-00
Page 37
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
EXCESSIVE
SCUFFING
PATTERN
F+19A-248
UP136688
Excessive Scuffing Pattern -Reject

Figure 13 70-00-00
Page 38
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
WIDE BAND ROLLER

CONTACT PATTERN
F+19A-230
Wide Band Roller Contact Pattern

UP136688
Figure 14 70-00-00
Page 39
Dec 14/87
~ I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
POLISHING
I
F+I 9A-246
UP136688
Pol i shi ng
Figure 15 70-00-00
Page 40
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SILVERPLATE FLAKING AND PEELING
UNEVEN
CAGE
WEAR
DOGBONE J
E WEAR t
PATTERN !
F+47A- 110
Unacceptable Cage Defects

UP136688
Figure 16 70-00-00
Page 41
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CROSSBARWEAR
THROUGH
SILVER PLATE
~-.;. ~~ i
• "~ Z', ~.~,'<~
F+19A-226
UP136688
Cage Defects
Figure 17 70-00-00
Page 42
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
< ~ ~ , <
/
CAGE CRACKS
OR LINES IN
SILVER PLATING
" -.T~ :.-i. "v ~"¢-~
.... ~..~.,,~ ~
F+I9A-228
Cage Defects
UP136688
Figure 18 70-00-00
Page 43
Dec 14/87
~ lslied
6. Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection

R NOTE: Inspection personnel who interpret indications shall be
R qualified in accordance with MIL-STD-410 and certified
R to a level II or I l l penetrant inspector. Personnel
R qualified to a level I may perform penetrant operation
R under direct supervision of a level II or I l l
R inspector.
A. Perform Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection as Follows
R (1) Pre-clean part as follows.
R NOTE Titanium parts shall be cleaned in accordance with

R Method No. 10.
R (a) Vapor degrease part using vapor degreaser. Refer to 72-00-00,

R Cleaning/Painting, Method No. 2.
(b) Inspect part to ensure part is free of o i l , carbon, etc. Re-

clean parts i f required.
(2) Apply penetrant by dipping (immersion), brushing, spraying, or

electro-static methods as follows.
(a) When penetrant is applied by dipping, the part shall remain
immersed in the penetrant until part has reached ambient
temperature.
R (b) When penetrant is applied by either brushing or spraying, part

R shall be allowed to cool to ambient temperature prior to pene-
R trant application.
R (3) Part and penetrant temperature shall be 60 to IO0°F (16 to 38°C).
R Dwell time shall be in accordance with Table 4A and as follows.
R (a) For the purpose of these instructions, dwell time shall be

R that period of time when the penetrant covers the part.
R (b) Unless otherwise specified, either an immersion dwell or drain

R dwell can be used.
NOTE: Normal dwell times shall not exceed 2 hours.
R (c) I f penetrant dries on part during the dwell cycle, the part
R shall go through the cleaning cycle prior to reapplication of
R penetrant.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 44
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
R Table 4A. Dwell Times (In Minutes)

R
R Type of Penetrant Emulsifier Developer

R Material Discontinuity (See NOTES 1, 2) (See NOTE 3) (See NOTE4)
R
R Aluminum, All 10 1 10
R Magnesium, Fatigue cracks 20 1 10
R Brass,
R and Bronze
R Steel, All 20 1 10
R Titanium, Fatigue cracks 30 I 10
R and High
R Temp Alloys
R NOTE: 1. The dwell times apply for 60 to IO0°F (16 to 38°C). Above
R IO0°F (38°C), use half the dwell times. Between 35 to 60°F
R (2 to 16°C), double the dwell times. Below 35°F (2°C) and
R above 115°F (46°C) penetrant inspection should not be
R performed.
R 2. Penetrant dwell times are minimum. The maximum penetrant

R dwell time shall not exceed 2 hours.
R 3. Emulsification times are maximum and consist of injection

R spray. Ideal emulsification times are determined
R experimentally.
R 4. Developer dwell times are approximate and may require ad-

R justment depending on indication bleed out. Times speci-
R fied are for dry developer. The maximum dwell time shall
R not exceed 4 hours.
R 6. A. (4) Remove penetrant as follows.
R CAUTION: DO NOT OVERWASHPART.

R (a) Excess penetrant shall be removed by pre-rinsing with water
R for a maximumof 1 minute with 40 psi maximum pressure. Refer
R to Table 4B.
R (b) Apply emulsifier with injector spray nozzle for a maximum of I

R minute. Refer to Table 4B.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 44A
Aug 12/91
~ /lied

R Alternate Method: Apply emulsifier using the immer-
R sion method at 20 ±3 percent
R concentration level.
R 6. A. (4) (c) Final rinse with water for 1 minute maximum with 40 psi maxi-
R mum pressure. Refer to Table 4B.
R Table 4B. Cleaning Times

R
R Time at 2% Time at 5%
R Cycle Concentration Concentration
R
R Pre-rinse 1 minute 30 seconds
R Remover 1 minute 30 seconds
R Post-rinse 1 minute 30 seconds
R NOTE: All times are approximate.

R
R (d) Water temperature shall be 50 to IO0°F (10 to 38°C).
R (e) Part shall be washed in a darkened area and viewed under a

R black l i g h t to ensure proper penetrant removal.
R (5) Dry parts as follows.
R (a) Use low pressure air to remove residue and entrapped water
R from magnesium alloy part, passageways, and dead-ended
R threaded holes.
R NOTE: Excessive drying time shall be avoided.
R (b) Dry part in a recirculating hot air dryer at 160°F (70°C) un-
R t i l visually dry.
R (6) Apply a thin, uniform coating of dry developer, using dry air in a
R cabinet or spray. Refer to Table 4A for dwell time.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 44B
Aug 12/91
lied
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27}
R NOTE: Eye glasses with l i g h t sensitive (photochromatic)

R lenses shall not be worn by inspectors while per-
R forming interpretation.
R Ambient white l i g h t in the inspection booth shall

R not exceed 2 foot candles.
R 6. A. (7) Perform inspection as follows.
R (a) At the completion of developing cycle, allow a 10 minute mini-

R mum dwell time. Do not exceed 4 hours dwell time. Part ex-
R ceeding maximum dwell time shall be reprocessed.
R (b) Allow a minimum of 5 minutes for black l i g h t warm up.
R (c) Allow a minimum of 1 minute for eyes to adapt to darkness.
R (d) Position black l i g h t 15 inches from test surface so a minimum

R intensity of 1000 micro-watts per square centimeter is
R obtained.
R WARNING: 1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE IS TOXIC. USE IN

R WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOIDBREATHING
R FUMES OR LONGCONTACTWITH SKIN, TO PRE-
R VENT DAMAGETO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEPAWAY
R FROM FLAMETO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
R CAUTION: DO NOT USE MAGNESIUM CLEANING SOLUTIONS ON

R COMPONENTS CONTAININGALUMINUM PARTS.
WHEN SWABBING TITANIUM PARTS, USE A NON-

CHLORINATED SOLVENT SOLUTION.
NOTE: The swabbing technique shall be limited to

two times per area.
(e) For further elevated indications, swab with 1,1,1-

Trichloroethane and re-develop.
(f) To ensure accurate evaluation of indications, a 6 to 10 power

magnification may be used.
(g) Use an overlay template with linear and rounded black or

fluorescent marking to judge indication size.
(h) Accept/reject c r i t e r i a shall be per applicable manual section.

UP136688
70-00-00
Page 44C
Aug 12/91
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~:~Signal
R 6. A. (8) After completion of inspection, post-clean parts as necessary to

R remove penetrant and developer material.
R (9) Magnesium alloy part shall be baked and oiled within 4 hours after
R completion of penetrant inspection.
R (10) Unmachined parts with a conversion coating require a visual check

R to ensure no moisture is present and re-oiling of part immediately
R fol l owing penetrant inspection.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 44D
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
7. Magnetic Particle Inspection
NOTE: Inspection personnel shall be qualified and certified

to perform magnetic particle testing.
Inspectors performing magnetic particle testing shall

not wear eyeglasses with l i g h t sensitive (photochromic)
lenses which change color in sunlight.
All magnetic particle inspections shall be performed in
a manner as to ensure satisfactory detection of harmful
discontinuities having axes in any direction. Testing
shall consist of at least two separate examinations of
each area. Second examination shall be with magnetic
lines of force approximately perpendicular, insofar as
possible, to those used during f i r s t examination. A
different method of magnetization may be used for
second inspection.
Nonuniform cross sections, some complex component con-

figurations, thin sections and bearings may require
lower operating amperages. However, amperage require-
ments shall be sufficient to produce desired field
strength without being detrimental to part.
When magnetic current is passed through part or through
a central conductor to produce circular magnetization,
care must be taken to prevent contact of the part with
any grounded component to prevent arcing. Areas of
possible ground contact shall be covered with noncon-
ducting pads and/or coat central conductors, except for
their ends, with an insulating material.
A. Perform Magnetic Particle Inspection
(1) Preclean part by vapor degreasing. Refer to 72-00-00,

Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 2.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 45
Aug 12/91
~
ignal
/lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Circular magnetization, when applied, shall

always precede longitudinal magnetization to
permit more e f f e c t i v e demagnetization a f t e r
the inspection is complete.
7. A. (2) Determine type (circular/longitudinal) and number of shots a part

requires and the amount of amperage to be used as follows.
(a) Circular magnetization (head shots).

CAUTION: USE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SMALLER SEC-
TION OF PART BY OVERHEATING.
NOTE: Use separate magnetizing operations when

section changes are greater than t h i r t y
percent. In such cases, the sequence of
magnetization shall begin with the lowest
current setting (smallest dimension) and
proceed to the highest current setting
(largest dimension).
1 Determine magnetizing current, when applied to part i t s e l f ,
using the outside diameter or cross-section thickness per-
pendicular to the current flow. (Refer to Table 5.)
2 Central conductor current is based on outside diameter
measurements. When the inside diameter of a part is
greater than 1.2 times the diameter of the central conduc-
t o r additional magnetizing shots w i l l be required. With
the conductor against one side of the part (figure 19), the
distance along the circumference e f f e c t i v e l y magnetized is
approximately four times the diameter of the central
conductor. (Refer to Table 6.)
(b) Longitudinal magnetization.
I Determine the magnetizing current by establishing the L/D

ratio (divide length by the largest diameter). (Refer to
Table 7, 7A, 7B.)
2 For those cases when i t is desirable to magnetize the part
by centering i t in the c o i l , use the f o l l o w i n g formula to
determine the required magnetizing current.
900O Where: I = Coil current (amperes)

(+10%) = I L = Length of part (inches)
L/D D : Diameter of part (inches)
R The above formula and formulas, from which data of Tables
R 7A and 7B are derived, are contained in M i l i t a r y Standard
R MI L-STD- 1949.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 46
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
NOTE: A minimum of three shots of magnetizing current,
at least 1/2 second in duration, shall be used.
Suspension vehicles and solvents shall conform to

Federal Specifications VV-K-220 or P-D-680, Type I
or I I .
Successive overlapping shots shall be used when

parts extend more than six inches beyond each end
of the c o i l .
. A. (3) I n s t a l l part in magnetizing u n i t either using a central conductor

or d i r e c t l y to coil pads.
NOTE: The suspension shall be c i r c u l a t e d f o r a minimum

of 15 minutes p r i o r to beginning the inspection
operation.
(4) Apply suspension to part by hose, using the wet continuous method,
unless otherwise specified.
(5) Examine part under u l t r a v i o l e t l i g h t (black l i g h t ) to determine
discontinuities.
(6) Demagnitize part as follows.

(a) Hold part about one foot in f r o n t of the coil and move i t
slowly through the coil to approximately one foot beyond the
end of the u n i t . Rotate parts while passing through.
(b) Test part, using f i e l d i n d i c a t o r , at several locations.
(c) Repeat demagnitization process i f deflection readings exceeds

±3 gauss (±30ersteds) any location on the part.
(7) Clean part to ensure they are free of magnetic particles and apply
l i g h t coat of protective l u b r i c a n t .
UP136688
70-00-00
R Page 47
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R Table 5. Head Shot Current Ranges
R Part Diameter Current (amperes)

R (inches) Minimum Maximum
R 0.150 100 125

R 0.200 100 165
R 0.250 100 200
R 0.300 100 245
R 0.400 125 310
R 0.500 150 400
R 0.600 185 485
R 0.700 215 560
R 0.800 240 650
R 0.900 280 730
R 1.000 300 800
R 1.500 450 1200
R 2.000 600 1600
R 2.500 775 2000
R 3.000 900 2475
R 4.000 1250 3200
R 5.000 1500 4000
R 6.000 1800 4800
R 7.000 2200 4800
R 8.000 2450 4800
R 9.000 2550 4800
R 10.000 3000 4800
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 48
Aug 16/89
4 X DIA D AREA
OF MAGN ETIZATION
I --44A-3448
UP136688
Head Shot, Offset Central Conductor

Figure 19 70-00-00
R Page 48A
Aug 16/89
/.~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~JSignal
R Table 6. Current Ranges, Head Shot with Offset Central Conductor (Bar)
Wall Thickness 0.050 to 0.500 i n . ; Wall Thickness 0.400 to 0.700 i n . ;

Bar Diameter 0.125 to 0.375 in. Bar Diameter 0.500 to 0.870 i n .
R Current Current
R Wal I Bar (amperes) Wal I Bar (amperes)
R Thickness Dia Min Max Thickness Dia Min Max
R 0.050 0.125 100 175 0.400 0.500 390 1050

R 0.050 0.1875 100 230 0.400 0.620 430 1150
R 0.050 0.250 100 280 0.400 0.750 460 1250
R 0.050 0.375 145 380 0.400 0.875 500 1350
R 0.100 0.125 100 260 0.500 0.500 450 1200
R 0.I00 0.1875 115 310 0.500 0.620 490 1300
R 0.100 0.250 135 360 0.500 0.750 520 1400
R 0.i00 0.375 175 460 0.500 0.870 560 1500
R 0.200 0.125 160 420 0.600 0.500 510 1350
R 0.200 0.1875 175 475 0.600 0.620 550 1450
R 0.200 0.250 195 525 0.600 0.750 580 1550
R 0.200 0.375 235 625 0.600 0.870 620 1650
R 0.300 0.1875 240 635 0.700 0.500 570 1525
R 0.300 0.250 260 690 0.700 0.620 610 1575
R 0.300 0.375 295 790 0.700 0.750 650 1725
R 0.400 0,1875 300 785 0.700 0.870 690 1825
R 0.400 0.250 320 830
R 0.400 0.375 355 950
R 0.500 0.375 420 1100
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 48B
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 6. Current Ranges, Head Shot with Offset Central

Conductor (Bar) (Cont)
R Wall Thickness 0.050 to 0.300 i n . ; Wall Thickness 0.050 to 0.300 i n . ;

Bar Diameter 0.500 to 0.870 in. Bar Diameter 1.000 to 2.000 in.
Current Current
Wal I Bar (amperes) Wal I Bar (amperes)
Thickness Dia Min Max Thickness Dia Min Max
0.050 0.500 160 480 0.050 1.000 330 880

0.050 0.620 210 580 0.050 1.200 390 1025
0.050 0.750 255 680 0.050 1.350 430 1150
0.050 0.870 290 780 0.050 1.500 480 1275
0.100 0.500 210 560 0.050 1.870 590 1575
0.100 0.620 250 660 0.050 2.000 630 1675
0.100 0.750 285 760 0.100 1.000 360 960
0.I00 0.870 325 860 0.I00 1.200 420 1125
0.200 0.500 270 720 0.i00 1.350 470 1250
0.200 0.620 310 820 0.i00 1.500 510 1350
0.200 0.750 345 920 0.100 1.870 625 1650
0.200 0.870 385 1025 0.100 2.000 660 1750
0.300 0.500 330 880 0.200 1.000 420 1125
0.300 0.620 370 980 0.200 1.200 480 1275
0.300 0.750 410 1075 0.200 1.350 520 1400
0.300 0.870 440 1090 0.200 1.500 570 1500
0.200 1.870 680 1800
0.200 2.000 720 1925
0.300 1.000 470 1275
0.300 1.200 540 1475
0.300 1.350 580 1550
0.300 1.500 630 1675
0.300 1.870 750 1975
0.300 2.000 780 2075
70-00-00
UP136688
Page 48C
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~'~llied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ~-~Signal
R Table 6. Current Ranges, Head Shop with Offset Central

R Conductor (Bar) (Cont)
R Wall Thickness 0.400 to 0.700 i n . ; Diameter 1.000 to 2.000 in.
R Current Current
R Wal I Bar (amperes) Wal I Bar (amperes)
R Thickness Dia Min Max Thickness Dia Min Max
R 0.400 1.000 540 1450 0.600 1.000 65O 1750

R 0.400 1,200 600 1600 0.600 1.200 720 1800
R 0.400 1,350 650 1725 0.600 1.350 760 2025
R 0.400 1.500 690 1850 0.600 1.500 800 2150
R 0.400 1.870 800 2150 0.600 1.870 920 2450
R 0.400 2.000 840 2250 0.600 2.000 960 2575
R 0.500 1.000 600 1600 0.700 1,000 720 1850
R 0.500 1.200 660 1750 0.700 1.200 820 2200
R 0.500 1.350 700 1775 0.700 1.350 820 2200
R 0.500 1.500 750 2000 0.700 1.500 870 2300
R 0.500 1.870 860 2300 0.700 1.870 980 2600
R 0.500 2,000 900 2400 0.700 2.000 1025 2725
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 48D
Aug 16/89
~_~/lied
HAl NTENANCE MANUAL ignal
Table 7. Coil C u r r e n t , Parts P o s i t i o n e d t o t h e Side o f F i v e - T u r n ,

16-1nch Diameter Coil
R L/D R a t i o C u r r e n t Range L/D Ratio Current Range

R (amperes) (amperes)
R 3.00- 3.20 2700 - 3090 7.11 - 7.40 1140 - 1330

R 3.21 - 3.40 2530 - 2910 7.41 - 7.80 1100 - 1260
R 3.41 - 3.60 2380 - 2750 7.81 - 8.20 1040 - 1200
R 3.61 - 3.80 2250 - 2600 8.21 - 8.60 990 - 1150
R 3.81 - 4.00 2130 - 2300 8.61 - 9.00 950 - 1100
R 4.01 - 4.30 2020 - 2300 9.01 - 9.40 900 - 1050
R 4.31 - 4.60 1880 - 2150 9.41 - 9.90 860 - 1000
R 4.61 - 4.80 1760 - 2060 9.91 - 10.40 820 - 950
R 4.81 - 5.00 1690 - 1980 10.41 - 10.90 780 - 900
R 5.01 - 5.30 1620 - 1860 10.91 - 11.40 750 - 860
R 5.31 - 5.60 1530 - 1760 11.41 - 12.00 710 - 820
R 5.61- 5.90 1450 - 1670 12.01 - 12.60 680 - 780
R 5.91 - 6.20 1370 - 1590 12.61 - 13.20 650 - 750
R 6.21 - 6.50 1310 - 1520 13.21 - 13.80 620 - 710
R 6.51 - 6.80 1250 - 1450 13.81 - 14.50 590 - 680
R 6.81 - 7.10 1190 - 1390 14.51 and up 560 - 660
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 48E/48F
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 7A. C o i l C u r r e n t , P a r t s Centered i n F i v e - T u r n ,

16-1nch Diameter C o i l
R L/D R a t i o Current Range L/D R a t i o C u r r e n t Rang(

R 3.00 - 3.20 4770 - 5530 7.11 - 7.40 1650 - 1920

R 3.21 - 3.40 4350 - 4910 7.41 - 7.80 1570 - 1810
R 3.41 - 3.60 4010 - 4560 7.81 - 8.20 1480 - 1710
R 3.61 - 3.80 3720 - 4250 8.21 - 8.60 1400 - 1620
R 3.81- 4.00 3470 - 3980 8.61 - 9.00 1330 - 1540
R 4.01 - 4.30 3250 - 3630 9.01 - 9.40 1270 - 1470
R 4.31 - 4.60 2970 - 3340 9.41 - 9.90 1210 - 1390
R 4.61 - 4.80 2740 - 3180 9.91 - 10.40 1140 - 1310
R 4.81 - 5.00 2600 - 3020 10.41 - 10.90 1080 - 1250
R 5.01 - 5.30 2470 - 2820 10.91 - 11.40 1030 - 1190
R 5.31 - 5.60 2310 - 2640 11.41 - 12.00 980 - 1130
R 5.61 - 5.90 2160 - 2480 12.01 - 12.60 930 - 1070
R 5.91 - 6.20 2040 - 2350 12.61 - 13.20 880 - 1020
R 6.21 - 6.50 1920 - 2220 13.21 - 13.80 840 - 970
R 6.51 - 6.80 1820 - 2110 13.81 - 14.50 800 - 920
R 6.81 - 7.10 1730 - 2010 14.51 and up 760 - 890
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 49
Aug 16/89
lied
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
R Table 7B. Coil C u r r e n t , F i v e - T u r n , 16 Inch Diameter

R High F i l l F a c t o r C o i l s
R L/D R a t i o C u r r e n t Range L/D R a t i o Current Range

R 3.00 - 3.20 1260 - 1480 7.11 - 7.40 7O0- 820

R 3.21 - 3.40 1210 - 1420 7.41 - 7.80 670 - 780
R 3.41 - 3.60 1170 - 1370 7.81 - 8.20 650 - 750
R 3.61 - 3.80 1130 - 1320 8.21 - 8.60 620 - 72O
R 3.81 - 4.00 1090 - 1280 8.61 - 9.00 600 - 700
R 4.01 - 4.30 1050 - 1220 9.01 - 9.40 580 - 670
R 4.31 - 4.60 1000 - 1160 9.41 - 9.90 560 - 640
R 4.61 - 4.80 960 - 1130 9.91 - 10.40 530 - 620
R 4.81 - 5.00 930 - 1100 10.41 - 10.90 510 - 590
R 5.01- 5.30 900 - 1050 10.91 - 11.40 490 - 570
R 5.31 - 5.60 870 - 1010 11.41 - 12.00 470 - 550
R 5.61 - 5.90 830 - 970 1 2 . 0 1 - 12.60 450 - 520
R 5.91 - 6.20 800 - 930 12.61 - 13.20 440 - 500
R 6.21 - 6.50 770 - 900 1 3 . 2 1 - 13.80 420 - 480
R 6.51 - 6.80 750 - 870 13.81 - 14.50 400 - 460
R 6.81 - 7.10 720 - 840 14.51 and up 390 - 450
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 50
Aug 16/89
~lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
SYMBOLS:
CONTACT POINTS
l> MAGNETIZING CURRENT
MAGNETIC FIELD
CENTRAL CONDUCTOR X = DIAMETER
Y = LENGTH
HEAD SHOT
--m'. : "i C T
X
SHOT I
SHOT 2
-OR- CENTRAL CONDUCTOR SHOT

R
X ~>
SHOT
-_-_ 2- 1
SHOT 2
COIL SHOT
", CC I sH°T''
I- Y CI-44G-1329
Shaft Example
Figure 20 70-00-00
UP136688
Page 51
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A E RO S PAC E GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SYMBOLS:
* • • ,~ • CONTACT POINTS X = DIAMETER
.....'D, MAGNETIZING CURRENT
Y = LENGTH
MAGNETIC FIELD
CENTRAL CONDUCTOR
HEAD SHOT
D
SHOT, L~ b s SHOTS
-OR- CENTRALCONDUCTOR SHOT
R
I>
COIL SHOT
SHOT 4
Lb
L
I- Y
" i
-1
CI-44G-1332
Gearshaft Example
Figure 21 70-00-00
UP136688
Page 52
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SYMBOLS:
W= ~ d¢W,= W,= CONTACT POINTS
MAGNETIZINGCURRENT X = DIAMETER
r MAGNETIC FIELD
Y=LENGTH
FZ////~ CENTRAL CONDUCTOR
HEADSHOT
X ~ , ,
s.Too~,
~ v ! 1 "SHOT3 ~_____~
CENTRALCONDUCTOR SHOT
(NOT APPLICABLEFOR PART GEOMETRY)
COIL SHOT
T SHOT 4
/J
I;' ,I X r
L
1
I-
Y
1 CI-44G-1330
Gearshaft Example
Figure 22 70-00-00
UP136688
Page 53
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2.A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SYMBOLS:
****~ CONTACTPOINTS
~ MAGNETIZINGCURRENT A = DIAMETER (INSIDE)
~41P MAGNET~FIELD X = DIAMETER (OUTSIDE)

CENTRAL CONDUCTOR
Y = LENGTH
HEADSHOT
~k ~k =k
ROTATED 90° A ---

SHOT 2 SHOT 2
SHOT I
CENTRAL CONDUCTOR SHOT
~ SHOT3.4,5. ETC
- -
R ×
COVERAGE4 ~MESCENTRAL
CONDUCTORDIAMETER
COVERAGE
*** HEADSHOT
ROTATED 90° ~ --- K}----

SHOT2 SHOT 2
#..4'
SHOT I
CENTRAL CONDUCTOR SHOT
l
SHOT3" ~ ~ '
O X
1 Cl-44G-1331
Rings Example
Figure 23 70-00-00
UP136688
Page 54
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SYMBOLS:
iw~ w=~w CONTACTS POINTS
--{> MAGNETIZINGCURRENT
MAGNETIC FIELD
F//////~ CENR~,L CONDUCTOR X = D~METER
Y = LENGTH
HEAD SHOT
NOT APPLICABLEFOR PARTGEOMETRY
CENTRAL CONDUCTORSHOT
SHOT I
R 1 I
COIL SHOT
-f
SHOT 2 X
CI-52G-298
Cyl i nder Example

Figure 24 70-00-00
UP136688
Page 55
Aug 4/94
I~l MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
8. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses, and Fittings
NOTE: The following paragraphs contain general instructions for
cleaning, inspecting, and repairing tubes, hoses, and
fittings.
A. Clean Tubes, Hoses and Fittings
(1) Cover openings to prevent entry of d i r t and other foreign material.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTIN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA, AVOID

BREATHING FUMESOR CONTACTWITH SKIN.
(2) Wipe exterior with cloth soaked with solvent (Federal Specification
P-D-680, Type 1).
(3) I f internal passages require cleaning, thoroughly clean exterior
f i r s t , then flush interior of tube or hose in both directions with
solvent (Federal Specifications P-D-680, Type 1).
(4) Dry interior and exterior of hoses or tubes using low pressure,
dry, f i l t e r e d compressed air.
(5) Cover opening immediately after drying.
B. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses and Fittings
Table 8 provides usable limits and maximum repairable limits of tubes,
hoses and f i t t i n g s .
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 56
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Tabl e 8. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses and Fittings
Max.
Inspect Usable Limits Repairable Limits Corrective Action
a. Tubes for:
(1) Splits and None allowed. Not repairable. Replace tube.

cracks.
(2) Nicks,
scratches,
gouges,
wear, and
chafing on:
(a) Non- Any number, Same as usable Remove high metal and
fuel- 0.005 inch l i m i t s , with blend to adjacent
carry- deep, with no high metal. contour, using a fine
ing high metal. abrasive stone.
tubes. Replace tube i f
blending has been
previously done in
same are.
(b) Fuel- Not usable i f Not repairable. Replace tube.
carry- depth of defect
ing can be
tubes. measured.
(3) Dents (see Dented area not Not repairable. Replace tube.
table in over 20% of tube
f i g . 25). OD on straight or
curved section
having a radius
over twice the
tube OD ( f i g . 25
view A). On a
sharply bent
radius, not over
10% of tube OD
may be dented
(fi g . 25,
view B).
(4) Flattened OD not less than Not repairable. Replace tube.
area (see 75% of original
table in OD ( f i g . 25
f i g . 25). view C)
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 57
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
Table 8. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses and Fittings (Cont)
Max.
(5) Nicks and Up to 0.005 inch Not repairable. Replace tube.

scratches deep on bottom,
on packing 1/64 inch deep on
grooves. wall of groove
with no sharp
edges.
(6) Teflon None al I owed. Not repairable. Replace part.
tubes for
erosion
(black
spots).
R (7) Teflon Wear through Not repairable. Replace part.

R coating on coating to
R metal tubes parent material
R for wear. is not acceptable.
b. Flanges for:
(1) Flatness of Flat within 0.005 Up to 25% of Rework to usable

mating inch. Place on original flange l i m i t by lapping
surface. f l a t surface or thickness can be stoning or machin-
against flange removed to meet ing ( i f possible).
and insert 0.005 usable l i m i t .
inch thickness
(feel er) gage.
(2) Cracks. None allowed. Not repairable. Replace tube.
C. Hoses for:
(1) Kinks and Not allowed. Not repairable. Replace hose.
buckling.
(2) Frayed and Noneallowed. Not repairable. Replace hose.

broken
wire braid.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 58
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Max.
d. Hex coupling
nuts for:
(1) Damaged Any number as Not repairable. Replace part.

corners. long as wrench
can be used.
(2) Cracks. None al lowed. Not repairable. Replace part.
(3) Nicks and Any number, with Any number, with Blend high metal.
burrs. no high metal. high metal.
70-00-00
UP136688
R Page 58A/58B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Max,
(4) Damaged One-half of one Same as usable Chase threads

threads. thread (total) l i m i t s , with using a bottom-
with no high metal. ing tap.
high metal.
e. Male f i t t i n g s
for:
(1) Nicks, Any number i f the Same as usable Careful ly blend
dents, defect does not l i m i t s , with high sealing surfaces
scratches, extend in the metal. maintaining the
ridges, and axial direction original contour,
pits on across more than using a fine
sealing 1/2 the sealing abrasive stone.
surfaces. surface. No
high metal
al lowed.
(2) Nicks, Total length Same as usable Blend high metal,

dents, of defect no limits, with high using a die, fine
scratches, more than 1/2 metal. f i l e or
gouges, of one thread equivalent.
burrs, and length with
stripped no high metal.
threads.
(3) Nicks, Any number, 0.005 Sameas usable Blend high metal
dents, inch deep, with l i m i t s , with to adjacent contour
scratches, no high metal, high metal. using a fine
and gouges abrasive stone.
on remain-
ing sur-
faces of
fittings.
(4) Cracks. None allowed. Not repairable. Replace assembly.
f. FemaI e Any number i f Same as usable Blend high metal

f i t t i n g s for the defect does l i m i t s , with to usable.
nicks, dents, not extend in high metal. limits.
scratches, the axial direc-
ridges, and tion across more
pits on seal- than 1/2 the
ing surfaces. sealing surface.
UP136688
70-00-00
R Page 59
Aug 16/89
•I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
DENT ~ ~ ' ~
3/32 , N ~ 3 /~...~
"'" J ;AID/USTLEES~
JBEEA
N
MAX / /'~,~ / TWICETHE MAX l /x,,, ~ O.D. (LESSTHAN
• ,/ i (OVERTwo INCHES) / / "~. TWOINCHES)
I
'~ ~.,,,~ ONE INCHO.D.
~ONEINCH O.D. EXAMPLE:

EXAMPLE: DENTEDAREANOT OVER10°/o
DENTEDAREANOT OVER20% OF ORIGINALO.D.
OF ORIGINALO.D. VIEWB
VIEW A
FLATTENED FLATTENED
AREA AREA
3/4 INCHMIN
(5
ALLOWED
L
I. I INCHO.D.
EXAMPLE:
FLATTENEDAREANOT MORETHAN
25%OF ORIGINALO.D. I -~4G-204
VIEWC
TUBE OD 10% OF OD 20% OF OD 25% OF OD

(INCHES) .(INCHES) (_INCHES) (.INCHES)
114 1/32 3/64 3/16
5/16 1/32 1/16 15/64
3/8 3/64 5/64 9/32
5/8 1/16 1/8 15/32
3/4 5/64 5/32 9/16
ONE AND OVER 3/32 3/16 3/4
Dented and Flattened Tubes, Usable Limits

UP136688
Figure 25 70-00-00
Page 60
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. C. Repair of Tubes
(I) Blend minor defects using fine abrasive stone, fine f i l e , or abra-
sive cloth for blending.
(2) Blend tube around curved surface. The finished blend w i l l be as

close as possible to the original finish of the tube.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 61
Dec 14/87
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-~Signal,
. Cleaning Instructions for Fire Extinguisher Agents
Table 9. Fire Extingisher Agent Cleaning Instructions
Extinguisher Material Chemical Compound Corrective Action
Animal protein Not appl i cable Flush with water or steam

clean to remove residue.
Carbon dioxide C02 No residue, no cleaning

required.
Detergent foam Not applicable Flush with water or steam

clean to remove residue.
WARNING: DO NOT USE ALCOHOL NEAROPEN FLAMEOR ON HOT SURFACES. USE

ONLY WITH ADEQUATEVENTILATION, INHALATION OF VAPORSCAN
CAUSE DROWSINESS. STOREALCOHOL IN APPROVED CONTAINERS.
CAUTION: UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS DRY CHEMICAL AGENT(PKP) AND HALON
1011 CAN COMBINEWITH MOISTURE, WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE
CORROSION. DAMAGETO ENGINE PARTS, ENGINES EXPOSEDTO PKP
R AND HALON 1011 WILL BE CLEANED AS SOONAS POSSIBLE.
ALCOHOL CAN BE VERYCORROSIVEWHENLEFT ON MAGNESIUMPARTS

FOR EXTENDEDLENGTHSOF TIME. MAGNESIUMPARTS SHOULDBE
STEAM CLEANEDAS SOONAS POSSIBLE, AFTERTHE ALCOHOL RINSE,
TO PREVENTCORROSIONDAMAGE.
Dry Chemical Potassium Bicarbonate Use compressed air or

(PKP) with silicone (Methyl vacuum tool, remove as
polysidoxane) to much powder as possible
prevent moisture Remove residue with a
absorpti on mixture of 60% isopropyl
alcohol and 40% isobutyl
alcohol. Steam clean p a r t s .
Hal on 1011 Bromo chloromethane Halon 1011 is not water

CH2BrCI soluble. Remove residue
using a mixture of
60% isopropyl alcohol
and 40% isobutyl alcohol.
Steam clean parts.
Halon 1211 Bromochloro difluro- Halon 1211 has no residue.

methane CF2CIBr No cleaning required.
Hal on 1301 Bromo t r i f l u r o - Halon 1301 has no residue.

methane CF3Br No cleaning required.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 62
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
10. Curvic Couplin9 Handlin9 and Inspectio n

NOTE: Table 10 provides a l i s t of all materials and compounds
required for curvic coupling handling and inspection.
Table 10. Materials and Compounds
Material or Compound Manufacturer
Arkansas polishing stone Norton Co, Coated Abrasive Div, lOth Ave
(White) and 25th St, Watervliet, NY 12189
Soft rubber abrasive Brightboy Abrasives Inc, 351-365 Sixth

(Brightboy No. STTOAL0512) Ave, P.O. Box 7060, Newark, NJ 07107
Solvent (Federal Specification Commercially available

P-D-680, Type I)
A. Perform Visual Check of Curvic Couplings
(1) Always ensure curvic couplings to be mated are clean, free of o i l ,

d i r t or any other foreign matter, and no obvious damage exists.
Brush teeth with suede brush and wash with solvent (Federal Spe-
cification P-D-680, Type I).
(2) Ensure curvic coupling teeth have no nicks, burrs, or scoring. No

repair is permitted on curvic tooth mating faces. Repair damage
to curvic tooth edges shown as dark lines in Figure 26. Compo-
nents with damaged curvic tooth mating faces may be returned to
manufacturer for possible repair.
(a) Removehigh spots of damage by polishing with an Arkansas
polishing stone of suitable size and shape.
(b) Break sharp edges.

(c) Polish teeth using soft rubber abrasive (Brightboy No.
ST70AL0512).
(3) Visually inspect curvic coupling outside diameter for radial rub
damage. Light rubs are acceptable. Heavy rubs sufficient for
smear metal and cause blue discoloration are not acceptable.
UP136688
70-00-00
Page 63
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I0. B. Observe Handling Procedures

(I) Always ensure curvic couplings to be mated are clean, free of o i l ,
d i r t or any other foreign matter and no obvious damage exists.
Brush teeth with suede brush and wash with solvent (Federal Spe-
c i f i c a t i o n P-D-680, Type I ) . Ensure curvic coupling teeth have no
nicks, burrs or scoring. Immediately before mating curvic
couplings, brush curvic coupling teeth with bristled brush, pref-
erably horsehair, with short, s t i f f bristles to ensure cleanli-
ness.
(2) Never mate curvic couplings together except for required mainte-
nance operations. To preclude damage, always cover unmated curvic
coupling with protective cap or cover.
REWORK ALLOWED ONLY ON EDGES SHOWN AS DARK LINES.

1-48A-79!
Curvic Tooth Repair

UP136688
Figure 26 70-00-00
Page 64
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11. Fuel Nozzle Conical Sealing Surface Repair (Size 4 Fitting)
NOTE: Table 11 provides a l i s t of special tools, fixtures and

equipment required for conical sealing surface repair.
Table 11. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment
Item Source/
No. Nomenclature Use Part No.
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed item.
I. Fuel Nozzle Used to hard finish imperfec- 831005-1

Refinishing Kit tion from conical surface of
primary or secondary f i t t i n g
on fuel nozzle.
CAUTION: USINGFORCEWHENREPAIRING NOZZLE CONICAL SEALING SUR-

FACES WILL RESULT IN DAMAGETO FUEL NOZZLE REFINISHING
R KIT COMPONENTSAND FUEL NOZZLE.
A. Repair Fuel Nozzle Conical Sealing Surface
R (i) Select 832008-2 medium g r i t stone from k i t .
R (2) Apply oil from k i t to cone of nozzle.
R NOTE: I f fuel nozzle inlet port is damaged to the extent that

R the center dowel cannot be inserted, fuel nozzle is not
R reparable.
(3) Insert center dowel of stone in center of nozzle f i t t i n g .
(4) Apply moderate pressure while rotating stone to remove defect.
(5) Select 832008-1 fine g r i t stone from k i t and repeat steps (2)
through (4) to attain smooth final finish.
(6) Clean oil and loose g r i t from nozzle surface and k i t components.
12. Other Standard Practices
A. The double-twist method of safety wiring is the most common method

used. The single-wire method may also be used in electrical systems
and in places that are d i f f i c u l t to reach. When securing closely
spaced bolts, the number that can be secured by a 24 inch length of
wire is the maximum number in a series.
B. Standard practices which are considered common throughout industry,

such as riveting, welding, etc, are not included in this publication.
70-00-00
UP136688
Page 65/66
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71 - POWERPLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
SUBJECT SB SUBJECT PAGE
POWER PLANT 71-00-00
FIRESHIELDS 71-30-00
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES CA-DA, GA 71-30-01

Removal/Installation 201
Inspection/Check 208
Approved Repairs 208
UP136688
71-CONTENTS
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

72-01-27
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
POWER
PLANT Tab
Table of
Contents Aug 12/91
Li st of
Effective
Pages Aug 4/94
Record of
Ternpora ry
Revi sions Dec 14/87
71-30-00 1 Dec 14/87

2 B1ank
71-30-01 201 Aug 4/94
202 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87
205 Dec 14/87
206 Dec 14/87
207 Aug 16/89
208 Dec 14/87
209 Aug 16/89
210 Blank
UP136688
71-EF
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
INCORPO-
UP136688
71-T-R-REC
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FIRESHIELDS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The fireshields consists of upper and lower shield half assemblies mounted
around the circumference of the plenum assembly mounting flange. Purpose of the
fireshields is to confine the heat generated in the combustion section to the
rear half of the engine.
UP136688
71-30-00
Page 1/2
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIRESHIELDS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation

requ i red to perform Removal/Instal I ati on.
Material or Compound Hanufacturer
( Fel - Pro C5-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL
60076-4046 or Part No. NPC60301-I from
AlliedSignal Engines, Sales
Administration, P.O. Box 29003,
Phoenix, AZ 85038-9003
A. (Codes CA-DA, GA) Remove Fireshields (See Figures 201, 202)
(1) Removethermocouple harness assembly. Refer to 77-20-03, ~ i n t e -

nance Practices.
(2) Remove turbine oil supply lines. Refer to 79-20-08, Maintenance

Practices.
(3) Remove bleed air lines. Refer to 73-10-01, 73-10-13, and 75-10-01,
Maintenance Practices.
(4) Remove fuel manifold assembly and fuel flow divider. Refer to
73-10-07, Haintenance Practices.
(5) Remove ignition leads. Refer to 74-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(6) Remove shield half assemblies.
71-30-01
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
lied
60 95 70
65 50 ',,,,,
. \_~ .~ ..~ so 8s 2o
,~ ~s ../®~"" \ x.2,,,,, ',,',,...-.'4_ ../<~

55 80 ../" .....,.,,..~I ".'.;,-!~ .:~dl\
/ ..>.~:....~.,; ..d,
/-~~ ..->~........ ~ " I
/ / ~35
~o
5 3O
,~o
'
~o
• ,,o "£ ;- ° J o
E-44G-621
R (Codes CA-CC, GA) Fireshield Installation

UP136688
Figure 201 71-30-01

Page 202
Aug 12/91
l s l i e d
R 1. B. (Codes CA-CC, GA) Install Fireshields (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro CS-A) to

threads of bolts, studs, screws or nuts and to threads
(except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s
located aft of the fireshield unless otherwise
specified.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended

general torque values. Add frictional drag (run down)
torque of self-locking devices to recommended values.
(1) Apply compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to bolts.
(2) Assemble gaskets on lower shield half and secure. Tighten nut
(110) to a torque value of 5 inch-pounds. Install supports and
secure with nuts and bolts. Tighten bolts (25) to a torque value
of 25 inch-pounds.
(3) Assemble gasket onto upper shield half and secure. Tighten nuts
(145) to a torque value of 5 inch-pounds. Install supports and
secure with nuts and bolts. Tighten bolts (25, 50, 75) to a torque
value of 25 inch-pounds.
(4) Install and secure shield halves to compressor aft flange with nuts
and bolts. Tighten bolts (35, 60, 85, 90) to a torque value 60 of
inch-pounds. Install support (5) and tighten bolts (10) to a
torque value of 60 inch-pounds.
KEY TO FIGURE 201
o NUT 80. NUT

10. BOLT 85. BOLT
15. SUPPORT 90. BOLT
20. NUT 95. SUPPORT
25. BOLT 110. NUT
30. NUT 115. WASHER
35. BOLT 120. SCREW
40. SUPPORT 125. GASKET
45. NUT 130. SHIELD
50. BOLT 145. NUT
55. NUT 150. WASHER
60. BOLT 155. SCREW
65. SUPPORT 160. GASKET
70. NUT 165. SHIELD
75. BOLT
UP136688
71-30-01
Page 203
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (5) I n s t a l l i g n i t i o n leads. Refer to 74-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(6) I n s t a l l fuel manifold assembly and fuel flow d i v i d e r . Refer to 73-

10-07, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
(7) I n s t a l l bleed a i r lines. Refer to 73-10-01, 73-10-13, and 75-10-

01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(8) I n s t a l l turbine oil supply l i n e . Refer to 79-20-08, MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES.
(9) I n s t a l l thermocouple harness assembly. Refer to 77-20-03, MAINTEN-

ANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
71-30-01
Page 204
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

UP136688
71-30-01
Page 205
Dec 14/87
,AI,TE,A,OE ,,A,0AL
TPE331- REPO T ,0. ,2-01-2,,
~~ ~.~.--20
~,...,-.-- 25
30
'--5
35
265 - - - .
J
, ~.;~'.-~'" 45
235f "210'~15,~ . 40 --~(, ~ ~~ f ~ ,

255
230.,.....,-~,."~1~ ...:'-.... ,, . ", ', ' ,,"," ,.,,J ,~>Y~-~,/ 105

2257 .......... , • ,,,....~...-
....... , \ ' , ',.. ::':.'~i
,, .. :-.:- ;;~..~;~
• . \ .-.~...~ .~:
". : \ "--"~.~.'i~......... ",I
.f190
1~5 180 185
/
#
85
E-44A-6320
(Code DA) Fireshield Installation

UP136688
Figure 202 71-30-01

Page 206
Dec 14/87
Allied.Signal Aerospace Company

/lied
1. C. (Code DA) Install Fireshield (See Figure 202)
NOTE: Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to

threads of bolts, studs, screws or nuts and to threads
(except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing fittings
speci f i ed.
Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, for recommended

general torque values. Add frictional drag (run down)
(1) Apply compound (Fel-Pro CS-A) to bolts.
R (2) Assemble gaskets onto lower shield half, install screws (130, 140,
R 155, 175) as shown in Figure 203 and secure with washers and nuts.
Tighten screws (130, 140, 155, 175) to a torque value of 7 inch-
pounds. Install support and secure with bolt and nut. Tighten
bolt (90) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(3) Assemble gaskets onto upper shield half and secure with screws,
washers and nuts. Tighten screws (205, 225, 245) to a torque value
of 7 inch-pounds. Install supports and secure with bolts and nuts.
Tighten bolts (70) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(4) Install shield halves on aft flange of compressor housing with

bolts and nuts. Tighten bolts (75, 95) to a torque value of 60
inch-pounds. Install supports (60) to shield halves with bolts and
nuts. Tighten bolts (55) to a torque value of 60 inch-pounds and
bolts (45) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
i KEY TO FIGURE 202
. BOLT 95. BOLT 185. GASKET

15. NUT 100. SUPPORT 190. SHIELDLOWERHALF
20. SCREW 105. BOLT 200. NUT
25. WASHER 110. SUPPORT 205. SCREW
30. GASKET 120. NUT 210. WASHER
35. COVER 125. WASHER 215. GASKET
40. NUT 130. SCREW 220. NUT
45. BOLT 135. NUT 225. SCREW
50. NUT 140. WASHER 230. WASHER
55. BOLT 145. SCREW 235. GASKET
60. SUPPORT 150. NUT 240. NUT
65. NUT 155. SCREW 245. SCREW
70. BOLT 160. WASHER 250. WASHER
75. BOLT 165. GASKET 255. GASKET
80. SUPPORT 170. NUT 260. NUTPLATE
85. NUT 175. SCREW 265. SHIELDUPPERHALF
90. BOLT 180. WASHER
UP136688
71-30-01
Page 207
Aug 16/89
• I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1. C. (5) Install and secure support (110) to aft flange of compressor
housing with bolts and nuts. Tighten bolts (105) to a torque value
of 60 inch-pounds.
(6) Install gasket (30) to cover with screws, washers, and nuts.
Tighten screws to a torque value of 7 inch-pounds. Secure cover
(35) to upper shield half with bolts. Tighten bolts (5) to a
(7) I n s t a l l i g n i t i o n leads. Refer to 74-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(8) Install fuel manifold assembly and fuel flow divider. Refer to 73-
10-07, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(9) Install bleed a i r lines. Refer to 73-10-01, 73-10-13, and 75-10-

(1o) Install turbine oil supply line. Refer to 79-20-08, MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES.
(11) I n s t a l l thermocouple harness assembly. Refer to 77-20-03, MAINTEN-

ANCE PRACTICES.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Fireshield
(1) Inspect shaped section for deterioration and other damage. Repl ace
damaged shaped sections.
(2) Inspect shield half assemblies for cracks and other damage. Refer
to Approved Repairs.
3. Approved Repairs
Repair damaged shield half assemblies in accordance with standard shop

practices.
UP136688
71-30-01
Page 208
Dec 14/87
/lied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL ignal
17 14
13
16
INSTALL SCREWS IN '
12 REVERSED IRECTION
AT THESE LOCATIONS
15
11
14 I0 jj. /
/
/
/ 4
,f /
I" 1 5
/
12 6
11
10
D9
INSTALL SCREWS IN
REVERSED IRECTION
AT THESE LOCATIONS
INSTALL SCREWSWITH SCREW HEADS THIS SIDE

EXCEPT AT SCREW HOLES 6 AND 7.
INSTALL SCREWSWITH SCREW HEADS THIS SIDE

EXCEPT AT SCREW HOLES 7, 8 AND 13.
SECTION D - D F-44G-830 "

UP136688
Lower Shield Half (Screw Orientation)

Figure 203 71-30-01
Page 209/210
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
CHAPTER 72 - ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
ENGINE 72-00-00
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 1
TROUBLE SHOOTING 101
SERVICING 301
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 401
ADJUSTMENT/TEST 501
INSPECTION/CHECK 601
CLEANING/PAINTING 701
ENGINE COMPONENTS 72-O0-XX
REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION 72-10-00
COMPRESSOR SECTION 72-30-00
COMBUSTION SECTION 72-40-00
TURBINE SECTION 72-50-00

UP136688
72-CONTENTS
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

72-01-27
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
ENGINE Tab 9 Aug 16/89

10 Blank
Table of 11 F/O Dec 14/87
Contents Aug 12/91 12 Blank
13 F/O Dec 14/87
List of 1 Aug 4/94 14 Blank
Effective 2 Aug 4/94 15 F/O Dec 14/87
Pages 3 Aug 4/94 16 Blank
4 Aug 4/94 16A Aug 12/91
5 Aug 4/94 16B Blank
6 Aug 4/94 16C Aug 12/91
7 Aug 4/94 16D Blank
8 Aug 4/94 16E Aug 12/91
9 Aug 4/94 16F Blank
10 Aug 4/94 17 Aug 12/91
11 Aug 4/94 18 Aug 12/91
12 Aug 4/94 19 Aug 12/91
13 Aug 4/94 20 Aug 16/89
14 Aug 4/94 21 Aug 12/91
15 Aug 4/94 22 Dec 14/87
16 Aug 4/94 23 Dec 14/87
24 Dec 14/87
Record of 1 Aug 4/94 25 Aug 16/89
Temporary 2 Aug 4/94 26 Aug 12/91
Revisions 3 Aug 4/94 27 Aug 16/89
4 Aug 4/94 28 Blank
5 Aug 4/94 29 Aug 12/91
31 F/O Dec 14/87
DESCRIPTION 32 Blank
AND 33 Aug 16/89
OPERATION Tab 34 Dec 14/87
35 Aug 12/91
Description 36 Blank
And TROUBLE
Operation SHOOTING Tab
72-Contents Aug 12/91
Trouble
72-00-00 1 Aug 1 6 / 8 9 Shooting
2 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 72-Contents - Dec 14/87
3 Dec 14/87 101 Dec 14/87
4 Dec 14/87 102 Dec 14/87
5 Dec 14/87 103 Dec 14/87
6 Dec 14/87 104 Dec 14/87
7 F/O Aug 12/91 105 Aug 16/89
8 Blank 106 Dec 14/87
72-EFI
UP136688
Page l
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
107 Dec 14/87 156 Dec 14/87

108 Dec 14/87 157 Dec 14/87
109 Dec 14/87 158 Dec 14/87
110 Dec 14/87 159 Dec 14/87
111 Dec 14/87 160 Dec 14/87
112 Dec 14/87 161 Dec 14/87
113 Dec 14/87 162 Dec 14/87
114 Dec 14/87 163 Dec 14/87
115 Dec 14/87 164 Dec 14/87
116 Dec 14/87 165 Dec 14/87
117 Dec 14/87 166 Dec 14/87
118 Dec 14/87 167 Dec 14/87
119 Dec 14/87 168 Dec 14/87
120 Dec 14/87 169 Dec 14/87
121 Dec 14/87 170 Dec 14/87
122 Aug 12/91 171 Dec 14/87
123 Dec 14/87 172 Dec 14/87
124 Dec 14/87 173 Dec 14/87
125 Dec 14/87 174 Dec 14/87
126 Dec 14/87 175 Dec 14/87
127 Aug 16/89 176 Dec 14/87
128 Dec 14/87 177 Aug 12/91
129 Dec 14/87 178 Dec 14/87
130 Dec 14/87 179 Dec 14/87
131 Dec 14/87 180 Dec 14/87
132 Aug 12/91 181 Aug 12/91
133 Aug 12/91 182 Dec 14/87
134 Dec 14/87 183 Dec 14/87
135 Dec 14/87 184 Dec 14/87
136 Aug 12/91 185 Dec 14/87
137 Aug 12/91 186 Aug 16/89
138 Dec 14/87 187 Aug 12/91
139 Dec 14/87 188 Au9 16/89
140 Dec 14/87 189 Aug 12/91
141 Dec 14/87 190 Dec 14/87
142 Dec 14/87 191 Dec 14/87
143 Dec 14/87 192 Dec 14/87
144 Aug 12/91 193 Dec 14/87
145 Aug 12/91 194 Dec 14/87
146 Aug 12/91 195 Dec 14/87
147 Dec 14/87 196 Dec 14/87
148 Aug 12/91 197 Aug 12/91
149 Dec 14/87 198 Aug 12/91
15U Dec 14/87 198.1 Aug 12/91
151 Dec 14/87 198.2 Blank
152 Dec 14/87 198.3 Aug 12/91
153 Dec 14/87 198.4 Aug 12/91
154 Dec 14/87 198.5 Dec 14/87
155 Dec 14/87 198.6 Dec 14/87
UP136688
72-EFF
Page 2
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
198.7 Dec 14/87 304 Aug 4/94

198.8 Aug 16/89 304A Aug 4/94
198.9 Aug 16/89 304B Blank
198.10 Aug 12/91 305 Aug 4/94
198.11 Aug 12/91 306 Aug 4/94
198.12 Dec 14/87 307 Aug 4/94
198.13 Dec 14/87 308 Aug 12/91
198.14 Dec 14/87 309 Aug 12/91
198.15 Dec 14/87 310 Aug 12/91
198.16 Dec 14/87 311 Aug 12/91
198.17 Dec 14/87 312 Aug 12/91
198.18 Dec 14/87 313 Aug 12/91
198.19 Dec 14/87 314 Aug 12/91
198.20 Dec 14/87 RF340VAL/
198.21 Dec 14/87 I NSTALLATION Tab
198.22 Dec 14/87
198.23 Dec 14/87 Removal/
198.24 Dec 14/87 Instal lation
198.25 Dec 14/87 72-Contents m
Dec 14/87
198.26 Dec 14/87 401 Aug 12/91
198.27 Dec 14/87 4O2 Aug 12/91
198.28 Dec 14/87 403 Aug 12/91
198.29 Dec 14/87 4O4 Aug 16/89
198.30 Dec 14/87 4O5 Au9 16/89
198.31 Dec 14/87 406 Aug 12/91
198.32 Dec 14/87 4O7 Aug 12/91
198.33 Dec 14/87 4O8 Aug 16/89
198.34 Dec 14/87 409 Aug 16/89
198.34A Aug 4/94 410 Dec 14/87
198.34B Blank ADJUSTMENT/
198.35 Dec 14/87 TEST Tab
198.36 Dec 14/87
198.37 Dec 14/87 Adjustment/
198.38 Dec 14/87 Test
198.39 Dec 14/87 72-Contents 1 AuB 12/91
198.40 Dec 14/87 2 Aug 4/94
198.41 Aug 12/91 3 Aug 4/94
198.42 Dec 14/87 4 Blank
198.43 Dec 14/87 501 Aug 12/91
198.44 Dec 14/87 502 Aug 12/91
SERVICING Tab 503 Aug 4/94
504 Aug 4/94
Servicing 505 Aug 4/94
72-Contents Aug 12/91 506 Aug 4/94
301 Aug 4/94 507 Aug 4/94
302 Aug 4/94 508 Aug 4/94
302A Aug 4/94 509 Aug 4/94
302B Blank 510 Aug 12/91
303 Aug 4/94 511 Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 3
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
512 Aug 12/91 553 Aug 4/94

513 Aug 12/91 554 Aug 4/94
514 Aug 12/91 555 Aug 4/94
515 Aug 4/94 556 Aug 4/94
516 Aug 12/91 557 Aug 4/94
517 Aug 12/91 558 Dec 14/87
518 Aug 4/94 559 Aug 12/91
519 Aug 12/91 560 Blank
520 Aug 12/91 561 F/O Dec 14/87
521 Aug 12/91 562 Blank
522 Aug 16/89 563 Aug 16/89
523 Aug 16/89 564 Aug 16/89
524 Dec 14/87 565 Aug 12/91
525 Aug 12/91 566 Dec 14/87
526 Dec 14/87 567 Dec 14/87
527 Dec 14/87 568 Dec 14/87
528 Aug 12/91 569 Dec 14/87
529 Aug 12/91 570 Dec 14/87
53O Aug 4/94 571 Dec 14/87
531 Dec 14/87 572 Dec 14/87
532 Aug 12/91 573 Aug 4/94
532A Aug 4/94 574 Aug 12/91
532B Aug 4/94 575 Aug 12/91
532C Aug 4/94 576 Aug 4/94
532D Blank 577 Aug 12/91
533 Aug 4/94 578 Dec 14/87
534 Aug 4/94 579 Aug 12/91
535 Aug 12/91 580 Aug 12/91
536 Aug 12/91 581 Dec 14/87
537 Aug 16/89 582 Aug 12/91
538 Blank 583 Aug 12/91
539 Aug 4/94 584 Aug 4/94
54O Aug 16/89 585 Aug 12/91
541 Aug 16/89 586 Aug 12/91
542 Aug 16/89 587 Aug 12/91
543 Aug 16/89 588 Auy 4/94
544 Aug 12/91 589 Aug 4/94
545 Aug 4/94 590 Aug 12/91
546 Aug 12/91 591 Aug 12/91
547 Aug 12/91 592 Aug 12/91
548 Blank 593 Aug 4/94
549 Aug 12/91 594 Aug 12/91
55O Aug 4/94 595 Aug 12/91
550A Aug 4/94 596 Aug 12/91
550B Aug 4/94 597 Aug 12/91
550C Aug 4/94 598 Dec 14/87
550D Aug 4/94 598.1 Aug 4/94
551 Aug 4/94 598.2 Aug 4/94
552 Aug 4/94 598.3 Dec 14/87
72-EFF
UP136688
Paye 4
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
598.4 Aug 4/94 598.51 Aug 4/94
598.5 Aug 4/94 598.52 Aug 4/94
598.6 Aug 4/94 598.53 Aug 4/94
598.7 Aug 4/94 598.54 Aug 4/94
598.8 Aug 12/91 598.55 Aug 4/94
598.9 Aug 4/94 598.56 Aug 4/94
598.10 Aug 16/89 598.57 Aug 4/94
598.11 Aug 4/94 598.58 Aug 4/94
598,12 Aug 4/94 598.59 Aug 4/94
598.12A Aug 12/91 598.60 Aug 4/94
598.12B Aug 12/91 598.61 Aug 4/94
598.13 Aug 16/89 598.62 Aug 4/94
598.14 Aug 16/89 598.63 Aug 4/94
598.15 Aug 16/89 598.64 Aug 4/94
598.16 Aug 16/89 598.65 Aug 4/94
598.17 Aug 16/89 598.66 Aug 4/94
598.18 Aug 4/94 598.67 Aug 4/94
598.19 Aug 16/89 598.68 Aug 4/94
598.20 Aug 16/89 598.69 Aug 4/94
598.21 Aug 16/89 598.70 Aug 4/94
598.22 Aug 16/89 598.71 Aug 4/94
598.23 Aug 16/89 598.72 Aug 4/94
598.24 Aug 12/91 598.73 Aug 4/94
598.25 Aug 16/89 598.74 Aug 4/94
598.26 Aug 4/94 598.75 Aug 4/94
598.27 Aug 4/94 598.76 Aug 4/94
598.28 Aug 4/94 598.77 Aug 4/94
598.29 Aug 4/94 598.78 Aug 4/94
598.30 Aug 4/94 598.79 thru
598,31 Aug 4/94 598.132 Deleted
598.32 Aug 4/94 INSPECTION/
598.33 Aug 4/94 CHECK Tab
598.34 Aug 4/94
598.35 Aug 4/94 Inspection/
598.36 Aug 4/94 Check
598.37 Aug 4/94 72-Contents 1 Aug 4/94
598.38 Aug 4/94 2 Aug 4/94
598.39 Aug 4/94 601 Aug 4/94
598.40 Aug 4/94 602 Aug 4/94
598.41 Aug 4/94 602A Aug 4/94
598.42 Aug 4/94 602B Blank
598.43 Aug 4/94 603 Aug 4/94
598.44 Aug 4/94 604 Aug 4/94
598.45 Aug 4/94 604A Aug 4/94
598.46 Aug 4/94 604B Blank
598.47 Aug 4/94 605 Aug 4/94
598.48 Aug 4/94 606 Aug 4/94
598.49 Aug 4/94 607 Aug 4/94
598.50 Aug 4/94 608 Aug 4/94
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 5
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
609 Aug 4/94 658 Aug 4/94

610 Aug 4/94 659 Aug 4/94
611 Aug 12/91 660 Aug 4/94
612 Aug 16/89 661 Aug 4/94
613 Aug 16/89 662 Aug 4/94
614 Aug 4/94 663 Aug 4/94
615 Aug 4/94 664 Aug 4/94
616 Aug 4/94 665 Aug 4/94
617 thru 666 Aug 4/94
624 Omitted 667 Aug 4/94
625 Aug 4/94 668 Aug 4/94
626 Bl ank 669 Aug 4/94
627 Dec 14/87 670 Aug 4/94
628 Aug 12/91 671 Aug 4/94
629 Aug 12/91 672 Aug 4/94
630 Aug 16/89 673 Aug 4/94
631 Dec 14/87 674 Aug 4/94
632 Dec 14/87 675 Aug 4/94
633 Aug 4/94 676 Aug 4/94
634 Dec 14/87 677 Aug 4/94
634A Aug 12/91 678 Aug 4/94
634B Aug 12/91 679 Aug 4/94
634C Aug 12/91 680 Aug 4/94
634D Blank 681 Aug 4/94
635 Aug 12/91 682 Aug 4/94
636 Dec 14/87 683 Aug 4/94
637 Aug 4/94 684 Aug 4/94
638 Dec 14/87 685 Aug 4/94
639 Aug 4/94 686 Aug 4/94
640 Aug 4/94 687 Aug 4/94
641 Aug 4/94 688 Aug 4/94
642 Aug 4/94 689 Aug 4/94
643 Aug 4/94 690 Aug 4/94
644 Aug 4/94 691 Aug 4/94
645 Aug 4/94 692 Aug 4/94
646 Aug 4/94 693 Aug 4/94
647 Aug 4/94 694 Aug 4/94
648 Aug 4/94 695 Aug 4/94
649 Aug 4/94 696 Aug 4/94
650 Aug 4/94 Addendum 1 Dec 14/87
650A Deleted 2 Aug 4/94
650B Del eted 3 Aug 4/94
651 Aug 4/94 4 Aug 4/94
652 Aug 4/94 5 Aug 4/94
653 Aug 4/94 6 Aug 4/94
654 Aug 4/94 7 Aug 4/94
655 Aug 4/94 8 Bl ank
656 Aug 4/94 CLEANING/
657 Aug 4/94 PAINTING - Tab
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 6
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
205 Aug 16/89

Cleaning/ 206 Aug 12/91
Painting 207 Dec 14/87
72-Contents Aug 4194 208 Aug 12/91
701 Aug 4/94 209 Dec 14/87
702 Aug 12/91 210 Aug 12/91
703 Aug 16/89 211 Aug 12/91
7O4 Aug 12/91 212 Aug 12/91
705 Aug 4/94 213 Aug 12/91
7O6 Aug 4/94 214 Blank
706A Aug 4/94 72-10-00
706B Blank REDUCTION
707 Aug 12/91 GEAR AND
7O8 Dec 14/87 SHAFT
709 Aug 4/94 SECTION Tab
710 Aug 4/94
711 Aug 4/94 Reduction
712 Au9 4/94 Gear and
712A Aug 4/94 Shaft
712B Blank Section
713 Aug 4/94 72-Contents 1 Aug 12/91
714 Aug 12/91 2 Aug 12/91
714A Aug 12/91 3 Aug 4/94
714B Blank 4 Aug 12/91
715 Dec 14/87 72-10-00 1 Dec 14/87
716 Aug 16/89 2 Dec 14/87
717 Dec 14/87 3 Dec 14/87
718 Aug 12/91 4 Bl ank
719 Aug 12/91 201 Dec 14/87
720 Blank 202 Blank
72-O0-XX 72-10-01 201 Aug 16/89
ENGINE 202 Aug 12/91
COMPONENTS Tab 203 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87
Engine 2O5 Aug 12/91
Components 206 Dec 14/87
72-Contents Aug 12191 72-10-02 201 Aug 16/89
72-00-01 1 Aug 12/91 202 Dec 14/87
201 Aug 12/91 204 Aug 16/89
202 Aug 12/91 205 Aug 16/89
203 Dec 14/87 206 Aug 16/89
204 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 16/89
72-00-05 1 Aug 12/91 208 Aug 16/89
2 Blank 209 Aug 16/89
201 Aug 4/94 210 Aug 16/89
202 Aug 4/94 72-10-03 201 Aug 16/89
203 Dec 14/87 202 Aug 16/89
204 Aug 12/91 203 Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 7
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
iliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
204 Aug 16/89 209 Dec 14/87

2O5 Au9 16/89 210 Dec 14/87
206 Aug 16/89 211 Dec 14/87
207 Aug 4/94 212 Aug 12/91
208 Aug 4/94 213 Dec 14/87
209 Aug 12/91 214 Dec 14/87
210 Aug 16/89 215 Dec 14/87
211 Aug 12/91 216 Dec 14/87
212 Aug 4/94 217 Dec 14/87
213 Aug 4/94 218 Dec 14/87
214 Aug 4/94 219 Dec 14/87
72-10-04 201 Aug 16/89 220 Dec 14/87
202 Dec 14/87 221 Aug 16/89
203 Dec 14/87 222 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 223 Aug 4/94
72-10-05 201 Aug 12/91 224 Dec 14/87
202 Aug 12/91 225 Aug 16/89
203 Aug 12/91 226 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 227 Dec 14/87
205 Dec 14/87 228 Aug 16/89
206 Blank 229 Aug 12/91
72-10-06 201 Aug 16/89 230 Dec 14/87
202 Dec 14/87 230A Aug 4/94
203 Aug 12/91 230B Blank
204 Aug 12/91 231 Aug 12/91
205 Aug 12/91 232 Dec 14/87
206 Blank 72-10-10 201 Aug 12/91
72-10-07 201 Aug 16/89 202 Dec 14/87
202 Dec 14/87 203 Aug 12/91
203 Dec 14/87 204 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87 205 Aug 12/91
72-10-08 201 Aug 12/91 206 Aug 12/91
202 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 12/91 208 Blank
204 Aug 1 2 / 9 1 72-10-11 201 Aug 12/91
205 Dec 14/87 202 Aug 12/91
206 Aug 12/91 203 Aug 12/91
207 Dec 14/87 204 Aug 12/91
208 Aug 16/89 205 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 16/89 206 B/ank
210 Blank 72-10-12 201 Aug 4/94
72-10-09 201 Dec 14/87 202 Aug 12/91
202 Aug 12/91 203 Dec 14/87
203 Aug 16/89 204 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 205 Dec 14/87
205 Aug 16/89 206 Aug 12/91
206 Dec 14/87 207 Aug 12/91
207 Dec 14/87 208 Aug 16/89
208 Dec 14/87 209 Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 8
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA( 1 E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
210 Aug 12/91 243 Aug 16/89

72-10-13 201 Dec 14/87 244 Aug 16/89
202 Aug 16/89 245 Aug 16/89
203 Aug 4/94 246 Aug 16/89
204 Aug 12/91 247 Aug 16/89
2O5 Aug 12/91 248 Aug 12/91
206 Aug 12/91 249 Aug 16/89
207 Dec 14/87 250 Aug 16/89
208 Aug 16/89 251 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91 252 Aug 12/91
210 Dec 14/87 252A Aug 12/91
211 Dec 14/87 252B Aug 12/91
212 Aug 16/89 253 Aug 12/91
213 Dec 14/87 254 Aug 12/91
214 Aug 16/89 255 Aug 12/91
215 Aug 12/91 256 Blank
216 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 72-10-14 201 Aug 12/91
217 Dec 14/87 202 Dec 14/87
218 Dec 14/87 203 Aug 12/91
219 Aug 12/91 204 Dec 14/87
220 Aug 4/94 205 Aug 12/91
221 Aug 12/91 206 Aug 12/91
222 Aug 4/94 2O7 Aug 12/91
222A Aug 12/91 208 Aug 16/89
222B Blank 209 Aug 16/89
223 Aug 16/89 210 Dec 14/87
224 Aug 1 6 / 8 9 72-10-15 201 Aug 4/94
224A Aug 4/94 202 Aug 16/89
224B Blank 202A Aug 16/89
225 Aug 4/94 202B Blank
226 Aug 16/89 203 Aug 4/94
227 Aug 12/91 204 Aug 4/94
228 Aug 16/89 205 Aug 4/94
229 Aug 16/89 206 Aug 4/94
230 Aug 16/89 207 Aug 4/94
231 Aug 16/89 208 Aug 4/94
232 Aug 12/91 209 Aug 4/94
233 Aug 12/91 210 Aug 4/94
234 Aug 12/91 211 Aug 4/94
234A Aug 12/91 212 Aug 4/94
234B Aug 12/91 213 Aug 16/89
235 Aug 16/89 214 Aug 4/94
236 Aug 16/89 215 Aug 4/94
237 Aug 4/94 216 Dec 14/87
238 Aug 4/94 217 Aug 16/89
239 Aug 16/89 218 Aug 4/94
240 Aug 16/89 219 Aug 4/94
241 Aug 16/89 220 Blank
242 Aug 4/94 72-10-16 201 Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 9
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
202 Aug 12/91 247 Dec 14/87

203 Aug 12/91 248 Dec 14/87
204 Aug 4/94 249 Dec 14/87
205 Aug 12/91 250 Dec 14/87
206 Aug 12/91 251 Dec 14/87
206A Aug 12/91 252 Dec 14/87
i 206B Aug 4/94 253 Dec 14/B7
207 Aug 4/94 254 Aug 16/89
208 Aug 4/94 255 Aug 12/91
208A Aug 4/94 256 Aug 12/91
208B Blank 257 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 4/94 258 Aug 12/91
210 Dec 14/87 259 Aug 12/91
211 Dec 14/87 260 Blank
212 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 72-10-17 201 Aug 4/94
213 Dec 14/87 202 Aug 4/94
214 Dec 14/87 203 Aug 4/94
215 Aug 4/94 204 Aug 4/94
216 Blank 205 Aug 4/94
217 Dec 14/87 206 Aug 4/94
218 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 4/94
219 Aug 16/89 208 Aug 4/94
220 Aug 16/89 209 Aug 4/94
221 Dec 14/87 210 Aug 4/94
222 Aug 16/89 211 Aug 4/94
223 Aug 16/89 212 Blank
224 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 72-10-18 201 Aug 4/94
225 Dec 14/87 202 Dec 14/87
226 Dec 14/87 203 Aug 12/91
227 Aug 12/91 204 Dec 14/87
228 Aug 16/89 205 Aug 4/94
229 Dec 14/87 206 Aug 4/94
230 Dec 14/87 207 Aug 16/89
231 Aug 16/89 208 Aug 4/94
232 Aug 16/89 208A Aug 4/94
233 Aug 16/89 208B Aug 4/94
234 Dec 14/87 209 Aug 4/94
235 Dec 14/87 210 Aug 4/94
236 Dec 14/87 210A Deleted
237 Aug 12/91 210B Deleted
238 Dec 14/87 211 Aug 16/89
239 Aug 12/91 212 Dec 14/87
240 Aug 1 2 / 9 1 72-10-19 201 Aug 4/94
241 Dec 14/87 202 Dec 14/87
242 Aug 12/91 203 Aug 12/91
243 Aug 12/91 204 Dec 14/87
244 Dec 14/87 205 Aug 4/94
245 Dec 14/87 206 Aug 4/94
246 Dec 14/87 206A Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 10
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (1 E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
206B Blank 239 Aug 16/89

207 Aug 4/94 240 Dec 14/87
208 Dec 14/87 241 Aug 16/89
209 Dec 14/87 242 Aug 16/89
210 Aug 12/91 243 Aug 12/91
211 Dec 14/87 244 Aug 16/89
212 Aug 12/91 245 Aug 16/89
213 Aug 12/91 246 Aug 12/91
214 Aug 12/91 246A Aug 12/91
72-10-20 201 Aug 16/89 246B Aug 4/94
202 Aug 4/94 247 Aug 4/94
203 Aug 4/94 248 Aug 4/94
204 Aug 12/91 249 Aug 16/89
205 Aug 4/94 250 Aug 12/91
206 Aug 4/94 251 Aug 12/91
207 Aug 4/94 252 Aug 16/89
208 Aug 4/94 253 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 4/94 254 Aug 4/94
210 Aug 12/91 255 Aug 4/94
211 Aug 12/91 256 Aug 4/94
212 Dec 14/87 72-30-00
213 Aug 16/89 COMPRESSOR
214 Dec 14/87 SECTION Tab
215 Aug 12/91
216 Aug 12/91 Compressor
217 Dec 14/87 Section
218 Aug 12/91 72-Contents Dec 14/87
219 Aug 12/91 72-30-00 1 Dec 14/87
220 Aug 12/91 2 Blank
221 Aug 12/91 72-30-01 201 Aug 4/94
222 Aug 12/91 202 Aug 4/94
223 Aug 12/91 203 Aug 4/94
224 Aug 12/91 204 Blank
225 Aug 4/94 72-30-03 201 Aug 4/94
226 Dec 14/87 202 Aug 4/94
227 Dec 14/87 203 Dec 14/87
228 Aug 12/91 204 Aug 12/91
229 Dec 14/87 205 Dec 14/87
230 Aug 16/89 206 Dec 14/87
231 Dec 14/87 207 Aug 4/94
232 Aug 4/94 208 Aug 4/94
233 Dec 14/87 209 Aug 4/94
234 Aug 4/94 210 Aug 4/94
235 Aug 12/91 211 Aug 4/94
236 Aug 4/94 212 Dec 14/87
236A Aug 12/91 213 Aug 4/94
236B Blank 214 Aug 4/94
237 Aug 12/91 215 Dec 14/87
238 Aug 12/91 216 Dec 14/87
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 11
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
217 Aug 12/91 240 Dec 14/87

218 Dec 14/87 241 Dec 14/87
219 Dec 14/87 242 Aug 12/91
220 Aug 12/91 243 Aug 12/91
221 Aug 4/94 244 Blank
222 Aug 4/94 245 Aug 12/91
223 Aug 4/94 246 Blank
224 Aug 4/94 247 Dec 14/87
225 Aug 4/94 248 Dec 14/87
226 Aug 4/94 249 Aug 16/89
72-30-04 201 Aug 4/94 250 Dec 14/87
202 Aug 12/91 251 Dec 14/87
203 Dec 14/87 252 Aug 16/89
204 Aug 4/94 253 Aug 16/89
205 Aug 4/94 254 Aug 16/89
206 Aug 12/91 255 Aug 16/89
207 Aug 16/89 256 Aug 16/89
208 Aug 4/9~ 257 Aug 16/89
209 Aug 12/91 258 Dec 14/87
210 Aug 12/91 259 Aug 16/89
211 Aug 12/91 260 Dec 14/87
212 Aug 12/91 261 Dec 14/87
213 Aug 12/91 262 Dec 14/87
214 Aug 12/91 263 Dec 14/87
215 Aug 12/91 264 Dec 14/87
216 Aug 12/91 265 Aug 4/94
217 Aug 12/91 266 Dec 14/87
218 Aug 12/91 267 Dec 14/87
219 Aug 12/91 268 Dec 14/87
220 Dec 14/87 269 Aug 16/89
221 Dec 14/87 270 Dec 14/87
222 Dec 14/87 271 Dec 14/87
223 Dec 14/87 272 Dec 14/87
224 Dec 14/87 273 Aug 16/89
225 Aug 12/91 274 Dec 14/87
226 Dec 14/87 275 Dec 14/87
227 Dec 14/87 276 Dec 14/87
228 Dec 14/87 277 Aug 16/89
229 Dec 14/87 278 Dec 14/87
230 Dec 14/87 279 Aug 16/89
231 Dec 14/87 280 Dec 14/87
232 Dec 14/87 281 Aug 16/89
233 Dec 14/87 282 Aug 12/91
234 Dec 14/87 283 Aug 12/91
235 Dec 14/87 284 Aug 12/91
236 Aug 16/89 285 Aug 16/89
237 Dec 14/87 286 Aug 12/91
238 Aug 12/91 287 Aug 16/89
239 Aug 12/91 288 Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 12
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2.A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTI ON PAGE DATE
289 Aug 16/89 298.32 Dec 14/87

290 Dec 14/87 298.33 Aug 16/89
291 Aug 16/89 298.34 Dec 14/87
292 Dec 14/87 298.35 Dec 14/87
293 Aug 16/89 298.36 Dec 14/87
294 Dec 14/87 298.37 Dec 14/87
295 Dec 14/87 298.38 Aug 4/94
296 Aug 16/89 298.38A Aug 4/94
296A Aug 16/89 298.38B Blank
296B Blank 298.39 Aug 4/94
297 Aug 16/89 298.40 Dec 14/87
298 Aug 12/91 298.41 Dec 14/87
298.1 Dec 14/87 298.42 Dec 14/87
298.2 Aug 12/91 298.43 Aug 4/94
298.3 Aug 16/89 298.44 Dec 14/87
298.4 Aug 12/91 298.45 Dec 14/87
298.5 Aug 12/91 298.46 Dec 14/87
298.6 Aug 12/91 298.47 Aug 12/91
298.6A Aug 12/91 298.48 Aug 4/94
298.6B Blank 298.48A Aug 4/94
298.7 Aug 12/91 298.48B Blank
298.8 Aug 16/89 298.49 Aug 4/94
298.9 Dec 14/87 298.50 Aug 16/89
298.10 Dec 14/87 298.50A Aug 4/94
298.11 Dec 14/87 298.50B Blank
298.12 Dec 14/87 298.51 Aug 12/91
298.12A Aug 12/91 298.52 Aug 12/91
298.12B Blank 72-40-00
298.13 Dec 14/87 COMBUSTION
298.14 Dec 14/87 SECTION Tab
298.15 Aug 4/94
298.16 Dec 14/87 Combustion
298.17 Aug 4/94 Section
298.18 Aug 12/91 72-Contents Dec 14/87
298.19 Dec 14/87 72-40-00 1 Dec 14/87
298.20 Aug 4/94 2 Blank
298.21 Aug 16/89 72-40-01 201 Aug 4/94
298.22 Dec 14/87 202 Aug 12/91
298.23 Dec 14/87 203 Dec 14/87
298.24 Aug 16/89 204 Aug 4/94
298.25 Dec 14/87 205 Aug 4/94
298.26 Aug 4/94 206 Dec 14/87
298.27 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 12/91
298.28 Aug 4/94 208 Dec 14/87
298.28A Aug 4/94 209 Dec 14/87
298.28B Blank 210 Dec 14/87
298.29 Dec 14/87 211 Dec 14/87
298.30 Aug 12/91 212 Dec 14/87
298.31 Dec 14/87 213 Dec 14/87
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 13
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
214 Dec 14/87 204A Aug 4/94

215 Aug 12/91 204B Blank
216 Aug 12/91 205 Aug 12/91
72-50-00 206 Dec 14/87
TURBINE 207 Aug 4/94
SECTION Tab 208 Dec 14/87
209 Aug 12/91
Turbine 210 Dec 14/87
Section 211 Dec 14/87
72-Contents 1 Aug 4/94 212 Dec 14/87
2 Aug 12/91 213 Dec 14/87
72-50-00 1 Dec 14/87 214 Dec 14/87
2 Dec 14/87 215 Dec 14/87
72-50-01 201 Aug 4/94 216 Aug 16/89
202 Dec 14/87 217 Dec 14/87
203 Dec 14/87 218 Dec 14/87
204 Aug 12/91 219 Aug 12/91
72-50-02 201 Aug 4/94 220 Dec 14/87
202 Dec 14/87 221 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 12/91 222 Aug 12/91
204 Blank 223 Aug 12/91
72-50-03 201 Aug 4/94 224 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87 225 Aug 4/94
203 Dec 14/87 226 Aug 12/91
204 Aug 4/94 227 Aug 12/91
72-50-04 201 Aug 4/94 228 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87 229 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 4/94 230 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87 231 Aug 12/91
205 Aug 16/89 232 Aug 12/91
206 Dec 14/87 233 Aug 12/91
207 Dec 14/87 234 Aug 12/91
208 Aug 12/91 235 Aug 12/91
209 Dec 14/87 236 Aug 12/91
210 Aug 4/94 237 Aug 12/91
211 Aug 16/89 238 Aug 12/91
212 Aug 4/94 239 Aug 12/91
213 Aug 4/94 24O Auy 12/91
214 Blank 241 Aug 12/91
72-50-05 201 Aug 4/94 242 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87 243 Aug 12/91
203 Dec 14/87 244 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87 245 Aug 12/91
205 Aug 16/89 246 Aug 12/91
206 Aug 16/89 247 Aug 12/91
72-50-06 201 Aug 4/94 248 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87 249 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 4/94 250 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87 251 Aug 12/91
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 14
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
252 Aug 12/91 219 Aug 16/89

253 Aug 12/91 220 Dec 14/87
254 Aug 12/91 221 Aug 16/89
255 Aug 12/91 222 Aug 4/94
256 Aug 12/91 223 Aug 16/89
257 Aug 12/91 224 Aug 4/94
258 Aug 12/91 225 Aug 4/94
259 Aug 12/91 226 Blank
260 Aug 1 2 / 9 1 72-50-08 201 Aug 16/89
261 Aug 12/91 202 Aug 4/94
262 Aug 12/91 203 Aug 12/91
263 Aug 12/91 204 Aug 4/94
264 Aug 12/91 205 Dec 14/87
265 Aug 4/94 206 Aug 12/91
266 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 4/94
267 Aug 4/94 208 Aug 4/94
268 Aug 12/91 208A Aug 4/94
269 Aug 12/91 208B Blank
270 Aug 4/94 209 Aug 12/91
271 Aug 12/91 210 Aug 12/91
272 Aug 12/91 211 Dec 14/87
273 Aug 12/91 212 Aug 12/91
274 Blank 213 Aug 4/94
72-50-07 201 Aug 4/94 214 Aug 16/89
202 Aug 12/91 214A Aug 12/91
202A Aug 4/94 214B Blank
202B Blank 215 Au9 12/91
203 Aug 4/94 216 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 217 Aug 4/94
204A Aug 4/94 218 Aug 4/94
204 ' Blank 219 Dec 14/87
205 Aug 4/94 220 Aug 12/91
206 Aug 16/89 221 Aug 4/94
207 Aug 16/89 222 Dec 14/87
208 Aug 16/89 222A Aug 16/89
209 Aug 16/89 222B Blank
210 Aug 4/94 223 Dec 14/87
210A Aug 4/94 224 Aug 4/94
210B Blank 225 Aug 16/89
211 Aug 16/89 226 Aug 12/91
212 Aug 16/89 227 Aug 4/94
213 Aug 4/94 228 Aug 12/91
214 Aug 16/89 229 Aug 16/89
214A Aug 12/91 230 Aug 12/91
214B Aug 4/94 231 Aug 16/89
215 Aug 16/89 232 Dec 14/87
216 Aug 4/94 233 Aug 12/91
217 Dec 14/87 234 Aug 16/89
218 Dec 14/87 235 Dec 14/87
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 15
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
236 Aug 16/89

237 Aug 4/94
238 Aug 4/94
239 Aug 4/94
240 Aug 4/94
72-EFF
UP136688
Page 16
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INCORPO-
R 72-1 through 72-5 1
72-6 Not Issued 2
72-50-08
72-7 207 Sept 1/89 2
72-50-08
72-8 208 Sept 1/89 2
72-50-08
72-9 210 Sept 1/89 2
72-50-08
72-10 215 Sept 1/89 2
72-10-13
72-11 234 Oct 13/89 2
72-30-04
72-12 238 Jan 12/90 2
72-30-04
72-13 239 Jan 12/90 2
72-30-04
72-14 243/244 Jan 12/90 2
72-30-04
72-15 284 Jan 12/90 2
72-30-04
72-16 286 Jan 12/90 2
72-30-04
72-17 288 Jan 12/90 2
72-50-06
72-18 226 Jan 12/90 2
72-50-06
72-19 230 Jan 12/90 2
72-T-R-REC
UP136688
Page 1
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF TEMPORARYREVISIONS (CONT)
INCORPO-
72-50-06
72-20 245 Jan 12/90 2
72-50-06
72-21 25O Jan 12/90 2
72-50-06
72-22 263 Jan 12/90 2
72-50-06
72-23 269 Jan 12/90 2
72-50-08
72-24 227 June 8/90
72-00-00
72-25 132 Sept 28/90
72-0O-00
72-26 133 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-27 137 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-28 145 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-29 146 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-30 148 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-31 177 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-32 197 Sept 28/90 2
72-00-00
72-33 198.10 Sept 28/9Q 2
72-30-03
72-34 220 Dec 7/90 2
UP136688
72-T-R-REC
R Page 2
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I NCORPO-
72-50-04
72-35 208 Dec 7/90 2
72-00-00
72-36 407 Feb 1/91 2
72-00-01
72-37 1/2 Feb 1/91 2
72-00-01
72-38 201 Feb 1/91 2
R 72-00-00
R 72-39 614 Sept 20/91 3
R 72-50-08
R 72-40 227 Nov 8/91 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-41 573 Dec 13/91 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-42 589 Dec 13/91 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-43 593 Dec 13/91 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-44 654 Apr 10/92 3
R 72-30-01
R 72-45 201 May 8/92 3
R 72-30-01
R 72-46 202 May 8,/92 3
R 72-30-01
R 72-47 203 May 8/92 3
R 72-30-04
R 72-48 298.28 May 8/92 3
R 72-30-04
R 72-49 298.48 May 8/92 3
72-T-R-REC
UP136688
Page 3
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (CONT)
INCORPO-
R 72-30-04
R 72-50 298.49 May 8/92 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-51 301 June 5/92 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-52 506 June 5/92 3
R 72-00-00
R 72-53 601 Dec 18/92 3
R 72-10-18
R 72-54 206 Jan 8/93 3
R 72-10-18
R 72-55 2O8 Jan 8/93 3
UP136688
72-T-R-REC
Page 4
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INCORPO-
CHAPISEC/ RATED INTO
NO. PAGE NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY RENOVED BY REV NO.
72-T-R-REC
UP136688
R Page 5/6
Aug 4/94
AIIiedSignal Aerospace Company

MAINTENANCE MANUAL @/gal
CHAPTER 72 - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
General 1
Reduction Gear and Shaft Section 2
Compressor Section 2
Combustion Section 2
Turbine Section 5
Power Management Section 5
Fuel Control and Pump Assembly AA-CC 5
(Bend ix)
R Fuel Control and Pump Assembly DA-GA 18
(Woodward)
Propel 1e r Governor Assembly 20
Beta Tube 23
Propel 1e r P i t c h Control 23
Torque/Temperature L i m i t e r 23
Negative Torque Sensing (NTS) System AA- BA , 24
DA- FB
I g n i t i o n System 25
I n l e t A n t i - I c e System 25
Interstage Turbine Temperature Post SB 72-0042 25
I n d i c a t i n g System
Compensating Resistor
O i l System
E l e c t r i c a l System
Components and Accessories
Accessory Mounting Provisions
D i r e c t i onal References
Engine Mounting Provi s i ons
Shipping Container Informati on
UP136688

72-CONTENTS
Aug 12/91
lied
GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General (See Figures 1 and 2)

The turboprop a i r c r a f t engine is a lightweight fixed-shaft engine designed
to provide primary power for fixed wing a i r c r a f t . The primary divisions of
the engine are the reduction gear and shaft section, compressor section,
combustion section, turbine section and associated systems. Accessories and
components of power management system and other systems (fuel, o i l , air, ig-
nition, electrical, torque limiting and indicating, and temperature indicat-
ing) required for engine operation are mounted on the reduction gear and
shaft section and along the body of the engine.
Output drive for the aircraft propeller is provided by the reduction gear
section. The gear trains of the reduction gear section are driven by the
rotating group of the engine. The engine rotating group is made up of the
compressor impellers, turbine wheels and main shaft. The compressor impell-
ers and turbine wheels are joined and indexed by curvic (special face)
couplings which are held in place by the main shaft to make up the rotating
assembly.
A torsion shaft, positioned concentrically inside the main shaft, extends

through the length of the shaft and is coupled to the reduction gear
section. The torsion shaft is driven by a spline at the rear of the main
shaft and drives the helical gearshaft set (high speed pinion) through a
spline coupling at the front. The fuel control gear train is driven by a
gear arrangement from the high speed pinion through the torque sensor gear.
Leading particulars of the engine are listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Leading Particulars
Engine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-shaft turboprop engine with integral gearbox

Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-stage centrifugal
Turbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-stage axial
Combustion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single annular
Engine Dry Weight (complete engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Ib max
Length of Engine (nominal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 in.
Width of Engine (nominal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 in.
Height of Engine (nominal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 in.
Speed of 41,730 rpm (100 percent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591 rpm
Absolute Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,000 f t
Starting Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sea level to 20,000 f t
Ambient Air Temperature
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -54 to 55C (-65 to 130F)
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 to 55C (-40 to 130F)
Exception: Lowest permissible temperature shall be that at

which the fuel viscosity is 12 centistokes.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 1
Aug 16/89
I~I MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table I. Leading Particulars (Cont)
Engine Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One qt max per 12.5 hours

Electrical Power for Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 vdc, 600 amp (1000 amp momentary)
(l ooki ng forward) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counterclockwise
Propeller Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flanged
Approved Fuel and Oil Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual
2. Reduction Gear and Shaft Section
The reduction gear and shaft section comprises the forward section of the
engine above the air i n l e t duct. The main gear train of the section is
directly coupled to the aircraft propeller through the propeller shaft
assembly. Secondary gear trains operate shaft-driven accessories and compo-
nents of associated systems mounted on the rear of the reduction gear and
shaft section. Input, intermediate, and output housing assemblies enclose
the reduction gear and shaft section.
3. Compressor Section
Inlet air enters the compressor section through an i n l e t duct located at the
input housing assembly. The f i r s t stage impeller of the compressor section
compresses the inlet air and forces i t through the interstage duct assembly
to the second stage impeller. Air is further compressed by the second stage
impeller and is discharged into the combustion section.
4. Combustion Section
The compressed air supplied from the compressor section flows into a single
reverse flow annular combustion chamber assembly enclosed by the plenum
assembly. Here atomized fuel supplied by the fuel nozzle and manifold as-
sembly of the fuel system is mixed with the compressed air. Five primary
fuel nozzles are used for starting and ten secondary fuel nozzles for all
other phases of operation. During starting and i n i t a l acceleration, the
f u e l - a i r mixture is ignited by two igniter plugs of the ignition system.
After ignition cutout, combustion is self-sustaining. The resultant com-
bustion gases are directed to the three-stage axial turbine by the transi-
tion liner assembly.
The turbine plenum assembly, attached to the compressor housing assembly,

provides a plenum for compressed a i r which encloses the combustion area
keeping the outer surfaces of the engine r e l a t i v e l y cool. The rear end of
the plenum assembly provides a register for the turbine bearing support and
f o r mounting the fuel nozzle and manifold assemblies.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 2
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
REDUCTION GEARS TWO STAGE CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
INE
GS (2)
ILAR C O M B U S T I O N
~ER
IEL N O Z Z L E S (10)
INLET Db~,
~FUEL NOZZLES (5)
3r ~r Y
REDUCTION G E A R COMPRESSOR TURBINE SECTION
SECTION SECTION
S-44A-333
Simplified Cross Sectional View of Engine

UP136688
Figure 1 72-00-00
Page 3
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
z
0
X~ I--~ 0
Z wZ
UU
~ U ~
z N~
0
,u
f--U.I
OD
~m ~N
ZZ
7 m ~Q..
u.j w [-=
Zw~ -
o~ ~
~ ~Z~
z
z 0
~ UU
z
0
,,u
>- z
LLI --J 0
0
.~,~
U ~z U= ~/I - -
>-
0
z~
z
0
I--
,u,
o~
zz
-r-r
~uJ
5, U~
w~
~>
z~ "~Z
U~
-r
o
z
X
l
0
p.
U
oO
~-~ o~ ~zz
O~
--ro~
UP136688
Cross Sectional View of Engine Less Accessories (Typical) 72-00-00

Figure 2 Page 4
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
5. Turbine Section
The turbine section contains three a x i a l - f l o w turbine wheels and three sta-
t o r assemblies. Gases from the combustion section flow through the stator
and wheels and exhaust to atmosphere through the exhaust pipe assembly.
Some compressor a i r is directed against the rear face of the f i r s t stage
turbine wheel for cooling. The turbine section provides power through the
reduction gear and shaft section to drive the propeller.
6. Power Management System (See Figures 3 Through 8)
The major components of the power management system are the engine fuel con-
t r o l assembly, the propeller governor assembly and the propeller pitch con-
t r o l , plus the interconnecting mechanical linkage that coordinate the con-
t r o l functions. These i n t e r r e l a t e d power management controls are rigged to
provide two basic modes of operation: the beta mode and the propeller-
governing mode.
Beta-mode operation provides for operator control of propeller blade angle

and selection of engine speed. The fuel control unit automatically meters
fuel flow to supply engine power required by propeller load. Beta-mode
operation is normally u t i l i z e d at reduced a i r c r a f t speeds for reverse-pitch
braking on the runway and f o r ground operation.
Propeller governing mode operation provides for operator control of engine

power and selection of the engine speed-governing point. The propeller gov-
ernor-controls the propeller blade angle position to absorb the operator-
selected power setting while maintaining constant engine speed. Propeller
governing mode operation is u t i l i z e d for all airborne operations.
A beta l i g h t is furnished in cockpit to indicate when illuminated that the

propeller has moved into the ground operating (beta) range a f t e r landing in
response to power lever movement. Therefore operation of the beta l i g h t
between 65 and 85 percent engine rpm is not essential since the engine is
not operated in this speed range during takeoff, f l i g h t or landing and
safety of f l i g h t is not involved.
A. (Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly
(i) General.
The fuel control and pump assembly is composed of a fuel high pres-
sure and boost pump assembly and fuel control u n i t . These compo-
nents are stacked together as a single assembly on a four-stud
drive pad, located in the upper right-hand position at the rear of
the reduction gear section. The fuel control u n i t meters the f u e l ,
supplied by the boost and high pressure fuel pumps, to the engine
combustion chamber in accordance with sensed engine requirements
and operator inputs. The fuel control unit is composed of three
major fuel devices: an underspeed fuel governor, an overspeed fuel
governor, and manual fuel valve (main metering valve).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 5
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
FEATHERING VALVE ASSY

;UEL VALVE
~ELLER PITCH
INTERCONNECT
f , POWER LEVER
'~".. RPM LEVER
~'/o~,~.~ UNFEATHERI NG
_ . ~ SWITCH
~SPEED FUEL AND~'N~/~NUAL

LLER GOVERNOR FEATHER
:ONNECT CONTROL
:UMP
PRC ASSY
AC1
. . . . ICATES COMPONENTS OF TORQUE

* TORQUE SENSOR SENSING SYSTEM.
S-44G-132
Simplified Power Management and Torque

Sensing Diagram (Typical)
UP136688
Figure 3 72-00-OO
Page 6
Dec 14/87
/lied
TORQUE SENSING SECTION CHECK VALVE

*BETA PRESSURESWITCH CONNECTION (OPTIONAL)
I DUMP TO CASE CHECK VALVE

*NEGATIVE TORQUESENSOR PRESSURE
NEGATIVE TORQUESENSOR SWITCH CONNECTION (OPTIONAL)
PRESSUREREGULATOR",,I
UNFEATHERING OIL USED FOR
~m ,° NEGATIVE TORQUECHECKOUT UNFEATHERING OPERATION ONLY
VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
I
I
t _.J.~*UNFEATHERING PUMP
I J CONNECTION
f
FILTEREDENGINE OIL • AAAA#
ORQUE SENSOR SPEEDCONTROL LEVER
I '~ CHECK VALVE LOCATION
CAM \ HIGH PRESSUREOIL PUMP (CODES AA-BA, DA-FB)
COORDINATED WITH S.PEED
SETTING LEVERSHAFT '
CHECK VALVE LOCATION ~ ~ -- II I I :ram
(CODES CA-CC~ GA) IX CHECK VALVE MIN SP, D STOP
m ¢ ',
/., ¢ ,~ DUMP TO CASE ~ 1
,, -. ¢ ,~
POSITIVE TORQUESENSOR CA!
PRESSUREREGULATOR ¢
PISTON
MAIN ENGINE ¢
ROTOR SHAFT
m ¢ m MAX SPEED I
TORSION SHAFT STOP I
m ¢ I
iiii i~1 m i i
HIGH PRESSURERELIEFVALVE
R C PROPELLERGOVERNOR
¢
DUMP TO
CASE PRESSUREX CASE C
mi ml
II/I/
ll l
¢
DUMP TO.,_
~ *MANUAL PROPFEATHER
C CASE
HYDRAULIC ¢
RAW TORQUE
TORQUE SIGNAL SIGNAL
*ELECTRICAL PRESSURE COMPENSATOR
TRANSDUCERPAD (CODES CA-CC)
1
mm ml
\
FEATHERING VALVE
PROPELLERSERVO POSITIONING
PISTON (NOT FURNISHED) NEGATIVE TORQUESENSOR LOCKOUT VALVE
DUMP TO CASE
LEGEND
PROPELLER OIL FLOW TUBE (BETA TUBE) -1 ENGINE OIL-PRESSURE

CONTROL OIL-HIGH PRESSURE
FEATHERDIRECTION
DUMP TO CASE CONTROL OIL-REGULATEDPRESSURE
" ~ ' ~ ~ / ~ - (" )
~<>~ CONTROL OIL-MODULATED PRESSURE
j m m m
PROPELLERPITCH CONTROL I , I PRESETORIFICE

I ....
PITCH CONTROL LEVERCOORDINATED DIRECTION OF FLOW OR MOVEMENT
WITH POWERLEVERSHAFT /
CUSTOMERCONNECTION-MATING PARTNOT FURNISHED
*POWER LEVERCON'NECTION
>'///////A DESIGNATES CERTAINENGINE CODES
S-44G- 194
Torque Sensing Schematic (Typical)

Figure 4 72-00-0O
UP136688
Page 7/8
Aug 12/91
,#'~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~Signal
FUEL CONTROL
HIGHPRESSUREPUMP
~ \ /
START
FUEL PRESSURE FUEL FILTER\ \
I'/VALV
i
REGULATING VALVE
~*BOOST " - *FUEL TANK

PUMP
HEAT EXCHANGER
/COMPRESSOR PRESSURESENSOR
FUEL SOLENOID
PRIMARYFUEL
NOZZLE AND
MANIFOLD
ASSEMBLY
FUEL BOOST PUMP
SECONDARY FUEL
NOZZLE AND
MANIFOLD
., ASSEMBLY
INLET TEMPERATURESENSOR
~ URBINEPLENUM
DRAIN VALVES
FLOW DIVIDER VALVE
FUELDRAIN
* CUSTOMERFURNISHED S-44G-166
UP136688
Simplified Fuel System Diagram (Typical)

Figure 5 72-00-00
Page 9/10
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SCAVENGEOIL ~ , o ~ l~,~ FL~W~'~ i

I INCREASE /_~,.~E~E,0w = I
' • • • • • HiGH I~=~.~L/REFUEL
~'~ ~ SETTING ~ o 0 o o LOW ~ E FUEL
I[[I l _~'~J7,~: '-

HEATEXCHANGER
COCKPITSPEEDSETTING ~ er~rn 4 • * • * FUELDRAIN
LEVERCONNECTION--1 ENGINE OIL PRE,~,,qJRE
I ~ . BODYveNT
I - UNDERSPEEDGOVERNORLEVER CONTROL AIR
FUELCONTROL -....~=| O ORiFiC HEATERSYSTEM • • • • • J. BLEEDAIR
I./~. ( ALveO P E NE- sPEEl) LEveRMEN)
_J~_L~VE CLOSED- SPEEDLEVERMAX ; , ,. RESETORiRC~
MIN Wf - P3 STOP - DIRECTION OF FLOWORMOVEMENT
SPECIFICGRAVITY,ADJ PROPELLI~Pi'rCHCONTROL
ANTI-ICING VALVE MAX FOWERADJ/ / STARTFLOWADJ '~ " LEVERCONNECTION (=) CUSTOMER
M A FUR
TNSIHED
I CONNECTION
N G ' A R T- N o T
PROPELLERGOVERNORSPEED P3
METERING
/ VALVE CONTROLLEVERCONNECTION P~ , , ~
FUELFILTER FUELDIFFERENTIAL MIN FLOWADJ OV'E!~PEEDGOVERNC~

PRESSUREREGULATOR
0
200MICRONl , . OVI~SPEED
LEVER
mll
//t I~ EXH~JS"r
(*)FUEL
. MAX PLOW DERIC~ENT ~ P. L _ . . . . ~ n l ~ [' m _ r ~ - - - _ J / " ~
STOP / , /
FUEL | FILTERBYPASS
(INJECTORTYPE)
FILTERBYPASSVALVe -
_: .v=ox
B~ )
OVeR,SPEED
owo._
Px TRIMBLEED
~
i 10 MICRONFILTER Ill Tt2 1- (~,
;.
/
HiGH PRE TURBINEPLENUM
PUMP(VANETYPE) / O/.,..,,,~.,r RELIEFVALVE AIR iNLET ILL - TO ATMOSPieERE 1111JIiBINEPLENUM1 t DRAIN VALVE
OVERBOARDDRAIN PREIIL~iZING 10
HiGH PRESSURE VALve I P©-P • -- / MICRON
RELIEFVALve I I ~ TEMPERAlIJRESENSOR FJLT~
| FILTB~ ELECTRICALLY
HEATED
STARTPRF.SSURE PNEUMATICUNES
REGULATOR II FLOW'DIVIDERAND
I - ~ TORQUEMOTORAND BYPASS SELF,.BYPASSINGDRAJNVALVE
SCREENASEY I VISCO JET .... ~)
MANUAL FUELSI'UJTOFF PEIM,oJ~YDRAINVALVE i
~ ~ L j CHECK
VALVE .
i
/
STARTFUELREGULATOR
STARTFUELVALve
(*) FLOWMETER
CONNECTION
] i,
FUELSHUTOFFVALVE
|
!
l ~_____~.
[SE~o~AR,.O~N,,ALVE PLo.o.VI.~
t=
I
=
,,4m ~,....~. C
INLETANTI-ICING VALVE
H
vALVE
E
.
C
i
STORAGETANK
(AC~TOR)
~
SOLENO~vALve(NC)
S.,44G-12B
Engine Fuel Schematic
(Applicable to Engine Codes AA-BA)
Figure 6 7Z-00-00
Page 11/lZ
Dec 14/87
UP136688
HA[NTENANCEHANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-271
FUELCONTROL 2 DIFF PRESSURE INLETPRESSURESENSOR

SOLENOID (N OPEN) PS3 ,e--------
CLOSE 10% N
OPEN 50~ N , • ---- .,~. =11,. O,L-FU~'HEAT • ..,-i. INLET TEMPERATURE
! _X._.5'~. , ="~°-__ _ D FILLEDCAPILLARYTU~E"~'~.~I.,=__:~~--..-~...~.~_TT2
":=:-~G" ANTI-CINGINLETS~__.',":~,
ENSOR II / ¢ , , ~
~[ , D I n D I n l H
BY PASSREllJRNPo -.*----
i
AIR FLOW
DEFLECTC J~ EXHAUST
MAX POWER' FLIGHT n)LEADJ
ADJ
INLET TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATOR ,
=-- : - - 1 CONTROLLED • POWERLEVERCAM 10 MICRON
,fiLTER
DECELFLOW
ADJ SCREW
j ~ P'~ INLETPRES~IJRE
COMPENSATOR ,,,...
,P.~,,i~s,.~ II " ~ 1 1 ~<--tL~l~=~~l , ~ - ~ ,,,,,,.,ACCEL
FLOW ' POSITION
. STOP "~ I~"""FU~L~OW
STOP 1URBINE
PLENUM
I ow~o~c CHECK
DRAIN VALVE
~/1.~,-
|
~~~ !HAFT MAX FUEL
FLOW
POSITION
STOP
INLET
ANTI-ICING
VALVE
• ~ ~ ~.- . ~,, , _ _ , T " E ~ " ~ ' L - - ' ~ / . k ~ ~ ~ ll~'iq~r----"~%EED~-,.o I STORAGE

TANK
I_ . ~ ~ t ..... " ~ ~ ~ 1 ioLj~oi~~ L~or-
LEGEND
-J- HIGH PRESSURE
"!" LOW PRESSUREFUEL
-T- FUELDRAIN
----" CONTROL AIR
gLEEDAIR
I I ~ l l l
~ PRESETORIFICE
SECONDARYDRNN VALVE FLOWDIVIDER
DIRECTION OF FLOWOR
MOVEMENT
I !
*CUSTOMERCONNECTION- BLEEDPORT
MATING pARTNOT FURNISHED C CH~--"~KECK
VALVE (CODEDA ONLY) .~4,11G-129
Engtne Fuel Schematic

(Applicable to Engine Codes DA-FB) 72-0O-OO
Figure 7 Page 13/14
Dec 14/87
UP136688
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-Z7)
LEGEND
• • • • • HIGH PRES~UllEFUEL
t ! : OIL FLIGHT IOLE/~INCREASE

FLOW/~J
o o o o O LOW PRES~JI~EFUEL
FUEL OUTLET 4 ~ ~. ~.,,- FUELDRAIN
TO AIR FRAME
FUEL FILTER L-FUEL HEATEXCHANGER I
ENGINE-,OIL PRESSURE
I COCKPITSPEB) PROPELLERPITCHCONTROLLEVER
SEI-rING LEVER
CONNECTION CONTROL AIR
(o)
SERVOORIFICEHEATERSYSTEM
t FU~LCONIROL ~.~.,~ ~ ALVE OPEN-SPEEDLEVERMIN) I BLEEDAIR
ALVE CLOSED-SPEEDLEVERMAX)
RESETORIFICE
FUEL INLET FROM AIR
FRAMEFUELFILTER
(.)
1
SPECIFIC GRAVIIY ADJ
UNDERSPEEDGOVERNC~ LEVER
PROPELLERGOVERNOR (*)
$, DIRECTIONOF FLOW OR MOVIEMENT
CUSTOMERCONNECTION-MATING PART
SPEEDCONTROL NOT FURNISHED
I I MAX P(~ER N)J / STARTFLOW ADJ LEVERCONNECTION
I
THERMOSTAT m
ENRICHMENTLE~
. OVERSPEEDGOV~NOR ADJ
ANTI-ICING VALVE METERINGVALVE
E'x3
FUEL PUMP
J~"EXHAUST
FUELBOOSTPUMP
(INJECTOR TYPE)
DERICEL~ENT ~ i ;
//I i/
FLOW
STOP OVERBOARDDRAIN
LEVER i i / __ // '
OVERSPEED FILTER .==. FILTER
HIGH PRESSUREFUEL HIGH PRESSURE PRES~JRIZINGVALVE RELIEFVALVE I (')1,
PUMP(VANE TYPE) RELIEFVALVE AIR INLET t //TURBINE PLENUM , f | TURBINEPLENUM
FILTER i DRAINVALVE DRAIN VALVE
BYPASS ...... k •
VALVE i'EMPERATURESENSOR
PRESSURE .J
MANUAL FUEL
FLOW DIVIDERAND PRIMARY
DRAIN VALVE DRAIN
VALVE
SELF-BYPASSING VISCO JET
SCREENASSY INLET ANTI-ICING VALVE ~ |
•I .....I
"'"--TU~'LUEL
~O' VALVE
/ STARTFUELVALVE
a,. i,
STARTFUELREGULATOR
SECONDARY i IOMI~ON
DRAIN JJ -'- SOLENOID CHECK flL~R
VALVE CHECK VALVE V~LW
S-44G-120
/
PLOW DIVIDER _~_~--~" VALVE (N/C)
OVERBOARDDRAIN
m ~
(Codes CA-CC)
Engine Fuel Schematic 72-00-00
Figure 8
Page 15/1G
Dec 14/87
UP136688
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
t I,/SeAlO,L
../~/~ OIL-FUEL HEAT
!
mr••••
•
~j~
• •I ~
EXCHANGER
BYPASSRETURN ,~
FUELCONTROL~....~I
FROM~ i i
i •limlm i i t
j
FUELBOOST C i
I HP~MP ~ i II
"~ :-~:o oo o _ ~ i l o o o o o o o,,,~,
II M N HIGH PRESSURE - WJ • E I I M/
• H FJ FUELPUMP l LI • I° I I PT2INLETPRESSURE~/
i
Ii E! ..7-.. "FF-CONTRO"ED ,i
L] rJ .~-~ I~ If ~ ~
R ~ 4. ANTI-ICING ~ I- , I~I II,-:.... ,r.lll JL',,.'x,j..~..m~.t
a MICRON'-'-"L'~
"l----'~l'c~ Lit VALVE. a M l ~I H I ~
L_ ~..--~=AS~ ~ l ~ "~ ~ 1 "'-"

-
'
-'i~L,~:Ji:,I..........
~ I~ :~ PUMPDISCHARGE
IFI FIITERANTI- i kLO O O O O O O O O O O C
l
I : (N/o)
I -"-"-
~• • o, • • 9 • 9
E.K,CHMENT --------
SOLENOID VALVE
(N/C)
It''
i
i
P~S~
VALVE
/
•
l i
i
m n u ~ i ~ S-44G- 195. I
,I
(Code GA) Engine Fuel Schematic
UP136688
Figure 8A (Sheet 1 of 3) 72-00-00

Page 16A/16B
Aug 12/91
/IJed
Ps3-PT2DIFF PRESSURESENSOR
PS3
F ~ D FILLEDCAPILLARYTUBE7 TT2
INLET ~ " --
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR TT2
AIR FLOW DEFLECTOR
MAX POWER FLIGHT IDLE ADJ ~ •
ADJ
INLET TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATOR
POWERLEVERCAM
DECELFLOW
ADJ SCREW
CL PT2 BIAS SHAFT
OVER-
BOARD
DRAIN
~ O,VERSPEED OVERSPEEDMIN
GOVERNOR FUEL STOP
SETTING
ACCELERATIONLIMIT ~,
THREEDIMENTIONAL CA/~
FILTERBYPASSVALVE
GOVERNOR
IE3E:3E:3E3E3[3[3£~
m m ~ n nnmnu~m unn~
, ! I:I E3Z, .--'EB i~
°, Umi
*FLOW METER CONNECTIONS ~FUELSHUTOFFVALVE S-44G-195.2

UP136688
Figure 8A (Sheet 2) 72-00-00

Page 16C/16D
Aug 12/91
lied
,NESENSO ANTI-ICING
SHIELD
INLET PRESSURESENSORPT2
, .
t EXHAUST
/ • I
t
I
¢
PLENUM
DRAIN
VALVE
~ . M ~ x ACCEL~;V H MIN FUELFLOW i
FLOW STOP ~ ' r , I POSiTiONSTOPiJ ~1
A~- POWER i MAX FUEL FLOW
,EVER POSITION STOP
oM, N ACCELFLOWSTOP I INLET

ANTI-ICING
MIN RPM STOP I VALVE
R
FUEL MANIFOLD
PURGE AIR FILTER
(75 MICRON)
m~m m m m m m m m m mm~
i FLOW DIVIDER
AND DRAIN VALVE
SELF-BYPASSING PRIMARY /
SCREEN ASSEMBLY VISCO JET DRAINVALVE 1
i -"'-\'-'
| I • I ) i I • / I - - I i
CHECK
VALVE "A"
SECONDARY DRAIN VALVE FLOW DIVIDER /
FUEL MANIFOLD
PURGE AIR
-, / ~ / STORAGE TANK
CHECK FUELMAN IFOLD
VALVE "B" PURGEAIR SOLENOID
VALVE (N/C) S-44G-195.3

UP136688
Figure 8A (Sheet 3) 72-00-00

Page 16E/16F
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
Fuel-flow range is established by two basic l i m i t i n g devices:
6. A. (1) (a) A pneumatically controlled maximum fuel schedule which is a

function of engine speed and compressor discharge pressure as
modified by an i n l e t temperature sensor.
(b) A pneumatically controlled minimum fuel flow schedule which is
a function of compressor discharge pressure.
A specific gravity manual adjustment is externally located on the
fuel control unit to provide compensation for different fuel types.
Figures 5 through 8A i l l u s t r a t e typical fuel system i n s t a l l a t i o n s
of various configurations.
(2) Underspeed governor.
The underspeed governor, a droop-type speed control, is functional
at reduced engine speed in a beta-mode operation. The engine speed
selection is operator-controlled within l i m i t s specified in
Adjustment/Test. As engine speed decreases beyond the selected
setting, the underspeed governor increases the fuel flow to oppose
any speed decrease.
The minimum speed setting provides a minimum engine speed during
ground operation. The maximum speed setting provides more power
for reverse-pitch braking operation during landing.
The flyweight-type underspeed governor, driven by the fuel control

u n i t drive shaft, positions a flapper which modulates pneumatic
output to the metering valve to control fuel flow. Variable-speed
selection is accomplished by c o n t r o l l i n g the speeder-spring tension
that opposes the speed-sensing flyweight action. The speed lever
shaft, which positions the speeder-spring tension mechanism, pro-
trudes from the fuel control u n i t . Mechanical linkage connects the
underspeed governor shaft to the propeller governor assembly speed-
control shaft and, coordinated into a single cockpit control,
provides for operator control of the underspeed governor speed-
setting during beta mode and operator control of the propeller gov-
ernor assembly speed-governing point during propeller-governing
mode. The underspeed governor is set at least three percent below
the propeller governor assembly setting to prevent interference
between the two speed-control governors.
The linkage from the underspeed governor to the cockpit control is
airframe-furnished.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 17
Aug 12/91
lied
6. A. (3) Power l e v e r controlled metering valve.
The metering valve meters fuel flow to control engine power at a l l

engine speeds during both beta-mode and propeller-governing mode.
At a fuel flow s u f f i c i e n t to drive the engine speed above I00 per-
cent, the propeller governor assembly establishes a constant-
engine-speed operation by automatically increasing propeller blade
angle to absorb engine power. Additional fuel flow provides addi-
tional power at a constant engine speed (propeller-governing mode).
Propeller-governor mode for engine speeds less than 100 percent can
be established by operator control of the speed lever.
The power lever shaft, which controls a flapper that sets pneumatic
computer output to the metering valve, protrudes from the fuel con-
trol unit. Mechanical linkage connects the power lever shaft to
the p r o p e l l e r pitch control cam shaft and, coordinated into a sin-
gle cockpit control, provides for operator control of the propeller
blade angle during beta-mode of operation. The power lever posi-
tion r e l a t i o n s h i p to fuel flow and propeller blade angle (on a typ-
ical i n s t a l l a t i o n ) is shown in Figures 9 and 10.
The linkage from the propeller pitch control to the cockpit control
i s ai rframe-fu rni shed.
(4) Overspeed governor.
The flyweight-type overspeed governor is a safety device to control
engine speed at approximately 105 percent in the event of control
system malfunction. Excess engine speed produces overspeed gover-
nor f l y w e i g h t action, which reduces fuel flow to oppose any engine
speed increase.
B. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly
(1) General.
The fuel control and pump assembly is composed of a fuel high pres-
sure and boost pump assembly and fuel control u n i t . These compo-
nents are stacked together as a single assembly on a four-stud
drive pad, located in the upper right-hand position at the rear of
the reduction gear section. The fuel control u n i t meters the f u e l ,
supplied by the boost and high pressure fuel pumps, to the engine
combustion chamber. The fuel control u n i t is composed of three
major fuel devices: an underspeed governor, an overspeed governor,
and manual fuel valve (main metering valve).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 18
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
Fuel-flow range is established by two basic limiting devices:
6. B. (1) (a) A maximum fuel flow schedule functionally controlled by
mechanical means and compressor discharge pressure and compen-
sated for compressor i n l e t temperature and pressure variance.
(b) A minimum fuel flow schedule functionally controlled by
mechanical means and compressor discharge pressure.
A fuel trim manual adjustment is externally located on the fuel
control unit to provide compensation for different fuel types.
Figures 5 through 8A i l l u s t r a t e typical fuel system installations.
(2) Underspeed governor.
The underspeed governor, a droop-type speed control is functional
in a beta-mode operation. The engine speed selection is operator-
controlled within l i m i t s specified in ADJUSTMENT/TEST, Table 503.
Should engine speed attempt to increase beyond the selected set-
ting, the underspeed governor reduces the fuel flow to oppose any
speed increase.
The minimum speed setting provides a minimum engine speed during

ground operation for reduced noise level. The maximum speed set-
ting provides greater power during reverse-pitch braking operation.
The flyweight-type underspeed governor, gear-driven by the fuel
control unit drive shaft, positions the fuel main metering valve
through mechanical linkage to control fuel flow. Variable-speed
selection is accomplished by controlling the speeder-spring loading
that opposes the speed-sensing flyweight action. The speed lever
shaft, which positions the speeder-spring loading mechanism, pro-
trudes from the fuel control unit. Mechanical linkage connects the
underspeed governor shaft to the propeller governor assembly speed-
control shaft and, coordinated into a single cockpit control,
provides for operator control of the underspeed governor speed-
setting during beta-mode and p i l o t control of the propeller gover-
nor assembly speed-governing point during propeller-governing mode.
The underspeed governor is set at least three percent below the
propeller governor assembly setting to prevent governing i n t e r -
ference between the two speed-control governors.
The linkage from the underspeed governor to the cockpit control is
airframe-furnished.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 19
Aug 12/91
~;~f~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~~-~~Signal
6. B. (3) Power lever controlled metering valve.
The manual fuel valve shaft position meters fuel flow to control
engine power at all engine speeds during beta-mode and during
propel ler-governi ng mode.
At a fuel flow s u f f i c i e n t to drive the engine speed above the un-
derspeed governor setting, the propeller governor assembly esta-
blishes a constant-engine-speed operation by automatically increas-
ing propeller-blade pitch angle. Additional fuel flow provides ad-
d i t i o n a l power at a constant engine speed (propeller-governing
mode). Propeller-governor mode for speed s e t t i n g can be esta-
blished by operator control of the speed lever.
The manual fuel valve shaft (power lever shaft) controls the main
metering valve position and protrudes from the fuel control u n i t .
Mechanical linkage connects the power lever shaft to the propeller
pitch control cam shaft and, coordinated into a single cockpit con-
t r o l , provides for operator control of the propeller-blade pitch
angle during beta-mode of operation. The power lever position
relationship to fuel flow and propeller blade angle (on a typical
i n s t a l l a t i o n ) is shown in Figures 9 and 10.
The linkage from the propeller pitch control to the cockpit control
is airframe-furnished.
(4) Overspeed governor.
The flyweight-type overspeed governor is a safety device to control

engine speed at appproximately 103 percent in the event of
p r o p e l l e r governor assembly malfunction. Excess engine speed pro-
duces overspeed governor f l y w e i g h t action, which reduces fuel flow
to oppose any engine speed increase.
C. Propeller Governor Assembly
The p r o p e l l e r governor assembly is mounted in the lower left-hand posi-

tion at the rear of the reduction gear section. The propeller governor
assembly provides a constant engine speed during the propeller-governing
mode of operation. The gear driven propeller governor assembly is com-
posed of an integral gear type pump, metering valve, and flyweight
governor. Engine l u b r i c a t i n g o i l is i n t e r n a l l y directed to the
p r o p e l l e r governor assembly o i l pump i n l e t . The pressure pump boosts
the o i l pressure s u f f i c i e n t l y to position the propeller blade angle in
p r o p e l l e r governing mode. The o i l flow is metered by the metering
valve, controlled by flyweight governor action in response to engine
speed change. The oil flow is metered so as to maintain pressure in the
pitch control and propeller so as to set the blade angle required to
maintain the speed setting.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 20
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
30 500
//~.,6°'o ,oo°
2O (C......~"------ " ~ 4OO
Z
O
I
10 BLADJ:A N G ~ ~-'" ='''~

~
~
J BETA
FOLLOW-UP
300
~"
~
In
FUELFLOW
..j-
u
z
o
/ -
<
(3
Z
0
/ _1 200
~
!
/
-20
/ 0
0 20 40 60 80 100
POWERLEVERANGLE - (DEGREES) G-44A-913
NOTE: Refer to applicable Aircraft Maintenance Manual for specific angles.

UP136688
(Codes AA-CC, GA) Control Functions (Typical)

Figure 9 72-00-00
Page 21
Aug 12/91
~ I HAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
3O
/ 500
"-n
C
2O 400 m
\ 0
0 BETA
/
FOLLOW-UP
' BLADE A N G L E i
0 10
f ---~J 300
I-.-
"1-
£J
/----/
Z
- /
I
A E L FLOW
200 Z
C~
(D
Z
.<
.<
-10 / I00
/
-20 - - --- 0
0 20 40 60 80 100
POWER LEVER ANGLE - (DEGREES) G -44A-914
NOTE: Refer to applicable Aircraft Maintenance Manual for specific angles.

(Codes DA-FB) Control Functions (Typical)
UP136688
Figure 10 72-00-00
Page 22
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
The propeller governor assembly speed setting shaft is connected to the

underspeed governor shaft on the fuel control unit by mechanical
linkage. The propeller governor assembly provides for propeller-
governing mode of operation at a choice of engine speed settings. Oper-
ator control of the cockpit speed lever determines the amount of preload
on the governor speeder spring, which loads the flyweights.
During the beta-mode of engine operation the propeller governor assembly

is not governing and supplies high-pressure oil via the propeller pitch
control to the engine propeller control components.
6. D. Beta Tube
The propeller o i l - t r a n s f e r (beta) tube extends aft from a threaded ad-
justable connection in the propeller piston, through the engine
propeller shaft, and into the propeller pitch control. The tube por-
tion, housed within the propeller pitch control ported sleeve has o i l
supply ports through which propeller governor discharge oil is supplied
to the propeller piston. During beta-mode, the beta tube and the
propeller pitch control j o i n t l y control the oil pressure to the
propeller piston to position the blade pitch angle. During propeller-
governing mode, the beta tube performs no control function (due to the
ported sleeve position) and serves only as an oil passage.
E. Propeller Pitch Control
The propeller pitch control is mounted on the rear of the reduction gear
section on the propeller shaft centerline. The propeller pitch control
contains a cam arrangement which positions the ported sleeve. The beta
tube is connected to the control piston in the propeller. The a f t end
of the beta tube operates inside the ported sleeve of the propeller
pitch control.
The positioning cam-control shaft is connected to the main metering

valve power-lever shaft by mechanical linkage. During propeller-
governing mode, the propeller pitch control serves no basic function
other than providing an oil passage and housing for the beta tube. In
beta-mode, (underspeed governing), the propeller pitch control provides
for operator control of propeller blade pitch angle. Operator control
is accomplished by manually positioning the propeller pitch control cam.
The beta tube oil supply holes are then aligned with the ported sleeve
so that the pressure supplied to the propeller balances the propeller
piston spring.
F. Torque/Temperature Limiter
(Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) The torque l i m i t e r is essentially a valve with one
side connected between the fuel control and fuel shutoff valve and
bypasses metered fuel to reduce fuel supply to the engine. The torque
l i m i t e r consists of a torque motor with two coils wound in p a r a l l e l . I f
an overtorque condition arises, the torque motor receives an e l e c t r i c a l
signal from the torque l imiter c o n t r o l l e r which is an electronic assem-
bly remotely located in the airframe.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 23
Dec 14/87
I ~ I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
The overtorque signal to the torque motor w i l l position a plate valve in

the torque l i m i t e r , permitting fuel to bypass d i r e c t l y back to the i n l e t
of the fuel pump assembly thus reducing fuel flow to the engine.
(Codes DA-FB) The torque limiter bypass valve is also actuated by the
electronic controller to limit engine interstage turbine temperature
(ITT).
7. Negative Torque-Sensing (NTS) System
The NTS system is composed of two major components - the torque sensor as-
sembly and the propeller feathering valve. The function of the NTS system
is to l i m i t the torque the engine can absorb from the propeller during wind-
m i l l i n g and thereby prevent high propeller drag conditions. The NTS system
effects a movement of the propeller blades automatically toward t h e i r
feathered position (should the engine suddenly lose power while in f l i g h t )
and precisely modulates the propeller-blade pitch angle during a propeller-
windmilled engine a i r - s t a r t .
The torque sensor assembly is i n t e r n a l l y located. The torque-sensor func-

tion in the NTS system is to hydraulically actuate the propeller feathering
valve when too much negative torque is applied to the engine.
An additional minimum drag protection is also available in the event of NTS

system malfunction. The operator's manual instructs the operator to move
the power lever on the dead engine to the f u l l forward position. This ac-
tion positions the prop pitch control follower sleeve to hold the propeller
to the highest possible blade angle (resulting in lowest drag) under the
conditions of not having NTS protection. This redundant safety feature is
called the Beta follow-up system.
The propeller feathering valve is hydraulically actuated by the torque sen-

sor assembly, or can be manually actuated by operator control. The feather-
ing valve is externally mounted on the rear of the reduction gear section to
provide a connection for a manual control. In response to the torque sensor
assembly, or by manual actuation, the feathering valve blocks the high-
pressure o i l - f l o w to the pitch control, and simultaneously relieves high-
pressure oil in the propeller dome, which allows the spring-loaded propeller
blades to move toward a feathered position. The engine manual fuel shutoff
valve must be rotated to i t s closed position immediately prior to manual ac-
tuation of the feathering valve. This function is performed by a cockpit
control. Releasing the actuating pull on the spring-loaded feathering valve
allows i t to return to i t s normal operating position.
On a i r c r a f t equipped with an NTS indicator l i g h t , an NTS operational check

may be performed. This check can be performed before and a f t e r f l i g h t , and
can be used f o r trouble shooting and f a i l u r e detection. The NTS check is
made by observing the NTS indicator l i g h t during the engine cranking cycle.
The unfeathering pump must be energized to raise the propeller o i l pressure
level s u f f i c i e n t l y to activate a pressure-sensitive switch which w i l l i l l u -
minate the NTS indicator l i g h t . When the starter is energized, the NTS i n -
dicator l i g h t shou!d go out momentarily, then illuminates a f t e r the high i n -
i t i a l negative torque decreases.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 24
Dec 14/87
/lied
8. I g n i t i o n System (See Figure 11)
During engine s t a r t i n g , i g n i t i o n of the f u e l - a i r mixture within the com-

bustion chamber assembly is accomplished by the i g n i t i o n system. The i g n i -
tion u n i t is energized by 24 volts dc through a speed switch at the appro-
priate engine rpm and delivers high voltage pulses to the i g n i t e r plugs
through the i g n i t i o n leads. The i g n i t e r plugs produce high voltage pulses
across a gap to s t a r t combustion. The system is de-energized by the speed
switch when engine rpm reaches a value that indicates combustion has become
self-sustaining. In addition to i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l , the speed switch
provides e l e c t r i c a l control of the fuel s h u t o f f valve and the s t a r t e r -
generator as functions of engine rpm.
9. I n l e t A n t i - I c e System (See Figure 13)
The i n l e t a n t i - i c e valve, mounted on the lower l e f t side of the compressor

housing, is a normally-closed poppet-type valve actuated by a separate
switch. Plumbing lines connect the valve ports to the compressor a i r dis-
charge tap on the turbine plenum and to the i n l e t a n t i - i c i n g shield. When
the a n t i - i c e valve is open, i t permits flow of hot compressed a i r to pre-
vent formation of ice. A connection is provided from which hot a i r may be
obtained to provide a n t i - i c i n g to the a i r c r a f t i n l e t cowling and other
parts of the a i r c r a f t .
10. (Post SB 72-0042) Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) Indicating System

(Single Piece)
The interstage turbine temperature (ITT) sensor assembly is a one-piece as-
sembly consisting of twelve sensing probes located at the second stage sta-
t o r i n l e t position and a lead which connects to the engine compensating
r e s i s t o r control. The sensing probes are ungrounded and enclosed in
shields which are attached to the second stage stator assembly. The ITT
compensating r e s i s t o r control is mounted on the engine, and is used to
match engines at the same torque r a t i n g .
11. Compensatin9 Resistor

The compensating r e s i s t o r provides a means of matching engine indicated
temperatures at t h e i r rated power.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 25
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I TORQUE
TE
/MPERATUR
AA-BA,
EC
(ODES DA-FB)
LIMIT CONTROLLER
(AIR FRAMEMOUNTED)
(CODESAA-BA, DA-FB TORQUE/TEMPERATURE
TORQUETRANSDUCER LIMITERBYPASSVALVE
(AIR FRAMEMOUNTED)
(CODESAA-CC, GA) ~/STARTER-GENERATOR
STARTFUEL
SPEEDSWITCH
I (AIR FRAMEMOUNTED)
ENRICHMENT
VALVE / (CODES CA-CC, GA)
(CODES DA-FB)
STARTFUEL
REGULATORVALVE
OIL VENT VALVE ~ , J ~
R I
(CODES'CA-CC,
TORQUE SENSOR
TRANSMITTER
MAGNETIC DRAIN PLUG

(CHIP DETECTOR)
INTERSTAGETURBINE
TACHOMETERGENERATOR TEMPERATURESENSOR
AND HARNESSASSy
IGNITION UNIT FUEL
SHUTOFF
ANTI-ICE VALVE VALVE
COMPENSATING
RESISTORASSY
S-44G-193
El ectri cal Components Di agram (Typical )

UP136688
Figure 11 72-00-00
Page 26
Aug 12/91
/lied
m # Ili/~ o o
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXHAUST
II
AIR INLET I~ /, ,.. / -----I,.- I[
1 1 • <, o
k[ ,--,-- o
o: - 2 -or ' "~ "2"o'~.
~'~""
×'~'~
I F'~'"~ANTI-ICING SHIELD
INLET TEMPERATUREAND 1 t ° ° ° / IN,ETANT,-ICING

VALVE
PRESSURE SENSOR
'f
CUSTOMER
CONNECTION S-44G - 159
UP136688
Inlet Anti-lce System Schematic

Figure 13 72-00-00
R NOTE: Figure 12 deleted. Page 27/28
Aug 16/89
lied
12. Oil System (See Figures 14 and 15)
The lubrication system includes an internal pressure pump and three inter-
nal scavenge pumps. The pressure pump provides j e t and mist lubrication of
engine bearings and gears. The scavenge pumps, two in the reduction gear
section (in a single housing) and one in the turbine section, return l u b r i -
cating to the oil cooling system and oil tank assembly, and o i l - t o - f u e l
heat exchanger for fuel f i l t e r anti-icing. An oil vent valve unloads the
oil pumps (gearbox scavenge and pressure) during starting and is controlled
by speed switch. The lubrication system also supplies actuating oil to the
propeller control system and to the torque sensing components. The system
also includes an oil temperature bulb and magnetic drain plug for indica-
tion of oil temperature and the presence of magnetic particles in the o i l .
13. Electric.al Sy,stem (See Figure 11)

NOTE: The details of customer-furnished electrical system compo-
nent installation in the a i r c r a f t depend on the particular
aircraft. The equipment installation shown in Figure 11
is included as an aid to description and represents a typ-
ical installation only.
The electrical system includes engine and aircraft mounted components.

Certain components are optional or customer-furnished equipment. The elec-
t r i c a l system provides for required electrical starting and control opera-
tions as well as providing for operation of e l e c t r i c a l l y actuated compo-
nents, indicator lights, meters, etc, for monitoring engine operation.
Engine mounted electrical system components include an ignition system,
fuel shutoff valve, inlet anti-icing valve, start fuel regulator valve, oil
vent solenoid valve, and magnetic drain plug. A solid state electronic
speed switch is provided with the engine but is remotely located on the
a i r c r a f t . Optional or customer-furnished engine mounted electrical system
components may include a starter-generator, tachometer-generator and
beta/NTS pressure switches and oil pressure bulb.
(Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) A torque l i m i t e r system including an engine mounted

torque l imiter bypass valve and remotely located torque transducer and
torque/temperature controller is incorporated. (Refer to paragraph 6.F.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 29
Aug 12/91
lied
OILPRESSL~EREGULATORVALVE
SCAVENGEPUMPS P
RES
SUR
EPUMP
I / OILFLITER
[J[fIRm ~ ~ OIL FILTERBYPASSVALVE
OIL PRESSURESENSING
• I-~/~Z / CONNECT'O"
-'JEL OUT
OIL VENTVALVE
~IP4m COOLER
f °°I,,F ~,,
HI ..=.~ lr-I
£ . I ,
= i i ..L TURBINEBEARING
k SCAVENGEPUMP
iI i H p III i H "-~II
--
SCAVENGE INLETS
OIL TEMPERATUREBULB
~"~" OIL TANKASSEMBLY
S-44G- 160
Simpl i lied Lubricating 0il System Diagram (Typical)

Figure 14 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 30
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
LEGEND
TO TEMPERATURE i i ,i • • OIL PRESSURELINE

CONTROL AND_ r--J , L SCAVENGE "0 O O OIL SCAVENGE LINE
OIL COOLER " - ~ , ~ PUMPS OIL PRESSURE OIL SUCTION LINE
CONNECTION OIL RETURN LINE
OIL VENT LINE
PROPELLER 11 • • UNLOADING LINE-AIR
OIL VENT I ~ ~ ~ CONTROL OIL OIL, CONTROL-HIGH PRESSURE
VALVE "--....~J~ _ ~ o ! x ~. x x o 9 o o 9 ) SUPPLY
ORIFICE
I~ ~ ~t°I:,, ~ ~,, x.; ° ~ t P,LTER DIRECTION OF FLOW OR MOVEMENT
L ~ XL'--X-----;~OIo 0 0 0 O 0 9 0 ' C ' ~ --, BYPASS
1 ~ ,~ I-i / VALVE
ooeB oo-o~ o90q I ~1 P!
C
C
ACCESSORY C
¢ .wf FILTER
¢
Q
Q
PRESSURE OIL IN FROM OIL TANK
0
REGULATOR
0
Q
VALVE
0 PROPELLER GOVERNOR INLET
OIL PRESSURE
© i- ooe O 0 0 e O
PROPELLER GOVERNOR
bPRESSURE (CONTROL OIL PRESSURE)
c© PUMP IJAA--J~ NTS PRESSURE
~ REGULATOR GOVERNOR DUMP TO CASE
VALVE~ ORIFICE
© FEATHER PROPELLER GOVERNOR
(NTS PORT)
I
:1
o NTS CHECK- •PROPELLER PITCHCONTROL SCAVENGE
© VALVE PUMP
•RAW TORQUEPRESSURE
o
o
TO
PROPELLER 'CASE PRESSURE(NEGATIVE)
. 0 • 000 0
0
0
0
Io I~ 7
0
,0
0 ORIFICE TORQUE SENSOR
,0
0, f (:] 0 Q 0 ~ I
0
D EXHAUST
GEAR CASE
~0 0 0 0 Q 0 O0 0 0 0 0 oo o 0 VENT LINE
OIL TEMPERATURE
BULB BOSS
0 0 0
"~ 0 0 0 0
/
OVERBOARD AIR
VENT LINE
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
(UNFEATHER PUMP)
OIL TANK AND J
COOLER ASSEMBLY OIL TO FUEL
l OIL FROM TEMPERATURE CONTROL AND OIL COOLER 1 1
HEATER
,NK DRAIN S-44G-I 34
Oil System Schematic

Figure 15
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 31/32
Dec 14/87
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~~-=~Signal
14. Components and Accessories
A l l of the engine components and accessories are mounted in the reduction

gear and shaft section area except the thermocouple harness assembly, p r i -
mary and secondary fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies, turbine plenum
drain valves, flow d i v i d e r and drain valve, fuel s h u t o f f valve, i g n i t e r
plugs and i g n i t i o n leads which are mounted in the combustion and turbine
sections. The o i l pressure and scavenge pumps, and torque sensor assembly
are i n s t a l l e d i n t e r n a l l y in the reduction gear and shaft section. The
p r o p e l l e r governor, propeller pitch c o n t r o l , fuel control assembly, o i l
f i l t e r , negative torque sensor pressure regulator, and feathering valve as-
sembly and customer-furnished s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r , hydraulic pump, and
tachometer-generator, are i n s t a l l e d on mounting pads on the outside rear
face of the input housing assembly. The torque sensor pressure regulator
and o r i f i c e assembly is i n s t a l l e d on the center l e f t side of the input
housing assembly. The i g n i t i o n u n i t , fuel solenoid valve, and i n l e t a n t i -
ice valve are i n s t a l l e d on the l e f t side of the input housing assembly and
compressor housing assembly. The o i l f i l t e r bypass valve and o i l pressure
regulator valve assembly are i n s t a l l e d in bosses on the upper r i g h t side of
the input housing assembly. The o i l vent valve is located on the upper
f r o n t face of the input housing assembly. The i n l e t temperature and pres-
sure sensor is located in the i n l e t a i r duct on the lower r i g h t side of the
input housing assembly. Fuel flow d i v i d e r and plenum drain valves are
mounted on the bottom center of the engine.
15. Accessory Mounting Provisions
The accessory pad mounts are shown in Figure 16.
The speeds noted are based on a p r o p e l l e r shaft speed of 1591 rpm.
16. Directional References
CAUTION: ROTATEPROPELLERONLY IN NORMAL DIRECTION OF ROTATION.
Directional references to f r o n t and rear, r i g h t and l e f t , top and bottom

and clockwise and counterclockwise are made facing the turbine exhaust pipe
with the engine in a horizontal p o s i t i o n and the a i r i n l e t downward.
The d i r e c t i o n of r o t a t i o n of the propeller shaft is counterclockwise.
17. Engine Mounting Provisions
Five mounting pads are provided on the engine to s a t i s f y various mounting

requirements. Two pads are located at the top and bottom of the rear of
the plenum assembly. Two other pads are located on the r i g h t and l e f t
sides of the back face of the reduction gear section. One pad is located
at the top center of the rear face of the reduction gear section.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 33
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NEGATIVE TORQUE SENSOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR
FEATHERING VALVE
ENGINE MOUNT
STARTER-GENERATOR AIRCRAFT ACCESSORY

MOUNT (10,887 RPM) MOUNT (3,959 RPM)
FUEL PUMP/FUEL CONTROL

MOUNT (4,536 RPM)
TACHOMETER
GENERATORMOUNT
LEE PLUG AND (4,187 RPM)
OIL PRESSURE
TORQUE SENSII GAGE PORT
PRESSUREPORT
FILTER
CASE PRESSURE I NLET
ENGINE MOUNT 1
ENGINE MOUNT
PROPELLERGOVERNOR
MOUNT (3,754 RPM) PROPELLERPITCH
CONTROL MOUNT
OIL TEMERATUREBULB
OIL LINE PORT FOR BOSS (ALTERNATE)
TURBINE BEARING
F-44G-478
UP136688
Accessory Pad Mounts (Typical)

Figure 16 72-00-00
Page 34
Dec 14/87
l s l i e d
18. S.hippin9 Container In.formation
A. ATA300Type Reusable Container (PN PST110) (See Table 2)
This container is constructed of wood and cardboard. A flexible foam

form is placed into the container and the engine is nested in this
form. The oil flow metal tube (beta tube) is encased in styrofoam and
a cylindrical fiber container and nested with the engine. Another
flexible foam form is then placed over the engine and beta tube. The
shipping container is closed and secured with two straps.
Table 2. Shipping Container (PN PST110)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 inches
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 inches
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 inches
Weight (approximate) (engine included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 pounds
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 35/36
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CHAPTER 72 - TROUBLE SHOOTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
TROUBLE SHOOTING
General 101
Trouble Shooting Tips 101
Trouble Shooting Procedures 104
Pre-Start 105
Ground S t a r t 106
Air Start 110
Operation and Engine Check 111
Cruise 117
Landing 118
Reverse Thrust 120
After Landing 121
Shutdown 122
UP136688
TROUBLE SHOOTING
72-CONTENTS
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
GENERAL - TROUBLE SHOOTING
I. General
CAUTION: FOR THOSE TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES REQUIRING MANUAL

ROTATION OF PROPELLER, ONLY ROTATE PROPELLER IN NORMAL
DIRECTION OF ROTATION.
The fol lowing procedures provide information for i s o l a t i n g and eliminating

trouble which may occur during normal operation of the engine while in-
stalled in the a i r c r a f t .
Trouble shooting information is supplied in two sets of charts. The f i r s t

chart provides an index by dividing normal operation of the engine into
categories: p r e - s t a r t (procedures i and 2), ground s t a r t (procedures 3
through 17), a i r s t a r t (procedures 18 through 20), operation and engine
check (procedures 21 through 46), cruise (procedures 47 through 52), landing
(procedures 53 through 58), reverse t h r u s t (procedures 59 through 62), a f t e r
landing (procedures 63, and 67 through 71), and shutdown (procedures 64
through 66).
The chart for each category l i s t s possible trouble symptoms which may occur
during operation and l i s t s a specific trouble shooting procedure contained
in the second set of charts f o r each set of symptoms. The second set of
charts provide trouble shooting procedures in tree form to isolate the mal-
functioning part or component. The tree format is used by performing the
checks specified and then proceeding along the applicable path (OK or NOT
OK) to the next check or i n s t r u c t i o n u n t i l the trouble is isolated and
eliminated.
The second set of charts include references to certain test points. These
are i l l u s t r a t e d immediately following the trouble shooting charts in Figures
I01 through 104.
2. Trouble Shooting Tips
Values provided in the trouble shooting charts are as representative as

possible. However, the A i r c r a f t Flight and Maintenance Manuals are to be
used as a basis f o r operating, adjusting and evaluating the performance of
the engine i n s t a l l e d in the a i r c r a f t .
Before taking corrective action indicated by the trouble shooting proce-

dures, ensure the instruments used to obtain indications are checked for
accuracy.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 101
Dec 14/87
I ~ I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Engines bearing the same part number, though similar in characteristics, are
not i d e n t i c a l . This, coupled with tolerable error in the torque, rpm, fuel
flow, and temperature indicators, often causes differences in instrument
readings between normal, healthy engines. Engine performance should be
monitored for d a i l y changes and trends as compared with original installed
torque, fuel flow and ITT values. Cockpit readings obtained on each f l i g h t
w i l l aid greatly in monitoring engine performance.
The trouble shooting procedures are based on the symptoms which the engine
displays to the operator, as well as procedures of the Aircraft Flight r~an-
ual for starting and operating the engine. There is no deliberate duplica-
tion of troubles presented - that is, a trouble which would become apparent
when the engine is being started would not be covered in later operating
modes. Simple and easily diagnosed troubles such as loose connections or
incorrect control settings are not covered.
Table 101 provides specific maximum allowable fuel or oil leakages from en-
gine components as an aid to determining component s e r v i c e a b i l i t y .
NOTE: As the majority of engine i n s t a l l a t i o n s indicate fuel flow

in pounds per hour, this unit of measurement is used in the
fol lowing procedures.
Table 101. Fluid Leakage Limits
Location and Type ~laximum Allowable Limits
Fuel Pump Assembly Drive Pad

Fuel 5.0 cc/hr
Oil 0.5 cc/hr (approx eight drops per hr)
Hydraulic Pump Drive Pad 0.5 cc/hr (approx eight drops per hr)
Accessory, Tachometer-Generator, or 0.5 cc/hr (approx eight drops per hr)

Starter-Generator Shaft Seal ( o i l )
Fuel Pressure Regulator Drain

Connection (fuel)
During Regulator Operation 10.0 cc/mi n
During Normal Engine Running 1.0 cc/min
Fuel Control Assembly Drain (fuel) 1.0 cc/mi n
Flow Divider and Drain Valve Drain 5.0 cc/mi n

(fuel)
Propeller Shaft Seal 0.5 cc/hr (approx eight drops per hr)
Compressor Seal ( o i l ) (as viewed at 1.0 cc/min (approx 15 drops per min)
a i r i n l e t ) (Static leak only)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 102
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table 101. Fluid Leakage Limits (Cont)
Location and Type Maximum Allowable Limits
Turbine Seal ( o i l ) (Check leakage 1.0 cc/min (approx 15 drops per min)
during operation by monitoring oil
consumption of engine. Consumption
shall not exceed one quart per twelve
and one half hours operation. Engine
shall not emit smoke to indicate
excessive leakage during operation.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 103
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
3. Trouble Shooting Procedures
NOTE: In order to satisfy high quality operational standards, as
well as ensuring the accuracy of readings obtained during
the test and calibration of the equipment, i t is recom-
mended that all instrumentation and gages to be used be
checked on a periodic basis against instrumentation and
gages of known accuracy. Table 102 provides a l i s t of
equipment and materials required to perform Trouble Shoot-
ing Procedures.
Table 102. Equipment and Materials
Equipment or Materials Descri pti on
Gage A (Pressure) Capable of indicating 0-250 psi, +2

percent accuracy.
Gage B (Pressure) Capable of indicating 0-300 psi, +2
percent accuracy.
Gage C (Pressure) Capable of indicating 0-600 psi, +2
percent accuracy.
Gage D (Pressure) Capable of indicating 0-1000 psi, +2
percent accuracy.
Gage (Vacuum) Capable of indicating 0-10 psi +-2

percent accuracy.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 104
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRE-START. IF-
I OK-PROCEEDTO GROUNDSTART. NOT OK-PROPELLER WILL NOT UNFEATHER

ADEQUATELY TO ENGAGESTART LOCKS.
PROCEDURE 1.
(CODES DA-FB) SQUEAKINGOR SQUEAL-

ING SOUND IS HEARDWHENTURNING
ENGINE THROUGH BY HANDAFTER ENGINE
HAS REMAINED STATIC FOR SEVERAL
HOURS. PROCEDURE2.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 105
Aug 16/89
I ~ MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
GROUND START. IF-
OK-PROCEED TO AIR START, NOT OK-STARTER DOES NOT MOTOR

ENGINE. PROCEDURE3.
! NOT OK-ENGINE MOTORS-NOLIGHT OFF-

ENGINE SPEED LESS THAN 10 PERCENT.
PROCEDURE 4.
NOT OK-ENGINE MOTORS-NOLIGHT OFF-

ENGINE SPEED OVER 16 PERCENT-COCKPIT
FUEL PRESSUREOK-NO FUEL FLOW-
IGNITION SNAP AUDIBLE. PROCEDURE5.
NOT OK-ENGINE MOTORS-NOLIGHT OFF-

ENGINE SPEED OVER 16 PERCENT-COCKPIT
FUEL PRESSUREOK-PROPER FUEL FLOW-NO
AUDIBLE IGNITION SNAP. PROCEDURE6.
k_
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 106
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
GROUND START, IF- (CONT)
NOT OK-ENGINE MOTORS-NO LIGHT OFF-

ENGINE SPEED ABOVE 16 PERCENT-COCK-
PIT FUEL PRESSURE OK-NO FUEL FLOW-NO
AUDIBLE IGNITION SNAP. PROCEDURE7.

FUEL FLOW BELOW 50 LB/HR-ENGINE
SPEED ABOVE 16 PERCENT-IGNITION
SNAP AUDIBLE, PROCEDURE8.

NORMAL FUEL FLOW-IGNITION SNAP
AUDIBLE-ENGINE SPEED ABOVE 16 PER-
CENT. PROCEDURE9.
NOT OK-LIGHT OFF OK-ENGINE DOES NOT

ACCELERATE BEYOND 25 TO 40 PERCENT
ENGINE SPEED-HIGH TURBINE TEMPER-
ATURE PROCEDURE i0.
k
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 107
Dec 14/87
~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
GROUND START. IF- (CONT)

ACCELERATE BEYOND45 TO 60 PERCENT
ENGINE SPEED-HIGH TURBINE TEMPER-
ATURE. PROCEDURE11.

ACCELERATE TO SPEED OR EXCESSIVE
TIME REQUIRED TO ACCELERATETO
SPEED-LOW TURBINE TEMPERATURE FUEL
PRESSURE NORMAL. PROCEDURE12.
NOT OK-FLAME OUT DURING START-FUEL

PRESSURE ERRATIC. PROCEDURE13.
NOT OK-FLAME OUT DURING START-FUEL

PRESSURE NORMAL. PROCEDURE14.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 108
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
GROUND START. IF- (CONT)
NOT OK-EXCESSIVE TURBINE TEMPERATURE

DURING ACCELERATION BELOW50 PERCENT
ENGINE SPEEDOR FLAMING START.
(ABORT START PRIOR TO PASSING
TURBINE TEMPERATURE LIMITS.)
PROCEDURE 15.
NOT OK-ENGINE SPEED-FUEL FLOW-TUR-

BINE TEMPERATURE AND TORQUECYCLING
DURING GROUNDOPERATING CONDITIONS.
PROCEDURE 16.
1 NOT OK-EXCESSIVE VIBRATIONS DURING

START OR GROUND IDLE. PROCEDURE17.
UP136688
72-O0-00
Page 109
Dec 14/87
~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
i AIR START. IF-
OK-PROCEED TO OPERATION AND ENGINE

CHECK.
1 NOT OK-ENGINE WILL NOT WINDMILL DUR-
ING AIRSTART ATTEMPT. PROCEDURE18.
NOT OK-ENGINE WINDMILLING SPEED TOO

SLOW TO ACTUATE SPEED SWITCH DURING
ATTEMPTED AIRSTART-AIRSPEED IN COM-
PLIANCE WITH AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
PROCEDURE 19.
NOT OK-ENGINE WINDMILLING SPEED IN

EXCESS OF 35 PERCENTRPM WHENUNDER
CONTROL OF NTS. PROCEDURE20.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 110
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
OPERATION AND ENGINE CHECK. IF-
OK-PROCEED TO CRUISE. NOT OK-TURBINE TEMPERATURELOW ON

ONE ENGINE-TORQUE AND FUEL FLOWS
MATCH-POWER IS SYMMETRICAL.
PROCEDURE 21.
NOT OK-OIL PRESSURE LOW OR FLUCTU-

ATING. PROCEDURE22.
NOT OK-OIL FILTER BYPASS VALVE INDI-

CATOR BUTTON EXTENDS. PROCEDURE23.
NOT OK-HIGH OIL PRESSURE. PROCEDURE

24.
I
NOT OK-INSTALLATION WITH COMMON
DRAIN MANIFOLD-OIL CONTAMINATEDWITH
FUEL. PROCEDURE25.
k_,r
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 111
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
OPERATION AND ENGINE CHECK. IF- (CONT)I
I NOT OK-INSTALLATION WITH SEPARATE

DRAIN LINES-OIL CONTAMINATEDWITH
FUEL. PROCEDURE26.
NOT OK-OVERSPEEDGOVERNORINDICATES
LOW WITH PROPELLERON START LOCKS.
PROCEDURE 27.
NOT OK-OVERSPEEDGOVERNORINDICATES
HIGH WITH PROPELLERON START LOCKS.
PROCEDURE 28.
NOT OK-UNDERSPEEDGOVERNORHIGH RPM

SETTING CORRECTWITH SPEED LEVER
POSITIONED AT TAKEOFF-PROPELLEROFF
START LOCKS-POWERLEVER IS IN AB-
NOrmAL POSITION TO PROVIDE MINIMUM
FUEL FLOW. PROCEDURE29.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 112
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
OPERATION AND ENGINE CHECK. IF- (CONT)
NOT OK-UNDERSPEEDGOVERNORHIGH RPM

SETTING INCORRECT WITH SPEED LEVER
POSITIONED AT TAKEOFF-PROPELLER OFF
START LOCKS-POWER LEVER IN PROPER
POSITION TOWARD REVERSE TO PROVIDE
MINIMUM FUEL FLOW. PROCEDURE30.
NOT OK-UNDERSPEED GOVERNORLOW RPM

SETTING INCORRECT WITH SPEED LEVER
POSITIONED AT MINIMUM-PROPELLER OFF
START LOCKS-POWER LEVER IN PROPER
POSITION TOWARD REVERSE TO PROVIDE
NOT OK-ENGINE FLAMES OUT/BLOWS OUT

WHEN SPEED LEVER IS RAPIDLY MOVED
FROM HIGH SPEED STOP TO LOW SPEED
TOP WITH POWERLEVER AT POSITION OF
NOT OK-PROPELLER START LOCKS DO NOT

RELEASE WITH ENGINE AT SPEED AND
POWER LEVER IN REVERSE THRUST-BETA
LIGHT ON. PROCEDURE33.
k_
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 113
Dec 14/87
[ ~ I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
OPERATION AND ENGINE CHECK. IF- (CONT)I
NOT OK-NO PROPELLERRESPONSEWITH

POWER LEVER AT REVERSETHRUST-ENGINE
AT SPEED-OIL PRESSURENORMAL-BETA
LIGHT OFF PROPELLERRESPONDS
NORMALLY TO UNFEATHERINGPUMP.
PROCEDURE 34.
NOT OK-PROPELLERWILL NOT MOVEOFF

START LOCKS WITH ENGINE AT SPEED-
POWER LEVER AT REVERSETHRUST-BETA
LIGHT OFF-ENGINE OIL PRESSURENORMAL
PROCEDURE 35.
NOT OK-BETA LIGHT DOES NOT GO ON

WHEN REVERSETHRUST SELECTED BUT
PROPELLER RESPONDSNORMALLY.
PROCEDURE 36.
k.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 114
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO, 72-01-27)
OPERATOP~I AND ENGINE CHECK. IF- (CONT
NOT OK-DURING PROP GOVERNORCHECK-

LOW OR HIGH RPM-ENGINE SPEED TOO LOW
OR HIGH WHILE OPERATING ON PROPELLER
GOVERNOR-POWER LEVER AT CRUISE.
PROCEDURE 37.
I
NOT OK-PROPELLER GOVERNORSHIFT UP-
WARD OR FAILURE TO NTS.
PROCEDURE 38.
I
NOT OK-ENGINE TORQUE INDICATION NOT
REPEATABLE WITH POWERLEVER AT
FLIGHT IDLE AND SPEED LEVER AT
MAXIMUM. PROCEDURE39.
NOT OK-LOW TORQUE INDICATED WITH

TURBINE TEMPERATURESET FOR MAXIMUM
TAKEOFF-FUEL FLOW NORMAL-OIL
TEMPERATURE NORMAL. PROCEDURE40.
k.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 115
Dec 14/87
l ~ I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I OPERATION AND ENGINE CHECK.
1
NOT OK-HIGH TORQUE WHENTURBINE
TEMPERATURE SET FOR ~IAXIMUMTAKEOFF-
FUEL FLOW NORMAL. PROCEDURE41.
NOT OK-LOW TORQUE READING LJHEN

TURBINE TEMPERATURESET FOR MAXIMUM I
TAKEOFF-FUEL FLOW LOW. PROCEDURE42.1
I
NOT OK-(CODES AA-CC) SLOWACCELERA-

TION OR WILL NOT REACHMAXIMUMPOWER
OR OVERSPEEDSWITH PROPELLERON
LOCKS. PROCEDURE43.
! NOT OK-LOW TORQUE-TURBINETEMPER-

ATURE AND FUEL FLOWWITH POWERLEVER
FULL FORWARD. PROCEDURE44 OR 45.
NOT OK-BETA LIGHT STAYS ON WHEN

POWERLEVER ADVANCEDTOWARDTAKEOFF-
ENGINE SPEED AT NORMALPROPELLER
GOVERNOR SPEED. PROCEDURE46.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 116
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CRUISE (TWO ENGINE APPLICATION), IF- 1
OK-PROCEED TO LANDING. I NOT OK-LOWTURBINE TEIiPERATUREWITH

MATCHED TORQUE-FUELFLOW AND RPM.
PROCEDURE47,
i
NOT OK-UNACCEPTABLEPOWERLEVER
SPLIT WITH ENGINE SPEED-TORQUE-FUEL
FLOW MATCHED. PROCEDURE48.
NOT OK-POWERLEVERS SPLIT AT ALTI-

TUDE-SPLIT INCREASESAS ALTITUDE
INCREASES (NO SPLIT ON TAKEOFF OR
GROUND CHECK). PROCEDURE49 OR 50.
NOT OK-HIGH FUEL FLOWAT MAXI~IUM

POWER SETTING WITH TORQUEAND TUR-
BINE TEMPERATUREMATCHED.
PROCEDURE 51.
1 NOT OK-UNINTENTIONALSHUTDOWNDURING
FLIGHT. PROCEDURE52.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 117
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
LANDING. IF-
OK PROCEEDTO REVERSE THRUST. NOT OK-ASYMMETRICTHRUST ON LANDING

WITH POWERLEVER AT FLIGHT IDLE-BETA
LIGHTS NOT ON (SYMMETRYRESTORED
AFTER BETA LIGHTS GO ON). PROCEDURE
53.
NOT OK-ASYMMETRICTHRUST ON LANDING

WITH POWERLEVER AT FLIGHT IDLE-BETA
LIGHT FOR LOW THRUST ENGINE ON-
SYMMETRYRESTORED AFTER BOTH BETA
LIGHTS ON AND FO~ARD SPEED DE-
CREASES. PROCEDURE54.
NOT OK-ASYMMETRICTHRUST ON LANDING

BETA LIGHT FOR HIGH THRUST ENGINE
ON-ASYMMETRYWORSENSAS FORWARD
SPEED DECREASES. PROCEDURE55.
k_
UP136688
72-00-0O
Page 118
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
LANDING. IF- (CONT)
NOT OK-(NON-STOL AIRCRAFT) AIRCRAFT

SINK RATE TOO HIGH AT APPROACH AIR-
SPEED WITH POWERLEVERS AT FLIGHT
IDLE-THRUST SYMMETRICAL.
PROCEDURE 56.
NOT OK-AIRCRAFT FLOATS ON LANDING-

THRUST SYMMETRICAL-BETALIGHTS ON
DURING FLARE MANEUVER~JHEN POWER
LEVERS SET TO FLIGHT IDLE. PROCE-
DURE 57.
NOT OK-AIRCRAFT FLOATS ON LANDING-

THRUST SYMMETRICAL-BETA LIGHTS OFF
DURING FLARE MANEUVERWHEN POWER
LEVERS SET TO FLIGHT IDLE. PROCE-
DURE 58,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 119
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I REVERSE THRUST. IF-
i
OK-PROCEED TO AFTER LANDING. NOT OK-ASYfIMETRIC THRUST WHEN PROPS
ARE REVERSED-OPERATIONAL CHECK SHOWS
SAME FUEL FLOW-TURBINE TEMPERATURE-
TORQUE AND SPEED ON BOTH ENGINES
ALTHOUGH ONE ENGINE SLOWERTO
REVERSE (BETA LIGHT SLOW TO COME ON
IN LANDING AND REVERSE).
PROCEDURE 59.
NOT-OK ASYMMETRIC THRUST WHEN PRO-

PELLERS REVERSED-BETA LIGHT ON-
OPERATIONAL CHECK SHOWS ONE ENGINE
HIGH IN TURBINE TEMPERATURE-FUEL
FLOW AND TORQUE COMPAREDTO OTHER
ENGINE. PROCEDURE60.
1
NOT OK-ENGINE SPEED DECAYS WHEN RE-
VERSE THRUST SELECTED. PROCEDURE
61.
I NOT OK-REVERSE RESPONSE SLOW AT HIGH

LANDING SPEEDS. PROCEDURE62.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 120
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
AFTER LANDING. IF-
OK-PROCEED TO SHUTDOWN.
I NOT OK-UNINTENTIONAL SHUTDOWNDURING

GROUND OPERATION. PROCEDURE63.
NOT OK-MALFUNCTION ISOLATED TO

TORQUE AND TEMPERATURELIMITING
SYSTEM-REFER TO PROCEDURES67
THROUGH 71.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 121
Dec 14/87
/lied
SHUTDOWN. IF-
! NOT OK-NOISY DECELERATION FOLLOWING

SHUTDOWN, PROCEDURE64.
NOT OK-PROPELLER FAILS TO ENGAGE

START LOCKS AFTER SHUTDOWN.
PROCEDURE 65,
NOT OK-OIL CONSUMPTIONHIGH.

PROCEDURE 66.
R NOT OK-WHITE SMOKECOMING FROMTAIL-

R PIPE AFTER SHUTDOWN. PROCEDURE66A.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 122
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 1
PROPELLER WILL NOT UNFEATHER

ADEQUATELY TO ENGAGE START
LOCKS-CHECK THAT POWERLEVER IS AT
FULL REVERSE. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR LOW OIL SUPPLY. NOT OK-REPOSITION POWERLEVER.

CAUTION: DO NOT SERVICE OIL SUPPLY
UNTIL OIL HAS BEEN SCAVENGED FROM
GEARCASE-IF STARTER IS USED OBSERVE
TIME LI~IIT ESTABLISHED BY STARTER
MANUFACTURER. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT FEATHERING VALVE IS NOT OK-MOTOR ENGINE TO SCAVENGE OIL

NOT MANUALLY ACTUATED BY COCKPIT FROM GEARCASE AND RETURN OIL TO OIL
FEATHERING CONTROL. IF- TANK ASSEMBLY.
OK-CHECK FOR INOPERATIVE UNFEATHER- NOT OK-REPOSITION FEATHERING VALVE

ING PUMP (UNFEATHERING PUMP OPER- CONTROL.
ATION IS AUDIBLE). IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 123
Dec 14/87
~I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 1 I CONT)
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT RIGGING TO FEATH- NOT OK-CHECK FOR PROPER AIRCRAFT

ERING VALVE. IF- SWITCH POSITIONS AND WIRING CONTI-
NUITY-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
HANUAL.
i
OK-CONNECT GAGE (B, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-RERIG IN ACCORDANCEWITH
UNFEATHERING PUMP OUTPUT TO READ AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
DEADHEAD PRESSURE-REFERTO AIRCRAFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL-DEADHEAD PRESSURE
SHALL BE 125 PSlG MINIrIUM. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR CONTAHINATION OF I NOT OK-REPLACE UNFEATHERING PUMP.

FEATHERING VALVE. IF-
OK-CAP OFF NTS SYSTEM UPSTREAM OF NOT OK-REMOVE CONTAHINATION OR RE-

NTS CHECK VALVE (IF NTS SYSTEM PLACE FEATHERING VALVE. REFERTO
INSTALLED)-REFER TO FIGURES I01 72-10-07, HAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
THROUGH I03-RECHECK UNFEATHER
OPERATION. IF-
k
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 124
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE I (CONT)
OK-CHECK PACKINGS ON NTS PRESSURE NOT OK-REMOVE AND INSPECT BETA TUBE-
REGULATOR. IF- REFER TO 72-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. IF-
R OK-CHECK PRO- NOT OK-REPLACE

R PELLER PITCH PACKINGS.
R CONTROL FOR
R INTERNAL LEAK-
R AGE-REFER TO
R 72-10-02,
R MAINTENANCE
R PRACTICES.
OK-WITH BETA TUBE REMOVED ENSURE NOT OK-AS APPLICABLE REPLACE PACK-
PROPELLER CAN BE EXTERNALLY ~IOVED INGS OR BETA TUBE-NOTE: D~IAGE AT
THROUGH FULL RANGE OF TRAVEL. IF- SERVO LAND ON BETA TUBE INDICATES
POSSIBLE DAMAGETO PROPELLER PITCH
CONTROL-REPAIR OR REPLACE PROPELLER
PITCH CONTROL (INTERNAL LEAKAGE
INDICATED)-REFER TO 72-10-02,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES-CHECK
PROPELLER UNFEATHERING.
k
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 125
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE ~IANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE I (CONT)
OK-REMOVE PROPELLER GOVERNORAND NOT OK-REPLACE PROPELLER.

INSPECT GASKET-REFER TO 72-10-03,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. IF-
OK-REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNORAND NOT OK-REPLACE GASKET.

CHECK PROPELLER UNFEATHERING. IF-
NOT OK-REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A

GARRETT AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER INVESTIGATION.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 126
Dec 14/87
~ lslied
PROCEDURE 2
(CODES DA-FB) SQUEAKINGOR SQUEAL-

ING SOUND IS HEARD WHEN TURNING ENGINE
THROUGH BY HAND AFTER ENGINE HAS RE-
MAINED STATIC FOR SEVERAL HOURS-OPEN
AIRCRAFT FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE AND TURN
ON AIRCRAFT FUEL BOOST PUMPS. SLOWLY
TURN PROPELLER BY HAND IN NORMAL
DIRECTION OF ROTATION WHILE LISTENING
FOR SQUEAKING OR SQUEALING SOUND. IF-
OK-SQUEAKING OR SQUEALING WAS FROM NOT OK-PURGE AIR FROM NORMALLY FUEL
CARBON SHAFT BUSHING IN ENGINE LUBRICATED AREAS OF ENGINE DRIVEN
DRIVEN FUEL PUMP-PROCEEDWITH NORMAL FUEL PUMP BY DISCONNECTING FUEL LINE
OPERATION OF ENGINE. BETWEEN FUEL PUMP AND START PRESSURE
REGULATOR (SPR) SOLENOID VALVE-PRO-
VIDE CONTAINER FOR FUEL DRAINAGE-
TURN AIRCRAFT BOOST PUMP ON AND
ROTATE ENGINE BY HAND IN NORMAL
DIRECTION OF ROTATION-LISTEN FOR
SQUEAKING OR SQUEALING SOUND. IF-
OK-RECONNECT FUEL LINE BETWEEN FUEL NOT OK-REFER TO PROCEDURE64.

PUMP AND START PRESSURE REGULATOR
(SPR) SOLENOID VALVE AND CHECK FUEL
LINE FOR LEAKAGE-PROCEEDWITH
NORMAL OPERATION OF ENGINE.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 127
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 3
STARTER DOES NOT MOTORENGINE-CHECK

AIRCRAFT POWERSOURCEWITH NO LOAD.
IF-
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT POWERSOURCEWHEN NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

STARTER ENERGIZED. IF- MANUAL.
OK-CHECK VOLTAGE AT STARTER- NOT OK-(VOLTAGE LOW)-PULL PROPELLER

GENERATOR. IF- THROUGH BY HAND TO CHECK FOR BINDING
WHICH MAY INDICATE INTERNAL FAILURE.
IF-
I
OK-REPLACE NOT OK-CHECK FOR OK-REPLACE NOT OK-REMOVE
STARTER/ CONTINUITY STARTER/ SHAFT DRIVEN AC-
GENERATOR. ACROSS TERMINALS GENERATOR. CESSORIES FROM
A AND G OF SPEED REDUCTION GEAR
SWITCH. IF- SECTION AND RE-
CHECK FOR BIND-
ING. IF-
k_,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 128
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 3 I CONT)
OK-REFER TO NOT OK-REPLACE OK-REPLACE AC- NOT OK-REMOVE

AIRCRAFT MAIN- SPEED SWITCH. CESSORY CAUSING ENGINE-RETURN TO
TENANCE MANUAL REFER TO 74-30- BINDING. A GARRETT
(AIRCRAFT WIRING 01, MAINTENANCE AUTHORIZED
FAULTY). PRACTICES OR SERVICE FACILITY
AIRCRAFT MAIN- FOR FURTHER
TENANCE MANUAL. INVESTIGATION.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 129
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 4
ENGINE MOTORS-NO LIGHT OFF-ENGINE

SPEED LESS THAN 10 PERCENT-CHECKAIR-
CRAFT POWERSOURCE. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT PROPELLER IS ON NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

START LOCKS. IF- MANUAL. CHECKAIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL
POWER SOURCE.
OK-PULL PROPELLER THROUGHBY HANDTO NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

CHECK FOR INTERNAL BINDING. IF- MANUAL. CHECKPROPELLER START LOCK
ADJUSTMENT.
OK-CHECK VOLTAGE AT STARTER- NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-

GENERATOR. IF- SORIES FROM REDUCTION GEAR SECTION
AND RECHECK FOR INTERNAL BINDING.
IF-
NOT OK-REFER TO OK-REPLACE AC- NOT OK-REMOVE

AIRCRAFT MAINTE- CESSORY CAUSING ENGINE-RETURN TO
NANCE MANUAL. BINDING. A GARRETT
CHECK ELECTRICAL AUTHORIZED
CONTROL SYSTEM, SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER
INVESTIGATION.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 130
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 5

SPEED ABOVE 16 PERCENT-NO FUEL FLOW-
IGNITION SNAP AUDIBLE-(CAUTION:
OBSERVE TIME LIMITS ON STARTER-
GENERATOR AND AIRCRAFT BATTERY (IF
USED) WHEN MOTORING ENGINE)-CHECK THAT
COCKPIT CONTROL FOR FEATHERING VALVE
IS IN NORMAL POSITION. IF-
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT FUEL SHUTOFF NOT OK-SET CONTROLSTO NORMAL

VALVES FOR PROPER OPERATION AND POSITION.
NORMAL FUEL SUPPLY TO ENGINE, IF-
OK-CHK FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE MANUAL NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

OVERRIDE ARM FOR PROPER RIGGING. MANUAL-TROUBLE SHOOTING SECTION,
IF-
OK-CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ACROSS PINS A NOT OK-CORRECT FAULTY RIGGING-REFER

AND C OF FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR-VOLTAGESHALL
BE PRESENT WITH ENGINE SPEED
ABOVE APPROXIMATELY 10 PERCENT.
IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 131
Dec 14/87
~ l s l i e d
PROCEDURE 5 ICONT)
T
OK-DISCONNECT METERED FUEL LINE
I
NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
(FIGURES 101 THROUGH103) BETWEEN MANUAL-ELECTRICAL PROBLEM IN FUEL
FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL SHUTOFF SHUTOFF VALVE CIRCUITRY.
VALVE-DISCONNECT WIRING HARNESS
ASSEMBLY ELECTRICAL CONNECTORTO
IGNITION UNIT (SEE FIGURE IOI)-
CHECK FOR FUEL FLOW FROM FUEL
CONTROL UNIT WHILE MOTORINGENGINE
R UP TO 15 PERCENT ENGINE SPEED. IF-
R OK-WITH ENGINE RPM ABOVE 10 PERCENT (CODES DA-GA) NOT OK-CHECK FUEL PUMP
CHECK FOR FUEL FLOW FR~,I SHUTOFF ASSEMBLY HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
VALVE DISCHARGE PORT (FIGURES 101 FOR STICKING OR CONTAMINATIONOR
THROUGH 103) TO FLOW DIVIDER. IF- DETERIORATED PACKINGS-REFER TO
73-21-06. IF-
I
R OK-PERFORM FUEL NOT OK-REPLACE (CODES DA-FB) OK- (CODES DA-GA)
NOZZLE AND MANI- FUEL SHUTOFF CHECK PRESSURIZ- NOT OK-REMOVE
FOLD ASSEMBLY VALVE-REFER TO ING VALVE FOR AND CLEAN HIGH
FUNCTIONAL CHECK- 73-10-06. STICKING OR CON- PRESSURE RELIEF
REFER TO TAMINATION OR VALVE-REFER
72-00-00 DAMAGED PACK- 73-21-06.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST. INGS-REFER TO
IF- 73-21-04. IF-
R (CODE GA) OK-

R CHECK PRESSURE
R REGULATING VALVE
R FOR STICKING OR
R CONTAMINATION OR
R DAMAGED PACK-
R INGS-REFER TO
R 73-21-04. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 132
Aug 12/91
lied
P_ROCEDURE 5 (C.ONT)
R NOT OK-REMOVE- (CODES DA-GA) I (CODES DA-FB)

R CLEAN-INSPECT AN[ OK-CHECK FUEL ~NOT OK-CLEAN OR
R TEST PRIMARY AND CONTROL PS3 ROL- I REPAIR PRESSUR-
R SECONDARY FUEL LING DIAPHRAGM- IZING VALVE
R NOZZLE AND MANI- FOR LEAKAGE I REFER TO
R FOLD ASSEMBLY- REFER TO 73-21-04.
R REFER TO 73-21-05,
R 73-10-09. ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
IF-
R (CODE GA) NOT

R OK-CLEAN OR
R REPAIR PRESSURE
R REGULATING VALVE-
R REFER TO
R 73-21-04.
OK-REMOVE AND (CODES DA-GA)

REPLACE FUEL NOT OK-REPLACE
PUMPASSEMBLY- FUEL CONTROL
REFER TO UNIT-REFER TO
73-21-06-REPEAT 73-21-05.
CHECK FOR 300
PSIG. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT-REFER TO
73-21-05.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 133
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 6

SPEED ABOVE 16 PERCENT-COCKPIT FUEL
PRESSURE INDICATION OK-PROPER FUEL
FLOW-NO AUDIBLE IGNITION SNAP
CAUTION: OBSERVETIME LIMITS
ER-GENERATOR AND AIRCRAFT
BATTERY (IF USED) WHENMOTORING ENGINE)
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ACROSS PINS A AND B
OF IGNITION UNIT ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR. IF-
OK-REPLACE IGNITION UNIT-REFER TO NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

74-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. MANUAL-PROBLEM IN IGNITION UNIT
IF- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
NOT OK-REPLACE
IGNITER PLUGS-
REFER TO 74-20-
01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE
IGNITION LEADS-
REFER TO 74-20-
01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 134
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 7

SPEED ABOVE 16 PERCENT-COCKPIT FUEL
PRESSURE INDICATION OK-NO FUEL FLOW-NO
AUDIBLE IGNITION SNAP IS HEARD.
CAUTION: OBSERVETIME LIMITS ON
STARTER-GENERATOR AND AIRCRAFT BATTERY
IF USED WHEN MOTORING ENGINE. REFER
TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR
PROPER ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONTO SPEED
SWITCH. IF-
OK-REPLACE SPEED SWITCH. REFERTO NOT OK-REPAIR AIRCRAFT IN ACCORDANCE

AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF- WITH AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
NOT OK-REFER TO PROCEDURES 5 AND 6.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 135
Dec 14/87
~ lslied
PROCEDURE 8
ENGINE MOTORS-NO LIGHT OFF-FUEL FLOW

BELOW 50 LB/HR-ENGINE SPEED OVER 16
PERCENT-IGNITION SNAP AUDIBLE-CONNECT
GAGE (D, TABLE 102) TO MEASURE HIGH
PRESSURE PUMP DISCHARGE AT FUEL
PRESSURE TAP PORT ON FUEL CONTROL
ASSEMBLY-DISCONNECT WIRING HARNESS
ASSEMBLY ELECTRICAL CONNECTORTO
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE (SEE FIGURES I01
THROUGH 103) MOTOR ENGINE IAW AIRCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL-PRESSURE INDICATED ON
PRESSURE GAGE SHALL BE 300 PSI MINIMUM
R WITH ENGINE SPEED UP TO 15 PERCENT.
IF-
R OK-CHECK FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD (CODES DA-GA) NOT OK-CHECK FUEL PUMP
ASSEMBLIES. REFERTO 72-00-00, ASSEMBLY HIGH PRESSURERELIEF VALVE
ADJUSTMENT/TEST. FOR STICKING OR CONTAMINATIONOR
DETERIORATED PACKINGS. IF-
(CODES DA-FB) (CODES DA-GA)

OK-CHECK PRES- NOT OK-REMOVE
SURIZING VALVE AND CLEAN HIGH
FOR STICKING OR PRESSURE RELIEF
CONTAMINATION OR VALVE-REFER TO
DAMAGED PACK- 73-21-06.
INGS. IF-
R (CODE GA) OK-

R CHECK PRESSURE
R REGULATING VALVE
R FOR STICKING OR
R CONTAMINATION OR
R DAMAGED PACKINGS-
R REFER TO
UP136688
R 73-21-04. IF-
72-00-00
Page 136
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ /lied
ignal
PROCEDURE 8 (CONT)
R (CODES DA-GA) (CODES DA-FB)

R OK-CHECK FUEL NOT OK-CLEAN OR
R CONTROL PS3 ROL- REPAIR PRESSUR-
R LING DIAPHRAGM IZING VALVE-
R FOR LEAKAGE- REFER TO
R REFER TO 73-21-04.
R 73-21-05,
R ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
R IF-
R (CODE GA) NOT

R OK-CLEAN OR
R REPAIR PRESSURE
R REGULATING VALVE-
R REFER TO
R 73-21-04.

PUMP ASSEMBLY- FUEL CONTROL
73-21-06-REPEAT 73-21-05.
CHECK FOR 300
PSIG. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT-REFER TO
73-21-05.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 137
Aug 12/91
I~I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 9
ENGINE MOTORS-NOLIGHT OFF-NORMAL FUEL

FLOW-IGNITION SNAPAUDIBLE-ENGINE
SPEED OVER16 PERCENT-CHECK FOR MAL-
FUNCTIONING FLOWDIVIDER VALVE AS
EVIDENT BY UNBURNED FUEL IN EXHAUST.
IF-
OK-FUEL VAPORFROMEXHAUSTAND SUB- NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOWDI-

SEQUENT DRAINAGE FROMPLENUMDRAINS- VIDER VALVE-REFER TO 73-10-07,
CHECK PRIMARY FUEL NOZZLE SHROUDS MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION AND POSSI-
BLE RESTRICTION. IF-
NOT OK-REMOVE RESTRICTION OR REPOSI-

TION PRIMARY FUEL NOZZLE SHROUDS.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 138
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 10
LIGHT OFF OK-ENGINE DOESNOT ACCELER-

ATE BEYOND25 TO 40 PERCENT ENGINE
SPEED-HIGH TURBINE TEMPERATURE-CHECK
FOR OBSTRUCTION AT AIR INLET OR
EXHAUST. IF-
I
OK-ENSURE PROPELLER IS ON START NOT OK-CLEAR OBSTRUCTION.
LOCKS. IF-
OK-CHECK POWERLEVER FOR PROPER NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MAN-

POSITION (NOT IN PARTIAL REVERSE). UAL FOR PROPERSTART PROCEDURE.
IF-
OK-CHECK POWERLEVEROR ENGINE CON- I NOT OK-REPOSITION POWERLEVER.

TROLS FOR IMPROPERRIGGING THAT
COULD CAUSESOMEDEGREEOF REVERSE
BLADE ANGLE. IF-
OK-CHECK SPEED SWITCH FOR PREMATURE NOT OK-CORRECT FAULTY RIGGING-REFER

STARTER POWERINTERRUPTION-NORMAL TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR
STARTER DROP OUT IS AT APPROXIMATELY AIRCRAFT TO ENGINE CONTROLS
50 PERCENTENGINE SPEED. IF- RIGGING.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 139
Dec 14/87
MAINTEANCE MANOA
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 10 (CONT)
T
OK-PULL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HAND NOT OK-CHECK FOR AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL
TO CHECK FOR BINDING WHICH MAY FAULT-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
INDICATE INTERNAL FAILURE. IF- MANUAL. IF-
OK-REPLACE SPEED
SWITCH-REFER TO
AIRCRAFT MAINT-
ENANCE MANUAL.
OK-CHECK THAT START LOCK BLADE ANGLE NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-
IS SET AS SPECIFIED IN AIRCRAFT SORIES FROM REDUCTION GEAR SECTION
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF- AND RECHECK FOR INTERNAL BINDING.
IF-
I
NOT OK-RESET OK-REPLACE AC- NOT OK-REMOVE
START LOCKS-RE- CESSORY CAUSING ENGINE-RETURN TO
FER TO AIRCRAFT BINDING. A GARRETT
MAINTENANCE AUTHORIZED
MANUAL. SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER
INVESTIGATION.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 140
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 11
LIGHT OFF OK-ENGINE DOESNOT ACCELER-

ATE BEYOND45 TO 60 PERCENTENGINE
SPEED-HIGH TURBINE TEMPERATURE-CHECK
FOR EXCESSIVE ELECTRICAL LOAD-REFER
TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL. IF-
OK-CHECK POWERLEVER FOR PROPER NOT OK-CORRECT EXCESSIVE ELECTRICAL

POSITION (NOT IN PARTIAL REVERSE). LOAD-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
IF- MANUAL.
OK-CHECK FOR MISRIGGED ENGINE NOT OK-REPOSITION POWERLEVER.

CONTROLS. IF-
OK-PULL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HAND NOT OK-CORRECT FAULTY RIGGING-REFER

TO CHECKFOR BINDING WHICH MAY TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
INDICATE INTERNAL FAILURE. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 141
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 11 (CONT).
OK-ENGINE DETERIORATION INDICATED- NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-

REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A GARRETT SORIES FROM REDUCTION GEAR SECTION
AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY FOR AND RECHECK FOR BINDING. IF-
FURTHER INVESTIGATION.
I
OK-REPLACE AC- NOT OK-REMOVE
CESSORY CAUSING ENGINE-RETURN TO
BINDING. A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER IN-
VESTIGATION.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 142
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 12
LIGHT OFF OK-ENGINE DOES NOT ACCELER-

ATE TO SPEED OR EXCESSIVE TIME
REQUIRED TO ACCELERATE TO SPEED-LOW
TURBINE TEMPERATURE-FUEL PRESSURE
NORMAL-CHECK FOR LEAKS IN COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSE (P3) LINE
TO FUEL CONTROL UNIT (FIGURES 101
THROUGH 103). IF-
OK-(CODES AA-CC) CHECK P3 NOT OK-TIGHTEN FITTINGS OR REPLACE

FILTER FOR CONTAMINATION. IF- PARTS TO ELIMINATE LEAKAGE.
I
OK-(CODES AA-BA, DA-FB) CAP TORQUE NOT OK-CLEAN FILTER-REFER TO
LIMITER BYPASSVALVE. IF- 73-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
OK-CHECK FOR FAULTY FLOWDIVIDER NOT OK-REPLACE TORQUELIMITER BYPASS

AND DRAIN VALVE AS EVIDENT BY FUEL VALVE. REFERTO 73-22-01, MAINTE-
NOT BEING DISCHARGED INTO NANCE PRACTICES.
SECONDARY FUEL MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY.
IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 143
Dec 14/87
/lied
PROCEDURE 12 (CONT)
OK-CONNECT GAGE (D, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOWDI-

MEASURE HIGH PRESSUREPUMP DISCHARGE VIDER AND DRAIN VALVE-REFER TO
AT FUEL METERED PRESSlRE TAP PORT 73-10-07, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(FIGURES 101 THROUGH103)-DIS-
CONNECT WIRING HARNESS ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR FROM FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE (SEE FIGURES 101 THROUGH
103) MOTORENGINE AND OBSERVE
PRESSURE GAGE-PRESSURESHALL BE
300 PSlG MINIMUM WITH ENGINE SPEED
R UP TO 15 PERCENT. IF-
R (CODES DA-GA) NOT OK-CHECK fUEL PUMP

ASSEMBLY HIGH PRESSURERELIEF VALVE
FOR STICKING OR CONTAMINATIONOR
DETERIORATED. IF-
k.,
(CODES DA-FB) (CODES DA-GA)

OK-CHECK PRES- NOT OK-REMOVE
SURIZING VALVE AND CLEAN HIGH
FOR STICKING OR PRESSURE RELIEF
CONTAMINATION VALVE-REFER TO
OR DAMAGED 73-21-06.
PACKINGS. IF-
R (CODE GA) OK-

R CHECK PRESSURE
R REGULATING VALVE
R FOR STICKING OR
R CONTAMINATION
R OR DAMAGEDPACK-
R INGS-REFER TO
UP136688
R 73-21-04. IF-
72-00-00
& Page 144
Aug 12/91

~ S lied
PROCEDURE 12 (CONT)
R (CODES DA-GA) (CODES DA-FB)

R OK-CHECK FUEL NOT OK-CLEAN OR
R CONTROL PS3 ROL- REPAIR PRES-
R LING DIAPHRAGM SURIZING VALVE-
R FOR LEAKAGE- REFER TO
R REFER TO 73-21-04.
73-21-05,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
IF-
R (CODE GA) NOT

R OK-CLEAN OR
R REPAIR PRESSURE
R REGULATING
R VALVE-REFER TO
R 73-21-04.
[
PUMP ASSEMBLY- FUEL CONTROL
73-21-06-REPEAT 73-21-05.
CHECK FOR 300
PSIG. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT-REFER TO
73-21-05.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 145
Aug 12/91

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ / l iignal
ed
PROCEDURE 12 (CONT)
R (CODES DA-GA) OK-CHECK FUEL CONTROL NOT OK-(FUEL PRESSURE HIGH WITH RE-
R PS3 ROLLING DIAPHRAGM FOR LEAKAGE- SPECT TO FUEL FLOW) CHECK ADJUSTMENT
R REFER TO 73-21-05. IF- TO MANUAL OVERRIDE ARM ON FUEL SHUT-
OFF VALVE AND ATTEMPTTO START
ENGINE USING NORMAL START PROCEDURE.
IF-
R OK-CHECK INLET (CODES DA-GA)

R TEMPERATURE AND NOT OK-REPLACE
R PRESSURE SENSOR- FUEL CONTROL
R REFER TO UNIT-REFER TO
R 73-21-05. IF- 73-21-05.
OK-REPLACE NOT OK-REPLACE NOT OK-(ORIGINAL TROUBLE STILL EVI-

FUEL CONTROL INLET TEMPERA- DENT) PERFORMFUEL NOZZLE AND MANI-
UNIT-REFER TO TURE AND FOLD ASSEMBLY FUNCTIONAL CHECK-REFER
73-21-05. PRESSURE SENSOR- TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-
REFER TO
73-21-05.
i
OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOW DIVIDER NOT OK-(FUEL PRESSURE HIGH WITH
VALVE-REFER TO 73-10-07. RESPECT TO FUEL FLOW) REMOVE-CLEAN-
INSPECT AND TEST PRIMARY AND SECOND-
ARY FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD
ASSEMBLIES-REFER TO 73-10-09.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 146
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 13
FLAMEOUT DURING START-FUEL PRESSURE

ERRATIC-PERFORM PROCEDURE 5.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 147
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
PROCEDURE 14
FLAME OUT DURING START-FUEL PRESSURE

NORMAL-CHECK THAT FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
IS FULLY OPEN. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT VOLTAGE IS NOT APPLIED NOT OK-CORRECT FAULTY ADJUSTMENTTO

TO FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE SOLENOID PINS MANUAL OVERRIDE ARM ON FUEL SHUTOFF
B AND C CAUSING VALVE TO CLOSE. IF- VALVE-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.
R (CODES DA-GA) OK-CHECKFUEL CONTROL NOT OK-(VOLTAGE PRESENT)-CORRECT

R PS3 ROLLING DIAPHRAGM FOR LEAKAGE- AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL FAULT-REFER TO
R REFER TO 73-21-05. IF- AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
R OK-PERFORM FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD (CODES DA-GA) NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL
R ASSEMBLY FUNCTIONAL CHECK-REFER TO CONTROL ASSEMBLY-REFERTO 73-21-05.
72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-
OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY- NOT OK-REMOVE-CLEAN-INSPECTAND TEST

REFER TO 73-21-05. PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FUEL NOZZLE
AND MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES-REFER TO
73-10-09.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 148
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 15
EXCESSIVE TURBINE TEMPERATIRE DURING

ACCELERATION BELOW 50 PERCENT ENGINE
SPEED OR FLAMING STARTS (ABORT START
PRIOR TO PASSING TURBINE TEMPERATURE
LIMITS)-CHECK THAT PROPER PROCEDURE
IS BEING USED (PROPELLER ON START
LOCKS-POWER LEVER IN STARTING POSITION
(NOT PARTIAL REVERSE)). IF-
I
OK-CHECK FOR TAIL WINDS OR CROSS NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MAN-
WINDS. IF- UAL FOR PROPER PROCEDURE.
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT POWER-REFERTO NOT OK-REPOSITION AIRCRAFT INTO

AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL. IF- WIND.
OK-CHECK STARTERFOR DROPOUTBELOW

55 PERCENTENGINE SPEED. IF-
OK-(STARTER DROPOUTNORMAL)-CHECK NOT OK-(STARTER DROPS OUT PRIORTO

THAT FUEL ACCUMULATION FROM PREVI- 55 PERCENTENGINE SPEED) -
OUS START ATTEMPT HAS HAD TIME TO CHECK SPEED SWITCH-REFER TO AIR-
DRAIN. IF- CRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 149
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE15, ICONT)
OK-CHECK THAT SPECIFIC GRAVITY OR NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MAN-

FUEL TRIM ADJUSTMENTON FUEL CONTROL UAL FOR PROPERPROCEDURE.
UNIT IS PROPERLY SET-REFER TO 72-00-
00, ADJUS~IENT/TEST. IF-
OK-(BENDIX) CHECK STARTFUEL FLOW NOT OK-SET SPECIFIC GRAVITY OR FUEL

BY REDUCING 10 CLICKS AND CHECKING TRIM ADJUSTMENT.
START TEMPERATURE. IF-
OK-PUL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HAND TO NOT OK-SET START FUEL FLOW ADJUST-
CHECK FOR BINDING WHICH MAY INDICATE MENT TO GIVE CORRECT INTERSTAGE
INTERNAL MALFUNCTION. IF- TURBINE TEMPERATURE. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR MISRIGGED ENGINE CON- NOT OK-REMOVESHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-

TROL (CAUSING PARTIAL REVERSE). IF- SORIES FROMREDUCTION GEAR SECTION
AND RECHECKFOR INTERNAL BINDING.
IF-

BINDING. A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER IN-
VESTIGATION.
UP136688
k.r 72-00-00
Page 150
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 15 I CONT)
OK-CHECK START LOCKS FOR IMPROPER NOT OK-CORRECT FAULTY ENGINE CON-
ADJUSTMENT. IF- TROLS RIGGING.
I
OK-(CODES DA-FB) DISCONNECT FUEL NOT OK-RESET START LOCK BLADE ANGLE-
LINE FROM START PRESSUREREGULATOR REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
TO FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE AT START MANUAL.
PRESSURE REGULATORDISCHARGE PORT.
CAP FITTING ON START PRESSURE
REGULATOR AND LINE TO SHUTOFF VALVE -
RESTART ENGINE AND MONITORTURBINE
TEMPERATURE. IF-
OK-(BENDIX) CHECK PNEUMATIC LINES NOT OK-REPLACE START FUEL REGULATOR

BETWEEN INLET TEMPERATURESENSOR AND VALVE-REFER TO 73-10-03, MAINTENANCE
FUEL CONTROL FOR LEAKAGE. IF- PRACTICES.
OK-DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR NOT OK-REPLACE DAMAGEDPNEUMATIC

TO FUEL SOLENOID (START FUEL) VALVE LINES.
-RESTART ENGINE AND MONITORTURBINE
TEMPERATURE. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 151
Dec 14/87
~I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 15 (CONT)
OK-AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL PROBLEM-REFER NOT OK-(TURBINE TEMPERATURE STILL

TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. EXCESSIVE) DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR TO IGNITION UNIT (FIGURES
101 THROUGH103) AND MOTORENGINE-
ALLOW ENGINE SPEED TO STABILIZE ON
STARTER-OBSERVE FUEL FLOW-FLOW
SHALL NOT EXCEED70 LB/HR AFTER
STABILIZING.
OK-(FUEL FLOWWITHIN LIMITS) CHECK NOT OK-(FUEL FLOWEXCESSIVE)-RE-

FUEL FLOWDIVIDER VALVE FOR LEAKAGE PLACE FUEL CONTROLUNIT-REFER TO
THROUGH TO SECONDARYNOZZLES BELOW 73-21-05, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
50 PERCENTENGINE SPEED-(DISCONNECT
AND CAP OFF SECONDARYNOZZLES) (SEE
FIGURE 104) RECONNECTIGNITION UNIT-
INITIATE START ON PRIMARY NOZZLES
AND MONITOR TURBINE TEMPERATURE.
IF-
OK-(TURBINE TEMPERATURE NOT

EXCESSIVE) REPLACE FUEL FLOWDIVIDER
AND DRAIN VALVE-REFER TO 73-10-07,
NOT OK-ENGINE INTERNAL DAMAGE-

REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY FOR
FURTHER INVESTIGATION.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 152
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 16
ENGINE SPEED-FUEL FLOW-TURBINE TEMPER-

ATURE AND TORQUE CYCLING DURING GROUND
OPERATING CONDITION-CHECK FOR TAIL
WINDS OR CROSS WINDS. IF-
NOT OK-REPOSITION AIRCRAFT INTO

WIND.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 153
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 17
EXCESSIVE VIBRATION DURING START OR

GROUND IDLE-CHECK THAT AMBIENT WIND
CONDITIONS OR RECIRCULATION OF EXHAUST
GASES DUE TO AIRCRAFT POSITION IS NOT
CAUSING VIBRATION. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT ALL START LOCKS ARE NOT OK-REPOSITION AIRCRAFT INTO WIND
ENGAGED AND START LOCK BLADE ANGLE (GUSTY WIND CONDITIONS CONTRIBUTE
IS SET ON ALL BLADES AS SPECIFIED IN TO APPARENT VIBRATION).
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF-
OK-PULL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HAND TO NOT OK-RESET START LOCKS-REFER TO

CHECK FOR BINDING WHICH MAY INDICATE AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
INTERNAL MALFUNCTION. IF-
OK-INSPECT ENGINE MOUNTS FOR SIGNS NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-
OF UNUSUAL WEAR-CONFIRM TORQUE OF SORIES FROM REDUCTION GEAR SECTION
ENGINE MOUNT BOLTS SPECIFIED IN AND RECHECK FOR BINDING, IF-
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 154
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 17 (CONT)
k.r
I
OK-REPLACE ACCES- NOT OK-REMOVE
SORY CAUSING ENGINE-RETURN TO
BINDING. A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER IN-
VESTIGATION.
OK-INSPECT PROPELLER BLADES FOR NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE AS SPECIFIED MANUAL FOR PROPER TORQUE OR FOR EN-
IN AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF- GINE MOUNT REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE.
OK-INSPECT COMPRESSORFIRST STAGE NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE PROPELLER

IMPELLER-REFER TO 72-30-01, MAINTE- IAW AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
NANCE PRACTICES. IF-
OK-REMOVE OIL FILTER AND CHECK FOR NOT OK-REPAIR FIRST STAGE IMPELLER-
CONTAMINATION. IF- REFER TO 72-30-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
k.r'
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 155
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
P,RQ,CEDURE17 ICONT)
T
OK-CHECK DYNAMIC BALANCE OF
PROPELLER-REFER TO AIRCRAFT
NOT OK-DEPENDING UPON QUANTITY AND
TYPE OF CONTAMINATION EITHER REMOVE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF- ENGINE OR REFER TO 72-00-00,
INSPECTION/CHECK.
OK-CONNECT GAGE (D, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-REBALANCE PROPELLER IAW AIR-
BETA PRESSURE SWITCH PORT CRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
(FIGURES 101 THROUGH 103) AND
OBSERVE BETA PRESSURE ON PRESSURE
GAGE DURING GROUND IDLE-PRESSURE
SHALL BE STABLE WITHIN 50 PSI.
PROPELLER ON START LOCKS. IF-
OK-CONNECT GAGE (D, TABLE 102) INTO NOT OK-REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNOR
METERED FUEL LINE (FIGURES 101 ASSEMBLY-REFER TO 72-10-03,
THROUGH 103) BETWEEN FUEL CONTROL MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UNIT AND FUEL SHUTOFFVALVE WITH
TEE-(CAUTION: HARDLINES MUSTBE
USED) OBSERVEMETERED FUEL PRESSURE
ON PRESSURE GAGEDURING GROUNDIDLE-
PRESSURE SHALL BE STABLEWITHIN
25 PSI. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROLUNIT-

REFER TO 73-21-05, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 156
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 18
ENGINE WILL NOT WINDMILL DURING AIR

START ATTEMPT-PERFORM GROUND CHECK
WITH PROPELLER IN FEATHERED POSITION-
OPERATE UNFEATHERING PUMP-BLADES
SHOULD MOVEFROMFEATHERED POSITION-
LISTEN FOR SOUNDOF UNFEATHERING PUMP
RUNNING. IF-
OK-CONNECT GAGE (B, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-CHECK FOR VOLTAGETO UNFEATH-
UNFEATHERING PUMPDISCHARGE LINE (NO ERING PUMPMOTOR-REFER TO AIRCRAFT
FLOW)-PUMP RELIEF PRESSURESHALL MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF-
BE 125 PSI MINUTE. IF-
OK-SUSPECT UN- NOT OK-NO VOLT-

FEATHERING PUMP AGE TO UNFEATH-
MOTOR-REFER TO ERING PUMPMOTOR
AIRCRAFT MAIN- -CHECK AIRCRAFT
TENANCE MANUAL. ELECTRICAL
CIRCUITRY-REFER
TO AIRCRAFT
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.
OK-CHECK FEATHERING VALVE RIGGING. NOT OK-CHECK FOR LOSS OF OIL PRIME
IF- OR LOW OIL SUPPLY (AIR IN INLET
LINE) REFERTO AIRCRAFTMAINTENANCE
MANUAL. IF-
k_F'~
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 157
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 18 (CONT)
OK-REPLACE UN- NOT OK-PRIME UN-

FEATHERING PUMP FEATHERING PUMP
REFER TO AIR- REFER TO AIR-
CRAFT MAINTE- CRAFT MAINTE-
NANCE MANUAL. NANCE MANUAL.
OK-CHECK FEATHERING VALVE FOR CON- NOT OK-RERIG FEATHERING VALVE.

T~IINATION WHICH COULD CAUSE INTER-
NAL LEAKAGE OF CONTROLOIL PRESSURE.
IF-
OK-CHECK FEATHERING PUMP CHECK NOT OK-CLEAN CONTAMINANTS FROM

VALVE FOR RESTRICTION. IF- FEATHERING VALVE.
I OK-CHECK BETA TUBE PACKINGS. IF- NOT OK-REPLACE RESTRICTED UNFEATHER-

ING PUMP CHECK VALVE.
OK-CHECK PITCH CONTROL PACKING FOR NOT OK-REPLACE BETA TUBE PACKINGS-
LEAKAGE. IF- REFER TO 72-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
k_ 72-00-00
Page 158
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I
NOT OK-REPLACE PACKING OR PITCH
CONTROL-REFER TO 72-10-02, MAINTE-
NANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 159
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 19
ENGINE WINDMILLING SPEED TOO SLOW TO

ACTUATE SPEED SWITCH DURING ATTEMPTED
AIRSTART-AIRSPEED IN COMPLIANCE WITH
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL-CHECK THAT
COCKPIT FEATHERING VALVE CONTROL IS
CORRECTLY POSITIONED TO ALLOW
FEATHERING VALVE TO CLOSE. IF-
OK-PULL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HAND TO NOT OK-CORRECT POSITION OR RERIG

CHECK FOR BINDING WHICH MAY INDI- COCKPIT FEATHERING VALVE CONTROL-
CATE INTERNAL MALFUNCTION. IF- REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.
OK-UNFEATHER PROPELLER USING AIR- NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCESSO-

CRAFT UNFEATHERING PUMP-ENSURE RIES FROM REDUCTION GEAR SECTION AND
PROPELLER MOVES THROUGH FULL RANGE RECHECK FOR INTERNAL BINDING. IF-
OF TRAVEL. IF-
I
BINDING. A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER IN-
VESTIGATION.
I ,,
OK-TORQUE SENSING SYSTEM FAULT-REFER NOT OK-PERFORM TROUBLE SHOOTING
TO 72-10-05, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. PROCEDURE 1.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 160
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 20
ENGINE WINDMILLING SPEED IN EXCESSOF

35 PERCENTDURING FLIGHT CHECKOF NTS-
CHECK TO ENSUREFUEL FLOW INDICATION
IS ZERO. IF-
OK-CHECK FEATHERING VALVE FOR FREE- NOT OK-CHECK FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
DOM OF MOVEMENTOF PISTON. IF- RIGGING TO ENSUREFUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE CLOSES COMPLETELY. IF-
OK-REPLACE FUEL NOT OK-RERIG-RE-

SHUTOFF VALVE- FER TO 73-10-06,
REFER TO 73-10- MAINTENANCE
06, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES AND
PRACTICES. AIRCRAFT MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL.
OK-CHECK NTS ORIFICE FOR RESTRIC- NOT OK-CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION OF

TIONS. IF- FEATHERING VALVE-CLEAN-IF DAMAGED
PRACTICES.
OK-CHECK FOR LOW NTS PRESSUREREGU- NOT OK-CLEAN NTS ORIFICE-REFER TO

LATOR SETTING-REFER TO 72-00-00, AD- 72-10-06, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
JUSTMENT/TEST. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 161
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE20 (CONT)
OK-CHECK TORQUESENSORCALIBRATION- NOT OK-REPLACE NTS PRESSUREREGU-

REFER TO 72-10-16, MAINTENANCE LATOR-REFER TO 72-10-04, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. IF- PRACTICES.
NOT OK-REPLACETORQUESENSOR-REFER
TO 72-10-16, r~AINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 162
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 21
TURBINE TEMPERATURE LOW ON ONE ENGINE-

TORQUE AND FUEL FLOWSMATCH-POWER IS
SYMMETRIG CHECKTHE AIRCRAFT TEMPER-
ATURE INDICATING SYSTEM-REFER TO AIR-
CRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR CONTINUITY OF THE NOT OK-CALIBRATE SYSTEM. REFERTO

HARNESS ASSEMBLYAT THE COMPENSATING AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
RESISTOR lWO PIN CONNECTOR. RESIS-
TANCE SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN
77-20-03. IF-
OK-VERIFY CORRECTCOMPENSATING RE- NOT OK-REPLACE ENGINE HARNESS

SISTOR IS INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONAL. ASSEMBLY-REFER TO 77-20-03,
REFER TO DATA SHEETCUSTOMER (DSC). MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY-

PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 163
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 22
OIL PRESSURELOW OR FLUCTUATING IN

NORMAL FLIGHT ATTITUDES AND NORMALOIL
TEMPERATURE-CHECK OIL SUPPLY. IF-
OK-CHECK OIL FOR FUEL CONTAMINATION NOT OK-REPLENISH OIL SUPPLYAND

IF- CHECK THAT OIL CONSUMPTION DOESNOT
EXCEED ONE QUARTPER 12.5 HOURS
OPERATION.
OK-CONNECT GAGE (B, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-REFER TO TROUBLE SHOOTING

OIL PRESS FITTING ON REDUCTION GEAR PROCEDURE 25.
SECTION-OBSERVE OIL PRESSURE. IF-
I,,H , m
OK-REPLACE COCKPIT OIL PRESSURE IN- NOT OK-CHECK FOR CLOGGEDOIL FILTER.
STRUMENT-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTE- IF-
NANCE MANUAL.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 164
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE22 I CONT)
OK-REMOVE OIL FILTER BYPASS VALVE NOT OK-DEPENDING UPON QUANTITY AND
AND CHECK FOR DAMAGED PACKINGS-RE- TYPE OF CONTAMINATION-REMOVEENGINE
FER TO 79-20-04, MAINTENANCE OR REFER TO 72-00-00, INSPECTION/
PRACTICES. IF- CHECK.
OK-REMOVE OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR NOT OK-REPLACE OIL FILTER BYPASS

VALVE ASSEMBLY AND CHECK FOR DAMAGE VALVE-PACKINGS-REFER TO 79-20-04,
OR DAMAGED PACKINGS-REFER TO MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
79-20-05, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
IF-
OK-CHECK THAT OIL VENT VALVE IS NOT NOT OK-REPLACE OIL PRESSURE REGU-
STUCK OPEN OR ENERGIZED ABOVE 50 LATOR VALVE ASSEMBLYOR PACKINGS-
PERCENT ENGINE SPEED. IF- REFER TO 79-20-05, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
OK-CHECK FOR DAMAGED PACKINGS ON NOT OK-CHECK THAT VOLTAGE IS NOT

OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY INLET APPLIED TO OIL VENT VALVE WITH
TUBE ASSEMBLY. IF- ENGINE SPEED ABOVE 50 PERCENT. IF-
k.z
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 165
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO, 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 22 (CONT)
k_Z-
OK-REMOVE OIL NOT OK-REFER TO

VENT VALVE AND AIRCRAFT MAINTE-
CHECK OPERATION NANCE MANUAL TO
ON BENCH-REFER CORRECT ELEC-
TO 79-20-06, TRICAL FAULT.
MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE
OIL VENT VALVE-
REFER TO 79-20-
06, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
OK-EXCESSIVE LUBE SYSTEM FLOW-

INSPECT TURBINE OIL SYSTEMJET AND
I NOTOK-REPLACE PACKINGS.
HYDRAULIC MOUNT. IF-
OK-REFER TO PROCEDURE59 FOR BETA NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE JET OR

PRESSURE SYSTEM EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE. HYDRAULIC MOUNT.
IF-
OK-OIL PRESSUREPUMP OUTPUT LOW-

REPLACE PUMP ROTOROR REPLACE PUMP-
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 166
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 23
NO OTHERAPPARENTOIL SYSTEMPROBLEMS
BUT OIL FILTER BYPASSVALVE INDICATOR
BUTTON EXTENDSOUT-OIL TEMPERATURENOR-
MAL-CHECK OIL FILTER FOR CONTAMINA-
TION. IF-
OK-REPLACE OIL FILTER BYPASSVALVE- I NOT OK-REFER TO PROCEDURE22.

REFER TO SB 79-0008. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACEOIL FILTER ELEMENT.

(FILTER ELEMENTMAY BE CREATING
EXCESSIVE PRESSUREDROP)-REFERTO
79-20-02, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 167
Dec 14/87
I ~ l MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 24
HIGH OIL PRESSURE-CHECKOIL

TEMPERATURE. IF-
OK-CONNECT GAGE (B, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-RUN ENGINE WITH OIL AT NOR-
OIL PRESSURE FITTING ON REDUCTION MAL OPERATING TEMPERATUREAND RE-
GEAR SECTION AND OPERATE ENGINE WITH CHECK OIL PRESSURE.
OIL AT NORMALOPERATING TEMPERATURE
AND CHECK GAGE INDICATION. IF-
OK-REPLACE COCKPIT OIL PRESSURE NOT OK-(OIL PRESSUREHIGH)-REPLACE

INSTRUMENT. OIL PRESSUREREGULATORVALVE
ASSEMBLY REFER TO 79-20-05,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 168
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 25
INSTALLATION WITH COMMONDRAIN MANI-

FOLD OIL CONTAMINATEDWITH FUEL-CHANGE
OIL AND OIL FILTER-CHECK FOR OBSTRUC-
TION IN COMMONDRAIN MANIFOLD-REFER TO
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL. IF-
I
OK-DISCONNECT DRAIN MANIFOLD FROM NOT OK-REMOVE OBSTRUCTION-REFER TO
ACCESSORY DRIVE PAD-OPERATE ENGINE AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
TEN MINUTES-SHUT DOWNAND CHECK FOR
OIL CONTAMINATEDWITH FUEL. IF-
OK-REPLACE ACCESSORY DRIVE PAD SEAL- NOT OK-REPLACE OIL TO FUEL COOLER
REFER TO 72-10-08, MAINTENANCE IN OIL TANK ASSEMBLY-REFERTO
PRACTICES. 79-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 169
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 26
INSTALLATION WITH SEPARATE DRAIN

LINES-OIL CONTAMINATED WITH FUEL-
CHANGE OIL AND OIL FILTER-REPLACE OIL
TO FUEL COOLERIN OIL TANK ASSEMBLY-
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 170
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 27
OVERSPEED GOVERNORINDICATES LOW WITH

PROPELLER ON START LOCKS-(NOTE: WHEN
CHECKING OVERSPEED GOVERNORS-R'S"~NINCREASE
IN VIBRATION MAY BE NOTED-THIS IS NORMAL
AS LONG AS VIBRATION IN OPERATING SPEED
RANGE IS SATISFACTORY-TIMEOF OPERATION
ON OVERSPEED GOVERNORSHALL BE HELD TO
MINIMUM) CHECK THAT CONDITION LEVER IS
AT MAXIMUMWHEN POWERLEVER IS
ADVANCED. IF-
OK-CHECK TACHOMETERINDICATOR CALI- NOT OK-(BENDIX) MOVE CONDITION

BRATION. IF- LEVER TO MAXIMUM.
OK-PERFORM OVERSPEED GOVERNORCHECK NOT OK-REPLACE TACHOMETERINDICATOR.

NOTING FUEL FLOW AND RPM-TAKE PRO-
PELLER OFF LOCKS WITH SPEED LEVER
AT RPM LESS THAN NOTED ABOVE-MOVE
POWER LEVER TOWARDTAKEOFF-FUEL FLOW
INCREASES ABOVE VALUE NOTED DURING
INITIAL OVERSPEED GOVERNORCHECK-
(OBSERVE TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE
LIMITS.) IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 171
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 27 ICONT)
OK-(FUEL FLOWINCREASES) ADJUST NOT OK-(FUEL FLOWREMAINSTHE SAME)

OVERSPEED GOVERNOR(TO INCREASE REFERTO PROCEDURE30.
OVERSPEED GOVERNORSETTING)-REFER
TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-

PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 172
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 28
OVERSPEED GOVERNORINDICATES HIGH WITH

PROPELLER ON START LOCKS-(NOTE: WHEN
CHECKING OVERSPEED GOVERNOR'A'N IN-
CREASE IN VIBRATION MAY BE NOTED-THIS
IS NORMALAS LONGAS VIBRATION IN
NORMAL OPERATING SPEED RANGEIS
SATISFACTORY-TIME OF OPERATION ON
OVERSPEED GOVERNORSHALL BE HELDTO A
MINIMUM)-CHECK TACHOMETER INDICATOR
CALIBRATION. IF-
OK-ADJUST OVERSPEED GOVERNOR-REFER I NOT OK-REPLACE TACHOMETER INDICATOR.

TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-

PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 173
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 29
UNDERSPEED GOVERNORHIGH RPM SETTING

CORRECT WITH SPEED LEVER POSITIONED AT
TAKEOFF-PROPELLER OFF START LOCKS-POWER
LEVER IS IN ABNORMAL POSITION TO PRO-
VIDE MINIMUM FUEL FLOW-CHECK TO ENSURE
THAT PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL IS
CORRECTLY RIGGED TO POWERLEVER. IF-
I
OK-CHECKFLIGHT IDLE BLADEANGLE. NOT OK-RERIG-REFER TO 76-10-01,
IF- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
NOT OK-RESET FLIGHT IDLE BLADE ANGLE

-REFER TO 72-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-0O
Page 174
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 30
UNDERSPEED GOVERNORHIGH RPM SETTING

INCORRECT WITH SPEEDLEVER POSITIONED
AT TAKEOFF-PROPELLER OFF STARTLOCKS-
POWER-LEVER IN PROPERPOSITION TOWARD
REVERSE TO PROVIDE MINIMUM FUEL FLOW-
CHECK THAT SPEEDLEVER SETTING CAUSES
POSITIVE CONTACTOF UNDERSPEED GOVER-
NOR SHAFT WITH MAXIMUMSPEED STOP.
IF-
OK-ADJUST UNDERSPEED GOVERNORMAX- NOT OK-ADJUST PROPELLER GOVERNOR/

IMUM SPEED STOP TO OBTAIN CORRECT UNDER SPEEDGOVERNOR LINKAGE-REFER TO
ENGINE SPEED-REFER TO 72-00-00, 76-10-01, ADJUSTMENT/TEST OR AIR-
ADJUSTMENT/TEST. CRAFT LINKAGE.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 175
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 31
UNDERSPEED GOVERNORLOW RPM SETTING

INCORRECT WITH SPEED LEVER POSITIONED
AT MINIMUM-PROPELLEROFF START LOCKS-
CHECK THAT SPEED LEVER SETTING CAUSES
POSITIVE CONTACTOF UNDERSPEED GOVER-
NOR SHAFT WITH MINIMUM SPEED STOP.
IF-
OK-ADJUST UNDERSPEED GOVERNORMIN- NOT OK-ADJUST PROPELLER GOVERNOR/

IMUM SPEED STOP TO OBTAIN CORRECT UNDERSPEED GOVERNORLINKAGE-REFER TO
ENGINE SPEED-REFER TO 72-00-00, 76-10-01, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 176
Dec 14/87
lied
PROCEDURE 32
ENGINE FLAMESOUT/BLOWS OUT WHENSPEED

LEVER IS RAPIDLY MOVEDFROMHIGH SPEED
STOP TO LOW SPEEDSTOPWITH POWER
LEVER AT POSITION OF MINIMUM FUEL FLOW-
OBSERVE IF FUEL FLOW INDICATION DROPS
BELOW A NOMINAL 60 POUNDS PER HOURDUR-
ING RAPID SPEEDLEVER MOVEMENTFROM
HIGH SPEEDSTOP TO LOW SPEEDSTOP. IF-
OK-CHECK FUEL FLOW DIVIDER FOR NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROL

PROPER OPERATION-REFER TO 73-10-07, ASSEMBLY-REFER TO 73-21-05.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-
l OK-CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS.

, IF-
OK-CHECK FOR CLOGGED FUEL NOZZLES. NOT OK-REPAIR FUEL LEAKS. REFER
IF- TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
(CODES DA-GA) OK-CHECKFUEL CONTROL NOT OK-REMOVE-CLEAN-INSPECT AND TEST

PS3 ROLLING DIAPHRAGM FOR LEAKAGE- PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FUEL NOZZLE
REFER TO 73-21-05. IF- AND MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES. REFERTO
73-10-09.
R (CODES AA-CC) OK-REPLACEFUEL CON- (CODES DA-GA) NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL

R TROL ASSEMBLY. REFERTO 73-20-01. CONTROL ASSEMBLY-REFER TO 73-21-05.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 177
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 33
PROPELLER START LOCKS DO NOT RELEASE

WITH ENGINE AT SPEED AND POWERLEVER
IN REVERSE THRUST-BETA LIGHT ON (COLD
OIL AFFECTS TIME REQUIRED FOR PROPEL-
LER SYSTEMTO RESPOND-ON FIRST START
ALLOW ADEQUATETIME FOR PROPELLER OIL
SYSTEM TO FILL AND OIL TEMPERATURETO
STABILIZE)-CHECK THAT PROPER PROCEDURE
IS BEING USED TO UNLATCH PROPELLER
FROM START LOCKS. IF-
OK-SHUT DOWNENGINE-POSITION POWER NOT OK-USE SPECIFIED PROCEDURE-

LEVER AT REVERSE AND TURN ON UN- REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
FEATHERING PUMP-PROPELLER SHALL
MOVE IN REVERSE. IF-
OK-CHECK PROPELLER LATCH MECHANISM NOT OK-CHECK FOR FAULTY ENGINE/

FOR BINDING-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAIN- PROPELLER CONTROL RIGGING-CHECK
TENANCE MANUAL. AIRCRAFT RIGGING IAW AIRCRAFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL-CHECK PROPELLER
PITCH CONTROL-REFERTO 76-10-01,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES-CHECK
BETA TUBE POSITION-REFER TO 72-10-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 178
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 34
NO PROPELLER RESPONSE WITH POWERLEVER

POSITIONED AT REVERSE THRUST-SPEED
LEVER AT HIGH-OIL PRESS NORMAL-BETA
LIGHT OFF (PROPELLER RESPONDS NORMALLY
TO UNFEATHERING PUMP)-POSITION SPEED
LEVER TO LOW AND CHECK TO ENSURE BETA
LIGHT IS ON. IF-
, I i . . . .
OK-ADJUST PROPELLER GOVERNORHIGH RPMI NOT OK-(BETA LIGHT STILL OFF)-

SETTING-REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUST- I CHECK FOR CONTAMINATED OR DAMAGED
MENT/TEST. IF- ! UNFEATHERING PUMP CHECK VALVE
(FIGURES 101 THROUGH103).
OK-CHECK PROPELLER GOVERNORGASKET. NOT OK-REPLACE UNFEATHERING PUMP

IF- CHECK VALVE-REFER TO 77-10-02,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
OK-REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNOR NOT OK-REPLACE PROPELLERGOVERNOR

ASSEMBLY-REFER TO 72-10-03, MAINTE- GASKET-REFER TO 72-10-03,
NANCE PRACTICES. MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 179
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 35
PROPELLER WILL NOT MOVEOFF START

LOCKS WITH SPEED LEVER HIGH-POWER
LEVER AT REVERSETHRUST-BETA LIGHT
OFF-ENGINE OIL PRESSURENORMAL-CHECK
THAT PROPELLERRESPONDSTO UN-
FEATHERING PUMPWITH ENGINE STOPPED.
IF-
OK-REFER TO TROUBLE SHOOTING PRO- NOT OK-REFERTO TROUBLE SHOOTING

CEDURE 34. PROCEDURE 1.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 180
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
PROCEDURE 36
BETA LIGHT DOES NOT GO ON WHEN REVERSE

THRUST SELECTED BUT PROPELLER RESPONDS
NORMALLY-CHECK WIRING FROM BETA
PRESSURE SWITCH TO BETA LIGHT-REFER TO
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL. IF-
OK-CONNECT GAGE (C, TABLE 102) INTO NOT OK-REPAIR WIRING FAULT-REFER TO
BETA PRESSURE SWITCH PORT (FIGURES AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
I01 THROUGH103)-OPERATE ENGINE WITH
PROPELLER ON START LOCKS AND POWER
LEVER POSITIONED AT FLIGHT IDLE-
R (CODES AA-BA, DA-FB) PRESSURESHALL
R BE AS SPECIFIED IN AIRCRAFT MAINTE-
R NANCE MANUAL.
R (CODES CA-CC, GA) PRESSURESHALL BE
R AS SPECIFIED IN 77-10-02,
R ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-
OK-REPLACE BETA PRESSURE NOT OK-REFER TO TROUBLE SHOOTING

SWITCH-(CODES AA-BA, DA-FB) REFER PROCEDURE 1.
TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
(CODES CA-CC, GA) REFERTO
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 181
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 37
DURING PROPELLERGOVERNORCHECK-LOW OR
HIGH RPM-ENGINE SPEED TO LOW OR HIGH
WHILE OPERATING ON PROPELLER GOVERNOR
(POWER LEVER AT CRUISE)-CHECK FOR
NORMAL OPERATING OIL TEMPERATURE
(PROPELLER GOVERNORASSEMBLY SPEED
SETTING DECREASES1/2 PERCENT FOR
EACH 35C RISE IN OIL TEMPERATURE).
IF-
OK-ADJUST PROPELLER GOVERNOR NOT OK-CORRECTSPEED READING TO

ASSEMBLY HIGH OR LOW SPEED STOPS AS NORMAL FLIGHT OPERATING TEMPERATURE
SPECIFIED IN 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/ AND ADJUST SO THAT CORRECTEDSPEED
TEST AND REPEAT CHECK. IF- MEETS FLIGHT REQUIREMENTS.
NOT OK-RESET PROPELLER GOVERNOR

ASSEMBLY LINKAGE-REFER TO 76-10-01,
i
NOT OK-REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNOR-
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 182
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 38
PROPELLER GOVERNORRPM SHIFT UPWARD OR

FAILURE TO NTS-PRESSURE CHECK OF
PROPELLER GOVERNORRESET FUNCTION AND
NTS LOCKOUT SYSTEM COMPLETED-MAXIMUM
PRESSURE WAS LESS THAN 250 PSI.
INSTALL GAGE (C, TABLE 102) AT
POSITION C (SEE 72-00-00, ADJUST-
MENT/TEST FIGURE 501) TO CHECK BETA
PRESSURE-OPERATE ENGINE WITH PROPELLER
UNLATCHED AND WITH CONDITION LEVER AT
MAXIMUM-POWER LEVER AT FLIGHT IDLE-
BETA SHALL BE 350 PSIG MINIMUM. IF-
OK-(BETA PRESSURE OVER 350 PSIG) NOT OK-(BETA PRESSURE LESS THAN 350
REMOVE GAGE (C, TABLE 102) AND IN- PSIG) REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNOR(LOW
STALL AT POSITION A (FIGURE 501)- RELIEF VALVE SETTING)-REFER TO
INSTALL CAP AT POSITION D-OPERATE 72-10-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
ENGINE TO CHECK PRESSUREAS IN PRE-
VIOUS CHECK EXCEPT SET CONDITION
LEVER AT MINIMUM (PROPELLER GOVERNOR
RESET SYSTEM DISABLED)-PRESSUREAT
POSITION A (FIGURE 501) SHALL BE
ABOVE 250 PSIG. IF-
OK-(PRESSURE MORE THAN 250 PSlG) NOT OK-(PRESSURE LESS THAN 250 PSIG)
REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNOR(EXCESSIVE REMOVE CAP AT POSITION D (FIGURE
RESET SYSTEM LEAKAGE)-REFER TO 501) AND INSTALL AT POSITION B
72-10-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. (FIGURE 501)-OPERATE ENGINE TO
CHECK PRESSURE AS IN PREVIOUS CHECK
(CONDITION LEVER AT MINIMUM-
PROPELLER GOVERNORRESET SYSTEM
DISABLED) BETA PRESSURE SHALL BE
ABOVE 250 PSIG. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 183
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 38 ICONT)
OK-(PRESSURE MORETHAN 250 PSlG) RE- NOT OK-(PRESSURE LESS THAN 250
PLACE PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL PSIG) REMOVE CAP FROM POSITION B
(EXCESSIVE DUMP VALVE LEAKAGE)-REFER (FIGURE 501) AND RECONNNECTPROPELLER
TO 72-10-02, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. GOVERNOR RESET SYSTEM-CHECKNTS
SYSTEM CHECK VALVE IAW AIRCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL. IF-
I
OK-CHECK FOR DEFECTIVE PACKINGS ON NOT OK-REPLACE NTS CHECK VALVE-
NTS PRESSURE REGULATORAND RE- REFER TO 77-10-02, MAINTENANCE
STRICTOR-REFER TO 72-10-04 AND 72- PRACTICES.
10-06, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. IF-
OK-REMOVE PROPELLER GOVERNORAND NOT OK-(PACKINGS DAMAGED) REPLACE

INSPECT ORIFICE SETSCREW-REFERTO PACKINGS.
72-10-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES-
ORIFICE DIAMETER SHALL BE 0.0295
TO 0.0305 INCH-REPLACE OR CLEAN
ORIFICE IF CONTAMINATEDOR
RESTRICTED.
OK-PROPELLER GOVERNORHYDRAULIC RE-

SET LINE FOR RESTRICTION, IF-
I
NOT OK-CLEAN OR REPLACE PROPELLER
GOVERNOR HYDRAULIC RESET LINE. ]
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 184
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 39
FLIGHT IDLE POWERNOT REPEATABLE IN

FLIGHT WHEN CHECKED IAW AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
MANUAL-CHECK TO ENSURE ENGINE RIG PINS
CAN BE INSERTED IN PROPELLER PITCH
CONTROL QUADRANTWITH POWER LEVERS AT
FLIGHT IDLE. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT POWER LEVER CAN BE NOT OK-RERIG-REFER TO 75-10-01,

MOVED AWAY FROM FLIGHT IDLE DETENT MAINTENANCE PRACTICES OR RERIG AIR-
1/4 INCH WHILE IN FLIGHT IDLE DE- CRAFT LINKAGE IA~ AIRCRAFT MAINTE-
TENT WITH NO INCREASE IN FUEL FLOW. NANCE MANAUL.
PERFORM FLIGHT IDLE FLAT CHECK,
REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
IF-
NOT OK-INSPECT RIGGING-REFER TO 76-

10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. IF-
OK-REPLACE FUEL
CONTROL UNIT-
REFER TO 73-21-
05, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 185
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL •/•/liedignal
PROCEDURE 40
LOW TORQUE INDICATED WITH TURBINE

TEMPERATURE NORMAL-FUEL FLOW NORMAL-OIL
TEMPERATURE NORMAL-CHECK FOR OIL LEAKS
IN PLUMBING IN TORQUE INDICATING
SYSTEM. IF-
OK-PERFORM STATIC CALIBRATION CHECK NOT OK-CORRECTLEAKS-REFER TO AIR-

DF AIRCRAFT TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM CRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
IN ACCORDANCEWITH 72-00-00, ADJUST-
MENT/TEST. IF-
OK-CHECK POSITIVE TORQUE SENSOR NOT OK-RECALIBRATE-REPAIR OR RE-

PRESSURE REGULATOR/FILTER FOR PLACE TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM COM-
RESTRICTION OR MALFUNCTION. REFER PONENTS AS REQUIRED-REFER TO
TO 72-10-05. IF- 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TESTAND
77-10-03.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 186
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
PROCEDURE 40 (CONT.)
OK-CHECK ORIFICE HOUSING FOR CON- NOT OK-CLEAN OR REPLACE POSITIVE

TAMINATION OR PACKING DAMAGE. IF- TORQUE SENSOR PRESSUREREGULATOR/
FILTER.
OK-CHECK TORQUE COMPENSATOROR RE- NOT OK-CLEAN ORIFICE HOUSING OR

CESSED PLUG FOR PACKING DAMAGE. REPLACE PACKING.
IF-
OK-CHECK RAW TORQUE IN ACCORDANCE NOT OK-REPLACE PACKINGS. REFERTO

WITH 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF- 77-10-01 MAINTENANCE PRACTCIES.
R OK-(CODES CA-CC, GA) ADJUST TORQUE NOT OK-RECALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR

SENSOR COMPENSATORIN ACCORDANCE SYSTEM USING TORQUEMETERTEST KIT
WITH 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IN ACCORDANCEWITH 72-00-00,
ENTER AMOUNTOF ADJUSTMENT IN ENGINE ADJUSTMENT/TEST. ADJUSTTORQUE
LOG BOOK. (CODESAA-BA, DA-FB) SENSOR COMPENSATOROR TORQUETRANS-
RECHECK STATIC CALIBRATION OF AIR- DUCER AS APPLICABLE.
CRAFT TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM IN
ACCORDANCE WITH 72-00-00,
R NOT OK-(CODES CA-CC, GA) TORQUESEN-

SOR COMPENSATORMALFUNCTION-REPLACE
TORQUE SENSOk COMPENSATOR-REFERTO
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 187
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROCEDURE 41
HIGH TORQUE WHEN TURBINE TEMPERATURE

AND FUEL FLOW NORMAL-CHECKTHAT OIL
TEMPERATURE IS NORMAL. IF-
OK-PERFORM STATIC CALIBRATION CHECK NOT OK-ALLOW OIL TO REACH OPERATING

OF AIRCRAFT TORQUE INDICATING SYS- TEMPERATURE.
TEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH 72-00-00,
OK-CHECK POSITIVE TORQUE SENSOR NOT OK-RECALIBRATE-REPAIR OR REPLACE

PRESSURE REGULATOR/FILTER FOR TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
RESTRICTION OR MALFUNCTION. REFER AS REQUIRED-REFER TO 72-00-00,
TO 72-10-05. IF- ADJUSTMENT/TEST AND 77-10-03.
I
OK-CHECK ORIFICE HOUSING FOR CON- NOT OK-CLEAN OR REPLACE POSITIVE
TAMINATION OR PACKING DAMAGE. IF- TORQUE SENSOR PRESSURE REGULATOR/
FILTER.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 188
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROCEDURE 41 (CONT)
i
z
OK-CHECK RAW TORQUE IN ACCORDANCE NOT OK-CLEAN ORIFICE HOUSING OR

WITH 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF- REPLACE PACKING.
OK-CHECK GEARBOX PRESSURE IN ACCOR- NOT OK-RECALIBRATE TORQUESENSOR

DANCE WITH 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/ SYSTEM USING TORQUEMETERTEST KIT
TEST. IF- IN ACCORDANCEWITH 72-00-00,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST. ADJUSTTORQUE
COMPENSATOR OR TORQUETRANSDUCER
APPLICABLE.
OK-(CODES CA-CC, GA) ADJUST TORQUE NOT OK-CHECK ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFT
SENSOR COMPENSATORIN ACCORDANCE SEALS, BEARING SEALS AND GEARBOX
WITH 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. VENT SYSTEM FOR LEAKS. REPLACE
ENTER MOUNT OF ADJUSTMENT IN ENGINE SEALS AS NECESSARY.
LOG BOOK. (CODESAA-BA, DA-FB)
RECHECK STATIC CALIBRATION OF AIR-
CRAFT TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM IN
ACCORDANCE WITH 72-00-00,
R NOT OK-(CODES CA-CC, GA) TORQUESEN-

SOR COMPENSATORMALFUNCTION-REPLACE
TORQUE SENSOR COMPENSATOR-REFERTO
I
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 189
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 42
LOW TORQUEAND FUEL FLOWWITH ITT

MATCHED-CHECK TO ENSUREAIRCRAFT BLEED
SYSTEM IS OFF. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT ANTI-ICE VALVE HAS NOT NOT OK-SHUT OFF AIRCRAFT BLEED
FAILED IN THE OPEN POSITION. IF- AIR SYSTEM IAW AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
MANUAL.
OK-PULL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HANDTO NOT OK-REPAIR/REPLACE ANTI-ICE

CHECK FOR INTERNAL BINDING. IF- VALVE-REFER TO 75-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
OK-CHECK PLUMBING INTERFACE BETWEEN NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-

ENGINE AND AIRCRAFT BLEED AIR SORIES FROMREDUCTION GEARSECTION
SYSTEM FOR LEAKS-REFER TO AIRCRAFT AND RECHECKFOR INTERNAL BINDING.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF- IF-
i !
BINDING. A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY
FOR FURTHER IN-
VESTIGATION.
k
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 190
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT TEMPERATURE NOT OK-REPAIR LEAKS.

INDICATING SYSTEMIAW AIRCRAFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF-
OK-CHECK ENGINE TURBINE TEMERATURE NOT OK-REPAIR AIRCRAFT INDICATING

SYSTEM-REFER TO 77-20-03, MAINTE- SYSTEM-REFER TO AIRCRAFTMAINTENANCE
NANCE PRACTICES. IF- MANUAL.
NOT OK-REPLACE ENGINETURBINE TEM-

PERATURE SYSTEMAS NECESSARY-REFER T
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 191
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE43
(CODES AA-CC) ENGINE ACCELERATION

SLOW OR ENGINE WILL NOT REACHMAXIMUM
POWER OR ENGINE OVERSPEEDSWITH
PROPELLER ON LOCKS-CONTROLLINKAGE,
PROPELLER GOVERNORAND FUEL CONTROL
SET POINTS HAVE BEEN PROPERLYAD-
JUSTED-CHECK FOR LEAKAGE OF HEATED
PNEUMATIC TUBES BETWEENCOMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE PORT, INLET TEMPERATURE
SENSOR AND FUEL CONTROLUNIT-REFER TO
73-10-01, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES. IF-
NOT OK-CHECK FLARES AND FLARE I OK-REFER TO PROCEDURES28 OR 44.

SLEEVES OF PNEUMATICTUBES FOR COR-
ROSION OR CRACKSAND PRESSURETEST
PNEUMATIC TUBES-REFERTO 73-10-01,
NOT OK-REPAIR LEAKAGE OR REPLACE DE-

FECTIVE PARTS AND RETEST-REFERTO
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 192
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 44
(CODES AA-CC) LOW TORQUE-LOW TURBINE

TEMPERATURE AND LOW FUEL FLOW WITH
POWER LEVER FULL FORWARDCHECK THAT
PROPELLER GOVERNORASSEMBLY AND OVER-
SPEED/UNDERSPEED GOVERNORSETPOINTS
ARE WITHIN LIMITS-REFER TO 72-00-00,
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT POWERLEVER NOT OK-RESET WITHIN LIMITS.

RIGGING. IF-
OK-CHECK COMPRESSORDISCHARGE NOT OK-CORRECTMISRIGGED AIRCRAFT

PRESSURE, PX AND PC LINES FOR POWER LEVER RIGGING-REFER TO AIRCRAFT
LEAKS. IF- MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
OK-CAP TORQUE LIMITER BYPASS VALVE. NOT OK-REPAIR LEAKS.

IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE TORQUELIMITER BYPASS

VALVE-REFER TO 73-22-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. IF-
k_
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 193
Dec 14/87
~ 1 MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 44 (CONT)
NOT OK-CHECK VOLTAGE OF PROPELLER

GOVERNOR MONOPOLEIN ACCORDANCE
WITH 72-10-03, APPROVED REPAIRS.
IF-
J I
OK-ENGINE INSTALLATIONS WITHOUT OK-FUEL CONTROL NOT OK-REPLACE
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM) ENSURE ADJUSD~ENT RE- PROPELLER GOV-
FLOW DIVIDER AND DRAIN VALVE ARE NOT QUIRED-REFER TO ENOR ASSEMBLY
LEAKING WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING AT ADJUStmENT/TEST.
POWER. IF-
OK-CHECK RIGGING AND POSITION OF NOT OK-CAP DRAIN FITTING ON FUEL

MANUAL OVERRIDE ARM ON FUEL SHUTOFF FLOW DIVIDER AND DRAIN VALVE (FIGURE
VALVE-REFER TO AIRCRAFT 104) AND REPEAT CHECK-(CAUTION: RE-
~IAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF- MOVE CAP AFTER CHECK A N ~ O R
TURBINE TEMPERATUEON NEXT START.)
IF-
OK-REPAIR FLOW
DIVIDER AND
DRAIN VALVE-
REFER TO 73-10-
07, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
k_r
UP136688
72-O0-00
Page 194
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
T
OK-PERFORM FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD
ASS~IBLY CHECK IAW 72-00-00,
NOT OK-RERIG FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE-
REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF- MANUAL.
OK-CONNECT GAGE (D, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-REMOVE-CLEAN-INSPECTAND TEST

MEASURE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP DISCHARGE PRIMARY AND SECONDARYFUEL NOZZLE
AT FUEL PRESSURE PORT TAP ON FUEL AND MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES-REFER TO
CONT ASSEMBLY-PRESSURE SHALL BE 73-10-09, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
LESS THAN 900 PSI. IF-
OK-CONNECT GAGE (D, TABLE 102) INTO NOT OK-CONNECTGAGE (D, TABLE 102)
AIRCRAFT FUEL SUPPLY LINE TO FUEL TO DISCHARGE PORT ON FUEL SHUTOFF
CONTROL ASSEMBLY (FIGURES 101-102) VALVE (FIGURE 101) WITH TEE-
PRESSURE SHALL BE MORE THAN FIVE PRESSURE SHALL BE LESS THAN
PSI. IF- 800 PSI. IF-
NOT OK-CHECK OK-CONNECT GAGE NOT OK-REPAIR OR

ACFT FUEL SUPPLY (D, TABLE 102) REPLACE FLOW
SYST~I-REFER TO INTO METERED DIVIDER AND
AIRCRAFT MAINTE- FUEL LINE (FIGURE DRAIN VALVE-RE-
NANCE MANUAL. 101) FROM FER TO 73-10-07
FUEL CONTROL MAINTENANCE
UNIT-PRESSURE PRACTICES.
SHALL BE LESS
THAN 800 PSI.
IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 195
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE44 (CONT)
k.r'
NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SHUT-

OFF VALUE-REFERTO 73-10-06, MAINTE-
NANCE PRACTICES.
OK-REPLACE INLET TEMPERATURESENSOR-

PRACTICES. IF-

PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 196
Dec 14/87
lied
PROCEDURE 45
R (CODES DA-GA) LOW TORQUE-TURBINE TEM-

PERATURE AND FUEL FLOW WITH POWER
LEVER FULL FORWARD-CHECKTHAT PROPEL-
LER GOVERNORASSEMBLY AND OVERSPEED/
UNDERSPEED GOVERNORSETPOINTS ARE
WITHIN LIMITS-REFER TO 72-00-00,
I
OK-CHECK POWER LEVER ADJUSTMENT. I NOT OK-RESET WITHIN LIMITS.
IF-
[ I
OK-RETARD SPEED LEVER TO LOW WITH NOT OK-CORRECT FAULTY ADJUSTED AIR- 1
POWER LEVER FULL FORWARD(CAUTION: CRAFT POWER LEVER ADJUSTMENT-REFERTOI
MONITOR TURBINE TEMPERATUREAND AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. I
DO NOT EXCEED LIMIT)-FUEL FLOW SHALL t
DROP LESS THAN 10 LB/HR. IF-
R OK-SET SPEED LEVER TO HIGH POSITION NOT OK-CHECK COMPRESSORDISCHARGE

R AND SLOWLY ADVANCE POWER LEVER FROM PRESSURE SENSING LINE (FIGURES 102
R FLIGHT IDLE POSITION WHILE MONITOR- AND 103) FOR LEAKS.
ING FUEL FLOW-FUEL FLOW SHALL IN-
CREASE CONTINUOUSLYWITH POWER
LEVER ADVANCEMENT. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 197
Aug 12/91
/lied
PROCEDURE 45 (CONT)
L
OK-CAP TORQUELIMITER BYPASSVALVE. NOT OK-FUEL CONTROLADJUSTMENTRE-
IF- QUIRED-REFER TO 72-00-00,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
...... l
R OK-CHECK FUEL CONTROL PS3 ROLLING NOT OK-REPLACE TORQUELIMITER BYPASS
R DIAPHRAGM FOR LEAKAGE-REFER TO VALVE. REFERTO 73-22-01.
R 73-21-05, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF-
R OK-CHECK INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRES- NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROL UNIT-
R SURE SENSOR-REFER TO 73-21-05. IF- REFER TO 73-21-05.
OK-CHECK ADJUSTMENTAND POSITION OF NOT OK-REPLACE INLET TEMPERATURE AND

MANUAL OVERRIDE ARM ON FUEL SHUTOFF PRESSURE SENSOR-REFER TO 73-21-05.
VALVE. IF-
OK-PERFORM FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD NOT OK-ADJUST FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE-
ASSEMBLY CHECK IN ACCORDANCE WITH REFER TO AIRCRAFTMAINTENANCE
72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF- MANUAL.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
PROCEDURE 45 (CONT)
OK-CONNECT GAGE (D, TABLE 102) TO NOT OK-REMOVE-CLEAN-INSPECT AND TEST

MEASURE HIGH PRESSURE PUMPDISCHARGE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FUEL NOZZLE
AT FUEL PRESSURE PORTTAP ON FUEL AND MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES. REFERTO
CONTROL ASSEMBLY-PRESSURE SHALL BE 73-10-09.
LESS THAN900 PSI. IF-
OK-CONNECT GAGE(A, TABLE 102) INTO NOT OK-CONNECT GAGE(D, TABLE 102)
AIRCRAFT FUEL SUPPLY LINE TO FUEL TO DISCHARGE PORTON FUEL SHUTOFF
CONTROL ASSEMBLY (FIGURES 102 AND VALVE (FIGURES 102 AND 103) WITH
103) PRESSURESHALL BE MORETHAN 5 TEE-PRESSURE SHALL BE LESS THAN 800
PSI. IF- PSI. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 198.1/198.2
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
PROCEDURE 45.(CONT)
1
OK-REMOVE AND NOT OK-CHECK OK-CONNECT GAGE NOT OK-REPAIR OR
REPLACE FUEL AIRCRAFT FUEL (D, TABLE 102) REPLACE FLOWDI-
PUMP ASSEMBLY- SUPPLY SYSTEM- INTO METERED VIDER AND DRAIN
REFER TO REFER TO FUEL LINE (FIG- VALVE-REFER TO
73-21-06- AIRCRAFT MAINTE- URES 102 AND 73-10-07.
REPEAT CHECK. NANCE MANUAL. 103) FROM FUEL
IF- CONTROL UNIT-
PRESSURE SHALL
BE LESS THAN
800 PSI. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT-REFER TO
73-21-05.
NOT OK-REPAIR OR
REPLACE FUEL
SHUTOFF VALVE-
REFER TO
73-10-06.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.3
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
PROCEDURE 46
BETA LIGHT STAYS ON WHEN POWERLEVER

ADVANCED TOWARDTAKEOFF-ENGINESPEED
AT NORMALPROPELLERGOVERNORSPEED-
CHECK BETA PRESSURESWITCH-
(CODES AA-BA, DA-FB) REFERTO
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL.
(CODES CC-CA, GA) REFERTO 77-10-02,
I
I NOT OK-REPLACE BETA PRESSURESWITCH.
........ i
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.4
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 47
LOW TURBINE TEMPERATUREWITH MATCHED

TORQUE-FUEL FLOW AND RPM. CHECK
TURBINE TEMPERATUREINDICATION SYSTEM-
REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL
AND 77-20-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.5
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 48
UNACCEPTABLE POWERLEVER SPLIT ON THE

GROUND WITH ENGINE SPEED-TORQUEAND
FUEL FLOW~ATCHED (POWER LEVER POSITION
IS INFLUENCED BY AIRCRAFT LINKAGE
HYSTERESIS-ALL SPLITS IN QUADRANT
POSITION SHOULD BE MADEWITH MOVEMENT
OF BOTHPOWERIN SAMEDIRECTION)-CHECK
FOR FREEDOMOF POWERLEVER MOVEMENT.
IF-
OK-TRACK AIRCRAFT POWERLEVERS WITH NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

ENGINES SHUT DOWN-READ POWERLEVER MANUAL.
PROTRACTORS AT EQUAL COCKPIT POSI-
TIONS WITH LEVER MOVEMENTIN SAME
DIRECTION-PROTRACTORS SHALL AGREE
WITHIN ±2 DEGREES-RIG PINS SHALL
DROP INTO RIG SLOT WITH POWERLEVER
AT FLIGHT IDLE. IF-
OK-CHECK POWERLEVER ANGLE AT WHICH NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO AIR-

MAXIMUM TORQUE IS OBTAINED. IF- CRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL AND 76-10-
01, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
OK-CHECK ENGINE SPEED WITH LATCHED NOT OK-RESET MAXIMUMPOWERLEVER

PROPELLER-CONDITION LEVER HIGH-POWER POSITION IN ONE TURN INCREMENTS FOR
LEVER AT FLIGHT IDLE-SPEEDS SHOULD EACH 4 DEGREE CHANGEREQUIRED IN
BE MATCHEDWITHIN ±0.5 PERCENT. POWER LEVER ANGLE.
IF-
UP136688
k. 72-00-00
Page 198.6
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
OK-CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE WEARON ROD NOT OK-RESET FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOWS
END BEARINGS USEDTO RIG PROPELLER TO PROVIDE EQUAL ENGINE SPEEDS-REFER
PITCH CONTROLTO MANUAL FUEL VALVE TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
SHAFT. IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE WORNROD END BEARINGS-

PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.7
Dec 14/87
/lied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ignal
PROCEDURE 49
(CODES AA-CC) POWER LEVERS SPLIT AT

ALTITUDE-SPLIT INCREASES AS ALTITUDE
INCREASES (NO SPLIT ON TAKE-OFF OR
GROUND CHECK)-CHECK ALL BLEED-AIR
USING SYSTEMS FOR LEAKAGE AND IF
BLEED-AIR PRESSURESARE EQUAL ON BOTH
ENGINES. IF-
OK-CHECK LINES AND FITTINGS FROM NOT OK-CORRECT LEAKAGE-REFER TO

PLENUM TO INLET TEMPERATURESENSOR 75-10-01, 75-10-02, MAINTENANCE
TO FUEL CONTROL UNIT FOR LEAKAGE. PRACTICES AND AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
IF- MANUAL.
OK-CHECK P3 FILTER FOR CLEANLINESS NOT OK-CORRECT LEAKAGE.

-REFER TO 73-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. IF-
OK-(TURBINE TEMPERATUREDFFERENCE
BETWEEN ENGINES LESS THAN 20C WITH
POWER LEVERS MATCHED AND WITH TUR-
BINE TEMPERATUREON HIGHER POWER
ENGINE AT 923C)-INCREASE START FLOW
ADJUSTMENT FIVE CLICKS COUNTER-
I_NOT OK-CLEAN P3 FILTER-REFER TO
CLOCKWISE AND DECREASE MAXIMUM POWER

ADJUSTMENT ONE-FOURTH TURN COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE ON LOWER POWER ENGINE
FOR EACH 10C OF TURBINE TEMPERATURE
DIFFERENCE. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 198.8
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROCEDURE 49 (CONT)
OK-(TURBINE TEMPERATUREDIFFERENCE
BETWEEN ENGINES MORETHAN 20C WITH
POWER LEVERS MATCHED AND WITH TURBINE
TEMPERATURE ON HIGHER POWERENGINE AT
923C)-SWITCH INLET TEMPERATURESEN-
SORS BETWEEN ENGINES AND RECHECK.
IF-
OK-REPLACE INLET TEMPERATURESENSOR- NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROLUNIT-

REFER TO 73-21-02, MAINTENANCE REFER TO 73-21-05, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES. PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 198.9
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
PROCEDURE 50
(CODES DA-GA) POWERLEVERS SPLIT AT

ALTITUDE-SPLIT INCREASES AS ALTITUDE
INCREASES (NO SPLIT ON TAKEOFFOR
GROUND CHECK)-CHECK ALL BLEED-AIR
USING SYSTEMSFOR LEAKAGEAND IF
BLEED-AIR PRESSURES ARE EQUALON BOTH
ENGINES. IF-
OK-CHECK FLIGHT IDLE AND MAXIMUM NOT OK-CORRECT LEAKAGE-REFER TO

FUEL FLOWADJUSTMENT PLUGAND GASKET 75-10-01, 75-10-02 AND AIRCRAFT
ON REAR OF FUEL CONTROLUNIT FOR MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
LEAKAGE. IF-
OK-CHECK LINES AND FITTINGS FROM NOT OK-REPLACE PACKINGS AND GASKETS
INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SEN- TO CORRECT LEAKAGE.
SOR TO FUEL CONTROLUNIT FOR
LEAKAGE. IF-
R OK-CHECK FUEL CONTROL FUEL TRIM- NOT OK-SECURE PARTSOR CLEAN INLET
REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR.
IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.10
Aug 12/91
ilied
PROCEDURE 50 (CONT)
[
R OK-CHECK FUEL CONTROL PS3 ROLLING NOT OK-ADJUST FUEL CONTROL FUEL
R DIAPHRAGM FOR LEAKAGE-REFER TO TRIM-REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/
R 73-21-05. IF- TEST.
l
R OK-CHECK INLET TEMPERATURE AND NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROL UNIT-
R PRESSURE SENSOR-REFER TO 73-21-05. REFER TO 73-21-05.
IF-
OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROL UNIT-REFER NOT OK-REPLACE INLET TEMPERATURE

TO 73-21-05. AND SENSOR-REFER TO 73-21-05.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.11
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 51
HIGH FUEL FLOW AT MAXIMUMPOWERSET-

TING WITH TORQUEAND TURBINE TEMPER-
ATURE MATCHED-CHECKFLOW INDICATING
SYSTEM FOR MALFUNCTION. IF-
OK-(ENGINE INSTALLATIONS WITHOUT NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM) CHECK MANUAL.
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER DRAIN FOR LEAKAGE.
IF-
NOT OK-REPAIR FUEL FLOWDIVIDER

VALVE AS NECESSARY-REFER TO 73-10-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.12
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 52
UNINTENTIONAL SHUTDOWNDURING FLIGHT

(LOW INLET FUEL PRESSURE RESULTING
FROM UNINTENTIONALLY SHUTTING OFF
AIRCRAFT BOOSTPUMPAT HIGHER
ALTITUDES WILL CONTRIBUTE TO ENGINE
BLOW OUT-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
MANUAL)-CHECK THAT AIRCRAFT
CONTROLS AND SWITCHESARE IN NORMAL
POSITIONS. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT FUEL SUPPLY IS ADE- NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT

QUATE AND FUEL PRESSURE IS NORMAL. MANUAL FOR PROPERSTARTING PRO-
IF- CEDURES.
OK-RESTART ENGINE AND CHECKFOR NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT

PROPER ENGINE PARAMETERINDICATIONS. MANUAL.
IF-
NOT OK-CHECK SYMPTOMSLISTED IN

OTHER TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES
AND PERFORMAPPLICABLE PROCEDURE.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.13
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 53
ASYMMETRIC THRUSTON LANDING WITH

POWER LEVERAT FLIGHT IDLE-BETA LIGHTS
NOT ON (SYMMETRYRESTOREDAFTER BETA
LIGHTS GO ON) CHECKFOR MATCHED AIR-
CRAFT AND ENGINE CONTROL LINKAGE RIG-
GING-CHECK FOR FUEL FLOWON ENGINES
IN FLIGHT IAW AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
IF-
OK-ADJUST FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOW-RE- NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO

FER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
MANUAL AND ENGINE LOG BOOKFOR
PROPER VALUE-PERFORM ADJUSTMENT-
REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.14
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 54
ASYMMETRIC THRUSTON LANDING WITH

POWER LEVERAT FLIGHT IDLE-BETA LIGHT
FOR LOW THRUST ENGINE ON-SYMMETRY RE-
STORED AFTER LIGHTS ON AND FORWARD
SPEED DECREASES-REFER TO TROUBLE
SHOOTING PROCEDURE 53.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.15
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 55
ASYMMETRIC THRUSTON LANDING-BETA

LIGHT FOR HIGH THRUST ENGINE ON-
ASYMMETRY WORSENS AS FORWARD SPEED
DECREASES-CHECK THAT RIGGING PIN CAN
BE INSERTED IN RIGGING PLATE ON PRO-
PELLER PITCH CONTROLWITH POWERLEVER
POSITIONED AT FLIGHT IDLE. IF-
OK-CHECK FLIGHT IDLE BLADE ANGLE- NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO 76-

REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE 10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES AND
MANUAL. IF- AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
NOT OK-RESET FLIGHT IDLE BLADE ANGLE

BY POSITIONING BETA TUBE-REFER TO
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.16
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE rIANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 56
AIRCRAFT SINK RATE TOO HIGH AT

APPROACH AIRSPEED WITH POWER LEVERS AT
FLIGHT IDLE-THRUST SYMMETRICAL-CHECK
THAT RIGGING PIN CAN BE INSERTED IN
RIGGING PLATE OF MANUAL FUEL VALVE ON
FUEL CONTROL WHEN POWER LEVER SET AT
FLIGHT IDLE-REFER TO 76-10-01, rlAINTE-
NANCE PRACTICES. IF-
OK-INCREASE FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOW NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO 76-

ON BOTH ENGINES AN EQUAL AMOUNT-RE- 10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES AND
FER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.17
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE57
AIRCRAFT FLOATS ON LANDING-THRUST

SYMMETRICAL-BETA LIGHTS ON DURING
FLARE MANEUVERWHENPOWERLEVERS SET TO
FLIGHT IDLE-CHECKTHAT RIGGING PIN CAN
BE INSERTED IN PITCH CONTROLWHEN
POWERLEVER SET AT FLIGHT IDLE-REFER
TO 76-10-01, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
IF-
OK-CHECK FLIGHT IDLE BLADE ANGLE- NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO 76-

REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE 10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
MANUAL. IF-
NOT OK-RESET FLIGHT IDLE BLADE

ANGLE-REFER TO 72-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.18
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 58
AIRCRAFT FLOATS ON LANDING-THRUST

SYMMETRICAL-BETA LIGHTS OFF DURING
FLARE MANEUVERWHENPOWERLEVERS SET
TO FLIGHT IDLE-CHECK THAT RIGGING PIN
CAN BE INSERTED IN RIGGING PLATE OF
MANUAL FUEL VALVE ON FUEL CONTROL WHEN
POWER LEVERSET AT FLIGHT IDLE-REFER
TO 76-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES,
IF-
OK-REDUCE FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOWON NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO 7~

BOTH ENGINES AN EQUALAMOUNT-REFER 10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES AND
TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
UP136688
72-00 v,.,
Page 198.19
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 59
ASYMMETRIC THRUST ON LANDING WHEN

PROPELLER REVERSED-OPERATIONAL CHECK
SHOWS SAME FUEL FLOW-TURBINE TEMPER-
ATURE-TORQUE AND SPEED ON BOTH ENGINES
ALTHOUGH ONE ENGINE SLOWERTO REVERSE
(BETA LIGHT SLOWTO COMEON IN LANDING
AND REVERSE) (PROPELLER CONTROLSYSTEM
IS AFFECTED BY OIL TEMPEMPERATURE-OIL
TEMPERATURE MUST BE IN NORMAL
OPERATING RANGE ON BOTH ENGINES)-CHECK
ALL GOVERNEDSPEED SETTINGS (OVER-
SPEED/UNDERSPEED HIGH AND LOW AND
PROPELLER GOVERNORHIGH AND LOW SET-
POINTS) FOR REQUIRED SPEED AND
PROPER SEPARATION
NOTE: MINIMUMSEPARATION OF UNDER-
SPTP'E~
' DHIGH AND PROPELLERGOVERNOR
HIGH RPM SETPOINTS SHALL BE 2.5 PER-
CENT MINIMUM ENGINE SPEED. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR LOW BETA PRESSURE AS NOT OK-CHECK THAT ALL SPEED ADJUST-
FOLLOWS: MENT STOPS MAKE POSITIVE CONTACT.
(1)CONNECT GAGE(C, TABLE 102) TO IF-
BETA PRESSURE SWITCH PORT
(FIGURES I01 THROUGH i03).
(2)OPERATE ENGINE WITH PROPELLER
ON STARTLOCKS-POWER LEVER AT
FLIGHT IDLE AND SPEED LEVER FULL
FORWARD-NOTE BETA PRESSURE.
(3)OPERATE ENGINEWITH PROPELLER NOT OK-ADJUST APPLICABLE STOPS-
OFF STARTLOCKSAT FLIGHT IDLE- REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/
GROUND IDLE AND FULL REVERSEWITH TEST.
SPEED LEVER SET FULL FORWARD-NOTE
BETA PRESSURE.
(4)BETA PRESSURE SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 300 PSI IN EACH CASE. IF-
UP136688
L. 72-00-00
Page 198.20
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 59 (CONT)
I
NOT OK-CHECK FOR DEFECTIVE UNFEATH-
ERING PUMPCHECKVALVE (FIGURES 101
THROUGH 103). IF-
OK-CHECK FEATHERING VALVE FOR NOT OK-REPLACE UNFEATHERING PUMP

CONTAMINATION OR LEAKAGE. IF- CHECK VALVE-REFER TO 77-10-02,
OK-CAP OFF NTS CHECKSYSTEMUPSTREAM NOT OK-REMOVE CONTAMINATION OR RE-

OF NTS CHECKVALVE (IF NTS SYSTEM PLACE FEATHERING VALVE-REFER TO
INSTALLED)-SEE FIGURES 101 THROUGH 72-10-07, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
103-REPEAT BETA PRESSURE CHECKS.
IF-
I
OK-CHECK BETA TUBE PACKINGS FOR NOT OK-REPLACE NTS CHECKVALVE
DETERIORATION. IF- (FIGURES 101 THROUGH103)-REFER TO
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.21
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 59 (CONT)
OK-CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE BLEED OFF OF NOT OK-REPLACE BETA TUBE PACKINGS-
CONTROL OIL PRESSUREAT PROPELLER REFER TO 72-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PITCH CONTROLWITH PROPELLER IN- PRACTICES.
FEATHERED POSITION THE POWER
LEVER AT FLIGHT IDLE-OPERATE
UNFEATHERING PUMP UNTIL
BLADES REACH LIMIT OF TRAVEL-
DEENERGIZE UNFEATHERING PUMP AND
CHECK TIME REQUIRED FOR BLADES TO
RETURN TO FEATHER POSITION-REPEAT
CHECK ON OTHER ENGINE AND COMPARE
TIME REQUIRED. IF-
OK-(BLEED DOWNTIMES APPROXIMATELY NOT OK-(BLEED DOWNTIME TOO RAPID)-

EQUAL) REPLACE PROPELLER GOVERNOR CHECK PROPELLERGOVERNORGASKET.
ASSEMBLY FOR LOW PUMP OUTPUT-REFER IF-
TO 72-10-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE PROPELLER PITCH NOT OK-REPLACE PROPELLERGOVERNOR

CONTROL-REFER TO 72-10-02, MAINTE- GASKET REFER TO 72-10-03, MAINTE-
NANCE PRACTICES. NANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.22
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 60
ASYMMETRIC THRUST ON LANDING WHEN

PROPELLERS REVERSED-BETA LIGHT ON-
OPERATIONAL CHECK SHOWS ONE ENGINE HIGH
IN TURBINE TEMPERATURE FUEL FLOW AND
TORQUE COMPAREDTO OTHER ENGINE-
CHECK RIGGING BETWEEN POWER LEVER
PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT RIGGING PIN CAN BE NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO 76-

INSERTED IN RIGGING PLATE ON PRO- 10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES AND
PELLER PITCH CONTROL WITH POWER AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
LEVER IN FULL REVERSE-REFER TO
IF-
OK-CHECK FOR PROPER SETTING OF NOT OK-CORRECT RIGGING-REFER TO 76-

UNDERSPEED GOVERNOR. IF- 10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
OK-CHECK FLIGHT IDLE BLADE ANGLE NOT OK-ADJUST UNDERSPEEDGOVERNOR-

WITH ENGINE OIL AT NORMAL OPERATING REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
TEMPERATURE-REFER TO AIRCRAFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.23
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO, 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 60 I CONT),
T
OK-MAKE TAKE OFF POWERCHECK-REFER NOT OK-ADJUST FLIGHT IDLE BLADE
TO 72-00-00, ADJUS~IENT/TEST. ANGLE BY POSITIONING BETA TUBE-
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.24
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 61
ENGINE SPEED DECAYS WHEN REVERSE

THRUST SELECTED (ENSURE REVERSE NOT
SELECTED AT TOO HIGH AIRSPEED)-CHECK
THAT SPEED LEVER IS IN HIGH SPEED
POSITION. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT UNDERSPEEDGOVERNOR NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT

RPM SETPOINT IS CORRECT-REFERTO MANUAL FOR PROPER OPERATING PRO-
FUEL CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS, 72-00-00, CEDURES.
OK-PERFORM MAXIMUM FUEL FLOW CHECK- NOT OK-CHECK UNDERSPEEDGOVERNOR

REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. RIGGING-REFER TO 76-10-01, MAINTE-
IF- NANCE PRACTICES AND AIRCRAFT MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL. IF-
NOT OK-ADJUST UNDERSPEEDGOVERNOR

HIGH RPM SETPOINT-REFER TO 72-00-C
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
OK-CHECK FLIGHT IDLE BLADE ANGLE- NOT OK-ENGINE DETERIORATION INDI-

REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMAN- CATED-REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A
UAL. IF- GARRETT AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILII
UP136688
72-06-,,,,
Page 198.25
Dec 14/87
A I N T ANcE MANUAL
TP 331 5 IREPORT NO 72 01 27
PROCEDURE61 ICONT)
OK-CHECK REVERSEBLADE ANGLE IAW NOT OK-VERIFY FLIGHT IDLE BLADE

AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEMANUAL. IF- ANGLE IAW AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.
OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROLUNIT-REFER I NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACEPROPELLER.

TO 73-21-05, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.26
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 62
REVERSE RESPONSE SLOW AT HIGH LANDING

SPEED-ENGINE TESTED PER 72-00-00,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST AND PRESSUREMINIMUM
WAS IN EXCESS OF 20 PSl-CHECK RES-
TRICTOR ASSEMBLY FOR OBSTRUCTIONS-
RESTRICTOR ASSEMBLY IS LOCATED IN-
SIDE BORE WHICH HOUSES NTS
PRESSURE REGULATOR. IF-
OK-REPLACE THE PROPELLER PITCH CON- NOT OK-CLEAN (OBSTRUCTION) AS RE-

TROL FOR INADEQUATEDUMP VALVE FLOW QUIRED.
AND CHECK NTS LOCKOUT PRESSURE. IF-
OK-(BELOW 20 PSlG) PERFORM NOT OK-(ABOVE 20 PSlG) ENSURE

FIELD TEST OF NTS LOCKOUT AND PROPER SEATING OF ORIFICE SETSCREW.
PROPELLER GOVERNORRESET SYSTEM,
REFER TO 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/
TEST.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.27
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 63
UNINTENTIONAL SHUTDOWNDURING GROUND

OPERATION-CHECK THAT AIRCRAFT/ENGINE
CONTROLS AND SWITCHES ARE IN NORMAL
POSITION. IF-
OK-CHECK THAT FUEL SUPPLY IS ADE- NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT

QUATE AND FUEL PRESSURE IS NORMAL. MANUAL FOR PROPERSTARTING PRO-
IF- CEDURE.
OK-CHECK AIRCRAFT RIGGING TO MANUAL NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT

OVERRIDE ARM ON FUEL SHUTOFFVALVE, MANUAL.
IF-
OK-RESTART ENGINE AND CHECK FOR NOT OK-RERIG FUEL SHUTOFFVALVE-

PROPER ENGINE PARAMETERINDICATIONS. REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
IF- MANUAL,
OK-CONDUCT FLAMEOUTCHECK-REFER TO NOT OK-CHECK SYMPTOMSLISTED IN

72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST. IF- OTHER TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES
AND PERFORMAPPLICABLE PROCEDURE.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.28
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 63 (CONT)
OK-CHECK FOR POSSIBLE AIRCRAFT NOT OK-REPLACE FUEL CONTROL UNIT-

ELECTRICAL MALFUNCTION-REFERTO AIR- REFER TO 73-21-05, MAINTENANCE
CRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL. PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.29
Dec 14/87
~IAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 64
NOISY DECELERATION FOLLOWING SHUTDOWN-

PULL PROPELLER THROUGH BY HANDTO
CHECK FOR BINDING WHICH MAY INDICATE
INTERNAL MALFUNCTION. IF-
NOT OK-REMOVE SHAFT DRIVEN ACCES-

SORIES FROMREDUCTION GEARSECTION
AND RECHECK FOR BINDING. IF-
OK-REPLACE ACCESSORY CAUSING BIND- NOT OK-REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A

ING. GARRETT AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY
UP136688
72-00-0O
Page 198.30
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 65
PROPELLER FAILS TO ENGAGE START LOCKS

AFTER SHUTDOWN-CHECKTHAT POWERLEVER
IS POSITIONED TO FULL REVERSE IMMED-
IATELY AFTER INITIATING STOP. IF-
OK-UNFEATHER PROPELLER USING UN- NOT OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT

FEATHERING PUMP-ENSURESUFFICIENT MANUAL FOR PROPER OPERATING
REVERSE BLADE ANGLE EXISTS TO ALLOW PROCEDURES.
START LOCKS TO ENGAGE. IF-
OK-REFER TO AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE NOT OK-REFER TO TROUBLE SHOOTING

MANUAL TO DETERMINE SERVICEABILITY PROCEDURE 1.
OF PROPELLER START LOCKS.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.31
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 66
OIL CONSUMPTIONHIGH-CHECK ALL LUBRI-

CATION AND PROPELLER CONTROL SYSTEM
COMPENENTS-LINES-AND FITTINGS FOR
EVIDENCE OF LEAKAGE. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR LEAKAGE OF COMPRESSOR NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE PARTS AS

SHAFT SEAL (EVIDENT BY OIL IN COM- REQUIRED TO CORRECTLEAKAGE.
PRESSOR INLET). IF-
OK-CHECK FOR LEAKAGE OF OIL INLET NOT OK-REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A

FITTING ASS~IBLY AND OIL PRESSURE GARRETT AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY
JET OR OIL SCAVENGE PUMP AT REAR FOR REPAIR.
TURBINE BEARINGS AS EVIDENT BY OIL
LEAKING FROMBETWEEN TAIL CONE AND
AIRCRAFT SUPPORT. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR LEAKAGE OF REARTURBINE NOT OK-REPAIR OR REPLACE AS REQUIRED

SEAL OR GASKET BETWEEN BEARING SUP- TO CORRECT LEAKAGE.
PORT AND SEAL AS EVIDENT BY OIL
LEAKING INTO EXHAUST PIPE FROMBE-
TWEEN SUPPORT AND TURBINE
WHEEL. IF-
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.32
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
OK-CHECK FOR ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFT NOT OK-REPLACE SEAL OR GASKETAS

LEAKAGE BY REMOVING INDIVIDUAL REQUIRED TO CORRECTLEAKAGE.
DRAIN LINES AT COMMONDRAIN MANI-
FOLD TO DETErmINE SOURCEOF LEAKAGE
AND BY CHECKING STARTER-GENERATOR
MOUNTING PAD. IF-
J
OK-CHECK THAT OIL IS NOT FOAMING NOT OK-REPLACE SEALS AS REQUIRED TO
AND BEING LOST THROUGHOIL TANK CORRECT LEAKAGE-(ACCESSORY DRIVE
VENT LINE. IF- SHAFT SEALS REQUIRE NEGATIVE GEAR-
CASE PRESSURE OF AT LEAST 1 PSIG
TO SEAL PROPERLY).
NOT OK-IF OIL CONSUMPTION INCREASE

WAS NOTEDAFTERADDING OIL OR RE-
SERVICING-FOAM MAY BE CAUSEDBY
MIXING OF LUBRICATING OIL BRANDS OR
BY IMPROPERSERVICING. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION OF OIL NOT OK-RESERVICE OIL SUPPLYWITH

WITH FUEL. IF- APPROVED LUBRICATING OIL. REFER
TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHTMANUAL.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.33
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 66 (CONT)
OK-CONNECT VACUUMGAGE(TABLE 102) NOT OK-REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING

TO ACCESSORY HOUSINGGEARCASE PROCEDURE 25 OR 26.
NEGATIVE PRESSURE PORT-VACUUM GAGE
SHALL INDICATE A NEGATIVE
PRESSURE. IF-
I
OK-REPLACE AIR/OIL SEPARATOR IN OIL NOT OK-REMOVE ENGINE-RETURN TO A
TANK ASSEMBLY-REFER TO 79-10-01, GARRETT AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY
MAINTENANCEPRACTICES. FOR REPAIR.
UP136688
72-O0-00
Page 198.34
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROCEDURE 66A
WHITE SMOKE COMING FROM TAIL PIPE

AFTER SHUTDOWN. CHECKFUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE FOR LEAKAGE. REFERTO
73-10-06.
R OK-CHECK FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM

R FOR PROPER OPERATION. REFERTO
R ADJUSTMENT/TEST,
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 198.34A/198.34B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 67
AT 90 PERCENTTORQUE-FUEL FLOWDROPS
LESS THAN60 POUNDSPER HOURWHEN
TEMPERATURE LIMITING SYSTEM SELF TEST
ACTUATES. CHECKINLET FILTER TO
TEMPERATURE LIMITER BYPASS VALVE FOR
CONTAMINATION. IF-
OK-CHECK FOR FAULTY CONTROLLERBY NOT OK-CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER IN

EXCHANGING CONTROLLERS. IF- TEMPERATURE LIMITER BYPASS FITTING.
IF-
NOT OK-REPLACE TEMPERATURE LIMITER

BYPASS VALVE.
I OK~REPLACE FAULTY CONTROLLER. NOT OK-REPLACE TEMPERATURE LIMITER

BYPASS VALVE.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.35
Dec 14/87
l~I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE68
AT 90 PERCENTTORQUE-NODECREASE IN
FUEL FLOWWHENTORQUELIMITING SYSTEM
SELF TESTACTUATED. CHECKFOR FAULTY
CONTROLLER BY EXCHANGINGCONTROLLERS.
IF-
t
I OK-REPLACE FAULTYCONTROLLER. NOT OK-ELECTRICAL PROBLEM-REFERTO
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUALFOR
CHECK OF WIRING CIRCUITS. IF-
OK-REPLACE TORQUELIMITER BYPASS

VALVE.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.36
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-S (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 69
ITT-TORQUE-FUEL FLOW FLUCTUATING IN

EXCESS OF LIMITS (±5C (±gF) ITT,
±2 PERCENTTORQUE, ±10 POUNDSPER
HOUR FUEL FLOW) AT 100 PERCENTEN-
GINE SPEED. NOTE: GROUNDEFFECTSOR
WIND GUSTSMAY' -'PR
'O
' DUCE TRANSIENTS IN
EXCESS OF ABOVELIMITS. CHECKFOR DE-
FECTIVE SPEED SIGNAL FROMPROPELLER
GOVERNOR BY RETARDING POWER-TURN OFF
TORQUE LIMITING SYSTEM-ADVANCE POWER
TO 735HP/102.5 PERCENTTORQUE-TURN
ON TEMPERATURELIMITING SYSTEM.
IF-
OK-PLACE POWERLEVER AT MAXIMUM NOT OK-ENGINE STILL UNSTABLE-

(TO INCREASE BYPASSFLOW) AND EXCHANGE CONTROLLERS. IF-
CHECK FOR FLUCTUATIONS. IF-
OK-REPLACE NOT OK-CHECK

FAULTY CON- WIRING CONTI-
TROLLER. NUITY TO SPEED
SENSOR OR RE-
REPLACE PROPEL-
LER GOVERNOR.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.37
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 69 ICONT)
OK-BYPASS FLOWMAY BE LOW DUE TO NOT OK-REPLACE TORQUE/TEMPERATURE

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE WARMERTHAN LIMITER BYPASSVALVE. REFERTO
WHEN FLUCTUATIONS REPORTED. 73-22-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
ACTUATE TORQUELIMITER SELF TESTTO
CHECK BYPASS FLOW. NOTEFUEL FLOW
DECREASE-IF FUEL FLOWDECREASES
LESS THAN 25 POUNDSPER HOURTEMPO-
RARILY INCREASE SPECIFIC GRAVITY
OR FUEL TRIM ADJUSTMENT UNTIL SELF
TEST ACTUATION INDICATES A BYPASS
FLOW OF 25 POUNDSOR MOREPER HOUR.
CHECK FOR FLUCTUATIONS. IF-
OK-CAP TORQUE/TEMPERATURE LIMITER NOT OK-REPLACE TORQUE/TEMPERATURE

BYPASS VALVE. IF- LIMITER BYPASSVALVE. REFERTO
OK-CHECK PROPELLER GOVERNOR SPEED NOT OK-REPLACE TORQUE/TEMPERATURE

SENSOR LEADS (MAYBE INTERMITTENT LIMITER BYPASSVALVE. REFERTO
AND RAND~I CAUSING POWERFLUCTUATIONS 73-22-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP TO 200 HP/30 PERCENTTORQUEON
TAKEOFF). IF-
NOT OK-TURN OFF TORQUELIMITING SYS-

TEM AND CHECKWIRING IN ACCORDANCE
WITH AIRCRAFTMAINTENANCE MANUAL.
(SYMPTOM WILL DISAPPEAR BELOW94
PERCENT TORQUE.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.38
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE 70
HIGH TORQUEWITH SUCCESSFUL TORQUE

LIMITING SYSTEM SELF TEST DUE TO
SATURATED BYPASS VALVE-ACTUATE SELF
TEST AT 90 PERCENT POWERAND CHECK FOR
MINIMUM 60 POUNDS PER HOUR DECREASE IN
FUEL FLOW. IF-
OK-ADJUST MAXIMUM POWERSCHEDULE INOT OK-REPLACECONTROLLER.

DOWN UNTIL TORQUE IS CONTROLLED-
REFER TO ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
UP136688
72-O0-00
Page 198.39
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PROCEDURE71
PARTIAL POWERLOSS-CHECK FOR FAULTY

CONTROLLER: (1) REMOVECONNECTORAT
CONTROLLER AND JUMPPINS E/F AND G/D
ON AIRCRAFT HARNESSTO MAINTAIN ITT
INDICATION (2) NOTETORQUE, FUEL FLOW
AND ITT DURINGSTEADYSTATE OPERATION
(3) RECONNECTCONTROLLERCONNECTOR
WHILE AT STEADYSTATE OPERATION.
AFTER INITIAL POWERLOSSTRANSIENTS
CHECKTORQUE, FUEL FLOWAND ITT FOR
RETURN TO PREVIOUSLYNOTEDREADINGS.
IF-
NOT OK-SHORTOR GROUNDIN CONTROLLER

OR WIRING. REPLACECONTROLLEROR
REPAIR WIRING.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 198.40
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
UNFEATHERING PUMP
CHECK VALVE
JTOFF VALVE
tT
VALVE
)NNECTOR
K SYSTEM
T
JEL LINE
'HECK POINT
R
NTS CHECKVALVE
RAFT FUELSYSTF.M
INECTION
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
PRESSURE SENSING (P3) LINE F-4.4G-1061
UP136688
R (Codes AA-CC, GA) Trouble Shooting Test Points (Typical)

Figure 101 72-00-00
Page 198.41
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
NTS CHECK VALVE ACFT FUEL SYSTEM

CONNECTION
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
PRESSURESENSING (P3) LINE
RAWTORQUE
PRESSUREPORT
GEARCASE NEGATIVE
PRESSUREPORT II
NTS CHECK
CAP POINT
UNFEATHERING PUMP
CHECK VALVE
NTS SWITCH j
PRESSURE PORT
BETA SWITCH
PRESSURE PORT
IGNITION UNIT
FUEL
ELECTRICAL SHUTOFF
CONN ECTION VALVE ~ FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
INLET PORT DISCHARGE PORT
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR METERED FUEL LINE
PRESSURE CHECK POINT
F-44A-4107
(Codes EA-FB) Trouble Shooting Test Points (Typical)

UP136688
Figure 102 72-00-00

Page 198.42
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
:EATHERING PUMP
CK VALVE
L SHUTOFF VALVE
CTRICAL CO NNECTOR
SHUTOFF VALVE
HARGEPORT
CHECK SYSTEM
' POINT
ECTOR
ACFT FUEL SYSTEM

CONNECTION
NTS SWITCH
PRESSURE PORT
NTS CHECK
RAW TORQUE COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE

PRESSUREPOI~ PRESSURE SENSING (P3) LINE
GEARCASE NEGATIVE
PRESSURE PORT
BETA SWITCH
PRESSUREPORT
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE

INLET PORT
LEFTREAR
METERED FUEL LINE F-44A-5245
PRESSURECHECK POINT
(Code DA) Trouble Shooting Test Points

UP136688
Figure 103 72-00-00

Page 198.43
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SENSING PORT
(PRE SB73-0017)
FUEL I NLET PORT \
i" (PRE SB73-0035/0038)

FOLD PURGE SYSTEM CONNECTION
;T SB73-0035/0038)
IONDARY FUEL NOZZLE

IO MANIFOLD ASSY
PRIMARY FUEL NOZZLE

AND MANIFOLD ASSY
FLOW DIV:
DRAI N VAI
\ PRIMARY FUELNOZZLE AND MANIFOLD

ASSEMBLY CAP OR PRESSURE GAGE
CONNECT|ON POI NT
F-44A-3061R1
Troubl e Shooting Test Points (Typical)

UP136688
Figure 104 72-00-00

Page 198.44
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL /•/liedignal
CHAPTER 72 - SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
SERVICING
General 301
Depreservation 302
Preservation (Engine Installed in A i r c r a f t ) 303
Preservation (Engine Removed From A i r c r a f t ) 306
Preservation (Engine Removed From A i r c r a f t ) 309
In A Corrosive Environment, Extreme Wet
Conditions or Salt Atmosphere
Oil System Servicing 309
R Lubrication Requirements 312
R Servicing After Water Ingestion 313
R Fuel Microbiocide Requirements 314
UP136688
SERVICING
72-CONTENTS
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
rlAl NTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL - SERVICING
1. General
R CAUTION: USE OF AVIATION GASOLINE OTHERTHAN AS SPECIFIED IN THE

R AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL CArl RESULT IN FUEL CONTROL/FUEL
R PUNP MATING SPLINE WEAR. THIS IS DUE TO THE REDUCED LU-
R BRICATION QUALITIES OF AVIATION GASOLINE AS COMPAREDTO
R JP-4, JP-5, OR JET-A FUELS. ALSO, THE LEAD CONTENT OF
R AVIATION GASOLINE MAY ACCELERATE HOT SECTION DISTRESS IF
R USED IN EXCESS OF SPECIFIED LIMITS.
NOTE: Refer to A i r c r a f t F l i g h t ~lanual for approved oil and fuel.
Table 301 provides a l i s t of materials and compounds

required to perform SERVICING.
~]aterial or Compound Manufactu rer
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for l i s t e d items.
Any approved engine oil Commercial l y available
Barrier bag Commerci al l y avai I able

(NI L-B-131)
Barrier material Commercial ly available

(MI L-B-121)
Corrosion preventive compound CRC Chemicals USA, 885 Louis Dr,

(CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Warminster, PA 18974
Type I I I )
Corrosion preventive compound Roly I n t e r n a t i o n a l , P.O. Box 5103,

Supertech ST-A (MIL-C-16173, Ventura, CA 93003
Type I I I ) (Alternate f o r CRC 3-36)
Desiccant (NIL-D-3464) Commercially available
Grease (Aeroshell No. 17) Shell Oil Co, 1 Shell Plaza, P.O. Box
(MIL-G-21164C) 2463, Houston, TX 77001
Humidity i n d i c a t o r card Humidial Sales Co, 465 Mt Vernon Ave,

(6203-NX-56789) Col ton, CA 92324
Humidity i n d i c a t o r plug (Type 2) Blake, Moffet and Town, A Division of

(MIL-I-26860) or (HUM2156-40) Saxon Industries, 202 S 27th St, Phoenix,
AZ 85034
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 301
Aug 4/94
GFR7~-PA
lliedSignal
A I:. R ( ) ~ P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 301. Materials and Compounds (Cont)
Haterial or Compound Manufacturer
Preservative o i l :
Oil (MIL-L-6081C, Grade 1010) Commercial ly available
Oil (Univolt 60 Preservative) Exxon Co, USA, P.O. Box 2180, Houston,
TX 77001
Sealer (Metric Model HS-B) Doboy Packaging Machinery, A Division

of Nordson Corporation, 869 S Knowles
Ave, New Richmond, WI 54017
R Warning tag (Tag $8145-15A) AlliedSignal Engines, D i s t r i b u t i o n

Center, 1944 East Sky Harbor Circle,
Phoenix, AZ 85034
CAUTION: FUEL-PURGESYSTEM WILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UNLESS A MINI-

MUM ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS ATTAINED DURING THE
OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
. Depreservation
A. Depreserve Engine After I n s t a l l a t i o n or When Required
(i) Remove plugs, caps, or covers.
CAUTION: PRIORTO SERVICING ENGINE WITH OIL, ENSURE OIL

HAS BEEN SCAVENGED.
(2) F i l l oil tank assembly to operating level with approved engine oil
in accordance with Oil System Servicing, paragraph 6.B.
(3) Provide a source of approved engine fuel and connect to fuel i n l e t

port on fuel control assembly.
(4) Disconnect fuel l i n e between fuel control unit and fuel flow div-
ider valve and connect a l i n e to drain overboard.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 302
Aug 4/94
~F~7Q-~A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HA1NTENANCE MAI~UAL
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDEDDUTY

CYCLE FOR STARTER-GENERATOR.
PRIOR TO MOTORINGENGINE, DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION

SYSTEM.
NOTE: Do not exceed 15% R~| when motoring engine. I f

additional motoring is required, repeat motoring
procedure after engine rotation has come to a com-
plete stop.
R 2. A. (5) De-energize i g n i t i o n system, then motor engine with s t a r t e r -

generator u n t i l clear fuel flows from overboard drain l i n e .
(6) Stop motoring engine, disconnect overboard drain l i n e , and recon-

nect fuel line between fuel shutoff valve and fuel control
assembly.
(7) Start engine, observing normal start procedure, and operate for ap-
proximately 3 minutes.
(8) Stop engine. When engine has stopped rotating, shut o f f a i r c r a f t

fuel supply to engine.
(9) Inspect a l l lubrication lines and fuel lines and t h e i r connection

points for any evidence of o i l or fuel leakage, especially at the
previously disconnected/connected fuel l i n e .
(10) Remove fuel f i l t e r element from fuel pump and inspect. Clean,
r e i n s t a l l , or replace, observing procedures given in 73-21-03,
(11) Remove oil f i l t e r element from input housing assembly and inspect.
Clean, r e i n s t a l l , or replace, observing procedures given in
79-20-02, Naintenance Practices.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 302A/302B
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE ~IANUAL
3. Preservation (Engine I n s t a l l e d In Ai_rcraft)
A. Preserve Engine (INACTIVE From 1 To 60 Days)
NOTE: Operate engine with propeller o f f s t a r t locks.
(1) At beginning of period of idleness, using approved engine o i l , en-

gine shall be operated for a minimum of 10 minutes at or above
ground idle low rpm to ensure coverage of a l l internal engine parts
with o i l .
CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEMWILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UN-

LESS A MINIMUM ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS AT-
TAINED DURING THE OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
(2) Prior to engine shutdown, engine speed must be increased to 95 per-

cent to ensure adequate charging of the fuel manifold purge system.
Reduce engine speed to ground i d l e , then shut down in accordance
with A i r c r a f t Flight ~anual.
(3) Allow engine to cool.
(4) Inspect engine to ensure that i n l e t area is clean and dry.
(5) Cap, plug or cover engine i n l e t and exhaust openings. Ensure these
openings remain adequately sealed during period of idleness to pre-
vent entrance of water or foreign matter.
(6) There shall be no renewal of the 1 to 60 days preservation.
B. Preserve Engine (INACTIVE ~lore Than 60 Days)
R NOTE: Operate engine with propeller o f f s t a r t locks.
R (i) At beginning of period of idleness, using approved engine o i l , en-

R gine shall be operated f o r a minimum of 10 minutes at or above
R ground idle low rpm to ensure coverage of a l l internal engine parts
with o i l .
R CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEMWILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UN-

R LESS A MINIMUM ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS AT-
R TAINED DURING THE OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
R (la) Prior to engine shutdown, engine speed must be increased to 95 per-

R cent to ensure adequate charging of the fuel manifold purge system.
R Reduce engine speed to ground i d l e , then shut down in accordance
R with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Manual.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 303
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
lliedSignal
A E R O S PA C E
MAINTENANCE rlANUAL
. B. (3) Disconnect fuel line between fuel control assembly and fuel shutoff
valve and connect a l i n e to drain overboard.
(4) Disconnect fuel supply line at i n l e t connection on fuel control as-

sembly and connect a low pressure (2 to 5 psig) source of f i l t e r e d
(i0 micron nominal) preservative o i l to the i n l e t connection.
(Refer to Table 301.)
CAUTIOI~: DO NOT EXCEEDMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDEDDUTY

R PRIOR TO MOTORINGENGINE, DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION

SYSTEM.
NOTE: Do not exceed 15% RB,I when motoring engine. I f

procedure a f t e r engine rotation has come to a com-
plete stop.
R (5) De-energize i g n i t i o n system, then motor engine with s t a r t e r -

generator u n t i l the system flows o i l only out of the fuel l i n e .
(6) Reconnect lines that were disconnected in steps (3) and (4).
(s) Cap, plug or cover engine i n l e t and exhaust openings. Ensure these
openings remain adequately sealed during period of idleness to pre-
vent entrance of water or foreign matter.
(9) Once every 180 days of idleness depreserve engine in accordance

with steps in paragraph 2. and preserve engine in accordance with
steps (1) through (8).
C. Preserve Engine Subsequent To Operating In A Known Corrosive Environment

(Engine Operated Daily)
WARNI NG: MOST CORROSION PREVENTIVE SOLUTIONS ARE FLAMM-

ABLE AND SHOULD NOT BE USED EXCESSIVELY NOR AP-
PLIED TO A HOT ENGINE. ALLOWENGINE TO COOL
FOR A MINIMUM OF I0 MI[IUTES BEFORE USING
PRESERVATIVE MATERIAL ON ANY PART OF THE
ENGII~E.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 304
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HA1NTENANCE HANUAL
CAUTION: CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUNDSHALL NOT BE AP-

PLIED DIRECTLY ON THE COHPRESSOROR INTO THE
ENGINE. NO HYDRO-CARBONSOR OILS SHALL EVER BE
INTRODUCED INTO THE COMPRESSORSECTION. UNCON-
TROLLED COHBUSTION COULD BE A POSSIBLE RESULT.
3. C. (3) Wipe corrosion preventive compound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Type

I I I ) in engine i n l e t area with engine s t a t i c a f t e r l a s t f l i g h t of
the day. Preservative should be applied in quantity s u f f i c i e n t to
cover area with a l i g h t f i l m .
(4) Install i n l e t and t a i l p i p e plugs.
D. Preserve Engine Subsequent To Operating In A Known Corrosive Environment

(Engine Not Operated Daily)
NOTE: Operate engine with propeller o f f s t a r t locks.
(1) Once a week, engine conditions p e m i t t i n g , operate engine f o r at

R l e a s t 10 minutes at or above ground i d l e low rpm.
R CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEM WILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UN-

R LESS A MINIMUH ENGINE RPH OF 95 PERCENT IS AT-
R (2) Prior to engine shutdown, engine speed must be increased to 95 per-

R with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Manual.
WARNIIIG: MOST CORROSION PREVENTIVE SOLUTIONS ARE FLAM-

MABLE AND SHOULD NOT BE USED EXCESSIVELY NOR
APPLIED TO A HOT ENGINE. ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL
FOR A MINIMUM OF I0 MINUTES BEFORE USING
PRESERVATIVE MATERIAL ON ANY PART OF THE
ENGINE.
CAUTION: CORROSION PREVENTIVEMATERIAL SHALL NOT BE AP-

PLIED DIRECTLY ON THE COMPRESSOROR INTO THE
ENGINE. NO HYDRO-CARBONSOR OILS SHALL EVER BE
INTRODUCED INTO THE COMPRESSORSECTION. UNCON-
TROLLED COMBUSTION COULD BE A POSSIBLE RESULT.
(5) Wipe corrosion preventive compound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Type

I I I ) in engine i n l e t area with engine s t a t i c . Preservative should
be applied in q u a n t i t y s u f f i c i e n t to cover area with a l i g h t f i l m .
(6) Install i n l e t and t a i l p i p e plugs.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 304A/304B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. E. Preserve Engine During Extreme Wet Conditions ( A i r c r a f t Not Sheltered In

Hangar)
(1) Once a week, engine conditions p e m i t t i n g , operate engine for at

R least I0 minutes at or above ground idle low rpm.
R CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEM WILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UN-

R LESS A MINIMUM ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS AT-
R (2) Prior to engine shutdown, engine speed must be increased to 95 per-

R with A i r c r a f t Flight Manual.
(3) Preserve engine in accordance with paragraph 3.C.
F. Preserve Engine When Operated In A Salt Atmosphere Or Off Air Strips

Treated With Salt
(1) Wash engine externally as soon as possible with clean water.
R (2) Operate engine at or above ground idle low rpm for at least 10
minutes to remove moisture.
R CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEMWILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGEUN-

R LESS A MINIMUtl ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS AT-
(3) P r i o r to engine shutdown, engine speed must be increasea to 95 per-

cent to ensure adequate charging of the fuel manifold purge system.
Reduce engine speed to ground i d l e , then shut aown in accoraance
with A i r c r a f t Flight Manual.
(4) Preserve engine in accordance with paragraph 3.C.
CS) Apply corrosion preventive compound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309) on fuel

control assembly, controls linkage assembly, and exposed metal
parts.
(6) Inspect the gearcase f o r corrosion and apply corrosion preventive

compound. Extra care and attention is warranted in areas around
studs and inserts.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 305
Aug 4/94
GEG70-P_A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Preservation (Engine Removed From A i r c r a f t ~
A. Preserve Engine (INACTIVE Fr~n 1 To 60 Days)
NOTE: The following steps to be completed as soon as possible

a f t e r engine shutdown.
(1) Disconnect fuel l i n e between fuel control assembly and fuel shutoff
valve and cap o f f l i n e s .
(2) Drain engine l u b r i c a t i n g o i l , observing applicable procedures given

in Oil System Servicing, paragraph 6. Allow the engine to stand
urltil a l l the excess oil has drained.
NOTE: Prior to i n s t a l l i n g new o i l f i l t e r , dip in ap-

proved engine o i l .
(3) Remove and replace the oil f i l t e r element in accordance with

79-20-02, Maintenance Practices.
CAUTION: FUEL FILTER ELEMENT PART NO. 897513-1 IS A NON-

CLEANABLE TYPE FILTER ELEMENT AS IDENTIFIED ON
BOTTOM OF FILTER ELEMENT, REMOVEAND REPLACE
WITH NEW FILTER ELEMENT.
NOTE: Prior to i n s t a l l i n g fuel f i l t e r element, flush

with f i l t e r e d f u e l . Refer to A i r c r a f t Flight Man-
ual for approved fuel.
(4) Remove, clean an4 r e i n s t a l l metalic fuel f i l t e r element or remove

and replace disposable type fuel f i l t e r element observing proce-
dures given in 73-21-03, Naintenance Practices.
(5) Clean all excess fuel and oil fr~,1 engine.
(6) I n s t a l l covers over a i r intake and exhaust openings. I n s t a l l plugs

and dust covers on a l l line openings, wires and exposed sections.
(7) Tag the engine (Tag $8145-15A) to indicate that i t has been
preserved and indicate that the fuel system must be preserved with
preservative oil i f storage exceeding 60 days is contemplated.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 306
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. B. Preserve Engine (INACTIVE 60 Days Or More)
NOTE: The following steps to be completed as soon as

possible a f t e r engine shutdown.
(1) Disconnect fuel line between fuel control assembly and fuel shutoff
valve and connect a l i n e to drain overboard.
(2) Disconnect fuel supply line at i n l e t connection on fuel control as-

sembly and connect a low pressure (2 to 5 psig) source of f i l t e r e d
(10 micron nominal) preservative o i l .
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED MANUFACTURERSRECOMMENDEDDUTY

R PRIOR TO MOTORINGENGINE, DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION

SYSTEM.
NOTE: Do not exceed 15% R~I when motoring engine. I f

procedure a f t e r engine rotation has come to a com-
plete stop.
R (3) De-energize i g n i t i o n system, then motor engine with s t a r t e r -

generator u n t i l clean o i l flows from overboard drain l i n e .
(4) Disconnect oil supply l i n e from fuel i n l e t port on fuel pump assem-
bly and cap i n l e t port. Allow residual preservative o i l to drain
from fuel control assembly and lines.
(5) Disconnect overboard drain line and reconnect fuel line between
fuel shutoff valve and fuel control assembly.
(6) Drain engine lubricating o i l observing procedures given in Oil Sys-

tem Servicing, paragraph 6.
CAUTION: FUEL FILTER ELEMENT PART NO. 897513-1 IS A NON-

CLEANABLE TYPE FILTER ELEMENTAS IDENTIFIED ON
BOTTOM OF FILTER ELEMENT, REMOVEAND REPLACE
WITH NEW FILTER ELEMENT.
NOTE: Prior to i n s t a l l i n g fuel f i l t e r , dip element in

preservative o i l .
(7) Remove fuel f i l t e r element from fuel control assembly and inspect.
Clean, r e i n s t a l l or replace, observing procedures given in
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 307
Aug 4/94
lied
NOTE: Prior to installing f i l t e r element in flow divider

and drain valve, dip element in preservative o i l .
4. B. (8) Remove f i l t e r from flow divider and drain valve and inspect.
Clean, reinstall or replace, observing procedures given in
NOTE: Prior to installing oil f i l t e r , dip element in ap-
proved engine oil.
(9) Remove oil f i l t e r element from input housing assembly. Inspect oil
f i l t e r element. Reinstall or replace observing procedures given in
(10) Wipe all fuel and oil from engine. Apply corrosion preventive com-
R pound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Type I I I ) on fuel control assembly,
controls linkage assembly, gearcase and exposed metal parts.
(11) Install covers over air intake and exhaust openings. Install plugs
and dust covers on all line openings, wires and exposed sections.
(12) Wrap engine in barrier material (MIL-B-121) and seal all openings
to prevent entrance of foreign material.
(13) Place engine in barrier bag (MIL-B-131) with four bags of desiccant
(MIL-D-3464) and two humidity indicator cards (6203-MX-56789). In-
stall humidity indicator plug (MIL-I-26860) or (HUM2156-40) on bar-
rier bag.
(14) Seal barrier bag seam using sealer (Metric Model HS-B).
(15) Cut an opening large enough to insert vacuum line into barrier bag.
Insert vacuum line and evacuate barrier bag until tight against
engine.
(16) Carefully remove vacuum line to maintain the vacuum. Seal opening
in barrier bag using sealer (Metric Model HS-B).
(17) Secure warning tag (Tag $8145-15A) to barrier bag indicating

preservation procedures have been performed including preservation
of fuel system with preservative o i l .
(18) Check humidity indicator plug every 30 days. I f humidity indicator

plug changes from blue to pink, barrier bag must be opened and en-
gine inspected for rust or corrosion. I f rust or corrosion is evi-
dent, take appropriate corrective action.
(19) Represerve engine in accordance with steps (12) through (17) after
completing engine inspection.
(2o) Engines preserved as stated in steps (12) through (16) shall be
removed from preservation storage every two years. Perform de-
preservation procedure in accordance with step 2.A.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 308
Aug 12/91

l s l i e d
4. B. (21) Represerve engine in accordance with step 4.B.
(22) Engines received from Garrett Engine Division have been preserved.
This preservation should be adequate under normal conditions for a
period of two years. Comply with step (18) and (19) as required.
. Preservation (Engine Removed From Aircraft) In A Corrosive Environment, Ex-

treme Wet Co~dition.s Or Salt Atmosphere
I f engine w i l l not be IMMEDIATELY r e i n s t a l l e d , preserve engine in accordance
with paragraph 4.B.
6. Oil System Servicing
A. Drain Engine Oil

Drain the engine oil system when the engine is removed, at o i l change
intervals specified in Inspection/Check (Table 601), and whenever
required, as follows.
NOTE: I f possible, o i l shall be drained while the engine is
s t i l l warm from operation.
(1) Position a i r c r a f t propeller in feather position to ensure maximum
drainage of control oil into engine oil sump and oil tank assembly.
R CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDEDDUTY

R CYCLE FOR STARTER-GENERATOR.
R DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION SYSTEM.
R NOTE: Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector from oil vent

R valve when scavenging oil by motoring engine.
R Do not exceed 15% RPM when motoring engine. I f

R additional motoring is required to scavenge engine
R o i l , repeat motoring procedure after engine rota-
R tion has come to a complete stop.
R (2) Remove magnetic drain plug (chip detector) from bottom of output
R housing and drain as much o i l as possible. I f magnetic drain plug
R is inaccessible, engage propeller s t a r t lock, using unfeathering
R pump. Place feathering valve handle in FEATHER position. Motor
R engine approximately 20 seconds to scavenge as much residual oil as
R possible from the input housing assembly.
(3) Remove drain plug from o i l tank assembly and allow o i l to drain
into suitable container. Check drained oil for contamination which
could indicate internal damage to engine.
(4) Drain oil cooler. Refer to A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 309
Aug 12/91
~=~lslied
6. A. (5) Remove oil f i l t e r element, observing procedures given in 79-20-02,

Maintenance Practices. Inspect for unusual contamination which
could indicate internal damage to engine.
B. Fill Engine Oil System
F i l l the engine oil system at i n i t i a l installation of the engine, after

oil drain for oil change at intervals specified in Inspection/Check
(Table 601), and whenever required, as follows.
(1) Install clean oil f i l t e r element in engine, observing procedures

given in 79-20-02, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Install drain plugs with new packings or gaskets in oil tank assem-
bly and in bottom of output housing assembly.
(3) Remove oil tank dipstick and cap assembly from oil tank assembly.
Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for type and quantity of oil
required. Fill tank with oil until dipstick indicates FULL. Rein-
stall oil tank dipstick and cap assembly.
CAUTION: SHUT DOWNENGINE IMMEDIATELY IF OIL PRESSUREIS

NOT INDICATED WITHIN 10 SECONDSOF ENGINE
START.
R ROTATE PROPELLERONLY IN NORMALDIRECTION OF

R ROTATION.
R NOTE: In lieu of operating engine, propeller may be hand

R rotated approximately 30 revolutions, to scavenge
R as much residual oil as possible from nose cone
R and gearbox assemblies.
(4) Start engine, observing normal start procedures, and operate for
approximately 5 minutes.
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OR BRANDSOF OILS
WHENADDING OIL.
R NOTE: Oil level must be checked within 15 minutes of
R shutdown.
(5) Recheck oil level in oil tank and add oil i f required.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 310
Aug 12/91
/J'~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-~Signal
. C. Servicing Engine With Different Type Or Brand Of Oil

Proceed as follows whenever engine oil system is f i l l e d with different
type or brand of oil than previously used.
R CAUTION: ROTATEPROPELLERONLY IN NORMALDIRECTION OF

R ROTATION.
R NOTE: In lieu of operating engine, propeller may be used

R rotated approximately 30 revolutions, to scavenge
R as much residual oil as possible from nose cone
R and gearbox assemblies.
(1) Start engine and operate until normal oil temperature is reached.
(2) Shut down engine with propeller start locks disengaged and
propeller in feather position.
R CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDEDDUTY

R CYCLE FOR STARTER-GENERATOR.
R DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION SYSTEM.
NOTE: Disconnect electrical connector from oil vent

valve when scavenging oil by motoring engine.
Do not exceed 15% RPM when motoring engine. I f

additional motoring is required to scavenge engine
o i l , repeat motoring procedure after engine rota-
tion has come to a complete stop.
(3) Removemagnetic drain plug (chip detector) from bottom of output
housing and drain as much oil as possible. I f magnetic drain plug
is inaccessible, engage propeller start locks using unfeathering
pump. Place feathering valve handle in FEATHERposition. Motor
engine approximately 20 seconds to scavenge as much residual oil as
possible from the input housing assembly.
(4) Drain oil from oil tank, oil f i l t e r , fuel heater, and all intercon-
necting lines. Removeand replace oil f i l t e r element in accordance
with 79-20-02, Maintenance Practices.
(5) Drain oil cooler. Refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(6) Refill oil system with new o i l . Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual.
NOTE: Ensure propeller is on start locks prior to start-

ing engine.
(7) Operate engine for approximately 15 minutes and monitor oil pres-
sure and temperature. I f pressure or temperature fluctuates,
repeat steps (4) through (6).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 311
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ l s l
ignal
i e d

. C. (8) Make entry in permanent aircraft records to indicate type oil (Type
I or Type II) used to service engine.
7. Lubrication Requirements
NOTE: Perform lubrication of accessory (hydraulic pump) drive pad

and tachometer generator drive pad on rear of reduction
gear section at i n i t i a l installation of accessories with
R grease (Aeroshell No. 17).
A. (Pre SB 72-0416) Perform Starter-Generator Drive Spline Lubrication
Perform starter-generator drive spline lubrication and inspection at in-

R tervals specified in Inspection/Check (Table 601) as follows.
(1) Removestarter-generator from engine in accordance with Aircraft

Maintenance Manual.
(2) Clean both engine drive splines and starter-generator splines.

Refer to Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1.
(3) Dry splines using a directed air blast.
NOTE: The following dimensional inspection can be accom-

plished by making a comparison between the worn
area of a spline and the end where there is no
wear. This "no wear" area would normally be the
extreme forward end where there is no engagement
with the mating starter-generator shaft.
(4) Inspect the internal starter-generator drive splines of engine.

Maximum allowable depth of internal spline wear, measured at the
pitch line of tooth, not to exceed 0.020 inch.
(5) Replace starter-generator drive gearshaft i f internal spline wear

exceeds 0.020 inch. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
R (6) Apply a film of grease (Aeroshell No. 17) to internal starter-
generator drive splines of engine.
(7) Install starter-generator on engine in accordance with Aircraft

Maintenance Manual.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 312
Aug 12/91
/lied
7. B. (Pre SB 72-0486) Perform Tachometer Generator Drive Lubrication
Perform tachometer generator drive lubrication and inspection at inter-

vals specified in Inspection/Check (Table 601) as follows.
(1) Remove tachometer generator from engine in accordance with Aircraft

Maintenance Manual.
(2) Clean both engine and tachometer generator drives. Refer to Gen-
eral - Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1.
(3) Dry drives using a directed air blast.
NOTE: The following dimensional inspection can be accom-

plished by making a comparison between the worn
area of a drive and the end where there is no
wear. This "no wear" area would normally be the
extreme forward end where there is no engagement
with the mating tachometer generator shaft.
(4) Inspect the internal tachometer generator drive of the engine. The
maximum allowable depth of internal drive wear, shall not exceed
0.020 inch per surface. Removeand replace tachometer generator
drive i f wear is exceeded, refer to 72-10-15, Maintenance
Practices.
(5) Apply a film of grease (Aeroshell No. 17) to the internal generator
drive of the engine.
(6) Install tachometer generator on engine in accordance with Aircraft

Maintenance Manual.
8. Servicing After Water Ingestion
A. Perform Engine Ground Operation
(1) I f water has been suspected to have been introduced into engine,
start engine and operate at ground idle for 10 minutes.
(2) Shut down engine and cover engine inlet and tailpipe as required to
prevent further water ingestion.
\
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATEANTI-ICE VALVE FOR MORETHAN 10

SECONDS AT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 10°C (50°F).
B. Removal of Water From Anti-Icing Shield Following Engine Washing
Operate engine and actuate anti-ice valve. Anti-ice valve operation is

R limited to 10 seconds at temperature above 10°C (50°F).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 313
Aug 12/91
lslied

g Fuel Microbiocide Requirements
R Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for fuel microbiocide requirements.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 314
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CHAPTER 72 - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
I. General 401
2. Removal/Installation of Engine From/In 401
Shipping Container
3. Removal/Installation of Engine From/In 406
Maintenance Stand
4. Preparation of Engine Prior to 407
I n s t a l l a t i o n on A i r c r a f t
5. Preparation of Engine for Shipment 408
UP136688
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
72-CONTENTS
Dec 14/87
/lied
GENERAL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
. General
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVINGENGINE FROMAIRCRAFT, TO AVOID DAMAGETO

THE OIL FLOWMETALTUBE ASSEMBLY (BETA TUBE), ALWAYS
REMOVE THE BETATUBE PRIOR TO PROPELLERREMOVAL.
NOTE: Replacement of engine installed on aircraft w i l l require an

NTS-System Check by Flight Check. Refer to 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test.
I f maintenance procedures require removal of the engine from the aircraft,
consult the Aircraft Maintenance Manual for necessary removal and installa-
tion procedures.
2. Removal/Installation of Engine From/In Shippin9 Container
NOTE: Table 401 provides a l i s t of all special tools, fixture and

equipment required to perform Removal/Installation.
Table 402 provides a l i s t of all equipment and materials
required to perform Removal/Installation.
Item Source/
1. Hoisting Adapter Used to mount on propeller 284357-1-1

shaft to provide a hoist-
ing mount for l i f t i n g
operation
. Maintenance Stand Used to support engine during 284493-1-I
Engine transportation and maintenance.
. Maintenance Stand Used to mount engine in stand. 284557-I-1
Adapter
. Maintenance Stand Used to support aft end of engine 289247-1
Adapter when installed in stand using
Adapters Part No. 284557-1-1.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 401
Aug 12/91
lied
Table 401. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment (Cont)
Item Source/
No. Nomencl
atu re Use Part No.
5. MaintenanceStand Used to bolt to each side 284203-1-1

Adapter of engine to mount engine (Sold 1
of maintenance stand. each, 2 are
requi red)
R 6. Engine Transportation Used to transport engine. 831118-1
R Cart
NQTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed items.
Barrier bag Commerciall y avail able

(MIL-B-131)
Barrier material Commerciall y avail able
(MIL-B-121)
Desiccant (MIL-D-3464) Commerci al I y avai I abl e
Humidity indicator card Humidial Sales Co, 465 Mt Vernon Ave,
(6203-MX-56789) Colton, CA 92324
Humidity indicator plug (Type 2) Blake Moffet and Towne, A Division of
(MIL-I-26860) or (HUM 2156-40) Saxon Industries, 202 S 27th St,
Phoenix, AZ 85034
Sealer Doboy Packaging Machinery,

Metric Model HS-B) A Division of Nordson
Corporation, 869 S Knowles
Ave, New Richmond, WI 54017
Vacuum Source Commercially available
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 402
Aug 12/91
lslied
2. A, Remove Engine From Shipping Container
(1) Remove plastic shipping bands securing cover of shipping container,

then remove top flexible foam form and beta tube assembly shipping
case.
NOTE: Engine weight is approximately 400 pounds.
(2) Check humidity indicators on barrier bag (one indicator is located
inside barrier bag and shall be checked after bag is opened.) I f
either indicates excessive humidity, engine shall be immediately
removed and inspected for corrosion. I f engine was received from a
Garrett Facility, notify the shipping f a c i l i t y of the discrepancy.
CAUTION: ONCE THE BARRIER BAG HAS BEEN OPENED, THE EN-
GINE SHALL NOT BE STORED IN THE CARDBOARDSHIP-
PING CONTAINER UNLESS THE STEPS OF 2.B. ARE
STRICTLY FOLLOWED.
NOTE: Once barrier bag has been opened, engine shall be

installed, depreserved, and operated within 60
days.
Use care when removing barrier bag and barrier
paper as these materials may be reused i f
undamaged. The barrier bag contains sufficient
material to allow for resealing.
(3) Open barrier bag and remove barrier paper to provide access to the
propeller shaft.
(4) Install 284357-1-1 adapter on propeller shaft flange and secure.

Attach an overhead hoist of suitable capacity to adapter, and l i f t
engine from bottom flexible foam form.
(5) Complete removal of barrier bag and barrier paper from around
engine.
(6) Install two 284557-1-1 adapters on engine side mounts and install
engine onto 284493-1-1 stand or install engine on 831118-1 trans-
poration cart.
(7) Position engine as required to f a c i l i t a t e maintenance. Support aft
end of engine with 289247-1 adapter attached to plenum assembly.
(8) Remove284357-1-1 adapter from propeller shaft flange.
(9) Refer to Servicing for depreservation procedures.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 403
Aug 12/91
/lied
NOTE: Ensure engine has been preserved in accordance with

72-00-00, SERVICING and engine preparation for shipment
has been accomplished, refer to paragraph 5.
Engine is installed in container with a i r i n l e t down.
2. B. Install Engine into Shipping Container
(1) Install bottom flexible foam form in bottom of shipping container.
NOTE: I f a previously used barrier bag is being reused,

i t should be inspected for leaks, punctures, and
tears. If damaged, discard, and use new barrier
bag.
(2) Position b a r r i e r bag in bottom of foam form with opening upward to
receive engine.
(3) Drape a 10 foot by 3 foot sheet of barrier material (MIL-B-121)

(lengthwise) across the barrier bag opening and open cardboard
container. Drape a 6 foot by 3 foot sheet of barrier material
crosswise over the 10 foot sheet.
NOTE: Engine weight is approximately 400 pounds.
(4) Attach 284367-1-1 adapter to engine ouput shaft. Connect a hoist

of suitable capacity to adapter. L i f t engine with hoist.
(5) Position engine over barrier material and lower approximately one
half way into cardboard container.
(6) Pull both sheets of barrier material up and around engine and tape
into place. The 10 foot length sheet must be s p l i t at the one end
to f i t around propeller shaft. The engine, with the exception of
propeller shaft, should be completely shrouded with barrier
material to prevent any bare metal contact with barrier bag.
(7) Pull barrier bag snugly up against engine and lower engine,
properly positioned, into foam form.
(8) Remove284357-1-1 adapter from engine output shaft.
(9) Position and tape a smaller piece of barrier material to cover the
propeller shaft.
(10) Place four 1-pound bags of fresh desiccant (MIL-D-3464) around en-
gine between barrier material and barrier bag.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 404
Aug 16/89
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. B. (11) Cut a 1 inch diameter hole in barrier bag (to be visible from top
of engine) and install a humidity indicator plug (Type 2)
(MIL-I-26860) or (HUM2156-40) with glass window facing outward.
( I f barrier bag is being reused, use existing 1 inch hole to in-
stall plug).
NOTE: Removehumidity indicator card from its plastic
container prior to use.
(12) Tape a humidity indicator card (6203-MX-56789) to barrier paper on

top of engine.
NOTE: Sealer must be set at 121°C (250°F) or at temper-
ature recommended by barrier bag manufacturer.
(13) Close and seal barrier bag using sealer (Metric Model HS-B).
(14) Cut off an approximately 2 inch corner of sealed barrier bag and
insert vacuum hose. Evacuate a i r from barrier bag until i t .is
pulled t i g h t l y against engine.
(15) While holding barrier bag opening closed to prevent in flow of

air, remove vacuum hose and seal opening.
(16) Place beta tube in its protective case and position i t and other
loose components with engine log book in cavities provided in foam
form.
CAUTION: CARDBOARD SHIPPING CONTAINERS SHOULDBE STORED
IN A DRY AREA. CONTAINERSAND FOAMFORMS
WHICH HAVE BEEN STOREDOUTDOORSOR IN A DAMP
AREA SHALL NOT BE REUSED.
NOTE: Step (q) below may be omitted for engines

destined for extended storage in cardboard
containers. This will f a c i l i t a t e compliance of
periodic humidity indicator inspection. (Refer
to SERVICING, paragraph 4.B. for stored engine
inspection requirements). Inspection require-
ments are applicable to factory packaged as well
as repackaged engines.
(17) Position top of foam form over engine, close cardboard container,
tape flaps in closed position and i n s t a l l shipping bands.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 405
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Removal/Installation of Engine From/In Maintenance Stand

A. Remove Engine From Maintenance Stand
(1) Remove 289247-I maintenance stand adapter from aft end of engine.
Remove 284557-1-1 maintenance stand adapters or 284203-1-1 adap-
ters from engine side mounts.
(2) Attach hoist of suitable capacity (approximately 600 pounds) to

284357-1-I adapter on propeller shaft flange and l i f t engine from
stand.
B. Install Engine in Maintenance Stand
CAUTION: TO PREVENTDAMAGETO ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING

ASSEMBLY ENGINEMOUNTPADS, DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN
ENGINE MOUNTBOLTS OR USE BOLTS OF EXCESSIVE
LENGTH WHICH MAY BOTTOMIN BLIND HOLES.
ENSURE ALIGNMENT PINS ARE INSTALLED ON

284203-1-1 ADAPTER PRIOR TO INSTALLING ADAPTERS
ON ENGINE.
(1) Secure engine to 284493-1-1 maintenance stand with 284557-1-1 main-

tenance stand adapters or 284203-1-1 adapters attached to engine
side mounts.
(2) Position engine as required to f a c i l i t a t e work to be performed,

then support aft end of engine with 289247-1 maintenance stand
adapter attached to plenum assembly.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 406
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Preparation of Engine Prior to I n s t a l l a t i o n on A i r c r a f t
NOTE: P r e i n s t a l l a t i o n inspection is of a general nature and is

performed primarily to determine that engines received from
the f a c t o r y or from overhaul have suffered no shipping or
handling damage.
A. Perform P r e i n s t a l l a t i o n Inspection
(1) Check engines for any sign of mishandling or obvious physical

damage. Check that lines are secure and free of dents.
(2) Check to determine that a l l components, instruments and controls
are included.
CAUTION: PACKINGS AND GASKETS PROVIDED UNDER SHIPPING PLATES

AND COVERSARE USED FOR SHIPPING AND STORAGE PUR-
POSES ONLY. THESE PACKINGS AND GASKETS ARE NOT AP-
PROVED FOR USE DURING ON THE WING OR OFF WING ENGINE
OPERATION.
B. Perform the Following Procedures Prior to I n s t a l l a t i o n
(1) Remove shipping caps.
(2) Remove shipping cover plates and pads.
(3) Check for tag to determine i f engine has been preserved. I f engine
has been preserved, proper depreservation procedures shall be per-
formed a f t e r engine i n s t a l l a t i o n . (Refer to 72-00-00, SERVICING.)
(4) Make log book entries i f applicable.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 407
Aug 12/91
ignal
~
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l s l i e d
5. Preparation of Engine for Shipment
A. General Maintenance Procedures to be Performed Prior to Returning Engine

to Garrett or Garrett Authorized Service Facility
NOTE: Refer to airframe and engine Illustrated Parts

Catalogs for parts that remain with airframe and
engine.
(1) Oil tank and gearcase - drain oil tank and gearcase of f l u i d .
(2) Scavenge oil outlet port - disconnect a i r c r a f t plumbing from sca-

venge oil outlet port. Do not remove f i t t i n g . Cover f i t t i n g with
plastic cap.
(3) Fuel i n l e t port - disconnect aircraft plumbing from fuel inlet

port. Remove adapter f i t t i n g . Plug port with plastic plug.
(4) Oil pressure gage connection - disconnect a i r c r a f t plumbing from

oil pressure gage connection. Do not remove f i t t i n g . Cover f i t -
ting with plastic cap.
(5) Oil temperature bulb - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from oil tempera-

ture bulb. Do not remove bulb. Protect threads with plastic cap.
(6) Oil cooler return port - disconnect a i r c r a f t plumbing from oil

cooler return port. Do not remove f i t t i n g . Cover f i t t i n g with
plastic cap.
(7) (Engine with engine-mounted oil tank) Overboard vent port -

disconnect aircraft plumbing from overboard vent port. Do not
remove f i t t i n g . Cover f i t t i n g with plastic cap.
(8) (Engine with engine-mounted oil tank) Unfeathering pump supply

connection - disconnect aircraft plumbing from unfeathering pump
supply connection. Do not remove f i t t i n g . Cover f i t t i n g with
plastic cap.
(9) Compressor and turbine drains - disconnect a i r c r a f t plumbing from

compressor and turbine drains. Drain residual fluids and cover
f i t t i n g s with plastic caps.
(10) Oil vent valve - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from oil vent valve.
Protect connector with plastic cap.
(11) Inlet temperature sensor - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from i n l e t tem-

perature sensor. Do not remove sensor. Protect threads with
plastic cap.
(12) (Airframe-mounted fuel manifold purge system) Flow divider discon-
nect aircraft plumbing at flow divider. Removef i t t i n g and plug
port with plastic plug.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 408
Aug 16/89
lslied
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27}
R 5. A. (13) Starter-generator - remove starter-generator and QAD (quick

attach/detach).
(14) Hydraulic pump - i f applicable, remove hydraulic pump.
(15) Feathering valve - disconnect a i r c r a f t linkage and associated

brackets and mechanism from feathering valve. Do not remove
feathering valve and clevis eye from engine.
(16) Propeller pitch control/power lever input - disconnect a i r c r a f t

cables and associated linkage from propeller pitch control/power
lever input. Do not remove arm and rod to fuel control.
(17) Tachometer generator - remove tachometer generator.
(18) A i r c r a f t fuel flow transmitter - remove a i r c r a f t fuel flow trans-

mitter and cap f i t t i n g s .
(19) Manual fuel shut-off valve - disconnect a i r c r a f t linkage from man-

ual fuel shut-off valve. Do not remove lever.
(20) Anti-ice valve - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from anti-ice valve.

Cover connector with plastic cap.
(21) Customer optional a n t i - i c e connection - i f applicable, disconnect

a i r c r a f t plumbing and cover port with metal cap.
(22) Temperature compensator - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from tempera-

ture compensator. Cover connector with plastic cap.
(23) Raw torque/negative case pressure ports - disconnect a i r c r a f t

plumbing from raw torque/negative case pressure ports. Do not
remove adapter. Cover ports with metal caps.
(24) Beta/NTS switches - disconnect a i r c r a f t leads from beta/NTS

switches. Cover connectors with plastic caps.
(25) Unfeathering pump connection- disconnect a i r c r a f t plumbing from

unfeathering pump connection (beta block). Do not remove f i t t i n g .
Cover f i t t i n g with plastic cap.
(26) Ignition unit - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from ignition unit.

Cover connector with plastic cap.
(27) Propeller governor - disconnect a i r c r a f t lead from propeller

governor.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 409
Aug 16/89
~ J MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
5. A. (28) Compressor discharge bleed ports - disconnect aircraft plumbing

from compressor discharge bleed ports (typical two places). En-
sure customer furnished restrictors are installed and cover
connections.
(29) Solenoid valves - remove aircraft harness from various other sole-
noid valves. Cover connectors with plastic caps.
(30) Inlet, tail pipe, propeller shaft - after removal of aircraft

equipment from respective areas and removal of engine from air-
frame, cover inlet, tailpipe, and propeller shaft to prevent poss-
ible damage and contamination.
B. Prior to Installing Engine into Shipping Container, Inspect Engine to
Ensure the Following
(1) All engine mounted hardware is properly secured to engine.
(2) All aircraft associated hardware is removed from engine. (Refer

to Aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog and Maintenance Manual.)
(3) All open ports are properly covered or plugged.
(4) All engine related loose items are properly packaged and secure in
engine container.
(5) I f engine is damaged or partially disassembled, annotate condition

and attach to engine.
(6) Make log book entries and ensure engine records are shipped with
engine.
(7) Pack beta tube in its specified container and ship with engine.
R (8) Install engine into shipping container in accordance with para-

R graph 2.B.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 410
Dec 14/87
~ l s l i e d
CHAPTER 72 - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General 501
Table of Operating Limitations 505
R . Engine Operational Checks 517

R ao Engine Leakage Check 517
R AI. NTS Test System Check 518
R B. NTS Lockout and Propeller Governor AA-AC, CA-GA 518
R Reset Check
R B1. NTS System Ground Check 518
C. Start Flow Check AA-CC 519
D. F l i g h t Idle Check AA-CC 519
E. Flight Idle Fuel Flow Check 519
F. F l i g h t Idle Low Speed Flat Check DA-GA 520
G. Flight Idle Low Speed Check DA-GA 520
H. Fuel Flow Acceleration Schedule Check 521
I. Overspeed Governor Check 521
J. Disengage Propeller Start Locks Check 522
K. Propeller Governor High RPM Check 522
L. Propeller Governor Low RPM Check 522
M. Underspeed Governor 523
High RPM Check
N. Underspeed Governor 524
Low RPM Check
O. Underspeed Governor/Propeller 524
Governor Separation Check
P. Maximum Fuel Flow Check AA-CC 525
Q. Maximum Fuel Flow Check DA-GA
R. Static Reverse Power Check 528
S. Reverse Power Symmetry Check 528
(Twin Engine Requirements)
T. Flameout Check 528
U. I n l e t A n t i - l c e Valve Check 529
V. Torque Limiter Check AA-BA, EA-FB 529
W. Torque/Temperature DA 529
Limiter Check
R X. Propeller Governor Reset Function 530
and NTS Lockout System
Pressure Check
Y. Fuel Manifold Purge System Check AB-BA, CB-GA 532
R Z. Transition to Beta Mode Check 532
R (Twin Engine Requirements)
UP136688
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
72-CONTENTS
Page 1
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
. Engine Functional Checks 532A

A. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly 534
Functional Check (Dynamic
Pressure Flow Test)
B. Torque Indicating System Check 54O
C. Torque Sensor Compensator CA-CC, GA 546
Assembly Cal i bration
D. Seal Break-ln Procedure 549
R E. Vibration Check 55O
F. Indicated Torque Output Check 551
Using Torque Test Kit
G. NTS Systen Check by F l i g h t Check 565
. Adjustments 566
A. Fuel Control Adjustments (Bendix) AA-CC 566
B. Fuel Control Adjustments DA-GA 574
(Woodward)
C. Propeller Governor Adjustments 598.2
. Maximum Trim Compensation Adjustment 598.2

A. Confirm Engine Performance 598.2
Deteri orati on
B. Perform Maximum Trim Compensation 598.4
Adjustment
6. ITT Recompensating Procedure (On Wing) 598.5

A. Engine Preparation for Testing 598.12
B. Engine Testing Requirements 598.24
C. Test Data Reduction 598.29
D. Test Completion 598.30
E. Test Compensating Resistor 598.34
Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
UP136688
72-CONTENTS
Page 2
Aug 4/94

EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
. Propeller Test Stand Recompensation 598.44
Procedures (Recompensating ITT)
A. Engine Configuration on Propeller 598.49
Test Stand
B. Engine Preparation for Testing 598.51
C, Engine Testing Requirements 59E~.61
D, Test Data Reduction 598.67
E, Test Completion 598.68
F. Compensating Resistor Adjuslmlent 59&. 71
8. Test Requirements for Repaired 598.77

Engines
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
72-CONTENTS
UP136688
Page 3/4
R Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
/lied
GENERAL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
. General
This section includes engine operating information relative to pre-start

through shutdown procedures pursuant to operational checks and adjustments.
Engine operation limitations are listed in Table 503. The individual proce-
dures can be performed when required by other sections of this manual i f
necessary to establish engine operation within the limits specified by the
Aircraft Flight Manual or when required at periodic intervals as referenced
in 72-00-00, Inspection/Check 2, Periodic Inspection Requirements. When
specific procedures are required following replacement of an engine compo-
nent, these procedures are referenced in the applicable
chapter/section/subject covering Maintenance Practices for the component
replaced.
CAUTION: REFER TO TABLE 503 (OPERATINGLIMITATIONS). SHUTTHE

ENGINE DOWNIMMEDIATELYIF OPERATING LIMITS ARE EX-
CEEDED, OR IF UNUSUAL ENGINE NOISES, VIBRATION, SMOKE,
OR FIRE ARE EXPERIENCED OR IF FUEL OR OIL LEAKAGE IS
NOTED. DIAGNOSEAND CORRECTANY MALFUNCTIONOR CONDI-
TION PRIOR TO ATTEMPTINGANOTHERSTART.
IF INDICATED ITT IS IN EXCESSOF 300C (572F), THE ENGINE

MAY BE MOTOREDWITHOUT FUEL AND IGNITION UNTIL EITHER
300C (572F) OR 15 PERCENTENGINE RPM IS ATTAINED, AT
WHICH TIME A STARTMAY BE INITIATED.
IF ENGINE COMBUSTIONSECTION CONTAINS EXCESSIVE FUEL OR
FUEL VAPOR, ALLOWAT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR DRAINING OR
CLEARING BEFOREATTEMPTING A RESTART, OR MOTORENGINE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED IN APPLICABLE AIR-
CRAFT FLIGHTMANUAL.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ALLOW ENGINE TO EXCEED 106 PER-

CENT RPM.
THE OPERATORSHALL BE FAMILIAR WITH ALL EMERGENCYPROCE-

DURES NOTEDIN APPLICABLE AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL, ESPE-
CIALLY THOSERELATED DIRECTLY TO GROUNDOPERATIONS.
ON INITIAL ENGINE START FOLLOWING REPLACEMENTOF FUEL

CONTROL ASSEMBLY, FUEL CONTROLUNIT OR FUEL PUMPASSEM-
BLY, BE PREPAREDTO MANUALLYSHUT DOWNENGINE IF UNCON-
TROLLABLE ACCELERATION OCCURS.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 501
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
CAUTION: (CODES AB-BA, CB-GA) FUEL-PURGESYSTEMWILL NOT TOTALLY

(CONT) CHARGE UNLESS A MINIMUM ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENTIS
ATTAINED DURINGTHE OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
(CODES AB-BA, CB-GA) FUEL-PURGESYSTEMREQUIRES ACTUATION OF

THE "STOP" CIRCUIT FOR 5 SECONDSMINIMUM OR UNTIL ENGINE
SPEED DECREASES BELOWGROUNDIDLE SPEED. THE RPM SHOULDIN-
CREASE WITH ACTUATION OF THE STOP SWITCH, THEN DECAYWHENTHE
MANIFOLD FUEL IS DEPLETED. ACTUATIONOF THE STOP SWITCH FOL-
LOWING MANUALSHUTDOWN, WILL RESULT IN A FUEL ACCUMULATION IN
THE PLENUM. IT IS RECOMMENDEDTHAT THE ELECTRICAL SHUTDOWN
CIRCUITS NOT BE ACTIVATED UNTIL ENGINE COOLING PRECLUDESCOM-
BUSTION, OR IN THE CASEOF INITIAL ENGINE OPERATION WITH IN-
TENTIONAL MANUALSHUTDOWNSREQUIRED, THE PURGESYSTEMMAY BE
DISABLED.
NOTE: In order to satisfy high quality operational standards, as well

as ensuring the accuracy of readings obtained during the test
and calibration of the equipment, i t is recommended that all in-
strumentation and gages to be used be checked on a periodic
basis against instrumentation and gages of known accuracy.
Following any maintenance performed on the engine, confirm nor-
mal operation by starting and operating engine in accordance
with Aircraft Flight Manual.
Table 503 l i s t s corrective actions required when engine operat-
ing limits are exceeded.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 502
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 503. Certificated Engine Operating Limitations
Condition Operating Limit Action i f Exceeded
CAUTION: LIMITATIONS CONTAINED IN THIS SECTION REFERTO THE ENGINE

ONLY. THE AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEOR AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL
SHOULDBE CONSULTED FOR ADDITIONAL AIRCRAFT-REQUIRED ENGINE
LIMITATIONS. ALL VALUES ARE STEADYSTATE EXCEPTAS NOTED.
Light-off time (from 10

percent speed to l i g h t - o f f )
Ground starts Approximately Abort start.

10 seconds
Air starts Approximately Abort start.

15 seconds
Oil pressure 70 to 120 psig at normal Shut down as soon

operating temperature as possible.
range
50 psig minimum above

23,000 feet
40 psig minimum at ground

idle
NOTE: Transients below 40 psig are permissible at ground idle low.
Transient oil pressure in excess of 120 psi can occur during

cold weather starting.
72-00-00
UP136688
R NOTE: Tables 501 and 502 deleted. Page 503

Aug 4/94
GF~70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 503. Certificated Engine Operating Limitations (Cont)
* Pressure
Fl uctu ati ons
Oil ±5.0 psig (At steady RPM)
±0.5 psig (Raw torque

pressure (Delta P))
Fuel ±25.0 psi (At idle RPM,

pressure reading taken be-
tween fuel shutoff and fuel
flow divider valves.)
+5.0 psi (At takeoff and cruise
RPM, pressure reading taken
between fuel shutoff and
fuel flow divider valves.)
*When using direct reading gage.
(Codes DA-GA) Refer to Aircraft Accomplish fuel

Use of aviation Flight ~lanual. control/fuel pump
gasoline mating spline in-
spection. (Refer
to 72-00-00,
Inspection/Check.)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 504
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
~IAINTENANCE MANUAL
Oil temperature
NOTE: Starting the engine at oil temperature as low as -40% (-40°F)

is permitted providing adequate cranking torque is provided
and the fuel viscosity is lower than 12 centistokes. Exceed-
ing ground idle power at low oil temperature is not advisable
due to fuel icing and in the interest of optimum engine and
Iubricant performance.
I f the temperature l i m i t for normal continuous operation is

exceeded, reduce engine torque ( i f possible) to lower oil
temperature.
*Type I oil Below-40°C (-40°F) Pre-heat engine to

(MI L-L-7808) •Normal engine start may obtain minimum oil
not be possible. temperature of -40°C
(-40°F) to 55°C
-40°C (-40°F) to 55°C (I30°F).
(130°F) Operation allowed
during engine start and
warmup.
55% (130°F) to 79°C (174°F) Perform SOAP check

Normal continuous ground and prior to next f l i g h t
f l i g h t operation. i f operating above
100% torque and oil
temperature is above
79°C (174°F).
R 79°C (174°F) to 93°C (199°F) I f 5 minute f l i g h t

R Continuous ground operation operati on I imi t i s
R allowed i f below 100% torque. exceeded, perform
R foot-pounds torque. Flight SOAP check within 25
R operation al lowed for 5 f l i g h t hours. Oper-
R minutes when operating at or ation with oil temp-
R below 100% torque. erature between 93°C
R (199°F) and 150%
R (302°F) requires a
R SOAP check prior to
R next f l i g h t .
*Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for approved o i l .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 505
Aug 4/94
~ F::~70-~'A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Condi ti on Operating Limit Action i f Exceeded
Oil temperature (Cont)

*Type I oil I f 150°C (302°F) or greater. Accomplish Oil Over
(MI L-L-7808)(Cont) Temperature Inspec-
tion prior to next
f l i g h t . (Refer
to 72-00-00,
Ins pecti on/Check. )
R *Type II oil Below -40°C (-40°F) Pre-heat engine to

R (MIL-L-23699) Normal engine start may obtain minimum oil
R not be possible. temperature of -40%
R (-40°F) to 55°C
R -40°C (-40°F) to 55% (130°F).
R (130°F) Operation allowed
R during engine start and
R warmup.
R
R 55°C (130°F) to 110°C (230°F) Perform SOAPcheck

R Normal continuous ground and prior to next f l i g h t
R fl ight operati on. i f operating above
R 100% torque and oil
R temperature is above
R IIO°C (230°F).
R 110°C (230°F) to 127% I f 5 minute flight

R (260°F) Continuous ground operation limit is
R operation al lowed i f below exceeded, perform
R 100% torque. Flight opera- SOAP check within 25
R tion allowed for 5 minutes f l i g h t hours.
R when operating at or below
R 100% torque.
I f 127% (260°F) to 140% Perform SOAPcheck

(284°F). within 25 flight
hours i f operation
is at or below 100%
torque and for 30
seconds or less.
Perform SOAPcheck
prior to next f l i g h t
i f operation is
above 100% torque or
exceeds 30 seconds.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 506
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO, 72-01-27)
Condit i on Operating Limit Action i f Exceeded
Oil temperature (Cont)
R *Type I I I f 140°C (284°F) to 150°C Perform SOAP check

R (MI L-L-Z369)(Cont) (302°F). prior to next f l i g h t .
R
R I f 150°C (302°F) or greater. Accomplish Oil Over

R Temperature Inspec-
R tion prior to next
R f l i g h t . (Refer
R to 72-00-00,
R Inspection/Check. )
NOTE: Starting the engine at oil temperature as low as -40°C (-40°F)

is permitted providing adequate motoring torque is provided and
the fuel viscosity is not lower than 12 centistokes. Exceeding
ground idle power at low oil temperature is not advisable due
to fuel icing and in the interest of optimum engine and l u b r i -
cant performance.
Ambient temperature
ranges
Starting -40 to 55°C (-40 to 130°F) Do not attempt

start unless tem-
perature is within
these limits.
Operati on 55% (130°F) Maximum. Refer to Aircraft

No minimum l i m i t . Flight Manual.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 507
Aug 4/94
GEG7~2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Turbine temperature
Starting (Air and Ground) *'1149°C (2100°F) Abort start. I f

(Uncompensated) maximum 1149 to 1155°C (2100
for 1 second to 2111°F) in excess
of 1 second, conduct
a takeoff power check
to determine satis-
factory operation.
I f 1149 to 1155%
(2100 to 2111°F)
in excess of three
seconds or over 1155°C
(2111°F) at any time,
remove engine. Per-
form turbine over
temperature i nspec-
tion. Refer to
72-00-00, Inspection/
Check.
**Refer to Flight Manual for limits related to specific temperature

measuring system installed in aircraft.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 508
Aug 4/94
~V~7tq-PA
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Condi t i on Operating Limit Action i f Exceeded
Turbine temperature (Cont)
Takeoff and maximum Refer to A i r c r a f t 0 to 25% (0 to 45°F)

continuous at 100 Flight Manual. overlimit, reduce
percent rpm power.
25 to 35°C (45 to 63°F)

overlimit for 30
seconds, reduce power.
25 to 35°C (45 to 63°F)

overlimit in excess of
30 seconds, reduce
power and conduct a
power check to deter-
mine satisfactory per-
formance.
35 to 39°C (63 to 70°F)

overlimit for 5
seconds or less, re-
duce power and conduct
power check to deter-
mine s a t i s f a c t o r y per-
fo~]ance.
35 to 39°C (63 to 70°F)

overl imi t in excess of
5 seconds or over 39°C
(70°F) overlimit at
anytime, remove engine.
R Perform turbine over
R temperature inspection.
Refer to 72-00-00,
Inspecti on/Check.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 509
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ l s l i e d

R Table 503. Certificated Engine Operating Limitations (Cont)
Rotor speeds
100.0 percent Continuous Adjust engine speed
lever.
101.0 percent Continuous Correct to within

limits by movement of
engine speed lever.
Adjust linkage and/or
propeller governor
maximum setting.
101.0 to 101.5 5 minutes Reduce engine speed.

percent Record speed and time
of operation in excess
of limit in permanent
aircraft records. Re-
set governor to 101.0
maximum.
101.5 to 105.5 30 seconds Reduce engine speed.

percent Record speed and time
of operation in excess
of limit in permanent
aircraft records.
105.5 to 106.0 5 seconds Refer to Inspection/

R percent Check, Overspeed
R Inspection.
106.0 percent Never exceed Refer to Inspection/

Check, Overspeed
Inspection.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 510
Aug 12/91
/lied
Windmilling
NOTE: Reverse rotation of engine is not permitted.
0 to 5 percent Continuous Feather propeller or

reduce airspeed.
5 to 10 percent 30 minutes maximum Feather propeller or

reduce airspeed.
10 to 18 percent 5 minutes maximum Feather propeller or

reduce airspeed.
18 to 28 percent CAUTION: Feather propeller.

AVOID WINDMILLING OR EN-
GINE OPERATION BETWEEN
18 AND 28 PERCENTRPM
EXCEPT FOR TRANSIENT OF
THIS RANGEDURINGSTART
AND SHUTDOWNAS THIS IS
A CRITICAL RPM RANGE.
28 to 100 percent 1 minute maximum Feather propeller.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 511
Aug 12/91
~ S lied
Overtorque limits at:
2564 to 2871 FT-LBS 5 minutes Reduce torque within

(777 to 870 SHP limits and perform
reference only) SOAP analysis within
(100% to 112% next 25 flight ~ours.
reference only)
2871 to 2925 FT-LBS 15 seconds Reduce torque w~ in

(870 to 886 SHP limits and perfo~i~
(112% to 114% next 25 flight hours.
reference only)
2925 to 2983 FT-LBS 5 seconds Reduce torque within

(114% to 116% next 25 flight hours.
reference only)
2983 to 3051FT-LBS Anytime Reduce torque within

(116% to 118.9% next 25 flight hours.
reference only)
3052 FT-LBS (Over Anytime Prior to next flight,

925 SHP reference perform gearbox in-
only) (119% reference pection. Magnetic par-
only) particle inspect pro-
peller shaft coupling
in accordance with
70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Cracks
are not allowed.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 512
Aug 12/91
/lied
Full reverse
R Maximum airspeed Refer to Aircraft Position power lever

R Flight Manual for at ground idle until
R reverse operational the aircraft has
R Iimit. slowed below reverse
R operational l i m i t .
Landing minimum 93.0 percent rpm Return power lever

to ground idle posi-
tion i f engine speed
drops below l i m i t s .
R Beta l i g h t
R Beta l i g h t (at Beta l i g h t must be on Trouble shoot as soon
R normal operating when operating in the as possible for low
R oil temperature) Beta range at engine Beta pressure or
R speeds of 85 percent switch realfunction.
R and above. At speeds
R below 85 percent this
R is not required.
Leakage
Fuel and Oil Refer to 72-00-00, Trouble Trouble shoot appli-

Shooting, Table 101 for cable system.
all owable leakage.
Additional operating limits
Sudden stoppage or Any deceleration of the en- Shut down engine.

externally induced gine due to impact with any Refer to 72-00-00,
engine deceleration. object. Inspection/Check.
Cooling prior to 3 minutes at Idle or

shutdown. below 20 percent
power (high rpm inclu-
ding Descent, Approach,
Landing Roll, and Taxi).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 513
Aug 12/91
lied
Additional operating limits

(Cont)
Cooling prior to I f reverse power is used
shutdown. (Cont) and exceeds 20 percent
power (stabilized), the
3-minute cooling period
period commences at
engine power reduction.
Recommended air start 100-180 kts IAS 0-20,000 Adjust air speed and
altitude and air speed altitude altitude to bring
envelope. within limits.
Engine speed governor settings
Static takeoff setting 99.0 to 101.0 percent Adjust linkage and/

of propeller governor. or propeller gover-
nor maximum setting
prior to next flight.
Stabilized i n - f l i g h t 100.0 to 101.0 percent Adjust engine speed

engine rpm with speed I ever to wi thin
lever at take-off I imi ts.
position.
Minimum i n - f l i g h t 96.0 percent 1. Adjust speed lever

cruise setting. within limits.
. Adjust propeller
governor minimum
stop prior to next
flight.
Static maximum under- 96.0 to 97.0 percent Adjust linkage and/

speed fuel governor or underspeed fuel
setting with engine governor maximum
speed lever at high setting prior to
speed position and next flight.
power lever set at
ground idle.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 514
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine speed governor

settings (Cont)
Static minimum under- Refer to A i r c r a f t Adjust linkage and/

speed fuel governor Maintenance Manual for or underspeed fuel
setting with engine limit. governor minimum
speed lever at taxi settings prior to
and power lever set next f l i g h t .
at ground idle.
(Codes AA, AB, BA) 93.5 percent Adjust linkage and/

Static underspeed or underspeed fuel
fuel governor setting governor settings
with propeller gover- prior to next f l i g h t .
nor set at 96 percent.
R Overspeed fuel gover- 104.0 to 105.0 percent Refer to rotor over-

nor setting. speed limits. Shut-
down engine.
NOTE: Ground effects and wind gusts w i l l produce power changes in ex-
cess of the following limits but these changes are distinguish-
able by a non-cyclic nature. In all cases, care shall be taken
to ensure that fluctuations are attributable to the fuel con-
trol unit. (Codes AA-AC, DA-FB) Do not reject the fuel con-
trol without f i r s t capping the torque l i m i t e r bypass valve and
rechecking the fluctuation.
Consistent cyclic -+5°C (-+9°F) ITT Replace fuel control

fluctuations in ITT, +2 percent torque unit.
torque and fuel flow _+10 Ib/hr fuel flow
during operation in
reverse power.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 515
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
/lied
(Codes AA-CC, GA) Sufficient magnitude to Replace propeller

Fluctuations that result create a d i s t i n c t l y au- governor unit i f
in consistent visible en- dible cyclic beat fre- requirements
gine speed variation. quency between engines. of reverse power
Fluctuations within limits check are not met.
of reverse power check
above are satisfactory.
(Codes AA-CC) Simultaneous fluctu- Replace fuel control

Consistent and simultane- ations in excess of unit.
ous fluctuations in ITT, ±15C (±27F) ITT,
torque and fuel flow in ±4 percent torque, and
steady state f l i g h t . ±10 Ib/hr fuel flow.
Ignition Refer to Aircraft Remove and inspect ig-

Flight Manual. nition unit in accor-
dance with 74-10-01,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 516
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
NOTE: The operational procedures for the engine are presented

here in a general, non-specific format for convenient use
by maintenance personnel. I t is realized that these proce-
dures will seldom be used directly for installed-aircraft-
engine operation, as a i r c r a f t f l i g h t manuals that deal with
the operation of the aircraft as a system are normally used
for this purpose. The operational procedures contained in
this section are intended for use as a basic guide to the
R fundamentals of engine operation and do not supercede in-
R formation continued in the Aircraft Flight Manual and Air-
R craft Maintenance Manual.
2. Engine Operational Checks
NOTE: The operation of various switches and controls are described

with reference to a function performed at the engine. Consult
the applicable Aircraft Flight Manual for cockpit controls con-
figuration and operational procedures.
The oil temperature must be 75 to 85C (167 to 185F) for all

operational checks unless otherwise specified in Aircraft Main-
tenance Manual.
This check shall be made after the replacement of an engine or

following removal or uncoupling diaphragm.
A. Engine Leakage Check
(1) Visually check engine for evidence of fuel and oil leaks. I f leak-
age is apparent, proceed as follows.
NOTE: Conical seals may be used at any flared tubing

f i t t i n g of appropriate size in fuel and oil sys-
tems as a repair to correct leakage at the option
of the user. Refer to 70-00-00, General - Stan-
dard Practices.
(a) Clean all excess fuel, o i l , or grease from the exterior of en-
gine after any known leaks have been corrected.
(b) Start the engine and accelerate to ground idle speed.
(c) Release start locks and operate engine as required to deter-

mine i f any leaks exist.
(d) Shut down engine and check for evidence of external leakage
that may be in excess of the limits specified in 72-00-00,
Trouble Shooting. Correct any out-of-limits leakage and
recheck.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 517
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. AI. NTS Test System Check
Perform NTS t e s t system check in accordance with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t

Manual.
NOTE: This check shall be performed a f t e r removal and in-
s t a l l a t i o n of p r o p e l l e r pitch c o n t r o l .
B. (CodesAA-AC, CA-GA) NTS Lockout and Propeller Governor Reset Check
(1) Turn unfeathering pump on. Place speed lever in low position and
power lever at f l i g h t idle.
(2) Depress and hold NTS t e s t switch. NTS l i g h t shall i l l u m i n a t e .
(3) Move power lever to ground idle position. NTS l i g h t shall go out.
(4) Move power lever to f l i g h t idle position. NTS l i g h t shall

i I I umi nate.
(5) Release NTS test switch. Turn unfeathering pump off.
BI. NTS System Ground Check
NOTE: This check shall be performed a f t e r replacement of an en-

gine or following removal, i n s t a l l a t i o n , disassembly of the
engine gear reduction system (diaphragm), f i r s t and/or
second stage impeller, or propeller governor.
This check is also required anytime the main shaft has been
stretched using 284196-2-1 multiplier.
(i) With the propeller on start locks, set the power lever at f l i g h t
idle.
NOTE: Energizing the unfeathering pump ports oil pres-

sure to the NTS pressure switch. The increasing
oil pressure activates the switch causing the
cockpit NTS l i g h t to illuminate.
(2) Actuate NTS test switch. Cockpit NTS light shall illuminate.
NOTE: As starter-generator motors engine, negative

torque occurs. The feather valve w i l l activate
and dump oil to engine gear case. The cockpit
NTS l i g h t w i l l extinguish.
(3) Immediately perform an engine start. The cockpit NTS l i g h t shall

extinguish.
(4) At approximately 25 percent rpm, the cockpit NTS light shall i l l u -
minate and remain on.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 518
Aug 4/94
~ /lied
. BI. (5) Deactuate NTS test switch.
(6) I f above requirements are not met, refer to 72-00-00, Trouble
Shooting.
C. (Codes AA-CC) Start Flow Check
CAUTION: OBSERVEMAXIMUMSTARTING TEMPERATURE OF 1149°C

(2100°F).
(I) Start engine and observe time, in seconds, from ignition (ITT
rise) to ground-idle speed.
(2) I f starting time is less than 60 seconds and ITT does not exceed
start limits, adjustment is not required. Proceed with f l i g h t
idle check.
(3) I f the time is greater than 60 seconds, shut down engine in ac-
cordance with Aircraft Flight Manual and check propeller blade an-
gle while on locks in accordance with Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(4) I f blade angle is correct, refer to Fuel Control Adjustments.
(5) When the check satisfies the 60 second requirement, proceed with
the f l i g h t idle check.
D. (Codes AA-CC) Flight Idle Check
(i) Start engine in accordance with Aircraft Flight Manual. Do not

unlatch propeller. Turn environmental system OFF.
(2) Advance speed lever to maximumwith power lever at f l i g h t idle

position. Engine speed shall be 97.5 percent minimum.
(3) I f f l i g h t idle fuel adjustment is required, refer to Fuel Control

Adjustments.
E. Flight Idle Fuel Flow Check
NOTE: Perform this check with propeller on start locks to

eliminate influence of propeller rigging.
(i) Start engine in accordance with Aircraft Flight Manual.
(2) Move engine speed lever to low rpm position and power lever to ap-
proximately one inch above the f l i g h t idle detent.
(3) Retard power lever to f l i g h t idle detent.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 519
Aug 12/91
l s l i e d
. E. (4) After engine has stabilized, record engine rpm and fuel flow with
bleed-air off.
NOTE: The proper flight idle fuel flow results in a par-
ticular rate of descent in f l i g h t and a particular
engine rpm on the ground.
(5) Refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual for flight idle rpm setting.
F. (Codes DA-GA) Flight Idle Low Speed Flat Check
(1) Move speed lever to low engine speed position and advance power
lever slowly from minimum fuel flow position toward takeoff. In
area of flight idle detent, a constant fuel flow shall be noted.
(2) Record fuel flow at f l a t and advance power up to 750C (1382F) in-
terstage turbine temperature.
NOTE: I f engine is correctly rigged, misalignment of
f l i g h t idle ~ a t can usually be corrected in the
aircraft power lever linkage in accordance with
Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(3) Retard power lever to f l i g h t idle detent and record fuel flow.
Fuel flow shall be same as fuel flow noted in step (2).
NOTE: Propeller shall be off start locks for f l i g h t idle
check.
Adjust of flight idle fuel flow in accordance with Air-
craft Maintenance Manual. However, final evaluation of
the fuel flow for f l i g h t idle shall be determined by
the pilot and the necessary adjustment to the appropri-
ate engine or engines made per his request. The resul-
ting engine speed on the engines after proper adjust-
ment shall be recorded in the maintenance log sheets
and noted appropriately in order to prevent additional
adjustments by other maintenance personnel.
R G. (Codes DA-GA) Flight Idle Low Speed Check
(i) Move speed lever to low engine speed position and slowly advance
power lever until engine speed reaches approximately 95 percent.
(2) Retard power lever rapidly to f l i g h t idle position. Engine speed

shall stabilize as specified in Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(3) I f correct engine speed is not obtained, an adjustment of flight

idle fuel flow will be required. Refer to Fuel Control
Adjustments.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 520
Aug 12/91
lied
2. G. (4) Repeat check after adjustment has been accomplished and after
f l i g h t test i f required.
H. Fuel Flow Acceleration Schedule Check
(1) Start engine in accordance with aircraft f l i g h t manual.
(2) Position power lever at idle and establish stabilized condition.

Advance engine speed lever from low to high position in one second
or less. Engine speed shall increase to underspeed governor maxi-
mum setting in less than 8 seconds.
I. Overspeed Governor Check
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDMAXIMUMALLOWABLE ENGINE SPEED, MAXI-

MUMALLOWABLETURBINE TEMPERATURE OR ENGINETORQUE
LIMITS DURINGTHIS CHECK. (SEETABLE 503.)
WHEN CHECKINGOVERSPEEDGOVERNOR, AN INCREASE IN VI-

BRATION MAY BE NOTED. THIS IS NORMALAS LONGAS VI-
BRATION IN THE NORMALOPERATING SPEED RANGEIS
ACCEPTABLE. TIME OF OPERATIONON OVERSPEEDGOVERNOR
SHALL BE HELD TO A MINIMUM.
NOTE: This check will be made at interval specified in Table

601, Inspection/Check and following any maintenance
work involving disassembly or adjustment of engine or
removal or adjustment of control components. Perform
this check whenever a i r starts are intentionally
scheduled. Start locks are to remain engaged for this
check.
(1) Start engine in accordance with Aircraft Flight Manual. Do not
remove propeller from start locks.
(2) Operate engine until oil temperature reaches normal operating

range. Refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(3) (Codes AA-CC) Place engine speed lever in high rpm position. Ad-
vance engine power lever slowly toward maximum position, while
closely observing engine rpm. When overspeed governor setting is
reached, the engine speed w i l l not increase with further movement
of power lever. I f overspeed governor does not control engine
speed between 104.5 and 105.5 percent, refer to Fuel Control
Adjustments.
R (4) (Codes DA-GA) Place engine speed lever in high rpm position. Ad-
vance engine power lever slowly toward maximum position while
slowly observing engine rpm. When overspeed governor setting is
reached, the engine speed will not increase with further movement
of power lever. I f overspeed governor does not control engine
speed between 103.0 and 105.0 percent, adjust overspeed governor.
Refer to Fuel Control Adjustments.
UP136688
72-0O-00
Page 521
Aug 12/91
/lied
2. J. Disengage Propeller Start Locks Check

(1) Position engine speed lever as specified in A i r c r a f t Flight Manual.
NOTE: To positively determine that start locks have been

disengaged, advance power lever toward the maximum
position with engine speed lever at high speed
position until governing rpm is reached as indi-
cated by stabilized rpm and an increase in fuel
flow as power lever is advanced.
(2) Retard power lever slowly towards reverse to release propeller

blade locks.
K. Propeller Governor High RPM Check
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDMAXIMUMALLOWABLE ENGINE SPEED, MAXIMUMAL-
LOWABLE TURBINE TEMPERATUREOR ENGINE TORQUELIMITS DUR-
ING PROPELLER GOVERNORCHECKS. (SEE TABLE 503.)
NOTE: This check to be accomplished with propeller off start

locks.
(1) With engine speed lever in high speed position, advance the power
lever slowly toward the maximum position while observing engine
speed. Note the maximum engine speed which can be attained regard-
less of amount of power lever advancement. Record the maximum
R speed attained as reference for adjustment upon completion. I f en-
R gine speed is not within limits specified in Table 503, adjust
R propeller governor maximum stop in accordance with 76-10-01,
R Adjus tment/Test.
(2) I f engine is intended to be shut down upon completion of this
check, return power lever to a position slightly aft of the start
position. Operate engine for three minutes at idle condition for
temperature stabilization, then shut down engine in accordance with
Aircraft Flight Manual.
L. Propeller Governor Low RPM Check
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDTORQUEOR TURBINE TEMPERATURELIMITS.
NOTE: I f propeller governor does not control rpm within limits

specified, adjust low speed stop on propeller governor.
Turning stop screw clockwise one turn w i l l increase en-
gine rpm approximately one percent.
(1) Advance the speed lever to maximum position.

(2) Position the power lever at approximately 50 percent takeoff power.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 522
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: (CODES AA-CC) DO NOT CONTINUE TO RETARD SPEED LEVER
AFTER RPM STOPS DROPPING. EXCESSIVERETARDATION MAY
DAMAGE ENGINE.
2. L° (3) Retard speed lever SLOWLYuntil propeller governor speed does not
drop further with reduction in speed lever setting. Do not exceed
cruise torque and temperature limits. Refer to Aircraft Flight
Manual.
(4) The propeller governor shall maintain the engine speed at a setting
of 94 to 95 percent.
R (5) I f engine speed is not within limits specified in Table 503, adjust
R propeller governor minimum stop in accordance with 76-10-01,
R Adj ustment/Tes t.
(6) I f engine is intended to be shut down upon completion of this
check, return power lever to a position s l i g h t l y aft of the start
position. Operate engine for three minutes at idle condition for
temperature stabilization, then shut down engine in accordance with
Aircraft Flight Manual.
M. Underspeed Governor High RPM Check
NOTE: I f engine rpm does not stabilize at l i m i t speci-

fied, adjust maximum speed stop on the underspeed
governor. Refer to Fuel Control Adjustments.
Recheck and adjust linkage between underspeed gov-
ernor and propeller governor as required following
any adjustment of underspeed governor stop. Refer
to 76-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(1) Advance engine speed lever to high speed position. Retard power
lever slowly ground idle towards reverse, observing ITT indication.
When minimum obtainable ITT is indicated, continue movement until
ITT increases 10C then tighten f r i c t i o n lock on power lever. Rpm
should stabilize within limits. Refer to Table 503 for operating
limits.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 523
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
2. N. Underspeed Fuel Governor Low RPM Check
NOTE: If engine rpm does not stabilize within the limits

specified, adjust the minimum speed stop on under-
speed fuel governor. Refer to Fuel Control
Adjustments. Recheck and adjust linkage between
underspeed fuel governor and propeller governor as
required following any adjustment of underspeed
fuel governor stop. Refer to 76-10-01, MAINTEN-
ANCE PRACTICES.
(1) Retard power lever slowly through ground idle toward reverse to at-
tain interstage turbine temperature increase of 10C. Retard engine
speed lever to the low speed position. Refer to Table 503 f o r
operating l i m i t s .
O. Underspeed Fuel Governor - Propeller Governor Separation Check (Static

Underspeed Fuel Governor Setting with Propeller Governor Set at 96 Per-
cent)
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED CRUISE TORQUEOR TEMPERATURE LIMITS.

REFER TO AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
NOTE: Ensure engine oil temperature is within normal operat-

ing l i m i t s .
(1) Advance engine speed lever to maximum stop. Position power lever
at mid-range (approximately 50 percent of takeoff power).
(2) Slowly retard engi'ne speed lever and stabilize engine rpm at 96
percent. Set fri c tion lock.
(3) Retard power lever and minimum obtainable fuel flow.
(4) Stabilized engine rpm shall not exceed 93.5 percent.
(5) I f rpm is not within l i m i t s , recheck and adjust underspeed fuel

governor and/or adjust linkage. Refer to 76-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES f o r , linkage adjustment.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 524
Dec 14/87
/lied
2. P, (Codes AA-CC) Maximum Fuel Flow Check (Bendix Fuel Control)
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDTORQUEOR ITT LIMITS. (REFERTO TABLE

5o3.)
NOTE: Aircraft air bleed system shall be on and torque l i m i t -
ing system shall be off, as applicable, for this check.
(1) Place speed lever to high RPM position. Advance power lever until
ITT or torque l i m i t specified in Aircraft Flight Manual is reached.
See Table 504 or 505 for appropriate fuel control power lever pro-
tractor angle under existing ambient conditions.
NOTE: I f maximum power can be obtained, record ITT, fuel

flow, torque, oil temperature and oil pressure in
permanent aircraft records.
(2) I f maximum power cannot be obtained (torque limiting or maximum
ITT), check fuel control pneumatic system for leaks or blockage and
check ITT system. Refer to Trouble Shooting to determine i f pro-
blem exists in control linkage, i n l e t temperature sensor or ITT
system. If required, adjust fuel control maximum power adjustment
such that maximum power is achieved at appropriate power lever pro-
tractor angle. Refer to Fuel Control Adjustments.
R Q. (Codes DA-GA) Maximum Fuel Flow Check (Woodward Fuel Control)
NOTE: Aircraft a i r bleed system shall be on for this check.
Operational check of maximum power fuel flow can be ac-

complished by ground check and/or f l i g h t check. A
f l i g h t check shall be performed i f the engine is torque
limited during the ground check.
(1) Check and adjust f l i g h t idle fuel flow in accordance with fuel con-
trol adjustment prior to checking and adjusting maximum power fuel
fl ow.
(2) Perform operational check and adjustment of maximum power fuel flow
by ground check as follows:
(a) Advance engine speed lever to high rpm position.
NOTE: Do not exceed torque or ITT limits specified

in Table 503.
(b) Advance power lever slowly to maximum power lever position.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 525
Aug 12/91
~ [ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
2. Q. (2) (c) Allow engine to stabilize, and record engine rpm, fuel flow,
and ITT.
(d) I f ITT is not within the limits of Table 503, adjust fuel con-
trol maximum power trim adjustment. Refer to fuel control
adjustment.
Table 504. (Codes AA-BA) Power Lever Angle Preflight Ground Setting
at 100 Percent Indicated Torque and 65C Oil Temperature
POWER LEVER ANGLE (DEGREES) AT PRESSURE ALTITUDE

OAT
(deg C) Sea Level 2000 Ft 4000 Ft 6000 Ft
-40 77 80 83 86
-36 78 81 84 87
-32 79 81 84 87
-28 79 82 85 88
-24 80 82 86 89
-20 80 83 86 90
-16 81 84 87 91
-12 82 85 88 92
- 8 83 86 89 93
- 4 84 87 90 94
0 85 88 92 95
4 86 89 93 96
8 87 91 94 97
12 88 92 96 Turbine Temp
16 90 94 97 Limi ted
20 92 96 Turbine Temp
24 93 98 Limited
28 95 Turbine Temp
32 97 Limited
36 Turbine Temp
Limited
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 526
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table 505. (Codes CA-CC) Power Lever Angle P r e f l i g h t Ground Setting

at I00 Percent Indicated Torque and 65C Oil Temperature
POWERLEVER ANGLE IDEGREES) AT PRESSUREALTITUDE

OAT
(deg C) Sea Level 2000 Ft 4000 Ft 6000 Ft
-40 77 79 82 85
-36 77 80 82 86
-32 78 80 83 86
-28 78 81 84 87
-24 79 82 84 88
-20 79 82 85 89
-16 80 83 86 90
-12 81 84 87 91
- 8 82 85 88 92
- 4 83 86 89 93
0 84 87 90 94
4 85 88 92 95
8 86 90 93 97
12 88 91 95 Turbine Temp
16 89 93 96 Limited
20 91 94 98
24 92 96 Turbine Temp
28 94 98 Limited
32 96 Turbine Temp
36 98 Limi ted
40 Turbine Temp
Limi ted
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 527
Dec 14/87

ignal
~
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l s l i e d

2. R. Static Reverse Power Check
CAUTION: USE REVERSE POWERCAUTIOUSLY IF BETA RANGE LIGHT

DOES NOT COMEON IN THE GROUNDOPERATING RANGEWITH
SPEED LEVER AT HIGH SPEED POSITION. IF ENGINE SPEED
DROPS BELOW94.5 PERCENTDO NOT CONTINUE FURTHER
INTO REVERSE POWER.
NOTE: Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for minimum limits used

during landing.
(I) Place speed lever in high speed position. Retard power lever to-
wards f u l l reverse position while monitoring engine rpm. In f u l l
reverse position engine rpm should be 94.5 percent minimum.
(2) I f engine rpm drops below limits specified, recheck f l i g h t idle
propeller blade angle under hot oil conditions and perform Under-
speed Governor High RPM Check.
S. Reverse Power Symmetry Check (Twin Engine Requirement)

CAUTION: OBSERVEREVERSE POWERLIMITS AS SPECIFIED IN AIR-
CRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
(1) Place both speed levers in the high speed position. Set both power
levers to obtain 100 percent engine speed. Pull both power levers
smoothly into f u l l reverse. Both engines shall transition into
reverse simultaneously. Torque should be symmetrical. I f torque
R is not symmetrical, check engine control system rigging and
R propeller blade angle at f l i g h t idle and reverse.
T. Flameout Check
(1) Place power lever at position of minimum fuel flow.
(2) Retard speed lever from high speed stop to low speed stop within
one second or less.
(3) The engine shall not flameout/blowout.
(4) I f limits are not met, refer to 72-00-00, Trouble Shooting, Proce-
dure 32.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 528
Aug 12/91
/Allied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-"-"-"-"-"-"~Signal
. U. Inlet Anti-lce Valve Check

CAUTION: WHENPERFORMINGTHIS STATIC GROUNDCHECK, DO NOT
LEAVE ANTI-ICE VALVE SWITCH IN ON POSITION FOR MORE
THAN 10 SECONDSWHENAMBIENTTEMPERATUREIS 10°C
(50°F) OR ABOVE.
(1) With propeller off start locks, speed lever at high rpm and power
lever at ground idle (position providing minimum fuel flow), place
inlet anti-icing valve switch in ON position and check that inlet
anti-icing valve indicator light illuminates and ITT increases.
(2) Return anti-icing valve switch to OFF position. Ensure light goes
out and ITT returns to normal.
(3) Shut down engine in accordance with Aircraft Flight Manual.
V. (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Torque Limiter Check

Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for pre-flight check of torque limiting
system.
W. (Code DA) Torque/Temperature Limiter Check
R Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for pre-flight check of torque/

R temperature limiting system.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 529
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: ENSURE TEE, CROSS, OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY
WHEN REMOVINGOR INSTALLING CAPS AND TEST LINES. IF
TEE, CROSS, OR FITTINGS ARE NOT SECURED, UNDUE
STRESS, BENDINGAND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN ATTACHING
PARTS MAY RESULT.
NOTE: This check shall be made after the replacement of an

engine or following removal and installation of the
propel I er governor.
2. X. Propeller Governor Reset Function and NTS Lockout System Pressure Check
(1) (Codes CA-DA, GA) Remove tee at position A (Figure 501) and install
a cross f i t t i n g . Connect tube assemblies to cross and install gage
0 - 600 psi on open port of cross.
(2) (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Remove tee, i f installed, and install cross
f i t t i n g at position A, or remove cap from cross. Install gage
0 - 600 psi on open port of cross.
(3) Operate the engine. Advance speed lever to high speed (maximum
rpm) position. Advance power lever until engine rpm reaches 100
percent. Maximumpower is not necessary. However, in pursuit of
100 percent, do not exceed SHP or ITT l i m i t s . Pressure on gage at
position A shall be 325 psig minimum.
(4) Position the speed lever to maximum and position power lever to
select reverse blade angle. The pressure at position A shall not
exceed 25 psig at f u l l reverse thrust.
(5) With power lever positioned to 885C ITT or 700 SHP, position the
speed lever to establish 94 percent rpm. Lock speed lever in
position. Position power lever at ground idle. Shut down engine.
(6) Disconnect tube assembly from cross and install a cap on cross at
position B on Figure 501. Operate engine. With the condition
lever positioned per step (4) above, advance power lever to 885C
ITT or 700 SHP. Engine speed shall be a minimum of 5 percent
greater than preceding value.
NOTE: NTS lockout system pressure below 325 psig for

forward thrust operation, or, above 25 psig for
reverse thrust operation is not acceptable. In
addition, the propeller governor shall reset ap-
proximately five percent upward with pressure line
di sconnected.
(7) Remove cap at position B and pressure gage from position A.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 530
Aug 4/94
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
/ __
/
------ fi"
J
-- -.---4
!o;2
~p
POSITION A
/j
"--- "i .... II
POSITION B
II CHECK VALVE
+1_ I
~:r, cF.'lJ!
.,;]_ :',: ,
I',
t~-.-j .k:-J-
) f'----qc.41~r--.'
---f , ',. ,>.<,r,:
_ _ ~+'-'+"~x_ . ~ I
.... j-l-ii, t~--~} ', '
POSITION C .I---i ' --"" ', ",II '..zI"-I +
J ill', ,' I I
-- +.,.>.m,3,__...__.,.'--..__+~_'~'--.-.;,++--..
'
,,-+, _ / q ------_'-~
____.q--p----
+Z-++{ , i /
li" ' ; F-44A-2683
Propeller Governor Reset and NTS

Lockout System Test (Typical)
UP136688
Figure 501 72-00-00

Page 531
Dec 14/87
l s l i e d

. x. (8) (Codes CA-DA) Remove cross. Reinstall tee.
(9) Reinstall tube assemblies.
(10) I f the engine fails to meet pressure requirements outlined in steps

(3) and (4), refer to 72-00-00, Trouble Shooting.
(11) Engines which fail to pass check outlined in step (3) shall be
f l i g h t tested to ensure proper NTS function after correct pressures
are obtained.
Y. (Codes AB-BA, CB-GA) Fuel Manifold Purge System Check
CAUTION: ACTUATION OF THE STOP SWITCH FOLLOWINGMANUAL

SHUTDOWNWILL RESULT IN FUEL ACCUMULATION IN
THE PLENUM. IT IS RECOMMENDEDTHAT THE ELEC-
TRICAL SHUTDOWNCIRCUITS NOT BE ACTIVATED UNTIL
ENGINE COOLING PRECLUDESCOMBUSTION, OR IN THE
CASE OF INITIAL ENGINE OPERATION WITH INTEN-
TIONAL MANUALSHUTDOWNSREQUIREDTHE PURGESYS-
TEM MAY BE DISABLED.
FUEL-PURGE SYSTEMWILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGEUN-

LESS A MINIMUM ENGINE RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS AT-
TAINED DURINGTHE OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
(1) Actuate engine "STOP" c i r c u i t for 5 seconds minimum or until engine

speed decreases below ground idle speed.
(2) RPM should increase for about 1 second when the stop switch is ac-
tuated and then decay when the manifold fuel is depleted.
i
(3) Absence of the momentary speed increase indicates an inoperable

purge system.
R NOTE: Refer to Table 503 before performing Beta mode check.
R Z. Transition to Beta Mode Check (Twin Engine Requirements)
R Place both engine speed levers in high speed position. Set both power
R levers to obtain 100 percent engine speed. Pull both power levers
R smoothly to ground idle. Both engines shall transition together and
R both beta lights shall illuminate together.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 532
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Functional checks requiring engine operation, start and

shutdown engine in accordance with Aircraft Flight Manual.
Oil temperature must be within normal operating temperature

range on engine operation functional checks unless other-
wise specified in A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual.
3. Engine Functional Checks
NOTE: Table 506 provides a l i s t of equipment and materials

required to perform engine functional checks.
Equipment or Material Manufacturer
Air pressure source Adjustable from 0 to 100 psig
Degreaser and cleaner Miller-Stephenson Chemical Co, Inc,

(MS-180 Freon TF) George Washington Hwy, P.O. Box 950,
Danbury, CT 06810
Gage (Pressure) Commercial ly available

Capable of indicating 0 to 500
psi, ±2 percent accuracy
Gage (Pressure) Commercial ly avail able

Capable of indicating 0 to i00
psi, ±2 percent accuracy.

Capable of indicating 0 to 1000
psi, ±2 percent accuracy.

Capable of indicating 0 to 200 psi,
±2 percent accuracy.
Gage (Pressure/Vacuum) Commercially available

Capable of indicating +15 psig to
-30 Hg ±2 percent accuracy.
72-00-00
UP136688
R Page 532A
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E RO S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 506. Equipment and Materials (Cont)
Equipment or Naterial Manufacturer
R High-pass f i l t e r and Commercially available

R low-pass f i l t e r (The
R required frequency range
R is 110 to 2000 HZ with a
R r o l l o f f slope of at
R least 24 DB/octave char-
R a c t e r i s t i c of a 4 pole
R filter.)
(Fel-Pro C5-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL
60076-4046
L i n t - f r e e cloth Commercial l y available
Pressure regulator Commercial ly avail able
Capable of regulating a i r pressure
from 0 to 100 psig
Vibration meters Commercial l y avail able
Vibration pickups Commercially available

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 532B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Table 506A provides a l i s t of special t o o l s , f i x t u r e s and

equipment required to perform engine functional checks.
Table 506A. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment
Item Source/
R "1. O-Ring Used on propeller shaft prior $9413-037

R (Packing) to i n s t a l l i n g torquemeter.
R *2. O-Ring Used on torquemeter prior $9413-142

R to installing propeller.
*3. Anti-Rotation Used to prevent torquB~eter 283973-1
Bracket rotation during engine operation.
*4. Torquemeter (Load Used to obtain torque indication 2~3997-3

Cel l) (Lebow) from propeller shaft.
. Torque Calibration Used to adapt to gage 284453-i-i

Adapter Plate assemblies.
. Torque Calibration Used to adapt torque sensor 284461-1-i
compensator raw torque pressure
port to gage assembly.
. Torque Wrench Used to adjust torque sensor 284694-1-i

Adapter compensator.
R 7a. Turbine Vibration Used to provide an oriented base 285354-i-1

R Pickup Mount for attaching a v i b r a t i o n pickup
R to monitor engine turbine end
R during vibration check.
R 7b. Vibration Pickup Used to provide an oriented base 285374-1-1

R Mount f o r a%taching v i b r a t i o n pickup
R to monitor engine gearbox during
R vibration check.
. Torque Test Kit Used to obtain engine torque 291862-2

readout for required adjust-
ment of the torque system.
*Components of 291862-2 Torque Test K i t .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 532C/532D
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 506A. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment (Cont)
I tern Source/
* 9. Adapter Wrench Used to tighten bolts securing 292155-1

propeller to torquemeter.
"10. Digital Torque Used to display torque signals 292156-1

Indicator from torqu emeter.
"11. Electrical Cable Used to connect torquBneter 292158-i

and d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r .
"12. StorageCase Used to store all components 292159-1

of torque test k i t .
"13. Gage A s s ~ b l y Used to read raw torque pressure. 292471-1
"14. Gage Assembly Used to read gearcase pressure. 292472-1
"15. Tube Assembly Used to connect to compensator 292473-1

and transmitter adapter.
16. ExtendedBeta Consists of Beta Tube PN 897480-4 294626-1

R Tube Assembly or PN 832725-1 used on Dowty-Rotol
propeller with load cell (Lebow)
that is 5.68 inches in length.
17. ExtendedBeta Consists of Beta Tube PN 868369-1 294626-3

R Tube Assembly or PN 832727-1 used on Hartzell
that is 5.68 in length.
18. ExtendedBeta Consists of Beta Tube PN 897657-i 294626-9

R Tube Assembly or PN 832731-1 used on Hartzell
propel ler with load cell
(Lebow) that is 5.68 inches
in length and load cell
spacer PN 296974-4/-6 or
with load cell (Lebow) that
is 6.68 inches in length and
load cell spacer PN 296974-2.
*Components of 291862-2 Torque Test Kit.

UP136688
72-00-(
Page 53J
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
~IAlNTENANCE MANUAL
Table 506A. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipmnt (Cont)
Item Source/
19. Extended Beta Consists of Beta Tube PN 897660-1 294626-12

Tube Assembly or PN 832734-1 used on Dowty-Rotol
that is 5.68 inches in length and
Load Cell Spacer PN 296974-4/-6
or with load cell (Lebow) that
is 6.68 inches in length and
Load Cell Spacer PN 296974-2.
20. Load Cell Spacer Used on Dowty-Rotol propeller 296974-2

with load cell (Lebow) that is
6.68 inches in length.
21. Load Cell Spacer Used on Dowty-Rotol propeller 296974-4/-6

with load cell (Lebow) that is
R 22. Beta Tube Used on Dowty-Rotol propeller 897480-3 or

R with load cell (Lebow) that 832737-1
is 6.68 inches in length.
3. A. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Functional Check
NOTE: Perform tile following check whenever new or cleaned

nozzle assemblies are installed and at interval speci-
fied in 72-00-00, Inspection/Check, Table 601. This
check should also be performed whenever engine is fuel
flow limited or when fuel system is founa to be
contaminated.
Aviation kerosene or Jet A type fuels are requirea for

t h i s check.
(1) Fuel nozzle dynamic pressure flow t e s t . (Installed.)
(a) I n s t a l l tee f i t t i n g in lines f r ~ flow divider valve to p r i -

raary and secondary fuel manifolds.
(b) Connect pressure gage (0 to 1000 psig) to tee f i t t i n g in l i n e

to primary fuel manifold to measure primary fuel manifold
pressure (Ppri, column (4) in Table 507).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 534
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ / l iignal
ed
3. A. (I) (c) Connect pressure gage (0 to 500 psig) to tee f i t t i n g in line

to secondary fuel manifold to measure secondary fuel manifold
R pressure (Psec, column (3) in Table 507).
(d) Install pressure gage (0 to 200 psig) to measure compressor

R discharge pressure (Pcd, column (2) in Table 507).
(e) Use aircraft fuel flowmeter system to record fuel flow

R ("Actual" col umn i n Table 507).
(f) Start engine. Gradually advance power lever to maximumpower
lever position until fuel flowmeter indicates either 450 PPH
or maximumfuel flow within torque or temperature limits. Al-
low engine to stabilize.
(g) Record, engine fuel flow ("Actual"), compressor discharge
pressure (Pcd, column (2)), secondary fuel manifold.pressure
(Psec, column (3)), primary fuel manifold pressure (Ppri,
column (4)) values in Table 507.
(h) Retard power lever until flowmeter indicates 400 PPH. Allow
engine to stabilize. Repeat step (g).
Table 507. Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet
RECORD CALCULATE
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Engine Fuel Pcd Psec Ppri Psec-Pcd Ppri-Pcd

Flow PPH Actual PSIG PSIG PSIG PSID PSID
450
400
350
300
Column (5) is Column (3) - (2)

Column (6) is Column (4) (2)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 535
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
3. A. (1) (i) Retard power lever until fuel flowmeter indicates 350 PPH.
Allow engine to stabilize. Repeat step (g).
(J) Retard power lever until fuel flowmeter indicates 300 PPH.
Allow engine to stabilize. Repeat step (g).
(k) Calculate secondary delta P (fuel manifold pressure drop on
Figure 504) by subtracting compressor discharge pressure (Pcd,
column (2) in Table 507) from secondary fuel manifold pressure
(Psec, column (3) in Table 507) and record result in column
(5) (Table 507).
(I) Repeat step (k) for remaining three readings.
(m) Calculate primary delta P (fuel manifold pressure drop on
Figure 505) by subtracting compressor discharge pressure (Pcd,
column (2) in Table 507) from primary fuel manifold pressure
(Ppri, column (4) in Table 507) and record result in column
(6) (Table 507).
(n) Repeat step (m) for remaining three readings.
(o) Plot recorded data, on Figure 504 for secondary fuel manifold
assembly, and on Figure 505 for primary fuel manifold assembly
as follows.
1 Plot four recorded engine fuel flow ("Actual" column in
R Table 507) versus four calculated fuel manifold pressure
R drop values (columns (5) or (6) in Table 507) on Figure 504
or 507.
2 Plot four pair of values. Join resulting points with

smooth curve. I f any one point is grossly off curve, that
point value shall be rechecked.
3 I f resulting curves exceed limit criteria, specified in
Figures 504 or 505, at 375 PPH, remove nozzle and manifold
assemblies and perform Fuel and Nozzle Manifold Assemblies
Flow Test, 73-10-09, Adjustment/Test.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 536
Aug 12/91
~ ? Slied
350
300
250
r~
u.i
c~
B
0u _
z
<
:~ 200
R 2
150
I00
50
250 300 350 400 450 500
TOTAL FUEL FLOW (PPH)
G-44G-438
Secondary Fuel Manifold Baseline Plot

UP136688
(New Cleaned Manifold) Fuel Manifold Pressure/Total Engine Fuel Flow

Figure 504 72-00-00
R NOTE: Figures 502 and 503 deleted. Page 537/538
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
350
300
o.=
0 i
250
,,m
UJ
LU
O..
200
=J
0
u_
z
150
=_I
U.I
U.
100
50
250 300 350 400 4,.50 500
TOTAL FUEL FLOW (PPH)
CG-44G-775
Priraary Fuel ~lanifold Baseline Plot (New or Cleaned Manifol d)

Fuel Manifold Pressure/Total Engine Fuel F1ow
Figure 505 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 539
Aug 4/94
,~llied
3. B. Torque Indicating System Check
(1) (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Perform torque indicating system check as

follows.
(a) Disconnect o i l pressure l i n e and gearcase vacuum l i n e from

torque transducer.
(b) Connect pressure source (0 - 100 psi) through pressure regula-

t o r (0 - i00 psi) to high pressure port of torque transducer
or use suitable deadweight t e s t e r . Vent vacuum port of torque
transducer to ambient.
(c) With no e l e c t r i c a l power applied to a i r c r a f t torque indicating
c i r c u i t , set adjustment screw on the front face of torque in-
dicator so that indicator reads 700 shaft horsepower.
(d) From the engine DSC, record torque pressure corresponding to

27,700 inch-pounds torque (equivalent of 700 shaft
horsepower).
CAUTION: ENSURE PRESSURESOURCE IS CONNECTEDTO

HIGH PRESSURE PORT OF TORQUE TRANSDUCER
AND NOT TO LOW PRESSURE PORT.
(e) Adjust pressure regulator to apply pressure recorded in step

(d) to high pressure port of torque transducer. Refer to
(f) While observing cockpit torque indicator very closely, apply

and maintain aircraft electrical power to torque transducer.
(g) I f indicator reading does not vary from i t s position when
power is applied, proceed to step ( k ) .
(h) I f the indicator reading varies, loosen Allen zero adjust

lockscrew on r i g h t face of transducer. Refer to 77-10-03,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. Using a suitable spanner wrench in two
holes in face of transducer, rotate inner body of transducer
to obtain 700 shaft horsepower.
NOTE: The torque indicator reading w i l l often in-

crease as the Allen lockscrew is tightened.
I t w i l l be necessary to position inner body
of the transducer so that the torque indica-
tor reads 700 shaft horsepower when the Allen
lockscrew is tightened to a torque value of
11 to 15 inch-pounds.
(i) Apply a torque value of 11 to 15 inch-pounds to Allen lock-

screw and v e r i f y that torque i n d i c a t o r reading remains
unchanged.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 540
Aug 16/89
lied
. B. (1) (J) While maintaining pressure value from step (d) to torque
transducer, remove and re-apply e l e c t r i c a l power, observing
that torque indicator reading does not change. I f torque in-
dicator reading changes, repeat steps (c) through ( j ) .
(k) From engine DSC, record torque pressure corresponding to 2300
inch-pounds torque (equivalent to 58 shaft horsepower).
(i) With a i r c r a f t e l e c t r i c a l power applied to a i r c r a f t torque in-
dicating system, apply pressure recorded in step (k) to the
torque transducer high pressure port.
(m) Remove the span-adjust dust cover from face of transducer.

Refer to 77-10-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(n) Using a small screwdriver, adjust the span-adjust screw to ob-
tain a reading of 58 shaft horsepower on cockpit torque
indicator.
(o) Adjust regulator valve (0 - 100 psi) to increase pressure at
torque transducer high pressure port to value recorded in step
(d). Verify that torque indicator repeats i t s 700 shaft hor-
sepower reading. I f not, repeat procedure beginning with step
(h).
(P) Add pressure recorded in step (d) to pressure recorded in step

(k) and divide sum by 2 to obtain a mid-point average reading.
(q) Adjust pressure regulator (0 - 100 psi) to apply pressure to
torque transducer high pressure port equal to mid-port average
reading obtained in step (p). Verify that torque indicator
reads 370 to 390 shaft horsepower.
CAUTION: THE SPAN ADJUST DUST CAP SHALL BE IN-

STALLED FINGER TIGHT. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
(r) Install span-adjust dust cap and tighten finger t i g h t . Lock-
wire cap to zero adjustment.
(s) I f proper adjustment of torque indicating system cannot be ob-
tained in preceding steps, perform adjustment/test of torque
indicating system components in accordance with 77-10-03,
(2) (Code DA) (665 SliP Engine) Perform torque indicating system check
as follows.
(a) Disconnect oil pressure line and gearcase vacuum l i n e from

torque transducer.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 541
Aug 16/89
/lied
3. B. (2) (b) Connect pressure source (0 - 100 psi) through pressure regula-
t o r (0 - I00 psi) to high pressure port of torque transducer
or use suitable deadweght t e s t e r . Vent vacuum port of torque
transducer to ambient.
(c) With no e l e c t r i c a l power applied to a i r c r a f t torque indicating

c i r c u i t , set adjustment screw on f r o n t face of torque indica-
t o r so that i n d i c a t o r reads 100 percent torque.
(d) (Code DA) From engine DSC, record torque pressure correspond-
ing to 26,300 inch-pounds torque (equivalent to 100 percent
torque).
CAUTION: ENSURE PRESSURE SOURCE IS CONNECTEDTO
HIGH PRESSURE PORT OF TORQUETRANSDUCER
AND NOT TO LOW PRESSURE PORT.
(e) Adjust pressure regulator (0 - 100 psi) to apply pressure
recorded in step (d) to high pressure port of torque
transducer. Refer to 77-10-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(f) LJhile observing cockpit torque indicator very closely, apply

and maintain a i r c r a f t e l e c t r i c a l power to torque transducer.
(g) I f indicator reading does not vary from i t s position when
power is applied, proceed to step ( I ) or (m).
(h) I f indicator reading varies, loosen Allen zero adjust lock-

screw on r i g h t face of transducer. Refer to 77-10-03, MAIN-
TENANCE PRACTICES. Using a suitable spanner wrench in two
to obtain 100 percent torque.
NOTE: The torque indicator reading w i l l often in-
crease as the Allen lockscrew is tightened.
I t w i l l be necessary to position the inner
body of the transducer so that the torque in-
dicator reads 100 percent torque when the Al-
len lockscrew is tightened to a torque value
of 11 to 15 inch-pounds.
(i) Apply a torque value of 11 to 15 inch-pounds to Allen lock-

screw and v e r i f y that torque indicator reading remains
unchanged.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 542
Aug 16/89
ignal
~_/ l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. B. (2) (j) While maintaining pressure value from step (d) to torque
that torque indicator reading does not change. I f torque i n -
dicator reading changes, repeat steps (c) through (j).
(k) (Code DA) From the engine DSC, record pressure corresponding
to 2260 inch-pounds torque (equivalent to 8.6 percent torque).
(i) With a i r c r a f t e l e c t r i c a l power applied to a i r c r a f t torque in-
dicating system, apply a i r pressure recorded in step (k) to
(m) Remove the span-adjust dust cover from the face of transducer.
(n) (Code DA) Using a small screwdriver, adjust span-adjust screw

to obtain 8.6 percent torque on cockpit torque indicator.
(o) Adjust regulator valve (0 - 100 psi) to increase pressure at
torque transducer high pressure port to value recorded in step
(d). Verify that torque indicator repeats i t s I00 percent
torque reading. I f not, repeat procedure beginning with step
(i).
(p) Add pressure recorded in step (d) to pressure recorded in step

(k) and divide sum by 2 to obtain a mid-point average reading.
(q) Adjust pressure regulator (0 - 100 psi) to apply pressure to
torque transducer high pressure port equal to mid-point
average reading obtained in step (n). Verify that torque in-
dicator reads 53 to 56 percent torque.
CAUTION: THE SPAN-ADJUST DUST CAP SHALL BE IN-
(r) Install span-adjust dust cap and tighten finger t i g h t . Lock-

UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 543
Aug 16/89
ed
3. B. (2) (s) I f proper adjustment of torque indicating system cannot be ob-

R (3) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Statically check air c r aft torque indicating sys-
tem in accordance with air c r aft maintenance manual.
(4) (Code DA) (715 SHP Engine) Torque indicating system check.
(a) Disconnect raw torque pressure line and gearcase negative

pressure line from pressure (torque) transducer.
(b) Connect dead weight tester or connect pressure source (0 - 100

psi) through pressure regulator (0 - 100 psi) to high pressure
port of torque transducer.
(c) Vent vacuum port of torque transducer to ambient.
(d) Adjust torque indicator to read 100 percent torque in accor-
dance with Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(e) From engine DSC, record torque pressure corresponding to
28,300 inch-pounds torque (equivalent to 100 percent torque).
CAUTION: ENSURE PRESSURESOURCEIS CONNECTEDTO

HIGH PRESSUREPORTOF TORQUETRANSDUCER
AND NOT TO LOW PRESSUREPORT.
(f) Adjust pressure regulator (0 - 100 psi) to apply pressure

recorded in step (d) or (e) to high pressure port of torque
transducer. Refer to 77-10-03, Maintenance Practices.
(g) While observing cockpit torque indicator valve closely, apply
and maintain aircraft electrical power to torque transducer.
(h) I f indicator reading does not vary from its position when
power is applied, proceed to step (1) or (m).
(i) I f indicator reading varies, loosen Allen zero adjust lock-

screw on right face of transducer. Refer to 77-10-03, Main-
tenance Practices. Using a suitable spanner wrench in two
to obtain 100 percent torque.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 544
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MAIlUAL
NOTE: The torque indicator reading w i l l often i n -

crease as Allen lockscrew is tightened. I t
w i l l be necessary to p o s i t i o n the inner body
of the transducer so that the torque indica-
tor reads I00 percent torque when the Allen
lockscrew is tightened to a torque value of
3. B. (4) (j) Apply a torque value of 11 to 15 inch-pounds to Allen lock-

screw and v e r i f y that torque i n d i c a t o r reading remains
unchanged.
(k) While maintaining pressure value from step (d) to torque

that the torque i n d i c a t o r reading does not change. I f torque
indicator reading changes, repeat steps (c) through (k).
(I) From the engine DSC, record torque pressure corresponding to

2260 inch-pounds torque (equivalent to 8.0 percent torque).
(m) IJith a i r c r a f t e l e c t r i c a l power applied to a i r c r a f t torque in-

dicating system, apply a i r pressure recorded in step (I) to
(n) Remove span-adjust dust cover from the face of transducer.

Refer to 77-10-03, Maintenance Practices.
(o) Using a small screwdriver, adjust span-adjust screw to obtain

a reading of 8.0 percent torque on cockpit torque indicator.
(P) Adjust regulator valve to increase pressure at torque trans-

ducer high pressure port to value recorded in step (d).
Verify that torque indicator repeats i t s 100 percent torque
reading. I f not, repeat procedure beginning with step ( i ) .
(q) Add the pressure recorded in step (d) to pressure recorded in
step (k) and divide sum by 2 to obtain a mid-point average
reading.
(r) Adjust pressure regulator (0 - 100 psi) to apply pressure to

torque transducer high pressure port equal to mid-point
average reading obtained in step (q). V e r i f y that torque in-
dicator reads 53 to 56 percent torque.
CAUTION: THE SPAN-ADJUST DUST CAP SHALL BE IN-

(s) Install span-adjust dust cap and tighten f i n g e r t i g h t . Lock-

72-00-00
UP136688
Page 545
Aug 4/94
lied
3. B. (4)(t) I f proper adjustment of torque indicating system cannot be ob-

Adjustment/Test.
C. (Codes CA-CC, GA) Torque Sensor Compensator Assembly Calibration
NOTE: Prior to calibration and adjustment of torque sensor

compensator assembly, check a i r c r a f t torque/horsepower
indicating system as specified in paragraph 3.B.(3).
I f the engine raw torque signal is not satisfactory,

special test procedures and equipment are required as
specified in paragraph 3.F. I f equipment is available,
repair the engine and follow procedures in paragraph
3.F. to establish a new raw torque plot. I f equipment
specified in paragraph 3.F. is not available the engine
must be returned to a f a c i l i t y capable of establishing
a new raw torque plot.
(1) Calibrate torque sensor compensator assembly.

(a) Connect pressure gages to indicate raw torque pressure, com-
pensated torque pressure and gearcase negative pressure as
follows.
1 Remove bleed port plug from torque sensor compensator
assembly. Install 284461-1-1, torque calibration adapter
plate and connect pressure gage (0 - 100 psi).
2 Remove torque sensor transmitter and mounting adapter.
Refer to 77-10-03, Maintenance Practices. Install
284453-1-1, torque calibration plate.
3 Connect pressure gage (0 - 100 psi) to compensated pressure

port of adapter plate.
4 Connect vacuum gage (+15 to -30 psi) to gearcase negative

pressure port.
(b) Start and operate engine in accordance with Aircraft Flight
Manual. Unlatch propeller from start locks and operate engine
at ground idle. Operate until oil temperature stabilizes at
normal operating value. Ensure oil pressure is within normal
operating limits. Bleed lines at connections to raw torque
pressure gage and compensated torque pressure gage to purge
a i r from lines.
(c) With power lever set at minimum position where 100 percent en-
gine speed is reached and speed lever at takeoff position,
record raw torque pressure, compensated torque pressure, gear-
case pressure.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 546
Aug 12/91
ed

CAUTION: SET HIGHEST POWERPOINT ATTAINABLE WITHOUT
EXCEEDING ENGINE LIMITATIONS SPECIFIED IN
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
3. C. (1) (d) With power lever set at minimum propeller governing position
and speed lever at takeoff position, record raw torque pres-
sure, compensated torque pressure, and gearcase negative
pressure.
(e) Calculate raw torque differential (delta) pressure by sub-
tracting gearcase pressure reading from raw torque pressure
reading obtained in steps (c) and (d). Result is raw torque
differential (delta) pressure. The following is an example of
a typical calculation.
Raw Torque
Differential
Raw Torque Gearcase Negative (delta)
Pressure (psig) Pres%u,re.(psig) Pressure (psig)
(20) - (-3.5) : 23.5
(f) Calculate compensated torque d i f f e r e n t i a l (delta) pressure by

subtracting gearcase pressure reading from compensated torque
reading obtained in step (c) and step (d). Result is compen-
sated torque differential (delta) pressure. The following is
an example of a typical calculation.
Compensated
Torque
Differential
Compensated Torque - Gearcase Negative (delta)
Pressure (psig) Pressure (psig) Press.ure (psid)
(18) - (-3.5) = 21.5

(g) Enter engine DSC curve with raw torque differential (delta)
pressure obtained in step (e) and intersect raw torque d i f -
ferential (delta) pressure plotted line. (See Figure 509.)
(h) Plot corresponding compensated torque differential (delta)
pressure value obtained in step (f) at same torque values
(foot-pounds) that raw torque d i f f e r e n t i a l (delta) pressure
plotted line was intersected. (See Figure 509.)
(i) Draw a straight line through the points plotted in step (h)
and compare with compensated torque differential (delta) pres-
R sure specification line. (See Figure 509.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 547/548
Aug 12/91
ignal
~
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l s l i e d
3. C. (1) (j) I f slope of drawn l i n e is steeper or shallower than specifica-

t i o n , correct slope by adjusting body of torque sensor compen-
sator assembly using 284694-1-1, adapter. Turning body
clockwise w i l l steepen slope of drawn l i n e . Turning body
counterclockwise w i l l make slope shallower. Adjust body in
one-eighth turn increments between engine operations and
repeat procedure u n t i l drawn line and compensated torque pres-
sure specification l i n e are p a r a l l e l .
(k) After correct slope is obtained, adjust center screw on torque
sensor compensator to raise or lower l i n e plotted in step ( i ) .
Turning screw clockwise decreases indicated torque pressure,
torque, or horsepower and turning screw counterclockwise in-
creases indicated value. One-third turn provides a change in
indicated value of 1.5 psig, 55 foot-pounds, or 20 shaft
horsepower. Operate engine and adjust center screw of torque
sensor compensator assembly u n t i l points plotted in step (h)
coincide with compensated torque d i f f e r e n t i a l (delta) pressure
specification l i n e . (See Figure 509.)
D. Seal Break-ln Procedure

Accomplish seal break-in on engines that have had knife-edge seal or
corresponding seal components (rub strips) replaced. Perform seal
break-in as follows.
(1) Perform five engine starts and operations as follows.
NOTE: On the f i r s t start only, hold speed at ground i d l e

for 5 minutes prior to acceleration to 100 percent
speed.
(2) Start engine, accelerate to ground i d l e , then accelerate to 100

percent engine speed.
(3) Load engine to ITT of 815C (1500F) and operate for 30 seconds.
(4) Unload engine and decelerate to ground i d l e .
(5) Operate engine at ground idle for three minutes, and shut down.
CAUTION: ROTATEENGINE ONLY IN NORMALDIRECTION OF

ROTATION.
R NOTE: After engine shutdo~l following f i r s t engine oper-

R ation, wait 1 minute prior to rotating engine.
R After second operation, wait 2 minutes, t h i r d
R operation wait 3 minutes, fourth operation wait 4
R minutes, and f i f t h operation wait 5 minutes.
R (6) After each operation and shutdown, manually check engine for
R freedom of rotation.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 549
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
lqAl NTENANCE ~4ANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED STARTERDUTY CYCLE LI~,IITS.
3. D. (7) I f the engine is free to rotate a f t e r operation and shutdown cycles

one through four, immediately r e s t a r t the engine and repeat steps
(2) through (6). I f engine does not rotate f r e e l y , allow engine to
cool u n t i l free rotation returns, then continue with break-in
procedu re.
R NOTE: Vibration check shall be accomplished on a test cell

R equipped with vibration test equipment as specified in
R the following procedure. The v i b r a t i o n l i m i t s are not
R applicable to on-the-wing t e s t i n g .
E. Vibration Check
R NOTE: All vibration values are l i s t e d without 1PS

R qualifiers.
R (1) Provide a vibration check setup s i m i l a r to that shown in Figure 506

R as follows.
R (a) I n s t a l l vibration pickup mount (turbine) (1) to turbine plenum

R flange at one o'clock ( a f t looking forward) position so that
R base of mount is in horizontal position.
R (b) I n s t a l l vibration pickup mount (gearcase) (2) so front face of

R engine housing and secure.
R (c) I n s t a l l vibration pickup (3) to mount ( I , 2). Connect vibra-

R tion meters (5) and high-pass/low-pass f i l t e r s (4) to each
R pickup to measure engine v i b r a t i o n .
R (d) Install starter generator assembly on engine drive pad and

R secure.
(e) Connect test stand speed i n d i c a t o r to engine tach~neter

generator.
(f) Connect test stand torque i n d i c a t o r to torque sensor.
R CAUTION: EXERCISE EXTREFiECAUTION TO AVOID HUNG STARTS

R (I|4PROPER ENGINE ACCELERATION) BY OBSERVING ALL
R ENGINE OPERATING PARA~.IETERS. [REFERTO AIR-
R CRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.) IF HUNG START IS INDI-
R CATED OR TURBINE VIBRATION IS APPROACHING BUT
R NOT EXCEEDING 2.0, ABORT START. IF TURBINE VI-
R BRATIONS EXCEED 2.0, ISOLATE TROUBLE AND REPAIR
R ENGINE PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE AGAIN.
(2) Start and operate engine in accordance with the A i r c r a f t F l i g h t

Manual.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 550
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E RO S PAC E
l,iAl NTENANCE MANUAL
TO NO. TO NO. 2
4--..-
T-44G-164
qBRATION
R 1. 285354-1-1 TURBINE VIBRATION 3. VIBRATION PICKUP

R PICKUP MOUNT 4. HIGH-PASS/LOW-PASS FILTER
R 2. 285374-1-1 GEARCASE VIBRATION 5. VIBRATION METER
R PICKUP IqOUNT
Vibration Test Setup (Typical)

Figure 506 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 550A
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: The vibration l i m i t s l i s t e d in Tables 507A and

R 507B are not applicable to on-the-wing testing.
R 3. E. (3) Monitor vibration levels while accelerating to ground idle speed.

R Perform vibration analyzer t e s t , step (4), i f vibration levels ex-
R ceed the maximum allowable vibration l i m i t s (IPS). (Refer to Table
R 507A or 507B.)
R (4) I f v i b r a t i o n l i m i t s are exceeded at steady-state condition during

R t e s t , perform vibration analyzer test as follows.
R CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED ENGINE TEMPERATURELIMIT.
R (a) Set speed lever to maximum position. Move power lever to ob-
R tain 1595 ±4 r ~ and 2000 ±I00 inch-pounds load.
R (b) S t a r t analyzer recorder and slowly move power lever to load

R engine at a rate of approximately 2000 inch-pounds torque per
R second to rated torque of 28,320 inch-pounds or 1650 ±IO°F
R compensated turbine i n l e t temperature, whichever occurs f i r s t .
(c) S t a b i l i z e for 20 +5 seconds.
k (d) Slowly retard power lever and unload engine at a rate of ap-
R proximately 2000 inch-pounds per second to 2000 +100 inch-
R pounds load.
(e) Stop analyzer recoraer and retard power lever to ground i d l e

and speed lever to minimum stop.
(f) Review analyzer recording, i f v i b r a t i o n exceeds l i m i t s isolate

trouble and repair engine. (Refer to Table 507A or 507B.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 550B
Aug 4/94
~V~7n-~A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAI NTENANCE hANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NU. 72-01-27)
R Table 507A. Maximum Allowable Vibration Limits

R (Propeller Test Stand)
R
R Operating Limits Action i f

R Condition (IPS) Exceeded
R
R Vibration
R Gearbox 1.0 Higher gearbox v i b r a t i o n on the pro-
R p e l l e r test stand is acceptable i f she
R Turbine 0.6 time above 1.0 does not exceed 5 sec-
R onds. I f the indicated vibration ex-
R ceeds these l i m i t s , a v i b r a t i o n
R analyzer shall be used to record velo-
R c i t y levels. The maximum allowable
R v e l o c i t y (inch per second) versus f r e -
R quency (Hz) are tabulated below. I f
R the indicated v i b r a t i o n exceeds these
R l i m i t s , isolate trouble and repair
R engine.
R Final Acceptance Vibration Analyzer Limits (96 to

R 105 percent speed - steady state)
R Frequency (Hz) 110-124 125-360 361-450 451-600 601-800 801-2000
R Gearbox Velocity 0.30 0.50 0.70 1.00 0.70 1.00

R (inch per second)
R Turbine V e l o c i t y 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.50 0.35 0.50

R (inch per second)
R
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 550C
Auy 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 507B. Naximum Allowable Vibration Li~lits

(Dynamometer)
R Operating Limits Action i f

R Conaition (IPS) Exceeded
Vi brati on
Gearbox {].70 Maximum gearbox v i b r a t i o n l i m i t is
0.90 at no load provided vibration de-
Turbine 0.35 creases to 0.70 or less when 2000 -+200
inch-pounds load is applied. I f the
indicated vibration exdeees these l i m -
i t s , a vibration analyzer silall be used
to record v e l o c i t y levels. The maximum
allowable v e l o c i t y (inch per second)
versus frequency (Hz) are tabulated
below. I f the indicated vibration ex-
ceeds these l i m i t s , isolate trouble and
repair engine.
Final Acceptance Vibration Analyzer Limits (96 to

105 percent speed - steady state)
R Frequency (Hz) 110-124 125-360 361-450 451-600 601-800 801-2000
R Gearbox Velocity 0.30 0.50 0.70 1.00 0.70 1.00

R (inch per second)
R Turbine Velocity 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.50 0.35 0.50

R (inch per second)
R
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 550D
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
IIAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. F. Indicated Torque Output Check Using Torque Test Kit
NOTE: Removal of the diaphragm assembly shall require the es-

tablishment of a new raw torque p l o t following repair.
This new raw torque plot is required for future engine
evaluation. Establishment of a raw torque p l o t
requires special tools and procedures specified in t h i s
topic. Maintenance personnel should ensure that they
are thoroughly f a m i l i a r with the procedures and that
special tools (Tables 506 and 506A) are available
before undertaking maintenance requiring raw torque
determination.
(1) Preparation for indicated torque output check as follows.
NOTE: Locate d i g i t a l torque indicator so that a tempera-

ture range of I0 to 49% (50 to 120°F) is main-
tained during test and adjustment procedure. En-
sure that d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r case is
grounded through AC power cable (3 prong plug).
Ensure that s l i p rings of torquemeter are clean
and dry by removing s l i p ring cover and i f neces-
sary spray s l i p rings with degreaser and cleaner
(tlS-180 Freon TF). Wipe accessible surfaces clean
with l i n t - f r e e cloth.
(a) Connect d i g i t a l torque indicator to a 115 +10 volts (grounded

power supply), 50 to 60 Hz o u t l e t .
(b) Connect d i g i t a l torque indicator to torquemeter using 292158-1

e l e c t r i c a l cable.
(c) Place power switches (located at rear of d i g i t a l torque i n d i -

cator) to Oil position.
CAUTION: PROTECT OIL FLOW (BETA) TUBE FROM CORRO-
SION AND POSSIBLE DAHAGE UNTIL RE-
INSTALLATION. STORE IN BETA TUBE CASE.
(d) Remove engine propeller spinner, o i l flow (beta) tube assembly

and propeller assembly.
NOTE: On some i n s t a l l a t i o n s existing O-ring (packing)

may be used instead of special O-ring (packing)
provided with torque test k i t .
(e) Remove existing propeller shaft O-ring and i n s t a l l $9413-037

O-ring (packing).
(f) Remove propeller de-icing brush block assembly i f i n s t a l l e d .

Refer to A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 551
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A l:. R 0 S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: There are two d i f f e r e n t length torquemeters (load

c e l l s ) requiring d i f f e r e n t load c e l l spacers and beta
tubes used with 291862-2 torque t e s t k i t on Hartzell
and Dowty-Rotol propellers. Table 508 w i l l determine
requirements.
Table 508. Determine Requirmlents Using Load C e l l , Load Cell Spacer,

and Beta Tube used with Hartzell and Dowty-Rotol Propellers
HARTZELL PROPELLER
Load Cel 1 With Load Cell Spacer Use Beta Tube

Length (inches) Part No. Part No.
5.68 Not required ***'868369-1 or

R 832727-1
5.68 296974-4/-6 "897657-1 o r

R 832731-1
6.68 Not required 868369-2 or

R 832732-1
6.68 296974-2 "897657-1 or

832731-1
DOWTY-ROTOL PROPELLER
Load Cell With Load Cell Spacer Use Beta Tube

Length (inches) Part No. Part No.
5.68 296974-4/-6 *'897660-1 or

R 832734-1
5.68 Not required ***897480-4 or

R 832725-1
6.68 296974-2 *'897660-1 or

R 832734-1
6.68 Not requ i red 897480-3 or

832737-1
*Component of 294626-9 extended beta tube assembly

**Component of 294626-12 extended beta tube assembly
***Component of 294626-1 extended beta tube assembly
****Component of 294626-3 extended beta tube assembly
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 552
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Carefully f i t load cell spacer, i f requirea

and torquemeter (load cell) on propeller
shaft flange ensuring that aligning pins on
shaft flange and pin holes on torquemeter
(load cell) and load cell spacer, i f
required, engage and seat f u l l y with hand
pressure. I f satisfactory alignment cannot
be achieved, return torque test k i t to
R AlliedSignal Engines, Distribution Center,
1944 East Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034, for repair.
3. F. (i)(g) Install e l e c t r i c a l l y connected torquemeter (load cell) and

load cell spacer, i f required, on propeller shaft. I f
torquemeter (load cell) f a i l s to bottom against propeller
shaft flange or load cell spacer flange, remove torquemeter
(load c e l l ) . Clean pin holes and pins of d i r t , corrosion, and
other obstruction and r e i n s t a l l . Secure with existing
propeller mount bolts and washers only hand tightened at this
time.
(h) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Remove existing adapter plate from
yearcase. Install 284453-I-1 torque calibration adapter plate
on gearcase. Connect gage assembly (50, Figure 507) to gear-
case negative pressure port and connect existing tube assembly
from torque pressure transducer to tee on gage assembly.
(i) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Connect gage assembly (45) to raw torque
pressure port and connect existing tube assembly from trans-
ducer to tee on gage assembly.
(J) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Remove existing tube assembly connecting

torque sensor transmitter to mounting adapter. Connect gage
assembly (55) to union on mounting adapter. Connect flexible
hose assembly (60) between tee on gage assembly and union on
torque sensor transmitter.
(k) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Remove existing adapter plug from torque
sensor compensator assembly and install adapter (35). Connect
tube assembly (40) to adapter (35). Connect gage assembly
(45) to tube assembly (40). Ensure open end of tee on gage
assembly (45) is capped.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 553
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. F. (1) (l) Adjust d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r as follows.
NOTE: Ensure d i g i t a l torque indicator and

torquemeter (load c e l l ) have been e l e c t r i -
c a l l y s t a b i l i z e d for a minimum of 1 hour
prior to s e t t i n g .
I Set zero on indicator by adjusting coarse and fine balance

screws on d i g i t a l torque indicator face plate.
NOTE: On later model torque indicators there is

no propeller rotation selector and clock-
wise rotation reads out as a positive
value and counterclockwise rotation reads
out as a negative value.
2 Set propeller rotation switch at CCW (counterclockwise) f o r

l e f t )land propeller rotation (viewed from rear of engine).
3 Depress shunt c a l i b r a t e switch and adjust coarse and f i n e

span to read c a l i b r a t i o n positions as specified in data
sheet provided with d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r .
4 Recheck zero and span in accordance with preceding steps 1_

and 3. Repeat steps as necessary u n t i l required c a l i b r a -
tion is achieved.
CAUTION: FOLLOW OUTLINED TORQUENETERBOLT TORQUE

PROCEDURE OR OUTPUT SIGNAL MAY BE
AFFECTED.
(m) I n i t i a l l y tighten bolts securing torquemeter (load c e l l ) and

load cell spacer, i f required, to propeller shaft flange to a
torque value of 30 foot-pounds in sequence shown on Figure
508. Tighten bolts to f i n a l torque value as specified in A i r -
c r a f t Maintenance Manual or propeller manufacturer's
recommendation.
(n) Check reading on d i g i t a l torque indicator to determine i f a

s h i f t of more than +300 inch-pounds occurred; i f adjustment is
required, loosen and retighten bolts in accordance with
preceding step (m) to remove side loading of torquemeter. I f
s h i f t is less than +300 inch-pounds, rebalance i n d i c a t o r to
zero in accordance with preceding step ( I ) 1 .
(o) I n s t a l l beta tube and propeller as follows.
1 Set propeller pitch control in f u l l reverse position, i n -

s t a l l beta tube and check for freedom of movement in
propeller shaft. Remove beta tube.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 554
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAl NTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. F. (1) (o)--2 Carefully i n s t a l l $9413-142 packing on piston packing

groove of torquemeter. I n s t a l l propeller on torquemeter
(load c e l l ) and secure (hand t i g h t ) with bolts and washers
furnished with torquemeter.
R CAUTION: FOLLOW OUTLINED TORQUEMETERBOLT TORQUE

R PROCEDURE OR OUTPUT SIGNAL MAY BE
R AFFECTED.
3 I n i t i a l l y tighten bolts to a torque value of 30 foot-pounds

using 292155-1 adapter wrench and following torque sequence
shown in Figure 508. Tighten bolts to f i n a l torque value
as specified in A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual or propeller
manufacturer' s recommendati on.
NOTE: I f s a t i s f a c t o r y alignment cannot be achieved

R return torque test k i t to AlliedSignal Engines,
D i s t r i b u t i o n Center, 1944 East Sky Harbor Cir-
cle, Phoenix, AZ 85034, for repair.
4 Check reading on d i g i t a l torque indicator to determine i f a

s h i f t occurred in zero adjustment. I f a s h i f t of more than
+50 inch-pounds is noted loosen bolts, check alignment and
proper f i t of alignraent pins and pin holes and r e i n s t a l l
propeller in accordance with preceding step--3. I f problem
persists, change propeller and repeat step -3.
5 Set aircraft power lever at flight idle and pin propeller

pitch control lever so that no movement from this position
takes place during following steps 6, 7, and--8.
6 With propeller in feather position, c a r e f u l l y insert ex-
tended beta tube. Screw beta tube in until tube has ap-
proximately two threads showing at propeller dome.
CAUTI ON: TO AVOID POSSIBLE DAMAGEOF THE COM-

PRESSOR OR TURBINE AIR-OIL SEAL, OPERA-
TION OF THE UNFEATHERING PUMP SHALL BE
LIMITED TO ONE ( i ) MINUTE FOR COLD OIL
AND THIRTY (30) SECONDS FOR HOT OIL.
AT THE END OF THIS TIME, MOTOROR HAND
ROTATE PROPELLER IN NORMAL DIRECTION OF
ROTATION TO SCAVENGE OIL FROMTHE AC-
CESSORY HOUSING SUMP. IF STARTER IS
USED, OBSERVE TIME LIMIT IMPUSED BY
STARTER MANUFACTURER.
7 Operate unfeathering pump and adjust beta tube in u n t i l

blade is at angle specified. (Turning beta tube counter-
clockwise one turn increases blade angle approximately 2.4
degrees.)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 555
Aug 4/94
~FG70-2A
lliedSignal A E R O S P A C E
HAINTENANCE HANUAL
.....- .................... ..
..°-" .... - •
,'::.~... ~".~,~"-'.-... ,,'~, ,, ' ,, .........
•.%*.'~. ~ ~." ~. "~.

t ... ,. ,,... \\.~ ,..~...x \
..... ... ~I'.'-,~;~, ,~.x,, \
.. . . .:... ..~.::~ ~ \
,~-.\\
20 ~. ...::::.\~\ ,,
\ :~ ,,
% 15 "'.......--.:-g}
%
: ,' , ;~-,,:'.'-;~::~ ,~ ":.-
/ •:; .. ,.-~...,,..~.~ ,, ..... .-"

~....:
• ° o
.. .,...,.,~,..
...:... ~.o
:: ....... ,:
"., ; .- -'~,~-'~-~.--. ~ t
f~ , ~. , ,
t ' k . :<.
, --~.-- .-.-. . . . . . . -"
I i •
..
.... ~\, • ",..~' ...

,~, ..'~..." ..
, ~-.. ....":,," ....--"
~\•. "~-----:" .... ...-
%
%
10
30
/
Lj
.*.%~
• ~ ,, ~ -~;~ ...o .- ~%,
.[.::-, ,'
i-""" "
. . .". .. -;.~
...-,:~.::. • ,'~-:.i ~':" - . ALTERNATE
i:;"- " " ~.,." " " " t, ; ; "::.:.-':~-:'.-.'..,.,
~.. .. \ - : ,
:'."~" t
i
t o"
40 3 5 ~ ¢~ .;~, ./"
,-...,
t"
22.~
55
~ ' ROTATED A
ViEW A-A
F-44A-3626
Torque Test K i t I n s t a l l a t i o n
72-00-00
UP136688
Figure 507
R Page 556
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
HAl NTENANCE MANUAL
3. F. (i) (o) When propeller blade angle is confirmed, lock beta tube in
position with existing bolt and nut and re,love rig pin in-
stalled in preceding step--5.
NOTE: Allow clearance between arms of a n t i - r o t a t i o n

bracket to give s l i g h t amount of play and
prevent stress on torquemeter.
(P) Secure short aml of loosely j o i n t e d a n t i - r o t a t i o n bracket to

torquemeter using existing bolts and long arm of bracket to
engine case using existing stud and nut and washer supplied
with test k i t .
NOTE: All engine starts and shut-downs shall be accom-

plished in accordance with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Manual.
(2) Data acquisition as follows.
(a) Ensure d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r and torquemeter have been

e l e c t r i c a l l y stabilized for a minimum of one hour.
(b) Recheck d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r c a l i b r a t i o n in accordance

with preceding step (1)(I)--1 through (1)(I)--4.
(c) Start and operate engine (in accordance with a i r c r a f t f l i g h t

manual) at approximately 50 percent power u n t i l o i l tempera-
ture is at normal operating range. Cycle propeller through
reverse and normal ranges several times ( f o r a minimum of
three minutes) to ensure adequate oil flow through torquemeter
to bring to operating temperature.
i Bleed gage end of Gage Assembly, Part No. 292471-1 (see

Figure 507) thoroughly, obtaining continuous oil flow, to
ensure no a i r is trapped in gage assembly lines.
2 Set power lever at minimum point that w i l l maintain 100

percent rpm and recora d i g i t a l i n d i c a t o r torque.
KEY TO FIGURE 507
5. DIGITAL TURQUE INDICATOR 35. ADAPTER(PN 284461-1)

ASSY 40. TUBE ASSY (PN 292473-1)
10. CABLE ASSY 45. GAGE ASSY (PN 292471-1)
15. TORQUEMETER(PN 283997-3) 50. GAGEASS¥ (PN 292472-1)
R 20. PACKINGPN ($9413-037) 55. GAGEASSY (PN 292472-1)
R 25. PACKING PN ($9413-142) 60. FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSY
30. EXTENDEDBETA TUBE (PN MS28741-4-120)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 557
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENA,
CE MANUAL
REPOT NO. 72-01-27
PIN
PIN
F-44A-2697
Torquemeter and Propeller Bolt Torque Sequence

UP136688
Figure 508 72-00-00

Page 558
Dec 14/87

lied
RAW TORQUE PLOT
DEVIATION
TORQUE SIGNAL VALUES MUST PLOT

WITHIN ±0.50 PSID OF A STRAIGHT LINE
FOR ALL DATA POINTS OF 6000 INCH-POUNDS
R AND ABOVE, AND ±I.0 PSI AT DATA POINTS
R BELOW 6000 INCH-POUNDS.
RAW TQRQUE PRESSURE DELTA P
PRESSURE AT ZERO INCH-POUNDSTORQUEMUST
BE AT LEAST 8 PSlD.
(CODES AA-BA) TORQUEPRESSUREAT 27,700

INCH-POUNDS TORQUE (700 SHP) MUST BE LESS
THAN 65 PSlD AND 43 to 51 PSID HIGHER
THAN THE ZERO TORQUE PRESSURE.
(CODES CA-CC, GA) TORQUEPRESSUREAT 27,700
INCH-POUNDS TORQUE (700 SHP) MUST BE
LESS THAN 65 PSID AND 41 to 51 PSID
HIGHER THAN THE ZERO TORQUE PRESSURE.
(CODE DA) TORQUEPRESSUREAT 28,324

LESS THAN 65 PSID AND 41 TO 51 PSlD
(CODES EA-FB) TORQUE PRESSUREAT 28,900
LESS THAN 65 PSlD AND 41 TO 51 PSID
UP136688
Torque Sensor Output Characteristics Data 72-00-00

Figure 509 (Sheet 1 of 2) Page 559/560
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
90 nlnililililgUUeli||iuln|NinlBinlilleliel ~
ilimlmRBBllBiiDRggillmmgilililmmiiHiUHil
UlliOlilillililaailililillilmllililillOl
InmlillUliliniainiulnuaillilililnulluail
lillillilllNlniliUlUlillliHlilililimiill
ilulmuililnlunnillililUililnllinliUlUUil
nnmmmmaEmiiimnimaaniuiauauaunulluummiimi
uummmmummuuuumnnmmmumanmmumnmnnm|immiuun
mmmmmnammmummmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmaummam
80 nummmnumua|inmu|mianmimma|unm|umumammniu
mminmmmmummmsBuamgmmmmulmmmuiiummiammmae
mmmmmmmumnumummmmmmmmmmmmmmnmunmummmmmnu
uRQJailmuaunmaJmmmmnmmiimmaimuumuolumnmn
nmmmmunmumnmnmmnnmnnmmmmmmmnmnumumimmmmn
ulmmeaamaeunmaiaeaiaamuumamimnmamaaamumu
iIIIIIIDIIInIHNIIIIIIIiURIIIDIIDIIiIIBDi
illlOillllllllltmliUOillllilllilllllllll
naaimnininiali|amagiumnaaialinnuiaaniaei
mmmmmmummmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmumuuammmmmnmu
70 nmunmnuminnmlmiiiuunmmumammumu|uuaamimal
|||||||||||||||l||||||||||||||||||||||||!
Illlllllllllllllllllllllllilllllllllllll'
iimiBmiuliliRimBimimiumimnnllunBBiimimnm
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
60 Iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiillllllllllllllllllll
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIlllllllllllll
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
BiiimimMmnlltmnmiiiulnliunimiiRiigmlmign
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
illigilUUllnlmglmngmimilllmlgllniunuligl
iilliniUUlimiinlgnlilUUlaallunimlluniugl
limmmlllilmmmiBliBRnuuimiluJlmRmUliMilil
50 nilUliliilillUUlmllalilllUilliilonNliimU
mmmmummimiemmmmmmmnimmmammaannamummmmmmm
nnwnnnununniununmnununmunnuumunnunuuunmn
nmammemnnammammmmnnmuaaimalamaJammimmamn
uuummmmmnanimnmmmmmmummmumanmnnnimmmmmmn
nmmmmmmmnmummmmmmmmmnmumumnmnulummmmmmn
Z uunumnniununuuuummmmummmuuuuunuuunnnmumn
O namnniminianuanaaaamiimnnannnilanagallUn
liliniulUUlilillmiillDmliluminlnillilDNI
mlmmmmmmmlmiilmmmmmmnmiulmmmmimmmimmiuml
40 mimammiminmimmmmmimmmmaamiimmmummmmmmmmm
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmammmmmmmmm
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
z
30
a |imiiimmmm|i|moimmim|mmiimi|mi|mn~mmimmm
2
mimmummimi|ummmmmiim|miimiimiim~mimimmm|
mmmmimmmmu|m~mmimiiimmmi~mm~mmmmm~iiin~m
20
|mmmmmmmmi|iimmmmmim|mimNmiiNm|mm~mimmi|
,mmmnmmmumimmmmmnmmmamiiminmummmmmmiammmi
,mmmmmmmmimmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmimmmmmmmmmmm
imnmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
10 immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
I'--"
lmm
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||I
iroN, mimnimiaiiiimimmmamananmnaaaiimmmmmmuunm
immm nmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
LU m ~mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
)INN immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
iNn immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
iNN immmnmmimmmmmmmmmnmimmmmmnmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
Imm
)mm
)mm,
InN lmmnmnmmnmmnmmnmmnmummmmmumummaimmnmmmmmu
iNN immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmnmmmummmmmmmmmmmm
~mm immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmnmmmmmmmmmnmmmummmmm|
iNN ~mmmmmmmmmmmmnmmmnmmmmmnammmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
iNN ~mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmnmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
iroN, umnmmmmmmmmmmmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
iNN immmmmmmmmnmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmnmmmmmmmmn
inN inmmmmmmmmmmmmimmmmmmimmmmmmmnmnmmimmmmmn
7000 .I. ,J ___ 19,006 --, ) l 25,000
10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 26,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000
TORQUELOAD, INCH/POUN DS G-44G-209
Torque Sensor Output Characteristics Data

Figure 509 (Sheet 2)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 561/562
Dec 14/87
,~/'~llied
3. F. (2) (c) 3 Operate at maximum power point for ambient conditions
( r e f e r to A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Manual) and record d i g i t i a l i n d i -
cator torque.
NOTE: Recalibrate d i g i t a l i n d i c a t o r immediately af-

t e r propeller has stopped r o t a t i n g .
(d) Shut down (in accordance with a i r c r a f t f l i g h t manual) engine
and c a l i b r a t e d i g i t a l i n d i c a t o r in accordance with step
( 1 ) ( I ) 4 p r i o r to f i n a l c a l i b r a t i o n operation.
(e) Check test k i t i n s t a l l a t i o n f o r security and leakage.
NOTE: Power settings are based on percent of incre-

ment between minimum and maximum established
in following step.
(f) The approximate power settings that w i l l be used during test

are l i s t e d below:
Power Settin 9 RPM
Minimum 100 percent

20 percent 100 percent
100 percent i00 percent
To determine cockpit indicated torque to be used at each power
setting point, subtract minimum power point d i g i t a l indicator
torque from maximum power point d i g i t i a l indicator torque
found in step (c). M u l t i p l y difference by power setting
percentage. Add r e s u l t to minimum point cockpit torque to ob-
t a i n f i n a l value. The following is an example at 40 percent
power point.
(MAX - MIN) x (PERCENTAGE) + MIN = INDICATED COCKPIT TORQUE
(2000 - 800) x .40 + 800 = 1280
(g) Restart engine and proceed as follows.
NOTE: Maintain normal engine operating tempera-

ture during e n t i r e operation. Refer to
A i r c r a f t F l i g h t 14anual.
_I Operate engine at power points calculated in step (f)

above. Allow power to s t a b i l i z e at each point. Plot raw
torque values noted on o r i g i n a l DSC sheet. (See Figure
5O9. )
2 Record d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r torque, raw torque pres-
sure, engine case pressure and o i l temperature.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 563
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal •lslied
NOTE: Post-operation record shall be taken imme-
diately a f t e r the propeller has stopped
rotating.
3. F. (2) (g) 3_ Shut down engine and record post-operation zero and span.
I f zero and/or span does not repeat within ±150 inch-pounds
recheck equipment and repeat operation.
NOTE: Case pressure Gage Assembly Part No.

292472-1 readout is psi in the positive
range and Hg in the negative range. To
convert Hg to psi m u l t i p l y Hg by .5.
Gearbox pressure range, -0.5 to -10.0 in.
Hg.
4 Subtract case pressure from raw torque.
Raw Case Negative Raw Signal

Pressure - Pressure = delta P
(psig) (psig) (psid)
(20) - (-3.5) : 23.5
NOTE: A raw torque plot of the torque output

system is necessary for future engine
evaluation and trouble shooting.
5 Plot raw torque values on DSC sheet. (See Figure 509.)
Enter test data and torquemeter serial number on engine DSC
sheet and attach to permanent engine records for future
evaluation and trouble shooting.
6 Record and enter on engine log the values of each point

noted in step ~.
Remove test k i t components from engine.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 564
Aug 16/89
/lied
3, G. NTS System Check by Flight Check
NOTE: This check shall be performed a f t e r replacement of
an engine or following removal, i n s t a l l a t i o n ,
disassembly of the reduction gear system
R (diaphragm), or f i r s t and/or second stage
R impel I er.
R This check is also required anytime the main shaft

R has been stretched using 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r .
(1) Start engine in accordance with A i r c r a f t Flight Manual.
(2) Fly a i r c r a f t at safe single engine a l t i t u d e ; refer to A i r c r a f t

Flight Manual.
(3) Adjust power on test engine to cruise setting and s t a b i l i z e engine

temperature for I minute.
NOTE: The following instructions refer to the engine un-

der test only.
(4) Advance engine speed lever to high rpm.

(5) Actuate engine stop switch to close e l e c t r i c a l fuel shutoff
solenoid.
(6) Advance power lever to maximum power lever position.
CAUTION: IF AIRCRAFT YAWS EXCESSIVELY FEATHER PROPELLER.
(7) Note time required for engine to decelerate to approximately 35

percent rpm and feather propeller at 30 percent rpm.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ENGINE TO WINDMILL IN RPM RANGE

BETWEEN 18 AND 28 PERCENT.
(8) Engine rpm shall decelerate to approximately 35 percent rpm in less
than 60 seconds.
(9) Conduct normal a i r start in accordance with A i r c r a f t Flight Manual.
(10) I f NTS check is not satisfactory, refer to 72-00-00, Trouble

Shooting.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 565
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
4. Adjustments
A. (Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control Adjustments (Bendix)
NOTE: The fuel control adjustments outlined in this paragraph
are necessary only when indicated by specific operating
parameters or requirements. Adjustment rates outlined
in Table 509 may be used when adjustments are required.
The direction of rotation of adjustment screws is
determined by facing end that accepts key wrench.
Fuel control adjustment sequence is contained in Table

510. Use of this data may eliminate excessive read-
justments and t r i a l operations.
Adjustments points are shown in Figure 510.
Upon completion of adjustments perform operatinal check

according to type of adjustment made and make entry in
permanent aircraft records noting engine time, type and
amount of adjustment accomplished.
Log book entry required for any adjustment made.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 566
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table 509. (Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control Adjustment Rates (Bendix)
Figure
No. Adjustment Point *Adjustment Rate
510 Specific gravity adjustment Set to type fuel being

used
. One click of specific
gravity adjustment
changes specific gra-
vity setting 0.02.
A specific gravity
adjustment of 0.06
(three clicks) is
equal to approxi-
mately one turn on
maximum power ad-
justing screw. De-
greasing the speci-
f i c gravity adjust-
ment increases maxi-
mum power.
. One click of specific
gravity adjustment
is equivalent to ap-
proximately two de-
grees of power lever
travel for maximum
power on ground.
. I f the specific gravity

adjustment does not
provide enough adjust-
ment, maximum power
trim adjusting screw
may be used to restore
adjustability range.
510 Start flow adjustment One click cw = 0.75

pounds per hour de-
crease
*The adjustment rate is an approximate value and is intended only as a

guide for the maintenance technician.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 567
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table 509. (Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control Adjustment Rates (Bendix) (Cont)
Figure
510 Underspeed fuel governor minimum One turn cw = 2.0

stop (low rpm stop) percent speed increase
setting
510 Underspeed fuel governor maximum One turn cw = 1.0

stop (high rpm stop) percent speed increase
setting
510 Overspeed fuel governor adjustment One-fourth turn

cw = 2.0 percent speed in-
crease setting
510 Maximum power trim adjustment One turn cw = Approx

15 pounds per hour fuel
flow increase
510 F l i g h t - i d l e fuel flow One c l i c k cw = 2.5

adjustment pounds per hour increase
fuel flow

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 568
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Table 510. (Codes (AA-CC) Fuel Control Sequence of Adjustments (Bendix)
Adjustment
Sequence Procedure Affect on Other Adjustments
1. Specific gravity Set to type of Affects all other fuel control

fuel being used adjustments (fuel schedules)
except overspeed fuel
governor.
2. Start flow Adjust to main- Affects all other fuel control

tain peak ITT adjustments (fuel schedules)
start temperature except overspeed fuel
and start time governor. Affects power lever
within specified matching and maximum fuel
l i m i t s . Ascertain available at altitude.
Service Bulletins
73-0030, 73-0064
and 73-0085 have
been accomplished
i f problems are
experienced.
. Underspeed fuel Affects maximum power and

governor low and high f l i g h t idle.
4. Overspeed fuel gover- Other adjustments Affects maximum power and

nor to fuel control f l i g h t idle i f set too low.
do not affect
overspeed fuel
governor adjustment
once i t is set
correctly.
5. Maximumpower All previous ad- Affects f l i g h t idle adjustment

trim adjustment justments must be Affects power lever matching
set correctly beat takeoff and low altitudes.
fore maximum power
trim adjustment is
set.
6. Flight idle Accomplish as last No affect on previous ad-
adjustment in adjustments.
justment sequence.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 569
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
4, a. (1) Adjust specific gravity as follows. (See figure 510.)
CAUTION: USE ONLY FUEL APPROVEDIN FLIGHT MANUAL.
NOTE: I f specific gravity adjustment has been varied
from recommended setting to accomplish maximum
power trim adjustment, change specific gravity ad-
justment by the difference between actual fuel
specific gravities when a change in fuel type is
made in order to maintain maximumpower trim
adjustment.
When fuels are mixed, the proper specific gravity
setting is obtained by multiplying the specific
gravity of each fuel by the percentage of the fuel
used and adding the results.
(a) Use specific gravity Table 511 when making adjustments at fuel
control unit. Adjust fuel control unit to correspond with
type fuel being used, using following adjustment rates.
1 One click of specific gravity adjustment changes specific

gravity setting 0.02. A specific gravity adjustment of
0.06 (three clicks) is equal to approximately one turn on
maximum power adjusting screw. Decreasing specific gravity
adjustment increases maximumpower.
2 One click of specific gravity adjustment is equivalent to
approximately two degrees of power lever travel for maximum
power on ground.
3 If specific gravity adjustment does not provide enough ad-
justment, maximum power trim adjusting screw may be used to
restore adjustability range.
Table 511. Fuel Control Specific Gravity Adjustments (Bendix)
Fuel Used Recommended Specific Gravity Setting
ASTM D1655-66T, Jet A 0.80

ASTM D1655-66T, Jet A-1 0.80
ASTM D1655-66T, Jet B 0.77
MIL-T-5624G-I, JP-4 0.77
Aviation Gas (80/87 octane) 0.69
MIL-F-5616-1, JP-1 0.81
MIL-T-5624G-1, JP-5 0.83
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 570
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
O c OVERSPEED
GOVERNOR
ADJUSTMENT
VIEW A-A
POWER LEVER
/~A"XIMI I M C~T('~,P START FLOW ADJUSTMENT
POW
MINI
A •
!D GOVERNOR
SPEED STOP
FLIGHT IDLE
ADJ USTMEN1
)RAVITY
NT
A 4
FUE
CO
ASS !R
~IT
UNDERSPEED GOVERNOR
MINIMUM SPEEDSTOP F-44G-409
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control Adjustment Points (Bendix)

UP136688
Figure 510 72-00-00

Page 571
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
4. A. (2) Adjust start flow as follows. (See figure 510.)
NOTE: (Post SB 73-0030) Start-flow adjustment sensitiv-
i t y is increased from 0.8 pph per click to 2.0 pph
per click due to replacement of start-flow adjust-
ment valve assembly. The replacement valve assem-
bly has B-40 or D-40 etched on head. Increased
adjustment sensitivity must be compensated for
when start-flow adjustment is used for altitude
power trim adjustment.
Start-flow adjustment affects all schedules and

shall be checked and adjusted prior to adjustment
of f l i g h t idle and maximum power. I f the tempera-
ture margin of 200C (392F) is consistently availa-
ble, adjust the slow engine to match the faster
engine. Match the engines to within ten seconds.
(a) (Pre SB 73-0030) Turn start flow adjustment screw one click
counterclockwise to obtain 0.75 pounds per hour increase in
fuel flow.
(b) (Post SB 73-0030) Turn start flow adjustment screw one click
counterclockwise to obtain 2.0 pounds per hour increase in
fuel flow.
(3) Adjust underspeed fuel governor low rpm as follows. (See figure
510.)
(a) I f engine rpm does not stabilize at l i m i t specified in Table
503, adjust minimum speed stop on underspeed fuel governor.
Turning adjustment screw one turn clockwise w i l l increase en-
gine rpm 2.0 percent.
(b) Recheck and adjust linkage between underspeed fuel governor
and propeller governor for proper operation following any ad-
justment of underspeed stop. Refer to 76-10-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
(4) Adjust underspeed fuel governor high rpm as follows. (See figure
510.)
503, adjust maximum speed stop on underspeed fuel governor.
Turning adjustment screw one turn clockwise w i l l decrease en-
(b) Recheck and adjust linkage between underspeed fuel governor
and propeller governor for proper operation following any ad-
justment of underspeed governor stop. Refer to 76-10-01,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 572
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. A. (5) Adjust overspeed governor as follows. (See Figure 510.)
NOTE: When adjusting overspeed governor, hold adjusting

screw until lock nut is loosened, then hold lock
nut while turning adjusting screw.
(a) Loosen lock nut on adjusting screw and adjust overspeed gover-
nor as required. One-fourth turn clockwise will increase en-
(b) Tighten lock nut while holding adjusting screw at adjusted

posi t i on.
(6) Adjust maximum power trim adjustment as follows. (See Figure 510.)
NOTE: When adjusting maximum power t r i m , hold adjusting

screw u n t i l lock nut is loosened, then hold lock
nut while turning adjusting screw.
A maximum of two turns in e i t h e r d i r e c t i o n fr~L1

the factory setting is permissible. Do not adjust
external stops of the power lever shaft.
(a) Loosen lock nut on maximum power t r i m adjustment screw and ad-
j u s t maximum power trim as required. One turn clockwise of
adjustment screw produces a nominal fuel flow increase of 12
to 15 pounds per hour.
(b) Hold adjustment screw and tighten lock nut to 30 inch-pounds

torque and lockwire lock nut.
(7) Adjust f l i g h t idle fuel flow as follows. (See Figure 510.)
R NOTE: Refer to A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual and F l i g h t

R Manual for required operational checks a f t e r ad-
R justment of f l i g h t idle fuel flow.
(a) Turn adjustment screw as required to obtain desirea rpm. One
click clockwise will increase fuel flow a nominal 2.5 pounds
per hour.
(b) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational checks as

specified in Aircraft Maintenance Manual and Flight Manual.
Make entry in pemlanent aircraft records noting engine time,
type and amount of adjustment accomplishea.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 573
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
CAUTION: ENSURE POWERLEVER HAS FULL RANGE(0 TO 100 DEGREES)

FREEDOM OF TRAVEL AND NO BINDING EXIST AFTER ADJUST-
MENTS OR SETTINGS IN THE POWERMANAGEMENTAREA.
R 4. B. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control Adjustments (Woodward)
NOTE: I f fuel is found in Pt2 cavity upon removal of rear

cover or adjustment access plugs, refer to SB 73-0157
for corrective action.
The fuel control adjustments outlined in this paragraph
are necessary only when indicated by specific operating
parameters or requirements. Adjustment rates outlined
in Table 512 may be used when adjustments are required.
The direction of rotation of adjustment screws is
determined by facing end that accepts key wrench.
Fuel control adjustment sequence is contained in Table
513. Use of this data may eliminate excessive read-
justments and t r i a l operations.
Adjustments points are shown in Figures 511, 512, 513,
515, and 516.
Upon completion of adjustments perform operational
check according to type of adjustment made and make en-
try in permanent air c r aft records noting engine time,
type and amount of adjustment accomplished.
Log book entry required for any adjustment made.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 574
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
R Tabl e 512. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control Adjustment Rates (Woodward)
Figure
NOTE: Specific gravity adjustment may

be used as an alternate to ad-
justment of maximum power ad-
justing screw. Intermediate
f l i g h t idle fuel flow will be
affected when specific gravity
adjustment is made.
511, 512 Specific gravity adjustment One click cw = 4

pounds per hour in-
. Specific gravity adjustment of crease fuel flow and
five clicks is equal to approxi- approximately 8C at
R mately one turn on the maximum cruise
power adjusting screw. Clockwise
movement of specific gravity
adjustment increases maximum power.
. I f specific gravity adjustment
does not provide enough adjustment,
maximum power adjusting screw may be
used to restore adjustability range.
R 513 Acceleration schedule adjustment One turn cw = 60

pounds per hour in-
crease fuel flow
(3/16 turn maximum
allowable adjustment)
511, 512 Underspeed governor minimum One turn cw = 5.3

stop (low rpm stop) percent speed increase
setting
511, 512 Underspeed governor maximum One turn cw = 2.7

stop (high rpm stop) percent speed decrease
setting

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 575
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 512. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control Adjustment Rates (Woodward) (Cont)
Figure
NOTE: When adjusting overspeed fuel

governor with external adjus~lent,
hold adjusting screw u n t i l
lock nut is loosened, then
hold lock nut while turning
adjusting screw.
511, 512 Overspeed governor adjustment One turn cw = 4.5

percent speed increase
setting
NOTE: A change in f l i g h t idle set-

ting w i l l result in corres-
ponding change in maximum
power adjustment s e t t i n g .
511, 516 Flight idle adjustment One c l i c k cw = 2

pounds per hour increase
fuel flow
CAUTI 0 N: DO NOT EXCEED +1.5 TURN

ADJUSTMENT OF MAXIMUM POWER
ADJUST~IENT.
511, 515 Maximum power adjustment One turn cw = 20

pounds per hour fuel
R flow increase (Eighteen
R c l i c k s = one turn)

guide f o r the maintenance technician.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 576
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
R Table 513. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control
Sequence of Adjustment (Woodward)
Adjustment
Sequence Procedure Affect on Other Adjustments
i. Specific gravity Set to type of Affects maximum power

fuel being used. and all other adjustments
(Fuel schedules) except
overspeed governor.
2. Acceleration Adjust to main- Affects all other fuel
schedule tain peak ITT control adjustments (fuel
start temperature schedules) except over-
and start time speed governor.
within specified
I imi ts.
. Underspeed governor Independent of other
low and high adjustments.
4. Overspeed governor Other adjustments Affects f l i g h t idle

to fuel control and maximum power
do not affect over- i f set too low.
speed governor ad-
justment once i t is
set correctly.
5. Flight idle Affects maximum power
adjustment.
6. Maximumpower Accomplish as last No affect on previous
adjustment adjustment in ad- adjustments. Affects
justment sequence. power lever matching.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 577
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
4. B. (I) Adjust specific gravity as follows. (See figure 511 or 512.)
CAUTION: USE ONLY FUELS APPROVED IN FLIGHT MANUAL.

(a) Use specific gravity Table 514 when making i n i t i a l adjustments
to fuel control unit not previously adjusted. Adjust fuel
control unit to correspond with type fuel being used.
Table 514. Fuel Control Specific Gravity Adjustments (Woodward)
Fuel Used Recommended Speci f i c Gravity Setting
ASTM D1655-66T, Jet A 0.80
ASTM D1655-66T, Jet A-1 0.80
ASTN D1655-66T, Jet B 0.77
MIL-T-5624G-I, JP-4 0.77
Aviation Gas (80/87 octane) 0.69
MIL-F-5616-1, JP-I 0.81
MIL-T-5624G-I,JP-5 0.83
NOTE: When required, the specific gravity adjust-

ment may be u t i l i z e d to raise acceleration
schedule and obtain additional cruise power.
This adjustment should be performed p r i o r to
attempting to adjust acceleration schedule as
outlined in paragraph 4.B.(2).
(b) Ensure that specific gravity adjustment is properly set for
fuel being used observing the following instructions.
_I Determine type of fuel used on previous f l i g h t .
2 Determine type of fuel being added. Refer to Table 515 to

determine specific gravity adjustment required.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 578
Dec 14/87
ignal
FLIGHT IDLEADJUSTMENT
(UNDERHEX NUT)
UNDERSPEED
FUELGOVERNOR
MINIMUM STOP
UNDERSPEED MAXIMUM POWERADJUSTMENT
FUELGOVERNOR (UNDERHEX NUT)
MAXIMUM STOP
POWERLEVERSHAFT
GAS
-.....
OVERSPEEDFUEL
GOVERNORADJUSTMENT
SPECIFICGRAVITYA D J U S T M E N L ~
t I
t i)I
N
F-44A-5243
R (Codes DA-GA) (Woodward Fuel Controls with External

Overspeed Governor Adjustment) Fuel Control Adjustments
UP136688
Figure 511 72-00-00

Page 579
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany :Allied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~--~Signal
POWER
COVER LEVER
SHAFT
~ u ~VFUEL
ERSPEED
GOVERNOR
i@ @
ADJUSTMENT
l
A
B
UN DERSPEED MANUAL FUELLINKAGEASSY
UNDERSPEED FUELGOVERNOR SHOWN REMOVEDFOR CLARITY
FUELGOVERNOR MINIMUM STOP
MAXIMUM
~STO ~
//"~/'%•
</ ",/'~p,,
y / _~r ,.
• / J ,, i>-,
" V ,'," . "..'.~.'.
•,C,/"- "-", '~" ,.
,GI~,, 2 / o o,,p,,
(c,,/ ~.<~ ~?,o.,.,/-,,
,~,,
$"'~:/
-,,,.~,~/~,/.!,:~.-¥:~,~.>yM A N U A L FUEL
/~--7' ('~e-°,' ~f'~Z~" CAM FOLLOWER
y:" ~.:,?.~s.-,,~:,
:_f'.~;:.>./LEVER
'l,J f- p,J ~. ~ • ~.~.ml • --
L I
SPECIFICGRAVITY
ADJUSTMENT ;:-:-::! \ B
vt~,~ A-A
F-44A-5278
(Codes DA-GA) (Woodward Fuel Controls with Internal

UP136688
0verspeed Governor Adjustment) Fuel Control Adjustments

Figure 512 72-00-00
Page 580
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table 515. Specific Gravity Adjustment for Changes in Fuel Type
*Fuel Trim
From To Adj ustment
Aviation Kerosene Aviation Gasoline CW 6 Clicks

(aP-5)
Aviation Kerosene JP-4 C~J 3 Clicks
(JP-5)
JP-4 Aviation Gasoline CW 3 Clicks
Aviation Gasoline JP-4 CCW 3 Clicks
JP-4 Aviation Kerosene CCW 3 Clicks
(JP-5)
Aviation Gasoline Aviation Kerosene CCW 6 Clicks
(JP-5)
*Adjustments are to be made without consideration of fuel mix percentages.
4. B. (I) (c) Reset specific gravity adjustment as required to obtain proper

acceleration schedule and cruise power. A change of 0.02 (one
click) clockwise in specific gravity setting w i l l result in
approximately 4 pounds per hour fuel increase with a cor-
responding increase in ITT of approximately 8C at cruise.
Counterclockwise adjustment will decrease fuel flow and ITT a
corresponding amount.
(2) Adjust acceleration schedule as follows. (See figure 513.)
NOTE: Fuel control acceleration schedule may be adjusted

to increase starting fuel flow when slow accelera-
tion is encountered due to a lean starting
schedule. This is evidenced by the tendency of
the engine to hang at approximately 50 percent en-
gine rpm.
The fuel control acceleration schedule may also be

adjusted to decrease s t a r t i n g fuel flow when high
i n i t i a l peak temperatures are encountered during
the engine s t a r t .
Specific gravity adjustment should be performed

before attempting to adjust acceleration schedule.
(a) Prior to adjustment of acceleration schedule, perform

fol 1owlng.
UP136688
72-0O-00
Page 581
Dec 14/87
~S lied
-.-A
CAUTION:
/
SOME FUEL CONTROLS HAVE HEX NUT
" " LOCKING SCREW
HERE. DO NOT DISTURBNUT OR FUEL
CONTROL MALADJUSTMENT WILL
,.-A
OCCUR.
[ B
LOCKING SCREW
(3/32 INCH INTERNAL HEX HEAD)
ADJUSTER
(5/64 INCH INTERNAL HEX HEAD)
SECTION A-A
ACCELERATION ADJUSTMENT POINT
,,',;C, ~;--~------
>%X.-'o ..;~\o)
.. e \,-.+ .X< , e,.,<, L"L~-x. ,i

-;" %.-A, ~..'.'t,,"..,}%-.%
x. //';~'~ ~f~2,'.;2," .Zl i--ff
,I ! .#-.
u,<;'l r-~r:
i," I - I ~..... :
r-~:)"c~ i~-<~,,--~;~-~: ,, It "-"ll I ['1
~(~ --.1 =<7! k '~C~}--,<~ [,!i ~ i i
~-~'...........
. . . . . - - 1 ! t~-R 1!1 !1 I ~__1
~~[' l¢F/,[~;t:l~- , --' I ,'l I . . . . . -'
\K . . . . . :_-:-rc"i~ o; [-_--}_,
/\ 0 ~. . . . T-'~ ''~"
!__"_-.."
.... J__P:
MAN] IAL FUEL
CAM FOLLOWER
LEVER
FUEL CONTROL (REARCOVER REMOVED)

F-44A-3741
R (Codes DA-GA) (Woodward Fuel Controls)

UP136688
Acceleration Schedule Adjustment

Figure 513 72-00-00
Page 5 8 2
Aug 1 2 / 9 1
/,Allied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~--~Signal
4. B. (2) (a) i Ensure aircraft low battery power, speed switch malfunc-
tion, starter and switching relay are functioning properly.
2 Check the fuel flow divider valve for leakage during the
start cycle. This would be indicated by a steady stream of
fuel draining overboard while engine is undergoing start
cycle with fuel manifold purge line disconnected.
3 Inspect condition of packings in the fuel pressurizing

valve. Replace defective packings as necessary. Refer to
4 Disconnect compressor discharge pressure sensing (P3) line

from f i t t i n g on turbine plenum. Check f i t t i n g for
tightness. Inspect flared end of tube for cracks or other
deformities. Apply approximately five to ten psig pressure
to tube, noting i f leakage through fuel control unit bel-
lophram is occurring. Leakage is not allowed.
5 Reconnect P3 sensing line to f i t t i n g on turbine plenum and

secure.
(b) Adjust acceleration schedule in accordance with following

procedure. (Refer to Table 512 and Figures 513 and 516.)
NOTE: Do not remove the power lever arm assembly

from the power lever shaft.
1 Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly on

fuel control assembly by removing pin, nut and washers.
NOTE: I f fuel is found in Pt2 cavity upon removal of

rear cover or adjustment access plugs, refer to
SB 73-0157 for corrective action.
2 Remove f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5, Figure 516).
NOTE: Rotate cover during removal, after clearing

alignment pins, toward vertical centerline of
engine to clear 2D cam from internal linkage.
3 Remove cover from rear of fuel control assembly observing

following instructions.
a Remove screws securing cover to fuel control assembly.
NOTE: I f fuel is found in Pt2 cavity upon removal

of rear cover or adjustment access plugs,
refer to SB 73-0157 for corrective action.
b Rotate power lever shaft to minimum position. Tap cover

loose using a soft faced hammer. Removecover and
gasket.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 583
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (7 E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Turn adjuster clockwise to increase fuel

flow and counterclockwise to decrease fuel
f l ow.
4. B. (2) (b) i
4 Remove locking screw (Figure 513). Turn adjuster to
desired position (3/16-turn maximum). Reinstall locking
screw. Turn locking screw u n t i l contact is made with
adjuster. Tighten locking screw to a torque value of 7 to
9 inch-pounds.
(c) I n s t a l l cover on fuel control assembly observing following

instructions.
CAUTION: ENSURE MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER LEVER

(INTERNAL LINKAGE) IS IN SLOT PRIOR TO
POSITIONING COVER ONTO FUEL CONTROL. IF
NANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT,
OVERTE~PERATURE CONDITION WILL RESULT ON
ENGINE START. INSTALL SERVICEABLE COVER
GASKET ENSURING GASKET DOES NOT INTERFERE
WITH END OF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER
LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS
PLUG OR SPRING UNTIL FUEL CONTROL COVER
HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
i Ensure power lever shaft is in minimum position. Install

cover and new gasket (55, Figure 516) on fuel control
as sembly.
2 Secure cover on fuel control assembly with screws. Tighten

screws (20, 30) to a torque value of 16 to 19 inch-pounds
and screws (40) to a torque value of 60 to 75 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: USE CAREWHENINSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE

ACCESS PLUG AND SPRING TO ENSURESPRING
IS LOCATED DIRECTLY ON TOP OF FLIGHT
IDLE ADJUSTMENT AND SPRING IS NOT
CRIFIPED OR COCKED.
3 I n s t a l l f l i g h t i d l e access plug and spring (5) and new

packing (15). Tighten plug to a torque value of 25 to 30
inch-pounds.
(d) Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by i n s t a l l -

ing washers and nut. Tighten nut to a torque value of 12
inch-pounds and i n s t a l l new pin.
(e) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational check ac-

cording to type of adjustment made and make entry in pemanent
a i r c r a f t records noting engine time, type and amount of ad-
justment accomplished.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 584
Aug 4/94
/lied
4. B. (3) Adjust underspeed governor low RPM as follows. (See Figure 511 or
512.)
503, adjust minimum speed stop on underspeed governor. Turn-
ing adjustment screw one turn clockwise will increase engine
rpm 5.3 percent.
(b) Recheck and adjust linkage between underspeed governor and

propeller governor for proper operation following any adjust-
ment of underspeed governor stop. Refer to 76-10-01, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(4) Adjust underspeed governor high RPM as follows. (See Figure 511 or
512.)
503, adjust maximum speed stop on underspeed governor. Turn-
ing adjustment screw one turn clockwise will decrease engine
rpm 2.7 percent.
(d) Recheck and adjust linkage between underspeed governor and
propeller governor for proper operation following any adjust-
ment of underspeed governor stop. Refer to 76-10-01, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(5) Adjust overspeed governor as follows. (See Figure 511 or 512.)
(a) Adjust fuel control with external overspeed governor adjust-

ment as follows. (See Figure 511.)
NOTE: When adjusting overspeed governor, hold ad-

justing screw until lock nut is loosened,
then hold lock nut while turning adjusting
screw.
1 Loosen lock nut on adjusting screw and adjust overspeed

governor as required. One turn clockwise will increase en-
gine speed setting by 4.5 percent rpm.
Tighten lock nut while holding adjusting screw at adjusted

position.
(b) Adjust fuel control with internal overspeed governor adjust-
ment as follows. (See Figure 512.)
NOTE: Do not remove the power lever arm assembly from

the power lever shaft.
Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly on

fuel control assembly removing pin, nut, and washers.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 585
Aug 12/91
/lied
NOTE: I f fuel is found in Pt2 cavity upon

removal of rear cover or adjustment access
plugs, refer to SB 73-0157 for corrective
action.
4. B. (5) (b) 2 Remove f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5, Figure 516).
NOTE: Position power lever shaft in 100 degree posi-

tion to aid in removal of cover.
3 Remove cover from rear of fuel control assembly observing

fol 1owing instructions.
NOTE: Rotate cover during removal, a f t e r clearing

a Remove screws securing cover to fuel control assembly.
NOTE: I f fuei is found in Pt2 cavity upon

plugs, refer to SB 73-0157 for corrective
action.
b Rotate power lever shaft to minimum position. Tap cover

loose using a soft faced hammer. Remove cover and
gaskets.
CAUTION: MINIMUM FLOW ADJUSTMENTAND OVERSPEED FUEL GOV-

ERNOR ADJUSTMENTARE LOCATED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY
WITHIN THE FUEL CONTROLAND UTLIZE THE SAME
SIZE ALLEN WRENCH FOR REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS.
REFER TO FIGURE 512, DETAIL B, TO ENSURE PROPER
SELECTION OF OVERSPEED GOVERNORADJUSTMENT.
4 Adjust overspeed governor as required using tool Part No.

BS564 available from Garrett Supply, 6015 Randolph Street,
Los Angeles, CA 90040 or tool fabricated s i m i l i a r to Figure
512. One turn clockwise w i l l increase engine speed setting
by 4.5 percent RPM.
5 I n s t a l l cover onto fuel control assembly, observing f o l l o w -

ing instructions.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 586
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL ~ /lied
ignal
"T" HANDLE
OR EQUIVALENT
CUT GROOVE
WITH ROUND
FILE OR
5/64 INCH EQUIVALENT
ALLEN 0.040 IN.
WRENCH
t 1 t
0.035 IN.
4.5 IN. 0.I00 IN.
(APPROX) 0.020 IN.
(GROOVE DEPTH)
DETAIL A
I K-44A-425
R (Codes DA-GA) Dimension Requirements for Overspeed

UP136688
Governor Adjustment Tool (Woodward Internal Adjustment)

Figure 514 72-00-00
Page 587
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(INTERNAL LI[IKAGE) IS IN SLOT PRIOR TO POSl-
TIONII~G COVER ONTO FUEL CONTROL. IF MANUAL
FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT, OVERTEM-
PERATURE CONDITION WILL RESULT ON ENGINE
START. INSTALL SERVICEABLE COVER GASKET EN-
SURING GASKET DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH END OF
MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER LEVER. DO I~OT IN-
STALL FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG OR SPRING UN-
TIL FUEL CONTROL COVER HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
4. B. (5) (b) 5 a Ensure power lever shaft is in minimum position. In-

s t a l l cover and new gasket (55, Figure 516) on fuel con-
t r o l assembly.
b Secure cover on fuel control assembly with screws.

Tighten screws (20, 30) to a torque value of 16 to 19
inch-pounds and screws (40) to a torque value of 60 to
75 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE AC-

CESS PLUG AND SPRING TO ENSURE THAT
SPRING IS LOCATED DIRECTLY ON TOP OF
FLIGHT IDLE ADJUSTMENT AND THAT SPRII~G IS
NOT CRIMPED OR COCKED.
C I n s t a l l f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5) and new

packing (15). Tighten plug to a torque value of 25 to
30 inch-pounds.
6 Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by i n -

stal ling washers and nut. Tighten nut to a torque value of
12 inch-pounds and i n s t a l l new pin.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 588
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. B. (6) Adjust f l i g h t idle fuel flow as f o l l o w s . (See Figures 515 and

516.)
NOTE: A change in f l i g h t idle fuel flow setting

w i l l r e s u l t in a corresponding change in max-
imum fuel flow setting. Maximum fuel flow
setting must then be adjusted to original
setting. Maximum fuel flow adjustment w i l l
not a f f e c t f l i g h t idle fuel flow setting.
I f fuel is found in Pt2 cavity upon removal

Refer to A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual and

Flight Manual for required operational checks
a f t e r adjustment of f l i g h t i d l e fuel flow.
(a) Remove f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5, Figure 516) and
packing (15) from rear cover of fuel control assembly.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN LOCKNUT.
(b) For fuel control without f l i g h t idle c l i c k adjustment, use

deep socket to loosen and hold locknut while adjusting screw
and to secure locknut after adjustment is completed. One-
sixteenth turn of adjusting screw changes nominal fuel flow 10
pounds per hour. Tighten locknut to torque value of 10 inch-
pound. I n s t a l l f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5) and new
packing (15). Tighten plug to a torque value of 25 to 30
inch-pounds.
(c) For fuel controls with f l i g h t idle c l i c k adjustment, turn ad-

justing screw desired number of c l i c k s . Clockwise adjustment
of adjusting screw increases fuel flow. Each c l i c k produces a
nominal fuel flow change of 2 pounds per hour. I n s t a l l f l i g h t
idle access plug and spring (5) and new packing (15). Tighten
plug to a torque value of 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(d) Adjust both engines to match speed within 0.5% or less RPM.
R (e) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational checks as

R specified in A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual and F l i g h t Manual.
R Make entry in permanent a i r c r a f t records noting engine time,
R type and amount of adjustment accomplished.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 589
Aug 4/94
lied
POWER
LEVER
SHAFT
~,~ SPEEDSETTING
LEVERSHAFT
MAXIMUM POWER
ADJUSTMENT
( )
© ©
FLIGHT IDLE
ADJUSTMENT
F-44A-5239
(Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control Flight Idle

UP136688
and Maximum Power Adjustment Points (Woodward)

Figure 515 72-00-00
Page 590
Aug 12/91
/lied
4. B. (7) Reindex f l i g h t idle fuel flow adjustment stop i f required. (See

Figure 516.)
CAUTION: REINDEXING OF FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOWADJUSTMENT
STOP SHALL ONLYBE PERFORMEDONCETO INCREASE
RANGE FOR INCREASED FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOW
ADJUSTMENT. PRIORTO REINDEXING, CHECKLOG
BOOKTO DETERMINE IF REINDEXING, HAS PREVIOUSLY
BEEN PERFORMED. DECREASINGFLIGHT IDLE FUEL
FLOW ADJUSTMENTMAY BE PERFORMEDAS REQUIRED.
NOTE: Do not remove the power lever arm assembly from

the power lever shaft.
Ca) Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly on fuel
control assembly by removing pin, nut, and washers.

(b) Remove f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5, Figure 516).
NOTE: Position power lever shaft in 100 degree

position to aid in removal of cover.
I f fuel is found in Pt2 cavity upon removal

(c) Removecover from rear of fuel control assembly observing l o l -

l owing i nstructi ons.
NOTE: Rotate cover during removal, after cleaning

Remove screws securing cover to fuel control assembly.
2 Rotate power lever shaft to minimum position. Tap cover

loose usin~ a soft faced hammer. Remove cover (50) and
gasket (55}.
(d) Removeretaining ring (60) from slot in f l i g h t idle adjustment

screw.
(e) Slide f l i g h t idle adjustment stop rearward to remove i t from

splined f l i g h t idle adjustment screw.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 591
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ lslied
ignal
~ . ~ 65
~'~70
E-.44G- 1372
R 5. FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG 45. SPACER

R AND SPRING ASSY 50. COVERASSY
R 10. MAXIMUM POWERACCESS PLUG 55. GASKET
R 15. PACKING 60. RETAINING RING
R 20. SCREW 65. FLIGHT IDLE STOP
R 25. WASHER 70. DECELERATIONBLOCK ASSY
R 30. SCREW 75. FLIGHT IDLE SCREW
R 35. WASHER 80. FUEL CONTROLASSY
R 40. SCREW
UP136688
(Codes DA-GA) Flight Idle and Maximum Power 72-00-00

Adjustments (Woodward) Page 592
Figure 516 Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. B. (7)(f) Adjust screw as o u t l i n e d . For fuel control assemblies with

flight i d l e c l i c k adjustment, turn adjusting screw desired
number of c l i c k s . Each c l i c k changes nominal fuel flow 2
pounds per hour.
(g) C a r e f u l l y r e i n s t a l l stop so that equal adjustment range

remains both in increase and decrease flow d i r e c t i o n .
(h) Reinstall retaining ring (60) in i t s groove in adjustment

screw.
(i) I n s t a l l cover on fuel control assembly, observing the f o l l o w -

ing i n s t r u c t i o n s .

POSITIONING COVER ONTO FUEL CONTROL.
IF FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT,
OVERTEMPERATURE CONDITION WILL RESULT
ON ENGINE START. INSTALL SERVICEABLE
COVER GASKET Ef~SURING GASKET DOES NOT
INTERFERE WITH END OF MANUAL FUEL CAM
FOLLOWER LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT
IDLE ACCESS PLUG OR SPRING UNTIL FUEL
CONTROL COVER HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
1 Ensure power lever shaft is in minimum position. I n s t a l l

cover and new gaskets (55, Figure 516) on fuel control
assembly.
2 Secure cover to fuel control assembly with screws. Tighten

and screws (40) to a torque value of 60 to 75 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT 1DLE AC-

CESS PLUG AND SPRING TO ENSURE SPRING IS
LOCATED DIRECTLY ON TOP OF FLIGHT IDLE AD-
JUSTMENT AND SPRING IS NOT CRIMPED OR
COCKED.
(j) I n s t a l l f l i g h t i d l e access plug and spring (5) and new packing

R (15). Tighten plug to a torque value o f 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(k) Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by i n s t a l l -

inch-pounds and i n s t a l l new pin.
R (i) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational checks as

R specified in A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual and F l i g h t Hanual.
R Hake entry in permanent a i r c r a f t records noting engine time,
R type and amount of adjustment accomplished.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 593
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL lslied
ignal

CAUTION: COMPLETE TROUBLE SHOOTING OF ENGINE SHALL BE
ACCOMPLISHED PRIOR TO ADJUSTMENTOF MAXIMUM
FUEL FLOWTO ENSURETHAT THIS ADJUSTMENT IS AB-
SOLUTELY REQUIRED.
DO NOT ADJUST EXTERNAL STOPS OF THE POWERLEVER

SHAFT.
ENSURE POWERLEVER HAS FULL RANGE (0 TO 100 DE-
GREES) FREEDOMOF TRAVEL AND NO BINDING EXIST
AFTER MAXIMUM POWERSETTING ADJUSTMENT.
NOTE: During trouble shooting, p a r t i c u l a r emphasis shall
be placed on fuel system components that, i f mal-
functioning, could r e s t r i c t fuel flow. Examples
of these components are torque/temperature lim-
i t e r , fuel shutoff valve, flow divider, damaged
plumbing and fuel manifold nozzle assembles. En-
gine torque and temperature indicating systems
must be thoroughly checked for accuracy. Compres-
sor discharge pressure (P3) and i n l e t
temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensing systems shall
be checked for leaks and malfunctions. Compressor
discharge pressure (P3) sensing system can be
checked in accordance with step (2)(a)4.
4. B. (8) Adjust maximum power fuel flow as follows. (See Figures 515 and
516.)

R (a) Remove maximum power access plug and packing from rear of fuel
control and loosen locknut. Be careful not to change Allen
screw adjustment.
NOTE: I f required fuel flow change cannot be ob-

tained because, adjustment screw has reached
i t s travel l i m i t , refer to step (9).
(b) Use deep socket to loosen and hold locknut while adjusting
screw. Clockwise adjustment increases fuel flow. One-fourth
turn changes nominal fuel flow 5 pounds per hour. Secure
R locknut and tighten to a torque value of ten inch-pounds. In-
R s t a l l maximum power access plug (I0, Figure 516) and new pack-
R ing (15). Tighten plug to a torque value of 40 to 60 inch-
R pounds.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 594
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ ignal l s l i e d
CAUTION: THIS PROCEDURESHALL ONLY BE ACCOMPLISHEDAFTER

MAXIMUM POWERFUEL FLOWADJUSTMENT LIMITS HAVE
BEEN REACHED. COMPLETETROUBLE SHOOTING OF EN-
GINE MUST BE ACCOMPLISHEDTO ENSURETHAT THE
FOLLOWING PROCEDUREIS ABSOLUTELY REQUIRED.
IN SOMECASES THIS ADJUSTMENTMAY CAUSE POWER

LEVERS TO HAVE A MINOR SPLIT AT ALTITUDE.
ENSURE POWERLEVER HAS FULL RANGE (0 TO 100 DE-
GREES) FREEDOMOF TRAVEL AND NO BINDING EXIST
AFTER MAXIMUM POWERSETTING ADJUSTMENT.
NOTE: During trouble shooting, particular emphasis shall

be placed of fuel system components that, i f mal-
functioning, could r e s t r i c t fuel flow. Examples
of those components are torque/temperature lim-
i t e r , fuel shutoff valve, flow divider, damaged
plumbing and fuel manifold/nozzle assemblies. En-
gine torque and temperature indicating systems
must be thoroughly checked for accuracy. Compres-
sor discharge pressure (P3) and i n l e t
temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensing systems shall
be checked for leaks and malfunctions. Compressor
discharge pressure (P3) sensing system can be
checked in accordance with step (2)(a)4.
This adjustment w i l l affect f l i g h t i d l e fuel flow,
therefore, operate engine with condition lever in
low position and power lever in f l i g h t idle.
Record fuel flow and RPM so that indications can
be duplicated after adjustment is completed.
4. B. (9) Reinstate maximum power fuel flow adjustment range as follows.
NOTE: Do not remove the power lever arm assembly

from the power lever shaft.
(a) Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly on fuel
control assembly by removing pin, nut, and washers.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 595
Aug 12/91
~
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: I f fuel is found in Pt2 c a v i t y upon removal

r e f e r to SB 73-0157 f o r corrective a c t i o n .
4. B. (9) (b) Remove f l i g h t i d l e access plug and spring (5, Figure 516).
NOTE: Position power lever shaft in 100 degree

position to aid in removal of cover.
(c) Remove cover from rear of fuel control assembly observing the
following instructions.
NOTE: Rotate cover, a f t e r clearing alignment pins,

toward v e r t i c a l centerline of engine to clear
2D cam from internal linkage.
1 Remove screws securing cover to fuel control assembly.
NOTE: I f fuel is found in Pt2 c a v i t y upon

plugs, refer to SB 73-0157 for c o r r e c t i v e
action.
2 Rotate power lever shaft to minimum p o s i t i o n . Tap cover

loose using a soft faced hammer. Remove cover and gasket.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 596
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL .~llied
~JSignal
NOTE: One f u l l revolution of maximum power a d j u s t -

ment screw (Figure 517) changes fuel flow 20
pounds per hour. Clockwise increases fuel
flow, counterclockwise decreases fuel flow.
Note position of maximum power adjustment

screw p r i o r to movement to aid in calculation
of fuel flow changes between maximum power
and T2 bias adjustments.
4. B. (9) (d) Turn maximum power adjustment screw clockwise u n t i l arm

(Figure 517) j u s t clears cases and cover, or screw "bottoms".
Then turn maximum power adjustment screw two f u l l revolutions
counterclockwise.
NOTE: One f u l l revolution of T2 bias adjustment

screw (Figure 517) changes fuel flow approxi-
mately 80 pounds per hour. Counterclockwise
increases fuel flow, clockwise decreases fuel
f l ow.
(e) Turn T2 bias adjustment screw one half revolution counter-

clockwise to n u l l i f y adjustment made in step (d) and effec-
tively regain maximum power fuel flow adjustment. Further
fuel flow adjustment shall be made with maximum power adjust-
ment screw without removing cover.
(f) I n s t a l l cover onto fuel control assembly, observing the f o l -
lowing i n s t r u c t i o n s .

POSITIONING COVER ONTO FUEL CONTROL. IF
MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT,
OVERTEMPERATURE CONDITION WILL RESULT ON
ENGINE START. INSTALL SERVICEABLE COVER
GASKET ENSURING GASKET DOES NOT INTERFERE
WITH END OF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER
LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS
PLUG OR SPRING UNTIL FUEL CONTROL COVER
HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
1 Ensure power lever shaft is in minimum position. Install

R cover and new gasket (55, Figure 516) on fuel control
R assembly.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 597
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
MAXIMUM POWER
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
qD qD
FLIGHT IDLE
,ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
ARM
T 2 BIAS
"ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
ACCELERATION
ADJUSTMENT S~
,0
O
f
F.-44A-5068
Reinstate MaximumPower Fuel Flow Adjustment (T2 Bias)

UP136688
Figure 517 72-00-00

Page 598
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
r4AINTENANCE MANUAL
4. B. (9) (f)--2 Secure cover to fuel control assembly with screws. Tighten
and screw (40) to a torque value of 60 to 75 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE AC-

CESS PLUG AND SPRING TO ENSURE SPRING IS
LOCATED DIRECTLY ON TOP OF FLIGHT IDLE AD-
JUSTMENT AND SPRING IS [lOT CRIMPED OR
COCKED.
(g) I n s t a l l f l i g h t idle access plug and spring (5) and new packing
(15). Tighten plug to a torque value of 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(h) Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by i n s t a l l -

inch-pounds and instal I new pin.
(i) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational check to

determine amount of additional adjustments to be made.
NOTE: Refer to step (6) for f l i g h t idle fuel flow

adjustment. Refer to step (8) for maximum
power fuel flow adjustment.
(J) Adjust f l i g h t idle fuel flow to match pre-adjustment operation

indications. Flight idle adjustment affects maximum power
fuel flow. Adjust maximum power fuel flow adjustment screw as
requi red.
(k) A f t e r final operational check, make entry in permanent a i r -

c r a f t records noting engine time, type of adjustments and
amount of adjustments accomplished.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.1
Aug 4/94
~V~=7L3-~A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. C. Propeller Governor Adjustments

(1) Propeller governor high rpm adjustments.
(a) (Codes AA-CC) Adjust propeller governor high rpm stop screw
(on propeller governor). One turn shall cause approximately
one percent change in rpm. Clockwise to increase and counter-
clockwise to decrease.
(b) (Codes DA-GA) Adjust propeller governor high rpm stop screw
(located on top of concentric shaft assembly). One turn shall
cause approximately 2.5 percent change in rpm. Clockwise to
decrease and counterclockwise to increase.
(c) (Codes DA-GA) After adjus~aent has been accomplished, hold

speed setting (underspeed governor) shaft against maximum
stop.
(d) (Codes DA-GA) Ensure propeller governor high rpm stop (on
propeller governor) contacts simultaneously with underspeed
governor high speed stop.
(2) Propeller governor low rpm adjustment.
(a) Adjust propeller governor low rpm stop screw (located on

propel I er governor).
(b) One turn shall cause approximately one percent change in rpm.
Clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease.
(3) After adjustments, accomplish propeller governor high or low rpm

check in accordance with Engine Operational Check.
5. MaximumTrim Compensation Adjustment

NOTE: When low engine performance is suspected, accomplish engine
system v e r i f i c a t i o n to confirm low engine performance.
A. Confirm Engine Performance Deterioration

(1) Obtain l a t e s t DSC (customer data sheet) for minimum and maximum
T4.1 l i m i t . I f T4.1 limits are not available on DSC, contact
Customer Support Engineering to obtain maximum/minimumT4.1 l i m i t s .
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.2
R
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
5. A. (2) Perform engine system v e r i f i c a t i o n as follows.
(a) Check engine/aircraft indication system for proper calibration

and indication in accordance with Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(b) Check bleed a i r system for leaks in accordance with A i r c r a f t
Maintenance Manual.
(c) Check interstage turbine temperature (ITT) compensating re-

s i s t o r for proper setting as follows.
NOTE: ITT compensating r e s i s t o r setting may be

checked by removing power from compensating
resistor c i r c u i t breaker and observing ITT
temperature indicator. ITT temperature i n d i -
cation should be within +2C of setting l i s t e d
on DSC sheet.
I Check ITT compensating r e s i s t o r setting in accordance with

procedures outlined in 77-20-03, Maintenance Practices.
Record compensation values as follows.
Left Engine Right Engine

Actual Value (measured) C C
DSC Sheet or Logbook Value c
2 I f compensator value is not within ±2C of value l i s t e d on
DSC, adjust ITT compensating r e s i s t o r to required value in
accordance with 77-20-03, Maintenance Practices.
(d) Perform torque indicating system check in accordance with
paragraph 3.B.
(e) I f torque indicating problem s t i l l exists, after completing

step (d), perform indicated torque output check in accordance
with paragraph 3.F.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.3
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: I f engine performance deterioration is confirmed by

means of engine system v e r i f i c a t i o n , maximum trim com-
pensation adjustment may be accomplished at any time
during the service l i f e of engine. Maximum trim shall
be accomplished before attempting to perform on-the-
wing recompensation. The purpose of maximum trim com-
pensation adjustment procedure is to restore engine
power by re-adjusting interstage turbine temperature
(T4.1) to allow engine to operate to i t s thermal
rating.
S.I.L. P331-22 contains a l i s t of Field Service

Engineers.
5. B. Perform Haximum Trim Compensation Adjustment
CAUTI 0N: DO NOT ADJUST COMPENSATINGRESISTOR BEYONDTHE MAXI-

HUH T4.1 LIMIT (I,IAXIHUM TRIM VALUE) OR TT4 TURBINE
INLET TEMPERATUREWILL BE EXCEEDED.
NOTE: 4C (7F) = 1 percent torque (7 shaft horsepower)
(1) Adjust compensating resistor to value required to restore engine

power. Adjustment shall be accomplished in accordance with
77-20-03, Maintenance Practices, Adjustment/Test.
(2) Record adjustment setting in Engine Log Book and DSC.
(3) I f engine perfomlance remains low a f t e r maximum trim compensation

adjustment, perform engine recompensation procedures, or contact
R Field Service Engineer or customer Support Engineering.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.4
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPTTO ACCOMPLISH ENGINE OPERATIUN FOR RECOM-

PENSATION PURPOSES IF WIND CONDITIONS ARE GUSTING ABOVE
5 KNOTS OR IF WIND IS ABOVE I0 KNOTS STEADY STATE.
DO NOT ATTEMPT RECOFIPENSATIONOPERATION DURING RAINY

WEATHER CONDITIONS. HIGH MOISTURE CUNTENT ADVERSELY AF-
FECTS LEBOW SLIP RINGS CAUSING INACCURATE TORQUE
READINGS.
NOTE: Maximum trim compensation adjustment shall be accomplished

before attempting to perform on-the-wing recompensation.
Refer to paragraph 5.
6. Interst#ge Turbine Temperature Recompensating Procedure (on win_9~
NOTE: The following maintenance manual procedure is applicable to

operators of TPE331-5 engines where performance deteriora-
tion is confirmed. Recompensation, depending on engine
h i s t o r y , can result in power restoration by retrimming the
interstage turbine temperature (ITT) to allow the engine to
operate to i t s thermal rating.
Tile original (zero time) is defined as the l a t e s t DSC that

was created when an engine had a performance recompensation
done at production, overhaul, or hot section inspection.
The ITT recompensating procedure may be completed at any

time during the service l i f e of engine. A recompensation
is not required after a hot section inspection when setting
ITT compensating r e s i s t o r to the values given on the new
engine DSC (zero time). I f new engine DSC is unreadable
and engine vJas recompensated at Phoenix contact, Customer
k Support Engineering, P.O. Box 52181, Phoenix, Arizona
R 85072-2181 (Telephone: Area Code 602, 231-1000) for engine
canpensation values. A recompensation is required i f the
following conditions apply:
ReplacBnent of f i r s t or second stage impellers.
I f compressor was reshimmed.
I f current DSC information is not available, new DSC

values must be generated a f t e r completion of hot sec-
tion inspection.
All engines undergoing this procedure must have Engine Ex-

haust Pipe Assembly, Part No. 869578-6 or 3103359-1, and T5
Harness, Part No. 897591-1 i n s t a l l e d .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.5
Aug 4/94
GFG7D-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: ~laintenance personnel should be thoroughly f a m i l i a r

{-c-OT{T) with the following procedures and special tools and
equipment (Tables 516, 517) must be available. Ambient
(OAT) temperature f o r the recompensation test must be
between -7C (2OF) to 49C (120F).
Before each t e s t , ensure that the instrument c a l i b r a t i o n s

are current. (Refer to Table 518.)
When using Lebow torque readings (inch-pounds converted to

foot-pounds) or a i r c r a f t indicator torque readings (percent
of power converted to foot-pounds), use Data Reduction Pro-
R gram TPEV3 (3-1/2 or 5-1/4 inch diameter floppy disk).
Table 516 provides a l i s t of special tools, f i x t u r e s and

equipment required for engine recompensation. Table 517
provides a l i s t of equipment and materials required f o r en-
gine recompensati on.
Item Source/
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used f o r l i s t e d items.
"1. O-Ring (Packing) Used on propeller shaft prior to $9413-142

i n s t a l l i n g load c e l l .
*2. O-Ring (Packing) Used on load cell p r i o r to $9413-037

i n s t a l l i n g propeller.
. Torque Cal i bration Used to adapt to gage assemblies. 284453-1-1

Adapter Plate
. Torque Calibration Used to adapt torque sensor 284461-1-I

Adapter Plate compensator raw torque pressure
. Torque Test Kit 291862-2
*6. Adapter Wrench Used to tighten bolts securing 292155-1

propeller to load c e l l .
*7. Digital Torque Used to display torque indication 292156-1

Indicator from load c e l l .

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.6
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Source/
8. Deleted
*9. Electrical Cable Used to connect load cell to 292158-1

d i g i t a l torque indicator.
"10. Storage Case Used to store a l l components 292159 -1

"11. Anti-Rotation Used to prevent load cell sensor 283973-1

12. Deleted
"13. Torqu emeter Used to obtain torque signal 283997-3

(Load Cell) (Lebow) 5.68 inch in length).
"14. Gage Assembly Used to read raw torque pressure. 292471-1
"16. Tube Assembly Used to connect compensator and 292473-1

transmitter adapter.
17. TPE Recompensation Consists of several items of 296399-1

Adapter Kit special test equipment to allow
on wing recompensation of the
exhaust gas temperature system
(EGT).
*'18. Pt3/Tt3 Probe Used to sense compressor dis- 284542-2-1

Assembly charge pressure and temperature
during testing.
*'19. Signal Amplifier Used to boost the flowmeter 295839 -1

signal and when needed the monopole
signal for engine RPM.
**20. Flowmeter Used to sense fuel flow during 295844-1

Assembly testing.

**Components of 296399-1 TPE recompensation adapter k i t .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.7
Aug 4/94
/lied
Item Source/
*'21. Depth Set Tool Used to set depth of 284542-2-1 295885-1

Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly.
**22. Temperature Used to indicate fuel temperature 199Kf

Indicator and compressor discharge temper- (8-28VDC)
ature (T3). Omega Eng,
Inc, Stam-
ford, CT
**Components of 296399-1 TPE recompensation adapter k i t .

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.8
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I tern Sourc e/
23. Extended Beta Tube Consists of Beta Tube ~I 897480-4 294626-I

R Assembly or 832725-1 used on Dowty-Rotol
p r o p e l l e r with load c e l l (Lebow)
24. Extended Beta Tube Consists of Beta Tube PN 294626-3

Assembly 868369-1 used on Hartzell
that i s 5.68 inches in length.
25. Extended Beta Tube Consists of Beta Tube PN 897657-1 294626-9

Assembly or 832731-1 used on Hartzell
or with load cell (Lebow) t h a t is
6.68 inches in length and Load
Cell Spacer ~ 296974-2.
26. Extended Beta Tube Consists of Beta Tube PN 897660-1 294626-12

Assembly or 832734-1 used on Dowty-Rotol
or with load cell (Lebow) t h a t is
6.68 inches in length and Load
Cell Spacer PN 296974-2.
27. Load Cell Spacer Used on Hartzell or Dowty-Rotol 296974-2

propeller with load c e l l (Lebow)
28. Load Cell Spacer Used on Hartzell or Dowty-Rotol 296974-4/-6

p r o p e l l e r with load cell (Lebow)
29. Beta Tube Used with load c e l l (Lebow) 868369-2 or

R that is 6.68 inches in 832738-1
length on Hartzell p r o p e l l e r .
30. Beta Tube Used with load c e l l (Lebow) 897480-3 or

that is is 6.68 inches in length 832737-1
on Dowty-Rotol p r o p e l l e r .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.9
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal •/•lslied
Item Source/
No. Nomenclatu re Use Part No.
31. Recompens ati on Used to provide optional test panel 296740-1

Tester Assembly and related components that can be
used to accomplish ITT recompensa-
tion. Components of this k i t that
are required for ITT recompensation
can be obtained individually.
32. Thermocouple Used to sense engine i n l e t temper- 297055-1

Assembly (T2) ature (component of 296740-1
recompensation tester assembly).
33. Compensating Used to check or adjust compen- 298191-1
Resistor sating resistor setting.
Tester Kit
34. T5 Harness Used to sense exhaust gas temper- 897591-1

(EGT Harness ature (EGT).
Assembly)
35. Exhaust Pipe Provides means for mounting T5 3103359-1

harness and provides tap for or
exhaust pressure (PsS) 869578-5
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 598.10
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAII~TENANCE MANUAL
R Enamel (Glyptal 1201) Glyptal Inc, 305 Eastern Ave,

R Chelsea, I,JA 02150
R F-900 torque seal (Orange) Organic Products Co, 1963 E Irving Blvd,
R (Alternate f o r Glyptal) P.O. Box 428, I r v i n g , TX 75060
IBM Computer Model AT Commercially available

or
IBM Computer Model XT Commercial ly avail able
or
IBM Compatible PC Commercial ly available
( Personal Computer)
The following c a p a b i l i t i e s are required of the above computers.
1. 256K Ram
2. MS-DOS 2.0 or l a t e r version
3. P1ath co-processing chip
NOTE: Equipment required to accomplish recompensation using engine
R performance data reduction program No. TPEV3.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.11
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R (.) S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. A. Engine Preparation for Testing
NOTE: Ensure a l l instrument c a l i b r a t i o n s are current. In ad-

d i t i o n , items l i s t e d in Table 518 shall be calibrated
in accordance with c a l i b r a t i o n interval as indicated.
Table 518. Calibration Requirements
I tern Calibration Interval
*I. Load Cell (Lebow) A f t e r each ten operations or six months,

(Dead weight span test) whichever comes f i r s t , or i f the i n s t r u -
ment has been transported from one f a c i l -
i t y to another, i t should be dead weight
tested again in accordance with Report
No. 72-GE-06.
**2. Heise Pressure Gage 1 year
R **3. Turbine Flowmeter (Fuel) 1 year (must be calibrated for SG 0.817)
**4. Digital Temperature 6 months

Readout
5. Torque Pressure Gages 1 year
6. Test Frequency, See tester manual.

Voltage Readout
*Dead weight t e s t should use Lebow, d i g i t a l torque readout i n d i c a t o r and same

interconnecting wiring that w i l l be used in actual engine performance t e s t s .
This equipment should not be interchanged l a t e r .
**Component of 296399-1 recompensation adapter k i t .
(1) Remove engine cowling in accordance with A i r c r a f t Maintenance

Manual.
(2) (Pre SB 72-0446) Remove existing exhaust pipe and i n s t a l l Exhaust

Pipe Part I~o. 869578-6 or 3103359-1 with T5 Harness Part No.
897591-1. Some i n s t a l l a t i o n s may require complete or partial
removal of engine to i n s t a l l pipe. Test T5 harness (EGT harness
assembly) in accordance with 77-30-03, Adjustment/Test.
(3) (Post SB 72-0446) I f T5 harness (EGT harness assembly) is i n -

s t a l l e d , test in accordance with 77-20-03, Adjustment/Test.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.12
Aug 4/94
~ /lied
R NOTE: Table 518A presents the actual physical speeds required to pro-
R duce a corrected engine speed for establishing standard day en-
R gine mass a i r flows. These engine speeds should be used f o r
R conducting performance c a l i b r a t i o n at engine i n l e t temperature
R equal to or less than 15% (59°F).
R Table 518A. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine I n l e t Temperature
R Engine Speed
R Engine I n l e t (Frequency) Engine Turbine Propel I er
R Temperature (Prop Governor) Speed Shaft Speed
R °C oF Hz RPM RPM
R 15 59 938 41,730 1591

R 14 58 937 41,690 1589
R 14 57 936 41,649 1588
R 13 56 935 41,609 1586
R 13 55 934 41,569 1585
R 12 54 933 41,528 1583
R 12 53 933 41,488 1582
R 11 52 932 41,447 1580
R 11 51 931 41,407 1579
R 10 5O 930 41,366 1577
R 9 49 929 41,326 1576
R 9 48 928 41,285 1574
R 8 47 927 41,244 1572
R 8 46 926 41,204 1571
R 7 45 925 41,163 1569
R 7 44 924 41,122 1568
R 6 43 923 41,081 1566
R 6 42 922 41,040 1565
R 5 41 922 41,000 1563
R 4 4O 921 4O.956 1561
R 4 39 920 40,918 1560
R 3 38 919 40,877 1558
R 3 37 918 4O,835 1557
R 2 36 917 40,794 1555
R 2 35 916 40,753 1554
R 1 34 915 40,712 1552
R 1 33 914 40,671 1550
R 0 32 913 40,629 1549
R -1 31 912 40,588 1547
R -1 3O 911 4O,547 1546
R -2 2O 910 40,505 1544
R -2 28 910 40,469 1543
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.12A
Aug 12/91
/lied
R Table 518A. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine I n l e t Temperature (Cont)
R Engine Speed
R Engine I n l e t (Frequency) Engine Turbine Propel I er
R Temperature (Prop Governor) Speed Shaft Speed
R °C oF Hz RPM RPM
R -3 27 909 40,422 1541

R -3 26 908 40,381 1539
R -4 25 907 40,339 1538
R -4 24 906 40,298 1536
R -5 23 905 40,256 1534
R -6 22 904 40,214 1533
R -6 21 903 40,172 1531
R -7 20 902 40,131 1530
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.12B
Aug 12/91
lslied
Pt3 PRESSURE
Pt3/Tt3 PROBE
ASSEMBLY
FLOWMETER
ASSEMBLY
F-44A-4719
NOTE: Ensure flowmeter is i n s t a l l e d in a horizontal plane as shown.

Flowmeters mounted v e r t i c a l l y w i l l invalidate the calibration.
UP136688
Flowmeter Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n (Typical)

Figure 516 72-00-00
Page 598.13
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
6. A. (4) (Post SB 72-0446) I f EGT probe covers are i n s t a l l e d on exhaust

pipe remove in accordance with 72-50-05, Maintenance Practices.
Install and test T5 harness (EGT harness assembly) in accordance
CAUTION: DURING INSTALLATION OF FLOWMETERDO NOT SUBSTI-

TUTE METAL FLOWTUBE WITH ANY OTHER LINES OR
TUBING. TUBE SUPPLIED IN KIT IS CALIBRATED AND
SUBSTITUTION MAY RESULT IN IMPROPER READINGS.
DO NOT INSTALL 90 DEGREE FITTING ON INLET OR
OUTLET OF FLOWMETER.
NOTE: Ensure that i n s t a l l a t i o n of flowmeter is as hori-
zontally level as possible. Insulate flowmeter
i n s t a l l a t i o n from vibration and shock with foam
rubber or equivalent material.
(5) Using f l e x lines (component of 296399-1 recompensation adapter

k i t ) , i n s t a l l 295844-1 flowmeter assembly (component of 296399-1
recompensation adapter k i t ) in series with a i r c r a f t flowmeter or at
point where a i r c r a f t flowmeter was removed. Ensure flowmeter is
installed in correct direction of flow and in a horizontal plane.
(See Figure 516.)
(6) Set proper depth on 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly (component of
296399-1 recompensation adapter k i t ) as follows.
(a) Remove a n t i - i c e line from bleed a i r extraction port located at

2 o'clock position looking from aft forward.
(b) Place 295885-1 depth set tool (component of 296399-1 recompen-

sation adapter k i t ) over gasket on selected bleed a i r extrac-
tion port and press depth pin of 295885-1 depth set tool
through port hole u n t i l i t contacts the combustor. (See
Figure 517.) Lock the pin with knurled setscrew and carefully
withdraw 295885-1 depth set tool from the bleed a i r extraction
port.
(c) Hold 295885-1 depth set tool and set 284542-2-1Pt3/Tt3 probe
assembly on top of 295885-1 depth set t o o l . (See Figure 518.)
(d) Loosen compression f i t t i n g and position 284542-2-1Pt3/Tt3

probe assembly u n t i l probe j u s t contacts the end of depth pin.
(See Figure 518.)
(e) Set the two probe t i p openings (Figure 519) to point at any
corner of the 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly plate while
s t i l l maintaining probe/pin contact. Lock the probe in place
using the compression f i t t i n g . (See Figure 518.) Remove
284542-2-1Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly from 295885-1 depth set
tool.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.14
Aug 16/89
lied
DEPTH SET PIN
DEPTH SET T
BLEED AIR EXTRACTION F

(GASKET INSTALLED)
\
\
F-44G-636
UP136688
Setting Pin Depth of Depth Set Tool (Typical )

Figure 517 72-00-00
R Page 598.15
Aug 16/89
~_lslied
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO, 72-01-27)
Pt3/Tt3 PROBEASSY
COMPRESSION FITTING
MOUNTING PLATE
O
HEAD
SET
DEPTHSET TOOL
DEPTHSET PIN /
Pf3/l"t3 PROBEASSY
ON FITTING
OUNTING PLATE
SETSCREW, , ~
PROBEHEAD
I (COMPONENTOF
Pt3/Tt3 PROBEASSY)
DEPTH SETTOOL
DEPTH SET PIN F-44A-5185

UP136688
Setting Pt3/Tt3 Probe Depth

Figure 518 72-00-00
R Page 598.16
Aug 16/89
lied
F-44A-456|
UP136688
Pt3/Tt3 Probe Assembly Orientation

Figure 519 72-00-00
Page 598.17
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. A. (7) I n s t a l l 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly on a n t i - i c e bleed a i r ex-

t r a c t i o n port so the openings at the probe tips are pointing to the
bleed a i r extraction port corner representing forward and up.
Secure Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts
to torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(8) Remove any a i r c r a f t a i r line from remaining bleed a i r extraction

port and cap bleed a i r extraction port with a blanking plate. This
w i l l ensure zero bleed a i r during perfomance t e s t i n g .
(9) I n s t a l l 297055-1 thermocouple assembly (component of 296740-1

recompensation tester assembly) in shade on cowl side as near as
possible to engine i n l e t .
NOTE: The ITT compensator shall be removed and a i r c r a f t

ITT indicator shall be disconnected. Therefore,
indicated ITT on test instrumentation shall be un-
compensated and an adjustment to maximum operating
ITT l i m i t , equal to compensation o f f s e t of compen-
sator removed, shall be made and observed during
t e s t operation.
(10) Remove compensating r e s i s t o r from engine. Using part number and/or

setting number (stamped on compensator) and Table 519, determine
and record compensation o f f s e t of removed compensator.
NOTE: Ensure Lebow c a l i b r a t i o n is current in accordance

with Table 518.
(11) I n s t a l l a calibrated Lebow in accordance with paragraph 3.F.
NOTE: A 296740-1 recompensation t e s t e r assembly ( t e s t

panel, Figure 520) can be used as a substitute for
199KF temperature i n d i c a t o r for measuring all tem-
perature parameters. The t e s t panel also contains
a signal amplifier, as an integral component, that
can be used in lieu of 285839-I signal a m p l i f i e r .
However, this procedure is w r i t t e n for use without
296740-1 recompensation t e s t e r assembly. I f test
panel is used, do not connect Pt3 or Ps5 lines
through test panel.
A d i g i t a l multimeter (with frequency readout capa-

b i l i t y ) shall be used to provide fuel flow and
turbine speed readings. A Valhalla volt/frequency
meter is recommended.
(12) Place 292156-1 d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r , d i g i t a l volt/frequency

meter, 199KF temperature i n d i c a t o r and Heise pressure gage into
a i r c r a f t cabin. (See Figure 521.) I n s t a l l 292471-1 and 292472-1
torque pressure gage assemblies f o r checking and/or plotting raw
torque p l o t . (Refer to paragraph 3.F.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.18
Aug 4/94
/~llied
USEJUMPERHERETO USE 28V AIRCRAFTPOWERINPUT

THERMOCOUPLESWITCH OUTPUTTO VALHALLA OR FOR TEMPREADOUT
®Ps1
/ CONNECTMETER I ~
(~ IBEFOREATTACHINGJ
@
@
DC IN
O AGE
®
O P3
O FUEl, FLOW ENG. SP O

P3
FUEL ®
FLOW
Q PS5
SWITC~
ENG
SPEED
O O
J
BATTERYPOWERTO SIGNALAMPLIFIER INPUT PRESSURI
FOR FUEl,FLOWAND SPEEDSIGNAL SELECTOR
NOTE: USE ONLY UNGROUNDEDTHERMOCOUPI-ES F~4A-51~

WITH THISMETER.
Test Panel (Optional)

UP136688
(Component of 296740-1 Recompensation Tester Assembly)

Figure 520 72-00-00
R Page 598.19
Aug 16/89
lied
/ i lj
/ • ,',st
:,v
# I
!l I
i
I
I SIGNAL
CON NECT TO
! ......
~ VOLT/FREOUEN CY
ii~ METER
h1 "xX
I"'--
/
:~ ...............
~ ~t-:_---~'~"!
\ DIGITAL1 TORQUE ,} J
........ (STRAIN GAGE) --'" s
/
INDICATOR ,,'
"~.
\ ....................... I] ....
1I TEMPERATURE \\ i
I INDICATOR \
\:
HEISE PRESSUREGAGE
F--44A-5230
Signal Amplifier, Digital Torque Indicator,

UP136688
Temperature Indicator and Heise Pressure Gage

Figure 521 72-00-00
Page 598.20
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Signal
~ llied
6. A. (13) Connect instrument cables (components of 296399-1 recompensation

adapter k i t ) to 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly and 295844-1
flowmeter assembly. Connect P3 pressure l i n e (steel braided) to
Pt3 f i t t i n g of Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly.
(14) Connect instrumentation cables to output of 897591-1 T5 harness

and to output of engine ITT harness. The other end of these
cables shall be connected to 199KF temperature indicator, as
required, during engine t e s t operation.
CAUTION: THE DATA REDUCTION PROGRAMREQUIRES TURBINE

SPEED IN HERTZ (HZ) (SEE FIGURE 523). IF
PROPELLER GOVERNORIS NOT USED TO OBTAIN TUR-
BINE SPEED, USE AN ACCURATE ALTERNATE METHOD
TO MEASURE PROPELLER RPM. CONVERTPROPELLER
RPM TO TURBINE SPEED IN HZ BY USING THE FOL-
LOWING EQUATION.
TURBINE SPEED (HZ) = 938 x MEASURED PROPELLER RPM

1591
(15) Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l output leads of propeller governor monopole

and connect instrumentation cable for speed frequency signal. I f
monopole is not available, use a strobe speed sensor or similar
device to accurately measure propeller speed.
CAUTION: CLAMP OR PLUG AMBIENT VENT ON MANOMETER, DUR-
ING ENGINE STARTS, TO PREVENT STARTING TRAN-
SIENT PRESSURES FROMDISCHARGING WATER FROM
MANOMETER. ENSURETHAT CLAMP OR PLUG IS
REMOVED AND AMBIENT VENT IS COMPLETELYOPEN
PRIOR TO TAKING READINGS DURING TEST.
NOTE: I f optional test panel is used, do not connect

Ps5 line through test panel.
(16) Fabricate a water manometer using 0.250 inch outside diameter

clear p l a s t i c tubing. Manometer must be capable of measuring 35
inches of water (positive and negative pressures). See Figure 522
f o r sample. I n s t a l l manometer in a i r c r a f t cabin and connect a
pressure line between manometer and Ps5 port (located on engine
exhaust pipe).
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 598.21
Aug 16/89
lslied
-4 TO -4
FITTING
/
Ps5CONNECTTO " - - - ' ~ ~ ~ , VENT TO
AMBIENT
TAPE
-m~
w
- ~
I/4 INCH O.D.
TRANSPARENT
TUBING STICK MARKED IN 1/4
D
m --
INCH INCREMENTS
B
10- --
m --
THE READING IN INCHES OF WATER IS

THE TOTAL DISTANCE BETWEENTHE
WATER SURFACES. EXAMPLESHOWN ~ 0 ~ FILL WITH WATERTO
IS - 20 INCHES WATER. m
ZERO LEVELMARK
1 -10-
m u
-18-
t TAPE
1-44A-3102
UP136688
Manometer Fabrication
Figure 522 72-00-00
Page 598.22
Aug 16/89
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
~_/ l i e d
ignal
WARNING: ENSURE THAT ALL CABLES, LINES AND ELECTRICAL

LEADS ARE THOROUGHLYSECURED TO PREVENT COMPO-
NENTS FROM CONTACTING PROPELLER. IF PROPELLER
STRIKES COMPONENTS, DAMAGETO EQUIPMENTAND
POSSIBLE INJURY TO PERSONNELCOULD OCCUR.
6. A. (17) Route a l l instrumentation cables, lines, and electrical leads

along a i r c r a f t leading edge to and through a suitable cabin access
port. Tie wrap and tape cables, lines, and leads as necessary to
prevent damage during engine operation.
NOTE: I f optional test panel is used, do not connect P3

line through test panel.
(18) Attach P3 pressure line to Heise pressure gage. (See Figure 521.)
Ensure that Heise pressure gage is zeroed and positioned with gage
face v e r t i c a l .
CAUTION: FREQUENCY READOUTMAY NOT BE CAPABLE OF READ-
ING FUEL FLOW OR PROPELLERMONOPOLESPEED SIG-
NALS WITHOUT 295839-1 SIGNAL AMPLIFIER
(COMPONENT OF 296399-1 RECOMPENSATIONADAPTER
KIT).
NOTE: Fuel flow and turbine speed signal cables shall

be independently connected to signal amplifier on
an as required basis when readings are taken.
(19) I n s t a l l 295839-1 signal a m p l i f i e r to output cable of 295844-1

flowmeter assembly. Connect output of 295839-1 signal a m p l i f i e r
to input jack of d i g i t a l volt/frequency meter.
(20) Connect propeller governor monopole output cable to 295839-1 sig-
nal amplifier. Connect output of signal a m p l i f i e r to input of
d i g i t a l volt/frequency meter.
NOTE: The 199KF temperature indicator w i l l be used to
read uncompensated ITT (from ITT harness), fuel
temperature (from fuel flowmeter), compressor
discharge temperature (Tt3, from Pt3/Tt3 probe),
engine i n l e t temperature (Tt2, from 297055-1
thermocouple assembly) and exhaust gas tempera-
ture (Tt5, from T5 harness).
(21) Alternately connect individual temperature instrumentation cables
to 199KF temperature indicator as required to obtain readings at
each torque point. However, ITT cable MUST be connected during
starts and transient operations between torque points.
(22) To ensure proper operation of the engine o i l cooler, i n s t a l l en-
gine cowling i f necessary in accordance with A i r c r a f t Maintenance
Manual.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 598.23
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL /~llied
~JSignal
NOTE: All engine starts and shutdowns shall be accomplished in ac-
cordance with Aircraft Flight Manual.
During test operation of engine, the maximum torque limit shall
be observed. However, the operation is accomplished without
using ITT compensator. Therefore, indicated ITT shall be un-
compensated and an adjustment to maximum operating ITT l i m i t
shall be accomplished in accordance with step B.(1).
6. B. Engine Testing Requirements
(1) Obtain amount of compensation offset of rBnoved compensator as

determined and recorded in step A.(IO). Subtract compensation off-
set (degree F) from 1693F (maximum compensated ITT limit). The
result is the maximumuncompensated operating ITT limit to be ob-
served during engine test operation.
(2) Determine target torque values for test points 1 through 7. (See
Figure 523.)
(a) Determine on wing maximumallowable operating torque (for test
point 7) from Aircraft Flight Manual or by use of following
equati on:
Maximum Torque
(Foot-pounds) = 5252 x Maximum Installed SHP (Wing Rate)
Propeller RPM at 100% Turbine Speed
R CAUTION: WHENENGINE IS OPERATEDAT REDUCEDROTORSPEEDS

R (BELOW 59°F AMBIENT), TURBINE INLET TEMPERATURE
R WILL BE CLOSERTO MAXIMUMLIMIT.
R NOTE: I f ambient temperature is above 15°C (59°F), oper-

R ate engine at 100 percent rpm. One hundred per-
R cent engine rpm equals 938 Hz. Tolerance is ±4
R Hz.
R I f ambient temperature is -7°C (20°F) through 15°C

R (59°F), operate engine at speeds relative to am-
R bient in accordance with Table 518A (±4 Hz).
(b) Determine target torques for test points as follows.
1 Test point 1 equals test point 7 minus 600 foot-pounds.


UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.24
Aug 12/91
lied
6. B. (2) (b) 6_ Test point 6 equals test point 7 minus 100 foot-pounds.
7 Test point 7 is maximum torque (foot-pounds) as determined
in step (a) or torque obtained at maximura allowable ITT as
determined in step (1).
NOTE: Check all test equipment i n s t a l l a t i o n s to ensure they

are capable of measuring parameters shown in Figure
523. Ensure c a l i b r a t i o n of t e s t equipment is current
in accordance with Table 518.
(3) Adjust d i g i t a l torque indicator as follows.
NOTE: Ensure that d i g i t a l torque indicator and tnrquemeter

have been e l e c t r i c a l l y stabilized f o r a minimum of 1
hour prior to setting indicator on zero.
(a) Set zero on indicator by adjusting coarse and fine balance

screws on d i g i t a l torque indicator face plate.
(b) Set propeller rotation switch at (-) (counterclockwise) f o r

counterclockwise propeller rotation (viewed from rear of
engine).
(c) Depress shunt, c a l i b r a t e switch, and adjust coarse and fine

span to read calibration positions as specified in data sheet
provided with d i g i t a l torque indicator.
(d) Recheck zero and span in accordance with preceding steps (a)
and (c). Repeat steps as necessary u n t i l required c a l i b r a t i o n
is achieved.
CAUTION: RECHECK CABLES, LINES, AND LEADS ROUTED ALONG AIR-

CRAFT WING AND NACELLE TO ENSURE THEY ARE SECURE
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE.
ENSURE THAT ITT CABLE IS CONNECTEDTO 199KF TEMPERA-

TURE INDICATOR AND THAT INDICATOR IS PROPERLY POSl-
TIONED IN AIRCRAFT CABIN TO MONITOR ITT DURING EN-
GINE STARTS AND TRANSIENT POWERSETTINGS BETWEEN
TEST TORQUE POINTS.
DO NOT EXCEED TORQUE LIMITS OR MAXIMUM ITT OPERATING

LIMIT ESTABLISHED IN STEP B.(1).
(4) Start and operate engine (in accordance with A i r c r a f t Flight Man-
ual) u n t i l o i l temperature is at normal operating range. Cycle
propeller through reverse and normal operating ranges several times
(for a minimum of 3 minutes) to ensure adequate o i l flow through
torque meter to bring oil to operating temperature. Note engine
speed frequency when at 100 percent engine speed. Reset propeller
governor i f frequency is not 938 +4 Hz.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.25
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A C E
IIAI NTENANCE MANUAL
6. B. (5) Shut down engine (in accordance with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t ~lanual) and
recheck zero point and span c a l i b r a t i o n point on the torque
i n d i c a t o r . Adjust propeller governor i f required to obtain f r e -
quency requirement of step (4).
(6) Restart engine and select 100% propeller RPM and advance power
lever u n t i l the propeller has achieved f u l l governing.
(7) Select target torque (as determined in step ( 2 ) ( b ) ) f o r point 1
(Figure 523) on the d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r as the f i r s t data
point. Let parameters s t a b i l i z e f o r a minimum of 3 minutes and
record data in the sequence shown on performance data sheet. (See
Figure 523.)
(8) Repeat step (7) above (using target torques determined in step
(2)(b)) for points 2 through 7, Figure 523. Use Figure 524 only as
a sample to check data f o r range, sign, and decimal location.
NOTE: Fuel Temp is temperature of sample from which spe-

c i f i c g r a v i t y (S.G) was measured. Corrected S.G.
at 60F is to be entered on performance data sheet,
Figure 523.
(9) Shut down engine (in accordance with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Manual).
Record corrected fuel specific g r a v i t y and pressure a l t i t u d e on
Figure 523. Correct fuel specific g r a v i t y (S.G.) f o r deviation
from 60F by using the following equation:
S.G (corrected) = S.G (measured) + ((Fuel Temp °F - 6OF) x 0.00045)

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.26
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal MAINTEI~ANCE MANUAL

A E R 0 S PA C E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
i llxx
!
~b
!
Cb
0
XX ,o
!,-
' t
"o ~
" \f\t iR '" 0"" 0
,,< .~
~ ®®@ ©
i -
! °
7
~ m~ ~ o
~ =~j~=~ o_e~ =r
-,.,.~ ~?..o,.,.p~ ~
' oo-- -~ G
~z ~_m ~
o go ~,_. .~ =
= =<~ ,--=- ("} I.-
=~o
~
m
.~ ~ ~ ~,=
<=~.~,,-,o,o
~_ o.
8
,, ..
~ o.~ p_o = ,=~o
_(J~-
,.,. ~) o o o
Performance Data Sheet for ITT Recompensation
Figure 523 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.27
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2.A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
IIAl NTENANCE MANUAL
o3
wD
"
GO
I
o
!
o
o
' ~" 0~ -I- ~
,.< .~
z~
~,~ v~ !~;mm
Ol- _ ~ ~=o
~o = ~ # .
:[ . f / ) ¢-~
U O -- ,,, v~ ~F-
-,-0
~o ~ o~ o
'7
--, 121::1::
e ~~ ~ ._. (5 o o -e,,,..° <,,,r-~ <o~=~ !
- m~ "='~ ,<,,
Sample Perf0naance Data Sheet for ITT Rec0mpensati0n

Figure 524 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.28
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTEI4ANCE HANUAL
R NOTE: Instructions to obtain data reduction program No. TPEV3 and

R user manual No. TPEV3UM are provided in SIL P331-149.
R The data reduction program is on two 5-1/4 inch, 360K floppy

R disk or one 3-1/2 inch, 720K floppy disk. The floppy disk is
R formatted for an IBH XT/AT, or IBM XT/AT compatible personal
R computer with 256K, RAM, MS-DOS 2.0 or l a t e r and incorporates
R previously issued program No. 6876, 6877 and 6878, per SIL
R P331-136.
R Program No. TPEV3 reduces, calculates, plots, and p r i n t s out

R the test results that give the engine shaft horsepo~mr, minimum
R and maximum compensations, and plots of computer generated
R curves based on the output of test data.
R To use program No. TPEV3 data reduction, refer to user manual

R No. T PEV3UM.
R 6. C. Test Data Reduction
R (1) Computer inputs required for TPE PLOTTING SETUP are as follows.
R Ninimum SliP: 840

R Nominal T4.1: 1693
R T4 Limit: 1850
R NOTE: The l i m i t value, given in the following v a l i d i t y

R check, are a guide for determining whether data,
R as reduced on program TPEV3, is valid. The l i m i t s
R provided are based on a s t a t i s t i c a l studies of new
R production engine performance parameters and known
R normal d r i f t of these parameters as the engine
R deteri orates.
I f test data do not r e f l e c t l i m i t stated in v a l i d -

i t y check, review input parameters from all data
points to ensure that data are correct and was
properly entered into computer. Most common er-
rors are improper decimal point position and/or
omitted signs f o r minus readings.
(2) Perform the following v a l i d i t y check.
R Turbine flow parameter (T.F.P.) check - Check the TFP values, from
R reduced data, to ensure they are between the values of 1.50 to 1.65
R f o r at least 5 of the 7 data points. Check the data points that
R are not within t h i s range f o r correct data inputs.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.29
Aug 4/94
~F::~70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A C E
IIAI NTENANCE MANUAL
6. C. (3) Upon completion of test data reduction per program No. TPEV3, the
computer output w i l l give the minimum required compensation and the
maximum trim compensation. I f engine f a i l s to pass, compensation
values w i l l not be given, and a r e j e c t message w i l l appear on com-
puter printout. Refer to user manual No. TPEV3UM for more in depth
expl anati ons.
D. Test Completion
NOTE: Upon completion of engine recompensation, previous
DSC is no longer v a l i d .
(1) Write the following statement, in heavy black ink, across previous
R engine's DSC. (See Figure 525.)
"FOR CURREI~TDATAREFERTO LATEST DSC."
DATED
(2) Generate a new DSC with data collected during recompensation,

Figure 526.
(3) Make entry in engine log noting recompensation completion date and
that the l a t e s t data is also recorded in new DSC.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.30
Aug 4/94

A E R 0 S P A (i E GAKRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
ENGINESERIALNUMBER
PERFORMANCE
TESTS
TOARDC
SEALEVEL
NS
REQUI--~ ' * CORRECTED

. . . . .
SHAFTPOWEROUTPUT
PROPELLERSHAFTSPEED
SPECIFICFUELCONSUMPTIONLB/SHP- HR(MAX)@840t~ ~' ~ ~ • • o.6os . ~-/
1693 ~roq.'~
INTERSTAGETURBINETEMPERATURE °(2 /
ATRATEDPOWER 923 ~2~
2~,324,N.- LBSTORQUEPRESSURE
~P~ 7~S~k~0 ! i RECORD
2260IN. - LBSTORQUEPRESSURE
(/',P)57 L, D RECORD (2-
ADDITIONALINFORMATION: ~ ~ o
ATt4.1COMPENSATION C
ATt4"1COM~Si ~ ~ C
~ I ~VN ~ I P ~7069-2
~ i ~ S~ETT'
NG NO" ~c~
NOTE: ACCEPT,~J: C~NIATION RANGE SIGNATURE DATE

FoREN~I ! LABTECHNICIAN
LABTECHNICIAN
RECORDSETTINGNUMBERANDITT QUALITY
COMPENSATIONVALUEIN ENGINELOGBOOK. CONTROL
G-44G-330
Sample Data Sheet, Customer (DSC) (Typical )

R Figure 525 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.31
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
PERFORMANCE TESTS
*AFTER CORRECTION TO ARDC

STANDARD SEA LEVEL
CONDITIONS
SPEC * CORRECTED
REQUIRED
SHAFT POWER OUTPUT HP (MIN) 840
PROPELLER SHAFT SPEED RPM (MAX) 1591
SPECIFIC FUEL CONSUMPTION LB/SHP - HR (MAX) @ 840 SHP 0.605 N/A
COMPENSATED MEASURED °F 1693

INTERSTAGE TURBINE TEMPERATURE
AT RATED POWER °C 923
28t324 IN. - LBS TORQUE PRESSURE(Ap) 715 SHP, PSID PSID RECORD
2260 IN. - LBS TORQUE PRESSURE(AP) 57 SHP.. PSID PSID RECORD
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
ATt4.1 COMPENSATION °F °C
A Tt4.1 COMPENSATOR PART NO. 897069-2 SETTING NO.
SIGNATURE DATE
NOTE: ACCEPTABLE COMPENSATION RANGE
FOR ENGINE:
LAB TECHNICIAN
MAXIMUM TRIM A Tt4 .1 COMPENSATION
~ ? C , LAB TECHNICIAN
RECORD SETTING NUMBER AND ITT QUALITY
COMPENSATION VALUE IN ENGINE LOG BOOK. CONTROL
G-44G-311
Data Sheet, Customer (DSC) (Typical )

UP136688
Figure 526 72-00-00

Page 598.32
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
INPUT OUTPUT
ITT/EGT AIRCRAFT HARNESS

COMPENSATOR RESISTOR
@ @ ©
I
i ®
THERMOCOUPLE DIGITAL THERMOMETER

SIGNAL GENERATOR
W-44G-104
Compensating Resistor Control Assembly Test Setup

Using 298191-1 Compensating Resistor Tester Kit
R Figure 527 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.33
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A F I R () S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: There are two methods of testing compensating r e s i s t o r

Part No. 897069:
Method 1 consists of using thermocouple signal genera-

tor and d i g i t a l thermometer, proceed to step 6.E.(1).
Method 2 consists of using d i g i t a l voltmeter, reference

junction and external power source, proceed to step
6.E.(2).
6. E. Compensating Resistor Adjustment (Part No. 897069)
(1) Perform compensating resistor test using Method 1 as follows.
NOTE: Compensating r e s i s t o r setting is predetermined f o r

each engine and i d e n t i f i e d by a setting number
recorded on the engine DSC (Data Sheet, Customer).
Using a new compensation value, find the cor-
responding setting number in Table 519 to esta-
blish correct voltage output value. I f required
compensation f a l l s between two setting numbers,
use the next higher (more positive) s e t t i n g .
(a) Perform functional check as follows. (See Figure 527.)
1 Remove input and output connectors from engine EGT compen-

sating r e s i s t o r .
NOTE: Connectors on cable assembly are labeled f o r

easy instal l a t i o n .
2 I n s t a l l connector "A" to compensator input and connect "B"

to compensator output.
3 I n s t a l l connector "C" to a i r c r a f t harness o r i g i n a l l y con-

nected to compensator output.
4 I n s t a l l connector "D" to thermocouple signal generator.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.34
Aug 4/94
GF'G70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (1 E
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. E. (1) (a) -6 I n s t a l l connector "E" to thermocouple signal generator and

connector "F" to d i g i t a l thermometer.
--6 Apply aircraft power (28 VDC) to compensator.

7 Turn thermocouple signal generator and d i g i t a l thermometer
power switch to ON position. Set d i g i t a l thermo~aeter to
Celsius scale.
8 Adjust thermocouple signal generator dial setting value on

the digital thermometer readout display to 100°C.
9 Disconnect input connector "F" from d i g i t a l thermometer and
i n s t a l l connector "G" to d i g i t a l themometer, note value.
i0 The difference in readout on d i g i t a l thermometer between

step ( I ) ( a ) 8 and step (1)(a)9 is the compensator s e t t i n g ,
for example:
Step (1)(a)8 minus step (1)(a)9 equals compenstor setting

100°C - 72°C = 28°C
11 This value should agree with l a t e s t engine compensator set-

ting, recorded on engine DSC or in engine log book within
+_2°C.
12 I f temperature value does not agree with setting recorded
on engine DSC or engine log book refer to step 5.F.(1)(b)
for compensating resistor adjustment.
13 To check cockpit ITT indicator for accuracy, increase ther-

mocouple signal generator dial setting to various tempera-
ture and compare d i g i t a l thermometer readout value with
cockpit ITT indicator. The values should agree with +2%,
i f not, refer to 72-00-00, Trouble Shooting.
14 Turn e l e c t r i c a l power o f f . Disconnect test equipment and

reconnect cm~pensating r e s i s t o r to engine ITT therTnOCOuple
harness and a i r c r a f t harness.
15 Safety wire all connectors as required.
72-00-00
UP136688
R Page 598.35
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
FIAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. E. (1) (b) Perform adjustment of compensating r e s i s t o r using test setup

as follows.
1 Connect compensating r e s i s t o r into the test setup. (See

- Figure 527.)
2 The compensating r e s i s t o r is set by removing sealing screw

to gain access to setting adjustment screw.
NOTE: Compensating Resistor Part No. 897069 is

positive compensation, clockwise r o t a t i o n
of setting screw increases the setting
number. Total range of setting screw is
approximately 25 turns.
3 Refer to engine DSC to determine setting number of compen-

sating r e s i s t o r required f o r engine. See Table 519 to
determine amount of compensation setting number is to
provide.
4 I f value of compensation determined in step (a)lO does not

agree with the compensation required in step 3_, adjust set-
ting screw of the compensating r e s i s t o r repeat steps (a)2
through ( a ) l l to obtain the required compensation.
5 Turn e l e c t r i c a l power o f f . Disconnect t e s t equipment and

reconnect compensating r e s i s t o r to engine ITT thermocouple
harness and a i r c r a f t harness.
6 Recheck the compensation by engine operation.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.36
Aug 4/94

6. E. (1) (b) 7 After setting is accomplished lock setting screw with a

drop of Glyptal 1201. Record setting number in space
provided in compensating resistor by means of and ink stamp
or stencil. I f cm]pensating resistor is being recali-
brated, obliterate existing number before reidentifying.
Replace sealing screw and lockwire.
8 Record the new compensation value, compensator setting num-

ber and compensator part number in the engine log book.
9 Install compensating resistor in accordance with Engine

Maintenance Manual, Section 77-20-03, Maintenance
Practices.
10 Remove and secure all test cables and test equipment.
11 Install anti-ice f i t t i n g on bleed air extraction port on

engine plenum. Tighten nuts to torque value of 20 inch-
pounds.
12 Install engine cowling in accordance with Aircraft Mainte-

nance Manual.
13 Start engine (in accordance with Aircraft Flight Manual)

and perform operational checks (adjust as required) in ac-
cordance with Adjustment/Test. Shut down engine in accor-
dance with Aircraft Flight Manual.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.37
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 519. Compensating Resistor (Part No. 897069)
Output Requirements
Setting Mil livol t Nominal Temperature Compensation

No. (+0.020 mY) +° C +°F
1 0 0 °C (+ O°F)
2 +0.066 + 1.67°C (+ 3°F)
3 +0.132 + 3.34°C (+ 6°F)
4 +0.199 + 5.00°C (+ 9°F)
5 +0.265 + 6.67°C (+12°F)
6 +0.331 + 8.34°C (+15°F)
7 +0.398 +10.00°C (+18°F)
8 +0.464 +11.67°C (+21°F)
9 +0.530 +13.34% (+24°F)
10 +0.597 +15.00°C (+27°F)
11 +0.663 +16.67°C (+30°F)
12 +0.730 +18.34°C (+33°F)
13 +0.796 +20.00°C (+36°F)
14 +0.863 +21.67°C (+39°F)
15 +0.929 +23.34% (+42°F)
16 +0.996 +25.00°C (+45°F)
17 +1.063 +26.67°C (+48°F)
18 +1.129 +28.34°C (+51°F)
19 +1. 196 +30.00°C (+54°F)
20 +1.263 +31.67°C (+57°F)
21 +1.330 +33.34°C (+60°F)
22 +1.396 +35.00°C (+63°F)
23 +1.463 +36.67°C (+66°F)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.38
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Output Requirements (Cont)
Setting Millivolt Nominal Temperature Compensation

No. (±0.020 mY) +°C +°F
24 +1.530 +38.34°C (+ 69°F)

25 +1.597 +40.00°C (+ 72°F)
26 +1.664 +41.67°C (+ 75°F)
27 +1.731 +43.34°C (+ 78°F)
28 +1.798 +45.00°C (+ 81°F)
29 +1.865 +46.67°C (+ 84°F)
30 +1.932 +48.34°C (+ 87°F)
31 +1.999 +50.00°C (+ 90°F)
32 +2.066 +51.67°C (+ 93°F)
33 +2.133 +53.34°C (+ 96°F)
34 +2.200 +55.00°C (+ 99 °F)
35 +2.267 +56.68°C ( +102° F)
36 +2.335 +58.33 °C (+105° F)
37 +2.402 +60.01°C (+108°F)
38 +2.469 +61.67°C ( +111°F)
39 +2.536 +63.35°C ( +114° F)
40 +2.604 +65.01 °C (+117°F)
41 +2.671 +66.67°C ( +120°F)
42 +2.738 +68.35% (+123°F)
43 +2.806 +70.O0°C ( +126° F)
44 +2.873 +71.66°C (+1290F)
45 +2.941 +73.33°C (+132°F)
46 +3.008 +75.00°C (+135°F)
47 +3.076 +76.66°C (+138°F)
48 +3.143 +78.33°C (+141°F)
49 +3.211 +80.O0°C ( +144°F)
50 +3.278 +81.66°C (+147°F)
51 +3.346 +83.33°C (+150°F)
NOTE: I f tile output reading does not correspond to a listed setting number,
use the more positive setting number.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.39
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. E. (2) Perform compensating resistor test using Method 2 as follows.
NOTE: Compensating resistor setting is predetermined f o r

each engine and i d e n t i f i e d by a setting number
recorded on the engine DSC (Data Sheet, Customer).
Using a new compensation value, find the cor-
R responding setting number in Table 519 to esta-
blish correct voltage output value. I f required
compensation f a l l s between two setting numbers,
use the next higher (more positive) setting.
(a) Remove compensation r e s i s t o r .
(b) Connect the compensating r e s i s t o r into the t e s t setup. (See

R Figure 528.) Note the reference junction is to provide a min-
imum temperature difference of the three d i s i m i l a r metal
(chromel-alumel, chromel-copper, and alumel-copper) connec-
t i o n s ; and thus, to minimize generated errors. The connectors
inside the junction should occupy a small volume and the ex-
cess space f i l l e d with a compound (epoxy) to achieve a con-
stant temperature. Ideally the reference junction should be
submerged in an ice-bath solution.
(c) With 28 VDC power supply turned o f f , turn on d i g i t a l voltmeter

and record voltage and sign e i t h e r (+) or (-) displayed. This
voltage is a function of the d i s s i m i l a r metals.
(d) Turn on DC power supply and ensure the voltage level of the
power supply is 28 ±i volts. The compensating r e s i s t o r is set
by removing the sealing screw to gain access to the setting
adjustment screw.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.40
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE HANUAL
LEADS TWISTED TOGETHER REFERENCEJUNCTION

AND IDEALLY WELDED /
-WITHOUT USE OF ANY ~ / THIS ENCLOSED SPACE
OTHER METAL. ~ / FILLEDWITH EPOXY.
DIGITAL
VOLTMETER
' ,":1 c° (DVM)
~ - - - ' - CH (+) !
~ A L L CHROMEL (CH) AND ALUMEL

(AL) LEADS MAXIMUM OF 5 FEET
LONG. AMERICAN WIRE GAGE
NUMBER 18 TO 24. (DIA. IN ---'------'~---"~"
INCHES 0.040 TO 0.020)
J2 J1"
COMPENSATING
RESISTOR
AL
POWER SUPPLY
t
USE BENDIX SG3106E-10SL-56S CONNECTOR
[
USE BENDIX 28" 1 VOLTS
SG3106E- 14S-52S DC BATTERY OR
CONNECTOR RECTIFIED POWER SB-1938R4
Compensating Resistor Test Setup Diagram

R Figure 528 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.41
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTEblANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: USE PROPER SIZE JEWELERS SCREWDRIVER WHEI4 AD-

JUSTING THE SETTING ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
NOTE: Part No. 897069 is p o s i t i v e compensation, c l o c k -

wise r o t a t i o n of setting screw increases the set-
ting number. Total range of setting screw is ap-
proximately 25 turns.
. E. (2) (e) Turn setting screw with the power supply turned on u n t i l
desired voltage is displayed. To detemine voltage use f o l -
lowing algebraic equation:
(VOLTAGE) SETTING + (VOLTAGE) POWEROFF = (VOLTAGE) POWERON
See Table 519 which c o r r e l a t e s setting number and voltage.

The following examples show typical values which may occur
when setting the compensating r e s i s t o r , keeping in mind t h a t
these are examples and there is a tolerance on the setting
voltage:
Example A_
A compensating r e s i s t o r with a setting number of 19 requires a

s e t t i n g voltage of 1.196 inv. With power o f f , the voltage i n -
dicated is 0.020 mv.
Therefore: VSET + VOFF = VON
1.196 + 0.020 = 1.216 mv
Adjust the setting screw u n t i l 1.216 mv is displayed.
Exarapl e B

s e t t i n g voltage of 0.066 mv. With power o f f , the voltage i n -
dicated is -0.020 mv.
0.066 + (-0.020) = 0.046 mv

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.42
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTErJANCE MANUAL
6. E. (2) (f) After setting is accomplished, lock setting screw with a drop
R of Glyptal 1201. Record setting number in space provided on
compensating r e s i s t o r by means of an ink stamp or s t e n c i l . If
compensating r e s i s t o r is being recalibrated, o b l i t e r a t e e x i s t -
ing number before r e i d e n t i f y i n g . Replace sealing screw and
1ockwi re.
(g) Record new compensation value, cc~npensator setting number and
compensator part number in the engine log book.
(h) I n s t a l l compensating r e s i s t o r in accordance with 77-20-03,

(i) Remove and secure a l l test cables and test equipment.
(j) I n s t a l l a n t i - i c e f i t t i n g on bleed a i r extraction port on en-

gine plenum. Tighten nuts to torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(k) I n s t a l l engine cowling in accordance with A i r c r a f t Maintenance

Manual.
(i) S t a r t engine ( i n accordance with A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Hanual) and

perform operational checks (adjust as required) in accordance
with Adjustment/Test. Shut down engine in accordance with
A i r c r a f t Flight Manual.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.43
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRLTT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTI 0 N: DO NOT ATTEMPTTO ACCOMPLISH ENGINE OPERATION FOR

RECOMPENSATION PURPOSES IF WIND CONDITIONS ARE GUST-
ING ABOVE 5 KNOTSOR IF WIND IS ABOVE 10 KNOTS
STEADY STATE.
DO NOT ATTEMPT RECOMPENSATIONOPERATION DURING RAINY

WEATHER CONDITIONS. HIGH MOISTURE CONTENTADVERSELY
AFFECTS LEBOW SLIP RINGS CAUSING INACCURATE TORQUE
READINGS.
NOTE: Maximum trim compensation adjustment shall be accom-

plished before attempting to perform propeller t e s t
stand recompensation. Refer to paragraph 5.
. Propeller Test Stand Recompensation Procedures (Recompensating Intersta~_e

Tu rb i ne Temjoera{ u _ ~
NOTE: The following maintenance manual procedure is applicable to

operators of TPE331-5 engines where performance deteriora-
tion is confirmed. Recompensation, depending on engine
history, can result in power restoration by retrimming the
interstage turbine temperature (ITT) to allow the engine to
operate to i t s thermal rating. The recompensation proce-
dure ensures that the maximum turbine i n l e t temperature is
not exceeded.
Original (zero time) DSC is defined as the l a t e s t DSC that

was created when an engine had a performance recompensation
done at production, overhaul, or hot section inspection.
The ITT recompensating procedure may be completea at any

time during the service l i f e of engine. A recompensation
is not required a f t e r a hot section inspection when setting
ITT compensating resistor to the values given on the new
engine DSC (zero time). I f new engine DSC is unreadable
and engine was recompensated at Phoenix contact, Customer
R Support Engineering, P.O. Box 52181, Phoenix, Arizona
R 85072-2181 (Telephone: Area Code 602, 231-1000) f o r engine
compensation values. A recompensation is required i f the
following conaitions apply:
Replacement of f i r s t or second stage impellers.
I f compressor was reshimmed.
I f current DSC information is not available, new DSC values

must be generated after completion of hot section
ins pecti on.
All engines undergoing this procedure must have Engine Ex-
haust Pipe Assembly, Part No. 291822-1 or 869578-6.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.44
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
HAlNTENANCEMANUAL
NOTE: Maintenance personnel should be thoroughly f a m i l i a r

-~T) with the followiny proceaures and special tools and
equipment (Tables 520, 521) must be available. Ambient (OAT)
temperature for the recompensation test must be between -7 to
49°C (20 to 120°F).
Before each test, ensure that the instrument c a l i b r a t i o n s are

current. (Refer to Table 523.)
When using Lebow torque readings (inch-pounds converted to foot-

pounds) or a i r c r a f t indicator torque readings (percent of power
converted to foot-pounds), use Data Reduction Program TPEV3
(3-1/2 or 5-1/4 inch diameter floppy d i s k ) .
Table 520 provides a l i s t of special tools, f i x t u r e s and equip-

ment required for engine recompensation. Table 521 provides a
l i s t of equipment and materials required f o r engine
recompensati on.
I ton Source/
NOTE : Equivalent substitutes may be used for l i s t e d items.
"1. O-Ring (Packing) Used on load cell p r i o r to $9413-037

i n s t a l l i n g propeller.
*2. O-Ring (Packing) Used on propeller shaft p r i o r to $9413-142

i n s t a l l i n g load c e l l .
. Temperatu re Used to indicate fuel temperature 199Kf

Indicator and compressor discharge temper- (8-28VDC)
ature (T3). Omega Eng.
Inc. Stam-
ford, CT
*4. Anti-Rotation Used to prevent load c e l l sensor 283973-1

*5. Load Cell (Lebow) Used to obtain torque signal 283997-3

(5.68 inch in length).
, Torque Calibration Used to adapt to gage assemblies. 284453-1-1
Adapter Plate
*Components of 291862-2 torque test k i t .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.45
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAl NTENANCE MANUAL
R Table 520. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment (Cont)
Item Source/
No. Nomencl atu re Use Part No.
. Torque Calibration Used to adapt torque sensor 284461-i-1

Adapter Plate compensator raw torque pressure
8. Pt3/Tt3 Probe Used to sense compressor dis- 284542-2-1

Assembly charge pressure and temperature
during testing.
9. PropelI er Used for engine operational checks 284548-1-1

Test Stand and adjustments.
10. I n l e t Duct Used to provide uniform airflow 285591-1-1

and measure T2 temperature. or
298430-1-1
11. Exhaust Pipe Provides means for measuring T5 291822-2

and exhaust pressure (PsS). or
869578-6
12. Torque Test Kit bsed to obtain engine torque 291862-2

readout for required adjust-
ment of the torque system.
"13. Adapter Wrench Used to tighten bolts securing 292155-1

propeller to load c e l l .
"14. Digital Torque Used to display torque indication 292156-1

Indicator from load c e l l .
"15. Electrical Cable Used to connect load cell to 292158-1

digital torque indicator.
"16. Storage Case Used to store all components 292159-1

"17. Gage Assembly Used to read torque pressure. 292471-1
"19. Tube Assembly Used to connect compensator and 292473-1

transmitter adapter.
*Components of 291862-2 torque test k i t .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.46
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R Table 520. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment (Cont)
Item Source/
No. Nomencl a tu re Use Part No.
20. Extended Beta Tube Consists of 868369-1 beta tube 294626-3

Assembly used on Hartzell propeller
with load cell (Lebow) t h a t is
21. Extended Beta Tube Consists of 897657-1 beta tube 294626-9

Assembly used on Hartzell propeller with
load cell (Lebow) t h a t is 5.68
inches in length and 296974-4/-6
load cell spacer or with load cell
(Lebow) that is 6.68 inches in
length and 296974-2 load c e l l
spacer.
22. Depth Set Tool Used to set depth of 284542-2-1 295885-1

Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly.
23. Load Cell Spacer Used on Hartzell p r o p e l l e r 296974-2

with load c e l l (Lebow) t h a t is
24. Load Cell Spacer Used on Hartzell propeller 296974-4/-6

with load c e l l (Lebow) t h a t is
25. Compensating Used to check or adjust compen- 298191-1

Resistor sating r e s i s t o r s e t t i n g .
Tester K i t
26. Beta Tube Used with load c e l l (Lebow) 868369-2

t h a t is 6.68 inches in length.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.47
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R Table 521. Equipment and Materials
R Enamel (Glyptal 1201) Glyptal Inc, 305 Eastern Ave,

R Chelsea, MA 02150
R F-900 torque seal (Orange) Organic Products Co, 1963 E Irving Blvd,
R (Alternate for Glyptal) P.O. Box 428, Irving, TX 75060
IBM Computer Model AT Commercial ly avail able
or
IBM Computer Model XT Commercial ly available
or
IBM Compatible PC Commercial ly avail able
( Personal Computer)
Tile following capabilities are required of the above computers.
1. 256K Ram
2. NS-DOS2.0 or l a t e r version
3. Math co-processing chip
NOT.E: Equipment required to accomplish recompensation using engine

performance data reduction program No. TPEV3.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.48
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: To ensure test accuracy of propeller test stand per-

formance test, engine configuration shall be as speci-
fied in paragraph A and instrumentation accuracy as
R specified in Table 522. Ensure Lebow calibration is
R current in accordance with Table 523.
7. A. Engine Configuration on Propeller Test Stand
(1) I n s t a l l a calibrated 291862-2 torque test k i t and propeller.
(2) Install starter-generator.
(3) Install hydraulic pump.
(4) I n s t a l l a i r i n l e t sensing duct (Part No. 298430-1 or 285591-1-1)

with Tt2 temperature probes.
R (5) I n s t a l l special 291822-2 t a i l p i p e with Ps5 pressure taps and EGT

probes. (Tailpipe Part No. 869578-6 optional.)
(6) I n s t a l l propeller governor with monopole (propeller governor

monopole signal is 938 Hz at 100 percent rpm). Percentage type in-
dicator driven by tachometer generator is not acceptable. Torque
load cell (Lebow) having a monopole pick-up may also be used. In
t h i s case, 1591 Hz equal 100 percent rpm.
(7) No P3 bleed a i r on a n t i - i c e flow.
(8) No e l e c t r i c a l load.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.49
Aug 4/94
GIEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R Table 522. Propeller Test Stand Instrumentation Accuracy
Typical Required Resul rant Maximum

Parameter Range Accuracy Error
I n l e t Ter,~perature -18 to 49C +1 Count +0.5C (21F)

(Tt2) (0 to 120F) (±0.1% f u l l scale)
ITT (Tt4) -18 to 1094C +1 Count 21.5C (23F)

(0 to 200OF) (+0.1% f u l l scale)
Compressor Dis- -18 to 399C 21 Count +1C (22F)

charge Tempera- (0 to 750F) (+1% f u l l scale)
ture (Tt3)
PBarometer (PBar) 26 to 31 in. Hg +-0.25% +-0.075 in. Hg

(Same as Eng.
I n l e t Pressure
Pt2)
Exhaust Static 0 to -10 in. 21% 20.1 in H20

Pressure (Ps5) H20
Compressor Di s- 0 to 300 in. Hg 20.25% +0.15 in. Hg

charge Pressure
(Pt3)
Torque (Delta P) 0 to I00 psid +0.25% +0.25 psid

(See NOTE 1.)
Torque (Lebow 0 to 30,000 ±0.5% 2150 i n . - I b

Load Cell) in.-Ib
Speed (Propeller 0 to 1000 Hz +1 Count +2 propeller rpm

Governor Mono-
pole) (See NOTE 2.)
Fuel Flow (Wf) 0 to 500 I b +-0.5% +2.5 Ib per hr
per hr
Exhaust Gas -18 to 649C +1 Count ±1C (+1.8F)

Temperature (Tt5) (0 to 1200F)
NOTES
1. U t i l i z e d to check or re-establish torque plot.
2. Prop Governor Monopole Signal -938 Hz = 100 percent rpm. Percent type sys-
tem using tachometer generator is NOT acceptable. Monopole pickup of load
cell (Lebow) may be used. In this case 1591 Hz = i00 percent rpm.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.50
Aug 4/94
~70-~
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE HANUAL
7. B. Engine Preparation For Testing
NOTE: Ensure a l l instrument c a l i b r a t i o n s are current. In ad-

d i t i o n , items l i s t e d in Table 523 shall be calibrated
in accordance with c a l i b r a t i o n interval as indicated.
Table 523. Calibration Requirements
I tern C a l i b r a t i o n Interval
"1. Load Cell (Lebow Torquemeter) A f t e r each ten operations or six

months, whichever comes f i r s t . If
the instrument has been transported
from on f a c i l i t y to another, i t
shall be dead weight tested again in
accordance with Report No. 72-GE-06,
and SIL TPE331-102.
2. Torque Pressure Gage 1 year
3. Instrumentaion in 284548-1-1 6 months

Propeller Test Stand
*Dead weight t e s t shall be conducted on same Lebow, d i g i t a l torque readout

i n d i c a t o r and interconnecting wiring that w i l l be used in actual engine
performance t e s t s . This equipment shall not be interchanged l a t e r .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.51
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: Table 524 presents the actual physical speeds required to pro-
duce a corrected engine speeci for establishing standard day en-
gine mass a i r flows. These engine speeds should be used for
conducting performance c a l i b r a t i o n at engine i n l e t temperature
equal to or less than 15°C (59°F).
R Table 524. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine I n l e t Temperature
Engine Speed
Engine I n l e t (Frequency) Engine Turbine Propel l e r
Temperature (Prop Governor) Speed Shaft Speed
°C °F Hz RPM RPM
15 59 938 41,730 1591

14 58 937 41,690 1589
14 57 936 41,649 1588
13 56 935 41,609 1586
13 55 934 41,569 1585
12 54 933 41,528 1583
12 53 933 41,488 1582
11 52 932 41,447 1580
11 51 931 41,407 1579
10 50 930 41,366 1577
9 49 929 41,326 1576
9 48 928 41,285 1574
8 47 927 41,244 1572
8 46 926 41,204 1571
7 45 925 41,163 1569
7 44 924 41,122 1568
6 43 923 41,081 1566
6 42 922 41,040 1565
5 41 922 41,000 1563
4 4O 921 40.956 1561
4 39 920 40,918 1560
3 38 919 40,877 1558
3 37 918 40,835 1557
2 36 917 40,794 1555
2 35 916 40,753 1554
i 34 915 40,712 1552
i 33 914 40,671 1550
0 32 913 40,629 1549
-1 31 912 40,588 1547
-I 30 911 40,547 1546
-2 20 910 40,505 1544
-2 28 910 40,469 1543
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.52
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E RO S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R Table 524. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine I n l e t Temperature (Cont)
Engine Speed
Engine Inlet (Frequency) Engine Turbine Propeller
Temperature (Prop Governor) Speed Shaft Speed
°C °F Hz RPM RPM
-3 27 909 40,422 1541

-3 26 908 40,381 1539
-4 25 907 40,339 1538
-4 24 906 40,298 1536
-5 23 905 40,256 1534
-6 22 904 40,214 1533
-6 21 903 40,172 1531
-7 20 902 40,131 1530
7. B. (i) Set proper depth on 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly as follows.

(a) Remove a n t i - i c e line from bleed a i r extraction port located at
8 o'clock position looking from a f t forward. (See Figure
R 529.)
(b) Place 295885-1 depth set tool over gasket on selected bleed
air extraction port and press depth pin of 295885-1 depth set
tool through port hole until i t contacts the combustor. (See
R Figure 530.) Lock the pin with knurled setscrew and carefully
withdraw 295885-1 depth set tool from the bleed air extraction
port.
(c) Hold 295885-1 depth set tool and set 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe
R assembly on top of 295885-i depth set tool. (See Figure 531.)
(d) Loosen compression f i t t i n g and position 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3
probe assembly until probe just contacts the end of depth pin.
R (See Figure 531.)
R (e) Set the two probe tip openings (Figure 532) to point at any
corner of the 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly plate while
s t i l l maintaining probe/pin contact. Lock the probe in place
R using the compression f i t t i n g . (See Figure 531.) Remove
284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe ass~ibly from 295885-1 depth set
tool.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.53
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
PREFERRED BLEED AIR

EXTRACTION PORT
(
/-
#4
ANTI-ICE LINE F-44G-843

P2
Bleed A i r Extraction Ports and

A n t i - l c e Line (Typical)
72-00-00
UP136688
Figure 529
Page 598,54
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
\ \
D AIR EXTRACTION PORT
;KET INSTALLED)
'H SET TOOL
DEPTH SET PIN
F-44G-565
Setting Pin Depth of Depth Set Tool (Typical)

R Figure 530 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.55
Aug 4/94
~F~7N-~'A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pt3/l"t3 PROBEASSY
COMPRESSION FITTING
MOUNTING PLATE - - - - - ~ - ~ " ~
O
PROBEHEAD
SET SCREW
DEPTHSETTOOL
DEPTHSET PIN /
Pt3/'Tt3 PROBEASSY
(2OMPRESSIONFITTING
MOUNTING PLATE
SETSCREW. , ~
PROBEHEAD
J (COMPONENTOF
Pt3/~'t3 PROBEASSY)
DEPTHSETTOOL
DEPTH SET PIN F-44A-5185
Setting Pt3/Tt3 Probe Depth

Figure 531 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.56
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal
A E R O S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ir
F.-44A-4561
Pt3/Tt3 Probe Assembly Orientation

Figure 532 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.57
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
7. B. (2) I n s t a l l 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly on a n t i - i c e bleed a i r ex-

t r a c t i o n port so the openings at the probe tips are pointing to the
bleed a i r extraction port corner representing forward and down.
Secure Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts
(3) Cap a i r c r a f t bleed a i r extraction port with a blanking plate or

with 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly, i f applicable.
(4) Rer,love tube assemblies at P1 and P2 (Figure 529) (tube assembly at

P1 is customer connection) and cap f i t t i n g s at PI and P2 with two
$8495-6C caps or equivalent.
(5) Connect instrumentation cables 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly.

Connect Pt3 pressure l i n e (steel braided) to Pt3 f i t t i n g of Pt3/Tt3
probe assembly.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.58
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MAHUAL
-4 TO .-4
FITTING
1
CONNECT TO " - ' ~ ' ~ , , ~
Ps5 --
~ < VENT TO
AM,BlENT
TAPE
"-18"
I/4 INCH O.D.

TRANSPARENT
TUBING STICK MARKED IN I/4
INCH INCREMENTS
10-
i
THE READING IN INCHES OF WATER IS
THE TOTAL DISTANCE BETWEEN THE
= 2
Z -
WATER SURFACES. EXAMPLE SHOWN Z0= FILL WITH WATER TO

IS - 20 INCHES WATER. ZERO LEVEL MARK
.l -10-
-18-
TAPE
I-~A-3102
Manometer Fabrication
Figure 533 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.59
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: CLAMP OR PLUG AMBIENT VENT OR MANOMETER, DURING EN-

GINE STARTS, TO PREVENT STARTING TRANSIENT PRESSURES
FROM DISCHARGING WATER FROMMANOMETER. ENSURETHAT
CLAMP OR PLUG IS REMOVEDAND AMBIENT VENT IS COM-
PLETELY OPEN PRIOR TO TAKING READINGS DURING TEST.
NOTE: I f an accurate inches or water gage cannot be obtained

f o r Ps5 measurement, a water manometer may be f a b r i -
cated for the following procedure.
7. B. (6) Fabricate a water manometer using 0.250 inch outside diameter clear
plastic tubing. Manometer must be capable of measuring 35 inches
of water (positive and negative pressures). Refer to Figure 533
for sample. I n s t a l l manometer in test cell and connect a pressure
line between manometer and Ps5 port (located on engine exhaust
pipe).
WARNING: ENSURL THAT ALL CABLES, LINES, AND ELECTRICAL LEADS

ARE THOROUGHLYSECURED TO PREVENT COMPONENTSFROM
CONTACTING PROPELLER. IF PRUPELLER STRIKES COMPO-
NENTS, DAMAGETO EQUIPMENT~D POSSIBLE INJURY TO
PERSONNEL COULD OCCUR.
(7) Connect all other instrumentation cables, lines, and electrical

leads. Route along suitable support structurs. Tie wrap and tape
cables, lines, and leads as necessary to prevent damage during en-
gine operation.
(8) Ensure proper compensator setting and operation as follows.

(a) Obtain compensator part number, setting number and temperature
o f f s e t that is recorded in engines (D.S.C, sheet and/or engine
1og book).
Cb) Obtain part number and setting number that is stamped on com-
pensator i n s t a l l e d on engine. Using number obtained from com-
pensotor, temperature o f f s e t can be obtained from Table 525.
(c) Compare numbers obtained in step (b) to those obtained in step

Ca). Compensator part number, setting number and temperature
o f f s e t taken from engine records (step (a) should match those
taken fr~n c~npensator i n s t a l l e d on engine (step ( b ) ) .
NOTE: I f temperature offset does not meet tolerance

requirements of step (d), determine i f performance
problem was caused by improper compensation. Re-
evaluate need for recompensation.
(d) Apply power to propeller stand test c ell. Record EGT reading
and open c i r c u i t breaker which supplies power to compensator.
Difference between powered and unpowered readings shall equal
temperature offset obtained from engine records within -+3.6°F
(2°C). I f difference is not -+3.6°F (2°C) adjust, repair or
replace EGT compensator to correct problem.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.60
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R () S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. B. (8) (e) Reset c i r c u i t breaker.
NOTE: All engine starts and shutdowns shall be accomplished

in accordance with standard operating practices.
C. Engine Testing Requirements
R (1) Determine target torque value for each of f i v e test run points of
R Performance Data Sheet (Figure 534) as f o l l o w s .
R (a) Enter Figure 536 at current ambient temperature (Tt2) and

R determine the maximum operating temperature (Tt5).
R CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUMGEARBOX LIMIT OF

R 2773 FOOT-POUNDSTORQUE OR DAMAGETO EN-
R GINE MAY RESULT.
R (b) Operate engine and obtain either the maximum operating temper-
R ature (Tt5) or 2773 foot-pounds torque, whichever is reached
R first. Record engine torque at t h i s point as Test Point 5.
R (c) Calculate the target torque values for test points i through 4
R as follows. Enter the determined values in the target torque
R column of Figure 534.
Test point 4 = Test point 5 minus 150 f t - l b torque.
R (2) Deleted.
(3) Determine proper rpm to operate engine, while performing test, as

fol lows.
(a) When inlet temperature (Tt2) is equal to or greater than 59°F

(15°C), operate engine to propeller speed of 1591 rpm.
(b) When inlet temperature is less than 59°F (15°C), refer to

Table 524. Enter Table with engine i n l e t i~aeperature (Tt2).
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.61
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
cO
6
o ,9, '.-+m
Z I- - 7 1 - 0
--
n opO o~ 0
!
<
0--XXX ~ 8 0~-
XXX°
k- ~ 0121
< w
o£ 0 121 r r
"' ,,-i ~ 121 ~ n.- !11
°-XXX
I--
< @-,,
w ~z~
rr
0 rr 0
6O
m
°+XXX m o >0
~zO
m
+ ...,-
m O0
o+j
+ m
ul 0 ..
M rl Ill U I
ix" I.-
9 .iz % ! --.,
:~mlIl n"
~< ~ oz
0"3 @
-. zs~ "-
z_ -o'-' o,.,_ o._ ~
""+ _i~,,'T
_., 'm
-,-. o,, o,, __. -n
M
,.,- ®®
++ m
~ ~ > m m ~ ~ ~ o ~ ~ ~-
--I, z "r
o z
. . . . ~ Q
O.
o
-k u_
._, ,-,- 8o'-'
+ o
I--
,,,
D
,..u
rr
~ x1,11.1 <
~
:~ o:: w
>
-I-- ~
I.-- I- ,,~ < o o~ ~
o ~ o ~ ~ . ,,, ~ ~ o ~ "
Q 2 = < <~ ;< ,,, ~ o ,,'s, ~ ~
0 I,i W +Z
~> - ~ ~ o~ ,,, o~I~ o ~<_ < Q ~
zo ,.,- ~ ~< '-,- . <1 2 o < ._,
rr .<_co _~ rr ~ ','05 -----0 ~)
r-...¢ : 0
z~ ,,,
D ..
0. '"
0
~
O"D' o,,,
mO z
U.I w',- m, " z ~ me ,,,z ,,m
g "'× ,,, ~ ,?, ,,,~ i,,
,-,='"':~
0_ ~ < ~ - , o~ ~< ~
M
_
07,,, o,~ = =i, ~ l-l'r + ~l"r"
~
111
7~
0 O0 z~ rr m ~u
0 ~l-- [uo_ o_ 0 I-
UI
rr
® @ @@®
Performance Data Sheet
UP136688
F i g u r e 534 72-00-00
Page 598.62
Aug 4/94
4 lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE HN,I UAL
GARRETT T P E 3 3 1 - 5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
(5
Ill
"m
(5 LU09
Z (5
0
i 23
mU-Z
I-
tl.l O ~
n- > ,,<,
<~<n-
09 I~
I-.-
0
& • il.
,
i t
~ ~ 009
Q_
<
_.1G]I
09
~j ""i. '~ ~ O) ~ ~, <..0 IX. O > 0
Z
I1.1 t. , '~ oa "- ~ <
o ,,<.09
z o F-
I--
I.LI
ILl
09
n-
m- z ~ ~ ~, ,~ ~. ~ § ~ o~-~-
"r "r ~0 <~ O~ ~'~ m "~00
09 0 0 0
< , , iii o <~ I,, Z
121
,,o,~
121 I-- rr I----
7 8 :Fo --09
m,,~, "" ~o 'zo
09 N ~ Z ~-
m
~g / z o o o ,,- _.,- ,n o o - z
122 J-il_ -..I
rl
R "'
UJ n-
®®
O ~
~ w
=J
O
0_
Z
LU 09
_J -r 0
m
~
IJ.I
0
0 z- - Ca9
0 Z
f- ~. (5
m t- Z
4, 0 ×
I11 1 0 "'
"4-' u. tl.l LL n-
rr tu 0 n
~
,u.I
rr
rr
o_ o
-122 ~D i-
~,,,
09 ,~ 221 rr I---
uJ 09 Ill ~ 23 0 13._ tl_ W
n- Ill ~ ~ ~. 09
~- tU m ~
F- 0 ~ ILl
0 6O
~ ~ '"09 23 ~: -r UJ
[12
rr
0 6O.
~
U-
a~
ul ....1 ,, ,,, ~
Z ~ tu rr <
0 !-:
Om u -a ~ LLI "r X "~ tu 7
rr ,,, z ~ '" Z J
rr 0 LH
"' q .~ n- o 09 ~<~
Z
~"-s
tlJ I11 tll
~ ---a< ° N o
Z
iii ,,, ~ 8 [2 ~',,, 23 ~ (5 8 nw ~ m O wr r
>-
m rr u~ frO n- I-- rr O~
O rr Izlrr n ~ < I-- 09
nLU O rr
~ n- n-
<o ,,-i '"
Iii
o n-
o o~ o~ ~p~ ~o o~ ,~, , o~- n-
o I--- < ,~oN _z ua
n- Z) O ~ O _ o 231-- n_ ~- 23u_ C1 < Q-
69n- w ~--
O
O '~1- IJJo_ ~ I--
iii
n-
@ @ ®@®
Performance Data Sheet
F i g u r e 535 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 5 9 8 . 6 3
Aug 4 / 9 4
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
II}11
1050 i,,,,,,,,,,,,,, IIIII
IIII I
IIIII
lilll
4-4-
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : IIII IIIII
LL
iiJiiiiijjiiiii
...............
....
i. i. i. .i '
, It111
Itlll
lllll
++
iiiiii!!iiiiiii i~:i ~ IIIII
tllll
!!!!!
1040 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i iiii
W i. i .i i.i i. i i. i .i i.i i. i i. . . . i~ii l !'!
............... Jiii tllll
, I l l
iiiiiiiiiiiiii! iiii ItJli
IIIl! i :
Itill i :
iiiiiiijiiijiil iiii
"-"I020 . . . . . . . . . . .
iiiiiiiijiiiiii iiii jiii ~
ii..i~
TT
iiiiiiiiliiiiii iiii I"111
[ttl
B JJJJJJJJJJlilJl iiii IIII
Itli i i
IIII
iiiiiiiiiiiiiii i iJ.,i, I II I
............... ."r]!! !!!!
< iiiiiil]~L~.-~
till
IIII
!!!!
!!!!
iiiiiiiijjjiiil iiii !:::
980 ~ii~i~i[,:~iii ....
............... .i .i .i .i ,
: : [ : : : : : i i i i i i i .I
I .I
.I.I
!iii : !
IIII
Itll
till
IIII
!i!!iiiiJiiiiil iiiil !!!! ! ,
50 50 7O 80 90 100 II0
ENGINE INLET TOTAL TEMPERATURE (TT2) DEGREES F CG-44G-810
Maximum EGT (Tt5) Versus Engine I n l e t Temperature

R Figure 536 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.64
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Check all test equipment i n s t a l l a t i o n s to ensure they

are capable of measuring parameters shown in Figure
R 534. Ensure c a l i b r a t i o n of test equipment is current
R in accordance with Table 523.
7. C. (4) Adjust d i g i t a l torque indicator as follows.
NOTE: Ensure d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r and torquemeter have

been e l e c t r i c a l l y stabilized for a minimum of I hour
prior to setting.
(a) Set zero on indicator by adjusting coarse and fine balance

screws on d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r face plate.
(b) Set propeller rotation switch at (-) (counterclockwise) f o r

counterclockwise propeller r o t a t i o n (viewed from rear of
engine).
(c) Depress shunt, calibrate switch, and adjust coarse and fine
span to read c a l i b r a t i o n positions as specified in data sheet
provided with d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r .
(d) Recheck zero and span in accordance with preceding steps (a)
and (c). Repeat steps as necessary u n t i l required c a l i b r a t i o n
is achieved.
CAUTION: RECHECK CABLES, LINES, AND LEADS ROUTED ALONG AIR-

CRAFT WING AND NACELLE TO ENSURE THEY ARE SECURE
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE.
ENSURE THAT ITT CABLE IS CONNECTEDTO 199KF TEMPERA-

TURE INDICATOR AND THAT INDICATOR IS PROPERLY POSI-
TIONED IN AIRCRAFT CABIN TO NOIIITOR ITT DURING EN-
GINE STARTS AND TRANSIENT POWERSETTINGS BETWEEN
TEST TORQUE POINTS.
DO NOT EXCEED TORQUE LIMITS OR NAXlMUM ITT OPERATING

LIMIT ESTABLISHED IN STEPS (1) AND (2).
(5) S t a r t and operate engine until oil temperature is at normal operat-

ing range. Cycle propeller through reverse and normal operating
ranges several times ( f o r a minimum of 3 minutes) to ensure ade-
quate oil flow through torquemeter to bring oil to operating
temperatu re.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.65
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R O S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. C. (6) Shut down engine and recheck zero point and span c a l i b r a t i o n point
on the torque i n d i c a t o r .
(7) Restart engine and select 100% p r o p e l l e r RPM and advance power
lever u n t i l the propeller has achieved f u l l governing.
NOTE: With engine operating at reduced rotor speeds (below

59F ambient), as power lever is advanced engine rpm may
have a tendency to increase. Readjust engine speed to
R maintain speed reflected in Table 524 f o r ambient
temperature.
(8) Select t a r g e t torque (as determined in step (1)) f o r point 1 (see

R Figure 534) on the d i g i t a l torque i n d i c a t o r as the f i r s t data
point. Let parameters s t a b i l i z e f o r a minimum of 3 minutes and
record data in the sequence shown on performance data sheet. (See
R Figure 534.)
(9) Repeat step (8) above (using target torques detemined in step ( I ) )
R for points 2 through 5, Figure 534. Use Figure 535 only as a sam-
ple to check data f o r range, sign, and decimal l o c a t i o n .
NOTE: Fuel Temp is temperature of sample from which spe-

c i f i c gravity (S.G) was measured. Corrected S.G.
at 60°F is to be entered on performance data
sheet, Figure 534.
(10) Shut down engine and record corrected fuel specific g r a v i t y and
pressure a l t i t u d e on Figure 534. Correct fuel specific g r a v i t y
(S.G.) f o r deviation fr~n 60°F by using the following equation:
S.G (corrected) = S.G (measured) + ~(Fuel Temp °F - 60°F) x
o.ooo45)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.66
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: Instructions to obtain data reduction program No. TPEV3

R and user manual No. TPEV3UN are provided in
R SIL P331-149.
R The data reduction program is on two 5 - i / 4 inch, 360K

R floppy disk or one 3-1/2 inch, 720K floppy disk. The
R floppy disk is formatted for an IBM XT/AT, or IBM XT/AT
R compatible personal computer with 256K, RAM, MS-DOS 2.0
R or l a t e r and incorporates previously issue~ program No.
R 6876, 6877 and 6878, per SIL P331-136.
R Progra,l No. TPEV3 reduces, calculates, p l o t s , and

R prints out the test results that give the engine shaft
R horsepower, minimum and maximum compensations, and
R plots of computer generated curves based on the output
R of test data.
R To use program No. TPEV3 data reduction, r e f e r to user

R manual No. TPEV3UM.
R 7. D. Test Data Reduction
R (1) Computer inputs required f o r TPE PLOTTING SETUP are as follows.
R Minimum SHP: 840

R Nominal T4.1: 1693
R T4 Limit: 1850
NOTE: The l i m i t value, given in the following v a l i d i t y

check, are a guide f o r determining whether data,
as reduced on program TPEV3, is v a l i d . The l i m i t s
provided are based on a s t a t i s t i c a l studies of new
production engine performance parameters and known
normal d r i f t of these parameters as the engine
deteri orates.
R I f test data do not r e f l e c t l i m i t stated in v a l i d -

R i t y check, review input parameters from all data
R points to ensure that data are correct and was
R properly entered into computer. Most common er-
R rors are improper decimal point position and/or
R omitted signs for minus readings.
R (2) Perform the following v a l i d i t y check.
R Turbine flow parameter (T.F.P.) check - Check the TFP values, from
R reduced data, to ensure they are between the values of 1.50 to 1.65
R for at least 5 of the 7 data points. Check the data points that
R are not within this range f o r correct data inputs.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.67
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
HAINTEI,IANCE MANUAL
R 7. D. (3) Upon completion of test data reduction per program No. TPEV3, the
R computer output w i l l give the minimum required compensation and the
R maximum t r i m compensation. I f engine f a i l s to pass, compensation
R values w i l l not be given, and a r e j e c t message w i l l appear on com-
R puter p r i n t o u t . Refer to user manual No. TPEV3UM f o r more in depth
R explanations.
R E. Test Completion
NOTE: Upon completion of engine recompensation, previous
DSC is no longer v a l i d .
(1) Write the following statement, in heavy black ink, across previous
engine's DSC. (See Figure 537.)
"FOR CURRENT DATA REFER TO LATEST DSC."
DATED
(2) Generate a new DSC with data collected during recompensation,

Figure 538.
(3) Make entry in engine log noting recompensation completion date and
that the l a t e s t data is also recorded in new DSC.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.68
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE TESTS
~ q ' l O N TO ARDC
SEA LEVEL
NS
~S~P.ES~ r * CORRECTED
SHAFT POWER OUTPUT 85"/'

PROPELLERSHAFT SPEED (MAX)
SPECIFIC FUEL CONSUMPTION LB/SHP - HR (MAX) @ 0.6o5 ] -~ " t
COMPENSATED MEASURED °F 1693 j q.Go~'~
INTERSTAGETURBINE TEMPERATURE
AT RATED POWER 923 ~Z~
28,324 IN. - LBS TORQUE PRESSURE(Ap) ; RECORD
2260 IN. - LBS TORQUE PRESSURE(/',P) 57 ID RECORD I (2-
ATt4.1 COMPENSATION
ATt4.1 I
~ C
SETTING NO.
SIGNATURE
NOTE:
LAB TECHNICIAN
LAB TECHNICIAN
G-44G-330
Sample Data Sheet, Customer (DSC) (Typical)

R Figure 537 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.69
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE TESTS
*AFTER CORRECTION TO ARDC

STANDARD SEA LEVEL
CONDITIONS
SPEC
REQUIRED * CORRECTED
SHAFT POWER OUTPUT HP (MIN) 840
PROPELLER SHAFT SPEED RPM (MAX) 1591
SPECIFIC FUEL CONSUMPTION LB/SHP HR (MAX) @ 840 SHP

- 0.605 N/A
COMPENSATED MEASURED °F 1693

INTERSTAGE TURBINE TEMPERATURE
AT RATED POWER °C 923
28,324 IN. - LBS TORQUE PRESSURE(~P) 715 SHP, PSID PSID RECORD
2260 IN. - LBS TORQUE PRESSURE(/'.P) 57 SHP, PSID PSID RECORD
Z~Tt4.1 COMPENSATION OF °C
Tt4.1 COMPENSATOR PART NO. 897069-2 SETTING NO.
SIGNATURE DATE
NOTE: ACCEPTABLE COMPENSATION RANGE
FOR ENGINE:
LAB TECHNICIAN
MAXIMUM TRIM A Tt4.1 COMPENSATION
oCt LAB TECHNICIAN!
G-44G-311
Data Sheet, Customer (DSC)

Figure 538 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.70
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. F. Compensating Resistor Adjustment
(I) Perform compensating r e s i s t o r t e s t .
NOTE: Compensating r e s i s t o r setting is predeter-

mined f o r each engine and i d e n t i f i e d by a
setting number recorded on the engine DSC
(Data Sheet, Customer). Using a new compen-
sation value, find the corresponding setting
number in Table 525 to establish correct
voltage output value. I f required compensa-
tion f a l l s between two setting numbers, use
the next higher (more positive) setting.
(a) Remove compensation r e s i s t o r .
(b) Connect the compensating r e s i s t o r into the test setup. (See

Figure 539.) Note the reference junction is to provide a min-
imum temperature difference of the three d i s i m i l a r metal
(chromel-al umel, chromel-copper, and alumel-copper) connec-
tions; and thus, to minimize generated errors. The connectors
inside the junction should occupy a small volume and the ex-
cess space f i l l e d with a compound (epoxy) to achieve a con-
stant temperature. Ideally the reference junction should be
submerged in an ice-bath solution.
(c) With 28 VDC power supply turned o f f , turn on d i g i t a l voltmeter

and record voltage and sign either (+) or (-) displayed. This
voltage is a function of the d i s s i m i l a r metals.
(d) Turn on DC power supply and ensure the voltage level of the
power supply is 28 +I volts. The compensating r e s i s t o r is set
by removing the sealing screw to gain access to the setting
adjustment screw.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.71
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Output Requirements
Setting Mil l i v o l t Nominal Temperature Compensation

No. (+_0.O2O mV) +C +F
1 0 o c (+ OF)
2 +0.066 + 1.67C (+ 3F)
3 +0.132 + 3.34C (+ 6F)
4 +0.199 + 5.00C (+ 9F)
5 +0.265 + 6.67C (+12F)
6 +0.331 + 8.34C (+I5F)
7 +0.398 +IO.OOC (+ISF)
8 +0.464 +II.67C (+21F)
9 +0.530 +13.34C (+24F)
10 +0.597 +15,00C (+27F)
11 +0.663 +16.67C (+3OF)
12 +0.730 +18.34C (+33F)
13 +0.796 +20.00C (+36F)
14 +0.863 +21.67C (+39F)
15 +0.929 +23.34C (+42F)
16 +0.996 +25.00C (+45F)
17 +1.063 +26.67C (+48F)
18 +1.129 +28.34C (+51F)
19 +1.196 +30.00C (+54F)
20 +1.263 +31.67C (+57F)
21 +1.330 +33.34C (+6OF)
22 +1.396 +35.00C (+63F)
23 +1.463 +36.67C (+66F)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.72
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Output Requirements (Cont)
Setting Millivolt Nominal Temperature Compensation

No. (+0.020 mV) +C +F
24 +1.530 +38.34C (+ 69F)

25 +1.597 +40.00C (+ 72F)
26 +1.664 +41.67C (+ 75F)
27 +1731 +43.34C (+ 78F)
28 +1,798 +45.00C (+ 81F)
29 +1865 +46.67C (+ 84F)
3O +1.932 +48.34C (+ 87F)
31 +1999 +50.00C (+ 9OF)
32 +2.066 +51.67C (+ 93F)
33 +2.133 +53.34C (+ 96F)
34 +2.200 +55.00C (+ 99F)
35 +2.267 +56.68C (+102F)
36 +2.335 +58.33C (+105F)
37 +2.402 +60.01C (+I08F)
38 +2.469 +61.67C (+IIIF)
39 +2.536 +63.35C (+II4F)
4O +2.604 +65.01C (+117F)
41 +2.671 +66.67C (+120F)
42 +2.738 +68.35C (+123F)
43 +2.806 +70.00C (+126F)
44 +2.873 +71.66C (+129F)
45 +2.941 +73.33C (+132F)
46 +3.008 +75.00C (+135F)
47 +3.076 +76.66C (+138F)
48 +3.143 +78.33C (+141F)
49 +3.211 +80.00C (+144F)
5O +3.278 +81.66C (+147F)
51 +3.346 +83.33C (+I50F)
NOTE: I f the output reading does not correspond to a listed setting number,
use the more positive setting number.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.73
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEADS TWISTEDTOGETHER REFERENCEJUNCTION

AND IDEALLYWELDED
"WITHOUT USE OF ANY THIS ENCLOSEDSPACE
OTHER METAL. '~ / FILLEDWITH EPOXY.
o DIGITAL
VOLTMETER
o (DVM)
---- CH ( ) .--- 4-
~ A L L CHROMEL (c.) AND ALUMEL

(AL) LEADS MAXIMUM OF S FEET
LONG. AMERICANWIRE GAGE
NUMBER 18 TO 24. (DIA. IN
INCHES 0.040 TO 0.020)
J2 Jl "
COMPENSATING
RESISTOR
AL
1 POWERSUPPLY
J
USE BENDIX SG3106E-10SL-565CONNECTOR 1
USE BENDIX
SG3106E-14S-52S
I DC BATTERYOR
CONNECTOR [RECTIFIED POWER SB-1938R4
Compensating Resistor Test Setup Diagram

R Figure 539 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.74
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: USE OF PROPERSIZE JEWELERS SCREWDRIVER WHEN

ADJUSTING THE SETTING ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
NOTE: Part No. 897069 is positive compensation, clock-

wise rotation of setting screw increases the set-
ting number. Total range of setting screw is ap-
proximately 25 turns.
7. F. (I) (e) Turn setting screw with the power supply turned on u n t i l
desired voltage i s displayed. To determine voltage use f o l -
lowing algebraic equation:
(VOLTAGE) SETTING + (VOLTAGE) POWEROFF = (VOLTAGE) POWERON
R See Table 525 which correlates setting number and voltage.

The following examples show typical values which may occur
when setting the compensating r e s i s t o r , keeping in mind that
these are examples and there is a tolerance on the setting
voltage:
Example A

setting voltage of 1.196 mv. With power o f f , the voltage in-
dicated is 0.020 mv.
1.196 + 0.020 = 1.216 mv
Example B

setting voltage of 0.066 mv. With power o f f , the voltage in-
dicated is -0.020 mv.
0.066 + (-0.020) = 0.046 mv
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.75
Aug 4/94
~VG70-~A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. F. (2) (f) After setting is accomplished, lock setting screw with a drop
R of Glyptal 1201. Record setting number in space provided on
compensating r e s i s t o r by means of an ink stamp or stencil. If
compensating r e s i s t o r is being r e c a l i b r a t e d , o b l i t e r a t e e x i s t -
ing number before r e i d e n t i f y i n g . Replace sealing screw and
1ockwi re.
(g) Record new compensation value, compensator setting number and

compensator part number in the engine log book.
(h) I n s t a l l compensating r e s i s t o r in accordance with 77-20-03,

(i) Remove and secure a l l test cables and test equipment.
(j) I n s t a l l a n t i - i c e f i t t i n g on bleed a i r extraction port on en-

gine plenum. Tighten nuts to torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(k) Start engine and perform operational checks (adjust as

required) in accordance with Adjustment/Test. Shut down
engine.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 598.76
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: The test requirements l i s t e d below is a partial l i s t i n g .

Refer to individual component Chapter/Section/Subject for
test requirements when removal/installation is
accompl i shed.
8. Test Requirements for Repaired Engines
A. Test Requirements
(1) Perform the following test requirements, whenever gearbox

(diaphragm), fuel control/power management controls are removed, or
rotating group is disassembled.
(a) Removal of gearbox (diaphragm) requires an indicated torque
output check in accordance with paragraph 3.F. and NTS system
check by f l i g h t check in accordance with paragraph 3.G.
(b) Removal of fuel control/power management controls requires ad-

justments and tests outlined in 76-10-01, Maintenance Prac-
tices and paragraph 4, Fuel Control Adjustments.
(c) Disassembling of turbine section requires engine operational

tests in accordance with P i l o t Operational Handbook/Aircraft
Flight Manual and A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual i f required.
(2) Perform vibration check requirements, whenever f i r s t stage impeller

is replaced or removed from main shaft, or second stage impeller is
replaced, or main shaft is replaced.
(3) Remove of f i r s t and/or second stage impeller w i l l require an NTS

system check by f l i g h t check and NTS syst~a ground check.
(4) I f main shaft was stretched using 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r , perfom] an

NTS system check by f l i g h t check and NTS system ground check.
(5) An engine recompensation is required i f any of the following condi-

tions apply.
(a) F i r s t or second stage impeller was replaced.
(b) Engine compressor was reshimmed.
(c) I f current DSC i n f o m a t i o n is not available, new DSC values

must be generated a f t e r completion of hot section inspection.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 598.77
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTEI~ANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: Retorque of nuts or bolts is not required unless

R the component l i s t e d was removed and r e - i n s t a l l e d
R p r i o r to engine operational t e s t i n g .
R . A. (6) A f t e r completion of engine operational t e s t s , retorque nose cone,

R diaphragm, and compressor s p l i t l i n e retaining nuts and bolts as
R specified below.
R (a) I f the nose cone was rB,~oved, tighten r e t a i n i n g nuts to a

R torque value of 80 inch-pounds. Tighten retaining bolt to a
R torque value of i00 inch-pounds.
R (b) I f the diaphragm was removed, tighten r e t a i n i n g nuts to a

R torque value of 80 inch-pounds.
R (c) I f the accessory drive housing was removed, tighten compressor

R s p l i t l i n e retaining bolts and nuts to a torque value of 50
R inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-00-00
R NOTE: Pages 598.79 thru 598.132 deleted. Page 598.78
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R () S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72 - INSPECTION/CHECK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
I NSPECTION/CHECK
i . General 601
A. Removed Components and Parts 601
Ins pection Requi rements
B. Unscheduled Maintenance Requirements 601
C. Detailed and General Inspection 602
Requi rements
D. Life Limited Components 602A
R E. Time Between Overhaul (TBO)/Continuous 602A
R Airworthiness Maintenance
R Operation (CAMO)
. Perioaic Inspection 603

Ae General Information 603
B. Periodic Inspection Requirements 603
C. Compensating Resistor Temperatu re 611
Correction Value Check
De Hot Section Inspection 611
E. Gearbox Inspecti on 614
F. Fuel Control/Fuel Pump I n t e g r i t y 625
Inspecti on
Gi Emergency Shutdown System Check 637
R H. Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Mating DA-GA 639
R Splines Inspection
. Special Inspections 644

A. Accident or Incident Inspection 644
Requi rements
R B. Abnormal Load Inputs (Propeller 645
R Strike) Inspection
R B1. Del e ted
C. Lightning Strike Inspection 664
D. Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program 666
(SOAP) Check
E. Oil System Contamination Inspection 667
F. Engine Mounting Pad Inspection 669
R G. Bird Ingestion or Bird Impact 670
Inspection
H. Overspeed Inspection 682
I. Engine Over-Torque Inspection 684
R J. Turbine Over Temperature Inspection 685
R K. Uil Over Temperature Inspection 689
INSPECTION/CHECK
72-CONTENTS
UP136688
Page 1
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA(I E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72 - INSPECTION/CHECK
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
ADDENDUM 601
INDEX OF INSPECTION PROCEDURES
I . General
2. How To Use
INSPECTION/CHECK
72-CONTENTS
UP136688
Page 2
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
NOTE: The a p p l i c a t i o n of general maintenance practices introduced

in t h i s manual are on the smne guidelines as FAA Manual
AC65-9, Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
For those maintenance practices not covered in t h i s Main-
tenance Manual, use FAA Manual AC65-9, Airframe and Power-
plant Mechanics General Handbook.
A. Removed Components and Parts Inspection Requirements
Inspection checks and procedures in t h i s publication are those which can

be performed at f i e l d level to aid in determining i f a component or part
is serviceable. All components or parts removed f r ~ , the engine shall
be given a careful visual inspection f o r general appearance and obvious
damage. A component or part which shows evidence of damage beyond f i e l d
level repair c a p a b i l i t i e s shall be replaced. The damaged component or
part should be sent to an AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for
repair.
B. Unscheduled Maintenance (Repair or Modification) Requirements
(1) A careful visual inspection for general appearance and damage shall
be accomplished on a l l removed components (bearings, seals, etc.)
and accessible parts of modules, assemblies, sub-assemblies, etc.
(2) Disassembly of the engine f o r the purpose of unscheduled mainte-

nance (repair or modification) does not require that the
inspection/check procedures of t h i s publication be accomplished un-
less circumstances preceding the maintenance action or visual in-
spection of the components involved dictate that a detailed inspec-
tion is prudent.
(3) When disassembly is performed during unscheduled maintenance to the

extent that f i r s t or second or t h i r d stage turbine rotors are
removed, the rotors shall be v i s u a l l y checked f o r cracks. Cracks
are not allowed.
(4) When disassembly is performed, during unscheduled maintenance to

the extent that f i r s t or second stage impellers are removed, the
impeller shall be v i s u a l l y checked f o r cracks. Cracks are not
al I owed.
(5) When the engine is being inspected f o r an occurrence in which the

engine seized under any power setting or shut down without proper
cool down procedures in accordance with the A i r c r a f t F l i g h t Manual,
the fuel nozzles should be removed and flow tested in accordance
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 601
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 1. B. (6) Main shaft turbine nut shall be visually inspected for p i t t i n g and
R other damage anytime i t is accessible during unscheduled
R maintenance. Replace main shaft turbine nut i f p i t t i n g or other
R damage is evident.
C. Detailed and General Inspection Requirements
Detailed inspection/check instructions are provided f o r major components

and parts in the section of this publication where removal of that item
is described. In addition to those detailed instructions the following
general inspection instructions shall be performed.
(1) Visually inspect a l l welded, brazed, and soldered assemblies for

security of j o i n t s .
(2) Visually check a l l external surfaces and components of the entire
engine for cracks. No cracks are allowed.
(3) Visually inspect a l l tubes for kinks, cracks, excessive wear, signs
of corrosion and other damage. Inspect all f i t t i n g s for broken
threads, deterioration, and cleanliness.
(4) Inspect o i l drained from engine. I f excessive metal particles are

found or i f particles are magnetic in nature, contact AlliedSignal
Engines Field Service Engineers for disposition.
(5) Check for fuel and oil leaks.
(6) Check drains and vents for restrictions.
(7) Check compressor i n l e t for foreign material, obstructions and

damage.
(8) Check i n l e t t~iperature and pressure sensor f o r security and evi-

dence of damage or leakage.
(9) Check oil level.
(10) Check security of i g n i t i o n wiring and connections.
(11) Check for oil seal leakage around starter-generator mount,

tachometer generator mount, a i r c r a f t accessory mount, and fuel con-
t r o l assembly mount.
(12) Check for o i l leakage around base of feathering valve assembly and
beta pressure switch.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 602
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal FIAINTENANCE MANUAL

1. c. (13) When any disassembly is performed which permits inspection of

gears or splined parts, check for abnormal wear patterns, chipped
and broken teeth, enlarged and peened keyways, scoring, grooving,
scuffing, p i t t i n g , g a l l i n g and other damage. Spline tooth wear
shall not exceed i0 percent except in fuel pump drive coupling.
Refer to 73-20-01, Maintenance Practices, f o r fuel pump assenlbly
drive coupling inspection and wear l i m i t s .
D. Life Limited Cmnponents
For information concerning l i f e limite~ components, refer to Service

B u l l e t i n No. 72-0019.
E. Title Between Overhauls (TBO)/Continuous Airworthiness Fiaintenance Opera-

tion (CAIiO)
R NOTE: AlliedSignal furnished accessories mounted on the en-

R gine have ti,e same TBO/CAMO inspection irizerval as the
R engine. AlliedSignal furnished electronic components,
R rB,Jotely mounted from the engine, may remain in service
R as long as they are functionally tested and perform as
R prescribed in the Engine haintenance I Ianual at time of
R overhaul interval (TBO) or (CAMO) inspection i n t e r v a l .
TBO inspection interval periods are specified in Service Bulletin No.

72-0404.
CAMO inspection interval periods are specified in Service Bulletin No.

72-0823.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 602A/602B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A F, R 0 S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Periodic Inspection
A. General Information
(1) Recommended inspection intervals should not be exceeded by more

than i0 hours and shall be performed on components as outlined and
at intervals specified in Table 601.
NOTE: Engine operating hours are defined as any time the

engine is operated in f l i g h t ( l i f t o f f or
touchdown).
(2) Upon completion of these inspections (except for p r e - f l i g h t itBas)

make an engine log book entry noting engine operating time.
B. Periodic Inspection Requirements
Refer to Table 601 for recommended Periodic Engine Inspection

Requi rements.
Table 601. Periodic Inspection Requirements
Each Each Each Each

R Pre- 100 150 200 300
Nature of Inspection Flight Hour Hour Hour Hour
AIR INLET - Check f o r obstruction

and evidence of FOD. Obstruction
and FOD are not acceptable.
AIR INLET AND EXHAUST PIPE - Check X

f o r oil leakage from compressor
and turbine a i r - o i l seals.
OIL LEVEL - Must be above ADD mark. X

I f not acceptable, refer to (Daily)
Servicing.
(CODES AA, CA, PRE SB 73-0029)

(CODES DA-FB, PRE SB 73-0131)
FUEL CONTROL/FUEL PUMP
INTEGRITY INSPECTION-
(Refer to paragraph 2.F., Fuel
Control/Fuel Pump I n t e g r i t y
Inspection.)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 603
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 601. Periodic Inspection Requirements (Cont)
Each Each Each Each Each

R 100 150 200 300 400
Nature of Inspection Hour Hour Hour Hour Hour
FUEL FILTER- (PN 865791-4) Remove, X

clean and inspect for damaged and
separated screen. (PN 897513-1,
Disposable Fuel F i l t e r Element)
Remove and replace with new f i l -
ter element. (Refer to 73-21-03,
Maintenance Practices. )
R OIL FILTER - Remove, inspect and replace See NOTE.

f i l t e r element. (Refer to 79-20-02,
Maintenance Practices.)
R NOTE: Inspection may be accomplished in conjunction with an

R airframe inspection, but do not exceed 155 hours.
R COMPENSATINGRESISTOR - Test temperature

compensation value. (Refer to paragraph
2.C., Compensating Resistor Test.)
1NPUT GEARBOX DRAIN - (Check to

ensure drain is open) Use a i r to check
drain port passage as damage to
crossover duct could result from the
use of hard a r t i c l e s to check passages.
R (PRE SB 72-0416) STARTER/ *X

GENERATOR DRIVE SPLINES -
Inspect and lubricate. (Refer to
Servicing.)
* I n i t i a l inspection/lubrication at 100 hours. Subsequent inspection/

l u b r i c a t i o n at 200 hour i n t e r v a l .
FIRST STAGE COMPRESSORIMPELLER - In-

spect for foreign object damage. (Refer
to 72-30-01, Maintenance Practices.)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 604
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

150 200 300 400 600
AIR ANTI-ICE VALVE - (PN 319980-5-1

only) Remove, disassemble, clean
and inspect. (Refer to 75-10-01,
Maintenance Practices. )
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEMS -

Operate a i r f r ~ l e emergency feather/
fuel shutoff systems to determine
i f engine feathering val ve and
fuel shutoff valve have actuated.
Refer to paragraph 2.G.
(CODES AA-CC) P3 AIR FILTER -

Remove, clean ana inspect. (Refer
to 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.)
R OVERSPEEDGOVERNOR CHECK - (Refer X

to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.)
PLUMBING LINES AND CONNECTIONS - X

Check for s e c u r i t y , leaks, cracks,
cuts ana rubbing.
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTIONS - X

Check for security and damage.
NAGNETIC DRAIN PLUG - Remove and inspect. X

(For two-piece u n i t , r~.1ove knurled plug
and perform visual inspection.) (Refer to
79-30-01, Maintenance Practices.)
IGNITER PLUGS - Remove, clean and

inspect. (Refer to 74-20-01, Maintenance
Practices.)
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 604A/604B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

200 300 400 600 900
(CODES AB-BA, CB-FB) FUEL

MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM (10 MICRON)
FILTER - Remove, clean and inspect.
(Refer to 73-10-13, Maintenance Practices.)
FLOW DIVIDER AND DRAIN VALVE FILTER -

Remove, clean and inspect for damaged
or separated screen. (Refer to 73-10-07,
R CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY - Check f o r

security of locking features. Check
for proper alignment of control rod,
arms, levers and damage.
Check bolts and screws securing
levers and arms to serrated shafts.
Lubricate rod end bearings i f binding
is noted. (Refer to 76-10-01, Mainte-
nance Practices.)
R PLENUM DRAIN VALVES - Check operation

of plenum drain valves without rBaoving
frm,~ engine as fol Iows.
With engine not operating,

plenum drain valves should be
open. Open position may be
assured i f a i r passes f r e e l y
through valve when s l i g h t a i r
pressure is applied at the
attached drain tubes.
(CODES AA-BA, DA-FB) TORQUE LIMITER

(FUEL BYPASS) VALVE FILTER -
Remove and clean.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 605
Aug 4/94
G~GTQ-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTEHANCE MANUAL

R 200 300 400 600 900
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY - See NOTE.

Functional Check (Perform Dynamic
Pressure Flow Test.)
(Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.)
NOTE: Fuel nozzle assemblies must be replaced with new or cleaned

nozzle assemblies a f t e r 400 operating hours i f Dynamic Pressure
Flow Test was not performed during i n s t a l l a t i o n .
Fuel nozzle assemblies may be operated past 400 operating

hours, without removal for cleaning, by performing Dynamic
Pressure Flow Test upon fuel manifold assembly i n s t a l l a t i o n .
Perform Dynamic Pressure Flow Test at 400 operating hours and
at each succeeding 200 operating hours until f a i l u r e of Dynamic
Pressure Flow Test.
R (CODES DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0104/73-0051) *X

FUEL PUMPASSEMBLY DRIVE COUPLING -
Inspect and l u b r i c a t e .
(Refer to 73-20-01, Maintenance
Practices.) No inspection/
l u b r i c a t i o n required f o r engine
incorporating SB 72-0104 and SB 73-0051.
* I n i t i a l i n s p e c t i o n / l u b r i c a t i o n at f i r s t a i r c r a f t inspection a f t e r 200 hours

engine operation. Subsequent i n s p e c t i o n / l u b r i c a t i o n each 400 hours.
(CODES AA-CC, Pre SB 72-0104/73-0054) *X

FUEL PUMPASSEMBLY DRIVE COUPLING-
Inspect and l u b r i c a t e .
(Refer to 73-20-01, Maintenance Practices.)
No i n s p e c t i o n / l u b r i c a t i o n required
f o r engines incorporating SB 72-0104
and SB 73-0054.
* I n i t i a l i n s p e c t i o n / l u b r i c a t i o n at f i r s t a i r c r a f t inspection a f t e r 200 hours

engine operation. Subsequent i n s p e c t i o n / l u b r i c a t i o n each 400 hours.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 606
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

200 300 400 600 900
(CODES AA-CC) PNEUMATICTUBE ASSEMBLY FLARES

AND SLEEVES - Inspect for cracks
or corrosion. (Refer to 73-10-01,
(PRE SB 72-0486) TACHOMETER

GENERATOR DRIVE -
Inspect and l u b r i c a t e . (Refer to
72-00-00, Servicing.)
(CODES AA, AB, CA)

DIRECT DRIVE FUEL CONTROL
BACKLASH INSPECTION - (Refer to
SB 72-0095.)
R ENGINE OIL, TYPE I ONLY- Change
PLENUH DRAIN VALVES - Remove and t e s t X

f o r closing and opening. (Refer to
72-00-05, Maintenance Practices.)
R ENGINEOIL, TYPE I I ONLY- Change
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 607
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-0i-27)

200 300 400 600 900
(CODES AA, CA, POST SB 73-0029)

(CODES AB-BA, CB, CC)
(CODES DA-FB, POST SB 73-0131) (CODE GA)
FUEL CONTROL/FUEL PUMP See NOTE.
INTEGRITY INSPECTION -
(Refer to paragraph 2.F., Fuel
Control/FuR Pump I n t e g r i t y
Inspection.)
NOTE: Accomplish inspection at 3500 to 3700 hour interval i f operat-

ing on the 5400 hour TBO i n t e r v a l .
Accomplish inspection at 2900 to 3100 hour interval i f operat-

ing on the 600U hour interval or i f operating on Continuous
Airworthiness Maintenance Operation (CAMO) inspection i n t e r v a l .
This inspection is not required i f operating on the 3600 hour

interval.
R (CODES DA-GA) FUEL CONTROL/ See NOTE.

R FUEL PUMP ASS~IBLY MATING SPLINE
R INSPECTION - (Refer to paragraph
R 2.H., Fuel Control/Fuel Pump
R Ass~ibly Mating Spline Inspection.)
R NOTE: Accomplish inspection at 3500 to 3700 hour interval i f operat-

R ing on the 5400 hour TBO i n t e r v a l .
R Accomplish at time of overhaul i f operating on 3600 hour TBO.
R Accomplish inspection at 2900 to 3100 hour interval i f operat-

R ing on the 6000 hour TBO or CAMO i n t e r v a l .
GEARBOX INSPECTION - (Refer See NOTE.

to Gearbox Inspection.)
NOTE: Refer to Service Bulletin 72-0404 or 72-0823 for required i n -

spection i n t e r v a l .
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 608
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

200 300 400 600 900
COMPRESSOR BEARING - Inspect See NOTE.

in accordance with 70-00-00,
Standard Practices.
NOTE: Accomplish inspection in conjunction with gearbox inspection.

Replace as required in Service B u l l e t i n 72-0404 or 72-0823.
COMPRESSORAIR-OIL SEAL See NOTE.

AND ROTOR - Inspect in accordance with
HOT SECTION INSPECTION - See NOTE.

(Refer to Hot Section Inspection.)
R NOTE: Refer to Service Bulletin 72-0404 or 72-0823 for required in-

spection interval.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 609
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTE[IANCE MANUAL

2OO 300 400 600 900
biAGNESIUM COMPONEIITIilSPECTIOI~ *Annually
OUTPUT GEARBOXHOUSING (NOSE CONE) - See NOTE.

For corrosion l i m i t a t i o n s refer to
72-10-09, Inspection/Check.
INTERMEDIATE GEARBOXASSEMBLY See NOTE.

(DIAPHRAGM) - For corrosion
l i m i t a t i o n s refer to 72-10-13,
Inspection/Check.
INPUT HOUSING ASSEMBLY (ACCESSORY See NOTE.

DRIVE) For corrosion l i m i t a t i o n s
-
refer to 72-10-20, Inspection/Check.
NOTE: Remove all cowling and access panels to maximize access to areas to be
inspected.
Remove o i l , d i r t and other foreign matter, r e f e r to 72-00-00,

Cl eani ng/Pal nti ng.
Inspect exposed paint surfaces f o r defective or damaged paint, missing,

peeling, cracked, blistered, crinkled or scratched paint shall be reason
f o r repair. There is no l i m i t to tile size or number of areas of defec-
t i v e or damaged paint that may be repaired providing corrosion has pene-
trated less than 0.010 inch. I f corrosion is 0.010 inch or more refer to
appropriate section for inspection l i m i t s . Repair shall be accomplished
in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Repair of Defective or
Damaged Paint and Minor Corrosion on Magnesium Components.
*To be accomplished in conjunction with airframe annual inspection or

equivalent a i r c r a f t inspection.
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY See NOTE.
SPUR AND HELICAL (SUN AND BULL) See NOTE.

GEAR ASSEMBLY

Return assembly to AlliedSignal authorized f a c i l i t y f o r in-
volute inspection at TBO interval specified in Service B u l l e t i n
72-0404 or as specified in CAMO Service B u l l e t i n 72-0823.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 610
Aug 4/94
lslied
NOTE: Refer to Table 601 for hourly interval inspection

requirement.
2. C. CompensatingResistor Temperature Correction Value Check
(1) Check ITT Indicator temperature reading with power o f f and with
power on while operating engine at a steady state condition.
(2) Difference between power o f f and power on readings shall approxi-

R mate temperature compensation specified on latest engine DSC or in
R engine log book. I f temperature value does not agree with setting
R recorded on engine DSC or engine log book, refer to 77-20-03,
R Adjustment/Test for compensating resistor adjustment.
D. Hot Section Inspection
NOTE: Inspection of hot section components may be accomplished at

any time but shall be accomplished following any engine
overtemperature condition specified in Adjustment/Test Table
503, Maximum Permissible Operating Limits, and at engine
operating hours specified in Table 601.
(1) Removeengine components for hot section inspection, observing the

following.
(a) Remove oil i n l e t retainer shield assembly. Refer to 72-50-01,
(b) Remove t a i l cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(c) Remove o i l i n l e t f i t t i n g and oil pressure j e t . Refer to

(d) Remove turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to 72-50-04,

(e) Remove exhaust pipe assembly. Refer to 72-50-05, Maintenance

Practices.
(f) Remove turbine plenum assembly and combustion chamber

assembly. Refer to 72-40-01, Maintenance Practices.
(g) Remove interstage turbine temperature assembly (single piece),
turbine bearing and bearing support (carrier) and bearing sup-
port assembly. Refer to 72-50-06, Maintenance Practices.
(h) Remove t h i r d stage turbine stator and second and t h i r d stage

turbine wheel assemblies. Refer to 72-50-07, Maintenance
Practices.
(i) Remove f i r s t stage turbine wheel, f i r s t and second stage sta-

tor assemblies and ITT sensor assembly (multi-piece). Refer
to 72-50-08, Maintenance Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 611
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~_/lied
ignal
Table 602. Inspection of Hot Section Components
Component Inspection Requirements
(Pre SB 72-0052) First Stage Tur- Refer to 72-50-08, Inspection/Check

bine Stator and Liner Assembly
(One-Piece)
(Post SB 72-0052) First Stage Tur- Refer to 72-50-08, Inspection/Check
bine Stator and Liner Assembly
(Three-Piece)
Combustion Transition Liner Assembly Refer to 72-30-03, Inspection/Check
(Outer)
Combustion Chamber Assembly Refer to 72-40-01, Inspection/Check
Third Stage Turbine Stator Refer to 72-50-07, Inspection/Check
Second Stage Turbine Stator Refer to 72-50-08, Inspection/Check
Turbine Bearing Refer to 72-50-06, Inspection/Check
Turbine Bearing Support Assembly Refer to 72-50-06, Inspection/Check
(Post SB 72-0042) Interstage Tur- Refer to 72-50-06 and 77-20-03,
bine Temperature (ITT) System Inspection/Check
(Single-Piece)
Third Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly Refer to 72-50-07, Inspection/Check
Second Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly Refer to 72-50-07, Inspection/Check
First Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly Refer to 72-50-08, Inspection/Check
First Stage Segment Shroud Refer to 72-50-08, Inspection/Check
Curvic Coupling (Center Curvic Refer to 72-50-08, Inspection/Check
Coupling)
Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Refer to 73-10-09, Inspection/Check

and Adjustment/Test
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 612
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL •/l•edignal
2. D. (2) Inspect hot section components. Refer to Table 602 for hot section
components requiring inspection.
(3) Reassemble engine following hot section inspection as follows.

(a) I n s t a l l f i r s t stage turbine wheel and f i r s t and second stage
turbine stator assemblies. Refer to 72-50-08, Maintenance
Practices.
(b) I n s t a l l t h i r d stage stator and second and t h i r d stage turbine
wheel assemblies. Refer to 72-50-07, Maintenance Practices.
(c) I n s t a l l ITT sensor assembly, turbine bearing and bearing sup-

port ( c a r r i e r ) and bearing support assembly. Refer to
(d) Install turbine plenum assembly and combustion chamber

(e) Install exhaust pipe assembly. Refer to 72-50-05, Maintenance

Practices.
(f) I n s t a l l turbine scavenge pump. Refer to 72-50-04, Maintenance
Practices.
(g) I n s t a l l oil i n l e t f i t t i n g and oil pressure j e t . Refer to

(h) I n s t a l l t a i l cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(i) Install oil i n l e t retainer shield assembly. Refer to

(4) Upon completion of hot section inspection a engine indicated torque

output functional check is required, unless calibration has been
accomplished within the last 500 hours. Refer to Adjustment/Test.
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 613
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
rJAl NTENANCE MANUAL
2. E. Gearbox Inspection
NOTE: Inspection of gearbox and components may be accom-

plished at anytime but shall be accomplished at engine
operating hours specified in Table 601.
R (i) Disassemble engine as follows to f a c i l i t a t e gearbox inspection.

R Further disassembly of components beyond requirements in step (I)
R not required unless components do not meet specified inspection
R c r i t e r i a outlined in step (2).
(a) Remove beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove and disassemble propeller pitch control assembly.

(c) Remove shaft o i l seals. Refer to 72-10-08, Maintenance

Practices.
(d) Remove nose cone assembly (output gearbox housing assembly).

Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices. Do not disassemble.
Remove as an assembly f o r gearbox inspection.
(e) Remove o i l transfer tubes. Refer to 72-10-10, Maintenance

Practices.
(f) Remove torsion spline ( q u i l l ) shaft and coupling assembly.
(g) Remove planet c a r r i e r and gear assenlbly. Refer to 72-10-12,
Maintenance Practices. Do not disassemble. Remove as an as-
sembly f o r gearbox inspection.
(h) Remove ring gear assembly and ring gear support assembly.
(i) Remove diaphragm assembly (intermediate gearbox assembly).

Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices. Do not disassemble.
Remove as an assembly f o r gearbox inspection.
R (j) (Pre SB 72-0819) Disassemble as required to remove diaphragm

o i l j e t assemblies. Refer to 72-10-12, Maintenance Practices.
(k) Remove fuel control drive gear t r a i n . Refer to 72-10-15,

Maintenance Practices. Do not disassemble. Remove as an as-
sembly f o r gearbox inspection.
(I) Remove torque sensor assembly. Refer to 72-10-16, ~laintenance

Practices.
(m) Remove torsion shaft assembly. Refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance

Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 614
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. E. (1) (n) Remove compressor bearing c a r r i e r assembly and components.

(2) Perform inspection of gearbox components as follows.
(a) Inspect p r o p e l l e r pitch control assembly in accordance with

(b) Inspect shaft o i l seals in accordance with 72-10-08, Mainte-

nance Practices.
R (c) Inspect nose cone assembly (output gearbox housing assembly)

R as follows.
R 1 Inspect accessible areas of nose cone housing in accordance

R with 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
R 2 Inspect all accessible splines, gear teeth, gearshafts, and

R shaft threads in accordance with 72-10-09, Maintenance
R Pract ice s.
R 3 Inspect gearshaft and bearing assembly f o r freedom of

R r o t a t i o n . No binding allowed.
R 4 Visually inspect propshaft guide pins f o r security and

R damage. Loose or damaged pins are not acceptable.
R (d) Inspect o i l t r a n s f e r tubes in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-

R dard Practices.
R (e) Inspect spline ( q u i l l ) shaft and coupling assembly in accor-

R dance with 72-10-11, Maintenance Practices.
R (f) Inspect planet c a r r i e r and gear assembly as follows.
R _1 Inspect all accessible splines, gear teeth, strainer ele-

R ments, and accomplish ~I.0.W. v e r i f i c a t i o n in accordance
R 2 Inspect accessible gearshafts and bearings f o r freedom of

R r o t a t i o n . No binding allowed.
R (g) Inspect accessible areas of the ring gear assembly and ring
R gear support assembly in accordance with 72-10-12, Maintenance
R Practices.
R (h) Inspect diaphragm assembly (intermediate gearbox housing as-

R sembly) as follows.
R _1 Inspect accessible areas of diaphragm housing in accordance

72-00-00
UP136688
Page 615
Aug 4/94
~FR7N-~A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. E. (2) (h)2 Inspect all accessible splines, gear teeth, gearshafts, and
shaft threads in accordance with 72-10-13, Maintenance
Practices.
3 Inspect gearshafts and bearings for freedom of rotation.

No binding allowed.
4 (Pre SB 72-0819) Fluorescent penetrant inspect oil j e t as-

semblies in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
Cracks are not allowed.
R 5 Inspect accessible areas of shouldered shaft and tube as-

R sembly in accordance with 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
6 Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for freedom of r o t a t i o n .
(i) Inspect torsion shaft assembly in accordance with 72-10-14,

Mai ntenance Practices.
(j) Inspect fuel control drive gear t r a i n in accordance with

(k) Inspect oil pressure pump assembly and r o l l e r bearing in ac-

cordance with 72-10-18, Maintenance Practices.
(I) Inspect torque sensor assembly in accordance with 72-10-16,

(m) Inspect compressor bearing and c a r r i e r assembly components in

accordance with 72-10-19, Maintenance Practices.
(n) Inspect accessible areas of gearbox housing assembly

(accessory drive housing assembly) in accordance with
(3) I f any of the inspection l i m i t s are exceeded, refer to applicable

Chapter/Section/Subject for disassembly, inspection, and possible
repai r.
(4) Reassemble engine in accordance with applicable Chapter/Section/
Subject.
(5) Upon completion of gearbox inspection, an engine indicated torque

output functional check is required. Refer to 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test.
R (6) Perform o i l (SOAP) analysis within the next 25 f l i g h t hours. Refer

R to paragraph 3.D.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 616
Aug 4/94
¢".~t~-7ft_OA
lliedSignal
A E RO S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. F. Fuel Control/Fuel Pump I n t e g r i t y Inspection
NOTE: Table 603 provides a l i s t of a l l materials and com-

pounds required to perform fuel control/fuel pump inte-
g r i t y inspection.
Table 604 provides a l i s t of a l l special tools, f i x -

tures and equipment required to perform fuel
control/fuel pump i n t e g r i t y inspection.
Material or Compound Manufactu rer
NOT.___EE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for l i s t e d items.
Lubricant Commercial ly avail able

Petroleum J e l l y
Sol vent (Federal Specification Commercial ly available
P-D-6~O, Type I)
Item Source/
Note: Equivalent substitutes may be used for l i s t e d item.

I. Torque Wrench Used to check fuel pump drive 298177-1
Splined Adapter running torque.
NOTE: Pages 617 through 624 and Figures 601 through 604 omitted.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 625/626
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 627
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ ignal l s l i e d

2, Fo (1) Inspect fuel control/fuel pump assembly, nuts, bolts, and screws to
verify torque values and fuel leaks as follows.
(a) Verify torque values of nuts, bolts and screws used to secure
fuel control to fuel pump and fuel control/fuel pump to acces-
R sory drive housing. (See Figures 605, 606 and 607A.) Torque
values shall not be less than minimum inspection torque values
R specified in Key to Figures 605, 606 and 607A.
R (b) (Code DA-GA) Verify torque values of nuts and bolts used to
secure high pressure fuel pump assembly to fuel boost pump
R assembly. (See Figure 607 or 607B.) Torque values shall not
be less than minimum inspection torque values specified in
R Figure 607 or 607B.
(c) Inspect brackets securing fuel control to engine flange.
Brackets shall not be cracked or broken.
(d) Inspect fuel pump studs that mount fuel control to fuel pump.
No loose studs are allowed.
(e) (Codes DA-GA) Inspect for evidence of fuel leakage at fuel
pump high pressure and boost pump joining flanges.
(f) Perform the following corrective action, as applicable, after

ins pecti on.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 628
Aug 12/91
,~/~llied
Condition Corrective Action
Torque values exceed the minimum Tighten previously inspected

inspection torque values specified nuts, bolts, and screws to assem-
R in Key to Figures 605 through 607B. bly torque values specified in
R Brackets are serviceable. Fuel Key to Figures 605 through 607Bo
pump studs are not loose. No
fuel leakage evident.
NOTE: I f nuts and bolts securing brackets are less than minimum
specified torque values and all other fasteners are greater
than the minimum specified torque values, tighten all
previously inspected nuts, bolts, and screws to assembly
torque values specified in Key to Figures 605 through 607B.
No further action is required.
Condi t i on Corrective Action
Brackets cracked or broken. (Codes AA, CA, Post SB 73-0029)

(Codes AB-BA, CB, CC) Remove
or and replace fuel pump assembly in
accordance with 73-21-06,
Minimum inspection torque values
R are less than specified in Key to (Codes DA-GA) Remove
Figures 605 and 606, as fuel control/fuel pump assembly
applicable. in accordance with 73-20-01,
Maintenance Practices and
or replace packings in accordance
with step (2). Replace brackets
R (Codes DA-GA) Minimum inspection i f required, in accordance with
torque values on three or more 73-20-01. Tighten all previously
screws are less than specified inspected nuts, bolts, and screws
R in Key to Figure 607 or 607B. to assembly torque values speci-
fied in Key to Figures 605
R or through 607B as applicable.
Install fuel control/fuel
R (Codes DA-GA) SB 73-0156 not pump in accordance with 73-20-01,
compl i ed with. Maintenance Practices.
or
(Codes DA-GA, Post SB 73-0156)

Evidence of fuel leakage at fuel
pump high pressure and boost
pump joining flanges.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 629
Aug 12/91
llie d
Signal
HA1NTENANCE MANUAL
°-..
*-. -..
: :. (;-'::,..-:,.'.:':'..
::, .>.: iX'l,., ;.. .
,' .... :'~ ', /.',
... ..:::.,',,',";,
'--.i ~ ~f2 > \"~
~,-~,~, ..- ,,-,
~":" 40
~"- 3o
< ./'~
120 = ~ > ~ ' " E-44G-1285

UP136688
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly

Figure 605 72-00-00
Page 630
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
~ KEY TO FIGURE 605
*Assembly Torque Values *Minimum Inspection Torque Values
5. NUT 55 in. Ibs 35 in. Ibs

15, BOLT 60 i n . Ibs 45 in. Ibs
30. BOLT 55 in. Ibs 35 in. Ibs
40. NUT 50 i n . Ibs 37 in. Ibs
45. BOLT 60 i n . Ibs 45 in. Ibs
95, BOLT 60 i n . Ibs 45 in. Ibs
110. BOLT I00 i n . Ibs 75 in. Ibs
135, NUT 50 i n . Ibs 37 in. Ibs
150. FUEL CONTROL
185. FUEL PUMP ASSY
*Add f r i c t i o n a l (run down) torque to a l l torque values.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 631
Dec 14/87
J ~ MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
X
\ \
\
,\
,,- o°°....
--°. ,.. ".,,
~ ",,,
,, ' h [,:"., i ""
i.~-'.-.
~,., -.'_.---:::,, .I ~.-,- '~,',,' ,, ,
i~[,, ~,', ~" ...... :::,,~?'~ :
IP,~ l "'%,., J' ,!
---'-;,¢;~ , : - .......
160 -. .: ',..- :°'7,; i: ::
., , :."'v" :. " ',1
',. .... :, .', . >: \ : .....".. \\,,::!

• . ...,~-,,,',
,,-:, .~ .... ::.-...." ~., !i
•,~:-...- ~.;:~
j.i
<. t
85
135~. :"1
40 E--44A-6859
UP136688
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly

Figure 606 72-00-0O
Page 632
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Condition Corrective Action
Fuel pump assembly studs are loose. Remove and replace fuel pump
assembly in accordance with
73-21-06 ~Removal/Instal I ation.
Tighten a l l previously inspected
nuts, b o l t s , and screws to assem-
bly torque values specified in
Key to Figures 605 through 607B,
as applicable.
2. F. (2) (Codes DA-GA) Replace fuel pump assembly packings. (See Figure
607 or 607B.)
R CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW BEARINGS AND SHIMS TO

SEPARATE FROM FUEL PUMPWITHOUT FIRST
DETERMINING THEIR PROPERLOCATIONS PRIOR
TO SEPARATION. FUEL PUMPMUST BE REASSEM-
BLED WITH BEARINGS AND SHIMS IN EXACT
LOCATIONS PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED. IF
PREVIOUS LOCATION OF BEARINGS /V~D SHIMS
CANNOT BE DETERMINED, FUEL PUMPMUST BE
REPLACED.
NOTE: When separating the high pressure pump assem-

bly from the boost pump assembly, use extreme
care. Shim location and thickness must be
recorded f o r l a t e r assembly.
(a) Place fuel pump on bench with boost pump down.
KEY TO FIGURE 606
*Assembly Torque Values *Minimum Inspection Torque Values

120. FUEL CONTROL
135. SCREW 65 i n . Ibs 50 in. Ibs
160. FUEL PUMP ASSY
*Add f r i c t i o n a l (run down) torque to a l l torque values.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 633
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
BOOST PUMPASSEMBLY
ZU
(TYPICAL) #=~,-"-~' ~, ~ ~[
| E-44A-6850
*5. BOLT (PN MS9556-10) 20. PACKING(PRE SB 73-0156,

"10. BOLT (PN MS9556-I0) PN S9412-032) (POST SB 73-0156,
15. WASHER(PN AN960C10L) PN $9413-032)
30. PACKING(PN $9413-018)
35. PACKING(PN S9412-556)
*Assembly torque value is 25 - 30 inch-pounds minimum inspection torque value
is 18 inch-pounds.
Add frictional (run-down) torque to torque values.
(Codes DA-FB)
UP136688
Fuel Pump Assembly

Figure 607 72-00-00
Page 634
Dec 14/87
lied
\
,\ o•.. \
I Z "":'.o'# I l
. ..;',,, i I
__ <.S?D::-','C;S • * -;:
.... •-!!
, ,
, .... :: ,.
•. ,....; ,,
i, L ,,
,;~ .. ., ',.-" ~.; ..': ', :
~, -3" : :~:..'-:'\, ,
:',,;i :
~;~ "~"115
105
UP136688
Fuel Control and PumpAssembly

Figure 607A 72-00-00
Page 634A
Aug 12/91
/lied
R KEY TO FIGURE607A
R *Assembly Torque Values *Minimum Inspection Torque Values
R 5. NUT 65 in. Ibs 50 in. Ibs

R 35. SCREW 65 in. Ibs 50 in. Ibs
R 80. BOLT 60 in. Ibs 45 in. Ibs
R 100. FUELCONTROL
R 125A. FUELPUMPASSY
R *Add frictional (run-down) torque to all torque values.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 634B
Aug 12/91
/lied
BOOST PUMP ASSY
,/~. \ 25
30
~ ~, /. 50
HIGH PRESSUREPUMP ASSY

(TYPICAL)
E-44G-1011
R *25. SCREW (PN NAS1351C3-12) 55. PACKING (PRE SB 73-0156, PN S9412-032)

R 30. WASHER (PN AN960C10L) (POST SB 73-0156, PN S9413-032)
R 50. PACKING (PN $9413-018) 60. PACKING (PN S9412-556)
R *Assembly torque value is 25 to 30 inch-pounds, minimum inspection
R torque value is 18 inch-pounds.
R Add f r i c t i o n a l (run-down) torque to torque values.
UP136688
Fuel Pump Assembly

Figure 607B 72-00-00
Page 634C/634D
Aug 12/91
~ S lied
R 2. F. (2) (b) (Codes DA-FB) Remove screws (5, 10, Figure 607) and washer
(15), separate high pressure pump from fuel pump.
(c) (Codes DA-FB) Remove packing (20, 30, 35) from pump assembly.
NOTE: I f discoloration of bearings or drive shaft

journal is observed, replace fuel pump.
(d) (Codes DA-FB) Lubricate new packings (20, 30, 35) using
petroleum j e l l y . Install new packings (20, 30) in high pres-
sure pump and packing (35) in boost pump.
CAUTION: A SLIGHT SIDEWARD (ROLLING) MOTIONMAY BE

REQUIRED TO ENGAGEPUMPMATING FLANGES.
DO NOT FORCE, AS THRUSTBEARINGOR SEALS
MAY BE DAMAGEDRESULTING IN FUEL LEAKAGE
OR IMPROPERPUMPOPERATION.
R (e) (Codes DA-FB) Position high pressure pump against boost pump
mating flange and secure with screws (5, 10) and washers (15).
Tighten screws to torque value of 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(el) (Code GA) Remove screws (25, Figure 607B) and washer (30),
separate high pressure pump from fuel pump.
(e2) (Code GA) Remove packing (50, 55, 60) from pump assembly.
NOTE: I f discoloration of bearings or drive shaft
journal is observed, replace fuel pump.
(e3) (Code GA) Lubricate new packings (50, 55, 60) using petroleum
j e l l y . Install new packings (50, 55) in high pressure pump
and packing (60) in boost pump.
CAUTION: A SLIGHT SIDEWARD (ROLLING) MOTION MAY BE

REQUIRED TO ENGAGE PUMPMATING FLANGES, DO
NOT FORCE, AS THRUST BEARING OR SEALS MAY
BE DAMAGEDRESULTING IN FUEL LEAKAGE OR
IMPROPER PUMP OPERATION.
R (e4) Position high pressure pump against boost pumpmating flange

R and secure with screws (25) and washers (30). Tighten screws
R to torque value of 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(f) Check fuel pump assembly for rotational resistance.
1 Position fuel pumpassembly on a suitable bench with the

fuel pump drive shaft in view and support the assembly for
i nspection.
2 Install 298177-1 splined torque wrench adapter into fuel

pump female spline coupling.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 635
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FEATHERING VALVE
CONNECTOR n~
__~ ~ 0.30 IN. MINIMUM TRAVEL (OPEN)
at-- I %
S
J GEARBOX
CLOSED
F-44G-529
Extended Position Inspection of Feathering Valve

UP136688
Figure 608 72-00-00

Page 636
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal ~iAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. F. (2) (e) __3 Attach torsion spring type torque wrench (0 to 35 inch-
pound range) to hex end of 298177-1 splined zorque wrench
adapter and apply torque in a clockwise rotation (facing
the fuel pump drive pad) to check running torque. Make a
minimum of tllree complete 360 degree turns, indicatea
torque shall remain constant.
4 I f running torque is less than 18 inch-pounds, r e i n s t a l l

fuel c o n t r o l / f u e l pump assembly.
CAUTION: ENSURE ADEQUATE LUBRICATION IS APPLIED

TO FUEL PUMP INTERNAL PART DURING PUMP
OPERATION.
5 I f running torque is 18 inch-pounds or [.~ore, rotate fuel

pump at varying speeds up to 3000 RPM f o r no more than 3
minutes. During fuel pump rotation continually spray sol-
vent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I) on fuel pump
internal parts. Check running torque.
6 I f the running torque continues to be 18 inch-pounds or

more a f t e r run-in, disassemble fuel pump to determine
cause. I f a f t e r disassembly the cause cannot be detemlined
and, following reassembly, the running torque s t i l l conti-
nues to be 18 inch-pounds or more, return pump to
AlliedSignal Engines, D i s t r i b u t i o n Center, 1944 East Sky
Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034.
G. Emergency Shutdown System Check
(i) Operate airframe emergency feather/fuel shutoff systems to deter-

mine i f engine feathering valve and fuel shutoff valve have
actuated.
(2) Check to ensure required travel has been met on both valves.
(a) Check feathering valve extended position. Minimum travel from
closed to open position (extended) shall not be less than 0.30
inch. (See Figure 608.)
(b) Check fuel shutoff valve ann for required travel in the auto-
matic to manual o f f position. (See Figure 609.)
CAUTIUN: SERIOUS DAMAGEWILL OCCUR TO ENGINE HOT

SECTION IF FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE AND FEATHER-
ING VALVE DO NOT OPERATE IN PROPER
SEQUENCE.
(c) Ensure fuel shutoff valve mechanical lever moves to c u t o f f

position prior to actuation of feathering valve.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 637
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ 1 MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SHUTOFF VALVE OPERATION FROM

AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL OFF,
VALVE MAY CLOSE ANYWHERE
IN THIS RANGE,
q.
OVER-TRAVEL
OVER-TRAVEL AVAILABLE FOR
41" FEATHER VALVE OPERATION
.. / / AND RIGGING,
0°
90 °
AUTOMATIC MANUAL OFF
FUEL SHUTOFF - -
VALVE ARM
INDEX MARK
FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE SHAFT
F-44G-234
Positions of Fuel Shutoff Valve Arm (Typical)

UP136688
Figure 609 72-00-00

Page 638
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. G. (3) Return emergency feather/fuel shutoff systems to normal position.
(4) Ensure linkage pivot points are not obstructed.
(5) Lubricate detent mechanism and linkage as required.
R H. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Mating Splines Inspection
R NOTE: Table 605 provides a l i s t of special tools, f i x t u r e s

R and equipment required to perform inspection on fuel
R control and fuel pump mating splines.
R Table 605. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

R
R Item Source/
R No. Nomenclature Use Part Ho.
R
R Ze *Spline Plug Gage To check splines in fuel pump. 297292-1
R 2. *Ring Gage To check splines on fuel control. 297293-1
R 3. *Master Plug Gage To check 297293-1 ring gage f o r 297293-2

R serviceability.
R 4. Spline No-Go To check fuel control and fuel 298187-1

R Gage Set pump mating splines.
R *Components of 298187-1 spline no-go gage set.

R
R (I) Remove the following components to f a c i l i t a t e fuel control and fuel

R pump mating splines inspection.
R (a) Disconnect controls linkage assembly in accordance with

R 76-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
R (b) Remove i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor from fuel control

R u n i t in accordance with 73-20-01, Maintenance Practices.
R (c) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel control unit in accor-

R (d) Remove screw, nuts and washers securing fuel control unit to
R fuel pump assembly.
R (e) Remove bolt and washers securing fuel control unit to support.
R (f) Remove fuel control unit from fuel pump assembly.
R (g) Carefully remove packings and shim washers between fuel pump
R assembly and fuel control u n i t . Record number and thickness
R of shim washers f o r reference on assembly.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 639
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A F R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: Ensure 298187-1 spline no-go gage set has been

R checked for s e r v i c e a b i l i t y prior to inspecting
R mating splines. Refer to step (5).
R 2. H, (2) Inspect fuel pump spline shaft as follows. (See Figure 610.}
R CAUTION: DAIiAGE TO SPLINED SHAFT OR TOOLING MAY OC-

R CUR IF FORCE IS USED WHEN CHECKING SPLINE
R WEAR.
R (a) Attempt to insert 297292-1 plug gage into fuel pump splined
R shaft ( I ) . Rotate plug gage and repeat u n t i l all splines are
R checked.
R (b) I f 297292-1 plug gage can be inserted into any section of fuel
R pump splined shaft, splined shaft is worn and fuel pump must
R be replaced.
R (c) I f 297292-1 plug gage cannot be inserted into any section of
R fuel pump splined shaft, fuel pump splined shaft is servicea-
R ble and fuel pump can be continued in service.
F
R i. FUEL PUMP (SPLINED SHAFT)
R 2. FUEL CONTROL (SPLINED SHAFT)
R Fuel Control and Fuel Pump

R Mating Spline Locations
R Figure 610 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 640
Aug 4/94
~VR7R-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 2. H. (3) Inspect fuel control splined shaft as follows. (See Figure 610.)
CAUTION: DAMAGETO SPLINED SHAFT OR TOOLING MAY OCCUR

IF FORCE IS USED WHEN CHECKING SPLINE WEAR.
R (a) Attempt to i n s t a l l 297293-1 ring gage onto fuel control

R splined shaft (2). Rotate ring gage and repeat u n t i l all
R splines are checked.
R NOTE: Woodward Governor Company Service B u l l e t i n

R 40071 provides instructions f o r replacing fuel
R control splined shaft. A worn splined shaft
R may be replaced in accordance with Woodward
R Governor Company Service B u l l e t i n 40071 in lieu
R of replacing fuel control.
R (b) I f 297293-1 ring gage goes onto any section of fuel control
R splined shaft, splined shaft is worn and fuel control must be
R replaced.
(c) I f 297293-1 ring gage w i l l not go onto any section of fuel

control splined shaft, fuel control splined shaft is servicea-
ble and fuel control can be continued in service.
(4) I n s t a l l fuel control on fuel pump as follows.
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packings with any approved

clean engine fuel or l u b r i c a n t (0S-124 or San-
tovac 5) prior to i n s t a l l a t i o n unless otherwise
specified. Apply l u b r i c a t i n g compound ( L i q u i -
Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts located
forward of the a f t compressor case flange un-
less otherwise specified.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for

recommended general torque values. Add f r i c -
tional drag (run-down) torque of self-locking
devices to recommended values.
(a) (Codes DA-FB) Shim fuel control i n l e t transfer tube as

follows. (See Figure 611.)
1 I n s t a l l fuel control i n l e t t r a n s f e r tube in fuel pump

assembly.
2 Measure Dimension A and determine thickness of washers

required to obtain Dimension A. Dimension A shall be 0.200
to 0.215 inch.
3 I n s t a l l washers, as required, into fuel pump assembly u n t i l

Dimension A equals 0.200 to 0.215 inch.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 641
Aug 4/94
GFG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A. (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. H. (4) (b) I n s t a l l new packings on fuel control i n l e t t r a n s f e r tube. In-

s t a l l fuel control i n l e t transfer tube.
(c) Align fuel control u n i t on fuel pump assembly and secure with
washers, screw and nuts. Tighten nuts and screw in accordance
with 73-21-05, Fuel Control I n s t a l l a t i o n .
R (d) I n s t a l l support, shimming as required from mounting boss on

R fuel control to surface of support to avoid bending support.
R Use s u f f i c i e n t additional washers under head of b o l t to sup-
R port, to ensure bolt does not bottom out when i n s t a l l e d in
R fuel control. At least four threads must engage fuel control
R body. Tighten bolt in accordance with 73-21-05, Fuel Control
R Instal l a t i on.
(e) Connect controls linkage assembly in accordance with 76-10-01,

R (f) I n s t a l l i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor to fuel control

R unit in accordance with 73-20-01, Maintenance Practices.
R (g) Connect tube assemblies from fuel control u n i t in accordance

DIM. A
1 . ~
/
~ ''r
FUELCONTROLINLET
TP'ANSFER
TUBE
J~.
. ~ ' f~'WASHERS
T
FUELPUMPASSY
1-44G-804
R Shimming of Fuel Control I n l e t Connection

UP136688
R Figure 611 72-00-00

Page 642
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 2. H. (5) Inspect 298187-1 spline no-go gage set f o r s e r v i c e a b i l i t y as

R follows. (See Figure 612.)
R CAUTION: DAMAGETO SPLINED SHAFT OR TOOLING MAY OC-

R CUR IF FORCE IS USED CHECKING SPLINE WEAR.
R (a) Insert 297293-2 master plug gage into 297293-1 ring gage and
R observe the depth that master plug gage can be inserted into
R ring gage. Master plug gage shall be rotated and inserted in
R both spline positions.
R (b) I f master plug gage cannot be inserted past groove 2, ring

R gage is serviceable.
R (c) I f master plug gage can be inserted past groove 2 but does not
R go past groove 3, ring gage is worn. Ring gage may be used to
R inspect fuel control splined shaft but must be replaced at
R e a r l i e s t opportunity.
R (d) I f master plug gage can be inserted past groove 3, ring gage
R is unserviceable and cannot be used to inspect fuel control.
\\
R
' ~ MASTER
~'~"'~ RING
GAGE
SB-5441
R Spline No-Go Gage Set

R Figure 612 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 643
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Special Inspections
NOTE: Special inspections are required a f t e r certain events as

outlined in the fol lowing paragraphs.
Table 606 provides a l i s t of materials and compounds

required to perform Inspection.
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for l i s t e d item.

P-D-680, Type I)
A. Accident or Incident Inspection Requirements
CAUTI ON: ENGINES INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT OR INCIDENT REQUIRE

INSPECTIONS THAT EXCEED NORMAL INSPECTION
REQUIREMENTS.
For inspection requirements of engines involved in an accident or i n c i -
R dent contact AlliedSignal Engines, Customer Information Center, P.O. Box
R 52181, Phoenix, AZ 85072-2181. (Telephone 1-800-338-3378.)
R (FAX 602-231-2481.)
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 644
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. B. Abnormal Load Inputs (Propeller Strike) Inspection
R NOTE: The extent of inspection w i l l vary with the known

R conditions of the event and evidence disclosed
R through the stages inspection.
Analysis of the oil f i l t e r and any functional test

requirements are part of the evaluation and can
a f f e c t the final disposition of the engine.
Ensure that the source of any i r r e g u l a r i t y is

determined and r e c t i f i e d in the course of inspec-
tion and repair of the engine.
Conditions of the event are to be documented and

provided by the customer to any f a c i l i t y accom-
plishing all or part of the inspection.
R I f damage conditions are observed which are not

R acknowledged by t h i s manual, contact your local
R Field Service Representative or Customer Support
R Engineering, Phoenix, Arizona for advisement.
R (z) The following are the minimum requirements to be accomplished.

R However, steps (b) tilrough (e) are not required i f Table 607 speci-
R fied none as the requirement.
R (a) Accomplish tile inspection as required in Table 607.
R (b) Accomplish an i n i t i a l evaluation as specified in step 12).
R (c) Refer to unscheduled maintenance requirements, paragraph I . B .
R (d) Document the conditions of the event, related discrepancies

R found, and any inspection accomplished.
R (e) Accomplish oil and f i l t e r analysis (SOAP) inspection within 5

R to 10 engine operating hours and again at 20 to 30 hours f o l -
R lowing engine inspection and repair. Refer to paragraph 3.D.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 645
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A

R Table 607. Engine Event Condition and Inspection Requirements

R f o r Propeller Strike
R
R Condition Requi rement

R
R NOTE: In order to ensure continued airworthiness of the engine, the

R requirements of this inspection were established to cover a
R wide variation of d i f f e r e n t types of abnormal load inputs of
R possible event conditions.
R Circumstances of some events may require additional review of

R the inspection and repair scope. Contact Customer Support En-
R gineering, AlliedSignal Engines, Phoenix, Arizona for submis-
R sion to the Damaged Engine Review Board (DERB).
R I f event conditions result in an engine over-speed condition,

R perform Overspeed Inspection. Refer to paragraph 3.H.
R The drafting of solids in the airstream which result in obser-

R veable damage to the propeller may also result in damage to
R blade leading edges of the f i r s t stage impeller. In such cases
R the f i r s t stage impeller should be inspected in accordance with
R i. Impact on propeller or propeller spinner by h a i l , None

R rain, sand, or ground debris drafted from ground
R by the a i r strewn; e.g. gravel, nuts, bolts, etc.
. Bird impact on propeller or propeller Refer to bird

spinner or bird ingestion. ingestion or bird
impact inspection.
. Axial c o l l i s i o n of propeller or propeller Inspection Level 1
spinner with vehicles, power carts, a i r c r a f t ,
f a c i l i t y structures, or other heavy or
r i g i d structures during a i r c r a f t towing or
equipment movement.
R . Impact on propeller blade with propeller

R rotation of 1% rpm or less, resulting in:
R Propeller damage is repairable without Steps (1)(d) and (e)

R propeller removal from engine.
R Propeller damage not repairable without Inspection Level 1

R propeller removal from engine.
R
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 646
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
iIAl HTEI'IANCE MANUAL
Table 607. Engine Event Condition and Inspection Requirements

f o r Propeller Strike (Cont)
R Condition Requ i rBnen t

R
R 5. Inlpact on propeller blade with p r o p e l l e r

R rotation above 1% rpm, resulting in:
Propeller damage is repairable without Steps (1)(u) and (e)

propeller removal from engine.
Propeller damage not repairable without Inspection Level 2

propeller removal from engine.
. Ingestion of snow, water, or other foreign Inspection Level (.~

material r e s u l t i n g in a torque s h i f t
i n d i c a t i o n or uncoupling of torque
sensor can gear.
. Propeller enters grouna snow or water with Inspection Level 2

no observed deceleration. Sprayed or drafted
water and snow are not applicable.
5. Impact on propeller resulting in unc~Limanded Inspection Level 2

deceleration or stoppage of the engine, and Level 3
(observed or suspected).
R 1% RPFI is approximately 1 propeller revolution each 3 seconds.
R NOTE: Reference for inspection requirements are as follows.
R Inspection Level 1 Refer to steps (3) and (4).
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 647
Aug 4/94
C=F:G70-?~,~
lliedSignal MAIliT ENANCE MANUAL

A E R 0 S P A C E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Fluid leakage (fuel or o i l ) may be an inclication of

possible damage and should be evaluated.
R Steps (2)(c) and (d) are not required i f propeller was

R not rotating (static) when propeller strike occurred.
R 3. B. (2) Accomplish i n i t i a l evaluation as follows.

(a) Rotate the propeller by hand, in the normal direction of
rotation. Evaluate engine by feeling resistance and listening
for noise.
R Binding is not acceptable. Intermittent resistance to rota-
R tion or the emission of noise which cannot be determined nor-
R mal by similarity with other undistressed engine, is not
R acceptable.
R (b) Removechip detector in accordance with 79-30-01, biaintenance

R Practices. Inspect for pieces of metal; other than fine wear.
R (c) Remove engine oil f i l t e r in accordance with 79-20-02, Nainte-

R nance Practices. Visually inspect f i l t e r and f i l t e r cavity
R for metal pieces; other than fine wear.
R (d) Accomplish oil and f i l t e r analysis (SOAP); include any metal
R pieces found with f i l t e r for evaluation. Refer to paragraph
R 3.D.
R (e) Clean all exterior surfaces of engine in accordance with

R 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting.
R (f) Visually inspect all accessible surfaces of the input (nose

R cone), intermediate (diaphragm), and output (accessory drive)
R housing for any damage. Evidence of cracks or distortion
R tother than acceptable/repairable conditions addressed in
R 72-10-09, 72-10-13, 72-10-20) is not acceptable.
(g) Visually inspect all accessible surfaces of the propeller gov-
ernor, fuel pump, and fuel control for any damage. Evidence
of cracks or distortion is not acceptable.
(h) Visually inspect compressor i n l e t for indication of rub

between the 1st impeller blade contour and shroud.
(i) Visually inspect turbine exhaust for the following.
_I Damageof the third stage turbine rotor and nozzle.
R 2 Aluminum deposits on the third stage nozzle vanes, third

R stage turbine rotor blades, or other surfaces in tlle ex-
R haust gas path.
R (J) I f any event related damage to the compressor or turbine is

R known or suspected, accomplish inspection level 3.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 648
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. B. (3) Accomplish disassembly to f a c i l i t a t e inspection level 1 and level 2
R requirements as follows.
R NOTE: Accomplish steps (a) through (i) i f perform-
R ing inspection level 1.
R Accomplish steps (a) through (p) i f perform-

R ing inspection level 2.
R Steps (c), (d), (f) and (g) are not required

R i f inspecting for condition 3 of Table 607.
R Disassembly beyond requirements specified in

R step (3) is not required.
R Clean all removed parts in accordance with

R Cleaning/ Painting.
R During disassembly, visually inspect i n t e r i o r

R of reduction gear housings and component sur-
R faces for metal debris. Note findings and
R retain any debris for evaluation.
Unless specified, bearings may be l e f t assem-

bled on gear shafts.
(a) Removebeta tube in accordance with 72-10-01, Maintenance

Practices.
(b) Removeoutput gearbox housing assembly (nose cone) and disas-

semble in accordance with 72-10-09, F1aintenance Practices.
(c) Removeplanet carrier and gear assembly in accordance with

(d) Removeassembled ring gear and support from diaphragm assenlbly

in accordance with 72-10-12, Naintenance Practices.
(e) Removeintermediate gearbox housing (diaphragm module) in ac-

(f) Removetorque sensor assembly in accordance with 72-10-16,

Naintenance Practices.
NOTE: Do not remove the compressor bearing.

(g) Install nuts to retain the compressor bearing retainer on the
two studs at the 2 and 10 o'clock positions (as viewed inlet
up). Torque to the value specified in 72-10-19, Maintenance
Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 649
Aug 4/94
GFG7n-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: The following check should be accomplished

R with the engine in the i n s t a l l e d o r i e n t a t i o n ,
R i . e . ; i n l e t up or i n l e t down.
R . B. (3) (h) Rotate the engine main shaft and evaluate by feeling re-
R sistance and l i s t e n i n g for noise.
1 6inding is not acceptable.
2 Intermittent resistance to rotation or the emission of

noise, which cannot be determined as normal by s i m i l a r i t y
with other undistressed engines, is not acceptable.
3 I f any event related damage to the compressor or turbine is

known or suspected, accomplish inspection level 3.
(i) I f inspection is accomplished with engine i n s t a l l e d , access

engine mounts to provide f u l l visual access to each mount
region. (See Figure 608.)
NOTE: Disassembly instructions ( j ) through (p) are

to be accomplished in addition to (a) through
( i ) as requirements of inspection level 2.
R (j) Disassemble planet c a r r i e r and gear assembly in accordance

R (k) Remove the high speed pinion, sun and bull gear assembly and
R scavenge pump assembly from intermediate gear box housing as-
R sembly (diaphragm module) in accordance with 72-10-13, Main-
R tenance Practices.
R (I) (Pre Sb 72-0606) Disassemble the sun and bull gear assembly
R in accordance with the Engine Overhaul Manual.
(m) Remove torsion shaft in accordance with 72-10-14, Maintenance

Practices.
(n) Remove gerotors from reduction gear section scavenge pump as-
sembly in accordance with 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
(o) Remove gerotors from oil pressure pump assembly in accordance

R (p) Remove compressor bearing and c a r r i e r in accordance with

R 72-10-19, Maintenance Practices. The seal may be l e f t in-
R stalled in c a r r i e r .
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 650
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. B. (4) Accomplish inspection requirements for level 1 and/or 2 inspections

R as follows.
NOTE: Accomplish steps (a) through (n) i f performing i n -

spection level 1.
R Accomplish steps (a) through (y) i f performing i n -

R spection level 2.
R The following inspection requirements are to be

R applied with the level of disassembly specified.
R Prior to inspection, ensure all removed parts have

R been cleaned in accordance with Cleaning/Painting.
R A hand held mirror and l i g h t source are to be used

R to accomplish visual inspection of i n d i r e c t
R surfaces.
R (a) Visually inspect accessible surfaces of a l l components f o r

R damage. Crack indications, broken out pieces, and d i s t o r t i o n
R not i d e n t i f i e d as normal wear, is not acceptable. Typical
R areas of damage are as follows. (See Figures 613 through
R 616.)
R 1 Root areas of splines and gears.
R 2 I n t e r i o r surfaces adjacent to alignment studs and bushings.
R 3 Accessory and engine mount stud and/or inserts.
R 4 The as cast surfaces of intermediate housing between high

R speed pinion and sun and bull gear bearing bores.
Compressor bearing s t r u t t r a i l i n g edge of input housing.
6 Transition region of input housing from accessory mount

surface to compressor housing flange.
(b) Inspect alignment studs and bushings for security by applying

firm hand pressure. Movement of a bushing or stud r e l a t i v e to
i t s base is not acceptable.
(c) Visually inspect a l l alignment studs and bushings f o r d i s t o r -

tion and evidence of displacement r e l a t i v e to t h e i r base.
Visually detectable metal displacement or uneven perimeter in
the housing at the base of an alignment stud or bushing i n d i -
cates distress even i f the detail appears secure. (See
Figures 615 and 616.)
(d) Inspect a l l removed bearings in accordance with 70-00-00,

Standard Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 651
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal
A E R O S P A (i E
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
AF
EAB
CRACK
CRACK'-..~ / l
AREAB(ROTATED)
AREA A
CF-44G-I187
Accessory Drive Housing Mounting Pad Typical Crack Areas

Figure 613 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 652
Auy 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
tANSITION RbEGION
YPICAL 360-)
MIRROR
INTERIORSURFACE
ADJACENT TO STUDc,
AND BUSHINGS
FIRST STAGE COMPRESSORIMPELLER
~ ~ _ AREA P
COMPRESSOR
SUPPORT STRUT ~'~
MIRROR CF-44G-1188
AREA G .
R Accessory Drive Housing

R Figure 614 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 653
Aug 4/94
~FG70-2A

AEROSPACE GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
~ /STUD
DISPLACED
METAL , ~ , ~ I ' ~ I ~ I BUSHING
~---JJ~---... UNEVEN
0 PERIMETER
VIEW A
CI"YPICAL4 PLACES)
ALIGNMENTSTUD
AND BUSHING
ALIGNMENT
STUD AND
BUSHING Q ©
0
ALIGNMENT
STUD AND
BUSHING
Oo 0
CF-44G-I 190
Accessory Drive Housing Alignment Studs and Bushings

UP136688
Figure 615 72-00-00

Page 654
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
[~/ S T U D
DISPLACED
METAL , , ~ ~"l,~ BUSHING
:~'~"-J-'/'q'~.... UNEVEN
PERIMETER
VIEW A
(TYPICAL8 PLACES)
ALIGNMENTHOLE
ALIGNMENTHOLE
MOUNTBOLT
+
(TYPICAL4 PLACES)
JO
O O
,t@ A
©
ALIGNMENT HOLE
ALIG~ -F
HOLE
STUD
O
@
STUD
O~O
STUD CF-44G-1189
STUD
R Intermediate Gearbox Housing (Diaphragm) Assembly

R Aligment Hole and Stud Locations
R Figure 616 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 655
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. B. (4) (e) Inspect all gear and bearing assemblies for freedom of
rotation. Binding or i n t e r m i t t a n t resistance to rotation is
not acceptable.
R (f) Dimensionally inspect alignment holes of output and intermedi-

R ate housing, in accordance with 72-10-09 and 72-10-13,
R Inspection/Check.
R (g) Dimensionally inspect diameter of ring gear support mount

R alignment holes. I f any mount hole diameter is in excess of
R 0.4420 inch, the part is not acceptable.
(h) Inspect propeller shaft as follows.
1 Check surface H runout. (See Figure 617.)
R 2 I f damage is evident or runout requirement is not met, mag-

R netic particle inspect propeller shaft in accordance with
R 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
R (i) Inspect propeller shaft seal stator and rotor in accordance

R with 72-10-09, Inspection/Check.
R (J) Inspect torque sensor n]etering cam and valve for freedom of
R travel for f u l l length of curve ( h e l i x ) . Binding or i n t e r m i t -
R tant resistance is not acceptable.
(k) Inspect labyrinth static seal c a r r i e r of input housing. (See

Figure 614.) Visually detected separation or misalignment
relative to the housing is not acceptable. Movement using
firm hand pressure r e l a t i v e to the housing is not acceptable.
-H-
DIA B
DIA A
CI-44G-1334
NOTE: Diameters A and B establish centerline.

Propeller Shaft
UP136688
Figure 617 72-00-00

Page 656
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. B. (4) (I) Accomplish Fuel Control/Fuel Pump I n t e g r i t y Inspection in ac-

R cordance with paragraph 2.F.
R (m) Inspect controls linkage f o r freedom of travel to all stops.

R Binding or indicated changes of stopping points are not
R acceptable. Binding or improper rigging may indicate damage
R in response to abnormal input. I f the cause cannot be deter-
R mined as unrelated to the event, then remove propeller 9over-
R nor, fuel pump, fuel control and any other suspect component
R and functional test in accordance with component manual.
R Refer to Introduction, Table 2.
R NOTE: Conditional requirement of step (m) apply i f

R accomplishing inspection level i .
(n) Conditional requirements are as f o l l o w s .
R If: Cracks are found in any housing, accessory

R component, gear, shaft, or coupling.
R OR
R Propeller governor, fuel pump, fuel c o n t r o l ,

R e x h i b i t binding or d i s t o r t i o n of the mount
R flange.
R OR
R Damaged stud which fastens an accessory com-

R ponent or damaged insert at an engine mount.
R OR
R Raised metal (indicated with a sharp edge) on

R intermediate (diaphragm) housing, at the p e r i -
R meter of mount surface f o r ring gear support.
R OR
R Loose or displaced studs and locating pins at

R the ring gear support mount surface of the
R intermediate (diaphragm) housing.
R OR
Torque sensor exhibits binding or d i s t o r t i o n

of the mount flange.
OR
Torsion shaft has indications of t w i s t i n g

or d i s t o r t i o n .
Then: Accomplish requirements of inspection level 2.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 657
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E RO S PAC E
FIAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Inspection instructions (o) through (y) are

to be accomplished in addition to (a) through
(n) as requirements of inspection level 2.
3. B. (4) (o) Visually inspect internal splines of high speed pinion spur
gear. I f wear step in splines is evident, dimensionally check
for magnitude. ~ear step greater than 0.005 inch is not
acceptable.
(p) (Pre SB 72-0606) Magnetic p a r t i c l e inspect sun gear in ac-
cordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Visually inspect
splines. I f wear step in splines is evident, dimensionally
check for magnitude. Wear step greater than 0.006 inch is not
acceptable.
(q) (Pre SB 72-0606) Magnetic p a r t i c l e inspect bull gear in ac-
cordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Visually inspect
splines. I f wear step in splines is evident, aimensionally
check for magnitude. Wear step greater than 0.010 inch is not
acceptable.
(r) Magnetic particle inspect propeller shaft coupling in accor-

dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
R (s) Magnetic particle inspect planet rin~ gear and plates/bolts

R which fasten gear to ring gear support in accordance with
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 658
Aug 4/94

A E R 0 S PAC E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
R 3. B. (4) (t) Inspect torsion shaft as follows.
R 1 Visually inspect outer surface for indications of twisting

R (spiral patterns) and d i s t o r t i o n . Indications of twisting
R or d i s t o r t i o n is cause for r e j e c t i o n .
2 Magnetic particle inspect torsion shaft in accordance with

70-00-00, Standard Practices.
3 Inspect torsion shaft internal and external splines f o r

wear. Spline wear shall not exceed 0,005 inch.
4 Check Diameter C runout. See Figure 618.
(u) Magnetic p a r t i c l e inspect coupling shaft between rotating

group and high speed pinion.
(v) Magnetic p a r t i c l e inspect splined coupling between oil pres-

sure pump and fuel pump.
(w) Visually inspect compressor seal stator and rotor in accor-

dance with 72-10-19, Inspection/Check.
.004 1
-C- -C- I I
CI-44G-I 333
R NOTE: Countersinks at both ends establish centerline.
R Torsion Shaft Assembly

R Figure 618 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 659
Aug 4/94
~I~7¢~.PA
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. B. (4) (x) Return the following components to an AlliedSignal authorized

R service f a c i l i t y for functional test in accordance with t h e i r
R respective component overhaul manual or perform
R Adjustment/Test requir~nents in applicable section of this
R manual and operational and functional checks specified in step
R (7).
R Torque sensor
R Propel l e r governor
R Fuel pump
R Fuel control
R (y) Conditional requirements are as follows.
R 1 If: No event related damage is found,
R Then: Reassemble engine and perform engine operational

R and functional checks specified in step (7).
R 2 If: Cracks are found in any housing, accessory

R component, gear, shaft, or coupling,
R OR
R Propeller governor, fuel pump, or fuel control

R e x h i b i t binding,
R Then: Accomplish the following.
R a Discard the following.
R C~L1pressor bearing
R Torsion shaft
R b Return the following components to an AlliedSignal

R authorized service f a c i l i t y for disassembly and inspec-
R tion in accordance with t h e i r respective component
R overhaul manual.
R Torque sensor
R Propeller governor
R Fuel pump
R Fuel control
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 660
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. B. (4) (y) 2 c Remove bearings, all accessory gears and gearshafts, and
disassemble a l l gears and gearshafts. Refer to
72-10-13, 72-10-15, 72-10-16, 72-10-17, Maintenance
Practices. Magnetic particle inspect a l l accessory
gears and gearshafts in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-
dard Practices.
d Return the following components to an A1 liedSignal

authorized service f a c i l i t y for removal of paint, etch,
and fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with
Accessory drive housing (gearbox)
Intermediate gearbox housing (diaphragm)
Output gearbox housing (nose cone)
e (Post SB 72-0606) Disassemble sun and bull gear in ac-

cordance with Engine Overhaul Manual and inspect as
follows.
R Magnetic p a r t i c l e inspect sun gear in accordance with

R 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Visually inspect splines.
R I f wear step in splines is evident, dimensionally check
R for magnitude. Wear step greater than 0.006 inch is not
R acceptable.
R Magnetic p a r t i c l e inspect bull gear in accordance with

R 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Visually inspect splines.
R I f wear step in splines is evident, dimensionally check
R for magnitude. £Jear step greater than 0.010 inch is not
R acceptable.
R 3 If: Any damage is found related to abnormal load

R inputs other than l i s t e d in step 2,
R Then: Discard the following:
R Compressor bearing
R Torsion shaft
R 4 If: Any damage is found with ring gear

R retaining plates or bolts.
R Then: Discard retaining plates, nuts and bolts.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 661
Aug 4/94
~FG7~3-2A
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R . B. (5) Accomplish disassembly to f a c i l i t a t e inspection level 3 require-

R ments as follows.
R (a) Remove f i r s t and second stage impellers in accordance with

R (b) RBnove f i r s t , second and t h i r d stage turbine rotors, and cur-

R vic coupling shaft and seal assembly in accordance with
R 72-50-07 and 72-50-08, Maintenance Practices.
R (6) Accomplish inspection requirements for level 3 inspection as

R fol 1ows.
R (a) Visually inspect f i r s t stage impeller for damage. Refer to
R 72-30-04, Inspection/Check for acceptable l i m i t s .
R (b) Visually inspect second stage impeller f o r damage. Refer to

R (c) Visually inspect blade tips of f i r s t , second and t h i r d stage

R rotors for rub damage in accordance witll 72-50-07 or 72-50-08,
R Inspecti on/Check.
(d) Visually inspect second and t h i r d stage rotor seal knives for
wear and damage. I f wear or damage is evident, refer to
72-50-07, Inspection/Check for acceptable l i m i t s .
(e) Inspect second and t h i r d stage stator seal assemblies in ac-

cordance with 72-50-07 and 72-50-08, Inspection/Check.
(f) Visually inspect curvic coupling knives for wear and damage.
I f wear or damage is evident, refer to 72-50-08,
Inspection/Check for acceptable l i m i t s .
(g) lnspect seal assembly in accordance with 72-30-03,

Ins pecti on/Check.
R (h) Inspect turbine a i r / o i l seal in accordance with 72-50-06,

R (i) Inspect turbine bearing support in accordance with 72-50-06,

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 662
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. B. (7) Reassemble engine and perform the following engine operational and
R functional checks, and any requirements specified in applicable
R section of manual during removal/installation of components.
R (a) Engine leakage check.
R (b) Disengage propeller start locks check.
R (c) Indicated torque output check using torque test kit.
R (d) Propeller governor reset function and NTS lockout system pres-
R sure check.
R (e) NTS system ground check.
R (f) (Codes AA-AC, CA-GA) NTS lockout and propeller governor reset
R check.
R (g) NTS system check by f l i g h t check.

R (h) Flight idle fuel flow check.
R (i) (Codes DA-GA) Flight idle low speed f l a t check.
R (J) (Codes DA-GA) Flight idle low speed check.
R (k) (Codes AA-CC) Flight idle check.
R (l) Fuel flow acceleration schedule check.
R (m) Overspeed governor check.

R (n) Propeller governor high RPM check.
R (o) Propeller governor low RPM check.

R (p) Underspeed governor high RPM check.
R (q) Underspeed governor low RPM check.
R (r) Maximum fuel flow check.
R (s) Static reverse power check.

R (t) Reverse power symmetry check.
R (u) Transition to beta mode check.

R BI. Deleted.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 663
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R OS PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. C. Lightning S t r i k e Inspection
NUTE: The following inspection of propeller and engine compo-

nents shall be perfomed i f a i r c r a f t has experienced an
actual or suspected lightning strike.
(1) Visually inspect propeller, propeller deice boots, propeller dome,

and spinner for evidence of p i t t i n g or arcing.
(2) With cowling removed, v i s u a l l y inspect external engine surface, en-

gine mounting structure, and all electrical connections for evi-
dence of p i t t i n g or arcing.
I f no p i t t i n g or arcin~ is found after a suspected lightning strike

or a strike on the a i r c r a f t airframe, there is no need to proceed
further with the inspection. An oil contamination sample may be
taken and an oil f i l t e r element inspection accomplished in accor-
dance with paragraph 3.D. as a precautionary measure 10 to 15 en-
gine operating hours following the lightning strike incident. A
second oil sample should be taken approximately 50 engine operat-
ings flours after the f i r s t oil sample or at an interval recommended
by AlliedSignal Customer Support Engineering to verify stabiliza-
tion of wear metal levels in the oil system and oil f i l t e r element.
(3) I f evidence of p i t t i n g or arcing is found in step (1) or (2), ac-

complish following inspection.
(a) Remove nose cone assembly. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance
Practices. Visually inspect all accessible bearings and gears
f o r evidence of p i t t i n g or arcing. I f any p i t t i n g or arcing
is found replace affected gears and bearings and degauss all
other gears and bearings.
NOTE: I f any p i t t i n g or arcing is found on bull and

sun gear assembly, high speed pinion assembly
or diaphragm housing bearings for bull and
R sun gear, return diaphragm to an AlliedSignal
authorized service f a c i l i t y for repair.
(b) Remove, disassemble and inspect intermediate gearbox assembly

(diaphragm). Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
(c) V i s u a l l y inspect a l l accessible gears and bearings (including

compressor and turbine bearings) for p i t t i n g and arcing.
Replace affected gears and bearings as required and degauss
all other gears and bearings.
(d) Replace oil f i l t e r element in accoraance with 79-20-02, Main-

tenance Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 664
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. C. (4) Reassemble engine as required. Start and operate engine f o r 15

minutes and shutdown. Remove oil f i l t e r element (which should now
have a t o t a l accumulated time of 15 minutes) and perform inspection
by c a r e f u l l y spreading the pleated segments and v i s u a l l y checking
f o r a greater than normal amount of trapped p a r t i c l e s . Check for a
higher than normal amount of magnetic p a r t i c l e s by passing a magnet
inside f i l t e r element and observing reaction of p a r t i c l e s on outer
surface of f i l t e r element. Use care not to damage or m u t i l a t e
f i l t e r element. I f a higher than normal amount of metal p a r t i c l e s
are found, remove engine and return to an AlliedSignal authorized
service f a c i l i t y f o r repair. I f f i l t e r element is s a t i s f a c t o r y ,
r e i n s t a l l f i l t e r element and ground operate engine f o r i hour at
various intermediate power settings. Shutdown and check o i l f i l t e r
element as in 15 minute engine operation above.
(5) I f no abnormal amount of additional metal p a r t i c l e s are found in

o i l f i l t e r element a f t e r i hour engine operation in step (4), r e i n -
s t a l l oil f i l t e r element and return engine to service.
(6) Operate engine in normal service to accumulate 9 to 12 additional

engine operating hours on o i l f i l t e r element. After accumulating
t h i s time, submit an oil sample and o i l f i l t e r element f o r
analysis/inspection to appropriate analysis f a c i l i t y in accordance
with paragraph 3.D. as a means of monitoring the engine condition.
(7) I f subsequent engine operation a f t e r accomplishing step (5) results

in any of the following symptoms, attempt to determine the cause of
symptom. I f unable to determine cause, or i f o i l f i l t e r element is
R contaminated, contact a Field Service Engineer or AlliedSignal
authorized service f a c i l i t y f o r confirmation of tile above engine
R symptoms before returning the engine to an AlliedSignal authorized
service f a c i l i t y for repair.
(a) Low or f l u c t u a t i n g o i l or torque pressure.
(b) Any unusual engine noise or binding during rolldown.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 665
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. D. Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program (SOAP) Check
NOTE: Table 607A provides a l i s t of equipment and materials

required to perform Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program
(SOAP) Check.
Table 607A. Equipment and Materials
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used f o r l i s t e d item.
R Sampling k i t (PN 831043-3) AlliedSignal Engines, D i s t r i b u t i o n

Center, Sales Administration, P.O.
Box 29003, Phoenix, AZ 85038-9003
NOTE: Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program (SOAP) Check

has proved to be e f f e c t i v e at other than the in-
tervals recommended in diagnosing engine problems.
Therefore, i t is recommended an oil sample (with
o i l f i l t e r ) be submitted for analysis when an i n -
t e r m i t t e n t or change in engine operating parameter
occurs. Example: f l u c t u a t i n g o i l pressure,
change in audible noise l e v e l , etc.
Refer to paragraph E for inspection requirements

of contaainated oil systB~s.
(1) Inspect engines that have had gearbox repairs a f t e r at least 10 but
not more than 25 hours operating time as follows.
CAUTION: WHEN TAKING OIL SAMPLE FROM ENGINE FOR

SOAP CHECK. ENSUREALL EQUIPMENT USED IS
CLEAN AND NOT CONTAMINATEDTO PREVENT OB-
TAINING FALSE INDICATION OF OIL
CONTAMINATION. ENSUREENGINE OIL TENPERA-
TORE IS HgT. TAKE SAMPLE WITHIN 15
MINUTES AFTER SHUTDOWN.
Ca) Siphon an oil sample from the engine tank at the f i l l e r cap
using plastic tube provided in sampling k i t . Route the
plastic tube into the small container provided in the s~mpling
k i t to contain the oil sample.
(b) Remove oil f i l t e r from engine. Refer to 79-20-02, Flaintenance

Pract ices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 666
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. b. (1) (c) Visually inspect o i l f i l t e r . I f an abnormal number of trapped

particles is evident, contact a Field Service Engineer for
guidance and further i n s t r u c t i o n s .
(d) Place oil f i l t e r in container supplied in sallpling k i t .
(e) I n s t a l l replacement o i l f i l t e r on engine. Refer to 79-20-02,

CAUTION: ENSURE THAT CONTAINERS (SMALL CONTAINER

FOR SOAP SAMPLE AND LARGE CONTAINER FOR
OIL FILTER) ARE PROPERLY SEALED TO PREVENT
LEAKAGE DURING SHIPMENT.
NOTE: A l i s t of authorized laboratories for o i l

analysis is given in SIL (Service Information
Letter) P331-97.
(f) Prepare and route sampling k i t in accordance with sampling k i t

instruction s.
NOTE: The following inspection shall be performed on engines

which have experienced damage to o i l - w e t t e d parts that
resulted in contamination of the engine o i l system to
the extent that the oil f i l t e r bypass valve indicator
was extended, or contaminated chip detector was conta-
minated, and the damage resulted in extensive contami-
nation of the oil f i l t e r element.
Eo Oil System Contamination Inspection
(i) Inspect all bearing in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices. The intermediate gearbox housing assembly (diaphragm)
shall be returned to an AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y
f o r inspection of non-accessible bearings.
(2) Perform a 100 percent visual inspection of a l l gears. The interme-

diate gearbox housing assembly (~iaphragm) shall be returned to an
AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for inspection of non-
accessible gears.
(3) Prior to cleaning gears, inspect gear teeth for metal deposits. I f
there is an indication of metal deposits on gear teeth, perfom the
fol l owing.
(a) Clean gears in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting.
(b) Gears which had metal deposits and mating 9ears shall be mag-
netic particle inspected in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
(c) I f an oil j e t has gone between ring gear and planet gears,
remove and discard ring gear.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 667
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. E. (4) Visually inspect beta tube in accordance with 72-10-01, Maintenance

Practices. Replace beta tube, i f necessary.
(5) Visually inspect propeller pitch control components in accordance

with 72-10-02, Maintenance Practices. Replace part that does not
meet inspection requirements.
R (6) The following airframe parts shall be thoroughly flushed with sol-
vent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I ) .
R (a) Airfra~ne oil system tubes. Refer to A i r c r a f t Maintenance

R Manual.
R (b) Oil temperature control valve. Refer to A i r c r a f t Haintenance

R l~anual.
R (c) Propeller and piston/dome assembly. Refer to manufacturer's
R hai ntenance Nanual.
R (7) The a i r c r a f t oil cooler shall be replaced with a unit which has
R been v e r i f i e d to be thoroughly clean.
R (8) Engine o i l to fuel cooler shall be replaced with a unit which has
R been v e r i f i e d to be thoroughly clean.
(9) All o i l system tubing shall be thoroughly flusiled with solvent

(Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I ) .
(1o) All internal o i l passages in the accessory drive housing shall be

pressure flushed with solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type
I).
(11) Oil tank shall be removed, disassembled, and thoroughly flusiled

with solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I ) .
(12) Remove propeller governor assembly and return to an AlliedSignal

authorized service f a c i l i t y for overhaul.
(13) Remove torque sensor assembly and return to an AlliedSignal

authorized service f a c i l i t y for disassembly, cleaning, inspection
of components, and replacement of bearings.
(14) Following inspection, reassemble engine. Install a new oil f i l t e r

element in accordance with 79-20-02, Maintenance Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 668
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. E. (15) Start arld operate engine f o r 15 minutes, then shutdown. Remove

o i l f i l t e r element and inspect o i l f i l t e r element f o r metal p a r t i -
cles by passing a clean magnet along insiae surface of f i l t e r ele-
ment ana observing the reaction of p a r t i c l e s on outer surface of
f i l t e r element. I f greater then normal amount of metal p a r t i c l e s
are present, remove engine and return to an AlliedSignal
authorized service f a c i l i t y for r e p a i r . I f the o i l f i l t e r element
is s a t i s f a c t o r y , r e i n s t a l l f i l t e r element and 9round operate en-
gine f o r i hour at various intermediate power settings. Shutdown
engine and reinspect o i l f i l t e r element as in 15 minute engine
operation above.
(16) I f no abno~nal amount of additional metal p a r t i c l e s are found in

the o i l f i l t e r element a f t e r 1 hour operation in step (11), rein-
s t a l l o i l f i l t e r element and return engine to service.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE MORETHAN 10 HOURS

BEYO~D THE TIME THE OIL/OIL FILTER ELEMENT
SAMPLE IS TAKEN WITHOUT CONFI~IATION OF NORMAL
OIL/OIL FILTER ELEMENT SAMPLE RESULTS.
(17) Operate engine in normal service u n t i l an additional 9 to 12 oper-

ating hours have been accumulated on tile oil f i l t e r element. Sub-
mit an o i l / o i l f i l t e r element sample to an AlliedSignal authorized
analysis laboratory as a means of monitoring engine condition.
(18) I f subsequent engine operation results in any of the f o l l o w i n g ,

contact a Field Service Engineer or an AlliedSignal authorized
service f a c i l i t y for confirmation of engine symptoms before oper-
ating the engine f u r t h e r .
(a) Low or f l u c t u a t i n g o i l or torque pressure.
(b) Any unusual engine noises or binding during rolldown.
(c) Chip detector cockpit l i g h t illuminated and magnetic p a r t i -

cles found on chip detector.
NOTE: Internal engine malfunction in the reduction uear and

shaft section, c~npressor section, or turbine section
that could cause unusually high engine mount pad load-
ing requires the f o l l o w i n g inspection.
F. Engine Mounting Pad Inspection
Visually inspect engine mounting pads in accordance with 72-10-20,

Ins pecti on/Check.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 669
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. G. Bird Ingestion or Bird Impact Inspection
R NOTE: The extent of inspection w i l l vary with the known

R conditions of the event and evidence disclosed
R through the stages of inspection.
R Analysis of the oil f i l t e r and any functional test

R requirements are part of the evaluation and can
R affect the final disposition of the engine.
R Ensure that the source of any i r r e g u l a r i t y is

R determined and r e c t i f i e d in the course of inspec-
R tion and repair of the engine.
R Conditions of the event are to be documented and

R provided by the customer to any f a c i l i t y accom-
R plishing all or part of the inspection.
R I f damage conditions are observed which are not

R acknowledged by t h i s manual, contact your local
R Fiel~ Service Representative or Customer Support
R Engineering, Phoenix, Arizona for advisement.
R (1) The following are the minimum requirements to be accomplished.
(a) Accomplish i n i t i a l evaluation as specified in step (2).
R (b) Refer to unscheduled maintenance requirements, paragraph I.B.
(c) Document the conditions of the event and related discrepancies

found.
(d) Accomplish oil and f i l t e r analysis (SOAP) inspection within 5

to I0 engine operating hours and again at 20 to 30 hours f o l -
lowing engine inspection and repair. Refer to paragraph 3.D.
(2) Accomplish i n i t i a l evaluation as follows.
(a) Visually inspect propeller and propeller spinner for evidence

of bird matter and other indications of bird impact.
R NOTE: F i r s t stage impeller blaae d i s t o r t i o n or rub

R between f i r s t stage impeller blade leading
R edge and shroud may be an indication of bird
R ingestion.
R (b) Visually inspect compressor i n l e t f o r indications of bird mat-

R ter deposits and other indications of bird impact or bird
R ingestion.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 670
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: Diffuser vane damage and bird matter deposits

R are usually localized rather than uniformly
R distributed.
R 3. G. (2) (c) I f there are indications of bird impact or bird ingestion in

R the compressor i n l e t , inspect f i r s t stage impeller and f i r s t
R stage d i f f u s e r gas path using a borescope. Check entire c i r -
R cumference of f i r s t stage d i f f u s e r vanes when borescoping gas
R path.
R (d) Inspect f i r s t stage impeller f o r damage in accordance with

R NOTE: Bird matter in the turbine exhaust path may

R be observed as a build up of heavy carbon or
R soot p a r t i c l e s .
R (e) Visually inspect turbine exhaust path, t h i r d stage stator, and

R third stage turbine rotor for evidence of bird matter.
R (f) Rotate the propeller by hand, in the normal d i r e c t i o n of

R rotation. Evaluate engine by feeling resistance and l i s t e n i n g
R for noise.
R i Binding is not acceptable.
R 2 Intermittent resistance to rotation or the emission of

R noise which cannot be determined normal by s i m i l a r i t y with
R other undistressed engine, is not acceptable.
R (g) Remove chip detector in accordance with 79-30-01, Maintenance

R Practices. Inspect f o r pieces of metal; other than fine wear.
R NOTE: Steps (h) and ( i ) are not required i f

R propeller was not rotating ( s t a t i c ) when bird
R impact occurred.
R (h) Remove engine o i l f i l t e r in accordance with 79-20-02, Mainte-

R nance Practices. Visually inspect f i l t e r and f i l t e r cavity
R for metal pieces; other than fine wear.
R (i) Accomplish oil and f i l t e r analysis (SOAP); include any metal

R pieces found with f i l t e r for evaluation. Refer to paragraph
R 3.D.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 671
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
iliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE33i-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
R 3. G. (2) (j) I f bird ingestion is suspected, perform the following.
R 1 Remove fuel nozzles in accordance with 73-10-09, [4ainte-

R nance Practices.
R Remove i g n i t e r plugs in accordance with 74-20-01, Mainte-

R nance Practices.
R NOTE:
m
Foreign matter is usually observed in fuel
R nozzle shrouds and nozzle t i p s .
R Visually inspect fuel nozzles for foreign matter. Foreign

R matter is not acceptable.
R NOTE: Foreign matter is usually observed as

R deposits in combustor wall a i r holes.
R 4 Using a borescope, inspect combustor f o r evidence of

R foreign matter. Foreign matter is not acceptable.
R (k) I f ingestion of bird matter is indicated, accomplish steps (3)

R and (4).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 672
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: Clean a l l removed parts in accordance with
R Cleaning/Painting.
R During disassembly, v i s u a l l y inspect i n t e r i o r of

R reduction gear housings and component surfaces for
R metal debris. Note findings and r e t a i n any debris
R f o r evaluation.
Unless specified, bearings may be l e f t assembled

on gear shafts.
R 3. G. (3) Accomplish disassembly to f a c i l i t a t e inspection requirements for

R bira ingestion.
(a) Remove output gearbox housing assembly (nose cone) in accor-

dance with 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
R (b) Remove planet c a r r i e r and gear assembly in accordance with
R (c) Remove assembled ring gear and support from diaphragm assembly
R in accordance with 72-10-12, Maintenance Practices.
R (d) Remove i n t e m e d i a t e gearbox housing (diaphragm module) in ac-
R cordance with 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
R (e) Disassemble compressor section in accordance with 72-30-04,
R Naintenance Practices.
R (f) Remove ca~bustion chamber ( l i n e r ) in accordance with 72-40-01,
R Maintenance Practices.
R (g) Disassm]ble turbine section in accordance with 72-50-07 and
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 673
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2..A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Prior to inspection, ensure all removed parts

have been cleaned in accordance with
C1eani ng/Pai nti ng.
A hand held mirror and l i g h t source are to be

used to accomplish visual inspection of in-
d i r e c t surfaces.
R 3. G. (4) Accomplish inspection requirements for bird ingestion as follows.

(a) V i s u a l l y inspect accessible surfaces of a l l components for
damage. Crack indications, broken out pieces, and d i s t o r t i o n
not i d e n t i f i e d as normal wear, is not acceptable. Particular
attention should be given to the following. (See Figures 619
through 622.)
--i Root areas of splines and gears.
2 I n t e r i o r surfaces adjacent to alignment studs and bushings.
Accessory and engine mount stud and/or i n s e r t s .
The as cast surfaces of intermediate housing between high

speed pinion and sun and bull gear bearing bores.
5 Compressor bearing s t r u t t r a i l i n g edge of input housing.
R Transition region of input housing from accessory mount

R surface to compressor housing flange.
R (b) Inspect alignment studs and bushings for security by applying

R firm hand pressure. Movement of a bushing or stud r e l a t i v e to
R i t s base is not acceptable.
R (c) V i s u a l l y inspect a l l alignment studs and bushings for d i s t o r -

R t i o n and evidence of displacement r e l a t i v e to t h e i r base.
R Visually detectable metal displacement or uneven perimeter in
R the housing at the base of an alignment stud or bushing i n d i -
R cates distress even i f the detail appears secure. (See
R Figures 621 and 622,)
R (d) Inspect a l l removed bearings in accordance with 70-00-00,

R Standard Practices.
(e) Inspect a l l gear and bearing assemblies f o r freedom of

r o t a t i o n . Binding or i n t e r m i t t a n t resistance to rotation is
not acceptable.
R (f) Dimensionally inspect alignment holes of output and intermedi-
R ate housing, in accordance with 72-10-09 and 72-10-13,
R Inspection/Check.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 674
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. G. (4) (g) Dimensionally inspect diameter of ring gear support mount

alignment holes. I f any mount hole diameter is in excess of
0.4420 inch, the part is not acceptable.
(h) Inspect torque sensor metering cam and valve for freedom of
travel for f u l l length of curve ( h e l i x ) . Binding or i n t e r m i t -
tant resistance is not acceptable.
(i) Inspect labyrinth s t a t i c seal c a r r i e r of input housing.

Visually detected separation or misalignment r e l a t i v e to the
housing is not acceptable. Movement using firm hand pressure
r e l a t i v e to the housing is not acceptable.
R (j) Discard compressor bearing.
R (k) Accomplish Fuel Control/Fuel Pump I n t e g r i t y Inspection in ac-

R cordance with paragraph 2.F.
R (1) Inspect controls linkage for freedom of travel to a l l stops.

R Binding or indicated changes of stopping points are not
R acceptable. Binding or improper rigging may indicate damage
R in response to abnormal input. I f the cause cannot be deter-
R mined as unrelated to the event, then remove propeller gover-
R nor, fuel pump, fuel control and any other suspect component
R and functional test in accordance with component manual.
R Refer to Introduction, Table 2.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 675
Aug 4/94
~FG70-2A

A E R 0 S PA (i E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
AI
EA B
CRACK~.~
Z
. L
AREA B (ROTATED)
AREA A
CF--44G-1187
R Accessory Drive Housiny Nounting Pad Typical Crack Areas

R Figure 619 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 676
Aug 4/94
~FG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (: E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IANSITION I~EGION
YPICAL 360-)
MIRROR
INTERIOR SURFACE
ADJACENT TO STUDS
AND BUSHINGS
FIRST STAGE COMPRESSOR IMPELLER

t
LABYRINTH STATIC
SEAL CARRIER --..
AREA P
COMPRESSOR ~ ~
SUPPORT STRUT -- ~,
MIRROR CF-44G-1188
AREA G .
Accessory Drive Housing

Figure 620 72-00-00
UP136688
Page 677
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~....~..-~ STUD
DISPLACED
METAL ~,,,,L[-~.,~.I.. BUSHING
~'--.--~'.~-----...-~ UNEVEN
0 PERIMETER
VIEW A
.( (TYPICAL4 PLACES)
ALIGNMENT STUD
AND BUSHING
ALIGNMENT ~
STUD AND
R BUSHING /~ (~ 0
0
ALIGNMENT
STUD AND
BUSHING
Oo O
CF-44G-1190
R Accessory Drive Housing Alignment Studs and Bushings

UP136688
R Figure 621 72-00-00

Page 678
Aug 4/94
GFG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCEFIANUAL
.._....~ STUD
DISPLACED
METAL , ~ _ _ . ~ . . , . ~ BUSHING
~ '---.--J.)~'-,---.,.~ UNEVEN
PERIMETER
VIEW A
(TYPICAL 6 PLACES)
ALIGNMENT HOLE
\
'T----- ALIGNMENT HOLE
MOUNT BOLT -t--
(TYPICAL 4 PLACES)
0
0 ©
,IQ A
@
©
ALIGNMENT HOLE
ALIGNMENT
HOLE
STUD
F C~ 0
S STUD
0 ~ 0
STUD CF-44G-1189
STUD
Intermediate Gearbox Housing (Diaphragm) Assembly

Alignment Hole and Stud Locations
Figure 622 72-00-00
UP136688
Pa9e 679
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. G. (4) (m) Conditional requirements are as follows.
If: Cracks are found in any housing, accessory component,

gear, shaft, or coupling.
Then: Accomplish requirements for inspection level 2

of Abnormal Load Inputs (Propeller Strike)
Inspection.
(n) Magnetic particle inspect coupling shaft between rotating

group and high speed pinion.
(o) Visually inspect compressor seal stator and rotor in accor-

dance with 72-10-19, Inspection/Check.
NOTE: Bird matter deposits in compressor gas path

can result in a noticeable loss of engine
performance. Clean components to remove bird
matter deposits. Refer to 72-00-00,
C1eaning/Pai nti ng.
(p) Visually inspect f i r s t stage impeller for damage. Refer to

72-30-04, Inspection/Check for acceptable l i m i t s .
R (q) Visually inspect second stage impeller for damage. Refer to

R NOTE: Excessive r o l l back of compressor d i f f u s e r

R vane leading edges, can result in a noticea-
R ble loss of engine performance.
R (r) Inspect compressor d i f f u s e r as follows.
R 1 Visually inspect diffuser vane leading edges for cracks and

R rolled back appearance. Cracks are not acceptable.
R 2 Visually inspect all accessible areas of compressor d i f -

R fuser housing for cracks. I f cracks are evident, refer to
3 Using a borescope, inspect i n t e r i o r of compressor d i f f u s e r

f o r bird matter deposits.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 680
Aug 4/94

R CAUTION: BLOCKAGE OF AIR PASSAGES CAUSED BY SOOTAND

R CARBON DEPOSITS ON TURBINE SECTION CONPONENTS
R CAN AFFECT COOLINGAND CUMBUSTION
R CHARACTERISTICS. ABNORMALTHERMAL DISTRESS MAY
R RESULT IF BLOCKAGESARE NOT REHOVED.
NOTE: Bird matter w i l l be observed as abnormal soot and

carbon deposits on turbine section components.
3. G. (4) (s) Visually inspect all crevices and gas passages of turbine sec-
tion components for bird matter deposits. Clean to remove
soot and carbon deposits in accordance with applicable
Chapter/Section/Subject.
(t) Visually inspect blade tips of f i r s t , second and third stage

rotors for rub damage in accordance with 72-50-07 and
(u) Visually inspect second and third stage rotor seal knives for
wear and damage. I f wear or damage is evident, refer to
72-50-07, Inspection/Check for acceptable limits.
(v) Inspect second and third stage stator seal assemblies in ac-
cordance with 72-50-07 and 72-50-08, Inspection/Check.
(w) Visually inspect curvic coupling assembly knives for wear and
damage. I f wear or damage is evident, refer to 72-50-07,
Inspection/Check for acceptable limits.
(x) Inspect seal assembly in accoraance with 72-30-03,

Inspecti on/Check.
(y) lnspect turbine a i r / o i l seal in accordance with 72-50-06,

Inspecti on/Check.
(z) Inspect turbine bearing support in accordance with 72-50-06,

Ins pecti on/Check.
(aa) Visually inspect internal passages of combustion case (plenuriO
and pressure plumbing for evidence foreign matter. Clean to
remove foreign matter. Refer to 72-40-01, Cleaning/Painting.
(ab) Visually inspect and test fuel nozzles in accordance with

73-10-09, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
(ac) Visually inspect anti-ice shield and passages of anti-ice

valve and plumbing for evidence of foreign matter. Clean to
remove foreign matter. Refer to 75-10-01 and 75-10-02,
Cleani ng/Pai nti ng.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 681
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R CAUTION: THE CAUSE OF TIIE OVERSPEED SHOULD BE IDENTIFIED

R PRIOR TO FURTHER ENGINE OPERATION. REFERTO
R 72-00-00, TROUBLESHOOTINGFOR GUIDANCE,
R NOTE: The following are minimum requirements to be accom-

R plished a f t e r an overspeed condition has occurred.

R provided by the customer to any f a c i l i t y accomplishing
R all or part of the inspection.
R I f any damage condition is observed which is not ac-

R knowledged by this manual, contact your local Field
R Service Representative or Customer Support Engineering,
R Phoenix, Arizona for advisement.
3. H. Overspeed Inspection
R (1) Remove and replace or repair any component suspected of contribut-
R ing to the overspeed condition. Refer to applicable
R Chapter/Section/Subject for removal procedures.
NOTE: First'stage nozzle assembly may be l e f t assembled

in turbine stator housing unless visual inspection
dictates removal is required for a detailed
inspection.
R (a) Remove f i r s t , second, and t h i r d stage turbine rotors in ac-
R cordance with 72-50-07 and 72-50-08, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Removecurvic coupling assembly in accordance with 72-50-08,

(c) Remove f i r s t and second stage impellers in accordance with

(2) Perform overspeed inspection.

(a) Refer to unscheduled maintenance requirements, paragraph I.B.
R (b) Fluorescent penetrant inspect the following components in ac-

R cordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not
R acceptable.
R 1-- First and second stage impellers.
R 2 First, second, and third stage turbine rotors.
R 3 Curvic coupling assembly.
R (c) V i s u a l l y inspect blade t i p s of turbine rotor assemblies f o r

R rubs in accordance with 72-50-07 and 72-50-08,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 682
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
--AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
R 3. H. (2) (d) Visually inspect shrouds of turbine nozzle assemblies for rubs
R in accordance with 72-50-07 and 72-50-08, Inspection/Check.
R (e) Visually inspect second stage impeller for rubs and other
R damage in accordance with 72-30-03, Inspection/Check.
R (f) Visually inspect compressor housing shroud contour for rubs

R and other damage in accordance with 72-30-03,
R (g) Visually inspect f i r s t stage impeller for rubs and other

R damage in accordance with 72-30-04, Inspection/Check.
R (h) Visually inspect f i r s t stage impeller shroud for rubs and

R other damage in accordance with 72-30-04, Inspection/Check.
R (i) I f overspeed was in excess of 108% rpm, return the following

R components to an AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for
R dimensional and eddy current inspection.
1 First, second and third stage turbine rotor assemblies.
2 First and second stage impellers.

(2) Reassemble engine in accordance with applicable Chapter/Section/
Subject.
(3) Accomplish oil and f i l t e r analysis (SOAP) inspection within 5 to 10

engine operating hours and again at 20 to 30 hours following engine
inspection and repair. Refer to paragraph 3.D.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 683
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. I. Engine Over-Torque Inspection
NOTE: Table 609 is an engine over-torque inspection

requirement. For f l a t rated engine over-torque
inspection requirement refer to Aircraft Mainte-
nance Manual for airframe/engine installation in-
spection requirement.
(1) Perform engine over-torque inspection as specified in Table 608.
Table 609. Engine Over-Torque Inspection Requirements
Conditi on Recommendation
2564 to 2871 ft-lbs Reduce torque within limits and perform

(777 to 870 SHP reference only) SOAP analysis within next 25 f l i g h t
(100% to 112% reference only) hours.
Over 5 minutes

(870 to 886 SHP reference only) SOAP analysis within next 25 flight
Over 15 seconds
Over 5 seconds

(116% to 118.9% reference only) hours.
Anytime
3052 f t - l b s Prior to next flight inspect, perform

(Over 925 SHP reference only) gearbox inspection. Magnetic particle
(119% reference only) inspect propeller shaft coupling in
Anytime accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Cracks are not allowed.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 684
Aug 4/94

R NOTE: I f turbine over temperature occurred during engine

R start or below ground idle, steps (1) through (5) do
R not apply, proceed to step (6).
R I f turbine over temperature occurred at or above ground

R idle, accomplish steps (1) through (6).
R 3. J. Turbine Over Temperature Inspection Requirements
R (i) Determine the actual temperature compensation that the compensating

R resistor is set. Refer to 77-20-03, Adjustment/Test.
R (2) Obtain the latest engine DSC and determine the maximum temperature
R compensation al lowed.
R (3) Subtract the maximum temperature compensation allowed from actual

R temperature compensation.
R Example No. 1
R Actual temperature compensation = +17%

R Maximum temperature compensation = (-)+10°C (From DSC)
R Delta = + 7°C
R Example No. 2
R Actual temperature compensation = +110C

R Maximum temperature compensation = (.-)-5% (From DSC)
R Delta = +16°C
R (4) Calculate the actual turbine over temperature value as follows.
R Example (using delta from step (3)

R Example No. 1)
R Over temperature value observed = 37°C

R Subtract delta value (-)+ 7°C
R Actual turbine over temperature value = 30°C
R (5) Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test, Table 503 and determine

R required action f o r the actual turbine over temperature value
R determined in step (4).
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 685
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. J. (6) I f the column (action i f exceeded) in Table 503, 72-00-00,

R Adjustment/Test specifies Turbine Over Temperature Inspection is
R required, perform the following.
R CAUTION: THE CAUSEOF THE OVERTEMPERATUREMUSTBE
R IDENTIFIED PRIOR TO FURTHERENGINE
R OPERATION.
R (a) Determine the cause of the over temperature. Refer to

R 72-00-00, Trouble Shooting.
R (b) Remove and repair or replace any component suspected of con-

R tributing to the over temperature condition. Refer to appli-
R cable chapter/section/subject for the suspect component.
R (c) Refer to unscheduled maintenance requirements in 72-00-00,

R Inspection/Check for general inspection requirements.
R (d) Disassemble turbine group assembly (module) as required to

R remove f i r s t , second, and third stage turbine rotors and
R nozzles. Refer to 72-50-07 and 72-50-08, Maintenance
R Practices.
R CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROMTURBINE SECTION COMPO-

R NENTS ON ROTORBLADES RESULT IN A LOSS OF
R MATERIAL PROPERTIES OF THE BLADE. REUSE
R OF AFFECTED ROTOROR BLADES SET IS NOT
R ACCEPTABLE.
R (e) Visually inspect f i r s t , second and third stage turbine rotors

R as fol lows.
1 Visually inspect rotor blades for evidence of melting and

metal deposits from other turbine components. Melting or
metal deposits from other distressed turbine components is
not acceptable. Discard affected parts.
R 2 Visually inspect rotor blades for evidence of irregular

R bends and curling of blade t r a i l i n g edges. Irregular bends
R and curling is not acceptable.
R 3 Visually inspect f i r s t and second stage rotor blades for

R blistering (separation from base metal). Blistering is not
R allowed. Chipping of coating adjacent to blade t i p edges
R i s acceptabl e.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 686
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. J. (6) (f) Visually inspect f i r s t , second and third stage turbine nozzles
R as fol lows.
R 1 Visually inspect turbine nozzle vanes for evidence of

R melting. Evidence of melting is not allowed.
R 2 Visually inspect nozzle blade tip shrouds for rubs. I f

R rubs are evident, refer to 72-50-07 for acceptable limits.
R CAUTION: BURN THROUGHOR OTHERDEFORMITIESTHAT

R WOULD ALLOW GAS FLOWOUT OF THE NORMAL
R NOZZLE PATHRESULTS IN ABNORMAL IMPULSE
R LOADING OF TURBINE ROTORBLADES.
R NOTE: Burn through is defined as any nozzle vane

R material loss that allows sight through
R stator vanes when viewed parallel to en-
R gine center line.
R 3 Visually inspect nozzle assemblies for burn through and

R other deformities that would allow gas flow out of the nor-
R mal nozzle path. (See Figure 623.) Burn through or evi-
R dence of abnormal gas flow paths is not allowed.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 687
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. J. (6) (f) 3 a I f inspection reveals f i r s t stage nozzle vane burn
through, f i r s t stage turbine rotor blade set shall be
replaced and removed blade set shall be discarded.
b I f inspection reveals second stage nozzle vane burn

through, second stage turbine rotor blade set shall be
replaced and removed blade set shall be discarded.
C I f inspection reveals third stage nozzle vane burn

through, third stage turbine rotor shall be replaced and
removed rotor shall be discarded.
(g) Visually inspect outer transition l i n e r , inner transition
l i n e r , and combustor skirts for burn through and evidence of
melting. Burn through or melting is not acceptable.
(h) Replace parts that do not meet inspection requirements.
BURNTHROUGH
F-44G-771
R First Stage, Second Stage and Third Stage

R Turbine Nozzle Vane Burn Through (Typical)
UP136688
R Figure 623 72-00-00

Page 688
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. K. Oil Over Temperature Inspection
R NOTE: The extent of the inspection w i l l vary with the

R known conditions of the event and evidence dis-
R closed during the inspection.
R Ensure that the source of any irregularity is

R determined and rectified in the course of the in-
R spection and repair of the engine.

R provided by the customer to any f a c i l i t y accom-
R plishing all or part of the inspection.
R The following are minimum requirements to be

R accomplished. I f damage conditions are observed
R which are not acknowledged by this manual, contact
R your local Field Service Representative or
R Customer Support Engineering, Phoenix, AZ for
R advisement.
R (1) Refer to unscheduled maintenance requirements, paragraph I.B.
R (2) Document the conditions of the event and related discrepancies

R found.
R (3) Accomplish oil and f i l t e r analysis (SOAP) within 5 to 10 engine

R operating hours and again 20 to 30 hours following engine inspec-
R tion and repair. Refer to paragraph 3.D.
R (4) Accomplish disassembly to f a c i l i t a t e inspection requirements as

R follows.
NOTE: Accomplish steps (a) through (x) only, i f oil over tem-
perature was not caused from recirculation of exhaust
gas in the engine nacelle.
Accomplish steps (a) through (ak) i f oil over tempera-

ture was caused from recirculation of exhaust gas in the
engine nacelle.
During disassembly, v i s u a l l y inspect i n t e r i o r of reduc-

tion gear housing and components for debris. Note f i n d -
ings and retain any debris for evaluation.
All screens are to be removed from the oil jets f o r

cleaning purposes.
All packings are to be removed and discarded upon

access.
(a) Remove and disassemble beta tube in accordance with 72-10-01,

72-00-00
UP136688
Page 689
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A

AEROSPACE GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
R 3. K. (4) (b) Removeseal plug from propeller shaft in accordance with
R 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices. Discard seal plug.
R (c) Removeand disassemble propeller pitch control in accordance

R (d) Removepropeller governor in accordance with 72-10-03, Main-

R (e) Disassemble propeller governor in accordance with the compo-
R nent overhaul manual.
R (f) Removefeathering valve in accordance with 72-10-07, Mainte-
R nance Practices.
R (g) Disassemble feathering valve in accordance with the component
R overhaul manual.
R (h) Removeand disassemble output gearbox housing assembly (nose
R cone) in accordance with 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
R (i) Removeand disassemble planet carrier and gear assembly in ac-
R cordance with 72-10-12, Maintenance Practices.
R (J) Remove and disassemble intermediate gearbox housing

R (diaphragm) in accordance with 72-10-13, Maintenance
R Practices.
R (k) (Pre SB 72-0416) Removeplug and packings from starter gear

R shaft in accordance with engine overhaul manual.
R (1) (Post SB 72-0416) Removesplined adapter from starter gear-

R shaft in accordance with 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
(m) Removeplug and packings from hydraulic pump gearshaft in ac-

cordance with engine overhaul manual.
(n) (Post SB 72-0486) Removeinsert frm~ tachometer generator
gear in accordance with 72-10-15, Maintenance Practices.
(o) Disassemble sun and bull gear assembly in accordance with en-
gine overhaul manual.
R NOTE: I f binding between accessory drive housing

R (gearbox) and the f i r s t stage diffuser
R (crossover duct) is noted during disassembly,
R dimensionally inspect diffuser Diameter E.
R Refer to 72-30-04, Inspection/Check.
R (p) Removeand disassemble accessory drive housing (gearbox) in
R accordance with 72-10-20, Maintenance Practices.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 690
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. K. (4) (q) Removeand disassemble turbine scavenge pump in accordance

(r) Removeturbine bearing in accordance with 72-50-06, Mainte-

nance Practices.
R (s) Remove and disassemble Beta and NTS pressure switch housing
R assembly, NTS solenoid valve, and plumbing in accordance with
(t) Removeall components from oil tank in accordance with

(u) Removeoil f i l t e r in accordance with 79-20-02, Maintenance

Practices.
(v) Removeturbine bearing oil plumbing in accordance with

(w) Disassemble the magnetic drain plug assembly in accordance

R (x) Clean and flush all removed components in accordance with

R NOTE: Steps (y) through (ak) are required only i f

R oil over temperature was the result of recir-
R culation of exhaust gas in the engine
R nacelle.
R (y) Removefuel shutoff valve in accordance with 73-10-06, Main-

R (z) Removeflow divider in accordance with 73-10-07, Maintenance

R Practices.
R (aa) Remove f u r control from f u r pump in accordance with

R (ab) (Codes DA-FA) Removestart fuel pressure regulator in accor-

R (ac) (Codes DA-FB) Removefuel heater lockout valve in accordance

R (ad) (Code GA) Remove fuel heater lockout valve and fuel enrich-
R ment valve in accordance with 73-10-05, Maintenance Practices.
R (ae) (Codes AA-CC) Removeand disassemble fuel enrichment valve in

R accordance with 73-21-04, Maintenance Practices.
R (af) (Codes DA-FB) Removeand disassemble fuel pressurizing valve

R in accordance with 73-21-04, Maintenance Practices.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 691
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A

R . K. (4) ( a g ) (Code GA) Removefuel pressure regulating valve in accor-
(ah) Remove ignition unit and ignition leads in accordance with

74-10-01 and 74-20-01, Maintenance Practices.
(ai) Remove a n t i - i c e shutoff valve in accordance with 75-10-01,

Maintenance Practices,
(aj) Remove thermocouple harness, temperature sensor, and compen-
sating resistor in accordance with 77-20-03, Maintenance
Practices.
(ak) Clean and flush a l l removed components in accordance with

72-00-00, Cleaning/Painti ng.
NOTE: Accomplish steps (5) through (32) only, i f oil over

temperature was not caused from recirculation of ex-
haust gas in the engine nacelle.
Accomplish steps (5) through (48), i f over temperature

was caused from recirculation of exhaust gas in the en-
gine nacelle.
Disassembly of some components in accordance with step

(4) was accomplished to f a c i l i t a t e cleaning and/or
replacement of packings. These components may not be
acknowledged with individual inspection requirements in
the following instructions.
Replacement of all packings and nonmetallic components

in the oil affected system are required for potential
loss of durability.
R All oil j e t / o r i f i c e holes are to be checked to ensure

R blockage does not exist.
R All oil tubes and oil component passages should checked

R to ensure blockage or deposits do not exist that may be
R released into the oil flow.
R I f melting or distortion of nonmetallic oil transfer
R tubes is observed during inspection, then inspection
R requirements and the disposition of various components
R vary significancy; refer to step (32).
R (5) Inspect the following bearings in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-

R dard Practices.
R (a) Forward propeller shaft thrust bearing.

R (b) Planetary gear bearings.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 692
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. K. (5) (c) Bull/Sun gear bearings.
R (d) High speed pinion bearings.
R (e) Compressor bearing.
R (f) Turbine bearing.
R (g) Discard all other bearings not listed.
R (6) Return the following components to an AlliedSignal authorized ser-

R vice f a c i l i t y for dimensional inspection, flush out of all cored
R passages, and pressure check.
R (a) Accessory drive housing.

R (b) Output gearbox housing.
R (c) Intermediate gearbox housing.
R (d) Propeller pitch control housing and cover.
R (7) Inspect all components of the torque sensor assembly in accordance

R with component overhaul manual, and accomplish the following.
R (a) Discard torque sensor assembly bearings.
R (b) Return torque sensor housing to an AlliedSignal authorized

R service f a c i l i t y for flush of cored passages, and pressure
R check.
R (8) Inspect components of the propeller governor in accordance with

R component overhaul manual.
R (9) Remove and replace positive torque sensor pressure regulator pack-
R ings in accordance with 72-10-05, Maintenance Practices.
R (10) Inspect and test the negative torque pressure regulator valve in
R accordance with Report No. 72-IR-10.
R (11) Inspect components of feathering valve in accordance with the com-

R ponent overhaul manual.
R (12) Discard shaft oil seals. Refer to 72-10-08, Maintenance Practices.
R (13) Discard propeller shaft a i r - o i l seal. Refer to 72-10-09, Mainte-

R nance Practices.
R (14) Dimensionally inspect inner and outer journal diameters of the bull
R gear in accordance with Report No. 72-IR-10.
R (15) Inspect gearcase oil scavenge pump in accordance with 72-10-13,

R Inspection/Check.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 693
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A

. K. ( 1 6 ) Inspect oil pressure pump in accordance with 72-10-18,
Inspection/Check.
(17) Discard compressor air-oil seal. Refer to 72-10-19.
(18) Inspect inner diameter of torsion shaft for carbon deposits.

Deposits resulting in a visually evident restriction of the oil
path is not acceptable.
R (19) Rotate gerotor drive shaft of turbine scavenge pump. Binding or

R intermittent resistance to rotation is not acceptable.
(20) Test oil to fuel cooler in accordance with component overhaul

manual.
R (21) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Inspect and test beta pressure switch in ac-
R cordance with 77-10-02, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
(22) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Inspect and test NTS pressure switch in accor-
dance with 77-10-02, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
R (23) (Code DA) Test beta pressure switch restrictor in accordance with
R 77-10-02, Adjustment/Test.
R (24) Inspect and test NTS solenoid valve in accordance with 77-10-02,
R Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
R (25) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Inspect components of torque sensor compensator
R in accordance with the component overhaul manual. Replace pack-
R ings and diaphragm.
R (26) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Inspect and test torque pressure transducer
R in accordance with 77-10-03, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
R (27) Inspect and test oil f i l t e r bypass valve in accordance with
R Report No. 72-IR-10.
R (28) Inspect and test oil pressure regulator in accordance with compo-
R nent overhaul manual.
R (29) Inspect and test oil vent valve in accordance with 79-20-06,
R (30) Inspect and test oil temperature bulb in accordance with
R 79-20-01, Inspection/Check.
R (31) Inspect components of magnetic drain plug in accordance with
R 79-30-01, Inspection/Check.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 694
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
FiAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. K. (32) I f any nonmetallic transfer tube exhibits molten flow or distor-

R tion, accomplish the fol lowing.
(a) Discard the following.
R 1 Output gearbox housing.

R 2 Intermediate gearbox housing set.
3 Torque sensor housing, tubes, and manifolds.
R 4 Propeller pitch control housing.
R _5 Propeller governor assembly.
R 6 Gearbox oil scavenge pump housing and gerotors.
R 7 Oil pressure pump housing and gerotors.
R 8 Oil jets in the output gearbox housing, intermediate gear-

R box housing, and accessory drive housing.
R 9 Metallic and nonmetallic i n t e r i o r oil transfer tubes.
R 10 Turbine scavenge pump gerotors.
R 11 Oil supply hose between tank and oil pressure pump i n l e t .
R 12 Oil f i l t e r bypass valve.
R 13 Oil f i l t e r cap.
R (b) Return all gears and spiined couplings to an AlliedSignal

R authorized service f a c i l i t y for evaluation.
R NOTE: Accomplish steps (33) through (48) in addition to

R steps (1) through (32) i f over temperature of the
R oil was the result of recirculation of exhaust
R gas in the engine nacelle.
R (33) (Codes DA-FB) Inspect and test start fuel pressure regulator in
R accordance with 73-10-03, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
R (34) (Codes DA-FB) Inspect and test fuel heater lockout valve in ac-
R cordance with 73-10-05, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
R (35) (Code GA) Inspect and test fuel heater lockout valve and fuel en-
R richment valve in accordance with 73-10-05, Inspection/Check and
R Adjustment/Test.
(36) Inspect and test fuel shutoff valve in accordance with 73-10-06,
Inspection/Check and Adjust~aent/Test.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 695
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal MAINTENANCEMANUAL
. K. (37) Inspect components of fuel flow divider in accordance with
73-10-07, Approved Repairs.
(38) Inspect insulation of fuel manifolds in accordance with 73-10-09,

Inspecti on/Check.
(39) (Codes AA-CC) Test fuel enrichment valve in accordance with

73-21-04, Adjustment/Test.
(40) Inspect and test fuel manifold purge solenoid valve in accordance
with 73-10-13, Inspection/Check.
(41) Test fuel control in accordance with the component overhaul

manual.
(42) Test fuel pump in accordance with the component overhaul manual.
(43) (Codes DA-FB, GA) Test fuel heater lockout valve and fuel enrich-
ment valve in accordance with 73-10-05, Adjustment/Test.
(44) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Inspect and test torque/temperature limiter
(by-pass valve) in accordance with 73-22-01, Inspection/Check and
Adjustment/Test.
(45) Inspect and test ignition unit in accordance with 74-10-01,

Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
(46) Inspect and test anti-ice shutoff valve in accordance with

75-10-01, Inspection/Check and Adjustment/Test.
(47) Inspect gasket material of the anti-ice shield in accordance with
R (48) Inspect and test thermocouple harness, temperature sensor, and
R compensating resistor in accordance with 77-20-03,
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 696
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
ADDENDUM601
INDEX OF INSPECTION PROCEDURES
I. General
This addendum provides an index of Inspection/Check locations. The index is

intended to aid in locating the Inspection/Check procedure when the part
number is known.
. How To Use
Locate the part number in Table 1 that corresponds to the part number of the
item to be inspected.
Read Chapter/Section/Subject number (location of the Inspection/Check in-

formation) directly to the right of part number.
INSPECTION/CHECK
UP136688
72-ADDENDUM 601
Page 1
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1. Index of Inspection Procedures
Chapter/ Chapter/
Section/ Secti on/
Part No. Subject Part No. Subject
MS28034-3 79-20-01 3101407-1 73-10-01

S8495-4C 79 -20-06 3101408-X 72-50-08
S9084D6Y 72-00-01 3101409-1 73-10-01
$9803-4 72-00-01 3101410-1 73-10-01
156120-2 79 -10-01 3101414-1 73 -10-01
194-523-9204 79-20-06 3101415-1 73-10-01
305394-2 74-30-01 3101416-1 73-10-01
305538-X 74-30-01 3101429-1 73-10-01
3001436-1 79 -20-02 3101441-1 77-10-02
3101006-X 72-10-13 3101442-1 77-10-02
3101025-X 72-10-13 3101443-1 77-10-02
3101062-1 72-10-16 3101447-1 72-10-19
3101063-1 72-10-16 3101455-1 73-10-13
3101066-1 72-10-13 3101456-1 73-10-13
3101068-X 72-10-13 3101457-1 73-10-13
3101084-X 72-10-13 3101689-1 72-10-13
3101091 72-50-06 3101707-X 72-10-16
3101092-1 72-50-06 3101708-X 72-10-16
3101144-X 72-10-13 3101710-1 77-10-02
3101155-1 73-10-09 3101716-1 77-10-03
3101156-1 73-10-09 3101724-2 72-10-12
3101160-X 72-10-19 3101725-X 72-10-09
3101167-1 72-30-04 3101726-X 72-10-15
72-50-08 3101755-3 72-40-01
3101170-X 72-10-13 3101766-1 73-10-01
3101180-1 72-10-16 3101783-1 72-10-09
3101205-1 73 -10-01 3101802-X 79 -20-05
3101218-1 73-10-01 3101807-X 72-10-13
3101219-1 73-10-01 3101829-X 72-30-04
3101279-1 73-10-01 3101830-X 72-30-04
3101293-X 72-30-04 3101836-X 72-10-20
3101299-1 77-10-03 3101874-1 72-50-08
3101321-X 72-10-13 3101877-1 73-10-01
3101335-2 72-10-13 79 -20-01
3101336-1 72-10-13 3101887-1 73-10-01
3101344-1 79 -20-08 3101888-1 75-10-01
3101375-1 72-10-19 3102011-1 73-10-01
3101383-1 73-10-13 3102012-i 73-10-01
3101385-1 73 -10-13 3102013-1 77-10-02
3101396-1 73-10-13 3102014-1 79-20-08
3101405-1 72-10-19 3102022-X 72-30-03
INS PECTION/CHECK
UP136688
72-ADDENDUM 601
Page 2
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1. Index of Inspection Procedures (Cont)
Chapter/ Chapte r /
Section/ Secti on/
3102028-X 72-10-14 3103496-3 72-30-04

R 3102178-1 73-10-01 3103585-1 72-10-15
R 3102179-1 73-10-01 3103598-2 72-10-15
3102183-1 73-10-01 3103708-1 72-10-19
3102341-X 72-10-16 3103727-X 72-10-13
3102345-X 72-10-20 3103728-3 72-10-13
3102347-1 72-10-05 3103729-1 72-10-13
3102378-X 72-10-12 3103732-2 72-10-20
R 3102391-1 72-10-13 3103735-1 72-10-09
3102440-1 72-10-05 3103785-X 72-10-10
3102467-1 73-10-09 3103827-1 79 -20-02
3102468-1 73-10-09 3103887-1 72-10-10
R 3102473-1 73-10-09 3103904-1 72-00-O5
3102474-1 73-10-09 3103933-1 72-10-10
R 3102507-1 73-10-01 3103946-2 72-50-08
R 3102604-1 73-10-01 3103969-1 72-50-06
R 3102605-1 73-10-01 3103971-1 79-30-01
R 3102613-1 72-40-01 3103972-1 79 -30-01
3102689-1 73-10-01 3107000-1 72-10-15
3102770-1 73-10-01 3107037-X 72-10-13
R 3102838-1 73-10-09 3107056-X 72-30-03
R 3102839-1 73-10-09 3107065-1 72-10-09
R 3102843-1 73-10-09 3107092-1 72-10-09
3102844-1 73-10-09 319974-1-1 79 -20-06
3102847-1 72-30-04 319980-X 75-10-01
3102877-1 77-10-02 337-541-9101 73-22-01
R 3102985-1 72-10-15 337-541-9104 73-22-01
3103011-1 79-20-02 337-546-9001 73-10-13
3103031-1 72-10-15 358206 72-10-13
3103035-1 72-10-15 358267 72-10-09
72-10-17 358271 72-10-13
3103127-1 72-50-08 358272 72-10-13
3103176-1 73-10-01 72-10-15
3103192-3 72-10-13 358278 72-10-09
75-10-01 358331-2 72-10-19
3103217-2 72-10-18 72-30-04
3103359-1 72-50-05 358347-1 72-50-06
R 3103376-1 73-10-09 358348 72-10-13
3103396-1 73-10-01 72-10-15
3103435-1 72-10-13 358360-X 72-10-09
3103467-1 72-10-13 358361-1 72-10-09
INSPECTION/CHECK
72-ADDENDUM 601
UP136688
Page 3
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1. Index of Inspection Procedures (Cont)
Chapter/ Chapter/
Section/ Secti on/
358465-1 72-10-13 866531-2 72-10-13

358676-X 72-10-12 866533-3 72-10-01
358893-1 72-10-15 866540-X 79-20-02
72-10-17 866757-2 72-00-01
358894-1 72-10-15 867155-1 79-10-01
369876-X 74-20-01 867165-X 72-10-18
369949-X 74-20-01 867166-1 72-10-08
R 394230-X 73-10-06 867167-1 72-10-08
394312-12-1 73-10-03 867569-X 72-50-08
R 394324-X 73-10-07 867814-1 72-10-06
R 394390-1-I 73-10-07 867883-X 72-10-13
423-534-9003 72-10-13 867884-1 72-10-15
423-603-9011 72-10-13 867885-1 72-10-13
423-603-9012 72-10-13 867886-1 72-10-13
682-523-9014 72-10-13 867887-1 72-10-13
682-523-9801 72-10-13 867894-1 72-10-12
682-523-9821 72-10-13 867916-6 77-10-01
690267-4 72-50-06 867923-1 72-50-04
690279-1 72-50-06 867935-1 79-20-04
692481 72-40-01 867944-1 72-10-16
692545-X 73-10-03 868039-1 72-10-19
77-10-02 868179-1 72-50-02
759001-2 72-00-01 868182-1 72-50-07
76149 79-20-02 868183-1 72-50-08
771-564-9001 77-10-02 868184-X 72-50-07
771-612-9203 73-10-13 868194-2 72-10-13
865021-2 72-10-13 868242-1 73-10-09
865042-X 72-50-06 868248-X 72-50-08
865046-X 72-50-04 868259-X 72-50-07
865078-1 72-50-03 72-50-08
865542-5 72-10-02 868260-X 72-30-03
865549-2 72-50-06 868272-X 72-50-07
865616-2 77-10-02 868379-X 72-50-07
865791-4 73-21-03 868405-X 73-21-04
865839-1 77-10-03 868558-1 73-10-05
865888-X 72-10-09 868605-X 72-10-14
865952-1 72-10-10 868630-X 72-50-07
865956-5 77-10-02 868743-X 73-10-09
866194-1 72-10-09 868749-1 73-10-09
866306-X 72-10-19 868752-1 73-10-09
866339 -2 79-10-01 868780-X 75-10-02
IrlS PECTION/CHECK
UP136688
72-ADDENDUM 601
Page 4
Aug 4/94
r'~. ~ t 2 " / i ~ = e J A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ta bl e 1. Index of Inspection Procedures (Cont)
Chapter/ Chapter/
Section/ Section/
868781-X 72-10-13 893466-X 73-10-09

868800-1 72-10-07 893467-X 73-10-09
868855-1 72-10-10 893468-X 73-10-09
868877-X 72-10-19 893469-X 73-10-09
868889 -1 72-00-05 893482-X 72-30-03
868905-1 72-50-08 893528-X 73-21-05
R 868939 -2 72-10-09 893540-X 73-21-06
868948-X 72-10-13 893561-X 73-21-05
73-10-09 893570-1 76-10-02
868962-X 74-10-01 893587-X 73-21-02
869067-1 77-10-02 893611-X 73-21-05
869082-X 72-40-01 893 739 -X 72-10-13
869106-1 76-10-02 893742 -1 79 -30-01
869151-5 73-21-06 893757-1 72-10-12
869169-I 73-21-05 893769 -2 72-10-11
869178-i 79-20-02 893970-X 72-30-03
869183-1 73-21-03 894079 -X 72-30-04
869224-X 72-10-10 894084-2 72-30-O4
869245-4 72-10-07 894085-1 73-10-01
869258-1 79-20-07 894117-X 79-30-02
869381-1 73-21-04 894119-1 72-10-11
869444-X 72-10-20 894124-X 72-10-11
8695 O9- i 73-10-01 894382-1 75-10-01
869529-1 73-10-01 894418-X 72-10-03
869530-1 73-21-03 894436-1 73-10-10
869537-1 75-10-01 894528-X 72-50-08
869563-1 72-50-03 894533-X 72-10-19
869578-X 72-50-05 894615-1 73-10-01
869601-X 79 -20-05 894622-X 72-50-08
869647-X 72-10-02 894778-2 72-10-04
869674-1 77-10-03 894799 -2 72-10-04
869710-1 73-10-01 894989 -2 72-00-05
77-10-02 895139-X 73-21-03
869806-1 73-10-09 895203-1 73-10-10
869807-1 72-10-05 895208-1 72-21-04
869808-1 72-10-04 895369 -X 77-10-03
869911-X 73 -20-01 895380-X 73-22-01
893126-1 74-20-01 895475-2 72-10-02
893283-X 72-10-09 895476-1 72-10-02
893284-1 72-10-09 895481-X 72-10-02
893384-X 72-30-03 895490-X 72-10-03
INSPECTION/CHECK
UP136688
72-ADDENDUM 601
Page 5
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1. Index of Inspection Procedures (Co.t)
Chapter/ Chapter/
Secti on/ Secti on/
895539-X 72-5O-07 896273-1 77-10-06

895616-1 72-50-03 896298-X 75-10-02
895625-1 73-10-01 896299 -1 73-10-01
895628-1 73-10-01 896306-1 73-10-01
895629 -1 73-10-01 896317-1 77-10-03
895877-X 72-50-06 896343-1 79-20-08
895896-1 72-10-15 896346-1 73-10-01
895900-X 72-10-13 896349 -1 73-10-01
895948-X 72-30-04 896364-1 73-10-01
896062-1 79-10-01 896390-1 73-10-01
896063-1 75-10-01 896413-1 72-10-11
896105-1 72-50-01 896417-1 79-10-01
896148-X 72 -10-20 896420-X 72-10-04
896172-1 72-10-12 896450-X 72-50-08
896173-1 72-10-12 896462-1 75-10-01
896194-X 79 -20-01 896467-1 79-20-08
896214-1 72-10-11 896473-1 73-10-01
896223-X 72-30-01 896474-1 73-10-01
72-30-04 896489 -1 73-10-01
896232-1 72-10-12 896494-X 72-50-06
896233-1 79 -20-02 896495-1 73-10-05
896246-1 73-10-01 896496-X 72-50-08
79 -20-01 896502-1 73-10-01
896247-1 73-10-01 896511-1 73-10-01
79 -20-01 896512-1 73-10-01
896248-1 73-10-01 896513-1 73-10-01
896253-I 73-10-01 79 -20-01
896254-1 73-10-01 896518-1 73-10-01
896255-1 73-10-01 896519 -1 73-10-01
896256-X 77-10-04 896521-1 73-10-01
896257-1 75-10-01 896522-1 73-10-01
896258-1 75-10-01 896549-2 72-50-06
896259 -1 73-10-01 896556-1 77-10-02
896260-1 73-10-01 896584-1 72-50-08
896262-1 79 -20-08 896635-1 73-10-01
896264-i 73-10-01 896648-1 72-10-13
896265-i 73-10-01 896657-1 73-10-01
896266-1 73-10-01 896700-2 79-20-02
896267-1 73-10-01 896745-I 72-10-12
896269 -1 73-10-01 896758-1 73-10-01
896272-1 72-10-06 896788-1 77-10-02
INS PECTION/CHECK
UP136688
72-ADDENDUM 601
R Page 6
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ta bl e 1. Index of Inspection Procedures (Cont)
Chapter/ Chapter/
Section/ Secti on/
Part No, Subject Part No. Subject
896795-1 77-10-02 897513-1 73-21-03

896803-1 72-10-17 897529-X 72-50-06
896804-2 72-10-17 897591-1 77-20-03
896805-1 72-10-15 897642-1 73-21-03
896806-1 72-10-15 897751-X 72-10-03
896808-X 72-10-15 897770-X 73-21-05
896826-X 72-10-16 949529-X 76-10-09
896828-X 72-10-13 949594-X 76-10-09
89683 I - I 72-10-16
896855-X 72-10-20
896863-1 72-10-13
896876-1 77-10-02
896911-X 72-50-06
896925-1 72-10-15
896930-1 73-10-01
896931-1 73-10-01
896932-1 73-10-01
896933-1 79 -20-01
896944-1 79-20-01
896982-1 72-50-03
896959 -1 77-10-02
896963-1 77-10-02
896964-1 77-10-02
896965-1 77-10-02
896966-1 77-10-02
896997-1 73-10-01
897024-1 72-10-02
897055-X 73-10-01
897056-X 73-10-01
897069-X 77-20-03
897196-1 73-20-01
73-21-06
897197-3 72-10-13
897262-X 72-10-02
897265-1 72-10-02
897331-X 77-10-03
897390-X 73-21-06
897400-X 73-21-06
897407-2 79 -20-04
897410-X 72-10-03
897458-2 77-10-03
INS PECTION/CHECK
72-ADDENDUM 601
UP136688
Page 7/8
Aug 4/94
GFR70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE M~4UAL
CHAPTER 72 - CLEANING/PAINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPIER/
CODE/ SECTION/
GENERAL 72-00-00
CLEANING/PAl NTIHG
General 701
General Cleaning Instructions 7O4
Prepare Specific Solutions for 705
Cleaning of Components
Prepare A1 kaline Cleaner Solution 705
Prepare Aluminum Touch-Up Solution 705
Prepare Chromic - N i t r i c Pickle 70b
Sol uti on
Prepare De-oxidizer Solution 706
Prepare Rust Stripper Solution 706
Prepare ~lagnesium Touch-up Solution 706
(Dow 1)
Prepare Magnesium Touch-up Solution 706A
(Bow 19)
Cleaning Methods 707
1 - Degrease Parts Using Petroleum 7O7
Sol vent
2 - Degrease Parts Using Vapor 7O7
Degreasi ng Method
3 - Clean Parts Using Glass Bead 7O8
Peening
4 - Clean Parts Using Abrasive 7O9
Blasting Nethod
5 - Clean Non-corroded Aluminum Parts 7O9
6 - Clean Corroded A1uminum Parts 710
7 - Clean Non-corroded Magnesium Parts 711
8 - Clean Corroded Magnesium Parts 712
9 - Clean Plain Steel and Stainless 713
Steel Parts
10 - Clean Titanium Parts 714A
11 - Clean Electrical Components Parts 715
12 - Clean Fittings and Plumbing 715
Special Cleaning Instructions for Specific 715
Components
Clean Components With Curvic Coupling Ends 715
Clean Bearings 715
Clean Tube Assembly 717
Repair Defective or Damaged Paint and 718
Minor Corrosion
CLEANING/PAINTING
UP136688
72-CONTENTS
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL - CLEANING/PAINTING
i. General

required to perform CLEANING/PAINTING.
Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual for approved o i l .
Ivlaterial or Compound Manufactu rer
Acetone Commercially avail abl e

(Federal Specification 0-A-51C)
R Alkaline cleaner Novamax Technologies, 1615 Johnson Rd

R (D 909) NW, Atlanta, GA 30318
Aluminum oxide g r i t (120 Mesh) Commercially avail able
Any approved engine oil Commerica l l y ava i I abl e
Brush-on paint remover Commercially avail able

(Federal Specification TT-R-251)
Calcium sulfate Commercially avail able
Chemical film for aluminum Witco Allied-Kelite Div of Witco

( I r i d i t e No. 14-2) Chemical Corp, 400 Midland Ave, Highland
(MIL-C-5541) Park, MI 48203
Chromic acid flake Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,

P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
Corrosion-preventive compound CRC Chemicals USA, 885 Louis Dr,

(CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Type I I I ) Wanninster, PA 18974
De-oxidizer (Oakite 34) Oakite Products Inc, 50 Valley Rd,

Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922
Devcon "F" Devcon Corp, 59 Endicott St, Danvers,

MA 01923
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 701
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~:~/lied
Glass beads (Screen No. 100-230 Potters Industries Inc, 377 Rt 17,
(130 Grit) Class IV, Size AF Hasbrouck Heights, NJ 07604
or AG)
Gloss light green epoxy-amine Koppers Co, Inc, Paint Div, P.O. Box
paint (Base A423-66-24670 911207, Commerce, CA 90091 (or author-
and Activator C-1178) ized Distributor Griggs Paint of Domcom
Enterprises, 3602 S 16th Pl, Phoenix,
AZ 85040)
Methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK) Commercial ly available
(Federal Specification TT-M-261)
Nitric acid (Federal Commercial ly availabl e
Specification 0-N-350)
Oil (MIL-L-6085) Commercial ly available
Penetrant oil (MIL-I-25135) Commercial ly available

UP136688
72-0O-00
Page 702
Aug 12/91
lied
R Primer (Green epoxy-amine) Kopper Co, Inc, Paint Div, P.O. Box
R (Base P415A-66-34151 and 911207, Commerce, CA 90091 (or author-
R Activator C-1178) ized Distributor Griggs Paint of Domcom
R Smaller quantities Enterprises, 3602 S 16th Pl, Phoenix,
R (5 grams to 4 oz) are AZ 85040)
R available from Wilco,
R 4636 E Elwood, Suite 11,
R Phoenix, AZ 85040
Rust stripper Oakite Products Inc, 50 Valley Rd,
(Oakite Rustripper) Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922
Sand (120 Grit) Commercial ly avail able
(MIL-S-17726A)
Sandpaper (240 g r i t size) Commercially available
Sodium dichromate/bichromate Commercially ava i I able
Solvent (Federal Specifi- Commercial ly avail able
cation P-D-680, Type I)
*Touch-up solution (Dow 1) Dow Corning Corp, 3901S. Saginaw Rd,
**Touch-up solution (Dow 19) Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,
i, 1,1-Tri chloroethane Commercial ly available
(MIL-T-81533)
*Touch-up solution (Dow 1) may be mixed from commercially available
chemicals (sodium dichromate and n i t r i c acid).
**Touch-up solution (Dow 19) may be mixed from commercially available
chemicals (chromic acid flake and calcium sulfate).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 703
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. Follow General Cleaning Instructions
WARNING: CLEANING SHALL BE PERFORMEDIN A CLEAN, WELL-
VENTILATED AREA. RUBBERGLOVESAND PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING SHALL BE WORN. EXTINGUISHERSAND VAT OR
TANK COVERSSHALL BE ON HANDIN CASE OF FIRE.
(1) Cleaning procedures for individual parts shall be consistent with

good shop practices and the following procedures. Correct and
thorough cleaning for all parts is important to the successful in-
spection, repair, and satisfactory operation after repair.
(2) All metallic parts shall be cleaned to remove o i l , grease, rust
stains, and soiled areas. Flange areas, register diameters, and
sealing surfaces shall be cleaned of o i l , gaskets, and sealing com-
pounds, i f present. Removeadherent gasket or sealing compound
residues using acetone (Federal Specification 0-A-51C) and a soft
or s t i f f fiber bristled brush.
(3) Clean painted parts but do not remove old paint i f paint is s t i l l
serviceable.
(4) Corrosion products wherever they appear shall be removed and the
base metal treated to prevent further corrosion before reassembly.
(5) Steel and 400 series stainless steel parts require the application
of corrosion-preventive compound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Type I I I )
after cleaning to prevent rust and corrosion.
(6) Clean dissimilar materials as follows.
CAUTION: AN ASSEMBLYSHALL NOT BE CLEANED IN A SOLUTION

THAT IS DETRIMENTAL TO PARTS IN THE ASSEMBLY.
(a) Analyze assemblies that combine dissimilar materials carefully

and determine types of materials.
(b) Clean assemblies containing brass, bronze, steel, and cadmium,

using methods applicable to the base metal involved. Assem-
blies containing these materials are not affected by chromic
acid or hydrofluoric acid.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 704
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. (6) (c) Clean assemblies containing synthetic materials using methods

that are non-destructive to the material.
(7) Place parts in clean plastic bags or equivalent containers after

cleaning, for protection from contaminants. Ports and orifices
shall be capped, plugged, or sealed.
B. Prepare Specified Solutions for Cleaning of Component Parts
WARNI NG: THE FOLLOWING SOLUTIONS ARE HAZARDOUS. AVOID IN-

HALATION OF FUMES, DUST, AND MIST. AVOID CONTACT
WITH SKIN. AFTER PREPARATION, WASH HANDS AND FACE
THOROUGHLY.
NOTE: Use either d i s t i l l e d or de-ionized water f o r prepara-

tion of the following solutions.
(1) Prepare alkaline cleaner solution as follows.
(a) Dissolve 4 to 6 ounces of alkaline cleaner in each gallon of

d i s t i l l e d or de-ionized water.
R (b) Maintain solution in an a i r agitated tank at applicable tem-
R perature below.
_1 For ferrous metals use 65 to 93°C (150 to 200°F).
For non-ferrous metals use 54 to 76°C (130 to 170°F).
(2) Prepare aluminum touch-up solution as follows.

R WARNI NG: TOUCH-UP SOLUTION IS AN ACID. USE CAUTION TO
R PREVENT CONTACT WITH SKIN. IF POWDEROR MIXED
R SOLUTION COMES IN CONTACT WITH SKIN, FLUSH OFF
R IMMEDIATELY WITH WATER. INHALATION OF DUST
R FROMTHE POWDERSOR VAPORS FROMTHE SOLUTION
R SHALL BE AVOIDED. SWABS, ETC., SATURATED WITH
R SOLUTION, CONSTITUTE FIRE HAZARDS IF ALLOWED TO
R DRY. IMMEDIATELYAFTER USE, RINSE THOROUGHLY
R IN TAP WATER.
NOTE: Prepare aluminum touch-up solution in small

batches. Use only freshly prepared solutions.
(a) Dissolve 1 ounce of powder ( I r i d i t e 14-2) in each quart of

d i s t i l l e d or de-ionized water.
R (b) Maintain pH of 0.9 to 1.1 using n i t r i c acid (Federal Specifi-
R cation 0-N-350).
(c) Maintain solution at 21 to 27% (70 to 80°F).
(d) Allow solution to stand at least 2 hours before use.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 705
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (3) Prepare c h r o m i c - n i t r i c pickle solution as follows.

(a) Add 12,0 to 13.5 ounces of chromic acid flake and 1.0 to 1.4
pints of n i t r i c acid (Federal Specification 0-N-350) with
enough d i s t i l l e d or de-ionized water to make I gallon of
solution.
(b) Maintain solution at 21 to 27°C (70 to 80°F),
(4) Prepare aluminum de-oxidizer solution as follows.
(a) Dissolve 8 to 16 ounces of de-oxidizer (Oakite 34M) in 1 gal-

lon of d i s t i l l e d or de-ionized water.
(b) Maintain solution at 18 to 35°C (65 to 95°F) in an a i r agi-

tated tank.
(5) Prepare rust s t r i p p e r solution as follows.
WARNI NG: EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PREPARINGRUST

STRIPPER SOLUTIOI~. USE OF A RESPIRATOR IS
STRONGLY RECOMMENDED. MIXING MAY PRODUCETEM-
PERATURES EXCEEDINGTHE BOILING POINT OF THE
SOLUTION.
R (a) Dissolve 2 to 4 pounds of rust s t r i p p e r (Oakite Rustripper) in

each gallon of d i s t i l l e d or de-ionized water.
(b) Maintain solution at 71 to 93°C (160 to 200°F) in an a i r agi-

tated tank.
(6) Prepare magnesium touch-up solution (Dow 1) as follows:
WARNI NG: NITRIC ACID AND SODIUM DICHROMATEARE TOXIC AND

CORROSIVE MATERIALS WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE
BURNS AND POSSIBLE LUNG DAMAGE. AVOID BREATH-
ING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN. WHENHANDLING,
USE ACID RESISTANT GLOVES, APRON, AND FACE
SHIELD IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. WHENMIXING
SOLUTIONS, DO NOT ADD WATER OR SOLUTION TO NI-
TRIC ACID; ALWAY ADD NITRIC ACID TO WATER OR
SOLUTION.
CAUTION: TOUCH-UP SOLUTION (DOW 1) SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED

TO CONTACTANODIC TREATED SURFACES. A RAPID
DETERIORATION OF THE COATING WILL OCCUR.
(a) Nix 1.5 pounds of sodium dichromate and 1.5 pints of n i t r i c
acid (Federal Specification 0-N-350) with enough d i s t i l l e d or
de-ionized water to make 1 gallon of solution.
(b) Allow solution to stand for 1 to 2 minutes.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 706
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
t4AINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (7) Prepare magnesium touch-up solution (Dow 19) as follows.

(a) Mix 1.3 ounces of chromic acid flake and one ounce of calcium
sulfate with enough water to make one gallon of solution.
(b) S t i r vigorously for at least 15 minutes to ensure saturation

of the solution with calcium sulfate.
(c) ~laintain solution at 21 to 32°C (70 to 90°F).
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 706A/706B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lied
1. C. Cleaning Methods
CAUTION: THE SPECIFIC CLEANING METHODS OUTLINED MUST BE FOLLOWED.

THE VARIOUS SOLUTIONS AND MATERIALS SPECIFIED IN THE CLEAN-
ING METHODSCAN BE USED ONLY ON THE PARTS AND MATERIALS
INDICATED. FAILURETO USE THE PROPER CLEANING METHODMAY
RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGETO THE PART BEING CLEANED.
CLEANING METHODNO. 1
Degrease parts using petroleum solvent as follows.
WARNING: SPRAYVAPORS ARE TOXIC AND SHALL NOT BE

INHALED. OBSERVEALL FIRE PRECAUTIONS.
(a) Place solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I) in dip
tank or use a spray in a positive outside-ventilated spray
booth.
(b) Dip, soak, agitate, or spray parts to be cleaned u n t i l oil and

grease have been removed.
CAUTION: DO NOT SCRAPE, SCRUB, OR USE A BRUSH WHEN CLEANING

CARBON SEALS; CRACKS, GROOVESAND CHIPPING WILL
OCCUR CAUSING THE CARBON SEAL TO BE UNSERVICEABLE.
(c) Remove caked grease or soft carbon deposits using a s t i f f

plastic f i b e r bristled brush.
Degrease parts using vapor degreasing method as follows.
WARNING: I,I,I-TRICHLOROETHANE IS TOXIC, USE IN A WELL-

VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR CON-
TACT WITH SKIN.
(a) Use 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) in vapor degreaser at
a temperature range of 74 to 79°C (165 to 175°F).
(b) Place parts in rack so that a l l surfaces w i l l have d i r e c t con-
tact with vapor. Parts that do not allow free drainage shall
be racked so they may be turned over below vapor level to
eliminate l , l , l - T r i c h l o r o e t h a n e (MIL-T-81533) dragout when
parts are removed.
(c) Spray flush parts free of heavy grease or other contaminants,

then position parts in vapor zone for f i n a l cleaning.
(d) A i r - d r y parts with low pressure compressed a i r (20 psig).

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 707
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Clean parts using glass bead peening as follows.
CAUTION: DO NOT CLEAN MAGNESIUMCOMPONENTSUSING GLASS

BEAD PEENING.
NOTE: Do not glass bead peen curvic couplings until

fluorescent penetrant or magnetic particle inspec-
tion has been performed. Maximumpressure of 20
psig shall be used on titanium couplings. Maximum
pressure of 40 psig shall be used on all other
coupling materials. Do not use glass bead clean-
ing for removing paint and/or corrosion from mag-
nesium parts. Use abrasive blast method on magne-
si um components.
(a) Clean hard carbon, paint, corrosion and scale from parts by
peening with glass beads (Screen No. 100-230 (130 Grit) Class
IV, Size AF or AG).
(b) Clean parts with solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type

I) to remove oil and grease contamination.
NOTE: Glass bead peening equipment shall be cleaned

and recharged with new beads after each 24
hour period of operation.
(c) Mask any surfaces that could be damaged by peening.
CAUTION: REGULATE AIR PRESSURETO KEEP EROSIONOF

BASE METAL TO A MINIMUM. KEEPNOZZLE IN
MOTION TO PREVENT BLAST FROMDWELLING ON
ONE SPOT.
(d) Peen corroded areas with glass beads (Screen No. 100-230 (130
Grit) Class IV, Size AF or AG) until corrosion products are
removed.
(e) Rinse surface free of glass beads (Screen No. 100-230 (130
Grit) Class IV, Size AF or AG). Dry part in oven at 96 to
112C (205 to 235F) for one hour.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 708
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MN~UAL
Clean parts using abrasive blasting method.
NOTE: Do not abrasive blast part until fluorescent pene-

trant or magnetic particle inspection has been
performed.
(a) Clean hard carbon, lead deposits, corrosion, and scale from
parts by abrasive blasting using a standard sandblast cabinet
and sand (120 Grit) (MIL-S-17726A) or aluminum oxide g r i t (120
Mesh).
(b) Clean parts with solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type

I) or vapor degreaser to remove o i l and grease contamination.
(c) Mask any surfaces that could be damaged by abrasive blasting.
CAUTION: REGULATE AIR PRESSURETO KEEP EROSION OF

BASE METAL TO A MINIMUM. KEEP NOZZLE IN
FIOTION TO PREVENT BLAST FROM DWELLING ON
ONE SPOT.
(d) Set blasting equipment air pressure at 15 to 30 psig, then

subject parts to abrasive blasting. Reduce air pressure as
required to control action on base metal.
Clean non-corroded aluminum parts as follows.
(a) Clean surfaces with solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680,

Type I) to remove o i l and grease contamination.
(b) Immerse parts in a l k a l i n e cleaner solution f o r 2 to 10

minutes. Scrub surface with a soft p l a s t i c f i b e r b r i s t l e d
brush to remove surface contamination. I f old gaskets or
sealing compound are present, c a r e f u l l y l i f t softened gaskets
with a knife blade and scrape surface clean.
(c) Rinse parts with water at 27 to 43°C (80 to 110°F). Use low
pressure a i r (20 psig maximum) to dry part.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 709
Aug 4/94

CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW PARTS TO REMAIN IN CONTACT

WITH DE-OXIDIZING SOLUTION LONGER THAN 3
MINUTES OR CHEMICAL ETCHING WILL OCCUR.
(d) Treat bare areas with de-oxidizing solution for 1 to 3

minutes. Repeat step (c) to rinse part.
R NOTE: Maintain the pH of the aluminum touch-up

solution at 0.9 to 1.0 by adding chromic acid
flake or n i t r i c acid (Federal Specification
0-N-350) to the solution.
R (e) Coat treated areas with aluminum touch-up solution. Allow

area to remain wet for 15 to 30 seconds.
(f) Rinse parts with water at 27 to 43% (80 to 110°F). Remove

excess water with low pressure air (20 psig maximum). Dry in
oven at a temperature not to exceed 710C (160°F).
(g) Store parts in dry place away from corrosive fumes.
Clean corroded aluminum parts as follows.
CAUTION: CORROSION MAY BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OR REPAIR

OF A PART. REFERTO INSPECTION/CHECK AND/OR
REPAIR WHENEVER CORROSION APPEARSTO BE BEYOND
SURFACE FINISH.

Type I) to remove oil and grease contamination.
R (b) Immerse parts in alkaline cleaner solution for 2 to 10

minutes. Scrub surface with a s t i f f plastic fiber bristled
brush to remove surface contamination. I f old gaskets or
sealing compound are present, carefully l i f t softened gaskets
with a knife blade and scrape surface clean.
(c) Rinse parts with water at 27 to 43°C (80 to 110°F). Use low
pressure a i r (20 psig maximum) to dry part.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 710
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: I f parts are hard anodized and chromic-nitric

pickle solution is used to remove heavy cor-
rosion, softening of the finish will result.
Completely strip parts and apply a new ano-
dize finish in accordance with Repair.
(d) Treat corroded areas with chromic-nitric pickle solution until

corrosion is removed. Repeat step (c) to rinse part.
(e) Coat bare areas with aluminum touch-up solution. Allow area
to remain wet for 15 to 30 seconds.
(f) Rinse parts with water at 27 to 43°C (80 to 110°F). Remove

excess water with low pressure air (20 psig maximum). Dry in
oven at a temperature not to exceed 71°C (160°F).
(g) Store parts in dry place away from corrosive fumes.
Clean non-corroded magnesium parts as follows.

(b) Immerse parts in alkaline cleaner solution and brush surfaces

with a soft plastic fiber bristled brush to remove
contaminants. Allow parts to soak for 2 to 10 minutes i f
flange surfaces have gaskets or sealing compounds stuck to
them. Whensoftened, carefully l i f t gaskets with knife blade
and scrape surface until clean.
(c) Rinse parts in warm tap water at 27 to 43°C (80 to 110°F).
(d) Brush magnesium touch-up solution (Dow 19) onto any bare metal
areas. Keep surfaces wet for 1 to 2 minutes, then rinse with
clean tap water.
(e) Dry parts in oven at 79 to 107°C (175 to 225°F) for 1 hour.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 711
Aug 4/94
GF~7~2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Clean corroded magnesium parts as follows.
CAUTION: CORROSION MAY BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OR REPAIR

OF A PART. REFERTO INSPECTION/CHECK AND/OR
REPAIR WHENEVER CORROSION APPEARS TO BE BEYOND
SURFACE FINISH.

(b) Immerse parts in alkaline cleaner solution for 2 to 10

minutes. Scrub surfaces with a s t i f f plastic fiber bristled
brush to remove any loose contaminants. I f old gaskets or
sealing compounds are stuck to flange areas, carefully l i f t
the softened materials with a steel blade and scrape surface
until clean.
(c) Rinse parts in warm tap water at 27 to 43°C (80 to 110°F).
NOTE: All traces of moisture shall be removed

within 2 hours to prevent corrosion.
(d) Air-dry to remove excess water from part. Place in oven at 79

to 107°C (175 to 225°F) for 1 hour to complete drying.
(e) Using good shop practices, remove any obviously loose paint to
expose the base magnesium material.
(f) Remove all corrosion as follows.
CAUTION: USE EXTREMECARENOT TO GOUGESURFACEOF

UNCORRODED BASE METALWHEN PERFORMINGTHE
FOLLOWING STEPS.
! Hand scrape to remove corrosion, using good shop practices.
2-- Perform final clean-up of corroded areas using a clean

stainless steel brush.
3 Check depth of removed material at all areas of corrosion

removal. I f depth exceeds 0.010 inch at any location, in-
spect housing(s) for serviceability in accordance with
72-10-09, 72-10-13, 72-10-20, Inspection/Check as
applicable. Inspect only the limits and dimensions appli-
cable for the areas in which depth of corrosion damage is
0.010 inch or more.
4 Feather edges of paint by l i g h t l y sanding, using sandpaper

- (240 g r i t size).
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 712
Aug 4/94
lliedSignai
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: 1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE IS TOXIC. USE IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING
FUMES OR LONG CONTACT WITH SKIN, TO PRE-
VENT DAMAGETO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY
FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MAGNESIUM CLEANING SOLUTIONS ON

COMPONENTS CONTAINING ALUMINUM PARTS.
(g) Clean area by wiping with a l i n t free cloth saturated with

1,1,1-trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533), methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK)
(Federal Specification TT-M-261), or acetone (Federal Specifi-
cation 0-A-51C).
(h) Inspect surface for presence of oil using a black light. A

bright, bluish-white colored fluorescence usually indicates
oil or grease contamination. I f presence of oil is indicated,
repeat step (g).
(i) Apply touch-up solution (Dow 1) to corroded areas as follows.
1 Using cotton swab, work solution into corroded area until

all visible reaction/gassing stops.
2 Wipe clean, using clean, lint-free cloth.

UP136688
72-00-00
Page 712A/712B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(j) Apply touch-up solution (Dow 19) to treated areas as follows.
1 Using a clean cotton swab, apply solution to corroded

areas.
2 Allow solution to stand on surface f o r 5 minutes minimum,

then thoroughly wipe dry in preparation f o r primer coat,
using a clean, l i n t - f r e e c l o t h . Use heat gun i f necessary
to ensure al 1 moisture has been removed from the treated
area p r i o r to applying the primer coat.
Clean plain steel and stainless steel parts as follows.
NOTE: I t is not necessary to remove heat d i s c o l o r a t i o n .

CAUTION: EXTREME DAMAGECAN OCCURTO NON-STEEL PARTS

R IF CLEANEDWITH RUSTSTRIPPER SOLUTION. IN
R ADDITION, STEEL PARTSWHICH HAVE BEEN
R REPAIRED FOR DIMENSIONAL RESTORATION USING
R SOME METAL SPRAY PROCESSESCAN INCUR DAMAGE
R TO THE METAL SPRAY IF SUBSEQUENTLYCLEANED
R IN RUSTSTRIPPER SOLUTION. ENSURECRITICAL
R DIMENSIONAL AND VISUAL INSPECTIONS ARE COM-
R PLETED AFTER IMMERSION IN RUSTSTRIPPER.
R STEEL PARTSWHICH ARE KNOWNTO HAVE HAD
R METAL SPRAYREPAIR MAY BE CLEANED BY THE
R VAPOR DEGREASINGMETHOD.
(b) Immerse in rust stripper solution for 10 to 20 minutes. The

solution shall remove rust, loosen scale, dissolve varnish
deposits, and soften organic compounds.
72-00-00
UP136688
Page 713
Aug 4/94
~=~/lied
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGEHIGHLY FINISHED SURFACES.
USE ONLYSTIFF PLASTIC FIBER BRISTLED
BRUSH ON SUCHAREAS.
NOTE: Do not glass bead peen parts until
fluorescent penetrant or magnetic particle
inspection has been performed.
(c) After soak in solution, remove parts, rinse, and scrub sur-
faces with s t i f f plastic fiber bristled brush, or glass bead
peen to remove carbon and scale.
(d) Rinse thoroughly in clean tap water at 27 to 43C (80 to 110F).
Dry parts by blowing with clean compressed air until free of
moisture.
(e) Preserve steel parts after cleaning. Low alloy steel parts
that will be subjected to magnetic particle inspection within
8 hours may be l e f t dry until inspected. Place in clean
container.
(f) Low alloy steel parts that will be subjected to magnetic par-
t i c l e inspection but will be held longer than 8 hours prior to
inspection shall be coated with penetrant oil (MIL-I-25135).
Place in clean container.
(g) Low alloy steel parts not subject to inspection and those that
have completed inspection shall be placed in a solution of
R corrosion-preventive compound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309, Type
R I I I ) for 3 to 5 minutes. Place in clean container and store
away from moisture and corrosive fumes.
(h) Stainless steel and heat resistant alloy parts, shall be kept
dry and boxed for protection from physical damage.
(i) Stainless steel of the 400 series shall be placed in a solu-

tion of corrosion-preventive compound (CRC 3-36, MIL-C-81309,
Type I l l ) for 3 to 5 minutes. Place in clean container.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 714
Aug 12/91
/lied
Clean titanium parts as follows.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE 1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE TO CLEANTITA-

NIUM PARTS. HIGHTEMPERATUREOPERATIONOF
TITANIUM PARTS, AFTERCONTACTWITH CHLORINATED
CHEMICALS, CAN CAUSE PART FAILURE DUE TO ERO-
SION AND CRACKS.

(b) Immerse parts in alkaline cleaner solution at temperature of

71 to 82°C (160 to 180°F) for 3 to 5 minutes minimum. Scrub
surface with a s t i f f plastic fiber bristled brush to remove
surface contamination. I f old gaskets or sealing compound are
present, carefully l i f t softened gaskets with a knife blade
and scrape surface clean.
(c) Rinse parts in fresh running water. Use compressed air to

remove excess water. Dry in oven at 71 to 121°C (160 to
250°F) for 1 hour.
(d) Store parts in dry place.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 714A/714B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Clean electrical component parts as follows.

(a) Wipe with clean lint-free cloth dipped in 1,1,1-
Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) or solvent (Federal Specifica-
tion P-D-680, Type I).
(b) Clean electrical connectors with dry soft plastic fiber

bristled brush and remove oily type soil with cotton swab
dipped in 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533).
Clean fittings and plumbing as follows.
(a) Spray tubes and fittings externally and internally with sol-
vent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I) in an outside-
ventilated spray booth.
(b) Dry parts with dry, filtered compressed air.
(c) Insert protective plugs and caps in each end of plumbing and
fi t t i rigs.
1. D. Perform Special Cleaning Instructions for Specific Components
(1) Clean components with curvic coupling ends.
Do not clean curvic couplings by glass bead peening or abrasive

blasting until fluorescent penetrant or magnetic particle inspec-
tion has been perfomed.
NOTE: During cleaning do not permit high rotational
speeds of bearings as damage can result. Slow
rotational speeds are permissible.
(2) Clean bearings.
(a) Demagnetize bearings so that residual magnetism does not ex-
ceed five gauss.
(b) Dip, soak or agitate bearings in solvent (Federal Specifica-
tion P-D-680, Type I) until oil and grease have been removed.
(c) Allow bearings to drain dry.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 715
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27}
1. D. (2) (d) Coat bearings with approved engine oil following
inspection/check i f bearings are to be reused immediately.
(e) If bearings are not to be reused immediately, coat bearings
with preservative oil (MIL-L-6085), individually seal bearings
in plastic bag and store in dry, cool area. Do not store in
area cooled by evaporative cooler. Do not store near electri-
cal equipment to preclude possibility of magnetizing bearings.
(3) Clean f i r e extinguisher agents from components. Refer to STANDARD
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 716
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. D. (4) Clean Tube Assembly Part No. 3101475-1 as follows. (See figure
701.)
(a) Using only 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) and a nylon

bristled brush, clean external surfaces of tube assembly.
(b) Plug or cap End 2 including the two porting holes. Spray
1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) into End 1 with sufficient
pressure to cause fluid to exit through End 3. Continue spray
until fluid is clear.
(c) Removeplugs or caps from End 2. Spray all ends until clean.
CAUTION: DO NOT DIP ENTIRE TUBE ASSEMBLY INTO RUST
STRIPPER OR DAMAGETO STRAINER AND CHECK
VALVE MAY OCCUR.
(d) I f rust is present on End 2, remove by dipping End 2 not more

than 1.5 inches into rust stripper solution (as prepared in
paragraph I.B.(5)) until rust is dissolved. Rinse End 2
thoroughly in clean water. Dry part with dry, filtered com-
pressed air.
(e) Submerge tube assembly in 1,1,1-Trichloroethane and dry part

with dry f i l t e r e d compressed air.
NORMAL
FLOW
END 3--'--'-"-'----"
(CONTAINS CHECK
VALVE)
END 1
(CONTAINS STRAINER)
END
F-44A-362B
Tube Assembly PN 3101475-1

UP136688
Figure 701 72-00-00

Page 717
Dec 14/87
,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-)Signal
. Repair of Defective or DamagedPaint and Minor Corrosion.
A. Repair Minor Corrosion as Follows
(I) Using good shop practices, remove any obvious loose paint to expose
the base material.
(2) Removeall corrosion as follows.
CAUTION: USE EXTREMECARE NOT TO GOUGESURFACE.
(a) Hand scrape to remove corrosion, using good shop practices,

then hand brush, using a clean stainless steel wire brush.
(b) Feather edges of paint by l i g h t l y sanding, using sandpaper
(240-grit size).
(3) Clean and treat magnesium components in accordance with Method No.
8.
R (4) Clean and treat aluminum components in accordance with Method No.
R 6.
R B. Repair Treated Area as Follows
(1) Prepare Devcon "F" as follows.
(a) Mix by weight 1 part hardener to 9 parts base or mix by volume

1 part hardener to 4 parts base.
(b) Stir until a uniform mixture without lumps is obtained.
(2) Apply Devcon "F" to corroded areas or voids as follows.
(a) F i l l corroded areas or voids with Devcon "F" and blend to ad-
jacent surfaces.
R (b) Cure Devcon "F" for 16 hours at room temperature or oven bake
R for 4 hours at 65°C (150°F).
(3) Apply primer and l i g h t green paint as follows.
(a) Prepare primer as follows.
1 Mix equal parts, by volume, of primer and activator.
2 Allow to stand 30 to 45 minutes before use.

(b) Using a soft brush or airbrush, apply a thin coat of primer
(approximately 0.0006 to 0.0012 inch thick). Allow primer to
dry 30 to 45 minutes.
UP136688
72-00-00
Page 718
Aug 12/91
/lied
CAUTION: IF HEAT GUN IS USED TO CURE PRIMER, DO NOT EX-
CEED 93°C (200°F) OR BUBBLING OF THE PRIMER MAY
RESULT.
2. B. (3) (c) Cure primer, using one of the following methods.
PREFERRED METHOD: Cure at 82 to 93°C (180 to 200°F)

maximum for 30 to 40 minutes, us-
ing heat lamp(s).
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure at 82 to 93°C (180 to 200°F)

ing heat gun.
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure by air-drying for 72 hours

at 14 to 36°C (57 to 97°F).
(d) Prepare light green paint as follows.
1 Mix equal parts by volume of paint base and activator.
Allow to stand 45 minutes prior to use.
(e) Apply l i g h t green paint (approximately 0.0006 to 0.0012 inch

thick) and allow to air dry 45 minutes.
CAUTION: IF HEAT GUN IS USEDTO CUREPAINT, DO NOT
EXCEED 93°C (200°F) OR BUBBLING OF THE
PAINT MAY RESULT.
(f) Cure l i g h t green paint using one of the following methods.
PREFERRED METHOD: Cure at 82 to 93°C (180 to 200°F)

ing heat lamp(s).
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure at 82 to 93°C (180 to 200°F)

ing heat gun.
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure by air-drying for 72 hours

at 14 to 36°C (57 to 97°F).
UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 719/720
Aug 12/91
Allied-Signal Aerospace Company

allied
MA1NTENANCE MANUAL Signal
CHAPTER 7 2 - ENGINE COMPONENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
ENGINE COMPONENTS
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES AND COVERS
MA1NTENANCE PRACT ICES
Removal / I n s t a l l a t i o n
I n s p e c t i on/Check
PLENUM DRAIN VALVES, PLUGS AND BLEED
R A I R EXTRACTION PAD COVERS
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
Removal / I n s t a l l a t i on
UP136688
ENGINE COMPONENTS
72-CONTENTS
A u g 12/91
/lied
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES AND COVERS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
R CAUTION: PACKINGS AND GASKETS PROVIDED UNDERSHIPPING PLATESAND COV-

R ERS ARE USED FOR SHIPPING AND STORAGEPURPOSES ONLY. THESE
R PACKINGS AND GASKETSARE NOT APPROVED FOR USE DURINGON THE
R WING OR OFF WING ENGINE OPERATION.
Shipping plates and covers are provided with the engine to protect
against damage or contamination from foreign objects. These shipping
plates and covers shall be retained for future use.
UP136688
72-00-01
Page 1/2
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES AND COVERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOTE: Shipping and identification plates and covers are i l l u s -

trated in Figures 201, 202 and 203 where accessories are
normally mounted. These should be installed whenever ac-
cessories are removed.
Table 201 provides a l i s t of all materials and compounds
requi red for Removal/Instal I ation.

Grease Dow Corning Corp, 3901S Saginaw Rd,
(DC-111 Silicone Compound) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
R CAUTION: PACKINGS AND GASKETS PROVIDEDUNDERSHIPPING PLATES

R AND COVERSARE USED FOR SHIPPING AND STORAGEPUR-
R POSES ONLY. THESEPACKINGS AND GASKETSARE NOT AP-
R PROVED FOR USE DURINGON THE WING OR OFF WING ENGINE
R OPERATION.
NOTE: Do not remove trade mark or identification plate unless
replacement is intended.
A. Remove Shipping and Identification Plates and Covers (See Figures 201,
202 and 203)
CAUTION: ASSEMBLY LUBRICANTMIXED WITH SYNTHETIC ENGINE OIL CAN
CAUSE OIL FOAMINGAND OIL JET PLUGGING. USE NO MORE
THAN REQUIRED. ALLOWNO GREASETO ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
NOTE: Apply a very thin coat of grease (DC-111 silicone com-

pound) to gasket (35, figure 203) prior to installation.
Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, for recommended
general torque values.
B. Install Shipping and Identification Plates and Covers (See Figures 201,
202 and 203)
2. Inspection/Check
Check for security, punctures, and other damage.

UP136688
72-00-01
Page 201
Aug 12/91
/Allied
• ~ " 55
.-" • ---....
.; • . :'-... "...
. . . . . 1: . . . . " , -.. -.- . . . ~-
".':. - J . ' ; 4 ~ Y . ,
I . . . . . -':- ,.-'...- ".' "'." -~-

.-. . .... ,1 . "~- ,. I';i":,":~ .. ", . ;'.
| ..'" "-. ~ .::~tl, ~.I...: ~:::. .. . . . . . ,
-'-"- . . . . . . . . . " ' " "~ ~% "t'l.- . " "'" .7":. -, ' , "-~" ;. " ,
L~.;;" ,..- -.. . o.~.-.~i~.;.'~..." .,.': . . ,.. . ,
:(.~...",\.,..~. ---':, ', ,'7.. • ':-.:~%.. "~:~,~,. ":.'.. ,
• "" .>":',~ ; ~ . , . ".V • ". ".', "" "7:,',. :J',', '..'"~ ::" " , .. ".
• .::..~1C~. ,,,. ...° I ". ". ':C. ";~,', ,'

• " .: ~" . : " " , ~,"
":'" Y~' " Ac'" 0 ' "~'.
" "
' '".'"
"':! ",
",' "" I
..--
. . . .
..
. . . .
.
.....
.;...2.~,.
,.. _~.,~
.~ ~
", ....
;.{.~,
.....
..; ,;-
, .. -:, , . -., . . . . . -~. ', .-~-L~;;:; ~ ~ ; -. . . . .. .-..,;;~,

~. '~ ~,-':.,, : ..... -~',., .- : .." .. .. ,-~."
..... ,'.- ." . ........... ,," ' ~ : ; ~ I - 2 0
, . . . . . . -,-"C~-I
. . . . . . . . . . ' ,',, / .: ~@~ ~ / _ 10
. "'.. .;. " E-44G-1519

' ".'."i.- -2..i-.. '"
10. SCREW 45. WASHER

15. WASHER 50. PLATE (IDENTIFICATION)
20. PLATE(IDENTIFICATION) 55. PLATE(LOGO TYPE)
40. SCREW
Trade Mark and Identification Plates I n s t a l l a t i o n

UP136688
Figure 201 72-00-01

Page 202
Aug 12/91
HAl NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
_ . 65...
............ :;':::-ii;:~. ~"~;,, :': :~"~', \ / ~

....... -<"';:"-".",, '":"' '::-'~;', .->'," /I
......... ........ ~ .,:~itf!~'~a~:~;i"::.. ".,~;~.,, ,~., '~, ,a,

,,~:', ~'/,. . . . . . . . ', . ,. ",¢ ' . . . . . :'~,,~ "~;F' "', 'b : "',
/'~,r,"~'t'!"~":'~'~,,;'.'.~.' . . . . "......... ~":'~,"i~ ",~" " ("!~,, 'J , ,/
",,..,, " - ~ , " 4 : ' : . "..-'-~ ' , , "' '.'1~'" . " ~ ~, ,',; ,
: "'),~c;.%",:'.*~/:','.;:;&~, ~ "-'.:=, " ~, " ~'-. "- ,'~R ,1),:,~ '.'~ -'-" ,~, ~ ~ "~ ,,.'~ .~'~
,~,\,,~.a...... "7'-;4:.;~'~/,V~r..,.'£". \ ". ", ",~,~I ,~, r
• .... .~: ,,.. , .... , ,, , ,, ,Ia~)~
,,,, _ ~:~''.. :" ..-'"(Eta\ .~.,~ ~ ', ' ~ ij ~ ~,tlq //

* ' U ~ l ~ ¢ ~- _ ,-' .. - " ".~;, ~1~, .3 ,, °
25 .'. • -",. ....

. . . . .,,, ,.:,,
.. . . . . . . ..~..~'. % ...... ....:~..,',~ ,.,,, <.~J'I /.[~i" .,~,,,t
.m~ ......
.,, [ ./~.,>.... ,~ \ ..... ::,:~,~ .... :',,~-t,..- ~ L. 1,:::.,:....,,~::;~|~,
I ~ r'~%~:~,,'., I. /'-",,~"a ' .,,-,,m,';' ~ . ~::,:.;-"' ,~j,:'~'a .'," "
--- ~ ~ - . ....... :-~;~ . . . . . ~ \

~k \/~"-~o \ ' ::,. . .... , .."
\\ o)-J - ', ......'""~: ...... 111 .-- ..~'--
35 .~
~:~'~"~ 55 60 E-4.4G-583
R 5. NUT 35. NUT

R 10. ~IASHER 40. WASHER
R 15. BOLT 45. NUT
R 20. WASHER 5O. BOLT
R 25. COVER PLATE (PROPELLER SHAFT) 55. WASHER
R 30. PACKINGS (USED FOR 60. COVER (ENGINE INTAKE)
R SHIPPING PURPOSES ONLY) 65. COVER (EXHAUST)
Shipping Plates and C o v e r s Installation

UP136688
F i g u r e 202 72-00-01
Page 203
Dec 1 4 / 8 7
/lied
35.,<~
,..~.~
3o
.. ~ . . ~.~¢'." - . ! ..,-<- ,l... " ~...
" ~ :,;','~L,!~'''~',l",v,', "~" "', ";~',",' '\

" -~ . ' . ~ = i ~ , ' - : ; = . ~ i~ . ", ~ " ~,
.i, :..- ..,,, ,I] 't:).l~i, i.<t:,-..,, ~,>w ,}
~" t ' ~ : - . " ; ' ": , ; "1 : " , " ~,~ ~ .~ tJ
,--..: t~.<t,~!t.:;~..~,.',',,-,,.,/t l.t
I,", ,.,,, ' ~ C ~,, I~;t, .~.:,, 1'.,~]
"-,j: . . . ,:],, ,.;':.1 ," s,i i~ -." "-" ' ~::" ,,
.......... ;.- ....... ,.,
";,. ,V, .-' ....','~ ..~"~C.

<',",,'. ,A~ '" .." ". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"\-" , ~ :,,, ~ l. -.~'~
•. (,~ ~ ',,
,.~, ~ .t'A
,~ .~.lt,;'
v.~,",","
6570",.f%, ~ "
E--44G-741
5. NUT 40. BOLT

10. WASHER 45. WASHER
15. COVER(STARTER PAD) 50. PLATE(TORQUESENSORPAD)
20. NUT 55. PACKING
25. WASHER 60. NUT
30. PLATE(HYDRAULIC PUMPPAD) 65. WASHER
35. GASKET 70. COVER
UP136688
(Codes AA-CC, EA-GA) Shipping Plates and Covers Installation

Figure 203 72-00-01
Page 204
Aug 12/91
/lied
PLENUM DRAIN VALVES, PLUGSAND BLEED AIR EXTRACTIONPAD COVERS -

R 1. Plenum Drain Valves and Drain Plugs
R The plenum drain valve assembly drains excess fuel from the plenum chamber
R on engine shutdown. During engine operation the valve is held in the closed
R position when air pressure overcomes the spring force on the ball (maximum
R of 12 psig) and opens when air pressure falls below the spring force on the
R ball (5 psig minimum).
R 2. Bleed air Extraction Pad Covers
R Low and high pressure compressor bleed airflow is available for airframe and
R engine system use, (except during starting cycle) from ground idle to maxi-
R mum continuous. A total of 10 percent of engine airflow may be extracted
R for aircraft purposes.
UP136688
72-00-05
Page 1/2
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PLENUM DRAIN VALVES_, PLUGS AND BLEED AIR EXTRACTION PAD COVERS -
M A I NTENANCE PRACTIC ES
NOTE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of a l l materials and compounds

required to perform Removal/Installation. Table 202
provides a l i s t of special tools, f i x t u r e s and equipment
Material or Compound Hanufacturer
High temperature compound Fel-Pru Inc, Div of Felt Products Hfg Co,
(Fel - Pro C5-A) 7450 N HcCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL
60076-4046 or Part No. NPC60301-1 from
Retaining compound Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,

( L o c t i t e RC/609) Newington, CT 06111
Item Source/
. Pin Type Torque Used to i n s t a l l or remove 287914-1

Wrench Adapter 896064-1 plug from input
housing.
72-00-05
UP136688
R Page 201
Aug 4/94

1. A. Remove Drain Valve, Plugs and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers (See
Figures 201, 202, 203, 204 or 205)
(1) Remove drain valves, plugs, bleed air extraction pad covers and
gas kets.
(2) Remove plugs and gaskets.
(3) Remove nuts, washers, bleed port cover, gaskets and restrictors.
R (4) (Part No. 896064-1 and 894989-2) Remove plug (80) using 287914-1
wrench.
R (5) (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-1/-2) Refer to 72-10-20, Mainte-
R nance Practices for removal of seal plug (80), drain plug (55).
B. Installation of Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers
(See Figures 201, 202, 203, 204 or 205)

threads of drain valves (except f i r s t two threads)
prior to installation.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for recom-

mended general torque values. Add f r i c t i o n a l drag
(run-down) torque of self-locking devices to
recommended values.
(1) Install new gaskets on drain valves.
(2) Install drain valves in plenum with arrows on drain valves pointing
away from plenum. Tighten drain valves (5, 70) to a torque of 60
to 65 inch-pounds.
(3) (Part No. 896064-1 and 894989-2) Apply retaining c~npound (Loctite
RC/609) to threads of plugs (55, 80) except f i r s t two threads. In-
stall seal plug (80) using 287914-1 torque wrench adapter. Tighten
seal plug (80) to a torque value of i0 inch-pounds.
(4) (Part No. 894989-2) Install drain plug (55) and tighten to a
R (5) (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-1/-2) Refer to 72-10-20, Mainte-
R nance Practices for installation of seal plug (80), drain plug
R (55).
(6) Install new gasket on plug. Install plug (15) and tighten to a
torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds.
(7) Install new gasket on plug (60, Figure 203, 204 or 205). Install
plug (60, Figure 203 or 204) and tighten plug (60, Figure 203) to a
torque value of 55 to 75 inch-pounds or plug (60, Figure 204 and
205) to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-0U-05
Page 202
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-00-05
Page 203
Dec 14/87
~=~/lied
25
3o
15
2O
\
5 F-44G-357
10
80
55 75
F-44G-358
(Codes AA-BA) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air
UP136688
R Extraction Pad Covers Installation

Figure 201 72-00-05
Page 204
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Signal•llied
1. B. (8) I n s t a l l , in sequence, over bleed port; gasket (40), r e s t r i c t o r
(45), gasket (50) and bleed port cover (35) and secure with washers
(30) and nuts (25). Tighten nuts (25) to a torque value of 20
inch-pounds.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Drain Valves
(i) Visually inspect for foreign material, stripped, crossed, and

peened threads, and other damage.
(2) Clean foreign material from drain valves using acceptable shop
practices.
(3) Replace damaged valves.
B. Check Drain Valves
(I) Valves shall be capable of being closed by 2.0 to 5.0 psig a i r

pres sure.
R (2) Valves shall be in open position with no a i r pressure applied. En-
R sure valve is open by applying s l i g h t a i r pressure in opposite
R d i r e c t i o n of arrow marked on valve. Air shall flow f r e e l y through
R valve.
(3) Replace valves which f a i l to close or open properly.
~ K E Y TO FIGURE 201
5. DRAIN VALVE 40. GASKET

10. GASKET 45. RESTRICTOR
15. PLUG 50. GASKET
20. GASKET 55. DRAIN PLUG
25. NUT 70. DRAIN VALVE
30. WASHER 75. GASKET
35. COVER 80. PLUG
UP136688
72-00-05
Page 205
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
25
3O
35
40
45
I-q
50
,f
%%.
F-44G-355
55
15
20
5
70 10
75 F-44G-356
(Codes CA-CC) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed A i r

UP136688
R Extraction Pad Covers I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 202 72-00-05
Page 206
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
KEY TO FIGURE 202
5. DRAIN VALVE 40. GASKET

10. GASKET 45. RESTRICTOR
15. PLUG 50. GASKET
20. GASKET 55. DRAIN PLUG
25. NUT 70. DRAIN VALVE
35. COVER 80. PLUG
UP136688
72-00-05
Page 207
Dec 14/87
/lied
15
2O
\
r
/
5
10 55
F-44G -359
80
60
65
/
q]
70
75
F-44G-360,
(Code DA) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air
UP136688

Figure 203 72-00-05
Page 208
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
KEY TO FIGURE 203
5. DRAIN VALVE 45. RESTRICTOR

10. GASKET 50. GASKET
15. PLUG 55. DRAINPLUG
20. GASKET 6O. PLUG
25. NUT 65. GASKET
30. WASHER 70. DRAINVALVE
35, COVER 75. GASKET
40. GASKET 80. PLUG
UP136688
72-00-05
Page 209
Dec 14/87
/~llied
25
30
35
40
15
20
5 $5 F-44G-353
10
80
75
F-4~G-354
(Codes EA-FB) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air
UP136688

Figure 204 72-00-05
Page 210
Aug 12/91
lied
KEY TO FIGURE 204
5. DRAINVALVE 45. RESTRICTOR

15. PLUG 55. DRAINPLUG
20. GASKET 60. PLUG
25. NUT 65. GASKET
30. WASHER 70. DRAINVALVE
35. COVER 75. GASKET
40. GASKET 80. PLUG
UP136688
72-00-05
R Page 211
Aug 12/91
lied
-,-....._.~
.___...-~
55
80
70 To
75
F-44G-1017
R (Code GA) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air

R Figure 205 72-00-05
UP136688
Page 212
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
KEY TO FIGURE 205
5. DRAIN VALVE 45. RESTRICTOR

15. PLUG 55, DRAIN PLUG
20. GASKET 60. PLUG
25. NUT 65. GASKET
30. WASHER 70. DRAIN VALVE
35. COVER 75. GASKET
40. GASKET 80. PLUG
UP136688
72-00-05
Page 213/214
Aug 12/91
All.iedSigna1Aemsgace Company
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72 - REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
SUBJECT SB SUBJECT -
PAGE
REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION
MA1NTENANCE PRACTICES
OIL FLOWMETAL TUBE ASSEMBLY (BETA TUBE)
Removal / I n s t a l 1a ti on
Adjustment/Test
Inspection/Check
CleaningIPainting
PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL ASSEMBLY

Removal / I n s t a l 1a t i on
Adjustment/Test
Inspection/Check
C l eaninglpainting
R Approved Repai r s
PROPELLER GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY
R Inspection/Check
R Cleaning/Painting
R Approved Repairs
NEGATIVE TORQUE PRESSURE REGULATOR

Inspection/Check
C l eani ng/Painting
POSITIVE TORQUE PRESSURE REGULATORIFILTER

Removal / I n s t a l 1a t i o n
Inspecti on/Check
Cleani ng/Painting
UP136688

72-CONTENTS
Page 1
Aug 12/91
~
ignal
/lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
ORIFICE HOUSINGAND ORIFICE 72-10-06

VALVE BODY
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 201
Cleaning/Painting 205
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY 72-10-07

AND OIL TRANSFERTUBE 201
DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEALS 72-10-08
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY 72-10-09

R OIL TRANSFERTUBES, OIL JET AND 72-10-10

R LUBRICATION ADAPTER
R Inspection/Check 207
R Cleaning/Painting 207
TORSION SPLINE (QUILL) SHAFT AND 72-10-11

COUPLING ASSEMBLY
UP136688

72-CONTENTS
Page 2
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY 72-10-12

Removal/Instal I a t i on 201
Inspecti on/Check 209
Cl eaning/Pai nting 210
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY 72-10-13

(DIAPHRAGM) MAINTENANCEPRACTICES 201
Removal/Instal I tion 201
Ins pect i on/Ch ec k 227
C1eani ng/Pai nti ng 239
TORSION SHAFT ASSEMBLY 72-10-14

R TACHOMETER GENERATORGEAR AND TORQUE 72-10-15

R SENSOR GEAR ASSEMBLIES
Removal / Instal I ati on 201
TORQUE SENSOR GEAR ASSEMBLY 72-10-16

Removal/Instal l a t i on 201
Adjustment/Test 217
DIRECT DRIVE FUEL CONTROLGEARSHAFT 72-10-17


72-CONTENTS
UP136688
Page 3
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lied
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
OIL PRESSUREPUMPASSEMBLY 72-10-18
AND ROLLERBEARING
COMPRESSOR BEARINGCARRIERAND COMPONENTS 72-10-19
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGASSEMBLY 72-10-20

UP136688
REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFTSECTION

72-CONTENTS
Page 4
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
REDUCTION GEARAND SHAFT SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The reduction gear section is located in the front of the engine above the a i r
i n l e t duct and is enclosed by the input, intermediate and output housing
assemblies. The propeller and shaft-driven accessories and components of asso-
ciated systems are driven by a series of gears, shafts and integral parts
through the reduction gear section. The output housing contains the propeller
shaft for mounting the air c r aft propeller and couples rotating torque from
reduction gearing of the intermediate gearbox housing to drive the propeller.
I. Oil Flow Metal Tube Assembly IBeta Tube)
The propeller oil-transfer (beta) tube extends aft from a threaded adjusta-
ble connection in the propeller dome, through the engine propeller shaft and
into the propeller pitch control. The tube portion, housed within the
propeller pitch control ported sleeve has oil supply ports through which
propeller governor discharge oil is supplied to the propeller dome.
2. Propeller Pitch Control Assembly
The propeller pitch control is mounted at the rear of the reduction gear
section on the propeller shaft centerline. During propeller-governing mode,
the propeller pitch control serves no basic function other than oil passage
and housing for the beta tube. In beta-mode, (underspeed governing), the
propeller pitch control provides for p i l o t control of propeller blade pitch
angle.
3. Propeller Governor Assembl~,
The propeller governor assembly is mounted in the lower left-hand position

at the rear of the reduction gear section. The propeller governor assembly
provides a constant engine speed during the propeller-governing mode of
operation.
4. Negative Torque Sensor Pressure Regulator
The negative torque sensor pressure regulator, mounted on the rear face of
the reduction gear section, is a preset spring loaded, piston actuated regu-
lator which functions to maintain oil pressure from the propeller governor
to the negative torque sensor system.
5. IPre SB 72-0257/SB 72-0441) Positive Torque Sensor Pressure Regulator
The positive torque sensor pressure regulator mounted on the right side of
the reduction gear section directly above the torque signal compensator, is
a preset, spring loaded, piston actuated regulator which functions to regu-
late lube oil pressure to the torque sensing system.
6. Orifice Housing Assembly

The o r i f i c e housing assembly is a preset restrictor to meter oil to the
negative torque sensor pressure regulator.
UP136688
72-10-00
Page 1
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
7. Featherin.~ Valve Assembly
The propeller feathering valve assembly, mounted on the outside of the in-
put housing assembly provides for connection of a customer-furnished
control. The valve has normally open ports through which the propeller
positioning control o i l passes from the governor to the pitch control. I f
manual feathering of the propeller is required, pulling the feather control
valve lever moves a spool valve to close the entry port for control o i l
from the governor and simultaneously opens a port for dumping o i l . The
port to the pitch control remains open, allowing propeller oil to flow back
into the valve and into the oil sump in the reduction gear housing, allow-
ing the propeller to feather. In addition to the above function, the
propeller feathering valve assembly operates automatically to bring the
propeller toward the feathered position i f a negative torque is sensed by
the torque sensor. Negative torque causes a pressure d i f f e r e n t i a l to build
up across the spool valve. This pressure moves the spool valve in the same
manner as manual feathering. As soon as the negative torque is removed,
the pressure on the spool valve is removed and the spring loaded spool
valve moves back into normal position.
8. Shaft Oil Seals
Shaft oil seals are incorporated in the accessory mount pads to prevent oil
leakage.
9. Torsion Spline ( Q u i l l ) Shaft and Couplin~ Assembly
Torsion spline shaft and coupling assembly couples the torsion shaft to the
high speed pinion.
10. Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly
Planet c a r r i e r and gear assembly is mounted on the intermediate gearbox as-

sembly and provides a means of coupling the propeller shaft to the main
shaft rotating group through the intermediate gearbox gear train.
11. Torsion Shaft Assembly
A torsion shaft, positioned concentrically inside the main shaft, extends

through the length of the shaft and is coupled to the reduction gear
section. The torsion shaft is driven by a spline at the rear of the main
shaft and drives the matched gearshaft and bearing set (high speed pinion)
through a spline coupling at the front.
12. Oil Transfer Manifold, Torque Sensor Assembly and F i t t i n 9
The torque sensor assembly is essentially a pressure regulator valve,

mounted inside the reduction gearcase, which varies settings with a change
in the angular position of two gears. Oil pressure from the torque sensor
assembly is supplied, through oil transfer manifold plumbing, to a compen-
sated torque indicating system which provides an ouput proportional to en-
gine power.
UP136688
72-10-00
Page 2
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Foward end of main shaft transmits torque to the propeller through the
reduction gear t r a i n . The torsion shaft is splined into the a f t end of the
main shaft. Gears mounted on the forward ends of main shaft and torsion
shaft drive the gears of the torque sensor assembly. The torque supplied
to the propeller is measured by the torque sensor assembly by measuring the
amount of torsion shaft t w i s t in r e l a t i o n to main shaft.
13. Oil Pressure Pump Assembly
The pressure pump assembly is a gerotor type pump keyed to the shaft of the
fuel control unit drive gear. The gerotor gears are installed in a housing
attached to the inside of the fuel control unit mounting pad on the reduc-
tion gear section.
The pump delivers oil from the oil tank through a pressure regulator and a
f i l t e r into cored passages and internal plumbing in the reduction gear
housing, where the oil is directed to bearings and gears. An external
plumbing l i n e carries l u b r i c a t i n g o i l to an o i l j e t in the turbine section
f o r l u b r i c a t i o n of the rear bearing. Pressurized oil is also provided to
the propeller governing system.
14, Gearcase Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly
The oil scavenge pump assembly is a gerotor type pump driven by a splined
shaft, which in turn is driven by internal splines in the fuel control u n i t
drive gear. Gerotor gears for the pump assembly are i n s t a l l e d in a housing
attached to the inside of the reduction gear section intermediate housing
assembly.
Lubricating o i l , supplied to the bearings and gears (and also pressurized
o i l supplied to the propeller governing system), drains into a sump in the
bottom of the reduction gear section housing, where i t is picked up by the
tubes in the sump and passed through vertical tubes to the main scavenge
pumps. From the scavenge pumps, the oil is directed to the fuel heater,
the a i r c r a f t heat exchanger and the o i l tank.
15. Compressor Bearing Carrier Support Assembly
The compressor bearing c a r r i e r support assembly supports the bearing and

the a i r - o i l seal and rotor at the forward end of the main shaft.
UP136688
72-10-00
Page 3/4
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
CAUTION: MAINTENANCE PRACTICES OUTLINED IN THIS CHAPTER/SECTIONAS-

SUMES THAT PROCEDURESWILL BE PERFO~IED BY ADEQUATELY
TRAINED PERSONNEL. EXTENSIVETESTING REQUIRING SPECIAL
TOOLS MUST BE PERFORMEDWHENEVER INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX ASSEM-
BLY (DIAPHRAGM) IS REMOVED. REFER TO 72-00-00,
ADJUS~IENT/TEST, PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE
REQUIRING INTERMEDIATE GEARBOXASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) REMOVAL.
ENSURE ALL MATERIALS AND SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED IN THIS AND
REFERENCED CHAPTER/SECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE BEFORE ATTEMPTING
ANY OF THE FOLLOWING MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
NOTE: Removal and installation procedures are provided to completely

disassemble and reassemble the reduction gear section. Compo-
nents should be removed only to the extent required for the
maintenance action to be performed.
UP136688
72-10-00
Page 201/202
Dec 14/87
/lied
OIL FLOWMETAL TUBE ASSEMBLY (BETA TUBE) - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
I. Removal/Installation
NOTE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of all special tools, fixtures

and equipment required for Removal/Installation. Table 202
provides a l i s t of all materials and compounds required for
Removal/Instal lation.
Item Source/

i. Plug Puller Used to remove plug from 285397-I-I
flanged end of propeller
shaft.
2. Bearing and Bushing Used to install plug in 285398-1-]

Driver flanged end of propeller
shaft.
3. Oil Flow Metal Tube Used to i n s t a l l , remove or 287335-1-I
Wrench adjust oil flow metal tube
(beta).

Any approved engine oil Commercially available
Lubricant Monsanto Company, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,

(0S-124 or Santovac 5) St Louis, MO 63166
UP136688
72-10-01
R Page 201
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
25 35 30
/
1o
~'.~ 55 45
"" ;'t~ --s -. .,~-. 1 C~'x""

"< " T t , ' ~ ' ; \ ~J ": E~.A~
"]~!~7;','
.%1
5. NUT 35. PACKING

10. BOLT 40, BETATUBE
15. PACKING 45. SEAL PLUG
25. PIN 50. PACKING
30. PLUG 55. PACKING
UP136688
(Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Beta Tube Installation

Figure 201 72-10-01
Page 202
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany ,~llied
. A. RemoveBeta Tube (See Figures 201, 202)

WARNING: ENSUREPROPELLER IS FULLY FEATHEREDBEFORE
PROCEEDING.
(1) Ensure propeller is feathered for beta tube removal.
(2) Removethat portion of the spinner and the propeller hub assembly
that will afford accessibility to beta tube. (Refer to Aircraft
Maintenance Manual.)
CAUTION: PROTECTBETA TUBE FROMCORROSIONAND ANY POSSI-
BLE DAMAGEUNTIL REINSTALLATION. IF POSSIBLE
STORE IN SHIPPING CONTAINER.
R (3) (Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Using 287335-1-1 wrench carefully remove
beta tube from propeller shaft. Removepackings.
(4) (Codes BA, FA, FB) Removedbeta tube in accordance with Aircraft
Maintenance Manu~l.
(5) Removepropeller in accordance with Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
CAUTION: (CODESAA-AC, CA-EA, GA) ENSURE285397-1-1

PULLER IS PROPERLYINSTALLED AND SEATEDON
PROPELLER SHAFT FLANGE, PRIORTO ATTEMPTINGTO
REMOVEPLUG, TO PRECLUDEPOSSIBLE DAMAGETO
PULLER.
R NOTE: (Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Do not remove plug from

propeller shaft unless required for maintenance.
R (6) (Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Removeplug using 285397-1-1 puller.
(7) Install cover plate to protect propeller shaft. Refer to 72-00-01,

shipping plates and covers installation.
B. Install Beta Tube (See Figures 201, 202)

NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended
general torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down)
torque of self locking devices to recommended values.
Lightly coat new packings with clean engine oil or lu-

bricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation.
(1) Removecover plate installed on propeller shaft. Refer to

72-00-01, shipping plates and covers installation.
(2) (Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Ensure plug is installed in propeller
shaft. I f necessary, install new packings on shaft seal plug then
install plug using 285398-1-1 driver.
UP136688
72-10-01
Page 203
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
20
10 25
i l t
......~:: ~;;:~!~::./
g" .......... i ..... "
... ".::.,: -.:. :

"-~ ".~...//
:.. E-44A-5931
: ,
5. PACKING 25. PLUG

10. PACKING 30. PACKING
20. PIN 35. BETATUBE
UP136688
(Codes BA, FA, FB) Beta Tube Installation

Figure 202 72-10-01
Page 204
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (3) Install new packings on beta tube.
(4) Ensure ports on beta tube are free of obstructions.
(5) Ensure propeller is in feather position.
(6) (Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Install beta tube using 287335-1-1 wrench
until approximately two threads of threaded section is showing at
propeller dome.
(7) (Codes BA, FA, FB) Install beta tube in accordance with Aircraft
Maintenance Manual.
(8) Hand actuate the propeller pitch control. Check to ensure f u l l

travel to reverse position without drag or binding.
R NOTE: (Codes AA-AC, CA-EA, GA) Do not lock position of

beta tube with bolt and nut until f l i g h t - i d l e an-
gle is set. Refer to Adjustment/Test.
(9) Upon completion of assembly of engine, operate engine in accordance

with Aircraft Flight Manual and perform operational checks speci-
fied in 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
2. Adjustment/Test
NOTE: Oil temperature affects the following procedure. I f per-

formed when engine is cold, recheck and adjust on f i r s t en-
gine run when oil is at normal operating temperature.
A. Observe Adjustment/Test Procedures
(1) Set propeller pitch control lever on FLIGHT-IDLE and pin so that no
movement from this position takes place during the following check.
Withdraw beta tube until approximately half of the threaded section
is showing at propeller dome.
(2) Check that unfeathering pump is connected to engine oil tank.

UP136688
72-10-01
Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: DO NOT SERVICE OIL SUPPLY UNTIL OIL HAS BEEN
SCAVENGED FROM GEARCASE. AT END OF UNFEATHER-
ING PUMP OPERATING PERIOD, ACTIVATE AND CRANK
ENGINE TO SCAVENGEOIL FROM THE ACCESSORY
HOUSING SUMP. IF STARTER IS USED, OBSERVETIME
LIMIT ESTABLISHED BY STARTER MANUFACTURERAND
DISABLE OIL VENT VALVE.
. A. (3) Determine propeller blade f l i g h t - i d l e angle at blade measuring

station. Operate unfeathering pump and position beta tube. One
turn counter-clockwise of beta tube provides a two degree blade an-
gle increase. Check blade angle with propeller protractor f o l l o w -
ing adjustment of beta tube.
(4) Lock beta tube in position with b o l t and nut when specified
p r o p e l l e r blade angle is achieved. Tighten nut in accordance with
A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual.
(5) Perform dynamic o i l leakage check with spinner on unless A i r c r a f t
Maintenance Manual specifies otherwise.
(6) Perform f l i g h t - i d l e low rpm check. Refer to 72-00-00,

ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
(7) Shut down engine and check f o r leakage.
(8) Reinstall spinner i f removed for leak check.

3. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Beta Tube (See Figure 201 or 202)
(I) V i s u a l l y inspect beta tube for scoring, nicks, scratches, corrosion

and d i s t o r t i o n . Replace beta tube i f any scratches are detected on
the metering and sealing surfaces. Replace beta tube i f raised
material or indentation is detectable.
(2) Replace part that does not meet Inspection/Check requirements.
4. Cleanin~/Paintin 9
A. Clean Component Parts
(1) Clean a l l standard m e t a l l i c hardware in accordance with 72-00-00,

CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Method No. I or 2.
(2) Clean end plug of beta tube in accordance with 72-00-00,

CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Method No. I0.
(3) Clean beta tube in accordance with 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING,

Cleaning Method No. 12.
UP136688
72-10-01
Page 206
Dec 14/87
/lied
PROPELLER PITCH CONTROLASSemBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

. Removal/.l.nstal l a t i o n

required f o r Removal/Installation.
R Any approved engine o i l Commercial ly available
R Grease Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,

R (DC-I11 s i l i c o n e compound) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
R Lubricant (0S-124 or Monsanto Co, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,
R Santovac 5) St Louis, MO 63166
A. Remove Propeller Pitch Control Assembly (See Figure 201)

NOTE: I f new propeller pitch control assembly is to be i n -
s t a l l e d , rigging plate and pitch control arm must be
removed from the removed u n i t for i n s t a l l a t i o n on the
replacement u n i t . Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(1) Remove beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Disconnect plumbing as required.

(3) Disconnect controls linkage assembly to pitch control arm on
propeller pitch control assembly. Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(4) Rotate p r o p e l l e r pitch control shaft lever f u l l y counterclockwise.
(5) Remove bolts, washers and propeller pitch control assembly from
engine.
NOTE: Do not remove gasket unless damage is indicated by

inspection.
(6) I f gasket (30) requires replacement, remove shipping cover or a i r -
c r a f t shaft driven component. Refer to A i r c r a f t Maintenance
Manual.
UP136688
72-10-02
Page 201
Aug 16/89
I ~ ] MAI|,'ITENANCE
MANUAL
TPE331=5(REPORTN0o72-01=27)
,, , ..< \ ~.(~
3O
15
E-44G-584
R 1 BOLT 20. WASHER

R 10. WASHER 25. PROPELLERPITCH CONTROL ASSY
R 15. BOLT 30. GASKET
UP136688
Propeller Pitch Control Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 201 72-10-02
Page 202
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
l,IAl NTENANCE MANUAL
i. B. I n s t a l l Propeller Pitch Control Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, StandarQ Practices, f o r recmmnended

general torque values. Add f r i c t i o n a l drag (run-down)
(1) Rotate propeller pitch control shaft f u l l y counterclockwise.
CAUTION: ASSEMBLY LUBRICANT MIXED WITH SYNTHETIC ENGINE

OIL CAN CAUSE OIL FOAMINGAND OIL JET PLUGGING.
USE NO MORETHAN REQUIRED. ALLOSJNO GREASE TO
ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
NOTE: I n s t a l l a t i o n of a i r c r a f t shaft driven component

(or shipping cover) with new gasket may not be
necessary i f original gasket was judued servicea-
ble when propeller pitch control was removed.
(2) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-II1 s i l i c o n e ) to gasket (old or new

gasket).
(3) I n s t a l l and secure propeller pitch contrul assembly and gasket with
washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (5, 15) to a torque value of 80
i nch-pounds.
(4) I n s t a l l shipping cover or a i r c r a f t shaft driven component adjacent

to propeller pitch control assembly i f gasket was replaced.
(5) Connect plumbing.
(6) Connect controls linkage assembly. Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance

Practices.
(7) I n s t a l l beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
CAUTION: FOLLUWING PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL INSTALLATION, NTS

LOCKOUT AND PROPELLER GOVERNORRESET CHECK IS
REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPEROPERATION.
(8) Perform NTS lockout and propeller governor reset check in accor-
dance with 72-00-00, Adjusi~lent/Test.
2. Adjustment/Test
Perfom engine operational checks. Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
72-10-02
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
~F~7~-2A
Signal
,• Ilied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Inspec%ion/Check
A. Inspect Propeller Pitch Control Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: I f propeller pitch control assembly was removed because

of damage or malfunction, inspect beta tube. Refer to
(1) Inspect for security, evidence of oil leaks and damage. Check for
internal binding of propeller pitch control shaft by rotating
shaft. Shaft should rotate freely through 0 to 100 degrees
minimum. Sleeve shall extend and retract smoothly as shaft is
rotated.
(2) I f propeller pitch control assembly is disassembled for any reason,
inspect components of propeller pitch control assembly for wear as
follows. (See figure 202.)
(a) Inspect sides Qf cam assembly track for wear. Wear (Dimension
A) shall not exceed 0.004 inch on either side of track.
(b) Inspect diametrical clearance between pin and r o l l e r of

R propeller pitch control sleeve. Measure lateral movement of
R r o l l e r at several positions to determine maximum diametrical
R clearance which shall not exceed 0.005 inch and shall not be
R less than 0.001 inch.
R (c) Inspect guide of sleeve for cracks, bending, separation of

R braze or weld, wear and freedom of movement. Cracks, v i s i b l e
R bending and separation of braze or weld are not allowed.
R Replace sleeve i f requirements are not met.
(d) Inspect entire outside circumference of sleeve bearing (75,

figure 203). Minimum outside Diameter of bearing shall not be
less than 1.316 inch.
(e) Inspect body for excessive wear, foreign materials, and other
damage.
R (f) Inspect r o l l e r for wear. Diameter B shall be 0.2490 to 0.2495

R inch.
R (g) Inspect r o l l e r clearance. Dimension C shall be 0.005 inch

R minimum all around. Roller shall rotate freely.
(h) Replace any part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(3) Internal leakage of propeller pitch control assembly may be i n d i -

cated by propeller not unfeathering or not unfeathering adequately
to engage s t a r t locks.
(4) Internal leakage and/or binding may be corrected in accordance with

UP136688
Approved Repai rs.

72-10-02
Page 204
Aug 16/89
/lied
CAM ASSY
(TYPICAL)
DIM. A
DIM. A
SECTION A-A
R
WELD OR A
................................... . . ~. . . . //////./////////////////////I//////////11111/'7-/I
MUST ROTATE 1
DIM. C
J L
DETAIL A 1-44G-531
UP136688
Propeller Pitch Control Wear Limits

Figure 202 72-10-02
Page 205
Aug 16/89
~/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ 'Signal
. Cleaning/Painting
(i) Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for general cleaning i n s t r u c -

tions and for description of cleaning methods specified in Table
202.
NOTE: Reference shall be made to Table 202 for recom-

mended cleaning method.
Table 202. Cleaning Methods
Figure Item Cleaning Methods

No. No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
All standard metallic hardware X X

203 25 Cover X X X X
30 Body X X X X
65 Cam Assembly X X X
75 Sleeve Bearing X X
105 Retainer X X
140 Retainer X X
145 Valve Seat X X
155 Sleeve X X
UP136688
72-10-02
Page 206
Aug 16/89
~/~!lied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ~+ Signal
5. Approved Repairs

required for Approved Repairs.
Any approved engine oil Commercial ly avail abl e
R Compound (Loctite 222) Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,

R Newington, CT 06111

R Primer (Locquic Primer T, No. 747) Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,
R Newington, CT 06111
A. Correct Propeller Pitch Control Assembly Internal Leakage (See Figure

203)
(i) Disassemble propeller pitch control assembly as follows.
NOTE: Do not remove inserts and bushings from body or

cover unless required to replace damaged part.
(a) Remove screws, washers, cover, and gasket.

CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE
MINIMIZED. REFERTO 70-00-00, STANDARD
PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Do not remove bushings from cover and body
unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(b) Remove cam assembly and sleeve bearing. Remove packing from
body.
(c) Remove screws, washers, retainer and gasket.
NOTE: Do not disassemble sleeve assembly unless

damage is indicated by inspection.
(d) Remove sleeve assembly.
UP136688
72-10-02
Page 207
Aug 16/89
~ . Islied
ignal
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
30 0 `---80
~5 17o
175 I
170 "~ / "
105 ~ ~ 10
E-44G- 1229
UP136688
Propeller Pitch Control Assembly

Figure 203 72-10-02
Page 208
Aug 16/89
, .~!lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '~ - Signal
CAUTION: RETAINER(140) AND SLEEVE (155) HAVELEFT-

HANDED THREADS.
R NOTE: Heat sleeve assembly (140, 145, 150, 155) to
R 100°C (212°F) for 10 minutes to soften com-
R pound (Loctite 222), so retainer (140) can be
R removed from sleeve (155).
. A. (1) (e) Remove r e t a i n e r , valve seat, and packing from sleeve.
(f) Replace valve seat i f inside diameter exceeds 0.441 inch.

(g) Remove bushing and packings from cover.
(h) Remove retainers and use small wire to remove packing from
shaft bore.
(i) Remove plug and packing from body.
(2) Assemble propeller pitch control assembly as follows. (See Figure

203. )
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recom-

(run-down) torque of s e l f - l o c k i n g devices to
recommended val ues.
Replace a l l gaskets, packings, and retainers that

secure packings. Coat all internal surfaces of
body with clean engine o i l . L i g h t l y coat new
packings with clean engine o i l or lubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(a) Coat all internal surfaces of propeller pitch control body
with approved engine o i l .
KEY TO FIGURE 203
5. SCREW 95. SCREW

25. COVER 105. RETAINER
30. BODY 110. GASKET
35. BUSHING 115. WASHER
55. PACKING 140. RETAINER
60. GASKET 145. SEAT
65. CAM ASSY 150. PACKING
75. SLEEVE BEARING 155. SLEEVEASSY
80. PACKING 170. WASHER
85. PLUG 175. PACKING
90. PACKING
UP136688
72-10-02
Page 209
Aug 16/89
/lied
NOTE: Ensure threads of retainer and mating threads

of sleeve are clean p r i o r to applying primer.
5. A. (2)(b) Coat threads of retainer (140) and mating threads of sleeve

with primer (Locquic 747).
R CAUTION: APPLY COMPOUND(LOCTITE 222) SPARINGLY.

R EXCESSIVE USE COULDCAUSEBINDING OF SEAT
R (145).
R RETAINER (140) AND SLEEVE (155) HAVE LEFT-

R HAND THREADS.
(c) Coat threads of retainer with compound (Loctite 222) and in-
s t a l l packing, valve seat, and retainer into sleeve. Tighten
retainer (140) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds. Bake as-
sembled sleeve assembly for 15 to 30 minutes at 121 to 149°C
(250 to 300°F).
(d) Check security of retainer (140). Apply a breakaway torque
value (clockwise) of 35 inch-pounds. Repeat steps (b) and (c)
i f movement occurs.
(e) I n s t a l l packings and washers into body.
(f) I n s t a l l packing and plug into body. Tighten plug to a torque

(g) I n s t a l l sleeve assembly into body. I n s t a l l packing, washer,
gasket, and retainer. Secure with washers and screws.
Tighten screws (95) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(h) Position bearing on shaft of cam assembly and insert cam as-
sembly and bearing into body so guide sleeve is positioned in
s l o t of cam assembly.
(i) I n s t a l l packings on bushing (35) and i n s t a l l in cover.
(J) I n s t a l l gasket and cover to body and tighten screws (5) to a

(k) Check propeller pitch control operation by rotating shaft as-

sembly to check f o r freedom of movement. Shaft shall rotate
f r e e l y with no binding or rough spots. Sleeve shall extend
and r e t r a c t smoothly as shaft assembly is rotated. Torque
required to rotate shaft assembly to within 0.010 inch of f u l l
travel shall be 1 to 7 inch-pounds.
(i) I f internal leakage is not corrected, return propeller pitch

control to a Garrett authorized service f a c i l i t y f o r overhaul.
UP136688
72-10-02
Page 210
Aug 16/89
/lied
PROPELLER GOVERNORASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOTE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of special tools, f i x t u r e s and

equipment required for Removal/Installation. Table 202
provides a l i s t of all r~terials and compounds required for
Removal/Installation.
Item Source/
1. Check Valve Remover Used to remove and i n s t a l l 831061-1

and I n s t a l l e r check valve assembly (pin and
body).

(DC-Ill silicone compound) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
UP136688
72-10-03
R Page 201
Aug 16/89
~lslied
1. A. Remove Propeller Governor Assembly (See Figure 201, 202 and 203)
NOTE: Before replacing propeller governor assembly, be sure

trouble has been isolated to this component. I f new
propeller governor assembly is to be installed, rigging
shall be accomplished in accordance with Adjustment/
Test section of 76-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(1) Disconnect controls linkage assembly between propeller governor as-
sembly and fuel control assembly. Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(2) Disconnect wiring or plumbing as applicable.
(3) Remove nuts and washers securing propeller governor assembly to

housing.
(4) Remove propeller governor assembly from engine in a straight line
to avoid damage.
(5) Removegasket from propeller governor assembly.
NOTE: Do not remove orifice setscrew and check valve as-

sembly unless replacement is required.
(6) Removeorifice setscrew and check valve assembly (pin and body) as
follows.
(a) Removeorifice setscrew using 0.050 inch Allen wrench.
(b) Removepin using smaller threaded end of 831061-1 check valve

remover and installer.
(c) Removebody using larger threaded end of 831061-1 check valve
remover and installer.
R (7) (Code FB) Removeelbow and discard packing.

UP136688
72-10-03
Page 202
Aug 16/89
/lied
25 35 40 t~ . . :, ...
• ,/ "'--.o
f... :oo,
5 10 : ~ ::.:...>. . . . . .
| -. - . ; , ,. ;,"
.. °.° .-
/ "o.
• °OOo do.-.
20
5. NUT 25. ORIFICE SETSCREW

10. WASHER 35. PIN
15. PROPELLERGOVERNORASSY 40. BODY
20. GASKET
(Codes AA-CC, GA) Propeller Governor

UP136688
Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n
Figure 201 72-10-03
Page 203
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal •P•lslied
1, B. I n s t a l l Propeller Governor Assembly (See Figure 201, 202 and 203)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, f o r recommended
torque of s e l f - l o c k i n g devices to recommended values.
(1) I n s t a l l check valve assembly (pin and body) and o r i f i c e setscrew,
i f removed.
(a) I n s t a l l body, using larger threaded end of 831061-1 check

valve remover and i n s t a l l e r , u n t i l f u l l y i n s t a l l e d .
(b) I n s t a l l pin into body, using smaller threaded end of 831061-1
check valve remover and i n s t a l l e r , u n t i l f u l l y i n s t a l l e d .
(c) I n s t a l l and tighten o r i f i c e setscrew (25, figures 201 or 202),
using 0.050 inch Allen wrench, to a torque value of 7 inch-
pounds.
CAUTION: ASSEMBLY LUBRICANT MIXED WITII SYNTHETIC ENGINE

OIL CAN CAUSE OIL FOAMING AND OIL JET PLUGGING.
USE NO MORETHAN REQUIRED. ALLOWNO GREASETO
(2) Apply a very thin coat of grease (DC-111 silicone compound) to

gasket.
(3) I n s t a l l gasket on propeller governor assembly.
(4) Install propeller governor assembly in a straight line to avoid

damage and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten retaining nuts to
a torque value of I00 inch-pounds.
R (5) (Code FB) I n s t a l l elbow with nut and new packing. Tightn nut to a
R torque value of 20 to 25 inch-pounds.
(6) Connect wiring or plumbing as applicable.

Practices.
CAUTION: FOLLOWING PROPELLER GOVERNORINSTALLATION,

PROPELLER GOVERNORRESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCK-
OUT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE
PROPER OPERATION.
(8) Pressure check propeller governor reset function and NTS lockout
system and perform NTS system ground check. Refer to 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test.
(9) Perform propeller governor high RPM and low RPM checks. Refer to
UP136688
72-10-03
Page 204
Aug 16/89
25 35 40 ,''"- ~.,.....
;" ';::.. ...

5 10 i ;.."% .,":.
t 'J ",, j
•/.~'~ "... -.
E-~G-629
5. NUT 25. ORIFICE SETSCREW

10. WASHER 35. PIN
15. PROPELLERGOVERNOR ASSY 40. BODY
20. GASKET
UP136688
(Codes DA-FA) P r o p e l l e r Governor Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 202 72-10-03
Page 205
Aug 16/89
ignal
lslied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
25 35 40
10 20
il l ~bv
N
\ o'
50J'~
/(~ E-44G-866
45
R 5. NUT 35. PIN

R 10. WASHER 40. BODY
R 15. PROPELLERGOVERNORASSY 45. ELBOW
R 20. GASKET 50. PACKING
R 25. ORIFICE SETSCRBJ
R (Code FB)
UP136688
R Propeller Governor Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

R Figure 203 72-10-03
Page 206
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Inspection/Check
A. Propeller Governor Assembly (See Figures 201, 202 and 203)
(1) Inspect for security, evidence of o i l leakage and other damage.

Check propeller governor assembly ann for freeaom of movement.
Move propeller governor assembly ann against high speed stop and
check that am returns against low speed stop without assistance
when released. Check high and low speed stops for security.
(2) (Code FB) No repair available o11 ann or lever. I f damaged replace
propeller governor assembly.
(3) (Codes AA-FA, GA) Damaged ann or lever assemblies may be repaired
in accordance with Approved Repairs.
(4) Damaged magnetic pickup may be replaced in accordance with Approved

Repai rs.
(5) Inspect orifice setscrew and check valve assembly (pin and body)
for contamination.
(6) Refer to Approved Repairs for replacement of propeller governor
shaft packing.
3. CleaninB/Paintin 9
A. Clean Parts
(i) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer to 72-00-00,
Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1 or 2.
(2) Clean outside surface of propeller governor. Refer to 72-00-00,
72-10-03
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal MAINTENANCE NANUAL

A E R 0 S PA C E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
4. A~o_ved Rep.airs
i~OTE: Table 203 provides a l i s t of all equipment and materials

Table 203. Equipmentand haterials
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used f o r l i s t e d items with an asterisk.
*Any approved engine oil Commercial ly avail able

*Lubricant Monsanto Company, 800 N Lindbergh 131vd,
R Propeller governor Woodward Governor Co, 5001 I~ Second St,

R shaft packing Rockford, IL 61101
R (Part No. 1355-262)
R *Solvent (Federal Specification Commercially available

R P-D-680, Type I)
R Vol tme ter C~:imercial l y available
A. (Codes AA-FA, GA) Repair or Replace Daraagecl Arm or Lever Assembly (See
Figure 204)
NOTE: Note position of arm or lever assembly p r i o r to

removal.
(1) (Codes AA-CC, GA) Remove screws, washers and damaged lever and arm
assembly.
(2) (Codes DA-FA) Remove screw and serrateo am assembly.
(3) Replace damaged insert in arms or lever asselably in accordance with
70-O0-OU, Standard Practices.
(4) (Codes AA-CC, GA) I n s t a l l anTi and lever assembly on yovernor in

position noted during removal.
(5) (Codes DA-FA) I n s t a l l serrated am assembly in position noted dur-

ing removal.
(6) Reinaex propeller governor ~mn~l gearshaft. (See Figure 205.)

UP136688
72-10-03
Page 208
Aug 4/94
lied
• 65.. ~~-~
90
./,,85
E-44G-623
5. SCREW 55. SCREW

10. IDENTIFICATION PLATE 65. INSERT
15. PIN 70. OVERSPEEDGOVERNOR
20. NUT ADJUSTMENT ARM
25. WASHER 75. SCREW
30. SCREW 85. INSERT
40. INSERT 90. SERRATEDARM
45. INSERT 100. PROPELLERGOVERNOR
50. GOVERNOROVERRIDE LEVER
UP136688
R (Codes AA-FA, GA) Propeller Governor Assembly

Figure 204 72-10-03
Page 209
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (•lslied
ignal
IL I{ 0.045 TO CLEARANCEAT
0.065 IN. 100%SPEED SETTING
.5.888 IN. NOMINAL (REF)
HEIGHT AT 100% SPEED
F-44A-2724
UP136688
Propeller Governor Shaft Indexing (Typical )

Figure 205 72-10-03
Page 210
Aug 16/89
lied
)0 15 C~'~o..20
~ ,._-....- I.. ---" ",,",'K-~t i i
~'~-~ I/ !,>,,", '\,"'-/' {i
',,', / t t': I--~'*'"

..... .J E-44G-161
1 SCREW 20. LOCKNUT

10. WASHER 25. MAGNETICPICKUP
15. CLAMP 30. PACKING
R (Codes AA-FA, GA)

UP136688
Propeller Governor Magnetic Pickup Installation

Figure 206 72-10-03
Page 211
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. A. (4) (a) Turn propeller governor worm gearshaft to 100 percent speed
height of 5.888 inches, measured from governor mounting flange
to end of propeller governor worm gearshaft.
(b) Ensure clearance between propel l e r governor and arm is 0.045

to 0.065 inch at i00 percent p o s i t i o n .
B. Remove Magnetic Pickup (Figures 206 and 207)
(1) Remove screw, washer, and clamp.
(2) Loosen locknut on pickup. Remove pickup with packing and locknut.
(3) Remove packing and locknut from pickup.
C. I n s t a l l ~.lagnetic Pickup (Figures 206 and 207)
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packing with approved engine o i l

or l u b r i c a n t (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to
installation.
(1) I n s t a l l locknut and new packing on new pickup.
(2) I n s t a l l assembled pickup in propeller governor asserably.
(3) Turn magnetic pickup in u n t i l i t contacts flyweight head.
(4) Loosen pickup 1/2 turn and tighten locknut to a torque value of 22
to 25 inch-pounds.
R NOTE: A voltmeter can be used in place of an o s c i l -

R loscope to check propeller governor voltage. I f
R voltmeter indicates (volts) peak to peak no cor-
R rection of reading is required. I f voltmeter in-
R dicated (volts) RMS, the voltmeter reading must be
R m u l t i p l i e d by 2.82885 to obtain corrected peak to
R peak reading.
R (5) Operate engine at 100% with no load and with voltmeter check
voltage. Voltage shall be 4.5 +0.5 volts peak to peak.
CAUTION: DO NOT POSITION MAGNETIC PICKUP CLOSER THAN

ONE-EIGHTH TURN FROM FLYWEIGHT HEAD.
(6) I f 4 volts minimum can not be met, loosen locknut and turn pickup
in (clockwise) to increase voltage.
(7) After each adjustment tighten locknut to a torque value of 22 to 25

inch-pounds.
(s) I n s t a l l clamp, washer, and screw. Tighten screw to a torque value
UP136688
72-10-03
Page 212
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
G OVERN OR
~'\ ~'~ 30
E-44G-154
5. SCREW 25. MAGNETIC PICKUP

10. WASHER 30. PACKING
15. CLAMP 35. LOCKNUT
(Code FB)
Propeller Governor Assembly
Magnetic Pickup I n s t a l l a t i o n
Figure 207 72-10-03
UP136688
R Page 213
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 4. D. Replace Propeller Governor Shaft Packing
R (1) Remove propeller governor return spring, i f required.
(2) Loosen arm on shaft and c a r e f u l l y slide am approximately halfway

o f f shaft. Do not remove arm at t h i s time.
(3) Place a reference mark on the shaft and propeller governor housing
at the s p l i t l i n e of arm to ensure proper positioning of an~l when
reinstalled.
(4) Remove propeller governor arm fran shaft.
R (5) Rotate shaft ccw u n t i l packing is exposed. Remove packing using a

R dental pick or equivalent tool.
R (6) Clean the propeller governor spline shaft packing bore with solvent
R (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I ) . Use low pressure a i r to
R dry part.
R NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packing with clean engine oil or

R l u b r i c a t e (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to
R installation.
R (7) I n s t a l l new packing and c a r e f u l l y rotate shaft cw to ensure proper

R instal l a t i o n .
R (8) I n s t a l l arm on shaft with reference marks aligned with s p l i t l i n e

R on ann.
R NOTE: I f propeller governor arm has a shoulder, the f o l -

R lowing step is not required.
(9) Adjust arm to allow a 0.050 inch gap between housing and arm, when
arm is at high speed stop.
(10) Install propeller governor return spring i f required.
NOTE: I f speed setting is not w i t h i n 1.5% of original

speed setting, speeder spring may not be properly
seated. Propeller governor must be sent to an
authorized f a c i l i t y to ensure proper seating of
speeder spring.
(11) Operate engine to ensure propeller governor setting is in com-

pliance with engine functional requirements.
UP136688
72-10-03
Page 214
Aug 4/94
/lied
NEGATIVE TORQUE SENSOR PRESSURE REGULATOR -MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

. Removal/Instal lation

Any approved engine o i l Commercially available

A. Remove Negative Torque Sensor Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove screws, washers, cover, valve, and gasket. Remove and
discard packings. Remove (using an 8/32 UNF threaded bolt) res-
t r i c t o r body, packings, screen, and r e s t r i c t o r as an assembly.
Remove and discard packings.
NOTE: Do not remove r e s t r i c t o r from r e s t r i c t o r body un-

less damage is indicated by inspection.
(2) Screw an 8/32 UNF threaded bolt (two inches or longer) into screen.
Pull screen from r e s t r i c t o r body (60). Remove bolt from screen.
UP136688
72-10-04
Page 201
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
• - I
\L
\
~ ',',L \ L \
\ -
,,. \,, \
\
l
\
\
\ "-'-.-.";i i" ,,
-. : :':~.."'"
60 \
35
\
20
',, \\
15
55
10 50
40
5
3@
E-44A-5672
5. SCREW 25. PACKING 50. SCREEN

10. WASHER 30. PACKING 55. RESTRICTOR
15. COVER 35. GASKET 60. RESTRICTORBODY
20. REGULATINGVALVE 40. PACKING
UP136688
Negative Torque Pressure Regulator Installation

Figure 201 72-10-04
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B. Install Negative Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, for recom-

mended general torque values. Add frictional drag
recommended values.
L i g h t l y coat new packings with clean engine oil or

lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to
installation.
Install restrictor so arrow on body of restrictor

points toward nose of engine after installation.
(1) Install oil f i l t e r screen and new packings on restrictor assembly.

Screw an 8/32 UNF threaded bolt (two inches or longer) into screen
and restrictor assembly and push into bore and seat. Removebolt.
(2) I n s t a l l new packings in valve assembly. Position gasket and i n -

s t a l l valve assembly in bore. I n s t a l l cover and secure with screws
and washers. Tighten screws to a torque value of 15 inch-pounds.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Negative Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect negative torque pressure regulator for leaks and other
damage.
3. Cleanin~/Paintin~
(1) Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, f o r general cleaning i n s t r u c -

tions and description of cleaning methods specified in Table 202.
UP136688
72-10-04
Page 203
Dec 14/87
I ~ MAINTENANCEr.IANUAL
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Figure Item Cleanin 9 Methods

No. No. Nomencl atu re 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

201 15 Cover X X
20 Regulating Valve
50 Screen
55 Restrictor X X
60 Body X X
UP136688
72-10-04
Page 204
Dec 14/87
lied
POSITIVE TORQUE PRESSUREREGULATOR/FILTER - MAINTENANCEPRACTICES
required for Removal/Installation.

R A. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0257/0441) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Remove Posi-
tive Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
(I) Remove bolts and washers securing pressure regulator. Removecover

(20), valve gasket (45), and f i l t e r assembly (40).
(2) Remove packings from f l u i d pressure valve (25).
B. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0257/Pre SB 72-0441) (Codes CA-CC, GA)

Remove Positive Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove bolts and washers securing cover (50).
(2) Remove cover, gasket, and f i l t e r .
(3) Remove packing (55) from cover.
C. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) Remove Positive Torque Pressure
Filter (See Figure 202)
(1) Remove bolts and washers securing housing (25).
(2) Remove housing, gasket, and f i l t e r .
(3) Remove and discard packings (30, 35) from housing.

UP136688
72-10-05
Page 201
Aug 12/91
~ lslied
f - " ° " - o . !,o
/ : "
//.;-.. ; ;
/ ,/, /'-; , ' , , ,
.i
/
"*,. j a o#' ; i 11
/#
~""- 55
I
# to
// ,,
• '.. . . . . a J
/ t I
: "....
"..':,.
'..:; %._..,
(,.'. . •
/
"~ •
,.'. I
~°.. ,
i
40
............ --°
222.i......................... 25
45 -~
O'l z,
s
. ~ ' ~ 10
3o r 4 15
35
2O
15
5
E-44G-628
5. BOLT 35. PACKING

10. BOLT 40. FILTER
20. COVER 50. COVER
25. FLUID PRESSUREVALVE 55. PACKING
30. PACKING
(Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441) (Codes CA-CC, GA)

UP136688
Positive Torque Pressure Regulator Installation

Figure 201 72-10-05
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~:~lslied
ignal
R 1. D. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0257/0441) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Install

Positive Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean engine o i l or l u -
bricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)) p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .

(1) I n s t a l l new packings and f i l t e r assembly on f l u i d pressure valve
(25).
(2) I n s t a l l gasket on f l u i d pressure valve. I n s t a l l valve on engine
and secure with cover (20), bolts, and washers. Tighten retaining
bolts to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
R E. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0257/Pre SB 72-0441) (Codes CA-CC, GA)
I n s t a l l Positive Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean engine o i l or l u -

bricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .

torque values. Add frictional drag (run down torque)
of self-locking devices to recommended values.
(1) I n s t a l l new packing and f i l t e r oll cover (50).
(2) I n s t a l l gasket on cover. I n s t a l l cover on engine and secure with

bolts and washers. Tighten retaining bolts to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds.
F. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) I n s t a l l Positive Torque Pressure

F i l t e r (See Figure 202)
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packings with clean engine oil or
lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to
installation.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recom-

mended torque values. Add f r i c t i o n a l drag (run
down torque) of self-locking devices to recom-
mended values.
(1) I n s t a l l new packings and f i l t e r on housing.
(2) I n s t a l l gasket on housing. I n s t a l l housing on engine and

secure with bolts and washers. Tighten bolts to a torque
UP136688
72-10-05
Page 203
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO, 72-01-27)
. I nspecti on/Check
A. Inspect Positive Torque Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
(I) Inspect fluid pressure valve assembly for leaks and damage.
. C1eani ng/Pai nti ng
(i) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer to 72-00-00,

CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Methods No. 1 or 2.
(2) Clean f l u i d pressure valve and f i l t e r assembly. Refer to 72-00-00,

CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Method No. 12.
UP136688
72-10-05
Page 204
Dec 14/87
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
.. , ...-.:.-,v,\
., ." :
" ..-S" i.:
: il.
~,
".',,-..-.....-i : i
. , . .
:,',.-'-1:-~ ..-', .-, ', ', :.. " .
i: 45 / 30
• , ."
/ 40 / . 35
- "/
i
;:
15 5 E-44A-7187
5. BOLT 30. PACKING

10. BOLT 35. PACKING
15. WASHER 40. FILTER
25. HOUSING 45. GASKET
(Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441)

Positive Torque Pressure
Filter Installation
UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-05

Page 205/206
Dec 14/87
,_~!lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ ~Signal
ORIFICE HOUSING AND ORIFICE VALVE BODY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOTE: (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) This section

(72-10-06) does not apply.


A. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441) Remove O r i f i c e Valve Body (See

Figure 201)
(i) Remove bolt and washer securing orifice valve body and remove unit.
(2) Remove packings.

(3) Remove restrictor only i f damaged and replacement is required.
B. (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441) I n s t a l l O r i f i c e Valve Body (See
Figure 201)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, for recommended

Ensure that r e s t r i c t o r is i n s t a l l e d .
(1) I n s t a l l new packings on o r i f i c e valve body.
(2) Position orifice valve body on engine and secure with washer and
bolt. Tighten retaining b o l t t o a torque value of 70 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-10-06
Page 201
Aug 16/89
•I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
i..o ........ ,w .......

..-"
• "° ,, l,l~
,,~, X \ \
...... o..-'°'°°
""k .............;: ......
/i 10
35
E-44G-750
R 5. BOLT 25. BODY

R 10. WASHER 30. PACKING
R 20. RESTRICTOR 35. PACKING
(Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441)

UP136688
O r i f i c e ValveBody Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n
Figure 201 72-10-06
Page 202
Dec 14/87
,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~=~Signal
R 1. C. (Codes CA-CC, GA) Remove Orifice Housing (See Figure 202)

(i) Remove bolt and washer securing orifice valve body and remove unit.
(2) Remove packings.

(3) Remove restrictor only i f damaged and replacement is required.
D. (Codes CA-CC, GA) Install Orifice Housing (See Figure 202)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, for recommended

Ensure that r e s t r i c t o r are installed.
(I) Install new packings on o r i f i c e valve body.

(2) Position orifice housing on engine and secure with washer and bolt.
Tighten retaining bolt to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-10-06
Page 203
Aug 12/91
/lied
.o
35
20
/ .:
,t . jo o.O
3O
: .
/
', -'.~,~
' i
:. G
25
lO
E.-4.4-G-625
5. BOLT 30. HOUSING

20. RESTRICTOR 40. PACKING
25. RESTRICTOR 45. PACKING
UP136688
R (Codes CA-CC, GA) Orifice Housing Assembly Installation

Figure 202 72-10-06
Page 204
Aug 12/91
/J~llied
. Inspecti on/Check
A. Inspect Orifice Housing or Orifice Valve Body (See Figure 201 or 202)
R (I) Inspect restrictor hole for proper size. Restrictor Part

R No. 114508-32 shall be 0.0235 to 0.0245 inch. Restrictor Part
No. 114355-29 shall be 0.0300 to 0.0310 inch.
(2) Inspect orifice housing or orifice valve body for damage.
(3) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.

. Cleani ng/Pai nti ng
(1) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer to 72-00-00,

Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Methods No. 1 or 2.
(2) Clean orifice housing or orificed body. Refer to 72-00-00,

UP136688
72-10-06
Page 205/206
Aug 12/91
#'~llied
, '~~Signal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND TRANSFER TUBE -
Lubricant Monsanto Co, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,

A. Remove Feathering Valve Assembly (See Figure 201)

(I) Remove attaching screws and washers. Remove feathering valve
assembly. Remove packings.
(2) Remove transfer tube. Remove packings.
B. Install Feathering Valve Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packings with clean engine o i l or

l u b r i c a n t (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r to
installation.
Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, f o r recom-
(run down) torque of self-locking devices to
recommended values.
(1) Install new packings on transfer tube and i n s t a l l in engine.

(2) I n s t a l l new packings on feathering valve assembly.
Install
feathering value assembly on engine and secure with bolts and
washers. Tighten bolts (5) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds,
loosen and retighten to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-10-07
R Page 201
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
\ ,,"
"\
'..)
1
'~!~ : , ..
i
',..,.---"" ~ - - - ~ . . .
35
E-44A-6232
~""~25
5. BOLT 25. PACKING

10. WASHER 30. OIL TRANSFER TUBE
15. FEATHERING VALVE ASSY 35. PACKING
20. PACKING
UP136688
Feathering Valve Assembly and Oil Transfer Tube I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 201 72-10-07
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Inspecti on/Check
A. Inspect Feathering Valve Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect feathering valve body for damage. Ensure feathering valve
assembly piston does not bind or stick.
(2) Inspect feathering valve body for leaks. Refer to Approved

Repai rs.

3. Cleaning/Paintin 9

(I) Clean all standard metallic hardware in accordance with 72-00-00,
CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Method No. 1 or 2.
(2) Clean feathering valve assembly in accordance with 72-00-00,
4. Approved Repairs
A. Replace Feathering Valve Packing
(I) Remove partially assembled feathering valve. (See Figure 202.)
(2) Replace packing (5).
(3) Install partially assembled feathering valve and tighten to a

UP136688
72-10-07
Page 203
Dec 14/87
I ~ MAT
IPE3315
-NTENAE
NCR
(M
EA
PO
NR
UTALNo72-01-27)
"
\
"\
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
FEATHERING VALVE
4 . .
E-44A-6622
5. PACKING
Feathering Valve
UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-07

Page204
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEALS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

provides a l i s t of materials and compounds required for
Item Source/
1. Seal Pilot (Pre SB 72-0416) Used to 284173-1-1

guide and protect (starter/ (Replaced by
generator drive shaft) seal 296384-1)
during installation.
. Seal Pil ot Used to guide and protect 284173-2-1
(tachometer drive shaft) seal (Replaced by
during installation. 296384-2)
. Seal Pilot Used to guide and protect 284173-3-1
(accessory shaft) seal during (Replaced by
installation. 296384-3)
. Seal Pilot Used to guide and protect 284173-4-1
(oil pressure pump) seal (Replaced by
during installation. 296384-4)
. Seal Pressing Driver (Pre SB 72-0416) Used to 284174-1-1
press (starter-generator drive (Replaced by
R shaft) seal in carrier. 296385-2)
. Seal Pressing Driver Used to press (accessory shaft) 284174-3-1
R seal in carrier. Also used to (Replaced by
R remove (Pre SB 72-0416) 296385-1)
R starter-generator drive shaft
R seal from carrier.
. Seal Puller Used to remove oil pressure 285133-1-1

pump seal during disassembly. (Replaced by
285133-2-1)
. Seal Puller Used to remove oil pressure 285133-2-1
pump seal during disassembly. (Replaced by
285133-1-1)
UP136688
72-10-08
Page 201
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Sourc e/
. Seal Installer Used to install oil pump shaft 285134-2-I

seal into pump body with pump (Replaced by
installed in gearcase. 296387-1)
10. Seal Installer Used to install seal into 285155-1-1
tachometer drive gearshaft (Replaced by
port. 296391-I)
11. Seal Puller Used to remove seal from 285156-1-1
tachometer drive gearshaft
port.
12. Seal Pilot (Pre SB 72-0416) Used to 296384-1

guide and protect (starter/ (Replaces
generator drive shaft) seal 284173-1-1)
during installation of seal
carrier to engine.
13. Seal Pilot Used with 296391-1 seal 296384-2

installer, to install (Replaces
(tachometer drive shaft) 284173-2-1)
seal onto accessory shaft.
14. Seal Pilot Used to guide and protect 296384-3
(accessory shaft) seal during (Replaces
installation. 284173-3-1)
15. Seal Pilot Used to guide and protect 296384-4

(oil pressure pump) seal (Replaces
during installation. 284173-4-I)
16. Seal Pilot (Post SB 72-0416) Used to 296384-8

guide and protect (starter/
generator drive shaft) seal
during installation of seal
carrier to engine.
17. Seal Pressing Used to install (accessory 296385-1

R Driver shaft) seal into seal (Replaces
R carrier. Also used to 284174-3-1)
R remove starter-generator
R drive shaft seal from carrier.
UP136688
72-10-08
Page 202
Aug 12/91
/lied
Item SOUrc e/
18. Seal Pressing (Pre SB 72-0416) Used to 296385-2

Driver install (starter-generator) (Replaces
seal into seal carrier. 284174-I-1)
19. Seal Installer Used to install seal into 296387-1

oil pressure pump. (Replaces
285134-2-1)
20. Seal Installer Used to install seal 296391-1

into tachometer drive (Replaces
gearshaft port. 285155-1-1)
21. Seal Installer/ (Post SB 72-0416) Used to 831041-1

Remover install or remove (starter/
generator drive shaft) seal.
Grease (Aeroshell No. 7) Shell Oil Co, 1 Shell Plaza, P.O. Box
2463, Houston, TX 77001
Jointing compound Marston Bentley Inc, Rochester, Ml

(Hylomar PL32H) 48063 (Distributed by Aviall, 215 S
28th St, Phoenix, AZ 85034)
Lubricant The Monsanto Co, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,

Lubricating compound Lockrey Co, Inc, Lubricants Div, 2517

(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) Finlaw Ave, Pennsauken, NJ 08109
Sealant Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,
(Loctite No. 567) Newington, CT 06111
UP136688
72-10-08
Page 203
Aug 12/91
Allied-SignalAerospaceCompany /~llied
I° A. Remove Drive Shaft Oil Seals (See Figure 201)

(1) Removebolts, washers, seal carrier with accessory shaft seal, and
packing.
(2) Removebolts, washers, seal carrier with starter-generator drive
shaft seal and packing.
NOTE: Record thickness of thrust washers removed as an
aid at installation.
(3) Removespring washer and thrust washer. Record thickness of thrust
washers.
R (4) (Pre SB 72-0416 and 72-0616) Remove starter-generator shaft seal

from carrier using 284174-3-1 or 296385-1 seal driver.
R (5) (Post SB 72-0416 and 72-0616) Removestarter-generator shaft seal

from carrier using 831041-1 installer/remover.
(6) Removetachometer drive shaft seal using 285156-1-1 puller.
(7) Removeoil pressure pump shaft seal (80) using 285133-2-1 puller.
B. Install Drive Shaft Oil Seals (See Figure 201)

NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean engine oil or
lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
installation.
Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV)
to threads of bolts, studs, screws and nuts unless
otherwise specified.
Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, for recom-
(run down) torque of self-locking devices to
recommended val ues.
(1) Install accessory shaft seal as follows.
(a) Press new accessory shaft seal into carrier using 296385-1
driver.
(b) Install new packing on carrier.
(c) Apply a light coat of grease (Aeroshell No. 7) on lip of seal.

Install seal using 296384-3 pilot. (See Figure 202.)
(d) Coat bolt threads with sealant (Loctite No. 567) and secure
carrier. Tighten bolts (5) to a torque value of 40 inch-
pounds.
UP136688
72-10-08
Page 204
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. ~"--0/
i ..... . ".. ;~... "....~ .... ,"J....

4.'>t.'~2 '" ".: "';-;:'. ":>"~ ~":"-
: ':',:'-~:.. ". )"'-.7; : , ~ " . . ~:-'; ":::-.
,•...:.!'..;:._.'.:"..:.
...~.'y'~. 1,.
, , ."" ":'e.:~
•....... ... ~ " "... " " " ...." ,.
.~'~.. -,...
• ....!......,.~j j.~.~....'.. .. -. ...
)~1~i,, ,. +~:~..... ..
#f ;t~ .- ._~>. ~.. .;,..,~,,, % ~.... ...
. .
bU ~
--" s~.~'+.."~3z~-.: :',,':..","::...,.
..y: ~ ,r-:_&'%:.,-'.',;-.~ . ,'~.:.: .:.,'.'.,
55 \ ~ ~-'-1 , ~ . . ' ~ ' ; r _ " A : . .
•~.-" 7 ".';
~ : ,' .~.'#.:.2;';'.". :
"~'.";.".,"."" ".;'" ,;'.'.; '
.~, -'-;;. ..... -;.. , ~ ,: ~.~.-'~ ~ • .

30 \
"~
~,,'~,~>',i,. ) ~
•
,
I . ~y. ",'. • "." " .-'~',, ".
. ".i..:,;,_;.~.~.,.:....: :: ~-~,~.,.•
\ "~h~T ~ - r~i ~ '',l-~:<~"~-...~k~.
": " " ' . . . . . "
80 ' ; ......
--.. :~>: > #~';,,
"','h :, -.- , ,
I /J. "- ,.,....',',; ,;
X, \ - 25 ~ X I ~ i ~: :t:>..:,
5 lu 70 ,: z ..... -:t _":j ......... E-44A-6251
5. BOLT 45. SEAL

I0. WASHER (STARTER/GENERATOR DRIVE SHAFT)
15. SEAL CARRIER 50, PACKING
20. SEAL (ACCESSORY SHAFT) 55. SPRING WASHER
25. PACKING 60, THRUST WASHER
30. BOLT 70. SEAL
35. ~IASHER (TACHOMETER-GENERATOR DRIVE SHAFT)
40. SEAL CARRIER 75. RETAINING RING
80, SEAL (OIL PRESSURE PUMP)
Drive Shaft Oil Seals I n s t a l l a t i o n

UP136688
Figure 201 72-10-08

Page 205
Dec 14/87
Allied~SignalAerospaceCompany
lied
i. B. (2) Install starter-generator shaft seal as follows.
(a) (Pre SB 72-0416 and 72-0616) I n s t a l l new seal into c a r r i e r

using 284174-1-1 or 296385-2 d r i v e r .
(b) (Post SB 72-0416 and 72-0616) I n s t a l l new seal into c a r r i e r

using 831041-1 seal installer/remover.
(c) Measure Dimension A and Dimension B. (See Figure 203.)
NOTE: Use same thickness of thrust washers noted at

disassembly i f old c a r r i e r is r e i n s t a l l e d .
(d) Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A and subtract 0.060 inch

from r e s u l t to obtain required thickness of t h r u s t washers
required to maintain 0.050 to 0.070 inch gap f o r spring
washer.
(e) I n s t a l l thrust washers determined in step (d). I n s t a l l spring
washer.
(f) I n s t a l l new packing on c a r r i e r .
NOTE: Ensure l i p of seal and mating surface of shaft is

coated with approved engine o i l .
(g) Coat l i p of seal and mating surface of shaft with approved en-
gine o i l .
R (h) (Pre SB 72-0416 and 72-0616) I n s t a l l assembled seal and car-

r i e r on starter-generator drive shaft using 296384-1 seal
pilot.
R (i) (Post SB 72-0416 and 72-0616) I n s t a l l assembled seal and car-
r i e r on starter-generator drive shaft using 296384-8 seal
pilot.
(J) Coat b o l t threads with sealant (Loctite No. 567) and secure
c a r r i e r with washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (30) to a
(3) I n s t a l l tachometer drive shaft seal as follows.

(a) Install retaining ring.
NOTE: Seal l i p points forward.
(b) I n s t a l l new seal using 296384-2 p i l o t and 296391-1 p u l l e r .

UP136688
72-10-08
Page 206
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
INSTALL CARRIER
TO THIS OPENING.
i VIEW A
APPLY A LIGHT COAT OF

GREASE TO LIP OF SEAL
3
I LJ
F-44G-441
Assembly of Accessory Shaft Seal

UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-08

Page 207
Dec 14/87
/J~llied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ~'~'~'Signal
J
INST
TO 1 D I M . A--" i ~ =
SAM PLE : I
DIMENSION A = 0.262
DIMENSION B = 0.173
0.089
IN.
IN.
IN.
°M~Z WASHER
SCREW
(MINUS) 0.060 IN.
0.029 IN.
/t-'!.! ',
GEAR SHAFT"" I I
R WASHER . ' L---.[ ~!~.~-- PACKING
r~\\ ~ s~c~,o.,-,
COAT LIP OF SEAL

WITH ENGINE OIL
VIEWB F-4-4G -798

UP136688
Installation of Starter Shaft Seal (Typical)

Figure 203 72-10-08
Page 208
Aug 16/89
--7~llied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL '~Signal
NOTE: I f o i l pump is i n s t a l l e d , i n s t a l l o i l pump shaft
seal in accordance with step (4).
1. B. (4) I n s t a l l o i l pressure pump seal as follows. (See figure 201.)
(a) Coat outer surface of seal (80) and mating surface of oil
pressure pump with j o i n t i n g compound (Hylomar PL32H).
R NOTE: Ensure l i p of seal and mating surface of

R shaft is coated with grease (Aeroshell No.
R 7),
(b) Coat l i p of seal (80) and mating surface of shaft with grease
(Aeroshell No. 7).
(c) I n s t a l l new o i l pressure pump seal using 285134-2-1 or
296387-1 i n s t a l l e r and 296384-4 p i l o t .
. Ins pecti on/Check
A. Inspect Shaft Oil Seals (See Figure 201)
(I) Inspect accessory shaft seal c a r r i e r for severe scoring, grooving,

and damage in seal bore.
(2) Inspect s t a r t e r shaft seal c a r r i e r for severe scoring, grooving,
and damage in seal bore.
(3) Inspect f o r o i l leakage with parts i n s t a l l e d . Refer to 72-00-00,
TROUBLE SHOOTING, Table 101 for leakage l i m i t s .
. Cleani n.g/Painting

(I) Clean a l l standard m e t a l l i c hardware. Refer to 72-00-00,
CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Methods No. 1 or 2.
(2) Clean c a r r i e r . Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning

Methods No. 5 or 6.
(3) Clean spring washer. Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, Clean-
ing Methods No. 1 or 2.
(4) Clean retaining ring. Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, Clean-

ing Methods No. 1 or 2.
UP136688
72-10-08
Page 209/210
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

equipment required f o r Removal/Installation. Table 202
provides a l i s t of materials and compounds required f o r
Removal/Instal l a t i o n .
Item Sou rce/

I. Shaft Holder Used to hold propeller shaft 284172-1-1

from turning when loosening
retaining nut and to support
shaft when removing bearing.
. Seal Pressing Driver Used to press seal in c a r r i e r . 284174-2-1

(Replaced by
293689-1)
. Bearing Driver Used to press bearing on pro- 284191-1-1

p e l l e r shaft.
. Bearing Retainer Used to bolt on rear of acces- 284197-1-1

sory drive housing to retain
propeller shaft r o l l e r bearings
when propeller shaft is removed.
. Shaft I n s t a l l i n g Sleeve Used to p i l o t propeller shaft 284308-1-1

through r o l l e r bearing and to
protect ball bearing inner race.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to i n s t a l l bearing race 284477-1-1

Driver on propeller shaft.
. Bearing Pressing Plate Used to remove bearing races 284483-1-1

from propeller shaft.
. Torque Wrench Adapter Used to loosen propeller shaft 284677-1-1

locknut on propeller shaft.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 201
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ l s l
ignal
i e d
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)

I tem Source/
. Bearing Removing Holder Used to remove propeller shaft 285196-1-1

from bearing.
10. Hub Gear Puller Used to remove ring gear and 285199-1-1
internal planetary gear.
11. Seal Removal Driver Used to press seal assembly 285968-1-I

and Holder from propeller shaft seal
retainer.
12. Nose Cone Bolt Holder Used to hold propeller shaft 285969-1-1
seal retainer bolts from turn-
ing in nose cone when tighten-
ing or loosening retaining
nuts.
13. Shaft and Gear Gage Used as a point of measurement 285972-1-1

to obtain bottomed out dimen-
sion during assembly of output
gearbox housing.
14. Gage Used to provide reference 285973-1-1

measurements of propeller shaft
and components to ensure proper
installation.
R 15. Mechanical Sleeve Used to remove sleeve from 287428-1-1
R Pul I er nose cone assembly during
R maintenance of turbo-prop
R engine.
16. Torque Wrench Adapter Used to loosen bearing retain- 291898-1

ing nut on end of propeller
shaft.
17. Seal Holder and Driver Used to install seal assembly 293689-1
into propeller shaft seal (Replaces
retainer. 284174-2-1)
18. Propeller Shaft Pre- Check preload of propeller 294913-1

Load Gage shaft.
19. Spanner Wrench Used to turn seal retainer in 296263-1

nose cone housing so retainer
can be removed through holes.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL •!Slied
ignal
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)

Grea se Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,

(DC-III silicone compound) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
Grease (MIL-G-7421) Commercially available


Marking materials
Silver pencil (Preferred Boise Cascade Office Products Div,

(Berol Verithin No. 753, 302 S 23rd Ave, Phoenix, AZ 85009
Silver)
Violet master marker Pannier Corp, 207 Sandusky St,
(Grade 127-1/2) Pittsburgh, PA 15212
1,1,1-Tri chl o roethane Commercially available
(MI L-T-81533)
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 203
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
~65
E-44A-4102
Nose Cone and Annular Ball Bearing I n s t a l l a t i o n

UP136688
Figure 201 72-10-09

Page 204
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE MINIMIZED.

REFER TO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
NOTE: To remove nose cone to f a c i l i t a t e other maintenance,

accomplish paragraph A. only. Refer to 72-10-10, Main-
tenance Practices, for f u r t h e r engine disassembly.
1. a. Remove Nose Cone Assembly and Annular Ball Bearing (See Figure 201)
CAUTION: IF ENGINE IS IN HORIZONTAL POSITION DURING REMOVAL

OF OUTPUT GEARBOXHOUSING ASSEMBLY, USE CARE TO PRE-
VENT MATCHED PLANET GEAR AND BEARING SET ASSEMBLY
FROM DROPPING OUT OF ENGINE.
(1) Carefully remove beta tube from propeller shaft. Refer to

(2) Remove propeller pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Maintenance

Practices.
~ KEY TO FIGURE 201

5. RING 75. WASHER
10. SHIM 80. WASHER
40. SPRING RETAINER 85. GASKET
45. WASHERSET 90. NUT
50. BEARINGRETAINER 95. INSERT
55. BEARING (OUTER RACE) I00. BEARING (INNER RACE)
60. BOLT 105. SPACER
65. WASHER 110. BEARING (INNER RACE)
70. NUT 115. NOSE CONE ASSY
UP136688
72-10-09
R Page 205
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. A. (3) Remove ring, shims, spring retainer, washer set, bearing retainer,
and bearing outer race.
(4) Remove nuts, washers, and bolt securing nose cone assembly. Care-
f u l l y separate nose cone assembly from intermediate gearbox housing
(diaphragm). Removegasket.
(5) Secure 284197-1-1 retainer at rear of accessory drive housing to

retain rollers in bearing outer race.
(6) I n s t a l l 284172-I-1 holder on forward end of propeller shaft to keep

shaft from rotating.
(7) Remove nut from propeller shaft using 291898-1 adapter, then remove
insert.
CAUTION: BEARING INNER AND OUTER RACES ARE MATCHED

PARTS. WHEN EITHER RACE MUST BE REPLACED,
REPLACE COMPLETE BEARING AS AN ASSEMBLY.
(8) Install 284483-1-I plate around propeller shaft behind bearing in-
ner race. Press assembled output housing and propeller shaft out
of spacer and bearing inner race.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 206
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-10-09
Page 207
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
,,.~. /
-..t
I
I
.. ,, .....~ '4~-.".. "::"'-~:;) ",

, {,~ji o •, -,.
.',::.....':'..~
~.. ':., ";.~> %;..,:;>,, '.
-/.:,::..:.. '; ,',j ,,,,,, ,
9~. : '~. '. ; ,~ .~,,' , , :.-.::.:-:'~
"¢# ,.~
~/....~ /
~ ,.......:..._..
.-- -'= :'-:',
o...;
........ ~:7,::"" E-44A-6222
•.. -...o.
So RING 35. BOLT

10. SLEEVE 40. WASHER
15. LOCK NUT 50. STRAINER ELEMENT
20. RETAINER 55. OIL JET
25. COUPLING 60. PACKING
30. COUPLING
UP136688
Shaft Coupling and Oil J e t I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 202 72-10-09
Page 208
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1. B. Disassemble Nose Cone Assembly (See Figures 202 and 203)
(1) Disassemble shaft couplings and oil j e t as follows. (See figure

202.)
(a) Remove ring (5) and sleeve. Remove lock nut using 284677-1-1
adapter and remove retainer.
(b) Remove coupling and propeller shaft coupling from propeller
shaft using 287428-1-1 sleeve puller.
(c) Remove bolt and washer. Remove oil j e t assembly from nose
cone assembly.
(d) Remove propeller shaft from 284172-1-1 holder.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 209
Dec 14/87
• i MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
75
~ , f 80
..es
I
I
15
55
E-44G-626
5. NUT 65. PLATE

I0. BOLT 7O. PLATE
15. PACKING 75. SCREW
25. PIN 8O. WASHER
30. SHAFT 85. IDENTIFICATIONPLATE
35. BEARING 95. PLUG
45. SEALROTOR 100. INSERT
50. AIR/OIL SEAL 105. INSERT
55. RETAINER 110. NOSECONEHOUSING
60. PACKING
UP136688
Nose Cone Housing and Propeller Shaft Installation

Figure 203 72-10-09
Page 210
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (2) Remove propeller shaft as follows. (See figure 203.)
Ca) Place assembled nose cone housing assembly on 285969-1-1

holder. Remove nuts. Remove assembled nose cone housing from
285969-1-1 holder and remove bolts and packings securing
bearing.
(b) Use 296263-1 spanner wrench, turn retainer (55) u n t i l holes in

retainer are misaligned with holes in nose cone housing.
(c) Using a d r i f t tool from inside nose cone housing, tap retainer
u n t i l loose.
CAUTION: PROTECTEND OF PROPELLER SHAFT WHEN PER-

FO~IING THE FOLLOWING STEP.
NOTE: Make certain that top raised side of ring

(part of 285196-1-1 holder) rests against
seal r o t o r .
(d) Place forward end of shaft in cylinder portion of 285196-1-1

holder and position s p l i t ring portion of 285196-1-1 holder
between a i r / o i l seal and seal rotor portions of a i r / o i l seal
assembly.
NOTE: Do not remove pin from shaft unless damage is

indicated by inspection.
Do not remove inserts or plug from nose cone

housing unless damage is indicated by
inspection.
(e) Press propeller shaft from nose cone housing using arbor
press. Remove packings, retainer and seal rotor from
propeller shaft. Remove bearing from nose cone housing.
(f) Press a i r / o i l out of retainer using 285968-1-1 driver and

holder.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 211
Dec 14/87
~=~lslied
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

REFER TO 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.

Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to

threads of bolts, studs, screws, and nuts unless other-
wise specified.
I. C. Assemble Nose Cone Assembly
(1) Install a i r / o i l seal assembly and bearing into nose cone housing as
follows. (See Figures 203, 204 and 205.)
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE

R MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAREITHER SYN-
R THETIC RUBBER GLOVESOR NYLONMESHGLOVESWITH
R POLYETHYLENE PALMSAND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE
R OF THE ABOVEARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVES
R SHALL BE WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE
R INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(a) Assemble a i r / o i l seal onto retainer as follows. (See Figures

203 and 204.)
1 Heat retainer in oven at 149°C (300°F) for approximately 15

minutes. While hot, place seal retainer on arbor press.
R 2 Ensure a i r / o i l seal and rotor are dry; do not lubricate

R prior to installation. Position a i r / o i l seal onto retainer
with l i p up. Press a i r / o i l seal into retainer using
293689-1 holder and driver.
3 Install new packing on outside diameter of retainer. Posi-

tion seal rotor with f l a t surface against l i p of a i r / o i l
seal in preparation for installation into nose cone
housing.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 212
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. C. (1) (b) I n s t a l l retainer and a i r / o i l seal assembly i n t o nose cone

housing as follows. (See f i g u r e 205.)
I Heat output gearbox housing in oven at 86C (187F) f o r ap-

proximately ten minutes.
2 Place new packings on bolts and i n s t a l l bolts in seal

r e t a i n e r . Place assembled bolts and r e t a i n e r on 285969-1-1
holder.
3 Remove nose cone housing from oven and place on r e t a i n e r ,

press f i r m l y in place u n t i l r e t a i n e r bottoms in nose cone
housing.
DRIVER~ i
~~
AIR/OILSEAL IE '
r
~"'~"PACKING
J" ~ " " ~
1..,~.._.__._~
RETAINER
HOLDER
F-44G-453
Assembly of A i r / O i l Seal and Retainer

UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-09

Page 213
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
~
TWO SMALLMASTERMARKERINDEXMARKSFOR
CIRCLETYPEMFG MACHINEMARKINGSONLY.
1.,-'~ HOUSlNG
BEARIN ~ , , , , , ~ / ' ' " NUT

SURFACE
MARKED / M F G
"THRUST" MACHININGMARK
-,..?
RETA'NE~'--.~-r'--1 ~ r-'--
-'~~ PACKING
P C2 ;ju
VIEW B
(~'x'x- MFG MACHININGMARK
VIEWA F-44A-20259R1
UP136688
Installation of Propeller Shaft Seal Assembly and Bearings

Figure 205 72-10-09
Page 214
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. C. (I) (c) I n s t a l l bearing assembly into nose cone housing as follows.

(See figure 205.)
CAUTION: IF BEARING MANUFACTURER'S MARKINGS APPEAR

ON OUTER FLAT SIDE OF INNER RACE HALVES,
ALIGN MANUFACTURER'SMARKS AND MAKE TWO
SMALL INDEX MARKS, USING SILVER PENCIL
(BEROL VERITHIN NO. 753), ON INNER DI-
AMETER OF INNER RACE HALVES TO AID IN
MAINTAINING ALIGNMENT DURING INSTALLATION
OF BEARING ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: Bearing has two piece inner race. Inner race

halves are index marked for alignment by
manufacturer. Location and type of markings
may vary with d i f f e r e n t manufacturers. Aft
side of inner race is marked "THRUST".
1 While nose cone housing is hot, i n s t a l l bearing (with large

chamfer away from housing) over bolts, using caution to
prevent inner race halves from f a l l i n g out. Press bearing
into input gearbox housing until bearing bottoms in
housing. Ensure inner race surface marked "THRUST" is
toward a f t side of output gearbox housing.
CAUTION: SECURE BOLT HEADS WHILE TIGHTENING NUTS
TO PREVENT DAMAGETO OUTPUT GEARBOX
HOUSING (USE 285969-1-1 HOLDER).
2 Secure bearing with nuts. Tighten nuts to a torque value

of 100 inch-pounds.
(2) I n s t a l l oil j e t assembly onto nose cone housing as follows. (See

f i g u r e 206.)
(a) I n s t a l l new packing on oil j e t . Ensure strainer element is in

place. I n s t a l l o i l j e t assembly onto nose cone housing.
(b) Secure oil j e t assembly with bolt and washer. Tighten bolt to
a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
(c) Pump engine oil into ports as shown in Figure 206 to check
alignment of o i l j e t . Ensure oil spray pattern hits bearing
between bearing races.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 215
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO, 72-01-27)
PUMP OIL INTO PORT
~ HERE AND CHECK PROPER

ALIGNMENT OF OIL JET.
PACKING
OL,J /
OIL JET ASSY I]" ~ - ~
STRAINER ELEMENT
DETAIL A
F-44A-20261RI
CHECK WHEN INSTALLING INTO NOSE CONE

FOR ANY DAMAGE TO PACKING,
Installation of Oil Jet Assembly

UP136688
Figure 206 72-10-09

Page 216
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE

MINIMIZED. REFERTP 70-00-00, STANDARDPRAC-
TICES FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
I. C. (3) I n s t a l l propeller shaft onto nose cone housing as follows. (See

figures 203, 207, 208, and 209.)
(a) Place nose cone housing on 285972-1-1 gage (see figure 208).
Use depth micrometer and measure from Point A (top of bearing)
to Point B (top of tool) and record result as Dimension C for
l a t e r use.
BEARING
POI NT A
HOUSI POI NT B
DIM. C
1 I
1-44A-I 087
Measurement of Noe Cone Assembly

UP136688
Figure 207 72-10-09

Page 217
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
~ MICROMETER
GAGE~ L-RECORDAS DIM,F

L
PROPELLERSHAI
SAMPLE
DIMENSIONF=1.509IN,
F-44A-20262R2
Measurement of Propeller Shaft Assembly

UP136688
Figure 208 72-10-09

Page 218
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
MICROMETER
POINT G
POINT H
GAGE
- - RECORD AS D I M E N S I O N J
I
I 1-44A-1086R1
I
Measurement of Propeller Shaft Assembly

UP136688
Figure 209 72-10-09

Page 219
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
I. C. (3) (b) Install 285973-1-1 gage over propeller shaft (see figure 208).
Place on work bench in upright position and using a depth mi-
crometer, measure from Point D (top of gage) to Point E (end
of propeller shaft) and record result as Dimension F for later
use,
(c) Install and secure propeller shaft on 284172-1-1 holder.
NOTE: Apply l i g h t film of engine oil to propeller

shaft in area where bearing w i l l be placed.
I f bearing manufacturer's index markings are

located on outer f l a t sides of inner race
halves and silver pencil index marks were
made while installing bearing, remove silver
pencil index marks using 1,1,1-
Trichl oroethane (MIL-T-81533).
I f bearing manufacturer's index markings are

located on inner diameter of inner race
halves, align marks and make a corresponding
mark on outer f l a t side of upper inner race
half using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No.
753).
(d) Ensure bearing inner race halves are properly aligned. Place
nose cone housing and bearing over propeller shaft so index
mark on bearing is aligned with insert slot on propeller
shaft. Using 284191-1-1 driver and arbor press, press nose
cone housing down on propeller shaft until metal-to-metal con-
tact is made. Removeany remaining silver pencil marks using
1,1,1-Trichl oroethane (MIL-T-81533).
(e) Place 285973-1-1 gage over propeller shaft (see figure 210).
Use a depth micrometer and measure from Point G (top of gage)
to Point H (end of propeller shaft). Record result as Dimen-
sion J.
(f) To ensure propeller shaft is properly bottomed. Subtract

Dimension F from Dimension J. The remainder shall equal
Dimension C (J - F = C). I f J minus F does not equal Dimen-
sion C within +0.000/-0.002 inch, disassemble and reassemble
in accordance with paragraph 1.B.(2).
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 220
Dec 14/87
:~llied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ~~Signal
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. C. (4) I n s t a l l couplings on propeller shaft as follows. (See figure 202,

210.)
NOTE: Apply l i g h t f i l m of engine oil to propeller shaft p r i o r
to i n s t a l l i n g couplings.
(a) I n s t a l l coupling (30, figure 202) on propeller shaft. Using
284191-1-1 d r i v e r , press coupling against ball bearing.
Remove d r i v e r . I n s t a l l coupling (25) on coupling (30).
(b) I n s t a l l r e t a i n e r on propeller shaft.
NOTE: Remove excessive l u b r i c a t i n g compound a f t e r tightening

nut to prevent engine o i l contamination.
(c) Apply l u b r i c a t i n g compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to face and

threads of nut. I n s t a l l nut on shaft. Use 284677-1-1 adapter
with suitable torque wrench and tighten nut to a torque value
of 14,400 inch-pounds (1200 foot-pounds).
(d) I n s t a l l sleeve and retaining ring.
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER

TO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
(5) I n s t a l l bearing inner races and slotted round nut on a f t end of

propeller shaft as follows. (See figure 202, 210.)
(a) Press r o l l e r bearing inner race on propeller shaft using
284477-1-1 d r i v e r . I n s t a l l spacer. I n s t a l l ball bearing i n -
ner race with bearing ball pocket away from spacer. Use same
driver and press in place.
(b) Place nylon insert in propeller shaft slot and trim the small
f l a t surface of the nylon insert until i t is flush with outer
diameter of threads.
(c) Apply l u b r i c a t i n g compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to face and

threads of slotted round nut. I n s t a l l nut on propeller shaft.
Use 291898-1 adapter and suitable torque wrench and tighten
nut to a torque value of 1800 inch-pounds (150 foot-pounds).
(d) Store assembled nose cone assembly in a clean p l a s t i c bag un-
t i l i n s t a l l a t i o n on engine is required.
UP136688
72-10-09
R Page 221
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SLOTTEDROUND NUT
j AND INSERT
~ BEARING (INNER RACE)
SPACER
~ '~'''~ BEARING (INNER RACE)

PROPSHAFT NUT
\, I
RETAINER
RING
i PROPSHAFT
11 RETAINER
DETAIL B
COUPLING f " " ~ L
'*"" COUPLING
DETAIL
F-44A-4131
Installation of Propeller
Shaft Couplings and Aft Bearing Races
Figure 210 72-10-09
Page 222
UP136688
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTS I,IUST BE MINIMIZED.

REFER TO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Ensure engine is in horizontal position when i n s t a l l i n g

nose cone assembly.
1. D. I n s t a l l Nose Cone Assembly and Annular Ball Bearing (See Figures 201 and
211)
(1) Place 284308-1-1 shaft i n s t a l l i n g sleeve over a f t end of propeller

shaft. Carefully remove nuts securiny 284197-1-1 bearing retainer
in place on rear of accessory drive housing assembly. Do not
remove 284197-1-i bearing r e t a i n e r .
CAUTION: ASSEMBLY LUBRICANT MIXED WITH SYNTHETIC ENGINE

OIL CAN CAUSE OIL FOAMING AND OIL JET PLUGGING.
USE NO MORETHAN REQUIRED. ALLOWNO GREASE TO
(2) Apply a very thin coat of yrease (DC-111 s i l i c o n e compound) to

gasket and i n s t a l l diaphragm assembly.
NOTE: I n s t a l l large diameter washers at bushing loca-

tions in the following step.
When i n s t a l l i n g nose cone assembly, a l l i n s t a l l a -

t i o n nuts on diaphragm shoula be loosened then
retightened. Tighten nuts 180 degrees opposite
each other in 20 inch-pounds increments u n t i l
required torque value is reached.
Ensure nose cone assembly gasket does not extend

beyond nose cone housing flange.
(3) I n s t a l l nose cone assembly on diaphragm assembly. As propeller

shaft slides through bearing, 284197-1-1 bearing r e t a i n e r w i l l be
pushed out. Remove r e t a i n e r . I n s t a l l washers, nuts, and bolt to
secure nose cone assembly. Do not tighten nuts and b o l t at this
time. Remove 284308-1-1 shaft i n s t a l l i n g sleeve.
72-10-09
UP136688
Page 223
Aug 4/94
I ~ 1MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTN0° 72-01-27)
SHIMS
~ ~ RETANII NGRING
~ BEARING OUTERACE
~ J~.~'~l'" ~ " ~---SPRING RETAINER
BEARING
RETAINER
luTUl
I ,, ~:~~~A~o,,~ust,,
~ ~ ~llllllrl -- M A T C H E D WASHER SET
.~~
I~ PROPELLES
RHAFT
F-44A-2880R2
UP136688
Installation of Matched Washer Set

Figure 211 72-10-09
Page 224
Dec 14/87
,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~T-~Signal
CAUTION: ENSURE MATCHED WASHER SET COMPONENTSARE

PROPERLY ORIENTATED WITH EACH OTHER TO PROVIDE
A SPRING WASHER STACK FOR PROPERTENSION AND
CLEARANCES (SEE FIGURE 211).
NOTE: A f t side of ball bearing outer race is marked

"THRUST".
1. D. (4) I n s t a l l outer race of bearing (includes balls and separator) into

bearing r e t a i n e r . Ensure outer race surface marked "THRUST" is
toward rear of engine. Position assembled bearing outer race and
retainer over p r o p e l l e r shaft. Place spring washer set into spring
r e t a i n e r and i n s t a l l r e t a i n e r over p r o p e l l e r shaft.
NOTE: All installatiow~ nuts on the nose cone assembly

should be loosened. Tighten nuts 180 degrees op-
posite each other in 20 inch-pounds increments un-
t i l required torque is reached.
(5) Loosen nuts and bolt r e t a i n i n g nose cone assembly and raise nose
cone assembly s l i g h t l y . I n s t a l l 0.090 inch t r a i l shims and secure
with r e t a i n e r r i n g . Tighten nuts (70, figure 201) to a torque
value of 80 inch-pounds. Tighten b o l t (60) to a torque vlaue of
100 inch-pounds.
(6) Preload p r o p e l l e r shaft as follows.
(a) Rotate engine to horizontal position and i n s t a l l 294913-1

p r o p e l l e r shaft preload gage ( f i g u r e 212) on studs of nose
cone using speed nuts. With i n d i c a t o r arm against a f t side of
p r o p e l l e r shaft flange, zero dial i n d i c a t o r . Position force
gage against forward face of propeller shaft flange and zero
force gage.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED 100 POUNDS LOAD FORCE ON

PROPELLER SHAFT OR DAMAGE TO ENGINE MAY
RESULT.
(b) Gradually increase load on p r o p e l l e r shaft by turning knob

clockwise. Record the applied force at the point where dial
i n d i c a t o r indicates 0.001 movement. Preload on force gage
shall be 75 to 90 pounds with 0.001 reading on dial indicator.
R CAUTION: ENSURE NUTS AND BOLT SECURING NOSE CONE

R ARE LOOSENED PRIOR TO ADDING OR REMOVING
R SHIMS.
(c) I f indicated preload is not w i t h i n l i m i t s , remove applied

force and add or remove shims ( I 0 , figure 201) to obtain
proper preload (each 0.001 inch of shims increase/decreases
preload approximately four pounds).
R (d) Remove 294913-1 p r o p e l l e r shaft preload gage.

UP136688
72-10-09
Page 225
Aug 16/89
J ~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
K-44A-604
UP136688
Propeller Shaft Preload Gage

Figure 212 72-10-09
Page 226
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. D. (7) (Pre SPB 0052) I n s t a l l nose cone i d e n t i f i c a t i o n plate (adhesive

backing).
(8) (Post SPB 0052) I n s t a l l nose cone i d e n t i f i c a t i o n plate and secure
with screws. Tighten screws to 12 inch-pounds torque.
(9) I n s t a l l beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(10) I n s t a l l prop pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 227
Dec 14/87
lslied
ALIGNMENT
HOLE SURFACE B ~
ALIGNMENT
HOLE
DIM. E
AREA
ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT
~t
HOLE HOLE
SURFACEA
AREA D
DIM. F
SURFACE S
1-44G-794
DEPTH AREA PLACES
SURFACE A EXCEPT AREA D 0.060 IN. 1/2 SQ IN. MAX. 6 MAX.

SURFACE B 0.010 IN, 6 SQ IN. TOTAL AREA
SURFACE S 0.070 IN. 1/2 SQ IN. TOTAL AREA 4 MAX.
DIM. E 0.130 INCH MINIMUM RIB THICKNESS

DIM. F 0.220 INCH MINIMUM FLANGE THICKNESS
AREAS C AND D
CORROSION DEPTH (IN.) 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.02
TOTAL AREA (SQ-IN,) 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 2.0

UP136688
Inspection of Nose Cone Assembly 72-10-09

Figure 213 Page 228
Aug 16/89
~ S lied
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTS MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER
TO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Nose Cone Assembly (See Figures 201, 202, 203, and 213)
R (1) Inspect bearings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
(la) Visually inspect gear teeth and/or splines for pitting, chipping,
and excessive wear. Visual defects are acceptable as long as
defects cannot be f e l t using a 0.031 inch diameter stylus.
(2) Inspect entire nose cone assembly for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(3) Inspect nose cone assembly alignment holes for elongation. (See
Figure 213.) I f any hole is elongated 0.0005 inch or greater
return nose cone assembly to the following for evaluation and
repair.
Garrett General Aviation Services Division
Distribution Center
R 1944 East Sky Harbor Circle
Phoenix, AZ 85034
(4) Inspect nose cone for loose or damaged inserts. Replace inserts
which f a i l to meet inspection requirements in accordance with
(5) Inspect nose cone assembly for corrosion as follows. (See Figure
213.)
(a) Inspect nose cone assembly (Surface B, Figure 213) for evi-
dence of corrosion. Particular attention shall be given to
areas where dissimilar metals contact the magnesium surface.
(b) Inspect magnetic drain plug area for evidence of corroSion.

(See Figure 213.)
(c) Inspect ribs for evidence of corrosion. Following removal of

corrosion from rib area, minimum thickness of rib shall not be
less than Dimension E. (See Figure 213.)
(d) Inspect areas adjacent to studs and inserts for corrosion.
Maximum corrosion depth shall not exceed 0.020 inch.
(e) Treat corrosion which does not exceed limits of Figure 213 in
accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting.
(f) I f limits specified in Figure 213 are exceeded, return nose
cone assembly to manufacturer for evaluation.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 229
Aug 12/91
TPE331n5 (REPORTN0o 72m01~27)
ROTOR MATING
SURFACE
i
DIM. A
OPTIONAL
DESIGN J L._
/\.
IL
If" l
L
1-44G-590
SERVICEABLE LIMITS
DIM. A 0.150 INCH MINIMUM
A i r / O i l Seal Wear Limits

UP136688
Figure 214 72-10-09

Page 230
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAl NTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-0i-27)
CAUTION: hANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR) SHALL bE

MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC
RUBBER GLOVES UR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENE
PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE
AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVES SHALL BE WORN.
AIR/OIL SEAL (SEAL AND ROTOR) SHALL BE INSTALLED
DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
2. B. Inspect A i r / O i l Seal Assembly (See Figures 203, 214)
(1) Inspect seal stator as follows.
(a) Visually inspect metal housing for cracks and d i s t o r t i o n .

Cracks and d i s t o r t i o n are not allowed.
(b) Visually inspect carbon seal for cracks. Cracks are not
al I owed.
(c) Visual ly inspect carbon sealing surface f o r discontinuous con-

tact (skipping). Discontinuous contact (skipping) is not
al I owed.
(d) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface f o r p i t t i n g . Pitting

is not allowed.
(e) Press carbon seal into seal housing and check axial f l o a t .
Binding is not allowed.
(f) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface f o r wear, scratches,

and grooves. Visual defects that cannot be f e l t with a 0.015
inch diameter stylus are acceptable.
(g) Visually inspect carbon seal for coking.
Coking on carbon sealing surface is not allowed.
2 Coke buildup on carbon seal inner diameter is not allowed.
3 Coke buildup on carbon seal outer diameter is acceptable

provided i t does not extend beyond outer dia~neter (step) of
carbon seal.
(h) Measure carbon sealing surface height (see Figure 214). Mini-
mum acceptable carbon sealing surface height is 0.150 inch.
(i) Using IOX magnification, inspect sealing surface and inner and
outer diameters of sealing surface for chipping. Minor chip-
ping of inner and outer diameters is acceptable providing the
minimum sealing surface width is 70% or greater of original
surface measured r a d i a l l y .
72-10-09
UP136688
R Page 230A/230B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
/Allied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~--JSignal
2. B. (1) (j) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(2) Inspect seal rotor as follows.
R (a) Visually inspect seal rotor sealing surface for wear, scrat-
R ches and grooves. Visual defects that cannot be f e l t with a
R 0.015 inch diameter stylus are acceptable.
R (b) Visually inspect rotor sealing surface f o r chipping. Chipping

R is not allowed.
(c) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
R (3) Inspect o i l j e t assemblies as follows.
R (a) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with

R 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not allowed.
R (b) Inspect for contamination or d i s t o r t i o n that may affect o i l

R flow or spray pattern.
UP136688
72-10-09
Page 231
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. C1eani ng/Pai n t i n 9
(I) Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, f o r general cleaning instruc-

tions and f o r description of cleaning methods specified in Table
203.
NOTE: Reference shall be made to Table 203 f o r recom-


All standard m e t a l l i c hardware X X

201 5 Ring X X
40 Spring Retainer X X
45 Washer Set X X
50 Bearing Retainer X X
55 Bearing*
90 Nut X X
100 Bearing*
105 Spacer X X
II0 Bearing*
202 5 Ring X X
I0 Sleeve
15 Locknut X X
20 Retainer X X
25 Coupl i ng X
30 Coupl i ng X
50 Strainer Element X X
55 Oil Jet X X
203 30 Propel l e r Shaft X
35 Bearing*
45 Seal Rotor X
50 A i r / O i l Seal X
105 Nose Cone X X
Housing
*Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING f o r special cleaning i n s t r u c t i o n s .

UP136688
72-10-09
Page 232
Dec 14/87
l s l i e d

OIL TRANSFERTUBES OIL JET AND LUBRICATION ADAPTER -
Item Source/

I. Puller Used to remove oil transfer 285846-1-1
tube from accessory drive
housing.

(0S-124 or Santovac 5) St. Louis, MO 63166
A. Disassemble Engine to Gain Access to Oil Transfer Tubes
(1) Removebeta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.

Practices.
UP136688
72-10-10
Page 201
Aug 12/91
[~1 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
5O
. ;:c. . ....
•/• ":i..,.'L:i
Z.'s"-.'.': ...........
• ".
1;" , '. '- ;
.~'":.':'" ,'.b:'-, ;..'.. ": "':.'."..':.. ~,'~ :....
,~r. ',,,¢" 1"::" '.';~; i::';. ';":. "-, ':" "-.1:' .
In / ~ ' ~ ./ i , '/' /',.-':l-,t,:.',.,,,:l;,', . ). i d ' . ,

13 ~, r f~ ".,.../ './':~".~ .' " ~ ":". ".',~,'-;-; ',
x ~ ~'*¢, ~ ~ "'-.'v','.;",--"l ":,:', ": ~-'; '. 4?7, - - •
~, ', ~ %, ' .',:. .:.[:;',:~,' :'.: ,;i',':;--.'-;;, ,;?;,;' ," ../',,':

,, x~.. ,'u %, 'v:., '~ ~ -" :":.':',; ~i ---, .?,,! " ".-'.-r I,.',,,;, ",
" ""5 '.,;,-/;;--:, ,:-."::.: ---'~,.~;~'.:. J :7? ', ~...-.;::/,[ ;, "~

/', • ' - ' IJ /zt'." ":-,.".-'. I . ,,..7, -" '...
30..~ .,,/" . '. ,--- , :-.-,,",,., .... ; .. ..-.'l,-
•Y', '-'." '," '.%~,'i' "" ,,'," j, • * .-;" ;t,
" ' i" " ' . ' : : v , • ".-':..'- ~,'- I"
,'~I ::.' ". ',,
'.'. ~":...;.::;s.J'i ,.."
.,-~
I ~
,,,,
":-"'.
-..'...
"-:.~:,. " ,..'" :','..;,'
. ~.., ... ,,,
40 I 35 "'!'... ,~,t
• ,.j.,, , ,'/'~//
'-..'.:; . . . . . . ,..
E-44A-.4386
UP136688
Oil Transfer Tubes

Figure 201 72-10-10
Page 202
Dec 14/87
#~llied
R . A. (3) (Codes DA-FB) Remove start fuel pressure regulator. Refer to

73-10-03, Maintenance Practices
R (4) (Code GA) Remove fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer
R to 73-10-05, Maintenance Practices.
(5) Remove nose cone assembly. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance
Practices.
B. Remove Oil Transfer Tubes (See Figure 201)
(i) Remove oil transfer tube (5, 30). Removeand discard packings.
(2) Using 285846-I-1 puller, remove oil transfer tube (20). Removeand
discard packings.
(3) Remove plug and packing, discard packing.

(4) Refer to 72-10-11 or 72-10-12, Maintenance Practices, as required,
for further engine disassembly.
R C. RemoveOil Jet, Lubrication Adapter and Plug (See Figures 202, 203)
R (1) (Pre SB 72-0231) Removebolts, washers, and lubrication nozzles

R (45, 105, Figure 202) or lubrication adapter (50) as applicable.
R Remove and discard packings.
R (2) (Post SB 72-0231) Removebolts, washers, oil jet assembly (50,

R Figure 203), pin (60), and plug (75). Removeand discard packings.
KEY TO FIGURE 201
5. OIL TRANSFERTUBE 30. OIL TRANSFERTUBE

15. PACKING 4O. PACKING
20. OIL TRANSFERTUBE 45. PLUG
UP136688
72-10-10
Page 203
Aug 12/91
lied
65
70
,..~% ~ ',F~-~.~_'-~
" , ~;-,¢~, . , ,;-~,~ ~ ,
5O-'--- ~ ' - ~ ' - " - 60
~Q
J~
- - ~ ~ ~,,~ /.% . ~K-.T.<;-~.~.., ,~ .m~.~.'- *, _< x. / , / ~ i~
u-- ,~. " ~-~',".>-:'~.-,' .-\ ',I /

R - - ,.'.,.x~" ° l S"
105 110,..,... I IF-44G-1570

100 ""-,...,.~-~.,.P
R 3O. BOLT 65. PACKING

R 35. WASHER 7O. PACKING
R 45. LUBRICATIONNOZZLE 95. BOLT
R 50. LUBRICATIONADAPTER 100. WASHER
R 55. PACKING 105. LUBRICATIONNOZZLE
R 60. PACKING 110. PACKING
R (Pre SB 72-0231)
UP136688
R Oil Jet and Lubrication Adapter Installation

R Figure 202 72-10-10
Page 204
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean engine oil or l u -
1. D. Install Oil Transfer Tubes (See Figure 201)
(1) Install new packings on oil transfer tubes. Assemble tubes, then
install through diaphragm assembly into accessory housing. Ensure
smaller oil transfer tube is installed toward nose cone assembly.
(2) Install new packing on plug and install plug in housing. Tighten
plug (45) to a torque value of 220 to 240 inch-pounds.
(3) Install new packings on oil transfer tube (30) and install through
diaphragm housing into oil scavenge pump assembly.
R E. Install Oil Jet, Lubrication Adapter and Plug (See Figures 202, 203)
R (1) (Pre SB 72-0231) Install new packing on lubrication nozzle or in-

R stall packings on lubrication adapter. Install lubrication nozzle
R or lubrication adapter and secure with bolt and washer. Tighten
R bolt (30, Figure 202) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
R (2) (Pre SB 72-0231) Install new packing on lubrication nozzle. In-

R stall lubrication nozzle and secure with bolt and washer. Tighten
R bolt (95) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
R (3) (Post SB 72-0231) Install pin and new packing on oil j e t . Install
R oil jet and secure with bolt and washer. Tighten bolt (40, Figure
R 203) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds, loosen and torque to a
R value of 40 inch-pounds.
(4) (Post SB 72-0231) Install new packing on plug. Install plug and
secure with bolt and washer. Tighten bolt (65) to a torque value
of 60 inch-pounds, loosen and torque to a value of 50 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-10-10
Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL lied
ignal
...... ,'"3.
./ ,~,'"'~(,,.-..,......,..
." "Tt, "'" ;
o*° ".-'., i
,~, ..",.,":'~ ...... ::., .. :" "; ?.-" ....... "'. ' i .....
l, ~;d...:?,.,..~,,,;..,.:..: .,.;..;.~, ". .:'~t..~:.... ".;...
i, ,~JB i • , ) iI . -:,~, . , ,% i ,, f- ,~
.,.,-&.. - v.-..:..,,..,,,~, ....:...:... /~s: Z,, ". '.... ".
't " ".,:.'I.9!L-..':' ,t,,;';'.;iT;.!. .. - .:"...
~;'" : li'~ ' "": , #i#~"":" ' -
'.:,,"."/.;,y'~'-';;::.~.. ,;.: "....':"'":.;" V'~ ......'.
' .: I.,,',,'.'~:,: .~; %:.... . ".. ".3 . "" . • ". C'.
, ;(i .... . •h ";r,",.','" v. L-. "-.~ "'. , " '. ',.'.'..

;Y"%"'","~ :;:" ""'7;; " ' "' "" :""
I ::'t "d ;" #":aT, ':.', .#":, " ~'.';" /; : '., . " , ",',',
; ' ....... 5 ' / ": '. ":,',~::,'. i ', ', ., • ," ,~, ~ ":~. • '. ,.
','," ",','. :',!h,'..; ;~.'..-'...V";:_~.=~ .,: ",'/,~# ,~..<.,/]H, ~. • , ,,
".','. ","':'."" • "'.,, t:':~ , ' 'I, ~ ,~ ~//,t~, . . . . I
A ,' ...... ":" - . , t " , , % ,.., , , . I , , . ~ , ' / ,i#, . ~, i . I
-" I, :".... ""!':.",> .>"./.,..:-~;~;:.::.:',:i,,,
: (".;;,.'.z,~..;,; '. .: ,' '/..,/
I ,.:, .$:~...',, ,':,:~',
i~.'..." .. ,, ,. ..'f, " . . ' " 6d *" ..,' " *
" I ~ --'..':i,i;,#:;,,," ,:;....[.;. ,;..y ...#':.: ...... .r";/
R /
J I
u--
i:"
"-:,
•....
,'<*':" "'¢~ "E-':'i""
. . . . . :',.'¢-~.')T "~-' / " .
.~.:~-." ,,.,,
'"
:.,'.' .~.;,
v
/'" ............. ~".....
4°-,>, ""
.....~;;222.;;..... ..
;' "~
"~
-,,.,
"',1
I If #
/
• ....:'.....° °
65----,.."~~0~ 75 80 E-44G-1571
R 4O. BOLT 65. BOLT

R 45. WASHER 70. WASHER
R 50. OIL JET ASSY 75. PLUG
R 60. PIN
(Post SB 72-0231)
UP136688
Oil Jet and Plug Installation

Figure 203 72-10-10
Page 206
Aug 12/91
lied
. F. I n s t a l l Engine Components that were Removed to Gain Access to Oil Trans-

f e r Tubes
(1) Install nose cone assembly. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance

Practices.
(2) (Codes DA-FB) Install start fuel pressure regulator. Refer to
(3) (Code GA) Install fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer
(4) Install propeller pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Maintenance
Practices.
(5) Install beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Oil Transfer Tubes (See Figures 201, 202, 203)
(I) Inspect oil transfer tubes in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
R (2) Inspect oil j e t , lubrication nozzle, and lubrication adapter assem-
R blies as follows.
R (a) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with
R (b) Inspect for contamination and distortion that may affect oil
. Cl eani ng/Pai nti ng

(i) Clean all standard hardware. Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,

Cleaning Method No. I or 2.
(2) Clean oil transfer tubes. Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,
R (3) Clean lubrication adapter, lubrication nozzles, oil j e t , and plug.
R Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 5 or
R No. 6.
UP136688
72-10-10
Page 207/208
Aug 12/91
/lied
TORSION SPLINE (QUILL) SHAFT AND COUPLINGASSEMBLY -


equipment required for Removal/Installation.
Item Source/
1. Spline (Coupler) Use to reposition and indicate 284456-1-1

Positioning Wrench coupling spline position when (For short
adjusting negative torque. coupler)
285159-1-1
(For long
coupler)
. Spline (Quill) Used to change torsion shaft 284455-1-1
Posi t i oni ng Wrench spline position when adjust-
ing negative torque.
. Ball Lock Wrench Used to install or remove ball 289318-1
lock in the helical pinion
gearshaft assembly and to check
for positive engagement of
balls after installation.
A. Disassemble Engine to Gain Access to Quill Shaft and Coupler
(2) Removepropeller pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Maintenance

Practices.
(3) (Codes DA-FB) Removestart fuel pressure regulator. Refer to

R (4) (CodeGA) Remove fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer

(5) Removenose cone. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
R (6) Removeoil j e t assembly. Refer to 72-10-10, Maintenance Practices.

UP136688
72-10-11
Page 201
Aug 12/91
lied
...--;;-...., ....... .'"..

.-" J ".
o.o., .
l,].¢,l,." l..~.
.,,/l; ..... "" j."'" :'i
.' " "
...J, ,,, i~,,. L"' ..;.....
,!.~,,., ..vi.,,.
.',-,,. .,;" . :"" :;.', :,, ..,, ....
•:. I'~-'.':~,,'" ". -;." "'J'
; "("" "':' J.'4 . " ". .i~
i '. " >." '"
r, : ='. ~ );':" " , ;5' }
I *l*:. ' I ,*'
, :;., ,.. ~,'..,... -. :.,. ;.:., ,~-..,

s. , ,., . ," . ,, . ,#rrr,
i,. ,. ...... "i .. :G s . tfe
, ... .. ,.,. , • .. , . /,,.,,-,~./,

•,,'. ; ~,;:. . . . . . 9r.7.' , ' " '? ,. ~ ) ' , ')
• ". .; ',#. .z//'.',~:.....;,'1 '.,, ",.,;./.,/,,
"... ,'i , ~ . ;. "'.',;./: ," ,' t" . ""
... ,.. ~ , . , ....;..// , .. I
• .,.~'/' " ;;' 'F'"';" ','" I
., .""'" "" "I.)':/.', ;'' , / . . ' i
,,,,,;,.,;." -., .'//
,..o
B5 "~Z" "" "' , ij I
".;;... , /,/
50 70 .....,.~,,~
40 45~ ~ "
\ E-44G-1575
~u . ~ . ~
30. SHAFT 50. TORSIONSPLINE (QUILL) SHAFT

35. BALL 60. PIN
40. SPACER 65. PLUG
45. SPRING 70. COUPLING(COUPLER)
(Pre SB 72-0119) Torsion Spline Shaft and

UP136688
Coupling Assembly and Oil Jet Assembly

Figure 201 72-10-11
Page 202
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
1. B. Remove Quill Shaft and Coupler (See Figure 201 or 202)
(1) Install 289318-1 wrench in shaft until locking balls are released.
Remove shaft, balls, spacer, and spring. Removewrench from shaft.
(2) Install 284455-1-1 wrench in torsion spline shaft ( q u i l l ) and
remove shaft. Removewrench.
(3) Install spline positioning 284456-1-1 ( f o r short coupler) or

285159-1-1 ( f o r long coupler) wrench in coupling assembly. Remove
coupling assembly. Removewrench from coupling assembly.
NOTE: Refer to 72-10-12, Maintenance Practices, for f u r -
ther disassembly.
C. I n s t a l l Quill Shaft and Coupler
Quill shaft and coupler must be installed in conjunction with torque

sensor c a l i b r a t i o n . Refer to 72-10-16, Maintenance Practices, for i n -
stal I ation procedure.
D. Assemble Engine
(1) Install oil j e t assembly. Refer to 72-10-10, Maintenance

Practices.
(2) Install nose cone. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
(3) (Codes DA-FB) Install s t a r t fuel pressure regulator. Refer to

(4) (Code GA) Install fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve.

(5) Install propeller pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Maintenance

Practices.
(6) Install beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Quill Shaft and Coupler (See Figure 201 or 202)
(I) Inspect splined parts for breaks, cracks, burrs, and wear.
(a) Cracks and breaks are not allowed.
(b) Maximum spline wear allowable is 0.005 inch.

UP136688
72-10-11
Page 203
Aug 12/91
~:~/lied
...'","...,w...,'" T",..
• ,.t,
•'i:;:: ...............
:,)' "';/, :s}; ... ,.~ , . "I'.
•/ ,,..,,,.--;...;:.
• .J ".
~. ,,.':,-.:../;,
J,'.,,...:,,. • :, ;r t:.:.."'":,,
~" :,-,',',"'I:.
~,'I, :.: 11,,,"
- " : ";~;:'."i"'-,"";, '."
.'.,: iv,':,C,;-:-.. ,;.,',. ~.~:'.:" '.
";' .I .;.# ".;C L . ... ".'. I
"1,:.,. ,. ,'j ".,',,... ;~'., ," •; ,
•'.. , , , : . / ",:,, ":....:',.; ; ,.,', ,...-,

' , ' - " ",':P,', ;': ;;,'"." :.,; ' .' " .;e;e'.
, "". ',),~ , , : . " ."; .. ",' " : ':ToL i., ./ ~i"
, ':. , ".'.~: .,, ? -, ""'/, ," " .t,~,///4'..
•
".~ .::;.;:..~,::,:,.~,:.:
:.:,;' .f ..q
;'. ~;',' ,,~? ~. , " , ,#,... .,....
• .. .*. • ;2 .,:. . ,,,., , •
,,,, - :,..." '/,.s • , ~, ~, ,...
70 ~,,. "',-.::.,F.'.,:'" ]..,'. #

J III
os N,~ . / s "% " ,

""-:::':::
....
I.
. ,.;"//
-... ,..........'< ,:"
E-44G-1574
30. SHAFT 55. INSERT

35. BALL 60. TORSIONSPLINE (QUILL) SHAFT
40. SPACER 65. COUPLING(COUPLER)
45. SPRING 70. SPRING
UP136688
(Post SB 72-0119) Torsion Spline Shaft and Coupling

Assembly and Oil Jet Assembly
Figure 202 72-10-11
Page 204
Aug 12/91
,/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~DSignal
2 A. (1) (c) Stop pin marking of large end spline section of the coupling
assembly (70, Figure 201 or 65, Figure 202) is allowed.
Blending of stop pin marks are not required unless burrs are
present. Use Arkansas Stone to remove burrs.

. Cleaning/Painting
(1) Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for general cleaning instruc-

NOTE: Table 202 provides a l i s t of recommended cleaning
method.


201 30 Shaft X
40 Spacer X X
45 Spring X X
50 Torsion Spline X
Shaft
70 Coupling X
202 30 Shaft
40 Spacer X
45 Spring X
60 Torsion Spline
Shaft
65 Coupling
70 Spring X
UP136688
72-10-11
Page 205/206
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. Removal/Installation
NOTE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of materials and compounds

required f o r Removal/Installation. Table 202 provides a
l i s t of special t o o l s , f i x t u r e s , and equipment required f o r
Removal/Instal l a t i on.
Table 201. Naterials and Compounds
~,iaterial or Compound Manufacturer
NuTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used f o r l i s t e d items.

Any approveo engine oil Commercial l y available


Item Source/
NOTE: Equivalent substitues may be used for l i s t e d items.
1. Pin Torquing Used to hold shouldered pin 287889-1

Holder while torquing or loosening
retainer.
. Retaining Ring Used to i n s t a l l r e t a i n i n g 287890-1

Driver rings in pins in planetary
gears.
. Planetary Pin Used to remove pin from 296539-2

Driver planet c a r r i e r and 9ear
assembly.
72-10-12
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
ignal
~
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l s l i e d

1. A. Remove Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: I f the diaphragm assembly is to be removed from the en-
gine, the planet carrier and gear assembly and di-
aphragm assembly may be removed as an assembly. Refer
to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices. I f there is no
need to remove the diaphragm assembly, the planet car-
r i e r and gear assembly shall be removed as follows.

Practices.
(3) (Codes DA-FB) Remove start fuel pressure regulator. Refer to
(4) (Code GA) Remove fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer
(5) Remove nose cone. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
(6) Remove oil transfer tubes. Refer to 72-10-10, Maintenance

Practices.
(7) Remove assembled matched planet carrier and gear assembly.
(8) Remove nuts, plates, plate assemblies, and ring gear.

(9) Remove nuts, washers, and ring gear support from diaphragm.
UP136688
72-10-12
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE ~IANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
~-,:-.
'r,. " : ~ : . C ' ; ; ; - ¢ r ; "¢t',, ', ;
, ~-~.:~.,-'~<'-.r', ~'°. . G, -%.L~°o

,. # ~,~,. ,, , ° ....o..
~,7.."g"<" ./~'...'-, "~':,
"40 ,•. ':.':~.~.l'~

':,~ , . - - - . ~ ,'~;.:',"
"::=,~:, '",-',
'. :::
;v
• .~,,,~ ,.~
""-'.;'-' ,s > "
E-,4.4G-586
R 5. PLANET CARRIER AND 25. PLANETARYSPUR

R GEAR ASSY GEAR (RING GEAR)
R 10. NUT 30. NUT
R 15. PLATE 35. WASHER
R 20. PLATE ASSY 40. RING GEAR SUPPORT
Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

UP136688
Figure 201 72-10-12

Page 203
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B, Disassemble Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (See Figure 202)
(1) Remove retaining ring (5) and splined lock ( I 0 ) .
(2) I n s t a l l planet carrier and gear assembly on 287889-1 holder and

remove retainer (15) and key (20),

MINIMIZED. REFERTO 70-00-00 STANDARD PRAC-
(3) Remove planet c a r r i e r and gear assembly from holder and remove pin
(25) using 296539-2 planetary pin d r i v e r . Remove gear and bearing
set assembly (30) from planet gear c a r r i e r (35).
UP136688
72-10-12
Page 204
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
35
t 2o
15
E-44A-4439
R 5. RETAINING RING 25. PIN

R 10. SPLINE LOCK 30. GEAR AND BEARING SET ASSY
R 15. RETAINER 35. PLANET GEAR CARRIER
R 20. KEY
Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly

UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-12

Page 205
Dec 14/87
.~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-.~Signal
I° C. Remove Diaphragm Oil Jet Assemblies and Bull Gear Bearing Retainer (See
Figure 203)
(i) Remove bolts and washers securing oil j e t assemblies and retainer.
(2) Remove oil j e t assemblies. Removeand discard packings from oil

j e t assemblies.
(3) Remove retainer.

(4) Remove oil passage plugs. Removeand discard packings from oil
passage plugs.
D. Install Diaphragm Oil Jet Assemblies and Bull Gear Bearing Retainer
(See Figure 203)
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT SLOT IN BEARING OUTERRACE IS ALIGNED

WITH TAB ON BEARING ANTI ROTATION RETAINER PRIORTO
INSTALLING FORWARDBEARING RETAINER TO PREVENT
PINCHING OF BEARING OUTERRACE.
(1) Install retainer.
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with any approved engine

oil or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
installation.
R (2) Install strainers and new packings on oil j e t assemblies. Install

oil j e t assemblies and secure with bolts and washers.
(3) Tighten bolts (5, 25, 45, 65) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
Loosen bolts and retighten to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
(4) Install new packings on oil passage plugs. Install oil passage
plugs.
UP136688
72-10-12
Page 206
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
DIAPHRAGM
95 90 ~. i
I
25
,, \ ~>.~
! = .f)] g ~
I
65 70 ,,I / E-44G- 1525
80
5. BOLT 55. OIL JET ASSY

R 10. WASHER 58. STRAINER
15. OIL JET ASSY 60. PACKING
20. PACKING 65. BOLT
25. BOLT 70. WASHER
30. WASHER 75. OIL JET ASSY
R 35. OIL JET ASSY 78. STRAINER
R 38. STRAINER 80. PACKING
40. PACKING 85. RETAINER
45. BOLT 90. OIL PASSAGE PLUG
Diaphragm Oil Jet Assemblies Bull Gear

UP136688
Bearing Retainer I n s t a l l a t i o n
Figure 203 72-10-12
Page 207
Aug 12/91
~llied
1. E. Assemble Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly as Follows (See Figure 202)
PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Ensure gear and bearing set (30) have been inspected in
accordance wi th Inspection/Check.
(1) Place the four gear and bearing set assemblies (30) into position
in planet gear carrier (35). Ensure pins of gear and bearing set
assemblies do not bind against bottom of slots in planet gear
c a r r i e r . Leave planet gear c a r r i e r on bench.
(2) Install the four pins (25) and keys (20) down through planet gear
c a r r i e r and through bearing inner races. Ensure pins are down
flush and not binding on l i p of planet gear c a r r i e r .
(3) Apply l u b r i c a t i n g compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to face and

threads of the four retainers (15). L i f t side of planet gear car-
r i e r s l i g h t l y and i n s t a l l retainers by hand. Tighten finger t i g h t .
(4) Turn planet gear c a r r i e r (35) over and place on 287889-1 holder.
Ensure pins (25) are flush and not binding on l i p of planet gear
carrier. Tighten retainers (15) to a torque value of 700 inch-
pounds. Remove planet gear c a r r i e r from holding f i x t u r e .
(5) Install splined locks (10) through pins (25). I f necessary rotate
spline engagement until the square ends of the locks f i t into the
square openings in retainers (15). Using 287890-1 retaining ring
driver, compress and install retaining rings (5) in grooves of pins
(25) to retain splined locks in position.
F. I n s t a l l Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: When aligning ring gear teeth to ring gear support

teeth, the missing tooth gap shall be to l e f t of
plate assembly when viewed from nut side of plate
assembly and missing tooth gap is at 6 o'clock
posi t i on.
When i n s t a l l i n g plate and plate assembly, place
smaller surface of plate against teeth of gears
with chamfered surface of plate and plate assembly
inward toward center of ring gear support circle.
(I) Align gear teeth and i n s t a l l ring gear onto ring gear support and
secure with plate assembly, plate, and nuts. Tighten nuts (I0) to
UP136688
72-10-12
R Page 208
Aug 16/89
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: When installing ring gear support on diaphragm, position
crescent shaped cut-out of ring gear support mounting
flange, down (above high speed pinion bearing).
I. F. (2) Install assembled ring gear and ring gear support onto diaphragm
and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts (30) to a torque
NOTE: To prevent planet carrier and gears assembly from

inadvertently f a l l i n g out of ring gear, install
just prior to installing nose cone.
(3) Install planet carrier and gears assembly into ring gear.
(4) Install oil transfer tubes. Refer to 72-10-10, Maintenance

Practices.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (See Figure 201, 202)
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUSTBE

MINIMIZED. REFERTO 70-00-00, STANDARDPRAC-
TICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
NOTE: I f carrier or gear and bearing set is damaged,

replace damaged components.
Ensure pins are made of the same material (by

weight or part number).
R (1) Inspect planet carrier and gear assembly (5, Figure 201) as
R follows.
R (a) Visually inspect for cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(b) Visually inspect gear teeth for pitting, chipping, and exces-
sive wear. Visual defects are acceptable as long as defects
cannot be f e l t using 0.031 inch diameter stylus.
(c) Inspect bearings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
(d) Ensure M.O.W. (Measurement Over Wires) dimensions etched on
gears match within 0.001 inch.
R (2) Visually inspect ring gear support (40, Figure 201) as follows.
R (a) Visually inspect ring gear support for cracks and bolt hole
R elongation. No cracks allowed. Bolt hole elongation shall
R not exceed 0.0005 inch.
(b) Inspect ring gear support mating surface for wear. Wear shall
not exceed 0.003 inch depth.
UP136688
72-10-12
Page 209
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. A. (2) (c) Inspect ring gear support splines for wear and pitting. I f
wear exceeds 0.005 inch and/or i f pitting exceeds 0.010 inch,
replace ring gear support.
(3) Inspect planetary ring gear (25, Figure 201) as follows.
(a) Visually inspect for cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
R (b) Visually inspect ring gear teeth (longer teeth) for pitting,
R chipping, and excessive wear. Visual defects are acceptable
R as long as defects cannot be f e l t using a 0.031 inch diameter
R stylus.
R (c) Inspect ring gear splines (shorter teeth) for wear as follows.
R 1 Determine maximumwear depth by comparing maximumwear area

R on spline with end where there is no wear. The "no wear"
R area is normally at extreme a f t end of spline where there
R is no engagement.
2 Maximum allowable depth of internal spline wear, measured

at pitch line of spline tooth, is 0.010 inch.
(4) Inspect oil j e t assemblies as follows.
(a) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with

70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not allowed.
R (b) Inspect for contamination and distortion that may affect oil
R (c) Inspect strainer elements for contamination and damage that

R may affect function.
(5) Visually inspect external splines and flats of splined locks (10,
Figure 202) for wear. Replace splined locks i f wear is evident.
3. Cleaning/Paintin9
(1) Clean all standard metallic hardware in accordance with 72-00-00,

(2) Clean planet carrier and gear assembly in accordance with 72-00-00,
Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Methods No. I or 2.
(3) Clean j e t assembly in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,

UP136688
72-10-12
Page 210
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
INTE~IEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) -

1. Remova)/Installation

equipment required for Remvoval/Installation. Table 202
I tern Source/
1. Shaft Holder Used to hold propeller shaft 284172-1-1

when removing and i n s t a l l i n g
retaining nut and bearing com-
ponents. Also used in con-
junction with 285774-1-1, gear
holder, while removing bearing
retainer,
. Bearing and Used to i n s t a l l bear- 284184-1-1

Bushing Driver ing in diaphragm
housing.
. Mechanical Puller Used to separate 284192-1-1

diaphragm from accessory
drive housing.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to i n s t a l l bearings 284475-1-1
Driver on i d l e r gearshaft.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press bearing on 285162-1-i

Driver i n t e r n a l l y splined end of
starter-generator spur
gearshaft.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press bearing on 285163-i-1

Driver end opposite internal splines
of starter-generator spur
gearshaft.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press larger bear- 285177-1-1

Driver ing on tachmometer driver
gearshaft.
72-10-13
UP136688
Page 201
Dec 14/87
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ignal •/•lslied
Item Source/
. Bearing and Bushing Used to i n s t a l l or remove 285178-1-1

Driver bearing on tachometer drive
gearshaft.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press bearing on pro- 285180-1-1

Driver peller governor spur gear.
10. Bearing and Bushing Used to press bearing on 285181-1-1

Driver hydraulic pump spur gearshaft.
11. Gear Holder Used to hold i d l e r spur gear- 285774-1-1

shaft while removing or in- (Replaced by
s t a l l i n g bearing retainer. 287226-i-1)
12. Bearing Pressing Used to hold various bear- 285812-1-1

Holder ings while removing or in-
s t a l l i n g gears hafts .
13. Bearing and Bushing Used to press gearshaft from 285813-1-1

Driver bearings. (Replaced by
291140-1)
14. Bearing and Bushing Used to press gearshaft from 285814-1-1

291141-1)
15. Gear Holder Used to hold i d l e r spur gear- 287226-1-1

shaft while removing or in- (Repl aces
s t a l l i n g bearing retainer. 285774-1-1)
16. Bearing Roller Used to retain r o l l e r s of 287425-1-1

Guide bull gear bearing when
diaphragm halves are
separated.
17. Bearing and Bushing Used to press gearshaft from 291140-1

Driver bearings. (Replaces
285813-1-1)
18. Bearing and Bushing Used to press gearshaft from 291141-1

Driver bearings. (Replaces
285 814-1-1 )
UP136688
72-10-13
R Page 202
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
FIAIIITENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used fur listed items.

Grease (Acryloid 615 or Royal Lubricants Co, Inc, 101Eisenhower
HF-825) Parkway, Rose Land, NJ 07068, or Part No.
NPC61361-1 from AlliedSiynal Engines,
Sales Administration, P.O. Box 29003,
Grease (DC-III Silicone) Dow Corning Corp, 3901S Saginaw Rd,


Marking materials
(Berol Verithin No. 753, 302 South 23rd Ave, Phoenix, AZ 85009
Silver)
Violet master marker The Pannier Corp, S 207 Sandusky St,
72-10-13
UP136688
R Pa~e 203
Aug 4/94
/lied
2O
r"?
is / .C,Z~..-..>-,'r >.,
r/''f./30 ,.:._____.z_
t'x-'. ~." .. , - . ,:
R
J
~. f'",L
5
\ ,r ,.r.YI
'r., " .'I""
, ..
!i:.;.y--.
if!y
573
m NUT 35. GASKET

15. TUBE ASSY 55. WASHER
20. PACKING 60. IDENTIFICATIONPLATE
25. SHAFT 90. DIAPHRAGMASSY
30. PACKING
UP136688
Diaphragm Assembly Installation

Figure 201 72-10-13
Page 204
Aug 12/91
~:~lslied
TO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Starter-generator drive gearshaft replacement can be accom-

plished without removing diaphragm assembly using 296764-1
starter shaft mechanical puller. Refer to Approved Repairs.
(Post SB 72-0416 or 72-0730) Starter-generator drive gear-

shaft splined adapter replacement can be accomplished
without removing diaphragm assembly. Refer to Approved
Repairs.
1. A. RemoveDiaphragm Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: To remove diaphragm to facilitate other maintenance,

accomplish paragraph I.A. only. Refer to 72-10-14,
Maintenance Practices for further engine disassembly.
Removal of diaphragm assembly requires torque sensor
system calibration and the establishment of a new raw
torque plot following repair. Prior to removal of di-
aphragm assembly refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
NTS System Check by Flight Check will be accomplished
anytime diaphragm is removed, uncoupled and/or
disassembled. Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
(1) Removebeta tube assembly. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance
Practices.
Practices.
(5) Removenose cone assembly. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance
Practices.
(6) Removeoil vent. Refer to 79-20-06, Maintenance Practices.
(7) Removeoil transfer tube, oil jet and lubrication adapter. Refer
(8) Removetorsion spline (quill) shaft and coupling assembly. Refer
(9) Removeplanet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to 72-10-12, Main-
tenance Practices.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ l s l
ignal
i e d

1. A. ( 1 0 ) Removenuts and washers securing diaphragm assembly to engine.
NOTE: Use care when removing diaphragm assembly to pre-

vent torque sensor spur gear and cam assembly
from dropping out of engine.
(11) Position l i p of 284192-1-1 pullers under edge of diaphragm
assembly. Tighten jackscrews of pullers evenly and remove di-
aphragm assembly with assembled gearshafts. Removegasket between
diaphragm assembly and engine.
(12) Remove shouldered shaft and packing.
(13) Remove tube assembly and packings.
B. Disassemble Diaphragm Assembly
NOTE: Remove spur gearshafts, gearshaft, gear, and oil jet

assemblies only to accomplish required maintenance. I f
no maintenance is required in the area, proceed to step
(2).
(1) Remove gearshafts and oil j e t assemblies as follows. (See Figure
202.)
(a) Remove bolt and washer securing oil j e t assemblies. Remove
oil j e t assemblies and packing. Discard packing.
(b) Remove bolts and washer securing assembled bearings and gear-
shaft assemblies to diaphragm assembly.
UP136688
72-10-13
R Page 206
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
L
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 207
Dec 14/87
:#'~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL "~=~Signal
,009~ ~ j 45 \ ./ ;
120
.o \ /~
// 25.'.,, %~/ / I
155
\ . .~. .J. . ~ ' ~ 2o...~, ~2 J
.5 ~ - ~ ~.~
/
5 E..A.4G-i 085
UP136688
Gearshaftsand Aft Oil Jet Assemblies Installation

Figure 202 72-10-13
Page 208
Aug 16/89
/lied
MINIMIZED. REFER TO 70-00-00 STANDARD
PRACTICES FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Do not remove bearings from gearshaft assem-

blies unless damage is indicated. Refer to
Inspection/Check.
. B. (1) (c) Remove assembled bearings and idler gearshaft from diaphragm
assembly. Install idler gearshaft in 284172-1-1 and
287226-1-1 holders. Removeretainers. Remove idler gearshaft
from holders.
(d) Install 285812-1-1 holder on idler gearshaft and remove inner

race of aft bearing using 291141-1 driver. Removeforward
bearing.
R NOTE: (Post SB 72-0416 or 72-0730) Removal of

starter-generator drive gearshaft splined
adapter is not required unless wear is
indicated. Refer to Inspection/Check.
(e) Remove assembled bearings and starter-generator drive

gearshaft. Press bearings from starter-generator drive gear-
shaft using 291141-1 driver and 285812-1-1 holder.
KEY TO FIGURE 202
5. BOLT 115. PLUG

10. WASHER 120. RETAINER
15. OIL JET ASSY 125. BEARING (INNER RACE)
20. PACKING 130. BEARING
22. PIN 135. IDLER GEARSHAFT
25. BOLT 140. BOLT
30. WASHER 145. WASHER(SPRING TENSION)
35. OIL JET ASSY 150. GEAR(PROPELLER
40. PACKING GOVERNOR DRIVE)
45. BOLT 155. BEARING
55. BEARING 165. BOLT
65. PLUG 170. WASHER
70. PIN 175. BEARING
75. PLUG 185. PIN
80. PACKING 190. PLUG
85. GEARSHAFT(STARTER- 195. PACKING
GENERATOR DRIVE) 200. GEARSHAFT(HYDRAULIC
90. SPLINEDADAPTER PUMP DRIVE)
95. RING 205. WASHER
100. KEY WASHER (SPRING TENSION)
105. GEARSHAFT(STARTER-
GENERATOR DRIVE)
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 209
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
155
/
11o 115 ~"t~---~ j~'~ ,so ,s5
_ ~i ,~o <'7"~" + ,<
~c,.. 135 ,,,-,~,,.- 7-~.. iT5

~ 4o ----o<~<....~
"? ,o--.-,~-~.
1--Z -
f "
~__~A,~;--~ 14o~,~ "'145 ")",
.o "l
10 /' ,o--':~..-~__ If I,,, ,,;:.,,? ,
~-~ -"~, /I <--, ~ ' ~ C ' ~ . , - - ,,:.:.:::~.:.L / >, .:: ,..

--~...L.~.~t~i -..., y.~..~,.-,.,,, ,..:.~.::~ , .,..:'/... ,,.
8o__...<l~....., loo '..~..'~:":;'~'::.':.
195 '~.:,.':-t.,,' .:;-.__ ...... ;:~;i.!i;.,:..
85 ~ ~ . ".,,, ..;>.>.i!!.~i, '-

~,./,'. IlL"
E-44A-5561
(Post SB 72-0064, Pre SB 72-0163)

Diaphragm Oil Supply Tube Installation
UP136688
Figure 203 72-10-13

Page 210
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: When removing propeller governor drive and

hydraulic pump drive gearshafts, ensure
spring tension washers are removed.
I. B, (1) (f) Removehydraulic pump and propeller drive gearshaft.
I Remove bolts and washers securing assembled bearings and

gearshafts to diaphragm assembly. Remove assembled gear-
shafts from diaphragm. Remove spring tension washers.
2 Press bearings from gearshafts using 291140-1 and 291141-1

driver and 285812-1-1 holder.
3 Removepin and plug with packing. Removepacking.
(2) (Post SB 72-0064, Pre SB 0163) Remove diaphragm oil supply tubes as
(a) Remove oil transfer tube (175) from o i l tube (160). Remove
packings.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and clamps securing oil tubes, oil sup-
ply tubes and o i l transfer tube to diaphragm housing.
(c) Remove packings from tubes.
(d) Remove pin from o i l supply tube and remove spring and b a l l .
(e) Remove bearing retainer.
~ KEY TO FIGURE 203
. BOLT 105. PACKING

I0. WASHER 110. BOLT
15. NUT 115. WASHER
20. WASHER 120. CLAMP
30. WASHER 135. PIN
35. NUT 140. RETAINER
40. WASHER 145. SPRING
45. BOLT 150. BALL
50. WASHER 155. STRAINER
55. RESTRICTOR ASSY 160. OIL TUBE
70. WASHER 175. TRANSFERTUBE
80. RETAINER 185. PACKING
85. WASHER 190. OIL TUBE
I00. TRANSFER TUBE
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 211
Dec 14/87
--~,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '~'Signal
3O
35
~,~,-"'-" 35
,~, .~..~...
21
~"25
5
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
---" DIAPHRAGM
E-44G-1015
5. BOLT 25. OIL SCAVENGE PUMPASSY

10. PACKINGWITH RETAINER 30. TUBEASSY
20. ~JASHER 40. PACKING
21. NUT 45. PACKING
22. WASHER
Gearcase Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Installation
UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-13

Page 212
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (2) (f) Removenuts, washers, and bolts securing restrictor assembly
to diaphragm housing. Removerestrictor assembly.
NOTE: Remove gearcase oil scavenge pump assembly only to

accomplish required maintenance. I f no mainten-
ance is required in this area, proceed to para-
graph C.
(3) Removegearcase oil scavenge pump assembly as follows. (See figure

204.)
(a) Removenuts, bolts, washers, and retainer with packing secur-

ing gearcase oil scavenge pump assembly.
(b) Removegearcase oil scavenge pump assembly. Removepackings.
(c) Removetube assembly and packings.

UP136688
72-10-13
Page 213
Dec 14/87
Signal
~ llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.,,,,, \ .. 2s
5. BOLT 50. PACKING

10. WASHER 55. NUT
15. BOLT 60. WASHER
20. WASHER 65. BOLT
25. NUT 70. WASHER
30. ~JASHER 75. SPACER
35. BEARING (OUTER RACE) 80. ROLLERBEARING SHAFT SET
40. BEARING (OUTER RACE) (HIGH SPEED PINION)
45. SUN AND BULL GEAR ASSY I00. DIAPHRAGMHOUSING SET
(Pre SB 72-0064) Separating Diaphragm Housing Halves

UP136688
Figure 205 72-10-13

Page 214
Aug 16/89
Aii~d-SignalAerospaceCompany
lied
I. B. (4) Disassemble diaphragm for inspection or repair as follows. (See

Figures 205, 206 or 207.)
CAUTION: PRIOR TO SEPARATING DIAPHRAGM HOUSING,
MARK AN INDEX LINE USING SILVER PENCIL
(BEROL VERITHIN, NO. 753) ON OUTER RACE IN
RELATION TO HOUSING TO SHOWASSEMBLY
RELATIONSHIP. ENSUREPART IS REINSTALLED
IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION DURING ASSEMBLY.
DO NOT MIX OUTER RACES.
(a) Remove nuts, bolts, and washers securing diaphragm halves.
NOTE: I t may be necessary to apply heat to housing

halves and use jackscrew to separate housing
halves.
(Pre SB 72-0163) Diaphragm housings w i l l
separate with sun and bull gears retained in
forward housing half.
(Post SB-0163) Diaphragm housings w i l l
separate with sun and bull gears retained in
aft housing half.
(b) Separate diaphragm housing halves. Apply heat, i f necessary
with propane torch. Do not exceed 93°C (200°F). Use jack-
screws to aid in separating housing halves. Install
287425-1-1 bearing r o l l e r guide into bearing to prevent r o l l -
ers from f a l l i n g out.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 215
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
5\ 45
~o~.~~5o ~'
""m ~ 65
70
\
120
35
40
55
\
J
J
85 E-44G-642
e NUT 55. BEARING(OUTER RACE)

10. WASHER 60. RETAININGRING
15. BOLT 65. BEARING(OUTER RACE)
20. WASHER 70. SUN AND BULL GEARASSY
30. WASHER 80. BOLT
35. BOLT 85. BOLT
40. WASHER 90. LOCKPLATE
45. BOLT 95. HIGH SPEEDPINION ASSY
50. WASHER 120. DIAPHRAGMHOUSING SET
(Post SB 72-0064, Pre SB 72-0163)

UP136688
Separating Diaphragm Housing Halves

Figure 206 72-10-13
Page 216
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
.j 50
• • 3 o
13o 6o " ~ ~
"~~ E-44G-643
5. BOLT 75. WASHER

10. WASHER 80. BOLT
15. BOLT 85. WASHER
20. WASHER 90. BUSHING
25. BOLT 95. ROLLER BEARING AND SHAFT SET
30. WASHER (HIGH SPEED PINION)
35. NUT I00. BOLT
40. WASHER 105. LOCKPLATE
45. BEARING (OUTER RACE) II0, RETAINERPLATE
50. RETAINING RING 115. BOLT
55. BEARING (OUTER RACE) 120. LOCKPLATE
60. SUN AND BULL GEAR ASSY 125. RETAINER PLATE
65. PACKING 130. DIAPHRAGMHOUSING SET
70. NUT
(Post SB 72-0163) Separating Diaphragm Housing Halves

UP136688
Figure 207 72-10-13

Page 217
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Z5
50
ViEW A
75 ~ ' ~ J /_I
P'"~ 55
/~"~"~'60
70
40
45
25
E-44G -646
UP136688
Gearcase Oil Scavenge Tube Installation

Figure 208 72-10-13
Page 218
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: WHENSUN AND BULL GEARASSEMBLY IS
SEPARATED FROMHOUSINGHALF, THE INTERNAL
COMPONENTSOF HIGH SPEEDPINION MAY
SEPARATE IF NOT SECURED.
1. B. (4) (c) Using plastic tie wraps, secure high speed pinion components
by tying gearshaft to high speed pinion housing.
(d) Removeoil jet assemblies and bull gear bearing retainer.
(e) (Post SB 72-0064) Remove aft bearing retaining ring (60,

Figure 206 or 50, Figure 207).
CAUTION: REMOVAL OF BEARING MAY REQUIRE INSERTING A
SOFT METAL ROD THROUGHHOLES IN BULL GEAR
AND LIGHTLY TAPPING AGAINST BEARING OUTER
RACE, USING CARE NOT TO DAMAGEBEARING.
(f) Remove bearing from forward diaphragm housing h a l f .

(g) Remove bearing from aft diaphragm housing half.
(h) Remove and discard packing (50, Figure 205), (75, Figure 206),
(65, Figure 207).
NOTE: Do not disassemble sun and bull gear.
(i) Removesun and bull gear from diaphragm housing half.

NOTE: Do not remove lockplate (105, 120, Figure
207) and retainers (110, 125) unless damaged.
(J) Remove bolts (100, 115, Figure 207), lockplates (105, 120),
and retainers (110, 125) from diaphragm housing halves.
NOTE: Do not disassemble high speed pinion
assembly.
(k) Remove high speed pinion assembly from diaphragm
housing half.
(1) Remove oil scavenge tube from aft diaphragm housing
half. (See Figure 208.)
KEY TO FIGURE 208
5. BOLT 30. NUT 55. NUT
10. WASHER 35. WASHER 60. WASHER
15. BOLT 40. BOLT 65. BOLT
20. WASHER 45. SCREENASSY 70. SCREENASSY
25. OIL SCAVENGETUBE 50. OIL SCAVENGETUBE 75. PACKING
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 219
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. B. (4) (1) 1 Remove bolts and washers securing oil scavenge tube to a f t
diaphragm housing half.
2 Remove and discard packing.
R 3 (Pre SB 72-0695) Remove bolt, washer, and nut securing

screen assembly to oil scavenge tube.

PROCEDURES.
C. Assemble and I n s t a l l Diaphragm Assembly
(1) Install oil scavenge tube on a f t diaphragm housing half as follows.

(See Figure 208.)
(a) I n s t a l l new packing on oil scavenge tube.
(b) Route tube through a f t diaphragm housing half and secure with
washers and bolts. Tighten bolt (15) to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds. Tighten bolt (5) to a torque value of 50 inch-
pounds. Loosen bolt (5) and retighten to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0695) I n s t a l l screen assembly on oil scavenge tube

and secure screen assembly with bolt, washer, and nut.
Tighten bolt (40 or 65) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.

MINIMIZED. REFERTO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRAC-
(2) (Pre SB 72-0163) Assemble diaphragm housing halves as follows.

(See Figure 205 or 206.)
(a) (Pre SB 72-0064) I n s t a l l high speed pinion assembly to f o r -
ward diaphragm housing half using washers, spacer, nut and
b o l t . Tighten nut (55, Figure 205) to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds or bolt (65) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(b) (Post SB 72-0064) I n s t a l l high speed pinion assembly to f o r -

ward diaphragm housing half using lockplate and/or bolt.
Tighten bolt (80 or 85, Figure 206) to a torque value of 60
inch-pounds. Loosen bolt (80 or 85) and tighten to a torque
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 220
Aug 4/94
l s l i e d

I. C. (2) (c) Place forward diaphragm housing with high speed pinion onto
bench with aft side up. Remove plastic t i e wrap from high
speed pinion.
(d) Install sun and bull gear into forward diaphragm housing,
meshing teeth of bull gear with high speed pinion gearshaft.
CAUTION: ENSUREINDEX MARKSARE ALIGNED WHEN INSTALLING
OUTER RACES.
ENSURE THAT SLOT IN BEARING OUTERRACE IS
ALIGNED WITH TAB ON RETAINER PLATE.
(e) (Pre SB 72-0064) Using 284184-1-1 driver, hand press bearing
(outer race) onto aft half of diaphragm. (See Figure 205.)
(f) (Post SB 72-0064) Using 284184-1-1 driver, hand press bearing
(outer race) onto aft half of diaphragm and secure bearing
with retaining ring. (See Figure 206.)
(g) Install new packing (50, Figure 205), (75, Figure 206) in aft
diaphragm housing half.
(h) Install aft diaphragm housing over sun and bull gear and
secure to forward half of diaphragm with washers, nuts, and
bolts.
i (Pre SB 72-0064) Tighten bolts (5, 15, Figure 205) to
torque value of i00 inch-pounds. Tighten nut (25) to
2 (Post SB 72-0064) Tighten bolts (15, 25, 35, 45, Figure
206) to torque value of I00 inch-pounds. Tighten nuts (5)
(i) Rotate diaphragm on bench with forward housing up.

(j) Using 284184-1-1 driver, hand press bearing (outer race) onto
forward half of diaphragm.
(k) Install oil j e t assemblies and bull gear bearing retainer.
R (I) Check freedom of rotation and axial flotation of sun and bull
R gear. Minimum axial float shall be 0.010 inch.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 221
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. C. (3) (Post SB 72-0163) Assemble diaphragm housing halves as follows.
(See Figure 207.)
(a) l n s t a l l high speed pinion assembly to a f t diaphragm housing
half using washers, bushing, nut, and bolt. Tighten nut (70)
to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds or bolt (80) to a torque
NOTE: Install retainers (110, 125) and lockplates

(105, 120) i f renoved.
(b) Secure retainers (110, 125) and lockplates (105, 120) with
bolts (I00, 115) to diaphragm housing halves. Tighten bolts
(100, 115) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Loosen bolts
and tighten to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds. Bend lock-
plates against bolts.
(c) Place aft diaphragm housing and high speed pinion onto bench
with forward face up. Remove plastic t i e wrap from high speed
pinion.
(d) Install bull ana sun gear into aft diaphragm housing, meshing
teeth of bull gear with high speed pinion gearshaft.
(e) Using 284184-1-1 driver, hand press bearing (outer race) on
front side of forward diaphragm housing half.
(f) Install new packing (65) in aft diaphragm housing half.
(g) Install forward diaphragm housing over bull and sun gear and
secure to a f t diaphragm housing with washers, bolts, and nuts.
Tighten nuts (35) to a torque value of 80 inch-pounds.
Tighten bolts (5
(h) Rotate diaphragm on bench with aft side up.
(i) Using 284184-i-1 driver, hand press bearing (outer race) into
aft half of diaphragm. Install bearing retaining ring.
(j) Check freedom of rotation and axial flotation of sun and bull
gear. Minimum axial f l o a t shall be 0.010 inch.
UP136688
72-10-13
R Page 222
Aug 4/94
/~llied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL ~-JSignal
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with any approved engine
oil or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
installation.
1. C. (4) Install oil scavenge pump and plumbing as follows. (See Figure
204.)
(a) Install new packings on tube assembly. Install tube assembly
onto scavenge pump.
(b) Install new packings onto scavenge pump. Install scavenge
pump and secure with bolts, washers, and packings (with
retainers). Tighten bolts (5, 15) to torque value of 70 inch-
pounds.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 222A/222B
Aug 12/91
/lied
1. C. (5) (Post SB 72-0064, Pre SB 72-0163) Install diaphragm o i l supply tube

as follows. (See figure 203.)
(a) I n s t a l l r e s t r i c t o r assembly on diaphragm assembly and secure
with bolts and washers. Tighten b o l t (5) to a torque value of
I00 inch-pounds. Tighten bolt (25) to a torque value of 25
inch-pounds.
(b) Install ball, spring, retainer, pin, screen, and packings,
onto oil tube (160). Install tube.
(c) Place packings on t r a n s f e r tube (175) and i n s t a l l transfer
tube.
(d) Place packings on o i l supply tube (190). Slide end of oil

supply tube over end of oil tube (160) and position into
mounting position and secure with bolt (110) tighten bolt
(110) to a torque value of 100 inch-pounds.
(e) Prior to installing oil transfer tube (100), place retainer in
positon on diaphragm housing using bolt (65) to aid alignment.
Determine amount of washers (85) needed to obtain 0.000 to
0.020 inch loose f i t between retainer (80) and round retainer
that retains journal bearing.
(f) I n s t a l l new packing on o i l transfer tube (100) and i n s t a l l

tube. I n s t a l l clamp, r e t a i n e r , washers (70, 85) (exact amount
of washers (85) as determined in step (e)) and secure with
b o l t . Tighten b o l t (45) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
Tighten bolts (65, 90) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
REFER TO 70-00-00 STANDARD PRACTICES FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
(6) I n s t a l l gearshafts and o i l j e t assemblies as follows. (See figure

202.)
(a) Assemble gearshaft assemblies as follows.
I Press bearings on propeller governor drive gear using

285180-I-1 driver. Press bearings on hydraulic pump gear-
shaft using 285179-1-1 and 285181-I-1 driver.
NOTE: Ensure spring tension washers are in-
stalled in proper position.
2 Install spring tension washers and assembled bearings and
gearshaft assemblies into diaphragm assembly. Secure with
washer and bolt. Tighten bolts (140, 165) to a torque
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 223
Aug 16/89
/lied
CAUTION: THE INNER AND OUTER RACES OF THE IDLER GEAR-

SHAFT AFT BEARING, PART NO. 358271 ARE A
MATCHED SET IDENTIFIED BY SERIAL NUMBER.
RACES OF THIS MATCHED SET ARE NOT INTER-
CHANGEABLE WITH OTHER RACES OF THE SAME PART
NUMBER.
1. C. (6) (b) I n s t a l l i d l e r and starter-generator drive gearshaft assemblies
as follows.
1 Place i d l e r gearshaft on 287226-1-1 holder.
NOTE: Install aft bearing inner race with serial

number next to shoulder of gearshaft.
Press forward bearing and inner race of a f t bearing on

i d l e r gearshaft using 284475-1-1 d r i v e r .
Apply l u b r i c a t i n g compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to face

and threads of retainers, then i n s t a l l into each end of
i d l e r gearshaft. Tighten retainers (120) to a torque value
of 450 inch-pounds.
4 Press bearings onto each end of starter-generator drive

gearshaft using 285812-1-1 holder and 285162-1-1 driver on
i n t e r n a l l y splined end and 285163-1-1 driver on opposite
end.
5 I n s t a l l starter-generator drive gearshaft and i d l e r gear-

shaft with assembled bearings into diaphragm assembly.
Secure both gearshaft assemblies with washer and bolt.
Tighten bolt (45) to a torque value of 35 inch-pounds.
(c) I n s t a l l new packings on o i l j e t assemblies. I n s t a l l o i l j e t

assemblies into diaphragm assembly. Secure with washer and
b o l t . Tighten bolts (25) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
Loosen bolts (5, 25) and retighten to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds.
(7) I n s t a l l diaphragm assembly as follows. (See figure 201.)
CAUTION: ENSURESHOULDERED SHAFT IS INSTALLED WITH PACKING

GROOVE END INTO OIL PRESSURE PUMP.
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packing with clean engine o i l or lu-


(a) I n s t a l l new packing on shouldered shaft and i n s t a l l into pump.

UP136688
72-10-13
R Page 224
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. C. (7) (b) I n s t a l l new packings on tube assembly. I n s t a l l tube assembly

into accessory housing. I n s t a l l guide pins in tube assembly.
CAUTION: ASSEMBLY LUBRICANT MIXED WITH SYNTHETIC

ENGINE OIL CAN CAUSE OIL FOAMINGAND OIL
JET PLUGGING. USE NO MORETHAN REQUIRED.
ALLOW NO GREASE TO ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
(c) Apply a very thin coat of grease (DC-I11 silicone compound).

I n s t a l l gasket on accessory housing.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE FORCE WHEN INSTALLING INTERFIE-

DIATE GEARBOXASSEMBLY.
ENSURE FUEL CONTROL DRIVE GEARSHAFTWASHER

(SPRING TENSION) IS INSTALLED IN DIAPHRAGM
BORE PRIOR TO DIAPHRAGM INSTALLATION.
SPRING WASHER CAN CAUSE EXTENSIVE DAMAGE
IF DISLODGED INTO GEARCASE.
(d) Secure fuel control drive gearshaft washer (spring washer) in

diaphragm bore using grease (Acryloid 615 or HF-825). Refer
(e) Carefully i n s t a l l diaphragm assembly with assembled parts.

Ease assembly into place using guide pins i n s t a l l e d in tube
assembly as guides through o i l vent valve mount pad.
NOTE: Do not tighten nuts u n t i l i n s t a l l a t i o n of

nose cone housing is completed.
Ensure diaphragm gasket does not extend

beyond housing flange.
(f) I n s t a l l washers and nuts to secure diaphragm assembly to studs

of accessory housing. Tighten nuts (5) to 80 inch-pounds
torque.
(g) Remove guide pins.
(h) Perform torque sensor assembly c a l i b r a t i o n in accordance with

72-10-16, Adjustment/Test, following i n s t a l l a t i o n of diaphragm
assembly.
72-10-13
UP136688
Page 224A/224B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. C. (7) (i) Install new packing on oil jet assembly. Install oil j e t as-
sembly into diaphragm assembly. Secure with washer and bolt.
Tighten bolt (65) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Loosen
bolt (65) and retighten to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
(j) Install planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to 72-10-12,

(k) Perform an engine indicated torque output functional check in
accordance with 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
(I) Perform NTS system ground check, and NTS system check by
f l i g h t check in accordance with 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
72-10-13
UP136688
Page 225
Aug 4/94
G1EG70-2A
Signal
~! lied
MAINTENANCE MAr~UAL
SURFACEA
(PAINTED)
0 o
//•0
o
O~
~/~
R
÷
o )~
o o
-f-
FORWARD HOUSING ASSY
1-44G-648
UP136688
Inspection of Forward Diaphragm Housing

Figure 209 72-10-13
Page 226
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Diaphragm Assembly (See Figures 201, 209 through 215)
(1) Inspect oil jet assemblies as follows.

(b) Inspect for contamination or distortion that may affect oil
flow or spray pattern.
(2) Inspect diaphragm housing halves for cracks. No cracks are
allowed.
(3) Inspect diaphragm housing halves for loose and damaged inserts and
studs. (See Figures 211 through 214A.) Replace inserts or studs
in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
(4) Inspect diaphragm assembly alignment holes for elongation. (See

Figures 211 or 213.) I f any hole is elongated 0.0005 inch or
greater return diaphragm assembly to the following for evaluation
and repair.
Garrett General Aviatioan Services Division
Distribution Center
1944 East Sky Harbor Circle
Phoenix, AZ 85034
(5) Inspect scavenge tube f i t t i n g port for damage and stripped threads.
Repair damage and replace insert in accordance with Approved
Repairs.
(6) Inspect forward housing half, where ring gear support mates with
housing, for wear. Wear in excess of 0.003 inch in depth is not
permitted.
(7) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements
or is damaged beyond repair.
(8) Inspect diaphragm assembly for corrosion as follows.
NOTE: Particular attention must be given to areas

where dissimilar metals contact magnesium
surface.
(a) Inspect diaphragm housing (surface A, Figure 209) for evidence
of corrosion. Corrosion not in excess of the following limits
is repairable.
! Maximumdepth shall not exceed 0.040 inch.
2 Maximum area shall not exceed one square inch in two

UP136688
pl aces.
72-10-13
Page 227
Aug 12/91
,~'~llied
. A. (8) (b) Visually check edges (1) for corrosion. Corrosion not in ex-
cess of 50 percent of flange thickness is repairable.
(c) Visually check high speed pinion area (2) for corrosion. Cor-
rosion not in excess of 0.030 inch in depth is repairable.
(d) Visually check surface adjacent to bolt holes (3) for

corrosion. Corrosion not in excess of 0.030 inch depth is
repai rabl e.
(e) Treat corrosion in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/
Pai nti ng.
(f) I f limits are exceeded, return diaphragm assembly to manufac-
turer for evaluation.
B. Inspect High Speed Pinion
(i) Inspect high speed pinion bearings.
(a) Removehigh speed pinion assembly from diaphragm housing half.

(b) Clean bearings of high speed pinion in accordance with
Practices.
(d) Inspect for evidence of rotation of inner race on gearshaft
( i . e . bearing inner race loose on gearshaft).
(e) Re-oil bearings with clean approved engine o i l .
(f) I f bearings do not meet the inspection requirements of steps

(c) through (e) replace high speed pinion assembly.
(2) Inspect high speed pinion gear teeth.
Inspect every high speed pinion gear tooth load surface for defects
such as scoring, p i t t i n g , and chipping. Visual defects on high
speed pinion gear teeth is acceptable as long as defects cannot be
f e l t using a 0.031 inch diameter stylus.
(3) I f l i m i t s are exceeded, return high speed pinion to Garrett
authorized service f a c i l i t y for necessary repair or replacement.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 228
Aug 16/89
ignal
I0 50 10
200
/
40
O
\ ©
10
30
10
I0
F-44G-457
10. INSERT
20. 40. INSERT
I NSERT 50. STUD
30. I NSERT 200. HOUSING
Forward Housing Assembly (Diaphragm) Aft Face
(PN 3101025-3/-7/-8/-13)
UP136688
Figure 210 72-10-13

R
Page 229
Aug 16/89
~.lslied
50
70 50
0 O
O o
50
..--- 200
0
0
@
0 o/ @
- ALIGNMENT
HOLE
10
ALIGNMENT HOLE
/O
O
R
O
@
O O
O
-t-
ALIGNMENT HOLE
ALIGNMENT HOLE
80
20
10. INSERT 40. INSERT F-44G-689

20. INSERT 50. STUD
30. INSERT 200. HOUSING
Forward Housing Assembly (Diaphragm) Forward Face

(PN 3101025-3/-7/-8/-13)
UP136688
Figure 211 72-10-13

Page 230
Aug 16/89
Allied-SignalAerospaceCompany [~lstied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 40 10
200
30
©
\ ©
20
10
10
10
"I0
F-44.G-458
40. STUD
10. INSERT
200. HOUSING
20. INSERT
30. INSERT
Forward Housing Assembly (Diaphragm) Aft Face
(PN 3101128-3)
Figure 212 72-10-13
UP136688
Page 231
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
30 40
40
0 0
0 0
ALIGI
HOLE
-t- HOLE
10
© /O
O
10
C
©
O
15
+
[1,,25
ALIGNMENT
HOLE ALIGNMENT
HOLE
25
60
F-44A - 1058
10, INSERT 40. STUD

R "15, PLUG 50. PLUG
R **20, INSERT **60. PIN
R *25. INSERT 200. HOUSING
30. INSERT
*FOR PN 3101128-2 ONLY.

**FOR PN 3101128-3 ONLY.
Forward Housing Assembly (Diaphragm) Forward Face

(PN 3101128-2/-3)
UP136688
Figure 213 72-10-13

Page 232
Aug 12/91
lslied

~50, 60
SECTION B-B ROTATED
VIEW A ROTATED
40
30
F-44G-459
10. INSERT 50. INSERT

40. INSERT 200. HOUSING
Aft Housing Assembly (Diaphragm) Aft Face

UP136688
R (PN 896828-1/-2/-4/-12/-13)
Figure 214 72-10-13
Page 233
Aug 12/91
lied
SECTION B - B ROTATED
DETAILA ROTATED
100
3o !1o
80
90
140
10
-i---- H- T
120,130
30
10
60 F-44G-823
?0
R 10. INSERT 50. INSERT 90. PIN 130. PIN

R 20. INSERT 60. BUSHING 100. BUSHING 140. BUSHING
R 30. INSERT 70. PIN 110. PIN 150. PIN
R 40. INSERT 80. BUSHING 120. BUSHING 200. HOUSING
UP136688
R Aft Housing Assembly (Diaphragm) Aft Face 72-10-13

R (PN 3103729-1) Page 234
R Figure 214A Aug 12/91
~ / l iignal
ed
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. C. Inspect Hydraulic Pumpand Propeller Drive Gearshaft Assemblies (See
Figure 202)
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARINGCOMPONENTSMUSTBE MINIMIZED. REFER
TO 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURE.
(I) Inspect gearshaft teeth for scoring, pitting, and chipping. Visual
defects on gear teeth are acceptable i f defects cannot be f e l t us-
ing a 0.031 inch diameter stylus.
(3) Inspect bearings as follows.
(a) Do not remove bearings from gearshaft.
(b) Clean bearings and gearshaft assembly in accordance with

Practices.
(i.e. bearing inner race loose on gearshaft).
(e) Re-oil bearings with clean engine oil.
(f) Check for indications of roughness by holding outer race with
gearshaft pointed up and rotating gearshaft. Repeat procedure
with gearshaft pointed down. I f roughness is indicated,
repeat steps (b) and (e).
(g) Replace bearings that do not meet inspection requirements of

steps (c) through (f). Refer to Removal/Installation.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 234A
Aug 12/91
ignal
~
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l s l i e d

2. D, Inspect Starter-Generator Drive and Idler Gearshaft Assemblies (See
Figure 202)
R (I) Inspect gearshaft teeth for scoring, pitting, and chipping. Visual
R defects on gear teeth are acceptable i f defects cannot be f e l t us-
R ing a 0.031 inch diameter stylus.
R (la) Inspect oil jet assembly as follows.

(b) Inspect for contamination or distortion that may affect oil
flow or spray pattern.
(2) (Pre SB 72-0416) Replace starter-generator drive gearshaft i f in-
ternal spline wear exceeds 0.020 inch.
(3) (Post SB 72-0416 or 72-0730) Replace starter-generator drive gear-
shaft splined adapter i f there is any indication of internal
cracks, wear depth exceed 0.010 inch, or deformation. Refer to Ap-
proved Repairs.
(5) Inspect bearings as follows.

UP136688
72-10-13
Page 234B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal[•lslied
2. D. (5) (a) Do not remove bearings from gearshaft.
(b) Clean bearings and gearshaft assembly in accordance with
Practices.
(i.e. bearing inner race loose on gearshaft).
(e) Re-oil bearings with clean engine o i l .
(f) Check for indications of roughness by holding outer race with

gearshaft pointed up and rotating gearshaft. Repeat procedure
with gearshaft pointed down. I f roughness is indicated,
repeat steps (b) and (e).
(g) Replace bearings that do not meet inspection requirements of
steps (c) through ( f ) . Refer to Removal/Installation.
E. (Post SB 72-0064, Pre SB 72-0163) Inspect Oil Supply Tube Installation
(See Figure 203)
(i) Inspect tube assemblies in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
(2) Inspect r e s t r i c t o r assembly for cracks, contamination, and other
damage.
(3) Inspect oil strainer for damage and contamination.
F. Inspect Gearcase Oil Scavenge Pump (See Figure 204)
NOTE: Oil scavenge pump assembly may be disassembled to inspect condi-

tion of rotor set and to inspect pump i n t e r i o r for contamination
in the event of oil system contamination. Refer to Approved
Repairs.
(1) Inspect oil scavenge pump for cracks and other damage. No cracks
al I owed.
(2) Inspect tube assemblies in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Inspect screen assemblies for holes or contamination
that may affect function.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 235
Aug 16/89
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany -Allied
"%=~Signal
l'.IAl NTENANCE MANUAL
ii
|
\4
DIM. H '~ I ® DIM. J
%
t . . . . . .
R ,_,,.--~ ,
. SIDE B
SIDE A
DETAIL F 1-44G-817
..J W
i I
R Dimension H shall not exceed 0.100 inch.

R Dimension J shall not exceed 0.100 inch.
Sun and Bull Gear Inspection and Repair 72-10-13
Figure 215 Page 236
UP136688
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANdAL
2. G. Inspect Sun and Bull Gear Assembly (See Figure 215)
(1) V i s u a l l y inspect gear teeth for corner breakage. Repair damaged

gear teeth in accordance with Approved Repairs, i f damaye does not
exceed the following l i m i t s .
(a) Corner damage shall not extend beyond dimensions H and J.

(See Figure 215.)
(b) Corner breakage on more than three gear teeth is not

acceptable.
(c) Corner breakage on side A and side B of same gear tooth is not
acceptable.
(d) Corner breakage on two adjacent teeth is not acceptable.
C2) Inspect bull gear tooth load surface f o r defects such as scoring,
p i t t i n g , and chipping. Visual defects on bull gear teeth is ac-
ceptable as long as defects cannot be f e l t usin9 a 0.031 inch d i -
ameter stylus.
(3) Perform visual inspection of planetary drive end of sun gear teeth
f o r wear. I f gear teeth exhibit surface distress over a localized
area, return assembly to an AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l -
i t y f o r involute inspection.
NOTE: In addition to streakin 9, indicated in following step,

an unusual increase of iron content, shown in SOAP
analysis, may also serve as an i n d i c a t o r of internal
spline wear (between sun and bull gears).
R (Part No. 3107037-2/-4/-5/-6) Evidence of brownish

R discoloration or streaking is acceptable and is not
R cause to r e j e c t sun and bull gear assembly.
(4) (Pre SB 72-0606 and Part No. 3107037-1/-3/-18/-19) V i s u a l l y in-

spect mating surfaces of retaining nut, bearing inner races, sun
and bull gear f o r evidence of f r e t t i n g . Fretting is indicated by a
brownish d i s c o l o r a t i o n or streaking at mating surfaces. If fret-
t i n g is indicated, s p e c i f i c torque value on retaining nut may have
been l o s t , which could cause excessive internal spline wear between
sun and bull gear. Replace or return cQnponents to the following
f o r evaluation.
(a) Return sun and bull gear with bearings to an AlliedSignal

authorized service f a c i l i t y .
(b) Return planetary bearing and gear sets (four) to an

AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y capable of perfonning
a required i n v o l u t e inspection.
72-10-13
UP136688
Page 237
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. G. (5) Inspect bearings as follows.
(a) Do not rBnove inner race fro~l sun and bull gear assBnbly.
(b) Clean bearings of sun and bull gear assembly in accordance

with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, step I . D . ( 2 ) .

Practices.
(d) Inspect f o r evidence of r o t a t i o n of inner race on gearshaft

( i . e . bearing inner race loose on yearshaft).
(e) Re-oil bearings with clean approved engine o i l .
(f) I f bearings do not meet the inspection requirements of steps
(c) throuyh (e) replace or return sun and bull gear assembly
and bearing (matched set) to an AlliedSignal authorized ser-
vice f a c i l i t y .
H. Inspect Shouldered Shaft and Tube Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect shouldered shaft teeth f o r scoring, p i t t i n g , and chipping.

Visual defects on gear teeth are acceptable i f defects cannot be
f e l t using a 0.031 inch diameter stylus.
(2) Inspect tube assembly in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
(3) Replace part that does not meet inspection requir~lents.

UP136688
72-10-13
Page 238
Aug 4/94
/~!lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ Signal
. C1ean i ng/Pa i nt in g
(I) Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for general cleaning instruc-



All standard metallic hardware

201 15 Tube Assy X
25 Shaft
90 Diaphragm Assembly
202 15, 35 Oil Jet Assemblies X X

55, 125, Bearing*
130, 155
65 Plug X X
85, 105, Gearshaft
150, 200
120 Retainer
145, 205 Spring Washer
190 Plug
203 55 Restrictor Assembly

100 Transfer Tube
155 Strainer X X
160, 190 Oil Tube
175 Transfer Tube
204 30 Tube Assembly
*Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, paragraph D for special cleaning

instructions.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 239
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ,.ed
Signal
4. Approved Repairs
required for Approved Repairs. Table 205 provides a l i s t
of special tool, fixtures and equipment required for Ap-
proved Repairs.

Any Approved engine oil Cemmercially avail able
Epoxy resin Epoxylite Corp, 9400 Toledo Way, P.O.

(Epoxyl ire 6203) Box 19671, Irvine, CA 92713
Nitric acid (Federal Commercially ava i I able
Speci f i cati on 0-N-350)
Sodium di cromate Commercial ly available
Touch-up solution (Dow i) Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 240
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal L•lslied
Item Source/
No, Nomenclature Use Part No.
1. Inspection Mounting Used to mount greacase oil 284484-1-1

Plate scavenge pump when checking
freedom of rotation.
2. Spanner Wrench Used to check freedom 284602-1-1

of rotation of gearcase oil
scavenge pump.
. S t a r t e r Shaft Used to remove and install 296764-1
Mechanical Puller starter drive gearshaft.
(Pre SB 72-0416)
4. Spline Adapter Used to remove and i n s t a l l 298062-1

Puller Set plined adapter from internal
spline of s t a r t e r drive gear
shaft. (Post SB 72-0416)
4. A. Repair Sun and Bull Gear Teeth (See Figure 215)
R CAUTION: USE CARETO AVOID CONTAMINATINGSUN AND BULL

R GEAR ASSEMBLYCOMPONENTSWITH FILINGS DURING
R REPAIR.
R (1) Repair gear teeth corner breakage by blending with a stone. Blend
R repair shall not exceed the following limits.
R (a) Repair shall not exceed dimensions specified in figure 215.
R (b) No more than three gear teeth may be repaired.
R (c) Side A and side B corner repair of same tooth is not allowed.
R (d) Repair of two adjacent teeth is not allowed.
R (2) Surface finish shall be AA63 or better after blending.

UP136688
72-10-13
Page 241
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal 0
HAiNTEI~ANCE HANUAL
A E R S PAC E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 7Z-01-27)
4. B. Repair Diaphragm Housings
(1) Repair damaged insert or threaded boss f o r scavenge tube f i t t i n g

port as follows. (See Figures 216 and 217.)
(a) I f forward diaphragm housing does not have i n s e r t previously

i n s t a l l e d , prepare housing as f o l l o w s .
i Machine damaged scavenye port surface and threads. (See

Figure 216.)
2 Apply touch-up solution (Dow i ) to bare metal area of

reworked port using an acid r e s i s t a n t brush. Prepare
touch-up solution by mixing three ounces of sodium
dichromate and three ounces of n i t r i c acid with enough dem-
ineralized or a i s t i l l e d water to make one p i n t of s o l u t i o n .
Allow solution to stand f o r one to two minutes.
3 Clean new i n s e r t and diaphragnl housing in accoraance w i t h

72-00-00, Cleaning/Paintiny, Cleaning Method No. 2.
DRILL0.75 IN. DIA THRUTO REMOVEUNSTRIPPED

THREADS,MACHINETHREADS15/16(0.9375) -
16UN - 2BTO DEPTHAS SHOWN.
0.010 TO
~ MACHINETHIS 0°020 IN.
(REF)
ROUGHSURFACE
\
1 tl
0.480 TO 0.716 TO
i 0.500IN.
l
0.094 IN.
RELIEF
L 1
I
0,726 IN.
(REF)
0,218 IN.
~ UNSTRIPPEDTHREADS(REF) (REF)
0.9375 IN.
DIA
1-44A-1962
Re~#ork of Scavenge Tube Fitting Port

UP136688
Figure 216 72-10-13

R Page 242
Aug 4/94
ignal
~ lslied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
. B. (1) (b) I f forward diaphragm housing had i n s e r t previously i n s t a l l e d ,
prepare housing as follows. (See f i g u r e 217.)
1 D r i l l out lock pins and remove damaged i n s e r t .
2
m
Clean new insert and diaphragm housing in accordance with
72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 2.
(c) (Forward diaphragm housing, Part No. 3101025-X) I n s t a l l new
insert Part No. 3102391-1 i n t o housing with epoxy resin
(Epoxylite 6203) and tighten to a torque value of 375 inch-
pounds. Cure at room temperature f o r 24 hours.
(d) (Forward diaphragm housing, Part No. 3103728-3) I n s t a l l new

insert Part No. 3102391-2 with new packing into housing and
tighten to a torque value of 375 inch-pounds.
R (e) Pressure test insert i n s t a l l a t i o n using 150 psig a i r pressure.

R Leakage is not allowed.
* PACKING ~ SURFACEA
_. J INSiRT
_ 1.125 IN.
R
0.1253 IN. DIA
HOLE BY 0.28 TO
0.32 IN. DEEP ('rYP) 0
SECTION A-A
LOCK PIN LOCATION
F-44G-854
*Used with i n s e r t Part No. 3102391-2 only
UP136688
I n s t a l l i n g Lock Pins in Scavenge Tube F i t t i n g Port

Figure 217 72-10-13
Page 243
Aug 16/89
,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ' ~Signal

UP136688
72-10-13
Page 244
Aug 16/89
Allied-SignalAerospaceComps,7
ignal
~_/lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
-,,,,,(~.
45
20
l
55
10
,o 1
25
l
30
15
E-44A-6634
UP136688
Gearcase Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly

Figure 218 72-10-13
R Page 245
Aug 16/89
/lied
. B. (1) (f) D r i l l two equally spaced lock pin holes in accordance with
Figure 217 using a size 31 d r i l l .
(g) Press Lock Pins, Part No. S9008A163 into place 0.000 to 0.020
inch below Surface A. (See figure 217.)
C. Inspect and Repair Gearcase Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly

(1) Disassemble gearcase o i l scavenge pump assembly as follows. (See
figure 218.)
NOTE: Gearcase o i l scavenge pump assembly may be

disassembled to inspect condition of rotor
sets, and to inspect pump i n t e r i o r for conta-
mination in event of o i l system
contamination.
Keep outlet plate, body assembly, and body
end assembly together as a matched set.
(a) Separate outlet plate from body assembly.
NOTE: Keep rotor sets (15, 45) together as a matched

set.
(b) C a r e f u l l y remove r o t o r set (15) from shaft of body end.

Remove key.
(c) Removebody assembly from shaft of body end assembly. Remove

packings from body assembly.
NOTE: Keep rotor sets (15, 45) together as a matched
set.
(d) Carefully remove rotor set (45) from shaft of body end
assembly. Removekey.
KEY TO FIGURE 218
5. SCREW 4O. BODYASSY

10. OUTLETPLATE ASSY 45. ROTORSET
15. ROTORSET 50. PACKING
2O. PACKING 55. PACKING
25. PACKING 60. KEY
30. PACKING 65. END ASSY
35. KEY
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 246
Aug 16/89
Allied-SignalAerospaceCompan~
/lied
t
DIM. D
I DIA A
1-44G-875
R Dimension A shall be 2.9970 inch minimum.

R Dimension D shall not exceed 0.010 inch maximum.
Inspection of Matched Rotor Set PN 865101-1

UP136688
Figure 219 72-10-13

Page 247
Aug 16/89
Allied=SignalAerospaceCompany
/lied
4. c. (2) Inspect matched rotor set as follows. (See Figure 228.)
(a) Inspect rotor (gerotor) teeth and pockets for evidence of ab-
normal and deep wear patterns. I f visual inspection reveals
abnormal or deep wear patterns, dimensionally check part as
shown in Figure 219.
(b) Replace as a matched set i f Inspection/Check requirements are

not met.
(3) Inspect gearcase oil scavenge pump as follows. (See Figure 218.)
(a) Clean pump components in accordance with 72-00-00,
(b) Inspect interior of outlet plate, body housing, body end as-
R sembly for scratches and gouges.
R 1_ Gouges are not allowed.
R Minor scratches less than 0.005 inch deep are allowed.
R (c) Replace gearcase oil scavenge pump i f inspection requirements
R are not met.
(4) Assemble gearcase oil scavenge pump assembly as follows. (See

Figure 218.)
NOTE: Rotor sets (15, 45) may be assembled without

regard to position of side markings. Lubri-
cate rotor sets with clean engine oil prior
to installation in body assembly.
(a) Install key. Install rotor set (45) on shaft of body end as-
sembly, aligning key.
NOTE: Lubricate packings with clean engine oil or
installation.
(b) Install body assembly, with new packings, over shaft of body
end assembly and rotor set, aligning body assembly with body
end assembly.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 248
Aug 12/91
Allied-Signal Aerospace Compar~!~

/,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-~=~Signal
NOTE: Rotor sets (15, 45) may be assembled without
regard to position of side markings. Lubri-
cate rotor sets with clean engine o i l p r i o r
to i n s t a l l a t i o n in body assembly.
4. c. (4) (c) I n s t a l l key. I n s t a l l rotor set (15) on shaft of body end as-
sembly, aligning key.
(d) I n s t a l l o u t l e t plate over shaft of body end assembly in align-
ment with body assembly.
(e) Mount pump assembly on 284484-1-1 plate and secure with four
bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds.
I n s t a l l screw (5) and tighten to a torque value of 8 ±2 inch-
pounds.
(f) Using 284602-1-1 wrench, check pump assembly f o r freedom of

rotation.
(g) I f pump rotation is s a t i s f a c t o r y , remove pump from 284484-1-1
plate.
(h) I f pump r o t a t i o n is not s a t i s f a c t o r y , disassemble, inspect,
and reassemble pump.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 249
Aug 16/89
,,'Allied
MAI NTEr'JANCE MANUAL ~'~Signal
STARTER
MOUNTING
FLANGE
KNURLED
INNER BEARING OUTER BEARING EXPANDING
KNOB
STARTER-GENERATOR
FLANGED NUT
/
DRIVE GEARSHAFT
\
ASSEMBLED
PULLER AN D
INSTALLATION
•
'BEARING J
EXPANDERS
/ RO DS
RETAINER ACCESSORY PULLER BASE

DIAPHRAGM DRIVE
HOUSING
-'---- DIM. A
J
~ FREEZE AREA "--'-
I ..F,,,,. J L
I
_
\ '% m
\
SPLINES
, DIM. B
1-44G-939
(Pre SB 72-0416)
Removal and Installation of Starter-Generator Drive Gearshaft
UP136688
Figure 220 72-10-13

Page 250
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE MINIMIZED.
R REFER TO 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, FOR HANDLING
R PROCEDURES.
R (POST SB 72-0416 OR 72-0730) SPLINED ADAPTER MUST BE
R REMOVED, PRIOR TO REMOVING STARTER DRIVE GEARSHAFT,
R OR DAMAGETO ADAPTER MAY OCCUR.
NOTE: Starter-generator drive gearshaft replacement can be

accomplished without removing diaphragm using 296764-1
s t a r t e r shaft mechanical puller.
4. D. Remove and Replace Starter-Generator Drive Gearshaft
(1) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft using 296764-1 s t a r t e r

R shaft mechanical p u l l e r as follows. (See Figure 220 or 220A.)
NOTE: Measurements taken are f o r the purpose of en-

suring starter-generator drive gearshaft has
bottomed in inner bearing.
(a) Remove starter shaft oil seal in accordance with 72-10-08,

R (b) Measure Dimension A, Figure 220 or 220A from s t a r t e r mounting
flange to end of starter-generator drive gearshaft. Record
measurement.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0416) Assemble 296764-1 starter shaft mechanical
p u l l e r with large end of expanders positioned against the
knurled expanding knob as shown in Figure 220.
R (d) (Post SB 72-0416) Assemble 296764-1 starter shaft mechanical

R p u l l e r with small ena of expanders positioned against the
R knurled expanding knob as shown in Figure 220A.
(e) I n s t a l l and secure expanders, component of 296764-1 s t a r t e r

shaft mechanical p u l l e r , on rod with extension spring.
(f) Insert expanders i n t o starter-generator drive gearshafto Turn
knurl knob u n t i l expanders are t i g h t within starter-generator
drive gearshaft.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 251
Aug 12/91
AIIF~d.SignalAerospaceCompany
lslied
STARTER
MOUNTING
FLANGE
KNURLED
INNER BEARING OUTER BEARING EXPANDING
KNOB
DELVE GEARSHAFT FLANGED NUT
/
[>
BOLT
ASSEMBLED
EXTENSION SPRING PULLERAND
INSTALLATION
.,4
BEARING
RETAINER
ACCESSORY
EXPANDERS
/ ROD S
D IAPHRAGM PULLERBASE
DRIVE
HOUSING
"11" DIM. A
i
FREEZEAREA--~J
r~ I L
SPLINES
~J
L T
I DIM. B |
1-44G- 1094
R (Post SB 72-0416) Removal and Installation of

R Starter-Generator Drive Gearshaft
UP136688
R Figure 220A 72-10-13

Page 252
Aug 12/91
Allied.Signal Aerospace Companj~~

E,~_/lied
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING STARTER-GENERATORGEARSHAFT, CARE
MUST BE TAKEN TO ENSURE INNER BEARING DOES NOT
FALL INTO INTERMEDIATE HOUSING. WHENGEARSHAFT
OUTER BEARING HAS CLEAREDMOUNTING FLANGE,
VISUALLY CHECKTO DETERMINE IF INNER BEARING
HAS REMAINED ON STARTER-GENERATORDRIVE
GEARSHAFT. IF THIS HAS OCCURRED, CAREFULLY
RESTRAIN INNER BEARING AND REMOVE INNER BEARING
WITH STARTER-GENERATORDRIVE GEARSHAFT.
4. D. (i) (g) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft and outer bearing by

holding rod end and turning flanged nut clockwise.
(h) Removestarter-generator drive gearshaft from 296764-1 s t a r t e r

shaft mechanical puller.
(i) Refer to l . A . ( 3 ) ( e ) for removing outer bearing from s t a r t e r -

generator drive gearshaft.
(J) Measure Dimension B, Figure 220 or 220A from inner bearing

step to splined end of removed starter-generator drive
gearshaft. Record measurements.
(2) I f inner bearing was removed during removal of starter-generator

drive gearshaft, perform the following.
(a) Carefully remove bolt and inner bearing retainer through
starter-generator drive gearshaft cavity.
(b) Install inner bearing into bearing cavity and secure with
bearing retainer and bolt. Tighten bolt (45, figure 202) to a
(3) I n s t a l l starter-generator drive gearshaft using 296764-1 starter

shaft mechanical puller as follows.
(a) Measure Dimension B, Figure 220 or 220A from inner bearing
step to splined end of new starter-generator drive gearshaft.
Record measurement.
(b) Ensure bearing is installed properly on spline end of s t a r t e r -

(c) (Pre SB 72-0416) Ensure plug with packing are installed in
starter-generator drive gearshaft.
(d) Removeassembled rods from 296764-1 starter-generator shaft
mechanical puller base.
R (e) (Pre SB 72-0416) Assemble 296764-1 starter shaft mechanical
R puller with large end of expanders positioned against the
R knurled expanding knob as shown in Figure 220.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 252A
Aug 12/91
~Uied
4. D. (3) (f) (Post SB 72-0416) Assemble 296764-1 starter shaft mechanical

p u l l e r with small end of expanders positioned against the
knurled expanding knob as shown in Figure 220A.
(g) Install and secure expanders on rod with extension spring.
(h) Insert expanders into starter-generator drive gearshaft. Turn

knurl knob until expanders are t i g h t within starter-generator
drive gearshaft.
(i) Using assembled rods as a handle, submerge starter-generator

drive gearshaft in dry ice 1 1/2 inch depth f o r 30 minutes.
CAUTION: ENSURE IDLER GEARSHAFT TEETH ARE ALIGNED
AND IN PROPER POSITION FOR STARTER-
GENERATOR DRIVE GEARSHAFT ENGAGEMENT.
(J) Using assembled rods as a handle, i n s t a l l starter-generator

drive gearshaft.
(k) Remove 296764-1 s t a r t e r shaft mechanical p u l l e r .

UP136688
72-10-13
Page 252B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL •lslied
ignal
/ ACCESSORY
~k..x. ~ " " DRIVE.HOUSING
ADAPTER '[
~, /~1 ~ ~ ..--SNAPRING
SPL,NED ADAPTER" II I II----~ \ STARTER-G~NE,~TOR
/ ~ / ACCESSORY
J~ ~""x~J DRIVEHOUSING
II J ~ STARTERGENERATOR
INSTALLER~ II I I ~ /
~--'hl I ~ " J ] ~ SNAPR,NG
ADAPTER
F-44G-794
R (Post SB 72-0416 or 72-0730)

Removal and I n s t a l l a t i o n of Starter-Generator Drive
UP136688
Gearshaft Splined Adapter Assembly

Figure 221 72-10-13
Page 253
Aug 12/91
l s l i e d
. D. (3) (I) Compare previous measurements of Dimension B of old and new

starter-generator drive gearshaft. I f Dimension B of new
starter-generator drive gearshaft is more than Dimension B of
old starter-generator gearshaft, subtract the difference from
o r i g i n a l Dimension A measured in step (1)(b). I f Dimension B
of new starter-generator drive gearshaft is less than Dimen-
sion B of old starter-generator gearshaft, add the difference
from original Dimension A measured in step (1)(b).
R (m) Measure Dimension A, Figure 220 or 220A, from s t a r t e r mounting

flange to end of starter-generator drive gearshaft and compare
with original Dimension A as corrected in step ( I ) , to ensure
that starter-generator drive gearshaft is f u l l y i n s t a l l e d .
(n) I f starter-generator drive gearshaft is not f u l l y i n s t a l l e d

reaccomplish paragraph 4.D.
(o) I n s t a l l starter shaft oil seal in accordance with 72-10-08,

R CAUTION: USE OF TOOLS TO INSTALL SPLINED ADAPTER OTHER THAN

R 298062-1SPLINED ADAPTER PULLER SET MAY CAUSE DAMAGE
R TO BEARINGS AND GEARS.
R NOTE: Splined adapter may be removed or i n s t a l l e d with

R starter-generator drive gearshaft removed or i n s t a l l e d
R on engine.
E. (Post SB 72-0416 or 72-0730) Remove and Replace Starter-Generator Drive

Gearshaft Splined Adapter Assembly (See Figures 202 and 221)
(1) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter as

follows.
(a) Attach 298062-13 remover to starter-generator drive gearshaft
by engaging threaded rod into key washer.
(b) Hold nut and rotate threaded rod clockwise to remove splined
adapter. Remove 298062-13 remover from splined adapter.
(c) Remove snap ring and key washer from splined adapter. I f ser-
viceable, snap ring and key washer may be reused during
installation.
UP136688
72-10-13
Page 254
Aug 12/91
/~/lied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL ignai
4. E. (2) Install starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter as
follows.
(a) Install key washer into splined adapter and secure with snap
ring.
(b) Install splined adapter assembly over 298062-11 installer~
(c) Attach 298062-11 to starter-generator drive gearshaft by en-
gaging threads of 298062-11 i n s t a l l e r to threads in starter-
(d) Turn flanged nut clockwise until splined adapter is f u l l y
seated into splined bore of starter-generator drive gearshaft.
Remove 298062-11 i n s t a l l e r from starter-generator drive
gearshaft.
NOTE: When the splined adapter is worn beyond l i m i t s ,
the following repair may be accomplished in lieu
of splined adapter replacements.
(3) Repair gearshaft splined adapter.
(a) Using procedures in step (1), p a r t i a l l y remove the splined
adapter until approximately 2/3 of the adapter is out of the
gearshaft.
(b) Cutoff the exposed portion of the splined adapter.
(c) Reseat the portion of splined adapter that remained within the
gearshaft. Refer to step (2).
(d) Reverse the cutoff portion of the splined adapter and insert
into gearshaft.
UP136688
72-10-13
R Page 255/256
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORSION SHAFT ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Item Source/
1. Gear Train Lock Used to hold rotating 284689-1-1/

group in a fixed position -2-1
when checking torsion shaft
coupling security.
. Bushing Pliers Used to remove and i n s t a l l 285768-1-1

bushings from torsion shaft.
. Shaft Support Used to support compressor 285772-1-1

bearing when removing torsion
shaft.
. Torquing Holder Used to hold rotating group 287416-1-1

and Adapter in a fixed position when re-
moving or i n s t a l l i n g bearing
retaining nut to main shaft.
. Torsion Shaft Used to remove torsion shaft 291171-1

Hydraulic Removal from engine.
Fi xture
. Puller, Torsion Used to remove, i n s t a l l 294208-1

Shaft or reposition torsion shaft
when bushings are replaced.
. Torsion Shaft Used to remove or i n s t a l l 296401-1

Mechanical Puller torsion shaft.
UP136688
72-10-14
Page 201
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
..,%
.-. .+.., .- .
......:_...............-.+...
.::.:, +- . .~..-... \
x _ . .~ . .- ~ ' ..-'o. ~..-.:"
\ \ ....... +.,, .
o ; + + + + ....
10'-"'-'~ %~ ~'15
5. TORSIONSHAFT (IPC FIG. 153) 25. BUSHING

10. PACKING 35. BUSHING
15. BUSHING 40. RING
UP136688
(Pre SB 72-0119) Torsion Shaft Assembly

Figure 201 72-10-14
Page 202
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1. a. Disassemble Engine to Gain Access to Torsion Shaft

Practices.
(3) (Codes DA-FB) Remove start pressure regulator. Refer to 73-10-03,
(6) Remove o i l j e t or l u b r i c a t i o n nozzle. Refer to 72-10-10, Mainte-

nance Practices.
(7) Remove torsion spline ( q u i l l ) shaft and coupling. Refer to
(8) Remove diaphragm. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
(9) Remove turbine o i l i n l e t retainer shield. Refer to 72-50-01, Main-

tenance Practices.
(I0) Remove t a i l cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(11) Remove turbine o i l i n l e t tube and o i l j e t . Refer to 72-50-03,

(12) Remove turbine o i l scavenge pump assembly. Refer to 72-50-04,

UP136688
72-10-14
Page 203
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
.o.-"
: .~. .K,~' ,~ .., "; ';.'," ~',,.

."~ \ •:'-' ~,;,.,..;
!i -.,., ~, ~i ~. ° i.~
! ,~;-",~ ..............
.~ ,.'-:
...,,-'.-
~,
d~ ~ " ~%
,, ~.-~
:~,
I
, ,,~.~,~~.'~,"
~ ....~ ~ - . \,~ :? ~,'.:"

\,\ \.
I
\ x~.s~ .'~%....,
,.,~,,..,~ ",..,-,~¢.....
-., ,--.;
•, , ..-" |i
, ":;: ..-
\ ~ ' .',~."
,~'. ....
35 100
5O
E-44G-769
30 50
10 45
5. TORSIONSHAFT (IPC FIG. 2 OR 3) 40. RING

10. BUSHING(IPC FIG. 2 OR 3) 45. PACKING(IPC FIG. 3)
30. PACKING(IPC FIG. 2) 50. BUSHING
35. BUSHING 100. RING
UP136688
(Post SB 72-0119) Torsion Shaft Assembly and Bushings

Figure 202 72-10-14
Page 204
Dec 14/87
lied
1. B, Remove Torsion Shaft (See Figures 201 and 202)
(1) Loosen compressor main shaft nut using 287416-1-1 torquing holder
and adapter.
NOTE: I f d i f f i c u l t y is encountered when removing torsion
shaft, use 291171-1 torsion shaft hydraulic
removal fixture.
R Prior to removing torsion shaft, check security of
R torsion shaft coupling in accordance with
R Inspection/Check.
R Install 284689-1-1/-2-1 gear train lock when

R checking torsion shaft coupling security.
(2) Torsion shaft removal. I f 291171-I torsion shaft hydraulic removal

fixture is used, proceed to step (a). I f 296401-1 torsion shaft
mechanical puller is used, proceed to step (b).
(a) Removetorsion shaft using 291171-1 torsion shaft hydraulic

removal fixture.
NOTE: Do not remove turbine bearing and associ-

ated components.
1 Removeturbine end main shaft nut. Refer to 72-50-06,
2 Install 285772-1-1 shaft support on forward face of acces-

sory drive housing to relieve pressure against compressor
bearing during torsion shaft removal.
3 Install 291171-1 torsion shaft hydraulic removal fixture on
turbine end of main shaft. Using push rods and hydraulic
pressure, push torsion shaft out through compressor end of
main shaft.
(b) Removetorsion shaft using 296401-1 torsion shaft mechanical
puller.
1 Install 296401-1 torsion shaft mechanical puller at com-
pressor end of main shaft.
2 Pull torsion shaft out through compressor end of main shaft

by turning mechanical puller handle.
(3) (Post SB 72-0119) Remove bushing (10, figure 202) from torsion
shaft.
(4) Using 285768-1-1 bushing pliers, remove bushings (15, 25, 35,
Figure 201 or 35, 50, figure 202) from torsion shaft.
UP136688
72-10-14
Page 205
Aug 12/91
~:~/lied
1. B. (5) Remove packing and rings.
(6) Remove 291171-1 or 296401-1 torsion shaft removal f i x t u r e .
(7) I n s t a l l main shaft (turbine end) nut. Refer to 72-50-06, Mainte-

nance Practices.
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packings with any approved engine o i l

or l u b r i c a n t (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
installation.
C. I n s t a l l Torsion Shaft Assembly (See Figures 201 and 202)

(1) Tighten Main shaft nut (compressor end). Refer to 72-10-19, Main-
tenance Practices.
CAUTION: DO NOT FORCE TORSION SHAFT INTO MAIN SHAFT. IF
DIFFICULTY IS ENCOUNTERED, REMOVE SHAFT AND IN-
SPECT INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SPLINES FOR BURRS.
REMOVE BURRS AND REINSTALL SHAFT.
(2) Install rings onto torsion shaft assembly so that slots in rings
are 180 degrees apart. I n s t a l l new packing on torsion shaft.
(3) Determine proper size torsion shaft bushings (15, 25, 35, Figure
201 or 35, 50, Figure 202) as follows.
(a) Use the following c r i t e r i a when determining proper size
bushing.
--1 Use largest dash number bushing as i n i t i a l trial size.
2 Proper size bushing w i l l have a s l i g h t resistance, but w i l l

not bind, when inserting torsion shaft (with bushing in-
stalled) i n t o main shaft.
3 Bushing end gap shall not be less than 0.005 inch when com-
pressed on torsion shaft.
(b) Using 285768-1-1 p l i e r s , i n s t a l l t r i a l size bushing (largest

dash number) on torsion shaft aft journal.
(c) Insert torsion shaft into main shaft from forward end. Ensure
c r i t e r i a l i s t e d in step (a) is met. I f c r i t e r i a is not met,
repeat procedure using smaller dash number bushing. I f t o r -
sion shaft, with bushing i n s t a l l e d , can be inserted into main
shaft and c r i t e r i a l i s t e d in step (a) is met, proper size
bushing is determined. Remove bushing and set aside.
(d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) f o r each torsion shaft journal to
determine proper size t o r s i on shaft bearings.
UP136688
72-10-14
R Page 206
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
. C. (4) Determine proper size torsion shaft bushing (10, Figure 202) as
follows.
(a) Use largest size dash number bushing as i n i t i a l trial size.
Smaller dash number is smaller bushing.
(b) Insert t r i a l size bushing into forward end of main shaft.
Proper size bushing w i l l have a s l i g h t resistance but w i l l not
bind when inserted into main shaft. Use smallest dash number
bushing u n t i l proper size bushing is determined. Remove bush-
ing and set aside.
(5) Coat bushings, determined in step (3), l i g h t l y with any approved
engine o i l . Using 285768-1-1 P l i e r s , i n s t a l l bushings (15, 25, 35,
Figure 201 or 35, 50, Figure 202) on torsion shaft.
(6) Using 294208-1 torsion shaft p u l l e r , i n s e r t torsion shaft into main
shaft from forward end. I f required, compress bushings by hand to
permit i n s t a l l a t i o n of torsion shaft assembly. Remove 294208-I
torsion shaft puller.
(7) (Post SB 72-0119) I n s t a l l bushing (10, Figure 202), determined in
step (4), as torsion shaft is being i n s t a l l e d .
D. I n s t a l l Engine Components that were Removed to Gain Access to Torsion
Shaft
(1) I n s t a l l torque sensor. Refer to 72-10-16, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Install diaphragm. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.

(3) I n s t a l l torsion spline ( q u i l l ) shaft and coupling. Refer to
(4) I n s t a l l oil j e t or l u b r i c a t i o n nozzle. Refer to 72-10-10, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(5) I n s t a l l nose cone. Refer to 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect torsion Shaft Assembly (See Figures 201 and 202)
(I) Inspect torsion shaft for cracks and breaks. No cracks or breaks
al I owed.
(2) Inspect torsion shaft external (turbine end) splines f o r wear.
Spline wear shall not exceed 0.005 inch. (See Figure 203.)
(3) Inspect torsion shaft internal splines (compressor end) for wear.
Spline wear shall not exceed 0.005 inch.
UP136688
72-10-14
Page 207
Aug 12/91
Al#ed-SignalAerospaceCompany
,Allied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL '~- Signal
2. A. (4) Inspect torsion shaft bushing journals for wear as follows. (See
figure 203.)
(a) (Torsion shaft Part No. 3102028-X) Diameter A shall not be
less than 0.7439 inch.
(b) (Torsion shaft Part No. 3102028-i/-2) Diameter D shall not be

R less than 0.717 inch. I f diameter D is less than 0.717 inch,
R r e f e r to Service Bulletins 72-0501 and 72-0502.
(c) (Torsion shaft Part No. 3102028-3) Diameter D shall not be

R refer to Service B u l l e t i n 72-0502.
(d) (Torsion shaft Part No. 3102028-4) Diameter D shall not be
R replace torsion shaft.
R (e) (Torsion shaft Part No. 868605-X) Diameter D (typical three

R places) shall be 0.7190 to 0.7210 inch. I f diameter D is not
R within l i m i t s specified, replace torsion shaft.
DIA D DIA D EXTERNAL SPLINES

DIA A
L 1 /
R H
l INTERNALSPLINES t t
1-44G-864
UP136688
Torsion Shaft Inspection (Typical)

Figure 203 72-10-14
Page 208
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL /•llied
Signal
NOTE: Torsion shaft coupling measurement and security

check shall be accomplished every torsion shaft
removal.
2. A. (5) Check torsion shaft coupling f o r proper positioning. (See figure
204. )
(a) Check coupling security by applying 218 inch-pounds torque.
No movement allowed.
(b) Neasure from end of torsion shaft (turbine end) to face of
co upl i ng.
(c) I f measurement is not 1.54 to 1.58 inches, replace torsion
shaft.
(6) Inspect inside diameter of bushing (10, figure 20) f o r wear. In-
side diameter shall be 0.7448 to 0.7454 inch.
3. Cleaning/Painting
(1) Clean a l l standard metallic hardware in accordance with 72-00-00,

(2) Clean torsion shaft in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,
(3) Clean bushing in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,
Cleaning Method No. I.
(4) Cleaning rings in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,

Cleaning Method No. i.
UP136688
72-10-14
Page 209
Aug 16/89
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
TORSIONSHAFT~ ~
J .
I COUPLING/
1.54TO
1.58IN.
1-44G-499
Measurement of Torsion Shaft Coupling

UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-14

Page 210
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TACHOMETER GEIqERATORGEARAND TORQUE SENSOR

GEAR ASSEMBLIES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOIE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of special tools, fixtures and

Item Source/
No. Nomencla tu re Use Part No.
i. Bearing and Bushing Used to re~L1ove bearings 284181-1-1

Driver from gearshaft.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press larger bearing 285177-1

Driver on tachometer drive gear-
shaft.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press smaller bearing 285178-1

Driver on tachometer drive gear-
shaft.
. Nut Staking Tool Used to stake end of locking 285747-1-I

pin in nut.
. Pin Staking Tool Used to stake locking pin 285748-1-i

in place.
. Bearing Pressing holder Used to hold various bearings 285812-1

while removing or i n s t a l l i n g
gearshafts.
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press gearshaft from 285813-1-i

291140-1)
. Fixed Depth Gage Used to measure depth of 287463-I-i/
locking pin hole. -2-1/-13-I/
-15-1/-22-1/
-24-1
. Bearing and Bushing Used to press gearshaft from 291140-1

Driver bearings. (Repl aces
285813-1-1)
72-10-15
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GVG7(~-'~A
/lied
Item Source/
I0. Torque and D r i l l Used to torque and d r i l l a 291606-1

Fixture TPE Gearshaft Assembly, then
a f t e r i n s t a l l i n g on mating
gearshaft, w i l l torque and
d r i l l t h i s assembly.
R 11. Socket Used to remove nut from 291606-15

R 896808-1 gearshaft. (Part of
R 291606-1 torque and d r i l l
R fixture.)
R 12. Socket Used to remove nut from 291606-17

R 896806-1 gear. (Part of
R fixture.)
R 13. *Torque and D r i l l Used to hold a TPE Gear Assem- 291607-1

R Fixture bly during torque and d r i l l (Replaced by
R operations on a bearing re- 296441-1)
R tainer nut.
R 14. Adapter Used to remove nut from 291607-15

R 896805-1 gear. (Part of
R fixture.)
15. Bearing I n s t a l l a t i o n Used to i n s t a l l and remove 291786-1

and Removal Driver bearing set from bore in
Set torque sensor housing and
i n s t a l l bearing set on spur
gear.
16. Bearing Flushing K i t Used to pressure flush bear- 293602-1

ings following d r i l l i n g and
pinning operation.
17. **Bearing Flushing Tool Used to pressure flush bear- 293602-15,
ings following d r i l l i n g and -17, -19
pinning operation.
*NOTE: Manufacturer strongly recommends use of 296441-1 torque and

d r i l l f i x t u r e in l i e u of 291607-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
**Components of 293602-1 Bearing Flush Kit

UP136688
72-10-15
Page 202
Aug 16/89
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL •/•llied
Signal
Item Sourc e/
18. Socket Used to remove and i n s t a l l 294940-1

nut from gearshaft.
(Used with 291606-1 torque
and d r i l l f i x t u r e . )
19. *Torque and D r i l l Used to hold a TPE Gear 296441-1

Fixture Assembly during torque and (Replaces
d r i l l operations on a bear- 291607-1)
ing retainer nut.
20. Adapter Used to remove nut from 296441-13

896805-1 gear. (Part of
296441-I torque and d r i l l
fixture.)
*NOTE: Manufacturer strongly recommends use of 296441-1 torque and

d r i l l f i x t u r e in lieu of 291607-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .

UP136688
72-10-15
Page 202A/202B
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTI ON: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE MINIFilZED.

REFER TU 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
R 1. A. Remove Tachometer Generator Gear and Torque Sensor Gear Assem-

R blies (See Figure 201 or 202)
(i) Remove beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Remove propeller pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Naintenance

Practices.
(3) (Codes DA-FB) Remove s t a r t pressure regulator. Refer to 73-10-03,

(6) Remove oil transfer tube, o i l j e t and l u b r i c a t i o n nozzle. Refer to

(7) Remove torsion spline shaft ( q u i l l ) and coupling. Refer to

(8) Remove diaphragm. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practicees
(9) Remove nut, bolts, and washers securing support. Remove support
and washers. Record number and thickness of washers (35, 65) to
aid in assembly.
R (1o) (Pre SB 72-0555) Remove assembled spur gear (85) and i n s t a l l in

291607-1 or 296441-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e . D r i l l pin out of
nut (95) as follows.
(a) Install drill b i t (1/16 inch) in d r i l ] press.
(b) (Pre SB 72-0353) D r i l l out pin by applying pressure i n t e r m i t -

tently until a 0.120 inch depth is achieved a f t e r contact with
pin.
(c) (Post SB 72-0353) D r i l l out pin by applying pressure i n t e r -

m i t t e n t l y u n t i l a 0.095 inch depth is achieved a f t e r contact
with pin.
(d) Clean chips from area. Remove nut using 291607-15 or

296441-13 adapter.
R (ii) (Pre SB 72-0555) Remove spur gear and bearing set (85) from
291607-1 or 296441-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
UP136688
72-10-15
Page 203
Aug 4/94

fi
220 " I] ,.,,. -
~ "e /~..~i -.,---- 205
_.__, ~ ~ - - - - ~ , ~ y " - - - - - 210
,30~1~,~~ l ~/.-/J~,::.,, ~
170
120
,._J;,:...:.), - ,
" ' , " +,,,

,,,;~-",,-~, "'',
:/~+',',.... "-, I t ,
.-;.. /. . . . .,,-, ,
90 .." ~ ` ,', ,' - ' , J ~ . . . + , /., , ,,,.,
\ ++ ;oo 1 . + .
115
"~':,'~,$,'.. ":j, "; ', ), '-.i"~,
"''~ l'~C~, r . , , ," , ,~-
15 1~5 20
(Post SB 72-0061, Pre SB 73-0232)

R Tachometer Generator Gear and Torque
R Sensor Gear AssBmblies Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 72-10-15

Page 204
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAIHTENANCE MANUAL
R 1. A. (11) (Pre SB 72-0555) Remove bearing set (100) from spur gear.
Discard bearing set and use new bearing set when reassembling.
(11a) (Post SB 72-0555) Remove assembled spur gear (89). Remove

retainer ring (96) and bearing (102).
(12) Remove washer (105). Remove assembled gearshaft and bearing set
(110 through 175 or 225) from housing, Press bearing (110) from
assembled gearshaft using 285812-1-1 bearing and pressing holder
an~ 291140-1 bearing and bushing d r i v e r . Discard bearing and
replace with new bearing when reassembling.
(13) Place assembled gearshaft and bearing set (115 through 175 or 225)
in 291606-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
(14) D r i l l out pin (115) from assembled gearshaft and bearing set as
follows.
(a) Install drill b i t (1/16 inch) in d r i l l press.
(b) D r i l l out pin by applying pressure i n t e r m i t t e n t l y u n t i l depth

of 0.175 inch is achieved.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0197) Clean d r i l l chips from area. Remove nut

(120) using 291606-15 socket.
(d) (Post SB 72-0197) Clean d r i l l chips from area. Remove nut

(120) using 294940-1 socket,
KEY TO FIGURE 201

, NUT 100. BEARINGSET 145. BEARING SET
10. WASHER i05, WASHER 150. SPURGEAR
15. BOLT (SPRING TENSION) 160. PIN
20. WASHER 110. BEARING 165, PLUG
25. SUPPORT 115. PIN 170. PACKING
35. WASHER 120. NUT 175. GEARSHAFT
65. WASHER 125. BEARING 205. RING
85. SPUR GEAR 130. SPACER 210. INSERT
90. PIN 135. PIN 220. PIN
95. NUT 140. NUT 225. GEARSHAFT
72-10-15
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
~lliedSignal MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

220-------~
_.....~~ a~..~ 205
150 145
,!o
175
140 135
170...~.~'~
R
5 /
120 1.:1-,,-....,/.,-
.e...,,~ %. ~ l r,,)'~s " 1,
/~w" /195190 ~,"""i~::: ....":::r~/

_ J" / ,I. , ',',11" ;,', .'". "
115 ~f"
/
~
~
~
,~,",.. I __ "
.<:-..j,,..-i.~ ",.-..
,~'-'/~,~T,.,'j ".
,, ,,,,.~ .~..~.. ,,,,..~ ' . . - ,

.~," . ~ ., ,.,,, , . ~~.v
, . , - ~ , .",..x , . ~ . ,:~,,j~,~¢:~.
,..-.~. ~."....- o . . . , ,:.i
. . ."~ "--
/ ~:~ / ~" "-'~', "-~;~~.....- i',"t'. ",----

•~ oo ; . ",'-"s% ,r ~, j
IO "-.' • I"'1
"<=' ' r" i
CE-44G-1822
(Post SB 72-0232)
R Tachometer Generator Gear and Torque Sensor
R Gear Assemblies I n s t a l l a t i o n
UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-15

Page 206
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. (15) Remove assembled gearshaft and bearing set (125 through 175 or
225) from 291606-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
(16) Using 285812-1-1 bearing and pressing holder and 291140-1 bearing
and bushing d r i v e r , press assembled gearshaft and bearing set from
bearing (125). Discard bearing and replace with new bearing when
reassembling. Remove spacer.
(17) Remove bearing set (145), pin, nut, and spur gear as an assembly
frmn gearshaft, using 284181-1-1 bearing and bushing d r i v e r .
(18) Place assembled spur gear and bearing set (135 through 150) in
291606-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
(19) D r i l l out pin (135) from assembled gearshaft and bearing set as
follows.
(a) Install drill b i t (1/16 inch) in d r i l l press.
(b) D r i l l out pin by applying pressure i n t e r m i t t e n t l y u n t i l a

depth of 0.135 inch is achieved.
(c) Clean d r i l l chips from area. Remove nut using 291606-17

socket.
(20) Remove assembled gearshaft and bearing set (145, 150) from
291606-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
(21) Using 291786-1 bearing i n s t a l l a t i o n and removal d r i v e r set, remove

bearing set (145) from gear. Discard bearing set and replace with
new bearing set when reassembling.
(22) (Pre SB 72-0486) Remove pin (160) and ~ug (165) from gearshaft.
Remove packing from plug.
(23) (Post SB 72-0486) Remove i n s e r t (210) from gearshaft in accor-

dance with Approved Repairs.
KEY TO FIGURE 202
5. NUT 100. BEARING SET 145. BEARING SET

10. WASHER 102. BEARING 150. SPUR GEAR
15. BOLT 105. WASHER 160. PIN
25. SUPPORT (SPRING TENSION) 165. PLUG
35. WASHER 110. BEARING 170. PACKING
65. WASHER 115. PIN 175. GEARSHAFT
85. SPUR GEAR 120. NUT 205. RING
89. SPURGEAR 125. BEARING 210. INSERT
90. PIN 130. SPACER 220. PIN
95. NUT 135. PIN 225. GEARSHAFT
96. INTERNAL RING RETAINER 140. NUT
72-10-15
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A

1. B. I n s t a l l Tachometer Generator Gear and Torque Sensor Gear Assemblies

(See Figure 201 or 202)
NOTE: L i g h t l y coat new packings with any approved engine

o i l or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5).

menaed general torque values. Add f r i c t i o n a l drag
(run-down) torque of s e l f - l o c k i n g devices to
recommended values.
(i) Install new packing on plug (165, Figure 201 or 202). Install plug
(165) in gearshaft (175) and secure with pin (160).
(2) (Post SB 72-0486) Install insert (210) in gearshaft in accordance

with Approved Repairs.

NOTE: Ensure manufacturer's markings on outer race of

bearing set are aligned p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(3) Align manufacturer's V mark on bearing set (145) and install new
bearing set in spur gear (150) using 291786-1 bearing installation
and removal driver set. Place spur gear and bearing set in
291606-1 torque and d r i l l fixture. Install nut (140) and tighten
to a torque value of 100 inch-pounds using 291606-17 socket.
NOTE: Install a protective rubber pad over exposed bear-

ings prior to d r i l l i n g operation.
(4) Drill and pin nut (140) as follows.
(a) Install d r i l l b i t (1/16 inch) in d r i l l press.
(b) Align 291606-1 torque and d r i l l fixture with d r i l l press so

d r i l l b i t is aligned with d r i l l guide hole in fixture.
(c) D r i l l hole by applying intermittent pressure until a depth of

0.130 to 0.150 inch is achieved. Use 287463-15-i fixed depth
gage to measure 0.130 inch depth hole and 287463-13-1 fixed
depth gage to measure 0.150 inch depth hole.
(d) Use 293602-17 bearing flushing tool to clean chips from area.
Install pin to bottom of d r i l l e d hole.
(5) Stake pin in place using 285748-1-1 pin staking tool. Use
285747-1-1 nut staking tool to offset pin hole. Removeassembly
from 291606-1 torque and d r i l l fixture.
UP136688
72-10-15
Page 208
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE NANUAL

1. B. (6) I n s t a l l assembled components on gearshaft (175 or 225). I n s t a l l

spacer and new bearing (125) using 285178-1-1 bearing and bushing
driver. I n s t a l l nut (120).
(7) Place assembled gearshaft in 291606-1 torque and d r i l l fixture.
(a) (Pre SB 72-0197) Tighten nut (120) to torque value of 80

inch-pounds using 291606-15 socket.
(b) (Post SB 72-0197) Tighten nut (120) to torque value of 80

inch-pounds usin9 294940-1 socket.
NOTE: I n s t a l l a protective rubber pad over exposed bear-

ings prior to d r i l l i n g operation.
(8) D r i l l and pin assembled gearshaft (120 through 175 or 225) as

follows.
(a) Install drill b i t (1/16 inch) in d r i l l chuck of d r i l l press.
(b) Align 291606-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e with d r i l l press so

d r i l l b i t is aligned with d r i l l guide hole in f i x t u r e .
(c) D r i l l hole by applying i n t e r m i t t e n t pressure u n t i l a depth of

0.170 to 0.190 inch is achieved. Use 287463-1-1 fixed depth
gage to measure 0.170 inch depth hole and 287463-2-1 fixed
depth gage to measure 0.190 inch depth hole.
(d) Use 293602-19 bearing flushing tool to clean chips from area.
I n s t a l l pin to bottom of d r i l l e d hole.
(e) Stake pin using 2B5748-1-1 pin staking tool and o f f s e t pin
hole using 285747-1-1 nut staking t o o l .
(9) Remove assembled gearshaft from 291606-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e

and i n s t a l l new bearing ( I i 0 ) on gearshaft using 285177-i-1 bearing
and bushing driver. I n s t a l l assembled 9earshaft in housing.
CAUTION: ENSURE FUEL CONTROL DRIVE GEARSHAFTWASHER

(SPRING TENSION) IS INSTALLED IN DIAPHRA61vI BORE
PRIOR TO DIAPHRAGM INSTALLATION. SPRINGWASHER
CAN CAUSE EXTENSIVE DAHAGE IF DISLODGED INTO
GEARCASE.
(10) I n s t a l l washer (spring tension) (105) in accordance with 72-10-13,

72-10-15
UP136688
R Page 209
Aug 4/94
~[:P.71q_9 A
UiedSignal
A E R O S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Ensure manufacturer's markings on outer race of

bearing set are aligned prior to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
R 1. B. (11) (Pre SB 72-0555) Align manufacturer's V mark on bearing set and

i n s t a l l new bearing set (I00) in spur gear. Place spur gear and
bearing set in 291607-1 or 296441-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e . In-
s t a l l nut in spur gear and tighten nut (95) to a torque value of
110 inch-pounds using 291607-15 or 296441-13 adapter.
NOTE: I n s t a l l a protective rubber pad over exposed

bearings prior to d r i l l i n g operation.
(12) (Pre SB 72-0555) D r i l l and pin nut (95) as follows.
(a) Install drill b i t (1/1~ inch) in d r i l l press.
(b) Align 291607-1 or 296441-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e with

d r i l l press so d r i l l b i t is aligned with d r i l l guide hole in
fixture.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0353) D r i l l hole by applyin~ i n t e r m i t t e n t pres-

sure u n t i l depth of 0.130 to 0.150 inch is achieved. Use
287463-15-1 fixed depth gage to measure 0.130 inch depth hole
and 287463-13-1 fixed depth gage to measure 0.150 inch depth
hole.
(d) (Post SB 72-0353) D r i l l hole by applying i n t e r m i t t e n t pres-

sure u n t i l depth of 0.100 to 0.110 inch is achieved. Use
287463-24-1 fixed depth gage to measure 0.100 inch depth hole
and 287463-22-1 fixed depth gage to measure 0.110 inch depth
hole.
(e) Use 293602-15 bearing flushing tool to clean chips from area.
Install pin to bottom of hole.
(f) Stake pin in place using 285748-1-1 pin staking tool. Use
285747-1-1 nut staking tool to o f f s e t pin hole. Remove as-
sembly from 291607-1 or 296441-1 torque and d r i l l f i x t u r e .
R (12a) (Post SB 72-0555) I n s t a l l bearing (102) and retainer ring (96)

R into spur gear (89).
(13) Install assembled spur gear on torque sensor housing.

UP136688
72-10-15
Page 210
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAII~ITEI,IANCE MANUAL
1. B. (14) Perform measurements for shimming as follows. (See Figure 203.)
(a) Temporarily secure lock plate on torque sensor assembly with

slave bolts. Tighten slave bolts to a torque value of 30
i nch-pounds.
(b) Place a parallel bar across input side accessory drive

housing. (See Figure 203.)
(c) Using a depth micrometer, measure from face of housing to top

of lock plate and record as Dimension A.
(d) Remove slave bolts securing lock plate to torque sensor

assembly.
UP136688
72-10-15
Page 211
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MAI~UAL
PARALLEL BAR
/
I LOCK PLATE
INNER RACE
DIM.
SAMPLE
DIM. A = 3.948 INCH

DIM. B = 3.627 INCH
DIM. C = 0.321 INCH
Cl-44G-1347
Support Assembly Shim Requirements

UP136688
Figure 203 72-10-15

Page 212
Aug 4/94
S~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ':~Signal
1, B. (14) (b) Measure from face of housing to inner race of bearing set and
record as Dimension B. (See Figure 203.)
(c) Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A and record r e s u l t as

Dimension C.
(15) Perform measurement of support as follows. (See figure 204 or

2O5.)
(a) Fabricate a hold-down plate s i m i l a r to that shown in Figure
204 or 205 so support is secured to parallel bar. Hold-down
plate may be fabricated from any aluminum or steel material
approximately 1/8 inch t h i c k .
(b) Place the two legs of support (legs with small holes) on
parallel bar. Place hold-down plate across legs of support
and i n s t a l l bolt through hold-down plate and hole through
parallel bar. Secure bolt with washer and nut and tighten
finger t i g h t .
(c) Determine distance from parallel bar to bottom surface of leg

(surface D) of support as follows.
i Measure distance from bottom of parallel bar to bottom

surface of leg (surface D) and record as Dimension E.
2 Subtract thickness of parallel bar from Dimension E.

Record result as Dimension F which is the distance from
top surface of parallel bar to bottom surface of leg
(surface D).
(d) Subtract Dimension F from Dimension C as determined in step

(c). The remainder is the required thickness of washers
(shims) (35, 36, figure 201 or 35, figure 202) to provide a
R 0.000 to 0.002 inch interference f i t for support.
(e) (Pre SB 72-0232) I n s t a l l support, thickness of washers

(shims) as determined in step (d) above, and secure with
washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (15, figure 201) to a
torque value of 50 inch-pounds. I n s t a l l washer and nut.
Tighten nut (5, figure 201) to a torque value of 27 inch-
pounds.
UP136688
72-10-15
Page 213
Aug 16/89
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
FiAII~TENANCEMANUAL
, ~ ~ BO
LT
pO
. ~_oo~. ~
PAPAL
BOLT~ SUPPORTSURFAD
C~ SAMPLE
j_o,M. F
HOLDD
-OWP
N
LATE~.....~jJ-T~I / /
DIM. E = 1.069 IN.
THICKNESS OF
I J ,-~ I PARALLEL BAR = 0.750
DIM. F :0.319
L DIM. E
U-44A-122
(Pre SB 72-0232) MeasurBnent of Support

for Torque Sensor Gear
Figure 204 72.-10-15
UP136688
Page 214
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE HANUAL
OLT
HOLD-DOWN-
PLATE "~
IPPORT
PARALLELBAR
,HER
I
I
~ - NUT
BOLT~ SUPPORT
SAMPLE
SURFAC~D rDIM. F
DIM. E = 1.069 IN.
HOLD-DOWN PLATE~ . ~ / • THICKNESSOF
- l- 1 I
PARALLELBAR : 0.750
I ! DIM. F = 0.319
LDIM.
E-44A-5873
(Post SB 72-0232) Iqeasurement of Support

for Torque Sensor Gear
Figure 205 72-10-15
UP136688
Page 215
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCANOAL
TPE331-5 REP0" N0. 72-01-2,
POINT
SPUR
~ j3
POINT
MEASUREMENT~ . _ ~
AREA ~ /
(TYPFOUR ~ I l
PLACES) CT'l t J
DETAIL~. 1-44A-1389
UP136688
Alignment Check of Spur Gear (Typical)

Figure 206 72-10-15
Page 216
Dec 14/87
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~~-~Signal
i. B. (15) (f) (Post SB 72-0232) I n s t a l l support, thickness of washer
(shims) as determined in step (d) above, and secure with
washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (15, figure 202) to a
torque value of 50 inch-pounds. I n s t a l l washer (I0) and nut
(5). Tighten nut (5, f i g u r e 202) on Torque Sensor Housing
Part No. 3102672-1 to a torque value of 27 inch-pounds and
tighten nut (5) on Torque Sensor Housing Part No. 3102672-3
to a torque value of i00 inch-pounds.
(16) Perform alignment check of spur gear as follows. (See figure
206. )
(a) Place parallel bar across forward surface of accessory drive
housing. Using depth micrometer, measure from p a r a l l e l bar
to face of spur gear at four points.
(b) Spur gear shall be parallel at the four points within 0.004
inch.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0232) I f gear is not parallel w i t h i n 0.004 inch,
rotate the engine rotating group. Loosen and retighten the
two bolts (15, f i g u r e 201) to a torque value of 50 inch-
pounds.
(d) (Pre SB 72-0232) Loosen and retighten nut (5, figure 201) to
a torque value of 27 inch-pounds. Recheck parallelism.
(e) (Post SB 72-0232) I f gear is not parallel w i t h i n 0.004 inch,

rotate the engine rotating group. Loosen and retighten the
three bolts (15, f i g u r e 202) to a torque value of 50 inch-
pounds.
(f) (Post SB 72-0232) Loosen and retighten nut (5, figure 202)
on Torque Sensor Housing Part No. 3102672-1, to a torque
value of 27 inch-pounds. Loosen and retighten nut (5), on
Torque Sensor Housing Part No. 3102672-3, to a torque value
of 100 inch-pounds.
(g) I f parallelism is not within 0.004 inch, loosen bolts and nut
securing support and s h i f t position of support s l i g h t l y .
Retighten bolts and nut and recheck parallelism of spur gear.
(h) I f spur gear p a r a l l e l i s m is s t i l l not within 0.004 inch, ob-
t a i n a d i f f e r e n t support and repeat steps (15)(b) through
( 1 5 ) ( f ) and step (16).
(i) Replace torque sensor i f p a r a l l e l i s m is not w i t h i n 0.004 inch

and repeat shimming procedure.
UP136688
72-10-15
Page 217
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Torsion spline shaft and coupling assembly are

i n s t a l l e d and positioned during torque sensor
cal i brati on.
1. B. (17) I n s t a l l diaphragm. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
2. Inspection/Check
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE NINIMIZED. REFERTO

70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
R A. Inspect Tachometer Generator Gear and Torque Sensor Gear Assemblies (See
Figure 20i or 202)
(1) lnspect spur gears, gearshaft and bearings f o r freedom of r o t a t i o n .

Inspect gear teeth f o r chips, cracks, and uneven wear pattern.
(2) (Pre SB 72-0486) Replace gearshaft (175) i f tachometer generator

drive plug wear exceeds a nominal 0.020 inch per surface.
(3) (Post SB 72-0486) Replace i n s e r t (tachometer generator drive)

(210) i f there is any indication of internal cracks, wear depth ex-
ceeds O.01u inch, or deformation. Refer to Approved Repairs.
(4) Replace part that aoes not meet Inspection/Check requirements.

UP136688
72-10-15
Page 218
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. CleaningZPaintin ~
(i) Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for general cleaning instruc-


Figure Item Cleanin 9 Hethoas

No. No. Nomencl atu re 1 2 3 4 5 6
All standard m e t a l l i c hardware X X

201 or 25 Support X X
R 202 85, 89, Spur Gearshaft X X
150
175, 225 Gearshaft X X
95, 120, Nut X X
140
I00, 145 Bearing Set*
R 102, 110, Bearing*
125
130 Spacer X X
165 Plug X
*Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, f o r special

cleaning i n s t r u c t i o n s .
, Approved Repairs
A. (Post SB 72-0486) Remove Tachometer Generator Drive Insert (210, Figure

201 or 202)
(1) RBnove rin9 (205) from end of gearshaft (225).
(2) Using an awl, remove i n s e r t (210) from end of gearshaft (225).
(3) I f i n s e r t cannot be reaoved e a s i l y , a tap, s l i g h t l y larger than the

square hole, may be screwed into the square hole. Remove insert by
grasping tap and pulling s t r a i g h t out from end of gearshaft.
B. (Post SB 72-0486) I n s t a l l New Tachometer Generator Drive Insert
(1) P r i o r to i n s t a l l i n g new i n s e r t , ensure s l o t in insert is aligned

with a n t i - r o t a t i o n pin (220) in gearshaft.
72-10-15
UP136688
Page 219/220
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
l s l i e d

TORQUE SENSORGEAR ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOTE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of special tools, fixtures and equipment

required for Removal/Installation. Table 202 provides a l i s t of
materials and compounds required for Removal/Installation.
Item Source/
1. Orifice Plate Used in place of propeller 284459-1-1

governor for covering o i l
passages and for providing
o r i f i c e , when establishing
negative and positive torque
settings.
R 2. Coupler Indexing Used in conjunction with 287221-1-1

R Holder 285159-1-I spline position-
R ing wrench to hold coupler in
R position.
3. Torque Sensor Used to maintain proper align- 293097-1

Alignment Gage ment of torque sensor during
i n s t a l l a t i o n into input side
accessory housing.
4. Cam Assembly Used to maintain zero degree 865376-1

Lock Pin position of torque sensor
assembly during calibration.

UP136688
72-10-16
Page 201
Aug 12/91
~ lslied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
...... , .- , ..
...... . .: ; "~ ".; ,.:,;....,..

*,;- ?; .-'.- . .-~ ..
";" 2" " ~; .. ,~

,'" " { ~ 4 ; : . " "; "" ""
205 - , .
,. ~ . :t-T,-
... "~. ":~.'~.,..
:--..~.,., • -
".,', . • ..
/ : ":"", , ~ '-"~:;~ -">~':Y~." - ~" • ~' ""
I :f-'*s" : , " . . . . . . ~ . - 7tr'-z,~. ": /" ,, "s,...
' ." , "-~/~* r/,-" * .I/. , . ,' '~ =
~;~;' .~f-': ...... :...'-:-;:..::'-.':. i ', ., ,:'.

1 :'~- c.,.',,,...'----~,;:.-~i ...~ .:.. .. ~,~
1 ,~;',,.-;,'
" - " "; " -• ....... .: ~" 3 " ~:' : ' " ;" ": ,' x~'~,,
"~ '"~' :", ~ .' :"i
' '
340 :: "," . " -.',,:: ' • , , ".'
" - ~ ' ;'-'. ', / . '. " ' " -.,'7": ;," :- "' ' '','
330 ', \ .-, laO \ ~,~ ,: : '.,,--- ,.- P ~ . . . _ - : ~ ' ~ : } . . -:. -'.. ,' .' ,,,,,
~, , \\ "..•..-,.~" .~ --.'..:-.:
.t,. ,~~ . , ,..
....
/': : .~-, "j ~ .................
"
210 ".' "'. "'- "" "'. - •z ' " ./.. . . . : :e .:" •
/'~,~ .oo ~ ./'i "":.:'. , ,},~ /5 ~0 6o ~0~
~l,,\~,,,~ . ~ ,-,,~.~..,x ~ I . .,x ,, ;>~)~"-~D / 105 J~J~ L..JJ ~z/
30 3 -..,. ~/ ~...--185 . ,,.....F.~:~. ..
...~ ---.....~'.,,,----1"/5 -.~330 2o , ~
40 E-44G-1587
(Pre SB 72-0232)
Torque Sensor Gear Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n
UP136688
Figure 201 72-10-16

Page 202
Aug 12/91
/_~lied
1. A. Disassemble Engine to Accomplish Required Maintenance
NOTE: Removal of the intermediate gearbox assembly

(diaphragm) requires determination of existing en-
gine torque indicating system c a l i b r a t i o n values.

Practices.
(3) (Codes DA-FB) Remove s t a r t pressure regulator. Refer to 73-10-03,

(6) Remove oil transfer tube, o i l j e t and l u b r i c a t i o n nozzle. Refer to

KEY TO FIGURE 201
1 NUT 115. MANIFOLD 270. TRANSFERTUBE

10. BOLT 140. PACKING 280. PACKING
15. WASHER 150. BOLT 285. BOLT
20. CLAMP 155. WASHER 290. WASHER
25. BOLT 160. SCREW 295. TUBE ASSY
30. WASHER 165. WASHER 300. PACKING
R 35. BRACKET 170. RETAINER 301. NUT
R 40. BOLT 175. TUBE ASSY 302. NUT
R 45. CLAMP 180. PACKING 303. WASHER
50. WASHER 185. PACKING 305. NUT
55. WASHER 190. BOLT 310. WASHER
60. BOLT 200. KEY WASHER 315. BUSHING
70. WASHER 205. PLUG 330. BOLT
75. SCREW 210. TUBE 335. WASHER
80. WASHER 215. PACKING 340. BUSHING
85. BOLT 235. STRAINER 365. TORQUESENSOR
90. WASHER 245. STRAINER ASSY
105. INSERT 255. ADAPTER 390. WASHER (SHIM)
R ii0. PLUG 260. PACKING 485. SHIM
R 112. PIN 265. PACKING
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 203
Aug 12/91
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAIIiTENANCE MANUAL
i. A. (7) Remove t o r s i o n s p l i n e ( q u i l l ) s h a f t and c o u p l i n g . Refer to

72-10-11, Maintenance P r a c t i c e s .
(8) Remove diaphragm. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance P r a c t i c e s .
R (9) Remove tachometer generator gear and torque sensor gear assemblies.
Refer to 72-10-15, Maintenance P r a c t i c e s .
205 .~,:,
........ .~ , -;-;".',-,.
%
• : s. - -.,~. ~.. -..
1 "",,.:,.,,~ , ".--". ",..-'.:-,

/i .: ,."-~ , . ( S' . ; , Y"~.,'~i~&:
..'" :..~";"~.
, ~ -~,
~ ",
.-..". :"<"'.H.
200 ~, / I ,~.,-',.-~:~.---~'~:..~.~,. ,~ '.. .,.~.
,, ~ " ~ . . . . . , ; ,"../~-" --. .... ~ ~,', " , ' ~ ". v,'.:..
"~'~" ~'-"°~~
Iv . ~',' ,. , ~~."~: ~ -"
..... ~< . " i :' <;c .~ , ' •
,.:..:!..
, . t, ," ; "~
,;.,., '.. ,'!~
" ; ."',
=.,u \\ ~. :';; ; ~<~>~.-.:>.', , /. ~....,; ..... ; , ,
.,,~ , , .... . . . /- ..>~/;~..,,, .."._. . . . . ..$..;,~ , ,,
~fi0 ~cu "'~ ".. ~ "I ~'~.~ ,, ;,/,-,'7~.:.'-. ..... " z-4 ".
~. 395 ~ 430 ,~'C.:..-'~';\:'L'~;;.:"" .."x 'i ''~" -'"" ,
355 ~. ~, ~. (/-~..., "''~ ,"" "" " " /
" ,~' ~ . 301 ..'~1 ".:~. "," '" :<', /
~4,~ ° ~;.~ ~ ~..~ I ~...~. I ~.:, '~,. ~o , o ~
~, \~--~k'<.~.~, ~-.~,,~-. I "-.~:-l-..h ~ j ~L:-I'~
'~.~ - ~ a ~ , ~ - ~ ! ~ - ~ / . ~ - " 2,~5 ~ 2~o 'l ':::~::~ ~...-~":~'r'~c.
~ ~ \~'~'#Jz~,-~\o ." -/ ~ ' " , 85~~'~J~"" ...,-.1"" 112">
.~~' t I 315 '~ 280 / ,.,,~ 255 t ""I 165 ~ ~,'~-..-,..,~

? 305 310 ,.,,.~ 235 260 300 / 160~ ,, ,,o
302 185 . ~ /~
"o--g < - - - j f ~ . - / "
30 20 LmI~/
25 "~ i -~i) ~'~
40 E-.44G-1588
(Post SB 72-0232) Torque Sensor

Gear Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n
UP136688
Figure 2 0 2 72-10-16
Page 204
Aug 4/94
~:~lied
i. B, Remove Oil Transfer Manifold and Torque Sensor Assembly (See Figure 201
or 202)
(1) Remove bolts, washers, brackets, clamp, and tube retainers.
(2) Remove bolt and key washer securing plug or tube to accessory drive
housing. Remove plug or tube and packing.
(3) Remove b o l t s , screw, and washers securing oil transfer manifold as-
sembly to accessory drive housing. Remove packings.
(4) Remove tube assembly from torque sensor assembly. Remove packing.
(5) Remove adapter from accessory drive housing.
CAUTION: IF TORQUESENSOR CAMSET IS REMOVEDFROMTORQUE SENSOR,

USE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGETO METERING SURFACES OF CAMSET
PILOT VALVE ASSEMBLY DURING REMOVAL, HANDLING AND INSTAL-
LATION OF CAMSET.
(6) Remove bolt and nuts securing torque sensor assembly to accessory
drive housing. Carefully remove torque sensor assembly.
NOTE: Record nunlber and thickness of shims removed to aid in

reassembly. Lockwire shims to torque sensor mounting flange
to prevent loss or intermingling with compressor bearing
shims.
(7) Remove shims between torque sensor assembly and accessory drive
housing.
(8) Refer to 72-10-17, Maintenance Practices, for further disassembly.
KEY TO FIGURE 202

. NUT 90. WASHER 205. PLUG 303. WASHER
10. BOLT 105. INSERT 210. TRANSFERTUBE 305. NUT
15. WASHER 110. PLUG 215. PACKING 310. WASHER
20. CLAMP 112. PIN 235. STRAINER 315. BUSHING
25. BOLT 115. MANIFOLD 245. STRAINER 330. BOLT
30. WASHER 140. PACKING 255. ADAPTER 335. WASHER
35. BRACKET 150. BOLT 260. PACKING 340. BOLT
40. BOLT 155. WASHER 265. PACKING 345. WASHER
45. CLAMP 160. SCREW 270. TRANSFERTUBE 350. BUSHING
50. WASHER 165. WASHER 280. PACKING 355. TORQUESENSOR
55. WASHER 170. RETAINER 285. BOLT ASSY
60. BOLT 175. TUBEASSY 290. WASHER 360. WASHER(SHIM)
70. WASHER 180. PACKING 295. TUBEASSY 395. WASHER(SHIM)
75. SCREW 185. PACKING 300. PAKING 420. WASHER(SHIM)
80. WASHER 190. BOLT 301. NUT 430. SHIM
85. BOLT 200. KEY WASHER 302. NUT
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 205
Aug 12/91
lslied
1. C. Install Oil Transfer Manifold, Torque Sensor Assembly and Fittings
(run-down torque) of self-locking devices to
recommended values.
Lightly coat new packings with clean engine oil or
installation.
(1) Install direct drive fuel control gearshaft. Refer to 72-10-17,
TOP OF GEARBOX
/
TORQUE SENSOR
6.290 TO DIM. X
6.30( IN.
DIM
R
SHIMS
, IliTSHIMS
GEARBOX
DIM. Y
SHIMS REQUIRED : Z - (X +Y)
SIDE A
Z
1-44G-1125
R Shimming for Torque Sensor Installation (Side A)

UP136688
R Figure 203 (Sheet I of 2) 72-10-16

Page 206
Aug 12/91
~=~lslied
TOP OF GEARBOX
/
1 TORQUE SENSOR T
/
6.290 TO DIM. X
6.300 IN.
SIDE B
I DIM. Z
I
t I
SHIMS
iI SHIMS
DIM. Y
GEARBOX
SHIMS REQUIRED = Z -~X + Y )
SIDE B
Z 1-44G-1126
UP136688
Shimming for Torque Sensor Installation (Side B)

Figure 203 (Sheet 2) 72-10-16
Page 206A
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
IqAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: CARE SHOULD bE TAKEN TO INSTALL SHINS PROPERLY ON

TOP OF RbTAINER. ACCURATEMEASUREMENTSMUST BE
TAKEN FOR SHIMMING PROCEDURESOF TORi~UE SENSOR CON-
PONEi~TS TO ENSURE PROPERALIGNMENT OF CONPONENTS.
R NOTE: Prior to performing step (1), ensure bearing c a r r i e r

R retainer nuts are tightened to a torque value of 80
R inch-pounds.
i. C. (2) Place a parallel bar on face of accessory housing. With a depth

micrometer, measure the distance from the face of accessory housing
to face of bearing c a r r i e r retainer. Remove bearing c a r r i e r
retainer nuts and i n s t a l l shims (485, Figure 201 or 430, Figure
202) as required to obtain a dimension of 6.290 to 6.300 inches.
(See Figure 203.)
(3) (Post SIS 72-0232) Temporarily i n s t a l l and secure torque sensor us-
ing bearing c a r r i e r retainer nuts. Tighten nuts (302, 305, Figure
202) f i n g e r t i g h t .
NOTE: Ensure torque sensor housing does not bind on ac-

cessory drive housing in area shown in Figure 218.
(4) (Post SB 72-0232) Check gap between torque sensor housing and ac-
cessory drive housing (Figure 218) using a 0.020 inch thickness
gage. I f gap is less than 0.020 inch, remove excess material from
accessory drive housing in accordance with Approved Repairs.
(5) (Post SB 72-0232) Remove torque sensor housing, r e i n s t a l l and

tighten bearing c a r r i e r retainer nuts finger t i g h t .
(6) I n s t a l l new packings (300) on both ends of tube assembly (295).

I n s t a l l new packings (280) on both ends of tube (270). I n s t a l l new
packings (260, 265) on adapter assembly (255). I n s t a l l new pack-
ings (180, 185) on both ends of tube assembly (175).
(7) Assemble tube assembly (175) to manifold assembly (115) and secure
with r e t a i n e r (170), washer (165), and screw (160). Tighten screw
(8) Assemble other ena of tube assembly (175) into torque sensor port
and secure with washer (155) and bolt (150). Tighten bolt to
(9) I n s t a l l tube (270) and tube assembly (295) into adapter assembly
(255). I n s t a l l adapter assembly and tubes into ports in accessory
drive housing. I n s t a l l washer (290) and bolt (285). Tighten bolt
to torque value of 4U inch-pounds.
(10) (Pre SB 72-0064) I n s t a l l plug (205) with nm~ packing and secure
plug with bolt (190) and key washer (200). Tighten bolt to torque
value of 60 inch-pounds and secure by bending tabs of key washer
against bolt head.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 206B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. C. (11) (Post SB 72-0064) I n s t a l l tube (210) with new packing and secure
tube with bolt (190) and key washer (200). Tighten b o l t to torque
value of 60 inch-pounds and secure by bending tabs of key washer
against bolt head.
CAUTION: IF TORQUE SENSOR CAMSET IS REMOVED FROMTORQUE

SENSOR, USE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGETO METERING
SURFACES OF CAMSET PILOT VALVE ASSEMBLY DURING
REMOVAL, HANDLING, AND INSTALLATION OF C~iSET.
IF TORQUE SENSOR ASSEMBLY TO BE INSTALLED IS

NOT THE TORQUE SENSOR WHICH WAS REMOVED, EN-
SURE TORQUE SENSOR HOUSING DOES NOT HAVE IN-
TERFERENCE WITH BOSSES IN ACCESSORY DRIVE
HOUSING AND TORQUE SENSOR ASSEMBLY FULLY SEATS
ON TORQUE SENSOR SHIMS.
RECORD NUMBER AND THICKNESS OF SHIMS INSTALLED

AND KEEP WITH PERMANENTENGINE RECORDS FOR
REFERENCE USE AT POSSIBLE FUTURE ENGINE
DISASSEMBLY.
(12) (Pre SB 72-0232) Determine thickness of washers (shims) as

required to obtain a 0.000 to 0.002 inch interference f i t between
the gearbox and torque sensor housing mating surface as follows.
(See Figures 201, 203 and 206.)
(a) Use a depth micrometer, measure frmn top of gearbox to torque
sensor housing mating surface of gearbox (siae B). Record as
Dimension Z. (See Figure 203.)
(b) Measure thickness of torque sensor housing nearest the bolt

hole at side B. Record as Dimension Y.
R (c) Remove the two compressor bearing c a r r i e r retainer nuts. In-

R s t a l l torque sensor on mounting pins using thickness of shims
R determined in step (1). I n s t a l l the three torque sensor
R retaining nuts and two compressor bearing c a r r i e r r e t a i n e r
R nuts loosely.
R (d) Install 293097-1 alignment tool in i d l e r gear bearing cavity

R and onto torque sensor spur gear pin. (See Figure 204.)
72-10-16
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4194
GFG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
I;'iAINTENANCE biANUAL
R CAUTION: SLEEVE BUSHING I~UST NOT PROTRUDEABOVE

R THE TORQUE SENSOR HOUSING WHEI~ INSTALLED,
R BUT MUST NOT BE FORCED IN PLACE. ALIGN
R SHIMS TO ENSURE SLEEVE BUSHING WILL NOT
R HANG UP ON SHIP.iS.
R 1. C. (12)(e) Remove the center torque sensor retaining nut and i n s t a l l the
R largest of the three sleeve bushings that w i l l f i t over the
R center torque sensor housing stud. Ensure that the sleeve
R bushing is inserted through the compressor bearing retainer
R and shims. I f no bushing w i l l f i t , the dimension tolerance
R is acceptable and no bushing is required. I n s t a l l center
R retaining nut, but do not tighten at this time.
(f) I n s t a l l torque sensor assembly (365, Figure 201) with assem-

bled plumbing. Tighten nuts (302, 305) in increments of 10
inch-pounds, while checking freedom of 293097-1 alignment
t o o l . Tighten nuts (302, 305) to a torque value of 80 inch-
pounds. Alignment tool shall not bind.
(g) Use a depth micrometer, measure from top of gearbox (side B)
to top of torque sensor housing. Record as Dimension X.
(See Figure 203.)
(h) Perform calculation. Add Dimensions X and Y, then subtract

sum from Dimension Z. The results equal the thickness of
shims (390, Figure 201).
(i) Remove torque sensor assembly (365). I n s t a l l thickness of

shims (390). Re-install torque sensor assembly (365) as
outlined in step ( f ) .
NOTE: Bushing (340, Figure 201) is used with

Torque Sensor Assembly Pars No. 896826-3
only.
(J) I n s t a l l bushing (340, Figure 201, when applicable), washer

(335), and bolt (330). Tighten bolt to torque value of 50
inch- po unas.
CAUTION: IF TORQUE SENSOR CAMSET IS REI,IOVED FROM

TORQUE SENSOR, USE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE
TO METERING SURFACES OF CAMSET PILOT
VALVE ASSEMBLY DURING REMOVAL, HANDLING,
AND INSTALLATION OF CAMSET.
(k) Insert sleeve bushing (360, Figure 201) into torque sensor
housing arm bolt hole. Rotate bushing u n t i l eccentric hole
is aligned to allow bolt (350) to be started into gearcase
threads.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 208
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT liO. 72-01-27)
1. C. (12) (I) Remove bolt and place key washer (355) into position, i n s e r t -
ing large tab into hole of torque sensor housing am. The
smaller tab w i l l f i t into one of slots of sleeve bushing. I f
necessary, bushing may be rotated s l i g h t l y to accept the
locking tab.
(m) Install Dolt (330) and tighten to torque value of 50 inch-

pounds. Bend tab locks over bolt head.
(n) Remove aligment t o o l , i f tool binds, loosen bolts and

retorque in accordance with step (m). Recheck alignment with
tool.
(o) Measure for Dimension X. Dimension X shall be within 0.000

to 0.002 inch of original reading. I f Dimension X is not ub-
tained repeat steps (a) through (n).
(13) (Post SB 72-0232) Determine thickness of washers (shims) as

required to obtain a 0.000 to 0.002 inch interference f i t between
the gearbox and torque sensor housing mating surface as follows.
(See Figures 202, 203 and 207.)
(a) Use a depth micrmneter, measure from top of gearbox to torque
sensor housing mating surface of gearbox (side A). Record as
Dimension Z. Repeat procedure for side B. (See Figure 203.)
(b) Measure thickness of torque sensor housing nearest the bolt

hole at side A and side B. Record as Dimension Y.
R (c) Remove the two compressor bearing c a r r i e r retainer nuts. In-

R s t a l l torque sensor on mounting pins using thickness of shims
R determined in step (1). I n s t a l l tile three torque sensor
R retaining nuts and ~ o compressor bearing c a r r i e r retainer
R nuts loosely.
(d) I n s t a l l 293097-1 alignment tool in i d l e r gear bearing cavity

and onto torque sensor spur gear pin. (See Figure 205.)
R CAUTION: SLEEVE BUSHINGMUST NOT PROTRUDEABOVE

R THE TORQUE SENSORHOUSIHG WHEN INSTALLED,
R BUT MUST NOT BE FORCED IN PLACE. ALIGN
R SHIMS TO ENSURESLEEVE BUSHING WILL NOT
R HANG UP ON SHIMS.
R (e) Remove the center torque sensor retaining nut and i n s t a l l the
R largest of the three sleeve bushings that w i l l f i t over the
R center torque sensor housing stud. Ensure that the sleeve
R bushing is inserted through the compressor bearing retainer
R and shims. I f no bushing w i l l f i t , the dimension tolerance
R is acceptable and no bushing is required. I n s t a l l center
R retaining nut, but do not tighten at this time.
72-10-16
UP136688
Page 208A/208B
Aug 4/94
~F:RTN-PA
lliedSignal
A E R OS PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i. C. (13) (f) I n s t a l l torque sensor assembly (355, Figure 202) with assem-
bled plumbing. Tighten nuts (302, 305) in increments of 10
inch-pounds, while checking freedom of 293097-1 alignment
tool. Tighten nuts (302, 305) to a torque value of 80 inch-
pounds. Alignment tool shall not bind.
(g) Use a depth micrometer, measure from top of gearbox (side A)

to top of torque sensor housing. Record as Dimension X.
Repeat procedure for side B. (See Figure 203.)
(h) Perform calculation. Add Dimensions X and Y, then subtract

sum from Dimension Z. The results equal the thickness of
shims (360, 395, 420, Figure 202).
(i) Remove torque sensor assembly (355). I n s t a l l thickness of

shims (360, 395, 420). Re-install torque sensor assembly
(355) as outlined in step ( f ) .
CAUTI0 N: IF TORQUE SENSOR CAMSET IS REMOVEDFROM

TORQUE SENSOR, USE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE
TO METERING SURFACES OF CAMSETPILOT
VALVE ASSEMBLY DURING RENOVAL, HANDLING,
AND INSTALLATION OF CAMSET.
(J) Insert sleeve bushing (350, Figure 202) into torque sensor
housing arm bolt hole. Rotate bushing u n t i l eccentric hole
is aligned to allow bolt (340) to be started into gearcase
threads.
(k) Remove bolt and place key washers (335, 345) into position,
inserting the large tab into holes of torque sensor housing
arm. The smaller tab w i l l f i t into one of the slots of
sleeve bushing. I f necessary, bushing may be rotated
s l i g h t l y to accept the locking tab.
(I) I n s t a l l bolts (330, 340) and tighten to torque value of 50

inch-pounds. Bend tab locks over bolt head.
(m) Remove alignment t o o l , i f tool binds, loosen bolts and

retorque in accordance with step ( I ) . Recheck alignment with
tool.
(n) Measure for Dimension X. Dimension X shall be within 0.000

to 0.002 inch of original reading. I f Dimension X is not ob-
tained, repeat steps (a) through (m).
R (14) Deleted.
72-10-16
UP136688
Page 209
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
IDLERGEARBEARINGCAVITy
. " ALIGNMENT TOOL
MOUNTIN~ ~DJJ
QUE SENSOR
~,NING HOLES
UNTING)
BEA~
IORQUESENSORCENTER
RETAININGNUT
SB-2039R1
(Post SB 72-0095)
(Pre SB 72-0232) Torque Sensor Alignment
Figure 204
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 210
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
IDLER GE
BEARI N G
MOUNTI
LT
OUTBOARD BOL
ECCENTRIC SL
~UE SENSOR
; N I N G HOLES
JNTING)
. . . . •..~...,,_ ., . . . . ,.JR CENTER

RETAINING NUT
F.-44A.-4602
(Post SB 72-0232) Torque Sensor Alignment

UP136688
Figure 205 72-10-16

Page 211
Dec 14/87
I~I NAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
MEASURE GAP BETWEEN HOUSING AND TORQUE

SENSOR BODY WITH A FEELER GAGE IN THIS AREA.
TORC
HOUSING/'~ ~
SECTIONR-R
F-44A-2735
(Pre SB 72-0232) Torque Sensor

Housing Assembly Shim Requirements
UP136688
Figure 206 72-10-16

Page 212
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
WASHER HOUSING
f
I
\
TORQUE SENSOR
ION A--A
z~j"
TORQUE SENSOR
SECTION B--B
F-44A-4586
(Post SB 72-0232) Torque Sensor Assembly

Housing Shim Requirements
UP136688
Figure 207 72-10-16

Page 213
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1.90 TO.._~
7.50 TO _i~ 0.40 TOw, w"-2"00 IN.
8.00 IN. - J" 0.50 IN.
SILVER
SILVER I
i ~" 1/16" DIA 7X7 BRAID

CRESWIRE PER MIL-W-5424
3/64"(0.047 IN .)
NOMINAL WIRE
CRES OR MUSIC
WIRE
~RE6 9102 SLEEVE

0.070 IN. ID
X 0.095 IN. OD
SB-4072
Torque Sensor Cam Gear Locking Pin

UP136688
Figure 208 72-10-16

Page 214
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. C. (15) I n s t a l l new packings (140) on back of manifold assembly (115).

Swing manifold assembly up and secure with bolts (60, 85), screw
(75), and washers (70, 80, 90). Tighten bolts and screws to a
(16) (Pre SB 72-0064) I n s t a l l bracket (35), clamp (20), and secure with
bolts (10, 25), washers (15, 30), and nut (5). Tighten bolt (25)
to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds. Tighten bolt (10) to torque
(17) (Post SB 72-0064) I n s t a l l clamp (45) and secure with washers (50,
55) and bolt (40). Tighten bolt (40) to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds.
(18) Rotate f i r s t stage impeller until hole in torque sensor gear as-
sembly is on top.
NOTE: Torque Sensor Cam Gearshaft Locking Pin Part No.

865376-1 cannot be used in c a l i b r a t i o n and in-
s t a l l a t i o n of Torque Sensor, Part No. 3101726-2
due to decreased clearance between torque sensor
housing and accessory drive housing. Locally fa-
bricate a f l e x i b l e locking pin s i m i l a r to that
shown in Figure 208 for use in torque sensor
c a l i b r a t i o n and i n s t a l l a t i o n . Lock pin may be
fabricated from 0.040 to 0.050 inch diameter
lockwire approximately 24 inches long.
(19) I f 284880-1-1/-2-1 t e s t stand is used for torque sensor c a l i b r a -

t i o n , insert 865376-1 pin through propeller pitch control mount
pad opening in rear of accessory drive housing and into hole in
torque sensor gear assembly.
(2o) I f 293138-1 negative torque setting c a l i b r a t o r is used, i n s t a l l

865376-1 torque sensor cam lock pin or suitable lock pin through
torque sensor cam fr~n forward side of engine so pin can be
removed a f t e r intermediate housing (diaphragm) is i n s t a l l e d .
(21) I n s t a l l tachometer generator gear and torque sensor gear

assemblies. Refer to 72-10-15, Maintenance Practices.
72-10-16
UP136688
Page 215/216
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. Adj us tment/Tes t

equipment required for Adjustment/Test.
Item Sourc e/
No. Nomencl ature Use Part No.
I. Gear Locking Fixture Used to lock planetary gear 284452-1-1

(For clockwise turn- assembly while removing high
ing engines) speed pinion retainer.
. Torque Calibration Used to cover o i l passages and 284453-1-1
Adapter Plate adapt to oil lines on acces-
sory drive housing when
establishing negative and
positive settings.
. Spline Positioning Used to change torsion shaft 284455-1-1
Wrench (Quill) spline position when
adjusting negative torque.
. Spline Positioning Used to reposition and i n d i - 284456-1-1
Wrench cate coupling spline position
when adjusting negative torque.
. Splined Torque Used to hold turbine end of 284457-1-1
Wrench Adapter main shaft while applying
torque when adjusting torque
sensor on engine.
. O r i f i c e Plate Used in place of propeller 284459-1-1
governor for covering o i l
passages and f o r providing
o r i f i c e , when establishing
negative and positive
torque settings.
. Oil P1ug Used to block oil passages 284460-1-1
in accessory drive housing
when adjusting torque sensor.
For use with high speed pinion
r o l l e r bearing engines.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 217
Dec 14/87
~:~/lied
Item Sourc e/
. Calibration Provides compensator oil 284461-1-1

Torque Adapter pressure connection used on
Plate engine using torque pressure
compensator.
. Torque Calibration Used to seal oil port to ac- 284566-1-1
Cover cessory drive housing flange
during negative torque adjust-
ment.
10. Gear Train Lock Used to lock gear train during 284689-1-1/
positive and negative torque -2-1
adjustment.
11. Test Stand (Torque Used to supply oil, indicate 284880-1-1

Setting) (60 Hz) and regulate pressure when es-
tablishing negative or positive
torque setting.
12. Test Stand (Torque Used to supply o i l , indicate 284880-2-1

Setting) (50 Hz) and regulate pressure when es-
tablishing negative or posi-
tive torque setting.
13. Spline Positioning Used to reposition and 285159-1-1

Wrench indicate coupling spline posi-
tion when adjusting negative
torque.
14. Locking Fixture Used to lock rotating group 285809-1-1
(Turbine) while adjusting torque sensor.
15. Dummy Feathering Used in place of feathering 287220-1-1
Valve valve for adapting to oil
lines when establishing posi-
tive and negative torque set-
tings.
16. Coupler Indexing Used to hold coupler in 287221-1-1

Hol der torsion shaft while
performi ng cal i brati on.
UP136688
72-10-16
R
Page 218
Aug 12/91
,,~llied
Item Source/
No. Nomencla tu re Use Part No.
17. Torque Wrench Used when checking t r i p 287277-1-1

Adapter torque of feathering valve.
18. Ball Lock Wrench Used to i n s t a l l or remove ball 289318-1
lock in the helical pinion
gearshaft assembly and to check
for positive engagement of
balls a f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
19. Oil Plug Used to block o i l passages in 291790-1
accessory housing when adjust-
ing torque sensor. For use
with high speed pinion journal
bearing engines.
20. Negative Torque A self contained, portable 293138-1
Setting Calibrator c a l i b r a t o r used to adjust
negative and positive torque
setting with minimum removal
of engine accessories.
21. Oil Pump Plug Used to seal off shaft of o i l 294195-1
lubricated fuel pump splined
drive coupling when establish-
ing negative or positive torque
setting.
22. Coupler Positioner Used to prevent damage to 296877-1
coupler when i n s t a l l i n g torsion
spline shaft ( q u i l l shaft) and
to maintain position of coupler
during c a l i b r a t i o n .
23. Cover Used to cover solenoid vent 865019-1
valve port on accessory drive
housing during torque sensor
calibration.
24. Cam Assembly Lock Used to maintain zero degree 865376-1
Pin position of torque sensor
assembly during c a l i b r a t i o n .
UP136688
72-10-16
R Page 219
Aug 16/89
~Signal
/~!lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: After any maintenance requiring removal of intermediate
gearbox (diaphragm) assembly, torque sensor calibration
shall be performed in accordance with 72-10-16,
Adjustment/Test and NTS ground and f l i g h t check shall
be accomplished in accordance with 72-00-00,
Adj ustment/Test.
Torque sensor c a l i b r a t i o n may be accomplished using
e i t h e r 284880-1-1/-2-1 test stand or 293138-1 negative
torque setting c a l i b r a t o r . I f 293138-1 c a l i b r a t o r is
used, c a l i b r a t i o n can be accomplished with engine i n -
stalled in a i r c r a f t without removal of turbine section
components, propeller governor, propeller pitch con-
t r o l , tachometer generator and without disturbing en-
gine rigging or blocking the o i l tank. Refer to para-
graph A i f 284880-1-1/-2-1 t e s t stand is to be used.
Refer to paragraph B i f 293138-1 negative torque set-
ting c a l i b r a t o r is to be used.
2. A. Perform Torque Sensor Calibration Using 284880-1-1/-2-1 Test Stand
(I) Prepare torque sensor calibration setup as follows. (See figures

209, 210 and 211.)
(a) (Post SB 72-0119) Remove turbine components in accordance with
72-50-01 through 72-50-04, Maintenance Practices, i f
ins tal led.
(b) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Install 284453-1-1 torque calibration
adapter plate (see figure 210) on engine. Cap both fittings
of torque calibration adapter plate.
(c) Install 284459-1-1 orifice plate (see figure 210) with
865664-3 gasket on engine. Cap the upper f i t t i n g located on
orifice plate.
(d) Install 284566-1-1 torque calibration cover (oil inlet cover)
(see figure 210) with gasket on engine. Install 284195-1-1
oil pump plug i f engine configured with oil lubricated fuel
pump drive spline and pump is removed.
(e) Install 865019-1 cover (vent valve) (see figure 211) to cover
solenoid valve port on engine during calibration procedure, or
install solenoid vent valve with packings.
(f) Remove feathering valve and install 287220-1-1 dummyfeather-
ing valve (see figure 210) and secure with bolts. Tighten
(g) (Roller Bearing High Speed Pinion) Install 284460-1-1 oil plug
(see figure 211) and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts to a
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 220
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-10-16
Page 221
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
'\
28
25 2p
I ,
13
17
jQ
16 15
E-44A-4311
UP136688
Torque Sensor Calibration Test Setup (PN 284880-1-1/-2-i)

Figure 209 72-10-16
R Page 222
Aug 16/89
/lied
2. A. (1) (h) (Journal Bearing High Speed Pinion) I n s t a l l 291790-1 o i l plug

and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts to a torque value of 70 to
80 inch-pounds.
(i) Secure lower portion of intermediate gearbox assembly to input
housing assembly by i n s t a l l i n g washers and speed nuts on open
studs. Tighten speed nuts to a torque value of 80 inch-
pounds.
(J) (Journal Bearing High Speed Pinion) I n s t a l l oil plug and pack-
ing in intermediate gearbox housing on lower l e f t side of high
speed pinion port. Secure with bolt and washer.
(k) Provide and i n s t a l l unions (12, 23, f i g u r e 209) in rear of
reduction gear section in ports shown f o r connection of hose
assemblies.
(I) Position 284880-1-1/-2-1 test stand in front of engine so o i l

that drains from engine w i l l return to o i l tank assembly.
KEY TO FIGURE 209

"1. GAGE (NEGATIVE TORQUESENSOR) "17. ELBOW
* 2. GAGE (INLET PRESSURE) "18. TEE
* 3. UNION "19. HOSEASSY
* 4. HOSE ASSY *20. HOSE ASSY
* 5. GAGE (PUMP PRESSURE) 21. TORQUECOMPENSATORASSY
* 6. UNION 22. 284453-1-1 PLATE
* 7. SWITCH (TEST STAND POWER) *23. UNION
8. GATE VALVE *24. HOSEASSY
* 9. GATE VALE 25. 284689-1-1 OR 284689-2-1
*i0. HOSE ASSY GEAR TRAIN LOCK
"11. PLUG (ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR) 26. 287220-1-1 DUMMYFEATHERING
"12. UNION VALVE
13. 284566-1-1CONVER *27. HOSE ASSY
14. 284880-1-1/-2-1 TEST STAND *28. UNION
"15. OIL TANK ASSY *29. GAGE (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
16. 284459-1-1 PLATE *30. UNION
31. 294195-1 OIL PUMP PLUG
*COMPONENT OF 284880-1-1/-2-1 TEST STAND (14).
UP136688
72-10-16
R Page 223
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
C~
F-44A-3737
I. 287220-1-1 DUMMYFEATHERING VALVE 4. 284459-1-1 ORIFICE PLATE

2. 294195-1 OIL PUMP PLUG 5. 284453-1-1 TORQUE CALIBRATION
3. 284566-1-1 TORQUE CALIBRATION ADAPTER PLATE
COVER (OIL INLET COVER) 6. 284689-1-1 OR 284689-2-1
GEAR TRAIN LOCK
UP136688
Special Tools f o r Torque Sensor Calibration

Figure 210 72-10-16
Page 224
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-10-16
Page 225
Dec 14/87
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
li 2
III
9
\
7
\ 6
\
F-44G-469
UP136688
Torque Sensor Calibration Tools

Figure 211 72-10-16
Page 226
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. A. (1) (m) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Connect hose assembly (24) from union
(28) to upper f i t t i n g of torque pressure transducer mounting
adapter (22).
(n) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Connect hose assembly (24) from union (28)
to f i t t i n g located on torque sensor compensator assembly (21).
(o) Connect hose assembly (27) from union (30) to 287220-1-1 dummy
feathering valve.
(P) Connect hose assembly (4) from union (3) to union (12) on
right side of reduction gear section.
(q) Connect hose assembly (10) from union (6) to tee (18). Con-
nect hose assemblies (19, 20) from tee (18) to union (23)
(installed adjacent to gear train lock) and elbow (17)
respectively.
(r) Check test stand oil tank assembly for an adequate supply of
oil (oil tank shall be at least half f u l l ) .
(s) Close upper gate valve (8) and open lower gate valve (9). En-
sure switch (7) is in OFF position. Connect electrical con-
nector plug (11) to a source of 220 volts, 60 Hz electrical
power.
(t) Pressurize calibration setup as follows.
1 Place switch (7) in ON position and close gage valve (9).

Allow oil to circulate at approximately 100 psi for five
minutes to warm up and to purge air from system.
KEY TO FIGURE 211
1. 865019-1 COVER(VENT VALVE) 7. 285159-I-1SPLINE

2. 285809-1-1 TURBINE LOCKING FIXTURE POSITIONING WRENCH
3. 284457-1-1 SPLINE TORQUEWRENCH 8. 284456-1-1SPLINE
ADAPTER POSITIONING WRENCH
4. 289318-1 BALL LOCKWRENCH 9. 284460-1-1 OIL PLUG
5. 287277-1-1 TORQUEWRENCHADAPTER (ROLLER BEARING)
6. 284455-1-1SPLINE POSITIONING I0. 291790-1 OIL PLUG
WRENCH (QUILL SHAFT) (JOURNAL BEARING)
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 227
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL •llied
Signal
2. A. (1) (t) 2 Adjust knob of gate valve (8) to apply 100 to 103 psig i n -
l e t oil pressure to engine as indicated on i n l e t pressure
gage (2). Keep i n l e t o i l pressure set at 100 to 103 psig
f o r entire c a l i b r a t i o n procedure.
(2) (Pre SB 72-0119) Perform torque sensor c a l i b r a t i o n (long torsion
shaft, short coupler) as follows.
CAUTION: IF TURBINE IS ROTATEDTOO FAR DURING CALI-
BRATION (WITH COUPLING REMOVED) TORQUE
SENSOR MOVEABLE CAM SET DISENGAGES FROM
FIXED CAM SET. DO NOT RE-ENGAGE BY LIFT-
ING NOSE OF ENGINE. THE DIAPHRAGM SHALL
BE REMOVEDAND MOVEABLE CAM SET RE-ENGAGED
SO PIN HOLES THROUGHTHE FIXED AND MOVEA-
BLE CAM SET ARE ALIGNED. THE CAM SET IS
BALANCED IN THIS MANNER AND ANY OTHER CAM
SET ORIENTATION MAY CAUSE IMBALANCE AND
TORQUE SENSOR PRESSURE FLUCTUATION.
NOTE: Two technicians are required to perform fol-

lowing calibration procedures. Refer to
Figure 211 for illustration of calibration
tool s.
(a) Shim 284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench to maintain coupler
i n s e r t i o n depth within l i m i t s of Figure 212.
(b) Using 284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench, i n s e r t coupling
assembly into any free position.
(c) Remove 865376-1 or s i m i l a r torque sensor cam assembly locking
pin.
(d) I n s t a l l 284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 s t a r t e r drive gear (see
f i g u r e 210) lock to lock gear t r a i n .
(e) Using 284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench (see figure 211),
remove coupling assembly.
(f) Rotate turbine slowly by hand clockwise (looking forward) to

obtain 50 psi POSITIVE pressure (gage 29, figure 209).
(g) Rotate turbine slowly by hand counterclockwise (looking f o r -
ward) to obtain a s l i g h t r i s e in NTS pressure (gage I, f i g u r e
209).
(h) Using 284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench, i n s e r t coupling

assembly.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 228
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: The minimum incremental change is obtained by

rotating coupling 160 degrees. Remove,
rotate, and reinsert coupling assembly as
necessary to obtain NTS pressure indicated in
step ( i ) . I f unable to obtain pressure,
replace coupling and repeat.
2. A, (2) (i) Apply (firm) counterclockwise (looking forward) hand torque to

turbine to overcome static drag (do not snap turbine wheel).
Recheck NTS pressure (gage I, figure 209) ensuring 30 ±6 psig
is obtained.
(J) Position turbine in center of backlash. Using 284456-I-1

spline position wrench (see figure 211), remove coupling as-
sembly and rotate counterclockwise (looking aft) 160 degrees
(180 degrees less 3 teeth on large end). Reinsert coupling
assembly.
(k) Apply (firm) counterclockwise (looking forward) hand torque to

turbine. Recheck NTS pressure (gage I, figure 209) to check
that pressure obtained is higher than pressure obtained in
step ( i ) .
(I) Repeat step ( j ) one time.
(m) Apply (firm) counterclockwise (looking forward) hand torque to

turbine. NTS pressure (gage I) obtained should be 90 +I0
psig.
(n) Apply (firm) clockwise (looking forward) hand torque to

turbine. POSITIVE pressure (gage 29) obtained should be I I to
18 psig.
(o) With clockwise (looking forward) hand torque applied to tur-

bine, remove 284456-1-1 spline (see figure 211) positioning
wrench.
NOTE: The 296877-1 coupler positioner is used to

prevent damage to coupler when installing
torsion spline shaft (quill shaft).
(p) Install 296877-1 coupler positioner through aft end of main

shaft and torsion shaft.
(q) Carefully rotate turbine clockwise (looking forward) using
284455-1-1 spline ( q u i l l ) positioning wrench (see figure 211).
Insert torsion splined shaft at a position where i t will in-
stall f u l l y without binding.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 229
Dec 14/87
I•]MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
\
HELICAL PINION GEARSHAFT
, j - - J
f
.,- -f s
\
,q
I I
I I
COUPLING ASSY
1.75 TO II
NOTE: THIS DIMENSION MUST BE MAINTAINED
1.90 IN. THROUGHOUT TORQUE SENSOR CALIBRATION
AND OUILLSHAFT INSTALLATION.
F-44A-5079
Maximum Depth of Coupling

Assembly Into High Speed Pinion
UP136688
Figure 212 72-10-16

Page 230
Dec 14/87
Signal
~ ,lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. A. (2) (r) Using 284455-1-1 spline ( q u i l l ) positioning wrench remove and

reinsert torsion splined shaft rotating clockwise one long
spline tooth at a time, until f i r s t t i g h t position is found
(slight resistance required for insertion and removal).
(s) Using 284455-1-1 spline (quill) positioning wrench remove tor-
sion spline shaft and rotate clockwise 3 long spline teeth and
reinsert, p a r t i a l l y engaging long splines.
CAUTION: SHARPLY TAPPING TORSION SPLINE SHAFT UNTIL
IT BOTTOMSMAY PRODUCEBURRSWHICH CAN IN-
TERFERE WITH PROPERCALIBRATION.
(t) Apply slight counterclockwise (looking aft) pressure to
284455-1-1 spline (quill) positioning wrench to engage short
splines of torsion splined shaft. Lightly tap torsion splined
shaft into place. Remove284455-1-1 spline ( q u i l l ) position
wrench.
(u) Place switch (7, figure 209) in OFF position. Disconnect hose
assembly from 287220-1-1 dummy valve and connect to f i t t i n g
located on o r i f i c e plate (16, figure 209). Remove 287220-1-1
dummy feathering valve and reinstall feathering valve
assembly. Turn on test stand and adjust oil pressure to I00
to 103 psig as indicated by i n l e t pressure gage.
(v) Install 285809-1-1 turbine locking f i x t u r e (see figure 211) to

secure turbine wheel. Remove284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 starter
drive gear lock. (See figure 210.)
(w) Install 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter (see figure 211) into
high speed pinion gearshaft.
NOTE: Small adjustments may be made to increase or
decrease feathering valve t r i p torque by
rotating the small end of the torsion spline
shaft clockwise (looking aft) to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease.
(x) Obtain feathering valve t r i p torque by applying counterclock-
wise torque to 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter using torque
wrench. NTS pressure (gage I , figure 209) should suddenly
drop with 25 to 28 inch-pounds torque applied.
(Y) Loosen 285809-1-1 turbine locking f i x t u r e (see figure 211),

rotate turbine 180 degrees and retighten locking fixture.
Repeat step (x). Removeturbine locking fixture and internal
spline adapter.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 231
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL c•llied
'Signal
2. A. (2) (z) Screw 289318-1 ball lock wrench into shaft until fully
installed. Install spacer, spring and balls into ball lock
retainer shaft. While holding balls in place, insert shaft
with ball lock wrench into high speed pinion gearshaft. Apply
inward pressure on wrench and partially unscrew ball lock
wrench to ensure shaft is locked in gearshaft. Removeball
lock wrench. (Shaft should be 0.270 inch depth from end of
high speed pinion gearshaft.)
(aa) Removeall equipment and fixtures from engine.
(3) (Post SB 72-0119) Perform torque sensor c a l i b r a t i o n (short torsion
shaft, long coupler) as follows.
CAUTION: IF THE TURBINE IS ROTATED TOO FAR DURING CALI-

BRATION (WITH COUPLER REMOVED), THE TORQUE SEN-
SOR MOVABLE CAM SET WILL DISENGAGE FROM THE
FIXED CAM SET. DO NOT REENGAGE BY LIFTING THE
NOSE OF THE ENGINE. THE DIAPHRAGM MUST BE
REMOVED AND THE MOVABLE CAM SET REENGAGED SUCH
THAT THE PIN HOLES THROUGH THE FIXED AND MOV-
ABLE CAM SET LINE UP. THE CAM SET IS BALANCED
IN THIS MANNER AND ANY OTHER ORIENTATION MAY
CAUSE IMBALANCE AND TORQUE SENSOR PRESSURE
FLUCTUATION.
NOTE: Rotate turbine, using 284457-1-1 spline torque

wrench adapter (see figure 211) with torque
wrench, and measure amount of seal break-away
torque required to start turbine rotation in three
positions 120 degrees apart. Computeand record
average of the three seal break-away torques. Add
the value recorded to torque applied to turbine in
steps ( i ) , ( j ) , (1), and (m). Steps required are
summarized in Table 204.
(a) Shim 285159-1-1 spline positioning wrench to maintain coupler
insertion depth within limits of Figure 213.
(b) Using 285159-1-1 spline positioning wrench (see figure 211),
insert coupling assembly into any free position. Several free
positions may be observed.
(c) Remove865376-1 or similar torque sensor cam assembly locking

pin previously installed during torque sensor installation.
(d) Install 284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 gear train lock (see figure
210) onto starter pad to lock gear train.
(e) Using 285159-1-1 spline positioning wrench (see figure 211),
remove coupling assembly.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 232
Aug 16/89
;~!lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL "~ Signal
2. A. (3) (f) Install 284457-1-1 spline torque wrench adapter in rear
splines of main shaft (turbine scavenge pump and spur gear-
shaft removed). Rotate turbine slowly (using spline torque
wrench adapter) clockwise (looking forward) to obtain 50 psig
POSITIVE pressure (gage 29, figure 209).
(g) Rotate turbine slowly (using 284457-1-1 spline torque wrench
adapter, see figure 211) counterclockwise (looking forward)
until NTS pressure (gage I , figure 209) rise is noted.
NOTE: Spring assembly may be l e f t out and installed
after the last coupler position has been
determined.
(h) Using 285159-1-1 spline positioning wrench (see figure 211),
insert coupling assembly with spring assembly into any free
position.
NOTE: The minimum increment change is obtained by
rotating coupling 140 degrees.
Remove, rotate, and reinsert coupling assem-
bly as necessary to obtain NTS pressures as
per steps ( i ) and ( j ) . I f unable to obtain
pressure replace coupling and repeat checks.
(i) Apply 100 inch-pounds counterclockwise (looking forward)
torque to 284457-1-1 spline torque wrench adapter (in rear
splines of main shaft) using torque wrench. NTS pressure
(gage 1, figure 209) obtained should be less than 24 psig. I f
pressure is too high, center turbine and rotate coupler 140
degrees clockwise.
(J) Apply 130 inch-pounds counterclockwise torque to 284457-1-1

splined torque wrench adapter (see figure 211) using torque
wrench. NTS pressure (gage I , figure 209) obtained should be
more than 35 psig. I f pressure in step ( i ) is within l i m i t ,
but pressure in step ( j ) is too low, center turbine and rotate
coupler 140 degrees counterclockwise and recheck steps ( i ) and
(j).
NOTE: Spring assembly may be l e f t out and installed
after the last coupler position has been
determined.
(k) Position turbine in center of backlash. Using 285159-1-1
spline positioning wrench, remove coupling assembly with
spring and rotate counterclockwise (facing aft) 140 degrees.
Reinsert coupling assembly with spring assembly.
UP136688
72-10-16
R Page 233
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
2. A. (3) (I) Apply 100 inch-pounds counterclockwise (looking forward)
torque to 284457-1-1 spline torque wrench adapter using torque
wrench. Record NTS pressure (gage 1, figure 209) obtained.
NOTE: POSITIVE pressure obtained after f i f t h incre-
ment change as observed in step (1) shall be
14 +-4 psig (nominal).
(m) Apply 100 inch-pounds clockwise (looking forward) torque to
284457-1-1 spline torque wrench adapter using torque wrench.
Record POSITIVE pressure (gage 29, figure 209).
(n) Repeat steps (I) and (m) four times.
(o) Apply approximately 100 inch-pounds clockwise (looking for-

ward) hand torque to turbine wheel to keep spring on coupler
compressed and remove 285159-I-1 spline positioning wrench
(see figure 211). Ensure spring assembly is installed.
NOTE: Part No. 284455-1-1 spline positioning wrench
has l e f t hand threads.
The 296877-1 coupler positioner is used to
prevent damage to coupler when i n s t a l l i n g
torsion spline shaft ( q u i l l shaft).
(p) Remove 284457-1-1 spline torque wrench adapter (previously in-
stalled in step ( f ) ) . Install 296877-1 coupler positioner
through aft end of main shaft and torsion shaft.
(q) Apply clockwise (looking forward) hand torque to turbine and
using 284455-1-1 spline positioning wrench ( q u i l l ) , insert
torsion spline shaft where i t will install f u l l y without
bi ndi ng.
(r) While holding approximately 100 inch-pound clockwise (looking
forward) torque to turbine rotor and using 284455-1-1 spline
positioning wrench ( q u i l l ) , remove and reinsert torsion spline
shaft rotating clockwise (looking aft) one long spline tooth
at a time, u n t i l f i r s t t i g h t position is found (slight res-
istance required for insertion and removal).
(s) Using 284455-1-1 spline positioning wrench ( q u i l l ) , remove
torsion spline shaft and rotate counterclockwise (looking aft)
four long spline teeth and reinsert, p a r t i a l l y engaging long
splines.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 234
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: SHARPLY TAPPING TORSION SPLINE SHAFT UNTIL

IT BOTTOMSMAY PRODUCEBURRS WHICH CAN IN-
TERFERE WITH PROPERCALIBRATION.
. A. (3) (t) Apply slight counterclockwise (looking aft) pressure to
284455-1-1 spline positioning wrench ( q u i l l ) to engage short
splines of torsion spline shaft. LIGHTLY tap torsion spline
shaft into place. Remove 284455-1-1 spline positioning wrench
(quill).
(u) Install 285809-1-1 turbine locking fixture. Remove 284689-1-1

or 284689-2-1 gear train lock. (See figure 210.)
(v) Install 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter (see figure 211) into
high speed pinion gearshaft.
(w) Place switch (7, figure 209) in OFF position. Disconnect hose
assembly (27) from 287220-1-1 dummy feathering valve (see
figure 210). Connect same end of hose to f i t t i n g located
below 284459-1-1 o r i f i c e plate (4). Remove287220-1-1 dummy
feathering valve and reinstall feathering valve assembly.
Turn on test stand and adjust oil pressure to I00 to 103 psig
as indicated by inlet pressure gage.
NOTE: Small adjustments may be made to increase or

decrease feathering valve t r i p torque by
rotating the small end of the torsion spline
shaft clockwise (facing aft) to increase, or
counterclockwise to decrease.
(x) (Roller Bearing High Speed Pinion) Obtain feathering valve
t r i p by applying counterclockwise torque to 287277-1-I torque
wrench adapter (see figure 211) using torque wrench. NTS
pressure (gage 1, figure 209) should suddenly drop with 27 to
30 inch-pounds nominal torque applied.
(Y) (Journal Bearing High Speed Pinion) Obtain feathering valve

t r i p by applying counterclockwise torque to 287277-1-1 torque
wrench adapter using torque wrench. NTS pressure (gage I,
figure 209) should suddenly drop with 29 to 37 inch-pounds
nominal torque applied.
(z) Loosen 285809-1-1 turbine locking fixture (see figure 211),
rotate turbine 180 degrees and retighten locking f i x t u r e .
Repeat step (x) or (y). Remove 285809-1-1 turbine locking
fixture.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 235
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED900 INCH-POUNDSTORQUE.
DISTORTION OF PINION BEARING INNER RACE
MAY OCCURIF 900 INCH-POUNDS IS EXCEEDED.
2. A. (3) (aa) Install 284457-1-1 splined torque wrench adapter in rear
splines of main shaft, Install 284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 gear
train lock. Apply 900 inch-pounds clockwise (looking for-
ward) torque to 284457-1-1 spline torque wrench adapter using
torque wrench. POSITIVE pressure (gage 29, figure 209) ob-
tained should be 50 +5 psig.
NOTE: Ball lock shaft may require l i g h t tapping
against quill shaft/coupler for f u l l
engagement.
(ab) Remove 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter. Screw 289318-1 ball
lock wrench into shaft until i t bottoms. Install spacer
spring and balls into ball lock retainer shaft. While hold-
ing balls in place, insert shaft with 289318-1 ball lock
wrench spacer and balls (ball lock retainer) into high speed
pinion gearshaft. Apply inward pressure on wrench and p a r t i -
ally unscrew 289318-1 ball lock wrench to ensure i f shaft is
locked in gearshaft. Remove ball lock wrench. Shaft (ball
lock retainer) should be nominally 0,270 inch depth from end
of high speed pinion gearshaft.
(ac) Remove all equipment and fixtures from engine. Remove speed
nuts and washers installed in step A.(1)(i) i f applicable.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 236
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. B. Perform Torque Sensor Calibration Using 293138-1 Negative Torque Setting
Calibrator Assembly (Mini Test Stand)
NOTE: After any maintenance requiring removal of intermediate
gearbox (diaphragm) assembly or coupler assembly torque
sensor, calibration shall be performed in accordance
with 72-10-16, Maintenance Practices, and NTS ground
and f l i g h t check shall be accomplished in accordance
with 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
Torque sensor calibration may be accomplished using

293138-1 negative torque setting calibrator assembly
(mini-test stand), without removing the propeller gov-
ernor, propeller pitch control and tachometer generator
and without disturbing the engine rigging or blocking
the oil tank.
Two technicians may be required to accomplish calibra-
tion on some installations.
(1) Install 284460-I-I oil plug (see Figure 211) (for roller bearing
high speed pinion configuration) or 291790-1 plug (for journal
bearing high speed pinion configuration) into intermediate gearbox
housing (diaphragm).
(2) Install oil vent valve or 865019-1 oil vent valve cover.
(3) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Install 284453-1-1 torque calibration plate.
(See Figure 210.)
(4) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Remove lock plate from torque compensator assem-
bly and install 284461-1-1 torque calibration adapter plate.
NOTE: There are two methods to maintaining coupler in-
sertion depth of 1.75 to 1.90 inches (see Figure
213) when installing coupler. Use one of two
methods provided in step (5).
(5) Maintain coupler insertion depth by performing step (a) or (b).
(a) Install shims to 285159-1-1 spline positioning wrench to main-

tain coupler insertion depth limits (see Figure 213).
(b) Remove turbine scavenge pump and insert 296877-1 coupler posi-
toner through aft end of main shaft and torsion shaft.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 237
Aug 12/91
i~I MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
\
HELICAL PINION GEARSHAFT
---q.. w- - -
f
I,
~COUPLING ASSY
1.75 TO NOTE: THIS DIMENSION MUST BE MAINTAINED

1.90 IN. TH ROUGHOUT TORQUE SEN SOR CALl BRATION
AND QUILLSHAFT INSTALLATION.
F-44A-5079
Maximum Depth of Coupling

Assembly Into High Speed Pinion
UP136688
Figure 213 72-10-16

Page 238
Dec 14/87
lied
NOTE: Post SB 72-0119 engines use 285159-I-1 spline
positioning wrench. Other configurations use
284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench.
2. B. (6) Install coupler into any free position using 285159-1-1 or

284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench.
(7) Install 284689-1-1/-2-I gear train lock (see Figure 210) onto star-
ter pad to lock gear train.
(8) Carefully remove lock pin from torque sensor cam.

NOTE: Mini-Test Stands manufactured by manufacturers
other than Garrett may be connected slightly dif-
ferent than Garrett mini-test stand. Follow manu-
facturers instructions for connection.
(9) Install and connect 293138-1 negative torque setting calibrator as-
sembly (mini-test stand) components to engine as follows. (See
Figure 214.)
(a) Install 292513-1-1 beta tube support (5) on studs of interme-
diate housing (diaphragm), using speed nuts or diaphragm at-
taching nuts to secure support.
(b) Thread dummybeta tube with gage (22) into beta tube support
until dummybeta tube bottoms in pitch control, loosen approx-
imately one turn.
(c) Secure scupper drain (4) to intermediate gearbox housing below
high speed pinion gearshaft so oil draining from engine will
return to oil container (19).
(d) Removeengine feathering valve assembly and install 287220-1-1
dummy feathering valve (3). Install hose assembly (1) with
gage (2) onto dummy feathering valve (3).
R (e) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441) Removepositive torque
sensor regulator valve/cover from engine housing port (7).
Remove 292512-1 dummy positive torque sensor regulator from
bracket of beta tube support assembly test block (6).
R (f) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441) Install 292512-1 dummy
positive torque sensor regulator into port (7) and secure with
R (g) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Pre SB 72-0441) Install positive torque
sensor regulator valve/cover into bracket of beta tube support
assembly test block (6).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 239
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 2. B. (9) (h) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) Remove positive torque
pressure f i l t e r ( o r i f i c e d housing) from engine housing port
(7). Remove 292512-1 dummy positive torque sensor regulator
from bracket of beta tube support assembly test block (6).
(i) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) Install 292512-1 dummy
positive torque sensor regulator into port (7) and secure with
(J) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) Install positive torque

pressure f i l t e r (orificed housing) into bracket of beta tube
support assembly test block (6).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 240
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-10-16
Page 241
Dec 14/87
Allied-SignalAerospaceCompany ~ lsliedignal
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
17
!!
NTS CALIBRATION A
ENGINE FEATHERING
VALVE INSTALLED
DoNe,
UL.~..- ~
I
RAW PRESSURE
PORT(TOP) /I~~16 " ~
I
ALTERNATECONFIGURATION
(CODESAu~-BA,DA-FB)
e FEATHERINGVALVETRIP A
T-44G-157
UP136688
Negative Torque Sensor Calibrator Test Setup (PN 293138-I)

Figure 214 72-10-16
Page 242
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 2. B. (9) (k) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB, Post SB 72-0441) Install hose assembly
(8) between dummyregulator valve (7) and f i t t i n g in test
block (6).
(1) Install hose assembly (9) from pump (10) to regulator f i t t i n g

on 292513-1 beta tube support assembly (5). Ensure oil supply
line from oil container (19) to pump (10) is installed.
(m) Install hose assembly (11) with tee (12) and cap (13) onto tee
of 292513-1 beta tube support assembly (5). Connect hose as-
sembly (14) to tee (12) and to NTS check valve.
(n) (Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Install hose assembly (16) with gage (17)
to 284453-1-1 torque calibration plate (15, figure 214, ALTER-
NATE CONFIGURATION).
\
(o) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Install hose assembly (16) with gage (17) to
284461-1-1 torque calibration adapter plate on torque compen-
sator assembly (18).
(p) Check oil supply in oil container (19) to ensure adequate sup-
ply for calibration.
(q) Pressurize calibration setup.
I Connect pump (10) to electrical supply and adjust pressure

regulator (20) to 100 psig. Allow oil to warm up and to
purge air from the system. Check f i t t i n g s and connections
for oil leakage.
KEY TO FIGURE 214
* 1. HOSEASSY "14. HOSEASSY

* 2. GAGE(NEGATIVE TORQUESENSOR) 15. 284453-1-1 CALIBRATION PLATES
3. 287220-1-1 DUMMYFEATHERING VALVE "16. HOSEASSY
* 4. SCUPPERDRAIN "17. GAGE(POSITIVE TORQUE)
* 5. 292513-1 BETA TUBE SUPPORT SENSOR)
* 6. TESTBLOCK 18. 284461-1-1 TORQUE
* 7. 292512-1 DUMMYREGULATORVALVE CALIBRATION ADAPTER PLATE
* 8. HOSEASSY 19. OIL CONTAINER
* 9. HOSEASSY (CUSTOMER FURNISHED)
"10. PUMP *20. PRESSUREREGULATOR
"11. HOSEASSY "21. GAGE
12. TEE *22. GAGE
13. CAP *23. GAGE
*COMPONENTS OF 293138-1 NEGATIVE TORQUESETTING CALIBRATOR ASSEMBLY
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 243
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (9) (q) Adjust pressure regulator (20) to obtain a nominal 100 psig
i n l e t oil pressure to the engine as indicated on gage (21).
Maintain i n l e t oil pressure at nominal 100 psig throughout
calibration procedure. I f 100 psig cannot be maintained,
check oil f i l t e r on mini test stand for contamination.
NOTE: A schematic of the m i n i - t e s t stand test setup is shown

in Figures 215 and 216.
(10) Calibrate torque sensor system as follows.
NOTE: Prior to removing coupler, rotate coupler back and

forth s l i g h t l y to locate a free center position so that
coupler may be removed without drag.
Pre SB 72-0119, long torsion shaft, coupler to be

rotated 160 degrees.
Post SB 72-0119, short torsion shaft, coupler to be

rotated 140 degrees.
(a) Remove coupler only far enough to disengage splines.
CAUTION: IF TURBINE IS ROTATED TOO FAR DURING CALIBRA-

TION (#ITH COUPLER REMOVED), THE TORQUE SENSOR
MOVABLE CAM GEAR WILL DISENGAGE FROM FIXED CAM
GEAR. THIS WILL BE INDICATED BY NO POSITIVE
PRESSURE INDICATION AND A HIGH (APPROXIMATELY
80 PSIG) NEGATIVE PRESSURE INDICATION WHICH
CANNOT BE REDUCED REGARDLESS OF POSITION OF
COUPLER. THE DIAPHRAGMMUST BE R~IOVED AND
MOVABLE CAM SET REENGAGEDSUCH THAT PIN HOLES
THROUGH THE FIXED AND MOVABLE CAM SET ALIGN.
THE CAM SET IS BALANCED IN THIS MANNER AND ANY
OTHER ORIENTATION MAY CAUSE IMBALANCE AND
TORQUE SENSOR PRESSURE FLUCTUATION.
(b) Rotate impeller very slowly by hand in a counterclockwise

(looking a f t ) direction u n t i l a rise of at least 50 psig is
noted on positive pressure gage (17, figure 214). At t h i s
time negative pressure on gage (2) w i l l be at a low reading.
This indicates that the metering valve in the torque sensor is
positioned to block dumping of positive pressure to gearcase
and negative pressure dump to gearcase is open. Note negative
pressure.
(c) Rotate impeller very slowly by hand in a clockwise (looking
a f t ) direction u n t i l negative and positive pressures are ap-
proximately equal or u n t i l a s l i g h t rise is noted in negative
pressure reading. Record positive pressure.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 244
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PUMP PRESSURE
PUMP RELIEF GAGE
VALVE ~, (PTSREGULATED)
(z~).,~_ POSITIVEPRESSURE ENGINE
(FROM ENGINE) J , -
FILTER | II DUMMY REGULATOR
DUMMY
I I NTS CHECK FEATHERING
P MP PRESSURE /4 J VALVE/UNION VALVE
REGULATOR ADAPTER lj 'PROPELLER 1
(REGULATORBLOCK) PITCH
jj~ RETURNOIL II r () CONTROL
FROM ENGINE (RAW) •
(DO NOT SUBMERGE) POSITIVE PRESSURE
GAGE - . . ~ ~ ]
TORQUECOMPENSATOR/
~ O I L CONTAINER CALIBRATION ADAPTER
PROPELLERPITCH
CONTROL GAGE
N EGATIVE PRESSURE
GAGE S-31A-125
Mini-Test Stand Schematic for Torque Sensor Calibration

UP136688
Figure 215 72-10-16

Page 245
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PUMP
PRESSURE
,,,' PUMP RELIEF

VALVE
GAGE
(PTSREGULATED)
( f )-.,-- POSITIVEPRESSURE ENGINE
PTS REGULATORy
FROM ENGINE) J ~
GAGE
- - -
/
I I I DUMMYREGULATOR
PROPELLERPITCH
CONTROL PORT
NTS CHECK AATHERiNG

PUMP PRESSURE / VALVE/ UN~ON
REGULATOR ADAPTER
RETURN OIL (REGU~TOR(RBLOCK)
AW) ()
I i ''r FROMENGINE POSITIVE PRESSURE I
l l (DO NOT SUBMERGE) GAGE -..~@ . ~
\ TORQUE COMPENSATOR/
PROPELLER
OIL CONTAINER CALIBRATION ADAPTER
~ PITCH
CONTROL
PROPELLERPITCH j (
CONTROL GAGE
S-31A-126
Mini-Test Stand Schematic for Feathering Valve (NTS) Trip

UP136688
Figure 216 72-10-16

Page 246
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331,5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (I0) (d) Carefully insert coupler splines at any free position. After
coupler is inserted, ensure negative and positive pressures
remain approximately same as in steps (b) and (c) to indicate
position of metering valve in torque sensor has not changed.
NOTE: Negative pressure indicated by rotating im-
peller w i l l vary depending upon force and
speed at which impeller is rotated. The in-
dividual performing calibration should
rotate impeller for several t r i a l s before
taking final pressure reading to get feel
for amount of rotational force required.
(e) Rotate impeller by hand clockwise (looking aft) and hold im-
peller firmly in clockwise direction. Note negative pressure
which should be 20 to 35 psig with 30 psig as desired
pressure. Relax force on impeller and move impeller by hand
to firm clockwise (looking aft) position several times to get
feel for amount of force required to get a consistent nega-
tive pressure reading. Record negative pressure in Table 204
i f in desired range of 20 to 35 psig.
NOTE: Prior to removing coupler, rotate coupler

back and forth slightly to locate a free
center position so coupler may be removed
without drag.
Pre SB 72-0119, long torsion shaft, coupler

to be rotated 160 degrees.
Post SB 72-0119, short torsion shaft,
coupler to be rotated 140 degrees.
(f) I f negative pressure in step (e) is too low carefully disen-
gage coupler splines, rotate coupler 140 degrees (160 degrees
for long torsion shaft) counterclockwise (looking aft), using
pointer on 285159-1-1 or 284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench
as a guide, and reinsert coupler. See Figure 217 for ref-
erence points for 140 degree rotation of coupler. Recheck
negative pressure in step (e).
(g) I f negative pressure in step (e) is too high (in the 50 to 60
psig range), disengage coupler splines, rotate coupler 140
degrees (160 degrees for long torsion shaft) clockwise
(looking a f t ) , and reinsert coupler. Recheck negative pres-
sure in step (e). I f negative pressure is more than 60 psig,
disengage coupler and repeat steps (b) and (c) inserting
coupler when positive pressure is five psig greater than
o r i g i n a l l y noted in step (c). Repeat steps (d) and (e).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 247
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
F-44A-4103
UP136688
Reference Points for 140 Degree Rotation of Coupler

Figure 217 72-10-16
Page 248
Dec 14/87
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Positive pressure indicated by rotating im-
peller w i l l vary depending upon force and
speed at which impeller is rotated. The in-
dividual performing calibration should
rotate impeller for several t r i a l s before
taking final pressure reading to get feel
for amount of rotational force required.
. B. (10) (h) Rotate impeller by hand counterclockwise (looking aft) and

hold impeller firmly in counterclockwise direction. Note
positive pressure which should be in the 18 to 25 psig range
with a desired pressure of approximately 22 psig. Relax
force on impeller and move impeller by hand to firm counter-
clockwise (looking aft) position several times to get feel
for amount of force required to get a consistent positive
pressure reading. This is base position for coupler in which
metering valve in torque sensor is in a balance position
between positive and negative pressure dump to gearcase.
Table 204. Desired Pressure Readings for Coupler Positioning
Positive Pressure
Typical
Negative Pressure Pressure
Step Required Desired Actual Range Desi red Actual
(10)(e) 20 to 35 psig 30 psig psig
(h) - 18 to 25 psig 22 psig psig
(j) 45 to 65 psig 55 psig psig
(k) - 15 to 22 psig 19 psig psig

(m) 60 to 80 psig 70 psig psig
(n) - 13 to 20 psig 16 psig psig

(p) 70 to 100 psig 85 psig psig
(q) - 11 to 18 psig 14 psig psig
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 249
Dec 14/87
i ~ l MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
center position so coupler can be removed
without drag.
Pre SB 72-0119, long torsion shaft, coupler
to be rotated 160 degrees.
Post SB 72-0119, short torsion shaft,
coupler to be rotated 140 degrees.
2. B. (10) (i) Carefully disengage coupler splines, rotate coupler 140 de-
grees (160 degrees for long torsion shaft) counterclockwise
(looking aft), and reinsert coupler.
(J) Rotate impeller by hand in clockwise (looking aft) direction

and hold impeller firmly in clockwise direction. Note nega-
tive pressure which should now increase to 45 to 65 psig.
Record negative pressure in Table 204.
(k) Rotate impeller by hand in counterclockwise (looking aft)

direction and hold impeller firmly in counterclockwise
direction. Note positive pressure which should now be 2 to 3
psig less than recorded in step (h). Record positive pres-
sure in Table 204.
center position so coupler can be removed
without drag.
(I) Carefully disengage coupler splines, rotate coupler 140 de-
grees (160 degrees for long torsion shaft) counterclockwise
(looking aft) and reinsert coupler.
(m) Rotate impeller by hand in clockwise (looking aft) direction
(n) Rotate impeller by hand in counterclockwise (looking aft)
direction. Note positive pressure which should be another 2
to 3 psig less than in step (k). Record positive pressure in
Table 204. I f negative pressure in step (m) was in the 60 to
80 psig range, with positive pressure typically 11 to 18 psig
range, further positioning of the coupler will not be
necessary. Disregard steps (o), (p), and (q), and proceed to
step (r).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 250
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: I t should be observed that moving the

coupler in a counterclockwise direction has
increased negative pressure readings sub-
s t a n t i a l l y while positive pressure had de-
creased a small amount with each coupler
movement. The important objective is to get
negative pressure of at least 60 psig with
positive pressure typically in the 11 to 18
psig range.
2. B. (10) (o) I f positive pressure is s t i l l not in the 11 to 18 psig range,
carefully disengage coupler splines, again rotate coupler 140
degrees (160 degrees for long torsion shaft) counterclockwise
(looking aft) and reinsert coupler.
(P) Rotate impeller by hand in clockwise (looking aft) direction

(q) Rotate impeller by hand in counterclockwise (looking aft)
direction. Note positive pressure which should be 2 to 3
psig less than in step (n) and should now be 11 to 18 psig.
Record positive pressure in Table 204.
(r) Turn off pump on calibrator assembly (mini-test stand). If
coupler was installed without spring, install spring at this
time. Note position of pointer on coupler positioning
wrench, andvery carefully remove coupler f u l l y . Install
spring on coupler, and very carefully reinstall coupler in
exactly same position from which i t was removed. Turn on
pump on calibrator assembly (mini-test stand) and recheck
negative and positive pressure as in steps (p) and (q) to en-
sure coupler position has not changed. Turn off pump on
calibrator assembly (mini-test stand).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 251
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Failure to hold impeller firmly by hand in
counterclockwise (looking aft) direction
will cause coupler spring to push coupler
out of engine. An additional technician may
be required to hold impeller while 285159-1-
1 or 284456-1-1 spline positioning wrench is
removed and quill shaft installed. A
287221-1-1 coupling indexing holder may be
used to hold coupler in engine while 285159-
1-1 spline positioning wrench is s t i l l
instal Ied.
. B. (10) (s) Hold impeller by hand firmly in counterclockwise (looking
aft) direction to remove backlash and to hold coupler in
position. Remove 285159-1-1 or 284456-1-1 spline positioning
wrench from coupler. Continue to hold impeller in counter-
clockwise direction to prevent coupler spring from pushing
coupler out of engine.
(t) Install splined torsion shaft (quill shaft) on 284455-1-1
quill shaft positioning wrench and insert quill shaft into
any free position. Rotate quill shaft clockwise (looking
aft) one small spline at a time until drag is f e l t on inser-
tion of quill shaft.
CAUTION: SHARPLY TAPPING SPLINED TORSION (QUILL)
SHAFT AFTER IT HAS BOTTOMEDMAY PRODUCE
BURRS WHICH CAN AFFECT PROPERCALIBRATION
OF TORQUE SENSORSYSTEM.
(u) Disengage quill shaft and carefully index quill shaft coun-
terclockwise (looking aft) four small splines. Engage small
splines and apply slight counterclockwise (looking aft) twist
to quill shaft and insert f i r s t large splines of quill shaft
by lightly tapping with slide hammer on 284455-1-1 quill
shaft positioning wrench. Removequill shaft positioning
wrench by turning wrench clockwise (looking aft). Wrench has
l e f t hand threads.
(11) Check feathering valve (NTS) t r i p as follows.
(a) I n s t a l l 287277-1-1 internal spline adapter into high speed
pinion gearshaft.
(b) Removegage (2, figure 214), line (1), and dummyfeathering
valve (3) and install engine feathering valve.
(c) I n s t a l l line (1, figure 214) from f i t t i n g on propeller pitch

control to tee f i t t i n g (12).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 252
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (11) (d) Install 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter into high speed
pinion.
(e) Remove 284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 gear train lock from starter

drive pad.
(f) Turn on pump of calibrator assembly (mini-test stand) and

note pressure on gage (22, figure 214) (gage which extends
into propeller pitch control). Pressure should be 80 to 100
psig.
NOTE: The positive pressure value recorded in Table 204

is an indication of the amount of negative torque
that will be required to t r i p feathering valve.
The higher the positive pressure the higher the
torque required to t r i p feathering valve.
Actuate feathering valve several times to purge

air from feathering valve to obtain accurate
feathering valve t r i p torque.
(g) Hold impeller by hand firmly in clockwise (looking aft)
direction. Use torque wrench which indicates torque from 0
to 50 inch-pounds in 1 inch-pound increments and turn 287277-
1-1 torque wrench adapter in high speed pinion counterclock-
wise (looking a f t ) . Note torque reading on torque wrench
when pressure on gage (22, figure 214) (center gage on mini-
test stand) drops abruptly, indicating feathering valve (NTS)
trip.
(h) Rotate impeller 180 degrees and recheck t r i p torque as in
step (g).
NOTE: I f torque required for feathering valve t r i p

is too high, refer to step ( j ) . If torque
is low, refer to step (k).
(i) I f torque required for feathering valve t r i p is 28 t o 35

inch-pounds in steps (g) and (h), torque sensor calibration
is satisfactory. Proceed to step (1).
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 253
Dec 14/87
ignal
~._ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Repositioning of quill shaft in order to
lower torque required for feathering valve
t r i p may be accomplished a maximum of two
times. I f torque required for feathering
valve t r i p is s t i l l high after repositioning
quill shaft the second time, i t will be
necessary to reposition coupler in order to
lower torque required for feathering valve
t r i p.
2. B. (11) (j) I f more than 35 inch-pounds torque is required to t r i p
feathering valve, proceed as follows.
1 Install 284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 gear train lock onto
starter pad.
2 Hold impeller firmly in counterclockwise (looking aft)
direction to prevent coupler from ejecting from engine and
remove 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter from high speed
pinion.
NOTE: Failure to hold impeller firmly by hand
in counterclockwise (looking aft) direc-
tion will cause coupler spring to push
coupler out of engine. An additional
technician may be required to hold
impel ler.
3 Install 284455-1-1 quill shaft positioning wrench and
while continuing to hold impeller firmly counterclockwise,
remove quill shaft only far enough to disengage large
splines. Index quill shaft counterclockwise (looking aft)
one small spline and reinsert large splines by slightly
twisting q u i l l shaft counterclockwise and l i g h t l y tapping
quill shaft into position.
4 Install 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter into high speed
pinion.
5 Remove 284689-1-1 or 284689-2-1 gear train lock from
starter pad.
Repeat feathering valve t r i p check. (See steps (f)
through ( i ) ) .
7 I f torque required for feathering valve t r i p is s t i l l too
high, repeat step 1 through 6.
UP136688
72-10-16
R Page 254
Aug 16/89
~:~/lied
2. B. (ii) (j) I f t r i p torque is not within limits after positioning of
quill shaft the maximum of two times, i t will be necessary
to remove quill shaft and reposition coupler 140 degrees
(160 degrees for long torsion shaft) counterclockwise
(looking aft) and reaccomplish feathering valve t r i p
check.
(k) I f torque required for feathering valve t r i p is too low,
proceed as follows.
NOTE: Repositioning of quill shaft in order to raise torque
required for feathering valve t r i p , may be accom-
plished a maximum of two times. I f torque required
for feathering valve t r i p is s t i l l low after reposi-
tioning quill shaft the second time, i t will be neces-
sary to reposition coupler in order to lower torque
required for feathering valve t r i p .
! Install 284689-I-1/-2-1 gear train lock onto starter pad.
2 Hold impeller firmly in counterclockwise (looking aft)
direction to prevent coupler from ejecting from engine and
remove 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter from high speed
pinion.
NOTE: Failure to hold impeller firmly by hand in
counterclockwise (looking aft) direction
will cause coupler spring to push coupler
out of engine. An additional technician may
be required to hold impeller.
3 Install 284455-1-1 quill shaft positioning wrench and
while continuing to hold impeller firmly counterclockwise,
remove quill shaft far enough to disengage large splines.
Index quill shaft clockwise (looking aft) one small spline
and reinsert f i r s t large spline by twisting quill shaft
slightly counterclockwise and l i g h t l y tapping quill shaft
into position.
4 Install 287277-1-1 torque wrench adapter into high speed
pinion.
Remove 284689-1-1/-2-1 gear train lock from starter pad.
Repeat feathering valve t r i p check. (Refer to steps (f)
through ( i ) . )
7 I f torque required for feathering valve t r i p is s t i l l too

low, repeat steps ! through 6.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 255
Aug 12/91
lied
2. B. ( 1 1 ) (k)--8 I f t r i p torque is not within limits after positioning of
quill shaft the maximum of two times, i t will be necessary
to remove quill shaft and reposition coupler 140 degrees
(160 degrees for long torsion shaft) clockwise (looking
aft) and reaccomplish feathering valve t r i p check.
(I) Remove special tools and test equipment from engine.
(m) Screw 289318-1 ball lock wrench into shaft until i t bottoms.
Install spacer, spring and balls into ball lock retainer
shaft. While holding balls in place, insert shaft with
289318-1 ball lock wrench spacer and balls (ball lock
retainer) into high speed pinion gearshaft. While applying
pressure inward on wrench, partially unscrew 289318-1 ball
lock wrench to ensure shaft is locked in gearshaft. Remove
ball lock wrench. Shaft (ball lock retainer) should be nomi-
nally 0.27 inch depth from end of high speed pinion
gearshaft.
3. Inspection/Check
A. (Post SB 72-0061) Inspect Oil Transfer Manifold, Torque Sensor Assembly
and Fittings (See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect torque sensor assembly for freedom of rotation of internal
parts. Inspect adapter and o i l transfer manifold for damage and
obstructions that may affect oil flow. Inspect tube assemblies in
accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
(2) Visually inspect oil transfer adapter (255, Figure 201) for f r e t -
ting, wear, and other damage that may cause leakage.
(3) Visually inspect strainers in oil transfer adapter (255) for
damage. Refer to Approved Repairs for strainer replacement.
(4) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements or is

damaged beyond repair.
4. Approved Repairs
NOTE: Strainers Part No. 694752-1/-4 are used on Oil Transfer

Adapter Part No. 3101708-1. Strainers Part No.
694752-5/-8 are used on Oil Transfer Adapter Part No.
3101708-2.
R A. Repair Strainer (235, 245, Figure 201 or 202)
(1) Collapse strainer and remove from o i l transfer adapter. Ensure a l l

pieces of strainer are removed from o i l transfer adapter.
(2) Position strainer on oil transfer adapter and press to bottom.

UP136688
72-10-16
Page 256
Aug 12/91
AJlied~ignalAerospaceCompany
lied
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-Ol-27)
• \
MEASURE GAP BETWEEN HOUSING

AND TORQUE SENSOR BODY WITH
A FEELER GAGE IN THIS AREA.
100 INCH MINIMUM FROM EDGE OF PLUG
©
0 Q
REMOVE MATERIAL FROM SHADED AREA SB-4106

UP136688
R Repair Accessory Drive Housing

R Figure 218 72-10-16
Page 257
Aug 12/91
,~llied
R 4. B. Repair Accessory Drive Housing (See Figure 218)
R (i) Remove torque sensor and gear assembly.
R (2) Mask off the interior of accessory drive housing, ensuring that
R gears, bearings, bearing bores, oil and case vents are completely
R covered.
R (3) Remove excess material from accessory drive housing (Figure 218) at
R the point of interference by f i l i n g or with hand grinder to provide
R approximately 0.020 inch clearance between accessory drive housing
R and torque sensor housing arm.
R (4) Ensure that a l l f i l i n g s are removed from accessory drive housing,
R and remove masking material. Recheck to ensure that no contamina-
R tion has occurred.
R (5) Reinstall torque sensor and gear assembly and recheck clearance in
R accordance with paragraph 1.C.
(6) I f clearance is approximately 0.020 inch, proceed with touch up of
repaired areas as follows.
R (a) Prepare magnesium touch up solution in accordance with

(b) Maintain solution at 71 to 93°C (160 to 200°F).
(c) Using cotton swab, apply magnesium touch up solution and allow
to remain on surface for a minimum of five minutes, then wipe
off excess. Air dry using clean, dry f i l t e r e d compressed a i r
at 20 psig maximum.
UP136688
72-10-16
Page 258
Aug 12/91
/J~llied
MAgiNTENANCE MANUAL '-~--~Signal
5. Cleaning/Paintinjg
(1) Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for general cleaning instruc-

NOTE: Reference shall be made in Table 205 for recom-

Figure Item Cleanin9 Methods


201 115 Manifold X X
170 Retai her X X
175, 210, Tube Assembly X
295
205 PIug X X
255 Adapter X X
270 Tube
315, 340, Bushing X X
360
365 Torque Sensor X X
Assembly
485 Shim X X
202 115 Manifold X X

170 Retai her X X
175, 210, Tube Assembly
295
205 Plug X X
255 Adapter X X
270 Tube
315, 350 Bushing X X
355 Torque Sensor X X
Assembly
430 Shim X X
UP136688
72-10-16
R Page 259/260
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IPOST SB 72-0061) DIRECT DRIVE FUEL CONTROL GEARSHAFT -

MAINTENANCE PRACT'ICES

Item Source/
1. Bearing Driver Used to install bearing on 291788-1

gearshaft in direct drive fuel
control gear train.
. Mechanical Bearing Used to remove bearing from 291789-1

Puller gearshaft in direct drive fuel
control gear train.
. Mechanical Gear Used to remove spur 293044-1

Puller gearshaft and matched
bearing set from spur
gearshaft.
. Gear Instal ling Used to hold spur gear- 293601-1

Holder and shaft while driving spur
Driver gearshaft and matched
bearing set onto spur
gearshaft.
. Gear Holder Used to hold spur gear- 296094-i

shaft while removing or
torquing nut.
R . Shaft I n s t a l l e r To hold torque sensor assembly 831193-1

R and Holder and press splined shaft onto
R spur gear and bearings.
R . Bearing Installer To remove or install bearing 831194-1

R and Remover into torque sensor housing.
72-10-17
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
50,,.,
45.,.~ ~
25 30,~,~ ~'~
5
CE-44G-1654
5. NUT 35. KEY

10. WASHER 40. GEARSHAFT
20. GEARSHAFT 45. SPRINGWASHER
25. LOCKPLATE 50. WASHER(SHIM)
30. BEARINGSET 75. TORQUESENSORASSY
(Post SB 72-0061, Pre SB 72-0232, Pre SB 72-0555)

Direct Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft Installation
Figure 201 72-10-17
UP136688
Page 202
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROCEDURES.
1. A. RemoveDirect Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft

(diaphragm) requires determination of existing engine
torque indicating system calibration values. Prior to
r~ioval of intermediate gearbox assembly (diaphragm),
perform engine pre-teardown calibration. Refer to

Practices.


Practices.
(6) Removeoil transfer tube, oil j e t and lubrication nozzle. Refer to
(7) Removetorsion spline ( q u i l l ) shaft and coupling. Refer to

(8) Removediaphragm assembly. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance

Practices.
(9) Removetorque sensor. Refer to 72-10-16, Maintenance Practices.
R (10) (Pre SB 72-0555) Remove fuel control drive gearshaft as follows.

R (See Figure 201 or 202.)
(a) Using 296094-1 gear holder, remove nut and washer.
(b) Using 293044-i puller, remove gearshaft (20, Figure 201, 202),
matched bearing set and lockplate as an assembly.
72-10-17
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~5 "10 20 E-44G-636
5. BOLT 35. KEY

10. WASHER 40. GEARSHAFT
20. GEARSHAFT 45. SPRINGWASHER
25. LOCKPLATE 50. WASHER(SHIM)
30. BEARINGSET 75. TORQUESENSORASSY
R (Post SB 72-0232, Pre SB 72-0555)

Direct Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft Installation
UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-17

Page 204
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. (10) (c) Remove spring washer and washer.
(d) Remove gearshaft (40) from torque sensor body. Remove key
from gearshaft.
(e) Using 291789-1 puller, remove matched bearing set from spur
gearshaft. Remove lockplate.
R (11) (Post SB 72-0555) Remove fuel control drive gearshaft as follows.

R (See Figure 202A.)
R (a) Using 296094-1 gear holder, remove nut and washer.
R (b) Remove spur gear (15) from splined shaft.
R (c) Place torque sensor assembly on an arbor press with spur gear
R (45) down. Press splined shaft from bearing and spur gear.
R (d) Remove spur gear (45), internal retainer ring, retainer ring,
R and spring tension washer.
R (e) Using 831194-1 bearing installer/remover, remove bearing.
(12) Refer to 72-10-18, Maintenance Practices, for further disassembly

of engine.
72-10-17
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAII~TENANCE I+IAP~UAL
• s
CE-44G-1676
R 5. NUT 35. INTERNALRETAINER RING

R 10. WASHER 40. SPLINEDSHAFT
R 20. BEARING 45. SPURGEAR
R 25. SPRINGTENSIONWASHER 75. TORQUESENSORASSY
R 30. RETAINERRING
R (Post SB 72-0555)
R Fuel Control Drive Gearshaft Installation
R Figure 202A 72-10-17
UP136688
Page 206
Aug 4/94
~lUedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
FIAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIM. B
f ,
'
f
I '
DIM.A
WEW A-A
SAMPLE
DIM. A = 0 . 6 8 8
DIM. B = 0.630
0.058
(0.031 - 0.036 GAP) 0.033
SHIMS REQUIRED 0.025
1-44A-1176R1
R (Pre SB 72-0232, Pre SB 72-0555)

Direct Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft Shimming Requirements
Figure 203 72-10-17
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94

CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUSTBE MINIMIZED.

PROCEDURES.
1. B. Install Direct Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft

recommended values.
R (1) (Pre SB 72-0555) Install fuel control drive gearshaft as follows.

R (See Figure 201 or 202.)
(a) Determine spur gearshaft shimming requirements as follows.

(See Figure 203, 204.)
Using depth micrometer, measure from bearing seat in torque

sensor assembly housing to face of torque sensor assembly
housing and record as Dimension A.
2-- Measure height of bearing set and record as Dimension B.
3 Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A, then subtract 0.033

inch from the remainder to determine quantity and thickness
of washers (shims) required to provide 0.031 to 0.036 inch
gap.
NOTE: Ensure manufacturer's "V" mark on outer race

of bearing set is aligned prior to
instal lation.
(b) Install lockplate on gearshaft. Align manufacturer's "V" mark

on bearing set, then press matched bearing set onto gearshaft
using 291788-1 driver.
(c) Install key into slot on gearshaft, then install gearshaft

through torque sensor housing.
(d) Install quantity and thickness of washers (shims) detemlined

in step (a) into torque sensor housing, then install spring
washer.
CAUTION: ENSURE CONTAMINATIONAND BURRSHAVE BEEN

REMOVED FROMSHAFT OF GEARSHAFT(40) TO
ENSURE PROPERBEARING INSTALLATION.
(e) Using 293601-1 holder and driver, install gearshaft and mat-
ched bearing set onto gearshaft and align key slot in gear-
shaft with key.
UP136688
72-10-17
Page 208
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
R 1. B. (i) (f) Install washer and nut on spur gearshaft. Use 296094-1 gear
R holder to prevent rotation of spur gearshaft and tighten nut
R (5) to a torque value of 100 inch-pounds.
R (2) (Post SB 72-0555) Install fuel control drive gearshaft as follows.

R (See Figure 202A.)
R (a) Using 831194-1 bearing installer/remover, press bearing in

R torque sensor.
R (b) Install spring tension washer, retainer ring, and internal

R retainer ring. Ensure f l a t side of retainer ring (30) is fac-
R ing spring tension washer.
R (c) Place spur gear (45) on bearing. Using 831193-1 shaft instal-
R lation tool and holder, press splined shaft through spur gear
R and bearing ensuring proper alignment of splines.
R (d) Rotate torque sensor assembly 180° and press spur gear (15) on
R splined shaft.
R (e) Install washer with chamfer side up. Install nut.
R (f) Use 296094-I gear holder to prevent rotation of spur gear and
R tighten nut (5) to a torque value of 200 inch-pounds.
(3) Install oil transfer manifold and torque sensor assembly. Refer to
72-10-17
UP136688
Page 209
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
BEARINGSET.~,.,..~
SHIM~!' ! Dlh~.B
SECTIONA--A
SAMPLE
DIM. A = 0.688
DIM. B = 0,630
0,058
(0.031 - 0.036 GAP) 0,033
SHIMSREQUIRED 0.025 I -.44A-2465
R (Post SB 72-0232, Pre SB 72-0555)

Direct Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft Shimming Requirements
UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-17

Page 210
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Direct Drive Fuel Control Gearshaft (See Figure 201, 202)
(1) Inspect bearing set and gearshaft for freedom of rotation. Inspect
gearshaft teeth for chips, cracks, and uneven wear.
. Cl eani ng/Pai ntin 9
Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting for general cleaning instructions

and description of cleaning methods specified in Table 202.
NOTE: Reference shall be made to Table 202 for recommended

cleaning method.

No. No. Nomenclature 1 2

201 or 20, 40 Spur Gearshaft X X
202 25 Lockplate X X
30 Bearing Set*
45 Spring Washer X X
50 Washer (Shim) X X
R 202A 15, 45 Spur Gear X X

R 20 Bea ri ng* X X
R 25 Spring Tension Washer X X
R 30 Retainer Ring X X
R 35 Internal Retainer Ring X X
R 45 Splined Shaft X X
*Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, paragraph D. for special

cleaning instructions.
72-10-17
UP136688
Page 211/212
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Item Source/
1. Oil Pump Remover Used to remove oil pressure 284183-1-1

R Driver pump from accessory drive (Replaced by
R housing. 296509-2)
. Bearing Retainer Used to bolt on rear of ac- 284197-1-1

cessory drive housing to re-
tain propeller shaft r o l l e r
bearings when propeller shaft
i s removed.
. Bearing Puller Used to remove bearing outer 285773-1-1

race from accessory drive
housing.
. Pressure Pump Used to install oil pressure 296509-1

R Installer pump in accessory drive (Replaced by
R housing. 296509-2)
. Pressure Pump Used to install or remove oil 296509-2

Installer/Remover pressure pump into or from (Repl aces
cavity of accessory drive 296509-1 )
housing.
72-10-18
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
~ ] MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
...-"" : '. ;" ~ . ~

....:!... . . . . . . . ..<",'.",:" ".-,.
zu - . -; ~. .,~-.- - - ." ,, "_ "~. • . - ".~ \

~w.@,%. , ~ ~~ . , .~,.,. \ \ . ,\
or ',', "., ~.-- i.~ :,~ ~,9'~ . i , " ~":

, x ,~. - .. ; ~,. , ~// ,, . , ~ • ..,,
"
~. \~.,~ .:.,.. , - ,.-,
.,-~ .
.. ..-.- ~-.,\
.............. . . . . . . . .
,,, ..~,. ~" ... ~'~,. : ..." _ ', : .."
.~ ""'':':" - , ' ...../
• ~,. y':./
" - . ~c'" "c .... ..." E-44A-6645
5. SCREW 20. PACKING

15. OIL PRESSUREPUMPASSY
UP136688
Oil Pressure Pump Assembly

Figure 201 72-10-18
Page 202
Dec 14/87
lied

Any approved engine oil Commercial ly available
Lubricant Monsanto Company, 800 N Lindbergh, Blvd,

Grease (MIL-G-7421) Commercial ly available

REFER TO 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
NOTE: I f no maintenance is required in this area proceed to
72-10-19, Maintenance Practices, for further
disassembly.
I. A, Remove Oil Pressure Pump Assembly and Roller Bearings (See Figures 201
and 202)

(diaphragm) requires determination of existing en-
gine torque indicating system calibration values.
Prior to removal of intermediate gearbox assembly
(diaphragm), perform engine pre-teardown
calibration. Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
Practices.
Practices.

Practices.
R (4a) (Code GA) Remove fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer
(5) Removeoil transfer tube, oil jet and lubrication nozzle. Refer to
UP136688
72-10-18
Page 203
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
..-%
......,.- ;.,.,;.., • -- ,..~

...: . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....;,-~,';,~" - . , `
,.~ .,,.~.;~.'\', ,:.,,', ; .'~.',..........
. -,~ ,,:,.,,
..,,,~. . ~ . . - . . , ,...
35- \ ~ / " L
v J ~ ,,,,~
, , C \ "I ~
<>'.. " ~ / . :.;~.'.~'
,<.. . ..". -.-- - :.,.v...:
.. '.'". .• :. ',, : -..:
:'
(3Y ~-,--au ~ '-~,"~I" _" \":" ',, LL~,.-. :" , ¢: "--': : " .':
. ,.', ,~/.~.--~ .~.~ :,,..'.~.~..., , . . . , ~ . . . . .. .,~..
, ' J " :..'~Z~ ..,;.~' , :" "..:-:-\-,,"-,~.... -.~....
/ ~'~." j~'\ \..~ :~:" .~ : : . . " :-'~v-'\, . . . . -':'.~--.'"
/ ~ ~ \~C~ .~' "" \ '. .. . . . . . . . . . .
, " ~ ,~ ".~"X' ..:.<'~' : .... - : : .-'
20 5 ...... F-44G-75;]
5. SCREW 30. BEARING (OUTER RACE)

10. RETAINER 35. BOLT
15. BEARING (OUTER RACE) 40. KEY WASHER
20. BOLT 45. PLUG
25. KEY WASHER 50. PACKING
UP136688
Roller Bearing Installation

Figure 202 72-10-18
Page 204
Dec 14/87

1. A. (6) Remove torsion spline ( q u i l l ) shaft and coupling. Refer to

(7) Remove diaphragm assembly. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance

Practices.
(B) Remove screws and washers securing oil pressure pump assembly by
aligning holes on gear of pump assembly with head of each screw to
be removed.
R (9) Remove oil pressure pump assembly using 284183-1-i driver or

R 296509-2 installer/remover and remove packings.

MINII41ZED. REFERTO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRAC-
(10) Remove screw and retainer securing outer race of starter-generator

idler gear bearing and remove outer race using 285773-1-1 puller.
(11) Remove bolts and key washers securing flanged journal r o l l e r bear-
ing outer race and remove outer race.
(12) Remove bolt, key washer and plug. Remove packing from plug.
B. Install Oil Pressure Pump Assembly (See Figure 201)
CAUTION: (OIL PRESSUREPUMPASSEMBLY PARTNO. 867165-19

AND 3103217-X) ENSURESCREWS (15, FIGURES 203,
203A) ARE INSTALLED AND TIGHTENEDTO A TORQUE
VALUE OF 20 INCH-POUNDS.

recommended values.

i nstal lation.
When oil pressure pump is installed, the oil pas-

sage in pump must align with case oil passage.
(1) Install new packings on oil pressure pump assembly. Install pump
so pump outlet is aligned with case passage. Install and secure
R 296509-1/-2 pressure pump installer against face of accessory drive
housing with four nuts. Press oil pressure pump assembly in place
R using 296509-1/-2 pressure pump installer. Remove installer.
(2) Secure pump assembly with washers and screws. Tighten screws (5,
Figure 201) to a torque value of 60 inch-pounds.
72-10-18
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
1. B. (3) Check oil pump for freedom of rotation.
C. Install Roller Bearings (See Figure 202)

CAUTION: ALIGN BEARING DRAIN HOLESAT TOP AND BOTTON.
NOTE: Inner race of bearing is installed on propeller shaft.
(i) Install outer race of flanged jounal roller bearing in accessory

housing. Ensure drain holes are aligned with accessory housing at
top and bottom.
(2) Secure bearing outer race to housing with washer and bolt. Tighten
bolts (20) to a torque value of 60 inch-pounds. Install key wash-
ers and bolts.
(3) Hold r o l l e r bearings in place with 284197-1-1 r e t a i n e r . Install

outer race of r o l l e r bearing in accessory housing with bearing
serial number v i s i b l e from f r o n t of gearbox. Secure race with
retainers and screws. Tighten screws (5) to a torque value of 50
inch-pounds, loosen aria retighten to a torque value of 40 inch-
pounds.
(4) I n s t a l l new packing on plug. Install plug in housing and secure

with key washer (40) and bolt. Tighten bolt (35) to a torque value
of 6U inch-pounds.
(5) I n s t a l l diaphragm. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE MINIMIZED. REFERTO

70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Oil Pressure Pump Assembly an~ Roller Bearing (See Figures 201,
202)
(1) Inspect bearing ana pump assembly f o r freedom of rotation and any
evidence of binding.
R (2) Visually inspect pump assembly for pitting.
R (a) Pitting is acceptable anywhere, provided i t does not exceed

R 0.01 i,ch depth.
R (b) Pitting which exceeds 0.01 inch depth is not acceptable except
R as defined in Approved Repairs.
(3) (Pre SB 72-0226) Refer to 72-10-20, Inspection/Check, to inspect

aft propeller main bearing carrier mounting surface on accessory
housing assembly.
(4) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements. Refer to
Approved Repairs.
UP136688
72-10-18
Page 206
Aug 4/94
HAlNTENANCEMANUAL ignal
~ l s l i e d

3. Approved Repairs

required to perform Approved Repairs.
Table 204 provides a l i s t of all special tools, fixtures

and equipment required to perform Approved Repairs.
Table 203. Haterials and Compounds

Any approved engine oil Commercially avai I able
Grease Shell Oil Co, 1 Shell Plaza, P.O.
(Aeroshell No. 7) Box 2463, Houston, TX 77001
Jointing compound Marston Bentley Inc, Rochester, MI
(Hylomar PL32H) 48063 (Distributed by Aviall, 215 S
28th St, Phoenix, AZ 85034)
I tem Source/
R 1. Seal Puller Used to remove seal 285133-1-1

R from plate.
R . Seal Puller (Preferred tool-replaces 285133-2-1
R 285133-1-1)
. Seal Holder Used to install seal in oil 296386-1
and Driver pressure pump plate
assembly.
UP136688
72-10-18
Page 207
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: For replacement of oil pressure pump seal (40, Figure

203) without removing oil pressure pump, refer to
72-10-08.
Repair procedures outlined below are considered accept-

able as corrective action for oil pressure pump assem-
blies experiencing a low pressure output.
3. A. Repair Oil Pump Assembly
(1) Remove oil pressure pump assembly in accordance with

Removal / Instal I ati on.
(2) P a r t i a l l y disassemble oil pressure pump assembly for inspection as
(a) Remove nuts, washers, and screws securing plate assembly to
pump body.
(b) Remove assembled plate assembly and seal.
(c) Remove rotor set.

(d) Remove pump shaft seal using 285133-2-1 seal puller.
R (2a) Visually inspect oil pressure pump plate assembly and body assembly
R for p i t t i n g . (See Figure 202A.)
R (a) Pitting is acceptable anywhere provided i t does not exceed

R 0.01 inch depth.
R (b) Pitting on i n t e r i o r of plate assembly within the boundaries of

R Dimension R and Dimension S is acceptable provided i t does not
R exceed 0.02 inch depth. (See View B, Figure 202A.)
Dimension R shall not exceed 0.15 inch.

Dimension S shall not exceed 0.15 inch.
R (c) Pitting on interior of housing assembly within the boundary of
R Dimension P and outward of minimum diameter of casting is ac-
R ceptable provided i t does not exceed 0.02 inch depth. (See
R View C, Figure 202A.)
Dimension P shall not exceed 0.15 inch.

UP136688
72-10-18
Page 208
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. A. (2a) (d) Pitting which exceeds 0.02 inch depth and is within the boun-
R daries specified in steps (b) and (c) may be repaired as
R follows.
R 1 Hand finish within the boundaries defined in steps (b) and

R (c) to depth of pitting and to profile shown in Sections
R Y-Y and Z-Z. Minimumthickness of reworked area shall not
R be less than minimum wall as cast (Dimension T).
R I
2 Break edges and polish reworked area with rubber polish
R wheel.
R 3 Treat reworked area with chromate conversion coating

R solution. Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting.
(3) Inspect oil pressure pump rotor set as follows. (See Figure 204.)
NOTE: Rotor sets are matched. Do not separate or

intermingle with rotors frml other matched
sets.
(a) Visually inspect rotor set for nicks, scoring, burrs, pit-
ting, gouges, and cracks. None are permitted.
(b) Perform dimensional inspection i f visual inspection indicates

wear or damage. See Figure 204 for aimensional check.
(c) Replace rotor set i f inspection requirements are not met.
72-10-18
UP136688
Page 208A
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ ~ DIM. R
DIM. S
VIEW B
GEROTOR
INTERFACE
PLATE ASSY
HAND FINISH
PROFILE
SECTION Y - Y
R DIM. T
HAND FINISHPROFILE
/
~ Z DIM. P
VIEW C
1
T
SECTION Z - Z
_•"•A
MINIMUMDIAMETER
OF CASTING
DIM. T (REF) ----=
HOUSINGASSY SECTION A - A
CI-44G-1323
Oil Pressure Pump Housing and Plate Assembly Repair

UP136688
Figure 202A 72-10-18

Page 208B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. A. (4) Assemble oil pressure pump assembly as follows. (See Figure 203.)
(a) Inspect spur-gearshaft through body and install key into slot
of spur-gearshaft.
NOTE: Rotors of rotor set may be assemblea without

regard to position of side markings.
( b ) Apply a light coat of clean engine oil to rotor set and in-
stall inner rotor of rotor set to spur-gearshaft over key.
(c) Install outer rotor of rotor set over inner rotor into inside
rotor pocket of body.
(d) I n s t a l l oil pressure pump shaft seal.
1 Coat outer surface of seal (45) and mating surface of oil

pressure pump plate assembly with jointing compound
(Hyl omar PL32H).
2 Coat l i p of seal (45) and mating surface of shaft with

grease (Aeroshell No. 7).
3 I n s t a l l new oil pressure pump shaft seal using 296386-1

seal holder and driver.
(e) Carefully install plate into place on gearshaft. Ensure body

and plate have full interfacing f i t .
CAUTION: (OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY PART NO.

867165-19 AND 3103217-X) ENSURE SCREWS
(15, FIGURES 203, 203A) ARE INSTALLED AND
TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE VALUE OF 20 INCH-
POUNDS.
(f) Secure plate assembly to body assembly with nuts (5), washers
(10), and screws (15). Tighten screws (15) to a torque value
of 20 inch-pounds.
(g) Check for freedom of rotation of spur-gearshaft and rotor set.
72-10-18
UP136688
Page 209
Aug 4194
f~l~f~TN.gA
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
35 -'-.--~
~ ~\~ ~ / .,o
"
7 --%15
E-44G- 1227
5. NUT 35. KEY

10. WASHER 40. BODYASSY
15. SCREW 45. SEAL
25. PLATEASSY 50. SPURGEARSHAFT
30. ROTORSET
Oil Pressure Pump Assembly

UP136688
Figure 203 72-10-18

R Page 210
Aug 4/94
lied
I)
DIA B
t
DIM.
, 1
D SECTION l)-l)
0
1-44G -604
R (Pre SB 72-0505) Diameter B shall be 2.2490 inch minimum.
R (Post SB 72-0505) Diameter B shall be 2.1220 to 2.1230 inch.

R Dimension D shall not exceed 0.010 inch maximum.
Inspection of Oil Pressure Pump Rotor Set

UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-18

Page 211
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
4. Cleaning/Paintin ~

(2) Clean oil pressure pump in accordance with 72-00-00,

(3) Clean bearings in accordance with 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING,
paragraph D.
UP136688
72-10-18
Page 212
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR BEARING CARRIER AND COMPONENTS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Item Source/
1. Bearing Puller Used to install bearing and 284168-1-1

carrier onto main shaft and
into accessory drive housing.
. Wheel Clearance Used to provide a reference 284498-i-1/

Gage point to measure on when -2-1
establishing wheel to shroud
clearances.
. Bearing Puller Used to remove bearing from 285154-1-i/

housing assembly and main shaft. -2-1
. Seal Pressing Driver Used to press seal out of 285806-1-1

and Holder bearing carrier.
. Torquing Holder and Used to hold rotating group 287416-1-1

Adapter in a fixed position when re-
moving or installing bearing
retaining nut to main shaft.
. Seal Pressing Driver Used to align and install 287894-1

R compressor shaft seal in (Replaced by
R the bearing carrier. 831351-1)
. Rotating Group Used to check for impeller 294528-1

Thrusting Fixture clearances after replacing
compressor end bearing.
R . Seal Pressing Driver Used to align and install 831351-1

R compressor shaft seal in (Replaces
R the seal carrier. 287894-1)
72-10-19
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO, 72-01-27)
si:,' ..":-",:!.:":'('~-'.,'"%.,
:
, ..~, .~:, . .............. ;-~ .. , . . ;, ,-, ~'~,
:,: .....C..k-. : :: ! ,x ! ...L,,..;.,:7

, ', ~'" ,~ ' ~ ' C ;, ~':"~' '
165 \ ~
• "Y~"-
,..-':,",,'."
:C"; ,,4" : " \
"::-;"
~ i
i-: ""
150
\ ~~ ~~, "~ " , ,~:.-;
--'.'. • ,'.."
,,-:,~/- ',.',:. .:",*
120 ~ 2~,~-~ ~ . . ~ ""~-'L"-,. . . . . . "-."~,":"

110 ~ ~ Ip'%-'~ u" ~L ~ "':---~-"'"
(l~--%~["*,~-~ 160 155
10
\
40 35
E-44G-660
15
R 10. PLUG 40. PIN 125. AIR/OIL SEAL

R 15. NUT 45. RETAINER 150. BEARINGCARRIER
R 20. GEAR 50. SHIM 155. PACKING
R 25. NUT 110. BEARING 160. PACKING
R 35. PIN 120. ROTOR 165. SHIM
Compressor Bearing Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 72-10-19

Page 202
Dec 14/87
lied
Item Source/
. Rotating Group Used to check for impeller 298026-1

Back-up Fixture clearances after replacing
compressor end bearing.


CAUTION: ENSURETOP NORMALRUNNINGMEASUREMENT(STEP

1.A.(15)) IS ACCURATELYOBTAINED. THIS MEASUREMENT
MUST BE DUPLICATEDAFTER INSTALLATION OF COMPRESSOR
BEARING.
HANDLING OF BEARINGCOMPONENTSMUSTBE MINIMIZED.
PROCEDURES.
NOTE: For bearing l i f e limit, refer to 72-00-00, INSPECTION/
CHECK, Table 601.
1. A. RemoveCompressor Bearing Carrier Support Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Removal of the intermediate gearabox (diaphragm) assem-
bly will require accomplishment of torque output check
after installation. Refer to 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test, paragraph 2.

Practices.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 203
Aug 12/91
i ~ i MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO° 72-01-27)
PARALLEBAR
L
UREHERE
F-44G-369
R "284498-1-I/-2-1 Clearance Gage
Measuring for Running Clearance

UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-19

Page 204
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. (2) Remove propeller pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Maintenance

Practices.


Practices.
(6) Remove oil transfer tube, oil j e t and lubrication nozzle. Refer to
(7) Remove torsion spline (quill) shaft and coupling. Refer to

(8) Remove diaphragm assembly. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance

Practices.
R (9) R~1ove tachometer generator gear and torque sensor gear assemblies.
(10) Remove oil transfer manifold and torque sensor assembly. Refer to
(11) Remove oil inlet retainer shield assembly. Refer to 72-50-01,

(12) Remove t a i l cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(13) RBnove oil inlet f i t t i n g and oil pressure j e t . Refer to 72-50-03,

(14) Remove turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to 72-50-04, ~v~inte-

nance Practices.
CAUTION: DO NOT MOVEOR ROTATEROTATINGASSEMBLYWHILE

NUT IS REMOVED.
(15) Measure top normal running clearance as follows. (See Figure 202.)
72-10-19
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
t"~ [=f"~ '7t3 - 3 ' , A

lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
NOTE: Both 294528-1 thrusting fixture and 298026-1

back-up fixture can be used to load the rotating
group for measuring purposes and support when in-
stalling compressor bearing and bearing carrier
support assembly. However when using 294528-1
thrusting fixture, the a i r c r a f t tail pipe has to
be removed from engine exhaust pipe to gain ac-
cess to the back flange of exhaust pipe. To en-
sure proper loading of rotating group tighten
handle of thrusting/back-up fixture to a torque
value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact with
main shaft.
1. A. (15) (a) Install 294528-1 thrusting fixture on exhaust pipe or install

298026-1 back-up fixture at scavenge pump mount.
(b) Tighten handle of thrusting/back-up fixture to a torque value

of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact with main shaft.
(c) Place a parallel bar on face of housing assembly, install

284498-1-1/-2-1 gage into end of main shaft, and measure from
parallel bar to center of gage using depth micrometer.
(d) Record as top normal running clearance and put aside for use
later in assembly.
(16) Removenut using 287416-1-i holder and adapter, then remove gear
from forward end of main shaft.
(17) Removeand discard plugs from nut.
CAUTION: SHIMS INSTALLED BETWEEN FLANGESOF RETAINER

AND BEARING CARRIER ESTABLISH A CRITICAL
DIMENSION. RECORDEXACTNUMBERAND THICKNESS
OF SIIIMS REMOVEDTO ENSURESAMENUMBERAND
THICKNESS ARE INSTALLED AT INSTALLATION.
LOCKWIRE SHIMS (IN THEIR RELATIVE INSTALLATION
LOCATION) TO RETAINER TO PREVENTLOSS OR IN-
TERMINGLING WITH OTHERSHIMS.
(18) Remove nuts securing assembly, then remove retainer and retainer
shims.
(19) (Pre SB 72-0174) Use 285154-1-1/-2-1 bearing puller to remove

bearing from bearing carrier.
R (20) (Post SB 72-0174 or 72-0634) Use 285154-2-1 bearing puller to

remove bearing from bearing carrier.
(21) Remove bearing carrier and seal assembly from accessory drive
housing using two 10-32 screws as pullers.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 206
Au~ 4/94
lied
1. A. (22) Separate components after removal. Press seal assembly from car-
r i e r using driver and 285806-1-1 holder. Removeand discard
packings.
CAUTION: SHIMS INSTALLED BETWEEN BEARING CARRIER AND

HOUSING ESTABLISH A CRITICAL DIMENSION.
RECORD EXACTNUMBERAND THICKNESS OF SHIMS
REMOVEDTO ENSURESAMENUMBERAND THICKNESS
ARE INSTALLED AT INSTALLATION. LOCKWIRESHIMS
(IN THEIR RELATIVE INSTALLATION LOCATION) TO
BEARING CARRIER TO PREVENTLOSS OR INTERM-
INGLING WITH OTHERSHIMS.
(23) Removebearing carrier shims.

PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean engine oil or lu-
B. Assemble Compressor Bearing Carrier and Components (See Figure 201)

mended general torque values. Add frictional
drag (run-down torque) of self-locking devices to
recommended values.
R (Codes CA-CC, GA, Pre SB 72-0634) (Codes AA-BA,
R DA-FB) Bearing inner race consists of two halves
which are matched and scribed during manufacture.
Halves must be positioned so scribe marks on in-
ner diameter of inner race halves are aligned to
f a c i l i t a t e checking alignment during assembly and
installation of bearing carrier. (See Figure
203.)
Step (1) not required unless bearing, bearing

retainer or bearing carrier has been replaced.
I f components were not replaced, use same thic-
kness of shims as removed.
(1) Use a depth micrometer and measure from bearing seat to carrier
flange face and record as Dimension A. (See Figure 202.) Posi-
tion bearing on retainer and using a micrometer, measure from
retainer flange to bearing surface and record as Dimension B.
Subtract Dimension A from Dimension B. Subtract 0.002 inch from
result. The remainder is required thickness of retainer shims to
provide 0.001 to 0.003 inch pinch between retainer and carrier.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 206A/206B
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTOR SHALL BE

MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAR EITHER SYN-
THETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH
POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE
OF THE ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVES
SHALL BE WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTOR SHALL BE
INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
NOTE: Seal must bottom in carrier without excessive

pressure or cutting packing.
I. B. (2) I n s t a l l new packing in c a r r i e r . Ensure a i r / o i l seal and r o t o r are

dry; do not l u b r i c a t e p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n . Press a i r / o i l seal
R into c a r r i e r using 287894-1 or 831351-1 d r i v e r .
R (2a) Check to ensure packing (160) is properly seated. Install new

R packing (155) on carrier.
R (2b) Install rotor ( f l a t side down) on seal.
(3) Install bearing.
CAUTION: ENSURETHAT RETAINER ANTI-ROTATION TAB/PIN

LOCKS IN SLOT OF BEARING. (SEE FIGURE 204.)
(4) Install thickness of retainer shims determined in step {1) or same

thickness of shims removed, as applicable. Position retainer on
carrier.
72-10-19
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
"BEARING
BEARING SEAT SNAP RING /
/
RETAINER
L-- . . . . . . . . . "_a
/
I
CAUTION:
kJ U
DO NOT
MEASURE SMALL INDEX LINES IN
ON RADIUS. BEARING LINE WITH SCRIBEMARKS
CARRIER
MANUFACTURER' S ON INNER RACE
SCRIBE MARKS /
// BEARING
SAMPLE:
DIM. B= 1.245
DIM. A = 1.230
0.015
-0.002
SHIM THICKNESS= 0.013
LINE UP SCRIBEMARKS AS SHOWN.

F-44A-2600R1
UP136688
Compressor Beari ng Carri er - Retainer Shim Requirments

Figure 203 72-10-19
Page 208
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
RETAI NER r.////7./J/,Tv////~/~=~TF~..fs/,/~/,xA
=,~/"~~C ~NI-ROIAI'I/ONIA
'B
s~c"°~~==~~'~'~°'1
BEARING ARRIER
. ~ A , I~oTo~
*SEAL (STATOR SECTION) I
*MATCHED SET
'TATION TAB
F-44A-2607
Assembly of Compressor Bearing Carrier

UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-19

Page 209
Dec 14/87
lied
PROCEDURES.
1, C. Install Compressor Bearing Carrier, Spur Gear, and Main Shaft Nut (See
Figure 201)
(1) Install 294528-1 thrusting fixture on exhaust pipe or install

298026-1 back-up fixture at scavenge pump mount.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN HANDLEOF THRUSTING/BACK-UP

FIXTURE.
(2) Turn handle of thrusting/back-up fixture to a torque value of 15 -+0
inch-pounds after contact with shaft to hold f i r s t stage impeller
against shroud.
CAUTION: RECORDNUMBERAND THICKNESS OF SHIMS INSTALLED

AND KEEP WITH PERMANENT ENGINE RECORDSFOR REF-
ERENCE USE AT POSSIBLE FUTUREENGINE
DISASSEMBLY.
(3) Install same number and thickness of bearing carrier shims removed
in removal into accessory drive housing assembly.
CAUTION: ENSURE THERE IS NO LUBRICANTON AIR/OIL SEAL

AND ROTORIN PARTIALLY ASSEMBLEDBEARING
CARRIER.
(4) Remove retainer and compressor bearing from assembled bearing car-
r i e r and seals. Install assembled bearing carrier and seals into
accessory drive housing assembly.
NOTE: Ensure index marks on bearing inner races are
aligned when installing bearing.
(5) Using 284168-1-1 bearing puller, press bearing onto shaft until
bearing bottoms.
NOTE: I f retainer shims were removed during step (4),
ensure same thickness removed are installed.
(6) Install retainer and shims onto bearing carrier. Ensure anti-
rotation tab on retainer locks into slot in bearing. Secure
retainer with nuts and tighten nuts to a torque value of 80 inch-
pounds.
(7) Install plugs to f u l l depth of blind holes in nut and dress to
0.000 to 0.005 inch above threads of nut.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 210
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Loosen and tighten nut three times. On third

(final) torque, add the running torque to the
required torque.
. C. (8) Apply approved engine oil to face and threads of nut. Install spur
gear on main shaft, then install nut. Install 287416-1-1 holder
and adapter on gear and tighten nut (15, figure 201) to a torque
value of 900 inch-pounds. Removeadapter.
(9) Install 284498-1-1/-2-1 gage onto main shaft. Place parallel bar
on face of housing as shown in Figure 202.
(10) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to face
of 284498-1-1/-2-1 gage to obtain top normal running. Measurement
must equal measurement obtained prior to bearing removal, refer to
step A.(14)(d).
(11) I f adjustment of shims is required to obtain top normal running

clearance, remove components and adjust thickness of shims.
(12) Turn handle of thrusting/back-up fixture, to remove pressure from

rotating assembly. Removethrusting/back-up fixture.
(13) Install torque sensor assembly and oil transfer manifold. Refer to
(14) Install turbine scavenge pump assembly, refer to 72-50-04, MAINTEN-

ANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 211
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARINGCOMPONENTSMUSTBE MINIMIZED. REFER
TO 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES FOR HANDLINGPROCEDURES.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Compressor Bearing Carrier and Components (See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect compressor bearing carrier components (installed).
Check for oil leakage from compressor seal at air inlet with engine
not operating. Refer to 72-00-00, Trouble Shooting, for maximum
allowable limits.
(2) Inspect removed compressor bearing carrier components as follows.

(See figure 201.)
(a) Inspect bearing in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Inspect gear for unusual wear pattern or other
damage.
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR)
R SHALL BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALLWEAR
R EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBERGLOVESOR NYLON
R MESHGLOVESWITH POLYETHYLENEPALMSAND
R FINGERS. IN CASENONEOF THE ABOVEARE
R AVAILABLE, CLEANCOTTONGLOVESSHALLBE
R WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL (SEAL AND ROTOR) SHALL
R BE INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(b) Inspect air/oil seal and rotor as follows.
R 1_ Visually inspect metal housing for cracks and distortion.

R Cracks and distortion are not allowed.
R 2 Visually inspect carbon seal for cracks. Cracks are not

R al I owed.
R 3 Visual ly i nspect carbon seal ing surface for di scontinuou s

R contact (skipping). Discontinuous contact (skipping) is
R not all owed.
4 Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for pitting. Pit-
ring is not allowed.
R 5 Press carbon seal into seal housing and check axial float.
R Binding is not allowed.
R 6 Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for wear, scrat-

R ches, and grooves. Visual defects that cannot be f e l t with
R a 0.015 inch diameter stylus are acceptable.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 212
Aug 12/91
/lied
R 2. A. (2) (b) 7 Visually inspect carbon seal for coking.
R Coking on carbon sealing surface is not allowed.
b Coke buildup on carbon sealing surface inner diameter is

not all owed.
C Coke buildup on carbon sealing surface outer diameter is
acceptable provided i t does not extend beyond major
outer diameter (step) of carbon seal.
R 8 Using IOX magnification, inspect sealing surface and inner

R and outer dialneters of sealing surface for chipping. Minor
R chipping of inner and outer diameters is acceptable provid-
R ing the minimum sealing surface width is 70% or greater of
R original surface measured radially.
9 Visually inspect the assembly for missing retainer pins.

Missing pins are not allowed.
10 Visually inspect rotor sealing surface for chipping. Chip-
ping is not allowed.
11 Visually inspect seal rotor sealing surface for wear,

scratches and grooves. Visual defects that cannot be f e l t
with a 0.015 inch diameter stylus are acceptable.
(c) Inspect spur gear splines and teeth.
1 Chipped or broken splines or teeth are not acceptable.

UP136688
72-10-19
Page 213
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
2, A. (2) (c) 2 Inspect gear teeth load surfaces for defects such as scor-
ing, pitting, and chipping. Visual defects are acceptable
i f defects cannot be f e l t , using a 0.031 inch diameter
stylus.
Wear steps are not allowed.
(d) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(1) Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting for general cleaning instruc-

203.


No. No. Nomenclature 1 2

201 15 Nut X X
20 Gear X X
45 Retainer X X
50, 165 Shim X X
110 Bearing*
120 Rotor X X
125 Air/Oil Seal X
150 Bearing Carrier X X
*Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for special cleaning instructions.
UP136688
72-10-19
Page 214
Aug 12/91
/lied
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES


Grease Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,

(DC-111 silicone compound) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
Lubricant (Fluroglide C/P) Chemplast Inc, 150 Dey Rd, Wayne,
NJ 07470
Sealant Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,
(RTV732 or RTV731) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
Solvent (Federal Specification Commercial ly available
P-D-680, Type I)
Touch-up solution (Dow 19) Dow Corning Corp, 3901S Saginaw Rd,
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 201
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

equipment needed for Removal/Installation.
Item Source/
i. Bearing Puller Used to i n s t a l l bearing and 284i 68-I-1/

c a r r i e r onto main shaft and -2 -1
into accessory drive housing.
. Wheel Clearance Used to provide a reference 284498-1-1/

Gage point to measure from when -2-i
establishing impeller to
shroud cl earances.
. Bearing Puller (Pre SB 72-0174) Used to re- 285154-1-1

move bearing from main shaft
and accessory drive housing.
3a. Bearing Puller Used to remove bearing from 285154-2-1

housing assembly and main shaft.
. Dummy Bearing Used to align and permit axial 285160-2-1

Carrier movement of the main shaft when
measuring for f i r s t and second
stage impeler clearances.
. Torquing Holder Used to hold rotating group in 287416-1-i

and Adapter a fixed position when removing
or i n s t a l l i n g bearing retaining
nut to main shaft.
. Housing I n s t a l l i n g Used to protect seal when 287891-1

Pilot i n s t a l l i n g accessory drive
housing.
. Seal Pressing Used to align and i n s t a l l 287694-1

Driver compressor shaft seal in the
bearing c a r r i e r .
. Pin Type Torque Used to remove and i n s t a l l plug 287914-i

Wrench Adapter in accessory drive housing.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 202
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A

Item Source/
. Shim Checking Dummy (Pre SB 72-0174) Used in place 293497-1

Bearing Set of engine hardware when shimming
for c~,pressor running clearance.
10. Shim Checking Dummy (Post SB 72-0174) Used in place 293814-1

Bearing Set of engine hardware when shimming
for compressor running clearance.
11. Rotating Group Used to load rotating group when 294528-1

Thrusting Fixture measuring for impeller clearance.
NOTE: Remove only those items required to gain access to acces-

sory drive housing for removal and replacement. Accomplish
disassembly in any order required due to f a c i l i t i e s
available. I f entire engine is to be disassembled for
other purposes in addition to accessory drive housing
replacement, refer to 72-30-04, Maintenance Practices. The
following procedure is for replacement of accessory drive
housing without disassembly of turbine and combustion
sections.
1. A. RemoveAccessory Drive Housing
(2) Removefuel lines. Refer to 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Deleted.
(4) (Codes DA-FB) Remove start fuel pressure regulator valve. Refer to
(5) (Codes DA-FB) Remove fuel heater lockout valve. Refer to 73-10-05,
(5a) (Code GA) Remove fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer
(6) Removefuel shutoff valve and plumbing. Refer to 73-10-06, Main-

tenance Practices.
(7) Removeturbine bearing oil line. Refer to 79-20-08, Maintenance

Practices.
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
l s l i e d

1. A. (8) RemoveBETA/NTS plumbing and switch housing. Refer to 77-10-02,
(9) Remove ignition system. Refer to 74-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(lO) Remove a i r anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(11) Remove compensating resistor. Refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance

Practices.
(12) Remove torque sensor transmitter. Refer to 77-10-03, Maintenance

Practices.
(13) Remove recessed plug/torque sensor compensator. Refer to 77-10-01,
(14) Remove torque pressure adapter. Refer to 77-10-04, Maintenance

Practices.
(15) Remove oil f i l t e r and adapter. Refer to 79-20-02, Maintenance

Practices.
(16) Remove oil tank and plumbing. Refer to 79-10-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(17) Remove oil vent valve. Refer to 79-20-06, Maintenance Practices.
(18) Remove control linkage. Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance Practices.

(19) Remove prop pitch control. Refer to 72-10-02, Maintenance
Practices.
(20) Remove prop governor. Refer to 72-10-03, Maintenance Practices.
(21) Remove fuel control and pump assembly. Refer to 73-20-01, Mainte-
nance Practices.
R (22) (Codes AA-CC) Removeinlet temperature and sensor. Refer to

(23) Remove anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 73-10-10, Maintenance
Practices.
(24) Remove torque/temperature l i m i t e r . Refer to 73-22-01, Maintenance
Practices.

Practices.
(26) Remove torsion shaft and coupling. Refer to 72-10-11, Maintenance

Practices.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 204
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
i. A. (27) Remove diaphragm assembly. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance
Practices.
(28) Remove turbine bearing oil i n l e t retainer. Refer to 72-50-01,

(29) Remove tail cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(3o) Remove oil i n l e t f i t t i n g and oil pressure j e t . Refer to 72-50-03,

(31) Remove turbine oil scavenge pump. Refer to 72-50-04, Maintenance

Practices.
(32) Remove tachometer generator gear and torque sensor gear

(33) Remove torque sensor assembly and oil transfer manifold. Refer to
(34) Remove compressor bearing assembly. Refer to 72-10-19, Mainte-

nance Practices.
(35) Remove anti-icing shield assembly. Refer to 75-10-02, Maintenance

Practices.
(36) Remove shaft oil seals. Refer to 72-10-08, Maintenance Practices.
(37) Remove positive torque sensor regulator. Refer to 72-10-05, Main-

tenance Practices.
(38) Remove orifice housing. Refer to 72-10-06, Maintenance Practices.
(39) Remove negative torque sensor regulator. Refer to 72-10-04, Main-

tenance Practices.
(40) Remove oil pressure regulator. Refer to 79-20-05, Maintenance

Practices.
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A

AEROSPACE
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
ENGINE(TYP)
~115
R -,----120 145 ,s
T ~'~140
I
135
9S
130"~'~
55
\
125
CE-44G-1835
(Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199)

(Power Group Part No. 3101880-5)
Removal of Accessory Drive Housing and
First Stage Impeller Shroud 72-10-20
UP136688
Figure 201 Page 206

Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. ( 4 1 ) Removeoil f i l t e r by-pass valve. Refer to 79-20-04, Maintenance
Practices.
(42) Removefeathering valve. Refer to 72-10-07, Maintenance

Practices.
(43) Remove oil pressure pump assembly and r o l l e r bearings (aft
propeller shaft and starter idler). Refer to 72-10-18, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(44) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199) (Power Group Part No.
3101880-5) Removeaccessory drive housing and f i r s t stage im-
peller shroud as follows. (See Figure 201.)
(a) Removenuts (5), bolts (10) and washers (15).

(b) Removenuts (20), washers (25) and spacers (30) or bolts
(35), lockplates (40) and spacers (45).
(c) Removeaccessory drive housing assembly (110).
(d) Removeplug (115), packing (120), nut (125), washer (130),
packing (135) and insert (140).
(e) Install three 10-32 UNF jackscrews approximately 120 degrees
apart in holes on impeller shroud and carefully remove im-
peller shroud (100).
(f) Removejackscrews. Removepackings (90, 95), shims (55) and
gasket (50).
R NOTE: Removal of drain f i t t i n g (160) and plug
R (150) is not required unless replacement is
R required.
R (g) I f required, replace drain f i t t i n g (160) or plug (150) in ac-
R cordance with Approved Repairs.
KEY TO FIGURE 201
NUT
. 100. SHROUD
10. BOLT 110. ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSII~GASSY
R 15. WASHER (130, IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-20)
20. NUT 115. PLUG (70)
25. WASHER 120. PACKING (80)
30. SPACER 125. NUT (90)
35. BOLT 130. WASHER (95)
40. LOCKPLATE 135. PACKING (100)
45. SPACER 140. INSERT (105)
R 50. GASKET (IPC FIG. I , 72-30-04) 145. JAM NUT (110)
R 55. GASKET (SHIM) 150. PLUG (115)
R 90. PACKING 155. JAN NUT (120)
R 95. PACKING 160. DRAIN FITTING (125)
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIALLY
ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
°° {
R
110
115
50 55 CE-44G-1834
(Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA)

(Power Groups Part No. 3101880-7 added by SB 72-0199)
Removal of Accessory Drive Housing Assembly
Figure 202 72-10-20
UP136688
Page 208
Aug 4/94

1. A. (45) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA) (Power
Groups Part No. 3101880-7 added by SB 72-0199) (Power Groups Part
No. 3101880-10 added by SB 72-0223) Remove accessory drive
housing assembly as f o l l o w s . (See Figure 202.)
(a) Remove nuts (5), bolts (10), and washers (15).
(b) Remove nuts (50), washers (55), adapters (60), and spacers
(65).
(c) Remove accessory drive housing assembly (110), gasket (40),
and shim (45).
R NOTE: Removal of drain f i t t i n g (125) and plug
R (115) is not required unless replacement is
R requi red.
(d) I f required, replace drain f i t t i n g (125) or plug (115) in ac-

cordance with Approved Repairs.
KEY TO FIGURE 202

5. NUT (IPC FIG. I , 72-10-20) 65. SPACER
R 10. BOLT 110. JAb NUT
R 15. WASHER 115. PLUG
R 40. GASKET(IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-04) 120. JAM NUT
R 45. SIilFi 125. DRAIN FITTING
R 50. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-20) 130. ACCESSORYDRIVE
55. WASHER HOUSING
60. ADAPTER
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 209
Aug 4/94
~ lslied
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
85 E-44G-837
70. PACKING(IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-04) 95. FIRST STAGE

85. NUT IMPELLER SHROUD
R (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA)
Removal of First Stage Impeller Shroud
UP136688
Figure 203 72-10-20

Page 210
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
R I. A. (46) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA) (Power
No. 3101880-10 added by SB 72-0223) Removef i r s t stage impeller
shroud as follows. (See Figure 203.)
(a) Removenuts (85), washers (90), and impeller shroud (95).
(b) Removepackings (70, 100).
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 211
Aug 12/91
•IMAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
/
""-4o,
t
5
110
~,~ '~.~"-,... 65
E-44G -838
R 5. NUT 45. SPACER

R 10. BOLT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-20)
R 15. WASHER 50. NUT
R 20. NUT 55. WASHER
R 25. WASHER 60. ADAPTER
R 30. SPACER 65. SPACER
R 35. BOLT 110. ACCESSORY DRIVE
R 40. GASKET (IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-04) HOUSING ASSY
R (50, IPC FIG. I , 72-03-04)
Temporary Instal lation of Accessory
Drive Housing to Obtain
Assembly Measurements
UP136688
Figure 204 72-10-20

Page 212
Dec 14/87
/lied
1. B. Install Accessory Drive Housing and Compressor Bearing
(1) Temporarily install accessory drive housing to obtain assembly

measurements as follows. (See figure 204.)
(a) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-111 silicone compound) to
gasket and surfaces mating with gasket. Install gasket (40)
on compressor housing flange of partially assembled engine.
CAUTION: (POWER GROUPSPARTNO. 3101880-10) TO
RELIEVE THERMALEXPANSIONOF COMPRESSOR
HOUSING, LOOSENAND RETIGHTENTRANSITION
LINER BOLTS.
R NOTE: I f second stage impeller running clearance is
R being checked after engine operation, clear-
R ance will be 0.005 inch greater (typical)
R than when engine was i n i t i a l l y assembled.
R This is due to engine thermal expansion.
(b) (Power Groups Part No. 3101880-10) Relieve thermal expansion
1 L i f t compressor diffuser to gain access to transition liner

bolts.
NOTE: Ensure all bolts are loose prior to
retightening to completely relieve thermal
expansion set.
2 Loosen transition liner bolts and tighten bolts to a torque
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 213
Aug 16/89
~ { MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PARALLEL BAR
MEASURE HERE
DUMMY BEARING CARRIER
INPUT SIDE ACCESSORY

DRIVE HOUSING
2ND STAGE ZERO

CLEARANCE
ON LINER
BOLT
F-44G-275
R "284498-1-1/-2-1 Clearance Gage
Measurement of Main Shaft Position with

Second Stage Impeller at Zero Clearance
UP136688
Figure 205 72-10-20

Page 214
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignai
~ l s l i e d
R CAUTION: (CODES AA-AC, CA-DA, POSTSB 72-0199)

R (CODES BA, EA-GA) (POWERGROUPSPARTNO.
3101880-7/-10) THE FIRST STAGECOMPRESSOR
SHROUDMOUNTINGSTUDS (INNER ROW OF STUDS
ON DIFFUSER) ARE NOT EVENLYSPACED. EN-
SURE THAT SHROUDMOUNTINGSTUDSARE
PROPERLYALIGNED WITH RELIEF HOLES IN AC-
CESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGWHILE INSTALLING AC-
CESSORY DRIVE HOUSING.
I. B. (1) (c) Install 287891-1 housing installing pilot on compressor end of

main shaft. Position accessory drive housing (110, Figure
204) onto partially assembled engine aligning bolt holes of
housing and engine.
NOTE: Speed nuts may be used to secure accessory
drive housing at this time as housing will be
removed and reinstalled in later assembly
sequence.
(d) Secure accessory drive housing with 9 evenly spaced bolts
R (10), washers (15) and nuts (5). Tighten nuts (5) or nuts
R without a locking device (speed nuts) to a torque value of 50
inch-pounds. Remove287891-1 housing installing pilot.
(e) Install 285160-2-1 dummybearing carrier onto accessory drive
housing and secure with three speed nuts. Do not tighten
speed nuts, allow free movement to prevent interference of
rotating group.
NOTE: (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199) (Power

Group Part No. 3101880-5) Nuts (20), washers
(25) and spacers (30) are used with Diffuser
Part No. 895948. Bolts (35) and spacers (45)
are used with Diffuser Part No. 3101293.
(Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes
BA, EA-GA) (Power Groups Part No.
3101880-7/-10) Nuts (50), washers (55),
adapters (60) and spacers (65) are used.
(f) Install four nuts (20), washers (25), and spacers (30) or
bolts (35) and spacers (45) or nuts (50), washers (55), adap-
ters (60), and spacers (65), as applicable, evenly spaced
around engine, to force diffuser to contact accessory drive
housing. Tighten nuts (20) or bolts (35) or nuts (50) alter-
nately from side to side until torque value is reached to en-
sure diffuser is evenly positioned. Tighten nut (20) or bolts
(35) or nuts (50) to a torque value of 30 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 215
Aug 12/91
lied
1. B° (2) Perform impeller and shroud shimming measurement as follows.
(a) With engine in nose down position, install 294528-1 rotating

group thrusting fixture.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN 294528-1 THRUSTING FIX-

TURE AGAINSTMAIN SHAFTOR DAMAGETO
SECOND STAGESHROUDPORTIONOF COMPRESSOR
OF HOUSING SHALL OCCUR.
R (b) Turn "T" handle of 294528-1 thrusting fixture to a torque

value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact with main shaft to
load rotating group forward. Rotate engine to inlet up
position.
(c) Place a parallel bar on face of housing assembly, install
parallel bar to center of gage. (See Figure 205.) Subsequent
measurements shall always be taken from same side of parallel
bar. Record measurement as second stage zero.
(d) Using second stage zero measurement obtained in step (c), cal-
culate top normal running clearance and f i r s t stage zero
clearance in accordance with sample shown in Table 203 or 204.
Remove parallel bar and 284498-1-1/-2-1 gage.
(e) Turn "T" handle of 294528-1 thrusting fixture to remove pres-

sure fr~n rotating assembly. Remove accessory drive housing.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 216
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Tables 203 and 204 provides a l i s t of compressor clearances,

sample measurements and calculations required when shimming the
f i r s t stage impeller shroud. The following information provides
a d e f i n i t i o n of terms and an explanation of procedure:
Definition of terms:
Second stage zero measurement: Represents the position of the

rotating group relative to the front face or surface of the ac-
cessory drive housing when second stage impeller is l i g h t l y
loaded against second stage shroud protion of compressor housing
p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n of the f i r s t stage shroud. See Figure
2O5.
Second stage running clearance: Represents the required clear-

ance between the second stage impeller and second stage shroud
portion of compressor housing after the rotating group has been
secured by i n s t a l l a t i o n of the compressor bearing.
Desired top normal running clearance measurement: Represents

desired position of the rotating group relative to forward face
or surface of accessory drive housing a f t e r rotating group has
been secured by i n s t a l l a t i o n of compressor bearing.
F i r s t stage running clearance: Represents the required clear-

ance between f i r s t stage impeller and f i r s t stage impeller
shroud after the rotating group has been secured by i n s t a l l a t i o n
of the compressor bearing.
Desired f i r s t stage zero measurement: Represents the desired

position of the rotating group relative to the front face or
surface of the accessory drive housing when the f i r s t stage im-
peller is l i g h t l y loaded against f i r s t stage impeller shroud af-
t e r accomplishment of f i r s t stage shroud shimming.
Explanation of procedure:
A calculated f i r s t stage zero measurement must be obtained i n

accordance with Tables 203 and 204 before proper shimming of
f i r s t stage impeller shroud can be accomplished. The calculated
f i r s t stage zero is obtained by f i r s t obtaining second stage
zero measurement. Add nominal second stage running clearance to
second stage zero measurement. This establishes desired top
normal running clearance measurement. Subtract nominal f i r s t
stage running clearance from top normal running clearance
measurement. The remainder is the desired f i r s t stage zero
measurement needed to continue shimming f i r s t stage shroud.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 217
Dec 14/87
~/lied
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
ENGINE(l~Y'P)
. I
115 " (i~"
140 - - ~
"''100
J
135 --,-,- ~.J~
13o- - , - ~ '"55
125 --"-(~
""50
2530,,~" ~
110
10_
E-44G-.835

UP136688
R
(Power Group Part No. 3101880-5)
Installing Accessory Drive Housing and 72-10-20
First Stage Impeller Shroud Page 218
Figure 206 Aug 12/91
lied
R . B. (3) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199) (Power Group Part No.
3101880-5) Install accessorydrive housing and f i r s t stage
impeller shroud as follows. (See Figure 206.)
NOTE: Installation of packings (90, 95) may be delayed
until final shim adjustment.
(a) Install packings (90, 95) to f i r s t stage impeller shroud (100)
and assemble shroud down over f i r s t stage impeller using guide
pins.
(b) Install approximately 0.090 inch thickness of shims (55) onto
shroud (100).
(bl) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-111 Silicone Compound) to

on compressor housing assembly.
NOTE: Apply lubricant (Fluro-Glide C/P) on diffuser
side of shroud (100).
(c) Ensure handle of 294528-1 thrusting fixture is loosened to
relieve pressure on rotating assembly. Prior to installing
accessory drive housing. Lightly coat mating surfaces in con-
tact with gasket with grease (DC-111 silicone compound).
(d) Remove 285160-2-1 dummybearing carrier and install 287891-1

pilot on forward end of main shaft. Secure accessory drive
housing to compressor housing with bolts (10), washers (15),
and nuts (5). Do not tighten nuts (5) at this time.
(e) (Engines with Diffusers Part No. 895948-1/-4) Install spacers

(30), washers (25) and nuts (20). Tighten nuts (20), in 10
inch-pound increments, alternating from one side to other, to
ensure shroud is pulled into position evenly. Tighten nuts
KEY TO FIGURE 206
5. NUT 90. PACKING

15. WASHER 100. SHROUD
20. NUT 110. ACCESSORYDRIVE HOUSINGASSY
25. WASHER (IPC FIG. I, 72-10-20)
30. SPACER 115. PLUG(701
35. BOLT 120. PACKING(80)
40.
45.
LOCKPLATE
SPACER
125.
130.
NUT (90I
WASHER 95)
50. GASKET(IPC FIG. I, 72-30-04) 135. PACKING(I00)
55. GASKET(SHIM) 140. INSERT(105)
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 219
Aug 12/91
/lied
NOTE: Lockplates (40) shall overlap at 6 o'clock
position (ends of two lockplates at one bolt
position}.
1. B. (3) (f) (Engines with Diffusers Part No. 3101293-1/-2) Install two
bolts (35), lockplates (40) and spacers (45) to hold shroud
(100) in position and remove guide pins. Install remaining
bolts (35), lockplates (40) and spacers (45). Tighten bolts
(35), alternating from one side to the other to ensure pulling
shroud into position evenly. Tighten bolts (35) alternately
to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds. Do not bend tabs of
lockplates (40) at this time.
R (g) Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Remove

R 287891-1 pilot from main shaft and install 285160-2-1 dummy
R bearing carrier onto accessory drive housing and secure with
R three speed nuts. Do not tighten speed nuts, allow free move-
R ment to prevent interference of rotating group.
(h) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees and tighten "T" handle of
294528-1 thrusting fixture to a torque value of 15 ±0 inch-
pounds, after contact with main shaft, ensuring f i r s t stage
zero. Place parallel bar on face of housing.
(i) Measure dimension from parallel bar on face of housing to top
of gage on end of shaft. Record as f i r s t stage zero.
(J) Compare measurement obtained in step (i) (actual f i r s t stage

zero))to calculated f i r s t stage zero as accomplished in step
(2)(d . Install or remove shims (55, figure 206), as
required, to obtain calculated f i r s t stage zero measurement.
Compare final f i r s t stage zero measurement to top normal run-
ning clearance (see Table 203). Difference shall be 0.036 to
0.038 inch.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 220
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
Table 203. (Pre SB 72-0223)
(Power Groups Part No. 3101880-5/-7)
Clearance Limits, Sample Measurements and Calculations
Sample Measurements
Limits and Calculations
Second stage zero measurement 4.940 in.
Second stage running clearance 0.039 to 0.041 in. +0.040 in. (nominal)
Desired top normal running 4.980 in.

clearance measurement
First stage running clearance 0.036 to 0.038 in. -0.037 in. (nominal)
Desired f i r s t stage zero 4.943 in.
measurement
R 1. B. (4) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA) (Power
No. 3101880-10 added.by SB 72-0223) Install f i r s t stage impeller
shroud as follows. (See figure 207.)
(a) Install packings (70, 100) on f i r s t stage impeller shroud

(g5).
NOTE: Studs on compressor diffuser are not equally

spaced. Ensure f i r s t stage impeller shroud
bolt holes are properly aligned with studs of
compressor diffuser during installation.
(b) Spray face and side of f i r s t stage impeller shroud, where con-
tact is made with compressor diffuser, with lubricant (Fluoro-
Glide C/P). Wipe off excess lubricant with clean cloth. In-
stall f i r s t stage impeller shroud (95) down over f i r s t stage
impeller, ensure bolt holes are properly aligned with studs.
(c) Secure f i r s t stage impeller shroud (95) with washers (90) and
nuts (85). Tighten nuts (85) to a torque value of 27 inch-
pounds.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 221
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ lslied
ignal
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
~
"'lOO
""'7o 95
E-~G-~7
85
70. PACKING(IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-04) 90. FIRST STAGE IMPELLERSHROUD

85. NUT 100. PACKING
90. WASHER
(Power Groups PN 3101880-7 added by SB 72-0199)
UP136688
Installing Accessory Drive Housing Assembly

Figure 207 72-10-20
Page 222
Aug 12/91
ied
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
45
40
l 1
J 5
65 j
60 \ - /
50 ,,,.,,~..'~ -~
E-44G-836
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-20) 55. WASHER

10. BOLT 60. ADAPTER
15. WASHER 65. SPACER
40. GASKET(IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-04) 110. ACCESSORYDRIVE HOUSING
45. SHIM
50. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-20)
UP136688

Figure 208 72-10-20
Page 223
Aug 12/91
~ S lied
No. 3101880-10 added by SB 72-0223) Install accessory drive housing
assembly as follows. (See Figure 208.)
(a) Install approximately 0.090 inch thickness of shims (45) over
studs and onto face of diffuser.
(al) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-111 Silicone Compound) to

NOTE: Step (b) is optional. I f operating conditions
warrant the need to prevent water entrapment
between the f i r s t stage compressor inlet shroud
and the accessory drive housing the gap may be
filled with sealant (RTV 732 or 731). The use of
this material may make removal of the inlet shroud
extremely d i f f i c u l t .
(b) Apply sealant (RTV732 or RTV731) on f i r s t stage impeller

shroud (95, Figure 207) ledge just behind packing (70) where
f i r s t stage impeller shroud mats with accessory drive housing.
CAUTION: WHENINSTALLING ACCESSORYDRIVE HOUSINGASSEM-
BLY, ENSURERELIEF HOLES IN ACCESSORYDRIVE
HOUSING ASSEMBLYARE ALIGNED WITH MOUNTING
STUDS OF FIRST STAGE IMPELLER SHROUD.
(c) Ensure handle of 294528-1 thrusting fixture is loosened to

relieve pressure on rotating assembly. Prior to installing
accessory drive housing assembly (110, Figure 208), coat mat-
ing surfaces in contact with gasket with grease (DC-111 S i l i -
R cone Compound). Remove 285160-2-1 dummy bearing carrier and
R install 287891-1 pilot on forward end of main shaft. Secure
accessory drive housing assembly (110) to compressor housing
assembly with nine evenly spaced bolts (10), washers (15) and
pounds.
(d) Install spacers (65), adapters (60), washers (55) and nuts
(50). Tighten nuts (50) alternating from one side to the
other until torque value is reached to ensure pulling shroud
into position evenly. Tighten nuts (50) to a torque value of
R 30 inch-pounds. Remove287891-1 pilot from main shaft and in-
R stall 285160-2-1 dummy bearing carrier onto accessory drive
R housing and secure with three speed nuts. Do not tighten
R speed nuts, allow free movement to prevent interference of
R rotating group.
(e) I f step (b) was accomplished, ensure gap is f i l l e d with seal-
ant (RTV732 or RTV731) between f i r s t stage impeller shroud and
accessory drive housing.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 224
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (5)(f) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees and tighten handle of

294528-1 thrusting fixture to a torque value of 15 ±0 inch-
pounds after contact with main shaft.
(g) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees and install
284498-1-1/-2-1 gage to shaft and place a parallel bar on face
of housing assembly.
(h) Measure from parallel bar to top of gage in end of shaft.

Refer to Figure 205. Record measurements as f i r s t stage zero.
(i) (Power Groups Part No. 3101880-5/-7) Comparemeasurement ob-

tained in step (h) (actual f i r s t stage zero) to calculated
f i r s t stage zero as established in step (2)(d). Install or
remove shims (45, Figure 208) as required to obtain calculated
f i r s t stage zero measurement. Comparefinal f i r s t stage zero
measurement to top normal running clearance. (Refer to Table
203.) Difference shall be 0.036 to 0.038 inch.
CAUTION: (POWER GROUPPARTNO. 3101880-10) CALCU-

LATION FOR REMOVALOF SHIMS IS EXTREMELY
CRITICAL. THEREIS NO MEASUREMENTMETHOD
TO CHECKIF PROPERAMOUNTOF SHIMS HAS
BEEN REMOVED.
R NOTE: (Power Group, Part No. 3101880-10) The

desired result of shimming the crossover duct
to the accessory drive housing is to provide
0.010 inch clearance between the f i r s t stage
impeller and the f i r s t stage shroud when the
second stage impeller is against second stage
shroud portion of the compressor housing
(second stage zero). This is required
because second stage compressor running
clearance (0.026 to 0.028 inch) is less than
f i r s t stage running clearance (0.036 to 0.038
inch).
R (J) (Power Group, Part No. 3101880-10) Subtract desired f i r s t

stage zero as calculated in Table 204 from f i r s t stage zero
measurement obtained with t r i a l shims in step (5)(h). (Refer
to Table 204.) Difference equals thickness of shims to be
removed to establish proper correlation between f i r s t stage
impeller and second stage impeller when top normal running
clearance is established in a later step.
(k) Install remaining bolts (10, Figure 208), washers (15), and
nuts (5) securing accessory drive housing assembly to compres-
sor housing assembly. Tighten bolts (10) to a torque value of
50 inch-pounds.
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 225
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: First stage zero measurement cannot be checked after shimming

procedure is completed. This is caused by second stage running
clearance (0.027 inch nominal) being less than f i r s t stage run-
ning clearance (0.037 inch nominal). Second stage zero would
occur prior to f i r s t stage impeller contacting its shroud. Ta-
ble 204 provides calculation procedures to determine amount of
shims to remove.
Table 204. (Power Group Part No. 3101880-10) Clearance

Limits Sample Measurements and Calculations
Sample Measurements
Second stage zero measurement 4.940 in.
Second stage running clearance 0.026 to 0.028 in. +0.027 in. (nominal)
Desired top normal running 4.967 in.

clearance measurement
First stage running 0.036 to 0.038 in. -0.037 in. (nominal)

measurement
First stage zero measurement 4.994 in.
with t r i a l shims
(calculated)
Thickness of shims to be 0.064 in.
removed
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 226
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
' • ~ ¢.. ..', .. ,,~ ~\

,...%. ,. ~, . ,. • :-;~
, .~,-~: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;-,..,, .~, ,', ~.
165 '~\ ~'. , --'.;':";'.,-.-':,y-""/ '.:"-

150 \ \:>-'" :"X:"I-,.,,<".,%' ."" ' .."
125 L'~'~ ~ ''. ," ~,"

120 ~ ~l~'~'~.~','~W-..~,.
k "-. ":,-..... ". -"
110 | t IP'%-'X,'%-,.-,.-,.-,.-,.~
,~ ~ ~ ......~ - -
(i[~-~,"~',P--.Y 160 155
2"~ ~ ~. , ~"~ 50
10
\
40 35
E-44G-660
15
10. PLUG 40. PIN 125. AIR/OIL SEAL

(IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19) 45, RETAINER 150. BEARING CARRIER
15. NUT 50. SHIM 155. PACKING
20. GEAR 110. BEARING 160. PACKING
25. NUT 120. ROTOR 165, SHIM
35. PIN
Compressor Bearing C a r r i e r Support Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

UP136688
Figure 209 72-10-20

Page 227
Dec 14/87
ilied
NOTE: Accomplish step (6) on an "as required" basis,

i . e . , components were completely disassembled at
removal, thickness of shims between retainer and
carrier unknown or new bearing carrier and compo-
nents being installed at this time.

instal lation.
1. B. (6) Assemble Compressor Bearing Carrier Assembly (See Figure 209, 210,
211)
R NOTE: (Codes CA-CC, GA, Pre SB 72-0634) (Codes AA-BA,

R DA-FB) Bearing inner race consists of two halves
which are matched and scribed during manufacture.
Halves must be positioned so scribe marks on inner
diameter of inner race halves are aligned to
f a c i l i t a t e checking alignment during assembly and
installation of bearing carrier. (See Figure
210.)
Step (a) not required unless bearing, bearing
retainer or bearing carrier has been replaced or
thickness of shims, as removed, is unknown.
(a) Use a depth micrometer and measure from bearing seat to car-
r i e r flange face and record as Dimension A. (See Figure 210.)
Position bearing on retainer and, using a micrometer, measure
from retainer flange to bearing surface and record as Dimen-
sion B. Subtract Dimension A from Dimension B. Subtract
0.002 inch from result. The remainder is required thickness
of retainer shims to provide 0.001 to 0.003 inch pinch between
retainer and carrier.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL

BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAR EITHER
SYNTHETIC RUBBERGLOVESOR NYLONMESH
GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENEPALMSAND
FINGERS. IN CASE NONEOF THE ABOVEARE
AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVESSHALL BE
WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE IN-
STALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
NOTE: Seal must bottom in bearing carrier without

excessive pressure or cutting packing.
(b) Install new packing on inside and outside of bearing carrier.

R Ensure a i r / o i l seal and rotor are dry; do not lubricate prior
R to installation. Press a i r / o i l seal and rotor into bearing
carrier using 287894-1 driver.
(c) Install bearing.

UP136688
72-10-20
Page 228
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
"BEARING
BEARING SEAT SNAP RING /
/ /
/ ~ , RETAINER
L_,- . . . . . . . . . -'-J
/
i I
CAUTION:
LI LI
DO NOT
MEASURE SMALL INDEX LINES IN
ON RADIUS. BEARING LINE WITH SCRIBEMARKS
CARRIER
MANUFACTURER'S ON INNER RACE
SCRIBEM A R K S , : : : :~:; ~ ~ ~ ~/I ..~RING
SAMPLE:
DIM. B = 1.245
DIM. A = 1.230
0.0t5
-0.002
SHIM THICKNESS= 0.013
LINE UP SCRIBEMARKS AS SHOWN.

F-44.A-2600R1
Compressor Bearing Carrier - Retainer Shim Requirement

UP136688
Figure 210 72-10-20

Page 229
Dec 14/87
lied
RETAI NER SHIM
RETA I N ER II////X/'III[////)6/'~-~,F'.. .,,,",II,,,II'/.,x//////'!
ER
BEARNG--------i-T
, ~-~,y I I J'1-~"~,~PACK, NG
*SEAL (STATOR SECTION) I

F-44G -723
*MATCHED SET
Assembly of Compressor Bearing Carrier

UP136688
Figure 211 72-10-20

Page 230
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLYASSEMBLEDENGINE (TYP)
JL
165
1
25 \
ASSEMBLEDBEARING
110 CARRIERAND SEALS
I "
10
/I 20
45
E-44G-840
15
Installing Bearing Carrier and Seals,

Compressor Bearing Retainer, Spur Gear and
Hain Shaft Nut
UP136688
Figure 212 72-10-20

Page 231
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: RECORDNUMBERAND THICKNESS OF SHIMS IN-

STALLED AND KEEP WITH PERMANENTENGINE
RECORDS FOR REFERENCE USE AT POSSIBLE
FUTURE ENGINE DISASSEMBLY.
NOTE: Ensure that retainer anti-rotation tab locks

in slot in bearing. (See Figure 211.)
. B. (6) (d) Install thickness of retainer shims determined in step (a) and
position retainer on carrier.
(7) Install previously assembled (assembled in step (6)) bearing car-

r i e r and seal, compressor bearing, retainer, gear, and main shaft
nut as follows. (See Figures 212 and 213.)
(a) Remove285160-2-i dummybearing carrier from partially assem-

bled engine.
(b) Install approximately 0.040 inch thickness of shims (165,

Figure 212) into accessory drive housing assembly.
CAUTION: ENSURETHERE IS NO LUBRICANT ON AIR/OIL

SEAL AND ROTORIN PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
BEARING CARRIER.
NOTE: Ensure same thickness of shims (50) installed
between retainer (45) and bearing carrier and
seal, assembled in step I.B.(6), are kept
together and reinstalled during assembly.
(c) Remove retainer (45) and compressor bearing (110) from assem-
bled bearing carrier and seal. Install assembled bearing car-
r i e r and seal into p a r t i a l l y assembled engine.
(d) Tighten "T" hanale of 294528-1 thrusting fixture to a torque
value of 15 ±0 after contact with main shaft.
NOTE: (Pre SB 72-0174) Use 293497-i dummybearing

R set. (Post SB 72-0174 or 72-0634) Use
293814-1 dummy bearing set.
(e) Using 284168-1-I/-2-1 bearing puller, press dummybearing

(component of dummy bearing set) onto shaft until dummybear-
ing bottoms out.
KEY TO FIGURE 212
10. PLUG(IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19) 45. RETAINER

15. NUT 50. SHIM
20. GEAR 110. BEARING
25. NUT 165. SHIM
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 232
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PARALLEL BAR
F-44G-369
"284498-1-1/-2-1 Clearance Gage

Measuring to Obtain Running Clearance
UP136688
Figure 213 72-10-20

Page 233
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
--AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: I f shims (50) were removed during step (c),
ensure same thickness removed are installed.
1. B. (7)(f) Install retainer (45) onto assembled bearing carrier and seal.
Ensure anti-rotation tab on retainer locks into slot in dummy
bearing. Secure retainer with nuts (25) and tighten nuts to a
(g) Install gear (20) onto main shaft. Apply approved engine o i l
to face and threads of dummynut (component of dummybearing
set). Install dummynut onto main shaft. Using 287416-1-1
holder and adapter, tighten dummynut to a torque value of 900
inch-pounds. Loosen and tighten dummynut a total of three
times. On third and final tightening add running torque to
required torque value.
(h) Rotate engine 180 degrees and tighten "T" handle of 294528-1
thrusting fixture to a torque value of 15 +0 inch-pounds af-
ter contact with main shaft. Rotate engine 180 degrees.
(i) Install 284498-1-1/-2-1 gage onto main shaft. Place parallel

bar on face of accessory drive housing as shown in Figure 213.
(J) Using depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to

face of gage. Record as top normal running. Remove
284498-1-1/-2-i gage.
(k) Comparemeasurement to top normal running calculated in Table
203 or 204 as applicable.
(I) I f additional shimming is required to obtain top normal run-

ning clearance, remove components and adjust thickness of
shims (165) and repeat steps (c) through (k).
(m) Record top normal, f i r s t stage and second stage impeller

clearance. Comparewith calculated results in Table 203 or
204.
(n) When required top normal running clearance is obtained, loose

"T" handle of 294528-1 thrusting fixture to ensure pressure
has been removed from rotating assembly. Removedummynut,
gear, retainer and shims.
(o) (Pre SB 72-0174) Use 285154-i-1/-2-1 bearing puller to remove
dummy bearing from bearing carrier.
(p) (Post SB 72-0174 or 72-0634) Use 285154-2-1 bearing puller to

remove dummy bearing from bearing carrier.
(q) Removeshims (165). Measure and record number and thickness

of shims (165).
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 234
Aug 4/94
C~Ir~7N.PA
~33~;lied
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTSMUST BE

R MINIMIZED. REFERTO 70-00-00, STANDARD
R PRACTICES, FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
R NOTE: Ensure that same amount and thickness of

R shims (165) selected in step (2) are rein-
R stalled during assembly.
R 1. B. (7) (r) Install shims (165) previously selected into accessory drive
R housing.
R (s) Install packing (155) onto p a r t i a l l y assembled bearing c a r r i e r

R then i n s t a l l into accessory drive housing.
(t) Tighten "T" handle of 294528-1 thrusting fixture to a torque
value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact with main shaft.
NOTE: Ensure index marks on bearing inner races are
aligned when installing bearing.
(u) Using 284168-1-1 bearing puller, press bearing (110, Figure
212) onto shaft until bearing bottoms.
(v) Install retainer (45) onto shims (50). Ensure anti-rotation

tab on retainer locks into slot in outer race of bearing
(110). Secure retainer with nuts (25). Tighten nuts (25) to
(w) Install gear (20) onto main shaft. Install plugs (10) into
blind holes of nut (15), dress plugs to 0.000 to 0.005 inch
above threads of nut. Apply approved engine oil to face and
threads of nut. Install nut (15) onto main shaft. Using
287416-1-1 holder and adapter, tighten nut (15) to a torque
value of 900 inch-pounds. Loosen and tighten nut a total of
three times. On third time add running torque to required
torque value.
(x) Repeat steps (h) through (k) to recheck top normal running
clearance. Removeall tools and fixtures from engine.
(8) Check third stage turbine wheel t i p clearance. Tip clearance shall
be 0.017 to 0.022 inch.
NOTE: Ensure starter drive gearshaft is properly shimmed dur-

ing installation of starter drive gearshaft seal in ac-
cordance with 72-10-08 Maintenance Practices.
Ensure propeller shaft is properly preloaded during in-
stallation of nose cone assembly in accordance with
72-10-09 Maintenance Practices.
(9) Install all components, removed for access, in accordance with ap-
plicable Chapter/Section/Subject. Refer to steps I.A.(1) through
UP136688
I.A.(43) for Chapter/Section/Subject reference.

72-10-20
Page 235
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Accessory Drive Housing Assembly
(i) Inspect studs. (See Figure 214.)
(a) Check adjacent mounting surface.
1 Fretting up to 0.005 inch depth is allowed, provided sur-

face where bearing carrier actually contacts is parallel to
accessory drive housing rear flange within 0.0005 inch. I f
parallelism requirement is not met, return accessory drive
housing to the following f a c i l i t y for repair.
Di stri buti on Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
Touch up worn areas in accordance with 72-00-00,

(b) Check studs. Side or rotational movement is not acceptable.

Axial movement shall not exceed 0.007 inch. Cracking or
material breakout in mounting surface is not allowed. Refer
to Approved Repairs.
FRONTVIEW LOOKING AFT
ETCHEDLETTER STUD A
INDICATING STUDA
REPLACEDSTUD
MOUNTING
SURFACE
#
I
,__ ___]
.I. IF ,
%I~B STUDB
I~44C--b-A)
STUDA
Replacement of Compressor Bearing Carrier Studs on

UP136688
Accessory Drive Housing Assembly 72-10-20

Figure 214 Page 236
Aug 4/94
/lied
R 2. a. (la) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for loose or damaged in-
R sert at mount hole for oil pressure regular and oil bypass valve.
R (See Figure 214A.) Replace insert in accordance with Approved
R Repairs.
(2) (Post SB 72-0061) Visually inspect oil transfer adapter bushing

bore (Figure 215) for wear grooves. I f wear is estimated to be
0.035 inch or more bushing must be replaced. I f depth of wear
groove is undetermined or questionable, the following pressure
check may be performed. With oil transfer adapter assembly in-
stalled, connect NTS test stand as for calibration. Set pressure
as high as attainable, but do not exceed 100 psi maximum. Block
all oil drain ports at gearcase, i f oil leaks between bushing and
adapter, bushing must be replaced. Refer to Approved Repairs.
(3) (Post SB 72-0061) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for
loose and damaged insert at mount hole for torque sensor arm.
(See Figure 215.) Replace insert with oversized insert in accord-
ance with Approved Repairs.
(4) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for loose or damaged

alignment studs and bushings and through studs. (See Figure 215.)
I f through stud, or alignment stud and bushings are loose or
damaged, return accessory drive housing assembly to a Garrett
authorized service f a c i l i t y for repair.
(5) Inspect for oil leakage or weepage above engine air inlet where
input housing studs extend through diaphragm for attachment of
airframe air i n l e t . I f leakage or weepage is indicated, refer to
Approved Repairs.
(6) (Pre SB 72-0226) Inspect aft propeller main bearing carrier
mounting surface on accessory housing assemby for fretting. I f
wear is 0.005 to 0.010 inch, reshim to achieve the necessary
preload in accordance with 72-10-09, Maintenance Practices. I f
wear is greater than 0.010 inch, replace accessory drive housing.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 236A/236B
Aug 12/91
lied
OIL BYPASS
VALVE INSERT
R
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR
I I',.SERT
F-44G-1001
R Oil Pressure Regulator and Oil Bypass

UP136688
R Valve Insert Inspection

R Fi gure 214A 72-10-20
Page 237
Aug 12/91
Allied-Signal Aerospace Company ~ lslied

"b 0 0",,
I
\
O
STUD AND
BUSHING ALIGNMENT
R STUD AND
BUSHING
© ©
I TORQUE
SENSOR ALIGNMENT
ARM MOUNT STUD AND
HOLE INSERT BUSHING
o\
ALIGNMENT OIL TRANSFER
STUDAND ADAPTERBUSHING
BUSHING
© F-44G-971
UP136688
Inspection of Inserts, Bushings, and Alignment Studs

Figure 215 72-10-20
Page 238
Aug 12/91
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 2. A. (7) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for cracks. No cracks are
allowed except Areas G and P, Figure 216.
R (8) Inspect intake area (Areas G and P, figure 216) for cracks.
(a) I f a crack exists and the maximum length on either side of
center support is under 1.0 inch, monitor cracks. Check crack
progression after every 25 hours of operation.
(b) I f a crack appears to be more than 1.0 inch length on either
side of center support, the following procedures shall be
performed.
1_ Remove paint and protective compound from suspected cracked
ar ea.
2_ Perform fluorescent penetrant check/inspection in accor-
dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
3 If base metal is not cracked, touch-up exposed magnesium
area with DOW 19 and repaint in accordance with 72-00-00,
Cleaning/Painting.
4 I f base metal is cracked less than 1.0 inch maximum length

on either side of center support, touch-up exposed magne-
sium area with DOW 19 only and monitor cracks. Check crack
progression after every 25 hours of operation. Replace in-
put housing assembly when crack exceeds 1.0 inch.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 239
Aug 16/89
~I MAN
I TENANCM
EANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
MIRROR /" AREA G
AREA P
/
I
AREA F
FIRST STAGE COMPRESSOR IMPELLER
F-44A-5372
UP136688
Accessory Drive Housing Corrosion/Crack Inspection

Figure 216 72-10-20
Page 240
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. A. (9) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for cracks at mounting

pads. (See figure 217.)
(a) Inspect Areas, A, B and C at locations illustrated in Figure
217.
(b) Inspect intake area D, RH side intake area immediately aft of

inlet temperature sensor and inboard of engine mounting pad
location. Inspect like area on LH side of intake.
(c) I f cracks are suspected the following procedures shall be per-

formed to verify cracks.
1-- Remove paint and protective compound from suspected crack
area.
i
2 Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with
(d) I f base metal is not cracked, touch-up exposed magnesium area

with Dow 19 and repaint in accordance with 72-00-00,
Cleani ng/Painting.
CAUTION: ENGINE D~4AGEMAY RESULT IF OPERATEDWITH

CRACKS IN ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGMOUNTING
PADS.
(e) I f fluorescent penetrant inspection reveals a crack in the

base metal of more than one-half inch, the accessory drive
R housing must be replaced prior to next engine operation.
(f) I f fluorescent penetrant inspection reveals a crack in the

base metal of one-half inch or less, the accessory drive
R housing must be replaced. A one time f l i g h t of less than 5
R hours is allowed to return to maintenance f a c i l i t y for
R replacement of accessory drive housing assembly.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 241
Aug 16/89
lslied
~~#0~~
' ~~
/
CRACK CRACK
AREA A
AREA B
(ROTATED}
AREA D
F-44A-5238
Inspection of Accessory Drive Housing

UP136688
Mounting Pad for Cracks

Figure 217 72-10-20
Page 242
Aug 16/89
7~llied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL ~-~Signal
NOTE: All corrosion shall be treated in accordance with
2. A. (10) Inspect accessory drive housing for corrosion damage as follows.
(See Figures 216, 218 through 220.)
NOTE: Particular attention shall be given to areas where
dissimilar metals contact the magnesium-alloy
housing at machined surfaces.
Limits apply after all corrosion has been removed.

(a) Inspect Surface A (Figure 218) observing specified limits of
Table 205.
(b) Inspect Surface B observing specified limits of Table 206.
(c) Inspect Surface R observing specified limits of Table 207.
(d) Inspect Area D (Mounting Pads). Corrosion damage shall not

exceed 0.020 inch depth and total area of 1/2 square-inch per
mount pad.
(e) Inspect Areas E and M (Figure 219) observing specified limits
of Table 208.
(f) Inspect Area F (Figure 219) as follows.
! Corrosion damage shall not exceed 0.050 inch depth in a 2

square-inch area.
Number of corrosion damaged areas shall not exceed three.
(g) Inspect Area G. Corrosion damage shall not exceed 0.010 inch
depth and total area of 1/2 square-inch.
(h) Inspect Areas H and L (Figure 219). The combined total of
corrosion damage of both sides shall not exceed 0.040 inch
total depth and total area of 2.0 square-inches on each side.
(i) Inspect Area P (Figure 215). Corrosion damage shall not ex-
ceed 0.020 inch depth and total area of one square-inch.
(j) Inspect Area J (Detail A) observing limits in Figure 219.

(k) Inspect Area K as follows.
Corrosion damage shall not exceed 0.040 inch depth in a
two square-inch area.
2 Numberof corrosion damaged areas shall not exceed three.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 243
R
Aug 12/91
~ _ Islied
2. A. (10) (I) Inspect areas adjacent to studs and inserts for corrosion
damage. Maximumcorrosion damage depth shall not exceed
0.020 inch.
(m) Inspect Area T, total corrosion damage shall not exceed the
following limits.
AREA T
Max. Damage Depth (in.) 0.060 0.040 0.020

Max. Total Area (sq-in.) 5 10 20
(n) I f limits are exceeded, return accessory drive housing to

manufacturer for further evaluation.
SURFACE R
SURFACE
SURFACE
F-44A.5373
VIEW A - A
UP136688
Accessory Drive Housing Corrosion Inspection 72-10-20

R Figure 218 Page 244
Aug 16/89
lied
Table 205. Surface A Limits for Corrosion Damage
Max. Depth (in.) 0.185 0.160 0.140 0 . 1 2 0 0.100 0 . 0 8 0 0.060
Max. Total Area (sq-in.) 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.7 5.5 7.0 9.0
Table 206. Surface B Limits for Corrosion Damage
Max. Depth (in.) 0.080 0.070 0.060 0 . 0 5 0 0.040 0 . 0 3 0 0.020
Max. Total Area (sq-in.) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Number Places 4 5 6 8 I0 12 15
Table 207. Surface R Limits for Corrosion Damage
Max. Depth (in.) 0.060 0.040
Max. Total Area (sq-in.) 0.5 0.7
Number Places 8 10
Table 208. Areas E and M Limits for Corrosion Damage
*Max. Depth (in.) 0.080 0.070 0.060 0.050 0.040 0.030 0.020 0.010
Max. Total Area 0.75 1.6 2.8 4.8 8.5 20.0 40.0 75.0
(sq-in.)
*These limits include combined corrosion damage depth of both Areas E and M.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 245
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCEMANUAL •isliedi g n a l
,, 9.5 IN. " ,
J
A
/
1-44.G-1163
UP136688
Accessory Drive Housing Corrosion Inspection

R Figure 219 (Sheet 1 of 2) 72-10-20
Page 246
Aug 12/91
~/lied
E
t ,,,~
NOTE 1
f IlJ T 0.10 IN. MIN

NOTE2
l
NOTE 5
l
DIA Y
k
NOTE3 = 0.50 I H . ~
•NOTE 4
DETAIL A
"1
1-448-1162
R NOTE 1. Corrosion on Surface X is acceptable up to 0.050 inch in

R depth in this area provided the corroded surface area under
R washer is less than 10 percent of the total bearing area
R beneath each washer.
R NOTE 2. Corrosion on Surface X within this area shall be limited to

R 0.035 inch in depth in 50 percent of a i linear inch and not
R exceeding 20 percent of a 90 degree quadrant
R (circumferentially).
R NOTE 3. Corrosion on surface of Diameter Y is acceptable up to 0.050

R inch depth within this area.
R NOTE 4. Corrosion within this area of Diameter Y shall be limited to

R 0.035 inch in depth in 25 percent of a 1 linear inch and not
R exceeding 10 percent of a 90 degree quadrant
R (circumferentially).
NOTE 5. Allowable metal spray to a thickness of 0.010 to 0.020 inch.
R Accessory Drive Housing Corrosion Inspection

UP136688
R Figure 219 (Sheet 2) 72-10-20

Page 246A
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal ~IAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. A. ( 1 1 ) Inspect inlet temperature sensor mounting pad as follows. (See

Figure 220.)
(a) Inspect accessory drive housing i n l e t temperature sensor
mounting pad for evidence of corrosion or salt deposits.
Particular attention must be given to area where dissimilar
metals contact the magnesium alloy laying surface (surface
A).
(b) Treat corrosion in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/
Painting.
(c) I f limits are exceeded, return accessory drive housing to

manufacturer for evaluation.
R B. Inspect Drain Fitting
R Inspect and check drain f i t t i n g in accordance with 72-00-05,

\\ SORFACEC
SURFACE B
F-,44A-5371
NOTES:
1. Corrosion damage depth of Surface A not exceeding 0.020 inch and

1/2 square-inch total area is allowable.
2. Corrosion damage depth of Surface B not exceeding 0.010 inch and
1/2 square-inch total area is allowable.
3. Corrosion damage depth of Surface C not exceeding 0.040 inch on
entire surface is allowable.
Inspection of Inlet Temperature Sensor Mounting Pad

UP136688
Figure 220 72-10-20

Page 246B
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Approved Repairs
R Adhesive sealant (Silastic 732 RTV) Dow Corning Corp, 3901S Saginaw Rd,
R (MIL-A-46106) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
Compound (Loctite 504 Gasket Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,

El iminator) Newington, CT 06111
Compound, locking Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,

(Loctite No. 271) Newington, CT 06111
Potting compound (Epoxylite 810 Epoxylite Corp, 9400 Toledo Way, P.O.
or Epoxylite 203 and Activator Box 19671, Irvine, CA 92713
1 or 1A)
R Sealant, PST pipe Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountain Rd,
R (Loctite No. 567) Newington, CT 06111
Sol vent (Federal Commercial ly avail able
Specification P-D-680, Type I)
Touch-up solution (Dow 19) Dow Corning Corp, 3901 S Saginaw Rd,
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 247
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. A. Repair Accessory Drive Housing
(1) Replace damaged stuas as follows. (See Figure 214.)
NOTE: Mounting studs may have been previously

replaced with clinch (through) bolts. Clinch
bolts do not have any identifying mark. How-
ever, mounting stud holes were drilled to a
depth that extends into the a i r inlet area.
(a) I f stud has not been previously replaced, remove stud using
Keensert removal procedures. Refer to 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Previously replaced studs have l e t t e r R etched ad-
jacent to or on end of stud, or may be a clinch (through)
bolt. (See Figure 214.) I f stud has been previously
replaced, return accessory drive housing to the following for
stud replacement.
R AlliedSignal Engines
Distribution Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
(b) Inspect mounting hole for pulled threads. I f pulled threads

exist, return accessory drive housing to the following for
stud replacement.
Distribution Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
(c) Install stud Part No. 682-533-9653 (stud A, Figure 214) or
stud Part No. 682-533-9652 (stud B, Figure 214) using Keensert
installation procedures. Refer to 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
(d) Etch l e t t e r R on end of replacement stud.
(2) Repair corrosion damaged areas in accordance with 72-00-00,

Cleaning/Painting.
72-10-20
UP136688
Page 248
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 3. A. (3) If indicated by inspection, replace oil transfer adapter bushing or
R plug (figure 215) as follows.
CAUTION: TO PREVENTENGINE OIL SYSTB~ CONTAMINATION DUR-

ING REWORKUSE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES.
CONNECT NTS TEST STANDAS FOR CALIBRATION AND
FLUSH DRILL CHIPS OR REMOVEREARBEARING LUBRI-
CATION LINE AT INPUT HOUSINGAND APPLY SHOPAIR
AT THE BEARING LUBRICATION FITTING.
(a) Replace threaded bushing as follows.
1 Using d r i l l size 0.5156 inch (33/64), d r i l l ID of bushing

and collapse walls. I f bushing wall cannot be collapsed,
d r i l l size 17/32 inch or rotary f i l e may be used, however
extreme caution must be used not to remove gearbox
material.
2 In the possibility gearbox threads were damaged during

bushing removal, a 5/8-16 UN3B bottom tap may be used to
repair threads.
3 Prior to installation of new bushing, preheat gearcase with

R heat lamp. Coat new bushing with potting compound
R (Epoxylite 810) and install 0.01 to 0.03 inch below gear-
case surface. Allow to dry for six hours u t i l i z i n g heat
lamp during drying period.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 249
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. A. (3) (b) Replace plug as follows.
1 Using d r i l l size 0.5312 inch (17/32), d r i l l ID of plug and
collapse walls. I f plug wall cannot be collapsed, d r i l l
size (35/64) or rotary f i l e may be used. However, extreme
caution must be used not to remove gearbox material.
2 Prior to installation of new plug, preheat the gearcase

with heat lamp. Coat new plug with potting compound
(Epoxylite 810) and press into gearcase to 0.01 to 0.03
inch below gearcase surface. Allow to dry for six hours
utilizing heat lamp during drying period.
3 I f plug installed was Plug Part No. 869065-1 (magnesium

alloy), Dow 19 must be used during rework (refer to
UP136688
72-10-20
R Page 250
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal (•lied
3. A. (4) Replace loose or damaged insert at mount hole for torque sensor arm
with oversize insert as follows. (See Figure 215.)
(a) Use long-nosed pliers to remove loose or damaged insert.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT HOLE FOR OVERSIZE INSERT IS

DRILLED PERPENDICULARTO FORWARDFACE OF
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGAND CENTEREDWITH
EXISTING HOLE, TO ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENT
OF TORQUESENSORMOUNTINGBOLT.
(b) D r i l l a 0.332 inch ( d r i l l size Q) hole at location of removed
insert to a depth of 0.50 to 0.53 inch f l a t bottom.
(c) Flush drilled hole clean of all d r i l l chips using solvent
(d) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 3/8-16UNC-2B bottom tap.
Countersink hole to 0.385 inch diameter by 0.037 inch deep.
(e) Flush threaded hole using solvent (Federal Specification

P-D-680, Type I) and dry thoroughly.
(f) Touch up threads with primer in accordance with 72-00-00,

Cleaning/Painting.
NOTE: Use a modified screwdriver, or a rod, with

the correct outside diameter to f i t inside
diameter of insert and slotted to f i t over
tang of insert, to install new insert.
(g) Install new oversize Insert Part No. 423-551-0121, while
primer is wet, three-quarters to one and one-half turns below
surface of countersink. Removetang, i f applicable, using
long-nosed pliers or blunt tool and hammer.
(h) Touch up lead thread in accessory drive housing by wiping on
thin coat of primer to seal surface scratches and adjacent
area around insert hole in accordance with 72-00-00,
Cleaning/Painting.
(i) Allow primer to cure four to six hours at room temperature or
by baking for one hour at 82 to 135°C (180 to 275°F).
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 251
Aug 12/91
/lied
CAUTION: ENSURE INTERIOR OF ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
IS CLEANEDOF ALL DRILL CHIPS AND METAL
PARTICLES TO PREVENTOIL SYSTEM
CONTAMINATION.
3. A. (4) (j) Clean i n te ri or of accessory drive housing thoroughly to remove

a l l metal particles before reassembling engine.
(5) Repair oil leakage or weepage around studs located above engine a i r
i nl et.
(a) Temporary repair may be accomplished as follows.
1 Removea i r frame a i r i n l e t .
2 Apply compound (Loctite 504 Gasket Eliminator) around leak-
ing studs.
3 Reinstall airframe a i r inlet causing compound to extrude,

forming an interim gasket.
(b) Permanentrepair may be accomplished as follows.
1 Remove output gearbox housing assembly (nose cone) in ac-

NOTE: Studs may be replaced without removal of in-

termediate gearbox housing (diaphragm) i f
care is used not to damage housing during
stud removal.
2 Removestuds which indicate oil leakage or weepage in ac-
cordance with 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES.
3 Coat threads of new keensert stud with locking compound.
4 Turn stud into threaded hole until step is 0.010 to 0.030

inch below machined surface. Drive in locking keys using a
hammer and keensert installation tool.
5 Install output gearbox housing assembly (nose cone) in ac-

cordance with 72-10-09, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 252
Aug 16/89
lied
3. A. (6) Replace loose or damaged oil bypass valve mount insert as follows.
(See Figure 214A.)
(a) Remove insert using Keensert removal procedures. Refer to

replaceable components, 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
(b) Insert mount hole for pulled threads.
(c) I f mount hole threads are not pulled, install insert in ac-
cordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Refer to Table
210 for insert part number.
(d) I f mount hole has pulled threads, install oversize insert as

follows. Refer to Table 210 for part number.
R CAUTION: ENSURE THAT HOLE FOR OVERSIZE INSERT IS

R DRILLED PERPENDICULAR TO FACEOF ACCESSORY
R DRIVE HOUSINGAND CENTEREDWITH EXISTING
R HOLE, TO ENSURE PROPERALIGNMENTOF MOUNT-
R ING BOLT.
R 1 (First oversize) D r i l l a 0.3110 inch ( d r i l l size 5/16 inch)

R hole at location of removed insert to a depth of 0.32 to
R 0.35 inch f l a t bottom.
R 2 (First oversize) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 3/8 -

R 16UNC-2A bottom tap. Countersink hole to 0.385 inch di-
R ameter by 0.037 inch deep.
R CAUTION: ENSURE THATHOLE FOR OVERSIZE INSERT

R IS DRILLED PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF
R ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGAND CENTERED
R WITH EXISTING HOLE, TO ENSUREPROPER
R ALIGNMENT OF MOUNTBOLT.
R 3 (Second oversize) D r i l l a 0.3642 inch ( d r i l l size U) hole

R at location of removed insert to a depth of 0.32 to 0.35
R inch f l a t bottom.
R 4 (Second oversize) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 7/16 -

R ameter by 0.037 inch deep.
R 5 Flush threaded hole using solvent (Federal Specification
R P-D-680, Type I) and dry thoroughly.
R 6 Install insert in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

R Practices.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 253
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 210. Replacement Inserts
Insert Original Firs t Oversi ze Second Oversi ze

Location Part No. Part No. Part No.
R Oil Bypass MS51830-201L MS51831-201L MS51832-201L

Valve Mount
Oil Pressure I~$51830-202L MS51831-202L MS51832-202L

Regulator
Mount
3. A. (7) Replace loose or damaged oil pressure regulator mount insert as

follows. (See Figure 214A.)
(a) Remove insert using Keensert removal procedures. Refer to

replaceable components 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
(b) Inspect mount hole for pulled threads.
(c) I f mount hole threads are not pulled, install insert in ac-
cordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Refer to Table
210 for insert part number.
(d) I f mount hole has pulled threads, i n s t a l l oversize insert as

follows. Refer to Table 210 for part number.

DRILLED PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF ACCES-
SORY DRIVE HOUSING AND CENTEREDWITH
EXISTING HOLETO ENSUREPROPERALIGN-
MENT OF MOUNTING BOLT.
1 (First oversize) Drill a 0.3642 inch d r i l l size U) hole at

location of romoved insert to a depth of 0.32 inch f l a t
bottom.
2 (First oversize) Tap d r i l l e d hole to bottom with 7/16 -

14UNC-2A bottom tap. Countersink hole to 0.385 inch di-
ameter by 0.037 inch deep.
UP136688
72-10-20
Page 254
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DRILLED PERPENDICULARTO FACEOF ACCES-
SORY DRIVE HOUSINGAND CENTEREDWITH
EXISTING HOLE, TO ENSUREPROPERALIGN-
MENT OF MOUNTING BOLT.
3. A. (7) (a) 3_ (Second oversize) Drill a 0.4219 inch ( d r i l l size 27/64

inch) hole at location of removed insert to a depth of 0.32
to 0.35 inch f l a t bottom.
4 (Second oversize) Tap d r i l l e d hole to bottom with i/2 -

ameter by 0.037 inch deep.
5 Flush threaded hole using solvent (Federal Specification

P-D-680, Type I) and dry thoroughly.
6 Install insert in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
R B. (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-1/-2) Replace Drain Fitting or Plug

R (See Figure 201 or 202)
R (I) Removejam nut and drain f i t t i n g .
R (2) Removejam nut and plug.
R (3) Install drain f i t t i n g as follows.
R (a) Apply adhesive sealant (Silastic 732 RTV) to accessory drive

R housing and to drain f i t t i n g . (See Figure 221.)
R (b) Install drain f i t t i n g in accessory drive housing. (See Figure

R 221.)
R (c) Apply sealant, PST pipe (Loctite No. 567) to threads, except
R f i r s t two threads, of drain f i t t i n g which mate with jam nut.
(d) Install jam nut on drain f i t t i n g and tighten to a torque value

(e) Apply adhesive sealant (Silastic 732 RTV) to surfaces adjacent

to drain f i t t i n g and finish flush with drain f i t t i n g and adja-
cent surfaces. (See Figure 221.) Allow aahesive to cure at
room temperature for 24 hours or oven cure at 200 to 300°F (93
to 149%) for 5 minutes.
(4) Install plug as follows.

(a) Apply adhesive sealant (Silastic 732 RTV) to accessory drive
housing and to plug. (See Figure 221.)
(b) Install plug in accessory drive housing. (See Figure 221.)

72-10-20
UP136688
Page 255
Aug 4/94
~l=~7rl.PA
lliedSignal
AE R OS PA E C
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
. B. (4) (c) Apply sealant, PST pipe (Loctite No. 567) to threads, except
f i r s t two threads of plug which mate with jam nut.
(d) Install jam nut on plug and tighten to a torque value of 15 to

20 inch-pounds.
R (e) Apply adhesive sealant (Silastic 732 RTV) to surfaces adjacent

R to plug and finish flush with plug and adjacent surfaces.
R (See Figure 221.) Allow adhesive to cure at room tBnperature
R for 24 hours or oven cure at 200 to 300°F (93 to 149°C) for 5
R minutes.
NOTE I NOTE I
ADHESIVE ~ ~
--ADHESIVE ~ ~ i J J l JIIIL '

R
j .ANT
ACCESSORY DRIVE
HOUSING
INSTALL AT 6 O'CLOCK POSITION INSTALL AT 12 O'CLOCK POSITIO~
SBG-727
R NOTE1: Apply adhesive sealant (Silastic 732 RTV) flush with adjacent surfaces.
R Drain Fitting and Plug Installation

R Figure 221 72-10-20
UP136688
Page 256
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO* 72-01-27)
CHAPTER 72 - COMPRESSOR SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION1
SUBJECT PAGE
COMPRESSOR SECTION
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER

FlAI NTENANCE PRACTICES
Inspection/Check
Approved Repai r s
COFIBUSTION TRANSITION LINER ASSEMBLY

MA1 NTENANCE PRACTICES
Inspection/Check
C l eani ng/Pai n t i n g
Approved Repairs
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING, COPZPRESSOR

HOUSING, COMRPESSOR IMPELLERS, MA1 N
SHAFT AND COMPRESSOR DIFFUSER
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repai r s
UP136688
COMPRESSOR SECTION
72-CONTENTS
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
COMPRESSOR SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The compressor section of the engine consists e s s e n t i a l l y of those components

located in the center of the engine and enclosed by the compressor housing and a
portion of the input housing. The principal components of the compressor sec-
tion are the impellers, interstage d i f f u s e r assembly, impeller shroud, com-
bustion t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r and compressor housing. The compressor section f u r -
nishes the compressed a i r to the combustion section.
The t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r assembly registers on the compressor housing. The assembly

directs a i r to the turbine section and also provides support for the seal on the
splined curvic coupling. The l i n e r assembly supports the forward end of the
combustion chamber. Small holes in the center section of the l i n e r assembly
d i r e c t cooling a i r to the f r o n t face of the f i r s t stage turbine wheel and
through the curvic teeth to the center area between the turbine wheel hubs and
the main drive shaft. The s t a t o r and l i n e r assembly forms an inner register f o r
the combustion chamber.
I n l e t a i r e n t e r s t h e engine through an i n l e t a i r duct located at the bottom of

the reduction gear section. From the i n l e t a i r duct, the a i r enters the com-
pressor section at the f i r s t stage impeller, where i t is compressed and forced
through the interstage d i f f u s e r assembly to the second stage impeller. Air is
f u r t h e r compressed by the second stage impeller and guided by the compressor
housing and combustion t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r into the combustion section.
UP136688
72-30-00
Page 1/2
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal FIAII~TENANCE MANUAL

A E R 0 S P A (" E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOTE: Inspection/Check and Approved Repairs of f i r s t stage im-

peller are performed with engine assembled.
1. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect First Stage Impeller
(1) Using a strong l i g h t and mirror, check f i r s t stage impeller through

inlet for damage as follows.
(a) Visually inspect impeller for deformed blades. Limits for

deformed blades are as follows.
1 Deformed blades are restricted to the outer one-half of the

leading edge.
2 The radius at the bend shall be greater than 0.2 inch and
blade contour shall be within 0.1 inch of original
projected blade contour.
3 I f deformed blades are within l i m i t s , check blades for

cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(b) Visually inspect impeller for cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(c) Visually inspect impeller blades for dents and nicks. Limits
for dents and nicks on blades are as follows.
1 Dents or nicks on inner one-half of blaae leading edge

shall not exceed 0.03 inch in depth.
Dents or nicks on outer one-half of leading edge shall not

R exceed 0.05 inch in depth.
I f dents or nicks are within above limits, repair in ac-

cordance with Approved Repairs.
Dents or nicks within 0.25 inch of hub are not acceptable.
(d) I f limits are exceeded, the engine shall be removed for

repair. Refer to 72-30-04, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Check f i r s t stage impeller for rubbing as follows.
Check around periphery of impeller and interior surface finish on

shroud for rubbing. I f rubbing is evident, contact an AlliedSignal
authorized service f a c i l i t y (refer to SIL P331-27) or the appropri-
ate AlliedSignal Field Service Engineer (refer to SIL P331-22) for
guidance and further instructions.
72-30-01
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~lliedSignal
A E R O S PAC
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
RADIUS SHALL FAIR

SMOOTHLY TO LEADING
EDGE CONTOUR
LENGTH MUST BE FOUR

TIMES DEPTH-MINIMUM VIEW D - D
. ~ 0,1 IN. PAD
",~ CONFIGUPATION
AFTER
~v~--" MATERIALREMOVED
o~,~,~PT"
y/j.-- o.,,,.
DETAIL B
NICK OR DENT REMOVAL FROMINNERHALF OF LEADINGEDGE
LENGTH MUST BE FOUR

TIMES DEPTH-MINIMUM
0,1 IN, PAD

8%~,~~"~'°O"VE~
E~
MAX DEPTH
0.05 IN. 0.2 IN.
DET~L C
NICK OR DENT REMOVALFROM OUTER HALF OF LEADINGEDGE
CI-44G-1279
First Stage Compressor Impeller Nick or Dent Repair

UP136688
Figure 201 72-30-01

Page 202
Aug 4/94
GEG7(]-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Approved Repairs
A. Repair First Stage Impeller
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDREWORKLIMITS OF FIGURE 201. PERFORM-

ANCE MAY BE AFFECTED. BLADESMAY BE REWORKEDMORE
THAN ONCE IF LIMITATIONS SHOWNIN FIGURE 201 ARE NOT
EXCEEDED.
R (1) Dents or nicks 0.03 inch in depth may be removed from the inner
R one-half of blade leading edge. Dents or nicks 0.05 inch in depth
may be removed from outer one-half of leading edge. (See Figure
201.)
(2) Hand finish to remove dents or nicks on blade. Hand finish to

remove material from the leading edge of the blade at a length
R equal to four times the depth of the nick or dent. (See Figure
R 201, Details B and C.)
(3) All places where material is rBnoved shall f a i r smoothly, have a

R finish with a 180 g r i t or f i n e r , and not leave any corners or edges
sharper than 0.1 inch radius.
(4) Blade repair is not allowed within 0.25 inch of hub.
R (5) Blending of leading edge contour which extends more than 0.2 inch
R beyond the allowable repair depth is not acceptable. (See shaded
R area, Details B and C, Figure 201.)
72-30-01
UP136688
Page 203/204
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COFIBUSTION TRANSITION LINER ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Removal/Instal I ati on.
Item Source/
i. Gear Train Lock Used to lock gear train when re- 284689-1-i/
moving combustion transition liner. -2-1
2. Dummy Shaft Used to secure turbine components 285158-i-1
when measuring assembly aimension.
R Anti-seize lubricant compound Emhart Corp, Bostik Div,

R (Never-Seez,Nickel Special) Boston St, Middleton, MA 01949
R (MIL-A-907D)
Camel hair brush Commercially avail able

(Fel -Pro C5-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL
Marking materials
(Berol Verithin No, 753, 302 S 23rd Ave, Phoenix, AZ 85009
Silver)
Violet master marker The Pannier Corp, 207 Sandusky St,

72-30-03
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
Solvent (Federal Specification Commercial ly available

P-D-680, Type I)
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVINGBOLTSSECURING SEAL ASSEMBLY, ENSURE

THAT NUT PLATES ARE NOT DISLODGED AND DROPPED INTO
ENGINE. IF NUT PLATE IS DROPPEDINTO ENGINE, RETURN
R ENGINE TO AN ALLIEDSIGNAL AUTHORIZED REPAIR FACILITY
IF NUT PLATE CANNOTBE RECOVERED.
NOTE: Transition liner seal assembly is securea with nuts and

bolts on C~ibustion Transition Liner Assembly, Part No.
893970-1, therefore combustion transition liner assembly
has to be removed, to remove seal assembly. On Cora-
bustion Transition Liner Assembly, Part No. 893970-3, the
transition liner seal assembly is secured with bolts and
nutplates (nutplates welded to combustion transition
liner assembly) to combustion transition liner assembly,
removal of combustion transition liner is not necessary.
To replace seal assembly on Combustion Transition Liner
Assembly, Part No. 893970-3, disassemble engine in ac-
cordance with paragraph I.A., only to extent necessary to
gain access to seal assembly. Removeand install seal
assembly in accordance with steps 1.A.(35) and I.B.(1).
i. a. Remove Combustion Transition Liner Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove compensator and disconnect ITT sensor assembly. Refer to

(2) Remove rear turbine bearing oil line. Refer to 79-20-08, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(3) Remove air anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(4) Remove fuel flow divider and drain valve. Refer to 73-10-07, Main-
tenance Practices.
(5) Remove fuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to 73-10-09, I:lain-
tenance Practices.
(6) Rer,love ignition leads and igniter plugs. Refer to 74-20-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 202
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
2B
"'5
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 2) 30. SEALASSY (20, IPC FIG. 1)

10. TRANSITIONLINER ASSY 35. SECONDSTAGE IMPELLER
(35, IPC FIG. I) (I0, IPC FIG. 2)
15. BOLT (IPC FIG. 1) 40. VANEASSY (15, IPC FIG. 2)
20. NUT (5, IPC FIG. I) 45. COMPRESSORHOUSING
25. BOLT (10, IPC FIG. I) (20, IPC FIG. 2)
Combustion Transition Liner Assembly Second Stage
Impeller and Compressor Housing Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 72-30-03

Page 203
Dec 14/87
/lied
R 1. A. (7) (Codes CA-CC, DA, GA) Remove fireshields. Refer to 71-30-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
CAUTION: ENSURETHAT COMPRESSORBEARING IS INSTALLEDTO
RETAIN POSITION OF MAIN SHAFT.
NOTE: Engine must be removed from aircraft and placed in
a suitable maintenance stand which will support
the engine at the engine mounting pads with engine
in a vertical position and propeller shaft end
down.
(8) Place engine in maintenance stand with propeller shaft end down.
Refer to 72-00-00, Removal/Installation.
(9) Removeoil inlet retainer shield. Refer to 72-50-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(I0) Remove tail cone. Refer to 75-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(II) Remove turbine oil inlet f i t t i n g and oil pressure jet. Refer to
(12) Remove turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to 72-50-04, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(13) Remove exhaust pipe assembly. Refer to 72-50-05, Maintenance
Practices.
(14) Remove turbine plenum and combustion chamber. Refer to 72-40-01,
(15) Remove bearing support assembly components and bearing support
(16) Remove third stage stator and second and third stage turbine wheel
(17) Remove f i r s t stage turbine wheel, f i r s t and second stage stator as-
semblies and interstage turbine temperature sensor assembly. Refer
(18) Install 285158-1-1 dummyshaft over engine main shaft.
(19) Install 284689-1-1/-2-1 gear train lock onto starter mount pad to
lock engine gear train.
(2o) Tighten all bolts between compressor housing forward flange and ac-
cessory drive housing to a torque value of 60 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 204
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. A. (21) Fabricate suitable bridging tool (or use turbine plenum as alter-
nate) to span compressor housing rear flange and to extend above
center curvic coupling at a height to allow a depth measurement to
be taken from bridging tool to high point of the center curvic
coupling. (See figure 202.)
(22) Using depth micrometer, measure from upper surface of bridging tool
to high point of center curvic coupling (high point of curvic
coupling is tooth with "V" marking) and record as Dimension A.
(See figure 202.)
(23) Using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), mark bolt holes on
compressor housing flange where bridging tool is mounted so that
bridging tool can be installed at same location during reassembly
to ensure repeatability of Dimension A measurement.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE CENTER CURVIC COUPLING UNTIL

COUPLING IS INDEX MARKED.
(24) Remove285158-1-1 dummyshaft from engine main shaft.
(25) Using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), index mark center
curvic coupling to main shaft. This index mark is important to en-
sure that center curvic coupling is installed in same spline posi-
tion during reassembly.
(26) Using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), index mark compressor
housing flange, accessory drive housing rear flange and gasket for
orientation at reassembly.
(27) Removenuts, washers and bolts between compressor housing flange
and accessory drive housing flange.
(28) Attach a l i f t i n g device to the compressor housing rear flange.
CAUTION: DO NOT DISENGAGE CENTER CURVIC COUPLING FROM

SECOND STAGE IMPELLER UNTIL COUPLINGAND IM-
PELLER HAVE BEEN INDEX MARKED.
(29) Carefully l i f t compressor housing with center curvic coupling and

second stage impeller from engine.
(30) Cover exposed engine compressor section to prevent entry of foreign

objects.
(31) With compressor housing s t i l l suspended from hoist and, using s i l -
ver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), carefully index mark on inter-
nal surfaces, orientation of curvic engagement between the aft cur-
vic of second stage impeller and forward curvic of center curvic
coupling.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 205
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CENTER CURVIC COUPLING _ _ j DUMMY SHAFT (285158-I-I)
I
II,
BRIDGING TOOL
DIM A
NOTE: TURBINE PLENUM
~'~'~
MAY BE USED AS
ALTERNATE
BRIDGING TOOL 1 SEAL ASSY
NUT
COMPRESSOR HOUSING RANSITION LINER
FFUSER VANE SECTICN
GASKET
SECOND STAGE IMPELLER
BO LT
/ CURVlC COUPLING
ACCESSORY GASKET (V SEAL)
DRIVE HOUSING
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER
F-44G-370
UP136688
Measurement of Center Curvic Coupling Height

Figure 202 72-30-O3
Page 206
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. (32) Using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), select and index
mark location of one of second stage impeller leading edge blade
tips to compressor housing to f a c i l i t a t e orientation during
reassembly.
(33) Remove center curvic coupling and place in protective covering to

prevent damage to curvics.
(34) Support compressor housing on bench (forward end up) to gain ac-
cess to nuts securing transition liner assembly. Removenuts and
l i f t compressor housing from transition l i n e r assembly. Remove
second stage impeller from compressor housing. Index mark d i f -
fuser vane to compressor housing.
(35) Remove screws and nuts or bolts and remove seal assembly from
transition l i n e r assembly.
B. Install Combustion Transition Liner Assembly (See Figures 201 and 202)
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0387) DURINGSEAL ASSEMBLY INSTAL-

LATION POSITION THE SEAL BRAZEDJOINT AS NEAR
TO THE 12 O'CLOCK (11 O'CLOCK TO 1 O'CLOCK)
POSITION OF THE ENGINE VERTICAL REFERENCELINE
AS POSSIBLE.

recommended values.
Reassemble in accordance with 72-30-04 to esta-

blish proper compressor running clearance i f com-
pressor s p l i t line gasket was replaced, or i f com-
pressor housing, or impeller silroua, or f i r s t
stage impeller, or second stage impeller, or com-
pressor diffuser were replaced or reworked.
I f removed components listed above are being re-

installed and were not reworked, or i f rework con-
sisted of only hand finishing shroud contour or
hand finishing impeller leaaing edge contour and
balancing impellers, i t is not required to re-
establish compressor running clearance.
(1) Install seal assembly into rear side of combustion transition liner
and secure with screws and nuts or bolts. Tighten nuts (20, Figure
201) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds or bolts (15) to a torque
value of 60 i nch-pounds.
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
~7~-PA
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. IS. (2) Install second stage impeller and diffuser vane. Coat threaded
studs of combustion transition l i n e r assembly with anti-seize lu-
bricant compound (Never-Seez, Nickel Special). Install combustion
transition liner assembly into compressor housing and secure with
nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
(3) I f a replacement second stage impeller is installed, a vibration

check is required. Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
CAUTI ON: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-

VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR LONG
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGETO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE
HAZARD.
NOTE: Brush mating surfaces of curvics with a camel hair

brush, then clean thoroughly with solvent (Federal
Specification P-D-680, Type I).
(4) Clean center curvic coupling forward curvic teeth and second stage
impeller aft curvic teeth.
(5) Support compressor housing and assembled components by a l i f t i n g

device.
(6) Install center curvic coupling using orientation index marks.
(7) Align index mark on second stage impeller blade with index mark on
compressor housing.
CAUTION: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-

VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMESOR LONG
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENTDAMAGETO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEPAWAY FROMFLAMETO AVOID FIRE
HAZARD.
NOTE: Brush mating surfaces of curvics with a camel hair
brush, then clean thoroughly with solvent (Federal
(8) Clean forward curvic coupling teeth of second stage impeller to

remove dust particles.
(9) Remove protective covering from engine compressor section and clean
aft curvic coupling teeth of f i r s t stage impeller to remove dust
particles.
(10) Ensure the curvic coupling gasket (V seal) is properly seated in
the aft curvic coupling of f i r s t stage impeller.
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 208
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. B. (11) Ensure that the compressor housing to accessory drive housing

gasket is in place. I f the gasket is replaced, the average thick-
ness of the new gasket shall be within +0.001 inch of the average
thickness of the removed gasket.
CAUTION: DO NOT DISENGAGE CURVIC COUPLING TEETH BETWEEN

CENTER CURVIC COUPLINGAND SECONDSTAGE
IMPELLER.
(12) Carefully l i f t and lower compressor housing, with assembled parts,

over main shaft. Align center curvic coupling splines in accor-
dance with index marks. Slowly lower assembly to engage f i r s t and
second stage impeller curvics. At this point, compressor housing,
accessory drive housing and gasket index marks should align.
(13) I n s t a l l 285158-1-1 dummy shaft over main shaft.
(14) Install bolts, washers and nuts to secure compressor housing to

accessory drive housing. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 60
inch-pounds.
(15) I n s t a l l same bridging tool (see Figure 202) at same location as

marked during removal. Using depth micrometer, measure from upper
surface of bridging tool to high point of center curvic coupling.
Record dimension. Dimension shall be within +0.004/-0.000 inch of
Dimension A recorded during removal. I f dimension is not within
tolerance, reassemble components and remeasure.
(16) Remove bridging t o o l , 285158-1-1 dummy shaft and 284689-1-1/-2-i

gear t r a i n lock.
(17) Install f i r s t stage turbine wheel and f i r s t and second stage sta-
tor assemblies. Refer to 72-50-08, Maintenance Practices.
(18) Upon completion of engine assembly, i f a replacement second stage

impeller was installed, a vibration check is required. Refer to
(19) Upon completion of engine assembly perform an NTS system check by

f l i g h t check and NTS system ground check in accordance with
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 209
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Seal Assembly (20, Figure 201)
(1) (Felt Metal) Inspect seal assembly as follows.
(a) Visually inspect seal grooves. Adjacent grooves shall not

have connecting paths.
(b) Visually inspect f e l t metal inside diameter surface for rotat-

ing knife wear. Wear grooves shall not exceed 0.030 inch in
depth measured from unworn surface.
(c) Inspect for separation between f e l t metal and bonding surface.

Evidence of separation is cause for rejection. Inspect for
broken bonds and missing material. Evidence of either of
these conditions is cause for rejection.
(d) Visible braze in f e l t metal or grooves is not permitted.
(e) Damagedf e l t metal material of seal assembly can be replaced.

Return seal assembly to the following repair f a c i l i t y .
Distribution Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
(f) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. I f cracks are

suspected, perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accor-
dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not
allowed.
(g) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection

requirements.
(2) (Honeycomb) Inspect seal assembly as follows.

(a) Visually inspect the honeycomb portion of the seal assembly
for abnormalities which could cause seal to leak (separation
of brazed j o i n t , pieces missing or any other obvious damage).
(b) Visually inspect honeycomb inside diameter surface for rotat-

ing knife wear. Wear grooves shall not exceed .030 inch in
(c) Visually inspect seal wear grooves. Adjacent grooves shall

not have connecting paths. Wear grooves are not allowed
within 0.032 inch of seal edge.
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 210
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE HANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNU. 72-01-27)
2. A. (2) (d) Damagedhoneycomb material of seal assembly can be replaced.

Return seal assembly to the fol lowing repair facil i ty.
Distribution Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
( e ) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. I f cracks are

dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.
(f) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection

requ i rements.
(3) Visually inspect f e l t metal or honeycomb seal assembly for wear in

area of contact with f i r s t stage nozzle seal ring (Refer to
72-50-08). Light surface polishing is acceptable. Wear sufficient
to form a step or measurable depression of 0.005 inch or less is
acceptable; however, sharp edges must be blended to a smooth
contour.
B. Inspect Combustion Transition Liner Assembly (See Figure 203)
(i) Visually inspect liner assembly for cracks in material, distortion,

loose studs, and other damage.
(2) Cracks are allowed as shown in View A-A of Figure 203. Cracks
shall not exceed one inch. No intersectin~ cracks allowed.
(3) Cracks shall not exceed limits shown in View B-B of Figure 203.
(4) No cracks or holes permitted in inner shell.
(5) Dimensionally inspect thickness of sheet metal liner in Area A.

Thickness shall not be less than 0.030 inch.
(6) (Post SB 72-0527) Visually inspect thermal barrier coating for
R peeling, flaking, erosion, and missing coating. Peeling, flaking,
R erosion or missing coating are acceptable, i f no localized warpage
or distortion of base metal has occured.

damaged beyond limits of Approved Repairs.
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 211
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
LINER
A A
SEAMWELD
0.030 I N / /
MIN.
AREA A
A ~ CRACK
A+B+C=TO J
LENGTH OF THREEINCHES. B /~w" ~
o--j
VIEW A - A
SEAMWELD SEAM WELD
/
B
L__,
~ CRACK
TOTAL CRACK LENGTH ADJACENTTO

INBOARD SIDE OF WELDOR
CRACK
THROUGHWELD ALLOWABLETHROUGH
360'~ CIRCUMFERENCE. TOTAL CRACK
LENGTH ADJACENTTO OUTBOARD
SIDE OF WELD SHALLNOT EXCEED
NINE INCHESTOTAL LENGTH.
ViEW B-B
NOTE: LINER ASSEMBLYSHOWN REMOVEDFOg CLARITY.

1-44A-2966
Inspection of Combustion Transition Liner Assembly

UP136688
Figure 203 72-30-03

Page 212
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
-- A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. C. Inspect Compressor Housing (See Figures 204, 205)
NOTE: Inspection of compressor housing assembly in conjunc-

tion with a turbine (hot) end section is performed with
the compressor housing assembly and combustion transi-
tion liner assembly installed in the gearbox. Plate
Area A Figure 204 can be observed with the combustion
transition liner installed.
(1) Visually inspect housing for cracks. Cracks are not acceptable ex-
cept as noted in step (2)(a).
(2) Visually inspect compressor housing assembly for metal spray

buildup as follows.
R (a) Visually inspect shroud contour (Area B, Figure 204) for chip-
R ping, rubs, flaking, wear, and cracks.
R 1 Craze cracks are acceptable.
R 2 Hand finish to remove raised metal.
(b) See Figure 205 - Light metal spray buildup as shown at Section
A is acceptable.
(c) See Figure 205 - Heavy metal spray buildup as shown at Section
B is acceptable providing i t is confined within an area less
than 45 degrees.
(d) See Figure 205 - Heavy metal spray buildup as shown in Section
B. I f metal spray buildup exceeds an area of 45 degrees,
remove combustion transition liner. Refer to paragraph I.A.
(3) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements and that is
damaged beyond approved repair.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 213
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A

. D. Inspect Second Stage Impeller
(1) V i s u a l l y inspect impeller f o r cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(2) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with

(3) V i s u a l l y check impeller blades f o r dents and nicks. Limits f o r

dents andnicks on blades are as follows. (See Figure 208.)
(a) Dents or nicks on inner h a l f of blade leading edge shall not

exceed 0.05 inch in depth.
(b) Dents or nicks on outer h a l f of leading edge shall not exceed

0.08 inch in depth.
(c) Dents of nicks which are w i t h i n 0.05 inch hub f i l l e t are not
acceptable.
R (d) I f dents or nicks are w i t h i n above l i m i t s , repair in accor-

R dance with Approved Repairs.
(4) Visually inspect impeller for evidence of rubbing. (See Figure

201.)
(a) Rubbing is not permitted in Area B.
(b) Minor rubbing is acceptable on blades (Surface C).

(c) Minor rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A) is
acceptable provided rub damage does not exceed following
I imi ts.
Damage shall not exceed 0.005 inch depth.
2 No damage allowed within 0.020 inch of blade platform or

blade root area (Dimension E).
(d) Repair minor rub damage in accordance with Approved Repairs.

(5) Inspect and repair curvic couplings in accoraance with 70-00-00,
Standard Practices.

(7) Replacement of second stage impeller requires a vibration check.
Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 214
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
~PLATE (AREA
A)
t I
SHROUD (AREA B)
ABRADLE MATERIAL
MAX RUB DEPTH0.005 IN.
1-44A-3074
Inspection of Compressor Housing Assembly (Typical)

UP136688
Figure 204 72-30-03

Page 215
Dec 14/87
• J MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
i,
"'~"" ""':'" 0
LIGHT METAL
SPRAY BUILD-
,.~',. -.
SECTION A
LIGHT METAL SPRAYBUILD-UP
BING
HEAVY
SPRAY
SECTION B
HEAVY METAL SPRAY BUILD-UP
F-44A-4691
UP136688
Inspection of CompressorHousing Assembly

Figure 205 72-30-03
Page 216
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
B B
AREAA ,<>,
CURVIC
CURVlC COUPLING ~ .-'~"~.~ I COUPLING
MARK " A " OR " T " INDICATESFACE
RUNOUT HIGH POINT ON FACE OF
NEARESTTOOTH. (TYPICAL BOTH
COUPLINGS)
/
ViEW A - A
t AREA A
"~'--DIM. E
1-44G-811
ViEW B-B
UP136688
Second Stage Compressor Impeller Inspection

Figure 206 72-30-03
R Page 217
Aug 12/91
I ~ I FIAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. E. Inspect Diffuser Vane Assembly (See Figure 207)
(i) Visually check assembly for cracks and voids. No cracks are
allowed. A 15-percent void is allowed in brazed joints.
(2) Visually check assembly for distortion. Dimension E shall be
within limits specified in Figure 207. Straighten to obtain speci-
fied requirements,
(3) Visually check assembly for vane tip erosion/damage. Vane tip ero-
sion is acceptable providing i t can be blended within maximum blend
depth specified in Figure 207.
(4) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with 70-00-
00, STANDARDPRACTICES. No cracks are allowed.
(5) Replace part that does not meet Inspection/Check requirements or
that is damaged beyond repair.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 218
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
"*-'--"I--DIM. C (TYPICAL17 PLACES)

I
Ifl
I/llllllll,l~
.~ , DIM. E (NOTE I)
-i
,i
DIM. F (NOTE 2)
222
f
!~ -~--~DIM. C (TYPICAL17 PLACES)

view G- G 1-44G-594
NOTE: , Inspect Dimension E between vanes observing Radius D.

(Typical 17 places).
2, 0.050 IN. MAX. BLENDDEPTH
REPAIRABLE LIMITS
DIM. C 0.401 in. min

RAD. D 6.000 in.
DIM. E 0.525 to 0.535 in.
Diffuser Vane Assembly

UP136688
Figure 207 72-30-03

Page 219
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ / l iignal
ed

2. F. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gasket
(1) Visually inspect curvic coupling gasket for nicks, deformation,
cracks, hanging burrs, kinks, and other damage.
(2) Visually inspect curvic coupling gasket for evidence of positive
contact of gasket tips which mate with curvics. There shall be no
visible leakage paths.
(3) Measure height of gasket at three positions approximately 120 de-
grees apart. Minimumaverage height of gasket shall be 0.212 inch.
3. Cleaning/Paintin B

R CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0527) DO NOT IMMERSETRANSITION
R LINER WITH THERMALBARRIER COATING IN SOLUTIONS
R CONTAINING SODIUMOR POTASSIUM. SOLUTIONSSUCH
R AS ALKALINE CLEANERS, RUSTSTRIPPERSAND SODIUM
R HYDROXIDE CAN PENETRATETHROUGHTHE THERMAL
R BARRIER COATINGAND DAMAGETHE BONDCOAT
R BETWEEN THE BARRIER COATINGAND THE BASEMETAL.
(2) Clean combustion transition liner in accordance with 72-00-00,
Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 2 and 9.
4. Approved Repairs

equipment required for Approved Repairs.
Item Source/
1. Impeller Balancing Used to adapt second stage 284992-1-1

Arbor impeller to supports of stan-
dard balancing machine.
UP136688
72-30-03
Page 220
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Balancing machine AMCA International Corp, Giddings and

(Gisholt Model 13S Standard) Lewis Div, 142 Doty St, Fond Du Lac,
WI 54935-3331
4. A. Repair Second Stage Impeller
CAUTION: ENSURETHERE ARE NO STRESS RISES (SHARP EDGES)

OR CRACKS IN REPAIRED AREA AFTER BLENDING.
(1) Removeminor rubbing (aluminum buildup) on impeller blade radial

(Surface C, Figure 206) by hand finishing.
(2) Hand finish to remove rub damage to outside edge of platform rim
(Area A, Figure 206).
R (3) Repair nicks and dents on leading edge of impeller blades as
R follows. (See Figure 208.)
R (a) Blending of leading edge contour which extends more than 0.2
R inch beyond the allowable repair depth is not acceptable.
R (See shaded area, Details B and C, Figure 208.)
R (b) Dents or nicks 0.05 inch in depth may be removed from inner
R one-half of the blade leading edge. Dents or nicks 0.08 inch
R in depth may be removed from outer one-half of the leading
R edge. (See Figure 208, Details B and C.)
R NOTE: Blending is not allowed within 0.05 inch of

R hub f i l l e t .
R (c) Hand finish to remove dents or nicks from the blade. Hand
R finish to remove material from leading edge of the blade at a
R length equal to four times the depth of the nick or dent.
R (See Figure 208, Details B and C.)
R (d) All place where material is removed shall f a i r smoothly, f i n -

R ished with a 180 g r i t or finer, and not leave any corners or
R edges sharper than 0.01 inch radius.
R (e) Balance impeller in accordance with step (4).
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 221
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R O S PA (1 E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RADIUS SHALL FAIR

ORIGINAL LEADING EDGE SMOOTHLY TO LEADING
CONTOUR IS A 4:1 ELLIPSE. EDGE CONTOUR
LENGTH MUST BE FOUR

TIMES DEPTH-MINIMUM VIEW D - D
VIEW A - A
~ X 0.I IN. PAD
DETAIL B
R ~ D I
NICK OR DENT REMOVAL FROM INNER HALF OF LEADING EDGE
LENGTH MUST BE FOUR

TIMES DEPTH-MINIMUM
IN, PAD
CONFIGURATION AFTER
MATERIAL REMOVED
MAX DEPTH
0.08 IN. - - 0.2 IN.
HUB FILLET
FF ! DETAIL C
~ D I
NICK OR DENT REMOVAL FROM OUTER HALF OF LEADING EDGE

CI-44G-I281
R Second Stage Impeller Nick or Dent Repair

R Figure 208 72-30-03
UP136688
Page 222
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A

4. A. (4) Dynamically balance impeller, after repair, as follows. (See

Figure 209.)
(a) Install 284992-1-1 arbor on curvic couplings and install in
balancing machine (Gisholt Model 13S Standard Balancing
Machine).
(b) Dynamically balance impeller to an accuracy of 0.005 inch-

ounce in Plane L and 0.005 inch-ounce in Plane M.
R (c) Remove material for balancing from areas illustrated in Figure

R 209. Area No. 2 must be shot peened after removing material
R for balancing.
(d) All places where material is removed for balancing shall f a i r

smoothly and leave no corners or edges sharper than 0.015 inch
radius.
R NOTE: Shot peening is not required unless balance

R material was removed from Area 2. (See Figure
R 209.)
R (5) Shot peen areas enclosed by arrows to an intensity of 0.002 to
R 0.006 inch per Almen A2 gage. (See Figure 210.)
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 223
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-?.A
~lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PLANE L ~ , PLANE M
I/
I\o.~o,.. R :
1.9OIN. IJl
Ii1' l I
I
I
r
'
MIN. I
i
I
I 2.20
I
IN.
MAX.
MAx 1111
0,50 IN.
;!
M,N -'I II ~I ',
MATERIAL REMOVAL
AREA NO. 1 FOR
BALANCE.
MATERIAL REMOVAL
AREA NO. 2 FOR BALANCE.
DO NOT REMOVE MATERIAL
p~ ~ BELOW PHANTOM LINE
SHOWN.
1-44A- 1117
Second Stage Compressor Impeller Balancing (Typical)

Figure 209 72-30-03
UP136688
Page 224
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
4. B. Repair Cracks Found in Combustion Transition Liner (See Figure 203)
(1) Stop d r i l l cracks found in l i n e r ring (section A-A of Figure 203)

R of combustion transition liner assembly. Stop drilled hole shall
R be 0.05 to 0.07 inch diameter.
(2) Replace liner assembly i f cracks exceed l i m i t s shown in View B-B of

Figure 203.
C. Repair Compressor Housing (See Figure 204)
(1) Hand blend shallow pitted, chipped, or flaked areas of contoured

area (aluminum-silicone coated). Do not expose base metal.
(2) Any rub step in contour area shall not exceed 0.005 inch. Hand
blend step smooth with contour. Do not expose base metal.
72-30-03
UP136688
Page 225
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (~. E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIM. R
4.90 TO
5.10 IN.
CI-44G-1282
Second Stage Impeller Shot Peening

Figure 210 72-30-03
UP136688
Page 226
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING, COMPRESSORHOUSING, COMRPESSOR

IMPELLERS, MAIN SHAFT AND CQMPRESSORDIFFUSER -

R Anti-seize lubricant compound Emhart Corp, Bostik Div,
R (Never-Seez,Nickel Special) Boston St, Middleton, MA 01949
R (MI L-A-907D)
Camel hair brush Commercial ly ava il able
Epoxy resin Epoxylite Corp, 4900 Toledo Wa, P.O.

(Epoxyl ite 6203) Box 19671, Irvine, CA 92713
Grease (Acryloid 615 or Royal Lubricants Co, Inc, 101 Eisenhower

NPC61361-1 from AlliedSignal Engines,

(DC-111 silicone compound) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
60076-4046
Lapping compound Timesaver Products Co, 3770 Podlin Drive,

(Time Saver #80) Franklin Park, IL 60131
Lubricant (Fluoroglide, C/P) Chenplast Inc, 150 Dey Rd, Wayne, NJ

07470
Lubricant compound Lockrey Co, Inc, Lubricants Div, 2517

72-30-04
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ /lied
Material or Compound Manufac tu re r
Marking materials
Silver pencil (Preferred) Bosie Cascade Office Products Div,

(Berol Verithin NO. 753, 302 S 23rd Ave, Phoenix, AZ 85009
Silver)
Plastic cap, curvics Commercial I y avai I able

(NAS816-268)
Retaining Compound Loctite Corp, 705 N Mountian Rd,
(Loctite R/C 609) Newington, CT 06111
R Sealant (RTV732 Dow Corning Corp, 3901S Saginaw Rd,

R or RTV731) P.O. Box 997, Midland, MI 48640
Solvent (Federal Specifi- Commercially avail able

cation P-D-680, Type I)
1,1,1-Tri chl oroethane Commercial ly available
(MIL-T-81533)
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Item Sourc e/
1. Spline and Socket Used for tightening (or 284196-2-1

Wrench (Multiplier) loosening) the main shaft
retaining nut when
assembling and stretching
the main shaft. Use with
200 foot-pounds standard
torque wrench.
NOTE: The fol lowing

item is a com-
ponent of
284196-2-1
Multiplier,
Splined Adapter 284196-21

la. Splined Adapter Used with 284196-2-1 294760-1
wrench when tightening or
loosening main shaft nut.
Engages splines of main shaft
on engines containing main
shaft with internal threads
in aft end.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 203
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Source/
R . **Shaft Stretching Used to stretch main shaft 284572-3-1/

Fixture (20 Ton) to install and remove main -4-1
shaft nut.
NOTE: The following

items are com-
ponents of
284572-3-1
Shaft Stretch-
ing Fixture.
A. Adapter (Socket) "284572-19/

296862-i
B. Two Piece Adapter 284572-23
C. Stretching Shaft 284572-25
D. Nut 284572-27
E. Safety Cover 295608-1
F. Packing MS28775-237
NOTE: The fol lowing

items are com-
ponents of
284572-4-1
Shaft Stretch-
i ng Fi xtu re.
A. Adapter (Socket) 296862-I

D. Nut 284572-27
G. Anti-Rotation Handle 832000-1
2a. Stretching Shaft Used with 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft 296131-1

stretching fixture to stretch
main shaft and remove main
shaft nut.
"296862-1 Socket preferred. (Not a component of 284572-3-1.)

R **Refer to 72-ST-06, Special Tools Pamphlet for maintenance instructions.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 204
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Source/
2b. SocketWrench Used in lieu of 284572-19 socket 296862-1

when d i f f i c u l t y is encountered
during rBnoval of main shaft
nut with 284572-3-1/-4-i shaft
stretching fixture.
2c. Broaching Used to broach internal splines "293498-1/

Fixture of main shaft after shaft 831023-1
stretching operation.
2d. Shaft Support Used to back-up compressor 285772-1-1

bearing when using 293498-1
broaching fixture.
. **Shaft Stretching Used to stretch main shaft 298420-1/

Fixture (30 Ton) to install and remove main -2/-3
shaft nut.
NOTE: The following

i terns are
components of
298420-1
Shaft Stretch-
i ng Shaft
Fixture.
A. Cylinder and Pump Assy 295192-4

B. Nut 295194-6
C. Safety Cover 295195-1
D. Two Piece Adapter 297641-I
E. Adapter 297642-I
F. Socket Wrench 297643-1
G. Stretching Shaft 297644-1
H. Packing $8990-240
"831023-1 Broaching Fixture preferred.

R **Refer to 72-ST-21, Special Tools Pamphlet for maintenance instructions.
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
/lied
Item Source/
. Shaft Stretching
Fixture (30 Ton)
(Cont)
NOTE: The following

items are
components of
298420-2
Shaft Stretch-
ing Shaft
Fixture.
R A. Cylinder and Pump Assy 295192-4
B. Nut 295194-6
D. Two Piece Adapter 297641-1
R E. Adapter 297642-1
NOTE: The following
items are
components of
298420-3
Shaft Stretch-
ing Shaft
Fixture.
R A. Cylinder and Pump Assy 295192-4

B. Nut 295194-6
R E. Adapter 297642-1
R I. Anti-Rotation Handle 832001-1
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 206
Aug 12/91
lied
Item Source/
. Rotating Assembly Used to provide spacers 285167-1-1

Balancing ~t on each end of rotating
group for runout check.
NOTE: The following
items are
components of
285167-1-1
Rotating Assy
Balancing Kit.
A. Spacer (Turbine end) 285167-19

B. Spacer (Compressor end) 285167-21
NOTE: Special tools listed below are for general use.
5. Bearing Puller Used to install bearing and 284168-1-1

(mechanical) carrier onto main shaft and
into accessory housing.
. Maintenance Stand Used to bolt to each side of 284203-1-1
Adapter engine to mount engine to
maintenance stand.
(Sold each, 2 required)
. Mechanical Puller Used to remove curvic coupling 284476-2-1
from exhaust end of main shaft.
. Impel ler and Used to hold second stage 284478-1-1
Coupling Clamp impeller and curvic coupling
together on compressor housing
while instal ling transition
liner.
. Rotating Assembly Used to hold rotating group 284480-1-1/
Holder in upright position while -2-1
stretching shaft.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 207
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Source/
10. Aircraft Engine Used to support engine dur- 284493-1-1

Maintenance Stand ing transportation and main-
tenance.
11. "C" Clamp Set Used to hold stator locking 284496-1-1

nut to second stage stator
during buildup.
12. Wheel Clearances Used to provide a reference 284498-1-i/

Gage point to measure on when es- -2-1
tablishing wheel to shroud
clearances.
13. Shim Clearance Used to hold parts in alignment 284988-1-1

Gage and to hold main shaft in ex-
treme position when checking
for silims required for proper
f i r s t stage impeller clearance.
14. Turbine Wheel Used to provide a point from 285153-i-i/

Shaft Elongation which measurement may be taken -2-1
Gage when checking main shaft length
before and after shaft is
stretched.
14a. Bearing Puller (Pre SB 72-0174) Used to 285154-1-1

remove bearing from housing
assembly and main shaft.
14b. Bearing Puller Used to remove bearing from 285154-2-1

housing assembly and main shaft.
15. Dummy Shaft Used to hold f i r s t and second 285158-I-1

stage impellers on main shaft
when removing or i n s t a l l i n g
accessory housing.
16. Dummy Bearing Used to align and allow up and 285160-2-i

Carrier down movement of main shaft when
measuring f i r s t and second stage
impeller clearance.
72-30-04
UP136688
R Page 208
Aug 4/94
/,,,,,,,,,~ilie d
MAINTENJ
~,INTENANCE MANUAL ~JSignal
Item Sourc e/
17. Torquing Holder Used to hold rotating group in 287416-1-1

and Adapter a fixed position when removing
bearing retaining nut from main
shaft.
18. Bolt Retainer Used to retain bolts in stator 287423-1-1

Ring Clamp and liner assembly while as-
sembling second stage stator.
19. Rotating Group Used to hold p a r t i a l l y assembled 287517-1

Holder rotating group as main shaft is
installed.
20. Runout Checking Used to support rotating 287518-1

Fixture group during runout check.
21. Housing Used to protect seal assembly 287891-1

Installing Pilot when installing accessory
drive housing assembly.
22. Retaining Used to aid in installing 291756-1

Ring Guide thrust ring and spring washer
in turbine bearing cavity.
23. Torquing Holder Used with standard Power-Dyne 291900-2

Assembly Torque wrench to in-
stall or remove a TPE turbine
support from the stator re-
taining nut.
24. Shim Checking (Pre SB 72-0174) Used in place 293497-I

Dummy Bearing of engine hardware when shim-
Set ming for compressor running
clearances.
25. Shim Checking (Post SB 72-0174) Used in place 293814-1

Dummy Bearing of engine hardware when shim-
Set ming for compressor running
clearances.
26. Seal Removal Used to remove labyrinth 294278-1

Holder seal from main shaft with-
out damaging knife edges.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 209
Aug 12/91
/.~llied
NOTE: Remove only those items required for maintenance being

accomplished.
Accomplish disassembly in any order as required due to

f a c i l i t i e s and maintenance being performed.
. A. Remove Compressor Housing, Compressor Impellers, Main Shaft and
Compressor Diffuser
(1) Remove Beta tube. Refer to 72-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Remove fuel lines. Refer to 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(3) (Codes AA-CC) Removefuel control heat plumbing. Refer to

(4) (Codes DA-FB) Removestart fuel pressure regulator valve. Refer
R (5) (Codes DA-FB) Removefuel heater lockout valve. Refer to
R (5a) (Code GA) Remove fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve. Refer
(6) Removefuel shutoff valve and plumbing. Refer to 73-10-06,
(7) Removeturbine bearing oil line. Refer to 79-20-08, Maintenance
Practices.
(8) RemoveBETA/NTS plumbing and switch housing. Refer to 77-10-02,
(9) Removemanifold purge system plumbing. Refer to 73-10-13,
(lO) Remove ignition system. Refer to 74-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(11) Remove fuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to 73-10-09,

(12) Remove air anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01,

(13) Remove ITT thermocouple harness assembly and ITT compensating

resistor. Refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance Practices.
(14) Remove fireshields. Refer to 71-30-01, Maintenance Practices.
(15) Remove torque sensor transmitter. Refer to 77-10-03, Maintenance

Practices.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 210
Aug 12/91
/~llied
i. A. (16) Remove recessed plug/torque sensor compensator. Refer to

(17) Remove torque pressure adapter. Refer to 77-10-04, Maintenance

Practices.
(18) Remove oil f i l t e r and adapter. Refer to 79-20-02, Maintenance
Practices.
(19) Remove oil tank and plumbing. Refer to 79-10-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(20) Remove fuel flow divider and drain valve. Refer to 73-10-07,
(21) Remove oil vent valve. Refer to 79-20-06, Maintenance Practices.
(22) Remove control linkage. Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance Practices.

Practices.
(24) Remove propeller governor. Refer to 72-10-03, Maintenance
Practices.
(25) Remove fuel control and pump assembly. Refer to 73-20-01,
(26) Remove anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 73-10-10,

(27) Remove torque/temperature limiter. Refer to 73-22-01, Maintenance
Practices.
(28) Remove fuel enrichment and pressurizing valve. Refer to 73-21-04,

(29) Remove fuel f i l t e r . Refer to 73-21-03, Maintenance Practices.

Practices.
(31) Remove planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to 72-10-12,
(31a) Remove diaphragm assembly. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance
Practices.
(32) Remove torsion shaft and coupling. Refer to 72-10-11, Maintenance
Practices.
(33) Remove magnetic drain plugs. Refer to 79-30-01, Maintenance
Practices.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 211
Aug 12/91
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~-~Signal
1. A. (34) Remove turbine bearing oil i n l e t retainer. Refer to 72-50-01,

(36) Remove oil inlet f i t t i n g and oil pressure jet. Refer to 72-50-03,
(37) Remove turbine oil scavenge pump. Refer to 72-50-04, Maintenance

Practices.
(38) Remove torque sensor assembly and oil transfer manifold. Refer to
(39) Remove fuel control drive gear train. Refer to 72-10-15,
(4o) Remove torsion shaft assembly. Refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance
Practices.
(41) Remove compressor bearing assembly. Refer to 72-10-19,

Practices.
(43) Remove turbine plenum and combustion chamber. Refer to 72-40-01,

(44) Remove interstage turbine temperature sensor assembly, turbine

bearing, bearing carrier and turbine bearing support assembly.
(45) Remove third stage stator and second and third stage turbine wheel
(46) Remove f i r s t stage turbine wheel, f i r s t and second stage stator

(47) Remove anti-icing shield assembly. Refer to 75-10-02, Maintenance

Practices.
(48) Remove shaft oil seals. Refer to 72-10-08, Maintenance Practices.
(49) Remove positive torque sensor regulator. Refer to 72-10-05,

(5O) Remove o r i f i c e housing. Refer to 72-10-06, Maintenance Practices.

(51) Remove negative torque sensor regulator. Refer to 72-10-04,
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 212
Aug 12/91
lied
i. A. (52) Remove oil pressure regulator. Refer to 79-20-05, Maintenance

Practices.
(53) Remove oil f i l t e r by-pass valve. Refer to79-20-04, Maintenance
Practices.
(54) Remove feathering valve. Refer to 72-10-07, Maintenance
Practices.
(55) Remove oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearings (aft
propeller shaft and starter idler). Refer to 72-10-18,
i ~
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 213
Aug 12/91
ABi.~,-Sin.-na-!Aem-__~aceCompany _~!lied
MA-~TENA14CE ~A141.JAL Signal
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORT140. 72-01-27)
i
,,C. r
;,,,:, ',
,~.,~, "
', ~',',',
"- ~\i
1
l 5
,-..~@p ", ,z-.
~'95
R
55
!
-->.
J,/Y
° ,.;~J'j
25 30,, .
E-44G-1278
35--.,...J 45

R (Power Group PN 3101880-5)
Removal of Accessory Drive Housing and
First Stage Impeller Shroud
UP136688
72-30-04
Figure 201 Page 214
Aug 12/91
~/lied
R 1. A. (56) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199) (Power Group Part No.
3101880-5) Removeaccessory drive housing and f i r s t stage im-
peller shroud as follows. (See figure 201.)
(a) Remove nuts (5), bolts (10) and washers (15).
(b) Remove nuts (20), washers (25) and spacers (30) or bolts
(35), lockplates (40) and spacers (45).
(c) Removeaccessory drive assembly.
(d) Install three 10-32 UNF jackscrews approximately 120 degrees
apart in holes on impeller shroud and carefully remove im-
peller shroud (100).
(e) Removejackscrews. Removepackings (90, 95), shims (55), and
gasket (50).
KEY TO FIGURE 201
o NUT 40. LOCKPLATE

10. BOLT 45. SPACER
15. WASHER 5O. GASKET
20. NUT 55. GASKET(SHIM)
30. SPACER 95. PACKING
35. BOLT 100. SHROUD
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 215
Aug 12/91
Allied,SignalAerospaceCompany
MAINTENANCE r4ANUAL ~ /lied
ignal
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
ENGINE
ACCESSORY DRIVE
DRIVE HOUSING
40 45
i 1
/
J 5
30 ~
20 25.,, " ~ - /
E-44.G-672
o NUT 30. ADAPTER

10. BOLT 35. WASHER
20. NUT 45. SHIM
25. WASHER
UP136688
Removal of Accessory Drive Housing Assembly

Figure 202 72-30-04
Page 216
Aug 12/91
lied
R 1. A. (57) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA) (Power
No. 3101880-10added by SB 72-0223) Removeaccessory drive housing
assembly as follows. (See Ffigure 202.)
(a) Removenuts (5), bolts (10) and washers (15).
(b) Removenuts (20) and washers (25), adapter (30), and washers
(35).
(c) Removeaccessory drive housing assembly, gasket (40), and
shim (45).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 217
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL lslied
ignal
PARTIALLY ASSE'~BLED ,
100
@~8590 E.-4,4A-6681
50. PACKING 95. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER

85. NUT SHROUD
Removal of First Stage Impeller Shroud
UP136688
Figure 203 72-30-04

Page 218
Aug 12/91
~3~lied
R 1. A. (58) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Post SB 72-0199) (Codes BA, EA-GA) (Power
No. 3101880-10 added by SB 72-0223) Removef i r s t stage impeller
(a) Removenuts (85) and washers (90), and remove impeller shroud
(9o).
(b) Removepackings (70, 100).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 219
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
..-," ,: ;;';,:::..,, " ..::.,.

"~# %. . . . . . . . : . . ~ " : , % "-.%,
8O , ' ~ ,j ¢. (, , j " : : . . , ",. ,:, "-,%
,'(, : ............. ;t Y'.".,, " ,,.":,, ",.X
i :.;..'" ,C"-:;'::'..:;"'.. ",,".::, "',",
'
!,// ..,/,.::.,,:~:~';..',::'.
.::s .... %..,,~.,.
,,,,
., X %
',,',:,
,
',,"
,I rf I/ I ." "':~:, ' ~,', ',,;', ',
fl"~ 7 * 1 ~ I":, ,, ',,,,"',% ~" ,~ ',t
~t;C>-"~"% " ". ~ ' " I,, ;it~ q ~: II II
. . / (;'. . . . . : : : . . . . . ..'~
, ,~ ~, , 'If
/ %: '::":~':.::.,,,,'¢t:t'tl /,,~
~. "~:d::, ,/'1¢ ,
•".~'.:::::-:.'~.<"~ /
TATA
• _
3,
55
45
/"
E-44G-118
(Pre SB 72-0444) Removal of First Stage Impeller,

Compressor Diffuser and Shouldered (Main) Shaft
Figure 204 72-30-04
Page 220
UP136688
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: REPLACEMENT OF COMPRESSORINTERSTAGE DUFFUSER

PART NO. 3101830-1/-2/-3 OR 3102847-1 (DIE
CAST CROSSOVERDUCT) WITH ANOTHEROF EITHER
PART NUMBER(3101830-1/-2/-3 or 3102847-1)
DOES NOT AFFECT ENGINE AERODYNAMICVARIANCE
AND AN ENGINE PERFORMANCETEST IS NOT
REQUIRED.
REPLACEMENT OF COMPRESSORINTERSTAGE DIFFUSER,
PART NO. 895948-1/-4 OR 3101293-1/-2 WITH A
LIKE PART NUMBERDIFFUSER OR WITH COMPRESSOR
INTERSTAGE DIFFUSER, PART NO. 3101830-1/-2/-3
OR 3102847-1, OR IF EITHER FIRST OR SECOND
STAGE IMPELLER, SECONDSTAGE COMPRESSOR
HOUSING OR SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT IS
REPLACED, PERFORMANCETESTING OF THE ENGINE
MUST BE ACCOMPLISHEDAT A GARRETT AUTHORIZED
SERVICE FACILITY.
R NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly,

R place index marks where removal of marks are
R readily accessable during assembly.
Using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), in-

dex mark second stage impeller to f i r s t stage im-
peller and mark f i r s t stage impeller to main
shaft.
I. a. (59) Removef i r s t stage impeller, diffuser assembly and main shaft as
follows. (See figure 204 or 205.)
NOTE: Whenever components with knife edge (labyrinth)

seals are removed from engine, use care to pre-
vent any handling damage such as dents, nicks, or
bends on knife edges.
(a) Remove assembled main shaft (5), seal (15), f i r s t stage im-
peller (10), and diffuser assembly (60 or 65).
QKEY TO FIGURE204
5. SHAFT(MAIN) 45. SPRINGWASHER
10. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER 55. STUD
15. SEAL 60. DIFFUSERASSY
20. GASKET(NO HOLES) 65. DIFFUSERASSY
25. RETAININGRING (DIECAST CROSSOVERDUCT)
35. DISK SEAL 75. WASHER
40. SEAL SPACER 80. LOCKPLATE
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 221
Dec 14/87
~'~,.. ~., ,
TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
Ks°~/~s/RE~
115
RTATEDA
55
45
(Post SB 72-0444) Removal of Main Shaft, First

UP136688
Stage Impeller and Interstage Diffuser

Figure 205 72-30-04
Page 222
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: PROTECT CURVIC COUPLINGS BY INSTALLING

PLASTIC CAPS OR SIMILAR PROTECTIVE
DEVICES. SURFACESOF COUPLINGS ARE
CRITICAL AND MAY BE DAMAGEDBY CARELESS
HANDLING OR STORAGE. REFERTO 70-00-00,
STANDARD PRACTICES FOR CURVIC COUPLING
HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
I. A. (59) (b) Remove d i f f u s e r assembly (60 or 65) from main shaft (5) then
press main shaft (5) from f i r s t stage impeller ( I 0 ) .
NOTE: Do not remove seal (15) from main shaft (5)
unless damage is indicated at inspection.
(c) Remove labyrinth seal (15) from main shaft (5) using 294278-1
seal remover holder.
CAUTION: CHECK CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (20) TO

ENSURE GASKET WHICH IS PRESENTLY
INSTALLED, CONTAINS NO HOLES. IF
INCORRECT GASKET IS INSTALLED REFER TO
APPROVED REPAIRS FOR ACTION REQUIRED.
(d) (Pre SB 72-0444) Remove gasket (20, figure 204), retaining

ring (25), retainer (30), disk seals (35), seal spacer (40),
and washer (45) from diffuser assembly.
(e) (Post SB 72-0444) Remove gasket (20, figure 205), r e t a i n i n g
ring (25), r e t a i n e r (30), disk seals (35), seal spacers (40),
retaining ring (42), and two washer (45) from d i f f u s e r
assembly.
(f) (Pre SB 72-0430) Check applied torque value of 35 inch-pounds

on b o l t (70).
(g) (Post SB 72-0430) I f no evidence of damage and or wear to
lockplate (80) and b o l t (70) do not remove.
KEY TO FIGURE 205
5. SHAFT (MAIN) 45. SPRING WASHER

I0. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER 55. STUD
15. SEAL 60. DIFFUSER ASSY
20. GASKET (NO HOLES) 65. DIFFUSER ASSY
25. RETAINING RING (DIECAST CROSSOVERDUCT)
35. DISK SEAL 75. WASHER
40. SEAL SPACER 80. LOCKPLATE
42. RETAINER
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 223
Dec 14/87
~] MAN
ITENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
2@
E-44G-671
""s
Removal Of Second Stage Impeller,

UP136688
Diffuser Vane Assembly and Compressor Housing

Figure 206 72-30-04
Page 224
Dec 14/87
lied
. A. (60) Remove combustion transition liner assembly, second stage im-
peller, and compressor housing assembly as follows. (See Figure
206.)
(a) Removenuts (5) and separate transition liner assembly ( 1 0 )
from compressor housing (45).
NOTE: Install a plastic cap (NAS816-268) over im-
peller curvic coupling for protection.
(b) Removesecond stage impeller (35). Removevane assembly
(40).
(c) Removecompressor housing (45) from maintenance stand.
(d) (Engines using Combustion Transition Liner Assembly Part No.
893970-1) Remove nuts (20), bolt (25) and seal assembly (30)
from combustion transition liner assembly (10).
(e) (Engines using Combustion Transition Liner Assembly Part No.
893970-3) Remove bolts (15) and seal assembly (30) from com-
bustion transition liner assembly (10). Do not remove nut-
plate unless damage is indicated by inspection.
KEY TO FIGURE 206
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-30-03) 35. SECONDSTAGE IMPELLER

10. TRANSITIONLINER ASSY (35) (10, IPC FIG. 2)
15. BOLT 40. VANEASSY (15)
20. NUT (5) 45. COMPRESSORHOUSING
25. BOLT (10) ASSY (20)
30. SEAL ASSY (20)
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 225
Aug 12/91
TPE331m5 (REPORT NOm 72~01m27)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, for

recommended general torque values. Add f r i c -
tional drag (run-down torque) of s e l f - l o c k i n g
devices to recommended values.
Fits and clearances and special torque values

involved in assembly are specified at the ap-
plicable point of assembly.
When bolts, screws, or nuts are i n s t a l l e d

forward of the f i r e s h i e l d , all threaded sur-
faces shall be coated with l u b r i c a t i n g com-
pound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) unless otherwise
specified. When male plumbing f i t t i n g s are
installed forward of the f i r e s h i e l d , all
threaded surfaces (except f i r s t two threads)
shall be coated with clean engine o i l unless
otherwise specified. When bolts, screws,
nuts, or male plumbing f i t t i n g s are i n s t a l l e d
a f t o f the f i r e s h i e l d , all threaded surfaces
(except f i r s t two threads of male plumbing
f i t t i n g s ) shall be coated with high tempera-
ture compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) unless otherwise
specified. When splines or gear teeth are to
be mated, coat the surface with lubricating
o i l of the same specification as used in the
engine lubricating system unless otherwise
specified.
I. B. Install Compressor Housing, Compressor Impellers, Main Shaft and

Compressor Diffuser
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 226
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
THIS PAGEINTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 227
Dec 14/87
J~J MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
15 NUT
" " 20 SPUR GEAR
SPAC
j15
~ j 2o
5 MAIN
js
HOLD
\
[ ] E.-4.4A-6682
5. SHOULDERSHAFT (MAIN) 20. GEAR

(IPC FIG. 3, 72-30-04) (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19)
15. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19)
Installation of Spacer, Gear and Nut
UP136688
onto Main Shaft

Figure 207 72-30-O4
Page 228
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: IF NO ROTATING COMPONENTSHAVE BEEN REPLACED, ENSURE

EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION
TO MAIN SHAFT.
IF A ROTATING COMPONENTIS REPLACED, THE REPLACEMENT

COMPONENT CURVlC TOOTH MARKED WITH A "V" OR " I "
SHOULD BE POSITIONED APPROXIMATELY 180 DEGREES FROM
"V" OR " I " ON MATING CURVICS. THE REMAINING
COMPONENTS PREVIOUSLY MARKED SHOULD REMAIN ALIGNED
WITH EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARK ON MAIN
SHAFT. IF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING (BETWEEN SECOND
STAGE IMPELLER AND FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL) IS
REPLACED, THE CENTER CURVIC COUPLING TEETH HAS
APPROXIMATELY THREE DIFFERENT POSITIONS WHERE CURVIC
TEETH WILL MESH WITH SECOND STAGE IMPELLER AND
INTERNAL SPLINES OF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING AND MAIN
SHAFT. POSITION CENTER CURVIC COUPLING TOOTH MARKED
WITH "V" OR " I " AS NEAR TO 180 DEGREE FROM "V" OR
" I " ON SECOND STAGE IMPELLER CURVIC AS POSSIBLE.
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with "V" or " I " indicates the high
tooth. When replacing a turbine rotating component or
components, "V" or " I " tooth should be positioned ap-
proximately 180 from "V" or " I " tooth on mating curvic.
The index l i n e marked during disassembly on components

not being replaced should remain aligned regardless of
position of "V" or " I " teeth on curvics.
. B. (I) Assemble r o t a t i n g group f o r runout check as follows.
NOTE: Prior to assembly of r o t a t i n g group, inspect

components f o r inspection acceptance and any
obvious damage. Ensure turbine wheel seals
are f u l l y seated and alignment pins are
properly i n s t a l l e d and seated with no cracks.
Record serial numbers of turbine wheels.
(a) I n s t a l l nut, gear, and spacer on forward end of main shaft as

follows. (See f i g u r e 207.)
! Place turbine end of main shaft (5) on 284480-1-1/-2-1

holder.
I n s t a l l 285167-21 spacer over the compressor end of main

shaft, then i n s t a l l gear (20).
3 Coat thread of nut (15) with approved engine o i l then i n -

s t a l l nut on main shaft. Tighten nut (15) hand t i g h t .
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 229
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
ROTATING GROUP
!"~"" 15 LABYRINTH SEAL
~ j 15
HOLDER
P
L
E-44A-5099
15. LABYRINTHSEAL
Installation of Labyrinth Seal on Main Shaft
UP136688
Figure 208 72-30-04

Page 230
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (1) (b) Install labyrinth seal on main shaft as follows. (See figure
208.)
1 Rotate assembly 180 degrees and place on 284480-1-1/-2-1

holder.
2 Heat labyrinth seal in an oven at 177C (350F) for 15

minutes, then install with two blades down over main shaft
until firmly seated against shaft shoulder.
3 Remove shaft and assembled components from holder.

UP136688
72-30-O4
Page 231
Dec 14/87
I~l MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
ROTATING GROUP.
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
ROTATING GROUP
10 FIRSTSTAGEIMPELLER
15 SECOND STAGEIMPELLER
140 CURVIC COUPLING
L._ ° IL L{F
i]
i
J
HOLDER
~
I
. . , , ~ 14o
E-44G-675
10. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER (IPC FIG. 3, 72-30-04)

15. SECOND STAGE IMPELLER (IPC FIG. 2, 72-03-03)
140. CURVIC COUPLING (90, IPC FIG. 1, 72-50-08)
Installation of First and Second Stage
Impellers and Curvic Coupling
UP136688
Figure 209 72-30-04

Page 232
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (1) (c) I n s t a l l f i r s t and second stage impellers and curvic coupling

on main shaft as follows. (See figure 209.)
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING
FUMES OR LONG CONTACTWITH SKIN TO
PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH.
KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE
HAZARD.
NOTE: Brush mating surfaces of curvics with a

camel hair brush. Clean thoroughly with
solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680,
Type I ) .
Assemble impeller and curvic coupling with

index marks (made during disassembly)
aligned.
1 Place curvic coupling (140) in 287517-1-1 holder. Place

second stage impeller (15) on curvic coupling.
2 Heat f i r s t stage impeller (10), in an oven at 177C (350F)

f o r 15 minutes and i n s t a l l on second stage impeller. Place
impellers and curvic coupling along with holder on arbor
press and press main shaft down through the stackup.
Ensure main shaft splines are properly aligned with curvic
coupling splines.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 233
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
ROTATING GROUP
SEAL ASSEMBLYTO BETOWARD

COMPRESSOREND (FRONT) OF
ENGIN E
DIM. B
I
10 CURVIC COUPLING
ZO THIRDSTAGE
WHEEL ASSY
i5SECOND STAGE
WHEEL ASSY
55"-'-~~
b ~5 FIRSTSTAGE
WHEEL ASSY
2o__B
15
10 ~ HOLDER~ J
5 E-44G-767
i
Installation of First, Second and Third Stage Wheel

Assemblies (Turbine Wheels), and
Curvic Coupling onto Main Shaft
UP136688
Figure 210 72-30-04

Page 234
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (1) (d) Install f i r s t , second, and third stage wheel assemblies

(turbine wheels) gaskets and curvic coupling onto main shaft

CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE
HAZARD.
CAUTION: TO PREVENTTHE POSSIBILITY OF INSTALLING FIRST

STAGE TURBINE WHEEL IN BACKWARDS, ENSURETHIN
EDGE OF TURBINE BLADES FACEAFT.
IF NO ROTATINGCOMPONENTSHAVE BEEN REPLACED,

ENSURE EACHPART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME
RELATIVE POSITION TO MAIN SHAFT.
IF A ROTATING COMPONENTIS REPLACED, THE
REPLACEMENT COMPONENTCURVIC TOOTHMARKEDWITH
A "V" OR "I" SHOULDBE POSITIONED APPROXIMATELY
180 DEGREESFROM"V" OR "I" ON MATING CURVICS.
THE REMAINING COMPONENTSPREVIOUSLYMARKED
SHOULD R~IAIN ALIGNED WITH EACHOTHERBUT MAY
NOT ALIGN WITH MARKON MAIN SHAFT.
• KEY TO FIGURE 210
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19) 55. SECOND STAGEWHEELASSY

10. ROTOR (IPC FIG. I, 72-50-07)
(120, IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19) 65. FIRST STAGEWHEELASSY
15. CURVICCOUPLING (IPC FIG. I, 72-50-08)
(5, IPC FIG. 1, 72-50-07)
20. THIRD STAGE WHEELASSY
(15, IPC FIG. 1, 72-50-07)
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 235
Dec 14/87
/lied
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with "V" or "I" indicates

the high tooth. When replacing a turbine
rotating component or components, "V" or "I"
tooth should be positioned approximately 180
from "V" or "I" tooth on mating curvic.
The index line marked during disassembly on

components not being replaced should remain
aligned regardless of position of "V" or "I"
teeth on curvics.
Brush mating surfaces of curvics with a camel
hair brush, then clean thoroughly with solvent
Assemble turbine wheels and curvic coupling

with marks (made during disassembly) aligned.
I. B. (1) (d) --I Rotate p a r t i a l l y assembled rotating group 180 degrees and
place on 284480-1-1/-2-1 holder with curvic coupling up.
Remove 287517-1-1 holder from assembly.
2_ Install f i r s t stage turbine wheel (65).
3 Install second stage turbine wheel (55) with seal assembly

toward compressor end of main shaft, and third stage tur-
bine wheel (20) with seal assembly toward compressor end of
main shaft.
4 Place curvic coupling (15) over main shaft and align teeth
to mate with those on turbine wheel. Heat coupling with
hand torch until i t completely engages turbine wheel.
_5 Using a depth micrometer measure from end of main shaft to
top of 284480-1-1/-2-1 holder inside main shaft (Dimension
B, unstretched) as illustrated in Figure 210. Record
result for later use.
6 Install rotor (10) over end of main shaft with f l a t side
against curvic coupling. Install 285167-19 spacer over end
of main shaft.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 236
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
WARNING: TO AVOID INJURY WHEN USING HYDRAULIC SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE

(20 TON OR 30 TON RAM), ENSURE PRESSURE VALUES USED ARE
CORRECT FOR FIXTURE BEING USED.
NOTE: When stretching the main shaft for runout check, select the ap-
propriate special tool and reference as l i s t e d in Table 203.
Table 203. Special Tools f o r Stretching

Main Shaft for Runout Check
Special Tool Reference
284196-2-1 M u l t i p l i e r
with 284196-21/ Para 1.B.(1) (e)
294760-1 Splined
Adapter
284572-3-1/-4-1 Shaft
Stretching Fixture Para 1.B.(1)(f)
with 284572-25/
296131-I Stretching
Shaft
298420-1/-2/-3 Shaft
Stretching Fixture Para 1.B.(1) (g)
NOTE: The 284196-2-1 multiplier with 284196-21

splined adapter (component of 284196-2-1 mul-
t i p l i e r ) shall be used on Main Shaft Part No.
894079-1 (with internal splines only).
The 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r with 294760-1

splined adapter shall be used on Main Shaft
Part No. 894079-2 (with internal threads 0.50
inch from turbine end of main shaft).
I f part number of main shaft is unknown, a

visual check of turbine end of main shaft is
required.
. B. (1) (e) Stretch main shaft to install main shaft nut for runout check
using 284196-2-1 multiplier with 284196-21 or 294760-1 splined
adapter.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 237
Dec 14/87
/_~lie d
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT TURBINE

R NUT OTHERTHANAPPROVED ENGINE OIL IS
R PROHIBITED. OTHERLUBRICANTS MAY
R RESULT IN A CORROSIVE ATTACKTO THE
R MAIN SHAFT TURBINE NUT.
NOTE: Use old main shaft nut removed at
disassembly. Use new nut at final
assembly.
1. B. (I) (e) ! Coat face and threads of nuts (5, figure 210) with approved
engine oil then install nut on main shaft hand tight to
seat curvic couplings.
_2 Install splined adapter into 284196-2-1 multiplier.
NOTE: Ensure splines of splined adapter mesh

with internal splines of main shaft and
multiplier is properly seated on main
shaft nut, prior to stretching main shaft.
3 With assembled rotating group installed on 284480-1-1/-2-1
holder, install 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r with splined adapter
over main shaft nut.
4 Install breaker bar on 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r to hold rotat-

ing group in restrained position.
NOTE: Use Dimension B (unstretched), recorded in
step (d)5, in obtaining shaft stretch.
The required shaft stretch (the difference
between Dimension B unstretched and
Dimension B stretched) is equal to 0.036
to 0.039 inch.
5 Hold breaker bar stationary. Move handle of 284196-2-1

multiplier in a clockwise direction to tighten main shaft
nut. While tightening main shaft nut, frequently check
dimension. I f Dimension B (stretched) is more than 0.039
inch greater than Dimension B (unstretched), recorded in
step (d)5, loosen nut to obtain the required dimension
(unstret-ched) plus 0.036 to 0.039 inch.
_6 Remove284196-2-1 multiplier with splined adapter.
7 This concludes the main shaft stretch procedure using

284196-2-1 multiplier. Proceed to step (h).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 238
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
NOTE: The 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching f i x t u r e

with 284572-25 stretching shaft shall be used
on Main Shaft Part No. 894079-1 (with i n t e r -
nal splines o n l y ) .
The 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching f i x t u r e

on Main Shaft Part No. 894079-2 (with i n t e r -
nal threads 0.50 inch from turbine end of
main shaft).

requi red.
I. B. (1) (f) Stretch main shaft using 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching f i x -
ture with 284572-25 or 296131-1 stretching shaft to i n s t a l l
main shaft nut for runout check as follows. (See Figure 211
or 212.)
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT

R TURBINE NUT OTHER THAN APPROVED ENGINE
R OIL IS PROHIBITED. OTHERLUBRICANTS
R MAY RESULT IN A CORROSIVE ATTACK TO
R THE MAIN SHAFT TURBINE NUT.
R NOTE: Use old main shaft nut removed at

R disassembly. Use new nut at f i n a l
R assembly.
I Coat face and threads of nut (5, Figure 210) with approved
engine o i l . I n s t a l l nut on main shaft hand t i g h t to seat
curvic couplings.
2 (Main shaft with internal splines only) Remove rotating

group from 284480-1-1/-2-1 holder. Insert 284572-25
stretching shaft threads f i r s t through compressor end of
main shaft. Exercise care when i n s t a l l i n g main shaft on
284480-1-1 holder, compressor end f i r s t .
CAUTION: (MAIN SHAFT WITH INTERNAL THREADS) ENSURE

296131-1 STRETCHING SHAFT IS THREADED INTO
MAIN SHAFT UNTIL FULLY INSTALLED
(APPROXIMATELY 6 I / 2 TURNS). LOOSEN
STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN TO PREVENT SHAFT
BINDING DURING INSTALLATION OR REMOVALOF
MAIN SHAFT NUT.
3 (Main shaft with internal threads) I n s t a l l and tighten

296131-1 stretching shaft into turbine end of main shaft
u n t i l f u l l y i n s t a l l e d (approximately 6 1/2 turns from s t a r t
of thread engagement). Loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 239
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SAFETY
COVER
NOTI
STRETCHINGFIXTURE"""'~/
1
,IG SHAFT
MAIN SH
ADAPTER
Z.
1-25
SP, ) PIECE
PeER
PACKII tiC
PLING
F-44G-2B0
Stretching Main Shaft (Shaft Stretching

•Fixture PN 284572-3-1/-4-1 with 284572-25 Stretching Shaft)
UP136688
Figure 211 72-30-04

Page 240
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SAFETY
COVER
NUT I 1
SIRETCHING FIXTURE N
......... N G SHAFT
MAIN SHAFT NUT I-I
PACKINGI
R°~L.~
i
ADAPTER (SOCKFTI ~,. "
SPACER ~
~
E
) PIECE
~PTER
IIC
PLING
SHAFT
)ER
F-44G-279
Stretching Main Shaft (Shaft Stretching Fixture

PN 284572-3-1/-4-1 with 296131-1 Stretching Shaft)
UP136688
Figure 212 72-30-04

Page 241
Dec 14/87
Allied.SignalderospaceCompany
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ ignal /lied
1. B. (1) (f)_4 Install two piece adapter (Part No. 284572-23, component of
284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture) between seal
rotor and aft curvic coupling. Install MS28775-237 packing
(furnished) around two piece adapter to hold in place.
NOTE: I f d i f f i c u l t y is encountered in removing

main shaft nut, use 296862-1 socket in
place of 289572-19 adapter socket provided
with 284572-3-I fixture.
5 Install 296862-1 socket on main shaft nut. Install ram as-

sembly over stretching shaft and two piece adapter°
6 Install and tighten 284572-27 nut on stretching shaft

against aft end of ram assembly. While holding stretching
shaft, loosen nut to 1/4 inch gap between nut and ram
assembly.
WARNING: ENSURE SAFETYCOVER IS INSTALLED WHEN

USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
OPERATION OF FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY
COVER IN PLACE COULDRESULT IN SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY.
7 Install 295608-1 safety cover on ram assembly. Connect hy-

draulic pump hose to ram assembly.
8 Use 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture as follows.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWING STEP,
APPLY A NOMINAL 5500 PSIG. DO NOT
EXCEED 5720 PSIG.
Apply hydrualic pressure (approximately 5500 psig) to

main shaft, turn adapter socket clockwise to tighten
main shaft nut. Do not exceed 5720 psig. Release pres-
sure and remove 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture
and stretching shaft.
b This concludes main shaft stretch procedure for runout

check using 284572-3-1/-4-I shaft stretching fixture.
Proceed to step (h).
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 242
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
NOTE: The 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture can

only be used on Main Shaft Part No. 894079-2
(with internal threads 0.50 inch from turbine
end of main shaft).

required.
1. B. (1) (g) Stretch main shaft to install main shaft nut for runout check
using 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture for runout check
as follows. (See Figure 213.)
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT

R TURBINE NUT OTHERTHANAPPROVED ENGINE
R MAY RESULT IN A CORROSIVEATTACKTO
R THE MAIN SHAFTTURBINE NUT.
R NOTE: Use old main shaft nut removed at
R disassembly. Use new nut at final
R assembly.
1 Coat face and threads of nut (5, figure 210) with an ap-
proved engine o i l . Install nut on main shaft hand tight to
seat curvic coupling.
CAUTION: ENSURE 297644-1/-2 STRETCHINGSHAFT IS
THREADED INTO MAIN SHAFT UNTIL FULLY
INSTALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2 TURNS).
LOOSEN STRETCHINGSHAFT 1/4 TURNTO
PREVENT SHAFT BINDING DURING
INSTALLATION OR REMOVALOF MAIN SHAFT
NUT.
2 Install and tighten 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft into tur-

bine end of main shaft until f u l l y installed (approximately
6 1/2 turns from start of thread engagement). Loosen
stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
3 Install 297641-1 two piece adapter between seal rotor and

aft curvic coupling. Install $8990-240 packing (furnished)
around two piece adapter to hold in place.
Install 297643-1/-2 socket wrench on main shaft nut.

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 243/244
Aug 12/91
~ S lied
NOTE: The 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft and

295194-6 nut are pilot f i t t e d to cylinder
bore to ensure alignment of the hydraulic
head to the engine main shaft. Do not
reverse nut.
1. B. (1) (g)_5 Install 298420-1/-2/-3 hydraulic head over 297644-1/-2

stretching shaft and 297641-1 two piece adapter. Install
and tighten 294194-6 nut on 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft
until f u l l y installed against hydraulic head. While hold-
ing 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft, loosen nut to a 1/4 inch
gap between nut and hydraulic head.
WARNING: ENSURE 295195-1 SAFETYCOVERIS

INSTALLED WHENUSING SHAFTSTRETCHING
FIXTURE. OPERATIONOF SHAFTSTRETCHING
FIXTURE WITHOUTSAFETY COVER IN PLACE
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY.
6 Install 295195-1 safety cover on hydraulic head. Connect

hydraulic pump hose to hydraulic head.
7 Use 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture as follows.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWING STEP,

APPLY A NOMINAL 3570 PSIG. DO NOT
EXCEED 3710 PSIG.
Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 3570 psig) to

main shaft. Do not exceed 3710 psig. Turn 297643-1/-2
socket wrench clockwise to tighten main shaft nut.
Release pressure and remove 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft
stretching fixture.
b This concludes the main shaft stretch procedure for

runout check using 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching
fixture. Proceed to step (h).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 245/246
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SAFETY" ~ /
COVER~ , ~
NUT~L 1 ~R
SCREW,~
STRETCI
SHAFT
SO
WR
AD
PAC
TWOPIECI C
ADAPTER LING
"IAFT
A
f
L ~ F-44G-281
Stretching Main Shaft

(Shaft Stretching Fixture PN 298420-1/-2/-3)
UP136688
Figure 213 72-30-04

Page 247
Dec 14/87
MAI
TENA
CEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
6 11
RUNOUTS
POSITION 1 6 11 1-44A-2892
BUILD NO,
NOTE: Runout surface is provided on aft curvic (Position 11)

0.08 to 0.10 inch from end of curvic.
Performing Runout Check of Assembled
UP136688
Rotating Assembly
Figure 214 72-3O-04
Page 248
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (I) (h) Perform runout check of assembled rotating assembly as

NOTE: Runout shall not be checked in areas where

material has been removed for balancing.
1 Remove assembled rotating assembly from 284480-1-1/-2-1

holder and install 285167-21 spacer on impeller end of
shaft. Place assembly in 287518-1-1 runout checking
fixture. Check runout at positions indicated in Figure
214.
2 Maximumrunout at each position shall not exceed 0.0015

inch total indicator reading.
CAUTION: IF COMPONENTSMUSTBE ROTATED, ENSURE

CURVICS SEAT PROPERLY. CURVICWILL NOT
ALWAYS MATE PROPERLYAT 90 DEGREES.
ROTATE UNTIL SEATING OCCURSPROPERLY.
NOTE: First stage impeller may have to be

removed and reinstalled in a different
location in relation to main shaft to aid
in obtaining runout limits. Prior to
reinstallation of f i r s t stage impeller,
ensure that position selected allows
proper seating of curvics and al lows cen-
ter curvic coupling to spline main shaft.
3 I f runout is not within l i m i t s , disassemble rotating assem-

bly down to component not within runout limits. Rotate the
individual component 90 degrees and reassemble. Perform
complete runout check again. Continue this procedure in
increments of 90 degrees until limits are established or
until i t is determined a component requires replacement.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 249
Aug 16/89
l ~ j MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
j NUT
CURVICCOl
NOTE: ALL OF DOTTEDAREA

TOBEREMOVEDIN THISSTEP...,
INDE~ INDEX LINES
NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE

FIRSTSTAGEIMPELLER.
\
.DER
LDER
SECONDPHASEOF INDEXING
FIRSTPHASEOF INDEXING
F-44G-144
UP136688
Indexi ng and Disassembling Rotating Assembly

Figure 215 72-30-04
Page 250
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (1) (i) Index and disassemble rotating assembly as follows. (See

figure 215.)
1 Remove nut and 285167-21 spacer (component of 285167-1
rotating assembly balancing kit) from impeller end of
rotating assembly. Place assembly on 284480-1-1/-2-1
holder.
2 Mark an index line as shown in shaded area using s i l v e r

pencil (Berol V e r i t h i n , No. 753).
WARNING: TO AVOID INJURY WHEN USING HYDRAULIC

SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE (20 TON OR 30
TON RAM), ENSURE PRESSURE VALUES USED
ARE CORRECT FOR FIXTURE BEING USED.
NOTE: To remove turbine main shaft nut, select

appropriate special tool and reference as
listed in Table 204.
Table 204. Special Tools to Remove

Turbine Main Shaft Nut
284196-2-1 multi pli er

with 284196-21/ Para (1) (j)
294760-1 splined
adapter
284572-3-1/-4-1 Shaft
stretching fixture Para (1)(k)
with 284572-25/
296131-1 stretching
shaft
298420-1/-2/-3 shaft Para (1) (1)

stretching fixture
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 251
Dec 14/87
lied
NOTE: The 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r with 284196-21

splined adapter (components of 284196-2-1
multiplier) shall be used on 894079-1 main
shaft (with internal splines only).
splined adapter shall be used on 894079-2
main shaft (with internal threads and
splines).
requi red.
1. B. (1) (j) Stretch main shaft to remove main shaft nut using 284196-2-1
multiplier with 284196-21 or 294760-1 splined adapter.
Install splined adapter into 284196-2-1 multipler.

multiplier is prope~y seated on main
shaft nut, prior to stretching main shaft.
2 With assembled rotating group installed on 284480-1-1/-2-1

holder, install 284196-2-1 multiplier with splined adapter
over main shaft nut.
3 Install breaker bar on 284196-2-1 multiplier to hold rotat-
ing group in restrained position.
4 Hold breaker bar stationary. Move handle of 284196-2-1

multiplier in a counterclockwise direction to loosen main
shaft nut.
5 Remove284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r .
6 Removemain shaft nut, 285167-19 spacer, and seal rotor
from main shaft.
7 This concludes the main shaft nut removal procedure using

284196-2-1 multiplier with splined adapter. Proceed to
step (m).
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 252
Aug 16/89
/lied

on 894079-1 main shaft (with internal splines
only).
The 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture
on 894079-2 main shaft (with internal threads
0.50 inch from turbine end of main shaft).
requi red.
1. B. (1) (k) Stretch main shaft using 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching f i x -
ture with 284572-25 or 296131-1 stretching shaft to remove
main shaft nut as follows. (See figure 211 or 212.)
1 (Main shaft with internal splines only) Removerotating

group from 284480-1-1/-2-1 holder. Insert 284572-25
main shaft. Exercise care when installing main shaft on
284480-1-1/-2-1 holder, compressor end f i r s t .
CAUTION: (MAIN SHAFT WITH INTERNAL THREADS) EN-

SURE 296131-1 STRETCHINGSHAFT IS
PREVENT SHAFT BINDING DURING INSTALLA-
TION OR REMOVAL OF MAIN SHAFT NUT.
2 (Main shaft with internal threads) Install and tighten
until f u l l y installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start
of thread engagement). Loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn.

aft curvic coupling. Install MS28775-237 packing
4 Install 284572-19 adapter socket on main shaft nut. In-
stall ram assembly over 296131-1 stretching shaft and two
piece adapter.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 253
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i. B. (1) (k) _5 Install and tighten 284572-27 nut on 296131-1 stretching
shaft against aft end of ram assembly. While holding
296131-1 stretching shaft, loosen nut to 1/4 inch gap
between nut and ram assembly.
WARNING: ENSURE 295608-1 SAFETY COVERIS IN-

STALLED WHEN USING SHAFT STRETCHING
FIXTURE. OPERATIONOF FIXTURE WITHOUT
SAFETY COVER IN PLACE COULDRESULT IN
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
6 Install 295608-1 safety cover on ram assembly. Connect hy-

CAUTION: USE EXTREMECARE NOT TO DAMAGETHE MAIN

SHAFT WHILE USING 284572-3-1/-4-1
FIXTURE. A NOMINAL PRESSURE OF 5500
PSIG SHOULDBE ENOUGHTO LOOSENMAIN
SHAFT NUT. IF A SEPARATION BETWEEN
MATING SURFACES OF NUT, SPACER, ROTOR,
OR AFT CURVIC COUPLING IS OBSERVED, NO
FURTHER STRETCH IS REQUIRED. DO NOT
EXCEED 6500 PSIG.
Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5500 psig) to main

shaft. Turn adapter socket counterclockwise to loosen main
shaft nut. Then loosen nut and slowly decrease hydraulic
pressure as required until nut is loose and hydraulic pres-
sure is zero. Remove ram assembly, stretching shaft, and
components of 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture from
engine. Removemain shaft nut.
_8 Remove 285167-19 spacer and seal rotor from main shaft.

284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture with stretching
shaft. Proceed to step (m).
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 254
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: The 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture

can only be used on 894079-2 main shaft (with
internal threads 0.50 inch from turbine end
of main shaft).
required.
1. B. (1) (1) Stretch main shaft to remove main shaft nut using
298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture as follows. (See
figure 213.)
CAUTION: ENSURE 297644-1/-2 STRETCHINGSHAFT IS
INSTALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 I/2 TURNS).
LOOSEN STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURNTO
TION OR REMOVALOF MAIN SHAFT NUT.

bine end of main shaft until f u l l y installed (approximately
6 1/2 turns from start of thread engagement). Loosen
stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
aft curvic coupling. Install $8990-240 packing (furnished)
around two piece adapter to hold in place.
3 Install 297643-1/-2 socket wrench on main shaft nut.

295194-6 nut are p i l o t fitted to cylinder
bore to ensure alignment of hydraulic head
to the engine main shaft. Do not reverse
nut.
4 Install 298420-1/-2/-3 hydraulic head over 297644-I/-2
until f u l l y installed against hydraulic head. While hold-
ing 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft, loosen nut to a 1/4 inch
gap between nut and hydraulic head.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 255
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: ENSURE 295195-1 SAFETY COVER IS IN-

STALLED WHENUSING SHAFT STRETCHING
FIXTURE. OPERATIONOF SHAFT STRETCHING
FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY COVERIN PLACE
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. B. (1) (1) _5 Install 295195-1 safety cover on hydraulic head. Connect

CAUTION: USE EXTREMECARE NOT TO DAMAGETHE MAIN

SHAFT WHILE USING 298420-1/-2/-3
FIXTURE. A NOMINAL PRESSUREOF 3570
PSIG SHOULDBE ENOUGHTO LOOSENMAIN
SHAFT NUT. IF A SEPARATION BETWEENTHE
MATING SURFACESOF NUT, SPACER, ROTOR
SEAL OR AFT CURVIC COUPLING IS OB-
SERVED, NO FURTHERSTRETCH IS REQUIRED.
DO NOT EXCEED4220 PSIG.
Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 3570 psig) to main

shaft, turn 297643-1/-2/-3 socket wrench counterclockwise
to loosen main shaft nut. Loosen nut and slowly decrease
hydraulic pressure as required until nut is loose and hy-
draulic pressure is zero. Removehydraulic head and compo-
nents of 298420-1/-2/-3 stretching f i x t u r e from engine.
Remove main shaft nut.
7 Remove285167-19 spacer and seal rotor from main shaft.

298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture. Proceed to step
(m).
NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly,
place index marks where removal of marks are
readily accessible during assembly.
(m) Using 284476-2-1 puller, remove curvic coupling from rotating

group. Mark an index line on main shaft with silver pencil
(Berol Verithin No. 753) in line with the line scribed on cur-
vic coupling in previous step ( i ) and shown in Figure 215.
Mark a line on main shaft in line with the scribed line on
third stage turbine wheel. Removewheel. Continue this
procedure with the second stage turbine wheel, f i r s t stage
turbine wheel, curvic coupling, and second stage impeller.
All components are removed from main shaft except f i r s t stage
impeller and labyrinth seal.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 256
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOWANY LAPPING COMPOUNDTO COME

IN CONTACTWITH BEARINGS OR ANY OIL WETTED
PARTS.
DO NOT GOUGELAPPED SURFACES.
1. B. (1) (n) Prior to assembling compressor housing, lap second stage im-
peller (10, figure 217) to shroud portion of compressor
housing (20) to improve f i t as follows.
1 Use lapping compound (Time Saver 80 g r i t ) or equivalent

mixed with engine oil to a l i g h t consistency, spread over
shroud surface to be lapped.
_2 Apply light force to impeller when lapping to shroud por-
tion of compressor housing to obtain a minimum circumferen-
tial contact width 3/8 inch towards tips (impeller vane
exit area). Removeany throat (radial) contact by polish-
ing and/or lapping.
R WARNING: CLEANING AGENTSARE TOXIC AND
R FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED
R AREA. AVOIDBREATHING FUMESOR CONTACT
R WITH SKIN TO PREVENTDAMAGETO PHYSICAL
R HEALTH. KEEPAWAYFROM FLAMETO AVOID
R FIRE HAZARD.
CAUTION: REMOVEALL LAPPING COMPOUNDFROMIM-
PELLER AND SHROUD.
DO NOT USE 1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE AS A
CLEANING AGENTON TITANIUM IMPELLERS.
3 Use 1,1,1-Trichloroethane to remove lapping compound from

all parts except impellers.
4 Use solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I) to
remove lapping compound from impellers.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 257
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
TOP
546 9~c
1(
1
13
42
41-- 15
AS VIEWED
FROM 16
TURBINE
0\38 END
18/O, ~ADAPTER
19/2/
F.-44G-138
Installation of Compressor Housing

UP136688
Assembly onto Maintenance Stand

Figure 216 72-30-04
Page 258
Dec 14/87
lied
I. B. (2) Install compressor housing assembly onto maintenance stand as
follows. (See figure 216).
CAUTION: ENSURE ALIGNMENT PINS ARE INSTALLEDON
284203-1-1 ADAPTER PRIOR TO INSTALLING
ADAPTERS ON ENGINE.
NOTE: The inside front face of the compressor
housing is d r i l l e d in three places at bolt
hole locations 27/28.
(a) Install two 284203-1-1 maintenance stand adapters to compres-
sor housing assembly on forward face of aft flange.
(b) Install assembled adapters and compressor housing assembly
into 284493-1-1 a i r c r a f t engine maintenance stand and secure.
(c) Rotate housing assembly in stand with aft end up for next
step.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 259
Aug 16/89
I ~ l MAINTENANCE~IANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CLAMP
INOEX
MARKER
11
l
LINES
II ,'~jI ~ s8CURVC
,COUPUNG
i:, p '~I~ IsVANE~SY
""71,
iiii
20 COMPRESSORHOUSING L.~
/
9@
IL \~i
E-~H-G-772
10. SECONDSTAGEIMPELLER 20. COMPRESSORHOUSING

(IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-03) 90. CURVICCOUPLING
15. VANEASSY (IPC FIG. I, 72-50-08)
Installing Second Stage Impeller and Curvic Coupling
onto Compressor Housing Assembly
UP136688
Figure 217 72-30-04

Page 260
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (3) Install vane assembly, second stage impeller, and curvic coupling
onto compressor housing assembly as follows. (See figure 217.)
NOTE: Brush mating surfaces of curvics with a camel
hair brush and rinse with solvent (Federal
(a) I n s t a l l vane assembly (15) i n t o compressor housing assembly

(20) and align holes.
(b) Place second stage compressor impeller (10) into compressor
housing (20).
NOTE: Refer to 72-00-00, ADJUSI~IENT/TEST, for seal
break-in procedures i f knife-edge seal or
related components (rub-strips) have been
repl aced.
(c) Install curvic coupling (90) ensuring silver pencil index
marks are in alignment.
(d) Using 284478-1-1 clamp, bolt curvic coupling and second stage
impeller together.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 261
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
35 20 5 15
E-44A-5050
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-30-03) 20. SEALASSY

10. BOLT 35. TRANSITIONLINER
15. BOLT
Installing Transition Liner
UP136688
and Seal Assembly

Figure 218 72-30-O4
Page 262
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (4) Assemble transition liner and seal assembly as follows. (See
figure 218.)
(a) Place transition liner assembly (35) on work bench.
CAUTION: SEAL ASSEMBLY (20) IS INSTALLED IN AFT

SIDE OF TRANSITION LINER. (POSTSB 72-
0387) DURINGSEAL INSTALLATION POSITION
THE SEALS BRAZEDJOINT AS NEARTO THE
12 O'CLOCK (11 O'CLOCKTO 1 O'CLOCK)
POSITION OF THE ENGINEVERTICAL REF-
ERENCE LINE AS POSSIBLE.
NOTE: Refer to 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TESTfor
seal break-in procedures i f knife-edge
seal or related components (rub-strips)
have been replaced.
1 (Pre SB 72-0297) (With Transition Liner Part No. 893970-1)

Secure seal assembly (20) into transition liner assembly
(35) with bolts (10) and nuts (5). Tighten nuts (5) to a
2 (Post SB 72-0297) (With Transition Liner Part No. 893970-3)

Secure seal assembly (20) into transition liner assembly
(35) with bolts (15). Tighten bolts (15) to a torque value
of 60 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 263
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
TRANSITION
LINER CURVlC
ANDSEAL COUPLING
ASSY \ ~ //.
\ /.
5 NUT
VANE ASSY COUSIFS~ORI~(~
TRANSITION LINER
AND SEALASSY
/
~)J ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
5
f E-A4G-677
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 2, 72-30-03)

Instal ling Transition Liner
and Seal Assembly
UP136688
Figure 219 72-30-04

Page 264
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (5) Install transition liner and seal assembly as follows. (See Figure
219.)
(a) Coat threaded studs of transition liner and seal assembly with
R anti-seize lubricant compound (Never-Seez, Nickel Special).
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0387) WHENPOSITIONING TRANSI-

TION LINER, ENSUREBRAZEDJOINT OF SEAL IS
POSITIONED AS NEARTO 12 O'CLOCK POSITION
OF ENGINE VERTICAL REFERENCELINE (TOP) AS
POSSIBLE.
(b) Place transition liner and seal assembly, with studs down,
over curvic coupling and into position in compressor housing.
Start two nuts (5) on studs of transition l i n e r and seal
assembly.
(c) Rotate p a r t i a l l y assembled engine in maintenance stand 90 de-

grees and install remaining nuts (5). Tighten nuts (5) to a
torque value of 40 inch-pounds. Rotate p a r t i a l l y assembled
engine 90 degrees back to original position.
(d) Remove284478-1-1 clamp securing curvic coupling and second

stage impeller in compressor housing assembly.
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 265
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
.. 1.80
/~" ~ / 6 5 (REF)
45 " ' - - 60
35 ~~"
E-44A-7140
25. RETAININGRING 45. SPRINGWASHER

30. RINGRETAINER 60. DIFFUSERASSY
35. DISC SEAL 65. DIFFUSERASSY
40. SPACER 70. BOLT
42. RINGRETAINER 75. WASHER
80. LOCKPLATE
Assembling Diffuser Assembly, Spacers,
Washers, Seals and Rings
UP136688
Figure 220 72-30-04

Page 266
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. B, (6) Assemble d i f f u s e r assembly, spacers, washers, seals and rings as
follows. (See f i g u r e 220.)
NOTE: Two thicknesses of lockplate under one b o l t is

permi ssible.
(a) I f previously removed i n s t a l l washers (75) or lock plates (80)
and bolts (70) on compressor d i f f u s e r (60 or 65). Tighten
(b) (Pre SB 72-0444) Place d i f f u s e r assembly (60 or 65) on bench
with vanes up and i n s t a l l spring washer/washers (45) and one
disc seal (35) into port of d i f f u s e r assembly.
(c) (Post SB 72-0444) Place d i f f u s e r assembly (60 or 65) on bench

with vanes up and i n s t a l l two spring washers (45), ring
retainer (42) and one disc seal (35) into part of d i f f u s e r
assembly.
(d) Place one spacer (40) on top of disc seal (35). Alternate
disc seals (35) and spacers (40) u n t i l five disc seals (35)
and four spacers (40) have been i n s t a l l e d in d i f f u s e r
assembly.
(e) Secure disc seals, spacers, and washers with ring retainer
(30) and retaining ring (25).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 267
Dec 14/87
i ~ I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLY
ASSEMBLED
ENGINE
,/
(PRESB72-0199)
DIFFUSERASSEMBLY, SEALS,
-....
SPACERSAND WASHERS
21),
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
ROTATING GROUP
(POST SB72-0199)
DIFFUSERASSEMBLY, SEALS,
SPACERSAND WASHERS
E-44A-5223
20. GASKET
Installing Diffuser Assembly with Seals,
Spacers and Washers, Gasket and
UP136688
Partially Assembled Rotating Group

Figure 221 72-30-04
Page 268
Dec 14/87
lslied
CAUTION: IF NO ROTATINGCOMPONENTSHAVE BEEN REPLACED, ENSURE

EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAMERELATIVE POSITION
TO MAIN SHAFT.
COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTHMARKEDWITH A "V" OR "I"
SHOULD BE POSITIONEDAPPROXIMATELY 180 DEGRESS FROM
"V" OR "I" ON MATING CURVICS. THE REMAINING COMPO-
NENTS PREVIOUSLYMARKEDSHOULD REMAINALIGNED WITH
EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARKON MAIN
SHAFT. IF CENTERCURVIC COUPLING (BETWEEN SECOND
STAGE IMPELLER AND FIRST STAGETURBINE WHEEL) IS
REPLACED, THE CURVIC COUPLING TEETHHAVE APPROXI-
MATLY THREEDIFFERENT POSITIONS WHERECURVICTEETH
WILL MESHWITH SECONDSTAGE IMPELLERAND INTERNAL
SPLINES OF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING AND MAIN SHAFT.
POSITION CENTERCURVIC COUPLING TOOTHMARKEDWITH
"V" OR "I" AS NEARTO 180 DEGREEFROM"V" OR "I" ON
SECOND STAGE IMPELLER CURVIC AS POSSIBLE.
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with "V" or "I" indicates the high
components, "V" or "I" tooth should be positioned ap-
proximately 180 from "V" or "I" tooth on mating curvic.
The index line marked during disassembly on components

position of "V" or "I" teeth on curvics.
1. B. (7) Install diffuser assembly with seals, spacers, and washers, gasket
and partially assembled rotating group as follows. (See figure
221.)
CAUTION: ENSURE GASKET (20) WITH NO HOLES IS IN-

STALLED ON REARSIDE OF FIRST STAGE
IMPELLER.
NOTE: Spray mating surfaces of f i r s t stage impeller

shroud and diffuser assembly with lubricant
(Fluorogl ide).
Check acceptance of f i r s t stage impeller shroud

hole pattern to pattern of compressor diffuser.
(a) With partially assembled rotating group installed on
284480-1-1/-2-1 holder, place assembled diffuser assembly with
seals, spacers, and washers down over main shaft until contact
is made with f i r s t stage impeller.
(b) Install gasket (20) around outside diameter of f i r s t stage im-
pel ler curvics.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 269
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORT N0, 72-01-27)
DUMMYSHAFT
TRANSITION
ASSY
HOUSING
SECOND
STAGE
IMPELLER DIFFL
ASSY
IMPELLER
LABYRINTHSEAL/
N SHAFT
F-44G-371
Assemble Main Shaft to Second Stage Impeller

UP136688
Figure 222 72-30-04

Page 270
Dec 14/87
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Hold curvic coupling securely against second
stage impeller during main shaft installation
to maintain curvic relationship.
i
. B. (7) (c) Install assembled components (rotating group and diffuser as-
sembly) on partially assembled engine by inserting main shaft
up through second stage impeller (see figure 222) and secure
with 285185-1-1 dummyshaft to ensure shaft is bottomed. (See
figure 222.)
(d) Rotate partially assembled engine in stand 180 degrees for
next assembly procedure.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 271
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
~CJ~I'q(~YDRIVE PARTIALLY
ASSEMBLED
ENGINE" ~ ' ~ k ~
o NUT 15, WASHER

10. BOLT 40. GASKET
Temporary Installation of Accessory Drive

Housing to Obtain Assembly Measurements (Typical)
UP136688
Figure 223 72-30-04

Page 272
Dec 14/87
/lied
1. B. (8) Temporarily i n s t a l l accessory drive housing to obtain assembly

measurements as follows. (See figure 223.)
(a) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-111 Silicone Compound) to
on compressor housing flange of partially assembled engine.
(b) Install 287891-1 pilot on forward end of mainshaft, to prevent
damage to labyrinth seal when installing accessory drive
housing.
CAUTION: ~IHEN INSTALLING ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
ASSEMBLY, ENSURERELIEF HOLES IN ACCESSORY
DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY ARE ALIGNED WITH
MOUNTING STUDS OF FIRST STAGE IMPELLER
SHROUD.
(c) Position accessory drive housing assembly onto partially as-
sembled engine aligning bolt holes of housing, gasket, and
engine.
(d) Remove 287891-1 pilot and install 285160-2-1 dummy bearing
carrier and secure to accessory drive housing with three speed
nuts. Do not tighten nuts, allow dummycarrier free movement
to prevent interference of rotating group.
NOTE: Speed nuts may be used to secure accessory
drive housing at this time as accessory drive
housing will be removed and reinstalled in
later assembly sequence.
(e) Secure accessory drive housing with nine evenly spaced bolts
(10), washers (15), and nuts (5). Tighten nuts (5) or speed
nuts to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(f) Rotate p a r t i a l l y assembled engine 180 degrees (turbine end
up), and remove 285158-1-1 dummy shaft.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 273
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
ASSEMBLED SEAL, STATOR

/" AND NUT
65
ASSEMBLED STATOR SHROUDS

AND RING
E-44A-5046
10. NUT (IPC FIG. 1, 72-50-08) 65. FIRSTSTAGETURBINEWHEELASSY

Assembling First Stage Stator Assembly, First
UP136688
Stage Turbine Wheel and Second Stage Stator Assemblies

Figure 224 72-30-04
Page 274
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (9) Assemble f i r s t stage stator and liner, f i r s t stage turbine wheel

and second stage stator assemblies as follows. (See figure 224.)
CAUTION: ENSURE TURBINE WHEEL IS INSTALLED WITH

TRAILING EDGE (THIN EDGE) OF BLADESTOWARD
ASSEMBLED SEAL, STATORAND NUT.
(a) Place assembled stator, shrouds, and ring on bench and set
f i r s t stage turbine wheel assembly (65) into assembly with
thin part of blade up. Silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753)
index mark on turbine wheel shall be visible.
(b) Place assembled seal, stator, and nut over f i r s t stage turbine
wheel (65) and onto assembled stator, shrouds and ring. Press
down the correct position using hand pressure.
(c) Secure assemblies together using bolts (previously installed

and secured with 287423-1-1 bolt retaining ring) and nuts
(10). Tighten nuts (10) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
Remove 287423-1-1 bolt retaining ring.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 275
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
\
85 5
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED "J00
ENGINE
(,
FIRSTAND SECOND
\6 STAGE STATORSAND
FIRST STAGETURBINE
WHEEL ASSEMBLY
E-44A-5221
5. GASKET(8 HOLES) I00. GASKET (NO HOLES)

(IPC FIG. I , 72-50-08) (IPC FIG. 2, 72-50-08)
85. GASKET(NO HOLES)
(IPC FIG. I , 72-50-08)
Instal ling Assembled First and Second
Stage Stators and First Stage
Turbine Wheel Assembly and
UP136688
Curvic Coupling Gaskets

Figure 225 72-30-04
Page 276
Dec 14/87
~ l s l i e d
1. B. (10) Install assembled f i r s t and second stage stators and f i r s t stage

turbine wheel assembly and curvic coupling gaskets as follows.
(See figure 225.)
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLINGGASKET (85, 100)
WITHOUT HOLES IS INSTALLED ONTOCURVIC
COUPLING.
(a) Install curvic coupling gasket (85 or 100) onto curvic

coupling installed on p a r t i a l l y assembled engine.
CAUTION: ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTER

MARKER) INDEX MARKINGS ARE REMOVEDDURING
ASSEMBLY.
R (b) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with

R standard reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard
R Practices.)
(c) Place f i r s t and second stage stators and f i r s t stage turbine
wheel assembly over main shaft of p a r t i a l l y assembled engine.
Ensure silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753) index line on
f i r s t stage turbine wheel aligns with curvic coupling index
line.
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (5) WITH
EIGHT HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056
INCH) IS INSTALLED INTO FIRST STAGE TUR-
BINE WHEELASSEMBLYAND HOLES IN GASKET
FACE TOWARDREAROF ENGINE.
(d) Install curvic coupling gasket (5), with eight holes (hole
dia. 0.051 to 0.056 inch) facing toward the rear of engine,
into f i r s t stage turbine wheel assembly.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 277
Aug 16/89
I~I MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
AND SEAL ASSY '~::~/'/~----~
E-~?~5220
50. CURVICCOUPLINGGASKET
5.
10.
CURVICCOUPLING
(IPC FIG. 1, 72-50-07)
CURVICCOUPLING GASKET (4 HOLES)
(PRESB 72-0300, 4 HOLES)
(POST SB 72-0300, 6 HOLES)
15. THIRD STAGE TURBINE 55. SECONDSTAGETURBINE
WHEEL ASSY WHEEL ASSY
Installing Second and Third Stage Turbine
Wheel Assemblies, Third Stage Stator
and Seal Assembly, Curvic Coupling
UP136688
Gaskets and Curvic Coupling

Figure 226 72-30-04
Page 278
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (11) Install second and third stage turbine wheel assemblies, third
stage stator and seal assembly, curvic coupling gaskets, and cur-
vic coupling as follows. (See figure 226.)
CAUTION: ENSURE PROTECTIVE COVERINGS ARE REMOVED

FROMTURBINE WHEEL KNIFE SEALS PRIORTO
INSTALLATION OF TURBINE WHEELASSEMBLY.
R ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTER

R MARKER) INDEXMARKINGS ARE REMOVEDDURING
R ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: Refer to 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST, for seal

replaced.
(a) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with
standard reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. )
(b) Install second stage turbine wheel assembly (55) onto parti-
ally assembled engine. Ensure silver pencil (Berol Verithin
No. 753) index line is aligned with f i r s t stage turbine wheel
assembly index line.
CAUTION: (PRE SB 72-0300) ENSURECURVIC COUPLING

GASKET (50), WITH FOURHOLES (HOLEDI-
AMETER 0.051 to 0.056 INCH) IS INSTALLED
INTO SECONDSTAGE TURBINE WHEELASSEMBLY
AND HOLES IN GASKETFACETOWARDREAR OF
ENGINE.
(POST SB 72-0300) ENSURECURVIC COUPLING
GASKET (50) WITH SIX HOLES (HOLEDIAMETER
0.101 TO 0.106 INCH), IS INSTALLED INTO
SECOND STAGE TURBINE WHEELASSEMBLYAND
HOLES IN GASKET FACETOWARDREAROF
ENGINE.
(c) Install curvic coupling gasket (50), with holes to rear, into
second stage turbine wheel assembly (55).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 279
Aug 16/89
! ~ I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
DIM. B
MEASURE
HERE REAROFENGINE NOTE:WITHNUTTIGHT
i ~ SHAFTSHOULDPROTRUDE
,L SLIGHTLYBEYONDBACK
SHAFT J OFNUT IF CURVICSARE
I i i PROPERLY ENGAGED.
• ~,15 NUT
ROTOR.9@
[ /~'~/, 85 BEARING(INNERRACE)
....~ 95 CURVIC {~['- .GAGE ~,,%'i05 GASKETTHIRDSTAGE

....-105
I00 BOLT WHEELASSY
I ~..----100
E-44G-783
15. NUT (IPC FIG. 3, 72-50-06) 95. SEAL

85. BEARING(INNER RACE) 100. BOLT
90. SEALROTOR 105. GASKET
Installing Main Shaft Mounted Bearing
UP136688
Support Assembly Components

Figure 227 72-30-04
Page 280
Dec 14/87
~:~/lied
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0380) AFTERENGINE IS COM-

PLETELY ASSEMBLED, ALL BRAZEDJOINTS OF
HONEYCOMB SEAL ASSEMBLIES (INSTALLED ON
TRANSITION LINER, SECONDAND THIRD STAGE
STATORS) SHOULDBE AS NEARTO 12 O'CLOCK
(11 O'CLOCK TO I O'CLOCK) POSITION OF THE
ENGINE VERTICAL REFERENCELINE AS
POSSIBLE.
(POST SB 72-0380) NOTETHE POSITION OF

BRAZED JOINT OF HONEYCOMBSEAL ASSEMBLY
AND MARKTOP OF STATORUSING SILVER PEN-
CIL (BEROL VERITHIN NO. 753).
1. B. (11)(d) Assemble third stage stator and seal assembly to second stage
stator assembly. I t may be necessary to temporarily remove
the three "C" clamps to allow flanges of the two stator as-
semblies to mate flush inside locking nut.
CAUTION: ENSURE PROTECTIVE COVERINGSARE REMOVED
FROMTURBINE WHEEL KNIFE SEALS PRIOR TO
INSTALLATION OF TURBINE WHEEL.
ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTER

MARKER) INDEXMARKINGS ARE REMOVEDDURING
ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test, for seal

replaced.
(e) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with
standard reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.)
(f) Install third stage turbine wheel assBnbly (15) to second
stage turbine wheel assembly (55) ensuring silver pencil
(Berol Verithin No. 753) index marks on two wheel assemblies
are aligned.
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLINGGASKET (10) WITH
FOUR HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056
INCH) IS INSTALLED INTO THIRD STAGETUR-
BINE WHEELASSEMBLY AND HOLES IN GASKET
FACE TOWARDREAR OF ENGINE.
(g) Install curvic coupling gasket (10), with four holes (hole
dia. 0.051 to 0.056 inch) to rear, into third stage turbine
wheel assembly (15). Heat curvic coupling (5) at 149°C
(300°F) for 5 minutes and assemble on shaft against third
stage turbine wheel assembly (15) with silver pencil (Berol
Verithin No. 753) lines aligned.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 281
Aug 16/89
lied

1. B. (12) Install shaft mounted bearing support assembly components as
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR)
R SHALL BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAR
R EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBERGLOVESOR NYLON
R MESH GLOVESWITH POLYETHYLENE PALMSAND
R FINGERS. IN CASE NONEOF THE ABOVEARE
R AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVESSHALL BE
R WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL (SEAL AND ROTOR) SHALL
R BE INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(a) Place seal (95) with bolts (100) and gaskets (105) installed,
on top curvic coupling in partially assembled engine.
R (b) Ensure seal and seal rotor are dry; do not lubricate prior to
R installation. Place seal rotor (90) over main shaft, f l a t
side down, and push into place against seal (95).
(c) Place bearing inner race with rollers (85) onto main shaft and
push down into position against seal rotor (90). Rollers can
be held in place on inner race with use of grease (Acryloid
HF-825) and a plastic strap.
Table 205. Special Tools and Reference to Perform

Main Shaft Stretch by Application
284196-2-1Spline and
Socket Wrench (Multi- Step (b)
plier) with 284196-21/
294760-1Splined Adapter
284572-3-1/-4-1 Shaft
Stretching Fixture
with 284572-25/ Step (c)
296131-1 Stretching
Shaft
298420-1/-2/-3 Shaft Step (d)

Stretching Fixture
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 282
Aug 12/91
Allied~ignalAerospaceCompany
lied
WARNING: TO AVOID INJURY WHENUSING HYDRAULIC SHAFT

STRETCHING FIXTURE (20 TON OR 30 TON RAM), EN-
SURE PRESSURE VALUES USEDARE CORRECTFOR FIX-
TURE BEING USED.
CAUTION: WHENPERFORMINGMAIN SHAFTSTRETCH, ENGINE

SHALL BE IN A VERTICAL POSITION (INLET DOWN).
NOTE: There are three special tools to stretch the main

shaft to install main shaft nut. For c l a r i t y , a
complete procedure for stretching main shaft, us-
ing each tool, is provided by application as
I i sted below.
. I f 284196-2-1 spline and socket wrench
(multiplier) with 284196-21 or 294760-1
splined adapter is being used to stretch main
shaft, proceed to step (13)(b).
. I f 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture
with 284572-25 or 296131-1 stretching shaft
is being used to stretch main shaft, proceed
to step (13)(c).
. (Main Shaft Part No. 894079-2 (internal
threads)) I f 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching
fixture is being used to stretch main shaft,
proceed to step (13)(d).
i. B. (13) Perform main shaft stretch.

(a) Install 285153-1-1/-2-1 elongation gage on threads of com-
pressor end of main shaft. Using depth micrometer, measure
from turbine end of main shaft to end of elongation gage.
Record as Dimension B (unstretched). (See Figure 227.)
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 283
Aug 12/91
~ l s l i e d

R NOTE: I f main shaft is stretched using 284196-2-1
R multiplier, perform the following checks in
R accordance with 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
R NTS system ground check
R NTS system check by f l i g h t check
splined adapter (component of 284196-2-1
multiplier) shall be used on 894079-1 main
shaft (with internal splines only).
splined adapter shall be used on 894079-2
Main Shaft (with internal threads and
splines).

required.
1. B. (13) (b) Stretch main shaft to install main shaft nut using 284196-2-1
multiplier with 284196-21 or 294760-1 splined adapter.
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT TUR-
R BINE NUT OTHERTHANAPPROVEDENGINE
1 Coat face and threads of nut (15, Figure 227) with an ap-
proved engine oil then install nut on main shaft hand
tight to seat curvic couplings.
2 Install splined adapter into 284196-2-I m u l t i p l i e r .
multiplier is properly seated on main
shaft nut, prior to stretching main
shaft.
3 Install 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r with splined adapter over

main shaft nut.
4 Install breaker bar on 284196-2-I m u l t i p l i e r to hold

rotating group in restrained position.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 284
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Use Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

in step (a), in obtaining shaft stretch.
R The required shaft stretch (the d i f -
R ference between Dimension B unstretched
R and Dimension B stretched) is equal to
R 0.036 to 0.039 inch.
1. B. (13) (b) Holding breaker bar stationary. Movehandle of 284196-2-1

multiplier in a clockwise direction to tighten main shaft
nut. While tightening main shaft nut, frequently check
main shaft stretch to obtain the required Dimension B
(unstretched) plus 0.036 to 0.039 inch.
6 I f Dimension B (stretched) is more than 0.039 inch greater

than Dimension B (unstretched), recorded in step (a),
loosen main shaft nut u n t i l required Dimension B is
obtained.
Z Remove 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r with splined adapter.

8 Remove285153-1-1/-2-1 elongation gage.

284196-2-1 multiplier . Proceed to step (15).
with 284572-25 stretching shaft (component
of 284572-3-1/-4-1 f i x t u r e ) shall be used on
894079-1 main shaft (with internal splines
only).
The 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching f i x t u r e
on 894079-2 main shaft (with internal
threads 0.50 inch from turbine end of main
shaft).
visual check of turbine end of main shaft i s
requi red.
(c) Stretch main shaft to i n s t a l l main shaft nut using

284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching f i x t u r e with 284572-25 or
296131-1 stretching shaft. (See figure 211 or 212.)
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 285
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFTTUR-

R BINE NUT OTHERTHAN APPROVED ENGINE
R MAY RESULT IN A CORROSIVE ATTACKTO
R THE MAIN SHAFTTURBINE NUT.
I. B. (13) (c) 1 Coat face and threads of nut (15, figure 227) with an ap-
proved engine o i l . Then install nut on main shaft hand
tight to seat curvic couplings.
2 (Main shaft with internal splines only) Insert 284572-25

main shaft.
CAUTION: (MAIN SHAFTWITH INTERNAL THREADS)
ENSURE 296131-1 STRETCHINGSHAFT IS
TION OR REMOVALOF MAIN SHAFTNUT.
3 (Main shaft with internal threads) Install and tighten

until f u l l y installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from
start of thread engagement). Loosen stretching shaft 1/4
turn.

aft curvic coupling. Install MS28775-237 packing
5 Install 284572-19 adapter socket on main shaft nut. In-
stall ram assembly over stretching shaft and two piece
adapter.
6 Install and tighten 284572-27 nut on stretching shaft

against aft end of ram assembly. While holding stretching
shaft, loosen nut to 1/4 inch gap between nut and ram
assembly.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 286
Aug 12/91
/lied
WARNING: ENSURE 295608-1 SAFETY COVER IS INSTALLED
WHEN USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
OPERATION OF FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY COVER
IN PLACE COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY,
1. B. (13) (c) 7 Install 295608-1 safety cover on ram assembly. Connect

hydraulic pump hose to ram assembly.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWINGSTEP,

APPLY A NOMINAL 5500 PSIG. DO NOT EX-
CEED 5720 PSIG.
8 Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5500 psig) to main

shaft. Turn adapter socket clockwise to tighten main
shaft nut. Do not exceed 5720 psig. Release pressure and
remove 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture and
stretching shaft.
The required shaft stretch (the d i f -
ference between Dimension B unstretched
and Dimension B stretched) is equal to
0.036 to 0.039 inch.
9 Using a depth micrometer, measure and record shaft

stretch. I f Dimension B (stretched) is 0.036 to 0.039
step (a), shaft stretch is within limits.
10 I f Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B
(unstretched), previously recorded in step (a), but less
than 0.036 inch, repeat steps ! through 8 and add 100
psig above the previous pressure used until required
Dimension B is obtained.
11 I f Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B
(unstretched), previously recorded in step (a), by more
than 0.039 inch, repeat steps 1 through 8 and loosen main
shaft nut until required Dimension B is obtained.
1_22 Remove285153-1-1/-2-1 elongation gage.

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 287
Aug 16/89
~_/lied
1. B. (13) (c) 13 This concludes the main shaft stretch procedure using
284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixtured. Engines with
(Main Shaft Part No. 894079-1 (internal splines only)),
proceed to step (14) Engines with (Main Shaft Part No.
894079-2 (internal threads), proceed to step (15).
NOTE: The 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture
can only be used on 894079-2 main shaft
(with internal threads 0.50 inch from tur-
bine end of main shaft).
required.
(d) Stretch main shaft to i n s t a l l main shaft nut using
298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixutre. (See Figure 213.)
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT TUR-

R BINE NUT OTHERTHAN APPROVEDENGINE
I Coat face and threads of nut (15, Figure 227) with an ap-
proved engine o i l . Install nut on main shaft hand tight
to seat curvic coupling.
CAUTION: ENSURE 297644-1/-2 STRETCHING SHAFT IS
LOOSEN STRETCHING SHAFT OUT 1/4 TURN
TO PREVENTSHAFT BINDING DURING IN-
STALLATION OR REMOVALOF MAIN SHAFT
NUT.

bine end of main shaft until f u l l y installed
(approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of thread
engagement). Loosen stretching shaft out 1/4 turn.

aft curvic coupling. Install $8990-240 packing
4 Install 297643-1/-2 socket wrench on main shaft nut.

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 288
Aug 12/91
295194-6 nut are p i l o t f i t t e d to cylinder
bore to ensure alignment of the hydraulic
head to the engine main shaft. Do not
reverse nut.
1. B. (13) (d) --5 Install 298420-1/-2/-3 hydraulic head over 297644-1/-2

until i t bottoms against hydraulic head. While holding
297644-1/-2 stretching shaft, loosen nut to a 1/4 inch gap
between nut and hydraulic head.
WARNING: ENSURE 295195-I SAFETY COVERIS IN-
STALLED WHENUSING SHAFT STRETCHING
FIXTURE. OPERATIONOF SHAFT
STRETCHING FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY
COVER IN PLACE COULDRESULT IN SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY.
6 Install 295195-1 safety cover on hydrualic head. Connect
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWINGSTEP,

APPLY A NOMINAL 3570 PSIG. DO NOT EX-
CEED 3710 PSIG.
7-- Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 3570 psig) to main

shaft. Turn 297643-1/-2 socket wrench clockwise to
tighten main shaft nut. Do not exceed 3710 psig. Release
applied pressure and remove hydraulic head and components
of 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture from engine.

R The required shaft stretch (the d i f -
R ference between Dimension B unstretched
R and Dimension B stretched) is equal to
R 0.036 to 0.039 inch.
Using a depth micrometer, measure and record shaft
stretch. I f Dimension B (stretched) is 0.036 to 0.039
step (a), shaft stretch is within limits.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 289
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (13) (d) 9 I f Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B

(unstretched) previously recorded in step (a) but less
than 0.036 inch, repeat steps ~ t h r o u g h 7 a n d add 50 psig
increments above the previous pressure used u n t i l required
Dimension B is obtained.
I0 I f Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B

(unstretched), previously recorded in step (a), by more
than 0.039 inch, repeat steps 2 through 7 and loosen main
shaft nut until required Dimension B is obtained.
11 Remove 285153-1-1/-2-1 elongation gage.

298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching f i x t u r e . Proceed to step
(15).
(14) ~lain Shaft, Part No. 894079-1 (internal splines only). Check t o r -
sion shaft for f i t with main shaft as follows.
(a) I n s t a l l torsion shaft into main shaft from impeller end; do

not use force to i n s t a l l .
(b) I f torsion shaft w i l l not f i t properly into main shaft,
remove torsion shaft.
(c) I n s t a l l and secure 285772-1-1 shaft support to face of acces-
sory drive housing with four bolts. Tighten handle of shaft
support u n t i l shaft support contacts compressor main shaft.
NOTE: There are two broaching f i x t u r e s , 831023-1

(preferred) and 293498-1, used to broach in-
ternal splines in main shaft for properly
f i t t i n g torsion shaft. Step (d) pertains to
the use of 831023-1 broaching f i x t u r e and
step (e) pertains to the use of 293498-1
broaching f i x t u r e .
(d) Insert 831023-1 broaching f i x t u r e threads f i r s t through com-

pressor end of main shaft.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 290
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (14) (d)1 Install two piece adapter 284572-23, between seal and aft
curvic coupling. Install packing (Part No. MS28775-237,
furnished) around two piece adapter to hold in place.
2 Install ram assembly over 831023-1 broaching fixture and

two piece adapter.
3 Install and tighten nut 284572-27 on 831023-1 broaching
fixture against aft end of ram assembly.
Connect hydraulic pump hose to ram assembly.
Apply enough pressure to pull broaching fixture through

main shaft.
6 Remove 831023-1 broaching fixture, 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft

stretching fixture and 285772-1-1 shaft support.
7 Reinstall torsion shaft into main shaft to check for cor-

rect f i t .
8 I f f i t is correct, remove torsion shaft.
9 If f i t is not correct, repeat procedure.
(e) Install 293498-1 shaft spline broaching fixture on turbine

end.
1 Broach internal spline of main shaft.
2 Remove 293498-1 shaft spline broaching fixture and

285772-1-1 shaft support.
3 Reinstall torsion shaft into main shaft to check for cor-

rect f i t .
4 I f f i t is correct, remove torsion shaft.

If f i t is not correct, repeat procedure.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 291
Aug 16/89
MAINTenANCE,AOAL
TPE331-5REPORT NO. 72-01-271
REAROF ENGINE
DIM. X
GAGE
, ~ , BOL~
I
I /TOOL
PLENUM ASSY
CLAMP
J
L_
NUT
E ~..,~--- BOLT
i "~"~COMPRESSOR HOUSING ASSY
F-44A-4351
Preparation for Impeller to Shroud

Clearance Shim Measurement
UP136688
Figure 228 72-30-04

Page 292
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (15) Perform impeller and shroud shimming measurement as follows. (See

figures 228 and 229.)
(a) Place 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage on bench with "T" handle
up.
(b) Place plenum assembly over gage. Reach down through exhaust
pipe opening in plenum assembly and l i f t gage and bolt gage
to plenum assembly with bolts in every other hole. Tighten
WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE ENGINE IS HELD IN THE IN-

LET DOWNPOSITION FOR THE FOLLOWING STEP
OR DAMAGETO THE ENGINE AND/OR PERSONNEL
INJURY MAY RESULT.
NOTE: Speed nuts may be used in place of nuts for

this operation.
(c) With engine in the inlet down position, remove bolts securing
284203-1-1 maintenance stand adapters to compressor housing
assembly. Install plenum on engine. Secure engine to main-
tenance stand using adapter bolts. Install bolts and nuts,
in every third hole of plenum, between maintenance stand
adapters. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50 to 60 inch-
pounds. (See figure 228.)
(d) Tighten "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to a

torque value of 15 ±O inch-pounds after contact is made with
main shaft so rotating assembly cannot s h i f t position.
Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees.
(e) Loosen nuts on 285160-2-1 dummy bearing carrier so rotating

assembly is free to move. Rotate assembly in stand until
turbine end is up and weight of rotating assembly zeros
second stage impeller wheel assembly on the shroud.
(f) Tighten "T" handle in 284988-I-1 shim clearance gageto a
torque value of 15 -+0 inch-pounds to ensure second stage zero
and centers main shaft. Using a depth micrometer, measure
from face of gage to third stage turbine wheel assembly as
shown in Figure 228. Record as Dimension X as shown on sam-
ple worksheet in Table 209.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 293
Aug 16/89
~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
J -F
PARALLEL BAR
MEASURE HERE
*C
2NO STAGE
CLEARANCI
LINER
F-44G-275
R "284498-1-1/-2-1 Clearance Gage
Measurement of Main Shaft Position with

Second Stage Impeller at Zero Clearance
UP136688
Figure 229 72-30-04

Page 294
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (15) (g) Rotate assembly in stand until accessory drive housing assem-
bly is in up position.
NOTE: Table 206 or 207 provides a l i s t of compressor clear-

ances, sample measurements and calcuations required
when shimming the f i r s t stage impeller shroud. The
following information provides a definition of terms
and an explanation of procedure:
Definition of terms:
Second stage zero measurement: Represents the posi-
tion of the rotating group relative to the front face
or surface of the accessory drive housing when second
stage impeller is l i g h t l y loaded against second stage
shroud portion of compressor housing prior to instal-
lation of the f i r s t stage shroud. (See figure 229.)
Second stage running clearance: Represents the

required clearance between the second stage impeller
and second stage shroud portion of compressor housing
after the rotating group has been secured by installa-
tion of the compressor bearing.
Desired top normal running clearance measurement: Re-

presents desired position of the rotating group rela-
tive to forward face ~)r surface of accessory drive
housing after rotating group has been secured by in-
stallation of compressor bearing.
First stage running clearance: Represents the
required clearance between f i r s t stage impeller and
f i r s t stage impeller shroud after the rotating group
has been secured by installation of the compressor
bearing.
Desired f i r s t stage zero measurement: Represents the

desired position of the rotating group relative to the
front face or surface of the accessory drive housing
when the f i r s t stage impeller is l i g h t l y loaded
against f i r s t stage impeller shroud after accomplish-
ment of f i r s t stage shroud shimming.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 295
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Explanation of procedure:
C T)
A calculated f i r s t stage zero measurement must be ob-
tained in accordance with Table 206 or 207 before
proper shimming of f i r s t stage impeller shroud can be
accomplished. The calculated f i r s t stage zero is ob-
tained by f i r s t obtaining second stage zero
measurement. Add nominal second stage running clear-
ance to second stage zero measurement. This esta-
blishes desired top normal running clearance
measurement. Subtract nominal f i r s t stage running
clearance from top normal running clearance
measurement. The remainder is the desired f i r s t stage
zero measurement needed to continue shimming f i r s t
stage shroud.
(Post SB 72-0223, Power Group Part No. 3101880-10)
First stage zero measurement cannot be checked after
shimming procedure is completed. This is caused by
second stage running clearance (0.027 inch nominal)
being less than f i r s t stage running clearance (0.037
inch nominal). Second stage zero would occur prior to
f i r s t stage impeller contacting i t shroud. Table 207
provides calculation procedures to determine amount of
shims to remove.
R (Post SB 72-0223, Power Group 3101880-10) I f second
R stage impeller running clearance is being checked af-
R ter engine operation, clearance will be 0.005 inch
R greater (typical) than when engine was i n i t i a l l y
R assembled. This is due to engine thermal expansion.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 296
Aug 16/89
lied
Table 206. (Pre SB 72-0223) (Power Groups Part No. 3101880-5/-7)

Clearance Limits, Sample Measurements and Calculations
Sample Measurements
Second stage zero

measurement 4.940 in.
Second stage running

clearance 0.039 to 0.041 in. +0.040 in. (nominal)
Desired top normal
running clearance
First stage running
clearance 0.036 to 0.038 in. -0.037 in. (nominal)
Desired f i r s t stage
zero measurement 4.943 in.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 296A/296B
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 207. (Post SB 72-0223) (Power Group Part No. 3101880-10)

Clearance Limits Sample Measurements and Calculations
Sample Measurements
Second stage zero

Second stage running
clearance 0.026 to 0.028 in. +0.027 in. (nominal)
Desired top normal

running clearance
First stage running 0.036 to 0.038 in. -0.037 in. (nominal)
zero measurement 4.930 i n.
First stage zero

measurement with
t r i a l shims 4.994 in.
zero (calculated) -4.930 in.
Thickness of shims
to be removed 0.064 in.
1. B. (15) (h) Place a parallel bar on face of housing assembly, install

parallel bar to center of gage. (See figure 229.) Subse-
quent measurements shall always be taken from same side of
parallel bar. Record measurement as second stage zero.
(i) Using second stage zero measurement obtained in step (h),

calculate top normal running and f i r s t stage zero in accor-
dance with sample shown in Table 206 or 207. Remove parallel
bar and gage.
(J) Loosen "T" handle in 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to remove

pressure from rotating assembly. Removeaccessory drive
housing assembly.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 297
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~lslied
ignal
R 1. B. (16) (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199) (Power Group Part No.
3101880-5) Install accessory drive housing and f i r s t stage im-
peller shroud as follows. (See Figure 230.)
NOTE: Installation of packings (45, 50) may be
delayed until final shim adjustment in step
(j).
(I00).
(b) Spray face and side of f i r s t stage impeller shroud, where
contact is made with diffuser assembly, with lubricant
(Fluoroglide CP). Wipe off excess lubricant with clean
c l o t h . Install f i r s t stage impeller shroud (100) down over
f i r s t stage impeller using guide pins.
(c) Install approximately 0.090 inch thickness of shims (55) onto
shroud (100).
(d) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-111 Silicone Compound) to
(e) Ensure handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage is loosened
to relieve pressure on rotating assembly. Prior to i n s t a l l -
ing accessory drive housing assembly, coat mating surfaces in
contact with gasket with grease (DC-111 Silicone Compound).
(f) Install 287891-1 pilot on forward end of main shaft. Secure
accessory drive housing assembly to compressor housing assem-
bly with eight evenly spaced bolts (10), washers (15), and
nuts (5). Do not tighten nuts (5) at this time.
(g) (Engines with Diffusers Part No. 895948-1/-4) Install spac-
ers (30), washers (25) and nuts (20). Tighten nuts (20), in
10 inch-pound increments, alternating from one side to other,
to ensure shroud is pulled into position evenly. Tighten
nuts (20) to a torque value of 30 inch-pounds.
NOTE: Lockplates (40) shall overlap at 6 o'clock
position (ends of two lockplates at one bolt
position).
(h) (Engines with Diffusers Part No. 3101293-1/-2) Install two
bolts (35), lockplates (40) and spacers (45) to hold shroud
(100) in position and remove guide pins. Install remaining
bolts (35), lockplates (40), and spacers (45). Tighten bolts
(35) alternating from side-to-side, to a torque value of 40
inch-pounds, to ensure pulling shroud into position evenly.
Do not bend tabs of lockplates (40) at this time.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.1
Dec 14/87
AUied~ignalAerospaceCompany
lied
• 4~.~,<:.,
~ri, I
',~II I
-;---, ~-,
1
., ',~.~-:~< , 5
95
\
R
~/~'55
!
~"50
~J
25 30,~.
20 -.,
E-44 G - i 278
45
R (Codes AA-AC, CA-DA, Pre SB 72-0199)

(Power Group PN 3101880-5)
Installing Accessory Drive
UP136688
Housing and First Stage Impeller Shroud

Figure 230 72-30-04
Page 298.2
Aug 12/91
~ S lied
. B. (16) (i) Tighten nuts (5), installed in step ( f ) , to a torque value of
50 inch-pounds.
(J) Remove 287891-1 p i l o t and install 285160-2-1 dummybearing

carrier and secure to accessory drive housing with three
speed nuts. Do not tighten nuts. Allow dummycarrier free
movement to prevent interference of rotating group.
(k) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees and tighten "T" handle
of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to a torque value of 15 ±0
inch-pounds after contact with main shaft, ensuring f i r s t
stage zero. Place parallel bar on face of housing.
(I) Measure dimension from parallel bar on face of housing to top

of gage on end of shaft. Record as f i r s t stage zero. Loosen
"T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage.
(m) Compare measurement obtained in step (1) (actual f i r s t stage

zero) to calculated f i r s t stage zero as accomplished in step
(15)(i). Install or remove shims (55, figure 230) as
required to obtain calculated f i r s t stage zero measurement.
Compare final f i r s t stage zero measurement to top normal run-
ning clearance (see table 206). Difference shall be 0.036 to
0.038 inch.
NOTE: Refer to Figures 233 through 236 for bolt
hole positions to be l e f t open for component
mounting.
(n) Install remaining bolts (10), washers (15) and nuts (5).
Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
~KEY TO FIGURE 230

So NUT 40. LOCKPLATE
10. BOLT 45. SPACER
20. NUT 55. GASKET(SHIM)
30. SPACER 95. PACKING
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.3
Aug 16/89
/lied
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED
POWER GROUP
, v
E-44G-668
~~90
70. PACKING 95. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER SHROUD

90. WASHER

UP136688
Installing First Stage Impeller Shroud

Figure 231 72-30-04
Page 298.4
Aug 12/91
lied
Groups Part No. 3101880-7 added to SB 72-0199) (Power Groups Part
No. 3101880-10 added by SB 72-0223) Install f i r s t stage impeller

(95).
NOTE: Studs on compressor diffuser are not equally
spaced. Ensure f i r s t stage impeller shroud
bolt holes are properly aligned with studs
of compressor diffuser during installation.
(b) Spray face and side of f i r s t stage impeller shroud, where
contact is made with compressor diffuser, with lubricant
(Fluoroglide, CP). Wipe off excess lubricant with clean
cloth. Install f i r s t stage impeller shroud (95) down over
f i r s t stage impeller, ensure bolt holes are properly aligned
with studs.
(c) Secure f i r s t stage impeller shroud (95) with washer (90) and
pounds.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.5
Aug 12/91
Allie#.SignalAerospaceCompany
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
PARTIALLYASSEMBLED
POWER GROUP
45 50
1 1
J 5
35
2530,,~",~ ~. j j
@"~ 15
E-.44G-502
1 NUT 35. SPACER

10. BOLT 40. ACCESSORYDRIVE HOUSING
15. WASHER (110, IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-20)
20. NUT 45. GASKET
25. WASHER 50. SHIM
30. ADAPTER
UP136688

Figure 232 72-30-04
Page 298.6
Aug 12/91
~ / l iignal
ed
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No. 3101880-10 added by SB 72-0223) Install accessory drive
housing assembly as follows. (See Figure 232.)
(a) Install approximately 0.090 inch thickness of t r i a l shims
(50) over studs and onto face of diffuser.
(b) Apply a thin coat of grease (DC-111 Silicone Compound) to

gasket (45) and surfaces mating with gasket. Install gasket
(45) on compressor housing assembly.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.6A/298.6B
Aug 12/91
lied
R NOTE: Step (bl) is optional. I f operating conditions war-

R rant the need to prevent water entrapment between the
R f i r s t stage compressor inlet shroud and the accessory
R drive housing the gap may be f i l l e d with sealant
R (RTV732 or RTV731). The use of this material may
R make removal of the inlet shroud extremely d i f f i c u l t .
R 1. B. (18)(bl) Apply sealant (RTV732 or RTV731) on f i r s t stage impeller

R shroud (95, Figure 231) ledge just behind packing (70) where
R f i r s t stage impeller shroud mates with accessory drive
R housing.
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING ACCESSORYDRIVE HOUSINGAS-
SEMBLY, ENSURERELIEF HOLES IN ACCESSORY
DRIVE HOUSINGASSEMBLYARE ALIGNED WITH
MOUNTING STUDS OF FIRST STAGE IMPELLER
SHROUD.
(c) Ensure handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage is loosened
to relieve pressure on rotating assembly. Prior to i n s t a l l -
ing accessory drive housing assembly (40), coat mating sur-
faces in contact with gasket with grease (DC-111 Silicone
Compound). Install 287891-1 p i l o t on forward end of main
shaft. Secure accessory drive housing assembly (40) to com-
pressor housing assembly with eight evenly spaced bolts
(10), washers (15) and nuts (5). Tighten nuts (5) to a
(d) Install spacers (35), adapters (30), washers (25) and nuts
(20). Tighten nuts (20) in 10 inch increments, alternating
from side-to-side to ensure shroud is pulled into position
evenly. Tighten nuts (20) to a torque value of 30 inch-
pounds. Remove287891-1 pilot from main shaft and install
285160-2-1 dummybearing carrier and secure to accessory
drive housing with three speed nuts. Do not tighten nuts,
allow dummycarrier free movement to prevent interference of
rotating group.
R (dl) I f step (bl) was accomplished, ensure gap is f i l l e d with

R sealant (RTV732 or RTV731) between f i r s t stage impeller
R shroud and accessory drive housing.
(e) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees and tighten handle of
284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to a torque value of 15 ±0
inch-pounds after contact with main shaft.
(f) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees and install
284498-1-1/-2-1 gage to shaft and place a parallel bar on
face of housing assembly.
(g) Measure from parallel bar to top of gage in end of shaft.
See Figure 229. Record measurements as f i r s t stage zero
(with t r i a l shims).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.7
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. B. (18) (h) (Pre SB 72-0223) (Power Groups Part No. 3101880-5/-7) Com-
pare measurement obtained in step (g) (actual f i r s t stage
zero) to calculated f i r s t stage zero as established in step
(15)(i). Install or remove shims (50, figure 232) as
required to obtain calculated f i r s t stage zero measurement to
top normal running clearance (see table 206). Difference
shall be 0.036 to 0.038 inch.
(i) (Pre SB 72-0223) (Power Groups Part No. 3101880-5/-7) In-

stall or remove shims until measurement obtained is 0.036 to
0.038 inch less than top normal running clearance. (See
table 206.) Record this dimension.
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0223, POWERGROUPPARTNO.
3101880-10) CALCULATIONFOR REMOVALOF
SHIMS IS EXTREMELYCRITICAL. THEREIS NO
MEASUREMENTMETHODTO CHECKIF PROPER
AMOUNT OF SHIMS HAS BEENREMOVED.
NOTE: (Power Group Part No. 3101880-10) The
desired result of shimming the crossover
duct to the accessory drive housing is to
provide 0.010 inch clearance between the
f i r s t stage impeller and the f i r s t stage
shroud when the second stage impeller is
against second stage shroud portion of the
compressor housing (second stage zero).
This is required because second stage com-
pressor running clearance (0.026 to 0.028
inch) is less than f i r s t stage running
clearance (0.036 to 0.038 inch).
(J) (Power Group Part No. 3101880-10) Subtract desired f i r s t

stage zero is calculated in Table 207 from f i r s t stage zero
measurement obtained with trial shims in step (g). (See
table 207). Difference equals thickness of shims to be
removed to establish proper correlation between f i r s t stage
impeller and second stage impeller when top normal running
clearance is established in a later step.
NOTE: Refer to Figures 233 through 236 for bolt
hole positions to be l e f t open for component
mounting.
(k) Loosen "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage. Install

remaining bolts (15), washers (10), and nut (5). Tighten
nuts (5) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 298.8
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.9
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CUSTOMER
BRACKET
\ FUEL
CONTROL
BRACKET
ITT COMPENSATOR
4
50 .--.5
(CUSTOMER) BRACKET 49
FUEL ANTI-ICE
48 VALVE BRACKET
46 4 ~ ,O,
45
44 11
43 12
42 13
40
AS VIEWED
FROM 16
TURBINE
END
f8
/ 0///2209
FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE BRACKET 34 21
32
~.~23 22
31 24
AIR ANTI-ICE
VALVE BRACKET
L_L-
\
FLOW DIVIDER
BRACKET
F-44A.-4371
(Codes AA-BA) Component

Mounting Positions on Compressor
Housing/Accessory Drive Housing Flange
UP136688
Figure 233 72-30-04

Page 298.10
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FUEL CONTROL
BRACKET
TOP
53 54 J 1 2
FUEL SHUTOFF
-'x,,
VALVE BRACKET
49
50
FUEL ANTI-ICE
VALVE BRACKET
48 /
/
44
43 12
42l 13
4o I 15
39
AS VIEWED
FROM
t 16
TURBINE
38 END i7
918
20
' 22
, . / 33 32 23
ITT COMPENSATOR ~,' 31 30 . ~ ~ , , ~ 25 24
AND AIR ANTI-ICE
VALVE BRACKET
FLOW DIVIDER FL44A-~I369

BRACKET
(Codes CA-CC) Component

Mounting Positions of Compressor
UP136688
Figure 234 72-30-04

i Page 298.11
Dec 14/87
~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CUSTOMER
-\
BRACKET
FUEL CONTROL
BRACKET
50
49 ~ 6
ITT COMPENSATOR
48 /
(CUSTOMER) BRACKET
! I \uL8 FUEL HEATER LOCKOUT
VALVE BRACKET
-!
13
40 15
AS VIEWED
FROM
TURBINE
END t78
16
_/
FUEL SHUTOFF /0•20
19
VALVE BRACKET 34~ 21
32
31
~ 22
!7 26 25
AIR ANTI-ICE
VALVE BRACKET
\
F L O W DIVIDER "
BRACKET
(Codes EA, FA, FB) Component

UP136688
Figure 235 72-30-04

Page 298.12
Dec 14/87
~:~lied
FUEL CONTROL
BRACKET
53 54 T?P1 2
50
49
FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE BRACKET '~k
!I
43
42
40 !5
AS VIEWED
FROM
TUFC.BI NE
END t?
18
16
/0•20
19
ITT COMPENSATOR /
BRACKET
21
32 0~~ , 3, . . 3. ~ 0 ~ -1- ~ ' - ~ . 24 23

~0 2928-'~27 26 25
AIR ANTI-ICE ' , i ~
VALVE BRACKET
%
FLOW DIVIDER
BRACKET
F-44G-1031
R (Code GA) Component

R Mounting Positions on Compressor
UP136688
R Housing/Accessory Drive Housing Flange

R Figure 235A 72-30-04
Page 298.12A/298.12B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FUEL ODNTROL
BRACKET
P3 LINE CLAMP /--
BRACKET /
54 TOP 1
53
50
49
6
FUELSHUTOFF 48 ?
VALVE BRACKET FUELHEATERLOCKOUT
% VALVE BRACKET
\./
42 13
IGNITION LEAD 41-
CLAMP BRACKET
4o I AS VIEWED
15
39 FROM 16
TURBINE
38 END 17
/O•2019
21
/ 33
).~23 22
IT-TCOMPENSATOR
AND ANTI-ICE
Y 32 ":
31 24
VALVE BRACKET
FLOW DIVIDER F-44A-4367

BRACKET
(Code DA) Component

UP136688
Figure 236 72-30-04

Page 298.13
Dec 14/87
i ~ l MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTN0o 72-01-27)
PARTIALLYASSEMBLEDENGINE(TYP)
175
25
\ \
ASSEMBLEDBEARING
110 CARRIERANDSEALS
50
45
I 2o
15 E-44G-679
10. NYLOCKPLUG 45. RETAINER

(IPC FIG. 1, 72-10-19) 50. SHIM
15. NUT (MAIN SHAFT) 110. BEARING (COMPRESSOR)
20. SPURGEAR 175. SHIM (165, IPC
25. NUT FIG. I , 72-10-19)
Instal ling Previously Assembled Bearing

Carrier and Seals, Compressor Bearing,
Retainer, Spur Gear and Main Shaft Nut
UP136688
Figure 237 72-30-04

Page 298.14
Dec 14/87


PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Refer to 72-10-19, Maintenance Practices, for assembly

of bearing carrier, seal, and compressor bearing.
1. B. (19) Install previously assembled bearing carrier and seals, compressor

bearing, retainer, spur gear and main shaft nut as follows. (See
Figures 237 and 238.)
Ca) Remove 285160-2-1 dummy bearing c a r r i e r from p a r t i a l l y assem-

bled engine.
(b) Install approximately 0.040 inch thickness of shims (175,

Figure 237) into accessory drive housing assembly.
CAUTION: ENSURETHERE IS NO LUBRICANT ON AIR/OIL SEAL AND

ROTOR IN PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED BEARING CARRIER.
NOTE: Ensure that same thickness of shims (50) removed dur-

ing disassembly are kept together and reinstalled dur-
ing assembly.
(c) Remove retainer (45) and compressor bearing (110) from assem-
bled bearing carrier, rotor, and seals. Install assembled
bearing carrier, rotor, and seals into partially assembled
engine.
(d) Tighten "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to a

torque value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact with main
shaft.
NOTE: (Pre SB 72-0174) Use 293497-I dummy bearing set.

R (Post SB 72-0174 or 72-0634) Use 293814-1 dummy
bearing set.
(e) Using 284168-1-1 bearing puller, press dummybearing

(component of dummy bearing set) onto shaft until dummybear-
ing is f u l l y installed. Loosen "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim
clearance gage.
CAUTION: RECORD NUMBERAND THICKNESS OF SHIMS INSTALLED AND
KEEP WITH PERMANENTENGINE RECORDSFOR REFERENCE
USE AT POSSIBLE FUTUREENGINE DISASSEMBLY.
NOTE: I f shims (50) were removed during step (c), ensure

same thickness removed are installed.
(f) Install retainer (45) onto assembled bearing carrier and

seals. Ensure anti-rotation tab on retainer locks into slot
in dummybearing. Secure retainer with nuts (25) and tighten
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.15
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
~ ] MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
PARALLEL BAR '~"~" [-~"-J --Z
F-44G -369
R "284498-1-1/-2-1
Measuring to Obtain Running Clearance

UP136688
Figure 238 72-30-04

Page 298.16
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (19) (g) Install spur gear (20) onto main shaft. Apply an approved
engine oil to face and threads of dummynut. Install dummy
nut onto main shaft. Using 287416-1-1 holder and adapter,
tighten dummynut to a torque value of 900 inch-pounds.
Loosen and tighten dummynut a total of three times. On
third and final torque add running torque to required torque
value.
(h) Rotate engine 180 degrees and tighten "T" handle of

284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to a torque value of 15 ±0
inch-pounds a f t e r contact with main shaft. Rotate engine 180
degrees.
(i) Install 284498-1-1/-2-1 gage onto main shaft. Place parallel

bar on face of accessory drive housing as shown in Figure
238.

face of gage. Record as top normal running. Remove
284498-1-1/-2-1 gage.
(k) Compare measurement to top normal running calculated in Table

206 or 207. Result shall be 0.002 inch less than previously
calculated in Table 206 or 207.
CAUTION: WHEN TOP NORMAL RUNNING HAS BEEN OB-

TAINED, RECORDNUMBERAND THICKNESS OF
SHIMS (175) INSTALLED AND KEEP WITH PERM-
ANENT ENGINE RECORDS FOR REFERENCEUSE AT
POSSIBLE FUTURE ENGINE DISASSEMBLY.
(1) I f additional shimming is required to obtain top normal run-

ning clearance, remove components and adjust thickness of
shims (175) and repeat steps (c) through (k).
(m) Record top normal, f i r s t stage and second stage impeller

clearance. Comparewith calculated result in Table 206 or
207.
(n) When required top normal running clearance is obtained,

loosen "T" handle of 284988-1-i shim clearance gage to ensure
pressure has been removed from rotating assembly. Remove
dummy nut, spur gear, retainer and shims.
(o) (Pre SB 72-0174) Use 285154-i-1/-2-1 bearing puller, to

remove dummybearing from bearing carrier.
R (p) (Post SB 72-0174 or 72-0634) Use 285154-2-1 bearing puller,

to remove dummy bearing from bearing carrier.
(q) Ensure "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage is
tightened to a torque value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after con-
tact with main shaft.
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.17
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
/lied
NOTE: (Codes CA-CC, GA, Pre SB 72-0634)

(Codes AA-BA, DA-FB) Ensure index marks on
bearing inner races are aligned when in-
stalling bearing.
I. B. (19) (r) Using 284168-1-1 bearing puller, press bearing (110, Figure
237) onto shaft until bearing is fully installed.
(s) Install retainer (45) onto shims (50). Ensure anti-rotation

tab on retainer locks into slot in outer race of bearing
(110). Secure retainer with nuts (25). Tighten nuts (25) to
(t) Install spur gear (20) onto main shaft. Install nylock plug
(10) into nut (15), dress nylock plug to 0.000 to 0.005 inch
above threads of nut. Apply an approved engine oil to face
and threads of nut. Install nut (15) onto main shaft. Using
287416-1-1 holder and adapter, tighten nut (15) to a torque
value of 900 inch-pounds. Loosen and retighten nut a total
of three times. On third time add running torque to required
torque value.
(u) Repeat steps (h) through (k) to recheck top normal running
clearance.
(v) Rotate engine 180 degrees with turbine end up for next assem-
bly procedure.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.18
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-O4
Page 298.19
Dec 14/87
AEROSPACE GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
TURBINE BEARING
CARRIER
DIM.
DIM. T
TURBINE BEARING ,~
SUPPORT ASSY
DIM. P
DIM. S
R
BUILD DIMENSION
2.277 INCHES
DIM. M Y DIMENSION
2.176 INCHES
F-44G-374
Measuring and Calculating Turbine Assembly

Shimming Dimensions
Figure 239 72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.20
Aug 4/94
/lied
1. B. (20) Calculate turbine build shimming requirements as follows. (See

figure 239.)
(a) Using Figure 239, measure dimensions shown and record on work
sheet as shown in Table 209. Support assembly and turbine
bearing carrier support assembly are measured with components
separated and on work bench.
S = 5.13 (min) to 5.15 (max) inches (see figure 239)
T = As measured in Figure 239
U = Dimension determined in step (a)
X = Dimension determined in step (15)(f)
Y = Refer to table 208
X + Y - S = M (M is the amount of (±0.002 inch) washers

required between third stage stator assembly and support as-
sembly)
Build dimension (from table 208) - (X - T + U) = P (P is the

amount of shims (±0.002 inch) required between support assem-
bly and bearing support assembly (turbine bearing carrier))
CAUTION: DIMENSIONS LISTED IN TABLE 208 ARE BASED
ON DIMENSION X TAKENWITH ROTATINGGROUP
AT SECONDSTAGE ZERO.
NOTE: Table 208 provides engineering dimensions

for calculating turbine build.
Table 208. Calculations Dimensions
(Pre SB 72-0223) (Post SB 72-0223)

Power Group Part No. 3101880-5/-7 3101880-10
"Y" dimension 2.136 2.149
Build dimension 2.317 2.304

UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 298.21
Aug 16/89
I~l MAINTENANCM
EANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. B. (2o) (b) Using data recorded on work sheet (Table 209), calculate and
record washer thickness requirements for later assembly
procedure.
NOTE: Table 209 provides sample work sheet for
determining turbine build shimming
requirements.
Table 209. Turbine Build Shimming Requirements
1. Record Dimension S (Refer to step (20)(a)). n°
2. Record Dimension T (Refer to step (20)(a)). n,
3. Record Dimension U (Refer to step (20)(a). n°
4. Record Dimension X (Refer to step (15)(f)). In,
5. Dimension Y (See table 208) In°
6. Add lines 4 and 5 and record result here. In°
. Subtract line I from line 6 and record result here. n.

Result equals thickness of washers required for Dimension
M (Figure 239).
8. Subtract line 2 from line 4,

then add line 3 and record results here. in.
. Subtract line 8 from Build Dimension (from Table 208). in.

Result equals thickness of washers required for
Dimension P (Figure 239).
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.22
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
30
PARTIALLY
ENGINE (TY
E.-~I4A-5248
30. SUPPORTASSY (TURBINE 35. WASHER

BEARING) (IPC FIG. 3, 72-50-06)
Installing Turbine Bearing Support Assembly
UP136688
Figure 240 72-30-04

Page 298.23
Dec 14/87
1. B. (21) Install turbine bearing support assembly as follows. (See figures
240 and 241.)
(a) Remove plenum assembly from engine. Remove 284988-1-1 shim
clearance gage from plenum assembly. Remove three 284496-I-1
clamps from second stage stator.
(b) Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to threads of
support assembly (30, figure 240). Install required amount
of washers (35) determined in step (20)(b).
(c) Position support assembly (30) down over engine assembly and
assemble locking nut to support assembly. Screw support as-
sembly and nut together hand tight.
R NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly,
R readily accessible during assembly.
(d) Locate orientation arrow on second stage stator outer cone.
Mark position 180 degrees from arrow on second stage stator
using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753). This esta-
blishes the projected position where ITT harness will be
located when installed.
(e) (Turbine Bearing Support Part No. 895877-2) Align studs and
adjacent slot approximately 4 inches counterclockwise (aft,
looking forward) from mark made on second stage stator in step
(d).
(f) (Turbine Bearing Support Part No. 895877-4) Align studs that
are adjacent to slot identified as slot A in Figure 241 (slot
A can be readily identified by its relative position to bear-
ing support (carrier) alignment pin hole) approximately 4
inches counterclockwise (aft, looking forward) from mark made
on second state stator in step (d).
NOTE: All tools listed below are components of
291900-2 liner and support torquing holder
assembly.
(g) With turbine bearing support (30, figure 240) positioned, en-
sure stator locking nut is tightened firm onto turbine bear-
ing support. Install 291900-2 torquing holder assembly and
tighten turbine bearing support as follows.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.24
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
TURBINE BEARING STRUT NO. I

SUPPORT ASSY
SLOT B
ALIGNMENT
PIN HOLE
SLOT A
STRUT NO. 3 STRUT N O . 2
F-44A-3318
Positioning Turbine Bearing Support

PN 895877-4
UP136688
Figure 241 72-30-04

Page 298.25
Dec 14/87

A EROSPA. CE GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (21) (g) _1 Position 291900-11 base assembly around locking nut with
phenolic pads on dish of stator and liner and secure.
Turn the three jack screws in adapter until locking pins
engage slots in locking nut.
2 Place 291900-17 matched ring set around turbine bearing

support assembly with three notches in the inside diameter
of ring set, engaging the three lugs on the outside di-
ameter of turbine bearing support assembly. Secure with
two halves of matched ring set with the two 291900-23
hinge pins located 180 degrees apart. The matched ring
set is resting on base plate adapter inside the four lugs
on base assembly.
3 Place 291900-15 torquing cylinder on 291900-17 matched

ring set aligning holes in torquing cylinder with pins on
matched ring set. Position 291900-13 reaction cylinder
over torquing cylinder and secure to base assembly.
4 Install drive shaft and power-dyne. Operate power-dyne to

tighten turbine bearing support assembly. Tighten turbine
bearing support assembly to a torque value of 23,000 to
26,000 inch-pounds (1,917 to 2,166 foot-pounds). Remove
holder.
5 I f studs and slot do not align properly to ITT harness,

mark position on stator locking nut that aligns with
studs. Loosen stator locking nut and remove 291900-2
torquing holder assembly. Move locking nut and align mark
on nut with mark on second stage stator made in step (d).
Repeat steps ~ through ~.
(22) Install turbine plenum assembly and combustion chamber assembly.

(23) Install turbine bearing assembly. Refer to 72-50-06, Maintenance

Practices. Use thickness of shims as determined in step (20)(a).
(24) Install all remaining components and plumbing. Refer to applica-
ble Chapter/Section/Subject.
(25) Upon completion of engine assembly, i f replacement of either im-

peller or i f removal of f i r s t stage impeller from main shaft has
occurred, a vibration check is required. Refer to 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test.
(26) Upon completion of engine assembly perfom an NTS system check by

f l i g h t check and NTS system ground check in accordance with
UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 298.26
Aug 4/94
UP136688

2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect F i r s t Stage Impeller (See Figure 242)

(1) Visually check impeller leading edges for deformation. Deformation
is not acceptable.
(2) Visually check impeller blades f o r dents and nicks. Limits f o r
dents and nicks are as follows.
(a) Dents or nicks on inner one-half of blade leading edge shall

R not exceed 0.05 inch in depth.
(b) Dents or nicks on outer one-half of leading edge shall not ex-
R ceed 0.08 inch in depth.
R (c) Dents or nicks which are w i t h i n 0.25 inch of hub f i l l e t shall

R not exceed 0.05 inch in depth.
(d) I f dents or nicks are w i t h i n above l i m i t s , r e p a i r in accor-
dance with Approved Repairs.
(3) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with
70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks permitted.
R (3a) Visually inspect Diameter B f o r wear step (groove). Wear step is

R acceptable provided groove does not exceed 0.005 inch in depth.
(4) Visually check impeller f o r evidence of rubbing. (See Figure 242.)
(a) Minor rubbing is acceptable on blades (Surface E).
(b) Minor rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A) is

acceptable provided rub damage does not exceed following
limits.
1 Damage shall not exceed 0.005 inch depth.
2 No damage allowed within 0.020 inch of blade platform o r

blade root area (Dimension E).
(c) Repair minor rub damage in accordance with Approved Repairs.

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.28
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: A restoration repair of leading and contour edges

has been developed by the manufacturer. However,
due to the critical process control requirement
that must be maintained, this restoration shall be
accomplished at a manufacturer's authorized repair
f a c i l i t y only. I t is suggested that damaged im-
pellers be inspected to determine restoration
feasi bili ty.
2. A. (5) I f impeller leading eage and/or contour (Surface E) is damaged
beyond allowable repair limits and damage does not exceed 0.125
inch depth, return impeller to the following f a c i l i t y for possible
restoration repair.
Al liedSignal Engines
Distribution Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
(6) Inspect and repair curvic couplings in accordance with 70-00-00,
Standard Practices.
(7) Perform dimensional inspection in accordance with Figure 242.

(9) Replacement of f i r s t stage impeller requires a vibration check.
Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.28A/298.28B
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
"\
SURFACE A
DIA B
DIA F - -
I.-44G-214
Surface A and Diameter B establish centerline.

Diameter F shall be concentric with centerline within 0.003 inch total
indicator reading.
Area C is painted 0.002 to 0.004 inch thick.
SERVICEABLE LIMITS
DIA B 10.372 to 10.375 in.

DIA F 6.989 to 6.997 in.
First Stage Impeller Shroud Inspection

(PN 893483-I)
UP136688
Figure 243 72-30-04

Page 298.29
Dec 14/87
~ 5 lied
2. B. Inspect First Stage Compressor Shroud
(1) Visually check for cracks, warpage, and distortion. Cracks, war-
page or distortion not permitted.
(2) Visually check shroud Area C (see Figure 243 or 244) for impeller
rubs. Refer to Repair for blending minor rubs.
(3) Perform dimensional inspection in accordance with Figure 243 or
244.
R (4) (Pre SB 72-0199) Check jackscrew holes for stripped threads° Refer
to Repair for d r i l l i n g and tapping new holes.
L .J
/
DIA F DIA E
E F
9.420 TO 6.989TO
9.422 IN. 6.997IN.
1-44A-1736
First Stage Impeller Shroud Inspection

UP136688
(PN 3101829-1)
Figure 244 72-30-04
Page 298.30
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.31
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANOAL
R PORT NO. 72-01-27
DIA E
l
DIA F
A E *F **F
* PN 895948-1 ONLY 10.376 TO 3.300 TO 2.850 TO 2.870 TO

10.396 IN. 3.305 IN. 2.860 IN. 2.880 IN.
** PN 895948-4 ONLY
1-44A-2306
Compressor Interstage Diffuser Inspection

UP136688
(PN 895948-1/-4)
Figure 245 72-30-04
Page 298.32
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. C. Inspect Interstage Diffuser Assembly
(1) Inspect interstage diffuser Part No. 895948-1/-4 as follows. (See

figure 245.)
(a) Visually check diffuser for cracks and deformation. I f damage
is evident or suspected, perform fluorescent penetrant
check/inspection in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Apply penetrant to all areas except surfaces cov-
ered by metal spray. No cracks allowed.
(b) Visually check parts of interior air surfaces for excessive
erosion. Interior airflow surfaces shall have a surface f i n -
ish that w i l l ensure smooth air flow.
(c) Check studs for security. Refer to Repair for stud

replacement.
(d) Perform dimensional inspection in accordance with Figure 245.
(e) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements or is

UP136688
72-30-04
R Page 298.33
Aug 16/89
~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
DIA B
l
DIA F
I .-44A -2700
SERVICEABLE LI~41TS
DIA A 3.300 to 3.305 in.
DIA B 10.376 to 10.379 in.
DIA F 2.870 to 2.880 in.
Compressor Interstage Diffuser Inspection

UP136688
(PN 3101293-1/-2)
Figure 246 72-30-04
Page 298.34
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. C. (2) Inspect interstage diffuser Part No. 3101293-1/-2 as follows. (See

figures 246, 247.)
(a) Visually check diffuser for cracks and deformation. No cracks

or deformation permitted.
(b) Visually check parts of interior airflow surfaces for exces-

sive erosion and damage. Interior airflow surfaces shall have
a surface finish that w i l l ensure a smooth air flow.
(c) Perform dimensional inspection in accordance with Figure 246.
(d) Visually check diffuser for vane tip erosion/damage. Vane t i p

erosion/damage is acceptable providing i t can be blended
within maximum limits specified in Figure 247.
(e) Visually check brazed joints for voids. Voids up to 20 per-

cent are acceptable.
(f) Perform fluorescent penetrant check/inspection in accordance

with 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES. Apply penetrant to all
area except surfaces covered by metal spray. No cracks
al I owed.
(g) Replace diffuser i f Inspection/Check requirements are not met.

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.35
Dec 14/87
J~l MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
lj i
0,010 IN. MAX
SECTION A
1-44G-213
Compressor Interstage Diffuser Assembly

(PN 3101293-1/-2)
UP136688
Figure 247 72-30-04

Page 298.36
Dec 14/87
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.37
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FRC
AFTCOVER
DIA E
~ CRACK
DIAA
~ " " SURFACEG
DETAIL A
0.10IN. MAX t CI-44G-1293
C~npressor Diffuser Assembly

UP136688
Figure 248 72-30-04

Page 298.38
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. C. (3) Inspect Interstage Diffuser, Part No. 3101830-1/-2/-3, 3102847-1

and 3103496-3 as follows. (See Figure 248.)
R (a) Visually inspect for cracks. (See Figure 248.) I f cracks are
R suspected, perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accor-
R dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not ac-
R ceptable except as follows.
R 1 Cracks in r a i l s (located between inner diameter studs, see

R Diameters E and F) may not be closer than 0.20 inch from
R stud bosses.
R 2 Cracks in rails may be f u l l depth of r a i l , but may not ex-

R tend into forward face of front cover.
R 3 Cracks in stud bosses or within 0.20 inch of stud bosses

R are not acceptable.
R 4 Cracks in a f t cover which are forward of Surface G are not

R acceptabl e.
R 5 Cracks aft of Surface G may not exceed a cumulative length

R of 0.65 inch in any 90° arc of circumference.
6 Cracks in r a i l s and aft of Surface G which are acceptable

must be stop drilled with a 1/16 inch d r i l l b i t .
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.38A/298.38B
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. C. (3) (b) (Pre SB 72-0305 and Pre SB 72-0367 and Pre SB 72-0540) Check
vanes for radial looseness. Vane radial looseness shall not
exceed ±0.015 inch.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0540) Missing sealant is acceptable provided

rivets are tight. I f rivets are found loose, return diffuser
to AlliedSignal Engines, Distribution Center, 1944 East Sky
Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034 for repairs.
(d) (Post SB 72-0540) Visually check diffuser brazed joints for

voids. Voids up to 20 percent are acceptable.
(e) (Post SB 72-0540) Inspect diffuser for loose mounting studs.
Repair loose mounting studs in accordance with Approved
Repairs.
(f) Visually check diffuser for vane t i p erosion/damage. Vane t i p

erosion/damage is acceptable providing i t can be blended with
maximum limits specified in Detail A, Figure 248.
(g) Visually inspect vanes and a i r passages for corrosion, remove
corrosion in accoraance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,
Cleaning Method 6.
(h) Visually check diffuser for wear. I f wear is evident, perform

dimensional inspection of Diameter A in accordance with Figure
248. Diameter A shall be 3.310 inches maximum.
(i) Measure Diameter E, Figure 248. Diameter E shall be 10.369 to
10.374 inches. I f necessary, machine Diameter E to within
specified Iimits.
(j) Replace diffuser i f inspection requirements are not met.
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.39
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
2. D. Inspect Labyrinth Seal
R NOTE: Labyrinth seal shall not be removed from main

R shaft unless damage is evident.
(1) Visually check for burrs and pickup metal on knife edges. I f pre-
sent, remove pickup metal by stoning.
NOTE: Blue discoloration of knife edges is acceptable.

(2) Visually check knife edges for cracks, chips and other damage.
Cracks and chips are not acceptable.
(3) Perform dimensional inspection of seal. (See figure 249.)
(4) Perform magnetic particle inspection in accordance with 70-00-00,
STANDARD PRACTICES, i f damage is indicated or suspected. No cracks
al I owed.
break-in procedures i f knife-edge seal or related
components (rub-strips) have been replaced.
DIA
A
1.7460 TO 1-44A-2399
1.7490 IN.
UP136688
Labyrinth Seal
Figure 249 72-30-04
Page 298.40
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.41
Dec 14/87
I~J TP=31_
MAINTeNAnCE
~ANOAL72_ol.27
i ........
/ I , , I ®~51
SURFACE J .~_.__------ SURFACE K
1/1~-~I.ooo=
DIM. L ,I
P~I .........L . : J
DIA G
111,-,i.oo=I ~-,I.oo,51 1-44G-216
INSPECTION OF DIMENSION L, DIAt,|ETER G, AND SURFACES J AND K CANNOTBE

ACCOMPLISHED UNLESS KNIFE SEAL IS REMOVEDFOR REPLACEMENT.
REPAIRABLE LIMIT
DIA E and F 1.1812 to 1.1814 in.
DIA G 1.2598 to 1.2600 in.
DIA H 1.1863 to 1.1865 in.
DIM. L 20.84 to 20.86 in.
UP136688
Shouldered Shaft (Main Shaft) Inspection

Figure 250 72-30-04
Page 298.42
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. E. Inspect Shouldered Shaft (Main Shaft)
(1) Perform dimensional inspection of main shaft in accordance with

Figure 250.
(2) Perform fluorescent penetrant check/inspection in accordance with

70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.
(3) Check splines for wear, l i m i t s are as follows.
(a) Front (external) spline: Wear shall not exceed 0.007 inch.
(b) Center (external) spline: Wear shall not exceed 0.007 inch.
(c) Rear (internal) spline: Wear shall not exceed 0.005 inch.
(4) Visually inspect threads for damage. Replace main shaft i f threads
cannot be repaired by brushing with a wire brush.
(5) Replace shaft that does not meet inspection requirements.
(6) Replacementof shouldered shaft (main shaft) requires a vibration

check. Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
F. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gaskets
(1) Visually check gasket for burrs or other damage. If damage is evi-
dent or suspected, perform ~uorescent penetrant check/inspection
in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks
allowed.
(2) Check minimum height of gasket. Minimumheight shall be 0.212 inch

with both sealing surfaces parallel within 0.006 inch.
G. Inspect Accessory Drive Housing in Accordance with 72-10-20, ~,~intenance

Practices
H. Inspect Compressor Housing Assembly in Accordance with 72-30-03, Main-

tenance Practices
I. Inspect Second Stage Impeller in Accordance with 72-30-03, Maintenance

Practices
J. Inspect Diffuser Vane Assembly in Accordance with 72-30-03, Maintenance

Practices
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.43
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
l ~ I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
(1) Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, for general cleaning instruc-

210.
Figure Item Cleaning Methods - Refer Cleaning/Painting

No. No. Nomenc
I atu re 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
201 100 Shroud X X

203 95 Shroud X
204/ 5 Shaft X X
205 10 *Impel ler X
15 Seal X X
20 Gasket X X
60, 65 Diffuser assembly X X
206 35 Impel ler X
40 Vane assembly X X
45 Compressorhousing X X
assembly
*Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, paragraph D. for special cleaning

i nstru cti ons.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.44
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.45
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANC MA 0AL
TPE331-5 (REPORT N01 72-01u27)
0.300 IN.
0. 1560 TO 0.1641 DIAMETER THRU, 3 HOLES 120 DEGREES
APART. COUNTERSINK 115 TO 125 DEGREESBY 0. I9 TO
0.22 INCH DIAMETER (FAR SIDE ONLY). TAP FOR
NO. 10-32 UNF-3B THREAD THRU.
t
IN.
t
0
868623 (G) 1-44A-777
First Stage Impeller Shroud Repair

UP136688
(PN 893483-1) (Repair of Jackscrew Holes)

Figure 251 72-30-04
Page 298.46
Dec 14/87
lied
4. Approved Repairs

equipment required for Approved Repairs.
Item Source/
1. Impeller Balancing Used to adapt f i r s t stage impeller 284989-2-1

Arbor to supports of standard balancing
machine.


Balancing Machine AMCA International Corp, Giddings and
(Gisholt Model 13S Standard) Lewis Div, 142 Doty St, Fond Du Lac,
WI, 54935-3331
R Compound, retaining Loctite Corp, 705 N. Mountain Rd,
R (Locti te 609) Newington, CT 06111
R 1,1,1-Tri chl oroethane Commercial ly avail able
R (MIL-T-81533)
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.47
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. A. Repair First Stage Impeller (See Figure 242)
CAUTION: ENSURETHEREARE NO STRESS RISES (SHARP EDGES)

OR CRACKS IN REPAIRED AREA AFTER BLENDING.
(1) Repair nicks and dents on leading edge of impeller blades as

CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDLIMITS OF FIGURE 242. PER-

FORMANCE MAY BE AFFECTED. BLADESMAY BE
REPAIRED MORETHAN ONCE IF LIMITS ARE NOT
EXCEEDED.
R (a) Dents or nicks which do not exceed the limits specified in

R Section 72-30-01 may be repaired in accordance with 72-30-01,
R Approved Repairs.
(b) BlenUing of leading edge contour which extends more than 0.2
inch beyond the allowable repair depth is not acceptable.
(See shaded area, Details B and C, Figure 252.)
NOTE: Blending is not allowed within 0.05 inch of

hub f i l l e t .
(c) Remove dents or nicks which are within 0.05 to 0.25 inch from
hub f i l l e t as follows.
R 1 Use a stone to deburr dents or nicks which do not exceed

R 0.01 inch in depth.
R 2 Repair blades with dents or nicks which exceed 0.01 inch in

R depth but do not exceed 0.03 inch in depth as follows.
R a Hand finish to remove dents or nicks. Blending shall

R f a i r smoothly to existing blade leading edge.
R b Fluorescent penetrant inspect reworked area in accor-

R dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not
R al I owed.
c Shot peen reworked area in accordance with step (5).
R 3 Repair blades with dents or nicks which exceed 0.03 inch in

R depth but do not exceed 0.05 inch in depth as follows.
R a Hand finish to remove material from the leading edge of

R the blade at an equal depth from the dent or nick to the
R shroud end of leading edge.
R b Leading edge shall be contoured to 4:1 ellipse as indi-

R cated in Figure 252, View A-A.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.48
Aug 4/94

AEROSPACE GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
RADIUSSHALL FAIR
LEADINGEDGECONTOUR SMOOTHLYTO LEADING
SHALL BE A 4:1 ELLIPSE, EDGECONTOUR
LENGTHMUSTBE FOUR
TIMESDEPTH-MINIMUM VIEW D - D
~
VIEW A - A
SHROUDEND OF
LEADINGE D G E / / ~
2 IN, ~ D
CONFIGURATIONAFTER
MATERIALREMOVED
,-..~j 0.2 IN.
d . DETAIL B
NICKOR DENTREMOVALFROMINNERHALF OF LEADINGEDGE
LENGTHMUSTBE FOUR
TIMESDEPTH-MINIMUM
4 IN, PAD
CONFIGURATIONAFTER
MATERIALREMOVED
MAX DEPTH
0.08 IN. -- 0.2 IN.
c
NICKOR'DENTREMOVALFROMOUTERHALF OF LEADINGEDGE
CI-44G-1278
First Stage Impel l e r N i c k o r Dent R e p a i r

F i g u r e 252 72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.48A/298.48B
Aug 4 / 9 4
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. A. (1) (c) 3 c Fluorescent penetrant inspect reworked area in accor-

dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. Cracks are not
allowed.
d Shot peen reworked area in accordance with step (5).
(d) Dents or nicks 0.05 inch in depth may be removed from inner
one-half of the blade leading edge. Dents or nicks 0.08 inch
in depth may be removed from outer one-half of the leading
edge. (See Figure 252, Details B and C.)
NOTE: Blending is not allowed within 0.05 inch of

hub f i l l e t .
(e) Hand finish to remove dents or nicks from the blade. Hand
finish to remove material from leading edge of the blade at a
length equal to four times the depth of the nick or dent.
(See Figure 252, Details B and C.)
(f) All places where material is removed shall f a i r smoothly, f i n -

ished with a 180 g r i t or finer, and not leave any corners or
edges sharper than 0.1 inch radius.
(g) Balance impeller in accordance with step (4).
(2) I f minor rubbing is evident on impeller blades (Surface E, Figure

242), hand blend sharp edges and remove raised metal.
(3) Hand finish to remove minor rub damage to outside edge of platform
rim (Area A, Figure 242).
(4) Dynamically balance impeller, after repair, as follows. (See

Figure 253.)
(a) Install 284989-2-1 arbor on impeller curvic coupling and Di-
ameter A and install in balancing machine (Gisholt Model 13S
Standard Balancing Machine).
(b) Dynamically balance impeller to an accuracey of 0.005 inch-

ounce in Plane L and 0.005 inch-ounce in Plane M.
(c) Remove material for balancing fronl areas illustrated in Figure

253. Area No. 2 must be shot peened after removing material
for balancing.
(d) All places where material is removed for balancing shall f a i r

smoothly and leave no corners or edges sharper than 0.015 inch
radius.
72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.49
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ lslied
MATERIAL REMOVAL AREA NO. 2

IF WHEEL CANNOT BE BALANCED
~----- "It BY FIRSTREMOVING MAXIMUM
AMOUNT FROM AREA NO. 1.
Z Z AMOUNT SHOWN MAY BE REMOVED
FROM THIS AREA.
7 •
t
0.50 IN.
MAX
MATERIAL REMOVALAREA
NO. ! FOR BALANCE. BALANCE
AREA
t
DIA A 0.26 IN. MIN WALL
STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTIC
1 0.050IN. MIN
STRUCTURAL
CHARACTERISTIC
R
VIEW Z-Z
PLANE
"~'"~ CURVIC COUPLING
DIM.
-.,--- DIM. C
I~""~ PLANE M I-4.4G-725
R Dimension B shall not be less than 0.720 inch.

R Dimension C shall not exceed 2.100 inch.
R
UP136688
First Stage Compressor Impeller Balancing (Typical)

R Figure 253 72-30-04
Page 298.50
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 4. A. (5) Shot peen reworked areas as f o l l o w s , (See Figure 254.)
R (a) Locate arrows using Diameter K and Dimension L.
R (b) Shot peen areas enclosed by arrows to an i n t e n s i t y of 0.002 to

R 0.006 inch per Almen A2 gage.
(c) Locate shaded areas using Dimensions H and J.
R (d) Shot peen shaded areas to an i n t e n s i t y of 0,004 to 0,006 inch

R per Almen A2 gage in accordance with AMS2430 using 0.018 to
R 0,023 inch diameter steel shot.
I
',~ DIM. L ,J
t t
DIA K
DIM. J
H J K L
1.250 IN. 1.00 IN. 4.20 TO 3.659 iN.
MiI~I MIN 4.60 IN. (NOMINAL)
1-44A-1960
R First Stage Impeller Shot Peening

R Figure 254 72-30-04
UP136688
Page 298.50A/298, 50B

Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
,~llied
. B. Repair First Stage Impeller Shroud (See Figures 243, 244, 251)
(1) Hand blend minor rubs smooth with contour.
(2) (Shroud Part No. 893483-1) I f threads in jackscrew holes are
stripped, d r i l l three new holes 120 degrees apart and tap for 10-32
threads. Threads remaining in old holes shall be drilled out.
(Refer to figure 251.)
(3) (Pre SB 72-0345) Touch-up or repaint painted surfaces in accor-
dance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting.
C. Repair Interstage Diffuser
(I) (Interstage diffusers Part No. 895948-1/-4) Replace loose or inse-

cure stud as follows.
(a) Removeloose, insecure or damaged stud from diffuser assembly.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ALL RESIDUE OF HIGH TEMPERA-

TURE COMPOUND(FEL-PRO C5-A) IS REMOVED
FROMTHREADS IN DIFFUSER ASSEMBLY.
(b) Thoroughly clean diffuser assembly by vapor degreasing in ac-
cordance with Cleaning.
(c) Thread new stud into diffuser and check running torque.
(d) Secure stud using epoxy resin (Epoxylite 6203) as follows.

1 Prepare epoxy resin (Epoxylite 6203) by combining two parts
Epoxylite 6203 Part A and one part Epoxylite 6203 Part B.
Mix thoroughly.
_2 Apply an even thin coat of mixed epoxy resin to threads of

studs.
3 Install stud into diffuser. Tighten to a torque value of

40 i nch-pounds.
_4 Cure epoxy resin at 93.3°C (200°F) for 16 hours or at

176.7°C (350°F) for 1 hour.
(2) (Post SB 72-0540) Repair loose compressor diffuser mounting studs.
R (a) Install two nuts (Part No. AN315C3Ror equivalent) on studs so

R that two or three threads of stud are showing.
R (b) Hold one nut and tighten the other nut so the two nuts are
R locked together.
R (c) While holding wrench on the two nuts, loosen nut at base of
R stud.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.51
Aug 12/91
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~----~Signal
R 4, C. (2) (d) L i f t washer and clean exposed area of stud and cavity with
R 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533).
(e) Apply retaining compound (Loctite 609) to shouldered area of
stud.
(f) Tighten nut at base of stud to a torque value of 30 inch-
pounds.
(g) Loosen and remove nuts (Part No. AN315C3R).
D. Refer to 72-10-20, Maintenance Practices for repair of Accessory Drive

Housing
E. Action Required i f Incorrect Curvic Coupling Gasket has Been Installed
(1) Contact Customer Service Engineering, Garrett General Aviation Ser-
vices Division, Department H65-4, P.O. Box 29003, Phoenix, AZ 85038
(Telephone: Area Code 602, 231-1000) and provide the following
data.
(a) Engine serial number.
(b) Hours/cycle of l i f e limited rotating components.
(c) Location of curvic coupling gasket in question, number and

size of holes.
(d) Condition of turbine components being considered.
UP136688
72-30-04
Page 298.52
Aug 12/91
MA1NTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CHAPTER 72 - COMBUSTION SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
SUBJECT SB SUBJECT -
PAGE
COMBUSTION SECTION
COMBUSTION CHAFlBER CASE (PLENUM) AND

COMBUSTION CHANBER ASSEMBLY
Inspection/Check
Cleani ng/Painting
Approved R e p a i r s
UP136688
COMBUSTION SECTION
72-CONTENTS
Dec 1 4 / 8 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
COMBUSTION SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The combustion section is located in the rear one-third of the engine and encom-
passes the turbine section. I t provides an area where fuel and air are mixed
and ignited. Principal components of the combustion section are the combustion
chamber and turbine plenum assembly.
The annular combustion chamber assembly mates on one end with a slip j o i n t on
the transition liner assembly to form a combustion chamber. The other end is
supported at the rear by three welded tabs and three special stud bolts in the
turbine plenum assembly. The combustion chamber assembly contains ports for
five primary fuel nozzles and ten secondary fuel nozzles, and ports for three
igniter plugs (only two are used on any i n s t a l l a t i o n ) . Slots and holes are ap-
propriately located on the inner and outer walls of the chamber assembly to con-
trol combustion during starting and operation.
The turbine plenum assembly, attached to the compressor housing assembly, en-
closes the entire combustion area, and provides a plenum for compressed a i r , and
consequently provides a relatively cool skin enclosure. The rear end of the
plenum assembly provides a register for the turbine bearing support and for
mounting the primary and secondary fuel nozzle and manifold assemblies. A
flange on the rear face of the turbine plenum assembly provides mounting for the
exhaust pipe assembly. An oil tube assembly passes through the exhaust pipe as-
sembly and mates with an oil j e t assembly supported on the oil scavenge pump as-
sembly to provide lubricating oil to the turbine r o l l e r bearing.
UP136688
72-40-00
Page 1/2
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A E R OS PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMBUSTION CHAMBERCASE (PLENUM) AND COMBUSTION CHAMBER

ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Iten Source/
i. Then~ocoupl e Used to bend thermocouple 291791-1

Nanifol d manifold prior to installing
Foxing Tool turbine plenum.
72-40-01
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lslied
I. A. Remove Plenum Assembly and Combustion Chamber Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove ITT compensator and disconnect ITT sensor assembly from tur-
bine plenum. Refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance Practices.
nance Practices.
(3) Removeanti-ice valve plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01, Maintenance

Practoces.
(4) Removefuel flow divider and drain valve. Refer to 73-10-07, Main-
tenance Practices.
(5) Removefuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to 73-10-09, Main-

tenance Practices.
(6) Remove ignition leads and i g n i t e r plugs. Refer to 74-10-01, Main-

tenance Practices.
R (7) (Codes CA-CC, DA, GA) Remove fireshields. Refer to 71-30-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(8) Removeoil inlet retainer shield. Refer to 72-50-01, Maintenance

Practices.

(lO) Remove oil inlet f i t t i n g and o i l pressure jet. Refer to 72-50-03,
Practices.
UP136688
72-40-01
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
72-40-01
Page 203
Dec 14/87
~lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
10
!
oJ .
\ 2s
26
"~--55
)
15
\
65
".'.-.:.,.~"~, ° ~ :; #;:.°:;.,o, ~'.
CE-44G-1767
Turbine Plenum and Combustion Chamber Installation

Figure 201 72-40-01
UP136688
Page 204
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i. A. (12) Remove jam nut and copper washer on rear of plenum assembly where
ITT sensor assembly passes through the plenum assB~ibly. Refer to
(13) Remove plenum drain valves. Refer to 72-00-05, Maintenance

Practices.
(14) Remove plenum plugs.
(15) Remove shouldered bolts and washers securing combustion chamber to

pl enum.
(16) Removenuts and bolts securing plenum assembly. Remove plenum and
combustion chamber.
B. Install Plenum Assembly and Combustion Chamber Assembly (See Figures

201, 202, 203, 204)
CAUTION: IF PLENUMASSEMBLY (60, FIGURE 201) THATWAS

REMOVED IS NOTREINSTALLED, TURBINE BUILD
DIMENSIONS WILL CHANGE. COMPLYWITH STEP (1)
BELOW TO DETERMINE IF REPLACEMENT PLENUMASSEM-
BLY CAN BE INSTALLED WITHOUT FURTHERDISASSEM-
BLY AND SHIMMINGOF STATORCOMPONENTS.
(1) Determine i f replacement plenum assembly can be installed without

further disassembly and shimming of stator components as follows.
(See Figure 202.)
KEY TO FIGURE 201
5. BOLT 30. PLATE

10. WASHER 40. BOLT
15. NUT 45. PLATE
20. BOLT 55. STUD
25. JAM NUT 60. TURBINEPLENUMASSY
26. COPPERWASHER 65. COMBUSTIONCHAMBERASSY
72-40-01
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (1) (a) Measure distance between plenum flanges (dimension A, figure

202) at three places approximately 120 degrees apart on OLD
and NEW plenum assemblies. Average the three measurements for
each plenum assembly.
(b) I f difference in average measurements between OLD and NEW ple-

num assembly does not exceed +0.002 inch, proceed with
i nstal lation.
(c) I f difference in average measurements between OLD and NEW ple-

num assembly does exceed _+0.002 inch, refer to 72-50-06, MAIN-
TENANCE PRACTICES, for instructions to obtain proper turbine
build dimensions.
DIM. A
F-44A-3324
UP136688
Measuring Replacement Turbine Plenum Assembly

Figure 202 72-40-01
Page 206
Dec 14/87
lied
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0042) HOLDSENSORASSEMBLYWIRE

AGAINST TURBINE BEARING SUPPORTASSEMBLYWHILE
BENDING. DO NOT APPLY FORCETO CONNECTOR.

threads of all bolts unless otherwise specified.
1. B. (2) Install combustion chamber assembly being careful not to cut or

scratch ITT sensor assembly or ITT harness assembly.
CAUTION: ALL BENDS IN ITT SENSORASSEMBLY SHALL BE

FORMEDTO A MINIMUM RADIUS OF 0.50 INCH. ALLOW
A STRAIGHT SECTION OF ITT SENSORASSEMBLY FOR A
MINIMUM OF 0.125 INCH WHERETHE HARNESSEXITS
THE PLENUMCONNECTORBEFOREBEGINNING THE FIRST
BEND.
(a) After combustion chamber assembly is in place, use 291791-1
forming tool to bend ITT sensor assembly approximately as
shown in Figure 203. Observe minimum bend radius. Ensure ITT
sensor assembly does not touch combustion chamber assembly.
(b) Prior to further assembly, blend sharp edges of ITT sensor as-
sembly boss on turbine plenum assembly, i f not previously ac-
complished, in accordance with Figure 204. This blending will
avoid possible damage to ITT sensor assembly from sharp
corners.
(3) Install plenum assembly as follows.
(a) (Post SB 72-0042) Ensure ITT threaded connector anti-rotation
tab engages slot in plenum assembly where ITT sensor assembly
passes through the plenum assembly.
(b) Position combustion chamber assembly in plenum assembly.
Align igniter plug holes in combustion chamber assembly with
holes in plenum assembly. Secure with washers and bolts.
Tighten bolts (5, Figure 201) to a torque value of 70 inch-
pounds.
R (bl) Bend washers (10) down against f l a t on combustion chamber case

R boss, and bend opposite side of washer up against f l a t on bolt
R head.
UP136688
72-40-01
Page 207
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
,,;C,---~,I...... %;,'.-. -:% --....-..'.....
"". BEND RADIUS N O T T O EXCEED

.~.,,C.::o 0.50 I N C H M I N I M U M
", '.:'~'~ "~,. ", "7,.
". ', ','.'~) ", ", : 4',

-. ,,', ~ h i P'J
' " ', . . . . . . ".v, ;/'" (I
"..'7,,. ~" Ls , ,,, .~:, t

•...:.:, .. ,. ,,', ,,. .I.- ;' f~'~
. , "..,. , .~z ',' .'i "./"
\
,, :',,', , , , .;'r,-'.-'..-
~ ,~;-,-Y.v ITT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
,,, ~ ,//L ;.
~t I "T',-/
/ . / /~ ,.v d
..- ..~,~..::.
............
.~-....".~..-~
SB-13B2R1
(Post SB 72-0042) ITT Sensor

UP136688
Assembly BendRadius (Typical)

Figure 203 72-40-01
Page 208
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
I I1
p
L
ITT SENSOR ASSEMBLY BOSS BLEND EDGE 0.03 TO 0.08 INCH
TO DIMENSION A.
NO SHARP EDGES REMAINING.
B DIM. A
TURBINE PLENUM ASSEMBLY BLEND AREA
BLEND EDGE 0.03 TO 0.08 INCH.

F'
J
SLOT ~OR ,TT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
TURBINE BEARING SUPPORTASSEMBLY BLEND AREA.
0.002 IN. MAX
::D. J
" l
jSHIELD
PROBE
GAP BETWEEN SHIELD AND ITT PROBE.

1-44A-2869
(Post SB 72-0042) Installation Details for

ITT Sensor Assembly
UP136688
Figure 204 72-40-01

Page 209
Dec 14/87
I ~ l MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (3) (c) Position assembled combustion chamber assembly and plenum as-
sembly on engine so drain holes are at six o'clock engine
position.
(d) Install bolts with head on aft side of compressor housing, in-
stall plates and secure plenum to compressor housing with
nuts. Tighten nuts (15, figure 201) to a torque value of 50
i nch-pounds.
NOTE: To prevent damage to a n t i - r o t a t i o n pin on ITT

sensor assembly, tighten nut u n t i l there is a
s l i g h t movement of ITT sensor assembly.
(4) (Post SB 72-0042) Tighten washer and jam nut securing ITT sensor
assembly to plenum at ITT sensor assembly boss. Tighten nut u n t i l
there is a s l i g h t movement of ITT sensor assembly.
(5) (Post SB 72-0042) Measure ITT sensor assembly c i r c u i t resistance

from pin A to pin B. The resistance shall be 3.0 to 7.0 ohms.
Measure resistance from either pin to ground. Resistance shall be
greater than 50,000 ohms. I f resistance is not within these lim-
i t s , reject ITT sensor assembly.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST PIPE, ENSURE

TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT NUMBERONE STRUT IS
ALIGNED WITH TOP OF ENGINE.
(6) I n s t a l l exhaust pipe assembly. Refer to 72-50-05, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
UP136688
72-40-01
Page 210
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Inspecti on/Check
A. Inspect Plenum Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Visually inspect plenum assembly for damage. Cracks are only per-
mitted on tack welds at secondary fuel nozzle bosses and can be
removed by grinding i f desired.
(2) Replace plenum assembly in Inspection/Check requirements are not
met.
B. Inspect Combustion Chamber Assembly (See Figures 205, 206, 207)
(1) Inspect combustion chamber assembly for cracks, buckles, erosion,

and deformation in accordance with Figure 205.
(2) Carefully inspect welded seams and spot welds for cracking.
NOTE: Inspect combustor swirls in place. Do not remove.
(3) Inspect combustor swirls (exit area) for cracks. (See figure 206.)
Cracks over 0.050 inch in length, intersecting cracks or cracks ex-
tending into the support flange are not acceptable.
(4) Dimensionally check Tab M, Figure 207. Tab must be parallel to

dome with clearance of 0.065 to 0.095 inch.
(5) Refer to Approved Repairs for repair procedures for combustion

chamber assembly.
(6) I f limits are exceeded and cannot be repaired in accordance with

Approved Repairs, replace combustion chamber.
C. Inspect Shouldered Bolts (5, Figure 201)

(1) Inspect shank portion of shouldered bolts used to locate combustion
chamber in turbine plenum for wear grooves. Wear grooves in bolt
shank shall not exceed 0.040 inch in depth.
(2) Replace bolts that do not meet Inspection/Check requirements.
. Cleani n~/Pai nting


(2) Clean plenum in accordance with 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, Clean-

ing Method No. 1 or 9.
(3) Clean combustion chamber assembly in accordance with 72-00-00,

UP136688
72-40-01
Page 211
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1/4 INCH MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE

DEFORMAFION.
CRACKS 1/4 INCH LENGTH

o 0
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLEON
0 0 EDGES. CRACKSMUST
o o 0 o
0 0 NOT INTERSECTOR BE IN
0 0 AN INTERSECTINGPLANE.
0 o C) o
°
o 0
CRACKS UP TO 2 INCHES IN
0 o LENGTH PERMISSIBLEIN
o 0 o
CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIREC-
o 0 0 TION PROVIDEDTHAT I/2
0 INCH PROGRESSIONWILL
D o NOT INTERSECTANOTHER
o CRACK OR CAUSEMATERIAL
o 0 BREAKAWAY,
0
0 MINOR STRESSRELIEFCRACKS I/4
0
INCH LENGTH MAXIMUM AROUND
0 HOLES ARE PERMISSIBLE.
C) ~O METAL THICKNESSON BOTH

O INNER AND OUTERWALLS
LESSTHAN 0.030 INCH DUE
TO EROSION IS NOT
O PERMISSIBLE.
DILUTION HOLE CRACKS FROM HOLE

TO HOLE ARE PERMISSIBLEEXCEPTWHERE
PROGRESSION COULD CAUSE MATERIAL
BREAKAWAY.
J
i
O I
J
I
CRACKEDWELDS NOT PERMISSIBLE
o I
o O
1
CRACKS FROM EDGE OF INTERNAL COOLING SKIRTSTO A DILUTION HOLE
ARE PERMISSIBLEEXCEPTWHERE PROGRESSIONCOULD CAUSE MATERIALBREAKAWAY, 1-44A-20188R1
Inspection of Combustion ChamberAssembly

UP136688
Figure 205 72-40-01

Page 212
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SUPPORTFLANGE
~ jSWIRL
EXIT AREA ~I~<
I
'
i= '
SECTION R- R
COMBUSTORSWIRL(TYP)
SWIRL (REF)
0.050 IN. MAX / /
1
! ,/
A~
./ } t
L._
I I 1
~ 0.050IN. MAX
1
VIEW A-A
1-44A-3473
Combustor Swirl Inspection

UP136688
Figure 206 72-40-01

Page 213
Dec 14/87
I~I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
FORMPARALLEL
w WITH
0.050TO
o.o8o,..~,o \ ~--- + ~
TABM (I"YP"
~ TABM " ~ *0.065TO
I+]
S PLACES) 0.095 IN.
SECTIONW" W
TABM INSPECTION
DETAIL Z
*CRITICAL 1-44A-2657
Inspection of Combustion ChamberAssembly Tab

UP136688
Figure 207 72-40-01

Page 214
Dec 14/87
Allied~JgnalAerospaceCompany
,,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~Signal
. Approved Repairs


F i l l e r rod (H525) Commercially available
(AMS5796)
NOTE: All welding shall be accomplished by qualified person-

R nel certified to Specification MIL-STD-1595A and famil-
iar with industry techniques commonly used for welding
high temperature alloys.
A. Repair Cracks Found in Combustion Chamber Assembly
(1) Use a 1/16 to 3/32 inch diameter d r i l l to stop d r i l l cracks that do

not exceed limits specified in Figure 205.
CAUTION: DO NOT WELDALONG A BRAZEDSEAM; HOWEVER, WELD-
ING ACROSS A BRAZEDSEAM IS ALLOWABLE.
NOTE: Combustion chamber must be solution heat treated

prior to repairing cracks which exceed 1 inch.
Repair of combustion chamber cracks exceeding 1
inch shall be accomplished at a Garrett authorized
service f a c i l i t y .
(2) Weld cracks that do not exceed 1 inch, using f i l l e r rod (H525) in
accordance with specification MIL-W-8611A. Grind welded areas
flush against base metal surface to eliminate airstream
obstruction.
UP136688
72-40-01
Page 215
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
R NOTE: Ensure stress relief cycle has been accomplished
R to combustion chamber i f weld repairs were accom-
R plished on dome.
4. A. (3) Weld repairs to dome surface (example; hangar bolt boss attachment
and swirl boss ring) requires the following stress relief cycle and
inspection of swirl bosses for distortion.
(a) Perform stress relief cycle by heating combustion chamber at

940 ±14% (1725 ±25°F) for 30 minutes, then rapid air cool.
(b) Visually inspect swirl bosses for distortion. Distortion is

not al I owed.
(4) Bend Tab M as required from the down angle to a position parallel
to the dome. The 0.065 to 0,095 inch dimension shall be met at the
parallel position. (See Figure 207.)
(5) Ensure repaired cracks are properly welded, perform fluorescent
penetrant inspection in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
UP136688
72-40-01
Page 216
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72 - TURBINE SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
TURBINE SECTION 72-50-00
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY 72-50-01

TAIL CONE 72-50-02

Removal/Instal I ati on 201
I nspecti on/Check 203
OIL INLET FITTING AND OIL JET 72-50-03

TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMPASSEMBLY 72-50-04

EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY 72-50-05

TURBINE SECTION
72-CONTENTS
UP136688
Page 1
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72 - TURBINE SECTION
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
INTERSTAGE TURBINE TEMPERATURESENSORASSEMBLY, 72-50-06
TURBINE BEARINGSUPPORTASSEMBLY,
AND TURBINE BEARINGASSEMBLY
R Inspection/Check 266
R Approved Repairs 272
THIRD STAGESTATOR, SECONDAND THIRD 72-50-07

STAGE TURBINEWHEELASSEMBLIES
FIRST STAGETURBINE WHEEL, FIRST AND SECOND 72-50-08
STAGE STATORASSEMBLIES
UP136688
TURBINE SECTION
72-CONTENTS
Page 2
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
TURBINE SECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
I. Genera I
The turbine section contains three axial flow turbine wheels and three sta-
tor assemblies. Gases from the combustion section flow through the s t a t o r
and wheels and exhaust to a.tmosphere through the space between the exhaust
pipe assembly and the t a i l cone. The turbine section provides power to
drive the compressor and through the reduction gear and shaft section to
drive the propeller.
2. Oil I n l e t Retainer Shield Assembly
The o i l i n l e t retainer shield assembly is a metal sleeve t h a t provides a

heat shield for the oil i n l e t f i t t i n g assembly and o i l pressure j e t .
3. Tail Cone
The t a i l cone attaches to the rear end of the turbine bearing support assem-
bly and provides a protective cover for the turbine bearing scavenge pump
and associated components.
4. Oil I n l e t F i t t i n g Assembly and Oil Pressure Jet
The oil i n l e t f i t t i n g assembly and oil pressure j e t connects to the rear

turbine bearing oil line and directs oil to the rear turbine bearing.
5. Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly
The o i l scavenge pump is a three-gallon-per-minute, geroter-type pump

located inside the t a i l cone t h a t forces o i l from the rear turbine sump to
the input housing assembly by pumping oil through the torsion shaft. The
pump is driven by the spur gearshaft which is in turn driven by the t o r s i o n
shaft.
6. Roller Bearing, Bearing Support Assembly, and Seal

The turbine bearing support assembly supports the r o l l e r bearing in a mount,
and also supports the seal and r o t o r at the rear of the main shaft. The
seal prevents entry of l u b r i c a t i n g o i l i n t o the turbine gas area.
UP136688
72-50-00
Page 1
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
7. IPost SB 72-0042) Interstage Turbine Temperature In,,dicatin9 System IITT)
The interstage turbine temperature sensor assembly (ITT) is a one-piece as-
sembly consisting of twelve sensing probes located at the second stage sta-
tor i n l e t position and a lead which connects to the compensating resistor
control. The sensing probes are ungrounded and enclosed in shields which
are attached to the second stage stator assembly. The ITT compensating res-
i s t o r control is mounted on the l e f t side of the engine,
UP136688
72-50-00
Page 2
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
I. Removal/Instal lation

Hilh temperature compound Fel-Pro Inc, Div of Felt Products Nifg Co,
Fel-Pro C5-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL
A. Remove 0 i i I n l e t Retainer Shield Assembly (See Figure 201)

(1) Remove rear turbine bearing o i l tube assembly. Refer to 79-20-08,
(2) Remove o i l i n l e t retainer shield assembly.
(3) Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices, f o r f u r t h e r disassembly

of engine.
B. I n s t a l l Oil I n l e t Retainer Shield Assembly (See Figure 201)

I f force is required to i n s t a l l shield, improper size

spacer may have been used to seat o i l i n l e t f i t t i n g
assembly. Refer to 72-50-03, Maintenance Practices,
for instructions f o r selecting and i n s t a l l i n g proper
size spacer.
(1) I n s t a l l shield assembly into exhaust pipe assembly. Shield assem-

bly should i n s t a l l f r e e l y into position without using force or mov-
ing o i l i n l e t tube.
72-50-01
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T P E 3 3 1 - 5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
f" /.-........ --.->,
l 7, ', "-.. ",*,'-::.. ',:-.

; :,'-; ~ , .. , ...~, ..::.. ',',,,
•, ,., :' ':. f ¢

J#, "" "',',.,,
" ,. " ;.
° '" ,,'. ,..
""
' ". ".". G::, ', .?':" "."

•. .. ;.. :.. ;'.:., ..~. ..:
: e:.. ". ;;".':'; "~: '. ".',, ;:
', '. ",. ".'...:...-j/ .-" " r,',. ,,'~,

• . , .. • ..$ ,-
',.:':i. "... ".... : ',~ //'r~.// "',. .'5
....... , ':t'. I" q l .',, \ F
•." .... "'.. ~ ,, ~ > . ",. ~.,~10
" -. . ',-.,',; ~",,,.~
7 \v
.... :" ........ 2 . . . . . 't"
25"/%f15
20/,~
E-44A-6650
Be NUT 20. BOLT

10. WASHER 25. SHIELDASSY
15. BOLT
UP136688
Oil I n l e t Retainer Shield Assembly Installation

Figure 201 72-50-01
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: ENSURE SHIELD ASSEMBLY IS PROPERLYCENTERED

AROUNDOIL INLET TUBE. MISALIGNMENTMAY CAUSE
DAMAGETO OIL INLET TUBE.
1. B. (2) Check shield assembly for alignment around oil inlet tube. Shield
assembly should be checked at both ends for alignment. I f not
properly aligned, check/perform the following.
(a) Ensure shield assembly is not installed improperly (rotated
180 degrees).
(b) Removeoil i n l e t tube and install different size (thickness)
spacer. Refer to 72-50-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(3) Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to threads of bolts

and secure shield assembl~, with bolts, nuts, and washers. Tighten
bolts (15, 20, figure 201) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(4) Install tail cone. Refer to 72-50-02, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.

. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect oil i n l e t retainer shield assembly for cracks, broken

welds, and distortion. Replace shield assembly i f cracked or
distorted.
(2) Repair minor broken welds in accordance with Approved Repairs.

CLEANING/PAINTING.
(2) Clean shield assembly in accordance with 72-00-00,
UP136688
72-50-01
Page 203
Dec 14/87
~ lsiied

4. Approved Repairs

R F i l l e r rod (Brazed Alloy 2100 or Commerciallyavailable
R CRES 347, MIL-R-5031, Class 5A)
A. Repair Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly (See Figure 201)

(1) Repair minor broken welds by rewelding in accordance with standard
R shop practices using f i l l e r rod (Brazed Alloy 2100 or CRES347).
UP136688
72-50-01
Page 204
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL CONE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

NUTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed item.

A. Remove Tail Cone (See Figure 201)
(I) Remove rear turbine bearing oil l i n e . Refer to 79-20-08, Mainte-

nance Practices.
(2) Removeoil inlet retainer shield assembly. Refer to 72-50-01,

(3) Remove bolts and washers. Remove t a i l cone and spacers.

of engine.
B. I n s t a l l Tail Cone (See Figure 201)

threads of bolts p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(1) I n s t a l l spacers and t a i l cone. Secure with washers and bolts.

R Tighten bolts (5, Figure 201) to a torque value of 35 inch-pounds
R and lockwire.
(2) Install rear turbine bearing oil tube assembly. Refer to 79-20-08,
72-50-02
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
• ..";/";, ......... ......

10 / ",,r .......... Z "%. '-,
5 I r " f". ':::" "
I l ~ J'/l ""',,''", ",
',, °°o?', ",
~..J" "
,,',,'o
'v,,,
'y'oo.,:., ',
:i: :::"?!="2
15
E-4.4.G-632
5. BOLT 15. TAIL CONE

10. WASHER 20. SPACER
UP136688
Tail Cone Installation

Figure 201 72-50-02
Page 202
Dec 14/87
lUlied~ignalAerosp~eCompan¥
lied
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Tail Cone (See Figure 201)
(I) Inspect tail cone for cracks and distortion. Replace i f cracked or
distorted.
(2) Repair minor broken welds in accordance with Approved Repairs.

(2) Clean tail cone in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,
4. Approved Repairs

Filler rod (Inconel 718) Bob Martin Co, 2209 Seaman, S El Monte,
(AMS5832) CA 91733
A. Repair Tail Cone (See Figure 201)
(1) Repair minor broken welds by rewelding in accordance with standard

shop practices using f i l l e r rod (Inconel 718 per AMS5832).
UP136688
72-50-02
Page 203/204
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL JET - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
. Removal/Instal I ation

Material or Compound Flanufacturer
High temperature compound Fel-Pro Inc, Div of Felt Products Mfg Co

A. Remove Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Jet (See Figure 201)
nance Practices.
(2) Remove oil i n l e t retainer shield assembly. Refer to 72-50-01,

(3) Remove tail cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Removenuts securing inlet tube and remove inlet tube gaskets,
spacer, and j e t . Retain spacers for use during assembly.

of engine.
72-50-0
UP136688
Page 20_
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
5. NUT (IPC FIG. 178) 30. GASKET

10. OIL INLET TUBE 35. OIL JET
15. SPACER 40. GASKET
UP136688
O i l I n l e t Tube and O i l J e t I n s t a l l a t i o n
Figure 201 72-50-03
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. B. I n s t a l l Oil I n l e t Tube and Oil Jet (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, for recommended

Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to

threads of studs p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(1) Temporarily close lower end of tube and apply low pressure a i r to
f i t t i n g end to check for leakage. There shall be no evidence of
leakage.
NOTE: Nuts securing o i l scavenge pump may be loosened to

allow a s l i g h t movement ( r o t a t i o n ) of oil scavenge
pump. Rotating o i l scavenge pump clockwise or
counterclockwise w i l l prevent binding of oil pres-
sure j e t during i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(2) I n s t a l l oil j e t with new gaskets.
(3) I f nuts securing o i l scavenge pump were loosened during i n s t a l l a -

tion of oil pressure j e t , tighten nuts to a torque value of 80
inch-pounds. After 30 to 45 minutes cold-flow, tighten nuts again
to a torque value of 80 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: SELECTING OF IMPROPERSIZE SPACER IN THE FOL-

LOWING STEP MAY CAUSE MISALIGNMENT AND DAMAGE
OF OIL INLET TUBE.
(4) Select spacer thick enough so oil i n l e t retainer shield assembly

can be installed without binding. Refer to 72-50-01, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
(5) I n s t a l l gaskets, spacer, and i n l e t tube. Tighten nuts (5, figure

201) to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds. After 30 to 45 minutes
cold-flow, tighten nuts (5) again to a torque value of 70 inch-
pounds.
(6) Ensure oil i n l e t tube is centered in boss of exhaust pipe. I f oil

i n l e t tube is not centered, accomplish the following as required.
(a) Loosen nuts securing oil i n l e t tube and move tube clockwise or
counterclockwise to center o i l i n l e t tube. Tighten nuts as
specified in step (5).
(b) Repeat step (5), using spacer of proper thickness to move oil
i n l e t tube forward or a f t , and center o i l i n l e t tube.
(7) I n s t a l l oil i n l e t retainer shield assembly in accordance with 72-

UP136688
72-50-03
Page 203
Dec 14/87

2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Jet (See Figure 201)
(I) Perfom fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with
70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.
(2) Visually inspect oil j e t for bent and distorted mounting flanges
and cracked bolt holes. Check o r i f i c e in end of j e t for nicks,
R burrs, and other i r r e g u l a r i t i e s . None are allowed.
R (3) Visually inspect oil inlet tube for distortion, wear, and oil pas-
R sage for obstructions.
R (a) Distortion is not allowed.

R (b) A wear step on wrenching flats is acceptable, provided i t does
R not exceed 0.03 inch depth. Other wear is not allowed.
R (c) Oil passage obstructions are not allowed.
(1) Clean a l l standard metallic hardware in accordance with 72-00-00,

(2) Clean spacer in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Clean-

ing Method No. 2 or 9.
(3) Clean oil i n l e t tube in accordance with 72-00-00,

(4) Clean oil j e t in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,

Cleaning Method No. 2 or 9.
72-50-03
UP136688
Page 204
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
. Removal/Instal I ati on

required for Removal/Instal lation.
Table 202 provides a l i s t of special tools, fixtures and

High temperature compound Fel-Pro Inc, Div of Felt Products Nfg Co,
Oil (MI L-L-7808) Canmercially ava i I able
Oil (Ml L-L-23699) Commercial l y avail able
Item Source/
1. Scavenge Pump Used to remove turbine 298442-1

Puller Assembly scavenge pump. (Replaced by
831103-1)
. Scavenge Pump Used to remove turbine 831103-i

P u l l e r Assembly scavenge pump. (Replaces
298442-1)
R . Scavenge Pump Used to remove turbine 831191-1

R Puller Assembly scavenge pump. (Replaces
R 831103-1)
72-50-04
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEGTO-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
",.'~ ,..~ ~ \
,,\
• \
X",
x •
15 : ,:,. ::
10 . . . . ~" ""
5 \ t ,,,: ........ f"
\ \ ~ "- .,, ,, .....•
E-44G -376
e NUT 20. GASKET

10. WASHER 25. SPURGEARSHAFT
15. PUMP ASSY
Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 72-50-04

Page 202
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. RemoveTurbine Scavenge Pump Assembly (See Figure 201)
nance Practices.
(2) Removeoil i n l e t retainer shield assembly. Refer to 72-50-01,

(3) Removetail cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Removeoil i nl et tube and jet. Refer to 72-50-03, Maintenance

Practices.
NOTE: Take measurements in step (c) at three places 120

degrees apart.
(5) Prior to turbine scavenge pump removal, measure the following.

(See Figure 202.)
(a) Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly.
(b) Mark the position of parallel bar.
(c) Measure from parallel bar to turbine scavenge pump nut mount-
ing flange.
(d) Repeat steps (a) through (c) two additional times 120 aegrees
apart.
(e) Average the three measurements and record for later use when
installing turbine scavenge pump.
(6) Remove washers and nuts. Using 298442-1 or 831103-i or 831191-i

scavenge pump puller, remove scavenge pump assembly, gasket and
spur gearshaft.
B. Install Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly (See Figures 201, 202 and 203)
NOTE: Prior to installing scavenge pump assembly and compo-

nents, torsion shaft coupling measurement and security
check shall be accomplished.
(i) Check torsion shaft coupling for proper positioning. See Figure
203.
(a) Check coupling for security by applying a torque value of 218
inch-pounds. Replace torsion shaft, i f movement occurs.
72-50-04
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP

NUT MOUNTING FLANGE
D IMENSION 'TO
BE MEASURED
1
I-IT-
'l
NE BEARING SUPPORT ASSY
I, , 1-44-G-512
Measurement for Proper Seating of Bearing Carrier

UP136688
Figure 202 72-50-04

Page 204
Dec 14/87
lied
R CAUTION: IF DIMENSION A EXCEEDS 2.07 INCHES, EITHER TOR-

R SION SHAFT COUPLING HAS MOVEDOR TORSION SHAFT
R IS IMPROPERLY INSTALLED.
R i. B. (1) (b) Measure from end of main shaft to face of coupling and record
R as Dimension A. I f Dimension A exceeds 2.07 inches, the f o l -
R lowing measurements shall be taken.
R 1 Measure from end of main shaft to end of torsion shaft and

R record as Dimension B.
R 2 Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A to obtain Dimension C

R - (A-B=C).
R a I f Dimension C is 1.54 to 1.58 inches, torsion shaft is

R improperly i n s t a l l e d . Refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance
R Practices.
R b I f Dimension C is not 1.54 to 1,58 inches, coupling has

R moved within the torsion shaft. Replace torsion shaft.
R Refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance Practices.
CAUTION: ENSURE GASKET IS INSTALLED PROPERLYWITH HOLES AND

NOTCHED AREAS ALIGNED WITH TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMPAS-
SEMBLY AND TURBINE BEARING SUPPORTASSEMBLY.
threads of studs p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(2) Install new gasket onto turbine bearing support assembly.
(3) I n s t a l l spur gearshaft and pump assembly using care so splines mesh
properly. Install nuts andwashers. Tighten nuts (5, figure 201)
to a torque value of 80 inch-pounds. Wait 30 to 45 minutes for
possible cold-flow of gasket and then tighten to a torque value of
80 inch-pounds.
NOTE: Take measurements in step (c) at three places 120
degrees apart.
(4) To ensure bearing c a r r i e r is properly seated, measure the
following. (See Figure 202.)
(a) Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly.
(b) Mark the position of parallel bar.
(c) Measure from parallel bar to turbine scavenge pump nut mount-
ing flange.
(d) Repeat steps (a) through (c) two additional times 120 degrees
apart.
UP136688
72-50-04
Page 205
Aug 16/89
l ~ J MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
j NUT
TORSION
tAFT
COUPLING
,t DIM. C --.--,,--I-.~-"DIM.
, DIMo A
SBG-222
Dim. A - Dim. B : Dim. C

UP136688
Measurement of Torsion Shaft Coupling

Figure 203 72-50-O4
Page 206
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
• DIM. K ~/
\ \
FRONT SPLINE REAR SPLINE
1-44G-748
R Spur Gearshaft Inspection

UP136688
R Figure 204 72-50-04

Page 207
Dec 14/87
lied
I. B. (4) (e) Average the three measurements. Comparemeasurement

previously recorded in step A.(5). Difference in measurements
shall be within +0.00/-0.020 inch.
(f) I f measurements are not within +0.00/-0.020 inch, remove tur-

bine scavenge pump in accordance with step A.(6). Remove, in-
spect, and, reinstall bearing carrier in accordance with
72-50-06, Maintenance Practices, prior to reassembly.
(5) Install oil i n l e t tube and j e t . Refer to 72-50-03, Maintenance

Practi ces.
2. Inspection/Chec k
A. Spur Gearshaft Assembly Inspection (See Figure 201)
(1) Visually inspect spur gearshaft splines and gear teeth for chip-
ping, pitting and excessive wear of base metal. I f any of these
conditions exist, replace spur gearshaft. Chipping, pitting, flak-
ing or wearing of gearshaft copperplating is acceptable and is not
cause for gearshaft rejection.
(2) Dimensionally inspect spur gearshaft. Replace spur gearshaft i f
Dimension K is not within 3.260 to 3.280 inches. (See Figure 204.)
(3) Visually inspect for evidence of wear on scavenge pump end of spur
gearshaft. Wear is not acceptable. Replace spur gearshaft i f
worn.
R (4) Visually inspect spur gearshaft oil passage for obstruction and
R contamination that may affect oil flow. Clean oil passage to
R remove contamination or obstruction.
B. Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly Inspection (See Figure 205)
(1) Inspect pump assembly drive gear for sheared pin. Replace pump as-
sembly i f pin is sheared.
(2) Inspect turbine scavenge pump assembly for freedom of rotation of
drive gear and shaft and gerotors. Replace pump assembly i f bind-
ing exists.
(3) Inspect pump assembly for chipped and broken gear teeth and for
cracks. I f any of these conditions exists, replace pump assembly.
(4) Closely inspect bushing in rear of pump assembly housing for evi-
dence of wear or looseness. Replace pump assembly i f wear or
looseness is evident.
(5) Inspect pump housing center bore for wear, in area where end of
spur gearshaft contacts housing. Wear limits are as follows.
(a) (Post SB 72-0533) Wear shall not exceed 0.010 inch.

UP136688
72-50-04
Page 208
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
E-.44G-966
5~ SCREW 15. ROTORSET (OUTER PORTION)

10. COVER 25. SCAVENGEPUMP
Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly

UP136688
Figure 205 72-50-04

Page 209
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. B. (5) (b) Replace pump assembly i f wear limits are exceeded.
(6) Remove pump assembly cover and inspect as follows. (See Figure
205,)
(a) Inspect for sheared pin in rotor set retainer.
(b) Using a suitable scribe or equivalent, apply light hand pres-

sure alternately on ends of rotor set retainer pin as shown in
Figure 207. I f movement of pin is detected, refer to Approved
Repairs.
(c) Perform rotor set dimensional inspection. Refer to Figure 206

for limits.
(d) Visually inspect rotor set for cracks, gouges, and wear step.
Cracks, gouges, or wear step is not allowed.
(e) Remove outer portion of rotor set and inspect pump assembly
bore for scoring. Minor scoring is allowed.
(f) Replace pump assembly i f inspection requirements are not met.
(7) Visually inspect cover sealing surface for roughness, nicks, and
scratches. Replace cover i f roughness, nicks or scratches are
evident.
NOTE: Lubricate rotor set with clean oil (MIL-L-7808)

prior to installation.
(8) Install outer portion of rotor set.
(9) Check pump shaft end play clearance. Pumpshaft end play clearance
shall be within 0.005 to 0.015 inch.
(10) Install cover on pump assembly as follows.
(a) Install cover on pump assembly. Install screws hand tight.
(b) Rotate shaft assembly while tightening screws. I f any binding

of the shaft is f e l t while tightening screws, loosen screws,
reposition cover and repeat procedure.
(c) Repeat step (b) until screws are tightened to a torque value
of 40 inch-pounds and shaft rotates without binding.
(d) Lockwire screws in pairs.
72-50-04
UP136688
Page 210
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lslied
DIA A
~ .D
SECTION I}-B
1-44G-5-/7
DIA A 1.0598 in. min

DIM. D 0.005 in. max.
Inspecting Rotor Set
UP136688
Figure 206 72-50-04

Page 211
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
A E R O S P A (" E
MAINTENAIICE MANUAL
. B. ( 1 1 ) Visually inspect studs for security and damage. Replace studs in
accoraance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
(12) I f inspection requirements are not met, replace or repair scavenge
pump in accordance with component overhaul manual listed in Appli-
cable Publications Table. (Refer to Introduction section.)

(2) Clean spur gearshaft in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/

Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1 or 9.
(3) Clean scavenge pump housing in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/

Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1 or 2.
R 4. Approved Repairs
R A. Repair Loose Rotor Set Retainer Pin (See Figure 207)
R CAUTION: USE CARE NOT TO BREAKPIN WHENUPSETTING. IF PIN IS

R BROKEN, SCAVENGEPUMPASSEMBLYMUST BE SENT TU
R AUTHORIZED COMPONENTOVERHAUL FACILITY FOR REPLACE-
R MENT OF PIN.
R (1) Upset rotor set retainer pin to a maximum depth of 0.010 inch.
R (2) Using a suitable scribe or equivalent, apply l i g h t hand pressure

R alternately on ends of rotor set retainer pin. Pin movement is not
R acceptable.
R (3) Check pump shaft end play clearance. Pumpshaft end play clearance
R shall be within 0.005 to 0.015 inch.
72-50-04
UP136688
Page 212
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A

AEROSPACE
UPSET PIN APPROX0.010 IN.
© © • ~
APPLYLIGHTHANDPRESSURE
TO EACHEND OF PIN.
INSPECTION A REPAIR A
SBG-804
Rotor Set Retainer Pin Inspection and Repair

Figure 207 72-50-04
UP136688
Page 213/214
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

required for Removal/Instal lation.
A. RemoveExhaust Pipe Assembly (See Figure 201 or 202)
(1) Remove rear turbine bearing o i l l i n e . Refer to 79-20-08, Mainte-

nance Practices.

(4) Removeoil i nl e t tube and oil jet. Refer to 72-50-03, Maintenance

Practices.
(5) (Post SB 72-0446) Remove( i f installed) EGT harness (used for en-
gine performance test only), refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance Prac-
tices or remove nuts, bolts, covers, gasket and plug.
(6) Removebolts, washers, and exhaust pipe assembly.

of engine.
72-50-05
UP136688
R Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
J ~ l MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 7 2 - 0 1 - 2 7 )
/:,>-;;,:,.2;.::..;,.;.,- -.-..-~...
/), ,-
..,:.>, ," ., ::;,/',../ ;,.:
.,.,., .../'- . -% . %/ .
rt /"/ '"" ":', " k
• /,{~z-:. : .. .-.......,,
/:,'://;y/#/.::,,:.:~...... v. • .. '": "
:./.,-,~ ,--~,....:..~ %. ,': -.. . "... :
=
'~/
t ~,:~
~,-" ............ . ,:..'-~
. , . " . , '~,, "Y'w.
'..".. .
"~v,v'.,;
oI ~ , , ~. :,- ./,/ " " "":'~'""...,:,~.";"",;..
.,:~.:::. "" .....'" ~"
::-::"
, , , ~:" . . . . . /, --,~... . . . ~" ,... .. ...
f ~
.,~ ,,~--~..i":'../~,:
./..v ~K,:~,~ ,,. ¢....-.:. " ..:~.
• v.., ": ?:; :::.'.:v
t.",, ',, ". ..;Z'.
.", ,,",::
"",.;/../. ,,
~ ",,~..;.,...~/..... ,..:.,;<... .,i:~,,:,~. • '..;;;:,;:.;,,>::~
f. ~ = -,,,,~ \\\ ..;,......,,,:,......... , .:.t..-.. , :;:;? .;:.;
/ °N'---'~"~,\ '~.,• 4 t.' I . . :t*l'~
.. ; .,./.
n",~':" , ,.,' t,/ t " ':,..
"t "
;,',. /, "" s , ' q . , . , .~,.. • •
\\% ..-o.
,.,,,,.,..,, .....
.. %. o * . . ° ,~:
..
, ,
. ,
~/\ \ \.X\ \\\:i--.,...... I~-:;;.y .,-;...., .;.,, ,,

~\ \ \ ~ \\ LII.;;:'::::'.-.."
.....~.~
.L:&'/,
.... ".::",, )7-- ". "
"/'./.,;~"."
. ! ':: . .,..&..;,." /
~'.
...... /,i,:,,.,.,,..... v,,.....,..,,.;:;;.,
l E-44A-6666
10
. BOLT 10. EXHAUSTPIPE ASSY
(Pre SB 72-0446)
UP136688
Exhaust Pipe Assembly Installation

Figure 201 72-50-05
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B. I n s t a l l Exhaust Pipe Assembly (See Figure 201 or 202)

threads of bolts and nuts p r i o r to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
Ensure proper o r i e n t a t i o n of exhaust pipe assembly to
allow i n s t a l l a t i o n of o i l i n l e t f i t t i n g and retainer
shield assembly.
(1) I n s t a l l exhaust pipe assembly.
(2) I n s t a l l bolts to secure exhaust pipe assembly. Tighten bolts (5,

f i g u r e 201 or 202) sequentially in 12 to 15 inch-pounds increments
(3) I n s t a l l oil i n l e t tube and oil j e t . Refer to 72-50-03, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
(4) Install t a i l cone. Refer to 72-50-02, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(5) I n s t a l l o i l i n l e t retainer shield assembly. Refer to 72-50-01,
MAI NTENANCE PRACTICES.
(6) I n s t a l l rear turbine bearing oil line. Refer to 79-20-08, MAINTEN-
ANCE PRACTICES.
(7) (Post SB 72-0446) I n s t a l l EGT harness (used f o r engine performance

test only). Refer to 77-20-03, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES or i n s t a l l
covers and secure with bolts and nuts. Tighten bolts (20, figure
202) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(8) (Post SB 72-0446) I n s t a l l gasket and plug on Ps5 a i r port on ex-

haust pipe assembly. Tighten plug (30) to a torque value of 65 to
70 i nch-pounds.
UP136688
72-50-05
Page 203
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
\ '.~-. ....."
~'..~>-\. . . . . . . . . . . . ;" ..,x

..-,:.-' ;:~.,: ~
-,,, , \ \\
~~.. ::..~:..'~, ,\ ~
11 , ,~ ..~;,v.~.,, \.;\,~ ..~\ . ~...
~'~ ' ~"' " . --~" C ~ \ ~ .' "-~ ; ".'~
A ~ ~ \\\ ~,......;; ,,,.~:, ~,.

I'11 ° \ \~X\~..~ x~\\ ,~ , "%, ..... -.,," ,. ,',~," \'.'i:;'.'.,v ......:': '
I~I ~ \ \-X\ \ \\ /~ " - ~ . . . . . . . . . - ," "" \'~"..."" .'!," '
\ \\ \ \,X\ /
/-'%,
3 5 ~ E-44G-684
5. BOLT *25. COVER

10. EXHAUSTPIPE ASSY *30. PLUG
"15. NUT *35. GASKET
*20. BOLT
*(Post SB 72-0446 only)
(Post SB 72-0446)
UP136688
Exhaust Pipe Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 202 72-50-05
Page 204
Dec 14/87
/Allied
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Exhaust Pipe Assembly (See Figure 201 or 202)

R (1) Inspect exhaust pipe assembly for cracks as follows.
R (a) Visually inspect flanges and mounting bosses for bolt hole and
R weld cracks. No cracks allowed.
R (b) Visually inspect outer exhaust pipe body, inner weld joining
R outer shell, and ring for cracks. No cracks allowed.
R (c) Cracks in tack welds are permissible.

R (d) If cracks are suspected perform fluorescent penetrant inspec-
R tion in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
- R (2) Inspect exhaust pipe assembly flanges and body for buckling and
R distortion. No buckling or distortion allowed.
R (3) I f inspection requirements are not met, refer to Approved Repairs.
3. Cl eani ng/Painti n9

(2) Clean exhaust pipe assembly in accordance with 72-00-00,
4. Approved Repairs
Filler rod (347, Commercially avail able

MIL-W-6858, Class 5B)
UP136688
72-50-05
Page 205
Aug 16/89

ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R NOTE: All welding shall be accomplished by qualified person-

R nel certified to Specifications MIL-T-5021 and familiar
R with industry techniques commonly used for welding high
R temperature alloys.
4. A. Repair Exhaust Pipe Assembly (See Figure 201 or 202)
R (1) Weld repair cracks on flanges, bosses and body, using f i l l e r rod
R (CRES347), in accordance with MIL-W-6858, Class B.
R (2) To ensure repaired cracks are properly welded, perform fluorescent

R penetrant inspection in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
R Practices.
R (3) (Part No. 869578-2 or 3103359-1) After welding, process anneal as
R follows.
(a) Heat to 1625 ±25°F and hold 1 hour.
(b) Cool to room temperature at rate equivalent to air-cool or
faster.
R (4) Repair buckling or distortion by cold straightening to obtain the

R best possible condition. After cold straightening, perform
R fluorescent penetrant inspection in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-
R dard Practices.
UP136688
72-50-05
Page 206
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERSTAGE TURBINE TEMPERATURESENSORASSDIBLy~

TURBINE BEARING SUPPORTASSEMBLY, AND TURBINE
BEARING ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
Any approved engine oil Commercially avail able
Grease (Acryloid 615 or Royal Lubricants Co, Inc, 101 Eisenhower

NPC61361-1 from AlliedSignal Engines,
High t~perature compound Fel-Pro Inc, Div of Felt Products Mf9 Co,
Marking materials

Silver)

(Grade 127-i/2) Pittsburgh, PA 15212
72-50-06
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Item
1. Spline and Socket Used for tightening (or 284196-2-I

Wrench (Multiplier) loosening) the main
shaft retaining nut when
assembling and stretching
the main shaft. Use with
200 foot-pounds standard
torque wrench.
NOTE: The fol l owing item

is a component of
284196-2-1
Multiplier.
Splined Adapter 284196-21

la. Splined Adapter Used with 284196-2-i 294760-1
wrench when tightening or
loosening main shaft nut.
Engages splines of main
shaft on engines contain-
ing main shaft with internal
threads in aft end.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 202
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
Tabl e 202. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment (Cont)
Item
No. Nomencl
atu re Use Part No.
. **Shaft Stretching Used to stretch main 284572-3-1/

Fixture (20 Ton) shaft to i n s t a l l and -4-1
remove main shaft nut.
NOTE: The following

itmls are
components of
284572-3-1 Shaft
Stretching Fixture.
A. Adapter (Socket) "284572-19/

296862-1
D. Nut 284572-27
NOTE: The following

i terns are
components of
284572-4-1 Shaft
Stretching Fixture.
A. Adapter (Socket) 296862-1

D. Nut 284572-27
F. Packing HS28775-237
G. Anti-Rotation Handle 832000-1
"296862-1 Socket preferred. (Not a component of 284572-3-1.)

R **Refer to 72-ST-06, Special Tools Pamphlet for maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s .
72-50-06
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Item
2a. Stretching Shaft Used with 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft 296131-1

stretching f i x t u r e to stretch
main shaft and remove main
shaft nut.
2b. Socket Wrench Used in lieu of 284572-19 296862-1

socket when d i f f i c u l t y is
encountered during removal
of main shaft nut with
284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft
stretching f i x t u r e .
2c. Broaching Used to broach internal splines "293498-1/

Fixture of main shaft a f t e r shaft 831023-1
stretching operation.
2d. Shaft Support Used to back-up compressor 285772-1-1

bearing when using 293498-1
broaching f i x t u r e .
"831023-1 Broaching Fixture preferred

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 204
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item
No. Nomencl a tu re Use Part No.
R . *Shaft Stretching Used to stretch main shaft 298420-1/-2

Fixture (30 Ton) to install and remove main -3
shaft nut.
NOTE: The following

i terns are
components of
298420-1
Shaft Stretching
Fi xtu re.

B. Nut 295194-6
E. Adapter 297642-1
F. Socket Wrench Z97643-1
NOTE: The following

items are
components of
298420-2
Shaft Stretching
Fi xtu re.

B. Nut 295194-6
E. Adapter 297642-1
G. Stretchin9 Shaft 297644-2
*Refer to 72-ST-21, Special Tools Pamphlet for maintenance instructions.
72-50-06
UP136688
Page 204A/204B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lied
Item
o Shaft Stretching Used to stretch main shaft 298420-1/-2/

(Cont) Fixture (30 Ton) to install and remove main -3
shaft nut.
NOTE: The following

items are
components of
298420-3
Shaft Stretching
Fixture.

B. Nut 295194-6
E. Adapter 297642-1
I. Anti-Rotation Handle 832001-1
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
Table 202, Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment (Cont)
I tern
NOTE: Special tools listed below are for general use,
4. "C" Clamp Set Used to hold stators together. 284496-1-1
5. Bearing Puller Used to remove turbine end 284637-1-1

bearing inner race from the
main shaft when replacing
bearing or seal.
, Shim Clearance Gage Used to hold the compressor 284988-1-1

and turbine wheel shaft in the
extreme axial positions when
checking amount of shims re-
quired for proper f i r s t stage
impel ler clearance.
. Bearing Puller Used to remove bearing support 287386-1-1

and outer race of bearing from
turbine bearing support assembly.
. Bearing Presser Used to press turbine bear- 287915-1
and Holder ing outer race and mount into
bearing support while maintaining
alignment of anti-rotation tab.
. Retaining Ring Guide Used to aid in installing 291756-1

thrust ring and spring washer
in turbine bearing cavity.
10. Liner and Support Used with standard Power- 291900-2

Torque Holder Dyne Torque Wrench to in-
Assembly stall or remove a TPE turbine
bearing support assembly from
the stator retaining nut.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 206
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: TO AVOID INJURY WHEN USING HYDRAULIC SHAFT STRETCHING
FIXTURE (20 TON OR 30 TON RAM) ENSURE PRESSURE VALUES
USED ARE CORRECT FOR FIXTURE BEING USED.
NOTE: There are three special tools to stretch the main shaft. For
c l a r i t y , a complete proceaure for use of each of the three shaft
stretch tools is provided. The instructions for removal of com-
ponents to gain access to the mainshaft is provided in step I.A.
The procedure for use of the three shaft stretch tools is listed
below.
. Use 284196-2-1 spline and socket wrench (multiplier) with

284196-21 splined adapter (used on Main Shaft, Part No.
894079-1 which has internal splines only) or 294760-1
splined adapter (used on Main Shaft, Part No. 894079-2 which
has internal threads). Paragraph I.B.
. Use 284572-3-I/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture (20 ton) with

284572-25 stretching shaft (used on Main Shaft, Part No.
894079-1 which has internal splines only) or 296131-1 s t r e t -
ching shaft (used on Main Shaft, Part No. 894079-2 which has
internal threads). Paragraph 1.C.
. Use 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture (30 ton) on Main

Shaft, Part No. 894079-2 which has internal threads. Para-
graph I.D.
72-50-06
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Table 203 provides a l i s t of special tools, main shaft part number
and reference to perform main shaft stretch by application.
Table 203. Special Tools to Perform Main Shaft

Stretch to Remove/Install Main Shaft Nut
Special Tool Main Shaft P/N Reference
284196-2-1 Multiplier Paragraph I.B.

Used with:
284196-2i Splined Adapter 894079-1 (internal
splines only)
294760-I Splined Adapter 894079-2 (internal
threads)
284572-3-1/-4-1 Shaft Stretching Paragraph I.C.

Fixture used with:
284572-25 Stretching 894079-1 (internal
shaft splines only)
296131-1 Stretching 894079-2 (internal
shaft threads)
298420-1/-2/-3 Shaft 894079-2 (internal Paragraph I.D.

Stretching Fixture threads)
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 208
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. A. Removal of Interstage Turbine Temperature Sensor Assembly, Turbine Bear-

ing Support Assembly and Turbine Bearing Assembly.
(1) (Post SB 72-0042) Disconnect ITT sensor assembly. Refer to
nance Practices.
(3) Removeair anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(4) Remove plenum pressure plumbing. Refer to 73-10-13, Maintenance
Practices.
(5) Removefuel flow divider and drain valve. Refer to 73-10-07, Main-
tenance Practices.
(6) Removefuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to 73-10-09, Main-
tenance Practices.
(7) Remove ignition leads and igniter plugs. Refer to 74-20-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(8) (Codes CA-CC, DA, GA) Remove fireshields. Refer to 71-30-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(11) Removeoil inlet f i t t i n g and oil j e t . Refer to 72-50-03, Mainte-

nance Practices.
(12) Removeturbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to 72-50-04, Mainte-

nance racticesS.
NOTE: RemoveEGT harness assembly i f required.
(13) (Post SB 72-0446) Remove ( i f installed) EGT harness assembly.

(14) Removeexhaust pipe assembly. Refer to 72-50-05, Maintenance
Practices.
(15) Removeturbine plenum assembly and combustion chamber assembly.
(16) (Post SB 72-0042) Remove interstage turbine temperature (ITT) sen-
sor assembly. (See Figure 201.)
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 209
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
25
z-::.:.-%.
~ ~,;:
~ .~.\' ,~,~.:
• ~.~.:':
~"-': :~-."; 3 15 / E-44A-2883
2O
o NUT 20. PROBESHIELD

10, BOLT 25. ITT SENSORASSY
15. WASHER
(Post SB 72-0042) Interstage Turbine

UP136688
Temperature Sensor Assembly

Figure 201 72-50-06
Page 210
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: Do not remove ITT system unless a malfunc-

tion or v i s i b l e damage is indicated. Refer
to Inspection/Check.
1. A. (16) (a) Locate open ends of the ITT sensor assemblies (two o'clock
position looking forward) and mark a l i n e (orientation mark)
on second stage stator midway between open ends.
(b) Remove bolts and washers securing ITT sensor assembly and
shields to second stage stator assembly.
(c) Remove nuts securing ITT sensor assembly to turbine bearing

support,
CAUTION: AVOID EXCESSIVE BENDING OR SHARP RADIUS

BENDS IN LEADS WHEN REMOVING INTERSTAGE
TURBINE TEMPERATURESENSOR ASSEMBLY.
RADIUS OF LEAD BENDS SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 0.50 INCH.
(d) Remove ITT sensor assembly from second stage stator assembly
beginning with number I or 12 probe position (two o'clock
position looking forward) and working around stator.
(e) Remove probe temperature shields from second stage stator

assembly.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 211
Dec 14/87
~ I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
olo..~ m. o
~o. -i-.:.'.-.. " %.°
A ,'"%:', :.
#' I;'--
jJ'" ".e'-'. ",
95 90 ,, i ....... ... .~.,,
, .-.,;j.... . .. ,/,
,a ;,C ,,', "~, ¢, , "f
35 " ~ d
50
E-44G-683
/.~,~jj 45
5. NUT 50. SHIM

10. NUT 70. GASKET
15. RETAINER 75. BEARING (INNER RACE)
20. BEARING (OUTER RACE) 80. SEAL ROTOR
25. MOUNT 85, AIR-OIL SEAL
35. PIN 90. BOLT
40. PIN 95. GASKET
45. TURBINE BEARING CARRIER
(Pre SB 72-0089)
Turbine Bearing and Bearing Carrier
UP136688
Assembly Instal l a t i o n
Figure 202 72-50-06
Page 212
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)

PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Partial disassembly of turbine bearing assembly is
required to accomplished removal/installation of main
shaft nut and remaining components of turbine bearing
assembly.
. A. (17) (Pre SB 72-0089) Remove turbine bearing assembly (partial
disassembly). (See figure 202.)
(a) Removenut (10) and retainer (15).
CAUTION: USE CARETO PREVENTDAMAGETO OR LOSS OF

BEARING ROLLERS.
(b) Removebearing outer race (20), mount (25) and bearing car-
r i e r (45) using 287386-1-1 puller.
NOTE: If washer is broken, magnet may be used to
remove parts. After removal, reconstruct
washer to ensure all broken parts have been
removed. Discard washer.
(c) Removeshims. Note quantity and thickness of shims removed

to aid reassembly.
(d) Removegasket.
(e) Remover o l l e r bearing and cage from inner race.

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 213
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
100 , "" '~.':".i':" "".

10 5 \ ""', ;';"";,.-.'..:-..
''/ ""'::',.:. "'~>,i]..
,,.,, ../
25
15
3o
5. NUT 55. TURBINE BEARING CARRIER

10. RETAINER 60. SHIM
15. NUT 80. GASKET
20. BEARING (OUTER RACE) 85. BEARING (INNER RACE)
25. THRUSTRING 90. SEAL ROTOR
30. KEY 95. AIR/OIL SEAL
35. SPRINGWASHER 100. BOLT
45. PIN 105. GASKET
50. PIN
(Post SB 72-0089)
Turbine Bearing and Bearing Carrier
UP136688
Assembly Instal lation

Figure 203 72-50-06
Page 214
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Partial disassembly of turbine bearing assembly is

required to accomplished removal/installation of main
shaft nut and remaining components of turbine bearing
assembly.
. A. ( 1 8 ) (Post SB 72-0089) Removeturbine bearing assembly (partial
disassembly). (See figure 203.)
(a) Removenut (5) and retainer (10).
CAUTION: USE CARETO PREVENTDAMAGETO OR LOSSOF

BEARING ROLLERS.
NOTE:
,,, ,,
I f washer is broken, magnet may be used to
remove parts. After removal, reconstruct
washer to ensure all broken parts have been
removed. Discard washer.
(b) Removebearing outer race (20), keys (30), thrust ring (25),
washer (35) and bearing carrier (55) using 287386-1-1 puller.
(c) Removeshims. Note quantity and thickness of shims removed

to aid reassembly.
(d) Removegasket.
(e) Remove r o l l e r bearing and cage from inner race.

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 215
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
1. A. (19) Remove turbine bearing support assembly. (See figure 204.)
(a) (Post SB 72-0042) Removenuts to disconnect ITT sensor as-
sembly from turbine bearing support assembly.
NOTE: Do not disassemble bolts, pins, or studs for
support unless damage is indicated by
ins pecti on.
R When indexing components during disassembly,

R readily accessible during assembly.
(al) Using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753), mark turbine
bearing support assembly, locking nut, second stage stator
(at ITT stud location) and compressor housing prior to
removal.
(b) Soak threads of turbine bearing support assembly with pene-
trant oil (CRC 3-36) and tap sharply around the full circum-
ference of stator locking nut prior to installation of
291900-2 holder assembly.
(c) Allow threaded j o i n t to soak with oil for 15 to 20 minutes.
(d) Position 291900-11 base assembly around locking nut with phe-
nolic pads on dish of stator and liner and secure. Turn the
three jackscrews in adapter until locking pins engage slots
in locking nut.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 216
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
, ~-{-":.-,""<..j~
•.il,.::~,,,'......'~.,,,;~!~!!~.
',.,,~:,,"~::;:i',,;,::::~:.."~:,i
.:'... "", '~"::.k ". >:', ',', //"
!~"
1:17)
!
~, ">
, ,~,,.{:,'b, j- #,'~ "
E-44A-2869
5. NUT 30. TURBINE BEARING

15. BOLT SUPPORT ASSY
20. PIN 35. WASHER
25. STUD
Turbine Bearing Support Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n
UP136688
Figure 204 72-50-06

Page 217
Dec 14/87
i
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. A. (19) (e) Place 291900-17 matched ring set (component of 291900-2 hol-
der assembly) around turbine bearing support assembly with
three notches in the inside diameter of holder engaging the
three lugs on the outside diameter of turbine bearing support
assembly. Secure the two halves of matched set ring with the
two 291900-23 hinge pins (component of 291900-2 holder assem-
bly) located 180 degrees apart. The matched ring set is
resting on base plate adapter inside the four lugs on the
base assembly.
(f) Place 291900-15 torque cylinder (component of 291900-2 holder
assembly) on 291900-17 matched ring set (component of 291900-
2 holder) aligning torque cylinder with pins on matched ring
set. Position reaction cylinder over torque cylinder and
secure to base assembly.
(g) Install power-dyne on drive shaft.

(h) Operate power-dyne and attempt to loosen turbine bearing sup-
port assembly.
(i) I f turbine bearing support assembly f a i l s to loosen, repeat

steps (b) through (h) extending the oil soaking of threads to
one hour and sharply tapping the circumference of locking nut
at 15 minute intervals.
(J) I f turbine bearing support assembly s t i l l f a i l s to loosen,

pack turbine bearing support assembly with dry ice and allow
15 to 20 minutes for turbine bearing support assembly to
cool. Apply heat to outside diameter of locking nut using
propane torch. Do not allow temperature of nut to exceed
371C (70OF). Using power-dyne attached to 291900-2 holder
assembly, attempt to loosen support assembly.
(k) I f turbine bearing support assembly s t i l l f a i l s to loosen
repeat steps (b) through ( j ) .
(i) I f above procedures f a i l to loosen turbine bearing support

assembly, i t is recommended locking nut be s p l i t axially in
two places 180 degrees apart to relieve torque on turbine
bearing support. Nut may be s p l i t by scoring with hand grin-
der and s p l i t t i n g with chisel.
(m) Remove turbine bearing support and washers. Note quantity
and thickness of washer(s) removed to aid reassembly.
(n) Install 284496-1-1 "C" clamp set to hold stators together.
(See figures 205 and 206.)
(o) Install and secure turbine plenum assembly with four evenly
spaced nuts and bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50
to 60 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 218
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
1. A. (19) (p) Place a parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange, as

NOTE: Take four depth micrometer readings 90 de-

grees apart and use the average.
(q) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to
end of main shaft (four places, averaged), record as Dimen-
sion B (stretched) for reference during assembly. (See
Figure 205.)
(r) Remove turbine plenum assembly.
(s) Determine existing turbine build dimension. (See Figure

206.)
R 1 Place 284988-1-1 gage on bench with handle up, then place
R plenum assembly down over gage. Reach down through ex-
R haust pipe assembly opening in plenum and l i f t gage up and
R bolt to plenum assembly with exhaust pipe assembly bolts
R in every other hole. Tighten bolts to a torque value of
R 80 inch-pounds.
R _2 Temporarily set plenum assembly in place on compressor

R housing assembly so that drain valve bosses are at the 6
R o'clock position, and secure with bolts and nuts in every
R third hole. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50 to 60
R i nch-pounds.
R CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN "T" HANDLEOF

R 284988-1-1 GAGE, OVERTIGHTENINGCOULD
R CAUSE ERRONEOUS DIMENSION X INDICATION
R AND DAMAGETO COMPRESSORBEARING.
R TIGHTEN "T" HANDLETO A TORQUEVALUE
R OF 15 ±0 INCH POUNDSAFTER CONTACTIS
R MADE WITH MAIN SHAFT.
R NOTE: Take four depth micrometer readings 90

R degrees apart and use the average.
R 3 Tighten "T" handle of 284988-1-1 gage to a torque value of

R 15 +0 inch-pounds after contact is made with main shaft
R and rotor group is centered. With a depth micrometer,
R measure from face of gage to third stage turbine wheel as-
R sembly as shown in Figure 206. Record as Dimension X for
R reference during assembly.
R _4 Remove plenum assembly and 284988-1-1 gage from engine.

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 219
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
DIM B (STRETCHED)
MAIN SHAFTN U T ~ DIM B (UNSTRETCHED)

I
J ~ PARALLELBAR
I
/.~.,--.-.--" PLENUMASSY
"C" CLAMPSET
~ .~..~-.-COMPRESSOR
-.-- HOUSING ASSY
F-44G- 145
NOTE: ENGINE ROTATED IN VERTICAL POSITION (INLET DOWN).

REQUIRED DIMENSION B (STRETCHED) EQUALSRECORDED
DIMENSION B (UNSTRETCHED) MINUS0.036 TO 0.039 INCH.
UP136688
Shaft Stretch Measurements

Figure 205 72-50-06
Page 220
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
R NOTE: I f main shaft is stretched using 284196-2-1 Multiplier,

R perform the following checks in accordance with
R 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
R NTS system ground check

R NTS system check by f l i g h t check
R 1. B. Removal/Installation Procedures Using 284196-2-1 Multiplier with

284196-21 or 294760-1Splined Adapter
(1) Removal of turbine main shaft nut, bearing (inner race), seal rotor
and seal ( a i r / o i l ) .
CAUTION: MAINTAIN ENGINE IN A VERTICAL POSITION
(INTAKE DOWN)TO MAINTAIN ENGAGEMENTOF
CURVIC COUPLINGS.
NOTE: Use 284196-21 splined adapter with 294196-2-1

multiplier on main shaft with internal
splines only. Use 294760-1 splined adapter
with 284196-2-1 multiplier on main shaft with
internal threads (0.50 inch from turbine end
of main shaft).
(a) Install splined adapter (as applicable) into 284196-2-1
multi plier.
CAUTION: REMOVE TORSION SHAFT BEFORE USING 294760-1
SPLINED ADAPTER, TO PREVENTDAMAGETO EN-
GINE COMPONENTSAND/OR LOSS OF TORQUE
CALIBRATION WITH DISPLACEMENT OF TORSION
SHAFT.
NOTE: When using 294760-1 splined adapter on main
shaft with internal threads, diaphragm assem-
bly and torsion shaft shall be removed.
When using 284196-2-1 splined adapter on main
shaft with internal splines only, i t is not
necessary to remove diaphragm and torsion
shaft, proceed to step (d).
(b) Removediaphragm assembly. Refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance
Practices.
(c) Removetorsion shaft. Refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance
Practices.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 221
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
CAUTION: ENSURE SPLINES OF SPLINED ADAPTERMESH

WITH INTERNAL SPLINES OF MAIN SHAFTAND
SOCKET ON 284196-2-1 MULTIPLIER IS SEATED
PROPERLY ON MAIN SHAFTNUT, PRIOR TO
REMOVING MAIN SHAFT NUT.
1. B. (1) (d) Install 294196-2-1 multiplier with splined adapter over main
shaft nut.
(e) Install breaker bar on 284196-2-1 multiplier to hold rotating

group in restrained position.
(f) Hold breaker bar stationary, move handle of 284196-2-1 mul-

t i p l i e r in a counterclockwise direction to remove main shaft
nut.
(g) Remove 284196-2-1 multiplier and main shaft nut.
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF BEARING COMPONENTSMUSTBE

(h) Remove bearing inner race using 284637-1-1 puller.
(i) Remove seal rotor and a i r / o i l seal from main shaft.
(J) Remove bolts and gaskets (bolt seals) from a i r / o i l seal.
CAUTION: TO PREVENTENTRYOF FOREIGN OBJECTS INTO

ENGINE, COVERROTATINGGROUPAND END OF
MAIN SHAFT.
(k) This concludes the removal procedures using 284196-2-1 mul-

t i p l i e r with splined adapter. I f further disassembling of
components is required, proceed to 72-50-07, Maintenance
Practices.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 222
Aug 12/91
/lied
MAIN SHAFT NUT

THIRD STAGE TURBINE
WHEEL ASSEMBLY
~LENUM
%SSEMBLY
COMPRESSOR
HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
F-44A-20339RI
UP136688
Determini ng Turbine Build Dimensions

Figure 206 72-50-06
R Page 223
Aug 12/91
lied

PROCUDURES.
MAINTAIN ENGINE IN VERTICAL POSITION (INTAKE DOWN)
FOR ASSEMBLY PURPOSESAND TO MAINTAIN CURVIC RELA-
TIONSHIP OF IMPELLERS.

threads of bolts, studs, screws, and nuts and to
threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing
f i t t i n g s located aft of the fireshield unless otherwise
speci f i ed.
. B. (2) Installation of turbine main shaft nut, bearing (inner race), seal
rotor and seal ( a i r / o i l ) .
(a) Separate bearing outer race (Figure 202 or 203) from bearing
inner race. Place outer race to one side for later assembly.
(b) Using a micrometer, measure depth (three places, 120 degrees

apart, use average) of turbine bearing carrier and record for
later use as Dimension U on assembly data worksheet. (See
Figure 207 and Table 204.)
(c) Install gaskets (95, Figure 202 or 105, Figure 203) on bolts
(90, Figure 202 or 100, Figure 203). Place gasket on a i r / o i l
seal. Place bolts with gaskets through holes in a i r / o i l seal
and gasket (Figure 202 or 203).
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL

R BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAR EITHER
R SYNTHETIC RUBBERGLOVESOR NYLONMESH
R GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENEPALMSAND
R FINGERS. IN CASE NONEOF THE ABOVEARE
R AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVESSHALL BE
R WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE IN-
R STALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
INSTALL SEAL ROTORWITH FLAT SIDE AGAINST

AIR/OIL SEAL.
R (d) Ensure a i r / o i l seal and seal rotor are dry; do not lubricate
R prior to installation. Install a i r / o i l seal on main shaft on
~op of aft curvic coupling. Place seal rotor ( f l a t side down)
Figure 202 or 203) down on a i r / o i l seal.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 224
Aug 12/91
lliedSi lnal
A v.. o s PA c E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (2) (e) Apply l i g h t coat of grease (Acryloid 615 or HF-825) to r o l l e r s

of bearing inner race. Place bearing inner race with r o l l e r s
onto main shaft and push down into position against seal
r o t o r . Rollers can be held in place in inner race with use of
p l a s t i c strap.
CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT TURBINE

NUT OTHER THAN APPROVED ENGINE OIL IS
PROHIBITED. OTHERLUBRICANTS MAY RESULT
IN A CORROSIVE ATTACK TO THE MAIN SHAFT
TURBINE NUT.
(f) Lubricate threads and face of new main shaft nut with approved
engine o i l .
CAUTION: INSTALL NEW SHAFT NUT. DO NOT REUSE NUT

REMOVED AT DISASSEMBLY.
ENSURE PROPERENGAGEMENTOF CURVIC

COUPLINGS.
(g) Seat curvic coupling gaskets and curvic couplings as follows.
1 Install new main shaft nut.
2 Install i-7/16 inch boxed end wrench or socket on main

shaft nut and tighten nut using hand pressure.
3 I f main shaft is not flush with nut or does not protrude

beyond nut, curvic couplings are not properly en~agea. I f
curvic couplings are not properly engaged, slightly rotate
(shake) third stage wheel by hand until curvic couplings
are properly seated. Repeat steps --1 through --3.
Loosen main shaft nut until hand t i g h t .
(h) Install and secure turbine plenum assembly with four evenly
spaced bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50 to 60
inch-pounds.
(i) Place parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange.


end of main shaft (four places averaged). Record as Dimension
B (unstretched). (See Figure 205.) Removeparallel bar.
72-50-06
UP136688
R Page 225
Aug 4/94
lied
TURBINE BEARING
CARRIER
DIM. U
DIM. T J~ DIM. X
TURBINE BEARING
SUPPORT ASSY
DIM. P
DIM. S
BUILD DIMENSION
2.277 INCHES
I
DIM. M Y DIMENSION
2.176 INCHES
F-44G-374
UP136688
Turbine Build Dimensions

Figure 207 72-50-06
R Page 226
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany /~P~llied
NOTE: Table 204 provides sample worksheet for determining turbine build
dimensions.
Table 204. Turbine Build Dimensions Data and Calculation Sample Worksheet
1. Record Dimension S. n.
2. Record Dimension T. n.
3. Record Dimension U. in.
4. Record Dimension X. in.
5. Dimension Y. 2.176 in.
6. Add lines 4 and 5 and record result. In.
. Subtract line 1 from line 6 and record result. In.

dimension M (Figure 207). Dimension M is
the thickness of washers (Figure 204) required
between third stage stator assembly and
turbine bearing support assembly.
8. Subtract line 2 from line 4 then add line 3 and record in.
result.
. Subtract line 8 from 2.277. Result equals thickness in.

of shims required for dimension P (Figure 207).
Dimension P is the thickness of shims
(Figure 202 or 203) required between turbine
bearing support assembly and turbine bearing support.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 227
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal •islied
NOTE: Use 284196-21 splined adapter with 294196-2-1 mul-

t i p l i e r on main shaft with internal splines only.
Use 294760-1 splined adapter with 284196-2-1 mul-
t i p l i e r on main shaft with internal threads (0.50
inch from turbine end of main shaft).
1. B. (3) Perform main shaft stretch as follows.
(a) Install splined adapter into 294196-2-1 multiplier.
CAUTION: ENSURE SPLINES OF SPLINED ADAPTERMESH

WITH INTERNAL SPLINES OF MAIN SHAFTAND
SOCKET ON 284196-2-1 MULTIPLIER IS SEATED
PROPERLY ON MAIN SHAFT NUT, PRIORTO
STRETCHING MAIN SHAFT.
(b) Install 284196-2-1 m u l t i p l i e r with splined adapter over main

shaft nut.
(c) Install breaker bar on 284196-2-1 multiplier to hold rotating
group in restrained position.
(d) Hold breaker bar stationary, move handle of 284196-2-1 mul-
t i p l i e r in a clockwise direction to tighten main shaft nut.
While tightening main shaft nut, frequently check main shaft
stretch.
R (e) Place a parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange, as
R shown in Figure 201.
R NOTE: Take four depth micrometer readings 90 de-
R grees apart and use the average.
R (f) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to

R end of main shaft (four places, averaged), record as Dimension
R B (stretched). (See Figure 201.)
NOTE: Use Dimension B recorded in step A.(19)(q) as

a guide only in obtaining proper shaft
stretch. The required shaft stretch (the
difference between Dimension B unstretched
and Dimension B stretched) is equal to 0.036
to 0.039 inch.
(g) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded
in step ( 2 ) ( j ) , and Dimension B (stretched) is 0.036 to 0.039
inch, shaft stretch is within limits. See Figure 205.
(h) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

in step ( 2 ) ( j ) , and Dimension B (stretched) is less than 0.036
inch, repeat steps (a) through ( f ) , until required Dimension B
is obtained. See Figure 205.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 228
Aug 12/91
lied
I. B. (3) (i) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

in step ( 2 ) ( j ) , and Dimension B (stretched) is more than 0.039
inch, repeat steps (a) through ( f ) , loosen main shaft nut as
required until required Dimension B is obtained. See Figure
205.
(j) Remove284196-2-1 multiplier with splined adapter and turbine

plenum assembly.
(k) Place 284988-I-1 shim clearance gage on bench with "T" handle
up. Place plenum assembly down over gage. Reach down through
exhaust pipe assembly opening in plenum and l i f t gage and bolt
gage to plenum assembly with exhaust pipe assembly bolts in
every other hole. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 80 inch-
pounds.
(1) Temporarily set plenum assembly in place on compressor housing

assembly so drain valve bosses are at the six o'clock posi-
tion, and secure with bolts and nuts in every third hole.
Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50 to 60 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN "T" HANDLEOF 284988-1-1

SHIM CLEARANCE GAGE, OVERTIGHTENINGCOULD
CAUSE ERRONEOUS DIMENSION X INDICATION AND
DAMAGETO COMPRESSOR BEARING. TIGHTEN"T"
HANDLE TO A TORQUE VALUE OF 15 ±0 INCH
POUNDS AFTER CONTACT IS MADEWITH MAIN
SHAFT.
(m) Tighten "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to a

torque value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact is made with
main shaft and rotating group is centered.
(4) Determine thickness of washers and shims required for Dimension M

and Dimension P as follows.

(a) With a depth micrometer measure from face of gage to third
stage turbine wheel assembly as shown in Figure 206. Record
as Dimension X.
R (b) I f Dimension X is with +0.002 inch of Dimension X taken in
R step A.(19)(t) during disassembly, assemble engine with same
R thickness of washers (Dimension M) and shims (Dimension P) as
R removed during disassembly.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 229
Aug 12/91
~/lied
R 1. B. (4) (c) I f Dimension X is not within ±0.002 inch of Dimension X taken

R in step A(19)(t) during disassembly, determine required thick-
R ness of washers (Dimension M) and shims (Dimension P) as
R follows.
NOTE: Turbine bearing support assembly (see

Figure 204) and turbine bearing assembly
(see Figure 202 or 203) are not installed
on engine at this time.
R 1 Determine measurements for Dimension S and Dimension T with

R turbine support assembly and turbine bearing assembly
R separated on bench. (See Figure 207.)
R 2 Record results for Dimension S and Dimension T on Table

R 204.
R 3 Calculate thickness of washers required for Dimension M.
R Refer to Table 204, lines 5, 6 and 7.
R 4 Calculate thickness of shims required for Dimension P.

R Refer to Table 204, lines 8 and 9.
(5) Rotate engine 180 degrees (intake up).

NOTE: The torsion shaft and diaphragm assembly may be
installed at this time.
(6) Install torsion shaft. Refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance Practices.

(7) Install diaphragm assembly, 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
(8) Rotate engine 180 degrees (intake down) and remove turbine plenum
assembly. Remove284988-1-1 gage from turbine plenum assembly.
(9) Remove three 284496-1-1 clamps from second stage stator. Install
required amount of washers (Dimension M) as determined in step (4).
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 230
Aug 12/91
Allied~ignl AerospaceCompany
lied
NOTE: Align ITT securing studs on turbine bearing sup-

port assembly approximately 4 inches counter-
clockwise from ITT harness prior to tightening
turbine bearing support assembly and locking nut
to allow for proper final alignment of ITT
harness.
Align index marks on turbine bearing support as-

sembly, locking nut, and second stage stator.
A11 tools I i sted below are components of 291900-2

l i n e r and support torquing holder assembly.
1. B. (10) Position turbine bearing support assembly down over engine assem-
bly and assemble locking nut to turbine support assembly. Screw
support assembly and nut together hand tight. Install 291900-2
holder as follows.
(a) Position 291900-11 base assembly around locking nut with phe-
nolic pads on dish of stator and l i n e r and secure. Turn the
three jackscrews in adapter until locking pins engage slots
in locking nut.
(b) Place 291900-17 matched ring set around turbine bearing sup-
port assembly with three notches in the inside diameter of
holder engaging the three lugs on outside diameter of turbine
bearing support assembly. Secure two halves of matched ring
set using two 291900-23 hinge pins located 180 degrees apart.
The matched ring set is resting on base plate adapter inside
the four lugs on base assembly.
(c) Place 291900-15 torque cylinder on matched ring set aligning

holes in torque cylinder with pins on matched ring set.
Position 291900-13 reaction cylinder over torque cylinder and
(d) Install power-dyne on drive shaft. Operate power-dyne to
26,000 inch-pounds (1917 to 2166 foot-pounds). Remove
holder.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 231
Aug 12/91
lied

I. B. (11) Install turbine bearing carrier and components. (See Figure 202
or 203.)
NOTE: A i r / o i l seal, bolts, and gaskets, seal
rotor, turbine bearing inner race, and main
shaft nut were previously installed onto
main shaft.
R (a) (Pre SB 72-0089) Assemble bearing mount to bearing outer

race.
(b) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place bearing support on 287915-1-1 holder
with anti-rotation slot at the 12 o'clock position as viewed
by the mechanic.
R (c) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place bearing outer race and mount into
bearing support with anti-rotation slots in alignment.
NOTE: Maintain relationship of anti-rotation slots
in bearing outer race and mount with
retainer anti-rotation tab while aligning
d r i l l e d holes in retainer with alignment
pins on face of bearing support.
(d) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place retainer on bearing outer race and
push race and mount into bearing support using press part of
287915-1-1 holder.
(e) Measure Dimension A (see Figure 208) as follows.
_1 Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly.
2_ Mark the position of parallel bar.
3 Measure Dimension A.
4 Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 two additional times 120 degrees

apart.
Average the three measurement and record as Dimension A.
CAUTION: ENSURE DOWELPIN IN TURBINE BEARING CAR-

RIER LOCATES IN HOLE IN TURBINE BEARING
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.
R (f) Install required amount of shims (Dimension P) determined in

step (4). Install turbine bearing carrier into turbine bear-
ing support assembly.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 232
Aug 12/91
~:~lslied
I° B. (11) (g) Secure turbine bearing carrier and shims into turbine bearing
support assembly with spacers, washers, and nuts. Tighten
(h) Measure Dimension B. (See Figure 209.)
1 Place parallel bar in position as marked in step (e)2.
2 Measure Dimension B.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 two additional times with parallel

bar positioned as i n step (e)2.
4 Average the three measurements and record as Dimension B.
(i) To ensure proper seating of bearing carrier, add Dimension B

determined in step (h)4), Dimension P (determined in step
I4) and Dimension U determined in step (2)(b)). Total of
Dimensions B, P and U shall equal Dimension A (determined in
step (e) 5) within ±0.002 inch. (B + P + U = A (±0.002
inch)). -
NOTE: Use caution to ensure bolt heads do not bind
on a i r - o i l seal. Bolt (Part No. 865397-2)
has a scribe mark on threaded end. Align
scribe mark at position shown on Figure 209.
Tighten nuts on these bolts a quarter turn
and check position of scribe mark. Continue
this procedure until bolts are snug.
(J) (Pre SB 72-0089) Install retainer so anti-rotation tab en-

gages anti-rotation slot in bearing outer race (see Figure
209, View A) and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts (10, Figure
202) to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds, wait 30 to 45
minutes for possible cold-flow of gasket. Tighten nuts (10)
again to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds. Use caution dur-
ing tightening of nuts to ensure heads of bolts do not bind
on a i r / o i l seal.
(k) (Post SB 72-0089) Install spring washer and thrust ring into
bearing support using 291756-1-1 guide. Position key slot on
thrust ring 45 degrees clockwise from vertical.
(I) (Post SB 72-0089) Install keys in key slots on thrust ring,

install bearing outer race and retainer.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 233
Aug 12/91
lslied
PARALLELBAR
/
BEARING
TURBINE BEARIh
SUPPORT ASSY
Check Seating of Turbine Bearing Carrier

UP136688
Figure 208 72-50-06

R Page 234
Aug 12/91
~ S lied
~ ANTI-ROTATION TAB
sc'J~B~s ~ . RETA,,.,ER
/ ~ DOWELPIN
(OPPOSITESIDE)
BOLT
VIEW A SCRIBE
MARKS
BOLT
SCRIBE
MARKS
'JNG
~IER
ETAINER
OIL TRANSFER
BOSS
,OWELPIN
OPPOSITESIDE)
E
F-44G-835
VIEW B
UP136688
Locating Anti-Rotation Tab or Oil Transfer Boss

Figure 209 72-50-06
R Page 235
Aug 12/91
lied
NOTE: Use caution to ensure bolt heads do not bind on

a i r - o i l seal. Bolt (Part No. 865397-2) has a
scribe mark on threaded end. Align scribe mark
at position shown on Figure 209. Tighten nuts on
these bolts a quarter turn and check position of
scribe mark. Continue this procedure until bolts
are snug.
I. B. (11) (m) (Post SB 72-0089) Position retainer so oil transfer boss is

located approximately 120 degrees clockwise from vertical
(see Figure 209, view B) and aligns with keys in thrust ring.
Secure with nuts. Tighten nuts (5, Figure 203) to a torque
value of 70 inch-pounds. Wait 30 to 45 minutes for possible
cold-flow of gasket and tighten nuts (5) again to a torque
value of 70 inch-pounds. Use caution when tightening nuts to
ensure heads of bolts do not bind on a i r / o i l seal.
(n) Ensure rotating assembly rotates freely. I f interference is
noted, remove and reinstall components as required to ensure
bolts, seal, and shims are correctly installed and oriented.
(12) (Post SB 72-0042) Install interstage turbine tBnperature (ITT)

sensor assembly. (See Figure 201.)
(a) Install twelve probe temperature shields into twelve probe
holes in second stage stator assembly.
CAUTION: AVOID EXCESSIVE BENDINGOR SHARP RADIUS BENDS

IN LEADS WHENINSTALLING ITT SENSORASSEMBLY.
RADIUS OF LEAD BENDSSHALL NOT BE LESS THAN
0.50 INCH.
(b) Install ITT sensor assembly into second stage stator assembly
beginning with either probe number 1 or number 12). (Probes
1 and 12 are the two end probes on the sensor assembly.)
Progressively install probes into shields from starting probe
(either 1 or 12) around engine until a l l twelve probes are
seated. I f necessary, mounting clamps can be temporarily
removed or relocated to aid installation of probes. After
installation of sensor assembly relocate mounting clamps over
probe mounting bolt holes.
UP136688
72-50-06
R Page 236
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
NOTE: Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A)
to studs and nuts.
1. B. (12) (c) Secure ITT sensor assembly and shields to second stage stator
assembly with washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (10) to a
torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Check for existence of gap
between each shield and probe as shown in Figure 204,
72-40-01, Maintenance Practices. Gap shall not exceed 0.002
inch. If gap exceeds maximum, seat probe by tapping with
brass pin to bring gap within limits. Re-tighten bolts to a
torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Lock bolts by bending tab of
washers over edge of sensor assembly clamps and up on bolts.
(d) Attach ITT sensor assembly to turbine bearing support assem-

bly studs with nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of
20 inch-pounds.
(13) Refer to 72-40-01, Maintenance Practices, for installation of ple-
num assembly and combustion chamber assembly.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 237
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
NOTE: Main Shaft, Part No. 894079-1 has internal splines only.
Main Shaft, Part No. 894079-2 has internal threads. I f
part number of main shaft is unknown, a visual check of
the turbine end of main shaft is required.
Use 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretch f i x t u r e with 284572-25

stretching shaft on Main Shaft, Part No. 894079-1
( i n t e r n a l l y splined only). Use 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft
stretching f i x t u r e with 296131-1 stretching shaft on Main
Shaft, Part No. 894079-2 ( i n t e r n a l l y threaded).
I. C. Removal/Installation Procedures Using 284572-3-I/-4-1 Shaft Stretch Fix-

ture with 284572-25 or 296131-1 Stretching Shaft
(1) Removal of turbine main shaft nut, bearing (inner race), seal
rotor, and seal ( a i r / o i l ) .
(INTAKE DOWN) TO MAINTAIN ENGAGEMENTOF
CURVIC COUPLINGS.
REMOVE TORSION SHAFT BEFORE USING STRET-
CHING SHAFT 284572-25 WITH 284572-3-1/-4-1
SHAFT STRETCH FIXTURE TO PREVENT DAMAGETO
ENGINE COMPONENTSAND/OR LOSS OF TORQUE
CALIBRATION WITH DISPLACEMENT OF TORSION
SHAFT.
NOTE: For Main Shaft Part No. 894079-1 with i n t e r -

nal splines only, continue to steps (a)
through (c) and proceed to step (e).
For Main Shaft Part No. 894079-2 with i n t e r -
nal threads, proceed to step (d) and continue
on.
To properly use 284572-3-1/-4-1 f i x t u r e to

remove or i n s t a l l main shaft nut during shaft
stretch on main shaft with internal splines
only, the removal of diaphragm assembly and
torsion shaft is required. This gives access
to compressor end of main shaft to insert
284572-25 stretching shaft.
(a) (Main shaft with internal splines only) Remove diaphragm as-
sembly, refer to 72-10-13, Maintenance Practices.
(b) (Main shaft with internal splines only) Remove torsion

shaft, refer to 72-10-14, Maintenance Practices.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 238
Aug 12/91
/lied
1. C. (1) (c) (Main shaft with internal splines only) Insert 284572-25
stretching shaft, threaded end f i r s t through compressor end of
main shaft until stretching shaft bottoms. Stretching shaft
will protrude at turbine end of main shaft.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT THE 296131-1 STRETCHINGSHAFT

IS THREADED INTO THE MAIN SHAFT UNTIL
FULLY INSTALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2
TURNS). LOOSENSTRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN
TO PREVENT SHAFT BINDING DURING REMOVAL OF
MAIN SHAFT NUT.
NOTE: Use 296131-1 stretching shaft with

284572-3-1/-4-1 fixture on main shaft with
of main shaft).
(d) (Main shaft with internal threads) Install and tighten
296131-1 stretching shaft into turbine end of main shaft until
f u l l y installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of
thread engagement). Loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
(e) Install 284572-23 two piece adapter between seal and aft cur-
vic coupling. Install MS28775-237 packing (furnished) around
two piece adapter to hold in place.
NOTE: I f d i f f i c u l t y is encountered in removing main

shaft nut, use 296862-1 socket wrench in
place of 284572-19 adapter socket provided
with 284572-3-1/-4-1 fixture.
(f) Install 284572-19 adapter socket or 296862-1 socket wrench on

main shaft nut. Install ram assembly over stretching shaft,
two piece adapter, and socket.
(g) Install and tighten 284572-27 nut on stretching shaft against
aft end of ram assembly. While holding stretching shaft,
loosen nut to 1/4 inch gap between nut and ram assembly.
UP136688
72-50-06
R Page 239
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
WARNING: ENSURE 295608-1 SAFETY COVERIS INSTALLED

OPERATION OF FIXTURE WITHOUTSAFETY COVER
IN PLACE COULDRESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. C. (1) (h) Install 295608-1 safety cover on ram assembly. Connect hy-
CAUTION: USE EXTREMECARE NOT TO DAMAGETHE MAIN SHAFT

WHILE USING 284572-3-1/-4-1 FIXTURE. A NOMI-
NAL PRESSUREOF 5500 PSIG SHOULDBE ENOUGHTO
LOOSEN MAIN SHAFT NUT. IF A SEPARATION
BETWEEN MATINGSURFACES OF NUT, BEARING INNER
RACE, ROTOROR AFT CURVIC COUPLING IS OB-
SERVED, NO FURTHERSTRETCH IS REQUIRED. DO
NOT EXCEED6500 PSIG.
(i) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5500 psig) to main

shaft, turn adapter socket counterclockwise to loosen main
shaft nut. Loosen nut and slowly decrease hydraulic pressure
as required until nut is loose and hydraulic pressure is zero.
(j) Remove284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture and stretching

shaft. Removemain shaft nut.

(k) Remove bearing inner race using 284637-1-1 puller.
(I) Remove seal rotor and a i r / o i l seal from main shaft.

(m) Remove bolts and gaskets (bolt seals) from a i r / o i l seal.
(n) This concludes the removal procedures using 284572-3-1/-4-1

shaft stretching fixture with stretching shaft. I f further
disassembling of components is required, proceed to 72-50-07,
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 240
Aug 12/91
~:~/lied

MAINTAIN ENGINE IN VERTICAL POSITION (INTAKE DOWN) FOR

ASSEMBLY PURPOSES AND TO MAINTAIN CURVlC RELATIONSHIP OF
IMPELLERS.
TO PREVENT ENTRYOF FOREIGNOBJECTS INTO ENGINE, COVER
ROTATING GROUPAND END OF MAIN SHAFT.
NOTE: Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to threads of
bolts, studs, screws, nuts and to threads (except f i r s t two
threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s located aft of the
fireshield unless otherwise specified.
1. C. (2) Installation of turbine main shaft nut, bearing (inner race) seal
inner race~ Place outer race to one side for later assembly.
apart use average) of turbine bearing carrier and record for
(c) Install gaskets (95, Figure 202 or 105, Figure 203) on bolts
(90, Figure 202 or 100, Figure 203). Place gasket on a i r / o i l
CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE
MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAREITHER SYN-
THETIC RUBBERGLOVESOR NYLONMESHGLOVESWITH
POLYETHYLENE PALMSAND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE
OF THE ABOVEARE AVAILABLE, CLEANCOTTONGLOVES
SHALL BE WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE
INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
AIR/OIL SEAL.
(d) Ensure a i r / o i l seal and seal rotor are dry; do not lubricate
prior to installation. Install a i r / o i l seal on main shaft on
top of aft curvic coupling. Place seal rotor ( f l a t side down)
(Figure 202 or 203) down on a i r / o i l seal
(e) Apply light coat of grease (Acryloid 615 or HF-825) to rollers

of bearing inner race. Place bearing inner race with rollers
rotor. Rollers can be held in place in inner race with use of
plastic strap.
UP136688
72-50-06
R Page 241
Aug 12/91
lied
NOTE: Table 205 provides sample worksheet for determining turbine
build dimensions.
1. Record Dimension S. in.
2. Record Dimension T. in.
5. Dimension Y. 2. 176 in.
6. Add lines 4 and 5 and record result. in.
. Subtract line 1 from line 6 and record result. in.

R dimension M (Figure 207). Dimension M is
R the thickness of washers (Figure 204) required
R between third stage stator assembly and
R turbine bearing support assembly.
result.
. Subtract line 8 from 2.277. Result equals thickness in.

of shims required for Dimension P (Figure 207).
Dimension P is the thickness of shims (Figure
202 or 203) required between turbine bearing
support assembly and turbine bearing support.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 242
Aug 12/91
/lied
CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFTTURBINE

NUT OTHERTHAN APPROVEDENGINE OIL IS
PROHIBITED. OTHERLUBRICANTS MAY RESULT
IN A CORROSIVE ATTACKTO THE MAIN SHAFT
TURBINE NUT.
R 1. C. (2) (f) Lubricate threads and face of new main shaft nut with approved
engine o i l .
CAUTION: INSTALLNEW SHAFTNUT. DO NOT REUSENUT
ENSURE PROPERENGAGEMENTOF CURVIC

COUPLINGS.
1 Install new main shaft nut.
R 2 Install 1-7/16 inch boxed end wrench or socket on main

3 I f main shaft is not flush with nut or does not protrude

beyond nut, curvic couplings are not properly engaged. I f
curvic couplings are not properly engaged, slightly rotate
(shake) third stage turbine rotor by hand until curvic
couplings are properly seated. Repeat steps ! through ~.
4 Loosen main shaft nut until hand t i g h t .
R (h) Install and secure turbine plenum assembly with four evenly
R spaced nuts and bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50
R to 60 inch-pounds.
(i) Place a parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange, as

R (J) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to

R B (unstretched). (See Figure 205.) Remove parallel bar.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 243
Aug 12/91
~/lied
1. C. (3) Perform main shaft stretch as follows.

NOTE: For Main Shaft Part No. 894079-1 with inter-
nal splines only, continue to next step (a)
then proceed to step (c).
For Main Shaft Part No. 894079-2 with inter-
nal threads, proceed to step (b) then conti-
nue on to next step.
(a) (Main shaft with internal splines only) Insert 284572-25
stretching shaft, threaded end f i r s t through compressor end of
main shaft until stretching shaft bottoms. Stretching shaft
w i l l protrude at turbine end of main shaft.
CAUTION: ENSURE 296131-1 STRETCHINGSHAFT IS
THREADED INTO THE MAIN SHAFT UNTIL FULLY
LOOSEN STRETCHINGSHAFT OUT 1/4 TURNTO
PREVENT SHAFT BINDING DURING INSTALLATION
OF MAIN SHAFT NUT.
NOTE: Use 296131-1 stretching shaft with

284572-3-1/-4-1 fixture on main shaft with
of main shaft).
(b) (Main shaft with internal threads) Install and tighten
296131-1 stretching shaft into turbine end of main shaft until
f u l l y installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of
thread engagement). Loosen stretching shaft I/4 turn.
(c) Install 284572-23 two piece adapter between seal and aft cur-
vic coupling. Install MS28775-237 packing (furnished) around
two piece adapter to hold in place.
(d) Install 284572-19 adapter socket on main shaft nut. Install

ram assembly over stretching shaft, two piece adapter, and
socket.
(e) Install and tighten 284572-27 nut on stretching shaft against

aft end of ram assembly. While holding stretching shaft,
loosen nut to 1/4 inch gap between nut and ram assembly.
WHENUSING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
OPERATION OF FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY COVER
IN PLACE COULDRESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY.
(f) Install 295608-1 safety cover on ram assembly. Connect hy-
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 244
Aug 12/91
Allied,SignalAerospaceCompany
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWINGSTEPS, APPLY

A NOMINAL 5500 PSIG. DO NOT EXCEED5720
PSIG.
1. C. (3) (g) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5500 psig) to main
shaft, turn adapter socket clockwise to tighten main shaft
nut. Do not exceed 5720 psig. Release pressure and remove
284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft stretching fixture and stretching shaft.
R (h) Place a parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange, as

R (i) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to
NOTE: Use Dimension B, recorded in step A.(19)(q),
as a guide only in obtaining proper shaft
difference between Dimension B unstretched
and Dimension B stretched) is equal to 0.036
to 0.039 inch.
(J) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

(k) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

inch, repeat steps (a) through ( i ) , add 100 psig increments
above the previous pressure used, until required Dimension B
is obtained. See Figure 205. Do not exceed 5720 psig.
(1) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded
inch repeat steps (a) through ( i ) , loosen main shaft nut as
205. Do not exceed 5720 psig.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 245
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. C. (3) (m) Main Shaft Part No. 894079-1 (internal splines only) Check
torsion shaft for f i t with main shaft as follows.
1 Install torsion shaft into main shaft from impeller end; do
not use force to i n s t a l l .
I f torsion shaft w i l l not f i t properly into main shaft,

remove torsion shaft.
3 Install and secure 285772-1-1 shaft support to face of ac-

cessory drive housing with four bolts. Tighten handle of
shaft support until shaft support contacts compressor main
shaft.
NOTE: There are two broaching fixtures, 831023-1

(preferred) and 293498-1, used to broach in-
ternal splines in main shaft for properly
f i t t i n g torsion shaft. Step4 pertains to
the use of 831023-1 Broaching Fixture and
step 5 pertains to the use of 293497-1
Broaching Fixture.
Insert 831023-1 broaching fixture threads f i r s t through

compressor end of main shaft.
a Install 284572-23 two piece adapter between seal and a f t
curvic coupling. Install MS28775-237 packing
b Install ram assembly over 831023-1 broaching fixture and

two piece adapter.
C Install and tighten 284572-27 nut on 831023-I broaching

fixture against aft end of ram assembly.
Connect hydraulic pump hose to ram assembly.
Apply enough pressure to pull broaching fixture through

main shaft.
Remove 831023-1 broaching fixture, 284572-3-1/-4-1 shaft
stretching fixture, and 285772-1-1 shaft support.
Reinstall torsion shaft into main shaft to check for

correct f i t .
I f f i t is not correct, repeat procedure.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 246
Aug 12/91
~/lied
1. C. (3) (m) 5 Install 293498-1 shaft spline broaching fixture on turbine

end.
Broach internal spline of main shaft.
b Remove 293498-1 shaft spline broaching fixture and

285772-1-1 shaft support.
i
C Reinstall torsion shaft into main shaft to check for
correct f i t .
d I f f i t is correct, remove torsion shaft.
I f f i t is not correct, repeat procedure.
(n) Remove turbine plenum assembly.
(o) Place 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage on bench with "T" handle
up. Place plenum assembly down over gage. Reach down through
exhaust pipe assembly opening in plenum and l i f t gage and bolt
gage to plenum assembly with exhaust pipe assembly bolts in
every other hole. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 80 inch-
pounds.
(p) Temporarily set plenum assembly in place on compressor housing
assembly so drain valve bosses are at the six o'clock posi-
tion, and secure with bolts and nuts in every third hole.
Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50 to 60 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN "T" HANDLE OF
284988-1-1 SHIM CLEARANCE GAGE. OVER-
TIGHTENING COULDCAUSEERRONEOUSDIMENSION
X INDICATION AND DAMAGETO COMPRESSOR
BEARING. TIGHTEN"T" HANDLETO A TORQUE
VALUE OF 15 ±0 INCH POUNDSAFTERCONTACT
IS MADEWITH MAIN SHAFT.
(q) Tighten "T" handle of 284988-1 shim clearance gage to torque
value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact is made with main
shaft and rotating group is centered.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 247
Aug 12/91
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL =~$ignal
R I. C. (4) Determine thickness of washers and shims required for Dimension M

R and Dimension P as follows.

R (a) With a depth micrometer measure from face of gage to third

R stage turbine wheel assembly as shown in Figure 206. Record
R as Dimension X.
R (b) I f Dimension X is within ±0.002 inch of Dimension X taken in
R (c) I f Dimension X is not within ±0.002 inch of Dimension X taken

R in step A.(19)(t) during disassembly, determine required
R follows.
R NOTE: Turbine bearing support assembly (see

R Figure 204) and turbine bearing assembly
R (see Figure 202 or 203) are not installed
R on engine at this time.

R 205.
R Refer to Table 205, lines 5, 6 and 7.
R 4 Calculate thickness of shims required for Dimension P.

R Refer to Table 205, lines 8 and 9.
(5) Rotate engine 180 degrees (intake up).

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 248
Aug 12/91
lied
NOTE: (Main shaft with internal splines only) The torsion
shaft and diaphragm assembly may installed at this
time.
1. C. (6) (Main shaft with internal splines only) Install torsion shaft.
(7) (Main shaft with internal splines only) Install diaphragm
(8) Rotate engine 180 degrees (intake down) and remove turbine plenum
assembly. Remove284988-1-1 gage from turbine plenum assembly.
required amount of washers (Dimension M) as determined in step (4).
port assembly approximately 4 inches counterclock-
wise from ITT harness prior to tightening turbine
bearing support assembly and locking nut to allow
for proper final alignment of ITT harness.
Align index marks on turbine bearing support,
locking nut, and second stage stator established
in removal.
All tools listed below are components of 291900-2

liner and support torquing holder assembly.
(10) Position turbine bearing support assembly down over engine assembly
and assemble locking nut to support assembly. Screw support assem-
bly and nut together hand tight. Install 291900-2 holder as
follows.
nolic pads on dish of stator and liner and secure. Turn the
three jackscrews in adapter until locking pins engage slots in
locking nut.
bearing support assembly. Secure with two halves of matched
ring set using two 291900-23 hinge pins located 180 degrees
apart. The matched ring set is resting on base plate adapter
inside the four lugs on base assembly.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 249
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL /Allied
~--~Signal
I. C. (10) (c) Place 291900-15 torque cylinder on matched ring set aligning
holes in torque cylinder with pins on matched ring set.
Position 291900-13 reaction cylinder over torque cylinder and
26,000 inch-pounds (1917 to 2166 foot-pounds). Remove
holder.

(11) Install turbine bearing carrier and components. (See Figure 202 or
203.)
NOTE: Air/oil seal, bolts, and gaskets, seal rotor,
turbine bearing inner race, and main shaft nut
were previously installed onto main shaft.
R (a) (Pre SB 72-0089) Assemble bearing mount to bearing outer race.
R (b) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place bearing support on 287915-1-1 holder
with anti-rotation slot at the 12 o'clock position as viewed
by the mechanic.
R (c) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place bearing outer race and mount into bear-
ing support with anti-rotation slots in alignment.
NOTE: Maintain relationship of anti-rotation slots
in bearing outer race and mount with retainer
anti-rotation tab while aligning drilled
holes in retainer with alignment pins on face
of bearing support.
(d) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place retainer on bearing outer race and
push race and mount into bearing support using press part of
287915-1-1 holder.
(e) Measure Dimension A (see Figure 208) as follows.
1 Place parallel bar on turbine support assembly.
2 Mark the position of parallel bar.
Repeat steps I, 2 and ~ two additional times 120 degrees
apart.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 250
Aug 12/91
lied
CAUTION: ENSURE DOWELPIN IN TURBINE BEARING CAR-
RIER LOCATED IN HOLE IN TURBINE BEARING
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.
R I. C. (11) (f) Install required amount of shims (Dimension P) determined in
step (4). Install turbine bearing carrier into turbine bear-
(g) Secure turbine bearing carrier and shims into turbine bearing
support assembly with spacers, washers, and nuts. Tighten
_1 Place parallel bar in position as marked in step (e)2_.

3 Repeat steps ! and 2 two additional times with parallel

bar positioned as in step (e)4.
Average the three measurements and record as Dimension B.
(i) To ensure proper seating of bearing support, add Dimension B
R (determined in step (h)4, Dimension P (determined in step (4)
and Dimension U determined in step (2)(b). Total of Dimen-
sion B, P and U shall equal Dimension A (determined in step
(e)5) within ±0.002 inch. (B + P + U = A (±0.002 inch)).
(J) (Pre SB 72-0089) Install retainer so anti-rotation tab en-

202) to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds. Wait 30 to 45
minutes for possible cold-flow of gasket and tighten nuts
(10) again to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds. Use caution
during tightening of nuts to ensure heads of bolts do not
hang up on a i r / o i l seal.
bearing support using 291756-1-1 guide. Position key slot on
(1) (Post SB 72-0089) Install keys in key slots on thrust ring,

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 251
Aug 12/91
~ /lied

a i r - o i l seal. Bolt (Part No. 865397-2) has a
scribe mark on threaded end. Align scribe mark
at position shown on Figure 209. Tighten nuts on
are snug.
1. C. (11) (m) (Post SB 72-0089) Position retainer so oil transfer boss is

located approximately 120 degrees clockwise from vertical
(see Figure 209, View B) and aligns with keys in thrust ring.
Secure with nuts. Tighten nuts (5, Figure 203) to a torque
value of 70 inch-pounds. Wait 30 to 45 minutes for possible
cold-flow of gasket and tighten nuts (5) again to a torque
value of 70 inch-pounds. Use caution when tightening nuts to
ensure heads of bolts do not hang up on a i r / o i l seal.

(12) (Post SB 72-0042) Install interstage turbine temperature (ITT)

CAUTION: AVOID EXCESSIVE BENDING OR SHARPRADIUS BENDS

IN LEADSWHENINSTALLING ITT SENSORASSEMBLY.
RADIUS OF LEAD BENDSSHALL NOT BE LESS THAN
0.50 INCH.
beginning with either probe number 1 or number 12. (Probes 1
and 12 are the end probes on the sensor assembly.) Progres-
sively install probes into shields (starting with either 1 or
12) around engine until all twelve probes are seated. If
necessary, mounting clamps can be temporarily removed or
relocated to aid installation of probes. After installation
of sensor assembly, relocate mounting clamps over probe
mounting bolt holes.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 252
Aug 12/91
/lied
NOTE: Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A)

to studs and nuts.
1. C. (12) (c) Secure ITT sensor assembly and shields to second stage stator
assembly with washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (I0) to a
inch. I f gap exceeds maximum, seat probe by tapping with
brass pin to bring gap within l i m i t s . Retighten bolts to
(d) Attach ITT sensor assembly to turbine bearing support assem-
bly studs with nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of
20 inch-pounds.
(13) Refer to 72-40-01, Maintenance Practices for i n s t a l l a t i o n of ple-

NOTE: The 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching f i x t u r e can only be

used on Main Shaft, Part No. 894079-2 which has internal
threads. I f part number on main shaft is unknown, a visual
check of the turbine end of main shaft is required.
D. Removal/Installation Procedures using 298420-1/-2/-3 Shaft Stretching
Fixture with 297644-1/-2 Stretch Shaft
(1) Removal of turbine main shaft nut, bearing (inner race), seal rotor
and seal ( a i r / o i l ) .
(INTAKE DOWN) TO MAINTAIN ENGAGEMENTOF
CURVlC COUPLINGS.
ENSURE 297644-1/-2 STRETCHING SHAFT IS

THREADED INTO MAIN SHAFT UNTIL FULLY IN-
STALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2 TURNS).
LOOSEN STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN TO PRE-
VENT SHAFT BINDING DURING REMOVALOF MAIN
SHAFT NUT.
(a) Install and tighten 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft into turbine
end of main shaft u n t i l f u l l y i n s t a l l e d (approximately 6 1/2
turns from start of thread engagement). Loosen stretching
shaft 1/4 turn.
(b) Install 297641-1 two piece adapter between seal and a f t curvic
coupling. I n s t a l l S8990-240 packing (furnished) around two
piece adapter to hold in place.
(c) Install 297643-1/-2 socket wrench on main shaft nut.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 253
Aug 12/91
lied
NOTE: The 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft and 295194-6
nut are p i l o t f i t t e d to cylinder bore to en-
sure alignment of the hydraulic head to the
engine main shaft. Do not reverse nut.
I. D. (I) (d) Install 298420-1/-2/-3 hydraulic head over 297644-I/-2

stretching shaft, 297641-1 two piece adapter and socket
wrench. Install and tighten 295194-6 nut on 297644-1/-2
stretching shaft until f u l l y installed against hydraulic head.
While holding 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft, loosen nut to a
1/4 inch gap between nut and hydraulic head.
OPERATION OF SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE
WITHOUT SAFETY COVER IN PLACECOULDRESULT
IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
(e) Install 295195-1 safety cover on hydraulic head. Connect hy-
draulic pump hose to hydraulic head.
CAUTION: USE EXTREMECARE NOT TO DAMAGETHE MAIN SHAFT
WHILE USING 298420-1/-2/-3 FIXTURE. A NOMINAL
PRESSURE OF 3570 PSIG SHOULDBE ENOUGHTO
LOOSEN MAIN SHAFT NUT. IF A SEPARATION BETWEEN
MATING SURFACES OF NUT, BEARING INNER RACE,
ROTOR SEAL OR AFT CURVIC COUPLING IS OBSERVED,
NO FURTHERSTRETCH IS REQUIRED. DO NOT EXCEED
4220 PSIG.
(f) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 3570 psig) to main
shaft, turn 297643-1/-2 socket wrench counterclockwise to
loosen main shaft nut. Loosen nut and slowly decrease hydrau-
l i c pressure as required until nut is loose and hydraulic
pressure is zero.
(g) Remove298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture and stretching

shaft. Removemain shaft nut.

(h) Remove bearing inner race using 284637-i-1 puller.
(i) Remove seal rotor and a i r / o i l seal from main shaft.
(J) Remove bolts and gaskets (bolt seals) from a i r / o i l seal.

(k) This concludes the removal procedures using 298420-1/-2/-3
shaft stretching fixture. I f further disassembling of compo-
nents is required, proceed to 72-50-07, Maintenance Practices.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 254
Aug 12/91
~ /lied

PROCEDURES.
MAINTAIN ENGINE IN VERTICAL POSITION (INTAKE DOWN)
TO PREVENT ENTRY OF FOREIGN OBJECTS INTO ENGINE,

COVER ROTATING GROUP AND END OF MAIN SHAFT.

threads of bolts, studs, screws, nuts and to threads
(except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s
speci f i ed.
1o D. (2) Installation of turbine main shaft nut, bearing (inner race), seal
inner race. Place outer race to one side for later assembly.
apart, use average) of bearing support assembly and record for
R (c) Install gaskets (95, Figure 202 or 105, Figure 203) on bolts
R (90, Figure 202 or 100, Figure 203). Place gasket on a i r / o i l
R CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL
R BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAREITHER
R SYNTHETIC RUBBERGLOVES OR NYLONMESH
R GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENEPALMS AND
R FINGERS. IN CASENONEOF THE ABOVEARE
R AVAILABLE, CLEANCOTTONGLOVES SHALL BE
R WORN. AIR/OIL SEAL AND ROTORSHALL BE IN-
R STALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.

AIR/OIL SEAL.
R (d) Ensure a i r / o i l seal and seal rotor are dry; do not lubricate
R prior to installation. Install a i r / o i l seal on main shaft on
top of aft curvic coupling. Place seal rotor ( f l a t side down)
(Figure 202 or 203) down on a i r / o i l seal~
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 255
Aug 12/91
~=~lslied
I. D. (2) (e) Apply light coat of grease (Acryloid 615 or HF-825) to rollers
of bearing inner race. Place bearing inner race with rollers
rotor. Rollers can be held in place in inner race with use of
plastic strap.
R CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFTTURBINE

R NUT OTHERTHANAPPROVED ENGINE OIL IS
R PROHIBITED. OTHERLUBRICANTS MAY RESULT
R IN A CORROSIVE ATTACKTO THE MAIN SHAFT
R TURBINE NUT.
R (f) Lubricate threads and face of new main shaft nut with approved
engine o i l .
CAUTION: INSTALLNEW SHAFT NUT. DO NOT REUSE NUT
R 1 Install new main shaft nut.
2 Install 1-7/16 inch boxed end wrench or socket on main

R 3 I f main shaft is not flush with nut or does not protrude

R beyond nut, curvic couplings are not properly engaged. I f
R curvic couplings are not properly engaged, slightly rotate
R (shake) third stage turbine wheel by hand until curvic
R couplings are properly seated. Repeat steps ! through ~.
R 4 Loosen main shaft nut until hand tight.
R (h) Install and secure turbine plenum assembly with four evenly
R spaced nuts and bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 50
R to 60 inch-pounds.
R (i) Place a parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange, as


(J) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to

end of main shaft (four places, averaged), record as Dimension
B (unstretched). (See Figure 205.)
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 256
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ ignal /lied
NOTE: Table 206 provides sample worksheet for determining turbine

build dimensions.
1. Record Dimension S. in.
2. Record Dimension T. in.
5. Dimension Y. 2.176 in.
6. Add lines 4 and 5 and record result. in.
. Subtract line 1 from line 6 and record result. in.

dimension M (Figure 207).
result.
9. Subtract line 8 from 2.277. Result equals thickness in.

of shims required for dimension P (Figure 207).
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 257
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
CAUTION: ENSURE 297644-1/-2 STRETCHINGSHAFT IS THREADED
INTO THE MAIN SHAFT UNTIL FULLY INSTALLED
(APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2 TURNS). LOOSENSTRETCHING
SHAFT 1/4 TURNTO PREVENTSHAFT BINDING DURING
INSTALLATION OF MAIN SHAFT NUT.
1. D. (3) Perform main shaft stretch as follows.
(a) Install and tighten 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft into turbine

end of main shaft until f u l l y installed (approximately 6 1/2
turns from start of thread engagement). Loosen stretching out
1/4 turn.
(b) Install 297641-1 two piece adapter between seal and aft curvic
coupling. Install $8990-240 packing (furnished) around two
piece adapter to hold in place.
(c) Install 297643-I/-2 socket wrench on main shaft nut.
NOTE: The 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft and 295194-6

nut are p i l o t f i t t e d to cylinder bore to as-
sure alignment of the hydraulic head to the
engine main shaft. Do not reverse nut.
(d) Install 298420-1/-2/-3 hydraulic head over 297644-1/-2
stretching shaft, 297641-1 two piece adapter and socket
wrench. Install and tighten 295194-6 nut on 297644-1/-2
stretching shaft until i t bottoms against hydraulic head.
While holding 297644-1/-2 stretching shaft, loosen nut to a
1/4 inch gap between nut and hydraulic head.
WARNING: ENSURE 295195-1 SAFETY COVER IS INSTALLED

WHENUSING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
OPERATION OF SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE
WITHOUT SAFETY COVERIN PLACE COULDRESULT
IN SERIOUS PERSONALINJURY.
(e) Install 295194-1 safety cover on hydraulic head. Connect hy-
draulic pump hose to hydraulic head.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWINGSTEP, APPLY
A NOMINAL 3570 PSIG. DO NOT EXCEED3710
PSIG.
(f) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 3570 psig) to main

shaft, turn 297643-I/-2 socket wrench clockwise to tighten
main shaft nut. Do not exceed 3710 psig. Release applied
pressure and remove 298420-1/-2/-3 shaft stretching fixture
and stretching shaft.
(g) Place a parallel bar on turbine plenum assembly flange, as

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 258
Aug 12/91
~ l s l i e d

R I. D. (3) (h) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of parallel bar to
NOTE: Use Dimension B, recorded in step A.(19)(q),
as a guide only in obtaining proper shaft
difference between Dimension B unstretched an
Dimension B stretched) is equal to 0.036 to
0.039 inch.
(i) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

(J) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded

inch, repeat steps (a) through (h), adding 50 psig increments
above the previous pressure used until required Dimension B is
obtained. See Figure 205. Do not exceed 3710 psig.
(k) I f the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded
inch, repeat steps (a) through (h), loosen main shaft nut as
205. Do not exceed 3710 psig.
(i) Remove turbine plenum assembly.
R (m) Place 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage on bench with "T" handle
R up. Place plenum assembly down over gage. Reach down through
R exhaust pipe assembly opening in plenum and l i f t gage and bolt
R gage to plenum assembly with exhaust pipe assembly bolts in
R every other hole. Tighten bolts to a torque value of 80 inch-
R pounds.
(n) Temporarily set plenum assembly in place on compressor housing
assembly so drain valve bosses are at the 6 o'clock position,
and secure with bolts and nuts in every third hole. Tighten
bolts to a torque value of 50 to 60 inch-pounds.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 259
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
GARRE~T TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
R CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN "T" HANDLE OF 284988-1-1

R SHIM CLEARANCE GAGE. OVERTIGHTENINGCOULD
R CAUSE ERRONEOUS DIMENSION X INDICATION AND
R DAMAGE TO COMPRESSORBEARING. TIGHTEN "T"
R HANDLE TO A TORQUE VALUE OF 15 ±0 INCH
R POUNDS AFTER CONTACT IS MADE WITH MAIN
R SHAFT.
R 1. D. (3) (o) Tighten "T" handle of 284988-1-1 shim clearance gage to torque
R value of 15 ±0 inch-pounds after contact is made with main
R shaft and rotating group is centered.
R (4) Determine thickness of washers and shims required f o r Dimension M

R and Dimension P as follows.
(a) With a depth micrometer measure from face of gage to third
stage turbine wheel assembly as shown in Figure 206. Record
as Dimension X.
R (b) I f Dimension X is within ±0.002 inch of Dimension X taken in

R (c) I f Dimension X is not within ±0.002 inch of Dimension X taken

R in step A.(19)(t) during disassembly, determine required
R follows.
R NOTE: Turbine bearing support assembly (see Figure

R 204) and turbine bearing assembly (see Figure
R 202 or 203) are not installed on engine at
R this time.


R 206.

R -- Refer to Table 206, lines 5, 6 and 7.
4 Calculate thickness of shims required for Dimension P.

Refer to Table 206, lines 8 and 9.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 260
Aug 12/91
/lied
R 1. D. (5) Remove turbine plenum assembly from engine. Remove284988-1-1 shim
R clearance gage from turbine plenum assembly.
required amount of washers, previously calculated as Dimension M.

port assembly approximately 4 inches counterclock-
wise from ITT harness prior to tightening turbine
bearing support assembly and locking nut to allow
for proper f i n a l alignment of ITT harness.
Align index marks on turbine bearing support,

locking nut, and second stage stator established
in removal.
R All tools l i s t e d below are components of 291900-2
R l i n e r and support torquing holder assembly.
(7) Position turbine bearing support assembly down over engine assembly
and assemble locking nut to support assembly. Screw support assem-
bly and nut together hand t i g h t . I n s t a l l 291900-2 holder assembly
as follows.
nolic pads on dish of stator and l i n e r and secure. Turn the
three jackscrews in adapter u n t i l locking pins engage slots in
locking nut.
bearing support assembly. Secure two halves of matched ring
set using two 291900-23 hinge pins located 180 degrees apart.
The matched ring set is resting on base plate adapter inside
the four lugs on base assembly.
(c) Place 291900-15 torque cylinder on matched ring set aligning
holes in torque cylinder with pins on matched ring set. Posi-
tion 291900-13 reaction cylinder over torque cylinder and
bearing support assembly to a torque value of 23,000 to 26,000
inch-pounds (1917 to 2166 foot-pounds). Remove holder.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 261
Aug 12/91
,~llied
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL '-"~:~Signal

MINIMIZED. REFER TO 70-00-00, STANDARD PRAC-
I. D. (8) Install turbine bearing c a r r i e r and components. (See Figure 202 or
203.)
NOTE: A i r / o i l seal, bolts, and gaskets, seal r o t o r ,

turbine bearing inner race, and main shaft
nut were previously i n s t a l l e d onto main
shaft.
R (a) (Pre SB 72-0089) Assemble bearing mount to bearing outer race.
R (b) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place bearing support on 287915-1-1 holder

with a n t i - r o t a t i o n s l o t at the 12 o'clock position as viewed
by the mechanic.
(c) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place bearing outer race and mount into bear-
ing support with a n t i - r o t a t i o n slots in alignment.
NOTE: Maintain r e l a t i o n s h i p of a n t i - r o t a t i o n slots

in bearing outer race and mount with retainer
a n t i - r o t a t i o n tab while aligning d r i l l e d
holes in retainer with alignment pins on face
of bearing support.
(d) (Pre SB 72-0089) Place r e t a i n e r on bearing outer race and
push race and mount i n t o bearing support using press part of
287915-1-1 holder.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 262
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ /lied
ignal
1. D. (8) (e) Measure Dimension A (see Figure 208) as follows.

1 Place parallel bar on turbine support assembly.
2 Mark the position of parallel bar.
4 Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 two additional times 120 degrees
apart.
CAUTION: ENSURE DOWEL PIN IN BEARING SUPPORT

LOCATES IN HOLE IN TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT
ASSEMBLY.
R (f) Install required amount of shims (Dimension P) determined in

step (4). Install bearing support into turbine bearing sup-
port assembly.
(g) Secure bearing support and shims into turbine bearing support
assembly with spacers, washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to a
1 Place parallel bar in position as marked in step (e)2__.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 two additional times with parallel bar
positioned as-in ste-p (e)2.
Average the three measurements and record as Dimension B.
(i) To ensure proper seating of bearing support, add Dimension B
R (determined in step (h)4), Dimension P (determined in step (4)
and Dimension U determined in step (2)(b)). Total of Dimen-
sions B, P and U shall equal Dimension A (determined in step
(e)5) within ±0.002 inch. (B + P + U = A (±0.002 inch)).
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 263
Aug 12/91
~ l s l i e d

air-oil seal. Bolt (Part No. 865397-2) has a
scribe mark on threaded end. Align scribe mark at
position shown on Figure 209. Tighten nuts on
are snug.
I. D. (8) (j) (Pre SB 72-0089) Install retainer so anti-rotation tab en-

202) to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds. Wait 30 to 45
minutes for possible cold-flow of gasket and tighten nuts (10)
again to a torque value of 70 inch-pounds. Use caution during
tightening of nuts to ensure heads of bolts do not hang up on
a i r / o i l seal.
bearing support using 291756-1 guide. Position key slot on
(1) (Post SB 72-0089) Install keys in key slots on thrust ring,

(m) (Post SB 72-0089) Position retainer so oil transfer boss is

located approximately 120 degrees clockwise from vertical (see
Figure 209, View B) and aligns with keys in thrust ring.
Secure with nuts. Tighten nuts (5, figure 203) to a torque
value of 70 inch-pounds, wait 30 to 45 minutes for possible
cold-flow of gasket. Tighten nuts (5) again to a torque value
of 70 inch-pounds. Use caution when tightening nuts to ensure
heads of bolts do not hang up on a i r / o i l seal.

UP136688
72-50-06
R Page 264
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. D. (9) (Post SB 72-0042) Install interstage turbine temperature (ITT)


CAUTION: AVOID EXCESSIVE BENDINGOR SHARP RADIUS

BENDS IN LEADS WHEN INSTALLING ITT SENSOR
ASSEMBLY. RADIUSOF LEAD BENDSSHALL NOT
BE LESS THAN 0.50 INCH.
beginning with either probe number 1 or number 12. (Probes 1
and 12 are the two end probes on the sensor assembly.) Pro-
gressively install probes into shields from starting probe
(either 1 or 12) around engine until all twelve probes are
seated. I f necessary, mounting clamps can be temporarily
removed or relocated to aid installation of probes. After in-
stallation of sensor assembly, relocate mounting clamps over
probe mounting bolt holes.
NOTE: Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-

A) to studs and nuts.
(c) Secure ITT sensor assembly and shields to second stage stator
assembly with washers and bolts. Tighten bolts (10) to a
inch. I f gap exceeds maximum, seat probe by tapping with
brass pin to bring gap within limits. Re-tighten bolts to a
(d) Attach ITT sensor assembly to turbine bearing support assembly

studs with nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 20
inch-pounds.
(10) Refer to 72-40-01, Maintenance Practices, for installation of ple-

R (11) Install turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to 72-50-04, Main-

72-50-06
UP136688
Page 265
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ / l iignal
ed

. Inspecti on/Check
A. (Post SB 72-0042) Inspect Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT System)

(See Figure 201)
(1) Inspect temperature probe shields for wear as follows.

(a) (ITT Sensor Assembly, Part No. 896911-X) Replace temperature
probe shields (20) i f worn completely through shield wall.
(b) (ITT Sensor Assembly, Part No. 897529-X) Replace ITT sensor
assembly i f any shield is worn completely through shield wall.
(2) Inspect interstage turbine temperature sensor assembly (25) for the
fol l owing.
(a) Check leads for wear through sheathing.
(b) Check probes, maximum of two tips burned off permitted.
(c) Using IOX magnification, inspect brazed junction joint for
cracks. No cracks permitted.
(d) Check connector for cracked and missing insulating material.
(e) Check sensor assembly from either pin to ground.
1 (Ambient) Resistance must be 100,000 ohms or greater.
2 (Hot engine/after engine shutdown) Resistance must be

50,000 ohms or greater.
(f) Resistance check from pin to pin must be 3.0 to 7.0 ohms.
B. Inspect Bearing Carrier (See Figure 204)
(1) Check bearing bore in bearing support assembly for scoring,
grooves, or distortion. Scoring which does not exceed 0.005 inch
depth is acceptable.
(2) Replace bearing support assembly i f damage is sufficient to affect
sealing.
UP136688
72-50-06
R Page 266
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. C. Inspect Turbine Bearing (See Figure 202 or 203)
(i) Inspect turbine bearing in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
(2) Replace part that does not meet requirements of 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
D. Inspect Turbine Bearing Retainer (See Figure 204 or 210)
(1) Visually inspect inside diameter of bearing retainer for evidence

of varnishing. Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, f o r removal
of varnishing.
(2) Visually inspect retainer for cracks, nicks and burrs.
R (3) Visually inspect Diameter C and Surface D for wear. I f wear is

R evident, perform dimensional inspection. (See Figure 210.)
R (a) Dimension A shall be 0.029 to 0.031 inch.
R (b) Diameter C shall be as follows.
R Part No. 3101091-1 2.1710 to 2.1720 inches
R Part No. 3101091-2/-3 2.1734 to 2.1744 inches
CAUTION: HANDLINGOF AIR/OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR) SHALL BE

MINIMIZED. PERSONNELSHALL WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC
RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENE
PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE
AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTONGLOVES SHALL BE WORN.
AIR/OIL SEAL (SEAL AND ROTOR) SHALL BE INSTALLED
DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
E. Inspect Turbine Air/Oil Seal (See Figures 202, 203 or 211)
(1) Visually inspect carbon seal for cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(2) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for discontinuous contact

(skipping). Discontinuous contact (skipping) is not allowed.
(3) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface f o r p i t t i n g . P i t t i n g is

not al I owed.
(4) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface f o r wear, scratches, and

grooves. Visual defects that cannot be f e l t with a 0.015 inch di-
ameter stylus are acceptable.
72-50-06
UP136688
Page 267
Aug 4/94
GEG7~2A
~ l s l i e d

R 2. E. (5) Visually inspect carbon seal for coking.
R (a) Coking on carbon sealing surface is not allowed.

R (b) Coke buildup on carbon sealing surface inner diameter is not
R allowed.
R (c) Coke buildup on carbon sealing surface outer diameter is not
R allowed.
R (6) Visually inspect bellows for cracks, distortion, coking, and other
R deposi t s.
R (a) Cracks and distortion are not allowed.
R (b) Removecoking and other deposits. Refer to Cleaning/Painting.
R (7) Visually inspect forward and aft sides of mounting flange for
R raised metal. Removeraised metal using an abrasive stone.
R (8) Using IOX magnification, inspect sealing surface and inner and ou-
R ter diameters of sealing surface for chipping. Minor chipping of
R inner and outer diameters is acceptable providing the minimum seal
R surface width is 70% or greater of original surface measured
R radial ly.
(9) Measure carbon sealing surface (Surface D) height. (See Figure
211.) Minimumacceptable carbon sealing surface height is 0.025
inch.
R (I0) Visually inspect rotor sealing surface for chipping. Chipping is
R not al I owed.
R (11) Visually inspect seal rotor sealing surface for wear, scratches and
R grooves. Visual defects that cannot be f e l t with a 0.015 inch di-
R ameter stylus are acceptable.

UP136688
72-50-06
Page 268
Aug 12/91
l s l i e d
2° F, Inspect Turbine Bearing Support Assembly (See Figures 204 and 212)
NOTE: I f turbine bearing support assembly has two or

more of the three struts cracked to the extent
that the struts are separated from the inner cone,
the engine must be returned to a Garrett
authorized service f a c i l i t y for complete
disassembly.
R (1) Fluorescent penetrant inspect support assembly in accordance with
(a) I f cracks are evident at junction of struts with inner cone or
at inner diameter cone braze j o i n t replace turbine bearing
support assembly. Rework areas shown in Figure 212.
(b) If any cracks extend through inner cone, replace turbine bear-
(c) Refer to Approved Repairs for allowable rework of cracks.
Following rework of cracks, wall thickness of inner and outer
cones shall not be less than 0.070 inch.
(2) Visually inspect bolts, pins, nuts, and studs for security.
G. Visually Inspect Threads of Turbine Main Shaft for Damage
I f damaged threads cannot be repaired by brushing with wire brush,

replace main shaft.
Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, for general cleaning instructions

and for description of methods specified in Table 206.
UP136688
72-50-06
Page 269
Aug 12/91
A E R 0 S PA C E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
L
w
= DIM. A
SURFACE D . ~
DIA C
Cl--44G-1277
Turbine Bearing Retainer

Figure 210 72-50-06
UP136688
Page 270
Aug 4/94
~=~/lied
.!
!!!!!!f
~'i 1
0.025 IN.
SURFACED
1-44G-709
Seal Wear Limits

UP136688
Figure 211 72-50-06

R Page 271
Aug 12/91
UP136688
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIRD STAGESTATOR, SECONDAND THIRD STAGE
TURBINE WHEELASSEMBLIES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Item Source/
I. Mechanical Puller Used to remove curvic 284476-2-1

from the main shaft.
. Turbine Wheel Used to remove third 285845-1-1
Mechanical Puller stage turbine wheel from
second stage turbine
wheel.
Camel hair brush Commercial ly avail able
(Fel-Pro C5-A) 7450 N McComick Blvd, Skokie, IL
Marking materials

(Berol Verithin, No. 753) 302 S 23rd Ave, Phoenix, AZ 85009

72-50-07
UP136688
R Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ lslied
Solvent (Federal Commercial l y available

1. a. Remove Third Stage Stator Assembly and Second and Third Stage Turbine
Wheel Assemblies (See Figure 201)
(I) Disconnect ITT sensor assembly. Refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance
Practices.
ance Practices.
(3) Remove a i r a n t i - i c e valve and plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
Practices.
tenance Practices.
(6) Remove fuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to 73-10-09, Main-
tenance Practices.
(7) Remove i g n i t i o n leads and i g n i t e r plugs. Refer to 74-20-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
R (8) (Codes CA-CC, DA, GA) Remove f i r e s h i e l d s . Refer to 71-30-01,
(I0) Remove t a i l cone. Refer to 72-50-02, Maintenance Practices.
(11) Remove turbine o i l i n l e t tube and o i l j e t . Refer to 72-50-03,


nance Practices.
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 202
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
20
\
I0
30
25
50 15
\ 40
\
45
"-..:~: ,., -- ..../

• ,.% • -. ....-:.--,~
.,-,. ,;--,-. -, ; -~ -'~
..~ .,.--, ",- .. ,, -

•.~ ,,,,-- ",~-~ ",, .
55
.~.:-,-. , --% ,
•, ..::,,.- -~.. : :
" ".3= ::- :"::,;
:
i ~~i:;
:
.-'~
. ,-:.:~-~ ,,
jr., "s E-44A-2885
5. CURVICCOUPLING 30. SEALASSY

i0. GASKET 40. RIVET
15. THIRDSTAGE WHEELASSY 45. STATORASSY
20. NUT 50. GASKET
25. BOLT 55. SECONDSTAGEWHEELASSY
(Pre SB 72-0745 and A72-0861)

Third Stage Stator and Second and Third
Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly Installation
Figure 201 72-50-07
UP136688
Page 202A/202B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
/
/
35
40
65
.--=-_ _- --. o 50
_ ,,_ . - . "-.2...~ - -
-~" .:,-.. ".:" , :
•.T,,,'.T~ :.. ;
.~ "..'. "
, :~-.:,',. ~,}.. -
, ,~:...:. ,-./~
E-44G-1623
,: ~:-,~
R 5. CURVICCOUPLING 40. RETAINER 60. STATORASSY

R 10. GASKET 45. RETAINER 65. GASKET
R 15. THIRDSTAGE 50. SEALASSY 70. SECONDSTAGE
R WHEEL ASSY 55. SPACER WHEEL ASSY
R 35. RIVET
R (Post SB 72-0745 or A72-0861)

R Third Stage Stator and Second and Third
R Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly Installation
R Figure 201A 72-50-07
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. A. (13) (Post SB 72-0446) Remove ( i f installed) EGT harness assembly.

(14) Remove exhaust pipe assembly. Refer to 72-50-05, MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES.
(15) Remove turbine plenum assembly and combustion chamber assembly.

(16) Remove ITT sensor assembly, turbine bearing, bearing carrier and
bearing support assembly. Refer to 72-50-06, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF CURVIC COUPLING OR TURBINE

WHEEL ASSEMBLIES, MARK AN INDEX LINE USING
SILVER PENCIL (BEROL VERITHIN NO. 753) BETWEEN
EACH COMPONENTAND MAIN SHAFT TO SHOW
RELATIONSHIP. ENSUREEACH PART IS REINSTALLED
IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION TO MAIN SHAFT.
NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly,

place index marks where removal of marks are
readily accessable during assembly.
(17) Before removing each curvic coupling and turbine wheel, mark an
index line using silver pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753) between
each component and main shaft to show relationship. Indexing is
necessary to ensure that each part is reinstalled in same relative
position to main shaft from which i t was removed.
CAUTION: ENSURE GASKET (10, FIGURE 201) CONTAINS FOUR
HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056 INCH). IF
GASKET WITH IMPROPERNUMBEROF HOLES HAS BEEN
INSTALLED IN ENGINE, REFER TO APPROVED REPAIRS
FOR ACTION REQUIRED.
R PROTECT CURVIC COUPLINGS BY INSTALLING PLASTIC

R CAPS OR SIMILAR PROTECTIVE DEVICES. SURFACES
R OF COUPLINGS ARE CRITICAL AND MAY BE DAMAGED
R BY CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE. REFERTO 70-
R 00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, FOR CURVIC COUPLING
R HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(18) Remove curvic coupling using 284476-2-1 puller. Removecurvic

coupling gasket.
UP136688
72-50-O7
Page 204
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PA (" E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Whenever components with knife edge (labyrinth) seals

are removed from engine, use care to prevent any han-
dling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on knife
eages.
1. A. (19) Carefully remove t h i r d stage turbine wheel assembly using

285845-1-1 puller, i f necessary.
CAUTION: (PRE SB 72-0300) ENSUREGASKET (50, FIGURE 201)

CONTAINS FOUR HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056
INCH). IF GASKET WITH IMPROPERNUMBEROF HOLES HAS
BEEN INSTALLED IN ENGINE, REFERTO APPROVED REPAIRS
(POST SB 72-0300) ENSUREGASKET (50, FIGURE 201)

CONTAINS SIX HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.101 TO 0.106
INCH). IF GASKET WITH IMPROPERNUMBEROF HOLES HAS
BEEN INSTALLED IN ENGINE, REFER TO APPROVED REPAIRS
NOTE: Whenever components with knife edge (labyrinth) seals

are removed from engine, use care to prevent any han-
dling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on knife
edges.
(20) Carefully remove third stage stator assembly.
R (21) (Pre SB 72-0745 and A72-0861) Remove nuts and bolts securing seal
R assembly to t h i r d stage stator and remove seal assembly.
R (22) Remove second stage turbine wheel assembly and curvic coupling
R gasket.
R NOTE: Do not remove rivets (35, Figure 201A), retainers

R (40, 45), seal assembly (50), or spacers (55) un-
R less damage is indicated by inspection. (See
R Figure 201A.)
R (23) (Post SB 72-0745 or A72-0861) I f required by inspection, remove

R and replace seal assembly (50) in accordance with Approved
R Repairs.
72-50-07
UP136688
Page 204A/204B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. ( 2 4 ) Refer to 72-50-08, Maintenance Practices, for further disassembly

of engine.
CAUTION: IF NO ROTATING COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN REPLACED, EN-

SURE EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE
POSITION TO MAIN SHAFT.
IF A ROTATING COMPONENT IS REPLACED, THE REPLACE-

MENT COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTHMARKEDWITH A "V" OR
"I" SHOULD BE POSITIONED APPROXIMATLY 180 DEGREES
FROM "V" OR " I " ON MATING CURVICS. THE REMAINING
COMPONENTS PREVIOUSLYMARKEDSHOULD REMAIN ALIGNED
WITH EACHOTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARKON MAIN
SHAFT. IF CENTERCURVIC COUPLING (BETWEEN SECOND
STAGE IMPELLER AND FIRST STAGETURBINE WHEEL) IS
REPLACED, THE CENTERCURVIC COUPLING TEETH HAS AP-
PROXIMATLEY THREEDIFFERENT POSITIONS WHERECURVIC
TEETH WILL MESHWITH SECONDSTAGE IMPELLERAND IN-
TERNAL SPLINES OF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING AND MAIN
SHAFT. POSITION CENTERCURVIC COUPLING TOOTHMARKED
WITH "V" OR " I " AS NEAR TO 180 DEGREES FROM"V" OR
"I" 01~ SECONDSTAGE IMPELLER CURVIC AS POSSIBLE.
72-50-07
UP136688
R Page 205
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
l s l i e d
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with "V" or "I" indicates the high
components, "V" or "I" tooth should be positioned ap-
proximately 180 degrees from "V" or "I" tooth on mating
curvic.

Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, for recommended

general torque values. Add f r i c t i o n a l drag (run-down
torque) of s e l f - l o c k i n g devices to recommended values.
Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to

threads of bolts, screws and nuts prior to
ins tal I ati on.
. B. I n s t a l l Third Stage Stator Assembly and Second and Third Stage Turbine
Wheel Assemblies (See Figure 201)
CAUTION: (PRE SB 72-0300) ENSURECURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH

FOUR HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER0.051 TO 0.056 INCH) IS
INSTALLED INTO SECONDSTAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
AND HOLES IN GASKET FACE TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE.
(POST SB 72-0300) ENSURE CURVIC COUPLING GASKET

WITH SIX HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.I01 TO 0.106 INCH)
IS INSTALLED INTO SECONDSTAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSEM-
BLY AND HOLES IN GASKET FACE TOWARDREAR OF ENGINE.
ENSURE THAT PROTECTIVE COVERINGSARE REMOVEDFROM

TURBINE WHEEL KNIFE SEALS PRIORTO INSTALLATION OF
TURBINE WHEEL.
NOTE: Engine must be rotated in stand so a i r i n l e t is down

and turbine end up. This position is necessary to en-
sure that the r o t a t i n g group is loaded forward during
assembly.
Refer to 72-00-00 Adjustment/Test for seal break-in

procedures i f knife-edge seal or related components
( r u b - s t r i p s ) have been replaced.
(1) I n s t a l l second stage turbine wheel over shaft using caution to

R align index marks. During assembly, remove index markings in ac-
R cordance with standard reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00,
R Standard Practices. )
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 206
Aug 16/89
/lied
1. B. (1) (a) (Pre SB 72-0300) Install curvic coupling gasket with four
holes (hole dia. 0.051 to 0.056 inch) facing turbine end of
main shaft into second stage turbine wheel.
(b) (Post SB 72-0300) Install curvic coupling gasket with six
holes (hole dia. 0.101 to 0.106 inch) facing turbine end of
main shaft into second stage turbine wheel.
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0380) DURINGSEAL ASSEMBLY INSTALLA-
TION POSITION THE SEAL BRAZEDJOINT AS NEARTO THE
12 O'CLOCK (11 O'CLOCKTO I O'CLOCK) POSITION OF
THE ENGINE VERTICAL REFERENCELINE AS POSSIBLE.
NOTE: Brush mating curvic surfaces of turbine wheels and
curvic couplings with camel hair brush, rinse with
soap and water or solvent (Federal Specification
P-D-680, Type I ) .
(2) Install seal assembly into third stage stator assembly. Secure
with bolts and nuts. Install nuts toward rear of engine. Tighten
nuts (20, figure 201) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(3) Install third stage stator assembly onto second stage stator
assembly. It may be necessary to temporarily remove the three "C"
clamps to allow flanges of the two stator assemblies to mate flush
inside locking nut.
CAUTION: ENSURE PROTECTIVE COVERINGSARE REMOVEDFROMTUR-

BINE WHEEL KNIFE SEALS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF
TURBINE WHEEL.
R ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTERMARKER)
R INDEX MARKINGS ARE REMOVEDDURINGASSEMBLY.
R (4) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with standard
R reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices.)
(5) Install third stage turbine wheel to second stage turbine wheel us-
ing caution to align index marks.
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLINGGASKETWITH FOURHOLES
(HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056 INCH) IS INSTALLED
INTO THIRD STAGE TURBINE WHEELASSEMBLY AND HOLES
IN GASKET FACE TOWARDREAROF ENGINE.
(6) Install curvic coupling gasket with four holes (hole diameter 0.051
to 0.056 inch) facing turbine end of main shaft into third stage
turbine wheel.
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 207
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R CAUTION: ENSURE(SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTERMARKER)
R INDEX MARKINGSARE REMOVEDDURINGASSEMBLY.
R 1. B, (7) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with standard
R reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices.)
(8) Heat aft curvic coupling at 149% (300°F) for 5 minutes and ass~,,-
ble on shaft against third stage turbine wheel using caution tc
align index marks.
(9) Install interstage turbine temperature sensor assembly, turbine
bearing, bearing carrier, and bearing support assembly components.
Refer to 72-50-06, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
2. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Aft Curvic Coupling (See Figure 201)
Inspect and repair curvic couplings in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-

dard Practices.
B. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gaskets (See Figure 201)

grees apart. Minimum average height of gasket shall be 0.212 inch.
C. Turbine Seal Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Sealing material on turbine seal assembly Part No.
868259-1 consists of f e l t metal. Refer to step
2.C.(1). Sealing material on turbine seal assem-
bly Part No. 868259-2/-4 consists of honeycomb.
Refer to step (2).
(1) Visually inspect turbine seal assembly ( f e l t metal) as follows.
(a) Inspect seal grooves. Adjacent grooves shall have no connect-
i ng paths.
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 208
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. c. (I) (c) Inspect for separation between f e l t metal and bonding surface.
(d) Visible braze in f e l t metal or grooves is not permitted.
R (e) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. I f cracks are

R suspected, perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accor-
R dance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.
(f) Replace seal assembly i f inspection requirements are not met.
(2) Inspect turbine seal assembly (honeycomb) as follows.

(a) Visually inspect honeycomb portion of seal assembly for abnor-
malities which could cause seal to leak (separation of brazed
j o i n t , pieces missing, and other obvious damage).


not have connecting paths. Wear grooves within 0.032 inch of
seal edge not allowed.
(d) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. I f cracks are

suspected perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accor-
(e) Replace seal assembly i f inspection requirements are not met.
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 209
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: I f engine is subjected to third stage turbine stator

vane burn through, third stage turbine wheel assembly
shall be discarded.
. D. Inspect Third Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly (See Figures 201, 202, 203
and 204)
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROMTURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS

ON TURBINE ROTOR/WHEEL HAVE CAUSED LOSS OF
MATERIAL PROPERTIES. REUSE IS NOT APPROVEDOF
TURBINE WHEELS THAT HAVE BEEN SUBJECTED TO THE
METAL DEPOSIT DUE TO EXPOSURETO HIGH TEMPERA-
TURE BECAUSE OF THE FOLLOWING.
ENGINE DECELERATION (BOGDOWN) 55 PERCENTRPFIOR

BELOW.
OVERTEMPERATURE ABOVE THE START LIMIT OUTLINED

IN TABLE 503, 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
(1) Inspect turbine wheel f o r metal deposits.
(a) Removal of metal deposits from turbine rotor is not approved.

(b) Reuse of turbine wheel subjected to metal deposits is not
al I owed.
(2) Ensure precleaned turbine wheel is free of oil, carbon, etc. Refer
to Cleaning/Painting. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in
accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.

Standard Practices.
(4) Inspect turbine wheel rim as follows. (See Figure 202.)

(a) Visually inspect Surface A for damage. Repair damaged area in
accordance with Approved Repairs. Repair depth shall not ex-
ceed 0.040 inch after blending.
(b) Visually inspect Surfaces B and C for damage. No damage

al I owed.
(5) Inspect turbine wheel blades for damage or erosion on leading and
trailing edge as follows. (See Figure 203.)
(a) Visually inspect Area A for damage or erosion. Repair damaged
area in accordance with Approved Repairs. Repair depth shall
not exceed 0.0625 inch after blending.
72-50-07
UP136688
R Page 210
Aug 4/94

2. D. (5) (b) Visually inspect Area B for damage. Repair damaged area in
(c) Visually inspect Area C for damage. Repair damaged area in

( d ) Visually inspect Area D for damage. Repair damaged area in

ceed 0.030 inch after blending. Only one repair allowed per
blade and only five blades may be repaired per turbine wheel
assembly.
(6) Visually inspect turbine wheel for evidence of loose rivets. I f

loose rivets are suspected, check for movement using l i g h t force
(approximately 5 pounds). No movement allowed. Refer to Approved
Repairs.
(7) Distorted rivets are acceptable unless flare of rivet is distorted

over 50 percent of the diameter.
NOTE: Clean turbine wheel assembly in accordance with

72-0{)-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No.
9. Do not glass bead peen or abrasive blast.
(8) Inspect for cracks adjacent to turbine wheel rivet holes as
follows.
(a) Visually inspect for cracks adjacent to every r iv et hole on
both sides of turbine wheel. Observe crack susceptible area,
Figure 204.
(b) Inspection shall be accomplished using high intensity l i g h t

and 10 power magnification. No cracks allowed.
(c) I f cracks are indicated, return turbine wheel to an
AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for evaluation and
possible repair.

breakin procedures in knife-edge seal or related
components (rub-strips) have been replaced.
(9) Dimensionally inspect knife edge seal outer diameter at three posi-
tions approximately 120 degrees apart. Outer diameter shall be
3.173 to 3.180 inch.
72-50-07
UP136688
Page 210A/210B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~!,ied
L i
SURFACEB (TRAILING
R EDGE RIM)
SURFACEC (AREA
BETWEEN BLADES)
REPAIR
DEPTH
1
DAMAGE
DEPTH SURFACEA (LEADING
EDGE RIM)
ViEW B-B
1-44G-965
Inspection and Repair of Second and Third

UP136688
Stage Turbine Wheel Rim (Typical)

Figure 202 72-50-07
Page 211
Aug 16/89
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany ~lslied
ignal
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
L.E. T.E.
REPAIR
*AREA A DEPTH
DAMAGE
DEPTH
I
\
AREA D
*AREA B
DAMAGE
DEPTH
REPAIR DEPTH
*AREA C
I L
0.20 IN. 0.20 IN.
NO REWORK NO REWORK
ALLOWED ALLOWED
* THE AREAS INDICATED

ARE I/3 OF BLADE LENGTH
I
I
0.3 IN. RADIUS MIN
f
l
l
....
BLEND RADII
' 1
FIVE TIMES DEPTH
//
1-44G-964
Inspection and Repair of Second and Third

UP136688
Stage Turbine Wheel Blade (Typical)

Figure 203 72-50-07
Page 212
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
2. D. ( 1 0 ) Check gap between knife seal and shoulder of wheel.
(a) A gap of 0.010 inch or less is acceptable.
(b) I f gap is between 0.010 and 0.050 inch, refer to Approved

Repairs.
(c) I f gap exceeds 0.050 inch, seal assembly must be replaced.

R Return turbine wheel assembly to an AlliedSignal authorized
(11) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
NOTE: I f engine is subjected to second stage turbine stator

vane burn through, second stage turbine wheel assembly
shall be discarded.
E. Inspect Second Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly (See Figures 201, 203, 204
and 205)
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROMTURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS

ON TURBINE ROTOR/WHEEL HAVE CAUSEDLOSS OF
MATERIAL PROPERTIES. REUSEIS NOT APPROVEbOF
TURBINE WHEELSTHAT HAVE BEEN SUBJECTEDTO THE
METAL DEPOSITS DUE TO EXPOSURETO HIGH TEMPERA-
TURE BECAUSEOF THE FOLLOWING.
ENGINE DECELERATION (BOGDOWN) 55 PERCENTRPM OR

BELOW.
OVERT~4PERTURE ABOVE THE START LIMIT OUTLINED

(1) Inspect turbine wheel for metal deposits.
(a) Removal of metal deposits from turbine wheel is not approved.
(b) Reuse turbine wheel subjected to metal deposits is not

al I owed.
(2) Ensure precleaned turbine wheel is free of o i l , carbon, etc. Refer

to Cleaning/Painting. Perfoml fluorescent penetrant inspection in
accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.

Standard Practices.
72-50-07
UP136688
Page 213
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ /lied
CRACK SUSCEPTIBLEAREA. NO CRACKS PERMITTED.
VIEW A-A
(RIVETREMOVED FOR CLARITY)
NOTE: ABOVE ILLUSTRATIONS SHOWS CRACKS

SUSCEPTIBLE AREA. INSPECT FOR VERY
FINE HAIRLINE CRACKS. NO CRACKS
ARE PERMITTED IN ANY AREA OF
TURBINE WHEEL ASSEMBLY. 1-44A-3399
Inspection of Second and Third Stage Turb i ne

R
UP136688
Wheels for Cracks (Typical)

Figure 204 72-50-07
Page 214
Aug 16/89
MAINILNANCE MANUAL ' /~llied
~-~-~Signal
2. E. (4) Inspect turbine wheel rim as follows. (See Figure 202.)

(a) Visually inspect Surface A for damage. Repair damaged area in
(b) Visually inspect Surfaces B and C for damage. No damage
allowed.
(5) Inspect turbine wheel blades for damage or erosion on leading and
t r a i l i n g edge as follows. (See Figure 203.)
(a) Visually inspect Area A for damage or erosion. Repair damaged
area in accordance with Approved Repairs. Repair depth shall
not exceed 0.0625 inch after blending.
(b) Visually inspect Area B for damage. Repair damaged area in
ceed 0.040 inch a f t e r blending.
(c) Visually inspect Area C for damage. Repair damaged area in

(d) Visually inspect Area D for damage. Repair damaged area in

ceed 0.030 inch after blending. Only one repair allowed per
blade and only five blades may be repaired per turbine wheel
assembly.
(6) Inspect blades for erosion by measuring blade tip cord length
(Dimension B, Figure 205). Minimum blade tip cord length,
(Dimension B) shall not be less than 0.875 inch after repair.
(7) Visually inspect turbine wheel for evidence of loose rivets. I f

loose rivets are suspected, check for movement using l i g h t force
(approximately 5 pounds). No movement allowed.
(8) Loose or distorted rivets are acceptable unless flare of rivet is

distorted over 50 percent of the diameter.
UP136688
72-50-07
R Page 214A
Aug 12/91
lliedSignai MAINTENANCE MANUAL


72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No.
. E. (9) Inspect for cracks adjacent to turbine wheel rivet holes as
f o l l ows.
(a) Visually inspect for cracks adjacent to every rivet hole on
Figure 204.
(b) Inspection shall be acc~nplished using high intensity l i g h t

R (c) I f cracks are indicated, return turbine wheel to an
R AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for evaluation and
possible repair.
(10) Inspect knife edge seal outer diameter at three positions approxi-
mately 120 degrees apart. Outer diameter shall be 3.173 to 3.180
inches.
(11) Check gap between knife seal and shoulaer of wheel.
(a) A gap of 0.010 inch or less is acceptable.
(b) I f gap is between 0.010 and 0.050 inch, refer to Approved

Repairs.
(c) I f gap exceeds 0.050 inch, seal assembly must be replaced.

Return turbine wheel assembly to an AlliedSignal authorized
(12) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements
or is damaged beyona repair.
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 214B
Aug 4/94
~:~lslied
VIEW A-A
A
A
1-44G-791
Inspection of Second Stage Turbine Wheel Blade

UP136688
Figure 205 72-50-07

Page 215
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. F. Inspect Third Stage Stator Assembly (See Figures 201, 206 and 207)
(I) Visually inspect stator assembly for evidence of turbine wheel
blade t i p rub, cracks, warpage, distortion, and other damage. War-
page of vanes is acceptable as long as crack limitations are met.
If evidence of tip rubbing exists, refer to Approved Repairs.
R (2) (Pre SB 72-0745) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in ac-

cordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices, on sheet metal of inner
support (Area H) and welded j o i n t of outer support ring (Area J,
Figure 207). No cracks allowed.
R (2a) (Post SB 72-0745 or 72-0861) Inspect vanes for movement in rela-

R tion to outer band. Movementshall not exceed the following
R limits.
R (a) Axial movement shall not exceed 0.010 inch.
R (b) Radial movement shall not exceed 0.002 inch.
R (c) Circumferential movement shall not exceed 0.002 inch.
(3) Inspect vanes for cracks. Any combination of crack pictorial

geometry as shown in Figure 206 is acceptable. Observe following
limits.
Ca) One crack in each vane t r a i l i n g edge inner band root f i l l e t is

permitted, provided crack does not exceed 0.150 inch in length
from vane t r a i l i n g edge.
(b) One crack in each of eight vanes maximum is permitted,

provided any crack does not exceed 0.500 inch in length in ax-
ial direction.
(c) Maximum of two cracks permitted in each of any of three vanes

within the eight vanes provided cracks are non-intersecting
and do not exceed 0.500 inch in length in axial direction.
(4) Erosion at outer leading edges of all vanes, Figure 207, is accept-
able, provided i t does not exceed 0.250 inch a x i a l l y and 0.250 inch
radially.
(5) Erosion on Surface D (convex side of vanes) is acceptable provided

missing material limits of Dimensions B and C are not exceeded.
(See Figure 207.)
(6) Gap of 0.005 inch maximum for circumference of 180 degrees at Area
G is acceptable (leading edge stator side only).
(7) Any blade shroud rub deeper than 0.005 inch or through an arc
greater than 90 degrees is unacceptable.
72-50-07
UP136688
Page 216
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
v J
DETAIL A
1-44A- 1251
DETAIL A DETAIL A
Inspection of Third Stage Turbine Stator

Assembly Crack Patterns
UP136688
Figure 206 72-50-07

Page 217
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
/
AREA J
j~
DIM. B
SURFACE D (CONVEX SIDE)
DIM. C
XlAL.
AREA G
AREA H - AREA H
EROSIONS OR MISSING MATERIAL 0.250 INCH

AXIALLY AND 0.250 INCH RADIALLY MAXIMUM
IS ACCEPTABLE IN OUTER LEADING EDGE OF
ALL VANES.
EROSION ON SURFACE D (CONVEX SIDE OF VANES)

IS ACCEPTABLE PROVIDEDMISSING MATERIAL LIMITS
OF DIMENSIONS B AND C ARE NOT EXCEEDED.
B C
0.250 IN. 0.250 IN.

MAX MAX
1-44A-3033
Inspection of Third Stage Turbine

Stator Assembly
Figure 207 72-50-07
UP136688
Page 218
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 2. F. (8) Inspect stator vanes for burn through. Burn through is not
R acceptable. Burn through is defined as any vane material loss that
R allows sight through s t a t o r vanes when viewed parallel to engine
R center l i n e . (See Figure 208.)
R (9) I f inspection reveals stator vane burn through, t h i r d stage turbine

R wheel shall be replaced and removed wheel shall be discarded.
R (10) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
BURN THROUGH
F-44G-771
UP136688
R Third Stage Turbine Stator Vane Burn Through (Typical)

R Figure 208 72-50-07
Page 219
Aug 16/89
[ ~ I MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
. Cl eani ng/Pai nti n9
Refer to 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, for general cleaning instructions

and for description of cleaning method specified in Table 203.

Figure Item Cleanin 9 Method

No. No. Nomencl
a tu re 1 2 3 9
All standard metallic hardware X

201 5 Curvic Coupling
I0, 50 Gasket X
15 Third Stage
Wheel Assembly
30 Seal Assembly
45 Stator
55 Second Stage
Wheel Assembly
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 220
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL 7~f~lli.ed
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72_01=~i~ nal
4. Approved Repairs
R Material or Compound Manufacturer
R NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed item.
R Balancing Machine AMCA International Corp, Giddings and

R (Gisholt Model 13S Standard) Lewis Div, 142 Doty St, Fond Du Lac,
R WI 54935-3331
A. Repair Curvic Coupling (See Figure 201)

Repair curvic coupling teeth in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
B. Repair Third Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Repair curvic couplings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
R (2) Repair damaged Surface A of turbine wheel rim by blending area.
R Surface A repair depth shall not exceed 0.040 inch after blending.
R Maximum of one repair per turbine wheel assembly. (See Figure
R 202.)
(3) Repair blade leading and t r a i l i n g edge damage or erosion by blend-

ing area as follows. (See Figure 203.)
R (a) Area A repair depth shall not exceed 0.0625 inch after
R blending.
R (b) Area B repair depth shall not exceed 0.040 inch after
R blending.
R (c) Area C repair depth shall not exceed 0.030 inch after
R blending.
R (d) Area D repair depth shall not exceed 0.030 inch after
R blending.
R (e) A maximum of one repair per blade and a maximum of five blades
R per turbine wheel assembly is allowed.
UP136688
72-50-07
Page 221
Aug 16/89

A E R 0 S P A (" E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
4. B. (4) All repaired areas shall have a blend radius of five times blend
depth.
CAUTION: USE CARE WHENSTAKING RIVETS, TO PREVENTDAMAGE

TO RIVET POCKETOR SEAT.
(5) Carefully restake loose rivets using bucking bar and punch. After
repair check rivets as follows.
(a) Check for movBnent of rivet using l i g h t force (approximately 5

pounds). No movement allowed.
(b) Check for cracks in rivet flare. No cracks allowed.
(c) Check rivet flare for distortion. Distorted rivets are ac-
ceptable unless flare of rivet is distorted over 50 percent of
the diameter.
R (d) I f rivets cannot be repaired, return turbine wheel to an

R AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for evaluation and
possible repair.
(6) Balance third stage turbine wheel assembly as follows. (See Figure
209.)
(a) Install 284201-2-1 arbor on rotor curvic couplings and install
in balancing machine (Gisholt Model 13S Standard Balancing
Machine).
(b) Dynamically balance wheel assembly on curvic couplings to an

accuracy of 0.010 ounce-inch in Planes M and N. ~Bterial may
be removed for balancing frem area designated. All places
where material is removed for balancing must f a i r smoothly and
leave no corners or edges sharper than 0.15 incil radius and
have a surface of AA63 or better.
C. Repair Third Stage Stator Assembly (See Figure 201)

Repair raised metal and sharp edges by l i g h t l y hand finishing in accor-
dance with good shop practices.
D. Repair Second Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly (See Figure 201)
(i) Repair curvic couplings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
(2) Repair damaged Surface A of turbine wheel rim by blending area.

Surface A repair depth shall not exceed 0.040 inch after blending.
Maximum of one repair per turbine wheel assembly. (See Figure
202.)
(3) Repair blade leading and trailing edge damage or erosion by blend-
ing area as follows. (See Figure 203.)
72-50-07
UP136688
Page 222
Aug 4/94
~ /lied
PLANE M -
R
I
I
I
II
I
MATERIAL MAY BE REMOVED FROM THIS AREA

FOR BALANCING. DO NOT REMOVE MATERIAL
DEEPERTHAN THAT SHOWN IN SHADED AREA
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES).
1-44A-572
R Second and Third Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly

R
UP136688
(Typical) (Balancing)
R Figure 209 72-50-07
Page 223
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal HAl NTENANCE MANUAL

. D. (3) (a) Area A repair depth shall not exceed 0.0625 inch a f t e r
bl ending.
(b) Area B repair depth shall not exceed 0.040 inch after
blending.
(c) Area C repair depth shall not exceed 0.030 inch after
blending.
(d) Area D repair depth shall not exceed 0.030 inch after
blending.
(e) A maximum of one repair per blade and a maximura of five blades
per turbine wheel is allowed.
(4) Repair leadiny edge erosion by blending. Minimum blade t i p cord

length (Dimension B, Figure 205) shall not be less than 0,875 inch
a f t e r repair.
(5) All repaired areas shall have a blend radius of f i v e times blend
depth.
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN STAKING RIVETS, TO PREVENT DAMAGE

TO RIVET POCKET OR SEAT.
r e p a i r check rivets as follows.
(a) Check f o r movement of r i v e t using l i g h t force (approximately 5

(b) Check f o r cracks in r i v e t f l a r e . No cracks allowed.
(c) Check r i v e t f l a r e f o r d i s t o r t i o n . Distorted r i v e t s are ac-

ceptable unless f l a r e of r i v e t is distorted over 50 percent of
the diameter.
R (d) I f r i v e t s cannot be repaired, return turbine wheel to an

R AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y f o r evaluation and
possible repair.
(7) Balance second stage turbine wheel assembly as follows. (See

Figure 208.)
(a) I n s t a l l 284201-1-1 arbor on rotor curvic couplings and i n s t a l l
in balancing machine (Gisholt Model 13S Standard Balancing
Machine).
UP136688
72-50-07
Paye 224
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
A E ROS PA('E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. D. (7) (b) Dynamically balance wheel assembly on curvic couplings to an

accuracy of 0.010 ounce-inch in Planes M and N. Material may
be removed for balancing from area designated. All places
where material is removed for balancing must f a i r smoothly and
leave no corners or edges sharper than 0.15 inch radius and
have a surface of AA63 or better.
E. Action Required i f Incorrect Curvic Coupling Gasket has Been Installed
R (1) Contact Customer Support Engineering, AlliedSignal Engines, P.O.

Box 52181, Phoenix, Arizona 85072-2181 (Telephone: Area Code 602,
231-1000) and provide the following data.
(a) Engine serial number.
(b) Hours/cycle of l i f e limited rotating components.
(c) Location of curvic coupling gasket in question, number and

size of holes.
NOTE: The following repair is not authorized i f gap between seal

assembly and wheel is in excess of 0.050 inch. Return t u r -
bine wheel assembly to an AlliedSignal authorized service
f a c i l i t y for repair.
F. Repair Second and/or Third Stage Wheel to Seal Assembly Gap
(1) Press seal assembly into place using 5000 pounds force for 1 minute
to ensure seal assembly is against shoulder of rotor.
(2) Gap between seal assembly and wheel shall be less than 0.003 inch.
G. (Post SB 72-0745 or A72-0861) Replace Third Stage Stator Seal Assenbly

(See Figure 201A)
(1) D r i l l o f f head of i n s t a l l e d r i v e t . Use centerpunch and hammer to

punch out remainder of r i v e t .
(2) Remove retainers, spacers and seal.
(3) I n s t a l l new seal with spacers i n s t a l l e d between stator and seal.
(4) I n s t a l l retainers and secure assembly with new r i v e t s .
72-50-07
UP136688
Page 225/226
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal•lslied
FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL, FIRST AND SECOND STAGE STATOR

ASSEMBLIES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
NOTE: Table 201 provides a l i s t of special t o o l s , f i x t u r e s and

equipment required f o r Removal/Installation. Table 202
Item Source/
1. "C" Clamp Set Used to hold support and 284496-1-1

combustor l i n e r together
when measuring wheel to
shroud clearances.
. Stator P u l l e r Used to separate the s t a t o r 285524-1-1

assembly from the l i n e r
assembly.
. Bolt Retainer Ring Used to r e t a i n bolts in 287423-1-1

C1amp s t a t o r and l i n e r assembly
while assembling second
stage s t a t o r .
. Shroud Puller Used to remove shroud 287440-1-1

segments from s t a t o r
and l i n e r assembly.
. Curvic Coupling Gage Used to establish a l i g n - 291247-1

ment between damaged center
curvic coupling and new
center curvic coupling.
UP136688
72-50-08
R Page 201
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Camel hair brush Commercially avail able
Emery paper (320 Grit) Commercially available
60076-4046
Hydrochloric acid (HC1) Commercial ly available
Marking material s
Silver)
Violet master marker Pannier Corp, 207 Sandusky, St,

Powder (SermeTel PBX) Teleflex Inc, Aerospace Div, Church Rd,
P.O. Box 218, North Wales, PA 19454
Solvent (SermeTel P) Teleflex Inc, Aerospace, Div, Church Rd,
P.O. Box 218, North Wales, PA 19454
Sol vent (Federal Commercial ly available
Syr i nge G.C. Electronics Co, Div of Hydr~netals

Inc, 400 S Wyman St, Rockport, IL 61101
72-50-08
UP136688
R Page 202
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
Allied.SignalAero:?paceCompany /~llied
1, A. Disassemble Engine to Accomplish Required Maintenance
(i) Disconnect ITT sensor assembly. Refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance

Practices.
nance Practices.
(3) Remove a i r anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to 75-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
Practices.
tenance Practices.
(6) Remove fuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to 73-10-09, Main-
tenance Practices.
(7) Remove i g n i t i o n leads and i g n i t e r plugs. Refer to 74-20-01, Main-

tenance Practices.
R (8) (Codes CA-CC, DA, GA) Remove f i r e s h i e l d s . Refer to 71-30-01,

(11) Remove turbine oil i n l e t tube and o i l j e t . Refer to 72-50-03,

nance Practices.
(13) (Post SB 72-0446) Remove ( i f i n s t a l l e d ) EGT harness assembly.


Practices.
(15) Remove turbine plenum assembly and combustion chamber assembly.
(16) Remove ITT sensor assembly, turbine bearing and bearing support
( c a r r i e r ) assembly, and bearing support assembly. Refer to
(17) Remove t h i r d stage stator and second and t h i r d stage turbine wheel
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 203
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A IE R 0 S P A (i E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. B. (Codes AA-CC, EA, Pre SB 72-0052) Remove F i r s t Stage Turbine Wheel, and
F i r s t and Second Stage Stator Assemblies (See Figure 201)
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT GASKET (5, FIGURE 201) CONTAINS

EIGHT HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056
INCH). IF GASKET WITH IMPROPERNUMBER OF HOLES
HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN ENGINE, REFER TO APPROVED
REPAIRS FOR ACTION REQUIRED.
(1) Remove curvic coupling gasket.
NOTE: Do not disassemble r i v e t s from turbine wheel

assembl i es.
(2) Remove s t a t o r and l i n e r assembly, f i r s t stage turbine wheel, and

second stage stator assemblies as an assembly.
(3) Remove nuts and bolts securing second stage stator assembly and
c a r e f u l l y remove stator using 285524-i-1 p u l l e r .
R (4) (Pre SB 72-0821) Remove nuts and bolts securing seal assembly and
R remove seal assembly.
R (5) (Post SB 72-0821) Do not remove seal assembly unless inspection

R requirements are not met. Refer to Approved Repairs i f seal assem-
R bly must be replaced.
CAUTION: PROTECT CURVIC COUPLINGS BY INSTALLING PLASTIC

CAPS OR SIMILAR PROTECTIVE DEVICES. SURFACES
OF COUPLINGS ARE CRITICAL AND MAY BE DAMAGEDBY
CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE. REFERTO
70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES FOR CURVIC
COUPLING HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(6) Remove nut (50, Figure 201). Remove f i r s t stage turbine wheel as-
sembly and f i r s t stage stator and l i n e r assembly. Remove shrouds
from stator and l i n e r assembly using 287440-I-i puller.
CAUTION: CHECK CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (85) TO ENSURE

THAT GASKET WHICH IS PRESENTLY INSTALLED CON-
TAINS NO HOLES. IF INCORRECT GASKET IS IN-
STALLED, REFER TO APPROVED REPAIRS FOR ACTION
REQUIRED.
(7) Remove seal ring and gasket (85).
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 204
Aug 4/94
n~7N-~A
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
10....,~,~ 20
8s.. (
90 . . . ~ 80
", .
E-44A-2882
5. GASKET 50. NUT

10. NUT 60. RIVET
15. BOLT 65. FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSY
20. NUT 70. SHROUD
25. BOLT 75. STATOR AND LINER ASSY
30. SEAL ASSY 80. SEAL RING
40. RIVET 85. GASKET
45. SECONDSTAGE STATOR ASSY 90. CURVIC COUPLING
(Codes AA-CC, EA, Pre SB 72-0052) First Stage Turbine ~Jheel and
First and Second Stage Stator Assembly Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 72-50-08

Page 205
Dec 14/87
lied
10
45
°2o i
70
\
I
I 75
1
I .1
j"
I
80
85
100
\
95
.- .".. - ."..
90
11"--i{-; "..:.-.'-.. '.. i.
E-44G- 1267
.:i-" ..::.i.
s?:Q:i~.-'
..
R (Codes AA-CC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA)

First Stage Turbine Wheel and First and
Second Stage Stator Assembly Installation
UP136688
Figure 202
72-50-08
Page 206
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
HAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING CURVIC COUPLING FROM MAIN SHAFT

FOR ANY REASON, INDEX CURVIC COUPLING SPLINE TO
HAIN SHAFT WITH SILVER PENCIL (BEROL VERITHIN
NO. 753).
NOTE: When indexing components duriny disassembly, place

index marks where rBnoval of marks are reaaily ac-
cessible during assembly.
When components with knife edge ( l a b y r i n t h ) seals

are removed from engine, use care to prevent any
handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends, on
knife edges.
1. B. (8) Index curvic coupling center spline to main shaft using s i l v e r pen-
c i l (Berol Verithin No. 753). Indexing is necessary to ensure cur-
vic coupling is r e i n s t a l l e d in same r e l a t i v e position to main shaft
from which i t was removed. Remove curvic coupling.
(9) I f curvic coupling does not have cooling holes, discard curvic
coupling, and contact the following f o r f u r t h e r i n s t r u c t i o n s
regarding replacement of other components. (See Figure 202A.)
P.O. Box 29003
Telephone: (602) 231-1000
R FAX: (602) 231-4056
KEY TO FIGURE 202
5. GASKET 65. FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSY

10. NUT 70. SHROUD
15. BOLT 75. TURBINE SUPPORT
20. NUT 76. PIN
25. BOLT 50. SHIM
30. SEAL ASSY 85. FIRST STAGE STATOR
40. RIVET 90. TRANSITION LINER
45. SECONDSTAGE STATUR ASSY 95. SEAL RING
50. NUT 100. GASKET
60. RIVET 105. CURVIC COUPLING
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 207
Aug 4/94
~FO~Tn-2A
lliedSignai
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. C. (Codes AA-AC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA) Remove F i r s t Stage
Turbine Wheel arm F i r s t and Second Stage Stator Assemblies (See Figure
202)
CAUTION: ENSURE GASKET (5, FIGURE 202) CONTAINS EIGHT

HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056 INCH). IF
GASKET WITH IMPROPERNUMBEROF HOLES HAS BEEN
INSTALLED IN ENGINE, REFER TO APPROVED REPAIRS
(1) Remove gasket from f i r s t stage turbine wheel assembly.
(2) Remove all remaining components except curvic coupling and ~asket
as on assembly and separate as follows.
Ca) Remove nuts and bolts securing second stage stator assembly
and c a r e f u l l y remove second stage stator assembly using
285524-1-i puller.
R (b) (Pre SB 72-0821) Remove nuts and bolts securing seal assembly
to second stage stator assembly and remove seal assembly.
(c) (Post SB 72-0821) Do not remove seal assembly unless inspec-

tion requirements are not met. Refer to Approved Repairs i f
seal assembly must be replaced.
CAUTION: PROTECT CURVIC COUPLINGS BY INSTALLING

PLASTIC CAPS OR SIMILAR PROTECTIVE
DEVICES. SURFACESOF COUPLINGS ARE CRITI-
CAL AND MAY BE DAMAGEDBY CARELESS HAN-
DLING OR STORAGE. REFERTO 70-00-00,
STANDARD PRACTICES FOR CURVlC COUPLING
HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(d) Remove nut (50). Remove f i r s t stage turbine wheel assembly.
(e) Remove shrouds from turbine stator liner using 287440-1-1

puller. Remove turbine support, shim and f i r s t stage stator
from transition liner. Remove ring seal.
CAUTION: CIiECK CURVIC COUPLING GASKET {100) TO ENSURETHAT

GASKET WHICH IS PRESENTLY INSTALLED CONTAINS NO
HOLES. IF INCORRECT GASKET IS INSTALLED, REFERTO
APPROVED REPAIRS FOR ACTION REQUIRED.
(3) Remove gasket (100).
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 208
Aug 4/94

A E R O S P A (" E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO, 72-01-27)
CAUTION: WHEN RENOVING CURVIC COUPLING FROM NAIN SHAFT FOR

ANY REASON, INDEX CURVIC COUPLING SPLINE TO NAIN
SHAFT WITH SILVER PENCIL (BEROL VERITHIN NO. 753).
NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly, place i n -

dex marks where removal of marks are r e a d i l y accessible
during assembly.
1. C. (4) Index curvic coupling center spline to main shaft using s i l v e r pen
c i l (Berol Verithin No. 753). Indexing is necessary to ensure cur
vic coupling is r e i n s t a l l e d in same r e l a t i v e position to main shaf
from which is was removed. Remove curvic coupling.
(5) I f curvic coupling does not have cooling holes, discard curvic
coupling, and contact tile following for f u r t h e r instructions
regarding replacement of other components. (See Figure 202A.)
P.O. Box 29003
Telephone: (602) 231-1000
FAX: (602) 231-4056
C) C) COOLING HOLES
©
© Y ©
C)
F-44G-875
Curvic Couplin~ Coolin~ Hole Inspection

Figure 202A 72-50-0
UP136688
Page 208A/208~
Aug 4/94
~ /lied
CAUTION: MAINTAIN ENGINE IN VERTICAL POSITION (INTAKE DOWN)

IF NO ROTATING COMPONENTSHAVE BEEN REPLACED, ENSURE

EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION
TO MAIN SHAFT.

COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTH MARKEDWITH A "V" OR " I "
SHOULD BE POSITIONED APPROXIMATELY180 DEGREES FROM
"V" OR " I " ON MATING CURVICS. THE R~IAINING COMPO-
NENTS PREVIOUSLYMARKEDSHOULD REMAIN ALIGNED WITH
EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARK ON MAINSHAFT.
IF CENTER CURVlC COUPLING (BETWEEN SECOND STAGE IM-
PELLER AND FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL) IS REPLACED,
THE CENTER CURVIC COUPLING TEETH HAS APPROXIMATELY
THREE DIFFERENT POSITIONS WHERECURVIC TEETH WILL
MESH WITH SECOND STAGE IMPELLER AND INTERNAL SPLINES
OF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING AND MAIN SHAFT. POSITION
CENTER CURVIC COUPLING TOOTHMARKEDWITH "V" OR " I "
AS NEAR TO 180 DEGREES FROM "V" OR " I " ON SECOND
STAGE IMPELLER CURVIC AS POSSIBLE.
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with "V" or " I " indicates the high
components, "V" or " I " tooth should be positioned approx-
imately 180 degrees from "V" or " I " tooth on mating
curvic.

Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to threads

of bolts, studs, and nuts prior to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
R 1. D. (Codes AA-AC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA) I n s t a l l F i r s t
Stage Turbine Wheel, and F i r s t and Second Stage Stator Assemblies (See
Figure 202)
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 209
Aug 12/91
AIIiedSignal Aerospace Company

MA1NTENANCE MANUAL &&&,I
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLING HAS COOLING HOLES. (SEE

FIGURE 202A.) DAMAGE TO ENGINE MAY RESULT DUE
TO IMPROPER COOLING.
ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTER MARKER)
INDEX MARKING ARE REMOVED DURING ASSEMBLY.
-
NOTE: Refer t o 72-00-00 Ad justment/Test, f o r seal break-
i n procedures i f knife-edge seal o r r e l a t e d compo-
nents ( r u b - s t r i ps) have been replaced.
1. D. (1) I n s t a l l c u r v i c coupl i n g on main s h a f t . C a r e f u l l y a1 i g n index mark

on c u r v i c coupling w i t h index mark on engine main s h a f t . During
assembly, remove index markings i n accordance w i t h standard reas-
sembly procedures. (Refer t o 70-00-00, Standard P r a c t i c e s .)
(2) When replacement o f c u r v i c coupl i n g i s required, observe the f o l -

1owing procedures.
CAUTION:
- - SOLVENT I S TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Brush curvics o f damaged c u r v i c c o u p l i n g and c u r v i c s o f

291247-1 coupl i n g a1 ignment gage w i t h camel h a i r brush and
thoroughly clean w i t h s o l v e n t (Federal S p e c i f i c a t i o n P-D-680,
Type I ) . Loosen l o c k i n g screws on gage and place c u r v i c
c o u p l i n g on gage w i t h forward end a g a i n s t gage teeth. Posi -
t i o n r i n g on gage a t p o s i t i o n i n which t h e coupling t e e t h w i l l
f u l l y bottom on gage. Tighten l o c k i n g screws on gage t o a
t o r q u e value o f 25 inch-pounds.
(b) Mark shaft of gage adjacent t o index mark placed on c o u p l i n g

p r i o r t o removing c u r v i c coupling from engine, u s i n g s i l v e r
p e n c i l (Berol V e r i t h i n No. 753).
) Using depth micrometer, measure from t o p o f s h a f t o f 291247-1

c o u p l i n g alignment gage t o h i g h t o o t h o f c u r v i c c o u p l i n g ( h i g h
t o o t h has "V" marking). Record reading.
) Do n o t loosen l o c k i n g screws on gage. Remove c u r v i c c o u p l i n g

from gage.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 210
Aug 12/91
MA1NTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
WARNING: SOLVENT I S TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE I N

WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVO I D BREATHING
FUMES OR LONG CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT
DANAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM
FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
1. D. (2) (e) Brush c u r v i c s o f new c u r v i c coupl i n g w i t h camel h a i r brush and

thoroughly clean w i t h s o l vent, (Federal S p e c i f i c a t i o n P-D-680,
Type I ) . Place new c u r v i c coupling on gage w i t h forward end
against gage t e e t h a t t h e p o s i t i o n i n which c u r v i c coupling
w i l l f u l l y bottom on gage teeth.
Take measurement w i t h depth micrometer from t o p o f gage t o
high t o o t h mark o f c u r v i c coupling (high t o o t h has "V"
marking). Measurement s h a l l be w i t h i n 0.003 i n c h o f t h a t ob-
t a i n e d on measurement o f o l d coupling i n step ( c ) . I f meas-
urements does n o t agree w i t h i n 0.003 inch, r e p l a c e c u r v i c
coupling w i t h new coupl i n g and repeat measurement. Mark new
c u r v i c coupling adjacent t o mark on s h a f t o f gage t o ensure
same angular a1 ignment as o l d coupling. Remove c u r v i c
coupling from gage.
(3) Assemble t h r e e piece f i r s t stage s t a t o r and l i n e r assembly as

f o l l o w s . (See f i g u r e s 202 and 203.)
Place t r a n s i t i o n 1iner, f i r s t stage s t a t o r and t u r b i n e support

i n t o p o s i t i o n on exhaust p i p e as shown i n View A, Figure 203.
With thickness gage, check space between flanges o f t u r b i n e

support and t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r a t t h r e e o r more l o c a t i o n s . Take
t h e average o f these readings and add 0.010 i n c h t o measure-
ment (see f i g u r e 203, View A). Result equals t o t a l thickness
o f shims required t o o b t a i n 0.008 t o 0.012 i n c h clearance
between t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r and f i r s t stage s t a t o r when a l l p a r t s
a r e f i n a l l y assembled.
Remove t u r b i n e support and i n s t a l 1 thickness o f shims deter-

mined i n s t e p (b). I n s t a l l t u r b i n e support on shims. Tem-
p o r a r i l y secure components using s i x b o l t s and nuts. Tighten
nuts t o a torque value o f 20 inch-pounds.
Place a p a r a l l e l b a r across top o f t u r b i n e support (see View

A, f i g u r e 203). Measure from p a r a l l e l bar t o a f t face o f ou-
t e r r i n g o f f i r s t stage s t a t o r and record as Dimension A.
Remove assembled components from exhaust p i p e and p o s i t i o n on

work bench (see View B, f i g u r e 203). Again measure d i s t a n c e
from p a r a l l e l bar t o a f t face of o u t e r r i n g o f f i r s t stage
s t a t o r and record as Dimension B.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 211
Dec 14/87
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany /Allied
THICKNESS GAGE READING.

ADD 0.010 IN. TO OBTAIN
PARALLEL BAR~ PROPERSHIMTHICKNESS.
DIM, A
I I II
L-~I r j
ir-
~L-"I tL-_1
EXHAUST
LI' PIPE
j J f f ~..._.__ J f
VIEW A
SHIM
PARALLEL BAR, ~ /
0.008 TO
0.012 IN.
f
t
/ I~I STAGE
TURBN
IE
sUPPORT
TRANSITION LINER STATOR
VIEW B
1-44A-2067
(Codes AA-AC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA)

Determining Shim Thickness for Three Piece
UP136688
First Stage Stator and Liner Assembly

Figure 203 72-50-08
Page 212
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal MAI~TENANCE MANUAL

i. D. (3) (f) Subtract Dimension I$ from Dimension A, obtained in step (d).

Result equals clearance between t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r and f i r s t
stage s t a t o r . Required clearance is 0.008 to 0.012 inch.
Remove bolts and nuts i n s t a l l e d in step (c).
(g) I f clearance is not within l i m i t s , change thickness of si~ims

as required.
(h) l n s t a l l shrouds in position on turbine support so shrouos are

placed at a pin location and centered. I n s t a l l ring on f i r s t
stage stator and ensure ends overlap lock ring in place.
(i) Place all bolts through t r a n s i t i o n l i n e r , shims and turbine

support. Retain bolts in position using 287423-1-1 b o l t
retainer.
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAI,iMABLE. USE IN WELL-

VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUriES OR LONG
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAI'IAGETO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FRON FLANE TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
(4) Brush mating curvic surfaces with a camel hair brush and thoroughly
clean with solvent, (Federal S p e c i f i c a t i o n , P-D-680, Type I ) .
NOTE: I f new a f t curvic coupling and/or turbine wheel or

wheels are i n s t a l l e d , temporarily i n s t a l l the
three turbine wheels and a f t curvic coupling
without gaskets using care to oppose "V" marks on
mating curvic 180 degrees. Index curvic couplings
on turbine wheels to main shaft usin~ s i l v e r pen-
c i l (Berol V e r i t h i n No. 753).
(5) ~Jith stator anu l i n e r assembly s t i l l on work bench (impeller end

down), place f i r s t stage turbine wheel into stator and l i n e r assen-
bly with thin part of blades up. Index mark on turbine wheel shall
be v i s i b l e .
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-038b) DURING SEAL INSTALLATION POSI-

TION THE SEAL BRAZED JOINT AS NEAR TO 12 O'CLOCK
(11 O'CLOCK TO 1 O'CLOCK) POSITION OF THE ENGINE
VERTICAL REFERENCE LINE AS POSSIBLE.
(G) (Pre SB 72-0821) I n s t a l l seal assembly into second sta~e s t a t o r
assembly. Secure with bolts ana nuts. I n s t a l l nuts toward rear of
engine. Tighten nut (20, Figure 202) to a torque value of 20 inch-
pounGs.
(7) Place s t a t o r lockin 9 nut with shouldered eage down and place second
stage stator assembly with impeller end down inside locking nut.
L i f t nut ana secure to l i p of second stage stator with three
284496-1-1 clamps.
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 213
Aug 4/94
A~ed.SignalAerospaceCompany
~_~/lied
. D. (8) I n s t a l l second stage stator assembly in f i r s t stage stator and
l i n e r assembly. Press down into correct position using hand
pressure. Secure with bolts i n s t a l l e d from bottom through mated
flanges, and with nuts i n s t a l l e d from top (toward rear of engine).
Tighten nuts (10, figure 202) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTER MARKER)

INDEX MARKINGS ARE R~IOVED DURING ASSEMBLY.
(9) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with standard

reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices.)
CAUTION: ENSURETHAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH NO

HOLES IS INSTALLED INTO CURVIC COUPLING.
(10) I n s t a l l curvic coupling gasket with no holes into curvic coupling.

Place f i r s t stage stator and l i n e r assembly, f i r s t stage turbine
wheel, and second stage stator assembly over shaft, using caution
to align index marks on wheel assembly and curvic coupling.
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH EIGHT HOLES (HOLE

DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056 INCH) IS INSTALLED INTO
FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSEMBLY AND HOLES IN
GASKET FACE TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE.
(11) I n s t a l l curvic coupling gasket with eight holes (hole diameter

0.051 to 0.056 inch) facing turbine end of main shaft into f i r s t
stage turbine wheel.
(12) I n s t a l l t h i r d stage stator and second and t h i r d stage turbine wheel

assemblies. Refer to 70-50-07, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
CAUTI ON: IF NO ROTATING COMPONENTSHAVE BEEN REPLACED, ENSURE

EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELEATIVE POSITION
TO MAIN SHAFT.

COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTH MARKEDWITH A "V" OR " I "
SHOULD BE POSITIONED APPROXIMATELY 180 DEGREES FROM
"V" OR "I" ON MATING CURVICS. THE REMAINING COMPO-
NENTS PREVIOUSLYMARKED SHOULD REMAIN ALIGNED WITH
EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARKON MAIN
SHAFT. IF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING (BETWEEN SECOND
STAGE IMPELLER AND FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL) IS
REPLACED, THE CENTER CURVIC COUPLING TEETH HAS AP-
PROXlMATLY THREE DIFFERENT POSITIONS WHERE CURVIC
TEETH WILL MESH WITH SECOND STAGE IMPELLER AND IN-
TERNAL SPLINES OF CENTER CURVIC COUPLING AND MAIN
SHAFT. MARKEDWITH "V" OR " I " AS NEAR 180 DEGREES
FROM "V" OR " I " ON SECONDSTAGE IMPELLER CURVIC AS
POSSIBLE.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 214
Aug 16/89
/lied
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with "V" or " I " indicates the
high tooth. When replacing a turbine rotating
component or components, "V" or " I " tooth should
be positioned approximatly 180 degrees from "V" or
" I " tooth on mating curvic.
The index line marked during disassembly on compo-

nents not being replaced should remain aligned
regardless of position of "V" or " I " teeth on
curvics.
1. E, (Codes AA-AC, EA, Pre SB 72-0052) I n s t a l l F i r s t Stage Turbine Wheel and

F i r s t and Second Stage Stator Assemblies (See Figure 201)
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLING HAS COOLING HOLES. (SEE

FIGURE 202A.) DAMAGETO ENGINE MAY RESULT DUE
TO IMPROPERCOOLING.
ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTER MARKER)

INDEX MARKING ARE REMOVEDDURING ASSEMBLY.
components ( r u b - s t r i p s ) have been replaced.
(I) I n s t a l l curvic coupling on main shaft. Carefully align index mark
on curvic coupling with index mark on engine main shaft. During
assembly, remove index markings in accordance with standard reas-
sembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices.)
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 214A/214B
Aug 12/91
lied
1. E. (2) When replacement of curvic coupling is required, observe the f o l -

lowing procedures.

CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGETO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEPAWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Brush curvics of damaged curvic coupling and curvics of
291247-1 coupling alignment gage with camel hair brush and
thoroughly clean with solvent, (Federal Specification P-D-680,
Type I ) . Loosen locking screws on gage and place curvic
coupling on gage with forward end against gage teeth. Posi-
tion ring on gage at the position in which coupling teeth w i l l
f u l l y i n s t a l l on gage. Tighten locking screws on gage to a
(b) Mark shaft of gage adjacent to index mark placed on coupling

prior to removing curvic coupling from engine, using s i l v e r
pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753).
(c) Using depth micrometer, measure from top of shaft of 291247-1
coupling, alignment gage to high tooth of curvic coupling
(high tooth has "V" marking). Record reading.
(d) Do not loosen locking screws on gage. Remove curvic coupling
from gage.
UP136688
72-50-08
R Page 215
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED

AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR LONG CONTACTWITH SKIN TO
PREVENT DAMAGETO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME
TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
1. E. (2) (e) Brush curvics of new curvic coupling with camel hair brush and
thoroughly clean with solvent, (Federal Specification P-D-680,
Type I ) . Place new curvic coupling on gage with forward end
against gage teeth, at the position in which curvic coupling
w i l l f u l l y bottom on gage teeth.
(f) Take measurement with depth micrometer from top of gage to
high tooth mark of curvic coupling (high tooth has "V"
marking). Measurement shall be w i t h i n 0.003 inch of that ob-
tained on measurement of old coupling in step (c). I f meas-
urements do not agree within 0.003 inch, replace curvic
coupling with new coupling and repeat measurement. Mark new
curvic coupling adjacent to mark on shaft of gage to ensure
same angular alignment as old coupling. Remove curvic
coupling from gage.
(3) Place f i r s t stage stator assembly on bench with impeller end up.
I n s t a l l seal ring on stator assembly making sure ends overlap to
lock ring in place. Turn stator assembly over on work bench and
i n s t a l l shrouds into stator with b o l t s .
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED

AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR LONG CONTACTWITH SKIN TO
PREVENT DAMAGETO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME
TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
(4) Brush mating curvic surfaces with a camel hair brush and thoroughly
clean with solvent, (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I ) .
CAUTION: TO PREVENTTHE POSSIBILITY OF INSTALLING FIRST STAGE TUR-

BINE WHEEL BACKWARDS, ENSURE THIN EDGE OF TURBINE BLADES
FACE AFT.
NOTE: I f new a f t curvic coupling and/or turbine wheel or wheels
are i n s t a l l e d , remove previously i n s t a l l e d index marks on
items to be r e i n s t a l l e d . Temporarily i n s t a l l the three t u r -
bine wheels and a f t curvic coupling without gaskets, using
care to oppose "V" marks on mating curvic 180 degrees. In-
dex curvic couplings on turbine wheels to main shaft using
s i l v e r pencil (Berol Verithin No. 753).
(5) With stator and l i n e r assembly s t i l l on work bench (impeller end

down), place f i r s t stage turbine wheel into stator and l i n e r assem-
bly with thin part of blades up. Index marks on turbine wheel
shall be v i s i b l e .
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 216
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
A F. R 0 S P A (i E
NAINTENANCE MANUAL

components ( r u b - s t r i p s ) have been replaced.
R i. E. (6) (Pre SB 72-0821) I n s t a l l seal assembly into second stage stator

assembly. Secure with bolts and nuts. I n s t a l l nuts toward rear of
engine. Tighten nuts (20, Figure 201) to a torque value of 20
i nch-pounds.
(7) Place stator locking nut with shouldered edge down and place second
stage stator assembly with impeller end down inside locking nut.
L i f t nut and secure to l i p of second stage stator with three
284496-1-i clamps.
(8) I n s t a l l second stage s t a t o r assembly in f i r s t stage stator and

l i n e r assembly. Press down into correct position using hand
pressure. Secure with bolts i n s t a l l e d from bottom through mated
flanges, and with nuts i n s t a l l e d from top (toward rear of engine).
Tighten nuts ( i 0 , Figure 201) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: ENSURE (SILVER PENCIL AND VIOLET MASTERMARKER)

INDEX MARKINGS ARE REMOVEDDURING ASSEMBLY.
(9) During assembly, remove index markings in accordance with standard

reassembly procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices.)
CAUTION: ENSURECURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH NO HOLES IS

INSTALLED INTO CURVIC COUPLING.
(10) I n s t a l l curvic coupling gasket with no holes into curvic coupling.

Place f i r s t stage stator and l i n e r assembly, f i r s t stage turbine
wheel and second stage stator assembly over shaft using caution to
align index marks on wheel, assembly and curvic coupling.
CAUTION: ENSURE CURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH EIGHT HOLES

(HOLE DIAMETER 0.051 TO 0.056 INCH) IS IN-
STALLED INTO FIRST STAGE TURBINE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
AND HOLES IN GASKET FACE TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE.
(11) I n s t a l l curvic coupling gasket with eight holes (hole diameter

0.051 to 0.056 inch) facing turbine end of main shaft into f i r s t
stage turbine wheel.
(12) Install third stage stator and second and third stage turbine wheel
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 217
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2.A
2. In_z!s_pection/Check
A. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gasket (See Figure 201 or 202)


grees apart. Minimum average height of gasket shall be 0.212 inch.
B. Curvic Coupling (See Figure 201 or 202)
(1) Inspect curvic couplings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
(2) Visually inspect spline area of curvic coupling (90 or 105) for
cracks. I f cracks or uamage is evident, replace curvic coupling.
NOTE: Refer to 72-00-00, Adjusi~nent/Test, for seal
cor,lponents (rub-strips) have been replaced.
(3) Inspect knife edges fur wear. Minimum acceptable knife diameter is
2.974 inches through any 90 degree arc.
(4) Replace curvic coupling that does not meet inspection requirBnents
or is damaged beyond repair.
C. Inspect Stator Locking Nut (See Figure 201 or 202)

(1) Visual|y inspect nut for wear and damage. Thread damage in excess
of one-half entrance thread is cause for replacmlent.
NOTE: Diameter B dimensional inspection is not required
unless stator locking nut w i l l not assemble with
mating components during i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(2) Dimensionally inspect inner dim~leter at three positions approxi-

mately 120 degrees apart. Diameter B (Figure 204A) shall be 9.629
to 9.636 inches.
(3) Replace part i f inspection requir~aents are not met.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 218
Aug 4/94
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
B~
/,y soRFAc~
G OUGES
\
,•i/RAISED
METAL AND
MATERIALBUILDUP
SURFACE E VIEW A- A
DIM. D
1~.. \
t X
DETAIL C SECTION B- B ~ SURFACE E
1-44G-332
DIM. D shall not exceed 0.020 inch.
Inspection of F i r s t Stage
Turbine Segmented Shroud
UP136688
Figure 204 72-50-08

Page 219
Dec 14/87

NOTE: I f engine is subjected to f i r s t stage turbine stator

vane burn through, f i r s t stage turbine wheel assembly
shall be discaraed.
2. E. Inspect F i r s t Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly (See Figure 201, 203 or 205)
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROMTURBINE SECTION COMPOIENTS

ON TURBINE WHEEL HAVE CAUSED LOSS OF MATERIAL
PROPERTIES. REUSE IS NOT APPROVED OF TURBINE
WHEELS THAT HAVE BEEN SUBJECTED TO THE METAL
DEPOSIT DUE TO EXPOSURETO HIGh TEMPERATURES
BECAUSE OF THE FOLLOWING.
ENGINE DECELERATION (BOGDOWN) 55 PERCENT RPH OR

BELOW.
OVERTEMPERATUREABOVE TIIE START LIMIT OUTLINED

(i) Inspect turbine wheel for metal deposits.
(a) Removal of metal deposits from turbine wheel is not approved.
(b) Reuse of turbine wheel subjected to metal deposits is not

al I owed.
(2) Ensure precleaned turbine wheel is free of o i l , carbon, etc. Refer

to Cleaning/Painting. Perform fluorescent penetrant
check/inspection in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
No cracks allowed.
(3) Inspect and repair curvic coupling teeth in accordance with

(4) Visually inspect diffusea aluminizee coating. Coating may be

eroded from leading edge of blades. Leading edge corner raaius may
be eroded to 7/32 inch radius maximum.
(5) Visually inspect turbine wheel for evidence of loose r i v e t s . I f

loose rivets are suspected, check for moveraent using l i g h t force
(approximately 5 pounds). No movement allowed. Refer to Approved
Repair.
(6) Distorted rivets are acceptable unless f l a r e of r i v e t is distortea

over 50 percent of the diameter.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 221
Aug 4/94
GFG70o2A
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CRACK SUSCEPTIBLEAREA. NO CRACKSPERMITTED.
j
CRACK S U S C E P ~ U S C E P T I B I . E
1 AREA.
VIEWA-A
(RIVET REMOVEDFOR CLARITY)
NOTE: ABOVE ILLUSTRATIONSSHOWSCRACKS

SUSCEPTIBLEAREA. INSPECTFOR VERY
FINE HAIRLINE CRACKS. NO CRACKS
ARE PERMITTEDIN ANY AREAOF
TURBINEWHEELASSEMBLY. 1-44A-3399
UP136688
Inspection of First Stage Turbine Wheel for Cracks

Figure 205 72-50-08
Page 222
Dec 14/87
~ /lied
72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No.
2. E. (7) Inspect for cracks adjacent to turbine wheel r i v e t holes as
fol Iows.
(a) Visually inspect for cracks adjacent to every r i v e t hole on
Figure 205.
(b) Inspection shall be accomplished using high intensity l i g h t

UP136688
72-00-00
R Page 222A/222B
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
j--'~'A /STATOR FLANGE

AREA B I~/~
// f o~ / - - - ~ ~ - - _ ~ ~ ~ \\,
t //~ ~ ' ~ ~ \\ \
STATORFLANGE
BRAZE FILLET
DISH
\ t
AREA B
AREA M
~AREA
p~p~AREA N
AREA H
AREA L
E FILLET
VANE
SECTION A-A
1-44A-1173
(Codes AA-CC, EA, Pre SB 72-0052) Inspection of

First Stage Turbine Stator and Liner Assembly
UP136688
Figure 206 72-50-08

Page 223
Dec 14/87
lliedSignai
A F R O S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. F. (Codes AA-CC, EA, Pre SB 72-0052) Inspect First Stage Stator and Liner
Assembly (See Figures 201, 206 and 207)
(i) Visually inspect aiffused aluminum coated Area H and L for chip-
ping, f l a k i n g , and wear through to base metal. (See Figure 206.)
Erosion on a l l vane leading edges extending f u l l vane width r a d i -
a l l y is acceptable, provided i t does not exceed 0.050 inch a x i a l l y .
Local erosion on all vane t r a i l i n g edges is allowable, provided i t
does not exceed 50 percent of original metal thickness or 0.300
inch a x i a l l y .
(2) Inspect Areas M and N (Figure 206) f o r cracks in sheet metal by use
R of X-ray NDT. No cracks are allowed in these areas. AlliedSignal
Quality Standard P-125 shall be used as a guide f o r X-ray f a c i l i t y
R capable of complying with AlliedSignal Quality Standard P-125 or
R returned to AlliedSignal f o r inspection.
(3) Visually inspect stator and liner assembly for cracks, warpage,
distortion, and other damage. Warpage of vanes is acceptable as
long as crack limitations are met. Cracks are not acceptable in
any portion of the stator except as noted.
(4) Any vane with a piece missing is cause f o r r e j e c t i o n of the s t a t o r .
(5) Buckling at t r a i l i n g edge of each vane is permitted, provided i t

does not deviate more than 0.050 inch from normal contour.
(6) Inspect Area N for erosion (see Figure 206). I f erosion of sheet
metal exceeds 0.005 inch, replace stator and liner assembly.
(7) Inspect for the following crack limitations. Any combination of

cracks pictorial geometry as shown in Figure 207 is acceptable in a
maximum of 20 vanes, provided crack limitations are met.
(a) Cracks shall not exceed 0.010 inch in width. A 0.010 inch d i -
ameter wire is recommended f o r checking crack width.
(b) One crack in each of ten vanes is permitted, provided any

crack does not exceed 0.600 inch in length. One crack in each
of five vanes is permitted, provided any crack does not exceed
0.300 inch in length. One crack in each of five additional
vanes is permitted, provided any crack does not exceed 0.100
inch in lenyth.
(c) A maximum of two cracks are permitted in each of any three

vanes w i t h i n 20 vanes mentioned above, provided cracks are
p a r a l l e l to each other and do not exceed 0.600 inch in length.
A minimum separation distance of 0.200 inch between the two
cracks in each vane is also required.
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 224
Aug 4/94
/•/liedignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. F. (7) (d) No cracks are allowed in the dish (see figure 206).
(e) A single radial crack in Area B (see figure 206) is acceptable

within a one bolt hole area on s t a t o r flange. Radial cracks
are allowed in a maximum of f i v e bolt hole areas.
(f) No cracks are allowed in Area P (see figure 206).
R (8) Inspect stator vanes f o r burn through. Burn through is not

R allows sight through stator vanes when viewed parallel to engine
R center lines. (See Figure 213.)
R (9) I f inspection reveals stator vane burn through, f i r s t stage turbine

(i0) I f inspection of stator and l i n e r assembly is not s a t i s f a c t o r y ,

replace stator and l i n e r assembly with three piece f i r s t stage sta-
t o r and l i n e r assembly in accordance with 72-50-08,
Removal/Instal I ati on.
AXIAL ~,
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYA,I
\
ACCEPTABLE VANE TRAILING EDGE CRACK PATTERNS
L.. L._
DETAIL A
1-44A- I 174
(Codes AA-CC, EA, Pre SB 72-0052)

UP136688
F i r s t Stage Turbine Stator Assembly Crack Pattern

Figure 207 72-50-08
Page 225
Aug 16/89
7J'~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL "-'~JSignal
ViEWB- B
".~-DIM. H'~" /
DIM. F • I I-.-- I
DiM. D
I
DIA C
I
EDGE l \ I TRAILING
PLATFORM
-.-.-AIRBAFFLE
SECTION A- ~.
1-44G-726
SERVICEABLE LIMITS SERVICEABLE LIMITS
DIA C 7.600 in. max. DIM. F 0.130 to 0.155 i n .
DIM. D 0.055 i n . rain DIM. H 0.545 to 0.560 i n .
(Codes AA-CC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA)

UP136688
F i r s t Stage Turbine Stator Vane Section Crack Pattern

Figure 208 72-50-08
Page 226
Aug 12/91
lliedSignai
A I ~. R 0 S P A (i E
HAINTENANCE NANUAL
NOTE: A repair has been developed by the manufacturer to repair cracks,

corrosion/erosion, buckling or vane warpage that exceed inspec-
tion l i m i t s . However, at this time t h i s repair shall be accom-
R plished at an AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y . I t is
suggested that parts being held for future salvage be returned to
the following f a c i l i t y for review of r e p a i r a b i l i t y .
D i s t r i b u t i o n Center
Phoenix, AZ 85034
2. G. (Codes AA-CC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA) Inspect F i r s t

Stage Turbine Stator Vane Section (See Figures 202 and 208)
(i) Visually inspect stator vane section for cracks, warpage, d i s t o r -

t i o n , and other damage. Warpage of vanes is acceptable as long as
crack l i m i t a t i o n s are met. Cracks are not acceptable in any por-
tion of the stator except as noted.
(2) Visually inspect vane leading edges for hot gas corrosion/erosion.
Corrosion/erosion not exceeding 0.050 inch depth is acceptable.
(3) Visually inspect vane t r a i l i n g edges for hot gas corrosion/erosion.

Corrosion/erosion not exceeding 0.050 inch depth for 0.300 inch
distance towards vane leading edge is acceptable.
(4) Visually inspect vane t r a i l i n g edge for buckling. Buckling not ex-
ceeding 0.050 inch from normal contour is acceptable.
(5) Visually inspect parts f o r wear. I f wear is evident, perform

dimensional inspection observing specified l i m i t s .
(6) Visually inspect a i r baffle for buckling, cracks, and rub

indications. None allowed.
(7) Inspect for the following crack l i m i t a t i o n s .
(a) A maximum of six axial cracks in outer ring t r a i l i n g edge side

is acceptable providing no one crack exceeds 0.300 inch.
(b) Pin lock s l o t cracks are acceptable providing tile cracks do

not penetrate into vane outer wall.
(c) Any number of vane leading edge cracks are acceptable provid-
R ing the cumulative length per vane does not exceed 0.300 inch.
R Any single crack shall not exceed 0.15U inch.
(d) Any number of vane t r a i l i n g edge cracks are acceptable provid-

ing they do not exceed 0.300 inch and are none-intersecting.
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 227
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
Allied~SignalAerospaceCompany
~ S lied
SECTION A - A
DIM. M -~
DIM. C DIM. D
1 SURFACE E "~-'---~l
t t
EROSION NOT TO
ENTER PIN HOLE
SECTION B - B DETAIL Z
1-44G-191
(Codes AA-CC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA)

UP136688
Inspection of First Stage Turbine Support Assembly

Figure 209 72-50-08
Page 228
Aug 12/91
/lied
R 2. G. (8) Inspect stator vanes for burn through. Burn through is not
R allows sight through stator vanes when viewed parallel to engine
R center lines. (See Figure 213.)
R (9) I f inspection reveals s t a t o r vane burn through, f i r s t stage turbine

H. Inspect F i r s t Stage Turbine Support Assembly (See Figures 202 and 209)
(1) Visually inspect support assembly for cracks. I f cracks are evi-
dent, perform fluorescent penetrant check/inspection in accordance
with 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES. No cracks allowed except radial
cracks at Surface E not exceeding 0.200 inch in depth. Maximum of
six cracks per part.
(2) Visually check f o r erosion. Erosion shall not exceed l i m i t s as

(a) No erosion allowed through wall to pin hole. (See Detail Z.)
(b) Diameter A, minimum 7.355 inch, maximum out of round 0.018

inch.
(c) Diameter B, minimum 7.355 inch, maximum out of round 0.020

inch.
(d) Dimension C, minimum wall thickness of 0.050 inch, between pin
bosses.
(e) Dimension D, minimum wall thickness of 0.050 inch between pin
bosses.
(f) Pin wear step shall not exceed 0.020 inch depth. I f wear ex-
ceeds allowable l i m i t , replace pin(s) as follows.
Remove worn pin(s) from support assembly.
2 I n s t a l l nm~ $9008AK24 pin(s) 0.050 to 0.065 inch (Dimension

M) below Surface E.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 229
Aug 16/89
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany lied
R 2. I. (Codes AA-CC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA) Inspect Combustor
Transition Liner (See Figures 202 and 210)
(1) Visually inspect transition l i n e r for cracks. No cracks are al-
lowed in transition l i n e r .
(2) (Part No. 896496-1/-3) Minimum allowable thickness at combustion

chamber to combustor l i n e r contact area (Area B, Figure 210) is
0.030 inch.
(3) (Part No. 3101408-2/-4) Minimum allowable thickness at combustion
chamber to combustor l i n e r contact area (Area B, Figure 210) is
0.055 inch.
(4) Visually check for burning (oxidation) and/or hot corrosion
sulfidation). Minor burning (oxidation) and/or hot corrosion
Isulfidation) is acceptable.
damaged beyond repair~
AREA B
1
SECTION A-A
1-44A-1172
R (Codes AA-CC, EA, Post SB 72-0052) (Codes DA, FA-GA)

UP136688
Inspection of Combustor Transition Liner (Typical)

Figure 210 72-50-08
Page 230
Aug 12/91
lslied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
f
A
I
\ %
%
AXIAL
P
I
s
-.- DIM. B--~
AREAF
I
/ ~~IN~ER CONE
ISSING PIECE
300 IN. RADIALLY,
250 IN. AXIALLY.
XIMUM OF FOUR
THERMOCOUPLESLOT
CRACKLIMITS
.__,_J ~ " 0.1001N. ADJACENT
i r'--- T O VANE FILLET
DETAIL A
STATORVANE CRACKLIMITS
1-44G-966
Dimension A 0.125 inch maximum

Dimension B 0.750 inch maximum
UP136688
Second Stage Turbine Stator Assembly Crack Patterns

Figure 211 72-50-08
Page 231
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
2. J. Inspect Second Stage Stator Assembly (See Figures 201, 202, 211 and
212)
(I) Visually inspect stator assembly for cracks, warpage, d i s t o r t i o n ,

and other damage. Warpage of vanes is acceptable as long as crack
l i m i t a t i o n s are met. (See figure 211 for vane crack patterns.)
(a) Ensure precleaned sheet metal (Area H, figure 212) is free of
o i l , carbon, etc. Refer to Cleaning/Painting.
(b) Perform fluorescent penetrant check/inspection in accordance

with 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES. No cracks allowed,
(2) Erosion at outer edge of all vanes is acceptable, provided i t does

not exceed missing material in excess of 0.150 inch a x i a l l y and
0.150 inch r a d i a l l y . (See Detail E, figure 212.)
(3) Hot corrosion on a l l vane leading edges extending f u l l vane width

r a d i a l l y may be hand finished, provided i t does not exceed 0.075
i nch axial ly.
(4) Inspect braze j o i n t s as follows. (See figures 211 and 212.)
(a) Gap of 0.020 inch for 8 inches cumulative in circumference at

Area F is acceptable. (See figure 211.)
(b) Cracks in Area G are not acceptable. (See figure 212.)
(5) A piece of vane t r a i l i n g edge may be missing from a maximum of four

vanes, provided missing piece does not exceed 0.300 inch r a d i a l l y
and 0.250 inch a x i a l l y . (See figure 211.)
(6) Crack limits for thermocouple slots (slots cut out of outer shroud
of vane section casting to allow thermocouples to extend into vane
area) are as follows.
(a) Cracks may extend r a d i a l l y across the entire width of all the
thermocouple slots, but shall not exceed 0.125 inch in depth
in the axial direction. (See Detail B, Dimension A, figure
211.)
(b) Crack(s) in an axial d i r e c t i o n from outboard edge of thermo-

couple slot may extend into the sheet metal portion of inner
cone provided only one of the following conditions exists:
(See Detail B, Dimension B, figure 211.)
1 A single crack not to exceed 0.750 inch in length.
2 Numerous non-intersecting cracks not to exceed 0.500 inch

in length and without material missing from the cracks.
R (c) Check for circumferential cracks in sheet metal inner case.

R Replace stator assembly i f circumferential cracks are evident.
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 232
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. J. (7) No cracks are allowed in outer cone or rear a i r seal. (See Figure
212.)
(8) Inspect for cracked and bent mount lugs on stator ring. A maximum
of two cracked or bent non-adjacent lugs are acceptable. Rework to
remove defective lugs.
(9) Inspect mount lugs flange for cracks, crack length shall not exceed
0.200 inch across inner portion of flange toward mount lugs. (See
Area B, Figure 212.)
R (I0) Any blade rotor shroud rub deeper than 0.005 inch or through an arc
greater than 90 degrees is unacceptable.
(11) Visually inspect stator assembly for evidence of turbine wheel

blade t i p rub. I f rub indications are present, remove raised metal
and sharp edges by l i g h t l y hand finishing.
(12) Inspect stator vanes for burn through. Burn through is not
acceptable. Burn through is defined as, any vane material loss
that allows sight through stator vanes when viewed parallel to en-
gine center line. (See Figure 213).
(13) I f inspection reveals stator vane burn through, second stage tur-
bine wheel shall be replaced and removed wheel shall be discarded.

K. Turbine Seal Assembly (See Figure 201 or 202)
(1) Inspect turbine seal assembly ( f e l t metal) as follows.
NOTE: Sealing material on turbine seal assembly Part No.

868259-1 consists of f e l t metal. Refer to step (1).
Sealing material on turbine seal assembly Part No.
868259-2/-3/-4 consists of honeycomb. Refer to step (2).
(a) Visually inspect seal grooves. Adjacent grooves shall have no
connecting paths.
(c) Inspect for separation between f e l t metal and bonding surface.

(d) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. I f cracks are
UP136688
72-50-08
Page 233
Aug 12/91
ignal
~_/ l i e d
~INTENANCE MANUAL
2, No (1) (e) Replace seal assembly i f inspection requirements are not met.
(2) Inspect turbine seal assembly (honeycomb) as follows.

(a) Visually inspect honeycomb portion of seal assembly for abnor-
malities which could cause seal to leak (separation of brazed
j o i n t , pieces missing or any other obvious damage).


R have no connecting paths. Wear grooves within 0.032 inch of
R seal edge not allowed.
(d) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks, i f cracks are

suspected perform fluorescent penetrant inspection in accord-
ance with 70-00-00, Standard Practices. No cracks allowed.
(e) Replace seal assembly i f inspection requirements are not met.
L. Inspect Seal Ring (80, Figure 201 or 95, Figure 202)
(1) Visually check for f r e t t i n g , p i t t i n g and signs of rotation.

Replace i f conditions exist.
(2) Measure seal ring in free state, gap between ends shall be 0.050
inch minimum.

UP136688
72-50-08
Page 234
Aug 16/89
MA1NTENANCL MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
SEAL
SECTION A- A
STATOR RING
Inspection of Second Stage Turbine Stator

UP136688
Figure 212 72-50-08

Page 235
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BURN THROUGH
F-44G-771
R First and Second Stage Turbine Stator

UP136688
R Vane Burn Through (Typical)

R Figure 213 72-50-08
Page 236
Aug 16/89
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAI NTENANCE FIANOAL
R CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0747) DO NOT IMHERSE TRANSITION LINER

R WITH THERMAL BARRIER COATING IN SOLUTIONS CONTAINING
R SODIUM OR POTASSIUM. SOLUTIONS SUCH AS ALKALINE
R CLEANERS, RUST STRIPPERS AND SODIUM HYDROXIDE CAN
R PENETRATE THROUGH THE THERMAL BARRIER COATING N~D
R DAMAGE THE BOND COAT BETWEEN THE BARRIER COATING AND
R THE BASE METAL.
Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, f o r general cleaning i n s t r u c t i o n s

and for description of cleaning methods specified in Table 203.
NOTE: Reference shal 1 be made to Table 203 f o r recommended

cleaning method.
Figure Item Cleaning Methoes

No. No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
All standard m e t a l l i c hardware X

201 5, 85 Gasket
30 Seal Assembly
45 Stator
50 Locking Nut
65 F i r s t Stage
Wheel Assembly
70 Shroud X
75 Stator and X
Liner
80 Ri ng Seal X
90 Curvic Coupling X
202 5, 100 Gasket X
30 Seal Assembly X
45 Stator X
50 Locking Nut X X
65 F i r s t Stage X
Wheel Assembly
70 Shroud X
75 Turbine Support X
80 Shim X
85 Stator X
90 Transition Liner X
95 Ri ng Seal X
105 Curvic Coupling X
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 237
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAIIITENANCE MANUAL
4. Approved Repairs
A. Repair Curvic Coupling (See Figure 201 or 202)
Repair curvic couplings in accordance with 70-OU-O0, Standard Practices.
B. Repair F i r s t Stage Turbine Wheel Assembly (See Figure 201 or 202)
(1) Repair curvic couplings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard

Practices.
CAUTION: bSE CARE WHEN STAKING RIVETS, TO PREVENT DAMAGE

TO RIVET POCKET OI~ SEAT.
repair check rivets as follows.
(a) Check for movBnent of rivet using light force (approximately 5

(b) Check cracks in r i v e t f l a r e . No cracks allowed.
(c) Check r i v e t f l a r e for d i s t o r t i o n . Uistorted rivets are ac-

ceptable unless f l a r e of r i v e t is distorted over 50 percent of
the diameter.
(d) I f r i v e t s cannot be repaired, return turbine wheel to an
AlliedSignal authorized service f a c i l i t y for evaluation and
possible repair.
C. Action Required i f Incorrect Curvic Coupling Gasket has Been I n s t a l l e d
R (1) Contact Customer Support Engineering, AlliedSignal Engines, P.O.

R Box 52181, Phoenix, Arizona 85072-2181 (Telephone: Area Code 602,
231-1000) and provide the following data.
Ca) Engine serial number.
(b) Hours/cycle of l i f e l i m i t e d rotating components.

(c) Location of curvic coupling gasket in ques'cion, number and
size of holes.
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 238
Aug 4/94
lliedSignai
A E R 0 S PAC E
~,IAlNTENANCE MANUAL
R 4. D. (Post SB 72-0821) Remove and Replace Second Stage Stator Seal Assembly
R (See Figure 214)
CAUTION: USE EXTREMECAUTION WHEN REMOVING RIVETS TO

PREVENT ENLARGING, ELONGATING, AND/OR OTHERWISE
DAMAGING RIVET HOLES IN NOZZLE.
(1) Machine or hand f i n i s h to remove heads of installed r i v e t s (5).
(2) Use hanmer and suitable punch to drive out remainder of r i v e t .
(3) Remove retainer (10), d e f l e c t o r (15), spacers (20), and seal assem-
bly (25) from nozzle (30).
(4) Clean and inspect parts. Stator shroud rubs are acceptable up to
180 degree arc. Hand f i n i s h raised metal as required.
CAUTIOI~: ENSURETHAT SEAL IS INSTALLED WITH SEAL

SUPPORT/RING WELD JOINT FACING AFT.
(5) I n s t a l l new seal assembly (25), spacers (20), deflector (15), and
retainer ( i 0 ) .
CAUTION: ENSURETHAT RIVETS ARE INSTALLED FROMAFT SIDE

OF ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: NAS1398C4A4 r i v e t s raay be i n s t a l l e d using a hand-

held r i v e t i n g t o o l .
(6) Secure assembled parts with r i v e t s ~5).
(7) Check seal for security in nozzle assembly. No axial

movement should be apparent. Radial movement of the seal
r e l a t i v e to the nozzle is allowed up to 0.014 inch,
provided all rivets are properly secured.
72-50-08
UP136688
Page 239
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~lliedSignai
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FWD AFT
(REF)
15( R E F ) - - - - ' ~ I ~
',REF)
25(REF)
" 20 (REF)
5
I0
R
20
3O
\
.f
J
25
\ J
C E-44G - 1707
R (Post SB 72-0821)
R Second Stage Stator Assembly
R Figure 214 72-50-08
UP136688
Page 240
Aug 4/94
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
Phoenix, Arizona
VOLUME I I
TURBOPROP ENGINE
PART NO. MODEL NO.
895720-1 TPE331-5-251K
895720-2 TPE331-5-251K
895720-3 TPE331-5-251K
895720-4 TPE331-5-255K
896950-1-1 TPE331-5-251C
896950-2 TPE331-5-251C
896950-3 TPE331-5-251C
3101840-1 TPE331-5-252M
3102520-1 TPE331-5-252K
3102520-2 TPE331-5-254K
3102520-3 TPE331-5-254K
3103860-1 TPE331-5-252C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPORT NO. 72-01-27

UP136688
(FAA APPROVED)
Dec 14/87
Copyright 1987 AlliedSignal Inc. Revised Aug 4/94
~Islied
CHAPTER 73 - ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ .~ SECTION/
GENERAL 73-00-00
DISTRIBUTION 73-10-00
L i n e s - Fuel System
Pressure Regulator - S,ta,rt Fuel DA-FB
R Lockout Valve - Fuel Hea¢er DA-GA
Shutoff Valve - Fuel
Flow iIJ~vi.der and Drain Valve - Fuel
Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies - Fuel
Anti-Icing Valve - Fuel AA-CC
Mahifold Purge System AB-BA,
CB-FB
Fuel Control Heat AA-CC
FUEL SYSTEMPLUMBING 73-10-01

START FUEL PRESSUREREGULATOR DA-FB 73-10-03

Adjustment/Test 204
UP136688
73'CONTENTS
Page 1
Aug 12/91
lied
TABLE OF CONTENTS(CONT)
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
DISTRIBUTION (CONT)
R HEATER LOCKOUT/FUEL ENRICHMENTVALVE-FUEL DA-GA 73-10-05

Adjustment/Test 206
SHUTOFF VALVE-FUEL 73-10-06
Adjustment/Test 211
FLOW DIVIDER AND DRAIN VALVE - FUEL 73-10-07
MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES - FUEL 73-10-09
Adjustment/Test 214
ANTI-ICING VALVE - FUEL AA-CC 73-10-10
UP136688
73-CONTENTS
Page 2
Aug 12/91
Allied.SigmlAerospaceCompany
~ilied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL gnal
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/. SECTION/
DISTRIBUTION (CONT)
...... MANIFOLD PURGESYSTEM- FUEL AB-BA, 73-10-13
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES CB-GA 201
Adjustment/Test 211 -
CONTROLLING 73-20-00
Control and Pump Assembly - Fuel
Pump Assembly - Fuel
F i l t e r - Fuel
Control Unit - Fuel
Enrichment Valve - Fuel AA-CC
Pressurizing Valve - Fuel DA-FB
R Pressure Regulator- Fuel GA
Temperature Sensor AA-CC
R Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor DA-GA
FUEL CONTROLAND FUEL PUMPASSEMBLY 73-20-01

Adjustment/Test 210
FILTER - FUEL AA-BA, 73-21-03
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES DA-GA 201
ENRICHMENT AND PRESSURIZING VALVE - FUEL 73-21-04

Adjustment/Test 207
UP136688
73'CONTENTS
Page 3
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
EFFECT CHAPTER/
CODE/ SECTION/
CONTROLLING (CONT)
R INLETTEMPERATURESENSOR, INLET TEMPERATURE 73-21-05
R AND PRESSURESENSOR, AND FUEL CONTROL
R ASSEMBLY
R Adjustment/Test 221
PUMP ASSEMBLY - FUEL 73-21-06

Adjustment/Test 205
TORQUE LIMITER~ TORQUEAND/OR AA-BA, 73-22-00

TEMPERATURE LIMITING DA-FB
R TORQUE/TEMPERATURE LIMITER AA-BA 73-22-01

R (BY-PASS VALVE) DA-FB
Removal/Instal I ation 201
Adjustment/Test 208
Cl eani ng/Pai nti ng 212
UP136688
73-CONTENTS
Page 4
Aug 12/91.
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

72-01-27
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
Volume II 216 Aug 16/89
Ti ~e Page Aug 4/94 216A Aug 12/91
216B Aug 12/91
ENGINE 217 Dec 14/87
FUEL AND 218 Aug 12/91
CONTROL Tab 219 Aug 12/91
220 Dec 14/87
Table of 1 Aug 12/91 221 Dec 14/87
Contents 2 Aug 12/91 222 Dec 14/87
3 Aug 12/91 223 Aug 16/89
4 Aug 12/91 224 Dec 14/87
225 Dec 14/87
List of 1 Aug 4/94 226 Dec 14/87
Effective 2 Aug 4/94 227 Aug 16/89
Pages 3 Aug 4194 228 Dec 14/87
4 Aug 4194 228A Aug 12/91
228B Aug 12/91
Temporary 230 Dec 14/87
Revisions Aug 12/91 231 Aug 16/89
232 Dec 14/87
73-00-00 1 Dec 14/87 233' Dec 14/87
2 Blank 234 Dec 14/87
201 Dec 14/87 235 Dec 14/87
202 Blank 236 Dec 14/87
73-10-00 1 Aug 12/91 237 Dec 14/87
2 Dec 14/87 238 Dec 14/87
73-10-01 201 Aug 4/94 239 Dec 14/87
202 Dec 14/87 240 Dec 14/87
203 Aug 16/89 241 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 242 Dec 14/87
2O5 Aug 16/89 242A Aug 12/91
206 Dec 14/87 242B Aug 12/91
207 Aug 16/89 243 Dec 14/87
208 Aug 12/91 244 Dec 14/87
209 Aug 12/91 245 Aug 16/89
210 Dec 14/87 246 Dec 14/87
210A Aug 12/91 247 Aug 16/89
210B Aug 12/91 248 Dec 14/87
210C Aug 12/91 249 Dec 14/87
210D Blank 250 Dec 14/87
211 Aug 12/91 251 Aug 16/89
212 Dec 14/87 252 Dec 14/87
213 Aug 16/89 253 Aug 16/89
214 Aug 16/89 254 Dec 14/87
215 Aug 16/89 254A Aug 12/91
73-EFF
UP136688
Page 1
Aug 4/94
GEG70,.2.A

CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
2540 Aug 12/91 215 Aug 16/89
255 Aug 12/91 216 Dec 14/87
256 Aug 16/89 217 Dec 14/87
257 Dec 14/87 218 Aug 12/91
258 Aug 1 2 / 9 1 73-10-09 201 Aug 4/94
259 Aug 12/91 202 Aug 12/91
260 Blank 203 Aug 12/91
73-10-03 201 Aug 16/89 204 Aug 12/91
202 Aug 12/91 204A Aug 12/91
203 Dec 14/87 204B Blank
204 Dec 14/87 205 Aug 12/91
73-10-05 201 Aug 4/94 206 Dec 14/87
202 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 12/91 208 Dec 14/87
204 Aug 12/91 209 Aug 16/89
205 Aug 12/91 210 Aug 16/89
206 Aug 12/91 211 Dec14/87
207 Aug 12/91 212 Dec 14/87
208 Blank 212A Aug 12/91
73-10-06 201 Aug 16/89 212B Blank
202 Aug 16/89 213 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 4/94 214 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87 214A Aug 12/91
205 Dec 14/87 214B Aug 12/91
206 Dec 14/87 215 Aug 12/91
207 Dec 14/87 216 Aug 12/91
208 Aug 16/89 217 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91 218 Aug 16/89
210 Aug 12/91 219 Aug 12/91
211 Dec 14/87 220 Aug 12/91
212 Dec 14/87 221 Aug 12/91
213 Dec 14/87 222 Dec 14/87
214 Aug 12/91 223 Dec 14/87
215 Aug 4/94 224 Aug 12/91
216 Blank 225 Aug 4/94
73-10-07 201 Aug 4/94 226 Aug 4/94
202 Dec 1 4 / 8 7 73-10-10 201 Dec 14/87
203 Dec 14/87 202 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 203 Dec 14/87
205 Aug 12/91 204 Bec 14/87
206 Aug 12/91 205 Dec 14/87
207 Au9 16/89 206 Blank
208 Aug 1 2 / 9 1 73-10-13 201 Aug 4/94
209 Aug 12/91 202 Dec 14/87
210 Aug 12/91 203 Dec 14/87
211 Aug 16/89 204 Dec 14/87
212 Dec 14/87 205 Aug 12/91
213 Aug 16/89 206 Aug 12/91
214 Dec 14/87 207 Aug 12/91
73-EFF
UP136688
Page 2
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
208 Aug 12/91 209 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91 210 Aug 12/91
210 Dec 14/87 211 Aug 12/91
210A Aug 4/94 212 Blank
210B Blank 73-21-05 201 Aug 12/91
211 Aug 4/94 202 Aug 12/91
212 Aug 12/91 203 Aug 12/91
213 Aug 12/91 204 Aug 12/91
214 Blank 205 Aug 12/91
73-20-00 1 Aug 12/91 206 Aug 12/91
2 Aug 12/91 207 Aug 12/91
3 Aug 12/91 208 Aug 12/91
4 Blank 209 Aug 12/91
73-20-01 201 Aug 12/91 210 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87 211 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 16/89 212 Aug 12/91
204 Aug 12/91 213 Aug 12/91
205 Aug 12/91 214 Aug 12/91
206 Dec 14/87 215 Aug 12/91
207 Dec 14/87 216 Aug 12/91
208 Aug 12/91 217 Aug 12/91
208A Aug 12/91 218 Aug 12/91
208B Blank 219 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91 220 Aug 12/91
210. Aug 16/89 221 Aug 12/91
211 Aug 12/91 : 222 Aug 12/91
212 Aug 16/89 223 Aug 12/91
213 Aug 16/89 224 Aug 12/91
214 Blank 225 Aug 12/91
73-21-03 201 Aug 4/94 226 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87 227 Aug 12/91
203 Aug 16/89 228 Aug 12/91
204 Dec 14/87 229 Aug 12/91
205 Aug 16/89 230 Aug 12/91
206 Dec 14/87 231 Aug 12/91
207 Aug 12/91 232 Aug 12/91
208 Aug 12/91 233 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91 234 Aug 12/91
210 Aug 12/91 235 Aug 12/91
211 Aug 12/91 236 Aug12/91
212 Blank 73-21-06 201 Aug 12/91
73-21-04 201 Aug 16/89 202 Aug 16/89
202 Dec 14/87 203 Aug 12/91
203 Dec 14/87 204 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87 204A Aug 12/91
205 Aug 12/91 204B Aug 12/91
206 Aug 12/91 204C Aug 12/91
207 Aug 12/91 204D Aug 12/91
208 Aug 12/91 205 Aug 12/91
73-EFF
Page 3
UP136688
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
206 Aug 16/89

207 Aug 12/91
208 Dec 14/87
208A Aug 12/91
208B Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91
210 Aug 12/91
211 Aug 12/91
212 Aug 12/91
213 Aug 12/91
214 Aug 4/94 r
215 Aug 12/91
216 Blank
73-22-00 1 Aug 12/91
2 Blank
73-22-01 201 Aug 12/91
202 Dec 14/87
203 Dec 14/87
204 Dec 14/87
205 Aug 16/89
206 Dec 14/87
207 Dec 14/87
208 Aug 12/91
209 Aug 12/91
210 Aug 12/91
211 Aug 12/91
212 Aug 12/91
213 Aug 12/91
214 Dec 14/87
73-EFF
UP136688
Page 4
Aug 4/94
GEGT'~-~
I#li~.~l A e r i e Company
~liied
RECORDOF TEMPORARYREVISIONS
INCORPO-
R 73-21-05
R 73-1 210 ,S,ep,t 28/90 2
R 73-10-09
R 73-2 224 Sep,t 28/90 2
~J
UP136688
73-T-R-REC
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The engine fuel and control system includes a fuel control unit, pumps, f i l t e r s ,
valves, flow divider and manifold purge system (customer option), and fuel
nozzle and manifold assemblies. The system provides fuel of proper pressure,
weight flow, and spray characteristics to the combustion chamber to satisfy the
speed and power demands of the engine. At a given power setting, the system au-
tomatically compensates for variations in compressor i n l e t temperature and pres-
sure to maintain a constant turbine temperature.
73-80-00
UP136688
Page 1/2
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL- MAINTENANCEPRACTICES
1. Approved Repairs
A. Clean Fuel System Contamination with Fungus or Particulate Matter
(I) Clean or replace fuel pump f i l t e r as specified in 73-21-03, MAIN-

TENANCE PRACTICES, and flow divider and drain valve f i l t e r as spe-
cified in 73-10-07, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(2) Flush fuel shutoff valve.
(a) Manually actuate fuel shutoff valve while motoring engine to

flush valve.
(3) Check fuel pump assembly deadhead pressure.

(a) Connect 0 to 1000 psi pressure gage to fuel pressure tap port.
(See 72-00-00, TROUBLESHOOTING.)
(b) With fuel shutoff valve in off position, motor engine. Indi-
cated pressure shall be 300 psig minimumwith engine speed
above 16 percent.
(c) I f pressure is low, refer to 72-00-00, TROUBLESHOOTING.
(d) Removepressure gage.
(4) Check fuel control unit.

(a) Initiate a normal engine start and operation.
(b) I f improper performance of fuel control unit is indicated, as

demonstrated by poor engine start or power performance,
replace fuel control unit.
NOTE: I f indicated by fuel manifold and nozzle assembly
functional check, inspect, clean or replace
nozzles as required in accordance with 73-10-09,
(5) Check fuel manifold assemblies. Refer to 72-00-00,

ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
UP136688
73-00-00
Page 201/202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL /J~llied
~--~Signal
DISTRIBUTION (ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL) - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
i. Fuel System Lines

The fuel system lines includes lines, f i t t i n g s and other hardware necessary
to interconnect components of the fuel system.
2. (Codes DA-FB) Start Fuel Pressure Regulator
The fuel pressure regulator is mounted on the right side of the input
housing assembly. The fuel pressure regulator supplements fuel to ensure a
pressure sufficient for atomization to the primary fuel nozzles. A solenoid
valve actuated by a prime switch controls the operation of the fuel pressure
regulator. A parallel enrichment o r i f i c e is incorporated in the fuel pres-
sure regulator for use in starting above 25 percent engine speed.
(Codes AA-CC) A fuel enrichment valve performs same function as the fuel
pressure regulator. (Refer to 73-20-00 for description of fuel enrichment
valve.)
R 3. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Heater Lockout Valve
The fuel heater lockout valve is mounted on the right side of the front
flange of the compressor housing assembly. The fuel heater lockout valve
closes off the fuel flow through the oil to fuel heater to the fuel f i l t e r
when engine speed is in the range of 0 to 50 percent. This assures adequate
engine flow for starting with a cold engine where fuel f i l t e r anti-ice flow
demand is high.
4. Fuel Shutoff Valve

The fuel shutoff valve, mounted on the l e f t side of the compressor housing
flange, acts as a shutoff valve in the line from the fuel control unit to
the fuel nozzles. The valve has a dual solenoid and mechanically latches in
either the fuel-on or fuel- off position. The fuel-on solenoid is energized
by action of the speed switch and the f u e l - o f f solenoid is energized by a
switch in the aircraft cockpit. The valve may also be closed by manually
overriding the mechanical latch from the ON position.
5. Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve
The fuel flow divider and drain valve, mounted at the bottom of the turbine
section, directs fuel flow to the nozzles. The valve delivers metered fuel
flow to the primary and secondary fuel nozzles. The drain valve provides a
path for purging fuel from the fuel nozzles during roll-down when the fuel
shutoff valve is closed. An inlet f i l t e r is provided to prevent valve or
fuel nozzle blockage through all phases of operation. In the event the
f i l t e r becomes clogged, fuel is bypassed to the primary and secondary fuel
nozzle and manifold assemblies to sustain emergency engine operation.
UP136688
73-10-00
Page 1
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
6. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies

The fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies, mounted on turbine plenum, deliver
fuel to combustion chamber through five primary and ten secondary fuel
nozzles. The primary nozzles are for starting and i n i t i a l acceleration.
During all other phases of operation fuel is provided by both primary and
secondary nozzles.
7. (Codes AA-CC) Fuel Anti-lcing Valve

The fuel anti-icingvalve is temperature regulated to maintain a minimum
fuel temperature of fuel supplied to fuel control assembly. When the fuel
temperature decreases to approximately 2C (35F), a thermostat moves the
valve to route fuel through oil to fuel heater which is mounted in the oil
tank.
(Codes AA-BA) To preclude fuel f i l t e r icing, heated fuel is routed to the
boost pump. (Refer to 73-20-00 for fuel f i l t e r description.)
(Codes CA-CC) To preclude fuel f i l t e r icing, heated fuel is routed to the

inlet of the airframe fuel f i l t e r .
8. Manifold Purge System - Fuel

The engine fuel purge system includes a pneumatic accumulator, solenoid
valve, check valves and f i l t e r . Fuel that remains in flow divider and fuel
manifold is purged into combustor by a bleed air charge during shutdown cy-
cle and burned. Bleed air is stored in an accumulator during normal opera-
tion cycle and is discharged during shutdown cycle. The air is regulated by
a normally closed solenoid valve which is opened by actuation of stop
switch. The purge system is self-testing during operation because burning
of residual manifold fuel causes a momentary increase in speed that can be
observed during shutddown.
9. Fuel Control Heat
(Codes AA-CC) The fuel control heat consists of pneumatic tube assemblies
which route compressor discharge heated air to fuel control unit orifices to
prevent icing conditions. The supply valve allowing heated air to enter
fuel control is open when speed lever is in minimum position and closed when
speed lever is in the maximim position.
UP136688
73-10-00
Page 2
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEMPLUMBING - MAINTENANCEPRACTICES

Any approved engine fuel Commercial ly available

Lubricant (0S-124 Monsanto Company, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,
or Santovac 5) St Louis, MO 63166

73-10-01
UP136688
R Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
I~'I MAINTEHANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO, 72-01-27)
45 ~ "25/30
" ~ 35140
VIEWA- A
5,10
r
~A
80
85 ~
VIEWa
150
i35
130
TO
75 100 115
105 120 F.-44G-377
110
(Codes AA-BA)
Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing
UP136688
Figure 201 73-10-01

Page 202
Dec 14/87
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. A. (Codes AA-BA) Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel
from lines, during removal.
(1) Remove tube assemblies, clamps, reducers, gaskets, f i t t i n g s , and
packings from fuel shutoff valve, fuel flow divider valve, and fuel
control unit. (See figure 201.) Discard packings.
(2) Refer to 73-10-06, Maintenance Practices for removal of fuel
shutoff valve.
B. (Codes AA-BA) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Prior to installation, lubricate packings or gaskets except
pBckings or gaskets used on pneumatic lines with any type
clean jet fuel. An alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac
5) may be used; apply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly
to a thin transparent film to minimize contamination. Apply
lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of
bolts or screws, and apply clean engine oil to threads
(except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s except
pneumatic fittings forward of fireshield unless otherwise
speci fi ed.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended gen-
eral torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down torque)
of self locking devices to recommended values.
Use conical seals as required for leak repair. Refer to
70-00-00, Standard Practices, for installation instructions.
KEY TO FIGURE 201

, TUBE ASSY 90. CAP (POST SB 73-0017)
I0. SEAL 95. TEE
15. REDUCER 100. GASKET
20. PACKING 105. RING
25. NUT 110. NUT
30. CLAMP 115. TUBEASSY
35. TUBE ASSY 120. SEAL
40. SEAL 125. FITTING (ELBOW)
45. TEE (PRE SB 73-0026)
50. REDUCER 130. FITTING (TEE)
55. TUBE ASSY (POST SB 73-0026)
60. SEAL 135. CAP (POST SB 73-0026)
65. REDUCER 140. GASKET
70. TUBE ASSY 145. RING
75. SEAL 150. NUT
80. TUBE ASSY (PRE SB 73-0017) 155. FUELSHUTOFF
85. SEAL VALVE
UP136688
73-10-01
R Page 203
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (1) (Pre SB 73-0026) Install f i t t i n g with nut, ring, and gasket into
aft side of fuel shutoff valve. Tighten nut (150) to a torque
value of 50 to 55 inch-pounds.
(2) (Post SB 73-0026) Install f i t t i n g with nut, ring, and gasket into
aft side of fuel shutoff valve. Tighten nut (150) to a torque
value of 50 to 55 inch-pounds. Install cap onto f i t t i n g . Tighten
cap (135) to a torque value of 100 to 120 inch-pounds.
(3) Install tube assembly between f i t t i n g in fuel shutoff valve and

fuel flow divider.
(4) Install tee or f i t t i n g with nut, ring, and gasket into bottom of
fuel shutoff valve and secure. Tighten nut (110, figure 201) to a
(5) (Pre SB 73-0017) Install tube assembly between tee in bottom of
fuel shutoff valve and fuel flow divider.
(6) (Post SB 73-0017) Install cap onto aft side of f i t t i n g . Tighten

cap (90) to a torque value of 100 to 120 inch-pounds.
(7) Install reducer with new packing into fuel control unit. Tighten
reducer (15) to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds.
(8) Assemble and install tube assemblies between reducer in fuel con-
trol unit and f i t t i n g in bottom of fuel shutoff valve with attach-
ing parts. Tighten nut (25) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 204
Dec 14/87
lied
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-0.1-27)
I. C. (Codes CA-CC) RemoveFuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 202)
R NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel.
(I) Remove tube assemblies, clamps, unions, f i t t i n g s , and packings from

fuel shutoff valve, fuel flow divider valve, and fuel control unit.
(See figure 202.) Discard packings.

shutoff valve.
D. (Codes CA-CC) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 202)
NOTE: Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified, lu-
bricate packings or gaskets with any type clean j e t
fuel. An alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)
may be used. Apply lubricant sparingly and spread
evenly to a thin transparent film to minimize
contamination. Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly,
Grade NV) to threads of bolts or screws, and apply
clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads)
of male plumbing fittings unless otherwise specified.
R Use conical seals as required for leak repair. Refer
R to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for installation
R instructions.
(i) Install plug and bleeder with new packing or gasket into fuel
shutoff valve. Tighten plug and bleeder (195) to a torque value of
(2) Install f i t t i n g w i t h nut, gasket, and ring into aft side of fuel
shutoff valve. Tighten nut (190) to a torque value of 50 to 55
inch-pounds.
(3) (Pre SB 73-0026) Install tube assembly between f i t t i n g in fuel
s h u t o f f valve and fuel flow d i v i d e r .
(4) (Post SB 73-0026) Install cap onto f i t t i n g . Tighten cap (170) to

a torque value of 100 to 120 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 205
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE 31- REPORT NO. 72-01-27
15
r
5 20
10 . 25
35 " . ~ ' ~ ,v-

40_ 45--_ ,~v,.....,
~170
" " 175
I10
155 95
. 166
F-44G-378
5. TUBEASSY 80. SEAL 155. TUBE ASSY

10. SEAL *85. NUT 160. SEAL
15. FITTING *90. BOLT 165. FITTING (ELBOW)
20. GASKET *95. CLAMP (PRE SB 73-0026)
25. RING "100. NUT 170. CAP (POST SB 73-0026)
30. NUT "105. BOLT 175. FITTING (TEE)
35. REDUCER "110. CLAMP (POST SB 73-0026)
40. TUBE ASSY "115. TUBE ASSY 180. GASKET
45. SEAL 120. SEAL 185. RING
50. UNION *'125. CAP 190. NUT
55. NUT 130. TEE 195. PLUG AND BLEEDER
60. BOLT 135. TUBEASSY 200. PACKING
65. CLAMP 140. SEAL 205. FUEL SHUTOFF
70. BRACKET 145. UNION VALVE
75. TUBEASSY 150. PACKING
*(PRE SB 73-0017)
**(POST SB 73-0017)
(Codes CA-CC) Fuel Shutoff Valve

Plumbing Instal lation
UP136688
Figure 202 72-10-01

Page 206
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. D. (5) Install union with new packing into bottom of fuel shutoff valve.
Tighten union (145) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
(6) Install tube assembly onto union in bottom of fuel shutoff valve.
(7) Install tee into tube assembly.
(B) (Pre SB 73-0017) Install tube assembly between tee and fuel flow
divider and secure with clamP, bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts (85,
100) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(9) (Post SB 73-0017) Install cap onto aft side of tee. Tighten cap
(125) to a torque value of 100 to 120 inch-pounds.
(10) Install f i t t i n g with nut, gasket, and ring into fuel control unit.
Tighten nut (30) to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds.
(11) Assemble and install tube assemblies between tee below fuel shutoff
valve and fuel control unit.
E. (Code DA) RemoveFuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 203)
R NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual
R fuel.
(1) Remove tube assemblies, unions, f i t t i n g s , and packings from fuel
shutoff valve, fuel flow divider valve, and fuel control unit.
(See figure 203.) Discard packings.
shutoff valve.
F. (Code DA) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 203)
NOTE: Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified, lubricate

packings or gaskets with any type clean j e t fuel. An alternate
lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used; apply lubricant
sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent film to mini-
mize contamination. Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly,
Grade NV) to threads of bolts or screws, and apply clean engine
oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing f i t -
tings unless otherwise specified.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended general
torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down) torque of self-
locking devices to recommended values.
70-00-00, Standard Practices for installation instructions.
(1) Install plug and bleeder with new packing or gasket into fuel
shutoff valve. Tighten plug and bleeder (130) to a torque value of
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 207
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCEMANUAL •/liedignal
3O
5,10 (REF)
~""~15,2o
--..-d" (REF)
VIEW A
15 6
40 20 10
,120,125
~75,80
"90t95
60 85 70
65
F-44G-1005
UP136688
(Code DA) Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing

Figure 203 73-10-01
Page 208
Aug 12/91
lied
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTN0.72-01-27)
. F. (2) Install f i t t i n g with nut, ring, and gasket into aft side of fuel
shutoff valve and secure; Tighten nut (125) to a torque value of
(3) Install tube assembly between f i t t i n g in fuel shutoff valve and
fuel flow divider. ,
(4) Install union with new packing into bottom of fuel shutoff valve.
(5) Install tube assembly onto union in bottom of fuel shutoff valve.
(7) Install cap onto aft side of tee. Tighten cap (70) to a torque
(8) Install union with new packing into fuel control u n i t . . T i g h t e n

union (30) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
(9) Assemble and install tube assemblies (5, 15, 45, 60), tee (25) and
unions (40, 55) between tee below fuel shutoff valve and fuel con-
trol unit.
G. (Codes EA-FB) RemoveFuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 204)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel.
(1) Remove tube assemblies, unions, f i t t i n g s , and packings from fuel

shutoff valve, fuel flow divider valve, and fuel control unit.
(See Figure 204.) Discard packings.
(2) Refer to 73-10-06, Maintenance Practices forremoval of fuel

shutoff valve.
KEY TO FIGURE 203
. TUBE ASSY 75. TUBEASSY
10. SEAL 80. SEAL
15. TUBE ASSY 85. TEE
20. SEAL 90. TUBEASSY
25. TEE 95. SEAL
30. UNION 100. UNION
40. UNION 110. FITTING(ELBOW)
45. TUBE ASSY 115. GASKET
50. SEAL 120. RING
55. UNION 125. NUT
60. TUBE ASSY 130. PLUGAND BLEEDER
65. SEAL 135. PACKING
70. CAP 140. FUELSHUTOFFVALVE
UP136688
73-10-01
R Page 209
Aug 12/91
I~ MA
N
ITENANCEMANUAL
,,, TPE331-5(REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
t 35
5
10
ViEW A - A
5,10
12o
| iv
,30
!
120
,105,110,115
40 50 55
60 ' 70 90
65 75 95
8O
85
F-44G-380
(Codes EA-FB)
Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing Installation
UP136688
Figure 204 73-io-01

Page 210
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~lSignal
lied

I. H. (Codes EA-FB) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 204)
bricate packings with any type clean j e t fuel. An al-
ternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used.
Apply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly to a thin
transparent film to minimize contamination. Apply lu-
bricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of
bolts and screws, and apply clean engine oil to threads
torque of self-locking devices to recommendedvalues.
Use conical seals as required for leak repair. Refer

to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for installation
instructions.
(1) Install elbow with nut, ring, and new packing into aft side of fuel
shutoff valve. Tighten nut (115) to a torque value of 50 to 55
inch-pounds.
(2) InstalT tube assembly between elbow in fuel shutoff valve and fuel
flow divider.
(3) Install elbow with ring and new packing into bottom of fuel shutoff
valve and secure with nut. Tighten nut (85) to a torque value of
(4) Assemble and install tube assemblies (5, 15, 25, 45, 60), tee (35)
and unions (40, 55) between fuel control unit and elbow in bottom
of fuel shutoff valve with attaching parts.
KEY TO FIGURE 204

5. \TUBE ASSY 45. TUBEASSY 85. NUT
10. SEAL 50. SEAL 90. TUBEASSY
15. TUBEASSY 55. UNION 95. SEAL
20. SEAL 60. TUBEASSY 100. FITTING (ELBOW)
25. TUBEASSY 65. SEAL 105. PACKING
30. SEAL 70. FITTING (ELBOW) 110. RING
35. TEE 75. PACKING 115. NUT
40. UNION 80. RING 120. FUELSHUTOFF
VALVE
73-I0-01
UP136688
R Page 210A
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAere,~naceCompany
MATNTENANCE MANUAL -//~llied
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORT,0. 72-01-2~?""
13S(REF)
j
" ........... 1 4 6 , 1 4 7 / *
ViEWA- A
75
85
5,10
55
65 ~
F'-44GogB6
(Code GA) Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing

Figure 204A
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 210B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~llied
~JSignal
R 1. HI. (Code GA) Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 204A)
R NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual

R fuel.
R (1) Remove clamp, tube assemblies, unions, tees, packings, and brackei
R from fuel shutoff valve, fuel flow divider valve, and fuel control
R unit. Discard packings.
R (2) Refer to 73-10-06, Maintenance Practices for removal of fuel
R shutoff valve.
KEY TO FIGURE 204A
R . TUBE ASSY 90. SEAL

R 10. SEAL 95. UNION
R 15. CAP 100. NUT
R 20. FITTING 105. BOLT
R 25. RING 110. CLAMP
R 30. PACKING 115. BRACKET
R 35. NUT 120. TUBEASSY
R 40. TUBE ASSY 125. SEAL
R 45. SEAL 135. TEE
R 50. FITTING 140. TUBEASSY
R 55. CAP 145. SEAL
R 60. TUBE ASSY 146. UNION
R 65. SEAL 147. PACKING
R 70. UNION 150. TUBEASSY
R 75. PACKING 155. SEAL
R 80. UNION 165. FUELSHUTOFF
R 85. TUBE ASSY VALVE
73-10-0
UP136688
Page 210C/210u
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE.MANUAL ~ S lied
ignal
R . H2. (Code GA) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve Plumbing (See Figure 204A)
R NOTE: Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified, lubri-
R cate packings or gaskets with any type clean jet fuel. An
R alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used; ap-
R ply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly to a thin trans-
R parent film to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating
R compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts or
R screws, and apply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t
R two threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s unless otherwise
R speci fied.

eral torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down) torque
of self-locking devices to recommended values.

R (1) Install tee with nut, ring, and packing into aft side of fuel
R shutoff valve and secure. Tighten nut (35) to a torque value of
R 50 to 55 inch-pounds.
(2) Install tube assembly (5) between tee in fuel shutoff valve and
fuel flow divider.
(3) Install cap (15) on tee and lockwire.
(4) Install union with new packing into bottom of fuel shutoff valve.
(5) Install tube ~ssembly onto union in bottom of fuel shutoff valve.
(7) Install cap (55) onto aft side of tee and lockwire.
R (8) Install bracket (115) on accessory drive housing with short leg
R secured to housing. Tighten bolt to a torque value of 40 inch-
R pounds.
(9) Assemble and install tube assemblies (40, 85, 120), tee (135) and
unions (80, 95) between tee below fuel shutoff valve and tube as-
semblies (140, 150).
(io) Secure tube assembly (120) to bracket with clamp, bolt, and nut.
(ii) Install union into fuel pressureregulating valve. Tighten union
(12) Install tube assembly (140) between union and tee.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 211
Aug 12/91
~! MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
3O
60
5o
55
40
"
I
/
35
5,10,15, 20, 25
65
b .105,110,115
F-44G-381
90 70 80
95 75 85
100
e NUT 65. PACKING

10. BOLT 70. TUBE ASSY
15. WASHER 75. SEAL
20. CLAMP 80. TUBE ASSY
25. CLNIP 85. SEAL
30. TUBE ASSY 90, ELBOW
40. TUBE ASSY 100. NUT
45. SEAL 105. ELBOW
50. REDUCER 110, PACKING
55. PACKING 115. NUT
60. UNION 120. FUEL ANTI-ICE VALVE
(Codes AA-BA) Fuel A n t i - I c e Valve

UP136688
Plumbing I n s t a l l a t i o n
Figure 205 73-10-01
Page 212
Dec 14/87
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~:~Signal
. I. (Codes AA-BA) RemoveFuel Anti-lce Valve Plumbing (See Figure 205)
(I) Removetube assemblies, elbows, packing, and attaching parts from

fuel anti-ice valve and oil to fuel heater. Discard packing.
(2) Removetube assemblies with attaching parts between fuel anti-ice
valve and fuel control and fuel pump assemblies.
(3) Removereducer and union with gaskets from fuel anti-ice valve.
R (4) Refer to 73-10-10, Maintenance Practices for removal of anti-ice

R valve.
J. (Codes AA-BA) Install Fuel Anti-Ice Valve Plumbing (See Figure 205)

packings with any type clean j e t fuel. An alternate lubri-
cant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used. Apply lubricant
sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent film to
minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-
Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and apply
clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of
male plumbing fittings unless otherwise specified.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard PractiCes, for recommended gen-
R Use conical seals as required for leak repair. Refer to
R 70-00-00, Standard Practices for installation instructions.
(1) Install reducer, with new packing into fuel anti-ice valve.
Tighten reducer (50) to a torque value of 75 to 80 inch-pounds.
(2) Install union, with new packing into fuel anti-ice valve. Tighten
(3) Install tube assemblies (30, 40) between union on anti-ice valve
and fuel pump assembly, and reducer on fuel anti-ice valve and fuel
control assembly.
(4) Install clamps with three washers between clamps and secure with
bolt and nut. Tighten nut (5) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(5) Install elbows, (90, 105) with new packings and nuts, into fuel
anti-ice valve. Tighten nuts (100, 115) to a torque value of 65 to
70 inch-pounds.
(6) Install tube assemblies (70, 80) between fuel anti-ice valve and
oil to fuel heater.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 213
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
•/liedignal
20 20
25 25
40 30 10 30
45 35 15 .5 35
50
55
60 J'=~L ~L.....-- 100,105,110
65
\
70
80
85
75
I--1
I D
R
140 90 125 115

95 130 120
135 F-44G-701
5. CAP '75. SEAL

10. TUBEASSY 80. UNION
20. FITTING (ELBOW) 90. PACKING
25. GASKET 95. PACKING
30. WASHER 100. ELBOW
35. NUT 105. PACKIHG
40. NUT 110. NUT
45. BOLT 115. TUBE ASSY
50. CLAMP 120. SEAL
55. CLAMP 125. ELBOW
60. TUBEASSY ,130. PACKING
65. SEAL 135. NUT
70. TUBEASSY 140. FUEL ANTI-ICE VALVE
(Codes CA-CC) Fuel Anti-Ice Valve

UP136688

Figure 206 73-10-01
Page 214
Aug 16/89
~ / l iignal
ed
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. K. (Codes CA-CC) Remove Fuel Anti-lce Valve and Plumbing (See Figure 206)
(1) Removetube assembly and elbow between fuel anti-ice valve and oil
to fuel heater.
(2) Remove tube assemblies, attaching parts, elbow, unions, packings,
and gaskets from fuel anti-ice valve and fuel control and fuel pump
assemblies. Discard packings.
R (3) Refer to 73-10-10, Maintenance Practices for removal of anti-ice

R valve.
L. (Codes CA-CC) Install Fuel Anti-Ice Valve Plumbing (See Figure 206)

fuel. An altenate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may
be used. Apply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly
to a thin transparent film to minimize contamination.
threads of bolts and screws, and apply clean engine oil
to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing
fittings unless otherwise specified.
R i nstructi ons.
(1) Install union, with new packings into fuel anti-ice valve. Tighten
(2) Install tube assembly between elbow in fuel control unit and union
in anti-ice valve.
(3) Install elbow, with new packing into fuel pump assembly and secure
with nut. Tighten nut (110) to a torque value of 175 to 185 inch-
pounds.
(4) Install union, with new packing into fuel anti-ice valve. Tighten
(B) Install tube assembly between elbow in fuel pump assembly and union
in anti-ice valve. Install clamps, bolt, and nut. Tighten nut
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 215
Aug 16/89
/lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. L. (6) Install elbows, with nuts, gaskets and washers, into fuel pump
assembly. Tighten nuts (35) to a torque value of 90 to 95 inch-
pounds.
(7) Install tube assembly between elbows in fuel pump assembly.
(8) Install cap onto fuel pump assembly. Tighten cap (5) to a torque
(9) Install packing and nut onto elbow (125). Install elbow into fuel
anti-ice valve. Tighten nut (135) to a torque value of 60 to 70
inch-pounds.
(10) Install tube assembly between oil to fuel heater and elbow in fuel
anti-ice valve.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 216
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~=~lslied
ignal
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT'NO. 72-01-27)
5
lO
15
"20"
25 35
30 40
r-i
i
R I
g~lr=
: 3 =~.._.
~
65
70
F-44G-98.4
R 5. NUT 45. BOLT

R 10. BOLT 50. CLAMP
R 15. CLAMP 55. TUBEASSY
R 20. NUT 60. SEAL
R 25. WASHER 65. TUBEASSY
R 30. BRACKET 70. SEAL
R 35. TUBEASSY 80. FUELENRICHMENTVALVE ASSY
R 40. SEAL 90. FUELHEATERLOCKOUT
R VALVE ASSY
R (Code GA)
R Fuel Heater Lockout/Fuel Enrichment
R Solenoid Valve Plumbing Installation
UP136688
R Figure 206A 73~10-01

Page 216A
Aug 12/91
~=~;lied
R . LI. (Code GA) Remove Fuel Heater Lockout/Fuel Enrichment Solenoid Valve
R Plumbing (See Figure 206A)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel
from lines and fuel control assembly.
R (1) Remove tube assemblies, clamps, and bracket from fuel heater lock-
R out and fuel enrichment valves. Discard packings.
R (2) Refer to 73-10-05, Maintenance Practices for removalof fuel

R heater lockout and fuel enrichment solenoid valves.
R L2. (Code GA) Install Fuel Heater Lockout/Fuel Enrichment Solenoid Valve
R Plumbing (See Figure 206A)
R NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with any approved clean en-
R gine fuel or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
R installation unless otherwise specified. Apply lubri-
R cating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of
R bolts or screws and apply clean engine oil to threads
R (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing fittings
R located forward of the fireshield unless otherwise
R specified.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practlces, for recommended

R general torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down)
R torque of self locking devices to recommended values.

R instructions.
R (1) Install long leg of bracket on fuel pumpmounting stud and secure
R with washer and nut. Tighten nut (20) to a torque value of 80
R inch-pounds.
R (2) Install tube assembly from fuel enrichment valve to tee (135,
R Figure 204A). Secure tube assembly to bracket with clamp, bolt,
R and nut. Tighten nut (5, Figure 206A) to a torque value of 27 to
R 35 inch-pounds.
R (3) Install tube assembly from elbow in fuel control pressure regulat-
R ing valve to tee between fuel heater lockout and fuel enrichment
R valves. Secure tube assembly with clamp and bolt. Tighten bolt
R (45) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
R (4) Install tube assembly between fuel heater lockout valve and fuel
R heater.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 216B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
73-10-01
Page 217
Dec 14/87
/J~liied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL "~-~Signal
5
10
15
i ,!oo 2o,,5,3
R 55
60
65
,~.~.~ • ..
F-44G-1016
(Codes AA-BA, Post SB 73-0023/0026)

UP136688
Fuel Control Heat Plumbing Installation

Figure 207 73-10-01
Page 218
Aug 12/91
~:~/lied
k GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. M. (Codes AA-BA, Post SB 73-0023/0026) RemoveFuel Control Heat Plumbing
(See Figure 207)
(1) Removeclamp and bracket securing tube assembly. Removetube
assembly.
(2) Removeelbow and shim from turbine plenum. Removebolt, elbow, and
washers from fuel control u n i t .
N. (Codes AA-BA, Post SB 73-0023/0026) Install Fuel Control Heat Plumbing
(See Figure 207)
CAUTION: WHEN LINES AND FITTING ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISE
CARETHAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDOR
THREAD LUBRICATION COMPOUNDIS USED. ENSURE
PROPERALIGNMENTAND THREAD ENGAGEMENTTO PRE-
VENT FITTINGS FROMGALLING AND/ORCROSS
THREADING.

threads of bolts located aft of fireshields.

(run-down torque) of self locking devices to
recommended values.
(i) Install elbow in turbine plenum with proper thickness of shim to
orient elbow in proper position for tube assembly connection.
Tighten elbow (45) to a torque value of 55 to 75 inch-pounds.
(2) Install elbow, washers, and bolt in fuel control unit. Tighten
bolt (55) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
(3) Install tube assembly. Secure bracket and clamps with bolts and
nuts. Tighten bolt (25) to a "torque value of 50 to 60 inch-pounds.
Tighten nut (5) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
KEY TO FIGURE 207
. NUT 40. TUBE ASSY
I0. BOLT 45. ELBOW•
15. CLAMP 50. SHIM (LAMINATED)
20. NUT 55. BOLT
25. BOLT (UNIVERSAL FITTING)
35. BRACKET 60. ELBOW
65. WASHER
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 219
Aug 12/91
MAInTENAnCEMANUAL
TPE331- IREPORTNO. ,2-01-2,
15
~0
5 25 10
WEW A
3O
35
4O
45
50
F.-44G-384
(Codes CA-CC, Post SB 73-0023/0026)

UP136688
Fuel Control Heat'Plumbing Installation .J
Figure 208 73-10-01

Page 220
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. O. (Codes CA-CC, Post SB 72-0023/0026) RemoveFuel Control Heat Plumbin~
(See Figure 208)
(1) Removetube assemblies. Removeelbow, washers; and nut from engi
flange.
(2) Removeelbow and shim from turbine plenum. Removebolt, elbow,
washers from fuel control unit.
P. (Codes CA-CC, Post SB 73-0023/0026) Install Fuel Control Heat Plumbir

(See Figure 208)
CAUTION: WHENLINES AND FITTING ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISE

CARETHAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDOR
THREAD LUBRICATION COMPOUNDIS USED. ENSURE
PROPERALIG~ENT AND THREAD ENGAGEMENTTO PRE-
VENT FITTINGS FROMGALLING AND/ORCROSS
THREADING.
threads of bolts located aft of fireshield.
Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARDPRACTICES, for recom-

recommended values.
(1) Install elbow in turbine plenum with proper thickness of shim to

orient elbow in proper position for tube assembly connection.
Tighten elbow (45) to a torque value of 55 to 75 inch-pounds.
(2) Install elbow, washers, and bolt in fuel control unit. Tighten
bolt (30) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
(3) Install elbow in engine flange and secure with washers and nut.
Tighten nut (15) to a torque value of 50 to 55 inch-pounds. In-
stall tube assemblies.
~KEY TO FIGURE 208
. TUBE ASSY 30. BOLT(UNIVERSAL FITTING)
I0. TUBE ASSY 35. WASHER
15. NUT 40. ELBOW
20. WASHER 45. ELBOW
25. ELBOW 50. SHIM (LAMINATED)
UP136688
73-10-u.
Page 221
Dec 14/87
~i MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
5 55 100
10 60 140
105
15
,95
20
25
30
110
115
65\
"145
70 35 80
120 85
125 75 40
130 45 F-44G-386
135 50
5. BOLT 55. TUBEASSY 105. PACKING

10. WASHER 60. SEAL 110. REDUCER
15. CLAMP 65. REDUCER 115. PACKING
20. NUT 70. TUBEASSY 120. ELBOW
25. BOLT 75. SEAL 125. PACKING
30. CLAMP 80. TUBEASSY 130. RING
35. NUT 85. SEAL 135. NUT
40. BOLT 90. TUBEASSY 140. FUELHEATER
45. CLAMP 95. SEAL LOCKOUT VALVE
50. CLAMP 100. UNION 145. OIL TANK
(Code DA) Fuel Heater Plumbing Installation

UP136688
Figure 209 73-10-01

Page 222
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Q. (Code DA) RemoveFuel Heater Plumbing and Start Fuel Pressure Regulator
Plumbing (See Figures 209 and 210)
(1) Remove nuts, washers, bolts, clamps, brackets, tube assemblies,
f i t t i n g s , and packings from fuel heater and fuel pressure
regulator. Discard packings.
R (2) Refer to 73-10-03, Maintenance Practices for removal of start fuel
R pres sure regulator.
R. (Code DA) Install Fuel Heater Plumbing and Start Pressure Regulator
NOTE: Lubricate packings or gaskets used in fuel system
with any type j e t fuel prior to installation un-
less otherwise specified. Packings or gaskets
used in pneumatic system may be installed dry. An
alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be
used on all packings or gaskets prior to installa-
tion unless otherwise specified. Apply lubricant
sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent
film to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating
compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of
bolts and screws, and apply clean engine oil to
threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumb-
ing fittings used in fuel system located forward
of the fireshield unless otherwise specified.
mended general torque values. Add frictional dray
recommended values.
R Use conical seals as required for leak repair.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for instal-
R lation instructions.
(1) Install fuel heater plumbing as follows. (See figure 209.)
(a) Install elbow with nut, ring, and new packing into bottom of
fuel heater lockout valve. Tighten nut (135) to a torque
value of 50 to 55 inch-pounds. Install tube assembly from el-
bow to oil-to-fuel cooler.
(b) Install tube assembly between elbow in bottom of fuel heater
lockout valve and oil tank. Secure tube assembly with clamps,
bolt, and nut. Tighten nut (35) to a torque value of 27 inch-
pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 223 ;
Aug 16/89
l~J MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
55 5
60 10
15
120 140 65 20
145 70
125 150 75 85 95 25
130 90 loo. sp 35
135 155..,_ 80 4O
4_5
50
160
165
110
170
175
F.-44G-388
. NUT 65. CLAMP 125. PACKING

I0. BOLT 70. NUT 130. RING
15. CLAMP 75. WASHER 135. NUT
20. NUT 80. BRACKET 140. FITTING (TEE)
25. WASHER 85. TUBEASSY 145. PACKING
30. BRACKET 90. SEAL 150. RING
35. NUT 95. TUBEASSY 155. NUT
40. BOLT I00. SEAL 160. REDUCER
50. CLAMP 110. SEAL 170. UNION
55. NUT 115. CHECKVALVE 175. PACKING
60. BOLT 120. FITTING (ELBOW) 180. START FUEL PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(Code DA) Start Fuel Pressure

Regulator Plumbing Installation
UP136688
Figure 210 73-10-01

Page 224
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
I. R. (t) (c) Install reducer with new packing into top of fuel heater lock-
out valve. Tighten reducer (110) to a torque value of 60 to
65 inch-pounds. Install union withnew packing into fuel pump
assembly. Tighten union (100) to a torque value of 35 to 40
inch-pounds. Install tube assembly between reducer and union
and secure with clamp, washer, and bolt. Tighten bolt (5) to
(d) Install tube assembly on tee f i t t i n g from fuel pump assembly
and secure with clamp, washer, and bolt. Tighten bolt that
attaches clamp (15) to a torque value of 20 to 25 inch-pounds.
Install reducer in end of tube assembly. Install tube assem-
bly between reducer and o i l - t o - f u e l cooler.
(e) Install clamps (30) and secure with bolt and nut. Tighten nut
(2) Install start fuel pressure regulator plumbing as follows. (See
figure 210.)
(a) Install elbow with nut, ring, and new packing into fuel pres-
surizing valve. Tighten nut (135) to a torque value of 30 to
35 inch-pounds. Install tube assembly onto f i t t i n g from fuel
pressurizing valve. Install bracket (80) and secure with
washer and nut. Tighten nut (70) to a torque value of 50
i nch-pounds.
(b) Install clamp and secure to bracket using bolt and nut.
Tighten nut to a torque value of 27 inch-pounds. Install
check valve with arrow pointing towards tube assembly (95).
(c) Install union (170) into bottom of fuel start pressure regula-
tor and tighten to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
Install tube assembly between union and check valve.
(d) Install reducer with new packing into solenoid valve. Tighten
reducer (160) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds. In-
stall tee with nut, ring, and new packing into fuel pump
assembly. Tighten nut (155) to a torque value of 30 to 35
inch-pounds. Install tube assembly between reducer and tee
and secure with bracket (30), clamp, bolt, nuts, and washer.
Tighten mounting nut for bracket (30) to a torque value of 80
inch-pounds. Tighten nut (20) to a torque value of 27 inch-
pounds.
(e) Install clamps (50) and secure with bolt, washer, and nut.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 225
Dec 14/87
} ~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
15
20 65 100 110
5 ?5 70 150 105 115
10 i I I l l
30
35
120 40
F-.44G-385
13_00 458090
135 5685 95
140 55
145 60
5. BOLT. 60. CLAMP 115. PACKING

10. CLAMP 65. TUBEASSY 120. REDUCER
15. BOLT 70. iSEAL 125. PACKING
20. WASHER 75. REDUCER• 130. ELBOW
25. CLAMP 80. TUBEASSY 135. PACKING
30. NUT 85. SEAL 140. RING
35. BOLT 90. TUBEASSY 145. NUT
40. CLAMP 95. SEAL 150. FUEL HEATER
45. NUT 100. TUBEASSY LOCKOUT VALVE
50. BOLT 105. SEAL 155. OIL TANK
55. CLAMP 110. UNION
(Codes EA-FB) Fuel Heater Plumbing Installation
Figure 211 73-10-01
UP136688
Page 226
Dec 14/87
~=~/lied
. S. (Codes EA-FB) RemoveFuel Heater Plumbing and Start Fuel Pressure Regu-
lator Plumbing (See Figures 211 and 212)
(1) Remove nuts, washers, bolts, clamps, brackets, tube assemblies,
f i t t i n g s , and packings from fuel heater and fuel pressure
regulator. Discard packings.
R (2) Refer to 73-10-03, MaintenancePractices for removal of start fuel
R pressure regulator.
T. (Codes EA-FB) Install Fuel Heater Plumbing and Start Pressure Regulator
NOTE: Lubricate packings or gaskets used in fuel system
with any type j e t f u e l p r i o r to installation un-
less otherwise specified. Packings or gaskets
used inpneumatic system may be installed dry. An
alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be
used on all packings or gaskets prior to installa-
sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent
film to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating
compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of
bolts and screws, and apply clean engine oil to
threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumb-
ing fittings used in fuel system located forward
of the fireshield unless otherwise specified.
mended general torque values. Add frictional dray
recommended values.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices f o r instal-
(1) Install fuel heater plumbing as follows. (See figure 211.)
(a) Install elbow with nut, ring, and new packing into bottom of
fuel heater lockout valve. Tighten nut (145) to a torque
value of 50 to 55 inch-poundso Install tube assembly from el-
bow to oil-to fuel cooler.
(b) Install tube assembly between elbow in bottom of fuel heater

lockout valve and oil tank. Secure tube assembly with clamps,
bolt, and nut. Tighten nut (45) to a torque value of 27 inch-
pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 227
Aug 16/89
i~l MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
55 5
60 10
140 65 15
145 70 20 35
150 75 85 95 25 40
155 eo sO lqo 30 45
/ 5o
120t125 .,1301135 160,165
"if"
I
110
170
i e 175
F-44G-387
5. NUT 65. CLAMP 125. PACKING

10, BOLT 70. NUT 130. RING
15. CLAMP 75. WASHER 135. NUT
20, NUT 80. BRACKET 140. FITTING (TEE)
30, BRACKET 90. SEAL 150. RING
40. BOLT 100. SEAL 160. REDUCER
50. CLAMP 110. SEAL 170. UNION
55. NUT 115. CHECKVALVE 175. PACKING
60. BOtT 120. FITTING (ELBOW) 180. START FUEL PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(Codes EA-FB) Start Fuel Pressure
Regulator P1umbing Instal I ati on
UP136688
Figure 212 73-10-01

Page 228
Dec 14/87
Allied.$ignalAerospaceCompany
/Allied
1. T. (1) (c) Install reducer with new packing into top of fuel heater lock-
out valve. Tighten reducer (1201)to a torque value of 60 to
65 inch-pounds. Install union with new packing into fuel pump
assembly. Tighten union (110) to a torque value of 35 to 40
inch-pounds. Install tube assembly between reducer and union
and secure with clamp, washer, and bolt. Tighten bolt (15) to
(d) ~ Install tube assembly on tee f i t t i n g from fuel pump assembly
and secure with clamp, washer,, and bolt. Tighten bolt that
attaches clamp (10) to a torque value of 20 to 25 inch-pounds.
Install reducer in end of tube assembly. Install tube assem-
bly between reducer and oil-to-fuel cooler.
(e) Install clamps (40) and secure with bolt and nut. Tighten nut
(2) Install start fuel pressure regulator plumbing as follows. (See
figure 212.)
(a) Install elbow with nut, ring, and new packing into fuel pres-
surizing valve. Tighten nut (135) to a torque value of 30 to
35 inch-pounds. Install tube assembly onto f i t t i n g from fuel
pressurizing valve. Install bracket (80) and secure with
washer and nut. Tighten nut (70) to a torque value of 50
inch-pounds.
(b) Install clamp and secure to bracket using bolt and nut.
Tighten nut (55) to a torque value of 27 inch-pounds. Install
check valve with arrow pointing towards tube assembly (95).
(c) Install union (170) into bottom of fuel start pressure regula-
tor and tighten to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
Install tube assembly between union and check valve.
(d) Install reducer with new packing into solenoid valve. Tighten
reducer (160) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds. In-
stall tee with nut, ring," and new packing into fuel pump
assembly. Tighten nut (155) to a torque value of 30 to 35
inch-pounds. Install tube assembly between reducer and tee
and secure with bracket (30), clamp, bolt, nuts, and washer.
Tighten mounting nut for bracket (30) to a torque value of 80
inch-pounds. Tighten nut (20) to a torque value of 27 inch-
pounds.
(e) Install clamps (50) and secure with bolt, washer, and nut.
Tighten nut (35) to a torque value o f 27 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
R Page 228A
Aug 12/91
AIh'ed-SignalAerospaceCompany
/,~llied
MAINTENAHCE MANUAL ~=~Signal
25
3O 15 5
35 20 10
L ,"
85
R
)
.55 w. F-44G-1015
R 5. BOLT 45. SEAL

R 10. CLAMP 50. REDUCER
R 15. TUBEASSY 55. TUBEASSY
R 20. SEAL 60. SEAL
R 25. BOLT 65. TUBEASSY
R 30. WASHER 70. SEAL
R 35. CLAMP 85. FUELHEATER LOCKOUT/
R 40. TUBEASSY FUEL ENRICHMENTVALVE
UP136688
R (Code GA) Fuel Heater Plumbing Installation

R Figure 212A 73-10-01
Page 228B
Aug 12/91
~ ~l AerospaceCompany
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 1. TI. (Code GA) RemoveFuel Heater Assembly Plumbing (See Figure 212A)
R NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel
R from lines and fuel control assembly.
R (1) Remove bolts, washer, clamps, reducer, and tube assemblies.
R (2) Refer to 73-10-05, Maintenance Practices for removal of fuel

R heater lockout/fuel enrichment valve.
R T2. (Code GA) Install Fuel Heater Assembly Plumbing (See Figure 212A)
R (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s
R specified.
R Use conical seals as required for.leak repair. Refer

R instructions.
R (1) Install tube assembly between fuel heater lockout/fuel enrichment

R valve and fuel heater.
R (2) Install tube assemblies with reducer, between elbow on fuel con-
R trol assembly and fuel heater. Secure upper tube assembly with
R clamp, bolt, and washer. Tighten bolt (25) to a torque value of
R (3) Install tube assembly from elbow in fuel control asembly to tee
R between solenoid valves. Secure tube assembly with clamp and
R bolt. Tighten bolt (20) to a torque value of 40 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
P~ge 229:
Aug 12/91
I~~)t MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
5 45
10 50
15 55
20 60
65
70
75
85
F-44G-389

10. BOLT 40. SEAL 65. ELBOW
15. WASHER 45. FITTING (ELBOW) 70. PACKING
20. CLAMP 50. PACKING 75. RING
25. TUBEASSY 55. RING 80. NUT
30. SEAL 85. FUELFILTER ASSY
(Codes AA-BA) Fuel Filter Plumbing Installation
UP136688
Figure 213 73-10-01

Page 230
Dec 14/87
lied
i. U. (Codes AA-BA) RemoveFuel Filter Plumbing (See Figure 213)
(1) Remove tube assemblies, attaching parts, f i t t i n g s , elbows, and
packings from fuel control assembly. Discard packings.
filter.
V. (Codes AA-BA) Install Fuel Filter Plumbing (See Figure 213)
NOTE: Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified,

lubricate packings or gaskets with any type clean
jet fuel. An altenate lubricant (0S-124 or San-
tovac 5) may be used. Apply lubricant sparingly
and spread evenly to a thin transparent film to
minimize contamination. Apply lubricating com-
pound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts
and screws, and apply clean engine oil to threads
(except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing f i t -
tings unless otherwise specified.
(run-down) torque of self locking devices to
recommended values.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for instal-
(1) Install elbows, with nuts, rings, and new packings, into top of
fuel f i l t e r . Tighten nuts (80) to a torque value of 55 to 60 inch-
, pounds.
(2) Install fittings, with nuts, rings, and new packings, into fuel
control assembly. Tighten nuts (60) to a torque value of 55 to 60
inch-pounds.
(3) Install tube assemblies between fuel f i l t e r and fuel control

assembly. Install clamps, bolt, washers, and nut, with maximumof
three washers between clamp to prevent bending of tube assemblies
during installation. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 12
inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 231
Aug 16/89
) ~ J MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
45
50
80 55
85 60
ViEW A-A 9O 65
?O
95 1on 110 ?5 105
125
130
F-.44G-390
(Codes AA-BA) Inlet Temperature Sensor

UP136688
Pl umbi-ng- Instal I ati on

Figure 214 73-10-01
Page 232
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5j(REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. W. (Codes AA-BA) Remove Inlet Temperature Sensor Plumbing, Attaching Parts,

X. (Codes AA-BA) Install Inlet Temperature Sensor Plumbing, Attaching

Parts, and Fittings (See Figure 214)
CAUTION: WHEN LINES ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISECARETHAT NO CON-

TAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDNOR THREAD LUBRICATION COM-
POUND IS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENTAND THREAD
ENGAGEMENT TO PREVENTNUT TO FITTING GALLING AND/OR
CROSS THREADING.
NOTE: Packings or gaskets may be installed dry or lubricant

(0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used prior to installa-
tion unless otherwise specified. Apply lubricant spar-
ingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent film to
minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws
located forward of the fireshield unless otherwise
speci f i ed.

torque of se~f locking devices to recommended values.
Coat threads of elbow or tee with high temperature~com-

pound (Fel-Pro C5-A).
(1) Install elbow or tee with new gasket or packing into turbine plenum
and secure with nut. Tighten nut (30) to a torque value of 50 to
55 inch-pounds.
(2) Install unions with new gaskets or packing into i n l e t temperature

sensor. Tighten unions (125) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-
pounds.
(3) (Post SB 73-0022) Install bracket on oil f i l t e r mounting stud.

Tighten nut to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
KEY TO FIGURE 214
5. TUBEASSY *60. CLAMP 100. JUMPERASSY

"15. CAP 65. NUT 105. TUBEASSY
*20. TEE 70. WASHER 110. TUBEASSY
25. GASKET *75. BRACKET 115. TUBEASSY
30. NUT 80. NUT 120. FILTER (P3)
*45. NUT 85. BOLT 125. UNION
*50. BOLT 90. CLAMP 130. PACKING
*55. WASHER 95. BOLT 135. INLET TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
*(Post SB 73-0022)
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 233
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: P3 FILTER MUSTBE INSTALLED WITH ARROW(FLOW
DIRECTION INDICATION) TOWARDENGINE INTAKE.
I. x. (4) Install tube assembly between plenum elbow or tee and air f i l t e r .
Install air f i l t e r with arrow toward engine intake. Install tube
assembly between air f i l t e r and inlet temperature sensor union.
(5) (Post SB 73-0022) Install clamp on tube assembly and secure with
bolt, washer, and nut. Tighten nut (45) to a torque value of 20
i nch-pounds.
(6) Install tube assemblies between tees in fuel control and unions in
temperature sensor.
(7) (Engines with Tube Assemblies, Part No. 897055-1 and 897056-1) In-
stall clamps onto tube assemblies. Secure jumper assemblies to
clamp with nuts and bolts. Tighten nuts (80) to a torque value of
20 inch-pounds. Secure jumper assemblies to fuel control bracket
support with bolt. Tighten bolt (95) to a torque value of 25 inch-
pounds.
(8) (Engines with Tube Assemblies, Part No. 897055-2/-3 and 897056-2/-
3) Secure jumper assemblies to tube assemblies with bolts and nuts.
Tighten nuts (80) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds. Secure jum-
per assemblies to fuel control support bracket with bolt. Tighten
bolt to a torque value of 37 inch-pounds.
(9) Install cap on tee (20) installed in turbine plenum. Tighten cap
(15) to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds. Safety wire cap in
manner noted during removal.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 234
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Y. (Codes CA-CC) Remove Inlet Temperature Sensor Plumbing, Attaching Parts,
Z. (Codes CA-CC) Install Inlet Temperature Sensor Plumbings, Attaching

Parts, and Fittings (See Figure 215)
CAUTION: WHEN LINES ANDFITTINGS ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISE CARE

THAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDOR THREAD LUBRI-
CATION COMPOUNDIS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENT
AND THREAD ENGAGEMENTTO PREVENTNUT FROMGALLING
AND/OR CROSSTHREADING.

(0S,124 or Santovac 5) may be used prior to installa-
minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV)to threads of bolts and screws
specified.

(I) Install unions with new packings or gaskets into temperature

sensor. Tighten unions (190) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-
pounds.
(2) Install tube assemblies between tees in fuel control unit and
unions in temperature sensor.
(3) (Engines with Tube Assemblies, Part No. 897055-1 and 897056-1) In-
stall clamps (135) onto tube assemblies. Secure jumper assemblies
(140) to clamps with bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts (125) to a
torque value of 20 inch-pouhds. Secure jumper assemblies to fuel
control support bracket with bolt. Tighten bolt (120) to a torque
(4) (Engines with Tube Assemblies, Part No. 897055-2/-3 and 897056-2/-
3) Secure jumper assemblies (155) to tube assemblies with bolts and
nuts. Tighten bolts (150) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
Secure jumper assemblies to fuel control support bracket with bolt.
(5) Install tee with new gasket and nut into plenum and secure with
nut. Tighten nut (105) to a torque value of 50 to 55 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
.... - ' ~ , . . . . Page 235
" Dec 14/87
J~I MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
,A
• "1
,25
130
135 ~5
j ~ 180~
5
10
145
\ 15
2O
, A
155 150
view A - A 25 140
3O
35
r~
Illp 175 F-44G-391

75
(Codes CA-CC) Inlet Temperature Sensor

Pl umbing Instal I ati on
UP136688
Figure 215 73-10-01

Page 236
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Z. (6) Install cap on tee in plenum. Tighten cap (90) to a torque value
of 65 to 70 inch-pounds. Safety wire cap in manner noted during
removal.
(7) Install bracket on oil f i l t e r mounting stud. Tighten nut (25) to a

(8) Install elbow with new washer into upper shield half assembly and
secure with nut. Tighten nut (65) to a torque value of 50 to 55
i nch-pounds.
(9) Install tube assembly between tee in plenum and elbow in upper
shield half assembly.
(1o) Install tube assembly between elbow in upper shield half assembly
and f i l t e r and secure with clamp, bolt, washer, and nut. Tighten
nut (5) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: P3 FILTER MUSTBE INSTALLED WITH ARROW(FLOW

DIRECTION INDICATION) TOWARDENGINE INTAKE.
(11) Install f i l t e r , (P3) with arrow pointing toward engine intake.
(12) Install tube assembly between temperature sensor and f i l t e r .
KEY TO FIGURE 215
e NUT 105. NUT

10. BOLT 120. BOLT
15. WASHER 125. NUT
20. CLAMP 130. BOLT
25. NUT 135. CLAMP
30. WASHER 140. JUMPERASSY
35. BRACKET 145. NUT
40. TUBE ASSY 150. BOLT
45. FILTER (P3) 155. JUMPERASSY
50. TUBE ASSY 160. TUBEASSY
55. TUBE ASSY 165. TUBEASSY
65. NUT 175. TUBEASSY
70. WASHER 180. TUBEASSY
75. ELBOW 190. UNION
90. CAP 200. PACKING
95. TEE 205. INLETTEMPERATURE SENSOR
100. GASKET
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 237
Dec 14/87
~J MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
0
45
50
55
85
90
951100
150
5
10
155 15
20
140
/ V , lo5
60 25 90 110
65 30 115
70 35, 120
75 125
130
135
F-44G-395
(Code DA) Inlet Temperature .(TT2) and

Pressure (PT2) Sensor Plumbing Installation
UP136688
Figure 216 73-10-01

Page 238
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. AA. (Code DA) Remove Inlet Temperature (TT2) and Pressure (PT2) Sensor
Plumbing, Attaching Parts, and Fittings (See Figure 216)
AB. (Code DA) Install Inlet Temperature (TT2) and Pressure (PT2) Sensor
CAUTION: WHENLINES ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISE CARETHAT NO
CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDNOR THREAD LUBRICATION
COMPOUNDIS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENT AND
THREAD ENGAGEMENTTO PREVENTNUT TO FITTING GALLING

sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent film
to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws
specified.

(1) Install unions with new packings into fuel control unit and tem-
perature sensor. Tighten unions (85, 95, 145) to a torque value
KEY TO FIGURE 216

5. BOLT 85. UNION
15. CLAMP 95. UNION
20. INSULATORBUSHING 100. PACKING
25. NUT 105. NUT
30. BOLT 110. BOLT
35. CLAMP 115. CLAMP
40. NUT 120. BOLT
50. CLAMP 130. BRACKET
55. CLAMP 135. WASHER
60. NUT 140. TUBEASSY
65. BOLT 145. UNION
75. CLAMP 155. INLETTEMPERATURE AND
80. TUBEASSY PRESSURE SENSOR
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 239
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-O NO. 72-01-27
65
75' 70
8O
, . ~
¢
0
OU UIJ
40 25 90
45 30 95
50 35 100
55 105
110
115
F-44G-396
(Codes EA-FB) Inlet Temperature (TT2) and

Pressure (PT2) Sensor Plumbing Installation
Figure 217 73-10-01
UP136688
Page 240
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. AB. (2) Install tube assembly between unions and secure with clamps,
bolts, and nuts. Tighten nuts (25, 40, 60) to a torque value of
27 inch-pounds.
(3) Install bracket (130) and secure with bolt and washer. Tighten
(4) Install tube assembly between union in i n l e t temperature sensor

and f i t t i n g in anti-ice shield assembly. Secure tube assembly
with clamps, bushing, washers, bolt, and nut. Tighten bolt (5) to
a torque value of 25 inch-pounds. Tighten nut (105) to a torque
KEY TO FIGURE 217
5. BOLT 75. UNION

15. CLAMP 85, NUT
20. INSULATORBUSHING 90. BOLT
25. NUT 95. CLAMP
30. BOLT 100. BOLT
40. NUT 110. BRACKET
50. CLAMP 120. TUBEASSY
55. CLAMP 125. UNION
60. TUBEASSY 130. PACKING
65. UNION 135. INLET TEMPERATUREAND
70. PACKING PRESSURE SENSOR
73-10-01
UP136688
Page 241
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. AC. (Codes EA-FB) Remove Inlet Temperature (TT2) and Pressure (PT2) Sensor
AD. (Codes EA-FB)Install Inlet Temperature (TT2) and Pressure (PT2) Sensor
CAUTION: WHENLINES ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISECARETHAT NO

CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDNOR THREADLUBRICATION
COMPOUND IS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENT AND
THREAD ENGAGEMENTTO PREVENTNUT TO FITTING GALLING

(0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used prior to i~stalla-
sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent film
to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound
(LSqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws
speci fi ed.
torque of self Iockingdevices to recommended values.
(I) Install unions with new packings into fuel control unit and tem-
perature sensor. Tighten unions (65, 75, 125) to a torque value
(2) Install tube assembly between unions and secure with clamps,
bolts, and nuts. Tighten nuts (25, 40) to a torque value of 27
inch-pounds.
(3) Install bracket (110) and secure with bolt and washer. Tighten
(4) Install tube assembly between union in inlet temperature sensor

and f i t t i n g in anti-ice shield assembly. Secure tube assembly
with clamps, bushing washer, bolt, and nut. Tighten bolt (5) to a
torque value of 25 inch-pounds. Tighten nut (85) to a torque
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 242
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL "•/liedignal
60
65
~D
, []
~75
R
1194
20 5
25 10 F-44G-1010
30 15
R 5. NUT 75. CLAMP

R 10. BOLT 80. NUT
R "15. CLAMP 85. BOLT
R 20. NUT 90. CLAMP
R 25. BOLT 91. BOLT
R 30. CLAMP 92. WASHER
R 35. TUBE ASSY 93. BRACKET
R 40. CAP 94. WASHER
R 45. TEE 95. TUBE ASSY
R 50. UNION 100. UNION
R 60. UNION 125. INLET TEMPERATURE
R 65. PACKING AND PRESSURESENSOR
R 70. BOLT
(Code GA)
Inlet Temperature (Tt2) and Pressure (Pt2)
Sensor Plumbing Installation
UP136688
Figure 217A 73-10-Q1

Page 242A
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~l~&~al
GARRETT TPE331,5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
R 1. ADI. (Code GA) Remove Inlet Temperature (TT2) and Pressure (PT2) Sensor
R Plumbing, Attaching Parts, and Fittings (See Figure 217A)
R AD2. (Code GAi Install Inlet Temperature (TT2) and Pressure (PT2) Sensor
R Plumbing, Attaching Parts, and Fittings (See Figure 217A)
R CAUTION: WHENLINES ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISECARETHAT NO

R CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDNOR THREADLUBRICATION
R COMPOUND IS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENTAND
R THREAD ENGAGEMENTTO PREVENTNUT TO FITTING GALL-
R ING AND/ORCROSSTHREADING.
R NOTE: Packings or gaskets maybe installed dry or lubricant
R (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used prior to installa-
R tion unless otherwise specified. Apply lubricant
R sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent
R film to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating
R compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts
R and screws located forward of the fireshield unless
R otherwise specified.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recom-
R mended general torque values. Add frictional drag
R (run-down) torque of self locking devices to recom-
R mended values.
(I) Install union with new packing into fuel control unit. Tighten
R (2) Install tee on union. Tighten tee (45) to a torque value of 70

R to 80 inch-pounds. Install cap on tee and lockwire.
R (3) Install unions with new packings into inlet temperature and pres-
R sure sensor. Tighten unions (60, 100) to a torque value of 35 to
R 40 inch-pounds.
R (4) Install tube assembly between fuel control and inlet temperature
R and pressure sensor. Secure tube assembly with clamps, bolts,
R and nuts. Tighten bolts (10, 25) to a torque value of 27 to 35
R inch-pounds.
R (5) Install tube assembly between temperature and pressure sensor and
R f i t t i n g on anti-ice shield. Secure tube assembly with clamps,
R nuts and bolts. Tighten nut (85) to a torque value of 20 to 25
R inch-pounds. Tighten bolt (70) to a torque value of 25 inch-
R pounds.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 242B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)

UP136688
73-10-01
Page 243
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
25 35 15
5O
/
5,10
15
2O
F-44G-392
(Codes AA-BA)
Torque Limiter Assembly Plumbing Installation
' Figure 218 73-10-01
UP136688
Page 244
Dec 14/87
',,~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~-~Signal
. AE. (Codes AA-BA) RemoveTorque Limiter (By-Pass Valve) Plumbing (See
Figure 218)

(1) Removetube assemblies and attaching hardware.
(2) Removereducer and gasket from fuel control.

R (3) Refer to 73-22-01, Maintenance Practices for removal of
R torque/temperature limiter (by-pass valve).
AF. (Codes AA-BA) Install Torque Limiter (By-Pass Valve) Plumbing (See
Figure 218)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings or gaskets with clean engine
oil or fuel as applicable or alternate lubricant (0S-
124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation unless other-
wise specified. Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-
Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and
apply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two
threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s located forward of
the fireshield unless specified.
R instructions.
(1) Install reducer, with new gasket, into fuel control. Tighten
(2) Install tube assemblies, with attaching hardware. Tighten nut (5)
KEY TO FIGURE 218

. NUT 30. SEAL
10. CLAMP 35. REDUCER
15. TUBE ASSY 40. GASKET
20. SEAL 45. TEE
25. TUBE ASSY 50. TORQUELIMITER ASSY
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 245
Aug 16/89
~I MA
N
ITENANCEM
ANU
AL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
55
60
65
70
101 ":!.~
:,:_:.:::,.,,-._~,;....;:.. ........ 1
" ".... - 35
45
50
2_5 95
30 100
F-~-G-393
(Code DA) Torque and-Temperature Limiter

Assembly Plumbing Instal lation
Figure 219
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 246
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. AG. (Code DA) RemoveTorque and Temperature Limiter (By-Pass Valve) Plumb-
ing (See Figure 219)
(1) Removetube assemblies and attaching parts.
(2) Removeuniversal bolt and elbow with packings from fuel pump
assembly. Discard packing.
(3) Removeelbow from torque limiter.
(4) Removebracket from fuel pump flange.
R (5) Refer to 73-22-01, Maintenance Practices for removal of torque
R temperature limiter (by-pass val ve).
AH. (Code DA) Install Torque and Temperature Limiter (By-Pass Valve)
Plumbing (See Figure 219)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings or gaskets with clean engine oil
or fuel as applicable or alternate lubricant (0S-124 or
Santovac 5) prior to installation unless otherwise
specified. Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade
NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and apply clean engine
oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing
fittings located forward of the fireshield unless
speci fi ed.
R 70-00-00, Standard Practioes for installation instructions.
(1) Install elbow, with new packing, and ring into torque limiter and
secure with nuts. Tighten nut (70) to a torque value of 20 to 25
inch-pounds.
KEY TO FIGURE 219
5. NUT 60. PACKING
10. BOLT 65. RING
15. CLAMP 70. NUT
20. BRACKET 75. NUT
25. TUBEASSY 80. BOLT
30. SEAL 85. WASHER
35. UNIVERSALFITTING BOLT 90. CLAMP
40. PACKING 95. TUBEASSY
45. PACKING 100. SEAL
50. ELBOW 105. TORQUEAND TEMPERATURE
55. ELBOW L IMITER ASSY
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 247
Aug 16/89
~I MA
N
ITENANCEM
ANU
AL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. AH. (2) Install universal bolt and elbow, with new packings into fuel pump
assembly. Tighten bolt (35) to a torque value of 27 to 35 inch-
pounds.
(3) Install bracket onto fuel pump flange and secure with bolt.
Tighten bolt to a torque value of 30 inch-pounds.
(4) Install tube assembly with attaching parts between elbow in torque
l i m i t e r assembly and elbow in fuel pump assembly. Tighten nut (5)
(5) Install tube assembly with attaching parts between torque l i m i t e r

and tee in fuel shutoff valve plumbing. Tighten nut (75) to a
UP136688
73-10-01.
Page 248
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
THIS PAGEINTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

UP136688
73-10-01
Page 249
Dec 14/87
l ~ J MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
30
35 80 i, 5o,55
20,25
75
]
F
II
5 20
in 9~
F-44G-394
UP136688
(Codes EA-FB) Torque Limiter Assembly Plumbing Installation

Figure 220 73-10-01
Page 250
Dec 14/87
/lied
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-0.1-27)
I. AI. (Codes EA-FB) RemoveTorque and Temperature Limiter (By-Pass Valve)
(1) Removetube assemblies and attaching parts.
(2) Removeelbow, packing, ring, and nut from torque and temperature
limiter (by-pass valve). Discard packing.
(3) Removeuniversal f i t t i n g bolt and elbow from fuel pump. Remove
and di scard packings.
R (4) Refer to 73-22-01, Maintenance Practices for removal of torque
R temperature limiter (by-pass valve).
AJ. (Codes EA-FB) Install Torque and Temperature Limiter (By-Pass Valve)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings or gaskets with clean engine oil
or fuel as applicable or alternate lubricant (0S-124 or
Santovac 5) prior to installation unless otherwise
specified. Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade
NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and apply clean engine
oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing
fittings located forward of the fireshield unless
speci fi ed.
R 70-00-00, Standard Practices for installation instructions.
(1) Install universal f i t t i n g bolt and elbow, with new packings, onto
fuel pump. Tighten bolt (6Q) to a torque value of 27 to 35 inch-
pounds.
(2) Install nut, ring, and new packing onto elbow. Install elbow onto
torque and temperature limiter. Tighten nut (55) to a torque
~ KEY TO FIGURE 220
5, NUT 45. PACKING

10. WASHER 50. RING
15. CLAMP 55. NUT
20. TUBE ASSY 60. UNIVERSALFITTING BOLT
30. TUBE ASSY 70. PACKING
35. SEAL 75. ELBOW
40. ELBOW 80. TORQUELIMITER ASSY
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 251
Aug 16/89
i ~ ] MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
15
in 20
65
\
-I
) - i
45
50
55
60 F-44G-407
e TUBE ASSY 40. NUT

10. TUBE ASSY 45. NUT
15. REDUCER 50. WASHER
20. PACKING 55. ELBOW
25. CAP 60. WASHER
30. TEE 65. WARNINGTAG
35. GASKET 70. WARNINGTAG
UP136688
(Code DA) Plenum Pressure (PS3) Plumbing Installation

Figure 221 73-10-01
Page 252
Dec 14/87
lied
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01'27)
1. AJ. (3) Install tube assemblies and secure tube assembly (20) with clamp,
washer and nut. Tighten nut (5) to a torque value of 65 inch-
pounds.
AK. (Code DA) Remove Plenum Pressure (PS3) Plumbing (See Figure 221)
Remove tube assemblies, tee, elbow, reducer, and packings. Discard

packing.
AL. (Code DA) Install Plenum Pressure (PS3) Plumbing (See Figure 221)
Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and
apply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two
threads) of male plumbing fittings located forward of
the fireshield unless specified.
R instructions.
(1) Install reducer with new packing into fuel control unit. Tighten
(2) Install elbow with new washers into upper shield half assembly and
secure with nut. Tighten nut (45) to a torque value of 110 to 130
inch-pounds. Install tube assembly between reducer at fuel con-
trol and elbow at upper shield half assembly.
(3) Install tee with new gasket and nut into plenum. Tighten nut (40)
to a torque value of 50 to 55 inch-pounds. Install tube assembly
between tee and elbow in upper shield half assembly.
(4) Install cap on tee and tighten to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-
pounds. Lockwire cap.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 253
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1@
15
2O
25
30
35
J
b,
' i
F-44G-408
o TUBE ASSY 25. GASKET

10. REDUCER 30. NUT
15. PACKING 35. WARNINGTAG
20. ELBOW 40. WARNINGTAG
(Codes EA-FB) PlenumPressure (PS3)
UP136688

Figure 222 73-10-01
Page 254
Dec 1,4/87
Signal
~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. AM. (Codes EA-FB) Remove Plenum Pressure (PS3) Plumbing (See Figure 222)
Remove tube assemblies, elbow, reducer, and packings. Discard packing.
AN. (Codes EA-FB) Install Plenum Pressure (PS3) Plumbing (See Figure 222)
oil or fuel as applicable or alternate~ubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation unless
otherwise specified, Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws,
and apply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t
two threads) of male plumbing fittings located forward
of the fireshield unless specified.
Use conical seals as required for leak repair. Refer
to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for installation
instructions.
(1) Install reducer, with new packing into fuel control unit. Tighten
(2) Install elbow with new gasket and nut into plenum. Tighten nut
(3) Install tube assembly between elbow and reducer in fuel control
unit.
UP136688
73-10-01
R Page 254A
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCempany
/_~lslied
45
50
F-.44G- I011
30
35
40
R (Code GA)
UP136688
R Plenum Pressure (PS3) Plumbing Instal I ati on

R Figure 223 73-10-01
Page 254B
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCempany
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ,~lied
~~Signal
R . B. (Code GA) Remove Plenum Pressure Plumbing (See Figure 223)
R Remove tube assemblies, elbows, reducer, and packings.

R C. (Code GA) Install Plenum Pressure Plumbing (See Figure 223)
R CAUTION: WHENGASKETSOR PACKINGSARE INSTALLED ON PNEUMATIC
R FITTINGS, ENSURETHAT NOLUBRICANT IS USED. WHEN
R PNEUMATIC LINES AND FITTINGS ARE INSTALLED, ENSURE
R THAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDOR THREADCOM-
R POUND IS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENTAND THREAD
R ENGAGEMENT TO PREVENTGALLING AND/OR CROSS
R THREADING.
NOTE: Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to

threads of bolts or screws locatedforward of the
fireshield unless otherwise specified. Apply high tem-
perature compound (Fel-Pro C5-A) to threads of bolts
and studs located aft of the fireshield unless other-
wise specified.
(i) Install elbow with new gasket into turbine plenum and secure with
bolt. Tighten bolt (10) to a torque value of 110 to i30 inch-
pounds.
(2) Install elbow through fireshield and secure with washer and nut.
Tighten nut (40) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-pounds.
R (3) Install tube assembly between elbow and tee.
(4) Install reducer with new packing into fuel control assembly.
R (5) Install tube assembly between reducer in fuel control assembly and
R el bow.
KEY TO FIGURE 223
R 5. TUBEASSY 30. ELBOW

R 10. BOLT 35. WASHER
R 15. ELBOW 40. NUT
R 20. GASKET 45. REDUCER
R 25. TUBEASSY 50. PACKING
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 255
Aug 12/91
ignal
l s l i e d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-0.1-27)
2. Inspection/Check
NOTE: Table 202 provides a l i s t of all equipment and materials

required to perform Inspection/Check.
Table 202. Equipment and Material
Equipment or Material Description

Compressed air or nitrogen Commercial ly available
(clean, dry with pressure to
105 psig)
Detergent solution American Gas and Chemical Company, 511E
72nd Street, New York, NY 10021
Filter (10 micron) Commercially ava i I able
Multimeter Capable of measuring 0 to 100 ohms resist-

ance with accuracy of -+2
percent
Part No. 310C- Type 3-3022, Triplett
Corporation, 286 Harmon Place,
Bluffton, OH 45817
Silicone rubber sealant Commerci ally avai I able
A. Inspect Tube Assemblies

(1) Inspect tube assemblies in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices. Inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, and peened
threads. Check clamps for worn and missing cushions.
(2) Inspect tube assembly flares and flare sleeves as follows.
(a) Carefully remove enough of tube assembly insulation covering
to slide tube nut back onto tube assembly to expose back of
tube flare.
UP136688
73-10-01
R Page 256
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: USE CARETO PREVENTANY CONTAMINATION FROM
ENTERING PNEUMATICTUBESDURINGWIRE
BRUSHING OR WHILE ~UBESARE DISCONNECTED.
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, CLEANTUBES IN AC-
CORDANCEWITH CLEANING/PAINTING.
2. A. (2) (b) Inspect front and back of tube flare and flare sleeve for
cracks and corrosion. No cracks allowed. Removecorrosion by
brushing with wire brush.
(c) Following inspection, seal exposed end of insulation covering

with silicone rubber sealant.
(4) Perform leakage check of pneumatic system lines as follows.

(a) Disconnect tube assembly at turbine plenum tee. Connect
clean, dry air or nitrogen source with f i l t e r and pressurize
to 100 ±5 psig.
(b) Apply detergent solution to all pneumatic system connections.
No leakage is allowed.
(c) I f leakage is observed, apply proper torque values to connect-

ing nuts. I f leakage is s t i l l observed, replace faulty parts
and recheck for leakage.
B. (Codes AA-CC) Inspect P3 Filter for Contamination (Refer to
Cleaning/Painting for Cleaning Procedures)
C. (Codes AA-CC) Inspect Pneumatic Line Heaters
(1) Inspect external coating for deterioration or damage.

(2) Inspect thermal switch covering for damage and for security fo
thermal switch.
(3) Inspect external electrical leads and connectors for damage.
NOTE: Pneumatic line heater thermal switch must be

closed for resistance check. Thermal switch shall
open at 121 ±3C (250 ±SF) and close at I07C (225F)
minimum.
(4) Measure resistance of each pneumatic line heater from pin to ground
using multimeter. Resistance shall be 5 to 25 ohms.
(5) Replace pneumatic line heaters that do not meet Inspection/Check

requirements.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 257
Dec 14/87
AIh'ed-SignalAerospaceCompany
~ ilied
. Cleani ng/Pai nti ng
R NOTE: Table 203 provides a l i s t of all equipment and materials
R required to perform Cleaning/Painting.
Table 203. Equipmentand Materials
R Equipment or Material Manufacturer

Beaker (220 m i l l i l i t e r capacity) Commercially available
Blackstone heated tank Blackstone Ultrasonics Inc, 1111 Allen
U1trasoni c cleaner St, Jamestown, NY 14701
(Model HT 1.9)
Solvent (Federal Commercial ly available

R 1,1,1-Trichloroethane Commercially available
R (MIL-T-81533)
A. Clean Parts
(2) Clean all f i t t i n g s and plumbing in accordance with 72-00-00,
B. (Codes AA-CC) Clean P3 Filter
CAUTION: CLEANING SHALL BE PERFORMEDIN A CLEAN, WELL-
VENTILATED ROOM. RUBBERGLOVESAND PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING SHALL BE WORN. EXTINGUISHERSAND VAT
ORTANK COVERSSHALL BE ON HAND IN CASEOF
FIRE.
NOTE: P3 f i l t e r may be cleaned as a temporary expedient
by back flushing f i l t e r under l i g h t pressure using
solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I ) .
However, the sonic cleaning method should be em-
ployed for thorough cleaning.
(1) Clean P3 f i l t e r by sonic method as follows.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 258
Aug 12/91
lied
NOTE: Beaker is used in ultrasonic cleaner to conserve
cleaning agent. Water is used in ultrasonic
cleaner tank as transmitting fluid.
R 3. B. (1) (a) Place P3 f i l t e r in beaker and f i l l beaker with 1,1,1-
R Trichloroethane (MIL,T-81533) to submerge P3 f i l t e r .
(b) Place beaker containing P3 f i l t e r in ultrasonic cleaner tank

and f i l l Ultrasonic cleaner tank to within 3/8 inch of top
with water.
(c) Operate ultrasonic cleaner for 5 minutes.
R (d) Discard contaminated 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) and

R rinse P3 f i l t e r and beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
R (MIL-T-81533) using plastic squeeze bottle.
R (e) Refill beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533)
and operate ultrasonic cleaner for an additional 5 minutes.
R (f) Repeat steps (d) and (e) until 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
R (MIL-T-81533) remains clean after a 5 minute operation period.
(g) Removethe P3 f i l t e r from the beaker and dry using clean, low
pressure air supply.
UP136688
73-10-01
Page 259/260
Aug 12/91
~ / l iignal
ed
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETTTPE331-5 (REPORTNO.~ 72-01-27)
(CODES DA-FB) START FUEL PRESSUREREGULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Table 201. Naterials and Compounds

Any approved engine oil Commercially ava i I able

Lubricant (0S-124 or Monsanto Company, 800 N Lindbergh Blvd,
A. Remove Start Fuel Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)

(1) Removeplumbing from start fuel pressure regulator and solenoid
valve in accordance with 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Disconnect electrical connector from solenoid valve.
(3) Removebolts attaching bracket to output housing assembly. Remove
bracket.
(4) Removestart fuel pressure regulator and solenoid assembly from

bracket.
(5) Separate start fuel pressure regulator and solenoid valve.

UP136688
73-10-03
Page 201
Aug 16/89
~=~/lied
1. B, Install Start Fuel Pressure Regulator (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified lu-
Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and apply
general torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down
torque) of self locking devi~ces to recommended values.
(1) Install f i t t i n g with new packing or gasket into start fuel pressure
regulator. Tighten f i t t i n g .
(2) Install nut onto f i t t i n g followed by new ring and gasket.
(3) Install solenoid valve onto f i t t i n g with flow direction towards
start fuel pressure regulator. Tighten nut (70) to a torque value
R (4) (Pre SB 73-0187) Install fuel pressure regulator and solenoid

R valve onto bracket using washers (20, 40), as required, to align
R fuel pressure regulator and solenoid valve.
R (5) (Post SB 73-0187) Install fuel pressure regulator and solenoid

R valve onto bracket with washers (45) between fuel pressure regula-
R tor and bracket. Install washers (20), as required, to align fuel
R pressure regulator and solenoid valve.
(6) Secure fuel pressure regulator and solenoid valve with bolts (10,
30). Tighten bolts (10) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(7) Install bracket onto output housing assembly and install bolts.
(8) Install plumbing on start fuel pressure regulator and solenoid
valve in accordance with 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(9) Connect electrical connector to solenoid valve.
UP136688
73-10-03
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
-." ""-." " . " . -,;i "..

:': ~.;....... ':-'T," .%' ..... "........
i '. :,". ':": f :'."-:- "" "-." ....... ::::'.- ~.
" . " '-. "4 ....... ."~ .....:_.z- . .,,,.::,.,,... ~,, ::....:...
/.:... -- ,., .. , ".. .'.p.,, "¢..:-."" ":. "-...".2 . "..t.,
.~ -..-.::::.::.... -... .,-:.~:--..,. ,.,,,,.,.}-~
•~ "- ." ". ':".. : ,~4 ~'-Y

..."....... "...... ',..
-..::.. -.. ... ,.. .,,, .,"-
;~
.o ..,
~ ,' ~,,. ss ,:, ::::) ,,.,
-.,........ :,, .-:.~ / ~., .,,
@u
,~::;.*. . - -: ::i . , ~-- 5 .~J j
i" ~ : ,-. i :' ~,
" " ;4 :%' S

/~,r-. ~ " #',s' I
.':.i"" i'-~ ~'<"
50 20 ~,~,',~,~
E-44A-6701
5. BOLT 50. BRACKET

10. BOLT 55. SOLENOIDVALVE
20. WASHER 65. RING
25. NUT 70. NUT
30. BOLT 75. FITTING (UNION)
40. WASHER 85. FUELPRESSURE
45. WASHER REGULATOR
(Codes DA-FB) Start Fuel Pressure
Regulator Instal lation
UP136688
Figure 201 73-10-03

Page 203
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Adj ustment/Tes t
A. Test Solenoid Valve
(1) Apply 24 volts dc across pins A and B of electrical connector.

Valve shall open.
(2) Removevoltage. Valve shall close.
(3) Replace valve that does not meet requirements of steps (1) and (2)
above.
. Inspection/Check
A. Perform Inspection Check
(1) Check valve electrical connector for bent, broken, and burned pins.
(2) Check valve body for damage.

(3) Check brackets for bends, cracks, and breaks.
(4) Inspect f i t t i n g s for stripped, peened, and galled threads.
(5) Check for fuel leakage from drain connection on start fuel pressure
regulator with parts installed. I f leakage is noted, refer to 72-
00-00, TROUBLESHOOTING.
. Cl eani n9/Pal nti n9
A. Clean Parts

(2) Clean fittings in accordance with 72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING,
(3) Clean fuel pressure regulator and solenoid valve in accordance with
72-00-00, CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Method No. 11.
UP136688
73-10-03
Page 204
Dec 14/87

(CODES DA-FB, GA) FUELHEATERLOCKOUT/FUEL ENRICHHENTV.ALVE -

requi red to perform Removal/Installation.

(Fel-Pro CS-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL

A. (Codes DA-FB) Remove Fuel Heater Lockout Valve (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove plumbing from fuel heater lockout valve in accordance with
(2) Disconnect electrical connector from fuel heater lockout valve.
(3) Remove fuel heater lockout valve from bracket.
(4) Remove bracket.
73"10-05
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany '~ilied
N';:~. 35
!11~ D q*k
llJ
o; , . . , ;
q, ;; ,~';
/
-..,~
/.~..
lO
E-44G.-598
o
NUT 25. NUT
10. BOLT 30. BOLT
20. SOLENOID (LOCKOUT) VALVE 40. BRACKET
(Codes DA-FB)~Fuel Heater
Lockout Valve Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 73-10-05

Page 202
Aug 12/91
/lied
R 1. B. (Codes DA-FB) Install Fuel Heater Lockout Valve (See Figure 201)
R specified.
torque) of self locking devices to recommended values.
(1) Install bracket onto compressor housing using washers between

bracket and housing. Install bolts and nuts. Tighten bolts (30)
to a torque value of 50 to 60 inch-pounds.
(2) Install fuel heater lockout valve, with arrow pointing up, onto
bracket and secure with bolt, washer, and nut. Tighten nuts (5) to
(3) Install plumbing onto fuel heater lockout valve in accordance with
(4) Connect electrical connector to fuel heater lockout valve.

UP136688
73-10-05
Page 203
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal (•_•lied
I~' % 4
,, ,/,,. 2%, /
,'r 4.,;/ ..I , '
20 , ,'~-.! "- ,
-...~ ~--~ , ~/';~. -
30 ~
~ -' ~. . , ,,.., ; ,~_ -.':-.
~.~._ "-.;
, / I II '~/ /_ '
R 4s-..~,~, F-~h~ /85.. ~..

?o,,, .~ ' ~'-C8o 5
~o.....,~
- .- ~ E-44G-1518
U.-" B
5. BOLT 55. PACKING

10. BOLT 60. RING
15. WASHER 65. NUT
20. BRACKET 70. TEE
25. UNION 75. ELBOW
35. FUEL ENRICHMENTVALVE 81. RING
40. PACKING 82. NUT
45. RING 85. FUELHEATERLOCKOUT
50. NUT VALVE
(Code GA)
Fuel Heater Lockout Valve and
UP136688
Fuel Enrichment Valve Installation

Figure 202 73-10-05
i
Page 204
Aug 12/91
~:~l~ed
R 1. c. (Code GA) RemoveFuel Heater Lockout Valve and Fuel Enrichment Valve
R (See Figure 202)
R (1) Disconnect electrical connectors from fuel heater lockout valve and
R fuel enrichment valve.
R (2) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel heater lockout valve and fuel
R enrichment valve in accordance with 73-10-01, Maintenance
R Practices.
R (3) Remove bolts and washers securing fuel heater lockout valve and
R fuel enrichment valve to bracket. Removefuel heater lockout valve
R and fuel enrichment valve from bracket.
R (4) Removebolts securing bracket to input housing assembly. Remove

R bracket.
R (5) Removefuel heater lockout valve and fuel enrichment valve from
R tee.
R (6) Removeunion with packing and ring with packing from fuel enrich-
R ment valve.
R (7) Removeelbow, packing, ring and nut and ring with packing from fuel
R heater lockout valve.
R D. (Code GA) Install Fuel Heater Lockout Valve and Fuel Enrichment Valve
R (See Figure 202)
R specified.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for conical seal
R installation procedure and recommended general torque
R values. Add frictional drag (run-down) torque of self-
R locking devices to recommended values.
R (1) Install elbow with new packing, ring, and nut into fuel heater
R lockout valve. Ensure elbow is installed in outlet port of fuel
R heater lockout valve. Tighten nut (82) to a torque value of 50 to
R 55 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-05
Page 205
Aug 12/91
lied
R . D. (2) Install union with new packing into outlet port of fuel enrichment
R valve. Tighten union (25) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-
R pounds.
(3) Install tee~with new packing, ring, and nut into inlet port of fuel
enrichment valve.
(4) Install nut, ring, and new packing on tee. Install fuel heater
lockout valve on tee. Tighten nuts (50, 65) to a torque value of
(5) Install bracket on input housing assembly and secure with bolts.
NOTE: Ensure valves are installed with flow arrows in
direction shown in Figure 202.
R (6) Install fuel heater lockout valve and fuel enrichment valve on
R bracket and secure with bolts and washers. Tighten bolts (10) to a
R (7) Connect tube assemblies to fuel heater lockout valve and fuel en-
R richment valve in accordance with 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
R (8) Connect electrical connectors to fuel heater lockout valve and fuel
R enrichment valve.
2. Adjustment/Test
A. Test Fuel Heater Lockout Valve
(I) Apply 24 volts dc across pins A and B of electrical connector.

Valve shall close.
(2) Removevoltage from electrical connector. Valve shall open.

R (3) Replace valve i f i t fails to meet test requirements.
R B. Test Fuel Enrichment Valve

R (1) Apply 24 volts dc across pins A and B of electrical connector.
R Valve shall open.
R (2) Removevoltage from electrical connector. Valve shall close.
R (3) Replace valve i f i t fails to meet test requirements.
UP136688
73-10-05
Page 206
Aug 12/91
/Allied
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Fuel Heater Lockout Valve
(1) Visually inspect valve for cracks, evidence of leakage, and bent
and broken connector pins.
(2) Visually inspect bracket for cracks.

B. Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
. Cleaning/Pianting
A. Clean Parts
(2) Clean fuel heater lockout valve in accordance with 72-00-00,
UP136688
73-10-05
Page 207/208
Aug 12/91
/.~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL "-"~Signal
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-03.-27)
FUEL SHUTOFFVALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

requi red to perform Removal/Instal lation.

Any approved engine oil Commercially ava i I able
A. (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve (See Figure 201)
(1) Disconnect electrical connector and disconnect attached aircraft
I i nkage.
(2) Removeplumbing from fuel shutoff valve in accordance with

(3) Removefuel shutoff valve and bracket from input housing assembly.
(4) Removefuel shutoff valve from bracket.
(5) Removeactuating arm (manual override).

UP136688
73-10-06
R Page 201
Aug 16/89
lied
1. B. (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve (See Figures 201, 202,
203)
NOTE: Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified lu-

of male plumbing f i t t i n g unless otherwise specified.
R i nstru cti ons.
(i) Ensure fuel shutoff valve is in AUTO position. Fuel shutoff valve
is in AUTOposition when index mark on end of fuel shutoff valve
actuating shaft is in vertical position.
(2) Install actuating arm (manual override) on shaft extension of
valve. Install 0.005 and 0.010 inch thickness of washers, as
required, on shaft between actuating arm and valve body to obtain
0.001 to 0.006 inch shaft end play. Position actuating arm as
(3) Install bolt, washers, and nut. Tighten nut (100, figure 201) to a
(4) Install washer (45), spacer (50), and washers (80, as required, 2
maximum) between fuel shutoff valve and bracket.
UP136688
73-10-06
Page 202
Aug 16/89
~lliedSignal
A E R O S P A C E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.. -. -~.~\ ~.
"~ ",%,'\\\ ",'2,',,
?.. -, .. --:.)-}. x3S.:.'
. . - ... ~.~. -...

. . . .
.../ / .,."
:
:
•
... ~-,~.~;
,.~,,. ~-: ~#
., . o ..... .- .-o .,.
5/, r-,,o
l "i ' , ~ : - ~ #I _;$~'D_I s'--lO0
CE-44G-1825
Be NUT 7O. BOLT

i0. BOLT 75. WASHER
15. NUT 80. WASHER
20. BOLT 85. BRACKET
25. NUT 90. PLUGAND BLEEDER
35. BOLT 100. NUT
50. SPACER 115. WASHER
55. SUPPORT 120. ARM
65. WASHER 135. FUELSHUTOFFVALVE ASSY
(Codes AA-BA. EA-FB) Fuel Shutoff Valve Installation

Figure 201 73-10-06
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (5) Install fuel shutoff valve on bracket and support. Install wash-
ers, bolts, and nuts. Washer (75) used with bolt (70), Part No.
MS21280-06. Washer not used with Bolt Part No. MS21280-05.
Tighten nut (15) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds. Tighten nut
(25) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Tighten bolts (60, 70)
(6) Install assembled bracket, support, and fuel shutoff valve on en-
gine and secure with bolts and nuts. Tighten bolts (10) to a
(7) Install plug with new packing into fuel shutoff valve. Tighten
(8) Install plumbing to fuel shutoff valve in accordance with 73-10-01,
MAINTENANCE PACTICES.
(9) Connect electrical connector and aircraft linkage in accordance
with Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
Co (Code DA) Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve (See Figure 204)

linkage.
UP136688
73-10-06
Page 204
Dec 14/87
• MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
~T
/2
IN DEX
/ MARK
L "
vIEv¢ A
C-LTr
/2
INDEX
/ MARK
VIEW B
F-44G-512
INDEXMARK ON SHAFTOF FUELSHUTOFF VALVE (2) SHALLBE ALIGNEDWITH CENTERLINE

DURING INSTALLATION OF ARM (1)
VIEW A CODESAA-BA, EA-FB

VIEW B CODEDA
Fuel Shutoff Valve Arm Installation

UP136688
Figure 202 73-10-06

Page 205
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
SHUTOFF VALVE OPERATIONFROM

AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL OFF.
VALVE MAY CLOSEANYWHERE
IN THIS RANGE.
q.
OVER-TRAVEL
OVER-TRAVELAVAILABLE FOR
41" FEATHERVALVE OPERATION
AND RIGGING.
0°
AUTOMATIC
1B °
/
\
FUEL SHUTOFF "~,

VALVE ARM
I NDEX MARK
FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE SHAFT
F-~,G-234
i ¸
INDEX MARKONSHAFT OF FUEL SHUTOFFVALVE SHALL BE ALIGNED WITH CENTERLINE

DURING INSTALLATIONOF ARM (AUTOMATICPOSITION)
/
Positions of Fuel Shutoff Valve Arm
UP136688
Figure 203 73-10-06

Page 206
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
IO
35
• . ~\\ " .... .. ,,,,,

55
~","'~., ,~.,.,..... ~,,',,
; ...:..-.~ ~L~.,,... ~,, ,, ,(.,,~ ,,
~/..- ,.,, - , ~ ,,.,,',
l . - i .~.~.~, ~__ ~ /P">'~ ..~.~,~ 95

,./
°.°.--
o--~ •
\
...... ",..! ::/ ~."
~ / / ~" /:~,---~
~i
•.., ~,
5. NUT 6O. WASHER

10. BOLT 65. WASHER
15. NUT 70. WASHER
25. WASHER 80. NUT
30. SUPPORT 85. WASHER
35. NUT 90. SCREW
40. BOLT 95. WASHER
45. WASHER 100. ARM
50. SPACER 105. FUELSHUTOFFVALVE
55. BOLT
(Code DA) Fuel Shutoff Valve Installation

Figure 204 73-10-06
UP136688
Page 207
Dec 14/87
lslied
1. C, (2) Removeplumbing from fuel shutoff valve in accordance with
(3) Removefuel shutoff valve and bracket from input housing assembly.
(4) Removefuel shutoff valve from bracket.

D. (Code DA) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve (See Figures 202, 203, 204)

torque) of self locking devices to recommendedvalues.
R i nstructi ons.
(1) Ensure fuel shutoff valve is in AUTOposition. Fuel shutoff valve
is in AUTOposition when index mark on end of actuating shaft is in
vertical position.
(2) Install actuating arm (manual override) on shaft extension of fuel
shutoff valve (see figure 202) and secure with washers, bolts, and
locking nut. Tighten locking nut (80, figure 204) to a torque
(3) Install washers (65, 70, as required, two maximum) and spacer (50)
between fuel shutoff valve and bracket.
(4) Install fuel shutoff valve into bracket. Install support, washers,
bolts, and nut. Tighten bolts (20, 55) to a torque value of 70
inch-pounds. Tighten nut (35) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(B) Install fuel shutoff valve and bracket onto input housing assembly
and secure with nuts and bolts. Tighten bolts (10) to a torque
UP136688
73-10-06
Page 208
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
. D. (6) Install plumbing to fuel shutoff valve in accordance with 73-10-01,
(7) Connect electrical connector.
(8) Connect linkage to fuel shutoff valve in accordance with Aircraft
Maintenance Manual.
E. (Codes CA-CC, GA) Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve (See Figure 205)

linkage.
(2) Removeplumbing from fuel shutoff valve in accordance with
(3) Removefuel shutoff valve, bracket, and supports from input housing
assembly.
(4) Removefuel shutoff valve from bracket and supports.
(5) Removesupports from bracket.
F. (Codes CA-CC, GA) Install Fuel Shutoff Valve (See Figures 202, 203,
205)
packings or gaskets with any type clean j e t fuel. An alter-
nate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used. Apply
lubricant sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent
film to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and
apply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads)
(1) Ensure fuel shutoff valve is in AUTOposition. Fuel shutoff valve
is in AUTOposition when index mark on end of fuel shutoff valve
actuating shaft is in vertical position.
(2) Install actuating arm (manual override) on shaft extension of fuel
shutoff valve (see figure 202) and secure with washers, bolt, and
nut. Tighten nut (105) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-06
Page 209
Aug 12/91
/lied
°..°
°,.
*'~"~4 " - ...... "'°

~<.
....>.
i
I ""o°~.
. jr# #I ~#
25
'°':~" i /
E-44A-EW~97
5. NUT 70. NUT

10. BOLT 75. WASHER
15. NUT 80. BOLT
20. WASHER 85. NUT
25. BOLT 90. WASHER
3O. WASHER 95. SUPPORT
35. WASHER 100. BRACKET
40. SUPPORT 105. NUT
60. BOLT 125. ARM
65. WASHER 130. FUELSHUTOFFVALVE
UP136688
R (Codes CA-CC, GA) Fuel Shutoff Valve Installation

Figure 205 73-10-06
/
Page 210
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. F. (3) Install support onto bracket and secure with bolt, washers, and
nuts. Tighten nuts (70, 85) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
(4) Install washers (55) (maximum two each place) between fuel shutoff
valve and bracket.
(5) Install fuel shutoff valve and support onto bracket and secure with
washers, bolts, and nut. Tighten bolts (45, 60) to a torque value
of 70 inch-pounds. Tighten nut (15) to a torque value of 50 inch-
pounds.
(6) Install fuel shutoff valve and bracket onto input housing assembly
and secure with bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque
(7) Install plumbing to fuel shutoff valve in accordance with 73-10-01,

MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
(8) Connect electrical connector.
(9) Connect linkage t o f u e l shutoff valve in accordance with Aircraft

Maintenance Manual.
2. Adjustment/Test
A. Test Fuel Shutoff Valve
(1) Set manual overridelann on valve on AUTOposition. (See figure

203.) Check continuity across connector pins on electrical
connector. Continuity across pins A and C indicates l i m i t switch
No. 2 is closed and valve is closed. Continuity across pins B and
C indicates l i m i t switch No. 1 is closed and valve is open. I f
valve is closed, perform steps (2) through (4) in sequence. I f
valve is open, perform step (3), then steps (2) through (4). I f
requirements are not met, proceed to paragraph B to reset valve in-
ternal switches.
UP136688
73-10-0.6
Page 211
Dec 14/87
I(6AR~mrr) MAINTENANCEMANUAL
! TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGSTEPS (2) AND (3), DO NOT APPLY
VOLTAGE TO ELECTRICAL CONNECTORPINS FOR LONGER
THAN ONE SECOND. IF SWITCHES ARE NOT PROPERLY
ADJUSTED, VOLTAGEMAY REMAIN APPLIED TO ELEC-
TROMAGNET COILS CAUSING OVERHEATING.
. A. (2) Momentarily apply 24 volts dc maximum acrossPins A and C. Valve
shall open and remain open when voltage is removed. There shall be
continuity across Pins B and C.
(3) Momentarily apply 24 volts dc maximumacross Pins B and C. Valve

shall close and remain closed when voltage is removed. There shall
be continuity across Pins A and C.
(4) Momentarily apply 24 volts dc maximum across Pins A and C to open
valve. With a torque measuring device, measure force required to
close valve in "MANUAL" and "AUTO" position using manual override
arm. Apply force parallel to valve axis. Force required shall be
7.5 to 11 inch-pounds. Valve shall hold in closed position with
force removed.
B. Adjust Microswitches.
NOTE: Perform the following procedure when switch adjustment
is determined faulty during performance of test in-
structions, paragraph A.
(1) Set manual override arm shaft on fuel shutoff valve to MAN/OFF
position, then to AUTO position (figure 203). Note position of
manual override arm to aid reassembly.
(2) Removebolt and nut securing manual override arm, and remove manual
override arm.
(3) Removethree screws securing cover on fuel shutoff valve and remove
cover and gasket.
(4) Connect continuity meter across Pins B and C of fuel shutoff valve
electrical connector.
(5) Loosen locking screw securing bracket for close l i m i t switch

(nearest to manual override arm shaft extension) I/4 turn.
(6) Loosen locknut securing close l i m i t switch positioning screw and

turn screw counterclockwise to obtain continuity on continuity
meter, and clockwise until continuity just breaks. Turn screw an
additional 90 to 120 degree clockwise. Ensure there is clearance
between close l i m i t switch arm and pin which actuates switch by
moving against arm, I f required, reposition close l i m i t switch by
turning screw clockwise to obtain clearance. Tighten locknut to 8
inch-pounds. Tighten locking screw to secure close l i m i t switch
bracket to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-06
Page 212
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMINGTHE FOLLOWINGSTEPS, DO NOT AP-
PLY VOLTAGETO ELECTRICAL CONNECTORPINS FOR
LONGERTHAN ONE SECONDUNTIL ENSUREDTHAT SWIT-
CHES ARE PROPERLYADJUSTED. IF SWITCHES ARE
NOT PROPERLYADJUSTED,VOLTAGE MAY REMAIN AP-
PLIED TO ELECTROMAGNETCOILS CAUSING
OVERHEATING.
. B. (7) Momentarily apply 24 volts dc across Pins A and C of fuel shutoff
valve electrical connector. Valve shall actuate open.
(8) Connect continuity meter to Pins A and C of electrical connector.

(9) Loosen locking screw securing bracket for open position switch
(farthest from manual override arm shaft extension) 1/4 turn.
(I0) Loosen locknut securing open l i m i t switch positioning screw and
turn screw clockwise to obtain continuity, then counterclockwise
until continuity just breaks. Turn screw an additional 90 to 120
degrees counterclockwise~ Tighten Iocknut to a torque value of 8
inch-pounds. Tighten locking screw to secure open l i m i t switch
bracket to 20 inch-pounds.
(II) Apply 24 volts dc to Pins B and C of electrical connector. Valve
shall actuate closed.
(12) Apply and maintain 24 volts dc to Pins A and C of electrical

connector. Valve shall actuate open.
(13) Rotate manual override arm shaft to MAN/OFF position. Valve shall
close and remain closed when released. Removevoltage from elec-
t r i c a l connector pins.
(14) Rotate manual override arm shaft to AUTO. Install cover and gasket
of fuel shutoff valve and secure with screws. Reinstall manual
override arm removed in steIQ (2). Ensure manual override arm is
installed in position noted in step (1).
. Inspecti on/Check
A. Inspect Fuel Shutoff Valve, Plumbing and Attaching Parts
(1) Inspect valve for cracks and damage.
(2) Inspect electrical connector for bent, broken, and burned pins.
(3) Inspect splined external shaft for worn and damaged splines.
(4) Inspect tube assemblies in accordance with 70-00-00, STANDARD

PRACTICES.
UP136688
73-i0-~
Page 213
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal l s l i e d

. A. (5) Inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, and peened threads.
(6) Check clamps for worn and missing cushions.
(7) Inspect brackets and supports for cracks and damage.

R B. Check Fuel Shutoff Valve for Leakage
R (1) Disconnect fuel line from fuel shutoff valve outlet port.
R (2) Install slave line to allow leakage from fuel shutoff valve to be
R collected.
R (3) De-energize ignition system and remove electrical connector from
R fuel shutoff valve.
R CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEEDMANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDEDDUTY
R CYCLE FOR STARTER/GENERATOR.
R NOTE: Do not exceed 15% RPM when motoring engine. I f
R additional motoring is required, repeat motoring
R procedure after engine rotation has come to a com-
R plete stop.
(4) Motor engine and monitor slave line connected to valve outlet.
Measure outlet port leakage, i f any.
R (5) Allowable fuel leakage is 0.10 cc (two drops) in two minutes.
R (6) I f no leakage observed, or i f leakage within limits, remove slave
R line from valve outlet and connect engine fuel line. Re-energize
R ignition system and install electrical connector on fuel shutoff
R valve.
R (7) I f leakage observed exceeds allowable limits, activate manual
R shutoff by removing valve actuation linkage and rotating valve ac-
R tuator arm 90 degrees in the clockwise direction.
UP136688
73-10-06
Page 214
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. B. (8) Repeat steps (4) and (5).
(9) I f leakage observed exceeds allowable l i m i t s , remove valve for ex-

cessive leakage.
(lO) I f no leakage was observed, or i f leakage is within l i m i t s , recheck

normal shutoff leakage as follows.
( a ) Return valve actuating arm to AUTO (original) position.
NOTE: I t is necessary to open valve before rechecking

leakage as the internal spring w i l l hold valve
closed after mechanical shutoff is activated.
(b) Momentarily apply 24 to 28 VDC to valve connector pins A (+)

and C (-) to energize solenoid to open position.
(c) Momentarily apply 24 to 28 VDC to valve connector pins B (+)

and C (-) to energize solenoid to closed position.
(d) Repeat steps (4) and (5).
(11) I f leakage observed exceeds allowable l i m i t s , remove valve for ex-

cessive leakage.
(12) I f no leakage observed, or i f leakage within l i m i t s , remove slave

line from valve outlet and connect engine fuel line. Re-energize
ignition system and install electrical connector on fuel shutoff
valve.
A. Clean Parts


(3) Clean fuel shutoff valve in accordance with 72-00-00,

73-10-06
R Page 215/216
UP136688
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FLOWDIVIDER AND DRAIN VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

. Removal/Instal I ation

requ i red to perform Removal/Instal I ation.
Any approved engine fuel Commercially available
High temperature c~mpound Fel-Pro Inc, Div of Felt Products Mfg Co,
(Fel-Pro CS-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IL


A. (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Remove Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve (See
Figure 201)
(1) (Pre SB 73-0098) Disconnect fuel manifold assembly hoses from fuel ~
flow divider and drain valve in accordance with 73-10-09, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(2) (Post SB 73-0098) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel flow div-
ider and drain valve connection in accordance with 73-10-09, Main-
tenance Practices.
(3) Removefuel flow divider and drain valve and bracket from input
housing assembly.
(4) Removefuel flow divider and drain valve from bracket.
73-10-07
R Page 201
UP136688
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
MAI TENA CE MA OA,

TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
o ° "~
65
/
75 9o- . . ~ - - "
8O
130
105
E-44G-691
(Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Fuel Flow

Divider and Drain Valve I n s t a l l a t i o n
UP136688
Figure 201 73-10-07

Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB) Install Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve (See
Figure 201)

Grade NV) t o threads of bolts or screws, and apply
of male plumbing f i t t i n g s located forward of the
perature compound (Fel-Pro CS-A) to threads of bolts
and screws and to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of
male plumbing f i t t i n g s located a f t of the fireshields

(1) Install plug and bleeder with new packing into fuel flow divider
and drain valve. Tighten plug and bleeder (120) to a torque value
(2) (Pre SB 73-0098) Install f i t t i n g with ring and new packing into
fuel flow divider and drain valve. Tighten nut (90) to a torque
KEY TO FIGURE 201

5. NUT 80. PACKING
10. WASHER 85. RING
15. BOLT 90. NUT
20. WASHER 95. UNION
3O. BOLT 105. UNION
45. WASHER 120. PLUGAND BLEEDER
50. BRACKET 125. PACKING
55. BRACKET 130. FLOWDIVIDER
60. BOLT AND DRAIN VALVE
65. WASHER 150. ACCESSORYDRIVE
70. BRACKET HOUSING
75. FITTING (ELBOW)
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 203
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (3) (Post SB 73-0098) Install union with new packing into fuel flow
divider and drain valve. Tighten union (95) to a torque value of
(4) Install union with new packing into fuel flow divider and drain
valve. Tighten union (105) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-
pounds.
(5) Install brackets on fuel flow divider and drain valve and secure
with bolts and washers. Tighten bolts (40, 60) to a torque value
(6) Install brackets and fuel flow divider and drain valve onto input
housing assembly and secure with washers and bolts. Tighten nuts
(5, 25) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(7) (Pre SB 73-0098) Connect fuel manifold assembly hoses to union and
f i t t i n g in fuel flow divider and drain valve in accordance with 73-
CAUTION: (PRE SB 73-0017) ENSURETHAT HIGH PRESSURE

SENSING LINE IS CONNECTEDTO SENSING PORTOF
FLOW DIVIDER ASSEMBLY. SENSINGPORT IS BETWEEN
FUEL IN AND DRAIN PORTSAND IS MARKED"S".
INADVERTENT CONNECTION OF SENSING LINE TO DRAIN
PORT WILL FLOODTHE ENGINE AND SUBSEQUENTEN-
GINE LIGHT OFF WILL RESULT IN HOT START WITH
POSSIBLE DAMAGETO TURBINE SECTION.
(8) (Post SB 73-0098) Connect tube assemblies to fuel flow divider and
drain valve in accordance with 73-10-09, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 204
Dec 14/87
lied
R . C. (Codes CA-DA, GA) Remove Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve (See Figure
202 or 203)
(1) (Pre SB 73-0098) Disconnect fuel manifold assembly hoses from fuel
flow divider and drain valve in accordance with 73-10-09, Mainte-
nance Practices.
(2) (Post SB 73-0098) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel flow div-
ider and drain valve in accordance with 73-10-09, Maintenance
Practices.
2O
55 ~ 60
lo \ .,u I _/ 8o
E-44G-692
1 NUT 35. UNION 65. BRACKET

10. NUT 40. PACKING 70. PLUGAND BLEEDER
15. NUT 45. WASHER 75. PACKING
20. BOLT 50. UNION 80. FLOWDIVIDER
25. WASHER 55. PACKING AND DRAIN VALVE
30. WASHER 60. BOLT
R (Codes CA-CC, GA) Fuel Flow Divider and

UP136688
Drain Valve Installation

Figure 202 73-10-07
Page 205
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
. C. (3) Removefuel flow divider and drain valve and bracket from input
housing assembly.
(4) Removefuel flow divider and drain valve from bracket.
R D. (Codes CA-DA, GA) Install Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve (See Figure
202 or 203)
f u e l . An alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)
evenly t o a thin transparent film to minimize
of male plumbing fittings located forward of the
perature compound (Fel-Pro CS-A) to threads of bolts
and screws located aft of the fireshield unless other-
wise specified.
(1) Install plug and bleeder with new packing or gasket into fuel flow
divider and drain valve. Tighten plug and bleeder (70 or 75) to a
(2) Install unions with new packing or gaskets into fuel flow divider
and drain valve. Tighten union (35) to a torque value of 40 to 45
inch-pounds, and union (50) to a torque value of 60 to 65 inch-
pounds.
(3) Install bracket onto fuel flow divider and drain valve andsecure
with bolts. Tighten bolts (60) to a torque value of 25 inch-
pounds.
R (4) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Install two washers (45) onto larger union (50).
Install washers (30) onto smaller union (35) as required to shim.
(5) (CodeDA) Install nuts (30, 45) on unions.
(6) Install fuel flow divider and bracket onto fuel flow divider and
drain valve support and secure with bulkhead nuts.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 206
Aug 12/91
Signal
~ llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15
\
J
.~Z-~=;-" ?,o,,
i
i"
R
;~.'.,'21;~=':~',f'C'J~ ..i 75
~5~-~:, I ', .~~I '~q~

I., / " - \ 40
L/ 35 E-44G-857
e NUT 50. UNION

10. NUT 55. PACKING
15. NUT 60. BOLT
30. NUT 70. PLUG AND BLEEDER
35. UNION 75. PACKING
40. PACKING 80. FLOWDIVIDER AND
45. NUT DRAIN VALVE
UP136688
(Code DA) Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 203 73-10-07
Page 207
Aug 16/89
x3~llied
R 1. D. (7) (Codes CA-CC, GA) Tighten nut (10) to a torque value of 30 to 35
inch-pounds. Tighten nut (5) to a torque value of 50 to 55 inch-
pounds.
(8) (Code DA) Tighten nuts (10, 30) to a torque value of 30 to 35 inch-
pounds. Tighten nuts (5, 45) to a torque value of 50 to 55 inch-
pounds.
(9) Observe alignment of bolt holes in fuel flow divider and drain
valve bracket and input housing assembly. I f holes are ~properly
aligned, proceed to step (10). I f holes are not properly aligned-,
remove fuel flow divider and drain valve and bracket and repeat
steps (4) through (8).
(10) Install bolts, washers, and nuts. Tighten nuts (20) to a torque
(11) (Pre SB 73-0098) Connect fuel manifold assembly hoses to unions in
fuel flow divider in accordance with 73-10-09, Maintenance
Practices.
CAUTION: (PRE SB 73-0017) ENSUREHIGH PRESSURESENSING
LINE IS CONNECTEDTO SENSING PORTOF FLOWDIV-
IDER ASSEMBLY. SENSINGPORTIS BETWEENFUEL IN
AND DRAIN PORTSAND IS MARKED"S". INADVERTENT
CONNECTION OF SENSINGLINE TO DRAIN PORTWILL
FLOOD THE ENGINEAND SUBSEQUENTENGINELIGHT
OFF WILL RESULT IN HOT STARTWITH POSSIBLE
DAMAGETO TURBINESECTION.
(12) (Post SB 73-0098) Connect tube assemblies to fuel flow divider and
drain valve in accordance with 73-10-09, Maintenance Practices.
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve"
(1) Inspect valve for cracks and damage.
(2) Inspect threaded parts for damagedthreads.
(3) (Engines not equipped with manifold purge system) Inspect for fuel
leakage from drain with parts installed. Refer to 72-00-00, Trou-
ble Shooting. Refer to Approved Repairs for repair procedure.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 208
Aug 12/91
Nlied-SignalAerosPaC~ Company • " ~llied

MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-~gnal
. Cleaning/Painting
NOTE: Equivalent substitutesmay be used for listed items.

Beaker (200 m i l l i l i t e r capacity) Commerciallyavailable
Blackstone heated tank ultrasonic BlackstoneUltrasonics Inc, 1111 Allen

cleaner Model HT 1.9 Street, Jamestown, NY 14701
A1ternate:
Sonac Ultrasonic Cleaner Cooper Laboratories Inc, 300 Fairfield Rd,
Model S-2 Wayne, NJ 07407
Electrocleaner Diversey Corp, Diversey Wyandotte Div,
(Wyandotte FS) 1532 Biddle Ave, Wyandotte, MI 48192
Muriatic acid (35% HCI, Commercial ly avail able
Commercial Grade)
Sol vent (Federal Specification Commercia l l y avail able
P-D-680, Type I)
R 1,1,1-Trichloroethane Commerci a l l y avai I able
R (MIL-T-81533)

TANKCOVERS SHALL BE ON HAND IN CASEOF FIRE.
A. Clean Parts
73-10-07
UP136688
Page 2.09
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCEMANUAL Signal
. A. (2) Clean all fittings in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting,
(3) Clean outside surfaces of fuel flow divider and drain valve in ac-
cordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1.
(4) Clean internal parts of fuel flow divider and drain valve in ac-
cordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1.
B. Perform Special Cleaning
NOTE: To perform a thorough cleaning of the metallic f i l t e r ,

use the sonic method. I f the sonic method is not
available, use alternate method.
(1) Clean metallic f i l t e r element, sonic method, as follows.

R (a) Place f i l t e r element in beaker and f i l l beaker with 1,1,1-
R Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) to submerge strainer element of
filter.
(b) Place beaker containing f i l t e r element in ultrasonic cleaner

tank and f i l l ultrasonic cleaner tank to within 3/8 inch of
top with water.

R rinse f i l t e r element and beaker with clean 1,1,1-
R Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) using plastic squeeze bottle.
(e) Refill beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533)

(g) Removethe f i l t e r element from the beaker and blow dry using
clean, low pressure air supply.
(h) Install new packing in f i l t e r element.
73-10-07
UP136688
Page 210
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. B. (2) Clean metallic f i l t e r element, alternate method, as follows.
(a) Remove packing and degrease f i l t e r element in cold solvent,
R (Federal Specification P-D-680, Tupe 1).
(b) Prepare solution of Oakite rustripper by combining 3 to 5
pounds rust stripper to each gallon of water. Maintain solu-
tion at 72 to 82C (161 to 180F) with a i r agitation. Soak
f i l t e r in solution for 1/2 hour.
(c) Rinse and spray with tap water to remove residue.
(d) Prepare solution of electrocleaner (Wyandotte FS) by combining
9 ounces of electrocleaner to each gallon of water. Maintain
solution at 72 to 93C (161 to 20OF). Immersef i l t e r element
in electrocleaner solution for 4 to 6 minutes. During this
period, f i l t e r element shall be made an anode for 1 to 2
minutes at a potential of four to seven volts dc. Rinse
f i l t e r element in cold running tap water.
(e) Immerse f i l t e r element in equal parts muriatic acid and water,
by volume, at room temperature for I/2 to 1minute. Rinse
element thoroughly in cold running tap water.
(f) Immerse f i l t e r element in electrocleaner (Wyandotte FS) main-
tained at temperature of 72 to 96C (161 to 205F) for 4 to 6
minutes. Rinse in cold running tap water.
(g) Rinse f i l t e r element in clean hot water. Dry f i l t e r element
with fi l ter ed compressed a i r . I f cleaned f i l t e r element is
not to be used immediately in present assembly, place f i l t e r
element in clean container.
. Approved Repairs
R NOTE: The following procedure is recommended when malfunction
R of drain valve portion of flow divider valve is indi-
R cated by Adjustment/Test or evidence of leakage.
A. (Pre SB 73-0017) Partially Disassemble Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve
for Cleaning (See Figure 204)
CAUTION: USE SPECIAL CARETO AVOID LOSING OR DAMAGING
SMALL PRECISION PARTS.
(1) Removenipple with installed packing, f i l t e r element, and f i l t e r

spring from housing.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 211
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
230
225
220
210
205 \
\
190
-~. 14o 15o / ,~-.~~X'-~R,
25
E-44A-2943
20. SCREW 140. VALVEASSY

30. ADAPTER 160. SEAT
55. PISTON HALF 175. BALL
60. PISTON HALF 180. SPRING
65. GASKET 185. RETAINER
85. RETAINER 205. NIPPLE
95. SPRING 210. PACKING
105. RETAINER 220. FILTER
115. WASHER 225. SPRING
135. WASHER 230. HOUSING
(Pre SB 73-0017) Flow Divider and Drain Valve

UP136688
Figure 204 73-10-07

P~ge 212
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
4° A° (2) Removescrews securing adapter and remove adapter with packing.
NOTE: Record number and thickness of washers and shim
washers removed in the following step to aid
reassembly.
(3) Remove piston halves with gasket and packing, spring, and spring
retainers, washers, valve assembly with packing, seat with packing,
ball, ball spring, retainer, and shim washers.
B. (Post SB 73-0017) Partially Disassemble Fuel Flow Divider and Drain

Valve for Cleaning (See Figure 205)
CAUTION: USE SPECIAL CARETO AVOID LOSING OR DAMAGING
SMALL PRECISION PARTS.
(1) Removenipple with installed packing, f i l t e r element, and f i l t e r
spring from housing.
NOTE: Drain valve assembly is a matched set. Ensure parts
are not intermixed with parts from other drain valve
assemblies. Record number and thickness of washers
removed to aid in reassembly.
(2) Removescrews securing cover and remove cover and drain valve
assembly.
(3) Removeretaining ring and separate components of drain valve
assembly. Removepackings and washers.
C. Clean Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve Components
R Clean f i l t e r element and fuel flow divider internal components in ac-
cordance with Cleaning/Painting. Clean all other parts with solvent
(Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I). Dry f i l t e r with clean low-
pressure compressed air.
D. Inspect Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve Components
(1) Visually inspect all parts for damage and deterioration which could
cause possible malfunction or leakage.
(2) Visually inspect f i l t e r element for cracks, tears, and deformation.
(3) (Pre SB 73-0017) Inspect inner diameter of adapter that mates with
piston halves. Surface finish shall be free of scratches, burrs,
and deformation. Restrictor orifice in threaded end of adapter
shall be free and clear.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 213
Aug 16/89
I ~ i MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
15 ~~
20,.-.--~(~ , ~
35--..-...~..~.
I 85
45 "
50 "~P
80 ~
65
?o
30 , ~ 9O
e5 ~
I
E-44A-6693
10. SCREW 50. WASHER 95. WASHER
15. COVER 65. PISTON 110, NIPPLE
20. PACKING 70. PACKI,~G 115. PACKING
30. RING 75. PACKING 120. FILTER
35. HOUSING BO. PACKING 125. SPRING
40. SLEEVE 85. PACKIH;G 130. HOUSING
45. SPRING 9O. PACKING
(Post SB 73-0017) Flow Divider and Drain Valve
UP136688
Figure 205 73-10-07

Page 214
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. D. (4) (Pre SB 73-0017) Inspect piston halves for scratches and burrs.
Visually inspect sealing ring on outer piston half for evidence of
damage and wear.
(5) (Pre SB 73-0017) Visually inspect valve assembly, ball, and seat.
All parts shall be free of any defects that could affect sealing.
Pay particular attention to condition of ball and seat. These
parts should be free of grooves, f l a t spots, and other defect which
could cause leakage.
(6) Visually inspect threaded ports of housing for damaged threads.
Check all exposed passages and bores in housing for obstructions
and foreign matter.
(7) (Post SB 73-0017) Inspect drain valve assembly components for
freedom from nicks, burrs, and scoring. Check drain valve piston
for freedom of movement in drain valve sleeve.
R (8) Replace parts i f inspection requirements are not met.
E. (Pre SB 73-0017) Assemble Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve (See Figure
204)
CAUTION: ENSUREPISTON HALVESARE NOT BINDING OR COCKEDWHEN
INSTALLED IN BOREOF ADAPTER. IMPROPERLYINSTALLED
PISTON ASSEMBLYMAY CAUSEDRAIN VALVEMALFUNCTION
RESULTING IN HOT START OR FAILURE TO START.
(1) Assemble piston halves, with gasket and new packing, into adapter,
using suitable sleeve to guide piston halves into bore of adapter.
(2) Assemble new packing, same number and thickness of washers removed
in step A.(3), and spring with spring retainers on valve assembly.
(3) Install valve assembly, with assembled parts, into adapter so end
of valve assembly rod is inserted into inner piston half.
(4) Install same number and thickness of shim washers removed in step
A.(3), spring retainer, ball spring, ball, and seat with new pack-
ing into housing.
(5) Insert adapter, with assembled parts, into housing and secure with
screws. Tighten screws (20, 25) to a torque value of 13 inch-
pounds.
(6) Install f i l t e r spring, f i l t e r element, and nipple with new packing.
Tighten nipple (205) to 75 to a torque value of 80 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 215
Aug 16/89
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. F. (Post SB 73-0017) Assemble Fuel Flow Divider and Drain Valve (Engines
Not Equipped with Fuel Manifold Purge System) (See Figure 205)
NOTE: Drain valve components are a matched set. Ensure that
components are not interchanged with components of
other drain valve assemblies.
(I) Install new packing on tube nipple and install spring, f i l t e r , and
tube nipple. Tighten tube nipple (110) to a torque value of 75 to
80 inch-pounds.
(2) Install same number and thickness of washers removed in step B.(3)
into drain valve bore of flow divider and drain valve.
(3) Assemble drain valve assembly, with new packings, and install
retaining ring. Install drain valve assembly.
(4) Install cover and secure with screws. Tighten screws (10)to a
G. (Pre SB 73-0017) Test Flow Divider and Drain Valve (Engines Not Equipped
with Fuel Manifold Purge System) After Repair
(1) With flow divider and drain valve installed on engine, perform a
normal engine start in accordance with 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Ensure acceleration time and starting temperature are within normal
operating limits. Using ground observer, check for fuel leaks and
verify proper draining during shutdown.
(2) I f fuel leakage from flow divider drain valve port is noted at any
time other than engine shutdown, the following action shall be
taken.
(a) Removenecessary cowling, plumbing lines, etc., to gain access

to drain port side of flow divider.
(b) I f installed, remove drain line and union from flow divider
and drain valve drain port.
(c) Install Plug Part No. AN814-4DL, in flow divider drain valve
port and tighten to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds.
Lockwire. Cap customer drain line.
(d) Plug shall remain installed until the next scheduled engine
inspection period, at which time the cause of fuel leakage
shall be investigated and positive corrective action taken.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 216
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. H. (Post SB 73-0017) Test Flow Divider and Drain Valve (Engines Not
Equipped with Fuel Manifold Purge System) After Repair
NOTE: The flow divider incorporates a shuttle type drain

valve with soft packings for improved d i r t tolerance.
The drain valve opens during the last phase of engine
shutdown and remains open until the final part of the
following start cycle. I f the engine/aircraft instal-
lation has any lines below the drain valve that prevent
gravity drain of residual fuel trapped in low areas,
this fuel w i l l remain trapped until the engine is
restarted.
When the engine is started, plenum a i r going through

the secondary fuel manifold forces the residual fuel
out the secondary drain until fuel flow occurs in the
secondary manifold. At that time, the drain valve
seats in the run (closed) position. Fuel forced out
during engine starting is a result of the normal opera-
tion of the drain valve and should not be mistaken for
leakage.
(1) With flow divider and drain valve installed on engine, perform a
normal engine start in accordance with 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Ensure acceleration time and starting temperature are within normal
operating limits. Using ground observer, check for fuel leaks and
v e r i f y proper draining during shutdown.
(2) I f fuel leakage from the flow divider drain valve port is noted at
any time other than engine shutdown, the following action shall be
taken.
(a) Removenecessary cowling, plumbing lines, etc., to gain access

to drain port side of flow divider.
(b) I f installed, remove drain line and union from flow divider
and drain valve drain port.
(c) Install Plug part No. AN814-4DL, in flow divider drain valve
port and tighten to a torque value of 65 to 70 inch-pounds.
Lockwire. Cap customer drain line.
(d) Plug shall remain installed until next scheduled engine i n -

spection period, at which time the cause of fuel leakage shall
be investigated and positive corrective action taken.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 217
Dec 14/87
~llied
. I. (Codes AB-BA, CB-GA) Test' Flow Divider and Drain Valve (Engines Equipped
with Fuel Manifold Purge System) After Repair
NOTE: The fuel manifold purge system incorporates a one-way
check valve in the flow driver and drain valve drain
port. The drain valve opens during the last phase of
engine shutdown and remains open until the final part
of the following start cycle. The check valve prevents
any fuel from flowing into the pneumatic system of the
fuel manifold purge system upon engine start and shut-
down
Upon engine shutdown, the fuel purge solenoid valve is
actuated simultaneously with the engine fuel shutoff
valve. Bleed air that is stored in the accumulator is
forced through the fuel flow divider, purging fuel from
fuel manifolds into the combustor.
R Fuel purge system will not totally charge unless a min-
R imum engine RPMof 95 percent is attained during the
R operational cycle.
(1) Perform a normal engine start in accordance with 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test. Ensure acceleration time and starting temperature
are within normal operating limits. Using observer, check for fuel
leaks.
(2) Upon engine shutdown, there should be an increase of engine speed.
Any increase of engine speed denotes a properly operating purge
system.
(3) I f no increase in engine speed is noted, the following action shall
be taken.
NOTE: Ensure check valves are installed and func-
tioning properly.
(a) Remove electrical connector at the fuel purge solenoid valve.
Using voltmeter, check for voltage at connector. I f voltage
is not available, refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(b) I f step (a) is satisfactory, apply 24 volts dc across pins A
and B of electrical connector of solenoid valve. Valve shall
open. I f valve is found defective, replace.
(c) I f step (b) is satisfactory, disassemble, inspect and replace
packings. Repeat steps (1) and (2). Replace flow divider
valve i f problem s t i l I exists.
UP136688
73-10-07
Page 218
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R 0 S PAC E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal./Inst_allation

Table 202 provides a l i s t of all special tools, fixtures,

and equipment to perform Removal/Installation.
(Fel-Pro CS-A) 7450 N McCormick Blvd, Skokie, IlL
Plastic bags or sheeting Commercially avail able

(MI L-B-121)
Item Source/
. Gage Holds manifold at right 285220-i-1/

angle to centerline 285220-2-1
during assembly.
. Special Pliers Bends tabs on lock 287129-1-1
washers to hold nozzle
assembly.
73-10-09
Page 201
UP136688
Aug 4/9.4
GEGT0-2A
Signal ~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R 1. A. RemoveFuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly (See Figure 201 through 203A)
NOTE: The primary and secondary fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies are
not matched sets and may be replaced individually. I t is not
necessary to remove both unless both are plugged or damaged.
Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from fuel
manifold assemblies.
(1) Removenut, bolt, and clamp securing temperature sensor assembly.

(la) (Pre SB 73-0088/-0115) Disconnect fuel manifold and nozzle assem-

blies from flow divider and drain valve.
(2) (Post SB 73-0088/-0098/-0115) Disconnect hose assemblies or tube
assemblies from flow divider and drain valve.
R (3) Removebolts securing fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies and
R bracket to plenum assembly. Removeclamps, and fuel manifold and
nozzle assemblies. Drain any residual fuel.
(4) (Post SB 73-0088/-0098/-0115) Removehose assemblies or tube as-
semblies from fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.
(5) Removefuel nozzle shrouds and nozzle gaskets using care not to
damage shroud mating flange or plenum boss.
NOTE: Do not mix primary and secondary nozzle assembly parts dur-
ing disassembly, cleaning, and reassembly. The primary and
secondary nozzle flow rates and spray patterns are different
and assemblies must remain with their respective manifold
assemblies.
(6) I f damage or contamination is evident, remove fuel nozzle housings
and nozzle (tip) assemblies as follows. (See figures 204, 205.)
CAUTION: NOZZLE(TIP) ASSEMBLIESSHALL NOT BE DISASSEMBLED.
(a) Bend locking tabs of key washers away from flats of nozzle
(tip) assemblies.
(b) Remove nozzle (tip) assemblies and key washers from fuel
nozzle housings. Discard key washers.
NOTE: Do not remove alignment pin from primary fuel
nozzle housings.
(c) Clean fuel manifold and nozzle assembly components in accor-
dance with Cleaning/Painting.
(d) Inspect fuel manifold and nozzle assembly components in ac-
cordance with Inspection/Check.
73-10-09
UP136688
Page 202
Aug 12/91
MAIHTENAHCE MANUAL gnal
~oo.,.~,
115 90
5. NUT 50. SHROUD

10. BOLT 55. GASKET
15. CLAMP 60. SECONDARYMANIFOLD
20. CLAMP AND NOZZLE ASSY
25. CLAMP 80. CONICALSEAL
40. NUT 100, BOLT
R 46. BOLT 110. GASKET
R 47. BRACKET 115. PRIMARYMANIFOLD
R 48, BOLT AND NOZZLEASSY
R 49. BRACKET 150. CONICALSEAL
(Pre SB 73-0088/-0115) Fuel Manifold

and Nozzle Assembly Installation
Figure 201 73-10-09
UP136688
Page 203
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
55 4O
?
4? - " "
E-44G- 1523
48
o NUT 55. GASKET

10. BOLT 60. SECOHDARYMANIFOLD
15. CLAMP AND HOZZLEASSY
20. CLAMP 75. HOSEASSY
40. NUT 100. BOLT
46. BOLT 110. GASKET
47. BRACKET 115. PRIMARYMANIFOLD
48. BOLT AND NOZZLEASSY
49. BRACKET 140. HOSEASSY
50. SHROUD 150. CONICALSEAL
(Post SB 73-0088/-0115) (Pre SB 73-0098)
UP136688
Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Installation

Figure 202 73-10-09
Page 204
Aug 12/91
lied
100-,~1 10---.1
120
E-44 G - 1579
5. NUT 70. UNION

10. BOLT 75. TUBEASSY
20. CLAMP 100. BOLT
40. NUT 105. SHROUD
R 46. BOLT 115. PRIMARYMANIFOLD
R 47. BRACKET AND NOZZLEASSY
55. GASKET 125. UNION
60. SECONDARYMANIFOLD 140. TUBEASSY
AND NOZZLEASSY 150. CONICALSEAL
65. CONICALSEAL
R (Codes AA-BA, EA-FB, Post SB 73-0098)

UP136688
Figure 203 73-10-09

Page 204A/204B
Aug 12/91
,,'/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~-DSignal
)jlO
~ 40 I°°"~ ~,~11
c. \ \ , .
U 120
E-44G-1580
o NUT 65. CONICALSEAL

10. BOLT 76. TUBEASSY
20. CLAMP 100. BOLT
40. NUT 105. SHROUD
R 48. BOLT 115. PRIMARYMANIFOLD
R 49. BRACKET AND NOZZLEASSY
55. GASKET 125. UNION
60. SECONDARYMANIFOLD 140. TUBEASSY
AND NOZZLEASSY 150. CONICALSEAL
(Codes CA-DA, GA, Post SB 73-0098)

UP136688
Figure 203A 73-10-0~

Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
~ j
•!'•z•o,
v
~
3o
B---- .,~ ~ 55
lO
8oe°~
"JJ'2"~ e5 ' B
TYPICAL
E-44A-5313
(Pre SB 73-0088/-011.5.) Fuel Manifold and Nozzle

Assembly
Figure 204 73-10-09
UP136688
Page 206
Dec 14/87
/Allied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~--~Signal
. A. (6) (e) Repair damaged fuel manifold hose insulation in accordance

with Approved Repairs.
B. Install Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies (See Figures 201 through
203A)
(1) Install nozzle (tip) assemblies on fuel nozzle housings as follows.
(See Figures 206, 207.)
(a) Install new or cleaned nozzle (tip) assemblies with new key
washers into( fuel nozzle housing.
(b) Push pre-bent tab of key washers against f l a t surface of fuel
nozzle housings.
(c) Tighten nozzle (tip) assemblies to a torque value as specified
below. ~-
R Primary Fuel Secondary Fuel

R Manifold and Manifold and
R Nozzle Assembly Nozzle Assembly
R Part No. Part No. Torque Value
R 3102473-X 3102474-X 35 to 45
R inch-pounds
R 893468-X 3103469-X 55 to 65
R inch-pounds
CAUTION: FOLLOWINGBENDINGOF TABS, ENSURELOCKING
TABS ARE NOT CRACKED.
(d) Using 287129-I-1 crimping tool, bend tab of key washers flush
against fuel nozzle housing. Ensure pre-bent tab of key wash-
ers are flush against f l a t surface of fuel nozzle housing.
Close gap, i f necessary, using plastic mallet to bend locking
tab of key washers against wrench flats of nozzle (tip)
assembli es.
KEY TO FIGURE 204
I0. MARKERBAND(DELETED) • 60. NOZZLE(TIP) ASSY

20. NOZZLE (TIP) ASSY 65. KEY WASHER
25. KEY WASHER 80. PiN
30. NOZZLE HOUSING 85. NOZZLEHOUSING
35. CONICAL SEAL 86. CONICALSEAL
40. MANIFOLD ASSY 90. MANIFOLDASSY
55. MARKERBAND (DELETED)
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 207
Aug 12/91
l ~ i MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
,Coo
,o.,
D"
TYPICAL ~ ~ 85 B
!0
90
E.-44A-5261
55 / ,
(Post SB 73-0088/-0098/-0115) Fuel Manifold and Nozzle

Assembly
Figure 205
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 208
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: CARE SHALL BE EXERCISEDNOT TO INTERCHANGE
START (PRIMARY) NOZZLE (TIP) ASSEMBLIES
(MARKED "S") WITH RUN (SECONDARY) NOZZLE
(TIP) ASSEMBLIES.
I. B. (2) Install fuel nozzle housings and nozzle (tip) assemblies on primary
manifold assembly as follows. (See figure 206.)
CAUTION: INSTALL CONICAL SEAL ONLY IF A FUEL LEAK
EXISTS.
NOTE: Refer to Approved Repairs for use of conical

seal s.
(a) Install fuel nozzle housing and nozzle (tip) assemblies on

primary manifold assembly and tighten tube nut finger tight.
(b) Place assembled parts in 285220-I-1 or 285220-2-I gage and set
position of installed fuel nozzle housings an nozzle (tip) as-
semblies within 88 to 92 degrees to centerline of primary
manifold assembly. Tighten manifold assembly tube nuts secur-
ing fuel nozzle housings in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
(c) Install lockwire on tube nut.

(d) Remove assembled parts from 285220-1-1 or 285220-2-1 gage and
cover fuel nozzle housings and nozzle (tip) assemblies with
plastic bags or sheeting (MIL-B-121) until installation or
testing is performed.
4 KEY TO FIGURE205
10. MARKERBAND (DELETED) 60. NOZZLE(TIP) ASSY
20. NOZZLE(TIP) ASSY 65. KEY WASHER
25. KEY WASHER 80. PIN
30. NOZZLEHOUSING 85. NOZZLEHOUSING
35. CONICALSEAL 86. CONICALSEAL
40. MANIFOLDASSY 90. MANIFOLDASSY
55. MARKERBAND (DELETED)
UP136688
73-10-09
R Page 209
Aug 16/89
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. B. (3) Install fuel nozzle housings and nozzle (tip) assemblies on secon-
dry manifold assembly as follows. (See figure 207.)
CAUTION: INSTALLCONICAL SEAL ONLY IF A LEAK EXIST.
NOTE: Refer to Approved Repairs for use of conical

seal s.
(a) Install fuel nozzle housings and nozzle (tip) assemblies on

secondary manifold assembly and tighten tube nut finger tight.
(b) Place assembled parts in 285220-1-1 or 285220-2-1 gage and set

position of installed fuel nozzle housings and nozzle (tip)
assemblies within 88 to 92 degrees to centerline of secondary
manifold assembly. Tighten manifold assembly tube nuts secur-
ing fuel nozzle housing in accordance with 70-00-00, Standard
Practices.
(c) Install lockwire on tube nut.
(d) Remove assembled parts from 285220-1-1 or 285220-2-1 gage and
cover fuel nozzle housings and nozzle (tip) assemblies with
plastic bags or sheeting (MIL-B-131) until installation or
testing is performed.
UP136688
73-10-09
R Page 210
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
NOZZLEASSY(TIP)
LOCKINGT A B S ~ , ~ ~
NOTE:,NO GAPALLOWEDBETWEEN KEYWASHER

KEYWASHERAND NOZZLE
HOUSINGORNOZZLEASSY(TIP),
.ozz ..ou , o
~ LOCKWIRE
SOLID
FITTING~ . ~
PRIMARYMANIFOLDASSY
NOTE:
PROTECTPARTSWITHPLASTICBAGS
ORSHEETINGAT ALLTIMESEXCEPT F-44A-2547R1
WHENASSEMBLINGORTESTING.
Instal lation of Nozzle Assembly and Fuel Nozzle (Primary)

Figure 206 73-10-09
UP136688
Page 211
Dec 14/87
l ll' Z 'lj J MAINTENANCEMANUAL

TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
NOTE: NOZZLE ASSY (TIP)

NO GAP ALLOWED BETWEENKEY WASHERAND
NOZZLE HOUSING ORNOZZLE ASSEMBLY (TIP).
LOCKING TAB~ I LOCKING TAB
N ZZLE
HOUSING
ViEW A-A
~ LOCKING T~,~
~ LOCKWIRE NOZZLE
HOUSING
KEY WASHER~ ' ' ~ N O Z Z L E
° '
LAt'~.o~- 88 T(~92°
" (TYP) ~UII[
1
• SECONDARY
JJ MANIFOLD
• ASSY
I ~
~
I I
\
\
\
\ ( )/
--
NOZZLE ASSY (TIP) ~ TUBENUT
TYPICAL]OPLACES
NOTE:
PROTECTPARTSWITH PLASTICBAGS
OR SHEETING AT ALL TIMES EXCEPT
WHEN ASSEMBLING OR TESTING.
F-44A-2548RI
Installation of Nozzle Assembly and Fuel Nozzle (Secondary)

UP136688
Figure 207 73-10-09

Page 212
Dec 14/87
lied
. B. (4) Perform flow check of fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies in ac-
cordance with Adjustment/Test.
(5) Place gaskets and shrouds on nozzle body.
NOTE: Ensure that indexing pins on primary nozzles align
with mating holes in shrouds when manifold and
nozzle assemblies are instal led.
(6) Install fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies on engine. (See
Figures 201, 202, 203.)
threads of bolts located aft of fireshields unless
recommended values.
(7) (Post SB 73-0088/-0098/-0115) Install hose assemblies or tube as-
semblies on fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.
R (8) Install bracket, bolts, and nuts securing fuel manifold and nozzle
assemblies to engine. Tighten bolts (45) to a torque value of 70
inch-pounds, and bolts (100) to a torque value of 35 inch-pounds.
R (8a) Secure temperature sensor assembly to bracket with clamp, bolt, and
R nut. Refer to 77-20-03, Maintenance Practices.
R (8b) (Pre SB 73-0088/-0115) Install clamp (15) on secondary manifold
R and nozzle assembly. Install clamp (20) on primary manifold and
R nozzle assembly. (See Figure 201.)
R (8c) (Post SB 73-0088/-0115) (Pre SB 73-0098) Install clamp (15) on
R hose assembly. Install clamp (20) on primary manifold and nozzle
R assembly. (See Figure 202.)
R (8d) (Post SB 73-0098) Install clamp (15) on primary manifold and
R nozzle assembly. I n s t a l l clamp (2.0) on tube assembly. (See
R Figures 203 and 203A,)
R (8e) (Code DA) Install clamp (25, Figures 201, 202 and 203A) on igni-
R tion lead. Refer to 74-20-01, Maintenance Practices.
73-10-09
UP136688
Page 212A/212B
Aug 12/91
gnal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. B. (9) Secure clamps with bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque
(10) Perform fuel manifold and nozzle assembly functional check in ac-
cordance with 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test.
(II) (Pre SB 73-0088/-0115) Connect ends of manifold assemblies to flow
divider and drain valve.
(12) (Post SB 73-0088/-0098/-0115) Connect ends of hose assemblies or

tube assemblies to flow divider and drain valve.
(13) Start and operate engine and check for fuel leaks at manifold tube
nut connection points and~at manifold gaskets.
(14) Shut down engine and check torque on nuts and bolts securing mani-
fold and nozzle assemblies to engine. Retighten as required.
Lockwire bolts (100) and lockwire dummyigniter plug to adjacent
bolts (100).
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 213
Aug 12/91
~=~/lied
2. Adjustment/Test
NOTE: Table 203 provides a l i s t of all materials and equipment
required to perform Adjustment/Test. Table 203A provides a
l i s t of all special tools, fixtures, and equipment to per-
./ form Adjustment/Test.
Equipment or Material Description or Manufacturer

Containers (10) Capable of collecting measured amount of
test fluid (1000 CC)
Filter 10 micron minimum

Flowmeter Capable of measuring 0 to 500 pounds per
hour with ±2 percent accuracy
Pressure gage (2) Capable of measuring 0 to 500 psig with
±2 percent accuracy
Pressure regulator Capable of regulating pressure at 0 to
500 psig
Pump Capable of producing flow of 500 pounds
per hour and 500 psig
Shutoff valve (2) Manual shutoff valve
R Test Fluids
R MIL-C-7024, Type I I Commercially available
R Mineral spirits Chevron USA Incorporated, 575 Market St,

R (Chevron Thinner 325) San Francisco, CA 94105-2856
Towel (Kim-wipe) Commerci'ally available
NOTE: I f secondary fuel manifold and nozzle flow rate check is

accomplished at optional pressure of 100 ±2 psig in lieu of
400 ±2 psig, pressure capacity of pump, pressure regulator
and pressure gages may be reduced accordingly.
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 214
Aug 12/91
/lied
Table 203A. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment
Source/
Nomenclature Use Part No.

Fuel nozzle adapter Adapts fuel nozzle 284761-1-1
assembly to fuel nozzle tester.
Fuel nozzle tester Use to check flow rate and 831084-I
spray.pattern test. (110 vac,
60 Hz)
Fuel nozzle tester Use to check flow rate and 831084-2
spray pattern test. (240 vac,
50/60 Hz, single phase)
Fuel manifold tester Use to check flow distribution 831085-1
and leak check.
r
UP136688
73-10-09
R Page 214A
Aug 12/91
R NOTE: Refer to 72-00-00, Adjustment/Test, for testing proce-
R dure for fuel nozzle and manifold assembly installed on
R engine.
Fuel nozzle flow check maybe accomplished using either
method one or method two.
Use method one to flow check nozzle t i p assemblies

only. Nozzle tip is removed from fuel nozzle housing.
Refer to step (1).
Use method two to flow check the complete fuel nozzle

and manifold assembly. Refer to step (2).
. A. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Flow Check (Fuel Manifold and Nozzle
Assembly Removed) z
CAUTION: NOZZLE (TIPS) ASSEMBLIES SHALL NOT BE DISASSEMBLED.

IF TIP ASSEMBLIES CANNOTMEET FLOWRATEAND SPRAY
PATTERNS REQUIREMENTS, REPLACE INDIVIDUAL TIP ASSEM-
BLY WITH NEW OR CLEANEDTIP. FUELMANIFOLD AND
NOZZLE ASSEMBLYMAYBEREPAIRED AT A GARRETT
AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACITIY.
R ENSURE TEST SETUP DOESNOTBECOME CONTAMINATED BY
R ENSURING ALL PROTECTIVE COVERSARE REPLACEDWHENNOT
R TESTING. ENSURESYSTEMFLUID IS PERIODICALLY SAM-
R PLED AND EXAMINEDAND VERIFY IO-MICRON FILTER IS IN-
R STALLED UPSTREAMOF ASSEMBLY BEING TESTED.
(1) (Method One) Perform fuel nozzle t i p assembly flow rate and spray
pattern test as follows.
(a) Use 831084-1/-2 fuel nozzle tester or construct test setup as

illustrated in Figure 208.
WARNING: TEST FLUIDS ARE FLAMMABLE, USE ONLY IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA. DO NOT USE JET
FUEL.
NOTE: The 831084-1/-2 fuel nozzle tester has been

calibrated for use of MIL-C-7024, Type II
test fluid. Do not use a substitute test
fluid.
(b) Use test fluid at an inlet temperature of 24 to 29°C (75 to
8 5 °F).
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 214B
Aug 12/91
~llied
R 2. A. (1) (c) Install fuel nozzle tip assembly in 284761-1-1 fuel nozzle tip
R adapter and connect nozzle tip adapter to 831084-1/-2 fuel
nozzle tester or to test setup as schematically shown in View
A, Figure 208.
NOTE: I f spray pattern does not pass test, wipe

nozzle tip with a clean Kim-Wipe towel, using
a twisting motion. Do not touch nozzle tip
with fingers.
(d) Apply pressure of 100 +2 psig to fuel nozzle tip assembly and
check spray angle at a distance of 1 inch radius from the apex
of spray. The spray angle shall be in accordance with Table
204. Check spray pattern. The spray pattern shall be in ac-
cordance with Figure 209.
(e) Apply pressure of 100 -+2 psig and check flow rate of primary
nozzle assembly. Flow rate shall be in accordance with Table
204.
(f) Apply pressure of 400 -+2 (100 -+2 psig as optional) and check
flow rate of secondary nozzle assembly. Flow rate shall be in
accordance with Table 204.
(g) Reduce pressure to 0 psig, and remove fuel nozzle tip assembly
from nozzle tip adapter.
R (h) Install nozzle tip assembly on fuel nozzle housing. Install
R fuel nozzle housing and tip assembly on fuel manifold. Refer
R to paragraph I.B., removal/installation.
R (i) Leak check fuel nozzle and manifold assembly. Refer to para-
R graph B.
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 215
Aug 12/91
/lied
CAUTION: ENSURE TEST SETUP DOESNOT BECOMECONTAMINATED
BY ENSURINGALL PROTECTIVE COVERSARE REPLACED
WHEN NOT TESTING. ENSURESYSTEM FLUID IS PERI-
ODICALLY SAMPLEDAND EXAMINEDAND VERIFY 10-
MICRON FILTER IS INSTALLED UPSTREAMOF ASSEMBLY
BEING TESTED.
R NOTE: Fuel nozzle and manifold assembly test is not

R required i f individual nozzle tips tested good per
R step (1). Check for leaks only. Refer to para-
R graph B.
R 2. A. (2) (Method Two) Perform fuel manifold and nozzle assembly test as
follows.
WARNING: TEST FLUIDS ARE FLAMMABLE, USE ONLY IN WELL-
VENTILATED AREA. DO NOT USE JET FUEL.
NOTE: I f secondary fuel manifold and nozzle flow rate

check is accomplished at optional pressure of 100
±2 psig in lieu of 400 ±2 psig, pressure capacity
of pump, pressure regulator and pressure gages may
be reduced accordingly
(a) Install fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies on 831085-1 fuel
manifold tester or on test setup as schematically shown in
View B, Figure 208.
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 216
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. . . . . . IESTFtUID '" i
('IEMPERATURECONTROLLED)
/ 1
j3
1. MANUALSHUTOFFVALVE f
2.
3.
PUMP- 200/500 PSIG
PRESSUREREGULATOR -
c 4
0 TO 200/500 PSIG
4. FILTER - 10 MICRON
MINIMUM j5
5. FLOWMETER(ROTAMETER
6
OR EQUIVALENT) 0 TO
500 LB/HR ±2.0
PERCENT ACCURACY
6. PRESSUREGAGE 0 TO Q
500 PSl ±2.0
PERCENT ACCURACY I
7. MANUALSHUTOFFVALVE 7
8. PRESSUREGAGE 0 TO
500 PSI ±2.0
PERCENT ACCURACY
9. 5 CONTAINERS FOR IF
PRIMARY NOZZLEOR 10
CONTAINERS FOR SECON-
DARY NOZZLE TO VIEW A
OP,VIEW B
R +
NOZZLE TIP ADAPTER FUELMANIFOLDAM) NOZZLEASSEMBLY

, ,,,~/ + !
(PRIMARYO~ SECONOARY)
/
I t I ' t
NOZZLE +I.P ,,';~'\
A 6
T-44G-150
Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Test Setup

UP136688
Figure 208 73-10-09

Page 217
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany ~=~/lied
ignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(
LE
PATTERN C
PATTERNB
PATTERNA
//
PATTERN F
PATTERN E
PATTERND
F-44A-4993
NOTE: Nozzles may continue in service with spray patterns similar

to those pictured above. Patterns A, B and C are desired. However,
patterns D, E and F are acceptable providing discontinuities do not
exceed 10 percent of total spray pattern.
UP136688
Fuel Nozzle Test Spray Patterns

Figure 209 73-10-09
R
Page 218
Aug 16/89
~ /lied
Table 204. Flow Limits and Spray Angle
F1 ow Spray
Limits Angle
Part Name (Ib/hr) Degrees
Primary Nozzle Assembly 11 ±0.5 90 ±10

at 100 ±2 psig at 100 ±2 psig
R Secondary Nozzle Assembly 40 ±1.2 80 ±I0
at 400 ±2 psig at 100 ±2 psig
or (Optional)
20 ±0.7 at
100 ±2 p s i g
2. A. (2)(b) Apply 100 ±2 psig pressure for a period of time required to

obtain lOOcc (cubic centimeters) of test fluid in lowest flow
burette as shown in view B, Figure 208. Drain burettes until
each has lOOcc fluid.
(c) Reapply 100 ±2 psig for period of time required to obtain
R 800cc total in highest burette. Record amount (in cubic cen-
timeters) of test fluid contained in each burette.
NOTE: Observe spray characteristics of each nozzle
(tip) assembly. Nozzle (tip) assembly spray
characteristics shall consist of finely div-
ided droplets in form of fully developed
spray cones with no solid streams or
discontinuities. (See figure 209.)
R (d) Subtract lOOcc from the amount recorded for each burette in
step (c) to obtain relative quantity in each burette. Record
relative quantities.
(e) Select largest and smallest relative quantity recorded in step
(d) and determine percentage differential using the following
formula. Percentage differential shall be in accordance w i t h
Table 205.
PERCENTAGE (LARGEST RELATIVE QUANTITY-
DIFFERENTIAL = 100 X SMALLESTRELATIVE QUANTITY)
LARGEST RELATIVE QUANTITY
(f) Apply 100 +2 psig of pressure and record flow through the pri-
mary fuel manifold and nozzle assemby. Flow shall be in ac-
cordance with Table 205.
UP136688
73-I0-09
Page 219
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospacecompany
/lied
. A. (2) (g) Apply400 ±2 psig (100 ±2 psig as optional) pressure and
record flow through secondary fuel manifold and nozzle
assembly. Flow shall be in accordance with Table 205.
(h) Reduce pressure to zero psig and remove fuel manifold and
nozzle assembly.
(i) I f secondary fuel nozzle flow check is accomplished at 100 ±2

psig in lieu of 400 ±2 psig, a leak check of manifold and
manifold fitting connections shall be accomplished. Refer to
paragraph B.
R B. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Leak Check
R Perform a leak check of fuel manifold and manifold f i t t i n g connections

R by one of the following methods.
WARNING: TEST FLUIDS ARE FLAMMABLE, USE ONLY IN WELL-
VENTILATED AREA. DO NOT USE JET FUEL.
(I) (Liquid Method) Use pressure pump to apply 400 ±2 psig (using test
fluid) to manifold for sufficient duration to perform leakage check
of manifold and f i t t i n g connections;
(2) (Nitrogen Method) Submerge manifold (with shrouds removed) in water
without completely covering nozzle (tip) assembies and apply 400 ±2
~sig from regulated nitrogen source to check for leakage of mani-
old, fittings and nozzle tip/tab washer interface. Ensure all
water is removed from manifold following check.
Table 205. Flow and Differential Limits
Flow Maximum
Limits Percentage
Part Name (l b/hr) Di fferenti al
R Primary Fuel Manifold 55 ±2.5 12 percent

at 100 ±2 psig
R Secondary Fuel Manifold 400 ~12 10 percent
at 400 ±2 psig
or (Optional)
200 ±7 at
100 ±2 psig
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 220
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Inspection/Check
A. Check Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly (Installed)
Check fuel manifold and nozzle assembly for security and evidence of
fuel leakage.
B. Check Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly (Removed)
(1) Inspect for broken welds.
(2) Inspect manifold flexible hoses in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-
dard Practices.
(3) Inspect manifold assembly tube nuts for cracks and damaged threads.
(4) Inspect fuel nozzle housing for cracks, broken welds, and other
damage.
(5) Inspect fuel nozzle shrouds as follows. (See Figure 210.)
(a) Visually inspect shrouds for erosion and burned material
around tip hole. Maximumdiameter of t i p hole shall not ex-
ceed that shown in Figure 210.
(b) Check outside diameter of shrouds for wear and fretting in ex-
cess of Dimension B, Figure 210.
(c) Replace shroud i f inspection requirements are not met.
CAUTION: NOZZLE(TIP) ASSEMBLIESSHALL NOT BE
DISASSEMBLED.
(6) Inspect nozzle (tip) assembly for cracks, p i t t i n g , and damaged
threads.
R (7) Inspect conical sealing surface(s) for burrs, chatter marks, f l a t
R spots and circumferential grooves. Criteria for acceptance is no
R leakage during testing. Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for
R minor conical sealing surface repair.
C. (Post SB 73-0098) Inspect Tube Assemblies, Fittings, and Clamps
(1) Inspect tube assemblies with f i t t i n g s in accordance with 70-00-00,

Standard Practices~
(2) Inspect clamps for worn or missing cushions.
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 221
Aug 12/91
J ~ ] MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
DIA A
DIA A (TIP HOLE)
~
(l'lP HOLE)
\
~,,.,,., WORNAREA j WORNAREA
t
L - DIM. B • L DIM.
PRIMARYFUEL SECONDARYFUEL
NOZZLESHROUD NOZZLE SHROUD
A B
0.338 TO 0.023 IN.

0.345 IN. MAX
ALLOWABLE
TOLERANCE
0.338 TO
0.350 IN.
1-44A-2345
Inspecti on of Fuel, Nozzle Shi~6uds:~

' PN 868743-1/-2(Primary)-. .
PN 868749-1 (Secondary)
UP136688
~LFigure: 210 " ~ .i 73-10-09

Page 222
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Cleaning/PaintinB
required to perform Cleaning/Painting.

Hydralox sol ution Fortner Accessory Service Corp,
1320 Flower St, Glendale, CA 91201
(Oaki te Rustripper) Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922
Sol vent (Federal Specification Commercial ly available
P-D-680, Type I)
A. Clean Parts

(2) Clean manifold assembly in accordance with 72-00-00,

B. Perform Special Cleaning
(1) Clean nozzle assembly shrouds using rust stripper (Oakite) and a
suede brush.
(2) Disassemble fuel nozzle housings in accordance with Removal/

Instal lation.
CAUTION: NOZZLE(TIP) ASSEMBLIESSHALL NOT BE
DISASSEMBLED.
(3) Removecarbon buildup from external areas of nozzle (tip)
assembies.
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 223
Dec 14/87
!,ied
4. B. (4) Clean fuel nozzle housing as follows.
NOTE: Bore of primary fuel nozzles cannot be adequately cleaned
with brushes due to angle for mounting nozzle assembly.
(a) Scrub external surface and bores of fuel nozzle with a stain-
less steel wire brush and wire bristled tube brush. Removeas
much carbon contamination as possible with this operation.
VENTILATED AREA. AVOIDBREATHING FUMESOR LONG
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENTDAMAGETO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEPAWAYFROMFLAMETO AVOID FIRE
HAZARD.
(b) I f hydralox solution is used, perform following, then proceed
to step (d).
1 Place components in wire mesh basket and immerse in hy-

dralox solution and allow to soak for 15 to 30 minutes at
room temperature.
NOTE: Container for hydralox solution shall be porta-
ble and suitable for hanging in the fluid com-
partment of an ultrasonic cleaning unit.
1
2 Transfer container with hydralox solution and components to
fluid compartment of ultrasonic cleaning unit for minimum
of 15 minutes. Agitate components in solution occasionally
during 15 minute period.
NOTE: When soaking fuel nozzle assemblies/ components

in rust stripper solution at temperature levels
less than recommended; a longer soak time is
required for equivalent cleaning.
R (c) I f rust stripper is used, perform the following.
R Dissolve 8 ounces of rust stripper in 1 gallon of distilled

R or deionized water.
2 Place parts in rust stripper solution maintained at 100 to

104°C (212 to 220°F) (rapid b o i l ) Basket shall be sus-
pended approximately 1 inch above botton of container. A
vented lid may be placed over container to minimize heat
loss.
3 Rapidly boil nozzle components in solution for 2 hours.
(d) Remove basket from solution and rinse components in clean tap
water. Powerflush internal passages with filtered solvent
(Federal Specification P-D-680, Type I) and allow parts to
drain dry.
UP136688
73-10-09
Page 224
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. B. (4) (e) Inspect components visually for cleanliness of surfaces and

bores using a binocular microscope or an illuminated mag-
nifying glass. There shall be no carbon particles on the in-
ternal passages.
(f) Components not completely cleaned shall be recycled through

steps (a) through (e) until they are visually clean. Clean
components shall be dried for 1 hour in an oven at 110 to
132°C (230 to 270°F).
(g) Allow parts to cool at room temperature.

5. Approved Repairs

requried to perform Approved Repairs.

Adhesive (MIL-A-46106) Commercial ly available
(RTV-106 Red)
R Clamp (PN 211-557-9001) AlliedSignal Engines, Distribution,

Center, Sales Administration, P.O.
Box 29003, Phoenix, AZ 85038-9003
R Silicone impregnated fiber- AlliedSignal Engines, Distribution

glass cloth s p l i t sleeve Center, Sales Administration, P.O.
(PN 664-522-9003) Box 29003, Phoenix, AZ 85038-9003
A. Repair Damaged Fuel Manifold Hose Insulation Sleeve

(1) Removemetal bands securing insulation sleeve and remove damaged
insulation sleeve from fuel manifold hose assembly.
(2) Cut replacement sleeve (Table 207) length to extend from tube nut
to tube nut of hose assembly.
73-10-09
Page 225
UP136688
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A

NOTE: For ease of assembly roll sleeve inside out. Sleeve is

sized to wrap around hose assembly approximately twice. The
end of the sleeve that will f i r s t be wrapped around the hose
assembly may be trimmed at edges to allow the f i r s t wrapping
to cover only the hose portion of the hose assembly. The
second wrapping w i l l cover both the hose and hose f i t t i n g to
provide for a smoother appearance.
. A. (3) Wrap sleeve onto the hose assembly with inside surface of sleeve
next to outside diameter of hose assembly.
(4) Apply adhesive (Table 207) under the outer edge of sleeve approxi-
mately 1/4 inch from edge along full length of sleeve.
(5) Apply hand pressure at sleeve edge to work out excess adhesive.
Wipe away excess adhesive with paper towel or cloth.
(6) Secure sleeve at each end with clamps (Table 207).
(7) Apply a bead of adhesive at each f i t t i n g end of sleeve to prevent

moi sture entrapment.
(8) Allow adhesive to dry for 4 hours before reinstalling fuel manifold
assembly.
CAUTION: INSTALL A CONICAL SEAL ONLY IF A FUEL LEAK EXIST.
B. Correcting Fuel Leaks Between Fuel Manifold Assemblies and Nozzle Assem-
bl i es
CAUTION: IMPROPERLY INSTALLED CONICAL SEALS CAN CAUSEAN OB-

STRUCTION IN FUEL FLOW. INSTALLATIONOF CONICAL
SEAL REQUIRES A FLOWCHECKIN ACCORDANCEWITH
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
(1) Install conical seal on nozzle assembly f i t t i n g .
(2) Connect fuel manifold assembly to nozzle assembly.
CAUTION: ANYTIME A CONNECTION (WITH A CONICAL SEAL IN-

STALLED) BETWEEN FUEL MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND
NOZZLE ASSEMBLY IS LOOSENED, CONICAL SEAL MUST
BE REPLACED.
(3) Tighten fuel manifold assembly and nozzle connection in accordance

with 70-00-00, Standard Practices.
C. Minor Repair of Fuel Nozzle Conical Seal Surface(s)
R Remove minor burrs, chatter marks, and f l a t spots in accordance with

73-10-09
UP136688
Page 226
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
(CODES AA-CC) FUEL ANTI-ICE VALVE - MAINTENANCEPRACTICES
I. Removal/,Instal lation
requi red to perform Removal/Instal lation.
Table 201, Materials and Compounds

A. Remove Fuel Anti-Ice Valve (See Figure 201 or 202)

(1) Removeplumbing from fuel anti-ice valve in accordance with 73-10-
(2) Removefuel anti-ice valve and brackets from compressor housing.
(3) Remove fuel anti-ice valve from brackets.
73-10-10
UP136688
Page 201
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
1. B. Install Fuel Anti-lce Valve (See Figure 201 or 202)
threads o f bolts or screws.
torque of self locking devices torecommended values.
(1) Install fuel anti-ice valve onto bracket and support and secure
with washers, bolts, and nuts. Tighten bolts (35, 55) to a torque
(2) Install fuel anti-ice valve and bracket onto input housing assembly
and secure. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(3) Install plumbing on fuel anti-ice valve in accordance with 73-10-
UP136688
73-10-10
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
"-..."..,.o
• ,n~%'.', ; ' . ,.~,.. "s~ sw

L
gi~'::::.."::~,~i'::;'.".~ ~ ~.~
40 ...... 0.%.~"o
35....--" -~
E-44G-696
e NUT 45. NUT

10. BOLT 50. WASHER
15. WASHER 55. BOLT
20. NUT 60. WASHER
30. NUT 70. SUPPORT
35. BOLT 80. ANTI-ICE VALVE
40. WASHER
(Codes AA-BA) Fuel Anti-Ice Valve Installation

Figure 201 73-10-10
UP136688
Page 203
Dec 14/87
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
-:...,. .,.., ,,,, ,..:,... , ,- ,
:::,, ...
~':~-,:,::....:.. ::,
•E;..:.:.,~.: ~:.~-.~.~. ~ -
" - -~~'-~5 4s
E-'44G-697
e NUT 40. WASHER

10. BOLT 45. NUT
15. WASHER 55. BOLT
20. NUT 60. WASHER
30. NUT 70. BRACKET
35. BOLT 80. FUELANTI-ICE VALVE
(Codes CA-CC) Fuel Anti-Ice Valve Installation

Figure 202 73-10-10
UP136688
Page 204
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Fuel Anti-lce Valve and Plumbing

(1) Visually inspect anti-icing valve assembly for cracks, damaged a d -
justment screw, and peened threads. Replace damaged valve
assembly.
(2) Visually inspect tube assemblies in accordance with 70-00-00, STAN-
DARD PRACTICES. Check clamps for worn and missing cushions.
(3) Visually inspect brackets and stiffener for cracks and damage.
. Cleanin~/Paintinq
A. Clean Parts
(3) Clean anti-ice valve in accordance with 72-00-00,
UP136688
73-10-10
Page 205/206
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
(CODES AB-BA, CB-GA)
FUEL MANIFOLDPURGESYSTEM - MAINTENANCEPRACTICES


A. (Codes AB-BA, EA-FB) Remove Fuel Manifold Purge System Plumbing and Com-
ponents (See Figures 201, 202)
(1) Removefuel manifold purge system plumbing (Items 5 through 75,
Figure 201).
(2) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts attaching solenoid valve bracket to
engine. Removenuts, washers, and bolts attaching solenoid valve
to bracket. Removesolenoid valve. (See Figure 202.)
(3) Removenuts and clamps securing accumulator to engine. Remove
accumulator.
(4) Removef i l t e r and check valve from accumulator. Removepackings.
(5) Remove check valve (75, Figure 202) from fuel flow divider and
drain valve. Removepacking.
73-10-13
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEGT0-2A
UP136688
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (Codes AB-BA, EA-FB) Install Fuel Manifold Purge System Plumbing and
Components (See Figures 201, 202)

minimize contamination. Apply lubrication compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts located for-
ward of the fireshield unless otherwise specified. To
prevent contamination, do not apply thread compounds to
threads of plumbing f i t t i n g s installed in fuel manifold
purge system. Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro
C5-A) to thread of bolts located aft of the fireshield
(1) Install solenoid valve onto bracket and secure with bolts, washers,
and nuts. Tighten nuts (15, figure 202) to a torque value of 27
inch-pounds. Install assembled solenoid valve and bracket onto en-
gine and secure with bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque
(2) Install clamps on accumulator and install accumulator on anti-icing

extraction boss on engine. Tighten nuts (60) to a torque value of
20 inch-pounds.
(3) Install check valve with new packing into fuel flow divider and
drain valve. Install with arrow pointing in direction of fuel flow
divider and drain valve. Tighten check valve (75) to a torque
~ KEY TO FIGURE 201

5. TUBEASSY 45. CLAMP
10. UNION 50. TUBEASSY
15., PACKING 55. REDUCER
20. UNION 60. WASHER
25. PACKING 65. TUBEASSY
30. NUT 70. UNION
35. BOLT 80. PURGESYSTEMCOMPONENTS
40. CLAMP
UP136688
73-10-13
Page 203
Dec 14/87
I~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
5
/ 30
77>.
65
'.'.:~~" 4 ...i
-
..
m-~+L / 4o
i
...... I0 i
E-44A-~0~1
8|B 75
5. NUT 45. PACKING

10. BOLT 50. CHECKVALVE
15. NUT 55. PACKING
20. WASHER 60. NUT
25. BOLT 65. ACCUMULATOR
30. BRACKET 70. CLAMP
35. SOLENOIDVALVE 75. CHECK VALVE
40. FILTER 80, PACKING
(Codes AB-BA, EA-FB) Fuel Manifold Purge
System Components Installation
UP136688
Figure 202 73-10-13

Page 204
Dec 14/87
~ S lied
. B. (4) Install unions with new packings into top and bottom of solenoid
valve. Tighten unions (10, 70, Figure 201) to a torque value of 60
to 65 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: WHENLINES ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISECARETHAT NO
CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDOR THREADLUBRICA-
TION COMPOUNDIS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENT
AND THREADENGAGEMENTTO PREVENTGALLING AND/OR
CROSSTHREADING.
(5) Install tube assembly between check valve in fuel flow divider
valve and bottom of solenoid valve.
(6) Install union with new~acking into front of accumulator. Tighten

(7) Install tube assembly between union in accumulator and top of sole-
noid valve.
(8) Install reducer with washer into anti-icing extraction port boss.
(9) Install check valve with new packing into aft side of accumulator.
Install check valve with arrow pointing toward front of engine.
Tighten check valve (50, Figure 202) to a torque value of 60 to 65
inch-pounds.
(1o) Install f i l t e r with new packing into check valve. Install f i l t e r
with arrow pointing toward check valve. Tighten f i l t e r (40) to a
(11) Install tube assembly, with attaching parts, between reducer in

anti-icing extractor boss and f i l t e r on aft side of accumulator.
Tighten nut (30, Figure 201) to a torque value of 27 inch-pounds.
C. (Codes CB-DA, CA) RemoveFuel Manifold Purge System Plumbing and Compo-
nents (See Figures 203 through 206).
(1) Fuel manifold purge system components are remotely located. Refer
to Aircraft Maintenance Manual for removal instructions. Refer to
Figure 204 for l i s t of airframe mounted components. Refer to
Figure 203 for typical fuel manifold purge system schematic.
R (2) (Codes CB-CC, GA) Removefuel manifold purge system plumbing.

Refer to Figure 205.
(3) (Code DA) Removefuel manifold purge system plumbing. Refer to

Figure 206.
UP136688
73-10-13
Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~&dna'
R I. D. (Codes CB-DA,GA) Install Fuel Manifold Purge System Plumbing and Compo-
nents (See Figures 203 through 206)
(1) Fuel manifold purge system components are remotely located. Refer
to Aircraft Maintenance Manual for Installation instructions.
Refer to Figure 204 for list of airframe mounted components. Refer
to Figure 203 for typical fuel manifold purge system schematic.
SOLENOIDVALVE ACCUMULATOR BULKHEADFITTING ENGINE
PURGELINE
/
CHECKVALVE
P3 TUBE
ANTI-ICINGBLEEDAIR_.........,~J
~PORT
CHECKVALVE FIRESHIELD ANTI-ICINGTUBE
]
I
/
FLOW'DIVIDER INLET ANTHCN
IG
VALV.E. ~ _I
-t
S-44A-242RI
UP136688
Typical Fuel Manifold Purge System Schematic

Figure 203 73-10-13
Page 206
Aug 12/91
/lied
10
5
U
O
35
25
20-
3O
E-44A-2502R2
5. CHECKVALVE 25. FILTER

10. SOLENOIDVALVE 30. PACKING
15. ACCUMULATOR 35. PACKING
20. CBECKVALVE
(Codes CB-DA, GA) Fuel Manifold Purge
UP136688
System Components Installation

Fibre 204 73-10-13
Page 287
Aug 12/91
• Allied.SignalAerospace Company
~ /lied
H--.----
30 25 10
35 15
F-44G-402
5. TUBE 25. NUT

10. REDUCER 30. UNION
20. CAP
(Codes CB, CC, GA)
UP136688
Fuel Manifold Purge System Plumbing Installation

Figure 205 73-10-13
Page 208
Aug 12/91
lied
CAUTION: WHENLINES ARE INSTALLED, EXERCISECARETHAT NO CON-
TAMINATION IS INTRODUCEDOR THREADLUBRICATIONCOM-
POUNDIS USED. ENSUREPROPERALIGNMENTAND THREAD
ENGAGEMENTTO PREVENTGALLINGAND/ORCROSS
THREADING.
threads of bolts located aft of the fireshields unless
1. D. (2) Install reducer with washer into anti-icing extraction port boss.
Tighten reducer (10, Figure 205) or (30, Figure 206) to a torque
(3) (Code DA) Install elbow and washers onto fireshield and secure
with nut. Tighten nut (45, Figure 206) to a torque value of 110 to
130 inch-pounds.
R (4) (Codes CB-CC, GA) Install union into fireshield and secure with
washer and nut. Tighten nut (25, Figure 205) to a torque value of
(5) (Code DA) Install tube assembly with attaching parts between elbow
in the fireshield and reducer in anti-icing extraction port boss.
Tighten nut (5, Figure 206) to a torque value of 20 inch-pounds.
R (6) (Codes CB-CC, GA) Install tube assembly between bulkhead union in
the fireshield and reducer in anti-icing extraction port boss.
(7) Install cap on elbow or union. Tighten cap (20, Figure 205) or
(40, Figure 206) to a torque value of 100 to 120 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-10-13
Page 209
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
.,';] ¢
40 55 45 10
60 50 15
20
F-44G'-403
5. NUT 35. WASHER

10. BOLT 40. CAP
15. CLAMP 45. NUT
25. TUBEASSY 55. ELBOW
30. REDUCER 60. WASHER
(Code DA) Fuel Manifold Purge System
UP136688
Pl umbing Instal lation

Figure 206 73-10-13
Page 210
Dec 14/87
lliedSignal
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A E, 0 s v A C E GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. Adjustment/Test
A. Test Fuel Manifold Purge Valve Solenoid
(1) Apply 24 volts dc across Pins A and B of electrical connector.

Valve shal I open.
(2) Removevoltage from electrical connector. Valve shall close.
(3) Replace valve that does not meet requirements of (1) and (2).
R B. Test Check Valves (50, 75, Figure 202 or 5, 20, Figure 204)
R (I) Perform leakage check of each valve as follows.
R (a) Connect an air pressure source capable of 1000 psig to outlet

R f i t t i n g (determined by direction of flow arrow) of check
R val ve.
R (b) Immerse check valve in a container of water.
R (c) Apply 1000 psig air pressure for 1 minute. No internal or ex-
R ternal leakage allowed.
R (2) Check cracking pressure of each valve as follows.
R (a) Connect an a i r pressure source capable of 5 psig to inlet f i t -

R ting of check valve.
R (b) Slowly increase air pressure until flow commences from outlet
R f i t t i n g . Cracking pressure shall be 0.5 to 1.0 psig.
73-10-13
UP136688
Page 210A/210B
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
lliedSignal
AEROSPACE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Fuel Manifold Purge System Plumbing and Components
(I) Visually inspect solenoid valve electrical connector for bent,
broken, and burned pins.
(2) Visually inspect body of solenoid valve for damage and stripped and
damaged threads.
(3) Visually inspect tube assemblies in accordance with 70-00-00, Stan-
dard Practices.
(4) Visually inspect f i t t i n g s , reducer, and check valves for stripped
and peened threads.
(5) Visually inspect f i l t e r for damaged screen, stripped and peened
threads and contamination. Refer to Cleaning/Painting for cleaning
procedures.
(6) Visually inspect clamps for damage, cracks, and condition of
cushion.
(7) Visually inspect accumulator for dents, cracks, and stripped and
peened threads.
(8) Visually inspect bracket for cracks.
(9) Replace parts that do not meet inspection requirements.
73-10-13
Page 211
UP136688
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
/lied
. Cleaning/Painting
NOTE: Table 202 provides a l i s t of all equipment and materials

i

Beaker (200 m i l l i l i t e r Commercial ly avail able
capacity)
Blackstone heated tank Blackstone Ultrasonics Inc, 1111 Allen
ultrasonic cleaner Street, Jamestown, NY 14701
Model HT 1.9
Alternate:
Sonac ultrasonic cleaner Cooper Laboratories Inc, 300 Fairfield Rd,
Model S-2 Wayne, NJ 07470-07315
P-D-680, Type I)
R 1,1,1-Tri chloroethane Commercially avail able
R (MIL-T-81533)
A. Clean Parts
(1) Clean accumulator and check valves in accordance with 72-00-00,
(3) Clean solenoid valve in accordance with 72-00-00,

J
UP136688
73-10-13
Page 212
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4, B. Perform Special Cleaning of Fuel Manifold Purge System Filter
CAUTION: CLEANING SHALL BE PERFORMEDIN A CLEAN, WELL-
CLOTHING SHALL BE WORN. EXTINGUISHERSAND VAT
OR TANKCOVERSSHALL BE ON HANDIN CASEOF
FIRE.
NOTE: Filter may be cleaned temporarily by back flushing
f i l t e r under light pressure using solvent (Federal
Specification P-D-680, Type I). However, the
sonic cleaning method should be used for thorough
cleaning.
(I) Clean f i l t e r by sonic method as follows.
.NOTE: Beaker is used in ultrasonic cleaner to con-

serve cleaning agent. Water is used in ul-
trasonic cleaner tank as transmitting fluid.
R (a) Place f i l t e r in beaker and f i l l beaker with 1,1,1-

R Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) to submerge f i l t e r .
(b) Place beaker containing f i l t e r in ultrasonic cleaner tank and

f i l l ultrasonic cleaner tank to within 3/8 inch of top with
water.

R rinse f i l t e r and beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
R (e) Refill beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533)

I
(g) Removef i l t e r from beaker and blow dry using clean, low pres-
sure air supply.
UP136688
73-I0-13
Page 213/214
Aug 12/91
lied
CONTROLLING (ENGINE FUELAND CONTROL.) - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Fuel Control and Pump Assembly
The fuel control and pump assembly provide metered fuel to engine and are
mounted on fuel control drive pad on input housing assembly and are driven
through fuel control drive gear in reduction gear train. The units are com-
prised of fuel pump assembly and fuel control unit.
(Codes AA-CC) The fuel control unit incorporates a fuel enrichment valve.
(Codes DA-FB) The fuel control unit incorporates a fuel pressurizing valve.
(Code GA) The fuel control unit incorporates a fuel regulating valve.
2. Fuel PumpAssembly
(Codes AA-CC) The engine driven fuel pump assembly is mounted on fuel con-
trol drive pad on input housing assembly and is ~riven through a fuel con-
trol drive gear in reduction gear train. Th.e fuel pump assembly
incorporates a high pressure pump assembly (vane type}, injector boost pump
assembly and pressure r e l i e f valve. The fuel pump assembly delivers high
pressure fuel to fuel control unit for metering.
(Codes DA-FB) The engine driven fuel pump assembly is mounted on fuel con-
trol drive pad on input housing assembly and is driven through a fuel con-
trol drive gear in reduction gear train. The fuel pump assembly consists of
a boost element and a high pressure element with a common drive train. The
boost element of fuel pump assembly is a centrifugal pump assembly which
boosts i n l e t pressure to high pressure element. The high pressure pump as-
sembly incorporates a gear type pump and pressure r e l i e f valve, f i l t e r , and
anti-icing valve. The pump assembly delivers f i l t e r e d fuel of required
pressure to the fuel control unit for metering.
R (Code GA) The engine driven fuel pumpassembly is mounted on the fuel con-
R trol drive pad on the input housing assembly and is driven through a fuel
R control drive gear in the reduction gear train. The fuel pump assembly con-
R sists of a boost element and a high pressure element with a common drive
R train. The boost element of the fuel pump assembly is a centrifugal pump
R assembly which boosts i n l e t pressure to the high pressure element. The high
R pressure pump assembly incorporates a vane type pump and pressure r e l i e f
R valve, f i l t e r , and anti-ice valve. The pump assembly delivers f i l t e r e d fuel
R at required pressure to the fuel control unit for metering.
UP136688
73-20-00
Page 1
Aug 12/91
~;lied
3. Fuel Filter
(Codes AA-BA) The fuel f i l t e r is a separate unit located in the fuel line
between fuel pump assembly and fuel control unit to ensure clean fuel to
fuel control unit. In the event the f i l t e r becomes clogged, fuel is by-
passed around f i l t e r to sustain emergency engine operation.
R (Codes DA-GA) The fuel f i l t e r is a component of fuel pump assembly. Inlet

fuel to high pressure fuel pump is routed through fuel f i l t e r to ensure
clean fuel through all phases of operation. In the event f i l t e r becomes
clogged, fuel is by-passed around f i l t e r to sustain emergency engine
operati on.
/
(Codes CA-CC) The fuel f i l t e r is airframe mounted.
4. Fuel Control Unit

(Codes AA-CC) The fuel control unit, attached to the rear of fuel pump as-
sembly is driven through the fuel pumpassembly. The fuel control unit in-
corporates a pneumatic computer, metering valve positioned by a bellows as-
sembly, by-pass valve, overspeed governor, speed lever shaft, (underspeed
governor), and power lever shaft. Fuel is metered to the engine in accor-
dance with sensed engine requirements and operator inputs.
5. Fuel Control Unit

(Codes DA-GA) The fuel control unit is attached to the rear of the fuel pump
assembly. The control unit incorporates an underspeed governor, overspeed
governor, by-pass valve, fuel metering valve, minimum and maximumlimiting
stops, input levers, and fuel specific gravity adjustment to meter fuel to
engine.
6. Fuel Enrichment Valve
(Codes AA-CC) The fuel enrichment valve, attached to the fuel control unit,
supplements fuel to ensure a pressure sufficient for atomization to primary
fuel nozzles. A solenoid valve actuated by a prime switch controls opera-
tion of fuel enrichment valve. A parallel enrichment orifice is incor-
porated for use in starting above 25 percent engine speed.
. Fuel Pressurizing Valve

(Codes DA-FB) The fuel control fuel pressurizing valve back pressures fuel
control during engine starting to ensure servo pressure and accurate fuel
control metering. The pressurizing valve is referenced to boost pump dis-
charge pressure and thus drops out of the fuel circuit for all steady state
operating conditions.
UP136688
73=20-00
Page 2
Aug 12/91
AIh'ed.SignalAerospaceCompany
ignal
~ ilied.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Fuel Pressure Regulator
(CodeGA) The start fuel flow regulator assembly attached to the side of
the fuel control unit is a normally closed solenoid valve and pressure
regulator. The regulator valve provides additional fuel during light-off
and simultaneous lockout of the fuel f i l t e r anti-icing system when
energized. The regulator is also used to maintain a predetermined pressure
to the fuel nozzles.
9. Temperature Sensor
(Codes AA-CC) A sensing unit located in the compressor inlet section senses
compressor inlet temperature and compensates fuel flow schedule for changes
in inlet total temperature.
10. Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor
(Codes DA-GA)The inlet temperature and pressure sensor is part of fuel

control assembly. The sensing probe, located in compressor inlet section,
senses compressor inlet temperature and pressure then compensates fuel flow
schedules for changes in inlet total temperature and pressure.
UP136688
73-20-00
Page 3/4
Aug 12/91
AUied.SignalAerospaceCompany
//~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-=~gnal
FUEL CONTROLAND FUEL PUMPASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCEPRACTICES

Table 202 provides a l i s t of all special tools, fixtures,

and equipment required to perform Removal/Installation.

Any approved engine fuel Commercial ly avail able
Grease (Mobil 28) Mobil Oil Corp, P.O. Box 54053, Los
Angeles, CA 90054
Santovac 5~ St Louis, MO 63166
Lubri cati ng compound Lockrey Co, Inc, Lubricants Div, 2517
Syringe (Chemo-Jector) GC Electronics Div of Hydro Metals, Inc,
(GC No. 8887) 400 S Wyman St, Rockford, IL 61101
Item Source/
1. Seal Installing Used to install packing over 285843-I-1

Pilot end of drive coupling without
damaging packing.
. Fuel Control Torquing Used to torque nuts securing 294670-1
Wrench Set fuel control and fuel pump as-
sembly to accessory drive
housing mounting pad.
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 201
Aug 12/91
HAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
"%.,°
°"°..% ".o",.
•., \..
,<. ".).:.~1:::::..",., ...

,,,',......"-.::.-.:::;,,
, < 1.'.:'.~'t.." "::; "
...,..,, • ,~
135
5 140
125 f
95 '--"-~(J~ - "',, 100
E-4~.G-708
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Contro] and Fuel Pump

Figure 201 73-20-01
Page 202
UP136688
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. A. (Codes AA-CC) Remove Fuel Control and Fuel PumpAssembly (See Figure
201)
NOT___EE: Before replacing fuel control and pump assembly with
another complete unit, ensure trouble has been isolated
to this component. Refer to 73-21-05, MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES, for replacement of fuel control unit, tem-
perature sensor, or fuel enrichment valve assembly.
Refer to 73-21-06, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES, for replace-
ment of fuel pump assembly.
(1) Disconnect control linkage assembly. Refer to 76-10-01, MAINTE-
NANCE PRACTICES.
(2) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel control and pump assembly.
Refer to 73-10-01, MAINTENANCEPRACTICES.
(3) Removeenrichment valve i f required for maintenance. Refer to

(4) (Pre SB 73-0028/-0029) Remove bracket and support from rear of fuel
control and pump assembly.
(5) (Post SB 73-0028/-0029) Remove support assembly from rear of fuel
control and fuel pump assembly.
(6) Using 294670-1 wrench set remove nuts and washers securing fuel
control and fuel pumpassembly to input housing.
- - ~ KEY TO FIGURE 201
5. NUT 80. BOLT

15. BOLT 95. NUT
25. WASHER 105. BOLT
30. BOLT 110. SUPPORT
35. BRACKET 115. NUT
40. NUT 120. WASHER
45. BOLT 125. FUELCONTROLAND
50. WASHER FUEL PUMPASSY
55. WASHER 135. COUPLING
65. RIVET 140. PACKING
70. NUTPLATE 145. PACKING
75. SUPPORT 150. INSULATOR(PART DELETED)
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 203
Aug 16/89
~!iied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL Signal
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVEROR OTHERPOINTEDOB-
JECTS TO PRY FUEL CONTROLAND FUEL PUMPASSEM-
BLY FROMENGINEOR DAMAGETO PUMPFLANGEOR AC-
CESSORYDRIVE HOUSINGMAY OCCUR.
1. A. (7) Remove fuel control and fuel pumpassembly in a straight line to
avoid damage to drive coupling.
(8) Remove drive coupling and fuel control. Removepackings from drive
coupling.
(9) (Pre SB 73-0059) Removeinsulator.
B. (Codes AA-CC) Install Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure
201)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended gen-
Prior to installation, unless otherwise specified, lubricate
packings or gaskets with any type clean jet fuel. An alter-
nate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used. Apply
lubricant sparingly and spread evenly to a thin transparent
film to minimize contamination. Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and
apply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two threads)
of male plumbing f i t t i n g s unless otherwise specified.
(Pre SB 72-0104) Grease (Mobil 28) is soluble in fuel,
necessitating immediate correction of any fuel pump seal
leakage. The drive coupling shall be inspected and lubri-
cated at any time corrective action is required for fuel
pump seal leakage.
(1) (Pre SB 72-0104) Pack cavities of fuel pump assembly and reduction
gear section with grease (Mobil 28), using syringe (Chemo-jector),
so no air spaces exist in cavities. Coat new drive coupling pack-
ings with same grease and install on drive coupling using
285843-1-1 pilot, being careful not to damage packings. Remove
285843-1-1 pilot and apply grease to all splines of drive coupling.
Pack internal passage of coupling, ensuring all air is expelled.
Hold finger over opening and install coupling into fuel pump allow-
ing grease to egress through vent hole in coupling. Wipe off ex-
cess grease.
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 204
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAemspaceCompany
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~llied
Signal
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0104) DO NOT PACKCAVITIES OF FUEL

PUMPASSEMBLYOR REDUCTIONGEARSECTION, OR
COAT DRIVE COUPLING PACKINGSWITH GREASE.
1. B. (2) (Post SB 72-0104) Lubricate new drive coupling packings with clean
engine oil. Install packings on drive coupling using 285843-1-1
pilot, being carefull not to damage packings. Remove285843-1-1
pilot and lubricate drive coupling with clean engine oil. Install
drive coupling into fuel pump assembly.
(3) Deleted.
(4) Deleted.
R (5) Install fuel control and fuel pump assembly, exercising care to en-
R sure splines on drive coupling and accessory mounting pad splines
R properly align.
(6) Install washers and nuts. Torque nuts (115) (using 294670-I wrench
set) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(7) (Pre SB 73-0028) Install bracket and support.
(a) Install support onto compressor housing and secure with wash-
ers, bolts, and nuts. Tighten nuts (40, figure201) to a
(b) Install bracket onto support and secure with bolts. Tighten
(c) Install support, shimming as required from mounting boss on

fuel control to bearing surface of support to avoid bending
support. Tighten bolt (15) to a torque value of 60 inch-
pounds.
(8) (Post SB 73-0028) Install support assembly.

CAUTION: ATTACHSUPPORTASSEMBLYTO FUEL CONTROLUNIT AND
TIGHTEN PRIORTO ATTACHING SUPPORTASSEMBLYTO PLE-
NUM FLANGE. NO WASHERSARE ALLOWEDBETWEENSUPPORT
ASSEMBLY AND FUEL CONTROLUNIT OR BETWEENSUPPORT
ASSEMBLYAND PLENUMFLANGE. SUPPORTASSEMBLYIS
DESIGNED TO CONFORMTO TOLERANCECONDITION THATMAY
EXIST BETWEEN FUEL CONTROLUNIT AND PLENUMFLANGE.
(a) (Pre SB 73-0029) Install bolt, washers, and nuts. Tighten nut
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 205
Aug 12/91
~Rm~ MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
\
\
\
\ \
\
4.--o,o \ \
,.1!:,;'"'.::::::::.2, ,,
I ,,If2;,,', ,'
.~.':,:'....:::::;!;.~:,.~
175
*t
.~.:-~ ~-..... ......
/~75 "
145 ~ e5
80
1~5 I 115
110
5
E-.44A-.6703
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Control and Fuel PumpAssembly Installation

UP136688
Figure 202 73-20-01

Page 206
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. B. (8) (b) (Post SB 73-0029) Install washer and bolt. Tighten bolt (80)
to a torque value of 100 inch-pounds. Lockwire bolt.
(c) Install bolts, washers, and nuts. Tighten nuts (95) to a

(9) Install enrichment valve. Refer to 73'21-04, MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES.
(10) Connect tube assemblies to fuel control and fuel pump assembly.
(11) Connect controls linkage assembly in accordance with 76-10-01,

4 KEY TO FIGURE 202

5. BOLT 105. BOLT
10. WASHER 110. SUPPORT
15. INSULATORBUSHING 115. NUT
25. WASHER 125. BOLT
30. CLAMP 135. RIVET
35. INSULATORBUSHING 140. NUTPLATE
40. BOLT 145. SUPPORT
45. WASHER 150. NUT
50. INSULATORBUSHING 155. WASHER
65. INLET TEMPERATURE 160. COUPLING
AND PRESSURESENSOR 165. PACKING
75. INSULATOR 170. PACKING
80. BOLT 175. FUELCONTROLAND
85. WASHER FUEL PUMPASSY
/
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 207
Dec 14/87
~!lied
R Io Co (Codes DA-GA) Remove Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure
R 202 or 202A)
NOTE: Before replacing fuel control and fuel pump assembly
with another complete unit, ensure trouble has been
isolated to this component. Refer to 73-21-05, Main-
tenance Practices, for replacement of fuel control
unit. Refer to 73-21-05, Maintenance Practices, for
replacement of i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor.
Refer to 73-21-04, Maintenance Practices, for replace-
ment of fuel pressurizing valve assembly or pressure
regulating valve. Refer to 73-21-06, Maintenance Prac-
tices, for replacement of fuel pump assembly.
(I) Disconnect controls linkage assembly in accordance with 76-10-01,

(2) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel control and fuel pump assembly
in accordance with 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Disconnect tube assemblies from i n l e t temperature and pressure sen-
sor in accordance with 73-10-01, Maintenance Practices.
CAUTION: HANDLEINLET TEMPERATUREAND PRESSURESENSOR

WITH CARE, AS UNIT IS PRECALIBRATED. THE SENS-
ING ELEMENTAND BELLOWS ARE PRECISON PARTS.
CAPILLARY TUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENTAND BEL-
LOWS MUSTNOT BE KINKED, OR LEAKAGEMAY RESULT.
(4) Remove bolts, washers, bushings, and insulator to disconnect i n l e t

temperature and pressure sensor from inputhousing assembly.
(5) Remove support and support assembly from rear of fuel control and
fuel pump assembly.
(6) Using 294670-1 wrench set, remove nuts and washers securing fuel
control and fuel pump assembly to input housing assembly.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVER OR OTHERPOINTED OB-

JECTS TO PRY FUEL CONTROLAND FUEL PUMPASSEM-
BLY FROMENGINE OR DAMAGETO FUEL PUMPFLANGE
ORACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGMAY OCCUR.
(7) Removefuel control and fuel pump assembly in a straight line to

avoid damage to drive coupling.
(8) Removedrive coupling and fuel control and fuel pump insulator when
appl icabl e. Removepackings from drive coupling.
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 208
Aug 12/91
/lied
%
%
\
%
%
%
\
\ %
\
,\•
°
.p:-.°,,
-... •°.
\
\
,,, t
~ "~ ...... ;;12 ,.'.*,
.-*~ t
*-°** i t
• , °...,
: ,..::..-;~ ~ "::
s
170 ', .* q ~-~,..L~.,o •

.,.'~. . . J,.
, . * %,
\ ~ , ,* t
tt
\...," ,
~. .b ,* I ;
..'....,,~ IL
":.'."x,~,
%,
1~0155
/5' 211
• 15 lO /
5
E-44G-1521
5. BOLT 65. INLET TEMPERATURE 135. RIVET

10. WASHER AND PRESSURESENSOR 140. NUTPLATE
15. INSULATORBUSHING 75. INSULATOR 145. SUPPORT
20. BOLT 80. BOLT 150. NUT
25. WASHER 85. WASHER 155. WASHER
30. CLAMP 105. BOLT 160. COUPLING
35. INSULATORBUSHING 110. SUPPORT 165. PACKING
40. BOLT 115. NUT 170. PACKING
45. WASHER 120. WASHER 175. FUEL CONTROLAND
50. INSULATORBUSHING 125. BOLT FUEL PUMPASSY
UP136688
R (Code GA) Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Assembly Installation

R Figure 202A 73-20-01
Page 208A/208B
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ S lied
ignal

threads of bolts and studs. Grease (Mobil 28) is solu-
ble in fuel, necessitating immediate correction of any
fuel pump seal leakage. The drive coupling shall be
inspected and lubricated at any time corrective action
is required for fuel pump seal leakage.
. D. (Codes DA-GA) Install Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure
202 or 202A)
CAUTION: DO NOT PACKCAVITIES OF FUEL PUMPASSEMBLY,
REDUCTION GEARSECTION, OR COATDRIVE COUPLING
PACKINGS WITH GREASE.
(1) Lubricate new drive coupling packings with clean engine oil. In-
stall packings on drive coupling using 285843-1-1 pilot, being
careful not to damage packings. Remove285843-1-1 pilot and lubri-
cate drive coupling with clean engine o i l . Install drive coupling
into fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION: EXERCISE CAREWHENHANDLING INLET TEMPERATURE
AND PRESSURESENSORIN THE FOLLOWING STEPS.
PERFORM PROCEDUREINTHE ORDERPRESENTED.
R (2) Install fuel control and fuel pump assembly, exercising care to en-
R sure splines on drive coupling and accessory mounting pad splines
R properly align.
(3) Install washers and nuts. Torque nuts (150) (using 294670-1 wrench
(4) Install support assembly onto compressor housing and secure with
washers, bolts, and nuts. Tighten nuts (115) to a torque value of
50 inch-pounds.
(5) Install support onto support assembly and secure with bolts.
(6) Install washers (85) as required from mounting boss on fuel control
to bearing surface to avoid bending support. Use sufficient wash-
ers from surface of bolt to support to obtain 0.192 to 0.204 inch
total between mounting boss on fuel control and bearing surface of
bolt. Tighten bolt (80) to a torque value of 60 inch-pounds.
R (7) (Codes DA-FB, Post SB 73-0131) (Code GA) Lockwire bolts (80,
105).
73-20-01
UP136688
Page 209
Aug 12/91
l s l i e d

CAUTION: HANDLE INLET TEMPERATUREAND PRESSURESENSOR
WITH CARE, AS UNIT IS PRECALIBRATED. THE SENS-
ING ELEMENTAND BELLOWSARE PRECISION PARTS.
CAPILLARY TUBEJOINING SENSING ELEMENTAND BEL-
LOWSMUSTNOT BE KINKED, OR LEAKAGEMAY RESULT.
1. D. (8) Install inlet temperature and pressure sensor onto input housing
assembly with insulators, washers, and bolts. Tighten bolts (5,
20, 40) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(9) Connect tube assemblies to inlet temperature and pressure sensor in

accordance with 73-10-01 and 75-10-01, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
(10) Connect tube assemblies to fuel control assembly in accordance with

(11) Connect controls linkage assembly in accordance with 76-10-01,

2. Adjustment/Test
Perform Adjustment/Test as outlined in 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
3. Inspection/Check
NOTE: Table 203 provides a l i s t of all equipment required to per-

form Inspection/Check.
Table 203. Materials and Equipment
Materials or Equipment Manufacturer
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for li'sted items.

Look/See kit (Part No. QC No. 771) Quality Control Co, 3301 Beverly Blvd,
Los Angles, CA 90004
Tool makers microscope Brown and Sharpe, North Kingston, RI
02852
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 210
Aug 16/89
Signal
~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. A, Inspect Fuel Control and Fuel PumpAssembly
(1) Perform visual inspection of both external and internal splines for
wear as follows. (See figure 203.)
NOTE: I f indicated by inspection, drive coupling shall
be replaced. Whenever wear is detected,
thoroughly inspect mating part for similar
condition.
$
(a) Perform Vi'sual inspection using strong light and IOX

magnification.
(b) Minor burnish marks or discoloration are acceptable.
(c) Spline teeth showing no visible wear step when viewed from end
of spline and parallel to spline teeth are acceptable.
(d) All internal splines showing wear pattern types C, D, and E,
Figure 203, shall require further inspection using Look/See
kit (Part No. QC No. 771) or equivalent borescope type
instrument.
R (e) Spline teeth wear in excess of 0.005 inch is cause for
re pl acement.
(2) Perform dimensional ~inspection of both external and internal
splines for wear as follows.
(a) Splines with border line wear conditions detected during
visual inspection shall be replaced or dimensionally inspected
using a Toolmakers Microscope or equivalent. An impression
mold may be required in conjunction with the Toolmakers Mi-
croscope for internal splines.
(b) Defective internal spline's will require replacement of af-
fected assembly (oil pump assembly or fuel pump assembly). I f
either assembly is replaced, a new drive coupling shall be
installed.
(3) Prior to reinstallation of fuel control and fuel pump assembly, lu-
bricate drive coupling and fuel control and oil pump splines in ac-
cordance with Removal/Instal I ati on.
(4) Check fuel control and fuel pump assembly for security, loose f i t -
tings, evidence of fuel leakage, and damage. Refer to 72-00-00,
Trouble Shooting.
(5) Inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, and peened threads.
73-20-01
UP136688
Page 211
Aug 12/9!
~!iied
A. Clean Parts

(2) Clean outside surfaces of fuel control assembly and inlet tempera-
ture and pressure sensor in accordance with 72-00-00,
CLEANING/PAINTING, Cleaning Method, No. 1.
UP136688
73-20-01
Page 212
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ignal /•/lied
:~- "-..<::. ,',,,.

. .~. ,~.-..~
,%
2 ~" .~k', i~
1 ~ . ". ~ i . .~.y .'-:... . . ii
I ~LI..~WEAR IAN
REEATEETH
/ .~"~ :-": ",,~:.~" "
/ .Z~'~" \ ,: . . . . L ~ ......" ~ ":
,~.__../.~---~, ,_,-.-,~.- ....~..:
";C:!:k : ::
TM ....
A
KEY ITEM " TYPESPLINE TYPEWEAR

PATTERN
1 FUELPUMPASSEMBLY INTERNAL Dor E
2 DRIVECOUPLING EXTERNAL
3 OIL PUMPASSEMBLY INTERNAL
TYPE WEARPATTERNLOCATION ENDVIEW SIDEVIEW
A EXTERNALEND ENGAGEMENT
B FULLSPLINEENGAGEMENT
.;I
C INTERNALEND ENGAGEMENT
CI D
CENTRALIZEDENGAGEMENTLIGHTWEAR
CENTRALIZEDENGAGEMENTHEAVYWEAR
!-44G-936
UP136688
Spline Location and Wear Pattern (Typical)

Figure 203 73-20-01
Page 213/214
Aug 16/89

(CODES AA-BA, DA-GA) FUEL FILTER - MAINTENANCEPRACTICES
requ i red to perform Removal/Instal I ati on.
60076-4046 or Part No. NPC603QI-1 from


CAUTION: (POST SB 73-0110) FUELFILTER ELEMENTPART NO. 897513-1 IS

A DISPOSABLETYPE FILTER. REMOVEAND REPLACEWITH NEW
FI LTER ELEMENT.
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from lines
and fuel f i l t e r assembly.
A. (Codes AA-BA) Remove Fuel Filter Assembly (See Figures 201, 202)
(1) Removeplumbing from fuel f i l t e r assembly in accordance with

(2) Removeelbows and packings from fuel f i l t e r . (See Figure 201.)

(3) Removefuel f i l t e r , bracket and support from engine.
(4) (Post SB 73-0110) Discard f i l t e r element.
73-21-03
UP136688
Page 201
Aug 4/94
GEG/O-?-J~
MAINTENANCE MANUA
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. t;-:',- -,'-"=). . . . . .
5o ~J"~ 8o
vs~ v~-~s
(Codes AA-BA) Fuel Filter Installation

UP136688
Figure 201 73-21-03

Page 202
Dec 14/87
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCEMANUAL
. A. (5) Removecover from body. Removef i l t e r element. Removepackings.
(See figure 202.)
B. (Codes AA-BA) Install Fuel Filter Assembly (See Figures 201, 202)

bricate packings with any type clean j e t fuel. An al-
ternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used.
Apply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly to a thin
transparent film to minimize contamination. Apply lu-
bricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of
bolts or screws, and apply clean engine oil to threads
specified. Apply high temperature compound (Fel-Pro
C5-A) to threads of bolts and screws and to threads
speci fi ed.
(1) Secure fuel f i l t e r and bracket to engine support with bolts, wash-
ers, spacers, and nuts. Tighten nuts (40, 55) to a torque value of
12 inch-pounds. (See figure 202.)
(2) Install elbows, with rings and new packings, into top of fuel
f i l t e r and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts (30) to a torque value
(3) Install plumbing on fuel f i l t e r in accordance with 73-10-01, MAIN-
TENANCE PRACTICES.
~ KEY TO FIGURE 201
1 ELBOW 50. BOLT 80. WASHER

15. PACKING 55. NUT 85. BRACKET
25. RING 65. BOLT 90. SUPPORT
30. NUT 75. SPACER 95. FUELFILTER
40. NUT
UP136688
73-21-03
Page 203
Aug 16/89
MAINTENANCE
ANOAL
TPE331-5 72-01-271
"4--"-"20
30'-.-....
10. COVER 25. PACKING

15. FILTER ELEMENT 30. BODY
20. PACKING
UP136688
(Codes AA-BA) Fuel Filter Element Installation

Figure 202 73-21-03
Page 204
Dec 14/87
~ / l iignal
ed
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-0.1-27)
. B. (4) Install packing onto f i l t e r element, install f i l t e r element onto
body. (See figure 202.)
(5) Install packing onto cover, i n s t a l l cover onto body. Tighten
cover.
CAUTION: (POST SB 73-0110) FUEL FILTER ELEMENT, PARTNO.
897513-1 IS A DISPOSABLETYPE FILTER, REMOVEAND
REPLACE WITH NEW FILTER ELEMENT.
C. (Codes DA-FB) Remove Fuel Filter (See Figure 203)
(1) Removecap from fuel pump assembly.

(2) Removeclip, cup, spring, and f i l t e r element from cap.
(3) (Post SB 73-0110) Discard f i l t e r element.
(4) Removewasher from cup.
(5) Removeplug.
(6) Removepackings from cap, f i l t e r element, and plug.

UP136688
S~
73-21-03
R Page 205
Aug 16/89
I~I MANITENANMCEANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
15, ...,...,...------,~
1
20 • I ( ~
25 ~'
30 " ~
50 ~' '~
E-44A-5552
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Filter Installation

UP136688
Figure 203 73-21-03

Page 206
Dec 14/87
~=~/lied
1. D. (Codes DA-FB) Install Fuel Filter (See Figure 203)
NOTE: Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or
alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior
to installation.
(1) Install plug, with new packing, into f i l t e r housing cap. Tighten
(2) Install washer into cup. Install new packing onto f i l t e r element
and insert f i l t e r element into cup.
(3) Install spring into cap with small end up.
(4) Install cap over cup and secure with clip.
CAUTION: ENSURECAP THREADSARE PROPERLYLUBRICATEDTO

PREVENT FILTER HOUSINGCAP THREADSFROM
SEIZING.
(5) Apply a thin coat of lubrication compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to

threads of cap. Install assembled cap with new packing. Tighten
cap (20) to a torque value of 15 to 20 inch-pounds, and lockwire.
R E. (Code GA) RemoveFuel Filter (See Figure 204)
R (1) Removef i l t e r case.
R (2) Removeand discard f i l t e r and packings.
KEYTO FIGURE 203

10. PLUG 35. CLIP
15. PACKING 40. CUP
20. CAP 45. WASHER
25. PACKING 50. FILTER ELEMENT
UP136688
73-21-03
Page 207
Aug 12/91
lslied
R NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean engine fuel or lu-
R bricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation
R unless otherwise specified.
R Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended
R general torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down)
R torque of self-locking devices to recommended values.
R . F. (Code GA) Install Fuel Filter (See Figure 204)
(1) Install new packings on f i l t e r and f i l t e r case. Install f i l t e r

into f i l t e r case.
CAUTION: ENSURECAP THREADSARE PROPERLYLUBRICATEDAS
DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING STEP TO PREVENTCAP
THREADS FROMSEIZING.
R (2) Apply a thin coat of lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to

R threads of f i l t e r case. Install f i l t e r case with new packing.
R Tighten f i l t e r case (5) to a torque value of 15 to 20 inch-pounds.
R Install Iockwire.
-~.-~,~,~ ~.~
]~..-,,-10
E-44A-4306
R 5. FILTER CASE 15. FILTER

R (Code GA)
UP136688
R Fuel Filter Assembly Installation

R Figure 204 73-21-03
Page 208
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~&~am
2. InspectionJCheck
A. Inspect Fuel Filter and Associated Components
(1) Inspect fuel f i l t e r body and cover for damaged threads and other
obvious damage.
(2) (Pre SB 73-0110) Inspect metal f i l t e r element for damage and
cleanliness. Refer to Cleaning/Painting for f i l t e r element clean-
ing procedure.
R Equipmentor Material Manufacturer
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listeditems.

Beaker (200 m i l l i l i t e r capacity) Commercially avaii able
Blackstone heated tank ultrasonic Blackstone Ultrasonics Inc, 1111 Allen
cleaner (Model HT 1.9) St, Jamestown, NY 14701
Alternate
Sonac Ultrasonic Cleaner Cooper Laboratories Inc, 300 Fairfield Rd,
(Model S-2) Wayne, NJ 07470
Electrocleaner Diversey Corp, Diversey Wyandotte Div,
(Wyandotte FS) 1532 Biddle Ave, Wyandotte, MI 48192
Muriatic acid (35 percent Commercially avail able
HCl, commercial grade)
Solvent (Federal Specification Commercially avaiI able
P-D-680, Type I)
R 1,1,1-Tri chl oroethane Commercially avail able
R (MIL-T-81533)
UP136688
73-21-03
Page 209
Aug 12/91
~ed
TANK COVERSSHALL BE ON HANDIN CASEOF FIRE.
3. A. Clean Parts
Clean all standard metallic hardware in accordance with 72-00-00,

CAUTION: (POST SB 73-0110) FUELFILTER ELEMENTPARTNO.

897513-1 ISA NON-CLEANABLE TYPE FILTER ELEMENTAS
IDENTIFIED ON BOTTOMOF FILTER ELEMENT, REMOVEAND
REPLACE WITH NEW FILTER ELEMENT.
B. (Pre SB 73-0110) Perform Special Cleaning of Fuel Filter Element Part
No. 865791-4
(1) Removepacking and thoroughly clean f i l t e r element in cold solvent
(2) Prepare a solution of rust stripper (Oakite) by combining 3 to 5
pounds of rust stripper to each gallon of water. Maintain prepared
solution at 72 to 82C (162 to 180F). Employair agitation to keep
solution in suspension.
(3) Soak f i l t e r element in rust stripper solution for 30 minutes.
(4) Removef i l t e r element from solution and rinse thoroughly with clean
water.
(5) Prepare solution of electrocleaner (Wyandotte FS) by combining 9

ounces of electrocleaner to each gallon of water. Maintain solu-
tion at 72 to g3C (160 to 20OF). Immersef i l t e r element in elec-
trocleaner solution for 4 to 6 minutes. During this period, f i l t e r
element shall be made an anode for 1 to 2 minutes at a potential of
4 to 7 volts dc. Rinse f i l t e r element in cold running tap water.
(6) Immerse f i l t e r element in equal parts muriatic acid and water, by
volume, at room temperature for 1/2 to 1 minute. Rinse f i l t e r ele-
ment thoroughly in cold running tap water.
UP136688
73-21-03
Page 210
Aug 12/91
~=~lied
. B. (7) Immerse f i l t e r element in electrocleaner solution prepared in step
(5) maintained at temperature of 72 to 93°C (160 to 200°F) for 4 to
6 minutes. Rinse in cold running tap water.
(8) Pressure flush f i l t e r element (internal and external) using clean
water.
(9) Place f i l t e r element in beaker with open end down and f i l l beaker
with 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) to submerge f i l t e r
el ement.
(I0) Place beaker containing f i l t e r element in ultrasonic cleaner tank
and f i l l ultrasonic cleaner tank to within 3/8 inch of top with
water.
(II) Operate ultrasonic cleaner for 5 minutes.

(12) Discard contaminated 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) and rinse
f i l t e r element and beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
(MIL-T-81533) using plastic squeeze bottle.
(13) Refill beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) and
operate ultrasonic cleaner for an additional 5 minutes.
(14) Repeat steps (12) and (13) until 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
(MIL-T-81533) remains clean after a 5 minute operation period.
(15) Remove the f i l t e r element from beaker and pressure flush (internal
and external)using clean water. Dry f i l t e r element with filte~red,
low pressure compressed air.
(16) Install new packing in f i l t e r element. I f cleaned f i l t e r element
is not to be installed immediately, place in clean dry container.
UP136688
73-21-03
Page 211/212
Aug 12/91
ignal
~ /lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL ENRICHMENTVALVEASSEMBLYAND FUEL PRESSURIZING VALVE
ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
. Removal/Installation


A. (Codes AA-CC) RemoveEnrichment Valve Assembly (See Figure 201)

(1) Disconnect electrical connector from enrichment valve assembly.
NOTE: Record number and thickness of washer (30) removed from
check valve f i t t i n g (45) to aid in assembly.
(2) Remove nuts, washers, enrichment valve assembly and retainer
packings.
(3) Remove check valve f i t t i n g (45) and fluid transfer f i t t i n g . Remove
packings from check valve and fluid transfer fittings.
UP136688
73-21-04
Page 201
Aug 16/89
• TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
151
°-,
•.,.t~',,..-~-'"
--_~':--%,'.~x~- -~
-..3~ c;i X.~ , ' _ ~ . . . . ~=.~~
, -...~
• I I
I • " a
E-44G-705
5. NUT 45. CHECK VALVE FITTING

15. RETAINERPACKING 55. RETAINER PACKING
20. ENRICHMENTVALVE ASSY 60. FLUID TRANSFER FITTING
25. RETAINERPACKING 65. PACKING
30. WASHER
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Enrichment

UP136688
Valve Assembly Instal lation

Figure 201 73-21-04
Page 202
Dec 14/87
~ ~":......... .... ~.;,,~........ ~;....; . . . . . . '.... , -
....' :i ;!~.:;i:
~:,~:
,
,-;'~:
v
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
1. B. (Codes AA-CC) I n s t a l l Enrichment Valve Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, STANDARD PRACTICES, for recom-

(run-down) torque of s e l f locking devices to
recommended values.
Lightly coat new packings and gaskets with clean

engine fuel or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)
prior to i n s t a l l a t i o n .
(1) I n s t a l l new packings on check valve and f l u i d transfer f i t t i n g s .

Install f i t t i n g s into fuel control. Tighten f i t t i n g s to a torque
(2) I n s t a l l same number and thickness of washers (30) onto check valve
f i t t i n g , as noted during removal.
(3) I n s t a l l retainer packings, enrichment valve assembly, washers, and

nuts. Tighten nuts (5) to a torque value of 65 inch-pounds.
(4) Connect electrical connector to enrichment valve assembly in ac-

cordance with A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual.
UP136688
73-21-04
Page 203
Dec 14/87
*NTENANCEMANOAL TPE331~5 (REPORT NOo 72~01~27)
%
\
\
%
, \ "\
\\, \
-, "~
,,<-~
Jr
j5
90 - 100 105
~-.._j ,,/110 95
46
35~ ~
30 15
E-44G-706
5, BOLT 60. PACKING

10. WASHER 65. TRANSFER TUBE
20. WASHER 75. PLUG
30. BOLT 85. PLUG
40. CLAMP 95. FITTING (ELBOW)
45. WASHER I00. PACKING
50. FUEL PRESSURIZING 105. RING
VALVE ASSY Ii0. NUT
55. TRANSFERTUBE
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Pressurizing Valve
UP136688
Figure 202 73-21-04

Page 204
Dec 14/87
,~3~llied
I. C. (Codes DA-FB) RemoveFuel Pressurizing Valve Assembly (See Figure 202)
(1) Disconnect plumbing from fuel pressurizing valve assembly. Refer
(2) Remove bolts and washers securing fuel pressurizing valve assembly.
(3) Remove pressurizing valve assembly, transfer tubes, plugs, and
packings. Refer to Approved Repairs for Field Maintenance
Breakdown.
general torque values. Add frictional (run-down'
Lightly coat new packings with clean engine fuel or lu-
bricant (05-124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation.
Apply lubricating compound(Liqui-Moly) to threads of
bolts.
D. (Codes DA-FB) Install Fuel Pressurizing valve Assembly (See
Figure 202)
(1) Install new packings onto transfer tubes and plugs. Install trans-
fer tubes and plugs into fuel control.
(2) Carefully align and install fuel pressurizing valve assembly onto
transfer tubes, plugs, and fuel control.
(3) Secure fuel pressurizing valve assembly with bolts, washers, and
clamps. Tighten bolts (15, 30) to a torque value of 25 inch-
pounds.
(4) Install elbow f i t t i n g with nut, ring, and new packing into fuel
pressurizing valve. Tighten nut (110) to a torque value of 30 to
35 inch-pounds.
(5) Install plumbing onto fuel pressurizing valve assembly. Refer to
E. (Code GA) RemoveFuel Pressure Regulating Valve (See Figure 203)
(1) Disconnect tube assembly from fuel pressure regulating valve in ac-
(2) Remove bolts, washers, clamp, fuel pressure regulating valve,
transfer tubes, and plugs from fuel control unit. Removeand
discard packings.
UP136688
73-21-04
Page 205
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospace,Company
~llied
., ..,,%"~..~
:'- ~,-'--',.-, > ~"C,--~ ~ 5o ..
"'J,~.~
~~, ., ~ -"
" - ' ~ .'.~-.-~
~ ' ":..',,~... ~,oJ'i "~,....- 55
-) ,/~,.-. ~. 40",.~,,.'~[l~, ,I ~ 30 80 85 ~ /
,- -L% '
R "
"1
I
1o .
7
E-44G-1520
R 5.BOLT 50. PACKING

R 10. WASHER 55. TRANSFERTUBE
R 15. BOLT 60. PACKING
R 20. WASHER 65. PLUG
R 25. CLAMP 70. PACKING
R 30. FUEL PRESSUREREGULATING 75. FITTING
R VALVE ASSY 80. PACKING
R 35. TRANSFERTUBE 85. WASHER
R 40. PACKING 90. NUT
R 45. TRANSFERTUBE
R (Code GA)
UP136688
R Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve Assembly

R Figure 203 73-21-04
Page 206
Aug 12/91
~:~;lied
R NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices, for recommended
R general torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down
R torque) of self-locking deviceS to recommended values.
R Lightly coat new packings with clean engine fuel or lu-

R bricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to installation.
R Apply lubricating compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to
R threads of screws.
R 1. F. (Code GA) Install Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve (See Figure 203)
R (1) Install new packing onto transfer tubes and plugs. Install trans-
R fer tubes and plugs into fuel control unit.
R (2) Carefully align fuel pressure regulating valve onto transfer tubes
R and plugs and fuel control.
R (3) Install washers, clamp, and bolts. Tighten bolts (5, 15) to a
R (4) Install f i t t i n g (75) with nut (90), washer (85) and new packing
R into fuel pressure regulating valve. Tighten nut (90) to a torque
R value of 30 to 35 inch-pounds.
R (5) Connect tube assembly to fuel pressure regulating valve in accor-
2. Adjustment/Test
A. (Codes AA-CC) Test Fuel Enrichment Valve Assembly

(1) Apply 24 volts dc to Pins A and B of electrical connector on fuel
enrichment valve assembly.
( 2 ) Valve shall produce an audibleclick, indicating operation.
e Inspection/Check
R A. Inspect Fuel Enrichment Valve, Pressurizing Valve, and Pressure Regulat-
R ing Valve Assemblies
Check for security, fuel leakage, and obvious damage.
UP136688
73-21-04
Page 207
Aug 12/91
~llied
A. Clean Parts
R (2) Clean fuel pressure regulating, fuel pressurizing and fuel enrich-
ment valves in accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Clean-
ing Method No. 11.
. Approved Repairs
A. (Codes DA-FB) Partially Disassemble Fuel Pressurizing Valve Assembly
(See Figure 204)
NOTE: Valve plunger is spring-loaded. Care must be exercised
during removal to prevent inadvertent ejection of
plunger, spring, and spring seat when plug is removed.
(1) Remove plug, spring, spring seat, plunger, sleeve, and stop.
(2) Removeand discard old packings and gaskets.
B. (Codes DA-FB) Assemble Fuel Pressurizing Valve Assembly (See Figure
204)
(i) Lubricate new packings and gaskets with clean engine fuel or lubri-
cant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) and install onto valve components.
(2) Install stop, sleeve, plunger, seat, spring, and plug into body.
Tighten plug (5) to a torque value of 150 to 250 inch-pounds.
UP136688
73-21-04
Page 208
Aug 12/91
lied
g
30
~ t'" 25
/20
j15
j.lO
E-44A-3722
Se PLUG 35. SLEEVE

I0. PACKING 40. PACKING
20. SEAT 50. STOP
25. PLUNGER 55. BODYASSY
30. PACKING
UP136688
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Pressurizing Valve Assembly

Figure 204. 73-21-04
R Page 209
Aug 12/91
~ /lied
jm
j25
1o
E-44G-899
R 5. PLUG 35. SLEEVE

R 15. SPRING 45. PACKING
R 20. SEAT 50. STOP
R 25. PLUNGER 60. BODY
R 30. PACKING
R (Code GA)
UP136688
R Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve Assembly

R Figure 205 73-21-04
Page 210
Aug 12/91
/Allied
. C. (Code GA) Partially Disassemble Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve Assembly
(See Figure 205)
R NOTE: Valve plunger is spring-loaded, and care must be
R exercised during removal to prevent inadvertent
R ejection of plunger, spring, and seat when plug is
R removed.
R (I) Removeplug, spring, seat, plunger, sleeve, and stop. Removeand
R discard old packings.
D. (Code GA) Assemble Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve Assembly (See Figure
205)
R NOTE: Lightly coat new packings and gaskets with clean
R engine fuel or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)
R prior to assembly.
R (i) Install new packings onto valve components.
R (2) Install stop, sleeve, plunger, seat, spring, and plug into body.
R Tighten plug (5) to a torque value of 150 to 250 inch,pounds.
73-21-04
UP136688
Page 211/212
Aug 12/91
Allial.~ignalAerospaceCompany
~/lied
GARRETT TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01,27)
INLET TEMPERATURESENSOR, INLET TEMPERATUREAND
PRESSURESENSOR, AND FUEL CONTROLASSEMBLY -
. Removal/Instal I ati on

required to perform Approved/Repairs.
Table 202 provides a l i s t of all special tools, fixtures

Any approved engine oil Commercial ly avai I able
R Source/
R Nomenclature Use Part No.
R NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed item.

R Fuel Control Torquing Used to torque nuts securing 294670-1
R Wrench Set fuel control to fuel pump
R assembly.
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 201
Aug 12/91
Signal
~!lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARR-ETT TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
. A. (Codes AA-CC) RemoveTemperatureSensor (See Figure 201)
(1) Disconnect pneumatic line from temperature sensor in accordance
(2) Remove bolts, washers, and bushings securing temperature sensor to
input housing assembly. Removeinlet temperature sensor and
gasket.
threads of bolts prior to installation.
B. (Codes AA-CC) Install Temperature Sensor (See Figure 201)
(1) Install gasket, bushings, washers, and bolts securing temperature
sensor to input housing assembly. Tighten bolts (5) to a torque
(2) Connect pneumatic lines to temperature sensor in accordance with
C. (Codes DA-FB) Remove Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (See Figure
202)
(1) Removeinlet temperature and pressure sensor plumbing in accordance
WITH CARE, AS UNIT IS PRE-CALIBRATED. THE
SENSING ELEMENTAND BELLOWSARE PRECISION
PARTS. CAPILLARYTUBEJOINING SENSINGELEMENT
AND BELLOWSMUSTNOT BE KINKED, OR LEAKAGEMAY
RESULT.
(2) Removescrews and washers securing bellows end of inlet temperature
and pressure sensor to fuel control unit.
(3) Removepacking from bellows end of inlet temperature and pressure
sensor.
(4) Remove bolts, washers, bushings, and insulator to disconnect sensor

end of i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor from input housing
assembly.
UP136688
73-21-05
R Page 202
Aug 12/91
~/IJed
........V-..
o .-" • t ;
;, t l-"
;: t t 6
;. 4 qt
o.'; t i 0
a t •
:
::
,t
;.
• o.~, 1 ..-"
- /-
/
,
: :..-"
."
.;
gC ,NL
20
1C
E--44G-710
So BOLT 20. INLETTEMPERATURE

10. WASHER SENSOR
15. BUSHING 40. GASKET
(Codes AA-CC) Inlet Temperature Sensor Installation
UP136688
Figure 201 73-21-05

R Page 203
Aug 12/91
1slied
MAINTENANCEMANOAL ignal
• ,....
, ... ; : "-'::.',.
• ::--.. - , ':";~;, ".;,..' . "-.

..... •, ::.".~.,. "f. }. • ;~ . +. :; :
~., .... . /-. ~:j~ ." ,~.~-"\ .-. ; ~, : .... :

, -- ~,}-~ "' ~£T;~=~ ~ i "-~'! ,".~ " "; ' ." :"
F'-', ":"-;' ~>~,~1 ~-- ". v/'/.e. : ~/';". " ::

:>, -%,.," ,.p" ~ ,- . . . . .>,, ..... .. , . -. .:
..IUU / /. -'.• "-.'.".,, ~I , : ":

"\~•~ ~ ".- .,.;~ .', : ;:
/",i x" S5 ~ ,,...'.:, , .: ..:-., :.
I "\ A.
i ,5, o
L.J " <>-'~ "
111
(Codes DA-FB) Inlet Temperature and Pressure

UP136688
Sensor Instal lation

Figure 202 73-21-05
R Page 204
Aug 12/91
Allied-Signal A I_e_:_.___eCompany
/AUied ....
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~--)Signal

. D. (Codes DA-FB) Install Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (See Figure
202)
PARTS. CAPILLARYTUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENT
RESULT.

recommended values.
Lightly coat new packings and gaskets with clean
engine fuel or lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5)
prior to installation. Apply lubricating compound
(Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts,
screws, and studs.
(1) Install i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor onto input housing
assembly with insulator, bushings, washers, and bolts. Tighten
bolts (35, 50, 70) to a torque value of 25 inch-pounds.
(2) Install new packing onto bellows end of i n l e t temperature and pres-
sure sensor and install into fuel control unit.
(3) Install washers and screws. Tighten screws (85) to a torque value
of 25 inch-pounds.
(4) Install inlet temperature and pressure sensor plumbing in accor-
KEY TO FIGURE 202
. BOLT 60. CLAMP

10. NUT 65. BUSHING
15. CLAMP 70. BOLT
20. NUT 75. WASHER
25. BOLT 80. BUSHING
30. CLAMP 85. SCREW
35. BOLT 90. WASHER
40. WASHER 95. INLETTEMPERATUREAND
45. BUSHING PRESSURE SENSOR
55. WASHER 105. INSULATOR
73-21-05
UP136688
Page 205
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignaIAerosl~e ~lmny ~=~lied

<.~~
' " :. i .,
'
PARTIALLY ASSEMBLED "~"." ." .':

FUEL CONTROL ~i" :,.:;
. . . . . . . .,/:.~-::~.~ ..........
lg E-.44G-1536

R 10. NUT 80. BUSHING
R 15. CLAMP 81. SCREW
R 25. BOLT 85. SCREW
R 30. CLAMP 90. WASHER
R 45. BUSHING 100. BRACKET
R 55. WASHER 110. INLETTEMPERATURE
R 60. CLAMP AND PRESSURESENSOR
R 65. BUSHING 115. PACKING
R 70. BOLT 120. INSULATOR
R (Code GA)
UP136688
R Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor

Figure 203 73-21-05
R
Page 206
Aug 12/91
ignal
~_/lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. D. (5) Install clamps (15) and secure to i n l e t temperature and pressure
sensor tube assembly. Tighten nuts (10) to a torque value of 27
inch-pounds.
(6) Install clamp (30) and secure to rear turbine bearing oil tube
assembly. Tighten nut (20) to a torque value of 20 to 25 inch-
pounds.
R CAUTION: HANDLE INLET TEMPERATUREAND PRESSURESENSORWITH
R CARE, AS UNIT IS PRE-CALIBRATED. THE SENSING ELE-
R MENTAND BELLOWSARE PRECISION PARTS. CAPILLARY
R TUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENTAND BELLOWSMUSTNOT BE
R KINKED, OR LEAKAGEMAY RESULT.
R E. (Code GA) RemoveInlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (See Figure
R 203)
R (1) Remove inlet temperature and pressure sensor plumbing in accordance
R (2) Remove screws, washers, and bracket securing bellows end of inlet
R temperature and pressure sensor to fuel control assembly.
(3) Removenuts, bolts, and clamps securing inlet temperature and pres-
sure sensor tube assembly.
(4) Remove bolts, washers, clamp, and bushings securing i n l e t tempera-
ture and pressure sensor. Removei n l e t temperature and pressure•
sensor and insulator.
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 207
Aug 12/91
Allied.~gnalAerospaceCompany
. . . . . . ~llied
r
CAUTION: HANDLE INLET TEMPERATUREAND PRESSURESENSORWITH

CARE, AS UNIT IS PRE-CALIBRATED. THE SENSING ELE-
MENT AND BELLOWSARE PRECISION PARTS. CAPILLARY
TUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENTAND BELLOWSMUSTNOT BE
KINKED, OR LEAKAGEMAY RESULT.

torque) of self-locking devices to recommended values.
L i g h t l y coat new packings with clean engine fuel or l u -

Apply l u b r i c a t i n g compound (Liqui-Moly, Grade NV) to
threads of screws.
I. F. (CodeGA) Install Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (See Figure

203)
(1) Install inlet temperatureand pressure sensor onto accessory drive

housing assembly with insulator, bushings, washers, clamp, and
bolts. Tighten bolts (35, 50, 70) to a torque value of 25 inch-
pounds.
(2) I n s t a l l new packing onto bellows end of i n l e t temperature and pres-
sure sensor and i n s t a l l with bracket into fuel control assembly.
(3) I n s t a l l bracket, washers and screws. Tighten screws (85, 95) to a

torque value of 20 to 25 inch-pounds. Tighten screw (81) to a
(4) I n s t a l l clamps, bolts, and nuts. Tighten nuts (10, 25) to a torque
(5) I n s t a l l i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor plumbing in accor-

UP136688
73-21-05
Page 208
Aug 12/91
gnal ~:~/ilied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Before replacing fuel control unit with another com-
plete unit, ensure trouble has been isolated to this
component. Refer to Adjustment/Test for maintenance
procedures which may correct malfunctions.
I. Go (Codes AA-CC) Remove Fuel Control (See Figure204)
(1) Disconnect controls linkage assembly in accordance with 76-10-01,

(2) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel control unit in accordance

(3) Disconnect electrical connector from fuel enrichment valve.

(4) Removefuel enrichment valve, i f required. Refer to 73-21-04,
(5) (Pre SB 73-0028, SB 73-0029) Remove bracket and support assembly
from rear of fuel control unit.
(6) (Post SB 73-0028, SB 73-0029) Remove support assembly from rear of
fuel control unit.
R (7) Using 294670-1 wrench set, remove nut and washers securing fuel
control unit to fuel pump.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVER OR OTHERPOINTED OBJECT
TO REMOVEFUEL CONTROLOR DAMAGETO FUEL CON-
TROL OR FUEL PUMPMAY OCCUR.
(8) Remove fuel control unit in a straight line to avoid damage to

coupling splines.
(9) Remove packings between fuel control unit and fuel pump assembly.
(10) Remove connector tube or f i l t e r assembly and packings.
(11) Refer to Approved Repairs for breakdown.
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 209
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAemspaceCompany '~llied
175 m'-'~-,x% .- --'~,'." I

0 lS5 - . ~,,~'Ji L.%;:)., oI: #. :,~,.,,/
-...j/T^"
o p ~.
180
/~'"" 115 120
95 --.,..-~ "~'lOO
E-44G-716
5. HUT 50. WASHER 105. BOLT
10. WASHER 55. WASHER 110. SUPPORT
15. BOLT 65. RIVET 115. HUT
20. WASHER 70. NUTPLATE 120. WASHER
25. WASHER 75. SUPPORT 125. FUELCONTROLASSY
30. BOLT 80. BOLT 165. PACKING
35. BRACKET 90. WASHER 170. TUBE
40. NUT 95. NUT 175. FILTER ASSY
45. BOLT 100. WASHER 180. PACKING
185. PACKING
UP136688
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control Installation

Figure 204 73-21-05
R Page 210
Aug 12/91
.~llied
• MAINTENANCEMANUAL ~-~Signal
I. H. (Codes AA-CC) Install Fuel Control and Enrichment Valve Assembly (See
Figure 204)
CAUTION: WHEN PNEUMATICTEES, RESTRICTORS, NUTS, AND CAPSARE
INSTALLED, EXERCISE CARETHAT NO CONTAMINATION IS
INTRODUCED OR THREADLUBRICATION COMPOUNDIS USED.
ENSURE PROPERALIGNMENTAND THREADENGAGEMENTTO
PREVENT GALLINGAND/OR CROSSTHREADING.
NOTE: Lubricate packings or gaskets used in fuel system with
any type jet fuel prior to installation unless other-
wise specified. Packings or gaskets used in pneumatic
system may be installed dry. An alternate lubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used on all packings or
gaskets prior to installation unless otherwise
specified. Apply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly
to a thintransparent film to minimize contamination.
threads of bolts and screws, and apply clean engine oil
to threads (except f i r s t two threads) of male plumbing
f i t t i n g s used in fuel system located forward of the
fireshield unless otherwise specified.
(1) Ensure coupling has been installed. Refer to Approved Repairs for
installation.
(2) Install connector tube or f i l t e r assembly as applicable, with new
packings, into fuel control unit.
(3) Install new packing between fuel control unit and fuel pump
assembly.
(4) Align fuel control unit onto fuel pump assembly, exercising care so
splines on coupling and fuel pump splines mesh properly.
(5) Install washers and nuts. Tighten nuts (115) to a torque value of
R 65 inch-pounds using 294670-1 wrench set.
UP136688
J
73-21-05
Page 211
Aug 12/91
.,~llied
. H. (6) (Pre SB 73-0028) Install bracket and support assembly.
(a) Install support assembly (75) onto compressor housing and
secure with washers, bolts, and nuts. Tighten nuts (40) to a
(b) Install bracket (35) onto support assembly and secure with
bolts. Tighten bolts (30) to a torque value of 55 inch-
pounds.
(c) Install bolt and washers (20, 25) as required from mounting
boss on fuel control to bearing surface of support to avoid
bending support. Tighten bolt (15) to a torque value of 60
inch-pounds.
(7) (Post SB 73-0028) Install support assembly.
CAUTION: ATTACH SUPPORTASSEMBLYTO FUEL CONTROLUNIT
AND TIGHTEN PRIORTO ATTACHINGSUPPORTASSEMBLY
TO PLENUMFLANGE. NO WASHERSARE ALLOWED
BETWEEN SUPPORTASSEMBLYAND FUEL CONTROLUNIT
OR BETWEENSUPPORTASSEMBLYAND PLENUMFLANGE.
jSUPPORT ASSEMBLYIS DESIGNEDTO CONFORMTO TOL-
~ ERANCECONDITIONTHATMAY EXIST BETWEENFUEL
CONTROL UNIT AND PLENUMFLANGE.
(a) (Pre SB 73-0029) Install bolts, washers, and nuts. Tighten
nut (5) to a torque value of 55 inch-pounds.
(b) (Post SB 73-0029) Install bolt and washer. Tighten bolt (80)
to a torque value of 100 inch-pounds. Lockwire bolt.
(c) Install bolts, washers, and nuts. Tighten bolts (105) to a
(8) Install fuel enrichment valve assembly. 'Refer to 73-21-04, Main-
tenance Practices.
(9) Connect electrical connector to fuel enrichment valve. Refer to
Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
(10) Connect tube assemblies to fuel control. Refer to 73-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
Practices.
UP136688
73-21-05
R Page 212
Aug 12/91
Allied.S(qnalAerospaceCompany
lied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Jgnal
R THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK

UP136688
73-21-05
Page 213
Aug 12/91
Alli~.SignalAerospaceCompany ..... "/]~llied

MAINTENANCEMANUAL ~--~Signal
.\ \
~'\ \ \
:".:::.":. " ;" X
....... ...-:.~<~:..-, .... ,,,

: ";" .... "" E~ " ~ - : -'-~\\.'$~,'-~- ,'
".~ -'~;.;.~-.~ C .: "-::: .... : ,. " - ' , : i
:/ <~-L: . . . . . ~,,~\....-~:,.:.....- ,, ,,
1 7 0 ~ , ~.. \ ,,
\'~,^ \ "> . .>/ \-~ . . ...
, , , v ,
.:..., - ~... ,,
,,
___ 185,....~ ~ \',~....~ . ~ . . . .~.~,, - 1....... :,,

-.~:
165..-- ~ ..,, .:... : .,,
187_ "~)~ / / / U.r.',-:..'." " ,"
200 ~ ~-.'~n ...--",> ,~;

I ~~" ~1i~1 ..... "~:. ~ .-~"
.<! \~"~e ~ " ,~u
..
............... :~...." .......
\
E-44G-1468
110
UP136688
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Control Assembly Installation

Figure205 73-21-05
Page 214
Aug 12/91
/lied
1. Io (Codes DA-FB) Remove Fuel Control (See Figure 205)
(1) Disconnect controls linkage assembly. Refer to 76-10-01, Mainte-

nance Practices.
(2) Disconnect tube assemblies and remove f i t t i n g s from fuel control.

PARTS. CAPILLARYTUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENT
RESULT.
(3) Removefuel pressurizing valve, i f required. Refer to 73-21-04,
R NOTE: Do not remove rivets (135) or nutplates (140) from
R support (145) unless damage is indicated by
R inspection.
R (4) Removenuts, washers, bolts and supports from fuel control mounting
R flange.
R (5) Using 294670-I wrenchset, remove screw, nuts, and washers securing
R fuel control assembly to fuel pump.
KEY TO FIGURE 205
R 80. BOLT 150. NUT

R ii0. SUPPORT 165. WASHER
R 120. WASHER 185. TRANSFERTUBE
R 125. BOLT 186. PACKING
R 135. RIVET 187. SCREEN
R 140. NUTPLATE 190. PACKING
R 145. SUPPORT 200. FUELCONTROLASSY
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 215
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~ S ilied
gnal
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVEROR OTHER POINTEDOBJECT
TO PRY FUELCONTROLAWAYFROMFUEL PUMPAS THIS
MAY DAMAGEFUEL CONTROLCASEOR P2 BELLOWS IN-
SIDE END OF FUEL CONTROL.
. I. (6) Removefuel control assembly in a straight line to avoid damage to

drive splines.
(7) Removepackings and washers between fuel control assembly and fuel
pump assembly. Record number and thickness of washers.
(8) Removetransfer tube, with packings, and screen. Removeand
discard packings.
J. (Codes DA-FB) Install Fuel Control Assembly (See Figure 205)
NOTE: Lubricate packings or gaskets used in fuel system with

any type jet fuel prior to installation unless other-
wise specified. Packings or gaskets used in pneumatic
system may be installed dry. An alternate lubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) may be used on all packings or
gaskets prior to installation unless otherwise
specified. Apply lubricant sparingly and spread evenly
to a thin transparent film to minimize contamination.
threads of bolts, screws, and studs unless otherwise
specified.
(1) Install new packing (190) between fuel control and fuel pump
assembly.
(2) Shim fuel control inlet transfer tul)e as follows. (See Figure
206.)
(a) Install fuel control inlet transfer tube in fuel pump
assembly.
(b) Measuredimension A and determine thickness of washers

required to obtain dimension A. Dimension A shall be 0.200 to
0.215 inch.
(c) Install washers (170), ~s required, into fuel pump assembly
until Dimension A equals 0.200 to 0.215 inch.
UP136688
73-21'05
Page 216
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (•/liedignal
R 1. J. (2) (d) Install screen into inlet transfer tube.
(e) Install new packings (186) on fuel control inlet transfer

tube. Install fuel control inlet transfer tube.
R (3) Install support (145) with bolts, washers and nuts onto input
R housing assembly flange. Tightenbolts (125) to a torque value of
CAUTION: DO NOT PACKFUEL CONTROLDRIVE COUPLINGSPLINE
WITH ANY TYPE OF GREASE.
(4) Align fuel control assembly onto fuel pump assembly and secure with
washers, nuts, and screw. Tighten nuts (150), and screw (160) to a
torque value of 65 inch-pounds using 294670-I wrench set.
(5) Install support (110) onto support assembly (145) and secure with
bolts. Tighten bolts (105) to a torque value of 45 to 55 inch-
pounds.
(6) Install washers (85) as required from mounting boss on fuel control
assembly to bearing surface of support to avoid bending support.
Use sufficient additional washers from surface of bolt to support
to obtain 0.192 to 0.204 inch total between mounting boss on fuel
control and bearing surface of bolt. Tighten bolt (80) to a torque
(7) (Post SB 73-0131) Lockwire bolts (80, 105).
(8) I f removed, install fuel pressurizing valve assembly. Refer to

DIM. A
1 / FUELCONTROL INLET
TRANSFERTUBE
FUEL PUMPASSY
1-44G-B04
Shimming of Fuel Control Inlet Transfer Tube

UP136688
Figure 206 73-21-05

P~age 217
Aug 12/91
/Allied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~---~Signal
GARRETT TPE331,5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
%
%
%
%
\ %
\ %
\
~Nx
• ':°"°" ~
155 o,,° "°,,, '-°
150- ~ •
,.1,#
k. ~.. ,~...,..:,,
', \
190_ ....
235
110 175 238 -,-,,~.#, .-,°

:: Q,
......-- ~ ,,
,...;..-'~.~ ,* , ~
• _,,%" ,t~' 1t
• o ;,, ~ aa
/ /
250 t 4 " ' t ,~ - - --tq
s
~'~ . . . . :~..~.-_ ~ ,,
• .. _ , .......-~,~ ,, ,,
"~
• ' .-" ,'.o* %, | 11
~>::--" ~ ; : ,
215 220 •~ . , ::::. :., .:
.... , ' . ,~V

R
.- .
\
E-.44G- 1426
105 115
110
R 80. BOLT 145. SUPPORT 200. SCREW

R 85. WASHER 150. NUT 210. WASHER
R 105. BOLT 155. WASHER 215. SUPPORTBRACKET
R 110. SUPPORT 160. NUT 220. WASHER
R 115. NUT 165. WASHER 230. PACKING
R 120. WASHER 170. SUPPORTBRACKET 234. TRANSFERTUBE
R 125. BOLT 175. WASHER 235. PACKING
R 135. RIVET 180. SCREW 238. SCREEN
R 140. NUT PLATE 190. WASHER 250. FUELCONTROLASSY
UP136688
R (Code GA) Fuel Control Assembly

Figure 207 73-21-05
Page 218
Aug 12/91
~:~/lied
1. J. (9) Install fittings and connect tube assemblies to fuel control assem-
bly and fuel pressurizing valve in accordance with 73-10-01, Main-
tenance Practices.
(lO) Connect control linkage assembly. Refer to 76-10-01, Maintenance

Practices.
R K. (Code GA) RemoveFuel Control Assembly (See Figure 207)

(I) Disconnect controls linkage assembly in accordance with 76-10-01,
(2) Removefuel control plumbing in accordance with 73-10-01, Mainte-
nance Practices.
R (3) Removefuel pressure regulator valve in accordance with 73-21-04,
R Maintenance Practices.
R NOTE: Do not remove rivets (135) or nutplates (140) from

R support (145) unless damage is indicated by
R inspection.
R (4) Remove nuts, washers, bolts and supports from fuel control mounting
R flange.
R (B) Using 294670-1 wrench set, remove screw, support bracket nuts, and
R washers securing fuel control assembly to fuel pump.
R CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVEROR OTHERPOINTEDOBJECT

R TO PRY FUEL CONTROLAWAYFROMFUEL PUMPAS THIS
R MAY DAMAGEFUEL CONTROLCASEOR P2 BELLOWS IN-
R SIDE END OF FUEL CONTROL.
R (6) Removefuel control assembly in a straight line to avoid damage to
R drive spl ines.
(7) Remove packings and washers between fuel control assembly and fuel
pump assembly. Record number and thickness of washers.
(8) Remove transfer tube, with packings, and screen. Removeand
discard packings.
73-21-05
UP136688
Page 219
Aug 12/91
lied
R installation unless otherwise specified. Apply l u b r i -
R bolts located forward of the fireshield unless other-
R wise specified.
Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for recommended
R I, L. (Code GA) Install Fuel Control Assembly (See Figure 207)
R (i) Install new packing (230) between fuel control and fuel pump
R assembly.
R (2) Install screen into inlet transfer tube.
R (3) Install new packings (235) on fuel control inlet transfer tube.
R Install fuel control inlet transfer tube.
R (4) Install support (145) with bolts, washers and nuts onto input
R housing assembly flange. Tighten bolts (125) to a torque value of
R CAUTION: DO NOT PACKFUEL CONTROLDRIVE COUPLINGSPLINE
R WITH ANY TYPE OF GREASE.
R (5) Align the fuel control assembly onto the fuel pump assembly and
R secure with washers, support bracket, nuts, and screw. Tighten
R nuts (150, 160, Figure 207) and screws (180, 200) to a torque value
R of 65 inch-pounds using 294670-1 wrench set.
R (6) Install support (110) on support assembly (145) and secure with
R bolts. Tighten bolts (105) to a torque value of 45 to 55 inch-
R pounds.
R (7) Install washers as required from mounting boss on fuel control as-
R sembly to bearing surface to support to avoid bending support. Use
R sufficient additional washers from surface of bolt to support to
R obtain 0.192 to 0.204 inch total between mounting boss on fuel con-
R trol unit and bearing surface of bolt. Tighten bolt (80) to a
(8) Lockwire bolts (80, 105).

UP136688
73-21-05
• Page 220
Aug 12/91
//~llied
MAINTENANCE
kINTENANCE MANUAL ~---~Signal
R 2. Adjustment/Test
R NOTE: Table 203 provides a l i s t of all materials and equipment

R required to perform Adjustment/Test.

R
R Equipment or Materials Manufacturer

R
R NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed items.
R Air Source Commercial ly available

R (CompressedAir or Nitrogen)
R Capable of providing
R 150 psi pressure
R Gage (Pressure) Commercially available
R Capable of indicating
R 0 to 10 psi,
R ±2 percent accuracy,
R 1 psi increments
R Gage (Pressure) Commercial I y avai I able
R Capable of indicating
R 0 to 150 psi,
R ±2 percent accuracy
R Manual Shutoff Valve Commercially avail abl e
R Mini-Master Flowmeter Dwyer Instruments, P.O. Box 373,

R Model MMF-1 Michigan City, IN 46360
R 0.1 to 1.0 SCEH
R Regulator (pressure) Commercial ly available
R Capableof regulating pressure
R at 0 to 150 psig
R Tube (0.250 inch ID, CommercialI y avail able
R soft silicone)
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 221
Aug 12/91
lied
R 2. A. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control Ps3 Rolling Diaphragm Leakage Check Recom-
R mended Procedure
R (1) RemovePs3 and Pt2 sensing lines from fuel control.
(2) Connect test equipment as follows. See Figure 208.
R (a) Connect a source of clean, filtered, compressed air or ni-

R trogen to a regulator. Set regulator at 150 psig.
R (b) Install a 0 to 150 psi pressure gage at regulator outlet.
R (c) Connect a tube from gage to fuel control Ps3 port.
R NOTE: A metal tube may be used in lieu of the soft

R silicone tube.
(d) Connect a 0.250 inch ID soft silicone tube on fuel control Pt2
port.
R NOTE: The sleeve on flowmeter may beremoved i f

R required.
R (e) Install opposite end of soft silicone tube on flowmeter inlet

R port. Ensure a tight f i t at both ends of soft tube.
R NOTE: Observe flowmeter while applying pressure to Ps3

R port.
R (3) Slowly apply pressure to fuel control Ps3 port until pressure gage
R reads 20 psig. Flowmeter should indicate flow briefly, as the
R rolling diaphragm travels, and then return to zero.
R (4) Reject fuel control i f any flow is indicated on flowmeter with

R pressure applied.
R (5) Repeat step (3) at the following pressures. After initial indica-
R tion of flow, due to rolling diaphragm travel, no flow indication
R is allowed.
R (a) 40 psig
R (b) 60 psig
R (c) 80 psig
R (d) 100 psig
R l~I 120 p s i g
R 140 psig
R (g) 150 psig
(6) Reject fuel control i f any flow is indicated at any of the above
pressures.
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 222
Aug 12/91
/J~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-~---~Signal
PO~T . T I0
•
" /4 I
N
R
J
i
T-44q~- 147
R 5. AIR SOURCE 15. PRESSUREGAGE

R (COMPRESSEDAIR 20. FLOWMETER
R OR NITROGEN) 25. FUELCONTROL
R 10. REGULATOR
R (Codes DA-GA)
R Fuel Control Ps3 Rolling Diaphragm
Recommended Test Setup
UP136688
R
R Figure 208 73-21-05
Page 223
• Aug 12/91
"~llied
R . A. (7) Removetest equipment and reconnect lines removed from Pt2 and Ps3
R ports.
R B. (Codes DA-GA) Fuel Control Ps3 Rolling Diaphragm Leakage Check Alter-
R nate Procedure
R (i) RemovePs3 and Pt2 sensing lines from fuel control.
R (2) Connectt e s t equipment as follows. See Figure 209.
(a) Connect a source of clean, f i l t e r e d , compressed a i r or ni-

trogen to a regulator. Set regulator at 150 psig.
(b) Install a 0 to 150 psi pressure gage at regulator outlet.
(c) Connect a tube from gage to fuel control Ps3 port.
(d) Connect a manual shutoff valve to a pressure gage with 1 psig

increments. Connect a tube from pressure gage to fuel control
Pt2 port.
(3) Fully open manual shutoff valve and verify Pt2 pressure gage reads
0 psig.
R CAUTION: PRESSUREMUSTBE APPLIED TO PS3 PORTSLOWLY,

R AND PT2 GAGEMUSTBE MONITOREDWHILE PRESSURE
R TO PS3 PORTIS INCREASED. DO NOT ALLOWANY
R PRESSURE INCREASE TO BE OBSERVEDON THE PT2
R GAGE WITH MANUAL SHUTOFFVALVE OPEN.
R (4) Slowly increase pressure to Ps3 port from 0 to 150 psig while ob-
R serving Pt2 pressure gage. I f a pressure increase is noted on the
R Pt2 gage at any pressure;
R (a) Decrease pressure applied to Ps3 port to 0 psig.
(b) Reject fuel control.
(5) If no pressure rise is observed on Pt2 gage, close manual shutoff
valve at Pt2 port, Verify Pt2 pressure gage reads 0 psig.
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 224
Aug 12/91
.~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL '-'~---~Signal
R CAUTION: PRESSURE MUSTBE APPLIED TO PS3 PORTSLOWLY,

R AND PT2 GAGEMUSTBE MONITOREDWHILE PRESSURE
R TO PS3 PORT IS INCREASED. DO NOT ALLOWANY
R PRESSUREOBSERVED ON THE PT2 GAGETO EXCEED10
R PSIG WITH MANUALSHUTOFFVALVE CLOSED.
R 2, B. (6) Slowly increase pressure to Ps3 port fromO to 150 psig while ob-
R serving Pt2 pressure gage. I f a pressure increase is noted on the
R Pt2 gage:
R (a) Decrease pressure applied to Ps3 port to 0 psig.
R (b) I f any pressure is indicated on Pt2 gage, reject fuel control.
R (7) Removetest equipment and reconnect lines removed from Pt2 and Ps3
R ports.
C. Perform Adjustment/Test Procedures

R Perform adjustment/test procedures as outlined in 72-00-00,
R Adjustment/Test, for fuel control unit.
UP136688
73-21-05
• ~i Page 225
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany ~/lied
3o--I I
Ps3 -- j15
PORT
R
j5
T-44G-146
R 5. AIR SOURCE 15. PRESSUREGAGE

R (COMPRESSEDAIR 20. MANUALSHUTOFFVALVE
R OR NITROGEN) 25. PRESSUREGAGE
R 10. REGULATOR 30. FUELCONTROL
R (Codes DA-GA)
R Fuel Control Ps3 Rolling Diaphragm
UP136688
R Alternate Test Setup

R Figure 209 73-21-05
Page 226
Aug 12/91
AllieE.SipalAemspaceCompany
lied
3. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor as Follows
(1) Visually inspect inlet temperature and pressure sensor for security
and evidence of damage.
(2) Visually inspect tube in inlet end of inlet temperature and pres-
sure sensor for d i r t and obstructions.
(3) Visually inspect bellows on inlet temperature and pressure sensor
for collapsing, cracks, and breaks. I f bellows cannot be further
compressed, unit is defective.
(4) Visually inspect capillary tube for chaffing, kinks, cracks, and
leakage.
(5) Inspect output stroke of inlet'temperature and pressure sensor bel-
lows as follows. (See figure 210.)
(a) Cool probe and bellows at approximately 4.4C (4OF) to ensure
insert retracts and Dimension A is less than 1.02 inches.
(b) Maintain temperature of probe and bellows at 23.9C (75F).
(c) Provide and install 0.150 inch diameter ball in end of insert
and apply 15 pounds force against ball.
(d) Measure Dimension A. Output stroke of bellows (Dimension A)

shall be approximately 1.02 inches.
BELLOWS
D~M. A I 1'-
1 U\
INSERT
0.150 DIA BALL
1-44A-2089
UP136688
Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Installation

Figure 210 73-21-05
Page 227
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAeroslJaCe~,wnpany
lied
3. B. Perform Inspection Check
(1) Check fuel control for security, loose f i t t i n g s , fuel leakage, and
damage.
(2) Check fuel control for freedom of lever rotation.
CAUTION: IF FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLYIS BROKENAND ALL

BROKEN PIECES ARE NOT RECOVERED, REPLACEFUEL
CONTROL UNIT.
}
(3) (Codes AA-CC) Visually inspect fuel f i l t e r assembly for cracks,

breakage, corrosion, contamination, and damage.
NOTE Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed items.

Beaker (200 m i l l i l i t e r capacity) Commercially available
Blackstone heated tank ultrasonic Blackstone Ultrasonics Inc, 1111 Allen

cleaner (Model HT 1.9) St, Jamestown, NY 14701
Alternate
Sonac ultrasonic cleaner Cooper Laboratories Inc, 300 Fairfield Rd,
(Model S-2) Wayne, NJ 07470
P-D-680, Type I)
R 1,1,1-Trichloroethane Commercially available
R (MIL-T-81533)
UP136688
73-21'05
Page 228
Aug 12/91
~/lied
4. A. Clean Parts
(1) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer to 72-00-00,
(2) Clean fittings. Refer to 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning
Method No. 12.
(3) Clean outside surfaces of fuel control. Refer to 72-00-00,
(4) Clean external surface of inlet temperature and pressure sensor, in

accordance with 72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1.
R (5) Clean electrical connector in accordance with 72-00-00,
R Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 11.
B. (Codes AA-CC) Perform Special Cleaning of Inlet Fuel Filter Assembly

(1) Place inlet fuel f i l t e r open end down in beaker and f i l l beaker
R with 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) to submerge fuel inlet
filter.
(2) Place beaker containing fuel inlet f i l t e r in ultrasonic cleaner
tank and f i l l ultrasonic cleaner tank to within 3/8 inch of top
with water.
(3) Operate ultrasonic cleaner for 15 minutes.
R (4) Discard contaminated 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) and rinse

R fuel inlet f i l t e r and beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
R (5) Refill beaker with clean 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533) and
operate ultrasonic cleaner for an additional 15 minutes.
R (6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) until 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (MIL-T-81533)
remains clean after final operation period.
(7) Remove the inlet fuel f i l t e r from the beaker and blow dry using
clean, low pressure air supply.
(8) Rinse the inlet fuel f i l t e r with solvent (Federal Specification
P-D-680, Type I).
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 229
Aug 12/91
/Allied
5. Approved Repairs

Penetrating oil (CRC 3-36) Commercial ly available
Plastic fiber bristled brush Commercially avail able
Solvent (Federal Specification Commercial ly availabl e

P-D-680, Type I)
A. (Codes AA-CC) Perform Repair Procedures for No Engine Start and No Fuel
Flow from Outlet of Fuel Control as Follows
(1) Remove, clean, and reinstall fuel control by-pass valve as follows.
(See Figure 211.)
(a) Mark by-pass valve flangeand fuel control casting to keep
same relative position.
(b) Measure distance from by-pass valve flange to top of specific
gravity notched detent cap and record specific gravity
setting. This measurement is a reference in case the specific
gravity notched detent cap is rotated from its original
setting.
(c) Remove screws securing by-pass valve to fuel control assembly.
(d) Remove detent spring and remove bypass valve cover assembly by
gently working back and forth. The spring under the cover may
push cover assembly out. The spring is not attached to cover
and is removed as a separate part.
UP136688
73-21-05
R Page 230
Aug 1.2/91
/,#'~llied
5. A. (1) (e) Removespring washer and diaphragm retainer ring.
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGEDIAPHRAGMOF BY-PASSVALVE

ASSEMBLY DURINGREMOVAL.
NOTE: I f diaphragm sticks during removal, use a

wooden or plastic probe to release the di-
aphragm seal at outer diameter.
(f) Remove by-pass valve assembly by grasping cap shaped diaphragm
retainer on the by-pass valve assembly with needle nose pliers
and gently pulling assembly from fuel control assembly.
(g) Remove nut securing by-pass valve sleeve in fuel control body
and remove by-pass valve sleeve from body.
(h) Remove packing from by-pass valve bore and packings from by-
pass valve sleeve.
CAUTION: OPERATINGBOOSTPUMPWILL FLUSH A LARGE
QUANTITY OF FUEL FROMBY-PASS VALVEAREA.
OPERATE BOOSTPUMPMOMENTARILYTO AVOID
EXCESS FUEL DRAINAGE.
(i) Provide a container to catch fuel overflow and flush by-pass
valve assembly cavity with fuel, using the electrically driven
boost pump.
(J) Lubricate packing with clean engine fuel or lubricant (0S-124

or Santovac 5) and install in bottom of by-pass valve bore.
Ensure packing is properly centered in bore.
(k) Lubricate packings with clean engine fuel or lubricant (0S-124

or Santovac 5) and install on by-pass valvesleeve.
(I) Install by-pass valve sleeve into bore of fuel control body.
Rotate by-pass valve sleeve slightly to ensure packing in-
stalled in bore seats properly. Secure by-pass valve sleeve
with washer and nut. Tighten nut (110) to a torque value of
UP136688
73-21-05
R Page 231
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~_~/lied
ignal
i. 6O
" ~ ~ 70 s5 ~....~.- 5
.~ 35.
125
120
135
E-44G-717
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Control

UP136688
(Partial Breakdown)
Figure 211. 73-21-05
R Page 232
Aug 12/91
lied
5. A. (1) (m) Install by-pass valve assembly in fuel control unit.
(n) Install diaphragm retainer ring, spring washer, and spring.
(o) Install new packing on by-pass valve cover assembly.

(p) Install by-pass valve cover assembly and detent spring, align-
ing reference marks made in step (a). Secure with screws and
tighten screws (50) to a torque value of 30 inch-pounds.
(q) Check for proper specific gravity setting and reference meas-
urement made in step (b).
(2) Remove, clean, and reinstall fuel control pressurizing valve as

(a) Removetwo screws and washers securing cover.
(b) Gently move cover back and forth to remove. Inspect packing
on cover to ensure i t is not chipped.
(c) Inspect small bleed hole in cover for obstruction. I f bleed
hole is plugged, pressurizing valve will not open.
NOTE: Use care not to damage or misplace laminated
shims under spring.
(d) Remove spring. Using soft metal probe, move pressurizing
valve up and down in sleeve, checking for freedom of movement.
The pressurizing valve and packings may be removed and the
area ~ushed as described in step ( 1 ) ( i ) .
(e) Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or lubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) and install on pressurizing valve.
Reinstall pressurizing valve, i f removed. Install spring.
KEY TO FIGURE 211
I0. WASHER 8O. PACKING
15. RETAINER 90. SPRINGWASHER
2O. PACKING 95. RETAINER
25. SPRING 100. SPRING
30. SHIM 105. BY-PASSVALVE ASSY
35. VALVEASSY 110. NUT
50. SCREW 120. BY-PASSVALVE SLEEVE
55. CLIP 125. PACKING
60. CAP AND COVER 135. PACKING
65. SPRINGHOLDERGUIDE 145. FUELCONTROLBODY
UP136688
73-21-05
Page 233
Aug 12/91
lied
.... ..-" ~.~-,~:.:.~,~-' ~ --, .... ,---~.,,-,,.,
I ~ . ~. ~ ..... ;..- &,~.~ ~ - ' . - . . ~ . . ~ ~,~'...',~;,-~,,,-:, ,~
125 ~ - " ." '."D>~" :~ -'~. ""~"~ :;' : .".'~;"::."~-:•-...... .->';::

~_J~ ~ . - ~ ,,-~-/-~....;-.. \ ,.~ \..; :~....... ...; -.,.;..-- :-;::-~ ',..:
~. '.<. ~
7~,,,"k ~ "I". '"i . ".,.._:~."-..- ....
~"~':.'--,,,,.. "-:.',,..'.' ".'t,~.,"
" \ "-~'~ -~.~.~'~;
"<• -";<".-"
......•..:::I
~ ..........,.',;
~o ~ ~.,"'--,~- : ,~.•- \ ,, •.,:.:.~.~;_,,;.,,~.

! .b.U f/' ( ~ d ; ~ ' / 1 1 1/ c~ ~ _ ",, ~- .~:,~
-" ~ , ."
..' ": ~:;:,~ .~_..~:."
', ~ ~ ~ ~." ..... -
d" °,"..:-~ . - m ~ . ; ~ < d ~'~ t ' ~ ' ~ , ' ~ .~,, .-... ~,, .~ - >
f ~..';f ~.._-.-- ", ,,~ # ~,(f2~ ,c~,~.... .~.~,~:: "~ .:" / 5
I / ..,-" ~t 120..""~.S..~ 95 i ~,~ ,t.-.}D,.,- - ~ ,k,.,.,.f
,
• / /..~/. ~ 35 3
l" 50
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel C o n t r o l

UP136688
( P a t t i al Breakdown)
F i g u r e 212 73-21-05
R Page 234
Aug 1 2 / 9 1
lied
5. A. (2) (f) Lubricate new packing with clean engine fuel or lubricant
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) and i n s t a l l on cover. I n s t a l l cover
and secure with screws and washers. Tighten screws (5) a l t e r -
nately in 5 inch-pounds increments to a torque value of 30
inch-pounds.
B. (Codes AA-CC) Perform Repair Procedure for Overspeed During Engine

Start, Sudden Upward Change in Flight Idle Setting, I n a b i l i t y to Dece-
lerate to Underspeed Governor Low, I n a b i l i t y to Reduce Torque with Power
Lever, or a Change in Power Lever Relationship at High Power or in
Cruise.
NOTE: Perform all other standard procedures contained in

72-00-00, Trouble Shooting, p r i o r to accomplishing
the following procedure.
(1) Disassemble and clean check valve housing assembly. (See figure
212.)
(a) Disconnect pneumatic heater lines from fuel control unit tee
fittings. Disconnect fuel control heat l i n e .
(b) Remove screws and remove check valve housing assembly from
fuel control u n i t . Remove packings.
(c) Thread a No. 6-32 screw into plugs to remove plugs. Remove
packings.
(d) Using a f i t t i n g with an AN-4 thread, remove check valve.

Remove packing.
(e) Remove caps, tee f i t t i n g s , nuts, and packings. Check for

signs of corrosion between tee f i t t i n g s and housing.
(f) Reverse flush tee f i t t i n g s with solvent (Federal Specification

P-D-680, Type I ) . Clean check valve housing, check valve, and
plugs, using solvent and a p l a s t i c f i b e r b r i s t l e d brush. An
ultrasonic cleaning method may be used, i f available.
KEY TO FIGURE 212
. COUPLING 50. PACKING 90. PLUG

10. SPRING 55. NUT 95. PACKING
15. COUPLING 60. SCREW 100. CHECKVALVE ASSY
20. SLEEVE 65. SCREW 105. PACKING
25. COUPLING 70. WASHER 110. PIN
30. NUT 75. PACKING 115. PLUG
35. COUPLING 80. PACKING 120. PACKING
40. CAP 85. PIN 125. BODYASSY
45. TEE
UP136688
73-21-05
R Page 235
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~ l s l
ignal
i e d

5. B. (1) (g) Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or l u b r i c a n t
(0S-124 or Santovac 5) and i n s t a l l packings and jam nuts on
tee f i t t i n g s . Spray ends of tee f i t t i n g s l i g h t l y with pene-
t r a t i n g oil (CRC 3-36) to help prevent formation of corrosion.
I n s t a l l tee f i t t i n g s in housing, o r i e n t in proper d i r e c t i o n ,
and tighten nuts (55) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
I n s t a l l caps (40). Tighten caps to a torque value of 50 inch-
pounds.
(h) Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or lubricant

(0S-124 or Santovac 5) and install on parting surface of check
valve housing. Install housing on fuel control unit.
CAUTION: THE CHECK VALVE HOUSING ALSO SERVES AS A

BEARING RETAINER FOR CONDITION LEVER
SHAFT. INSTALL RETAINING SCREWS EVENLY
AND TIGHTEN ALTERNATELY SO BEARING REMAINS
ALIGNED.
(i) Install screws (60, 65) and tighten alternately in 10 inch-

pound increments to a torque value of 30 inch-pounds.
(J) Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or lubricant

(0S-124 or Santovac 5) and install packings, check valve, and
plugs. Install cotter pins.
C. Replace Damaged Couplings
(i) (Codes AA-CC) Remove coupling or coupling assembly as follows.

(See figure 212.)
(a) (Fuel Controls Part No. 893528-16/-19/-28) Remove single piece
coupling (5).
NOTE: Do not remove nut (30) or coupling (35).
(b) (Fuel Controls Part No. 893528-24/-31) Remove spring (10),

coupling (15), sleeve (20), and coupling (spider) (25).
(2) (Codes AA-CC) Install coupling or coupling assembly as follows.
(See figure 212.)
(a) (Fuel Control Part No. 893528-16/-19/-28) Install single piece
coupling.
NOTE: Ensure lugs of couplings (15 and 35) lock
onto coupling (spider) (25).
(b) (Fuel Controls Part No. 893528-24/-31) Install coupling
(spider) (25) around nut (30)and onto lugs of threaded
coupling (35). Install sleeve, coupling, and spring.
UP136688
73-21-05
R Page 236
Aug 12/91
lied
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Table 202 provides a l i s t of all special tools, f i x t u r e s ,

Any approved engine fuel Commerci al l y avai I able
Any approved engine o i l Commercial l y availabl e
Grease (Mobil 28) Mobile Oil Corp, P.O. Box 54053, Los
Angeles, CA 90054

R Table 202. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment
R Item Source/
R No. Nomenclature Use Part No.
R NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for l i s t e d items.
R 1. Seal I n s t a l l i n g Used to i n s t a l l packing over 285843-1-1

R Pilot end of drive coupling without
R damaging packing.
R . Fuel Control Used to torque nuts securing 294670-1

R Torquing Wrench fuel pump assembly to accessory
R Set drive housing mounting pad.
UP136688
73 -21-06
Page 201
Aug 12/91
,#~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ' ~ '~'Signal
•. "°",,
".,
",°;°
~ ,:Y". "'-:::-.':.. .,
~_~ .., / ~;;.-..--...-;;;~.., ,,
Z ': It ;'2':'~~' "" ; '
260 ,,. , ['~\ ..~--~', , , ~.. ,

•. ' ' "".;-~,.' ' '~" '4
d-,' p~, f
• l \\\~.-'~\II "' .:' // :
",...
IVl,~ \'~"r'l ~ 135
• ~ . 14o
230 - . , ~
225......~[~r,l~~ E-,44G-719
115. NUT 230. ELBOW

130. FUEL PUMP ASSY 240. NUT
135. COUPLING 245. PLUG AND BLEEDER
145. PACKING 255. PLUG AND BLEEDER
150. INSULATOR (PART DELETED) 260. PACKING
225. CAP
UP136688
(Codes AA-CC) Fuel Pump I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 201 73-21-06
Page 202
Aug 16/89
/lied
R NOTE: Fuel pump and fuel control assemblies may be removed and
R i n s t a l l e d as a complete u n i t ; refer to 73-20-01, Mainte-
R nance Practices.
1. A. (Codes AA-CC) Remove Fuel Punlp Assembly (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove fuel control assembly in accordance with 73-21-05, ~iainte-

nance Practices.
(2) (Codes AA-CC) Remove plugs from fuel pump assembly. Remove pack-
ings from plugs.
(3) (Codes CA-CC) Remove cap, elbow, packing, and nut.
pump assembly to accessory mounting pad.
R CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREW DRIVER OR OTHER POINTED OB-

R JECTS TO PRY FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY FROM ENGINE OR
R DAMAGE TO FUEL PUMP FLANGE OR ACCESSORY DRIVE
R HOUSING MAY OCCUR.
R (5) Remove fuel pump assembly in a s t r a i g h t line to avoid damage to

R drive coupling.
R (6) Remove drive coupling. Remove and discard packings from drive
R cou pl i ng.
B. (Codes AA-CC) I n s t a l l Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure 201)
NOTE: Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or a l t e r -

nate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
i n s t a l l a t i o n . Apply clean engine o i l to threads
(except f i r s t two threads) of plugs and elbow.
(1) (Codes AA-CC) Install new packings onto plugs and install into fuel
pump assembly. Tighten plug (245) to a torque value of 25 to 30
inch-pounds. Tighten plug (255) to a torque value of 65 to 75
inch-pounds.
(2) (Codes CA-CC) Install nut and packing onto elbow. Install elbow.
Tighten nut (240) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds. Install cap
(225).
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 203
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORT Nee 7 2 - 0 1 ~ 2 7 )
55 \ "\
~.-7o '\• ,.,,::::';.,..' \
~t-65
\
I ...,
~)'/I1-.~ ] ~" , :...:-~"!! ii
,~\.~ 17o ,- , '.i...-,-::",~.\, :i
~.,! ~, ,, ....,,'..'?,'-,...,
,.,..."i . ',,
---.Jk/'~T-'r% ~ '..~ ;, , :'~:...-;.. ~ ,,

Tg',.Z', I " > ",,~, .....
..'.'.:..:.:
' '::
...~" ~ ~ "~:" ~.q :', L : li
L~ ~ ,~/'~'~'~1=;~ .'~,'. : ;:,:: :,, ::
~"150 "'" :'. :;

.; ;.-
. • ,.~ ,~"
E-44G -602
40. UNION 155. WASHER

45. PACKING 160, COUPLING
55. FITTING (TEE) 165. PACKING
70. NUT 175. FUEL PUMP ASSY
150. NUT
UP136688
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Pump I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 202 73-21-06
Page 204
Dec 14/87

/~llied
MAINTENANCE
~I NTENANCE MANUAL '-'~-~Signal
R NOTE: (Pre SB 72-0104) Grease (Mobil 28) is soluble in f u e l ,

R necessitating immediate correction of any fuel pump
R seal leakage. The drive coupling shall be inspected
R and lubricated at any time corrective action is
R required for fuel pump seal leakage.
I. B. (3) (Pre SB 72-0104) Pack cavities of fuel pump assembly and reduction
gear section with grease (Mobil 28), using syringe (Chemo-jector),
so no a i r spaces exist in cavities. Coat new drive coupling pack-
ings with same grease and i n s t a l l on drive coupling using
285843-1-1 p i l o t , being careful not to damage packings. Remove
285843-I-1 p i l o t and apply grease to all splines of drive coupling.
Pack internal passage of coupling, ensuring all a i r is expelled.
Hold finger over opening and i n s t a l l coupling into fuel pump allow-
ing grease to e x i t through vent hole in coupling. Wipe off excess
grease.
CAUTION: (POST SB 72-0104) DO NOT PACK CAVITIES OF FUEL

PUMP ASSEMBLY OR REDUCTION GEAR SECTION, OR
COAT DRIVE COUPLING PACKINGS WITH GREASE.
R (4) (Post SB 72-0104) Lubricate new drive coupling packings with clean
R engine o i l . I n s t a l l packings on drive coupling using 285843-1-1
R p i l o t , being careful not to damage packings. Remove 285843-1-1
R p i l o t and l u b r i c a t e drive coupling with clean engine o i l . Install
R drive coupling into fuel pump assembly.
R (5) I n s t a l l fuel pump assembly, exercising care to ensure splines on

R fuel pump drive coupling and accessory mounting pad splines
R properly align.
R (6) I n s t a l l washers and nuts. Torque nuts (115) (using 294670-1 wrench
R set) to a torque value of 50 inch-pounds.
(7) I n s t a l l fuel control assembly in accordance with 73-21-05, Mainte-

nance Practices.
C. (Codes DA-FB) Remove Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure 202)
(1) Remove i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor and fuel control as-
(2) Remove union, tee f i t t i n g , packings, r i n g , and nut.
control and fuel pump assembly to accessory mounting pad.
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 204A
Aug 12/91

lied
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREW DRIVER OR OTHER POINTED OB-

JECTS TO PRY FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY FROM ENGINE OR
DAMAGE TO FUEL PUMP FLANGE OR ACCESSORY DRIVE
HOUSING MAY OCCUR.
I. C. (4) Remove fuel pump assembly in a s t r a i g h t l i n e to avoid damage to

drive coupling.
(5) Remove drive coupling. Remove and discard packings from drive
coupling.
D. (Codes DA-FB) I n s t a l l Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure 202)
NOTE: Lubricate new packings with clean engine fuel or

alternate lubricant (0S-124 or Santovac 5) p r i o r
to i n s t a l l a t i o n . Apply clean engine o i l to
threads (except f i r s t two threads) of adapter.
(1) I n s t a l l tee f i t t i n g , with new packing and ring, and secure with
nut. Tighten nut (70) to a torque value of 30 to 35 inch-pounds.
(2) I n s t a l l union with new packing. Tighten union (40) to a torque

R CAUTION: DO NOT PACK CAVITIES OF FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY,

R REDUCTION GEAR SECTION, OR COAT DRIVE COUPLING
R PACKINGS WITH GREASE.
R (3) Lubricate new drive coupling packings with clean engine o i l . In-
R s t a l l packings on drive coupling using 285843-1-1 p i l o t , being
R careful not to damage packings. Remove 285843-1-1 p i l o t and l u b r i -
R cate drive coupling with clean engine o i l . I n s t a l l drive coupling
R into fuel pump assembly.
R (4) I n s t a l l fuel pump assembly, exercising care to ensure splines on

R fuel pump drive coupling and accessory mounting pad splines
R properly align.
(5) I n s t a l l washers and nuts Torque nuts (150) (using 294670-1 wrench
(6) I n s t a l l i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor and fuel control as-
R E. (Code GA) Remove Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure 202A)
R (1) Remove i n l e t temperature and pressure sensor and fuel control as-
R sembly in accordance with 73-21-05, Maintenance Practices.
R (2) Using 294670-1 wrench set, remove nuts and washers attaching fuel
R pump assembly to mounting pad. Remove fuel pump assembly.
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 204B
Aug 12/91
lied
%
%
\
%
\ x,~.
\
,\\ \
I .... ".::...
"'; l,c;7-'.J",~ -
t ~ ! : , ) ',
.... t.~j:.,J
~,"~ _~--,,~i ! 160 ,, t::::::-}:~ i', !I

6F~%~t~ 17o :, .:,... :, ::
| ~"'x~',..,k<...~-,~,~-t ~IP'.,I \ .',, ,','~",.' ~" -'', " ,
k,~ _ - d Irl h ' ~ 1r ~,i ~

' .......
" ~" ;
]~.',"-".' ~ ~',
"~ Ir -"%~.I ~ ~,,x...'." : :x.'..::-:-.\.~ ~ :
"/'---..,,_i v ,,/7 c, ~.~: ....
::.:.:..
.~...• ::
..:.-~ ,,~ • :,
/ ~ >~ t- ',"-,'
.'~t ..?::,"',
: ::
~ I t
150
,. ' ,
.".'/
, ..
oo .,
.- ,,., ,,',.
E-44G-1427
R 150. NUT 165. PACKING

R 160. DRIVE COUPLING 175. FUEL PUMP ASSY
UP136688
(Code GA) Fuel Pump Assembly I n s t a l l a t i o n

Figure 202A 73-21-06
Page 204C
Aug 12/91

lied
NOTE: Refer to 70-00-00, Standard Practices for recommended

R L i g h t l y coat new packings with any approved clean en-
R gine fuel or l u b r i c a n t (0S-124 or Santovac 5) prior to
R i n s t a l l a t i o n unless otherwise specified. Apply l u b r i -
R bolts located forward of the f i r e s h i e l d unless other-
R wise s peci f i ed.
R . F. (Code GA) Install Fuel Pump Assembly (See Figure 202A)
R NOTE: Fuel pump assembly drive coupling is lubricated by

R engine o i l .
R (1) Install new packings on drive coupling (160) using 285843-1-1

R pilot. I n s t a l l drive coupling onto fuel pump assembly.
(2) I n s t a l l fuel pump, exercising care to ensure splines on drive

coupling and accessory mounting pad splines properly align.
(3) Secure fuel pump with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts (150) to a
torque value of 80 inch-pounds using 294670-1 torquing wrench set.
(4) I n s t a l l fuel control assembly and i n l e t temperature and pressure

sensor in accordance with 73-21-05, Maintenance Practices.
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 204D
Aug 12/91
Allied-SignalAerospaceCompan¥
/~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-~-~Signal
2. Adjustmen.t/Test
A. Perform Adjustment/Test of Fuel Pump as Outlined in 72-00-00,
Adjustment/Test
3. Inspection/Check
A. Inspect Fuel Pump Assembly
(1) Check fuel pump assembly for security, fuel leakage, loose f i t -
tings, and damage.
(2) Inspect splines of reduction gear section cavity, fuel pump assem-
bly cavity, and drive coupling in accordance with 73-20-01,
Inspection/Check.
4. Cleaning/Paintinq
A. Clean Parts
Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. I or 2.
(2) Clean outside surfaces of fuel pump assembly in accordance with
72-00-00, Cleaning/Painting, Cleaning Method No. 1.
(3) Clean fuel pump splines. Refer to 73-20-01, Cleaning/Painting.
UP136688
73-21-06
R Page 205
Aug 12/91
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
,/•llied
Signal
5. Approved Repairs

Table 203 provides a l i s t of all special tool, fixtures and

equipment required to perform Approved Repairs.
Cotton swabs Commerci al l y avail able
Grease (Krytox 240AC) Dupont E.I. DeNemours and Co, Inc,

Petroleum Chem Div, 1007 Market St,
Wilmington, DE 19898

Sol vent (Federal Specification Commercially available

P-D-680, Type I)
Item Source/
. Adapter Holder Used to i n s t a l l or remove 285802-1-1

cap of high pressure r e l i e f
valve body.
. Seal I n s t a l l i n g Used to i n s t a l l packing 285843-1-1
Pilot over end of shaft without
damaging packing.
. Torque Wrench Used to check fuel pump 298177-1

Splined Adapter drive running torque
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 206
Aug 16/89

lied
R 5. A. (Codes DA-GA) P a r t i a l l y Disassemble Fuel Pump Assembly
(I) Remove boost pump assembly from high pressure pump assembly as
R follows. (See figure 203 or 203A.)
(a) Position fuel pump on bench with boost pump assembly facing
down.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW BUSHINGS AND SHIMS TO
SEPARATE FROM FUEL PUMP WITHOUT FIRST
DETERMINING THEIR PROPER LOCATIONS PRIOR
TO SEPARATION. FUEL PUMP MUST BE REASSEM-
BLED WITH BUSHINGS AND SHIMS IN EXACT
LOCATIONS PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED. IF
PREVIOUS LOCATION OF BEARINGS AND SHIMS
CANNOT BE DETERMINED, FUEL PUMP MUST BE
REPLACED.
NOTE: When separating the high pressure pump assem-
bly from the boost pump assembly, use extreme
care. Shim location and thickness must be
recorded for l a t e r assembly.
(b) (Codes DA-FB) Remove bolts (5, 15) and washers (10, 20).
Separate boost pump assembly (95) from high pressure pump as-
sembly (100).
R (bl) (Code GA) Remove screws (5, 15) and washers (10, 20).
R Separate boost pump assembly (95) from high pressure pump as-
R sembly (100).
NOTE: Step B.(1)(a) provides procedures for i n s t a l -
l a t i o n of bearings, i f bearings were
separated from fuel pump. Bearings may be
r e i n s t a l l e d only i f positive location iden-
t i f i c a t i o n was made during disassembly.
(c) Place tape over bearings in boost assembly to hold bearings in
place.
NOTE: I f discoloration of bearings in high pressure
pump assembly or removed drive shaft is ob-
served, replace fuel pump.
(d) Remove shaft (25, 35). Remove and discard packings (30 or 40,
45, 50, and 55, 60, 65, 80).
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 207
Aug 12/91
I ~ ! MAINTENANCEMANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
LOCATO
I1N
95
/
~'~~ ~ E-44G-222
1oo
m BOLT 55. PACKING

20. WASHER 70. SPRING TENSION WASHER
25. SHAFT 75. WASHER
35. SHAFT 85. SPRING TENSION WASHER
45. PACKING 95. BOOST PUMPASSY
50. PACKING i00. HIGH PRESSUREPUMPASSY
UP136688
(Codes DA-FB) Fuel Pump Assembly

Figure 203 73-21-06
Page 208
Dec 14/87
/lied
95
i
\ #^ Lo~,o. •
R
g 2a
R t SCREW 55. PACKING

R 15. SCREW 65, PACKING
R 20. WASHER 70. SPRING TENSION WASHER
R 25, SHAFT 75. WASHER
R 35. SHAFT 85. SPRING TENSION WASHER
R 40. PACKING 90. WASHER
R 45. PACKING 95. BOOSTPUMP ASSY
R 50. PACKING 100, HIGH PRESSURE PUMP ASSY
R (Code GA) Fuel Pump Assembly

UP136688
R Figure 203A 73-21-06

Page 208A
Aug 12/91
~ /lied

5. A. (i) (e) Remove washers (75) and spring tension washers (70) from boost
pump assembly (95). Record thickness of washers (75). Secure
washers (75) and spring tension washers (70) together and tag
as being removed from Location 1.
(f) Remove washerss (90) and spring tension washers (85) from
boost pump assembly (95). Record thickness of washers (90).
Secure washers (90) and spring tension washers (85) together
and tag as being removed from Location 2.
(2) Remove high pressure r e l i e f valve assembly from fuel pump assembly
as follows. (See Figure 204 or 204A.)
(a) Remove plug (5) and packing (10). Discard packing (10).
(b) Remove assembled high pressure r e l i e f valve assembly (25
through 80) from fuel pump assembly. Discard packings (70,
75).
WARNING: EXERClSE CARE IN DISASSEMBLY OF HIGH PRES-
SURE RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY (25 THROUGH75)
TO AVOID EJECTION OF PARTS BY SPRING FORCE
AND POSSIBLE INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(c) Place assembled r e l i e f valve body in 285802-1-1 adapter holder
with cap end down and remove cap assembly (25), washers (30),
spring (45), valve guide (50), ball (55), and packing (60)
from r e l i e f valve body (65). Discard packing (60),
(d) Record thickness of washers (30).
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 208B
Aug 12/91
lied
,O\8o
30
25
E-44G-339
5. PLUG 55. BALL

25. CAP 65. RELIEF VALVE BODY
50. VALVE GUIDE 80. FUEL PUMP ASSY
UP136688
(Codes DA-FB) High Pressure R e l i e f Valve Assembly

Figure 204 73-21-06
R Page 209
Aug 12/91
/_~Slied
10
70 ,,,,, /~-~ ~/l~~,''" 80

75 ,~ ~ ' " ~
=~ 6 - ~ 60
~" ~ 55
R
~ '~30
~'25
E-44G-1578
R 5. PLUG 55. BALL

R 25, CAP 65. RELIEF VALVE BODY
R 45. SPRING 75. PACKING
R 50. VALVE GUIDE 80. FUEL PUMP ASSY
UP136688
R (Code GA) High Pressure Relief Valve Assembly

R Figure 204A 73-21-06
Page 210
Aug 12/91
lied
R 5. B. (Codes DA-GA) Assemble Fuel Pump Assembly
(1) Install boost pump assembly to high pressure pump assembly as

follows. (See figures 203, 203A, 205, 206.)
NOTE: I f the bearings separated from the boost pump

housing during disassembly, accomplish procedures
specified in step (a). Installation of bearings
may only be accomplished i f positive location
identification was made during disassembly.
I f discoloration of bearings in high pressure pump
assembly or removed drive shaft is observed,
replace fuel pump.
(a) I f required, install bearings at same locations noted during
disassembly. Ensure bearings are installed as specified in
Figure 205.
(b) Install shims, washers and new packings in fuel pump as
fol 1ows.
LOCATE BEARINGSAS SHOWN
INSTALL BEARINGSWITH LUBRICATION

SLOTS FACING GEARPORTION OF
~ , GEARSHAFT. LUBRICATIONSLOTSIN
BEARINGS SHALLFACEOPPOSITEFROM
d}
FUEL PUMPFILTERCASEOPENING.
SB-5396
(Codes DA-GA) Orientation of Bearings

UP136688
Figure 205 73-21-06

Page 211
Aug 12/91
Allied.SignalAerospaceCompany -/]~llied
MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~-~JSignai
/• BOOS/ PUMP
HIGHPRESSUREPUMP" ~ I
|
SHAFTCAVITIES
(KRYTOXGREASE) • P
HIGH PRESSUREPUMP(REF)
j = ~I AREAA
AREA(B) O "
25, 35
EXCESSGREASE/
NO GREASETHISAREA
50 1-44A-3109
25. SHAFT 40. PACKING

35. SHAFT 5O. PACKING
UP136688
(Codes DA-GA) Lubrication of Fuel Pump Shafts

Figure 206 73-21-06
Page 212
Aug 12/91
/lied
5. B. (I) (b) _.I Measure thickness of washers (75) and compare with t h i c k -
ness recorded in step A . ( 1 ) ( e ) . I n s t a l l same quantity and
thickness of washers (75) and washers (70) (removed in step
A.(1)(e)) in Location i in centrifugal pump assembly.
2 Measure thickness of washers (90) and compare with t h i c k -

ness recorded in step A . ( 1 ) ( f ) . I n s t a l l same quantity and
thickness of washers (90) and washers (85) (removed in step
A . ( 1 ) ( f ) ) in Location 2 in high pressure pump assembly
(1oo).
3 Lubricate packings (60, 65, 80), using lubricant (0S-124 or
Santovac 5), and i n s t a l l new packings on boost pump assem-
bly (95). I n s t a l l new packing (55) on high pressure pump
assembly (100).
(c) Lubricate and i n s t a l l drive shaft as follows. (See figure

206.)
NOTE: Use Grease (Krytox 240AC) grease. Avoid con-

tact with hands. Clean thoroughly a f t e r us-
ing Krytox grease to prevent possible in-
gestion when eating or smoking.
1 F i l l shaft cavities with grease using grease gun or plastic

syringe. F i l l from bottom of cavity to top of cavity.
2 I n s t a l l new packings on shaft (25 or 35) using 285843-1-1
pilot.
Coat shaft (25 or 35) with a heavy layer of grease at Area

A.
4 Press long end of shaft (25 or 35) into high pressure pump
shaft cavity, forcing excess grease to flow from center of
hole of shaft (25 or 35).
5 Coat shaft (25 or 35) with a heavy layer of grease at Area
B. Push cotton swab, bare end f i r s t into center hole of
shaft (25 or 35) to remove excess grease. Remove swab
coated with excess grease and discard.
CAUTION: DO NOT FORCE FLANGES TOGETHERAS DAMAGETO

THRUST BEARINGS MAY RESULT.
6 Position high pressure pump against boost pump so that Area
B of shaft (25 or 35) is inserted into boost pump shaft
cavity.
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 213
Aug 12/91
lliedSignal
A E R () .% P A (" E
MAI NTENANCE MANUAL
5. B. (1) (d) Position high pressure pump against boost pump mating flange
and secure with bolts (5, 15, Figure 203) and washers ( i 0 ,
20). Tighten bolts to a torque value of 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(e) Position fuel pur,lp assembly on a suitable bench with fuel pump
drive shaft in view and support assembly f o r inspection.
(f) I n s t a l l 298177-1 splined torque wrench ada~per i n t o fuel pump

female spline coupling.
Attach torsion spring type torque wrench (0 to 35 inch-pound

range) to hex end of 298177-i splined torque wrench adapter
and apply torque in a clockwise rotation (facing fuel pump
drive pad) to check running torque. Make a minimum of three
c~nplete 360 degree turns. Indicated torque shall remain
constant.
(h) I f the running torque is less than 18 inch-pounds, return pump

to service.
CAUTION: ENSURE ADEQUATE LUBRICATION IS APPLIED TO

FUEL PUHP INTERNAL PART DURING PUMP
OPERATION.
(i) I f running torque is 18 inch-pounds or more, operate fuel pump

at varying speeds up to 3000 RPM for no more than 3 minutes.
During fuel pump r o t a t i o n continually spray solvent (Federal
S p e c i f i c a t i o n P-D-680, Type I) on fuel pump internal parts.
Check running torque, i f less than 18 inch-pounds, return pump
to service.
(J) I f the running torque continues to be 18 inch-pounds or more

a f t e r r u n - i n , disassemble fuel pump to determine cause. I f
a f t e r disassembly the cause cannot be determined, and f o l l o w -
ing reassembly the running torque s t i l l continues to be 1Li
inch-pounds or more, return pump to AlliedSignal Engines, bis-
t r i b u t i o n Center, 1944 East Sky Harbor C i r c l e , Phoenix, AZ
85034.
(k) Install fuel pump in accordance with Removal/Installation.
NOTE: Prior to leak check, ensure high pressure r e l i e f

valve assembly is installed. Refer to step (2).
(1) Perform i n i t i a l leak check of fuel pump using the a i r c r a f t

boost pump system.
(m) Perform normal engine start and observe fuel pump during
starting procedure for any evidence of leakage.
(n) Upon completion of fuel pump leak check, check and ensure
proper engine operation in accordance with Aircraft Flight
Manual.
73-21-06
Page 214
UP136688
Aug 4/94
GEG70-2A
~ /lied
5. B. (2) Install high pressure r e l i e f valve assembly in fuel pump assembly

as follows. (See Figure 204 or 204A.)
(a) Install packing (60) on relief valve body (65). Install ball
(55), valve guide (50), spring (45), and same thickness of
washers(s) (30) as removed during disassembly. Install cap
(25) in 285802-1-i adapter holder and tighten relief valve
body to a torque value of 25 to 30 inch-pounds.
(b) Install packings (70, 75) on r e l i e f valve body (65).
(c) Install r e l i e f valve assembly (25 through 75) in fuel pump as-
sembly and tighten to a torque value of 40 to 45 inch-pounds.
(d) Install packing (10) on plug (5). Install plug and packing in
pump assembly. Tighten plug (5) to a torque value of 25 to 30
inch-pounds.
(e) Install fuel pump in accordance with Removal/Installation.
(f) Perform i n i t i a l leak check of fuel pump using the a i r c r a f t
boost pump system.
(g) Perform normal engine start and observe fuel pump during
starting procedure for any evidence of leakage.
(h) Upon completion of fuel pump leak check, check and ensure
proper engine operation in accordance with Aircraft Flight
Manual.
UP136688
73-21-06
Page 215/216
Aug 12/91
E~:~_~lied
(CODES AA-BA, DA-FB) TOR.QUE/TEMPERATURELIMITER (BY-PASS VALVE)-
The torque l i m i t e r (by-pass valve) is essentially a fuel by-pass valve inserted

in the fuel system between the fuel control and the engine fuel nozzles. The
assembly consists of a torque motor with two coils wound in p a r a l l e l . When
e l e c t r i c a l l y energized, the torque motor moves a beam to uncover a plate valve
which receives high pressure fuel from the fuel control. When the torque motor
receives the appropriate e l e c t r i c a l signal from the electronic c o n t r o l l e r the
beam is moved away from the plate valve permitting fuel to by-pass back to fuel
pump i n l e t . By-passing the fuel reduces the amount to the fuel nozzles and ac-
cordingly reduces engine torque. During normal starting, acceleration, and en-
gine torque settings the torque l i m i t e r plate valve is closed.
UP136688
73-22-00
Page 1/2
Aug 12/91
lied
(CODES AA-BA,... DA-FB) TORQUEITEMPERATURE_.LIMITER(B_Y-PASS.VALVE) -
I. Removal/Installation
Any approved engine oil Commercial ly avai I able


A. (Codes AA-BA) Remove Torque Limiter (By-Pass Valve) (See Figure 201)
(1) Remove tube assemblies and attaching hardware in accordance with

(2) Remove electrical connector from torque l i m i t e r . Refer to Aircraft
Maintenance Manual.
(3) Remove bolts securing torque limiter to bracket and remove bracket
from engine.
(4) Remove reducer and gasket from torque limiter.

(5) Refer to Approved Repairs for removal and installation of f i l t e r .
UP136688
73-22-01
Page 201
Aug 12/91
TPE331-5 (REPORTNO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (Codes AA-BA) Install Torque Limiter (By-Pass Valve) (See Figure 201)

Moly, Grade NV) to threads of bolts and screws, and ap-
ply clean engine oil to threads (except f i r s t two
threads) of male plumbing f i t t i n g s located forward of
the fireshield unless specified. Install new conical
seal for leakage repair only.
general torque values. Add f r i c t i o n a l drag (run-down
(1) Install bracket on engine and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts (15)
UP136688
73-22-01
Page 202
Dec 14/87
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TPE331-5 (REPORT NO. 72-01-27)
I. B. (2) I n s t a l l torque l i m i t e r on bracket and secure with bolts and

washers. Tighten bolts (20) to a torque value of 15 inch-pounds.
(3) I n s t a l l reducer, with new gasket, into torque l i m i t e r assembly.

MM Tpe-331-5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MM Tpe-331-5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RELEASED FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE BY: HORIZONTAL DE AVIACION LTDA

ENGINE PART NO. ENGINE MODEL NO. AIRCRAFT APPLICATION

895720-1/-2/-3 TPE331-5-251K Jetprop Commander 690/

REVISION NO. 3 DATEDAUGUST4, 1994

Inquiries regarding this publication should be directed to:

REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

72-39 To c l a r i f y the extent of disassembly and inspection requirements for

72-40 To change the l i m i t s for f i r s t stage turbine stator leading edge

72-41 To reference the A i r c r a f t Maintenance Manual and Flight Manual for

72-51 To add a CAUTION regarding excessive use of aviation gasoline.

72-52 To add aviation gasoline operating limitations to Table 503.

72-53 To add additional unscheauled maintenance inspection requirements.

72-54 To add inspection criteria for oil pressure pump pitting.

72-55 To add inspection and repair procedure for pitting on interior of

REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

Updated materials and compounds tables throughout manual.

Updated special tools, fixtures and equipment tables and t e x t .

Chapter/Section/Pages Description of Change

Ti tl e Page Updated to reflect current revision.

Record of Revisions Updated to r e f l e c t current revision.

Service Bulletin List Updated and revised service bulletin

Page 4 Updated the manual chapter designations.

Page 8 Updated abbreviations.

Pages 9 and 11 Referenced manufacturer for fuel control

Pages 51 through 55 Deleted table reference from figure

Page 58 Added wear l i m i t s for teflon coated metal

Page 65 Added part number to identify size of

Record of Temporary Revisions

REPORT NO. 72-OI-27-HIGHLIGHTS

Chapter/Secti on/Pages Description of Change

Page 303 Changed paragraph 3.B. t i t l e to reflect

Specified that approved engine fuel and

Added CAUTIONand procedure to reflect a

Page 304 Deleted step 3.B.(10) which stated 60 to

Page 504 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-52.

Page 518 Added NOTEto reflect NTS lockout and

REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

Chapter/Section/Pages Description of Change

Pages 550 through 550D Added engine vibration check procedures.

Pages 554 and 555 Changed CAUTION to reflect torquemeter

Page 573 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-41.

Page 576 Added adjustment rate values for one turn

Page 589 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-42.

Page 593 Incorporated Temporary Revision 72-43.

Pages 598.6, 598.11, 598.29, Changed the engine performance data

This program reduces, calculates, plots,

Pages 598.27 and 598.28 Updated on-the-wing performance data

Pages 598.61 and 598.64 Changed engine test requirement to

REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

Chapter/Section/Pages Description of Change

REPORT NO, 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

Chapter/Section/Pa~es Description of Change

Page 668 Added requirement to flush airframe oil

Page 208 Added equipment and materials required to

REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

C_hapter/Secti on/Pages Description of Change

Page 214 Added procedures for replacing propeller

Page 246B (Part No. 3103936-1 and 3103904-1/-2)

REPORT NO. 72-01-27-HIGHLIGHTS

Chapter/Secti on/Pages Description of Change

Page 208 Changed the type of thread lubricant used

Page 213 Changed the compressor housing inspection

Page 214 Changed the allowable limits for nicks